TN

Page 1 of 1744
FEED and Basic Design Services for Low Cost Creeping Expansion of
BORL, Bina
TENDER DOCUMENT
(Document No : A702-TENDER_DOC-A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070)
Click on the Document Title to go to that section of the document
Table of Contents
Document Number
A702TENDER_DOCA702-029-82-41-PFT-4070
A702-029-82-41-PFT-4070
A702-029-82-41-SI4070
A702-029-82-41-CL4070
A702-029-82-41-LP4070
A702-029-16-51-CF4070
A702-029-81-41TCL-4070
A702-029-82-41SOW-4070
A702-029-79-DS1806
A702-029-79-41-PID1199
A702-029-82-41-SP4070
A702-029-16-50-SP4070
A702-029-16-51-SP4070
A702-029-81-41-SP0014
A702-000-79-41PLS-01
A702-029-16-43-DP4070
A702-029-16-50-SL4070
A702-029-16-51-SL4070
A702-029-16-43-SK4070
A702-029-82-41-DS4070
A702-029-16-50-DS4070
A702-029-16-50-DS4071
A702-029-16-50-DS4072
A702-029-16-50-DS4073
A702-029-82-41-VR4070
A702-029-16-50-VR4070
A702-029-16-51VDR-4070
Page 2 of 1744
Rev.
Document Title
Page
Number
7
TENDER DOCUMENT
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
316
317
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (MACHINERY

DIVISION)
TECHNICAL CHECKLIST (MACHINERY DIVISION)
LOADING & PENALTY CRITERIA
326
COMPLIANCE FORMAT
331
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE
333
SCOPE OF SUPPLY/ WORK
336
MISCELLANEOUS
359
PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (P&IDS)
362
JOB SPECIFICATIONS (MACHINERY DIVISION)
363
JOB SPECIFICATION
377
JOB SPECIFICATIONS
381
ANY DOCUMENT TYPE SPECIFIC TO DEPT.
402
412
SPECIFICTAION FOR SURFACE PREPARATION AND

PAINTING (NEW CONSTRUCTION)
3D-MODELING SPECIFICATION FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SPARE LIST
463
MANDATORY SPARE PARTS
465
PIPING SCOPE DRAWING FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
467
DATA SHEET(MACHINERY DIVISION)
468
DATA SHEET
474
DATA SHEET
476
DATA SHEET
477
DATA SHEET
478
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS (MACHINERY DIVISION)
481
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS
489
494
320
461
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
A702-029-16-43VDR-4070
A702-02-41-ODB-01A702-029-16-50-OD4070
A702-999-16-47EDB-1001
A702-999-16-48EDB-1001
A702-000-16-54-DB0001
A702-6-44-0005-A1
A702-6-44-00054070
A702-6-44-0005
A702-6-44-00064070
A702-6-44-00164070
A702-029-16-513170
A702-029-16-513171
A702-000-16-4700001
A702-000-81-414140
A702-000-81-4144701
A702-029-81-41-DR4070
6-12-0030
6-48-0002
6-61-0014
6-36-0002
6-78-0001
6-78-0002
7-76-0103
1
1
6-51-0014
6-51-0031
6-51-0051
6-51-0064
6-51-0093
6-81-1014
6-81-1031
6-81-1032
6-81-1051
7-51-0103
7-51-0116
6-52-0052
6-52-0040
4
5
6
1
4
3
3
5
3
5
6
3
2
Page 3 of 1744
Document Title
Page
Number
497
0
A
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

TENDER
Basic Engineering Design Basis- Part-B
ANY OTHER DOCUMENT
Engineering Design Basis
568
ENGINEERING DESIGN BASIS
592
SITE SPECIFIC SEISMIC SPECTRA
615
A
A
ANNEXURE-I TO PMS ( GENERAL NOTES)

Piping Material Specification
618
630
A
A

Valve Material Specification
670
696
Non Destructive Examination Requirements of Piping
717
DRAWING
730
DRAWING
731
OVERALL PLOT PLAN
732
MISCELLANEOUS DRAWING
733
DETAILS OF ROADS C/S
734
ANY OTHER DOCUMENT
735
7
6
3
3
1
Standard specification for pressure vessels for package items.

Standard specification for E.O.T. crane.
Standard specification for electric hoist.
Standard specification for ventilation / pressurisation system.
Specification for quality management system requirements from
bidders
Specification for documentation requirement from contractors
Instructions to vendor for site performance guarantee
requirements for package units
Specification for industrial type control stations.
Specification for high voltage induction motors.
Specification for medium and high voltage cables & accessories.
Specification for energy efficient medium voltage induction motors
Specification for electrics of package equipment.
ITP for industrial type control stations
ITP for HV induction motors
ITP for MV motors
ITP for MV & HV cables & accessories
Typical earth plate fixing details.
Equipment earthing schedule.
Standard specification for instrumentation of package units.
Standard specification for programmable logic controllers.
738
757
771
779
790
500
566
797
806
813
819
837
847
859
869
873
879
885
891
892
893
967
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
Document Title
7-52-0001
7-52-0002
7-52-0035
7-52-0036
A702-029-81-41-SS4020
6-68-0021
4
4
3
3
0
Instrument connection on vessel, standpipes and tanks.

Instrument connection on pipes.
Thermowell.
Thermocouple / RTD assembly with thermowell.
LIST OF STANDARD SPECIFICATION
6-68-0022
6-68-0033
6-82-0001
6-82-2700
6-65-0016
6-65-0017
6-65-0018
6-65-0019
6-65-0021
6-68-0002
6-68-0003
6-68-0004
3
3
4
5
6
6-68-0062
6-66-0004
7-68-0417
7-68-0501
7-68-0506
7-68-0507
7-68-0552
7-68-0553
7-68-0557
7-68-0697
7-65-0006
7-65-0103
7-65-0272
7-65-0404
6-44-0002
0
7
7
6
7
7
7
5
3
4
3
4
3
5
6-44-0012
6-44-0013
4
4
6-44-0051
6-44-0052
6-44-0053
6-44-0054
6
6
6
6
Standard specification civil - structural lump-sum turn-key works

(LSTK works) general requirements
Standard specification civil - structural lump-sum turn-key works
(LSTK works) material & construction
Standard specification civil & structural works passive fire proofing
of steel structures (hydrocarbon pool fire).
Standard specification for health, safety & environment (HSE)
management at construction sites
ITP for Civil, Structural & Architectural Works (EPCC / LSTK
Contracts)
Standard specification for classification of soil for Earth Work in
site grading
Standard specification for site grading and rock cutting for site
grading
Standard specification for road & flexible pavements. (upto WBM
layer).
Standard specification for concrete pavement.
Standard specification for pipe culverts & ERC / TRC crossing.
Standard specification civil & structural works materials.
Standard specification civil & structural works earthwork.
Standard specification civil & structural works plain & reinforced
cement concrete
Standard specification civil & structural works vacuum dewatering
concrete system
Standard specification for portable fire extinguisher
MS anchor bolt assemblies
Handrails
Steel stairs
Details of steel ladder
Circular platform for hot vessels
Details of brackets of circular platforms for hot vessels
Platform support clips for hot vessels
Electroforged grating type-I & type-II
Cable crossings under road (PVC pipes).
Pipe culvert for storm water drainage.
Unit drainage details (rectangular ditch details).
RCC pavement details.
Standard specification for hot insulation of vessels, piping and
equipments.
Standard specification for fabrication and erection of piping
Standard specification for inspection, flushing and testing of piping
systems.
Technical notes for pipes.
Technical notes for valves.
Technical notes for flanges, spectacle blinds and drip rings.
Technical notes for butt welded, socket welded and screwed
fittings.
Page 4 of 1744
Page
Number
1003
1007
1010
1013
1014
1017
1047
1061
1077
1164
1201
1207
1219
1230
1240
1245
1260
1273
1303
1310
1315
1322
1330
1336
1339
1347
1352
1355
1363
1364
1367
1368
1369
1422
1437
1446
1456
1476
1483
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
6-44-0056
6-44-0057
6-44-0066
6-44-0067
7-44-0303
4
4
2
1
5
7-44-0304
7-44-0350
7-44-0351
7-44-0353
7-44-0354
7-44-0400
7-44-0403
7-44-0477
7-44-0478
7-44-0479
7-44-0480
7-44-0481
7-44-0482
7-44-0483
7-44-0484
7-44-0486
7-44-0487
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
A702-029-81-41-IS4020
7-75-0041
7-75-0036
7-65-0207
6-75-0004
7-75-0071
6-65-0027
4
4
6-75-0010
7-75-0004
7-75-0029
7-75-0063
6-65-0006
7-75-0027
6-75-0005
6-75-0012
4
4
4
3
4
5
0
6-75-0013
7-75-0064
7-75-0003
7-75-0049
6-75-0008
6-75-0003
0
4
4
0
5
5
Page 5 of 1744
4
5
3
6
Document Title
Technical notes for gaskets.
Technical notes for bolts and nuts.
Technical notes for steam and air traps
Technical notes for strainers
T-strainer type-1 2"-4" (150CL RF, 300CL RF & RTJ, 600CL RF &
RTJ)
`T' strainer type-1 6" to 24" ( 150# RF, 300# RF & RTJ, 600# RF
& RTJ)
Vent & drains (on lines 1 1/2" & below).
Vents and drains (on lines 2 and above).
Wells installation 1 1/2" dia taps (up to class 600).
Pressure tappings (PA, PG, PC, PT, PIC etc).
Steam trap assembly STA-1 (closed system).
Drip leg for steam lines.
Butt welding end preparation.
Fillet weld details.
Welding details for branch connections (not breaking into).
Butt weld details (dimensions).
Butt weld details (sequence of welds).
Welding detail for branch connections (stub in).
Branch connection (breaking into).
Branch connection (not breaking into).
Tolerances for fabrication.
Method of cutting & dimensions of field manufactured eccentric
reducers.
LIST OF INSTALLATION STANDARDS
False ceiling details with aluminium grid.
Pipe handrail with square up right type.
Valve pit (RCC) type-V for dia 2" to dia 6" valve
Standard specification for steel / aluminium doors, windows and
ventilators.
Steel door (pressed steel) double shutter.
Standard specification for underground and above ground G.I.
pipeline system (water services)
Standard specification for false ceiling, false flooring underdeck
insulation & partitioning
Dado detail (with BK. Wall & RCC col.)
Steel windows section details.
Urinal fixing detail.
Standard specification for earthwork for underground piping.
Steel windows / ventilators general specifications.
Standard specification for plastering and pointing.
Standard Specification for external facade system with structural
glazing
Standard specification for UPVC doors, windows & ventilators
Wash basin fixing detail.
Skirting detail (with RCC column).
False flooring
Specification for roofing.
Standard specification for wood works
Page
Number
1492
1497
1502
1509
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1524
1525
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1543
1544
1545
1546
1555
1556
1561
1572
1573
1574
1575
1582
1583
1592
1605
1615
1616
1617
1620
1628
Table of Contents
Document Number
Rev.
7-75-0091
7-75-0015
7-75-0002
6-75-0011
0
4
4
1
7-44-0404
7-75-0065
7-75-0068
7-75-0093
6-75-0001
7-75-0043
7-75-0062
6-75-0009
7-75-0032
7-75-0054
6-75-0007
4
4
4
0
5
4
4
5
4
4
5
7-75-0028
7-65-0403
6-65-0013
7-75-0031
7-75-0070
7-75-0014
6-75-0002
6-75-0006
7-75-0060
6-68-0017
4
3
3
4
4
4
6
5
4
0
7-75-0066
Page 6 of 1744
Document Title
Metal sheet flashing detail
Glazed aluminium window.
Skirting detail (with brick wall).
Standard specification for fire check / fire resistant doors, windows
& partitions
Pipe sleeves details for insulated lines under roads & dykes
Plinth protection (with building drain)
Roof drainage and water proofing.
Stainless steel tubular handrail
Standard specification for architectural works general.
Aluminium panel false ceiling (tray type).
European type W.C. (fixing detail).
Standard specification for sanitary fittings and fixtures.
Steel windows fittings and fixtures.
Steel gate (for entrances upto 6.0m width).
Standard specification for white washing, colour washing
distempering, painting and polishing
Steel windows / ventilators use of sections.
Details of barbed wire fencing (with angle iron post).
Standard specification for chain link fencing.
Steel windows / ventilator (with louvers).
Steel door (pressed steel) single shutter.
Glazed aluminium door.
Standard specification for floor finishing.
Standard specification for roof treatment.
Orissa pan W.C. (fixing detail).
Standard specification - civil & structural works - bipolar concrete
penetrating corrosion inhibiting admixture
Wooden panel door (toilet door).
Page
Number
1636
1638
1639
1640
1649
1650
1652
1655
1659
1666
1668
1669
1675
1676
1678
1693
1694
1695
1702
1703
1704
1705
1720
1729
1730
1744
Page 7 of 1744
BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED

REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT
AT
BINA REFINERY, MADHYA PRADESH
(BIDDING DOCUMENT NO. AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006)
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Prepared by:
Page 8 of 1744

REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT
PROJECT
AT
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Part - I: COMMERCIAL SECTION
Prepared by:
Page 9 of 1744
MASTER INDEX (COMMERCIAL)

NAME OF WORK
BIDDING DOCUMENT NO.
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT FOR REVAMP AND CAPACITY

ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES
LIMITED (BORL) AT BINA REFINERY
AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
COMMERCIAL SECTION
S.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
NO. OF SHT.
1.
Cover Page
2.
Master Index
3.
Notice Inviting Bid (NIB)
4.
Instructions To Bidders (ITB)
20
i)
1+15
Instructions to Bidders for E-Tendering
5.
Proposal Forms
30
6.
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
37
7.
Annexure to SCC
i)
Time Schedule
ii)
Qualification and Experience of Key Supervisory Personnel
iii)
Quality Management System
10
iv)
Specification for Documentation Requirements from Contractors and

Specification for Documentation Requirements from Suppliers
22
v)
Annexure-A, B & C for methodology of procurement of Structural

Steel, Cement & TMT Bars
vi)
Reconciliation of materials
10
vii)
Terms of Payment
viii)
Performance Guarantee
ix)
Health Safety and Environment (HSE) Guidelines
33
x)
General requirements for Radiography & other NDT
xi)
Calibration requirement of measuring devices
8.
Terms and conditions for participation in HAZOP Study
9.
General Conditions of Contract (GCC) along with its Annexure
76
(PRICE PART)
S.
NO.
1.
2.
DESCRIPTION
Cover Page
Schedule of Prices (Preamble, FORM SP-0 to FORM SP-10)
NO. OF SHT.
1
17
Note: Documents as per Master Index (Technical) is attached separately with the Technical Part.
103-A702-1006-MI
Page 1 of 1
Page 10 of 1744
GLOBAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING

OF M/S BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED (BORL)
Engineers India Limited (EIL) on behalf of Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) invites e-bids from eligible
bidders for the following Package:
Description
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
BIDDING DOC. NO.: AK/A702-029PF-TN-4070/1006
Bidding Document on Website
Bid Due Date/ Time
From 18.05.2016
On 14.06.2016 up to 1200 Hrs.

(IST)
to 1200 Hrs. (IST) on 14.06.2016
The detailed Notice Inviting Bid (NIB) & Bidding Document can be viewed and downloaded from EIL website
http://tenders.eil.co.in or Central Public Procurement Portal https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app. All amendments,
time extension, clarifications, etc., if any, will be uploaded in these websites only and will not be published in
newspapers. Bidders should regularly visit the above websites to keep themselves updated.
Contact Person: DGM (C&P), EIL Office Complex, Tower-I, 1st Floor, Sector-16, Gurgaon, Haryana, India.
Telephone: +91-124-380-2180, 2181, 2180 E-mail: atul.kumar@eil.co.in / amitkr.gupta@eil.co.in/
deepak.malik@eil.co.in.
DGM (C&P), EIL, GURGAON
Page 11 of 1744
NOTICE INVITING BID (NIB)

FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT FOR REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES
LIMITED (BORL) AT BINA REFINERY
BIDDING DOC. NO.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
(INTERNATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING)
E-Tendering
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) is a joint venture company promoted by Bharat
Petroleum Corporation Limited (BPCL) and Oman Oil Company S.A.O.C., Sultanate of
Oman (OOC). BORL is engaged in crude procurement, crude oil refining & storage and
despatch of petroleum products. The Company operates a six million metric tonnes per annum
(MMTPA) capacity refinery in the hinterland at Bina, Madhya Pradesh.
1.2
BORL intends to augment the processing capacity of Bina Refinery from existing 6.0 MMTPA
to 7.8 MMTPA under Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project. Project involves revamp of
process units, utilities, offsites and product dispatch facilities.
1.3
Engineers India Limited (EIL) on behalf of BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED (BORL),
invites e-bids for VPSA OXYGEN PLANT under single stage two bid system from competent
agencies with sound technical and financial capabilities fulfilling the Bidders Qualification
Criteria (BQC) stated in paragraph 6.0 below.
2.0
BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK:

Design, engineering, manufacture, procurement of materials, inspection, testing, painting,
insulation, supply and erection, commissioning and performance guarantee testing at site of
VPSA Oxygen Plant on lump sum turnkey basis including civil work for production of Oxygen as
per following:
No of chain
Capacity of plant (Gaseous O2)
Turndown
Oxygen (% Vol)
Pressure (kg/cm 2 (g))
Temperature (deg. C)
Dew point
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2 (Two) Nos.
182 TPD (as 100% of Oxygen)
50% of Chain capacity with no O2 venting
90 (min.)
1.5 (minimum)
Ambient
( - ) 46 deg. C at atm. Pressure
Each chain shall consist of following major items:

1.
2.
3.
One (1) number Roots Air Blower with Electric Motor drive.
One (1) pair of Adsorber vessel.
One (1) number Vacuum Pump with Electric Motor drive.
Following major items shall be common for all the chains

1.
2.
One (1) number O2 Surge Tank of required volume to meet continuous demand of O 2.
Two (2) numbers Reciprocating Oxygen compressors (1W+1S) with Electric Motor Drive
to supply O2 at specified pressure at the battery limit.
The plant shall be accommodated within the plot area available for this purpose (approximately
40m x 80m).
For complete details, refer Bidding Document.
3.0
TIME SCHEDULE FOR COMPLETION

15 Months for Mechanical Completion plus 2 Months for Commissioning from the date of Letter of
Acceptance (LOA).
NIB REV 0
Page 1 of 8
Page 12 of 1744
4.0
SALIENT FEATURES OF THE BIDDING DOCUMENT ARE AS FOLLOWS:

a)
Bidding Document No.
AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
b)
Bidding Document
availability on Website.
18.05.2016 to 12:00 Hrs (IST) on 14.06.2016.
c)
Last date for submission of

pre-bid queries
30.05.2016
d)
Date of Pre-Bid Meeting
1000 Hrs. (IST) on 01.06.2016 at Engineers India

Limited, EIL Office Complex, Sector-16, Gurgaon,
Haryana, India-122001
e)
Last Date and time of

submission of Bids
f)
E-Bid submission through

E-tendering
Only E-bids uploaded in Central Public Procurement Portal

website
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app
are
acceptable. Physical Bids and Bids submitted through any
other mode are not acceptable.
g)
EMD submission
Bidders are required to submit the EMD (in the prescribed

format) in original in the manner prescribed in the Bidding
Document in sealed envelope titled Earnest Money
Deposit for Bidding Document No. AK/A702-029-PF-TN4070/1006. However, bidders are required to upload the
scanned copy of EMD on E- Tendering website along with
the e-bid.
The detailed NIB along with Qualification Criteria and

complete Bidding Document can be viewed/ downloaded
from EILs website: http://tenders.eil.co.in and Central
Public
Procurement
Portal
website:
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app.
Up to 1200 Hrs. (IST) on 14.06.2016
Bids not accompanied with EMD shall be rejected. If the

bidder is unable to submit EMD in original on the Bid Due
Date& time, he should upload a scanned copy of the EMD
while submitting the bid in e-tendering website, provided
the original EMD (copy of which has been uploaded) is
received within 7 days from the date of unpriced bid
opening, failing which the bid will be rejected irrespective of
their status/ ranking in tender and notwithstanding the fact
that a copy of EMD was earlier uploaded by the bidder.
h)
NIB REV 0
Opening of Technocommercial (Un priced)

Bids
i)
Cost of Bidding Document
j)
Bid Security / Earnest

Money Deposit (EMD)
k)
Opening of Priced Bids
1400 Hrs. (IST) on 14.06.2016

(Bidders may witness Unprice bid opening through CPP
Portal remotely from their places)
Not Applicable.
For Foreign Bidder
For Indian Bidder
USD 75,800.00
INR 50,00,000.00
(US Dollars Seventy Five
(Indian Rupees Fifty
Thousand Eight Hundred
Lakh only)
only)
After evaluation and short listing of Un-priced technocommercial Bids. Bidders may witness opening of Priced
bids through CPP Portal remotely from their places.
Page 2 of 8
Page 13 of 1744
l)
Post Bid Meeting
Shall be conducted within 10 days from the date opening of

un-priced bids, if required. Exact date, time and venue shall
be intimated later.
If any of the dates, except for due date for submission of bid indicated above happen to be a
declared holiday in EIL Gurgaon, the next working day shall be considered.
4.1
There will be no waiver of EMD for Public sector Undertakings of Central / State Government
Undertakings and Micro & Small scale Enterprises (MSEs).
4.2
Bidder shall download the Bidding Document in his own name and submit the bid directly. The
Bidding Document is non-transferable.
5.0
EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD) / BID SECURITY
5.1
Bids must be accompanied with Earnest Money Deposit/ Bid Security for amount mentioned at
4.0(j) above.
5.2
EMD/ Bid Security shall be in favour of Bharat Oman Refineries Limited in the form of crossed
demand draft payable at Bina, Madhya Pradeshor non-revocable Bank Guarantee on nonjudicial stamp paper of appropriate value and in the prescribed pro-forma, from any Indian
scheduled bank; or from any Indian branch of an International bank.
5.3
Earnest Money Deposit/Bid Security shall be valid up to 2 Months beyond the period of
validity of bids.
5.4
If the Bank Guarantee towards EMD is not in the required proforma, but acceptable otherwise
(considering amount & issuing bank) the Bidder would be asked to resubmit the same in the
required proforma. Such Bids would however, be taken up for evaluation.
6.0
BIDDERSQUALIFICATION CRITERIA (BQC)

Bidder shall fulfil the following qualification criteria in order to qualify for the subject Work:
6.1
EXPERIENCE CRITERIA (TECHINCAL):
6.1.1
The Bidder shall be a regular supplier of VPSA (Vacuum Pressure Swing Adsorption) Oxygen
Plant for industrial application and shall be the single point responsibility vendor (SPRV) for the
complete Package.
6.1.2
Bidder shall have designed, engineered, supplied, erected and commissioned in last Ten (10)
years, at least One (1) number VPSA Oxygen Plant having single chain capacity of minimum 55
TPD (as 100% of Oxygen) with purity of 90 % (Vol) or better, which shall have been in
satisfactory operation for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date.
6.1.3
In case the bidder does not possess experience to meet the requirement of Cl. No. 6.1.2 above
on their own, in terms of design and engineering but meets the criteria in terms of supply,
erection and commissioning, the bidder can still be considered provided
6.1.4
a)
The bidder engages a technical collaborator for design and engineering, who meets
the requirements of clause 6.1.1 and 6.1.2 above.
b)
The bidder shall have executed at least one VPSA Oxygen Plant Project with similar tie
up with the proposed technical collaborator in the last Ten (10) years, which shall have
operated satisfactorily for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date.
c)
The bidder shall furnish a MOU with the proposed technical collaborator to this effect
along with the bid, wherein the MOU shall meet following requirements, as a minimum:
I.
The MOU shall define responsibility scope matrix between the bidder and proposed
technical collaborator for the offered VPSA Oxygen plant. The MOU shall confirm
that the proposed technical collaborator shall stand guarantee for the performance
of the offered VPSA Oxygen Plant.
II.
The MOU between the bidder and the proposed technical collaborator shall be valid
at the time of bidding & shall also continue to remain valid at-least up-to Three (3)
years after the delivery of the VPSA Oxygen Plant.
For qualification of the bidder, above clauses shall be read in conjunction.
NIB REV 0
Page 3 of 8
Page 14 of 1744
6.2
FINANCIAL CRITERIA
6.2.1
Annual financial turnover of the bidder in at least one of the immediate preceding 3 (three)
financial years as per the audited annual financial results up to the due date for submission of
bids should be not be less than the value as mentioned in the table below:
6.2.2
For Foreign Bidder

USD 8,235,000.00
For Indian Bidder

INR 54,35,00,000.00
(US Dollars Eight Million Two

Hundred Thirty Five Thousand
only)
(Indian Rupees Fifty Four

Crore Thirty Five Lakh only)
Networth of the bidder as per the immediate preceding years audited annual financial results should
not be less than the value as mentioned in the table below:
For Foreign Bidder

USD 823,500.00
For Indian Bidder

INR 5,43,50,000.00
(US Dollars Eight Hundred

Twenty Three Thousand Five
Hundred only)
(Indian Rupees Five Crore

Forty Three Lakh Fifty
Thousand only)
Net-worth shall be calculated as per the provisions of the Companys Act 2013.
6.2.3
Working Capital of the Bidder as per the immediate preceding years audited annual financial results
should not be less than the value as mentioned in the table below:
For Foreign Bidder

USD 823,500.00
For Indian Bidder

INR 5,43,50,000.00
(US Dollars Eight Hundred

Twenty Three Thousand Five
Hundred only)
(Indian Rupees Five Crore

Forty Three Lakh Fifty
Thousand only)
Working Capital shall be Current Assets minus Current Liabilities plus any unencumbered long term
deposits maintained with scheduled banks.
In case bidder is unable to meet the working capital requirement as above, the bidder can
supplement the working capital requirement with a line of credit from any scheduled bank in India.
Bidder shall furnish a certificate from any scheduled bank on banks letter head for availability of line
of credit for the value mentioned above, in the format enclosed as Annexure-A.
Note: In case of Foreign Bidders, if Audited Financial Report is in currency other than US
Dollars, the respective/desired figure for calculation of above details shall be converted into
equivalent US Dollars considering the conversion factor indicated in Bidders Audited Financial
Report. In case the same is not indicated, the conversion rate of USD as on last date of Bidders
financial year shall be considered based on RBI reference Rates.
6.3
GENERAL
6.3.1
Experience of only the bidding entity shall be considered. A job executed by a bidder for its own
plant/projects cant be considered as experience for the purpose of meeting requirement of BQC
of the Bidding Document. However, jobs executed for Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary / Holding
company will be considered as experience for the purpose of meeting BQC subject to
submission of tax paid invoice(s) duly certified by Statutory Auditor of the bidder towards
payments of statutory tax in support of the job executed for Subsidiary/ Fellow subsidiary /
Holding company. Such bidders to submit these documents in addition to the documents
specified in the Bidding Document to meet BQC.
6.3.2
A job completed by a bidder as a sub-contractor shall be considered for the purpose of meeting
the experience criteria of BQC subject to submission of following documents in support of
meeting the Bidders Qualification Criteria :
NIB REV 0
Page 4 of 8
Page 15 of 1744
a. Copy of work order along with SOR issued by main contractor.

b. Copies of Completion Certificates from the end user/Owner/Consultant of Owner and
also from the main contractor. The Completion Certificate shall have details like work
order no./date, brief scope of work, ordered & executed value of the job, completion
date etc.
6.3.3
In case audited annual financial statements including balance sheets and profit and loss account
for the immediate preceding financial year is not available for bid closing date up to 31st
December, the Bidder has an option to submit the same for the three previous years
immediately prior to the last financial year. However, for bid closing date after 31stDecember, the
bidder has to compulsorily submit the audited annual financial statements for the immediate
three preceding financial years, for evaluation and his qualification with respect to financial
criteria. In any case the date (i.e. the financial period closing date) of the immediate previous
years audited annual financial statement should not be older than eighteen (18) months from
the bid due date.
6.3.4
In case bidder is having wholly owned subsidiaries but only a single consolidated annual report
is prepared and audited which includes the financial details of their wholly owned subsidiaries,
consolidated annual report shall be considered for establishing the financial criteria subject to
statutory auditor/ chartered accountant of bidder certifying that separate annual report of bidder
(without the financial data of subsidiaries) is not prepared and audited.
6.3.5
Further in case of a bidder being a subsidiary company if separate annual report is not published
and only consolidated annual report of the Parent Company is available, consolidated audited
annual report shall be considered for establishing financial criteria subject to statutory auditor/
chartered accountant of bidder certifying that separate annual report of bidder is not prepared &
audited.
7.0
DOCUMENTATION IN SUPPORT OF MEETING BIDDERS QUALIFICATION CRITERIA
7.1
Documents required with bid against Experience Criteria (Technical)

i.
Bidder shall complete and submit the Proven Track Record Proforma enclosed as
Annexure-I to NIB to establish that the bidder meets the Bidder Qualification Criteria as per
clause no. 6.1 of NIB.
ii.
In case, bidder tie-up with a Technical Collaborator in line with clause no. 6.1.3, bidder shall
submit the MOU conforming all the requirements given in clause no. 6.1.3 (I) & 6.1.3 (II)
along with the bid.
7.2
Bidder shall also submit all necessary documentary evidence such as copies of work
order(s)/contract agreement(s) clearly indicating scope of work and value of the contract,
completion certificate(s), one year successful operation certificate(s),MOU with proposed
Technical Collaborator, if any, Complete audited annual financial statements including audit
reports, balance sheets, profit & loss account statements and all other notes & schedules etc. for
the immediate preceding three financial years, in the first instance itself in support of their
fulfilling Bidders Qualification Criteria.
7.3
All documents furnished by the bidder in support of meeting the experience and financial criteria
of BQC shall be:
Either
duly Certified by Statutory Auditor of the bidder or a practicing Chartered Accountant (not being
an employee or a Director or not having any interest in the bidders company / firm) where
audited accounts are not mandatory as per law.
Or
duly notarized by any Notary Public in the bidders country. In case of notarization, Bidder shall
also submit an Affidavit in the enclosed format enclosed (Annexure-II to NIB) signed by the
authorized signatory of the Bidder.
7.4
With regards to financial documents, in case Bidder submits original of bound published and
audited annual financial statements including balance sheet, profit & loss accounts and all other
schedules for the preceding three financial years, the same shall be considered without
certification of Statutory Auditor/Notarization of Notary Public.
NIB REV 0
Page 5 of 8
Page 16 of 1744
However, in case the bidder submits either a photo copy of published financial statement or a
translated copy of the published financial statements, the same shall be submitted duly certified
either by statutory auditor or Notary Public, in original, as per 7.3 above.
7.5
In case of Foreign bidder, if the documents submitted in support of meeting BQC, such asWork
Order, Completion Certificate, One year successful operation Certificate, duly audited Balance
Sheet, Annual Reports, Purchase Order, Inspection Release Note etc., are not in English
language, then the English translation copy of the same shall be furnished duly certified,
stamped and signed by Local Chamber of Commerce along with the copy of original version of
Work Order, Completion Certificate, One year successful operation Certificate, duly audited
Balance Sheet, Annual report, Purchase Orders, Inspection release Note etc. with the unpriced
bid. This requirement of certification of English translation by Local Chamber of Commerce is
additional to the requirement of authentication stipulated in 7.3 above.
7.6
Submission of authentic documents is the prime responsibility of the bidder. Wherever BORL /
EIL has concern or apprehension regarding the authenticity/ correctness of any document,
BORL / EIL reserves the right of getting the document cross verified from the document issuing
authority.
7.7
In the event of bidders failure to meet the above, BORL/ EIL reserve the right to complete the
evaluation based on the details furnished by the bidder in the first instance along with their bid
without seeking any additional information.
7.8
Bidders shall submit the required documents for meeting Bidders Qualification Criteria
(BQC) in a separate book let in original within 7 (Seven) days from the date of opening of
Un-priced Bid in sealed envelope titled Documentation against Bidder Qualification
Criteria for Bidding Document No. AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006 with proper index and
page numbering. However, bidders are required to upload the scanned copy of all BQC
documents on E- Tendering website along with the e-bid.
8.0
PRE-BID MEETING & SITE VISIT
8.1
Bidders are requested to attend a pre-bid meeting at Engineers India Limited, EIL Office
Complex, Sector-16, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana. Pre-bid meeting shall be attended by
competent representative(s) of the bidder.
8.2
Bidders are requested to submit Pre-bid queries through e-mail in the format prescribed in
Bidding Document to reach EIL on or before date indicated in Bidding Document.
8.3
BORL/EIL reserves the right not to entertain pre-bid queries received after last date of
submission of pre bid queries as mentioned in the Bidding Document.
8.4
Record notes of meetings, including the text of questions raised (without identifying the source of
the query) and the responses given will be transmitted to all the Bidders. Any modification of the
Bidding Document, which may become necessary as a result of the pre-bid queries/ pre-bid
discussion, shall be intimated to all bidders through the issue of an Addendum/ Amendment.
8.5
Non-attendance of the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a bidder. Offer of
the bidder who has not participated in the pre-bid meetings, may be considered for evaluation
only if their offer is in line with the bid requirement without any deviations.
8.6
For Site visit, if required, bidder may contact:

Mr. Ashok Ranjan Chaudhary (Vice President-Projects)
Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project,
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited,
PO BORL Residential Complex, Bina, Dist. Sagar,
Pin-470124 (Madhya Pradesh)
Contact No. - 07580-226342/ 276342
Email id: chaudharyar@bharatpetroleum.in
9.0
9.1
SUBMISSION OF BIDS& VALIDITY

Bids are required to be submitted through Central Public Procurement Portal website
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app only, on or before the Bid submission date and time.
Bidders are required to register themselves at Central Public Procurement Portal website
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app.
NIB REV 0
Page 6 of 8
Page 17 of 1744
9.2
Various links such as Help for Contractor, Information about DSC, FAQ, Resources
Required,
Bidders
Manual
Kit
etc.
are
available
on
home
page
of
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app facilitating vendors to participate in the bidding process.
Bidder are advised to download & utilize the available information/documents under these links
for activities like Registration in CPPP, obtaining User ID & Password, uploading & submission
of e-bids etc.
9.3
Bidders are advised in their own interest to carefully go through Instructions for E-tendering and
other related document available against various help links so as to ensure that bids are
uploaded in E-tendering website well before the closing date and time of bid submission.
Bidder is required to complete certain activities like Registration in e-tender website, obtaining
User ID & Password, enabling of Vendor and mapping of Digital Signature Certificate etc. before
they can load their e-bid on website.
In the event of failure in bidders connectivity with CPPP website during the last few hours on
account of problem on bidders account, they are likely to miss the deadline for bid submission.
Due date extension request due to this reason will not be entertained. In view of the same,
bidders are advised to upload their bid in advance.
9.4
No physical Bids / Offers shall be permitted. The Offers submitted through e-tendering system
shall only be considered for evaluation and ordering. Bids submitted through Fax/email/courier/computer floppy/CD/Pen Drive shall be rejected.
9.5
Bid should be valid for 4 (four) months from the due date of submission of Bids.
10.0
GENERAL
10.1
Notification of Corrigendum/Addendum/Bid Due Date Extensions, if any, to the NIB & Bidding
Document will be uploaded in EIL and CPPP websites only and will not be published in
newspapers. Hence bidders shall view the EIL / CPPP websites regularly.
10.2
BORL/EIL reserves the right to reject any or all the bids received at its discretion without
assigning any reason whatsoever and to annul the Bidding process at any stage.
10.3
In case any Bidder is found to be involved in cartel formation, his Bid will not be considered for
evaluation / placement of order. Such Bidder will also be debarred from bidding in future.
10.4
For detailed specifications, terms and conditions and other details, refer complete Bidding
Document.
10.5
Techno-commercial part of the Bids shall be opened at 1400 Hrs. (IST) on the due date for
submission of Bids. Bidders may witness the Bid opening through e-tendering portal at
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app remotely at their end.
10.6
Bids from Consortium/Unincorporated Joint Venture basis shall not be accepted.
10.7
BORL/EIL shall not be responsible for any expense incurred by bidders in connection with the
preparation & delivery of their bids, site visit, other expenses incurred during bidding process
and regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding process
10.8
BORL/EIL reserve the right to assess bidders capability and capacity to execute the work using
in-house information and by taking into account other aspects such as past performance etc.
10.9
Bidder submitting his bid should not be under liquidation, court receivership or similar
proceedings.
10.10 Canvassing in any other form by the bidder or by any other agency on their behalf may lead to
disqualification of their bid.
10.11 Unsolicited clarifications to the offer and/or change in the prices during its validity period would
render the bid liable for outright rejection.
10.12 Bid submitted by the bidder, who is on Holiday list of BORL/BPCL/EIL, shall not be considered
for bid opening and further evaluation. Bidder shall give a self-declaration mentioning that they
are not blacklisted or on Holiday List of BORL/ BPCL/EIL in the proforma attached with tender
document.
10.13 EIL/BORL reserves the right to complete the evaluation based on the details furnished (without
seeking any additional information) and / or in-house data, survey or otherwise.
NIB REV 0
Page 7 of 8
Page 18 of 1744
10.14 Telephone No., Fax No and e-mail address of DGM (C&P)/ Manager (C&P)/ Sr. Engineer, EIL,
Gurgaon are as under:
Telephone- +91-124-3802081/2180/2181,
E-mailatul.kumar@eil.co.in / amitkr.gupta@eil.co.in/ deepak.malik@eil.co.in
DY. GENERAL MANAGER (C&P)
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED, GURGAON, INDIA
NIB REV 0
Page 8 of 8
Annexure-I to NIB
PROVEN TRACK RECORD PROFORMA (FOR BIDDER QUALIFICATION / TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR) FOR SIMILAR
SUPPLY OF GOODS/WORKS/SERVICES
PROJECT- REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
EIL JOB NO- A702
ITEM/ PACKAGE- VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SL.
NO.
PARAMETER
CLIENT- M/s BORL

VENDORITEM/ PACKAGE TAG NO. - (029-LZ-00-1006)
INFORMATION ON INFORMATION
ON
PROPOSED
REFERENCED PACKAGE
PACKAGE (FOR THIS (BIDDER
WITHOUT
PROJECT)
TECHNICAL
COLLABORATOR)
INFORMATION ON REFERENCED PACKAGE

(BIDDER WITH TECHNICAL COLLABORATOR)
For Bidder
1.0
Is the Bidder, a regular supplier of VPSA Oxygen Plant and Single Point
Responsibility Vendor (SPRV) for the complete package? - Yes/No.
For Technical
Collaborator
For Bidder
-----For Bidder
2.0
(Also refer Note-8)

For the Bidder without tie-up with Technical Collaborator
Has the Bidder designed, engineered, supplied, erected and commissioned
in last Ten (10) years, at least One (1) number VPSA Oxygen Plant having
single chain capacity of 55 TPD (as 100% of Oxygen) with purity of 90 %
(Vol) or better, which shall have been in satisfactory operation for a minimum
period of One (1) year as on bid due date? Yes/No (If yes, indicate
supporting reference also)
3.0
Page 19 of 1744
-----------
-----
For bidder having tie-up with a Technical Collaborator:Name of Technical Collaborator and address
Is the Technical collaborator, a regular supplier of VPSA Oxygen Plant
?
Yes/No
Package
and Single Point Responsibility Vendor (SPRV) for the complete
Package? - Yes/No. (If yes, indicate supporting reference also)
-----------
------
------
(Also refer Note-8)
Place:
Date:
[Signature of Authorized Signatory]*

Name:
Designation:
Seal:
* Note-9
Page 1 of 5
Annexure-I to NIB
EIL JOB NO- A702
SL.
NO.
PARAMETER
CLIENT- M/s BORL

ON
PROPOSED
REFERENCED PACKAGE
WITHOUT
PROJECT)
TECHNICAL
COLLABORATOR)

For Bidder
Has the Technical collaborator designed, engineered, supplied, erected and

commissioned in last Ten (10) years, at least One (1) number VPSA Oxygen
Plant Package having single chain capacity of 55 TPD (as 100% of Oxygen)
with purity of 90 % (Vol) or better, which should have been in satisfactory
operation for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date?
Yes/No. (If yes, indicate supporting reference also)
------
Has the Bidder executed at least one (1) number VPSA Oxygen Plant with
similar tie up with the proposed Technical Collaborator of VPSA Oxygen
Plant Package in the last Ten (10) years, which shall have operated
satisfactorily for a minimum period of One (1) year as on bid due date. (Yes/No). (If yes, indicate supporting reference also)
4.0
Further to authenticate the above statement, Details furnished are as

under:
4.1
Capacity of VPSA Oxygen Plant ( TPD )
No. of chains
Single chain capacity
Total Capacity
4.2
Page 20 of 1744
Purity of Product Oxygen (% Vol)
Place:
Date:
------
------
For Technical
Collaborator
For Bidder
For Bidder
------
------
2
91 TPD (as 100%
of Oxygen)
182 TPD (as
100% of Oxygen)
90

Name:
Designation:
Seal:
* Note-9
Page 2 of 5
Annexure-I to NIB
EIL JOB NO- A702
SL.
NO.
PARAMETER
CLIENT- M/s BORL

ON
PROPOSED
REFERENCED PACKAGE
WITHOUT
PROJECT)
TECHNICAL
COLLABORATOR)

For Bidder
4.3
Date of award of contract
-----
4.4
Date of Delivery of complete VPSA Oxygen Plant Package
-----
4.5
Date of commissioning of VPSA Oxygen Plant Package
-----
4.6
Has the VPSA Oxygen Plant Package completed ONE Year of satisfactory
operation, as on bid due date? - Yes/No
4.7
Purchaser's / End Users Name and Address

Name (Company / Organization)
-----
4.9
Name of Contact Person
-----
Address Including Telephone No/ Fax No/ Email-ID
-----
4.11
Page 21 of 1744
For Bidder
For Bidder
---------
4.8
4.10
For Technical
Collaborator
Are duly endorsed supporting documents attached as specified in RFQ/IFB?

Yes/No
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS:
Place:
Date:

Name:
Designation:
Seal:
* Note-9
Page 3 of 5
Page 22 of 1744
Annexure-I to NIB
EIL JOB NO- A702
1.
This proforma duly filled-in, stamped and signed shall be submitted along with the Bid.
2.
Documentation Requirement for Bidder and Technical Collaborator
CLIENT- M/s BORL

Copies of Letter of Awards/ Order/ Work Orders and completion certificate (In case of Works/Services) or IRN/Proof of Delivery
(In case of supplies), as applicable to be enclosed. If necessary, additional documents such as approved technical
documents/drawings shall also be submitted to establish bidder meeting qualification criteria.
In case of Technical Collaboration, the above stated documents including copy of MOU as mentioned in the Bidders
Qualification Criteria shall be furnished separately for Bidders referenced packages as well as for Technical Collaborators
referenced packages.
3.
The Supply/Work/Services completed beyond Ten (10) years need not be indicated here.
4.
The list of Supply/Work/Services, not of similar nature shall not be indicated here. Failing to comply aforementioned instructions may
lead to rejection of bid.
5.
Since the information requested in this proforma shall be utilized to assess the Bidders capability, it is in the interest of the Bidder to
pick those cases out of total list of references which most closely match with the Bid requirement. The Bidder shall also ensure that all
information asked for is furnished and the same is correct and complete in all respects. Incomplete information could lead the bid
being considered ineligible for further evaluation.
6.
Incorrect information furnished in this proforma shall render the bid/order liable for rejection at any stage of evaluation/ work
execution, at the risk and cost of the bidder and the bidder shall be blacklisted.
7.
For the referred installations, the bidder shall indicate the name of the Purchaser/ End Users contact person (along with his address,
telephone no., fax no., e-mail id etc.) who may be contacted by the Purchaser/End User, if felt necessary.
Place:
Date:

Name:
Designation:
Seal:
* Note-9
Page 4 of 5
Page 23 of 1744
Annexure-I to NIB
EIL JOB NO- A702
CLIENT- M/s BORL

8.
Bidder shall also submit standard reference list (his own and that of Technical collaborator, if any) for VPSA Oxygen Plant.
9.
For certification and other requirements, refer commercial part.
Place:
Date:

Name:
Designation:
Seal:
* Note-9
Page 5 of 5
Page 24 of 1744
Annexure-II TO NIB
AFFIDAVIT
(TO BE SUBMITTED ON A NON JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)
AFFIDAVIT OF ..................................., S/o D/o _________________, resident of
____________
EMPLOYED
AS
____________________
AS..........................
WITH.................................................
HAVING
OFFICE
AT..........................
PIN............................
I, the above named deponent do hereby solemnly affirm and state as under:1.
That I am the authorized representative and signatory of M/s.......................
2.
That the document (s) submitted, as mentioned hereunder, by M/s .....................

alongwith the Bid Document submitted under covering letter no. ......... dated .......
towards Tender No. ........ for.......... (Project) has / have been submitted under my
knowledge.
Sr. No.
Document Reference
No. &Date
Document subject
Issuing Authority
3.
That the document(s) submitted, as mentioned above, by M/s ...........alongwith the Bid
Document for meeting the Bid Qualification Criteria thereunder, vide covering letter
no. .... dated ......., towards Tender No. ...... for ................ are authentic, vide covering
letter of their originals and have been issued by the issuing authority mentioned above
and no part of the document(s) is false, forged or fabricated.
4.
That no part of this affidavit is false and that this affidavit and the above declaration in
respect of genuineness of the documents has been made having full knowledge of (i)
the provisions of the Indian Panel Code in respect of offences including, but not
limited to those pertaining to criminal breach of trust, cheating and fraud and (ii)
provisions of bidding conditions which entitle the Owner / EIL to initiate action in the
event of such declaration turning out to be a misrepresentation or false representation.
5.
I depose accordingly.
DEPONENT
VERIFICATION
I, .......................the deponent above named do hereby verify that the factual contents
of this affidavit are true and correct. No part of it is false and nothing material has been
concealed there from.
Verified at ..............on this ........... day of .................20....
DEPONENT
Page 25 of 1744
Annexure-A to NIB
Page 26 of 1744
Instructions to Bidders
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bid Doc No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
M/s BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED

Job No. A702
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Engineers India Limited

New Delhi
Page 27 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL ....................................................................................................... 4
1.1
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 4
1.2
Eligible Bidders ............................................................................................................ 4
1.3
Acknowledgement & Confirmation to bid ................................................................ 4
1.4
Confidentiality of Document ....................................................................................... 4
1.5
Cost of Bidding ............................................................................................................. 4
1.6
Site Visit ........................................................................................................................ 4
2.0
BIDDING DOCUMENT, CLARIFICATION AND AMENDMENT ..................... 5
2.1
Bidding Document ....................................................................................................... 5
2.2
Clarification Requests by Bidder& Pre-bid meeting ................................................ 6
2.3
Amendment of Bidding Document ............................................................................. 6
3.0
PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS .............................................. 7
3.1
E-Tendering .................................................................................................................. 7
3.4
ZERO DEVIATION BIDDING.................................................................................... 7
3.5
Language of Bid ........................................................................................................... 7
3.6
Documents Comprising the Bid .................................................................................. 7
3.7
Bid Prices .................................................................................................................... 10
3.9
Bidder to note and consider the following: .............................................................. 11
3.10
Prices in FORM SP-1 & FORM SP-2 ...................................................................... 10
3.15
Currencies of Bid & Payment ................................................................................... 15
3.16
Bid Validity ................................................................................................................. 16
3.17
Earnest Money Deposit/Bid Security ....................................................................... 16
4.0
SUBMISSION OF BID................................................................................... 17
5.0
ALTERNATIVE BIDS .................. 15ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED.
6.0
BID OPENING AND EVALUATION .............................................................. 17
6.1
Opening of Techno-Commercial Part of Bid........................................................... 17
6.2
Clarification & Additional Information .................................................................. 17

New Delhi
Page 28 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
6.3
Bid Evaluation Criteria ............................................................................................. 17
6.4
Opening of Price Part of Bid ..................................................................................... 18
6.5
Evaluation of Price Bids ............................................................................................ 18
6.6
Bid Evaluation Process to be Confidential .............................................................. 19
6.7
Owners Right to Accept or Reject a Bid................................................................. 19
7.0
NEGOTIATION AND AWARD OF WORK .................................................... 19
7.1
Negotiation .................................................................................................................. 19
7.2
Award of Work .......................................................................................................... 19
7.3
Contract Document .................................................................................................... 19
8.0
CONTRACT PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE .............................................. 20
9.0
FRAUDULENT PRACTICES ........................................................................ 20
ENCLOSURES:
ANNEXURE-I TO ITB: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR E-TENDERING 03 PAGES

New Delhi
Page 29 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Introduction
1.1.1
BORL intends to augment the processing capacity of Bina Refinery from existing 6.0
MMTPA to 7.8 MMTPA under Revamp and capacity Enhancement Project. Project
involves revamp of process units, utilities, offsites and product dispatch facilities.
1.1.2
M/s Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) hereinafter referred to as "Owner" has
appointed M/s Engineers India Ltd. (EIL) as Project Management Consultant (PMC).
EILon behalf of BORL invites bids through E-tendering from eligible bidders, for VPSA
OXYGEN PLANT under single stage two bid system .
1.1.3
Engineers India Ltd. shall be the Engineer-in-Charge for this Project.
1.1.4
Scope of Bid: The scope of Bid shall mean the entire scope covered under the Bidding
Document (hereinafter for the purpose of these instructions collectively referred to as the
WORKS)
1.1.5
Throughout this Bidding Documents, the term Bid and Tender and their derivatives
(Bidder/Tenderer, Bid/Tendered/Tender, Bidding/Tendering, etc.) are synonymous,
and day means calendar day. Except where the context requires otherwise, words
indicating the singular also include the plural and words indicating the plural also include
the singular.
1.1.6
It shall be bidder's responsibility to have thorough understanding of the reference

documents, site conditions and specifications included in the Bidding Document.
1.2
Eligible Bidders
1.2.1
A bidder may be a firm or a company, who, have been issued the Bidding Document on
Limited Competitive Basis and intends to submit Bid, or have submitted bid in response to
Invitation for Bids (IFB) on Open Competitive basis.
1.2.2
In case of limited competitive bidding, the bidding is open only to the bidders to whom
Bidding Document has been issued.
1.2.3
A bidder who is on Holiday/ Negative list of EIL/BPCL/BORL on due date of submission of

bid / during the process of evaluation of the bids, the offers of such bidders shall not be
considered for bid opening/evaluation/award. Further, in case of a consortium bid (if
allowed as per Bidding Document), if any of the member(s) of consortium is on Holiday/
Negative list of EIL/BPCL/BORL on due date of submission of bid / during the process of
evaluation of the bids, the offers of such consortium shall not be considered for bid
opening/evaluation/Award.
1.2.4
In case of Limited enquiry, bidder shall fulfil the Qualification criteria (Experience and/or
Financial), if applicable as per Bidding Document.
1.3
Acknowledgement & Confirmation to bid
1.3.1
Within 3 days of downloading of Bidding Document, bidder shall acknowledge and

confirm his intention to bid for the tendered work on EIL website
http://tenders.eil.co.in/newtenders/.
1.4
Confidentiality of Document
1.4.1
Bidder shall treat the Bidding Document and contents thereof as confidential.
1.5
Cost of Bidding
1.5.1
All direct and indirect costs associated with the preparation and submission of bid
(including clarification meetings and site visit, if any), shall be to Bidders account and
Owner/ EIL will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the
conduct or outcome of the bidding process.
1.6
Details of beneficiary for issuance of bank guarantees

New Delhi
Page 30 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
Beneficiary: BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED

Bank Details: STATE BANK OF INDIA,
CAG BRANCH, NEVILE HOUSE,
3RD FLOOR, J N HEREDIA MARG,
BALARD ESTATE, MUMBAI-400001
A/C TYPE: CASH CREDIT
IFS CODE: SBIN0009995
BORL Income Tax PAN Number: AABCB7084M
1.7
Site Visit
1.7.1
The Bharat Oman Refineries Limited is located at Bina, District Sagar, Madhya Pradesh.
1.7.2
Bidder is advised to visit and examine the site on the date mentioned in IFB/LIB, its
surroundings and familiarise himself with the existing facilities and environment, and
collect all other information including applicable laws, which he may require for preparing
and submitting the bid and entering into the Contract. Claims and objections due to
ignorance of existing conditions or inadequacy of information will not be considered after
submission of the bid and during implementation.
The Bidder and any of his personnel or agents will be granted permission by the Owner to
enter upon his premises and land for the purpose of such inspection, but only upon the
explicit condition that the Bidder, his personnel or agents will release and indemnify the
Owner and his personnel and agents from and against all liability in respect thereof and
will be responsible for personnel injury (whether fatal or otherwise), loss of or damage to
property and any other loss, damage, cost and expenses incurred as a result thereof.
1.7.3
Bidder may contact the following person at site for site visit purpose:
Mr. Ashok Chaudhary (Vice President-Projects)
Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project,
Vill& PO: Agasod, Bina, Dist. Sagar,
Pin-470113 (M.P.)
Contact No. - 07580-226322/276322
Email id: chaudharyar@bharatpetroleum.in
2.0
BIDDING DOCUMENT, CLARIFICATION AND AMENDMENT
2.1
Bidding Document
2.1.1
The Bidding Document shall be read in conjunction with any amendment issued
subsequently.
2.1.2
The Bidder is expected to examine the Bidding Document, including all instructions,
terms, specifications and drawings in the Bidding Document. Failure to furnish all
information required as per the Bidding Document or submission of a bid not substantially
responsive to the Bidding Document in every respect could result in rejection of the Bid.
2.1.3
Bidding Document is non-transferable and shall at all times remain the exclusive property
of Owner/EIL with a license to the Bidder to use the Bidding Documents for the limited
purpose of submitting the bid.
2.1.4
The
complete
Bidding
Document
is
available
on
the
EIL
website:
http://tenders.eil.co.in/newtenders/,
Central
Public
Procurement
Portal
http://eprocure.gov.in/cppp. Bidder can view / download the documents from any of the
websites mentioned above. However, the bid shall be submitted only through Central
Public Procurement Portal website http://eprocure.gov.in/cppp.
2.1.5
All amendments, time extension, clarifications, etc. will be uploaded in the EIL website:
http://tenders.eil.co.in/newtenders/ only. In case of press enquires the same will not be
published in newspapers. Bidders should regularly visit the above websites to keep
themselves updated.
2.1.6
Agencies can view/download the Bidding Document free of cost.

New Delhi
Page 31 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
2.2
Clarification Requests by Bidder & Pre-bid meeting
2.2.1
Bidders authorized representative(s) shall attend the pre bid meeting on the prescribed
day at the given venue specified in IFB/ LIB. During the pre-bid meeting, all the technical
and commercial issues shall be discussed and concluded to ensure that the bid received
subsequent to pre bid meeting shall be without any deviations to terms and conditions.
Hence, bidders shall treat the pre bid meeting as utmost important and depute competent
& senior person capable of taking on the spot decision to sort out all the technical and
commercial issues.
However, in case any bidder does not attend the pre bid meeting, it shall be understood
that the bidder has a clear understanding of the scope, terms & conditions of the bidding
document and does not have any comments/ deviations to the requirements of the
bidding document.
2.2.2
In order to ensure fruitful discussions during pre-bid meeting, the bidder is requested to
submit any queries/clarification/information pertaining to Bidding document in writing
delivered by hand or by e-mail in the format provided in Bidding Forms so as to reach
two days prior to Pre-bid meeting. These queries shall be replied during pre-bid meeting.
The editable soft copies of the queries shall also be e-mailed to concerned persons
specified in NIB/LIB, to enable EIL to prepare replies to the queries in the same format
expeditiously.
2.2.3
The bidders are required to participate in the pre-bid meeting after going through the
entire bidding document alongwith BQC. Bidder shall come with all technical and
commercial points on which they need clarifications and also to ensure that they possess
all the supporting documentation for meeting the BQC. In case of any doubt, they may
discuss the same during the meeting to avoid any techno-commercial clarifications/
discussions post bid.
2.2.4
Replies to the pre-bid queries will be uploaded in EIL website http://tenders.eil.co.in as

expeditiously as possible. After pre-bid meeting, no further queries will be entertained
from the bidders.
2.2.5
Any modification of the Bidding Document, which may become necessary as a result of
the pre-bid discussion, shall be intimated to all bidders through the issue of an
Addendum/Amendment. The response of EIL shall not form part of the Bidding Document
unless issued as an Addendum/ Amendment.
2.2.6
Based on the pre-bid discussions, no-deviation form/techno-commercial compliance shall

be signed and submitted by the bidders as part of their offer. After pre-bid meeting, no
deviation shall be accepted. Bidder in their own interest shall submit bids fully complying
to bidding document requirements and EIL/BORL shall reserve the right to proceed with
the available compliant bids for evaluation without raising any technical/ commercial
queries.
2.2.7
Any failure by Bidder to comply with the aforesaid requirement shall not excuse the
Bidder, after subsequent award of Contract, from performing the Work in accordance with
the Contract.
2.2.8
A bidder may seek clarifications regarding the Bidding Document provisions, bidding
process and / or rejection of his Bid. Owner/EIL shall respond to such requests within a
reasonable time.
2.3
Amendment of Bidding Document
2.3.1
Owner/ EIL may, for any reason whether at his own initiative or in response to the
clarification
requested
by
the
prospective
bidder(s),
issue
modifications/changes/clarifications in the form of Amendment through EIL website
http://tenders.eil.co.in only, during the bidding period. Any Amendment thus issued shall
become part of Bidding Document and Bidder shall upload along with their bid, the
scanned copy of the Amendment duly signed and stamped as a token of his acceptance.

New Delhi
Page 32 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
3.0
PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS
3.1
E-Tendering
3.1.1
The bid shall be submitted through Central Public Procurement Portal

http://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app only. Methodology for e-tendering shall be as per
attached Annexure-I to ITB. Bidders are requested to get acquainted with the ETendering Website and upload their Bid well within the time provided for bid submission
to avoid last minute hassles.
3.2
Bidders are advised in their own interest to carefully go through Instructions for Etendering and other related document available against various help links so as to ensure
that bids are uploaded in E-tendering website well before the closing date and time of bid
submission.
Bidder is required to complete certain activities like Registration in e-tender website,
obtaining User ID & Password, enabling of Vendor and mapping of Digital Signature
Certificate etc. before they can load their e-bid on website.
In the event of failure in bidders connectivity with CPPP website during the last few hours
on account of problem on bidders account, they are likely to miss the deadline for bid
submission. Due date extension request due to this reason will not be entertained. In view
of the same, bidders are advised to upload their bid in advance.
3.3
No physical Bids / Offers shall be permitted. The Offers submitted through e-tendering
system shall only be considered for evaluation and ordering. Bids submitted through
Fax/e-mail/courier/computer floppy/CD/Pen Drive etc. shall be rejected.
3.4
ZERO DEVIATION BIDDING
3.4.1
This enquiry is issued on Zero Deviation Bidding basis wherein no post bid
correspondence of any nature shall be entertained. Bidders in their own interest are
advised to take part in the pre-bid meeting by deputing their competent personnel. This
will help bidder not only to cut short of the evaluation time leading to requirement of
shorter bid validity but also enable them to submit their best prices based on the clear
techno-commercial scope.
3.4.2
For cases where Bidders are required to meet Bidder Qualification Criteria (BQC)/
Financial Criteria (in case of LIB) for their qualification against Bidding Document, Bidders
may carry their qualification documents, which they feel are meeting the BQC/ Financial
Criteria, for discussion with EIL officials during the pre-bid meeting. However, Bidders
qualifications shall be based on qualification documents submitted in the Bid.
3.5
Language of Bid
3.5.1
The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the bid exchanged by
the bidder and EIL, shall be in the English language. Supporting documents and printed
literature that are part of the Bid may be in another language provided they are
accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant passages in the English
language, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall
govern.
3.6
Documents Comprising the Bid
3.6.1
The offer must be complete in all respects, leaving no scope for ambiguity. Bidder is fully
responsible for the bid submitted and no relief or consideration can be given for errors
and omissions.
3.6.2
The bid shall contain no interlineations, erasures or overwriting except as necessary to

correct errors made by the bidder, in which case, such corrections shall be signed in full
by the person or persons signing the bid.
3.6.3
The Bid shall be submitted in three parts viz. Part-I, Part-II & Part-III in respective folders
provided in the website.

New Delhi
Page 33 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
PART-I
PART-II
PART-III
3.6.4
Techno-commercial / Un-priced Bid

Priced Bid
EMD/Bid Security
PART-I: Techno-commercial / Un-priced Bid shall contain the following documents duly
stamped & signed by Bidder:
Section-I:
Section-II:
Section-III:
Section-IV:
Section-V:
Section-VI:
Section-VII:
i) Submission of Bid Letter

ii) Form of Bid and Information about Bidder as per FORM-A and FORMB respectively.
iii) Power of attorney in favour of signatory (ies) of the e-bid.
iv) Submission of declaration by bidder as per FORM-C.
v) Documentation against Bidder Qualification Criteria (Experience/
Technical & Financial)
i) Deployment Schedule of Construction Equipment, Tools & Tackles
proposed for execution of works as per Proposal FORM-D.
ii) Detailed execution Philosophy of work as per Proposal FORM-E.
iii) Details of proposed organisation along with CVs of key personnel for
Home and Site Office as per Proposal FORM-F & FORM-F1.
iv) Deployment Schedule of Supervisory Personnel as per Proposal
FORM-G.
v) Schedule for completion of major activities in the form of bar chart.
i) Copy of Partnership Deed in case of Partnership Firm or Memorandum
& Articles of Association in case of Limited Company.
ii) Information about any current litigation / arbitration, if any, in which
bidder is involved.
i) Reply to commercial questionnaire as per FORM-H.
ii) Unpriced copy (without price) of complete Schedule of Prices
document replacing Price figures with words Quoted/Not Quoted (as
applicable), duly scanned, signed and stamped on each page.
i) Technical offer and engineering details, if any, required as per Bidding
Document.
ii) Technical Compliance Formats of respective technical disciplines as
provided in the Bidding Document.
i)
Letter of waiver of conditions/ deviations as per FORM-K
i)
Any other information required in the Bidding Documents or

considered relevant by the bidder.
Self-certificate that the bidder is not under liquidation, court
receivership or similar proceedings.
Self-certificate that the bidder have not been placed on any holiday list
or black list declared by EIL/BORL/BPCL.
Submission of declaration regarding PF / ESI /ST registration and PAN
as per FORM-L.
Bank mandate FORM duly filled, signed and stamped with bankers
certification as per FORM-M
Copy of Master Index for Technical and Commercial Volumes provided
with the Bidding Document and copy of amendments (if any) in token
of having accepted and considered the same in preparing and
submitting the bid
Quality Assurance: A brief description of the Bidder's QA system and a
statement detailed how QA will be implemented for the Project.
Check list for Bid Completion (Commercial), duly filled in as per
FORM-N.
Signed & stamped terms and conditions for bidders participation in
Hazop Study
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Section-VIII:
Section-IX:
Section-X:
i)
i)
i)
ii)

New Delhi
Page 34 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
For convenience, the Bid shall be compiled in the form of specific Sections conforming to
the above. In case of non-submission of above documents or submission of incomplete
documents, the OWNER reserves the right not to evaluate such offers further and not to
enter into correspondence in this regard after opening the Techno-commercial / Unpriced
Bid.
Note: The above shall be uploaded in PREQUAL/ TECHNICAL folder in e-tendering
portal.
3.6.5
PART-II: Priced Bid shall be submitted separately and shall consist of the following:
i)
Total Schedule of Lump sum Prices as per formats (SP-0 to SP-10) given in the
Schedule of Prices, duly filled-in with prices, stamped & signed on each page,
complete in all respects, shall be submitted.
This part shall not contain any condition whatsoever failing which the Bids shall be liable
to be rejected. No stipulation, deviation, terms & conditions, presumption, basis etc. shall
be stipulated in Price Part of the bid. Any condition if stipulated shall be treated as null
and void and shall render the bid liable for rejection.
Note: Part-II shall be uploaded in FINANCE folder in e-tendering portal.
3.6.6
PART-III: EMD/Bid Security:

(i)
EMD/Bid Security, in the form of Crossed Demand Draft (DD) / Bank Guarantee
of requisite amount in favour of BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED
payable at Bina, Dist. Sagar, Madhya Pradesh, India, as stipulated in LIB/ NIB,
shall be submitted in the following manner:
3.6.7
Original EMD (in physical form): not later than Seven (7) days from the
date of Un-priced Bid Opening
Copy of Original EMD: Scanned & uploaded in E-Tendering Portal
alongwith Un-priced Techno-commercial Bid. Scanned copy of Bid
security shall be uploaded in FEE FOLDER in e-tendering portal.
SUBMISSION OF ORIGINAL DOCUMENTS:

a)
Bidders shall submit the following documents in ORIGINAL within Seven (7) days
from the date of Un-priced Bid Opening:
(i)
EMD/ Bid Security
(ii)
Booklet titled as Authenticated documents in support of fulfilment of the Bidder

Qualification Criteria as per NIB/LIB.
(iii) Power of Attorney in favour of signatory (ies) of bid.

b)
These documents in sealed envelope must be received by EIL at the following

address:
DAK RECEIPT SECTION,
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED,
TOWER-2, GROUND FLOOR,
EIL COMPLEX, SECTOR-16,
(NEAR 32ndMILESTONE ON NH-8),
GURGAON- 122001
HARYANA
ATTN: MR. ATUL KUMAR, DGM (C&P)
c)
If the envelope is not sealed and marked as above, the Employer will assume no
responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening.

New Delhi
Page 35 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
3.7
Bid Prices
3.7.1
Unless otherwise permitted in the Bidding Documents, the bid shall be for the whole
works.
3.7.2
Bidder shall quote price after careful analysis of cost involved for the performance of the
work considering all parts of the Bidding Document. In case any activity though
specifically not covered in description of item under SOR/SOP but is required to complete
the work as per scope of work, scope of supply, specifications, standards, drawings,
GCC, SCC or any other part of Bidding Document, the prices quoted shall be deemed to
be inclusive of cost incurred for such activity. Schedule of Prices (SOP) and Schedule of
Rates (SOR) have been used interchangeably in this document and shall mean the same
thing.
3.7.3
The Bid price is to be filled in the formats given in Schedule of Prices/ Rates.
3.7.4
The Total Lump sum Price shall be quoted in the FORM SP-0 of the SOP comprising the
total of the Lumpsum prices quoted in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3.
3.7.5
Lumpsum prices given in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3 shall be quoted based on detailed
break-up quoted in FORMS SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 respectively.
3.7.6
Each Bidder shall separately indicate in FORM SP-8 the lumpsum amounts that it has
considered and included in its bid as payable towards
a)
Excise Duty,
b)
Central Sales Tax (CST),
c)
Basic Custom Duty
d)
Countervailing Duty (CVD) for Imported Items,
e)
Additional Import Duty (AID)/ SAD/ Additional CVD for Imported Items,
f)
Service tax
g)
Swachh Bharat Cess
h)
Krishi Kalyan Cess
i)
MP VAT
j)
Entry Tax in Madhya Pradesh
k)
Customs Educational Cess and Customs Secondary & Higher Education

Cess
Such amounts shall be calculated and included at the present applicable rate of the
taxable value of such sale/service.
The lumpsum amounts indicated in FORM SP-8 shall form the basis for calculating the
variation (increase or reduction) in taxes and duties payable by the OWNER to the
CONTRACTOR or refundable by the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER, as the case may
be, in accordance with the provisions in this behalf in the Special Conditions of Contract.
3.7.7
The quoted prices shall remain firm, fixed and valid until completion of the Contract
performance and will not be subject to variation on any account except as otherwise
specifically provided in the Bidding Document.
3.8
Prices in FORM SP-1 & FORM SP-2
3.8.1
The price for Residual Design & Detailed Engineering component quoted in FORM SP-1
shall not exceed 10% (Ten Percent) of Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
3.8.2
The prices for Supply Component (FORM SP-2) shall not exceed 60% (Sixty Percent) of
Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
3.8.3
In case the price(s) quoted exceed the limits specified under clause 3.8.1 and/or 3.8.2
above, the excess amounts shall be paid in the Final Bill provided the Total Lumpsum

New Delhi
Page 36 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
Price (Quoted in FORM SP-0) does not increase on account of such payment.
3.8.4
The bidder(s) must indicate CIF value & rate of customs duty considered in the Price
Schedule. The bidder shall consider merit rate of customs duty for the imported materials.
Bidder shall ascertain the applicable merit rate of customs duty and shall be solely
responsible towards applicability and correctness of such rates. The evaluation and
ordering shall be carried out based on the merit rate of customs duty considered by the
bidder. Variation in price due to customs duty rate will be dealt with separately after
receipt of materials at site against documentary evidence.
3.8.5
If bidder has considered customs duty for import materials other than the merit rate of
customs duty in their offer, then statutory variation on the customs duty will be payable
extra on the merit rate of custom duty or the rate of custom duty considered by the bidder,
whichever is lower.
3.9
Bidder to note and consider the following:

a) Owner shall issue Form C against the inter-state purchases of goods sold to BORL,
wherever applicable. However, Form C shall be provided only for finished goods
manufactured by the Contractor and directly sold to the Owner. Form-C shall not be
provided for bought-out items sourced from Sub-vendor including supplies by the way of
sale in transit.
b) BORL will issue road permit for materials only for the cases wherever BORL shall provide
the FORM C pursuant to sl. no. a) above
3.10
It shall be the duty of the CONTRACTOR to duly observe and perform all laws, rules,
regulations, orders and formalities applicable to Excise Duty, Sales Tax, VAT, Service
tax, Swachh Bharat Cess, Customs Duty, Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty etc.
on the import, manufacture, sale and/or supply of any material to the OWNER and
performance of the works under the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the
OWNER indemnified from and against any and all claims, demands, prosecutions,
actions, proceedings, penalties, damages, demurrages and/or other levies whatsoever
made or levied by any Court, Tribunal or the Customs or other Authorities with respect to
any alleged breach, evasion or infraction of such duties, taxes, charges or levies or any
breach or infraction of any applicable laws, rules, regulations, orders or formalities
concerning the same and from the consequence thereof.
3.11
The price of materials is divided into two parts, the Foreign Currency component and the
Indian Rupee component.
3.12
Bidders quoted lump sum price shall be for the entire scope of work as specified in the
Bidding Document on Lumpsum Turnkey Basis (LSTK) WITH SINGLE POINT
RESPONSIBILITY, in the SOP format given alongwith Bidding Document as follows:
3.12.1
Indian Bidders:
I) Design and Detailed Engineering services (FORM SP-1):
Lump sum price shall include all costs related to Design and Detailed Engineering
services as per the requirement of Bidding Document.
II) Supply of Finished Goods (FORM SP-2):
Lump sum price of indigenous materials shall be indicated in Indian Rupees. Bidder is
expected to include ex-factory value of indigenous materials, anticipated cost of
procurement & profits, as applicable, towards procurement and supply of indigenous
materials.
However, where only ex-factory value is applicable, Bidder shall ensure that Goods are
consigned to OWNER from dispatch point and cenvatable documents w.r.t. Excise duty
are furnished and sales tax amount is charged accurately. Where the sale to the OWNER
is deemed to take place by endorsement/transfer of Railway Receipt or Truck/Lorry or
any receipt during transit, the Bidder shall consider the sales tax payable on aggregate of
ex-factory value of materials, anticipated cost of procurement and profits, as applicable,

New Delhi
Page 37 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
towards supply of indigenous materials. The Bidder shall accurately charge Excise duty
on ex-factory value of materials and furnish cenvatable documents w.r.t. same.
Similarly, Bidder is expected to indicate the anticipated CIF value of the imported
materials (Foreign Currency component) covering the price of materials as represented
by the Suppliers invoice(s), the anticipated freight on the shipment of the imported goods,
Marine cum transit Insurance and anticipated cost of procurement and profits.
All necessary handling equipment, cranes, tools tackle etc. for handling and loading of
goods at Bidders works/ despatch point shall be arranged by Bidder at his own cost.
Prices of materials for Civil, Structural and General civil, Architectural, Painting works and
all consumables for testing, Pre-commissioning, commissioning & PGTR shall be
included in prices for Construction/ Installation quoted in FORM SP-3.
III) Services related to Inland Transportation, port & customs clearance, handling and Site
Works i.e. Construction, Installation, Testing, Commissioning etc. (FORM SP-3) :
Inland Transportation, port & customs clearance:
Total quoted price shall include port & customs clearance, handling, forwarding, loading
on to trucks etc. and transportation charges from Port of Entry in India and / or from any
other place / works in India up to Project Site. Total quoted price shall also include
provision of all handling equipment including cranes, tools/ tackle etc. required for
handling of goods at Port of Entry/ Bidders despatch point in India, as applicable and at
all intermediate stations/ points up to Project Site and also for unloading at site, at
Bidders own cost. All demurrage, wharfage and other expenses incurred due to delayed
clearance of goods, or for any other reasons, either at Indian port of entry, or at any
clearing point, shall be to Bidders account. Bidder shall be solely responsible for making
all necessary arrangements for complying with all necessary formalities at the Indian port
of entry.
The prices shall include Indian customs duties on the goods offered from outside India
and despatched directly to site. Customs duties on such goods shall be paid directly by
the Bidder to the Indian Customs Authorities and Owner will reimburse the Custom Duty
paid by the Bidder as per provisions of this document. All customs clearance formalities,
including payment of port levies/charges are in the scope of Bidder and shall be borne by
him. Bidders shall indicate break-up of Indian Customs Duty considered and included by
them in SOP.
Construction/ Installation etc.:
Unloading of material at site, storage at site, handling, transportation to store and from
store to work site, , assembly at site, erection, hook up with existing equipment/system
testing, pre-commissioning, painting, insulation, commissioning, performance guarantee
test run etc. as specified in the Bidding Documents.
However, prices of materials for Civil, Structural and General civil, Architectural, Painting
works and all consumables for testing, Pre-commissioning, commissioning & PGTR shall
be included in prices for Construction/ Installation quoted in FORM SP-3.
Foreign Bidders:
3.12.2
I)
Design and Detailed Engineering services (FORM SP-1):

Lump sum price shall include all costs related to Design and Detailed Engineering
services as per the requirement of Bidding Document.
II) Supply of Finished Goods (FORM SP-2):

New Delhi
Page 38 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
Manufacture, procurement, testing and supply price of all goods on CFR Basis i.e. FOB
(International port of exit) plus firm ocean freight charges shall be quoted by the Foreign
Bidder for transportation through sea up-to Port of Entry in India. In case a foreign
Bidder proposes to supply certain goods from India, the prices for such goods shall be
quoted on ex-factory value of indigenous materials.
Prices of materials for Civil, Structural, and General civil, Architectural, Painting,
Insulation, Acid/Alkali, Fire proofing works and lubricants/chemicals / consumables shall
III) Port & Customs Clearance and Inland Transportation:
The prices shall include Indian import duties on the goods offered from outside India and
despatched directly to site. Import duties on such goods shall be paid directly by the
Bidder to the Indian Customs Authorities and Owner will reimburse the Custom Duty paid
by the Bidder as per provisions of this document. All customs clearance formalities,
including payment of port levies/charges are in the scope of Bidder and shall be borne by
him. Bidder shall indicate break-up of Indian custom duty considered and included by
them in SOP.
All demurrage, wharfage and other expenses incurred due to delayed clearance of goods,
or for any other reasons, either at Indian port of entry, or at any clearing point, shall be to
Bidders account. Bidder shall be solely responsible for making all necessary
arrangements for complying with all necessary formalities at the Indian port of entry.
Transportation charges of all goods from Port of Entry port and / or from any other place /
works in India up to Project Site(s) including port & customs clearance, handling,
forwarding, loading on to trucks etc. shall be included in quoted Price.
The transportation price shall also include provision of all handling equipment including
cranes, tools/ tackle etc. required for handling of goods at Port of Entry/ Bidders
despatch point in India, as applicable and at all intermediate stations/ points up to Project
Sites and also for unloading at site(s), at Bidders own cost.
IV) Site work:
Unloading of material at site, storage at site, handling, transportation to store and from
store to work site, , assembly at site, erection, hook up with existing equipment/system
testing, pre-commissioning, painting, insulation, commissioning, performance guarantee
test run, training etc. as specified in the Material requisition & RFQ documents.
Prices of materials for Civil, Structural, and General civil, Architectural, Painting,
Insulation, Acid/Alkali, Fire proofing works and lubricants/chemicals / consumables shall
3.13
Indian Bidders shall indicate the following in their offer:
3.13.1
Bidders quoted prices shall be inclusive of all taxes, duties and levies etc. as applicable
on the goods and services / works under the Contract till complete execution of the
Order/Contract, all insurance such as transit, storage cum erection etc. and Owner shall
not have any liability whatsoever on this account, except for statutory variation in taxes,
duties and levies etc. specified elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
3.13.2
Indian Bidders quoted prices shall take into consideration CENVAT benefits available to
indigenous manufacturers/ suppliers on account of Excise Duty on inputs and CVD and
Additional Import Duty (AID) paid by the vendor on in-built import components.
3.13.3
The bidder shall also indicate the following separately:

a. Details of Indian customs duties included in quoted price of the goods offered from
outside India and despatched directly to site.
b. Details of Excise Duty & CST/VAT on the finished goods, Entry Tax, Service Tax,
New Delhi
Page 39 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
Sawchh Bharat Cess and Krishi Kalyan Cess (rates and amount) included in quoted
price.
3.13.4
EIL shall provide all requisite inspection services for all indigenous equipment / bulk
material procured for the project as part of EPCM services at no additional cost. In the
case Indian bidder sourcing materials from abroad, the inspection shall be arranged
through Third Party Inspection agency (i.e. LRIS/BV/DNV/TUV/CEIL) in the country of
origin & charges of the same shall be included in quoted prices.
3.13.5
Bidder shall furnish list of recommended spares for Two years operation and
maintenance (FORM SP-7) indicating itemwise unit price and quantity.
3.13.6
Per diem rate for Vendors participation in Hazop Study to be conducted on VPSA
Oxygen Plant at EIL, New Delhi shall also be quoted (in FORM SP-10) as per Terms &
Conditions for Vendors participation in Hazop Study enclosed with Bidding Document.
3.14
Foreign Bidders shall indicate the following in Price Schedule
3.14.1
Foreign Bidders shall quote their prices in freely convertible Foreign Currency and in
Indian Rupees only (for that component of his price, which the Vendor expects to spend
in India).
3.14.2
It must be clearly understood by Foreign Bidders that prices of such goods, if any, which
the Bidder proposes to supply from India, shall be quoted in Indian Rupees only. Further,
such component of Bidders price for services like Construction/ Installation etc. to be
performed in India, which the Bidder expects to spend in India, shall also be quoted in
Indian Rupees only. However, such part of services in India which shall be rendered by
Vendors foreign personnel only may be quoted in foreign currency. Only one order for
Complete Scope shall be placed on the Foreign Bidder, which shall explicitly define
the order values in foreign currency as well as Indian currency portion as quoted
by the bidder. Overall responsibility towards the contractual obligations like
delivery, order execution, performance guarantee etc., shall be with the Foreign
Bidder only.
3.14.3
Foreign Bidders quoted prices shall be inclusive of all taxes, duties, levies etc. including
Indian Imports Duty as applicable in India and outside India, on the goods and
services/Works under the Contract, till complete execution of the Order/Contract,
including all insurance such as Marine, Transit, Storage, Erection etc., and Owner shall
not have any liability, whatsoever, on this account except for statutory variation in taxes,
duties and levies etc. applicable in India specified elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
3.14.4
Foreign Bidders quoted prices shall also be inclusive of export licensing charges/ fee, if
any, applicable for export of goods/services to India, withholding tax and any other
charges applicable in bidders country.
3.14.5
For supplies sourced within India & directly despatched to Site, the Foreign bidder shall
quote firm price for Indian supply in Indian rupees on ex-factory value basis inclusive of
all taxes & duties payable up to Project Site.
3.14.6
The bidder shall also indicate the following separately:

a)
Details of Indian customs duties included in quoted price of the goods offered from
outside India and despatched directly to site.
b)
Details of Excise Duty & CST/VAT on the finished goods, Entry Tax, Service Tax,
Sawchh Bharat Cess and Krishi Kalyan Cess (rates and amount) included in quoted
price.
3.14.7
In case any of the foreign bidders receipt against the order is subject to tax deduction at
source in India, the Bidder to quote prices gross of Indian income tax and indicate
applicable rate of same in the offer.
3.14.8
Custom Duty applicable on construction equipment, tools and tackles imported by Seller,
for use during execution of work and for re-export after use, shall be fully borne by Seller
as applicable.

New Delhi
Page 40 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
3.14.9
Concessional rate of Custom Duty:
a.
The bidder must ascertain and confirm along with supporting documents in the bid, if any
Customs Duty exemption / waiver is applicable to the products being supplied by him
under any multi-lateral / bi-lateral trade agreement between India and bidder's country.
b.
The bidder shall be liable to provide all documentation to ensure availment of the
exemption / waiver. In case the bidder defaults on this due to any reason, whatsoever, he
shall be liable to bear the incremental Customs Duty applicable, if any.
c.
Any Customs Duty applicability on account of any change in the bi-lateral / multi-lateral
agreement shall be to bidder's account.
Documentation to be furnished for availing the exemption / waiver of Customs Duty shall
be specifically listed in the Letter of Credit also as the pre-requisite for release of
payment against shipping documents and this documentation shall necessarily form a
part of shipping documents.
d.
3.14.10
Foreign vendors shall include third party inspection charges of Third Party Inspection
agency (i.e. LRIS/BV/DNV/TUV/CEIL) in the country of origin. In the case of foreign party
sourcing items from India the inspection shall be by EIL, no additional charges shall be
payable to seller on account of the same.
3.14.11
Bidder shall furnish list of recommended spares for Two years operation and
maintenance (FORM SP-7) indicating itemwise unit price and quantity.
3.14.12
Per diem rate for Vendors participation in Hazop Study to be conducted on VPSA
Oxygen Plant at EIL, New Delhi shall also be quoted (in FORM SP-10) as per Terms &
Conditions for Vendors participation in Hazop Study enclosed with Bidding Document.
3.15
Currencies of Bid & Payment
3.15.1
For the purpose of this clause and any other relevant provisions in Bidding Document,
Foreign Currency shall mean and be limited to US Dollars / Euros / GBP/ Japanese Yen.
3.15.2
However, maximum no. of currencies of quote shall be limited to two currencies (1) Indian
Rupees and (2) Any one of the allowed Foreign Currencies mentioned above.
3.15.3
Bidders may quote prices for materials to be imported into India either in Indian Rupees
or in Foreign Currency or in a combination of Indian Rupees and a Foreign Currency.
3.15.4
Bidders shall quote the price for Indian materials, services and for expenses to be
incurred in India only in Indian Rupees.
3.15.5
Bidders may quote the prices for materials to be imported into India in Foreign Currency.
Such bidders quoting in foreign currency shall separately indicate in a list the materials to
be imported into India and the Foreign Currency price payable for such materials.
However, for evaluation purposes, the bid price shall be converted to Indian Rupees by
converting the Foreign Currency into Indian Rupees at the Bill selling rate of State Bank
of India, New Delhi prevailing on the day of opening of the price bid.
3.15.6
Currency once quoted will not be allowed to be changed.
3.15.7
Bidders who have indicated materials to be imported into India, and who have indicated
the Foreign Currency price for such materials in their bids as specified above, shall on
proof of payment be paid the Rupee equivalent of the Foreign Currency paid for the
relevant materials imported into India limited to the maximum of the Foreign Currency
indicated in the priced bid in relation to such supplies at the TT buying rate for concerned
foreign currency of the State Bank of India prevailing on the date of payment to subvendor, with the intention that the risk of fluctuations in the exchange rate between the
concerned foreign currency and the Indian Rupee to the extent indicated above shall be
borne by the OWNER. If as a result, there shall remain any unutilized foreign currency
indicated in the priced bid relevant to the formation of the Contract in relation to such
supplies, these shall be considered to be the Bidders fee for the relative procurement, as
the case may be, and shall be added to and paid for separately, in the Final Bill, in
addition to the price of services, in Indian Rupees equivalent of such unutilized foreign
currency balance(s) converted at the currency Bill Selling rate of the concerned foreign
New Delhi
Page 41 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
currency of State Bank of India prevailing on the date of price bid opening or at the TT
buying rate of the concerned foreign currency of State Bank of India prevailing on the
date of Mechanical Completion, whichever is less.
3.16
Bid Validity
3.16.1
The Bid shall remain valid for acceptance for a period of Four Months from the due date
of submission of the bid. The Bidder shall not be entitled during the said period to revoke
or cancel his bid or to vary the bid except and to the extent required by Owner/ EIL in
writing.
3.16.2
Owner/EIL may request the bidder for extension of the period of validity of bid. If the
bidder agrees to the extension request, the validity of Bank Guarantee towards EMD/Bid
Security shall also be suitably extended. Bidder may refuse the request of extension of
bid validity without forfeiting his EMD/Bid Security. However, bidders agreeing to the
request for extension of validity of bid shall not be permitted to modify the bid because of
extension, unless specifically invited to do so.
3.17
Earnest Money Deposit/Bid Security
3.17.1
Bids must be accompanied with the Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) for an amount
indicated in LIB/IFB. EMD shall be submitted in form of Crossed Demand Draft in favour
of M/s BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED payable at Bina, Dist. Sagar, Madhya
Pradesh, India or Bank Guarantee in the prescribed Pro-forma (provided in GCC) from
any Indian scheduled bank; or from any Indian branch of an international bank.
3.17.2
Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) shall be valid for a period of 6 (Six) months from the final
due date of opening of Techno-commercial Bids.
3.17.3
Bidder should upload the scanned copy of Earnest money deposit (EMD) in E-Tendering
website. The original EMD should be submitted in a sealed envelope titled Earnest
Money Deposit against Bidding Document No. AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006 at
address mentioned at Sl. No. 3.6.7 above, on the last date of bid submission. However,
in case of non-submission an additional seven days shall be provided for submission of
original hard copy. Bidders to ensure that the original hard copy of EMD (in the
prescribed format) sent should match with the details available in the scanned copy,
otherwise the uploaded bid will be summarily rejected. EMD shall be submitted within 07
days of last date bid submission. In case the Bidder fails to submit the same in original
within 7 days, his bid shall be rejected, irrespective of their status / ranking in tender and
notwithstanding the fact that a copy of EMD was earlier uploaded by the Bidder.
3.17.4
The bid security shall be forfeited:

(a) if a bidder withdraws its bid during the period of bid validity, or any extension thereto
provided by the bidder; or submits multiple bids/alternative bids in accordance with
Clause 5.0 of ITB; or
(b) on his own modifies his bid during the period of bid validity; or
(c) if the successful bidder fails to:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
sign the Contract in accordance with Clause 7.3 of ITB; and/or

furnish a Contract performance Bank Guarantee in accordance with Clause 8.0 of
ITB.
to accept arithmetical corrections pursuant to Clause 6.5.3, 6.5.4 & 6.5.5 of ITB.
(d) If the Information/ documents forming basis of evaluation submitted by the bidder in
the bid is found to be false/ forged in accordance with relevant provisions provided in
Bidding Document.
3.17.5
Owner/ EIL may at any time cancel or withdraw the enquiry without assigning any reason
and in such cases the earnest money submitted by Bidder will be returned.
3.17.6
After acceptance of order by successful Bidder, Owner/ EIL will return the Earnest Money
Deposit to all unsuccessful bidders.
New Delhi
Page 42 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
3.17.7
Earnest Money Deposit shall be returned to the successful Bidder after he has furnished
the Security Deposit to Owner.
4.0
SUBMISSION OF BID
4.1
For submission of Bid, please refer instructions to bidders for e-tendering enclosed as
Annexure-I to this ITB. Due date and time for submission of bids have been mentioned in
the Letter Inviting Bid (LIB)/ Notice inviting Bid (NIB).
4.2
For documents comprising the Bid, please refer Clause No. 3.6 above.
5.0
ALTERNATIVE BIDS
5.1
A bidder (i.e., the bidding entity) shall, on no account submit more than one bid either
directly (as a single bidder or as a member of consortium) or indirectly (as a subcontractor) failing which following actions shall be initiated:
i)
All bids submitted by such bidder (say A) directly & indirectly, shall stand rejected
and BID SECURITY, if any, in case of direct bid submitted by bidder A shall be
forfeited.
ii)
If another bidder (say B) has proposed bidder A as a sub-contractor then bidder

Bs bid shall also be rejected. However, in case the bidder B has also proposed an
alternative sub-contractor who is other than the bidder A, then bidder Bs bid shall
be evaluated with the proposed alternative sub-contractor only. Hence, every bidder
shall ensure in his own interest that his proposed sub-contractor is not submitting
alternative/ multiple bids.
6.0
BID OPENING AND EVALUATION
6.1
Opening of Techno-Commercial Part of Bid
6.1.1
Techno-Commercial (Un-priced) Part (Part-I) and EMD (Part-III) will be opened on the
scheduled date and time. In the event the specified date of bid opening being
declared/happen to be a holiday for EIL, the bid shall be opened by the appointed time
and location on the next working day.
6.1.2
Bidders can witness bid opening by logging on to the E-Tendering Portal through their
system using their valid digital signature/certificate.
6.2
Clarification & Additional Information
6.2.1
Bidder should submit all the details called for along with their bid. However, Owner/EIL
may give opportunity to the bidders to submit missing details or clarifications within
certain stipulated time. Offer of bidder will be evaluated based on available details within
such stipulated time.
6.2.2
During evaluation, Owner/EIL may request Bidder for any clarification on the Bid,
additional or outstanding documents. Bidder shall submit all additional documents in
Original and 1 copy.
6.3
Bid Evaluation Criteria
6.3.1
Prior to detailed bid evaluation, the EIL/OWNER will determine the substantial
responsiveness of each bid with respect to the Bidding Documents. EIL/BORLs
determination of a bids responsiveness is to be based on the contents of the bid itself, as
defined in Clause 3.6 of ITB.
6.3.2
A substantially responsive bid is one, which conforms to the terms, conditions and
specification of the Bidding Documents (including Technical and Commercial
Amendments, if any) without any deviation. Bidder shall submit duly signed stamped
Total Compliance statement/ Letter of waiver of conditions/ deviations.
6.3.3
All documents furnished by the bidder in support of meeting the Bidders Qualification
Criteria shall be duly certified and authenticated as mentioned in NIB.
6.3.4
The recommendation for price opening shall be formulated after taking into account the

New Delhi
Page 43 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
following aspects:
a)
Bidders Qualification Criteria as per requirements given in NIB
b)
Technical acceptability of the Bids.
c)
Holiday Status of the bidders as decided by EIL/BORL/BPCL database
d)
Commercial acceptability of bids based on Compliance to requirement of

Bidding Document as per Clause Nos. 6.3.1, 6.3.2 & 6.3.3 above.
6.4
Opening of Price Part of Bid
6.4.1
Priced commercial part of only those bidders, whose bids are considered technocommercially acceptable, shall be opened. Bidders can witness bid opening details by
logging on to the E-Tendering Portal through their system.
6.5
Evaluation of Price Bids
6.5.1
The Total Lumpsum Price quoted by the bidder in FORM SP-0 as per the Schedule of
Prices (SOP) shall be considered for evaluation and determining L1 Bidder, subject to
provisions as mentioned below.
6.5.2
The bidder shall fill the Schedule of Lumpsum Prices both in figures as well as in words in
the SOP forming part of the Bidding Documents, in such a way that interpolation is not
possible. The tendered amount for the work shall be entered in the SOP and duly signed
by the bidder.
6.5.3
When there is a difference between the prices in figures and words, the price in words
shall prevail.
6.5.4
In case of any contradiction between the Total Lumpsum Price(s) in FORM SP-0 or Lump
sum price(s) in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3 or total of break-up prices indicated in FORM
SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6, the Lump sum Prices quoted shall prevail in following order:
(1) Total Lump sum Prices quoted in FORM SP-0
(2) Lump sum Prices quoted in FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3
(3) Total Prices quoted in FORM SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6.
6.5.5
Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0 shall govern in case of contradiction and
further break-up of prices shall be corrected accordingly.
6.5.6
To arrive at the evaluated prices, loading / adjustment on Total Lumpsum Price, wherever
applicable, shall be done as per following:
6.5.7
i)
Price Adjustment (Reduction) on account of Cenvatable Excise Duty amount as

quoted by Bidder in FORM SP-8.
ii)
Price Adjustment (Reduction) on account of MP VAT amount eligible for Input

Tax credit as quoted by the Bidder in FORM SP-8.
iii)
Price Adjustment (Reduction) on account of Cenvatable Service Tax amount as

quoted by the Bidder in FORM SP-8.
iv)
Price Adjustment (Reduction) on account of Cenvatable CVD & Cenvatable

SAD/AID as quoted by Bidder in FORM SP-8.
v)
Price Adjustment (Reduction) on account of Krishi Kalyan Cess amount as

quoted by the Bidder in FORM SP-8.
vi)
Loading on account of differential operating cost of plant as per Doc. No. A702029-82-41-LP-4070 attached in Technical volume of Bidding Document.
vii)
Loading on account of quoted per diem rate for bidders participation in HAZOP
Study for total 4 (four) Mandays
viii)
Any other loading specified elsewhere in the Bidding Document.
Conditional discount, if offered, shall not be considered for evaluation.

New Delhi
Page 44 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
6.5.8
While arriving at the final evaluated prices of all the Bidders, any suo-moto /lump sum
percentage or adhoc reduction by the Bidders after submission of the priced bid shall not
be considered for evaluation. However, if such bidder happens to be lowest after
evaluation, such rebate shall be taken into account for award of work.
6.5.9
Any suo-moto /lump sum percentage or adhoc increase by the Bidders after submission
of the priced bid shall result in rejection of Bid.
6.5.10
If for any of Taxes & Duties mentioned above the bidder has quoted rates at variance to
the rates specified in the Statute/Rules, the correct rate as per the prevailing
Statute/Rules shall be taken for evaluation.
The Ceiling amount on which such tax/ duty is applicable as quoted by the bidder in the
Form SP-8 of Schedule of Prices shall be taken for evaluation.
6.5.11
Prices quoted for recommended spares for two years operation and maintenance shall
not be considered for evaluation.
6.6
Bid Evaluation Process to be Confidential
6.6.1
Information related to the examination, clarification, evaluation and comparison of bids

and recommendations for award of contract shall not be disclosed to Bidder or other
person not officially concerned with such process. Any effort by Bidder to influence
Owner's/ EIL's processing of bidding or award decisions may result in rejection of such
Bidder's bid.
6.7
Owners Right to accept or Reject a Bid
6.7.1
Owner reserves the right to accept a bid other than the lowest and to accept or reject any
bid in whole or part, to annul the bidding process or to reject all bids with or without notice
or reasons. Such decisions by Owner shall bear no liability whatsoever consequent upon
such decisions.
7.0
NEGOTIATION AND AWARD OF WORK
7.1
Negotiation
7.1.1
In the opinion of Owner, if the total price or certain item rates quoted by the Lowest
Bidder are considered high, Owner may invite the Lowest Bidder for price negotiation.
Lowest Bidder shall attend such negotiation meetings and if requested by Owner, bidder
shall provide the analysis of rates/ break-up of amount quoted by him for any or all items
of Schedule of Prices/ Rates to demonstrate the reasonability.
7.2
Award of Work
7.2.1
Evaluation of Bids and finalisation of Contract/Award of Work shall be on overall Lowest

Evaluated Price Bid (L1) basis after Commercial & Technical Loading, as applicable.
7.2.2
The Bidder, whose bid is accepted by Owner, shall be issued Letter of Acceptance (LOA)
prior to expiry of bid validity. Bidder shall confirm acceptance by returning a signed copy
of the LOA.
7.2.3
Owner/ EIL shall not be obliged to furnish any information/ clarification/explanation to the
unsuccessful bidders as regards non-acceptance of their bids. Except for refund of EMD
to unsuccessful bidders, Owner/ EIL shall correspond only with the successful bidder(s).
7.3
Contract Document
7.3.1
The successful Bidder shall be required to execute a formal Agreement as per the Form
of Contract, with Owner within the specified period. For execution of the Agreement, the
successful bidder shall provide Stamp Paper of appropriate value. The cost of non-judicial
stamp paper shall be borne by the Contractor.
7.3.2
The Contract document shall consist of the following:

i)
Agreement (Form of Contract) signed on non-judicial stamp paper by Owner and

Contractor.
ii)
Letter of Acceptance
New Delhi
Page 45 of 1744
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
iii)
Detailed Letter of Award along with enclosures.
iv)
Bidding Document.
v)
Amendments to Bidding Document, if any.
vi)
Any other documents as deemed necessary.
8.0
CONTRACT PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
8.1
Within 30 (Thirty) days from the date of Notification of Award of works by the OWNER,
the successful bidder shall furnish a Contract Performance Guarantee in line with Clause
No. 3.5 of GCC.
9.0
FRAUDULENT PRACTICES
9.1
The OWNER requires that Bidder/Vendor/ Contractor observe the highest standard of
ethics during the award/execution of Contract. Fraudulent Practice means a
misrepresentation of facts in order to influence the award of a Contract to the detriment of
the OWNER, and includes collusive practice among bidders ( prior to or after bid
submission) designed to establish bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels and to
deprive the OWNER of the benefits of free and open competition.
9.2
The OWNER will reject a bid for award if it determines that the bidder recommended for
award has engaged in fraudulent practices in competing for the Contract in question.
Bidder is required to furnish the complete and correct information/ documents required for
evaluation of their bids, if the information/ documents forming basis of evaluation is found
to be false/ forged, the same shall be considered adequate ground for rejection of bids
and forfeiture of Earnest Money Deposit.
9.3
In case, the information/ document furnished by the Bidder/vendor/Contractor forming

basis of evaluation of his bid is found to be false/ forged after the award of the contract,
OWNER shall have full right to terminate the contract and get the remaining job executed
at the risk & cost of such Bidder/Vendor/ Contractor without any prejudice to other rights
available to OWNER under the contract such as forfeiture of CPBG/Security Deposit,
withholding of payment etc.
9.4
In case, this issue of submission of false document comes to the notice after execution of
work, OWNER shall have full right to forfeit any amount due to the
Bidder/Vendor/Contractor along with forfeiture of CPBG/Security Deposit furnished by the
Bidder/Vendor/Contractor.
9.5
Further, such Bidder/Vendor/ Contractor shall be put on Blacklist /Holiday/ Negative List
of OWNER debarring them from future business with OWNER and EIL for a time period,
as per the prevailing policy of OWNER and EIL.

New Delhi
Page 46 of 1744
Annexure 1 to ITB
E-TENDERING METHODOLOGY
Instructions for Online Bid Submission:
The bidders are required to submit soft copies of their bids electronically on the CPP Portal (URL:
http://eprocure.gov.in) only, using valid Digital Signature Certificates. The instructions given below are
meant to assist the bidders in registering on the CPP Portal, prepare their bids in accordance with the
requirements and submitting their bids online on the CPP Portal.
More detailed information useful for submitting online bids on the CPP Portal may be obtained at:
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app .
REGISTRATION
1) Bidders are required to enroll on the e-Procurement module of the Central Public
Procurement Portal (URL: https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app) by clicking on the link Click
here to Enroll on the CPP Portal is free of charge.
2) As part of the enrolment process, the bidders will be required to choose a unique username
and assign a password for their accounts.
3) Bidders are advised to register their valid email address and mobile numbers as part of the
registration process and submit in EIL tender portal for updation of records
(http://tenders.eil.co.in) . These details would be used for any communication from the CPP
Portal.
4) Upon enrolment, the bidders will be required to register their valid Digital Signature
Certificate (DSC) (Class II or Class III Certificates with signing key usage) issued by any
Certifying Authority recognized by CCA India (e.g. Sify / TCS / nCode / eMudhra etc.), with
their profile.
5) Foreign Bidders have to refer DSC details for foreign Bidders for Digital signature
Certificates
requirements
which
comes
under
Download
Tab
at
https://eprocure.gov.in/eprocure/app and the remaining part is same as above and below.
6) Only one valid DSC should be registered by a bidder. Please note that the bidders are
responsible to ensure that they do not lend their DSCs to others which may lead to misuse.
7) Bidder then logs in to the site through the secured log-in by entering their user ID / password
and the password of the DSC / e-Token.
SEARCHING FOR TENDER DOCUMENTS
1) There are various search options built in the CPP Portal, to facilitate bidders to search active
tenders by several parameters. These parameters could include Tender ID, organization
name, location, date, value, etc. There is also an option of advanced search for tenders,
wherein the bidders may combine a number of search parameters such as organization
name, form of contract, location, date, other keywords etc. to search for a tender published
on the CPP Portal.
2) Once the bidders have selected the tenders they are interested in, the same can be moved
to the respective My Tenders folder. This would enable the CPP Portal to intimate the
bidders through SMS / e-mail in case there is any corrigendum issued to the tender
document.
Dated02062014
Page1
Page 47 of 1744
3) The bidder should make a note of the unique Tender ID assigned to each tender, in case
they want to obtain any clarification / help from the Helpdesk.
PREPARATION OF BIDS
1) Bidder should take into account any corrigendum published on the tender document before
submitting their bids.
2) Please go through the tender advertisement and the tender document carefully to
understand the documents required to be submitted as part of the bid. Please note the
number of covers in which the bid documents have to be submitted, the number of
documents - including the names and content of each of the document that need to be
submitted. Any deviations from these may lead to rejection of the bid.
3) Bidder, in advance, should get ready the bid documents to be submitted as indicated in the
tender document and generally, they can be in PDF / XLS / RAR / DWF formats. Bid
documents may be scanned with 100 dpi with black and white option. However, Price
Schedule / SOR shall be strictly in RAR format without altering any contents of the
formats uploaded by EIL in their Bidding Document.
4) To avoid the time and effort required in uploading the same set of standard documents which
are required to be submitted as a part of every bid, a provision of uploading such standard
documents (e.g. PAN card copy, annual reports, auditor certificates etc.) has been provided
to the bidders. Bidders can use My Space area available to them to upload such
documents. These documents may be directly submitted from the My Space area while
submitting a bid, and need not be uploaded again and again. This will lead to a reduction in
the time required for bid submission process.
SUBMISSION OF BIDS
1) Bidder should log into the site well in advance for bid submission so that he/she upload the
bid in time i.e. on or before the bid submission time. Bidder will be responsible for any delay
due to other issues.
2) The bidder has to digitally sign and upload the required bid documents one by one as
indicated in the tender document.
3) Bidder has to select the payment option as offline to pay the tender fee / EMD as
applicable and enter details of the instrument.
4) Bidder should prepare the EMD as per the instructions specified in the tender document. The
original should be posted/couriered/given in person to the Tender Processing Section, with
in 7 calendar days of the date of Unpriced bid opening. The details of the DD/any other
accepted instrument, physically sent, should tally with the details available in the scanned
copy and the data entered during bid submission time. Otherwise the uploaded bid will be
rejected.
5) A Price Bid format has been provided with the tender document to be filled by all the bidders.
Bidders are requested to note that they should necessarily submit their financial bids in the
format provided and no other format is acceptable. Bidders are required to download the
Price Bid file, open it and complete the cells with their respective financial quotes and other
details (such as name of the bidder). No other cells should be changed. Once the details
have been completed, the bidder should save it and submit it online, without changing the
filename. If the Price Bid file is found to be modified by the bidder, the bid will be rejected.
Dated02062014
Page2
Page 48 of 1744
6) The server time (which is displayed on the bidders dashboard) will be considered as the
standard time for referencing the deadlines for submission of the bids by the bidders,
opening of bids etc. The bidders should follow this time during bid submission.
7) All the documents being submitted by the bidders would be encrypted using PKI encryption
techniques to ensure the secrecy of the data. The data entered cannot be viewed by
unauthorized persons until the time of bid opening. The confidentiality of the bids is
maintained using the secured Socket Layer 128 bit encryption technology. Data storage
encryption of sensitive fields is done.
8) The uploaded tender documents become readable only after the tender opening by the
authorized bid openers.
9) Upon the successful and timely submission of bids, the portal will give a successful bid
submission message & a bid summary will be displayed with the bid no. and the date & time
of submission of the bid with all other relevant details.
10) The bid summary has to be printed and kept as an acknowledgement of the submission of
the bid. This acknowledgement may be used as an entry pass for any bid opening meetings.
RETENDER
1) Please note that if Tender has been retendered, than it is mandatory for the bidder to
submit their offer again on CPP Portal.
ASSISTANCE TO BIDDERS
1) Any queries relating to the tender document and the terms and conditions contained therein
should be addressed to the Tender Inviting Authority for a tender or the relevant contact
person indicated in the tender.
2) Any queries relating to the process of online bid submission or queries relating to CPP Portal
in general may be directed to the 24x7 CPP Portal Helpdesk. The contact number for the
helpdesk is 1800 3070 2232.
Dated02062014
Page3
Page 49 of 1744
REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROPOSAL FORMS

New Delhi
Page 50 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. FORM OF BID ........................................................................................................ 3
II. INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER ......................................................................... 4
III. DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER ............................................................................ 5
IV. DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT ........................ 6
V. DETAILED EXECUTION PHILOSPHY PROPOSED FOR JOB UNDER
CONSIDERATION ................................................................................................ 9
VI. DETAILS OF PROPOSED ORGANISATION ...................................................... 10
VII. BIO-DATA OF KEY PERSONS HANDLING THIS JOB ....................................... 11
VIII. DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL ........................ 12
IX. COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE .......................................................................... 18
X. FORMAT OF LETTER OF WAIVER OF CONDITIONS / DEVIATIONS ..................... 23
XI. DETAILS OF P.F. / E.S.I/SERVICE TAX /SALES TAX REGISTRATION/ PAN .......... 24
XII. BANK MANDATE FORM ........................................................................................ 25
XIII. CHECK LIST (COMMERCIAL). ................................................................... 26
XIV. FOR BIDDERS PRE-BID QUERIES ....................................................................... 30

New Delhi
Page 51 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
FORM-A
Serial No.
To
FORM OF BID
(To be filled by the Bidder)
Date:

BORL Res. Complex,
Bina District: Sagar 470124
Dear Sirs,
Having examined the Bid Documents consisting of the Letter Inviting Bid, Special
Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract,
Specifications, Technical requirements, Time Schedule, Form of Agreement, Form of Bid,
Form of Price Schedule and Addendum(s) to the Bid Documents (if any), and having
understood the provisions of the said Bid Documents and having thoroughly studied the
requirements of Bharat Oman Refineries Limited relative to the work bid for in connection
with the ---------------------------- (Name of Work) for REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED (BORL) AT
BINA REFINERY and having conducted a thorough study of the job site(s) involved, the
site conditions, soil conditions, the climatic conditions, labour, power, water, material and
equipment availability, the transport and communication facilities, the availability and
suitability of Site Fabrication Areas, the availability of land and/or premises for temporary
office and accommodation quarters and all other factors and facilities and things
whatsoever necessary or relevant to the formulation of the Bid and the performance of
work, I/we hereby submit our bid/offer for the performance of the proposed services and
supplies in accordance with the terms and conditions and within the time mentioned in the
Bid Documents at the rates/prices quoted by me/us in Schedule of Rates/Price included
within the Bid Documents and arrived at rates/prices for the services and supplies as per
the Schedule of Rates/Price. If the work is awarded to me/us, I/we undertake to perform
the work and make the supplies in accordance with the Contract Documents as defined in
the Form of Agreement forming part of the bid documents and accept the terms and
conditions of Contract as laid down therein and undertake to submit within 30 (Thirty) days
of receipt of Notification of award of Bid for security deposit as specified in the Fax of
Acceptance of bid by way of Bank Guarantee from schedule 'A' Bank in India and to
commence work at the job site and to sign the formal Contract in terms of the Proforma of
Agreement forming part of Bid Documents within 15 (Fifteen) days of receipt of the
Detailed Letter of Acceptance from BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED
I/ We further undertake to keep my/our Bid/offer open for a period as mentioned in
Instructions to Bidders from the date of opening of bids.
Yours faithfully,
(Signature(s) of the Bidders(s))
Name & Designation of authorised person signing the Bid on behalf of the Bidder(s)
Full Name and address of the Bidder(s).
New Delhi
Page 52 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
FORM-B
INFORMATION ABOUT BIDDER
1
IN CASE OF INDIVIDUAL
1.1
Name of Business.
1.2
Whether his business is registered.
1.3
Date of commencement of business.
1.4
Whether he pays
Rs.10,000/- per year.
2.0
IN CASE OF PARTNERSHIP
2.1
Name of Partners
2.2
Whether the partnership is registered.
2.3
Date of registration of firm.
2.4
If each of the partners of the firm pays

income tax over Rs.10, 000/- a year and if so
which of them pays the same.
2.5
Age of Partners
3.
IN CASE OF LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

OR COMPANY LIMITED BY GUARANTEES
3.1
Amount of paid up capital
3.2
Name of Directors
3.3
Date of Registration of Company
3.4
Copies of the Balance sheet of the company

for the last 3 years.
4.
GENERAL
4.1
Income Tax PAN No. of the firm.
4.2
Provident Fund Registration No. of the firm.
4.3
Sales Tax Registration No. of the firm.
Income
Tax
over

New Delhi
Page 53 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER
FORMC
We _______________________ (Name of the Bidder) hereby represent that we have gone through and understood the Bidding Documents
(including but not limited to) the Commercial & Technical Requirements/ Specifications and that our Bid has been prepared accordingly in
compliance with the requirements stipulated in the said documents.
We are submitting the Table of Contents of Bidding Documents and amendments, if any, as part of our Bid duly signed and stamped on each
page in token of our acceptance. We are submitting the total Bidding Document as part of our Bid & undertake that all parts of the Bidding
Documents shall be deemed to form part of our bid and in the event of award of work to us, all the parts shall be considered for
constitution of Contract Agreement. Further, we shall sign and stamp each page of these documents as a token of Acceptance and as a part
of the Contract in the event of award of Contract to us.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
: ____________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
: ____________________________
COMPANY SEAL
: ___________________________________
NOTE:
This declaration should be signed by the Bidders representative who is signing the Bid.

New Delhi
Page 54 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
FORM-D
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE
CAPA-CITY
CRANES
1.1
(BIDDER TO SPECIFY)
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.9
2
DIESEL GENERATORS
2.1
(BIDDER TO SPECIFY)
2.2
2.3
3
COMPRESSORS
3.1
(BIDDER TO SPECIFY)
3.2
4
WELDING M/CS
4.1
DIESEL WELDING M/C

New Delhi
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOTAL
Page 55 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE
CAPA-CITY
4.2
DIESEL GENERATOR
4.3
WELDING
TRANS
FORMERS/REC-TIFIERS
4.4
TIG WELDING M/CS
GRIT BLASTING M/CS
SPRAY PAINTING M/CS
STRESS RELIEVING M/CS
RADIOGRAPHYM/CS
TEST PUMP
10
WATER PUMP
11
TRANSPORTATION EQPT
11.1
TRACTOR -TRAILOR
11.2
TRUCKS
11.3
BUS
12
JACKS
12.1
MECHANICAL
12.2
HYDRAULIC
13
CIVIL
13.1
EXCAVATORS
13.2
DUMPERS

New Delhi
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOTAL
Page 56 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
NO.
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE
CAPA-CITY
DESCRIPTION
13.3
BATCHING PLANT
13.4
CONCRETE PUMP CAR
13.5
TRANSIT MIXER
13.6
MIXER
13.7
VIBRATORS
13.8
COMPACTORS
13.9
THEODOLITES
14.0
OTHERS
14.1
INSULATION
EQUIPMENT
14.2
SECONDARY
TESTING KIT
14.3
METERS,
TOOLS
TACKLES ETC.
14.4
CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT
14.5
OTHER TOOLS & TACKLES
14.6
MULTI
METERS
CALIBERATORS ETC.
TESTING
INJECTION
&
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
_______________________
NAME OF BIDDER
_______________________
New Delhi
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
TOTAL
Page 57 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
FORM-E
NAME OF WORK
: VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
DETAILED EXECUTION PHILOSPHY PROPOSED FOR JOB UNDER CONSIDERATION
S. NO.
WHETHER TO BE CARRIED OUT

IN-HOUSE / OUTSOURCING WITH NAME
OF PROPOSED SUB-CONTRACTOR
DESCRIPTION
2.
RESIDUAL DESIGN /DETAILED

ENGG.
PLANNING
3.
PROCUREMENT
4.
EXPEDITING
5.
INSPECTION
6.
CONSTRUCTION
7.
TESTING,PRECPMMISSIONING,COMMISSIONING ASSISTANCE
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.
8.
NOTE:
(i)
Bidder to give a detailed write-up on all above activities chapter wise and will be
evaluated by OWNER/EIL.
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)

DATE:

New Delhi
Page 58 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
FORM-F
NAME OF WORK
: VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
DETAILS OF PROPOSED ORGANISATION

The Bidder shall submit herein details of Head Office and Project/Site Organisation
proposed to be deployed for execution of the work. Bidder shall also furnish the bio-data of
Site-in-Charge and key personnel to be deployed meeting the minimum criteria specified in
SCC.
Bidder understand that the said proposal represents the minimum deployment and the
Bidder acknowledges that the said deployment may have to be augmented with additional
number and/or categories, if required if directed by Engineer-in-Charge in order to compete
the work within the completion schedule and quoted lumpsum price.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
________________________

New Delhi
Page 59 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
FORM-F1
BIO-DATA OF KEY PERSONS HANDLING THIS JOB
(DESIGN, PROCUREMENT, PROJECT MANAGEMENT, QUALITY, SITE SUPERVISION)
NAME
DESIGNATION
TECHNICAL QUALIFICATION
KNOWLEDGE OF CODES/STANDARDS
LIST OF SIMILAR JOBS EXECUTED
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF RESPONSIBILITY
ROLE IN PREVIOUS ASSIGNMENTS
Bidders Name:
_________________________________________
Name and Designation of Signatory:

Signature with Date:
_________________________
____________________________________
(Note: Attach separate sheet for each person)

New Delhi
Page 60 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
FORM-G
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE OF SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.1
PROJECT MANAGER
1.2
PLANNING MANAGER
1.3
PLANNING ENGINEERS
RESIDUAL DESIGN AND

DETAILED ENGINEERING
2.1
PROJECT ENGINEERING
MANAGER
2.2
ENGINEERING
COORDINATOR
2.3
ENGG. PERSONNEL FOR

VARIOUS DISCIPLINE
2.3.1
CIVIL STRUCTURAL
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.2
PRESSURE VESSELS
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.3
MECHANICAL
EQPT/ROTARY EQPT.
(i)
ENGINEERS
DEPLOYMENT SCHEDULE (MONTH-WISE)

1
10
11
12

New Delhi
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 61 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
2.3.4
PIPING
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.5
ELECTRICAL
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.6
INSTRUMENTATION
(i)
ENGINEERS
2.3.7
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCUREMENT
3.1
PURCHASE
3.1.1
PURCHASE MANAGER
3.1.2
PURCHASE
COORDINATOR
3.1.3
PURCHASE OFFICER
3.2
INSPECTION
3.2.1
INSPECTION MANAGER
3.2.2
INSPECTORS
3.3
EXPEDITING
3.3.1
EXPEDITING
COORDINATOR
3.3.2
EXPEDITORS

1
10
11
12

New Delhi
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 62 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
3.4
CUSTOM CLEARANCE,
IMPORT LICENCE
TRANSPORTATION
PERSONNEL
SITE CONSTRUCTION
4.1
PROJECT MANAGER
4.2
CONSTRUCTION
MANAGER
4.3
CIVIL STRUCTURAL
4.3.I
LEAD ENGINEER
4.3.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.3.3
SUPERVISORS
4.4
MECHANICAL WORKS
4.4.I
LEAD ENGINEER
4.4.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.4.3
SUPERVISORS
4.5
PIPING WORK
4.5.1
LEAD ENGINEER
4.5.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.5.3
SUPERVISORS
4.6
ELECTRICAL WORK

1
10
11
12

New Delhi
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 63 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
4.6.1
LEAD ENGINEER
4.6.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.6.3
SUPERVISORS
4.7
INSTRUMENTATION
WORK
4.7.1
LEAD ENGINEER
4.7.2
SITE ENGINEER
4.7.3
SUPERVISORS
4.8
QUALITY
ASSURANCE/QUALITY
CONTROL
4.8.1
QC/QA MANAGER
4.8.2
INSPECTOR (CIVIL)
4.8.3
INSPECTOR (PIPING)
4.8.4
INSPECTOR (MECH
EQPT)
4.9
SAFETY ENGINEER
4.10
SITE ENGINEERING
WORKS
4.10.1
ENGINEERS
4.10.2
SUPERVISORS
4.11
COMPUTER ENGINEER

1
10
11
12

New Delhi
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
Page 64 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
4.12
ADMINISTRATION
MANAGER
4.13
MISCELLANEOUS
4.14
WAREHOUSE
PERSONNEL
4.15
MATERIAL MANAGER
4.16
COMMISSIONING
i)
COMMISSIONING
COORDINATOR
ii)
COMM. ENGINEER
(SHIFT- IN-CHARGE)
iii)
CONTROL ROOM
COORDINATOR
iv)
FIELD SUPERVISOR
v)
TECHNICIAN

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
_____________________________________
(STAMP & SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

New Delhi
Page 65 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
FORM-H
COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE
Page 17 of 30
Page 66 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE
Bidders reply/ confirmation as furnished in the Commercial Questionnaire (CQ) shall supersede the
stipulations mentioned elsewhere in their bid.
SL.
No.
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
EILs QUERY
1.
Please confirm that Master Index Document along

with Amendment, if any, duly signed and stamped
on each page has been submitted along with the
Bid.
2.
Confirm that your Bid is valid for 4 (Four) months

from the last date of submission of Bid.
3.
Confirm that Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) as per

bid stipulations have been furnished along with
bid.
4.
Confirm that the following

submitted with Part-I:
documents
are
a) All documents as per CHECK LIST.

b) Master Index as enclosed with Bidding Document
is submitted in unpriced part duly signed and
stamped on each page.
c)
Compliance for Addendum/ Amendments as a

token of acceptance (Applicable, if issued).
d) Confirm that price has been submitted/uploaded

in a separate folder provided in the E-Tender
Portal.
5.
Schedule of Price
a)
Price must be filled in the SOR/SOP provided

along with the Bidding Document. Please note
that the format is not to be edited by the bidder.
b)
Confirm that rate/ price has been quoted for all

items of SOR/SOP.
c)
Confirm that deviation/terms & conditions are not

mentioned in the price part. In case any terms
and condition is mentioned in the price part, the
same shall be treated as null and void.
6.
Confirm your compliance to critical stipulations of

bidding document as mentioned in ITB.
7.
Confirm that you have studied complete Bidding

Document including Technical and Commercial
Parts and your Bid is in accordance with the
requirements of the Bidding Document.
8.
Confirm your compliance to total scope of work

mentioned in the Bidding Document.
9.
Confirm your acceptance for 'SCOPE OF SUPPLY'

mentioned in the Bidding Document.
Please note that scope of supply mentioned in the
Bidding Document is not limitative and except for
Page 18 of 30
Page 67 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
No.
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
EILs QUERY
the material specifically identified as that to be
issued by OWNER, CONTRACTOR's scope shall
include supply of all materials required for
completion of Work irrespective of whether such
materials are mentioned in the Bidding Document
or not.
10.
Confirm your acceptance for Time Schedule as

mentioned in Annexure-I to Special Conditions of
Contract (SCC) of the Bidding Document.
11.
Confirm that your quoted price includes following

taxes/duties, insurance etc: -
12.
i)
All type of taxes/levies as per provisions

of Bidding Document.
ii)
Insurance
as
per
Bidding Document.
provision
of
Confirm that your quoted price includes all

applicable taxes, duties, cess, levies etc. such as
Sales Tax, Excise duty, Service tax, Swachh
Bharat Cess, MPVAT for works contract,
withholding tax, royalty, design & engineering
cess (if any) and Octroi, Entry tax in the State of
Madhya Pradesh (MP) India, taxes & duties on
construction equipment / machinery / tools &
tackles, cess, education cess etc.
Bids shall be evaluated taking in to account
Cenvat Benefit available to Owner. Contractor
shall provide details of service tax registration
number, MP VAT Reg. No (TIN No) along with the
copy of Registration Certificate.
13.
Confirm that your quoted price includes all types

of insurance as per the provisions of General
Conditions of Contract and Special Conditions of
Contract.
15.
Confirm that your Bid is substantially responsive

to the requirements of the Bidding Document,
and you have not stipulated any deviation and
submitted all details as specified in the Bidding
Document.
16.
Confirm that while proposing the list of

construction equipments, you have considered
the following eqpt.:
-
Cranes of adequate capacity
Induction Pipe Bending Machine, if required
DG Sets
Compressors
Spray Painting Machines
Test pumps
Adequate nos. of Welding Machines
Page 19 of 30
Page 68 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
SL.
No.
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
EILs QUERY
-
All relevant civil construction eqpts.
All Electrical eqpts.
All Instrumentation eqpts.
17.
Confirm that you have proposed adequate

project/site organisation with qualified supervisory
personnel having sufficient experience.
18.
Confirm that all costs resulting from safe

execution of Work, such as safety induction, use
of protective clothing, safety glasses and helmet,
safety precaution taken during monsoon, or any
other safety measures to be undertaken by the
CONTRACTOR for execution of Work are included
in the Lumpsum Price.
19.
Please confirm that all safety rules & regulations

as mentioned in Bidding Document or notified at
later date by OWNER during execution shall be
adhered by CONTRACTOR within Lumpsum Price.
20.
Confirm that the following safety precautions shall

be followed by CONTRACTOR as mandatory:
21.
Use of safety goggles while grinding
Use of helmet/ safety shoes
Crane movement area to be barricaded
Cylinders of flammable gases to be stacked

upright
Earthing of equipment to be made proper
Toe
boards
to
scaffolding platforms
Excavations to be properly
slopped
Safety net for construction.
be
provided
in
shored/
Confirm the following: "The planning schedule, S-curves, manpower

estimates, construction equipment deployment
schedule etc; submitted by the bidder with his
bid, are indicative and shall not be basis for extra
compensation in case actual needs are higher.
Detailed planning schedule developed by
CONTRACTOR after Contract award may be
subject to fluctuations depending upon actual
progress of the project and available Work front.
Co-ordination
and
making
available
by
CONTRACTOR
of
all
staff,
manpower,
construction equipment, tools, cranes, etc. and
materials as required for a timely completion of all
Work as per OWNER's construction and priority
schedule and in accordance with the available
Work front are to be included in the pricing".
Notwithstanding the above provision, the bidder
shall submit these details in accordance with the
Page 20 of 30
Page 69 of 1744

Job No. A702
SL.
No.
EILs QUERY
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
volume of work, which may be reviewed and

commented by us during pre-award stage/ post
award stage.
22.
Please furnish the bio data of key personnel

including nominated Project Director Project
Manager, Engineering Manager, Engineering Coordinator, Purchase Manager, QA/QC Manager,
Commissioning
Manager,
Commissioning
Engineer, etc.
These will be reviewed and
approved by Engineer-in-charge.
23.
Confirm that you have your own QA/QC

programme for executing this work. In case of
award of work, you will submit all QA/QC
documents as per specification No. 6-78-0001.
24.
Please confirm that your Lumpsum Price includes

cost towards third party inspection if any.
25.
Please note that the scope of this bid package is

on single point responsibility to CONTRACTOR
including
design,
detailed
engineering,
procurement,
supply,
fabrication,
project
management,
inspection,
expediting,
construction, erection , installation, testing, startup,
pre-commissioning,
commissioning,
performance guarantee runs and handing over
the plant to OWNER.
The scope of work mentioned under various
sections shall not be considered as limitative and
CONTRACTORs scope shall include completion of
any activities of work not mentioned in the bid
package but required to complete the Work in all
respects and making it functional.
26.
Please confirm that the CONTRACTOR shall

supply all chemicals, consumables required for
pre-commissioning as per provision of Bidding
Document.
27.
Please confirm that you have considered this

Contract as indivisible works contract and not
divisible contract.
28.
The safety measures as mentioned in GCC/SCC

shall not be considered as limitative.
The
CONTRACTOR will be required to develop their
stringent safety measures and submit the same to
Engineer-in-charge with the provision of a
dedicated safety group closely monitoring the
construction activities in all working shifts.
29.
Please confirm that your sub-contractor for

construction shall be meeting the requirements as
specified in Special Conditions of Contract
including the provision of GCC. Also that the
Page 21 of 30
Page 70 of 1744

Job No. A702
SL.
No.
EILs QUERY
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
BIDDERs REPLY/
CONFIRMATION
agency for executing Electrical work shall have a

valid licence for carrying out the Work in the state
of Madhya Pradesh.
30.
Confirm that Bidder is not involved in any

Litigation/ Arbitration, otherwise, if involved
please furnish information about the same.
31.
Confirm that the Bidder is not under liquidation,

court receivership or similar proceedings.
32.
Confirm that the Bidder is not placed on any

holiday
list
or
blacklist
declared
by
EIL/BORL/BPCL.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
__________________________
NAME OF BIDDER
__________________________
COMPANY SEAL
___________________________
Page 22 of 30
Page 71 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
FORM- K
FORMAT OF LETTER OF WAIVER OF CONDITIONS / DEVIATIONS

(ON COMPANYS LETTERHEAD)
NAME OF WORK
: VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006
We
*
hereby agree to fully comply with, abide by and accept without variation,
deviation or reservation all technical, commercial and other condition whatsoever of the
tender documents and all Addenda / Corrigenda / Clarifications issued by Bharat Oman
Refineries Limited.
We further hereby waive, withdraw and abandon any and all deviations, variations,
objections or reservations whatsoever hereto set out, given or indicated in our offer,
clarifications, correspondence, communications, or otherwise with a view that the final price
bid submitted may be treated to conform to, in all respects, with the terms and conditions of
the said tender documents including all Addenda / Corrigenda.
**
For & on behalf of
Authorised signatory
* Here fill in the name of bidder.
** The Letter of Waiver must be signed by the person (s) authorised to sign.
Page 23 of 30
Page 72 of 1744
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Job No. A702
FORM-L
DETAILS OF P.F. / E.S.I/SERVICE TAX /SALES TAX REGISTRATION/ PAN
Bidder to furnish details of Provident Fund Registration:

PF REGISTRATION NO.
DISTRICT & STATE
:
:
ESI Registration No.

DISTRICT & STATE
:
:
We hereby confirm that the above PF Account is under operation presently and shall be used for all PF related activities for the labour engaged
by us in the present work (if awarded to us).
Bidder shall be solely responsible to fulfil all the obligations of PF and ESI registration without any additional financial liabilities / implications to
EIL / OWNER
SERVICE TAX REGISTRATION NO.:
SALES TAX (MPVAT) REGISTRATION NUMBER:
PAN No.:
(SIGNATURE OF BIDDER)

New Delhi
Page 73 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
FORMM
BANK MANDATE FORM
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bidder Name
:
Bidder Code
:
Address of the Bidder
:
Particulars of Bank Account of Bidder
:
a. Name of the Bank
:
b. Name of the Branch and Address of the Branch
:
c. Branch Code
:
d. 9-Digit MICR code Number of the Bank & Branch
(As appearing in the MICR Cheque issued by the bank)
(Please do not give multicity cheque book code
Number)
e. Type of account (Saving Bank, Current or Cash Credit) :
f. Account Number
:
g. RGTS/IFSC Code (11 digit)
:
h. NEFT Code No.
:
5.
E-mail address of the Bidder
:
6.
Contact Person(s) of the Bidder
:
I/we declare that the particulars given above are correct and complete and I/we
accord our consent
for receiving all our payments through Electronic Mechanism.
______________________________________________________
(Signature and designation of the Authorised person(s) of Bidder)
Official seal of the Bidder
Place :
Date :
BANK CERTIFICATION
Certified that the particulars furnished above are correct as per our records.
Place :
Date :
_____________________________________
Signature of the Authorised Official of the Bank
Banks Stamp

New Delhi
Page 74 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
FORM-N
CONTENTS OF BID
AND
CHECK LIST (COMMERCIAL)

New Delhi
Page 75 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
CONTENTS OF BID ANDCHECK LIST

Bidder is requested to fill this check list and ensure that all details/documents have been furnished
under relevant sections as called for in the Bidding Document along with duly filled in, signed &
stamped.
Please tick the box and ensure compliance:
(A)
(A.1)
UNDER SECTION-I
Letter of submission & Synopsis of the Proposal.
Submitted
(A.2)
Form of Bid as per Proposal FORM-A including Information about

the Bidder as per FORM-B
Submitted
(A.3)
EMD/ BID SECURITY

(As applicable) as Bid Security as per format attached in the
GCC
Submitted
(A.5)
Power of Attorney in favour of the person(s) who has signed the

bid.
Submitted
(A.8)
Declaration as per Proposal FORM-C duly signed & stamped by

the bidder in token of having received and read all volumes of
the commercial & technical documents and having accepted
and considered the same in preparing and submitting the bid.
Submitted
(A.9)
(B)
(B.1)
Duly authenticated DOCUMENTATION IN SUPPORT OF MEETING

BIDDERS QUALIFICATION CRITERIA as per NIB.
Submitted
UNDER SECTION-II
Deployment Schedule of construction equipment, tools & tackles
proposed for execution of works as per Proposal FORM-D.
Submitted
(B.2)
Detailed execution philosophy of work as per Proposal FORM E.

Submitted
(B.3)
Details of proposed organisation along with CV's of key personnel

for Home and site Office as per Proposal FORM-F & FORM-F1.
Submitted
(B.4)
Deployment Schedule of Supervisory personnel as per Proposal

FORM-G.
Submitted
(B.5)
Project Schedule in the form of Bar Chart.

Submitted
(C)
(C.5)
UNDER SECTION-III
Partnership Deed in case of partnership firm, Consortium
Agreement in case of Consortium and Memorandum & Articles of
New Delhi
Page 76 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Association in case of constituent companies.

Submitted
(C.6)
Information about any Current Litigation/ Arbitration, if any, in

which bidder is involved.
Submitted
(D)
UNDER SECTION-IV
(D.1)
Reply to Commercial Questionnaire as per FORM-H.

Submitted
(D.2)
Unpriced copy (without price) of complete Schedule of Prices

document replacing Price figures with words Quoted/Not
Quoted (as applicable), duly scanned, signed and stamped on
each page.
Submitted
(E)
UNDER SECTION-V
(E.1)
Technical Details/documents specified under "Technical

Information Required along with Bid".
Submitted
(E.2)
Reply to Technical Questionnaire.

Submitted
(E.3)
Information required for Assessment of Quantum of Work as per

Bidding Document.
Submitted
(F)
UNDER SECTION-VI
(F.1)
Letter of waiver of Conditions/ deviations as per Proposal

FORM-K.
Submitted
(G)
UNDER SECTION-VII
(G.1)
Self-certificate that the bidder is not under liquidation, court

receivership or similar proceedings.
Submitted
(G.3)
Details of P.F./E.S.I./Sales Tax Registration/Service Tax

Registration/PAN as per Proposal FORM-L.
Submitted
(G.4)
Bank Mandate Form as per Proposal FORM-M.

Submitted
(H)
UNDER SECTION-VIII
(H.1)
Copy of Master Index for Technical and Commercial Volumes

provided with the Bidding Document and copy of amendments
(if any) in token of having accepted and considered the same in
preparing and submitting the bid.
Submitted
(I)
(I.1)
UNDER SECTION-IX
Quality Assurance: A brief description of the Bidder's QA system
New Delhi
Page 77 of 1744

Job No. A702
Proposal Forms
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
and a statement detailed how QA will be implemented for the

Project.
Submitted
(J)
(J.1)
UNDER SECTION-X
Check- List as per FORM-N.
Submitted

New Delhi
Page 78 of 1744
Proposal Forms

Job No. A702
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

FORMP
FOR BIDDERS PRE-BID QUERIES
SL.
NO.
REFERENCE OF BIDDING DOCUMENT

PART/
VOL.
Page
No.
Clause
No.
BIDDER'S QUERY
OWNER'S REPLY
Subject
The Pre-Bid Queries shall be sent by e-mail to atul.kumar@eil.co.in/ amitkr.gupta@eil.co.in/ deepak.malik@eil.co.in
Pre-bid queries shall be furnished strictly in above format (editable file) within cut-off date mentioned in
RFQ/LIB/NIB. Owner/EIL reserves the right not to consider any queries submitted after cut-off date.
SIGNATURE OF BIDDER
NAME OF BIDDER
:
:
___________________________
___________________________
New Delhi
Page 79 of 1744

Job No. A702
SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Page 1 of 37
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------
SPECIALCONDITIONSOFCONTRACT
(SCC)
Page 80 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 2 of 37
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------TABLEOFCONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
20.0
21.0
22.0
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
29.0
30.0
31.0
32.0
33.0
34.0
35.0
36.0
37.0
38.0
39.0
40.0
41.0
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 4
SCOPE OF WORK & SUPPLY OF MATERIALS ............................................................. 5
SINGLE POINT RESPONSIBILITY ................................................................................... 5
WORKS CONTRACT ........................................................................................................... 5
CONSTRUCTION WATER, CONSTRUCTION POWER AND LAND FOR
RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION ................................................................................ 5
CONTRACT AGREEMENT ................................................................................................. 6
PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT ............................................................................ 7
TIME SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................. 8
UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD STRUCTURES .................................................... 8
SUB-CONTRACTING .......................................................................................................... 8
CO-ORINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES ................................................................... 8
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND ORGANIZATION .............................................. 8
PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES .................................................................... 10
DRAWINGS ......................................................................................................................... 10
LEADS .................................................................................................................................. 12
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMME ................................ 12
MAKE OF MATERIALS .................................................................................................... 13
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE AND RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS .................... 13
CERTIFICATE OF VERIFICATION & GOOD CONDITION ........................................ 14
TEMPORARY WORKS ...................................................................................................... 15
EXCAVATION BY BLASTING ........................................................................................ 15
CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................... 15
GENERAL GUIDELINES DURING AND BEFORE ERECTION ................................. 16
ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 16
TESTS AND INSPECTION ................................................................................................ 17
INSPECTION OF SUPPLY ITEMS/ MATERIALS ......................................................... 18
FINAL INSPECTION .......................................................................................................... 18
ADDITIONAL WORKS/EXTRA WORKS ....................................................................... 18
TITLE OF OWNERSHIP .................................................................................................... 19
TERMS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................... 19
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE ....................................................................................... 19
ROUNDING OFF ................................................................................................................. 19
INVOICE & PAYMENT ..................................................................................................... 19
COMPUTERISED CONTRACTORS BILLING SYSTEM ............................................ 19
FIXED AND FIRM PRICE ................................................................................................. 20
ESCALATION ..................................................................................................................... 20
TAXES, DUTIES AND LEVIES AND STATUTORY VARIATIONS ON TAXES AND
DUTIES................................................................................................................................. 20
CONSIGNEE ........................................................................................................................ 25
INSURANCES ..................................................................................................................... 26
INSURANCE IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES ....................................................................... 26
STATUTORY APPROVALS .............................................................................................. 26
Page 81 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 3 of 37
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------
42.0
43.0
44.0
45.0
46.0
47.0
48.0
49.0
50.0
51.0
52.0
53.0
54.0
55.0
56.0
57.0
58.0
59.0
60.0
61.0
62.0
COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS ............................................................................................ 27

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSE ................................................................... 27
LABOUR RELATIONS ...................................................................................................... 28
LABOUR LICENCE ............................................................................................................ 28
UTILISATION OF LOCAL RESOURCES........................................................................ 28
CONTRACTORS LABOURERS TO LEAVE SITE ON COMPLETION OF THE
WORK ................................................................................................................................... 28
WORKING HOURS ............................................................................................................ 28
ESI / EPF ............................................................................................................................... 29
PROVIDENT FUND ............................................................................................................ 29
FUEL REQUIREMENT OF WORKERS ........................................................................... 29
ENTRY PASSES, GATE PASSES, WORK PERMITS AND SAFETY
REGULATIONS .................................................................................................................. 29
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE), MANAGEMENT ......................... 32
CHANGE IN LAW .............................................................................................................. 33
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY .......................................................................................... 34
REQUIREMENT OF EMPLOYEMENT VISA FOR FOREIGN NATIONALS ............ 34
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RADIOGRAPHY & OTHER NDT ....................... 35
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ........................................................................................... 35
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA NOT LIABLE ...................................................................... 35
DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BETWEEN GOVT. DEPT. / PSU & PSE ............................. 36
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF MONITORING AND MEASURING
DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITE ............................................................................. 36
MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ............................ 36
ANNEXURES TO SCC:
ANNEXURE-I
ANNEXURE-II
:
:
ANNEXURE-III
ANNEXURE-IV
ANNEXURE-VA,
VB &V C
ANNEXURE-VI
ANNEXURE-VII
ANNEXURE-VIII
ANNEXURE-IX
ANNEXURE-X
ANNEXURE-XI
:
:
:
:
:
:
TIMESCHEDULE
QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE OF KEY SUPERVISORY
PERSONANELS
QUALITYMANGEMENT SYSTEM
SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTROS AND SPECIFICATION FOR DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM SUPPLIERS
METHODOLOGY FOR PROCUREMENT OF STRUCTURAL STEEL, CEMENT AND TMT
BARS BY THE CONTRACTORS
RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
TERMS OF PAYMENT
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
HEALTH,SAFETY&ENVIRONMENT GUIDELINES FOR CONTRACTOR
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RADIOGRAPHY & OTHER NDT
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF MONITORING AND MEASURING
DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITE
Page 82 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 4 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
SPECIALCONDITIONSOFCONTRACT (SCC)
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Special Conditions of Contract shall be read in Conjunction with the General

conditions of Contract, Schedule of Rates, specification of work, Drawings
and any other document forming part of this Contract wherever the context
so require.
1.2
Notwithstanding the sub-division of the document into these separate

sections and volumes every part
of each shall be deemed to be
supplementary to and complementary of every other part and shall be read
with and into the Contracts as it may be practicable to do so.
1.3
Where any portion of the General Conditions of Contract is repugnant to or at

variance with any provisions of the Special Conditions of Contract, then
unless a different intention appears, the provision(s) of the Special
Conditions of Contract shall be deemed to over-ride the provision(s) of the
General Conditions of Contract only to the extent that such repugnancies, or
variations, prevail.
1.4
Wherever it is mentioned in the specifications that the CONTRACTOR shall

perform certain work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that the
CONTRACTOR shall do so at his own cost and the value of contract shall be
deemed to have included cost of such performances and provisions, so
mentioned.
1.5
The materials, design, and workmanship shall satisfy the applicable relevant
Indian Standards, the Job Specifications contained herein and Codes
referred to. Where the Job Specifications stipulate requirements in addition to
those contained in the Standard Codes and Specifications, these additional
requirements shall also be satisfied.
1.6
In case of an irreconcilable conflict between Indian or other applicable

standards, General Conditions of Contract, Special Conditions of Contract,
Specifications, Drawings or Schedule of Rates and any other portion of
Bidding Document, the following shall prevail to the extent of such
irreconcilable conflict in order of precedence.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Contract Agreement
Detailed Letter of Acceptance along with its enclosures.
Fax/Letter of Intent/Acceptance.
Schedule of Rates as enclosures to Detailed Letter of Acceptance.
Scope of Work/Supply/ Job/Particular Specifications.
Drawings
Technical/Material Specifications.
Special Conditions of Contract
Page 83 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 5 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
ix)
x)
xi)
General Conditions of Contract.
Other Documents
1.7
It will be CONTRACTORs responsibility to bring to the notice of Engineer-InCharge any irreconcilable conflict in the contract documents before starting
the work (s) or making the supply with reference to, which the conflict exists.
1.8
In the absence of any Specifications covering any material, design or work(s)

the same shall be performed/supplied/executed in accordance with standard
engineering practice as per the instructions/directions of the Engineer-InCharge, which will be binding on the CONTRACTOR.
2.0
SCOPE OF WORK& SUPPLY OF MATERIALS

Scope of work and supply of materials shall be as specified in Technical
Section of the bidding document.
3.0
SINGLE POINT RESPONSIBILITY

The entire work as per Scope of Work covered under this contract shall be
awarded on single point responsibility basis.
4.0
WORKS CONTRACT
The entire work as per Scope of Work covered under this contract shall be
awarded on single contractor.
5.0
5.1
CONSTRUCTION WATER, CONSTRUCTION POWER ANDLAND FOR

RESIDENTIAL ACCOMMODATION
CONSTRUCTION WATER:
Clause 2.3 of the General conditions of Contract stands modified as follows:
Subject to availability, construction water shall be provided by the OWNER
free of cost at one point near the site. Further onward distribution from above
location(s) shall be arranged by the CONTRACTOR at their own cost.
However, non-availability of construction water due to delay in commissioning
of OWNERs construction water or due to any reasons shall not entitle the
CONTRACTOR for any claim on OWNER on account of time and cost
implications.
5.2
CONSTRUCTION POWER
Clause 2.4 of the General conditions of Contract stands modified as follows:
Subject to availability, construction power maximum 150 kW shall be provided
by OWNER free of cost through 2 nos. of 125 A feeder from sub-station(s)
Page 84 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 6 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
near the site. Further onward power distribution from above location(s) shall
be arranged by the CONTRACTOR at their cost. However, non-availability of
construction power due to delay in commissioning of OWNERs construction
power system or due to any reasons shall not entitle the CONTRACTOR for
any claim on OWNER on account of time and cost implications.
The construction power shall be made available to the CONTRACTOR
subject to grid distribution, and no time extension or compensation shall be
payable on this account. Therefore, the CONTRACTOR shall within the
quoted price make alternate arrangement to cope with such eventuality.
Additional power, if required, to meet the contractual requirements, shall be
arranged by the CONTRACTOR at its own cost. The CONTRACTOR shall
ensure at his cost that all electrical lines and equipment and all installation
are approved by the State Electricity Inspector. The OWNER shall not be
liable for any loss or damage to the CONTRACTORS equipment for any
reason whatsoever.
5.3
LAND FOR RESIDENTIAL ACCOMODATION:

The OWNER shall not permit any land at site to be used for residential
purposes however shall otherwise provide open land for temporary
accommodation of the CONTRACORs personnel and labour about 10 KMs
away outside refinery premises for temporary construction of amenities at
free of cost. However, all such temporary facilities to be
demolished/dismantled, area to be cleared of debris & handed over to Owner
on completion of the job.
5.4
LAND FOR
WORKSHOP
CONTRACTORS
FIELD
OFFICE,
GODOWN
AND
The OWNER shall provide the CONTRACTOR open land within refinery
area, free of any liability to pay license fee (but otherwise subject to the terms
and conditions specified in Clause 2.5 of the General Conditions of Contract)
to establish a temporary site office, Godown & Workshop. However, all such
temporary facilities to be demolished/dismantled, area to be cleared of debris
& handed over to Owner on completion of the job. Additional land, if any,
shall be arranged by the CONTRACTOR on his own outside the Refinery
Complex within the quoted prices.
Please note that the CONTRACTOR shall only use porta cabins for their
Site office.
6.0
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
6.1
The CONTRACTOR shall execute a formal contract as per proforma given in

the General Conditions of Contract with the OWNER within One Month from
the date of Notification of Award on a non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate
Page 85 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 7 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
value. The cost of non-judicial stamp paper shall be borne by the

CONTRACTOR.
6.2
Contract documents for agreement shall be prepared after the acceptance of

bid. Until the final contract documents are prepared and executed, this bid
document together with the annexed documents, modifications, deletions
agreed upon by the OWNER and bidders acceptance thereof shall constitute
a binding contract between the successful Bidder and the OWNER based on
terms contained in the aforesaid documents and the finally submitted and
accepted prices.
6.3
The Contract Document shall consist of the following:

i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Original Bidding Document along with its enclosures issued.

Amendment/Corrigendum to original Bidding Document issued, if any.
Fax/Letter of Intent/ Acceptance.
Detailed letter of Award/Acceptance along with enclosures attached
therewith.
Agreement on non-judicial stamp paper
7.0
PERFORMANCE SECURITY DEPOSIT
7.1
CONTRACTOR shall submit Performance Security Deposit in the form of

Bank Guarantee only in favour of the OWNER in the form of irrevocable and
unconditional Bank Guarantee as per pro-forma enclosed in the tender
document and as per Clause No. 3.5 of General Conditions of Contract
(GCC). Other modes of submission of Performance Security Deposit
mentioned in Clause No. 3.5 of GCC shall not be acceptable to OWNER.
7.2
No interest shall be payable by the OWNER for sum deposited as

Performance Security Deposit.
7.3
The Performance Security Deposit submitted in the form of Bank Guarantee

will be returned to the CONTRACTOR after the end of Defect Liability
Period.
7.4
Upon completion of the works as per Completion Schedule stipulated in the

Contract, the above said guarantee shall be considered to constitute the
CONTRACTORs warranty/guarantee for the work done by him or for the
works supplied and their performance as per the specifications and any other
conditions against this Contract.
7.5
In the event of Completion of Project being delayed beyond the Scheduled

Completion Date, the OWNER/CONSULTANT may without prejudice to any
other right or remedy available to the OWNER/CONSULTANT, operate the
Bank Guarantee to recover the Compensation for delay leviable as per GCC.
The Bank Guarantee amount shall thereupon be increased to the original
amount, or the CONTRACTOR may alternatively submit a fresh Bank
Page 86 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 8 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
Guarantee for the equivalent amount of compensation for delay recovered.

8.0
TIME SCHEDULE
The work shall be executed strictly as per time Schedule mentioned in
Annexure-I to SCC. The period of completion given includes the time
required for mobilization as well as testing, rectifications, if any, retesting and
completion in all respects to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.0
UNDERGROUND AND OVERHEAD STRUCTURES

The CONTRACTOR will familiarize himself with and obtain information and
details from the OWNER in respect of all existing structures, overhead lines,
existing pipelines and utilities existing at the job site before commencing
work. The CONTRACTOR shall execute the work in such a manner that the
said structures, utilities, pipelines etc. are not disturbed or damaged, and
shall indemnify and keep indemnified the OWNER from and against any
destruction thereof or damages thereto. In case the existing facilities both
above and underground needs to be disturbed/ modified/ rerouted to create
new facilities, the CONTRACTOR/ bidder shall carry out such modification
without any cost to the OWNER.
10.0
SUB-CONTRACTING
If the CONTRACTOR is required to engage a Sub-CONTRACTOR for any
part of work, then such Sub-CONTRACTORs shall have prior proven
experience of similar work and shall require specific approval by
OWNER/Engineer-In-Charge after award of work.
Following the notification of acceptance of Bid, the CONTRACTOR will
submit to the OWNER for approval the details of Sub-CONTRACTORs.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that very competent and resourceful agencies
with proven track record and performance should be proposed for the work to
be sub-contracted.
11.0
CO-ORINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES

The work shall be carried out in such manner that the work of other agencies
operating at the site is not hampered due to any action of the
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR will be responsible for ensuring proper
coordination with other agencies. In the event of any dispute between the
CONTRACTOR and any other agency employed at the job site arising out of
or related to the performance of the work, the decision of the Engineer-InCharge shall be final and binding on the CONTRACTOR.
12.0
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND ORGANIZATION
12.1
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
Page 87 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 9 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
The CONTRACTOR shall without prejudice to his overall responsibility to

execute and complete the work as per specifications and time schedule,
progressively deploy construction equipment and tools & tackles and
augment the same as decided by the Engineer-in- Charge depending on the
site requirement & exigencies of the work so as to complete all works within
the contracted time schedule and without any additional cost to OWNER.
No construction equipment shall be supplied by the OWNER.
CONTRACTOR to ensure deployment of suitable equipment and take all
safety precautions during execution of work.
CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for making available for executing
the WORK, all requisite CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENTS, Special Aids,
Barges, Cranes and the like, all Tools, Tackles and Testing Equipment and
Appliances, including imports of such equipment etc. as required. In case of
import of the same the rates applicable for levying of Custom Duty on such
Equipment, Tools, & Tackles and the duty drawback applicable thereon shall
be ascertained by the CONTRACTOR from the concerned authorities of
Government of India. It shall be clearly understood that OWNER shall not in
any way be responsible for arranging to obtain Custom Clearance and/or
payment of any duties and/or duty draw backs etc. for such equipments so
imported by the CONTRACTOR and the CONTRACTOR shall be fully
responsible for all taxes, duties and documentation with regard to the same.
Tenderer in his own interest may contact, for any clarifications in the matter,
concerned agencies/Dept./Ministries of Govt. of India. All clarifications so
obtained and interpretations thereof shall be solely the responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR.
12.2
SITE ORGANISATION
Subject to the provisions in the contract document and without prejudice to
CONTRACTORs liabilities and responsibilities to provide adequate qualified
skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled personnel on the work, CONTRACTOR
shall deploy supervisory personnel and augment the same as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge depending upon the site requirement & the exigencies of
work so as to complete all works within the contracted time schedule and
without any additional cost to OWNER.
Qualification and experience of Key Supervisory Personnel to be deployed
for this work shall be as per given in the Annexure-II to Special Conditions
of Contract.
12.3
CONTRACTOR should maintain manpower engagement register (including

skilled and unskilled labour) / Hindrance register as per format given by
Engineer-in-Charge at site and should present the same to OWNER
representatives whenever asked for.
Page 88 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 10 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
12.4
Price adjustment due to delayed mobilization or shortfall in mobilization

of key manpower
12.4.1 The Key Supervisory Personnel shall be mobilized within 15 days of written
instructions for mobilization given during Kick-off-meeting or by Engineer-incharge based on front availability at site. In case of delay in mobilization or
shortfall in Key personnel manpower, penal recovery shall be levied from 16th
day onwards as per the recovery rates specified in Annexure-II to SCC, till
the date of mobilization of Key Supervisory personnel at site.
12.4.2 Deduction under this clause is in addition to Price adjustment for Delay
applicable pursuant to GCC clause no. 3.9. The provisions of GCC clause no.
3.9 shall have no bearing on this clause.
12.4.3 Price adjustment for non-mobilization of key manpower shall be limited to 3%
(three percent) of the total executed contract value.
13.0
PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

CONTRACTOR shall obtain all safety clearance (viz. Excavation, Hot/Cold
work permit) from OWNER, as may be required from time to time, prior to
start of work. Work without safety permit shall not be carried out. Safety
permit and fire service facility, if available, shall be provided on daily
allocation basis upon application.
CONTRACTOR shall obtain plans and full details of all existing and planned
underground services from Engineer-in-Charge and shall follow these plans
closely at all times during the performance of work. CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible for location and protection of all underground lines and structures
at his own cost.
Despite all precautions, should any damage to any structure/ utility etc. occur,
the
CONTRACTOR shall
contact
the
Engineer-in-Charge
and
CONTRACTOR shall forthwith carry out repair at his expenses under the
direction and to the satisfaction of BORL/TPIA and OWNER/concerned
authority.
CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions to ensure that no damage is caused
to the existing pipelines, cables etc. during construction.
14.0
DRAWINGS
The drawings accompanying the Bidding Document are generally indicative of
scope of work and are issued for bidding purpose only. Final construction
shall be carried out as per the drawings prepared by the CONTRACTOR and
reviewed by the OWNER or the OWNERs CONSULTANT during the course
of execution.
Page 89 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 11 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
The design criteria, specifications and other engineering requirements

and information required for designing the system are included in the Bidding
Document. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare basic and detailed
engineering drawings and other documents as required for performing or
completing the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for
generating or acquiring such additional data or information as may be
required to perform the engineering, procurements, fabrication,
transportation, installation, testing, pre-commissioning or commissioning
activities.
All drawings requiring approval shall be transmitted to OWNERs
CONSULTANT. The successful CONTRACTOR shall establish a compatible
system with that available with the CONSULTANT for transmission of
drawings which require the OWNERs approval, and extension of time shall
not be permissible on account of any delay in transmission of drawing for
approval or for consequent approval of drawings. The drawings/documents
submitted
by
the
CONTRACTOR
shall
be
reviewed
by
CONSULTANT/OWNER.
During such review, CONSULTANT and/ or the OWNER may suggest
modifications in the drawings/documents. So long as the modifications
suggested are to meet the technical requirements or the specifications or are
designed towards the efficient operation of the Plant without altering the basic
design parameters given in the Bidding Document, these shall be carried out
by the CONTRACTOR within the scope of relative work or supply without
extra cost to the OWNER or extra time irrespective of the fact that these
requirements have not been detailed in Bidding Document or in the
CONTRACTORS bid.
Review of design/drawings is not obligatory on the part of
CONSULTANT/OWNER and complete correctness/soundness of the
design/drawings shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR
irrespective of the
fact whether the same has
been reviewed by
CONSULTANT/OWNER or not.
Notwithstanding review of designs & drawings by CONSULTANT/OWNER,
any defect observed during commissioning and/or operating the Plant or
otherwise shall be rectified by the CONTRACTOR forthwith by carrying out all
necessary modifications, repairs, replacements and/or re-construction, as the
case may be, within the scope of Work and scheduled time and without any
extra cost to the OWNER.
The cost of preparing, submitting, correcting, modifying, re-performing and/or
re- submitting all documents and drawings furnished shall be included in the
scope of Work and the lumpsum price of services/work, and the term
Page 90 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 12 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
drawing in the detailed specifications shall, unless excluded by context

mean the drawings prepared by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed by
OWNER/CONSULTANT.
15.0
LEADS
For the various works, in case of contradiction, leads mentioned in the
Schedule of Rates shall prevail over those indicated in Technical
Specifications.
16.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMME
16.1
The CONTRACTOR shall adhere to the quality management system as per

EIL Specification No. 6-78-0001 Rev. 0 enclosed as per Annexure-III to
SCC. After the award of the contract, detailed quality assurance programme
to be followed for the execution of contract shall be submitted by
CONTRACTOR.
16.2
CONTRACTOR shall include in his offer the Quality Assurance Programme

containing the overall quality management and procedures which is required
to be adhered to during the execution of contract. After the Acceptance/
Award of the tender, detailed quality assurance programme to be followed for
the execution of contract under various divisions of works will be mutually
discussed and agreed to.
16.3
The CONTRACTOR shall establish document and maintain an effective

quality assurance system as outlined in recognized codes.
16.4
Quality Assurance System plans/procedures of the CONTRACTOR shall be

furnished in the form of a QA manual. This document should cover details of
the personnel responsible for the quality assurance, plans or procedures to
be followed for quality control in respect of Design, Engineering,
Procurement, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning. The quality
assurance system should indicate organisational approach for quality control
and quality assurance of the construction activities, at all stages of work at
site as well as at manufacturers works and despatch of materials.
16.5
The OWNER/CONSULTANT or their representative shall reserve the right to

inspect/witness, review any or all stages of work at shop/site as deemed
necessary for quality assurance.
16.6
The CONTRACTOR has to ensure the deployment of quality Assurance and

Quality Control Engineer(s) depending upon the quantum of work. This
QA/QC group shall be fully responsible to carry out the work as per standards
and all code requirements.
In case Engineer-In-Charge feels that
CONTRACTORs QA/QC Engineer(s) are incompetent or insufficient,
CONTRACTOR has to deploy other experienced Engineer(s) as per site
requirement and to the full satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.
Page 91 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 13 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
16.7
In case CONTRACTOR fails to follow the instructions of Engineer-In-Charge

with respect to above clauses, next subsequent payment due to him shall not
be released unless and until he complies with the instructions to the full
satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge.
16.8
The Specification for Documentation Requirements from CONTRACTOR

and Specification for Documentation Requirements from Supplier are
attached as Annexure-IV to SCC.
17.0
MAKE OF MATERIALS
17.1
The materials required to be supplied by the CONTRACTOR under this

contract shall be procured only from OWNER/CONSULTANT approved
vendors. Where the makes of materials are not indicated in the Bidding
document CONTRACTOR shall furnish the details of makes and shall obtain
prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge of vendors/sub-vendors before placing
order.
17.2 The CONTRACTOR shall purchase Steel & Cement in line with following
clauses:17.2.1 Cement: The methodology for procurement and supply of cement by the
CONTRACTOR from manufacturers shall be as per Annexure-V A of this
SCC.
17.2.2 Structural Steel: The methodology for procurement of structure steel shall be
as per Annexure-V B of this SCC.
17.3 HSD re-bars/TMT bars: The list of approved manufacturers and the
methodology for obtaining rebate, in case TMT bars are procured by the
CONTRACTORs from reputed manufacturers other than the approved
manufacturers, shall be as per Annexure-V C to this SCC.
18.0
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE AND RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
18.1
Issuance of Free Issue Materials (FIM), if any, from OWNER's stores or other
issue points of OWNER and its reconciliation shall be carried out as per terms
and conditions set forth in the Annexure-VI of SCC.
18.2
Free Issue Materials shall be issued for incorporation in permanent works

only and shall not be used for any temporary or ancillary works. These
materials shall be issued to the CONTRACTOR from the designated point
specified in the Bidding Document. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible, at
his own cost, for lifting of the materials from OWNERs issue points and
transportation as per scope of Bidding Document.
Page 92 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 14 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
18.3
Every month, CONTRACTOR shall submit an account for all materials issued
by OWNER in the proforma prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge. On
completion of work the CONTRACTOR shall submit Material Appropriation
Statement for all materials issued by the OWNER.
18.4
Wherever materials are under CONTRACTORs scope of supply whether part

or in full for any item of work covered under SOR, no allowances towards
wastage/scrap etc. shall be accounted.
18.5
All pipes shall be issued in available lengths/shapes and no claims for extra
payment on account of issue of non-standard length/shape will be
entertained. Pipes shall be issued on linear measurement basis.
19.0
CERTIFICATE OF VERIFICATION & GOOD CONDITION

The CONTRACTOR shall before supply of material covered within the scope
of supply at his own risks, cost and initiative undertake or cause to be
undertaken all tests, analysis and inspections as shall be required to be
undertaken with regard to the materials under the specifications and any
codes, practices, orders and instructions with respect there to and cause the
results thereof to be recorded, reported or certified, as the case may be, and
shall not offer for delivery or deliver any material which has not passed such
tests/analysis or Inspection and which are not accompanied by the test
results, reports and/or certificates in this behalf provided in the applicable
specifications, code(s) and or practices.
On arrival of the material at site the CONTRACTOR shall give a written notice
thereof to the Engineer-in-charge and Site engineer or Inspection Agency
notified by the OWNER in this behalf to inspect the materials, and shall keep
in readiness for the inspection the materials and the relevant test results,
reports and certificates applicable thereto.
Notwithstanding any other provisions in the Contract documents for analysis
or tests of materials and in addition thereto, the CONTRACTOR shall if so
required by the Engineer-in-charge or site Engineer/Inspection Agency in
writing at its own risk sand costs, analysis, test, prove and/or weigh all
materials (including incorporated materials) required to be analysed, tested,
proved and/or weighed by the Engineer- in-Charge or site
Engineer/Inspection Agency and shall have such analysis/test conducted by
the Agency(ies) or Authority(ies) if any, specified by the Engineer-in- Charge
or site Engineer/Inspection Agency. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all
equipment, labour, materials and other things whatsoever required for testing,
preparation of the samples, measurement and/or proof of weighment of the
material as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge or site Engineer/Inspection
Agency.
Page 93 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 15 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
If on inspection or proof, analysis or tests as aforesaid or otherwise the

Engineer-in- Charge or site engineer/Inspection Agency nominated by the
OWNER in this behalf is prima-facie satisfied that the material received is in
conformity with the material requirements of the Bill of Materials, the
description given in the shipping documents and in the CONTRACTORS
invoices in this behalf and that the test reports/results/Certificates given in
respect thereof are prima-facie inconformity with the relevant result(s),
report(s), certificate(s) required in respect thereof in terms of the
specifications and/or relevant codes and practices, and that the material
appears to be prima-facie in good order and condition, the Engineer-incharge shall issue to CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Verification and Good
Condition in respect of such material, and this shall constitute the Certificate
of Verification and Good Condition which is envisaged in the Contract
documents.
Such certificate is only intended to satisfy the OWNER that prima-facie the
material supplied by the CONTRACTOR is in order and shall not otherwise
absolve the CONTRACTOR of his/its full responsibility under the contract in
relation thereto, including in relation to specification fulfillment and/or
performance or other guarantees.
20.0
TEMPORARY WORKS
All temporary works, ancillary works, enabling works, including dewatering of
surface and subsoil water, preparation and maintenance of temporary drains
at the worksite, preparation and maintenance of approaches to working
areas, wherever required, for execution of the work, shall be the responsibility
of the CONTRACTOR and all costs towards the same shall be deemed to
have been included in the quoted prices.
21.0
EXCAVATION BY BLASTING
Blasting will not be permitted inside refinery premises.
22.0
CONSTRUCTION
The CONTRACTOR shall within the scope of work observe in addition to
specifications, all national and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulation
and requirements pertaining to the work.
Various procedures and methods to be adopted by CONTRACTOR during
the construction as required in the respective specifications shall be submitted
to OWNER in due time and well in advance of the specific work for approval.
The CONTRACTOR shall carryout required supervision as per Quality
Assurance Plan and furnish all assistance required by the OWNER in
carrying out inspection work. The OWNER will have authorized
Page 94 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 16 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
representatives present who shall have free access to the work at all times. If
an OWNERs representative notifies the CONTRACTORS representative of
any deficiency in any work or in the supervision thereof, the CONTRACTOR
shall make every effort to carry out such instructions consistent with best
industry practice.
23.0
GENERAL GUIDELINES DURING AND BEFORE ERECTION

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for organizing the lifting of the
equipment in the proper sequence for orderly progress of the work and to
ensure that access routes for erecting the other equipments are kept open.
Orientation of all foundations, elevations, lengths and disposition of anchor
bolts and diameter of holes in the supports and saddles shall be
checked by the CONTRACTOR well in advance of the installation.
Rectifications, including chipping of foundations, shall be carried out where
necessary in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge. If a structural member
needs to be dismantled to facilitate the equipment erection, this shall be done
by the CONTRACTOR after ensuring proper stability of the main structure in
consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge. All such dismantled members shall
be put back in position to the satisfaction of Engineer-in- Charge after the
completion of the equipment erection.
During the performance of the Work the CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost
keep structures, materials and equipment adequately braced by guys, struts
or other approved means which shall be supplied and installed by the
CONTRACTOR as required till the installation work is satisfactorily
completed.
Such guys, shoring, bracing, strutting, planking supports etc. shall not
interfere with the work of other agencies and shall not damage or cause
distortion to other works executed by the CONTRACTOR or other agencies.
The
CONTRACTOR
shall
duly
comply
with
manufacturer(s)
recommendations and detailed specifications for the installation of the
various equipment and machines.
Various tolerances required as marked on the drawings and/or in accordance
with the specifications and/or instructions of the Engineer-in-charge shall be
maintained. Verticality shall be verified with the Theodolite and shall be
maintained.
24.0
ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT
All erection shall be carried out by deploying a crane(s) of suitable capacity.
Erection by derrick shall not be permissible. The CONTRACTOR shall submit
erection schemes for erection of critical equipments to Engineer-in-Charge for
Page 95 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 17 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
his approval. No equipment shall be erected in the absence of an approved

erection scheme for such equipment.
Bamboo scaffolding for construction activities are
CONTRACTOR shall use Metallic Pipes for scaffolding.
not
allowed,
The quoted rates of the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed to include load

testing of the crane as required to establish the lifting capacity of the crane.
25.0
TESTS AND INSPECTION
25.1
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the various tests as enumerated in the
technical specifications of this bidding document and the technical
documents that will be furnished to him during the performance of the work.
25.2
All the tests either on the field or at outside laboratories concerning the
execution of the work and supply of materials by the CONTRACTOR shall be
carried out by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
25.3
The work is subject to inspection at all times by the Engineer-in-Charge. The

CONTRACTOR shall carry out all instructions given during inspection and
shall ensure that the work is being carried out according to the technical
specifications of this bid document, the technical documents and the
relevant codes of practice will be furnished to him during the performance of
the work.
25.4
The CONTRACTOR shall provide for purposes of inspection access ladders,

lighting and necessary instruments at his own cost.
25.5
Any work not conforming to execution drawings, specifications or codes shall

be rejected forth with and the CONTRACTOR shall carry out the rectifications
at his own cost.
25.6
All results of inspection and tests will be recorded in the inspection reports,
proforma of which will be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. These reports
shall form part of the completion documents.
25.7
For imported items, the acceptable Third Part Inspection Agencies (TPIA)
shall be as under:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
M/s LRIS
M/s BV
M/s DNV
M/s TUV
M/s CEIL
25.8
For indigenous items, the Third Part Inspection Agencies (TPIA) shall be by
EIL.
25.9
Inspection and acceptance of work shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from
any of his responsibilities under this Contract.
Page 96 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 18 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
26.0
INSPECTION OF SUPPLY ITEMS/ MATERIALS
26.1
All inspection and tests on bought out items shall be made as per the
specifications forming part of this contract. The CONTRACTOR shall submit
a categorization plan of all the supply items indicating the type of inspection
required for review by BORL/TPIA. Various stages of inspection and testing
shall be identified after receipt of Quality Assurance Programme from the
CONTRACTOR/ Manufacturer.
26.2
Inspection calls shall be given for associations of OWNER/CONSULTANTs

representative as per mutually agreed programme in prescribed pro-forma
with 15 days margin, giving details of equipment and attaching relevant test
certificates and internal inspection report of the CONTRACTOR.
All
drawings, General Arrangement and other contract drawings, specifications,
catalogues etc. Pertaining to equipment offered for inspection shall be got
approved from OWNER/CONSULTANT and copies shall be made available
to OWNER/CONSULTANT beforehand for undertaking inspection.
26.3
The CONTRACTOR shall ensure full and free access to the inspection
Engineer of OWNER/CONSULTANT at the CONTRACTORs or their subCONTRACTORs premises at any time during contract period to facilitate him
to carry out inspection and testing assignments.
26.4
The CONTRACTOR/ sub-CONTRACTOR shall provide all instruments, tools,

necessary testing and other inspection facilities to inspection engineer of
OWNER/CONSULTANT free of cost for carrying out inspection.
26.5
Where facilities for testing do not exist in the CONTRACTORs/ subCONTRACTORs laboratories, samples and test pieces shall be drawn
by the CONTRACTOR/ SUB-CONTRACTOR in presence of Inspection
Engineer of a OWNER/CONSULTANT and duly sealed by the later and sent
for testing in Government approved Test House or any other testing
laboratories approved by the Inspection Engineer at the CONTRACTORs
cost.
27.0
FINAL INSPECTION
After completion of all tests as per specification the whole work will be subject
to a final inspection to ensure that job has been completed as per
requirement.
If any defects noticed in the work attributable to
CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR at his own cost shall attend these, as
and when the OWNER brings them to his notice. The OWNER shall have
the right to have these defects rectified at the risk and cost of the
CONTRACTOR if he fails to attend to these defects immediately.
28.0
ADDITIONAL WORKS/EXTRA WORKS

OWNER reserves the right to execute any additional works/extra works,
Page 97 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 19 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
during the execution of work, either by themselves or by appointing any other

agency, even though such works are incidental to and necessary for the
completion of works awarded to the CONTRACTOR. In the event of such
decisions taken by the OWNER, CONTRACTOR is required to extend
necessary co-operation, and act as per the instruction of Engineer-In-Charge.
29.0
TITLE OF OWNERSHIP
29.1
Ownership of materials shall be transferred to the Company upon the date of

issuance of certificate towards part completion or completion and acceptance
of Works.
29.2
Ownership of the construction Equipment used by the CONTRACTOR and its

SUB-CONTRACTORs in connection with the Works shall remain with the
CONTRACTOR and its SUB-CONTRACTORS.
30.0
TERMS OF PAYMENT
Payments shall be made to the CONTRACTOR as per the Terms of
Payment as defined in Annexure-VII to SCC.
31.0
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the performance of the
systems/equipment/materials supplied by them in terms of the parameters
mentioned in the data sheets/ other documents attached with the Bidding
document, the guaranteed mechanical performance as laid down in Process
Package. Bidder to refer Annexure-VIII to SCC for Provision for loading on
account of guaranteed power consumption figure quoted by them in FORM
SP-9 of Schedule of Price & penalty on a/c of not meeting guaranteed power
consumption.
32.0
ROUNDING OFF
All payments to and recoveries from the CONTRACTORs bills shall be
rounded off to the nearest Rupee. Wherever the amount to be paid/recovered
consists of a fraction of a Rupee (Paisa), the amount shall be rounded off to
the next higher rupee if the fraction consists of 50 (fifty) paisa or more and if
the fraction of a Rupee is less than 50 (fifty) paisa, the same shall be ignored.
33.0
INVOICE & PAYMENT

Invoices to be raised on Bharat Oman Refineries Limited, Central Bill
Receiving Desk, Administrative Building, Refinery Complex, Post BORL
Residential Complex, Bina, District Sagar, Madhya Pradesh India - 470124
34.0
COMPUTERISED CONTRACTORS BILLING SYSTEM

Without prejudice to stipulation in General Conditions of Contract,
Page 98 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 20 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
CONTRACTOR should follow following billing system:

The bills will be prepared by the CONTRACTOR on their own PCs as
per the standard formats and codification scheme proposed by
OWNER. The CONTRACTOR will be provided with data entry software to
capture the relevant billing data for subsequent processing, if available.
CONTRACTOR will submit these data to OWNER in an electronic media
along with the hard copy of the bill, necessary enclosures and
documents. The CONTRACTOR will also ensure the correctness and
consistency of data so entered with the hard copy of the bill submitted
for payment.
OWNER will utilize these data for processing and verification of the
CONTRACTOR's bill.
The CONTRACTOR will also ensure that the hard copy of the bill submitted
for payment is duly signed and stamped by the authorised signatory.
35.0
FIXED AND FIRM PRICE

The contract prices shall remain fixed and firm & no escalation in price
on any account shall be admissible to the CONTRACTOR until the
completion of work covered under the Contract except for the variation in
prices pursuant to clause no. 36 of SCC and statutory variation mentioned in
clause no.37 below.
36.0
ESCALATION
36.1
No escalation in prices shall be granted to the contractor.
37.0
TAXES, DUTIES AND

ONTAXES AND DUTIES
37.1
The CONTRACTOR shall accept full and exclusive liability at his own cost for
the payment of any and all taxes, duties, cess and levies howsoever
designated, as are payable to any government, local or statutory authority in
any country including India which are now in force or as are hereafter
imposed, increased or modified and as are payable by CONTRACTOR, his
agents, SUBCONTRACTORS and its/their respective employees for or in
relation to the performance of this CONTRACT. The CONTRACTOR shall be
deemed to have been fully informed with respect to all such liabilities and
considered the same while submitting the offer.
37.2
Price quoted by the Bidder shall be inclusive of all applicable taxes, duties,
cess, levies etc. such as Sales Tax, Excise duty, Service tax, Swachh Bharat
Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess, MPVAT for works contract, withholding tax, royalty,
design & engineering cess (if any) and Octroi, Entry tax in the State of
Madhya Pradesh (MP) India, taxes & duties on construction equipment /
LEVIES
AND
STATUTORYVARIATIONS
Page 99 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 21 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
machinery / tools & tackles, cess, education cess etc.

37.3
OWNER is eligible to claim CENEVAT benefits for the Cenvatable component

of (i) Excise Duty (ED) on Indigenous goods, (ii) Countervailing Duty (CVD)
on Imported furnished goods, (iii) Additional Import Duty (AID) on Imported
furnished goods and (iii) Service Tax & Krishi Kalyan Cess on Services. The
Cenvat credit can be availed only on the goods and services which are
eligible for cenvat credit as per Act. CONTRACTOR shall take a note of this
and submit their offer accordingly.
CONTRACTOR shall be required to submit all valid necessary supporting
documentary evidences for the above taxes and duties to enable OWNER to
claim relevant benefits / reimbursements.
37.4
OWNER shall claim Input Tax Credit (ITC) of MP VAT on supply of materials
which are eligible for Input Tax Credit as per MP VAT act. The input tax credit
amount shall be paid to CONTRACTOR upon production of all relevant
documents necessary to claim Input Tax Credit by OWNER on supply of
materials which are eligible for Input Tax Credit as per VAT act and OWNER
is able to take VAT Credit in accordance with the provisions of VAT Act and
Bidding Document. CONTRACTOR shall submit all MP VAT Clearance
Certificate issued by Commercial Tax Department to BORL before
submission of pre-final RA bill. If the CONTRACTOR does not submits MP
VAT Clearance Certificate along with the pre-final RA bill then BORL shall
recover MP VAT paid to the CONTRACTOR along with applicable interest
and penalty.
37.5 Bidders to quote MP VAT and Service Tax as per valuation Scheme and
on quoted value of Material and services respectively. It may be noted
that composition scheme for both MP VAT and Service TAX should not
be adopted by the bidders.
37.6 CONTRACTOR shall submit valid necessary supporting documents for the
above taxes and duties within 3 months from the date of Invoice, to enable
OWNER to claim relevant benefits/ payments.
Notes:
a) The supporting documents for ED/CVD/AID shall include Excise invoice,
Importer Invoice, Proof of Material Receipt in Factory, Proof of Material
used in Project &CONTRACTORs undertaking that they have not
claimed Cenvat benefit for the same etc.
b) The relevant documents for MP VAT shall include Original Tax Invoice.
37.7 The amounts of Cenvatable Excise Duty, Cenvatable Countervailing Duty,
Cenvatable Additional Import Duty, Service tax, Cenvatable Krishi Kalyan
Cess and MP VAT eligible for ITC included in the lumpsum price will be
Page 100 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 22 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
considered as MANDATORY DISCOUNT and shall be deducted from all RA

bills on prorate basis. This amount shall be reimbursed to the CONTRACTOR
on submission of all related documents as explained above and obtainment
of benefits by BORL and in accordance with the provisions of the bidding
document.
In case CONTRACTOR is not able to produce proper documents for
reimbursement of Cenvatable Excise Duty, Cenvatable Countervailing Duty,
Cenvatable Additional Import Duty, Cenvatable Service tax, Cenvatable Krishi
Kalyan Cess and MP VATeligible for ITC, then the differential amount shall
not be reimbursed to the CONTRACTOR.
Further, reimbursement of Central Sales Tax (CST) & MP VAT on supplies,
Excise duty, Basic Custom Duty, Countervailing Duty, Additional Import
Duty,Customs Educational Cess and Customs Secondary & Higher
Education Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi
Kalyan Cess and Service tax will be limited to the values of each tax
mentioned by the CONTRACTOR in the Priced bid.
37.8 Form 49 (Road Permit) shall not be issued by BORL. CONTRACTOR shall
issue their own Road Permit for all incoming materials as applicable from
outside Madhya Pradesh for this contract. However, BORL shall provide
Road Permit for finished goods directly sold by the Contractor to the Owner
and not for the goods supplied by the way of sale in transit.
37.9 For imported items, CONTRACTOR shall import the material against their
own Import/ Export Code (IEC Code) based on merit rate of Custom Duty. All
formalities for custom clearance in India shall be done by CONTRACTOR.
37.10 Tax Deduction at Source (TDS) under Income Tax Act and Madhya Pradesh
Works Contract Tax (MP WCT) as per MP VAT Act shall be deducted from
the CONTRACTORs Running Account Bills at applicable rate during
currency of the contract.
37.11 Successful Bidder shall get registered in Madhya Pradesh for execution of
Works contracts within the state of Madhya Pradesh. CONTRACTOR shall
provide the details of registration before first payment against the contract.
Delay in payment by BORL due to non-submission of registration certificate
by the CONTRACTOR shall be solely attributable to the CONTRACTOR.
Cost of such registration shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
If already registered, Bidders shall provide the details for registration in
Madhya Pradesh along with the Techno Commercial Bid.
37.12 Owner shall issue Form C against the inter-state purchases of goods sold to
BORL, wherever applicable. However, Form C shall be provided only for
finished goods manufactured by the Contractor and directly sold to the
Page 101 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 23 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
Owner. Form-C shall not be provided for bought-out items sourced from Subvendor including supplies by the way of sale in transit.
37.13 CONTRACTOR shall have full and exclusive liability for payment of all
TAXES arising directly or indirectly out of the performance of the WORK and
CONTRACTORs obligations hereunder.
37.14 All TAXES levied and imposed on CONTRACTOR and his employees will be
for the account of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall also be liable for
interest and/ or all penalties arising due to non-payment or late payment of
any applicable TAXES. In the event OWNER pays or is required to pay any
TAXES, interest and/ or penalty due to default of CONTRACTOR,
CONTRACTOR shall forthwith reimburse such amounts to OWNER. If
CONTRACTOR fails to reimburse such amounts to OWNER within fourteen
(14) days of receipt of a demand from OWNER, OWNER shall be entitled to
deduct such amounts from any payments due and payable by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR under the CONTRACT.
37.15 Any costs, expenses or losses arising due to the re-export of the imported
goods or re-import of goods, shall be for the account of CONTRACTOR.
37.16 CONTRACTOR shall indeminify and keep harmless OWNER against liability,
losses or damages suffered by OWNER arising due to the failure of
CONTRACTOR or any of his employees or SUB-CONTRACTORS to pay any
TAXES, including interest and penalties in relation thereto or comply with any
of the provisions of any tax laws under the CONTRACT.
37.17 CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for all TAXES payable by his
SUB-CONTRACTOR (S) and their employees including but not limited to
Indian corporate TAXES.
37.18 If after the due date of submission of last price bid / price implication, any new
taxes or duties are levied or any increase occurs in the applicable rate(s) of
Central Sales Tax (CST) & MP VAT on supplies, Excise duty, Basic Custom
Duty, Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty,Customs Educational Cess
and Customs Secondary & Higher Education Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya
Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess and Service tax as a
result of Statutory amendment, the OWNER shall reimburse the
CONTRACTOR the said new taxes & duties as well as the increase in the
resultant CST &MP VAT on supplies, Excise duty, Basic Custom Duty,
Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty, Customs Educational Cess and
Customs Secondary & Higher Education Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya
Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess and Service tax as the
case may be, on CONTRACTOR furnishing satisfactory proof of payment
including copy of Govt. Regulations etc. Conversely, if there is any reduction
in the rates of CST &MP VAT on supplies, Excise duty, Basic Custom Duty,
Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty, Customs Educational Cess and
Page 102 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 24 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
Customs Secondary & Higher Education Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya

Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi Kalyan Cess and Service tax after the
date of submission of the last price bid /price implication, the OWNER shall
be entitled to benefit of such reduction, remission or exemption in the rate(s)
of the said taxes, which benefit shall be passed on to the OWNER by way of
reduction in the tax component.
However if the new levy (like GST) is levied as a substitute of taxes and
duties existing on the last bid due date, then the implication of the new levy
shall be worked out and the differential amount shall be reimbursed or
recovered by BORL.
37.19 Statutory variation shall be applicable only on CST & MP VAT on supplies,
Excise duty, Basic Custom Duty, Countervailing Duty, Additional Import Duty,
Customs Educational Cess and Customs Secondary & Higher Education
Cess, Entry Tax in Madhya Pradesh, Swachh Bharat Cess, Krishi Kalyan
Cess and Service tax and shall be considered upto contractual period or any
extensions thereof for reasons solely attributable to OWNER. In case of
statutory variations in other taxes and duties, the same shall be to the
CONTRACTORs account without any liability on the part of OWNER.
Notes:
a) For avoidance of doubt, it is clarified that OWNER shall not be liable for any
increase in tax due to any fluctuations or devaluations in the currency
exchange rate.
b) Notwithstanding anything contained herein, in case the CONTRACT period
is extended due to reasons attributable to CONTRACTOR, any statutory
increase in taxes including any increase due to exchange fluctuations shall
be borne by CONTRACTOR. However, any statutory decrease in taxes
including any decrease due to exchange fluctuations shall be passed on to
the OWNER.
37.20 Any errors of interpretation of applicability of taxes/duties by bidders shall be
to their account.
37.21 Notwithstanding the foregoing, OWNER shall not bear any liability in respect
of:
a) Personal taxes on the personnel deployed by the CONTRACTORs,
his sub-CONTRACTORs and Agents, etc.
b) The Corporate Taxes in respect of CONTRACTOR and his SubCONTRACTORs and other Agents, Indian or foreign based.
c) Any other taxes/duties/levies
37.22 CENVAT BENEFITS
Page 103 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 25 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
37.22.1 The classification of goods as per Central Excise/ Custom tariff should be
correctly done to ensure that CENVAT benefit is not lost by the OWNER on
account of any error on the part of the CONTRACTOR. It is the responsibility
of the CONTRACTOR to ascertain the applicable rules and follow the
provisions of the Excise Act/ the Excise Rules applicable from time to time
and in case of lapse in following the appropriate procedure/submission of
appropriate documents, which may result in disallowance of OWNERS
Cenvat claim, the OWNER reserves the right to withhold the payment of
Cenvatable duties as per the provisions of sub-clause no. 37.22.2 below.
37.22.2 The OWNER shall withhold payment of Cenvatable Duties (Central Excise
Duty and/or CVD & AID) and Cenvatable Service Tax & Krishi Kalyan Cess if
the relevant documentation is not made available to OWNER, to enable
OWNER to claim CENVAT benefit for the amount indicated in Schedule of
Prices due to the fact that the item is not cenvatable by nature or by its use,
the item is supplied with wrong classification or wrong documentation etc.
37.23 WITHHOLDING, ACCOUNTING AND TAX REQUIREMENTS
37.23.1 Tax shall be deducted at source by Owner from all sums due to
CONTRACTOR in accordance with the provisions of the Income Tax Act,
1961, as in force at the relevant point of time
Owner shall issue a Tax deduction or withholding certificate to the
CONTRACTOR evidencing the Tax deducted or withheld and deposited by
Owner on payments made to the CONTRACTOR to enable the
CONTRACTOR to claim the credit of the Tax deducted or withheld by Owner.
37.23.2 The CONTRACTOR shall withhold from wages and salaries of its agents,
servants or employees all sums required to be withheld by the laws of India,
and to pay the same promptly and directly when due to the proper authority
(ies). The CONTRACTOR further agrees to comply with all accounting and
reporting requirements under the laws of India, and to pay and bear the cost
of such compliance. Upon request by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR will
furnish OWNER evidence of payment of applicable withholding taxes in India.
37.23.3 Subject to above, other provisions of taxes and duties under Section-VII of
the GCC (General Conditions of Contract) shall also be applicable. Bidders to
consider same in the quoted prices.
38.0
CONSIGNEE
38.1
BORL shall be mentioned as consignee for all Tagged/Untagged Equipments

brought to site for permanent incorporation in the Work.
CONTRACTOR is expected to plan the delivery and flow of tagged
equipments into the refinery premises so that these are directly unloaded on
the civil foundations which are constructed in advance by the CONTRACTOR.
Page 104 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 26 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
In case, it is not possible to do so due to sequential holds etc., then such

tagged equipments shall be temporarily stored within the Battery Limit of the
Plant or under safe storage/warehouse of the CONTRACTOR.
39.0
INSURANCES
39.1
Clause No. 7.4 of General Conditions of Contract stands modified to the

extent that before commencing the execution of work, the contractor shall
also obtain a Comprehensive Erection All Risk Policy and Comprehensive
Insurance Policy covering Marine and Inland Transit Insurance for the total
contract value at his own cost & expense in the joint names of Owner &
Contractor (Owner shall be the first beneficiary). The Contractor shall keep
the Insurance Policy as mentioned above valid till the completion of work.
39.2
Irrespective of work acceptance, the responsibility to maintain adequate

insurance coverage at all times during the period of Contract shall be that of
CONTRACTOR alone. CONTRACTORs failure in this regard shall not
relieve him of any of his responsibilities and obligations under the contract.
39.3
CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with a copy of all insurance

policies and documents taken out by him in pursuance of the Contract.
Such copies of documents shall be submitted to the OWNER immediately
upon the CONTRACTOR having taken such insurance coverage.
CONTRACTOR shall also inform the OWNER at least 60 (Sixty) days in
advance regarding the expiry, cancellation and/or changes in any of such
documents and ensure revalidation/renewal etc., as may be necessary well in
time.
40.0
INSURANCE IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES
40.1
The CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost arrange, secure and maintain
separate insurance cover from the reputable insurance companies, for all
such amounts and for such periods as may be necessary to protect the
works, CONTRACTOR and sub- CONTRACTORs personnel and the
interests of the OWNER/CONSULTANT as per applicable laws of land.
40.2
The form and the limit of insurance cover taken by CONTRACTOR shall be
satisfactory to OWNER/CONSULTANT and one copy of all insurance policies
and related documents shall be submitted to OWNER/CONSULTANT,
immediately on execution.
CONTRACTOR shall inform OWNER
/CONSULTANT at least 60 days before any insurance policies expire or are
cancelled or changed.
41.0
STATUTORY APPROVALS
41.1
Obtaining statutory approvals, required as defined in CONTRACTORs scope

under Technical Scope of Work, shall be the responsibility of the
Page 105 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 27 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall arrange the inspection of the works

by the authorities and necessary co-ordination and liaison work in this
respect. The application on behalf of the OWNER for submission to relevant
authorities alongwith copies of required certificate complete in all respects
shall be prepared and submitted by the CONTRACTOR well ahead of time so
that the actual construction/commissioning of the work is not delayed for want
of the approval/inspection by concerned authorities.
41.2
Statutory fees paid, if any, for all such inspections and approvals by
authorities shall be deemed to be included in the quoted prices, if not
specified otherwise.
41.3
Any change/addition required to be made to meet the requirements of the

statutory authorities shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR free of
charge. The inspection and acceptance of the work by statutory authorities
shall however, not absolve the CONTRACTOR from any of his
responsibilities under this contract.
41.4
All statutory approvals other than specified under 41.1 above shall be
obtained by OWNER and provided to the CONTRACTOR.
42.0
COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
42.1
The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all applicable rules, regulations,

statutes, laws governing the performance of works in India, including but not
limited to the following:
i.
Contract Labour (Regulation & Abolition) Act 1970& the centre

rules1971 framed thereunder
ii.
Payment ofWages Act.
iii. Minimum Wages Act.
iv. OWNERs Liability Act.
v. Factory Act.
vi. Apprentices Act.
vii. Workmans Compensation Act.
viii. Industrial Dispute Act.
ix. Environment Protection Act.
x. Wild life Act.
xi. Maritime Act.
xii. Any other Statute, Act, Law as may be applicable.
43.0
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSE

The CONTRACTOR or its nominated SUB-CONTRACTOR(s), as the case
may be, shall have a valid electrical CONTRACTORs license for working in
the State in which the job site is located. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a
copy of the same to Engineer-in-charge before commencement of any
Page 106 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 28 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
electrical work or work pertaining to Electrical System.

No electrical work or work pertaining to electrical system(s) shall be permitted
to be executed
without a valid electrical CONTRACTORs license
being produced by the CONTRACTOR or SUB-CONTRACTOR, as the case
may be, intending to execute the work.
44.0
LABOUR RELATIONS
44.1
In case of labour unrest/ labour dispute arising out of non-implementation of

any law, the responsibility shall solely lie with the CONTRACTOR and he
shall remove/resolve the same satisfactorily at his own cost and risk.
44.2
The CONTRACTOR shall deploy only duly qualified and competent

personnel for carrying out the various jobs as assigned by the Engineer-InCharge from time to time. The workmen deployed by the CONTRACTOR
should also possess the necessary license etc., if required under any law,
rules and regulations.
45.0
LABOUR LICENCE
45.1
Before starting of work, CONTRACTOR shall obtain a license from concerned

authorities under the Contract Labor (Abolition and Regulation) Act 1970,
and furnish copy of the same to OWNER. The labour license for the
appropriate labour shall be valid for the total contractual period including
extended period, if any.
46.0
UTILISATION OF LOCAL RESOURCES
46.1
The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the availability of local SUBCONTRACTORs and skilled/unskilled manpower and engage them to the
extent possible for performance of works.
46.2
The CONTRACTOR shall not recruit personnel of any category from among
those who are already employed by the other agencies working at the site but
shall make maximum use of local labour available.
47.0
CONTRACTORS LABOURERS TO LEAVE SITE ON COMPLETION OF

THE WORK
47.1
The CONTRACTORs labourers must leave the location of the project site
after the work is tapered/completed to avoid creation of slum in the areas
adjoining the project site.
48.0
WORKING HOURS
CONTRACTOR shall mobilize sufficient workforce, machinery, and
equipments etc. so as to complete the job by working in normal working hours
prevailing at Site of OWNER.
Page 107 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 29 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
However, depending upon the requirement, time schedule/ programmes and

the target set to complete the job in time, the works may have to continue
beyond normal working hours to the extent of round the clock and Holidays
also, for which no extra claim shall be entertained.
49.0
ESI / EPF
The CONTRACTOR shall cover all employees engaged by him or through
SUB-CONTRACTORs under ESI as well as EPF Acts as per provisions of
Acts and shall submit necessary records and returns in proof of compliance
of these statutory enactments. CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and
hold the OWNER harmless from any liability or penalty which may be
imposed by the Central, State, Local or other statutory authority for any
violation of labour enactments or any other enactments, by the
CONTRACTOR or his sub-CONTRACTOR.
50.0
PROVIDENT FUND
The CONTRACTOR shall strictly comply with the provisions of Employees
Provident Fund Act and register themselves with RPFC before commencing
work.
The CONTRACTOR shall deposit Employees and OWNERs
contributions to the RPFC every month. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish
along with each running bill, the challan /receipt for the payment made to the
RPFC for the preceding months.
In case the contractor does not submit the challan / receipt confirming
payment of provident fund made to the RPFC for the preceding month along
with their running bill, then suitable amount shall be hold/retained by the
Owner while processing the payment. Such hold/retained amount shall be
released after receipt of the above mentioned challan / receipt by BORL. No
interest shall be paid by BORL on such hold/retained amounts.
51.0
FUEL REQUIREMENT OF WORKERS

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to arrange for the fuel requirement
of his workers and staff without resorting to cutting of trees and shrubs.
Cutting of trees and shrubs is strictly prohibited for this purpose.
52.0
ENTRY
PASSES,
GATE
AND
SAFETY REGULATIONS
PASSES,
WORK
PERMITS
Entry Passes
The CONTRACTOR shall follow regulations of OWNER for arranging entry
passes for his workers and staff.
Access Control system has been introduced in Refinery to strengthen security
measures. Labour entry is strictly through biometric access. Access Control
Page 108 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 30 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
cards shall be issued to labour for monitoring entry & exit of labour in
Refinery. All labours to be presented to ACS for capturing photo, palm
reading & personal details and entry is also subject to personal search /
frisking and will pass through metal detector then they have to swipe the card
and shall pass through palm readers.
Contractor, on award of job has to complete all formalities of compliance cell
i.e. submission of Form-V to labour commissioner / license to work in the
premises, ESIC/Insurance, PF details etc, complete fire & safety induction
programme, obtain Police clearance & health certificate.
On closure of contract, contractor shall return all access cards issued to his
labours. Nominal fees for access card will be charged of Rs.300/- per card
through bank DD in favour of BORL and Rs.250/- per card shall be refunded
on return of access card.Rs.50/- per card shall be deducted as processing,
printing & stickers cost etc.
The works under this contract are to be carried out in areas within the LPG
Plant area adjacent/ adjoining to the existing operating units. As such,
CONTRACTOR is required to abide by safety and security regulations of
OWNER enforced from time to time.
Gate Passes and Shipping Memos
To bring materials/equipments/tools/tackles etc. inside the plant for
construction work, the CONTRACTOR has to produce
challans/proper
documents to OWNER's personnel at gates. The materials shall be checked
thoroughly by OWNER's personnel at Gate and recorded in their register
before allowing any material to be brought inside the Refinery area by
CONTRACTOR. It shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that
the recorded entry no., date, signature of OWNER's authorised
representative with stamp are recorded on challans/supporting documents
signed by OWNER's personnel at gate during entry. Shipping Memos issued
by OWNER shall be preserved by CONTRACTOR and enclosed while
returning the materials to OWNER.
Work Permits
When work is to be carried out in hazardous areas, hot work permit are to be
obtained before start of work for all the jobs which are capable of generating
flame, spark, heat etc. namely, Gas cutting, grinding, welding, use of any
electrical/diesel/petrol/battery operated prime mover/ machine tools/
equipment/ generator sets/ mixer machine/ drilling machine/ pumps/ crane/
forklift/ truck/ trailer/ chipping/ breaking of rocks/concrete/hack saw cutting
and drilling, etc. Cold work permits are to be obtained for all the jobs.
Page 109 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 31 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
According to the nature of work and use of various types of equipment and
tools the CONTRACTOR has to apply for cold and hot permits in a prescribed
format at least two days before the work is planned to start. No work permit
shall be issued by OWNER unless proper arrangement is made by
CONTRACTOR to ensure safe performance of work inside the plant.
Jobwise and areawise permits shall be issued to CONTRACTOR and
against each permit at least one construction supervisor and one safety
supervisor of required level shall always be made available at site by
CONTRACTOR.
Vehicle Permits
Permits are to be obtained separately for entry/use of vehicles/ trailers etc.
inside the plant. The following requirements are to be met to obtain vehicle
permit:
Vehicle/Equipment etc. should be brought to site in good condition.
Valid Road tax certificate, fitness certificate and insurance policy from
competent authority.
Valid operating/driving licence of driver/operator.
Trailers used at site shall have valid RTO registration.
Hydra with operating cabin behind the lifting boom is not allowed.
Validity of the Permits
Permit is valid for one shift of 08 (Eight) hours.
No permit is valid if it is not renewed by the shift in-charge/shift
representative in shifts (Morning & Evening).
The permit shall be issued for a maximum period of one month and if
extension is required, CONTRACTOR has to apply for fresh permit.
No permit is valid on holidays unless special permission is obtained from the
competent authority.
Safety Regulations
Regarding Work Permit:
The work shall be carried out inside Operating Plant area as per OWNERs
Safety rules and Regulations and instructions of BORL issued from time to
time. Many times it may happen that the working hours shall be drastically
reduced or increased to meet certain safety requirements and
CONTRACTOR shall meet these requirements without any schedule or
financial implications. To obtain work permit and to satisfy all conditions laid
down therein, shall be the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. No claim for idling
of machinery, plant, manpower etc. for safety reasons or non-issuance of
work permit shall be admissible.
Page 110 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 32 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
The CONTRACTOR shall abide by all safety regulations and ensure that
safety equipment for specific job as stipulated in the factory act/safety
handbook is issued to workers during execution of work, failing which all the
works at site shall be suspended.
Regarding Hot work:
When doing hotwork CONTRACTOR must ensure that the fire hose is hooked
up with the firewater system and extended to the work spot. Fire extinguisher
must be kept near the working spot. Area around and below the hot working
place must be adequately protected from falling/coming out of sparks/hot
metals from the booth made of asbestos cloth/sheet and wetting them with
water. CONTRACTOR must arrange sufficient number of fire hoses and
firefighting equipment of approved quality at his own cost to carry out hot job
inside the plant. Welding and electrical cables should be of approved quality,
and no jointing and loose connection shall be permitted. At the end of the
working day CONTRACTOR must inform the Electrical section to switch off
power at sub-station end. CONTRACTOR must provide cotton dress, safety
shoe, safety helmet, safety belt, hand gloves of approved quality to his
workers to meet the safety requirement of various jobs.
Regarding use of Vehicles:
Vehicles shall be allowed to run at site after taking all safety measures with
the permission of concerned authority of site. Vehicle must not ply on any
road within the plant at speed exceeding 20 KM/hr. Mobile crane/loaded
trucks/trailers must not exceed speed limit of 15 KM/hr inside the plant. No
crane is allowed to move inside the plant with load. No vehicle is allowed to
park inside the plant.
Work Permit System:
During execution CONTRACTOR is required to obtain work permit from the
operation department of OWNER. For issuance of work permit, OWNERs
instructions shall be followed.
53.0
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE), MANAGEMENT
53.1
The CONTRACTOR shall adhere to requirement of BORLs established

norms of health, safety and environment (HSE) management in line with
Annexure-IX to SCC. CONTRACTORs will be penalized for any violation
of the HSE norms while executing the work as per provision of imposition
of penalty mentioned therein.
The CONTRACTOR shall also adhere to requirement of Health, Safety and
Environment (HSE) Management Document No-6-82-001, Rev-6 attached in
Technical Part of Bidding Document.
Page 111 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 33 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
However in case of any contradiction among various HSE guidelines

attached in Bidding Documents stringent requirements/clauses shall prevail.
54.0
CHANGE IN LAW
54.1
Change in Law means the occurrence of any of the following after the
Base Date i.e. last date for submission of the Bid/revised Bid, if any:
a) The enactment of any new law in India;
b) The repeal, modification or re-enactment of any existing Indian law;
c) The commencement of any Indian law which has not entered into effect
until the date of signing of the Contract;
d) Change in the interpretation or application of any Indian law by
Government Authority via issuance of circulars/ clarifications or by a court
which has become final conclusive and binding;
e) Increase/ Decrease in the rate of Taxes in force after the Base Date;
f) Change in the basis of computation of Taxes in force after the Base Date,
in such a manner that it has a material effect (positive or negative) on the
Contract.
Notwithstanding anything mentioned above, Change in Law will not include
any change in direct tax laws (which include income tax, corporate tax,
profession tax and wealth tax or any other taxes, duties, levies etc. which
were not declared as included in its quoted price) for which the
CONTRACTOR is the responsible party.
54.2
In the event that the CONTRACTOR reasonably considers that there is a

Change in law as a result of which the CONTRACTOR suffers an increase in
Cost or reduction in net financial burden payable with respect to execution of
the Works , the CONTRACTOR shall give notice to the Engineer-in-Charge
as soon as is reasonably practicable with:
i) details of the Change in Law;
ii) any other information which the Engineer-in-Charge reasonably requires
(including the CONTRACTOR's estimate of any increase or decrease in
the Contract Price incurred by it as a consequence of a Change of Law,
any Variation for making the Works compliant with the Change in Law
and/or changes to the Works Programme that will be incurred in complying
with that Change of Law).
54.3
If the Change of Law requires a Variation or the CONTRACTOR/BORL is

beneficially affected by a Change of Law, the Engineer-in-Charge must within
14 (fourteen) Working Days of receiving the CONTRACTOR's notification
under Clause 54.2 provide a direction to either:
Page 112 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 34 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
i) proceed with the Variation as proposed by the CONTRACTOR or as

deemed appropriate by OWNER; or
ii) vary the Works on a different basis as directed by OWNER; or
iii) not proceed with the Works in which event the CONTRACTOR will be
relieved of its obligations to comply with the subject of the Change in Law.
54.4
55.0
If the Engineer-in-Charge provides a direction under clauses 54.3(i) and

54.3(ii), such direction will be treated as a variationto the extent that a
Change of Law causes the CONTRACTOR to incur more Cost or less Cost
than it would otherwise have incurred, the difference shall be compensated
by OWNER or the benefit of lower Costs shall be passed on to OWNER by
the CONTRACTOR, as the case maybe. The CONTRACTOR shall produce
sufficient proof and estimate of increase in Costs for OWNERs consideration.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY
Neither OWNER/CONSULTANT nor CONTRACTOR nor their personnel,
agents nor any sub-CONTRACTOR shall divulge to any one (other than
persons designated by the party disclosing the information) any information
designated in writing as confidential and obtained from the disclosing party
during the course of execution of the works so long as and to the extent that
the information has not become part of the public domain. This obligation
does not apply to information furnished or made known to the recipient of the
information without restriction as to its use by third parties or which was in
recipient's possession at the time of disclosure by the disclosing party. Upon
completion of the works or in the event of termination pursuant to the
provisions of the contract, CONTRACTOR shall immediately return to
OWNER/CONSULTANT all drawings, plans, specifications and other
documents supplied to the CONTRACTOR by or on behalf of
OWNER/CONSULTANT or prepared by the CONTRACTOR solely for the
purpose of the performance of the works, including all copies made thereof
by the CONTRACTOR.
56.0
REQUIREMENT OF EMPLOYEMENT VISA FOR FOREIGN NATIONALS

All foreign nationals coming to India for execution of Projects/Contracts will
have to apply for Employment Visa only and that grant of Employment Visa
would be subject to strict adherence of following norms:
i)
Employment Visa is granted only for the skilled and qualified

professionals or to a person who is being engaged or appointed by a
Company, Organisation, Industry or Undertaking etc. in India on
contract or employment basis at a senior level, skilled position such
as technical expert, senior executive or in managerial position etc.
Page 113 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 35 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
ii)
Request for Employment Visa for jobs for which large number of
qualified Indians are available, is not considered.
iii)
Under no circumstances an Employment Visa is granted for routine,

ordinary secretarial / clerical jobs.
Bidders are advised in their own interest to check latest Visa rules from
Indian Embassy / High Commission in their country in case foreign nationals
are required to be deputed to India during execution of the Contract.
57.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RADIOGRAPHY & OTHER NDT
57.1
The CONTRACTOR shall carry out the radiography and other nondestructive tests as per the requirements specified in the Annexure-X to
SCC.
58.0
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
58.1
The aggregate total liability of the CONTRACTOR to BORL under the

Contract shall not exceed the total Contract Price, except that this Clause
58.0shall not limit the liability of the CONTRACTOR for following:
(a) In the event of breach of any Applicable Law;
(b)
In the event of fraud, willful misconduct or illegal or unlawful acts, or

gross negligence of the CONTRACTOR or any person acting on behalf
of the CONTRACTOR; or
(c)
In the event of acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR which are

contrary to the most elementary rules of diligence which a conscientious
CONTRACTOR would have followed in similar circumstances; or
(d)
In the event of any claim or loss or damage arising out of infringement of

Intellectual Property; or
(e)
For any damage to any third party, including death or injury of any third
party caused by the CONTRACTOR or any person or firm acting on
behalf of the CONTRACTOR in executing the Works.
58.2
Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for any kind of indirect or
consequential loss or damage including, loss of use, loss of profit, loss of
production or business interruption which is connected with any claim arising
under the Contract
59.0
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA NOT LIABLE

It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the CONTRACTOR
and the OWNER/CONSULTANT that the OWNER/CONSULTANT is entering
Page 114 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 36 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
into this agreement solely on its own behalf and not on behalf of any other
person or entity. In particular, it is expressly understood and agreed that the
Government of India is not a party to this agreement and has no liabilities,
obligations or rights there under. It is expressly understood and agreed that
the OWNER/CONSULTANT is an independent legal entity with power and
authority to enter into contract, solely in its own behalf under the applicable
laws of India and general principal of Contract Law. The CONTRACTOR
expressly
agrees,
acknowledges
and
understands
that
the
OWNER/CONSULTANT is not an agent, representative or delegate of Govt.
of India. It is further understood and agreed that the Govt. of India is not and
shall not be liable for any acts, omissions, commissions, breaches or other
wrongs arising out of the contract. Accordingly, CONTRACTOR hereby
expressly waives, releases and foregoes any and all actions or claims,
including cross claims, impleader claims or counter claims against the Govt.
of India arising out of this contract and covenants not to sue to Govt. of India
as to any manner, claim, cause of action or thing whatsoever arising of or
under this agreement.
60.0
DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BETWEEN GOVT. DEPT. / PSU & PSE

In the event of any disputes or differences between the CONTRACTOR and
OWNER, if the CONTRACTOR is a Government department, a Government
company or an undertaking in the public sector, then such disputes or
differences shall be resolved amicably by mutual consultation or through the
good offices or empowered agencies of the Government.
If
such
resolution is not possible, then the unresolved disputes or differences shall be
referred to arbitration of an arbitrator to be nominated by the Secretary,
Department of legal affairs (Law Secretary) in terms of the Office
Memorandum No.55/3/1/75-CF dated 19th December, 1975 issued by the
Cabinet Secretariat (Deptt. of Cabinet Affairs) as modified from time to time.
The Indian Arbitration & Conciliation Act 1996 shall not be applicable to the
arbitrator under this clause. The award of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
parties to the dispute, provided, however any party aggrieved by such award
may make a further reference for setting aside or revision of the award to
Law Secretary whose decision shall bind the parties finally and conclusively.
61.0
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF MONITORING ANDMEASURING

DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITE
Requirement for control of monitoring and measuring device at Site is
attached as Annexure-XI to SCC.
62.0
62.1
MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Following provisions of General Conditions of Contract Stands deleted
i) Clause no. 6.2 iii) - SECURED ADVANCE ON MATERIALS
Page 115 of 1744

Job No. A702

Page 37 of 37
(108-A269-1010-SCC)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------------
ii) Appendix- B- FORM OF INCOME TAX CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE

iii) Appendix-E- Format for Hypothecation Bond
iv) Appendix-FINFORMATION
CONSULTANTS
FORMAT
FOR
CONTRACTORS/
v) Appendix-G-Details of Cenvatable Excise Duty (SP3)

Certain sl. no. of Index of General Conditions of Contract stands revised as
follows:
62.2
i.
3.36 - Signature of Bidder/ tender by other than individuals
ii.
Clause No. 5.1 of GCC- Second para The Contractor ----------------------provision of a separate toilet stands deleted.
iii.
Clause no. 3.9 of GCC stands modified as follows:

3.9 PRICE REDUCTION DUE TO DELAY
The time allowed for carrying out the work as entered in the Contract, shall be
strictly observed by the Contractor. The work shall throughout the stipulated
period of the contract be preceded with all the diligence (time being essence
of the Contract). The Contract Price shall be subject to adjustment by way of
discount as hereinafter specified, if the Commissioning of Plant is delayed
beyond the total time period till Commissioning specified in the Time
Schedule.
If commissioning of Plant is delayed beyond the total time period till
commissioning specified in the Time Schedule for reasons not attributable to
OWNER, the OWNER shall be entitled to a discount in the Contract Price in a
sum equivalent to % (half percent) of the Contract Price per week of delay
or part thereof, subject to a maximum price reduction of 5% (five percent) of
the Contract Price.
iv.
First sentence of clause no. 4.26.1 stands replaced with following:

The Defect Liability Period for the complete works shall be 12 (twelve)
months from the date of the issue of the Completion Certificate. In case the
Plant is not commissioned and/or performance guarantee test run is not
carried out by the Contractor within 6 (months) after the time period till
commissioning specified in the Time Schedule for the reasons solely
attributable to the OWNER, the Defect Liability Period shall be up to 12
(Twelve) months after the time period till commissioning specified in the Time
Schedule. However, the contractor shall not be absolved from his
responsibilities of completing the entire works in all respects as per the
provision of the Bidding Document.

Job No. A702
Page 116 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
TIME SCHEDULE
(ANNEXURE I TO SCC)
________________________________________________________________________________
Engineers India Ltd
Page 1 of 2

Job No. A702
Page 117 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
NAME OF WORK
TIME SCHEDULE OF COMPLETION
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT FOR REVAMP AND

CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF
BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED (BORL)
AT BINA REFINERY
(Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN4070/1006)
15
Months
for
Mechanical
Completion plus 2 Months for
Commissioning from the date of
Letter of Acceptance (LOA).
Notes:
1.0
The time schedule of completion shall be reckoned from date of award of Contract,
which shall be the date of Letter of Acceptance.
2.0
The time indicated is for completing all the works in all respects as per specifications,
codes, drawings and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.0
It should be noted that the period of completion of all works given above includes time
required for mobilisation at Site, carrying out the works as per the requirements of
Contract documents, demobilisation, preparation of all reports in requisite quantities as
mentioned in the Bidding Document, rectifications, if any, rework, etc. complete in all
respects to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
________________________________________________________________________________
Engineers India Ltd
Page 2 of 2
Page 118 of 1744
QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE

REQUIREMENT OF KEY
CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL
(ANNEXURE-II TO SCC)
Page 119 of 1744
fry
NGINEERS
INDIAA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertaking)
QUALIFICATION & EXPERIENCE

REQUIREMENT OF KEY CONSTRUCTION
PERSONNEL AND PENALTY FOR THEIR
NON-MOBILIZATION
Infer Wgrur chliA4

d vi 3Tra 311-{
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 5
31-4Wa
rr-{
amit-n

PERSONNEL AND PENALTY FOR THEIR NONMOBILIZATION
0
Rev.
No
12.06.2015
Date
Issued as Standard
Purpose
RK
MD
Prepared Checked
by
by
SC
Standards Standards
Committee
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F2 Rev. 0
Copyright EIL All rights reserved
'=1 ENGINEERS
Og aiElf5reg INDIA LIMITED
Page 120 of 1744
k31
(viwn rirave maJoura)
(A Govt. India Undertaking)

NON-MOBILIZATION
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
CV
Curriculum Vitae
EPC :
Engineering, Procurement & Construction
EPCC :
Engineering, Procurement, Construction & Commissioning
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
NDT :
Non Destructive Testing
QA/QC :
Quality Assurance /Quality Control
RT
Radiography Testing
UT
Ultrasonic Testing
Construction Standards Committee

Convenor:
Sh. M Deshpande, ED (Construction)
Members:
Sh. S N Bhatnagar, GM (Construction)

Sh. Rakesh Nanda, GM (Piping)
Sh. Rajeev Jain, DGM, (C&P)
Sh. Janak Kishore , DGM (Projects)
Sh. Ravindra Kumar, AGM (Construction)
Sh. D Jana, AGM (Construction)
Page 121 of 1744
t31
9-ae..1e-IMENGINEERS
III ttileg 4110"; INDIA LIMITED

GON of Intim undertaking)

NON-MOBILIZATION
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.
QUALIFICATION & EXPERIENCE (POST QUALIFICATION)
2.
PENALTY FOR NON - MOBILIZATION OF KEY CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL
Page 122 of 1744
0
-11aeleiffAH ENGINEERS
Et5leg 1410 INDIA LIMITED
-

NON-MOBILIZATION
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 5
1. QUALIFICATION & EXPERIENCE (POST QUALIFICATION)

CATEGORY
QUALIFICATION & EXPERIENCE (POST QUALIFICATION) REQUIRED

Degree or Diploma in Engineering with minimum following relevant experience in
construction:
Resident Construction
Manager/ Resident
Engineer/Site-In-Charge
Contract value (Rs)
< 5 Cr. works
5-20 Cr. works
> 20 Cr. works
Degree holders
5 yrs
10 yrs
15 yrs
Diploma holders
8 yrs
13 yrs
20 yrs
--
Degree or Diploma in relevant Engineering discipline with following minimum experience in

Construction:
Lead Discipline Engineer
(Mechanical, Civil, Electrical,
Instrumentation)
Lead Welding/
NDT Engineer
Contract value (Rs)
< 20 Cr. works
> 20 Cr. works
Degree holders
5 yrs
10 yrs
Diploma holders
8 yrs
13 yrs
Degree or Diploma in Mechanical Engineering/ Metallurgy with the following experience in

Welding & NDT (Non Destructive Testing) and possessing valid Level-II certificate in the
relevant NDT methodology (RT/UT)
Contract value (Rs)
< 20 Cr. Works
> 20 Cr. Works
Degree holders
5 yrs
10 yrs
Diploma holders
8 yrs
13 yrs
Degree in Engineering with following experience (refer Note

Contract value (Rs)
lo
< 20 Cr. Works
also):
> 20 Cr. Works
Lead QA/QC Engineer

5 yrs of construction
experience of which 2 years in
QA/QC
Experience
10 yrs of construction
experience of which 3 years
in QA/QC.
Degree in Engineering with following experience in Planning & Scheduling:

Lead Planning Engineer
Contract value (Rs)

Experience
Safety Officer/ Supervisor
Warehouse- In- Charge/

Materials Manager
< 20 Cr. works

_
> 20 Cr. works
5 yrs.
8 yrs.
As per specification for HSE Management at construction sites enclosed elsewhere in the bid.
Diploma in Engineering or Diploma in Materials Management or Graduate in any stream with
min. following experience in Warehousing/ Stores Management:
Contract value (Rs)
Experience
< 20 Cr. works

_
> 20 Cr. works
5 yrs.
10 yrs.
Degree or Diploma in Engineering with minimum following experience in quantity

estimation, field measuremen , rate analysis, bill preparation etc. in Construction field:
Quantity Surveyor
Discipline Engineer (Including

welding/ NDT, QA/QC and
Planning)
Contract value (Rs)
< 20 Cr. works
> 20 Cr. works
Degree holders
2 yrs.
5 yrs.
Diploma holders
5 yrs.
10 yrs.
Degree in relevant Engineering Discipline with minimum 2 years of relevant experience in

construction or Diploma in relevant Engineering Discipline with minimum 4 years of relevant
experience in Construction. Welding /NDT engineer shall possess valid Level-II certificate in
the relevant NDT methodology (RT/UT)
Page 123 of 1744
1f
kit
Sift!' kiltift
1.1P,1 eircnie ANOITA)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of lode Undertaking)

NON-MOBILIZATION
STANDARD No.
7-82-0003 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 5
Notes: (for Table on previous page)

1. For Mechanical, Composite, EPC or EPCC Contracts of value more than Rupees 20 crores, the
Lead QA/QC Engineer shall be a qualified internal auditor for ISO 9001.
2. CVs of key construction personnel proposed to be deployed shall be submitted to
Owner/Engineer-in-Charge prior to their mobilization at site. The mobilization of key
personnel shall be done at site subject to prior approval of their CVs by Owner/Engineer-inCharge.
2. PENALTY FOR NON - MOBILIZATION OF KEY CONSTRUCTION PERSONNEL
Penalty for non-mobilization per day per person after the contractual mobilisation period /
mobilisation schedule agreed during Kick off Meeting / jointly agreed between contractor
and PMC / owner based on front availability etc.
-
Rs. 5000/- for Resident Construction Manager/ Resident Engineer/ Site-in-Charge;
Rs. 3000/- for Lead QA/QC Engineer, Lead Planning Engineer, Warehouse In-charge Lead
Discipline Engineer, Lead Welding/ NDT Engineer and the Quantity Surveyor
Safety Officer (As per HSE Specification)
Notes: (for Penalty clauses)

a) All intervening off days (Sundays etc.) and holidays will be counted for levy of penalty
b) Mobilised personnel shall not be demobilised till contractual completion or based on consent
of Engineer-in-Charge else penalties as above shall be applied.
c) Total of above penalties shall not exceed 3% of the contract value.
d) The above penalties are over & above all other contractual provisions with respect to
penalties.
Page 124 of 1744
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS
(ANNEXURE-III TO SCC)
Page 125 of 1744
ENGINEERS
lakgINDIA LIMITED
mren ewaire mjvam)
(A Gavt at India Undertaking)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS FROM
BIDDERS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 7
64)(11 Chrlf qui ciall -51-04ff

u tea aliikrrat t ?drift'
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS FROM BIDDERS
Rev.
No
General Revision
12.03.15
04.06.09
Issued as Standard Specification
Purpose
Date
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ

QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared by
Checked
by
SC
Standards
Committee
Convener
ND
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 126 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lft2
(AG'"ind'Undelt6ung)

SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CV
Curriculum Vitae
ISO
MR
Material Requisition
PO
Purchase Order
PR
Purchase Requisition
QA
Quality Assurance
QMS
QMS Standards Committee

Convener:
Mr. M.P. Jain
Members:
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary (Insp.)

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)
Mr. R.K. Trivedi (Engg.)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Const.)
Mr. Tilak Raj (Projects)
Mr. Vinod Kumar (CQA)

Page 127 of 1744
Igar
Oiren
llks
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
'A
Govt
At ' nth' Und"k"V)
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev.
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
Clause
No.
Title
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 DEFINITIONS
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
6.0 AUDITS
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
Page
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
$1g-zg
IA GOVt of
120.2 .I J40.9)
India Undertaking)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 7
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be
met by BIDDER for following purpose:

QMS requirements to be met by suppliers/contractors after award of work/

during contract execution.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word "BIDDER" means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
Owner for delivery of some products (including service). The word is considered
synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2
Project Quality Plan

Document tailored from Standard Quality Management System Manual of BIDDER,
specifying how the quality requirements of the project will be met.
2.3
Owner
Owner means the owner of the project for which services / products are being
purchased and includes their representatives, successors and assignees.
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

6-78-0002
6-78-0003
4.0
Specification for Documentation

Requirements from
Contractors
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL

Unless otherwise agreed with EIL / Owner, the BIDDER proposed quality system
shall fully satisfy all relevant requirements of ISO 9001 "Quality Management
Systems Requirements." Evidence of compliance shall be current certificate of
quality system registration to ISO 9001 or a recent compliance audit recommending
registration from a certification agency. The quality system shall provide the
planned and systematic control of all quality related activities for execution of
contract. Implementation of the system shall be in accordance with BIDDER'S
Quality Manual and PROJECT specific Quality Plan.
5.0
5.1
Page 128 of 1744
faReg
own
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
el
QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

BIDDER shall prepare and submit for review / record, Project Quality Plan / Quality
Assurance Plan for contracted scope / job. The BIDDER'S Quality Plan shall
address all of the applicable elements of ISO 9001, identify responsible parties
within BIDDER'S organization, for the implementation / control of each area,
reference the applicable procedures used to control / assure each area, and verify
the documents produced for each area. The Project Quality Plan shall necessarily
define control or make reference to the relevant procedures, for design and
engineering, purchase, documentation, record control, bid evaluation, inspection,
production/manufacturing, preservation, packaging and storage, quality control at

Page 129 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gavt of India undertaking'

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 7
construction site, pre-commissioning, commissioning and handing over (as

applicable) in line with contract requirement and scope of work.
5.2
BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements
and communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub
contractor's organization for compliance.
5.3
BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for
fulfillment of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work
environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are
maintained.
5.4
BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order.
The quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
Resources
Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are
realized
Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
Records to be generated
Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test
plans (ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder.
These documents shall be submitted to EIL/Owner for review/approval, before
commencement of work.
5.5
Requirements for sub-contracting / purchasing of services specified in contract /

tender shall be adhered to. In general all outsourced items will be from approved
vendors of EIL. Wherever requirements are not specified, or approved sub vendors
do not exist, the sub-contractor shall establish and maintain a system for purchasing
/ sub-contracting to ensure that purchased product / service conforms to specified
requirements. Criteria for selection of sub-contractor, evaluation, re-evaluation,
maintenance of purchasing data and verification of purchased product (subcontractor services), constitute important components of this requirement.
5.6
BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled
conditions. Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product
the availability of work instructions
the use of suitable equipment
the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
the implementation of monitoring and measurement
the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7
BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where
resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement.
This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the
product is in use or service has been delivered.
5.8
BIDDER shall establish a system for identification and traceability of product /

deliverable throughout product realization. Product status with respect to inspection
and testing requirements shall be identified.

ei
lge.ji id5fez
Oren erRRIZ .71.1.113,70
5.9
Page 130 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undettaking)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 7
BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL
property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be
reported to the EIL / Owner.
5.10
BIDDER shall ensure the conformity of product / deliverable during internal

processing and delivery to the intended destination. Requirements mentioned in the
tender shall be adhered to.
5.11
BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are
carried out in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipments
shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international
measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipments shall be protected from
damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12
BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of
contract.
5.13
BIDDER shall monitor and measure the characteristics of the product/deliverable to

verify that product requirement has been met. The inspection (stage as well as
final) by BIDDER and EIL / Owner personnel shall be carried out strictly as per the
ITPs forming part of the contract. Product release or service delivery shall not
proceed until the planned arrangements have been satisfactorily completed, unless
otherwise approved by relevant authority and where applicable by Owner / EIL.
5.14
BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the
product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to
prevent its unintended use or delivery
5.15
All non-conformities (NCs) / deficiencies found by the BIDDER'S inspection /

surveillance staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action shall be
recorded and resolved suitably. Effective corrective and preventive action shall be
implemented by the BIDDER so that similar NCs including deficiencies do not recur.
5.16
All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the
BIDDER and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented.
BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of all such corrective and preventive action
implemented by him.
5.17
BIDDER should follow the standards, specifications and approved drawings.

Concessions/Deviations shall be allowed only in case of unavoidable circumstances.
In such situations Concession/deviation request must be made by the BIDDER
URL of EIL eDMS is
through online system of EIL eDMS.
http://edocx.eil . co . in/vportal.
5.18
BIDDER shall have documented procedure for control of documents.
5.19
All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage
or loss until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract
requirement (Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Suppliers), or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
Copyright EILAll rights reserved
Page 131 of 1744
ei
IftJr
kif51ft.
wirer riraxem3Tmil
6.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of India UndertakIngi

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 7
AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme
shall cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as
applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This
shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under
BIDDER'S own ISO 9001 certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny
by EIL / Owner. EIL or Owner's representative reserves the right to attend, as a
witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL/Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance
and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this
purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
7.0
DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work
(Within one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner.
Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan
Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
Job Procedures
Inspection/Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained
by the BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during
execution of the project.
Quality Manual
Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
Procedure for Control of Documents
Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during
last one year
Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last one
year
Project QMS audit report
Technical audit reports for the project
Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit
any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
Page 132 of 1744
Page 133 of 1744
Page 134 of 1744
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS
(ANNEXURE-IV TO SCC)
Page 135 of 1744

ENGINEERS
101
** el!2RAfi'aA
Meavow INDIA LIMITED
IAIRON
IA GoN. Of India Undeftakingi
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 8
51(t)01
-4-4-<R1
tr-g 1-4-4vr
SPECIFICATION FOR
FROM CONTRACTORS
12.03.15
General Revision
04.06.09
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SC
ND
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Convener
Chairman
Approved by
Page 136 of 1744
k311 ei
51g-a 015teg
1.1FA
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
2IETIN
undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
STANDARD SPECIFICATION
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI
Document Control Index
eDMS -
Electronic Document Management System
FOA
Fax of Acceptance
HOD
Head of Division / Department
IC
Inspection Certificate
IRN
Inspection Release Note
ITP
Inspection and Test Plan
LOA
MOU
Memorandum of Understanding
QMS
URL
Universal Resource Locator

Convener:
Mr. M.P. Jain
Members:

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)

Page 137 of 1744
adaelei m,4 ENGINEERS

$1fgar 051ft
INDIA UMITED
Merl evensmaR3sTWIl
(A Govt of India UndertakIng)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Clause
Title
Page
No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
4.0
DEFINITIONS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4
4
4
4
Attachments
Format for completeness of Final Documentation
Format No. 3-78-0004
Page 138 of 1744
k391-4elei TEED ENGINERS

INDIA EL IMITED
lit15reg,
IA Govt al India Undertaking)
1.0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 8
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Contractors
All documents/data against the Tender / Contract shall be developed and submitted
to ElUOwner by the contractor for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Contractor
For the purpose of this specification, the word "CONTRACTOR" means the
person(s), firm, company or organization who is under the process of being
contracted by EIL / Owner for delivery of some products and services. The word is
considered synonymous to bidder, supplier or vendor.
2.2
Owner
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0001
Specification for Quality Management System Requirements

from Bidders
4.0
4.1
Documents/Data to be submitted by the Contractor
4.1.1
The contractor shall submit the documents and data against the Tender/Contract as
per the list specified in respective Tender/Contract.
4.1.2
Review of the contractor drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility
with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with Tender/Contract requirements,
applicable codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency
noticed during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor without any extra cost or time, whether or not comments
on the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage.
4.1.3
Unless otherwise specified, submission of documents for Review/Records shall

commence as follows from the date of Fax of Intent / Letter of Intent/ Fax of
Acceptance (FOA)/ Letter of Acceptance (LOA):
QMS
Drawing/Document Control Index
Other Documents/Drawings
4.1.4
- 1week
- 2weeks
- As per approved Drawing/Document Control
Index/Schedule
Documents as specified in Tender/Contract are minimum requirements. Contractor

shall submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per
EIL/Owner instructions.

Page 139 of 1744
ei
acs
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
4.2
Style and Formatting
4.2.1
All Documents shall be in ENGLISH language and in M.K.S System of units.
4.2.2
Before submitting the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly entered in each drawing:
Tender Number
Name of Equipment / Package
Equipment / Package Tag No.
Name of Project
Owner
Main Contractor (if work is sub-contracted)
Drawing / Document Title
Drawing / Document No.
Drawing / Document Revision No. and Date
4.3
Review and Approval of Documents by Contractor
4.3.1
The Drawing/Documents shall be reviewed, checked, approved and duly

signed/stamped by contractor before submission. Revision number shall be changed
during submission of the revised contractor documents and all revisions shall be
highlighted by clouds. Whenever the contractor require any subcontractor drawings
to be reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted by the contractor after duly
reviewed, approved and stamped by the contractor. Direct submission of subcontractor's drawings without contractor's approval shall not be entertained.
4.4
Document Category
4.4.1
Review
Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of contractor Drawings/Documents:

Review Code 1
No comments. Proceed with manufacture/

fabrication/ Construction as per the document.
Review Code 2
Proceed with manufacture/ fabrication/

Construction as per commented document.
Revised document required
Review Code 3
Document does not conform to basic

requirements as marked. Resubmit for review
Document is retained for Records. Proceed with

manufacture/ fabrication
Void
4.5
Methodology for Submission of Documents to EIL/Owner
4.5.1
Document Control Index (DCI)

Contractor shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on
PO/PR/MR along with schedule date of submission of each drawing/document on EIL
eDMS. The DCI shall be specific with regard to drawing/document no. and the exact
title. Proper sequencing of the drawings/documents should be ensured in schedule
date of submission.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tra
4.5.2
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 8
Submission of Drawings/Documents
Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal. The detail
guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on following
URL
http://edocx.ei Lco. i n/vporta I
4.5.3
Page 140 of 1744
/A Govt of India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Contractor, the
Contractor shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4
Details of Contact Persons of Contractor

After placement of order contractor shall assign a Project Manager for that order. The
details are to be filled online through the portal. The details include e-mail address,
mailing address, telephone nos., fax nos. and name of Project Manager. All the system
generated emails pertaining to that order shall be sent to the assigned Project
Manager.
4.5.5
Schedule and Progress Reporting

Contractor shall submit monthly progress report and updated procurement,
engineering and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) every month. First report
shall be submitted within 2 weeks from FOA/LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL/Owner
can ask for report submission as required on weekly/fortnightly/adhoc basis depending
upon supply status and contractor shall furnish such reports promptly without any price
implication. Format for progress report shall be submitted by the contractor during
kick off meeting or within one week of receiving FOA/LOA, whichever is earlier.
4.5.6
Quality Assurance Plan/Inspection and Test Plan

Inspection and test plans attached if any, to the tender are generic and indicative only.
Immediately after receipt of the order, contractor shall submit within one week of
receiving FOA/LOA, job specific ITPs based on the indicative ITPs. Further, contractor
shall also submit Quality Assurance Plan for project activities in the scope of contract,
starting from manufacturing to handing over/ commissioning, these plans shall
cover/identify the activities, relevant procedure, if any, code of conformance,
resources for performance and checking/monitoring, approval requirements and
authority, records to be generated and audit scope by EIL/Owner.
For EPCC/LSTK/Package contracts, the contractor shall prepare a list of items/
equipments and their inspection categorization plans for all items included in the scope
of supply immediately after receipt of order and obtain approval for the same from EIL.
The items shall be categorized into different categories depending upon their criticality
for the scope of inspection of TPIA and/or EIL.
4.5.7
Inspection Release Note (IRN)/ Inspection Certificate (IC)

Contractor shall ensure that all documents viz. documents reviewed, manufacture's
test certificate etc., mentioned in Inspection Release Note(IRN), issued by EIL/third
party against the materials supplied by contractor., are sent to EIL along with the IRN.
IRN/ IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector/ third party inspection agency only after all
the drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted and are accepted under review
code-1 & code R. Material/Equipments dispatch from contractor's/sub vender's works
shall not commence till above condition is met.
Page 141 of 1744
Ogof
IOM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0,1.I
(A Govt W
Indio Undertalung)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 8
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or withholding of payment as per conditions of Tender/Contract.
4.6
Final Documentation
4.6.1
As built Drawings
Shop/Site changes made by contractor after approval of drawings under 'Code 1' by
EIL and deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard
copies of drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the contractor. These
'As-built' drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/Site
engineer/TPIA also. Format for completeness of final documents (Format No. 3-780004) is attached with this specification. Contractor shall prepare scanned images
files of all marked up 'As built' drawings. Simultaneously contractor shall
incorporate the shop/site changes in the native soft files of the drawings also.
4.6.2
As built Final Documents

As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in Tender/Contract.
4.6.3
Packing/Presentation of Final Documents

Final Documents shall be legible photocopies in A4, A3 size only. Drawings will be
inserted in plastic pockets (both sides transparent, sheet thickness minimum 0.1 mm)
with an extra strip of 12 mm wide for punching so that drawings are well placed.
Final Documentation shall be bound in hard board plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x
315 mm (10 1 /2 inch x 12 1 /2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of
several volumes and each volume shall have a volume number, index of volumes and
index of contents of that particular volume. Where numbers of volumes are more,
90mm thickness can be used. Each volume shall have top PVC sheet of minimum
0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder cover and will have 2 lever clips. In
case of imported items documents, 4 lever clip shall also be accepted. All four corners
of folders shall be properly metal clamped. Indexing of contents with page numbering
must be incorporated by contractor. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall not be
acceptable. As mentioned above, books should be in hard board plastic folders with
sheets punched and having 2/4 lever clips arrangement.
Each volume shall contain on cover a title block indicating Tender No., name of project,
name of customer, package equipment tag no. & name (if applicable). Each volume
will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book. These spines
will also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume number (say 11
of 15) etc.
4.6.4
Submission of Soft copies

Contractor shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of
drawings/documents, along with proper index.
In addition to hard copies, contractor shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering
soft copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
computer, scanned images of all important documents (not available as soft files), all
relevant catalogues, manuals available as soft files (editable copies of drawings/text
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data PDF files
can be furnished).
All the above documents shall also be uploaded on the EIL eDMS portal.
Page 142 of 1744
laraeles ENGINEERS
Ogell 22-eg W INDIA LIMITED

4.6.5
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 8
Completeness of Final Documentation
Contractor shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL/TPIA and
attach the Format for Completeness of Final Documentation (Format No. 3-78-0004)
duly signed by EIL or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.
Page 143 of 1744

fEr) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali 4,30.0
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL
DOCUMENTATION
(A Gort of hula Undertakog)
COMPLETENESS OF FINAL DOCUMENTATION
Name of Supplier/Contractor
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Purchase Requisition No./
Tender No.
Rev. No. :
Name of the Work/

Equipment
Tag. No.
Supplier's/ Contractor's
Works Order No.
Certified that the Engineering Documents/ Manufacturing & Test Certificates submitted by the
supplier are complete in accordance with the Vendor Data Requirements of Purchase
Requisition.
Signature
Signature
Date
Date
Name
Name
Designation
Designation
Department
Department
Supplier/Contractor
EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi .
4/ Name: ......... .. . ......
...........
.....
..................
f4-41--/ Date: ..... .... ......

Format No. 3-78-0004, Rev. 1/ 12.03.2015
Page 144 of 1744
Page 145 of 1744
Page 146 of 1744
Page 147 of 1744
31

ENGINEERS
ligar lafgesW INDIA LIMITED
(411W1 292,51V MIJ10571)
Govt o India Undertalongj
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 8
irewufat
*mat t feitu
affr
74ER
SPECIFICATION FOR
FROM SUPPLIERS
C)(415----2
1
12.03.15
General Revision
04.06.09
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SC
SCT
Standards
Comm ifte
Convener
ND
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 148 of 1744
(t,ft. ENGINEERS
1i laWGNIIY INDIA LIMITED

ogire,
efiTIWAnowAl
(A Govt of Into Undertaking(
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI -
eDMS -
FOA
Fax of Acceptance
HOD
IC
IRN
ITP
LOA
MOU
MR
PO
Purchase Order
PR
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
QMS
TPIA
Third Party Inspection Agency
URL

Convener:
Mr. M.P. Jain
Members:

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)
ei
Oaez idiWIeg
Page 149 of 1744
011E71 ewaxedaagem)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Clause
No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
Title
Page
SCOPE
DEFINITIONS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4
4
4
4
Attachments
Page 150 of 1744
dol
5'gzir
tlf5ltu
I.VOM
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Intha Undertakongt
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 8
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Suppliers.
All documents/data against the PO / PR / MR shall be developed and submitted to
EIL/Owner by the suppliers for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Supplier
For the purpose of this specification, the word "SUPPLIER" means the person(s),
firm, company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
synonymous to bidder, contractor or vendor.
2.2
Owner
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0001

from Bidders
4.0
4.1
Documents/Data to be Submitted by the Supplier
4.1.1
The Supplier shall submit the documents and data against the PO/PR/MR as per the
list given in respective PO/PR/MR.
4.1.2
Review of the supplier drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility with
basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the supplier of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with PR requirements, applicable
codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency noticed
during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly corrected
by the supplier without any time and cost implications, irrespective of comments on
the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage or not.
4.1.3

- 1 week
QMS
Drawing/Document Control Index - 2 weeks
Index/Schedule
4.1.4
Documents as specified in PO/PR/MR are minimum requirements. Supplier shall

submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
Page 151 of 1744
'7f 11
I OfiTt cYeawlnn
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India UndenakIngi
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Before forwarding the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly mentioned in each drawing:
Purchase Requisition Number
Name of Project
Client
43 Review and Approval of Documents by Supplier
4.3.1

signed/stamped by supplier before submission. Revision number shall be changed
during submission of the revised supplier documents and all revisions shall be
highlighted by clouds. Whenever the supplier require any sub-supplier drawings to be
reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted by the supplier after duly reviewed,
approved and stamped by the supplier. Direct submission of sub-supplier's drawings
without contractor's approval shall not be entertained.
4.4 Document Category

4.4.1
Review Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of supplier Drawings/Documents:
Review Code 1

fabrication as per the document.
Review Code 2
Proceed with manufacture/fabrication as per

commented document. Revised document
required.
Review Code 3

Document is retained for Records. Proceed

with manufacture/fabrication.
Void
4.5
4.5.1

Supplier shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on
date of submission.

r1.7
-14
51g-a feff5leg
1.17,124ifflsrefloJOORI1
4.5.2
IA GUN. of India Undertaking,
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 8
Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal as per DCI.
The detail guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on
following URL
http://edocx.eil.co.in/vportal
4.5.3
Page 152 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Supplier, the
Supplier shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4
Details of Contact Persons of Supplier

After placement of order supplier shall assign a Project Manager for that order. The
Manager.
4.5.5

Supplier shall submit monthly progress report and updated procurement, engineering
and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) every month, beginning within 2 weeks
from FOA/LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL/Owner can ask for report submission as
required on weekly/fortnightly/adhoc basis depending upon supply status and supplier
shall furnish such reports promptly without any price implication. Format for progress
report shall be submitted by the Supplier during kick off meeting or within one week of
receiving FOA/LOA, whichever is earlier.
4.5.6

Inspection and test plans (ITP) attached if any, to the MR/PR are to be followed.
However for cases wherein ITPs have not been attached with MR/PR, Supplier shall
submit within one week of receiving FOA/LOA, the Quality Assurance Plan for
manufacturing, covering quality control of critical bought out items/materials,
inspection & testing at various stages of production, quality control records and site
assembly & testing as may be applicable to the specific order and obtain approval
from concerned Regional procurement Office of EIL/third party inspection agency, as
applicable.
For Package equipment contracts, the supplier shall prepare a list of items/
equipments and their inspection categorization plan for all items included in the scope
of supply immediately after receipt of order and obtains approval for the same from
EIL. The items shall be categorized into different categories depending upon their
criticality for the scope of inspection of TPIA and/or EIL.
4.5.7

IRN/ IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector/ third party inspection agency on the basis of
successful inspection, review of certificates as per specifications & agreed quality plan
(as applicable) and only after all the drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted
and are accepted under review code-1 or code R. Supplier shall ensure that necessary
documents/manufacturing and test certificates are made available to EIL/TPIA as and
when desired.

Page 153 of 1744
0151jeg
Ogell
1.127, owtore o43frosso
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Unclettalong)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 8
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or withholding of payment as per conditions of PO/PR/MR.
4.5.8
Transportation Plan
Transportation Plan for Over Dimensional Consignments (ODC), if any, shall be
submitted within 2 weeks of receiving FOA/LOA, for approval. Consignment with
parameters greater than following shall be considered as over dimensional.
Dimensions: 4 meters width x 4 meters height x 20 meters length
Weight
: 32 MT
4.6
Final Documentation
4.6.1
As Built Drawings
Shop changes made by Supplier after approval of drawings under `Code 1' by EIL and
deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard copies of
drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the supplier. These 'As-built'
drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/ TPIA also. Supplier shall
prepare scanned images files of all marked up 'As built' drawings. Simultaneously
Supplier shall incorporate the shop changes in the native soft files of the drawings
also.
4.6.2
As Built Final Documents

As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in PO/PR/MR.
4.6.3

Final Documentation shall be bound in Hard board Plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x
315 mm (101 /2 inch x 12 1 /2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of
index of contents of that particular volume. Where number of volumes are more,
0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder cover and will have 2 lever clip. In
must be incorporated by supplier. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall not be
Each volume shall contain on cover a Title Block indicating package Equipment Tag
No. & Name, PO/Purchase Requisition No., Name of Project and Name of Customer.
Each volume will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book.
These spines will also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume
number (say 11 of 15) etc.
4.6.4
Submission of Soft Copies

Supplier shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of

Copyright EILAIL rights reserved
Page 154 of 1744
lig
(L:ED'D ENGINEERS
C,'
INDIA UMITED
ar idf5les
I MT
riernfO7IJOCFAI
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
SUPPLIERS
No.
6-78-0003 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 8
In addition to hard copies, Supplier shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering soft
copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data, PDF files
can be furnished).
4.6.5

Supplier shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIUTPIA and
duly signed by EIL Inspector or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.

Page 155 of 1744

fEr) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali 4,30.0
DOCUMENTATION
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Tender No.
Rev. No. :
Name of the Work/

Equipment
Tag. No.
Works Order No.
Requisition.
Signature
Signature
Date
Date
Name
Name
Designation
Designation
Department
Department
Supplier/Contractor
EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi .
4/ Name: ......... .. . ......
...........
.....
..................
f4-41--/ Date: ..... .... ......

Format No. 3-78-0004, Rev. 1/ 12.03.2015
Page 157 of 1744
ANNEXURE-II
CONTRACT CLAUSE FOR ACCEPTANCE OF CEMENT MANUFACTURERS
1. Cement manufacturers having valid BIS certificate and listed in the BIS website as on date of
procurement of cement shall be allowed for supply of cement and contractor shall procure
cement from them with prior intimation to Engineer-in-charge.
2. Test after receipt of cement at site: Each batch of cement (week wise as mentioned on cement
bags) supplied by the contractor after delivery at site shall be subjected to the tests and
analysis required by the relevant Indian Standard Codes. The contractor shall carry out and
bear the cost of all tests and analysis to ensure quality of cement before using in actual works.
Page 159 of 1744
Page 160 of 1744
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE

AND
(ANNEXURE-VI TO SCC)
Page 161 of 1744
$fg-ar
,>iwn
STANDARD No.
CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE AND

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
311
Jw9.-11
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
IA Govt ot Intlia UndertakIng)
ffl"ilaT V"4'
2Tg'
j .04"
1
24.01.2014
Reaffirmed & Issued as Standard
SM
DJ
21.05.2008
Doc. No. 6-10-0001 Rev 0 has been revised

and issued as Standard
AS
GKI
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
RKD
Checked
by
XN"fr..
SC
SCB
VC
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 162 of 1744
011eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED RECONCILIATION OF MATERIALS
IA Govt of Indta Undertakingt
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
MS
Mild Steel
OFC
Optical Fibre Cable
OTDR
Optical Time Domain Report

Convenor:
Sh. RK Das, ED (Construction)
Members :
Sh. M Deshpande, GM (Construction)

Sh. M Natarajan, GM (C&P)
Sh. S Mukherjee, DGM (Construction)
Sh. Janak Kishore, DGM (Projects)
Page 163 of 1744
01
*
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Indo Undertakmg)

STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE OF MATERIALS
2.0 RETURN OF UNUSED MATERIAL/ SCRAP
3.0 CEMENT
4.0 REINFORCEMENT BARS /STRUCTURAL STEEL/PLATES
5.0 PIPING MATERIALS
6.0 EQUIPMENTS
7.0 CABLES
8.0
LINE PIPES
9.0 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE
10.0 OFC JOINTING KITS
Page 164 of 1744
J11
$garfffl
Erdg
1.12,1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Underlakingt

STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
1.0 CONDITIONS FOR ISSUE OF MATERIALS

Whenever any material is issued by Owner, following conditions for issue of material in
addition to other conditions specified in the contract shall be applicable:
1.1
Necessary indents shall be raised by the Contractor as per procedure laid down by the
Engineer-in-Charge from time to time, when the materials are required for incorporation in
permanent works.
1.2
Materials shall be issued only for permanent works and not for temporary works, enabling
works etc. unless specifically approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
1.3
The Contractor shall bear all other cost including lifting, carting from issue points to work
site/Contractor's store, custody and handling etc. and return of surplus/serviceable scrap
materials to Owner's storage points to be designated by the Engineer-in-Charge. No separate
payment for such expenditure shall be made.
1.4
No material shall be allowed to be taken outside the plant without a gate pass.
1.5
The Contractor shall be responsible for proper storage, preservation and watch & ward of
the materials.
2.0 RETURN OF UNUSED MATERIAL/ SCRAP

2.1
All unused/scrap materials shall be the property of the Owner and shall be returned in good
and acceptable condition category wise by the Contractor at his own cost to Owner's Store(s).
2.2
No credit shall be given to the Contractor for return of scrap. The Contractor should quote the
rates accordingly. Contractor shall make his own arrangements for weighing the cut offs to be
returned to Owner's stores.
2.3
In case the Contractor fails to return unused materials/ accountable scrap, then recovery for
such quantity of materials, not returned by the Contractor shall be affected at following penal
rates from the Contractor's bilis or from any other dues of the Contractor to the Owner:
S.
No.
Material
(a)
Penal rate for non return of accountable scrap
(b)
Penal rate for return of serviceable materials in

excess of permitted % allowances
(c)
Penal rate for issuance of unplanned OFC jointing

kits
(a)
Penal rates for non return of Unused material and

or penal rate for generating scrap in excess of
permitted % allowances
(b)
Penal rate for using excess amount of materials

like cement than permitted % allowances
1.
2.
NOTE : 1)
Penal Rates
Issue Rate + 25%

or
Landed Rate + 25%
(in case issue rate are not
indicated in the contract)
Twice the Issue Rates
or
Twice the Landed Rates
(in case Issue Rates are
not indicated in the
Contract)
Landed Rate shall be arrived from the latest Purchase Order of respective
material received at site by Owner/EIL.
Page 165 of 1744
5fg-ar 2154--cg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of IndO Undenak.g)
2)
STANDARD No.

7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
In case more stringent penal rates have been indicated elsewhere in the
Contract (based on Project requirement), the same shall supersede the above
rates.
3.0 CEMENT
3.1
Cement as received from cement Manufacturer/Stockists shall be issued to the Contractor.

The theoretical weight of cement in each bag for issue purpose shall be considered as 50 Kg or
20 bags per MT. However, cement bags weighing upto 4% less shall be accepted by the
Contractors and charged for as full bag.
3.2
The Contractor is required to submit the design mix for different grades of concrete, keeping
in view the requirements stipulated in IS:456 and IS 10262, specifically regarding durability,
slump and water cement ratio and specific gravity of materials brought to site as analyzed in
the laboratories. The design shall be based upon absolute volume method and theoretical
consumption of cement shall be worked out on this basis. For other than concrete items, the
coefficients for consumption of cement shall be adopted as per CPWD practice.
3.3
The permissible variation between Cement actually used on the job and theoretical
consumption worked out on the basis stipulated in above para 3.2 and as determined by
Engineer-in-Charge shall be 3% (Three percent only).
If the actual consumption is more than 103% of the theoretical consumption, then recovery at
the penal rates for the quantity of cement beyond the limit of 103% of theoretical consumption
shall be affected as per clause 2.3 above.
3.4
Unused quantity of cement shall be returned by the Contractor to the Owner's stores in good
condition only.
3.5
The Contractor shall maintain a good store for storing cement issued to him. The flooring of
the storage house, the clearances of cement bags from the side walls/ floor & stack height etc.
shall be as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.6
The contractor shall maintain a Cement Register in prescribed format and update the entries
on daily basis.
3.7
The cement store shall be offered for inspection and verification by the Engineer-in-Charge or
his authorized representative at any time when the Engineer-in-Charge feels the need to do so.
3.8
Empty cement bags shall be the property of the Contractor and shall have to be disposed off
by him.
4.0 REINFORCEMENT BARS / STRUCTURAL STEEL / PLATES

4.1
The scrap allowance for the reinforcement bars/structural steel including steel plate issued by
the Owner, shall be total 3% (2.5% accountable and 0.5% unaccountable) of the actual
consumption as incorporated in the works.
4.2
All serviceable reinforcement bars/structural steel/steel plates shall be issued in available

length/shapes/sizes and no claims for extra payment on account of issue of non-standard
lengths/shapes/sizes and bending etc. shall be entertained. Reinforcement bars and structural
steel shall be issued on weighment basis as per normal warehousing practice. In exceptional
circumstances, the reinforcement bars/ structural steel, if issued on linear measurement, the IS
coefficients for unit weight shall be considered. For the purpose of billing and accounting,
only linear measurements shall be taken and weight shall be calculated as per IS coefficients
in three decimals. The difference in unit weight as per IS and actual as issued, if any, shall be
Page 166 of 1744
$Igu
g
--,112-,,-,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ot Ind(o Itoeonotoo9)

STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
to Contractor's account and Contractor is deemed to have considered the same at the time of
bidding.
4.3
Reinforcement bars/structural steel/steel plates shall be issued only for those items where
Owner's supply has been specifically mentioned in Schedule of Rates/ Scope of Supply. The
storage of these items shall be done in such a way so as to avoid rusting/ damage to any kind
to the materials.
4.4
All reinforcement bars/structural steel (except M.S. Plates) in length of 2 meters and above
shall be considered as serviceable materials provided the material is in good and acceptable
condition. Reinforcement bars/structural steel section (except M.S. Plates) in lengths less than
2M shall be treated as scrap.
The contractor shall strive to avoid generation of cut pieces of length 2m and above, as far as
practicable, by effectively planning & executing the construction works.
4.5
For the purpose of accounting of the plates, all plates measuring not less than 1 Sq.m in area
and having any dimensions not less than 200mm when returned to Owner's store, shall be
considered as serviceable material. All other pieces shall be treated as wastage/scrap. The
Contractor shall prepare a plate cutting diagram in such a way that the minimum scrap is
generated. Also the cut plates should be used at proper places to reduce the scrap.
4.6
The serviceable cut pieces as mentioned in 4.4 & 4.5 above shall be considered as unused
material for reconciliation purpose.
4.7
Material appropriation shall be done and wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as
per clause 2.3 above shall be affected from the contractor.
5.0 PIPING MATERIALS

5.1
All serviceable pipes shall be issued in available lengths/shapes and no claims for extra
payments on account of issue of non-standard length & shape shall be entertained. Pipes shall
be issued on linear measurement basis. All valves, flanges, fittings etc. shall be issued on
number(s) basis. Contractor shall store the materials in such a way so as to avoid mixing of
different types of material and shall maintain complete identification and traceability at all
times.
5.2
The scrap allowance for pipes issued by the Owner shall be 3% (2.5% accountable + 0.5%
unaccountable) of the actual consumption as incorporated in the works.
5.3
All pipes in length of 2 meters and above shall be considered as serviceable material provided
the material is in good and acceptable condition and has clear identification and traceability
(Manufacturer's name, heat number/batch number and test certificates). Pipes in lengths less
than 2M shall be treated as scrap.
5.4
All unused/scrap pipes, valves, flanges, forged fittings like elbows, reducers tees shall be
returned by the Contractor category wise duly cleaned, greased and spec. marked at his own
cost to Owner's stores.
5.5
Page 167 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,31 --1
ft2s
(~ C1,01,,
1,
1 .345n.
(A Govt of Indo undertakmg)

STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
6.0 EQUIPMENTS
Various equipment/materials intended for the installation shall be received by Owner in
unpacked, skid mounted, crated, packed or loose condition and shall be stored in the
warehouses and open yards. In general, materials shall be issued to the Contractor in às
received' condition. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to draw, load and transport all
materials from Owner's designated places of issue to the point of installation and return all
packing materials like steel frames, wooden boxes/scrap etc. to Owner's stores.
All materials supplied by the Owner shall be duly protected by the Contractor at his own cost
with appropriate preservative like primer, lacquer coating, grease etc. as required.
7.0 CABLES
Appropriation of cables shall be done as follows:
7.1
Al1 the surplus and serviceable cables out of the cables quantity(ies) issued by the Owner to
the Contractor shall be returned by the Contractor to the Owner's store in good condition and
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.2
The Contractor shall be allowed a cutting/wastage allowance (accountable scrap) of 1.5% for
power cables and 3% for the control cables. This cutting/wastage allowance shall be
computed on the length of cables actually laid, measured and accepted.
7.3
All cables being returned to store should carry Aluminium sheet tags indicating the size &
type of cable. Cables of less than 15 meters length shall be termed as scrap. Cables of lengths
15M and above shall be termed as serviceable material & shall be returned size wise and
category wise to the Owner's store in wooden drums. Cables of serviceable length being
returned to stores in drum(s) shall be accepted only after Megger value continuity test and
physical measurement is carried out by the Contractor to the satisfaction of Engineer-inCharge. Empty cable drums and major packing material (as decided by Engineer-in-charge)
shall be Owner's property and shall be returned to Owner's Store/designated place without
any additional cost.
7.4
While carrying out material appropriation with the Contractor, the above points shall be taken
into account. All serviceable materials returned by the Contractor (size wise & category wise)
shall be deducted from the quantity(ies) issued to the Contractor for the respective sizes.
Scrap generated for power cable and control cable shall also be returned to Owner's store on
Lot basis. Wherever applicable, the recovery at penal rates as per clause 2.3 above shall be
affected from the contractor.
8.0
LINE P1PES
8.1
All bare/ coated line pipes as per Line Pipe specifications shall be issued on linear
measurement basis. The serviceable line pipes shall be issued in available lengths and shapes
and no claim for extra payment on account of issue of non-standard length and shape shall be
entertained. Contractor shall store and maintain the line pipes in proper manner to avoid
mixing of different classes of pipes. Contractor shall maintain complete identification and
traceability at all times. Al1 cut pieces when returned to Owner's storage points after beveling,
shall be considered as serviceable material provided:
a)
Corrosion Protection Coating is intact.
Page 168 of 1744
k5-1
1 2,zi&
Nyry
$1g-ar 22rt~dgb)
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt ol Indo Undettakingt
STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 9
Pipe pieces have pipe specifications, manufacturer's logo/name and heat number duly
authenticated with hard stamp of the authorized inspector as per approved procedure.
A11 cut pieces of pipes measuring less than 2 M shall be treated as wastage/scrap.
8.2
For the purpose of accounting of bare/ coated line pipes, following allowances shall be
permitted:
a)
Unaccountable wastage
upto 100 Km
101 to 500 Km
beyond 500 Km
0.1%
0.07%
0.05%
b)
Scrap (All cut pieces of pipes measuring

less than 2 Meter)
0.25%
c)
Serviceable materials (All cut pieces of pipe

measuring 2 Meter and above)
0.5%
The percentage allowance shall be accounted on the basis of pipe book chainage for main
pipeline.
8.3
9.0 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE

9.1
For the purpose of accounting of optical fibre cable, all cut pieces measuring in length of 40 m
and above when retumed to Owner's storage points shall be treated as serviceable materials.
All cut pieces of cable measuring less than 40 M shall be treated as scrap.
For the purpose of accounting of OFC (Optical Fibre Cable) following allowances shall be
permitted:
a)
b)
c)
Unaccountable wastage
Scrap (A11 cut pieces of cables measuring less than 40 M)
Serviceable material (measuring 40m to 750m)
0.5%
0.25%
0.25%
The percentage allowance shall be accounted on the basis of pipe book chainage for main
pipeline.
Cables returned in original drum (measuring 750m and above) with Optical Time Domain
Report (OTDR) shall be considered as unused material.
9.2
9.3
Page 169 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertaking)

STANDARD No.
7-82-0001 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
10.0 OFC JOINTING KITS

The Contractor shall make a schedule for use of Cable jointing kits and get the same approved
from Engineer-in-charge. The quantity mentioned in this schedule shall be termed as
`planned' usage quantity which shall be issued to the Contractor. However, any jointing based
on site requirements as decided by Engineer-in-charge shall be included in planned quantity.
Any unplanned jointing required to be carried out by the Contractor due to reasons not
attributable to Owner/EIL shall be issued from spare quantity, if available with Owner. Such
unplanned OFC Jointing Kits shall be charged from the contractor at penal rates as per clause
2.3 above.
Page 170 of 1744
Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project

Bharat Oman Refineries Limited
Job Number: A702
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 1 of 9
TERMS OF PAYMENT
[ANNEXURE-VII TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT]

New Delhi

Job Number: A702
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 2 of 9
1.0
MOBILIZATION ADVANCE
1.1
No Mobilisation Advance shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR.
2.0
SECURED ADVANCE ON MATERIALS
2.1
No Secured Advance on materials shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR.
3.0
ON ACCOUNT PAYMENTS
These payment terms shall be utilized only for the purpose of making progressive
payments to the contractor. Progressive Payments shall be released to Contractor
against running account bills duly certified by Engineer-in-charge after affecting
the necessary deductions/recovery if any including interest charges accrued
thereon. The basis for payment against various items shall be below:
4.0
TERMS OF PAYMENT
The basis and terms of payment for various items of Schedule of Lump sum
prices, without prejudice to any other mode of recovery available to OWNER, shall
be as follows:The CONTRACTOR shall submit further breakup for various activities of WORK
for the purpose of billing for each discipline such as civil and structural,
Mechanical, Piping, Electrical, Instrumentation, Insulation, Painting etc. including
breakup
for
Basic
Design,
Engineering,
Detailed
Engineering&
procurement/supply which will be reviewed and approved by Engineer-in-charge
within 60 days of submission of complete document in this regard by
CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall be paid running account bills at stages
of completion of individual item/work, based on the value assessment by
Engineer-in-charge in the following manner after deductions of necessary dues
payable by CONTRACTOR to the OWNER in accordance with various provisions
made elsewhere in this document.
Sr.
No.
1
Category of
Work
Payment Terms
Design &
Engineering
- 60% on submission of drawings and engineering details (as applicable) and

their approval under Code 2.
- 25% submission of AFC drawings under Code 1.
- 10% on submission of As-built drawings, Operating & Instruction manual (as
applicable).
- 5% upon completion of all works in all respect and issuance of
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE.
SUPPLIES:
2a)
Procurement &
Supply
Page 171 of 1744
- 10% on issuance of sub-order and submission of equivalent bank guarantee

valid till completion period plus three months claim period. However, the
bank guarantee shall be released after receipt and acceptance material at
site.
- 75% on receipt of materials at Site / fabrication yard within Project premises.

Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 3 of 9
Payment Terms
- 5% upon successful MECHANICAL COMPLETION of Works.
- 5% upon successful COMMISSIONING of Works.
- 5% upon successful PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST RUN and on
completion of all jobs and issue of COMPLETION CERTIFICATE.
CONSTRUCTION/ INSTALLATION:
3a)
U/G Piping
Measurement in
Running Meter
a. CARBON STEEL PIPES SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR

-
05% on issuance of sub-order and submission of equivalent bank

guarantee valid till receipt and acceptance of material at site plus 03
Months claim period
45% on receipt and acceptance of pipes at site.
10% on fabrication.
15% on NDT, Pre-testing, wrapping, coating.
10% on laying in position, welding, jointing, radiography etc.
10% after flushing, hydro-testing and back filling of trenches.
05% on completion of all works in all respects and issuance of

completion certificate.
b. CARBON STEEL
SUPPLIED
CEMENT
LINED
PIPES
CONTRACTOR
05% on issuance of sub-order (for bare line pipes or cemented line

pipes) and submission of equivalent bank guarantee valid till receipt
and acceptance of material at site plus 03 Months claim period
55% (#) on receipt and acceptance of Cement lined pipe at site.
10% on fabrication.
10% on NDT, Pre-testing, wrapping, coating.
10% on laying in position, welding, jointing, radiography etc.
05% after flushing, hydro-testing and back filling of trenches.

## Further break up of payment schedule, if necessary, shall be

recommended/approved by Engineer-in-charge.
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
3b)
Page 172 of 1744
Structural steel
works
05% on finalization of quantities, plan and submission of approved

fabrication drawings.

Months claim period
50% on receipt and acceptance of material at site.

Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
3c)
3d)
3e)
Category of
Work
Reinforcement
steel
Precast
concrete Item/
Block
Structural Steel
Painting Works
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 4 of 9
Payment Terms
-
20% on fabrication, surface preparation and application of primer coat.
15% on erection, alignment, welding, grouting etc.


Months claim period
25% on cutting, laying and acceptance thereof.

60% on completion of casting work duly certified by Engineer-incharge.
35% on completion of erection, alignment, leveling etc.

95% (##)after completion of touch up/repair of primer and intermediate

coat/coats and final coat.

(##) Further break up of payment schedule, if necessary, shall be

recommended / approved by Engineer-in-charge depending on number of
intermediate coats.
3f)
Composite
items.
Composite items of Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) work inclusive of

Excavation, shoring, strutting, Plane Cement Concrete (PCC), Centring and
shuttering, back filling and disposal of surplus earth in sub-structure:
-
3g)
Composite
items.
Composite items of RCC work in non suspended slabs/pavement slabs

including pedestals, ramps etc.
-
3h)
Page 173 of 1744
Composite
35% on completion of earth work in excavation, PCC centering &

shuttering
45% on completion of RCC
15% on back filling and removal of surplus earth
completion certificate
40% on completion of sand filling, centering, shuttering and PCC

55% on completion of RCC
Brick works in sub-structure

Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
items.
Payment Terms
-
3i)
Page 174 of 1744
Architectural
works.
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 5 of 9
50% on completion of excavation and PCC and receipt of Bricks at

site
25% on completion of Brick works
20% on completion of back filling and disposal of surplus earth
Steel / Aluminium / Glazed Glass / PVC etc. Doors, Windows & Ventilators
-

Months claim period
65% on receipt of material at site

20% on Installation and acceptance
Roofing
-

Months claim period

20% on Installation and acceptance
False Ceiling, False flooring,

-

Months claim period

25% on Installation in position and acceptance
Cladding /Facades etc.

-

25% on Fixing/ Installation and acceptance
Modular Furniture
-
10 % on approval of furniture drawings at least in Code II

25% on Fixing/ Installation and acceptance
The above payment terms will be applicable for Similar items in

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS. The decision of Engineer-in-charge on

Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 6 of 9
Payment Terms
identification of similar items shall be binding on the Contractor.
3j)
Other Civil,
Structural &
Architectural
works
95% on completion of work as certified in progress bill.
05% on completion of all works in all respects and issuance of completion

certificate.
MECHANICAL WORKS
3k)
3l)
Piping Worksfabrication at
site
Equipment
a) Supply, Fabrication & Erection of Piping

-

Months claim period.
45% after receipt and acceptance of material at site.
20% on fabrication including NDT, as applicable.
15% after site erection, field welding, radiographic and other

examination.
05% after providing supports, alignment, providing vents, drains
03% after flushing, testing, draining and drying.
02% after mechanical completion

Machineries (Compressors, Pumps & Misc.)
Erection
45% after transportation from stores / storage points to erection site and
placing in position.
30% after initial alignment, leveling and grouting.
18% after final alignment, shaft alignment after pipe hook-up, dowelling,
initial fill of lubricants, mounting of accessories and completion of piping.
02% after mechanical completion.


Months claim period

80% on completion of erection / installation.
ELECTRICAL WORK
3m)
3n)
Page 175 of 1744
For Supply
Items
For Erection

Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
3o)
Category of
Work
Items
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 7 of 9
Payment Terms
For Items
involving both
Supply &
Erection
15% on testing and acceptance.


Months claim period
20% after erection /installation.
10% after testing and acceptance.


Months claim period

INSTRUMENTATION
3p)
3q)
Page 176 of 1744
For Supply
Items
For Erection
/Installation
Items
a. Items not requiring loop checking

-
93% on completion of erection / installation and testing.

b. Items requiring loop checking
13% on testing and loop checking.


Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
3r)
Category of
Work
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 8 of 9
Payment Terms
a. Items not requiring loop checking
For Items with

supply and
erection /
installation

Months claim period
60% on receipt and acceptance of materials at site.
28% on completion of erection / installation and testing.

b. Items requiring loop checking
3s)
3t)
3u)
Calibrations
Main
Instruments
Miscellaneous
Works
Painting

Months claim period
55% on receipt and acceptance of materials at site
08% on testing and loop checking.
02% after mechanical completion.

80% after calibration.
13% after completion of recalibration during loop test, if any.

95% on completion of work on pro-rata basis as certified in progress bill.

-
30% on surface preparation and primer painting at shop / fabrication

yard.
65% (##) on completion of final painting.
5% upon successful PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST RUN and on

(##) Further break up of payment schedule, if necessary, shall be

recommended / approved by Engineer-in-charge depending on number of
intermediate coats.
3v)
Page 177 of 1744
Insulation/
Proofing Works


Job Number: A702
Sr.
No.
Category of
Work
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Sheet 9 of 9
Payment Terms
Months claim period
3w)
3x)
Page 178 of 1744
50% on supply and acceptance of material at site.
15% after installation of material.
20% on inspection after installation, its acceptance and removal of

scaffolding, if any.

PreCommissioning
&
Commissioning
95% upon successful COMMISSIONING of Works

Performance
Guarantee Test
Run
95% upon successful PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE TEST RUN.
5% on completion of all jobs and issue of COMPLETION CERTIFICATE.
NOTES:
i.
Bank Guarantees mentioned above shall be in the proforma given by OWNER.
ii.
No payment shall be released before receipt of Performance Bank Guarantee as

per the provisions of the Bidding Document.
The above progressive payments are subject to deductions towards income tax
and other deductions as applicable as per terms of the Contract. Taxat the
prevailing rate shall be deducted as per the Indian Income Tax Act. Tax Deduction
Certificate shall be issued by the Owner.
Part completion certificate whenever essential (offloading case etc.) shall be
issued with due concurrence from competent authorities to facilitate release of
Final payment.
Wherever milestone payment has been recommended on receipt and acceptance
of material, the same shall be released against Incoming Material Inspection
Report issued by EIL.
iii.
iv.
v.

Job No. A702

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(ANNEXURE VIII TO SCC)
Refer Document No. A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev. A titled as

Loading & Penalty Criteria for VPSA Oxygen Plant enclosed in
Technical volume of Bidding Document.
Page 179 of 1744
________________________________________________________________________________
Engineers India Ltd
Page 1 of 1
Page 180 of 1744
HSE Guidelines for Contractors
HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

GUIDELINES FOR CONTRACTORS
Page 1 of 33
Page 181 of 1744
1.0 Introduction:
BORL believes that all the manufacturing and related activities should be conducted
in a safe way to ensure the safety of people working in its premises.
It is to be ensured that contractors, who work for BORL, comply with HSE
standards as per the companys policy and observe safe practices & procedures at
work to protect health and safety of their employees and others.
Safety of the contract personnel needs enhanced focus due to constant change of
persons leading to lack of awareness. Statistics and experience show that an
additional benefit from improved HSE performance leads to overall effectiveness in
the execution of contract work.
In particular, the contractor has an independent responsibility for his own HSE
performance. BORL is responsible for clearly communicating its HSE requirement to
the contractor and for monitoring the contractor's performance with respect to
HSE. HSE standards of the contract employees should be in line with the BORL
employees and any violation observed will be dealt with strictly (including
termination of the contract).
These guidelines are applicable to all contracting agencies, O&M operators, other
service providers, etc. who work for Bharat Oman Refineries Limited.
1.1 Definitions:
Owner / Company shallmean Bharat Oman Refineries Limited.
Agreement shall mean the contract agreement between owner and contractor for
activities assigned to the contractors.
Contractor shall mean the person/persons, firm or company whose tender has
been
accepted
by
the
Competent
Officer
of
BORL
or
contractors
legal
Representative/ his successors and permitted assignee/sometimes engaged in job

on verbal instructions, due to exigency/emergency etc.
Engineer in charge shall mean the person authorized by the Competent
Officer of BORL to whom contractor or his/her employees report to for work
instruction.
Contract shall mean the totality of the agreement between the parties as derived
from the contract documents.
2.0 HSE Aspects of the Contract:
In addition to the usual features of a contact there shall be a separate clause
dealing with the contractors compliance with Health, Safety and Environmental
requirements. The sub-contractors if engaged shall follow all the HSE requirements
of BORL applicable to main contractor.
Page 2 of 33
Page 182 of 1744
2.1HEALTH:OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 MEDICAL FITNESS
i.
Before planning the posting of the worker to BORL, the concerned supervisor
shall have a general overview that the person is not physically or mentally
incapacitated for the planned job.
ii.
The contractor shall arrange the medical examination of the workers as per
the BORL policy.
iii.
The contractor shall produce the certificate of medical fitness of the worker at
the time of gate pass application on the format as required by BORL.
iv.
The contractor shall ensure the compliance to the completion of the various
specific medical examinations (SME) as per the BORL policy. At present the
SME is required for the following jobs
Confined space entry (Specify if inert space entry)
Work at Height
Work in SRU
Work in CPP
Work in High Noise Area
Canteen work
Operation of a crane, locomotive or fork-lift truck, or to give signals

to them
Driving (other than specified in clause1.4.7)
Work at White oil gantry or Railway Gantry of BDT
v.
The contractor shall ensure compliance to the Form-32 medical examination

for
Confined space entry ,
Work at Height (>30 Meters)
Any specific job as suggested by Fire &Safety dept.
vi.
The contractor shall ensure that the posting of the workers in the jobs
requiring SME or Form-32 shall be in accordance with the fitness status in
the medical examination.
vii.
The contractor shall follow-up with the workers for the medical
recommendation as suggested on the medical fitness certificate / Form 32.
viii.
The contractor shall ensure timely renewal of the medical certificate, that is
Within one year for:
Periodic Medical Examination for all the workers (if not specified)
Confined space entry (Specify if inert space entry)
Work at Height
Canteen work

to them (age < 45 years)
Driving (other than specified in clause 1.4.7)
Work at White Oil Gantry or Railway Gantry of BDT

Six months for:
Work in SRU
Work in CPP
Work in High Noise Area

to them (age > 45 years)
Page 3 of 33
Page 183 of 1744
ix.
The cost of all these medical examinations (if any) should not be directly or
indirectly recovered from the workers & shall be borne by the contractor
company.
x.
In case of any medical related dispute BORL will be the final authority to
arrive at a decision.
2.1.2 WORKPLACE INJURIES / EXPOSURES

i.
The contractor shall periodically educate, train, motivate & supervise the
workers at the opportunities of tool box talk or during the job on the
possible health hazards, risks involved in the job & the good safety
practices for prevention of such workplace injuries / exposures.
The contractor shall ensure that in case of any such incident, the person is
sent to Occupational Health Centre (OHC) along with his/her supervisor for
the treatment & the documentation.
The contractor shall cooperate, arrange & ensure that:
The injured gets the complete treatment as advised,
The injured gets the medical attention on the recommended frequency at
the govt. approved hospitals / clinics.
The person is brought to the OHC for fitness certificate in all (except the
First Aid cases), for the medical examination & fitness, before resuming the
duties.
The injured gets all required rehabilitative care.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
2.1.3 HEALTH PROMOTION ACTIVITIES

The contractor shall ensure that the workers actively participate in all the health
promotional activities as & when organized / supported by BORL.
2.1.4 Disclosure
The contractor shall disclose any such important medical information he has, to
the medical facility at BORL in writing, if any of his workers has any potential or
recognized significant health hazard to the health of the worker / his colleagues.
2.1.5 IMPROVEMENTS
The contractor shall periodically update his supervisors & the workers about the
prevailing medical related requirements at BORL.
2.2
Safety Guidelines for Contractors/ Sub-Contractors:
2.2.1 Responsibilities
i.
ii.
iii.
The contractor shall be fully responsible for supervision of its personnel to

ensure that they strictly adhere to all applicable Safety requirements.
The contractor shall appoint one of its personnel on the work site as a
Safety Representative.
The contractors Site Manager on site shall be responsible for coordinating
the contractors safety activities.
2.2.2 Alcohol and Drugs

The contractor shall ensure that any time during the performance of the work his
personnel are not under the influence of any alcoholic liquor, drug or other
intoxicating substances.
Page 4 of 33
Page 184 of 1744
2.2.3 Conduct of Contractors Personnel

The contractor shall instruct his personnel to comply with the following:
i.
No one shall enter any part of the complex, including the work site except
for undertaking the work assigned.
Smoking is strictly prohibited. Anybody found smoking would be
immediately removed from the complex. Such a person shall be barred from
working for any other contractor employed by BORL.
ii.
iii.
No fire or naked light, matches, cigarette lighters or any apparatus that can
cause ignition, shall be allowed in the complex.
iv.
Personal Protective equipment shall be used and worn in accordance with

the safety procedure.
v.
It is essential that good housekeeping is maintained throughout the period

of any work, both at work site and around any temporary building. The
working area shall be kept tidy at all times, escape and other access ways
shall be kept clear of objects. Safety equipment shall be kept in an
accessible place. Scrap/surplus material shall be removed daily, cleaning up
only at the end of the job is not considered sufficient. Spillage of oil or
chemical shall be cleared up immediately in view of the fire hazard, slippery
surfaces, toxic substances etc. Appropriate safety precaution shall be taken
during the cleaning up. While returning permit, acceptor will certify
housekeeping and issuer will check the same before signing the permit.
2.2.4 Equipment supplied by Contractor

The contractor shall provide and operate his equipment in compliance with the
BORL Procedures. Maintenance and use of equipment should be as per the standard
practice and it should not create any hazard during the use.
Contractor should
deploy skilled workmen for operating the machine.

Contractors to inspect tools/tackles at quarterly interval and necessary records are
to be maintained as per company format. Engineer In-charge will carry out random
audits to ensure system compliance.
2.2.5 Personal Protective Equipment
i. The contractor/ sub-contractor shall supply following mandatory personal
protective equipment to its all employees & supervisors :
S No.
PPE Type
1.
Safety Helmet
Specification
Quantity
Frequency
EN:397,
Yearly
Quarterly
IS:2925
2.
Safety Goggles
EN:166,
ANSI: Z 87.1
3.
Safety Hand Gloves
Polka Dotted
2 Pairs
Weekly
4.
Boiler Suit
Cotton
3 Sets
Yearly
5.
Safety Shoes
EN-345,
1 Pair
Yearly
IS:15298
Page 5 of 33
Page 185 of 1744
ii. The contractor/ sub-contractor shall also provide following PPEs as per job
requirements such as but not limited to:
S No.
PPE Type
1.
Ear Plug (Ear Muff on
2.
IS/EN/EU
Quantity
Frequency
Monthly
Weekly
IS: 3521
Job Specific
Need Base
EN:166.1.B.3
.9
Job Specific
Need Base
EN-374(JKL) AND
EN-388-CE,
EN-374-CE
1 Pair
Weekly
EN-345
1 Pair
Half Yearly
CE-0493
1 Pair
Monthly
Job Specific
Need Base
Yearly
need base)
EN 352-2,
ANSI: Z3.19,
EN-352-1
Dust Mask
IS:9473,EN149
3.
Full
Body
Harness
with double lifeline

4.
Face Shield
5.
PVC/Nitrile/Rubber
gloves
(For
Chemical/Civil
Jobs)
6.
Gum
Boots
(Civil
Jobs)
7.
Leather
Gloves
for
Welders
8.
Leather Apron
EN-398,
EN-
407
9.
10.
Helmet
mounted
IS:2925 ,EN-
welders shield
166
Chemical
ANSI: Z 87.1
Quarterly
EN-166,
Quarterly
Splash
Goggles (need base)

11.
Over
Spectacles
Goggles (need base)
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
EN-
170, EN-172
The contractor/ sub-contractor shall ensure that the quality of PPEs is

maintained as per BORL guidelines. Contractor/ sub-contractor is
responsible for providing personal protective equipment to their employees
as per above specifications, quantity & frequency.
The contractor/ sub-contractor shall ensure that personal protective
equipment are maintained in good condition and shall be worn as per the
requirement.
All the PPE should be available while working and proper supply to be
ensured by the contractor for routine wear and tear/loss.
Use of PPE is mandatory and any violation of the same shall be penalized.
Contractor shall provide contractors employees with the mandatory
personal protective equipment and the personal protective / safety
equipment as specified in the work permits. The contractor shall also
provide additional PPE, if instructed for safe execution of the job.
Contractors PPE and other safety equipment shall conform to BORL
specifications and sample shall be approved by BORL safety representative
Page 6 of 33
Page 186 of 1744
before procurement. Sufficient stock of mandatory PPEs shall be kept and

maintained at site.
2.3
ix.
Contractor employees and employees of Subcontractors shall wear safety

helmet and coverall of the same color with logo/emblem of the main
contractor.
x.
Contractor employees should be trained in proper use and maintenance of

PPE.
xi.
The damaged PPE shall be periodically replaced with new ones.
ENVIRONMENT:
2.3.1 The contractor shall perform their jobs in an eco-friendly manner and in
consonance with the objective of BORL Environment Management System. The
contractor
shall
inculcate
environmental
awareness
among
their
workmen/personnel and strive for enhancement of systems and skills for
minimizing the environmental impact out of their activities/services.
2.3.2 The contractor shall avoid wastage of water, compressed air, electric power,
steam, etc. supplied to them from owner's source of supply for execution of the
job.
2.3.3 The
contractor
shall
ensure
that
while
carrying
out
Modification/Repair/Replacement jobs of any equipment or pipeline, the spillage
of Hydrocarbon, Oily Sludge etc. are cleaned and routed to nearby OWS, at
regular interval as well as after completion of jobs.
2.3.4 Before attending any blinding/de-blinding jobs, during pipeline transfer operation
all tools, tackles &spares shall be kept ready at site in order to minimize
Hydrocarbon spillage.
2.3.5 Should there be a discharge or escape of appreciable quantity of pollutants or
contaminants during performance of its obligations under this Contract which
occurs as a result of activities of Contractor or its sub-Contractor, the Contractor
shall immediately take all action necessary to contain, control, recover or
disperse the substance and to eliminate the safety and environmental risks and
correct the damage resulting there from.
2.3.6 The contractor shall clear and level the work site and remove all metallic and
nonmetallic surplus materials, scrap, debris and other waste materials generated
out of his job, from time to time as well as after completion of job. The
contractors shall not throw away cut gaskets, used electrode pieces, hand
gloves, cotton bags, polythene bags, etc., into open channel drains or pipelines
system. They are to be collected and to be deposited in bins/waste collectors
earmarked for the purpose or disposed off in the areas as per the direction of
Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor is responsible for keeping his place neat and
clean. Also all temporary office shall be maintained in a healthy and hygienic
condition.
2.3.7 Contractor shall return all surplus materials & scrap to the owner's stores.
Page 7 of 33
Page 187 of 1744
2.3.8 Contractor's vehicles, trucks, tractor, cranes and other portable equipment e.g.
Air Compressor, DG Set, Dewatering Pumps etc. used inside refinery premises
(where Hydrocarbon is used as fuel) for execution of the job must be
mechanically sound and have an exhaust complying pollution norms. The
contractor shall ensure to avoid idle running of vehicles and equipment used for
execution of the job.
2.3.9 Special precautions and personal protection shall be taken as per refinery HSE
procedures during the following jobs:
i.
Handling of Hazardous Chemicals, Gases & Materials etc. (e.g. Spent
Catalyst/Clay/Carbon/Resins, Acids, Chlorine, Ammonia, Pyrophoric Iron,
etc.).
ii.
Working in presence of Suspended Solids (e.g. Catalyst, Refractory,

Sand, Dust, etc.)
iii.
Cleaning/handling of Oily Sludge.
2.3.10 BORL, Bina is having "QUALITY, ENVIRONMENT, OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH

AND SAFETY (QEHS) POLICY." Please refer Annexure I. Contractor/ Subcontractor will educate their personnel working inside the refinery w.r.t. QEHS
Policy of the refinery and all out efforts shall be made for compliance to the
above policy.
2.3.11 For contracts related to construction related activities, the contractor to use only
fly-ash based products for building materials and road embankment, such as
cement or concrete, fly-ash bricks/blocks/tiles, clay fly-ash bricks/blocks/tiles or
cement fly-ash bricks/blocks/tiles or similar products in combination or in
aggregate of them in every project in line with MoEF gazette notification.
2.3.12 For contracts related to solid material handling such as fly ash, pet-coke, coal,
limestone, sulfur, etc., the contractor is required to take all necessary
precautions so as avoid the dusts getting air borne or spillages on roads &
drains, etc. during transportation and handling of the same. Precaution during
transportation may include use of enclosed vehicles, proper covering of the
consignment with tarpaulin, water sprinkling, etc. as suitably directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
2.3.13 For activities related to generation & handling of E-Waste, spent lead acid
batteries & contaminated chemical drums the contractor is required to ensure
the handling of the same is carried out in line with related refinery Environment
dept. guidelines.
3.0
ADMISSION TO BORL PREMISES
3.1
ENTRY IN REFINERY PREMISES

CONTRACTOR shall allow only its employees, Subcontractors, and suppliers
directly connected with the work, to enter BORL premises only after attending
necessary safety induction training endorsed by F&S.
Page 8 of 33
Page 188 of 1744
3.2
VEHICLES AND PARKING
3.2.1 Contractor shall furnish transportation for all of Contractors employees from the
designated entry gate to the job site and return. The BORL Representative will
designate the routes and parking areas to be used by Contractor's vehicles in
BORL premises. Contractor shall observe all of the BORLs traffic regulations at
all times while in the refinery and other BORL premises.
3.2.2 All Contractors owned, rented, or leased vehicles or equipment (i.e. air
compressors, generators, welding equipment, forklifts, cranes, etc.) entering the
Refinery and other BORL premises shall be properly identified and has a valid
Safety Certificate and Gate Pass. Only vehicles required for execution of work are
allowed in the Refinery and other BORL restricted premises; all other vehicles
shall be parked outside the Refinery or BORL restricted premises.
3.2.3 A safety clearance from F&S dept. is required to all the vehicles entering in BORL
operational area. The timings of vehicle inspection is from 09:00 AM to 11:00 AM.
3.2.4 The contractor shall comply with all points of checklist given in Annexure IIof
safety inspection of vehicles before coming for inspection.
3.3
TRAFFIC REGULATIONS
All traffic signs, signals, and road markings must be obeyed. Unless otherwise
posted, the speed limit in BORL facilities is 30 KMPH. In all cases, the low posted
speed limit shall govern.
4.0
SAFETY RULES AND PROCEDURES
4.1
SMOKING AND CARRYING OF MATCHES / LIGHTERS

Smoking is prohibited in all BORL Areas. Carrying of matches and lighters into
Refinery premises is prohibited. Violators will be refused entry into the restricted
area and shall be dealt administratively as violation. Contractor shall be
responsible for strict adherence to these regulations by contractors employees or
the employees of contractors sub-contractors.
4.2
BATTERY OPERATED AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS

Non-intrinsically safe battery operated items e.g. flashlights, mobile phone,
pagers, personal monitors, etc. are not permitted inside the operational area.
Electrically operated tools & equipment should be suitable for use as per the area
classification and should be certified by BORL electrical dept.
4.3
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

Contractors shall furnish all portable fire extinguishers and safety equipment
required at construction sites during construction. The fire extinguishers shall be
certified by BORL Fire & Safety dept. and proper tag / sticker shall be provided by
the contractor. The firefighting equipment shall be regularly inspected &
maintained.
Contractors shall not use, alter, or move BORL
Firefighting equipment shall be accessible at all times.
firefighting
equipment.
Page 9 of 33
Page 189 of 1744
4.4
SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS
4.4.1 All scaffolds shall be erected by competent and qualified personnel and shall
conform to requirements of BORL guidelines and safe work practices for scaffolds
and ladders. These requirements include the mandatory inspection, tagging,
approval, and certification of erected scaffold before use.
4.4.2 Contractors scaffold material samples shall be approved by BORL prior to
procurement. Scaffolding should be regularly inspected by competent person &
provided with inspection tag.
4.5
USE OF RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL
4.5.1 Only authorized personnel holding valid Radiation Work Permit License issued by
BARC shall handle radioactive material.
4.5.2 Contractor shall comply with all safety precautions and requirements as specified
in relevant clauses of BORL procedures and guidelines.
4.5.3 Contractor shall ensure that the following basic rules are strictly enforced:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
4.6
The ionizing radiation source shall not be left unattended.

Radiation film badge dose meter shall be used.
The exposure area shall be clearly identified, barricaded by rope or other
effective means and radiation warning signs posted.
Contractor shall coordinate with BORL Inspection\ Instrumentation
Representative to ensure that, the Dose Rate at the barricade does not exceed
0.25 milirems per hour.
Contractor shall ensure availability of radiation meter at work site of
radiography
Contractor shall give 12 hours prior notice to Engineer inCharge Inspection \
Instrumentation before starting any radiography work inside refinery.
COMPRESSED GAS CYLINDERS
4.6.1 Contractor shall comply with the BORL requirements for storing, handling and
using of compressed gas cylinders.
4.6.2 Cylinders which are approved by PESO should only be allowed to use in refinery
complex.
4.7
ROAD CLOSURES
4.7.1 No roads shall be barricaded or blocked in any way without written approval from
the BORLs representative & F&S dept. Use of a flag man is required to direct
traffic around congested areas. Road workers and workers on roadsides shall
wear reflective coverall or jacket.
4.7.2 Barricades, temporary walkways, signs, etc. should be provided for the safety of
pedestrians and roadside facilities. Barriers shall be equipped with reflectors or
lights so that it is readily visible at night.
4.8
VEHICLE / EQUIPMENT SAFETY CERTIFICATE
4.8.1 All vehicles and engine driven equipment entering BORL premises require a
Safety Certificate as such, contractor should meet the following general
requirements:
Page 10 of 33
Page 190 of 1744
4.8.2 CONTRACTORS Vehicle or mobile equipment shall be in good condition and meet
the requirements of Vehicle and Equipment Safety. The number of vehicles/
mobile equipment shall be kept to the minimum essential for the site personnel
and work requirements.
4.8.3 Contractors vehicle or equipment shall be provided with the appropriate type and
size of fire extinguisher certified by BORL Fire & Safety dept.
4.8.4 An approved type of spark arrestor shall be fixed to the exhaust of equipment
and vehicles entering hazardous area. Pool cars or buses shall not be allowed to
enter hazardous area. Mobile equipment, lifting appliances and vehicles to load or
unload material shall only be allowed with work permit and prior authorization.
4.8.5 In addition, contractors lifting equipment shall have a valid load test certificate
from a BORL approved third party. Safety valves on mobile equipment shall also
be third party certified.
4.9 WELDING AND CUTTING

4.9.1 Contractor should obtain a Hot Work Permit prior to any welding works in BORL
premises and all requirements pertaining to hot work shall be strictly enforced.
Only a BORL approved type of Welding Blanket shall be used.
4.9.2 When welding work is carried out in a workshop or any similar location classified
as a permit free area, which is approved by Sr. VP (Mfg.), a work permit is not
required but the work shall be adequately supervised. The work area shall at all
times be kept clean of combustible and flammable material.
4.10
WORK PERMITS
4.10.1 As a general principle, no work in the BORL premises can be carried out unless
authorized by appropriate work permit, except those specified in the BORL
Guidelines and Procedures for Work Permit System. The nature of work may also
require additional permission, such as permission for radiography & Excavation.
4.10.2 Contractor shall obtain appropriate written work permit (and additional
permission if required) through its BORL representative before starting any work
and an approved copy of the permit must be available atthe job site.
5.0
CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT / MATERIALS

i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
5.1
Contractor's engine driven equipment shall be equipped with BORL approved

type of spark arrestor and should be in good operating condition before it can
enter the Refinery and other BORL premises.
All battery boxes shall be covered and all gasoline lines and carburetors free
from leakages.
A current and valid BORL Safety Certificate shall be attached to all engine
driven equipment entering the Refinery.
Operation of engine driven equipment must comply with BORL Rules and
Regulations.
THIRD PARTY TEST CERTIFICATE
5.1.1 Contractor shall secure BORL approved Third Party Test Certificate (before using
any) of the following contractors equipment / equipment accessories:
Page 11 of 33
Page 191 of 1744
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Lifting appliances (crane, boom truck, truck, jig lift, forklift, pulley, D
shackle etc.)
Safety valves on mobile equipment, e.g. air compressor, hydro test
machine, vacuum truck etc.
Cargo tank of tank vehicles, e.g. fuel tanker, vacuum tank or pressurized
tank, etc.
All pressure vessels, e.g. compressors air receiver, SMPV, etc.
5.1.2 And also produces test certificate once in year for all lifting appliance, valve
vacuum tank, pressure vessel, & once in six month for lifts, hoist, man basket
etc.
5.2
FORKLIFTS, INDUSTRIAL TRUCKS AND CRANES

Only persons holding appropriate Driving License may operate forklifts, industrial
trucks and cranes.
Personnel are not permitted to ride/travel on forklifts,
industrial trucks and cranes.
5.3
STORING FUEL AND REFUELING ON BORL PREMISES
5.3.1 Contractor should not store fuel for refueling (vehicles & equipment) inside BORL
premises without BORL Representative approval.
5.3.2 Contractor should not transport fuel on vehicles or containers not approved for
that purpose.
6.0 On-the job Control:

Following tools are useful to ensure the safe practices on the job.
6.1
Safety Supervision:
6.1.1 It is the duty of the contractor to supervise his workmen during the job. The
concerned plant personnel shall oversee the supervision of safety, health and
environmental matters.
6.1.2 It is mandatory that contractors supervisor is present within the plant premises
till the job continues. The contractors supervisor will be in the close contact with
BORL Engineer in charge.
6.2
Safety Inspections and Safety Audits:
6.2.1 Safety inspection and auditing are important means for monitoring contractor
safety.
Contractors Supervisor must discourage unsafe practices by contractor
employees through regular inspection at the work site. The compliance with work
permit system, mandatory PPEs of personnel, the operational condition of safety
equipment and the reliability, use of tools appropriate for the job, serviceability
and maintenance of work tools and equipment should be established by spot
checks. Concerned contractors safety supervisors shall carry out audit of their
facilities and equipment.
It is the responsibility of Contractors to ensure that
necessary action is taken to rectify in a time bound manner.
Page 12 of 33
Page 192 of 1744
6.2.2 Contractor should participate in half yearly HSE audit conducted by F&S
department of BORL. The result of these audits should be used for setting goals
for future improvements and winners should be awarded accordingly. A written
Inspection report shall be prepared and distributed to top management of the
same. The checklist for half yearly audit is as per Annexure III.
6.3
Non Compliance/ Safety Violation:
6.3.1 Whenever the contractor is found to be working unsafe, he shall be advised

accordingly by the concerned plant management and F&S person to take
corrective action. If needed work shall be stopped until the situation is rectified.
Delay in work as a result of such stoppages shall be regarded as a breach of
contractual obligations.
6.3.2 Non-compliance / violation of safety standards by the contractor shall be viewed
seriously by the HOD of concerned plant/ Dept. / HOD F&S.
7.0 Contract Employees Safety Training:

It is the policy of BORL to provide systematic safety training and education to
Companys contractors and transporters personnel for observing safe work
practices.
7.1 Safety Induction, Mandatory and Job Specific Fire & Safety Training:
As a minimum requirement, all the contractors personnel working at refinery
Complex are required to be trained in HSE aspects as detailed below:
7.1.1 Every person will be provided safety induction prior to deployment on work.
7.1.2 Permanent contractor have to fulfill the requirements of mandatory fire & safety
trainings.
7.1.3 Contractor employees will also attend job specific training on need basis.
7.1.4 Further, Contractor nominated safety representative also to train their workmen
and keep a systematic records of training as per details given below:
i.
Date and time of training given
ii.
Name and Signature of Safety Representative
iii.
Name and Signature of individual taken the training
iv.
Periodically contractor workmen training activities will be audited by

record checking and validation at random by Fire & Safety Dept.
7.2
Toolbox talks:
The toolbox talks as a part of continuous training for effective use of safety tips
on the job planned for that day. The Supervisor-in-charge of the Contractor
should give a ten to fifteen minutes talk to the Contract employees. This is the
most effective channel of communication as it takes less time, it is at the work
place and it is covering the immediate job they are handling so they can
Page 13 of 33
Page 193 of 1744
precisely correlate the training while working. Toolbox talk is the right tool to
boost
the
safety
awareness
and
to
improve
the
Contract
employees
participation as it involves a small group where direct contact is established to

make the safety message more effective. Records are to be maintained by
Contractor Supervisor of Tool Box talks. This should also reflect in monthly HSE
report.
8.0
EMERGENCY RESPONSE AND INCIDENT REPORTING
8.1
EMERGENCY RESPONSE
8.1.1 Contractor shall ensure that contractor employees clearly understand their
responsibility for an appropriate emergency response as per the BORL Emergency
Response & Disaster Management Plan through awareness / refresher training
and Safety Talks.
8.1.2 In the event of a major fire/ evacuation, contractor shall move contractors
employees away from the vicinity of the fire and out of the way of firefighting
activities in an orderly manner.
8.2
EMERGENCY SIRENS
There are various sirens to indicate emergency situation in the refinery, as
tabulated below. Proceed upwind, or crosswind if gas release is upwind of your
location, as indicated by wind socks/steam plumes. Proceed to the appropriate
emergency assembly area by the evacuation route as indicated/ communicated.
Page 14 of 33
Page 194 of 1744
8.3
Incidents Reporting:
8.3.1 All incidents, property damage and near miss cases pertaining to contractor
activities shall be reported by Contractor to the engineer in charge and Fire &
Safety department.
8.3.2 Contractor employee, in case of any injury shall report to the plant personnel and
if nobody is available, should rush to the Occupational Health Centre for the
treatment. If further treatment is required outside company, contractor will
arrange for the further treatment. In case of lost time injury or fatality, contractor
is responsible for the treatment and compensation of the affected workmen. The
contractor will not only give information during the investigation of the Incident to
the investigation team but also arrange the witness of the same.
9.o
9.1
Responsibilities:
Responsibilities of Contractor:
9.1.1 To ensure that all tools and equipment used by his working crews are maintained
in good working condition and have been tested by the competent authority.
Page 15 of 33
Page 195 of 1744
9.1.2 Contractor is required to make safety documents and records available to BORL
Representative upon request.
procedures, training
These include, but are not limited to work
records, performance records, environmental records,
licenses, permits, registrations and compliance plans.

9.1.3 To employ adequately qualified, trained, skilled and experienced persons for
specified activities.
9.1.4 To appoint adequate number of supervisors, who will be responsible for
implementing their HSE program.
9.1.5 To take immediate action to correct any violation of safety rules observed or
reported.
9.1.6 To ensure that appropriate warning signboards or tags are displayed on site.
9.1.7 To comply with safety norms lay down from time to time as per requirement of
job.
9.1.8 To keep a constant liaison with Engg-in-charge /BORL representative on safety
issues.
9.1.9 Photography is prohibited in all BORL controlled areas unless authorized.
Contractor shall
BORL
not
take
representative.
representative. Appropriate
photographs
of
the
Contractor shall obtain permission from
BORL
Work Permit
without
shall
be
approval
obtained.
9.1.10 To ensure that his personnel are provided with mandatory personal protective
equipment. Also, contractor should ensure that job specific personal protective
equipment is available to his personnel.
9.1.11 The contractor has to give an undertaking before start of contract on HSE related
aspects as per annexure IV.
9.2
Responsibilities of Contractor Supervisor / Site In-charge of Contractor:
9.2.1 Contractor supervisor is the key person to comply with the HSE standards at work
site. He is responsible for overall coordination of the HSE procedures prescribed
herein:
i.
To facilitate AE/SIC, Fire & safety representative or any other person from
BORL to carry out safety inspections of his site.
ii.
To comply with recommendations given by concerned BORL Officer. All

Contractors Safety Personnel, including designated Safety Representatives,
should make daily inspection of the work area. The inspection should be
routine, planned, and designed to include communications with specific people
in the work place, and not just a visual site visit.
Page 16 of 33
Page 196 of 1744
iii.
To get information from the concerned BORL personnel on hazards associated

with a particular job and to ensure that necessary precautions are taken
during the execution of that job accordingly.
iv.
Contractors job supervisors also should make daily inspection of their work
areas for the specific purpose of correcting unsafe acts or hazardous
conditions.
v.
To take action in consultation with concerned BORL personnel to rectify the

unsafe conditions at work site prior to start of the work.
vi.
When work is in restricted area, to select personnel adaptable to the work at

hand and will ensure that all safety requirements are being adhered to.
vii.
To ensure the use of mandatory PPEs by working crew under his control.
viii.
To review the work area for unsafe practices and conditions and initiate
corrective actions as required.
ix.
To maintain a constant awareness of fire hazards in their area of work

responsibility and to take action to eliminate the fire hazards if possible.
Matters beyond his ability to handle shall be reported to the concerned
engineer in charge.
x.
To know the plant emergency procedures.
This will broaden the leadership
base, which may be required to scope up with serious incidents, personal

injuries, fires or evacuation.
xi.
To provide all relevant information to incident investigation team for any

incident resulting in personal injury, property/ environmental damage.
10.0
HEALTH, SAFETY ANDENVIRONMENTAL PROGRAM

Besides meeting BORL and other regulatory safety provisions, contractors must
have a written safety Program and shall be approved by Fire & Safety
department. The actual program that shall be developed will depend on variables
such as size of the firm, size of the project, nature of activities and the location &
number of contract employees.
The Contractor Management shall commit resources and all necessary support to
ensure the program is implemented to the satisfaction of the BORL. Contractor
shall ensure adherence to all laws, rules, regulation, and notification of various
government departments pertaining to health, safety and environment.
10.1
SITE SAFETY ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
10.1.1 The contractors safety program should establish responsibilities for

engineers, supervisors, safety representatives, and the employees.
managers,
10.1.2 The contractors safety program should also include site safety organization with
respect to the overall site organogram. The contractors employee in-charge of
safety should be among the top in the organogram and should have authority
over other activities. There should be at least one dedicated, qualified and
experienced contractors safety Engineer or Supervisor exclusively responsible for
safety implementation / co-ordination. He shall be free from any other
responsibility and no compensation will be made by the BORL for the deputation
Page 17 of 33
Page 197 of 1744
of contractors safety staff. The details of the safety officer/supervisor shall be

submitted to BORL F&S dept. in a format given in annexure V. Depending upon
the nature and size of the job, minimum strength of the contractors safety
personnel shall be as indicated in the table below.
Employee Strength
Minimum Strength
(including sub-contractor)
of Safety Staff
Max. No. of employees 30
One discipline (Engr./ Supvr.) with safety

experience can function on part time basis
No. of employees : 30 100
One
Safety
responsibility
full
time
Supervisor
on
full
time
Two Safety Engineer on full time responsibility

+
Two
Safety
responsibility
No. of employees : > 500
on
One Safety Engineer on full time responsibility

+
One
Safety
responsibility
Supervisor
Supervisor
on
full
time
One Safety Engineer + One Safety Supervisor

(for each 250 employees) on full time
responsibility
10.1.3 The number of employees mentioned above represents the maximum number of
contractor employees estimated to be engaged at the site on any day by the
contractor and their subcontractor. In case of block shutdown or turnaround when
the contractor is required to bring in additional manpower, the number of
contractor safety personnel shall be increased as per above table.
10.1.4 Contractors safety personnel shall possess the requisite qualification and
experience as given below:
10.2
Safety Engineer
Shall be a graduate engineer (Mechanical / Chemical / Electrical/ Civil/ IP/ CTM/
Safety) having a minimum of Two (2) years working experience in the field of
Safety.He should possess a recognized degree or diploma in industrial safety. He
must be able to speak, read and write English very well.
Page 18 of 33
Page 198 of 1744
10.3
Safety Supervisor
10.3.1 He shall be a diploma holder in engineering or science graduate having five (5)
years experience in handling construction or maintenance projects in process
Plant. He should possess a recognized degree or diploma in industrial safety. He
must be able to speak, read and write English well.
10.3.2 Curriculum Vitae of contractors safety personnel along with copies of all
certificates shall be submitted for BORLs review and approval before posting at
BORL site. The BORL reserves the right to evaluate the candidate based on
review of CV and verification of original certificates and/or personal interview.
10.4
SAFETY ORIENTATION
10.4.1 New contractors key personnel (i.e. supervisors, engineers and managers) along
with the workforce shall receive safety induction training from BORL F&S
department, as per applicable safety training procedure. In turn, these trained
Contractors key personnel shall conduct orientation to their respective employees
prior to job site mobilization / beginning work in form of tool box talks on regular
basis and generate record for the same. Such orientation should include
provisions of the written safety program and procedures applicable to the
contractors scope of work, and also should include the following:
i.
Clarification of the HSE responsibilities for contractor, subcontractor,

employee and all construction/project site personnel.
ii.
Clarification of HSE expectations of the contractor employees.
iii.
HSE rules& regulations within BORL.
iv.
The procedure / responsibilities on Incident reporting for personal injuries,

occupational illnesses, fire incidents, property damage incidents,
environmental incidents, traffic incidents and near-miss incidents.
v.
vi.
Toolbox meeting schedule, agenda and attendance mandatory requirement.

The mandatory use of personal protective equipment on various specific
activities
vii.
Prompt reporting of unsafe acts or conditions.
viii.
Overview of BORLs emergency response plans

employees action in case of an emergency/drill
ix.
10.5
and
the
contractor
Waste Handling and Disposal.
CONTRACTORS HSE MEETINGS AND TRAINING

Contractor site in charge along with the safety officer/ supervisor shall attend
monthly HSE meeting conducted on every second Tuesday of the month by BORL.
The meeting agenda should include HSE records and activities, statistics,
incidents, personal protective equipment and other employees concern on HSE at
work. Minutes of meeting shall be prepared by F&S dept. and circulated to top
management and participants. The format of the monthly report is given in
annexure VI.
Page 19 of 33
Page 199 of 1744
10.6
SAFETY COMMUNICATION AND COORDINATION

For all practical purposes, it should be the responsibility of the contractor to have
all its employees & sub-contractors etc. informed and involved in various safety
communication and coordination activities.
10.7
RECORDKEEPING AND DOCUMENTATION
10.7.1 Records are required to support activities of contractor safety programs for both
control and audit purposes. Records that shall be maintained and retained within
the contract duration at the job site should include the following:
i.
Log of all injury cases reported and treated, showing date, name of
injured, job nature of injury and type of treatment given.
ii.
All incident investigation report (i.e. injury, illness, traffic, property

damage, environmental incident and as well as Near Miss Incidents).
iii.
Safety meetings or toolbox meeting records or minutes showing date of

meeting, who attended, the subjects discussed and who conducted the
meeting.
iv.
Job site inspection / audit reports and status of the action plans.
v.
Records to show dates, name of participants and subject of training

programs.
vi.
Lifting Tackles and crane or equipment inspection records, 3rd party

certificate.
vii.
PPEs stock & distribution records shall be maintained
11.0
SAFETY REPORTS & RECORD REQUIREMENTS.

The Contractor shall prepare and submit the monthly safety reports in prescribe
format given as Annexure II (through BORL representative) to Fire & Safety
department within the first five working days of the month.
12.0
COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY REQUIREMENT

Consultants, contractors/ sub-contractors or other third parties working in the
field shall abide by:
i.
ii.
iii.
The safety procedures for working in areas of the work as defined in scope of
work.
All requirements under The Factories Act 1948 and the rules framed thereunder in the M P Factories Rules& Gujarat Factory Rules, as applicable.
Applicable Environment Regulations in force and also the systems and
procedures in M.P/Gujarat state of work.
Page 20 of 33
Page 200 of 1744
iv.
13.0
Contractor shall follow complete HSE (Health, Safety and Environmental

Policy) guidelines of BORL.
SAFETY INFRINGEMENT AND PENALTY SCHEME

All contractors/ sub-contractors and their employees working in BORL premises
shall comply with the BORL safety procedures, guidelines and safe work practices.
Violation of these BORL procedures / guidelines / safe work practices shall be
dealt according to penalty system as follows:
13.1 PENALTY STAGES

VIOLATION
MINOR
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
Caution
Notice
Penalty
Penalty Rs.
1000/- *
Rs. 500/-
MAJOR
Penalty Rs.
1000/-*
FOURTH
Multiplied
Penalty
Penalty
Rs. 2000/- *
Rs. 5000/- *
Multiplied
* The BORL reserves the right to impose more severe penalty, i.e. suspend/terminate
the employee, his supervisor or the site manager.
Note: - The penalties may be revised from time to time by BORL management.
BORL employee is authorized to charge the infringement note to contractor for

any violation observed at site in prescribe format ( Annexure- II) with the copy to
safety dept. In case of any disagreement, BORL SAFETY representative shall be
the final authority to decide whether an infringement is minor or major for
violations which are not listed in the penalty system. Fire & Safety Department is
authorized to issue infringement report to the BORL representative. The format of
the penalty is as per annexure VII. The Engineer in Charge of the Contract shall
take necessary action and provide feedback to Fire & Safety Department with
copy of receipt from bank.
13.2 Minor Violation (Examples)
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Not wearing personal protective equipment (PPE) at work site.

Minor traffic violation (wrong parking)
Blocking of emergency equipment or exits.
Using unapproved scaffolding.
Not keeping proper housekeeping
Not providing shoring for the excavations.
Over speeding
Page 21 of 33
Page 201 of 1744
13.3
Major Violation
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
(Examples)
Smoking, carrying matches or lighter.

Working without valid work permit.
Non-compliance to work permits condition.
Repeating minor violations more than twice.
Major traffic violation.
Found guilty of negligent driving resulting in a vehicle incident.
Page 22 of 33
Page 202 of 1744
ANNEXURE I: BORL QEHS POLICY
Page 23 of 33
ANNEXURE II
VEHICLE / EQUIPMENT SAFETY CHECKLIST

F/003/SFT/003
Date
Vehicle/Equipment type :
No.:_______________
BORL
Six Month
Contractor
Sr.
No
____________________
Company Name:
Vehicle Reg./Serial
_________________
ITEM
Re-validation:
REQUIREMENT
Y / N / NA
1.
Fire Extinguisher
Approved type and size, properly mounted, easily retrievable
2.
Exhaust System
Should not leak
3.
Spark Arrestor
Fitted with approved spark arrestor
4.
All Lights
Operable and covered with standard lens (includes reverse, brake,

hazard lamps & turn indicators), not cracked or broken
5.
Reverse Beeper/ Horn
Available in vehicles where driver cannot see the rear, horn loud enough,
activated by gear lever
6.
Seat Belt
Seat Belt with seat belt assembly in proper working condition
7.
Tyres
Good condition
8.
Battery
Secured by clamp, terminals covered
9.
Fuel/Hydraulic System
Good condition and not leaking
10.
Engine/Rotating part
guards
Guards in place where applicable
11.
Wind Shield
Good condition having proper visibility, no cracks

Wipers/Washers
12.
Brakes/Parking Brake
Foot Brake Operable and efficient

Hand Brake Operable and efficient
13.
Rear View Mirrors
Both Side / Rear View in driver cab available and adjustable, no cracks
14.
Body/canopy/booms
Good condition
15.
First Aid Kit
Available & maintained
Additional Checks For Cranes
Page 203 of 1744
16.
Safe Load Indicator
Working condition & tripping system not bypassed.

Anti two Block Alarm/Cut - out
Load Indicator
Over Hoist Alarm
Over Boom Cut Out/Alarm
17.
Limit Switches
For crawler & hydraulic cranes
18.
Glass enclosure for

Forklift
Good condition having proper visibility, no cracks
19.
ELCB Available
Applicable for welding machine or powered devices above 24V
20.
Third Party Certificate
Valid certificate from approved third party for lifting appliances, PSV of
equipment. & tank/vessel/cylinders of tankers
21.
Safety latches
Available in hooks & in good condition.
Page 24 of 33
Wire Ropes Condition/anchorages

Hook with Latch in good condition
22.
Slings
Slings with load test and marking.
Operator
Operators certificate of competency
Requested B Vehicle User / Owners Signature

BORL Authorized Signature
Fire & safety department is responsible for the safety clearance at the time of inspection. Responsibility of the
vehicle before & after the inspection lies with the user department/Engineer in charge.
&
Page 204 of 1744
Page 25 of 33
Page 205 of 1744
ANNEXURE III: CONTRACTORS SAFETY PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST
Contractor's Safety Performance Checklist

Date:
Time: Hrs
Location / Area of audit :

Name of contractor company:
Name of auditees during audit:
Type of work involved:
Name of auditors:
Reporting department:
S.No
Name of Engineer Incharge:

Check Points
Does the Contractor have adequate number of Supervisors for the jobs?
Are the Supervisors competent to ensure that the work force adhere to all
applicable safety requirements? ( As per the scope of safety guidelines)
Is there any Incident/LTI occurred, ( If 2 FAC - 0 , 1 FAC - half marked )
Detail Report available, Remedial measure taken , Briefing about the

incident done.
Does the contractor know the incident including Nearmiss reporting system
of BORL? Interview any Two Persons ( supervisor& site incharge ).
Whether all the tools / equipment Including PPE's used are meeting the
standards? ( any certification CE, ISI Marked )
Max.
Marks
Marks
Obtained
Whether PPE are being used and in good condition? ( Available with
Workers at field )
Full sleeve (Cotton overall)/ Boiler Suit
Safety Shoes
Safety Helmet
Safety Goggles
Hand gloves while working
Ear Plug/Muff in high noise area
Any specific PPE such as safety harness, respiratory protectors /

mask, welders screen, gum boot etc.
Does the workmen know about the nearest location of:
8
MCP,
Page 26 of 33
Remarks
Page 206 of 1744
Fire extinguishers,
Safety Shower,
Assembly Point, Wind socks, Siren Codes
First Aid Box,
Does the contractor personnel know about the hazard associated with their
job/ chemicals / material handled and precautions to be taken? ( Brief
discussion at field )
10
Are contractor's personnel aware of the various types of permits for different
kinds of jobs?
11
Are the specified conditions of the permit complied?
12
Workplace maintained clean and orderly during / after the job?
13
Chemicals / materials handled properly?

Are the following equipment used by the contractors maintained in good
condition ? ( check for the different legal requirement & BORL requirement
like list, internal inspection)
14
Tools , Tackles
Electrical / Welding Generators/ Cutting Set with Flash back

Arresters.
Scaffolds
Cranes
15
Whether the contractor workmen/supervisor familiar with safety sign, BORL

Area classification, etc.?
16
Whether workmen undergone HSE training and records kept? ( compulsory

training all were attended seek record )
17
All employee were taken mandatory fire & safety trainings ( record
&interview any two persons)
18
Whether toolbox talk conducted regularly and records kept properly? Record
checked
19
Asked the information from any of worker about tool box talk subject
20
Does the contractor attend safety committee meetings regularly?

Are the contractor's personnel familiar with emergency actions?
Emergency telephone numbers
What to do in case of fire?
What to do in case of toxic release?
21
Total
Page 27 of 33
Page 207 of 1744
Overall Rating :
(Ref. of Rating: 0-50%- Below Avg,51-60% - Average, 60-75% - Satisfactory,
76-85% - Good,86-95% -V Good,96-100% - Excellent )
Name & Signature:
Auditor (BORL)
Auditee (Contractor/Owner)
Page 28 of 33
Page 208 of 1744
ANNEXURE IV
UNDERTAKING
We, M/s ____________________ have been awarded contract work order no.
___________ dtd. __.__._____ by M/s Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd.
We hereby
undertake as follows:
1. That we have understood the details of the work to be executed with reference to the
aforesaid work order and the requirements of manpower, equipment, tools/tackles,
safety equipment and other resources necessary to execute the work thereof.
2. That we have got competent supervisors and workers with required qualification,
relevant experience / skills and trained for safe execution of the work.
Our
supervisors are well aware of the work hazards and have got adequate knowledge
and familiarity about the safe work practices / safe work methods, necessary safety
measures and precautions to be taken to avoid accidents during execution of the
work.
3. That we have read and understood the General and Special Conditions of the contract
work order under reference and agree to abide by the same.
4. That we have familiarized ourselves with the working conditions, understood all
necessary requirements for safe execution of the work, including HSE policy and
procedures of BORL and obtained all clarifications regarding the job.
5. That we undertake to ensure and strictly comply with safety procedures and safe
practices / methods relevant to the work for safety of our employees and property of
the company BORL and provide required personal protective equipment to all our
employees, as necessary for safety & to prevent probable injuries to our workers and
as per the safety requirements of the Company (BORL).
We further undertake to
carry out the work in accordance with the HSE policy and procedures of BORL
6. That
we
shall also
comply
with all
applicable
regulations
with
respect
to
environmental protection.
7. That we undertake to deploy competent and trained personnel for the job identified
who will possess requisite skill, certificate / license.
8. That we shall ensure use of right type of tools, tackles & equipment, maintained in
good working condition, suitable to the nature of the job under execution.
9. That we shall be responsible for safety of our employees and other persons at site /
property of the company and accountable for any accident due to negligence / fault
of our employees or our company and shall be ready to accept the responsibilities for
any legal consequences.
Page 29 of 33
Page 209 of 1744
Signed, Sealed & Delivered by
(Signature of the proprietor of the Company / Authorized person)

Name
Date
Name of Company
Company Seal :
Witnesses:
1. Signature
Name
: ___________________
: ___________________
Date : ___________________
Address
: ______________________
Name : ______________________
Date : ______________________
: ___________________
___________________
2. Signature
Address
: ______________________
______________________
Page 30 of 33
Page 210 of 1744
ANNEXURE V
Safety Engineer / Supervisor appointment
Contractors Name: - ...
Nos. of Work force at site:-..
Details of Safety officer / Supervisor
Full Name: - ..
Date of Birth: - .Designation: ...
Contact No :- Email ID: ..
Appointment date: - .
Educational Qualification: 1)....
2)..
3)..
Professional Experience (In Chronological Order)
S.N.
Name of Organization
Period of
Service
From
Designation
Area of
Responsibility
To
Stamp and Signature of Contractors Owner / Site Incharge

Date:-______________
Page 31 of 33
Page 211 of 1744
ANNEXURE VI: CONTRACTORS MONTHLY SAFETY PERFORMANCE

REPORT
CONTRACTORS MONTHLY SAFETY PERFORMANCE REPORT
REPORT FOR THE MONTH
CONTRACT NO
CONTRACTOR NAME
CONTRACT TITLE
CONTROLLING DEPT /TEAM
SITE INCHARGE
NAME : SIGNATURE : THROUGH : - ENGINEER IN CHARGE
NAME : SIGNATURE:TO , FIRE & SAFETY DEPT
Following data to be furnish
S
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DESCRIPTION
THIS
MONTH
CUMMILATIVE
REMARK
Man Hours worked

No of Employees
Lost Work Cases ( LWC )/Lost
Time Cases
Lost Work-Days
Restricted Workday Cases ( RWC)
Medical Treat. Only Cases ( MTC)
First Aid Cases ( FAC)
Dangerous Occurrences (DO)
Near-Miss Incidents ( NM)
Violations Notifications
Toolbox Meeting/Safety Training
Safety Audits
Detail of Accidents/Near miss/Dangerous Occurrence

Date &
Time
Emp Name, ID, &Desig.
Brief Description
Recommendation
Detail of Tool Box Talk & Training

Date &
Time
No of Participants
Topic
Detail of Safety Audits (Copy of Report should be attached with report)

Date & Time
Audit done by
Auditee
Details of Safety Violations by contractors (Report attached if any)

Date & Time
Brief Description of violations
Action taken /Remark
NOTE: - Copy of report to be sent to fire & safety on or before 3rd of the following
month.
Page 32 of 33
Page 212 of 1744
ANNEXURE VII
PENALTY NOTIFICATION FOR CONTRACTORS SAFETY VIOLATIONS
From
To
Date :
Engineer in Charge
Given below are violation details of Safety Regulations / Site Instructions committed by a contractor
working for your division.
Name :- Cont. Emp. No : Contractor :Location of Violation : -
Vehicle No :
Date :
Time :
Details of Violation: -..........................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................
Immediate action taken:- ..................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................................
This violation is:
Minor
Major
Action recommended:
Written warning
Penalty Rs.____________
Suspension
Dismissal
Other_______________________________________
Signature
VIOLATION
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
Fourth
MINOR
Caution Notice
Penalty Rs. 500/-
Penalty Rs. 1000/-
Multiplied
MAJOR
Penalty Rs.
1000/-*
Penalty Rs.2000/*
Penalty Rs. 5000/*
Multiplied
* BORL reserves the right to impose more severe penalty, i.e. suspend/terminate the
employee, his supervisor or the site manager.
Note : The Penalties may be revised from time to time by BORL management.
Engineer in Charge / HOD to forward this notification for further action as per
applicability.
Copy of Receipt from Bank to be submitted to Engineer in Charge by the violator.
Bank Details For Penalty Deposits
Beneficiarys Name: - Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd.
Beneficiarys Bank Name & Branch :- State Bank of India, BINA
Account No / I.F.S.C. Code Number : - 10778895059 / SBIN0001427
Account code: 470315
RECOVERIES-ACCIDENT/ LOSSES/ SAFETY
Cc
: Head Fire & Safety

Page 33 of 33
Page 214 of 1744
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF MONITORING AND

MEASURING DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITE
(ANNEXURE-XI TO SCC)
151MTRY
*igiriaRteg,
Page 215 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS OF
MONITORING AND MESURING DEVICES AT
CONSTRUCTION SITES
1-3=fro-r r4-4- urT PdRicril
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 5
cHILIA
armeicbdi
MONITORING AND MEASURING
DEVICES AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
0
Rev.
No
28.04.2015
Date
Issued as Standard
Purpose
'3DJ
/k MD
Prepared Checked
by
by
SC
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
lafaZIE'T
5.ge1105ieg
141R7f ERP12 051.740,71)
Page 216 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES
AT CONSTRUCTION SITES
(AGO
of
In
Undertaking)
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ABS
ABS Consultancy
BIS
Bureau of Indian Standards
BV
Bureau Veritas
CELL
Certification Engineers International Ltd.
DNV
Det Norske Veritas
IRS
Indian Registrar for Shipping
LRS
Llyod's Register Group Limited
NABL
National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories
PMI
Positive Material Identification

Convenor:
Sh. M Deshpande, ED (Construction)
Members:
Sh. S N Bhatnagar, GM (Construction)

Sh. Rajeev Jain, DGM, (C&P)
Sh. Janak Kishore , DGM (Projects)
Sh. Ravindra Kumar , AGM (Construction)
Copyright EIL An rights reserved
MONITORING
AND MEASURING DEVICES
INDIA UMITED
Inda
IAG
ENGINEERS
e.if
fetiaieU
Iffllerr eleasteaxamni)
Page 217 of 1744
ovt of
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Undertalong)
Page 3 of 5
Requirement for control of monitoring and measuring devices.

SI.
No.
A.
Description
Calibration requirements
Civil-Survey
Theodolite
Levels
A.3.
Steel measurement
tapes
A.4.
Cross staff
---
Distomat
Total Station
Remarks
once in a year or
project duration
whichever is earlier
Record to be
maintained
(See note below)
Every use
Record to
be maintained
(See note below)
----
"Freemans"
make or BIS
approved make
shall be used.
Mutilated, or
broken tapes
shall not be
used.
c. Marking on the
tape shall be
legible
---
Same as 3b&3c
above
Records to be
maintained
Record to be
maintained
(See note below)
Actual Physical
Verification at Site
To check for permanent
adjustments by traversing
and observing the closing
error,etc.
Before using
first time at site
once in a year or
project duration
Check for zero error
Whenever used
Calibration of scales
Once in three
Months
Records to be
maintained
Calibration certificate from

manufacturers or from
reputed calibrating agency.
As per
manufacturer
specification or
once a year
6 months
Records to be
maintained
Civil Laboratory
B.
balancesMechanical
Weigh
Batcher/Batching
Plant
Cube testing
machine
All
Moisture Meter
Note:
To check for permanent

adjustments by traversing
and observing the closing
error
To check by Backsight/
Foresight readings, the
temporary adjustments of
level
----
Frequency
Calibration of scales
---
Records to be
maintained
If Error is found, it has to be sent to manufacturers or their authorized agents for

rectification and certification. Reputed calibrating agency shall be NABL
accredited for relevant testing.
1.27.1eResrv mows
Page 218 of 1744
Sl.
No.
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
MONITORING
AND MEASURING DEVICES
INDIA
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Description
STANDARD No.
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 5
Frequency
Remarks
Mechanical/ Electrical/Welding
Pressure Gauges
Calibration certificate from
reputed laboratories or
calibrate by dead weight
testers with standard weights
or with master Gauge
Dial gauges
Check for Zero Error
Dead Weight
Calibration from
Tester
manufacturer or reputed
Calibrating agency.
Calibration certificate shall
not be older than one month
from the date of
mobilization.
Vernier caliper/
Check for Zero error
screw gauge
Holiday tester
Calibration from
manufacturer or reputed
calibrating agency or by
calibrating by zeep meter.
Once in 6 months
Records to be
maintained
Whenever used
As per
manufacturer's
recommendation or
once in a six month
whichever is
earlier.
--Records
(Calibration
certificate) to
be maintained
Once in 6 months
Records to
be maintained
C.6
Elcometer
Before use
Records to
be maintained
C.7
Universal Testing
Machine
Records to
be maintained
C.8
Charpy V-notch
Impact testing
machine
C.9
Hardness Testing
Machine
As per
manufacturer's
recommendation or
once a year
As per
manufacturer's
recommendation or
once in a year
Before use
C.10
Chemical Analysis
,ex :PMI etc.
Various Digital
and Analog
meters
Before use
Records to be
maintained
Records to be
maintained
C.
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.11
Note:
Check with standard test

films supplied by the
manufactures
Calibration Certificate
from any reputed third party
inspection agency. viz,
CEIL, LRS, BV, ABS, DNV
or IRS.
from any reputed third party
inspection agency. viz,
CEIL, LRS, BV, ABS, DNV
or IRS.
Check with the standard test
block supplied with the
machine as per
manufacturer's
Recommendation
Check with the
standard samples
Calibration Certificate from
reputed laboratories or the
manufacturer
Whenever used
Once in Six
Months or as per
manufacturer's
recommendation
whichever is
earlier.
---
Records to be
maintained
Records to be
maintained
If Error is found, it has to be sent to manufacturers or their authorized agents for

rectification and certification. Reputed calibrating agency shall be NABL
accredited for relevant testing.
lalfteq
eig em Eitateg
1.41V, eleCAU
Page 219 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
mom)
SI.
No.
C.12
C.13
Description
MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES
Variable current,
voltage and
resistance
generators
Temperature/
Pressure Recorders
7-82-0002 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 5
Frequency
Remarks
Calibration Certificate from

reputed
laboratories
Once in Six
months
Records to be
maintained
Calibration from
manufacturer or any
reputed calibrating
agency
from reputed
laboratories
Manufacturer's Certificate or
Chemical Check
Once in Six
months
Records to be
maintained
Once in Six months
To be discarded
in case of damage
or malfunctioning
---
C.15
Temperature
gauges
C.16
Thermocouples
C.17
Vibration probes
Calibration from
reputed laboratory
Once in a year
C.18
Decibel-meter
Calibration from
reputed laboratory
Once in a Year
Note:
STANDARD No.
---
To be discarded
in case of
damage or
malfunctioning
- do -
If Error is found, it has to be sent to manufacturers or their agents for rectification

and certification & reputed laboratory shall be NABL accredited for relevant
testing.
Page 220 of 1744
TERMS & CONDITIONS FOR VENDOR PARTICIPATION IN HAZOP STUDY

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
The vendor shall participate during HAZOP study of the package. The vendor shall indicate the cost of
providing the services related to same on per diem basis. Cost for HAZOP participation for total 4
mandays shall be added to the total cost of the Flare Gas Recovery Package for commercial comparison
purpose. However the actual payment for HAZOP participation shall be based on actual man-days
participated by vendor.
Bidder shall quote per diem charges for participation in HAZOP study of the package which shall include
lodging, boarding, medical, local transport, all insurances including Bidders personnel and third party
insurance, all other incidental charges and all taxes & duties except Service tax (for bidders registered in
India) which shall be quoted extra and shall be payable against submission of Invoice as per Service tax
rules.
The Foreign Bidder shall quote prices gross of Indian income tax and bidder shall furnish all requisite
information stipulated elsewhere in the Bidding Document. Applicable rate of withholding tax shall be
indicated in the offer.
Withholding Tax(s) as per Government policy shall be deducted at source by Purchaser while making
payments against each invoice. Any wrong assessment of applicable withholding Tax shall be to Bidders
account.
For Foreign Bidders : To & fro air fare by economy class through most economical route preferably by Air
India and/or AC 2 Tier by Train Fare(*) within India nearest to EIL Office (New Delhi), will be reimbursed at
actual. Local transportation in bidders country shall be to bidders account.
For Indian Bidders: To & fro air fare by economy class through most economical route preferably by Air
India and/or AC 2 Tier by Train Fare(*) nearest to EIL Office (New Delhi), will be reimbursed at actual.
(*)In case a bidder travels by any other mode of transport, the payment shall be made against
documentary evidence subject to maximum of AC 2 Tier train fare.
Per diem charges shall be payable from the day bidders person reaches EIL Office upto the day he
participates in HAZOP study at EIL Office. No payment will be made for travel days/period.
In case bidders representative is not called for during Intervening weekly off/Holidays, the same shall be
payable at the normal quoted rate.
In case bidders representative takes leave, per diem charges for that day shall not be payable.
Working hours prevailing at EIL Office, normally 8 hours/day - Monday through Friday and holidays as
applicable to EIL Office shall apply.
Vendors personnel shall observe/abide by working conditions prevailing at the work place, safety codes,
Indian laws and local laws.
A notice period of 15 days will be given for mobilization of personnel for Hazop Study.
Validity period of per diem rate shall be upto the end of guarantee period.
Payment: 100% against submission of monthly bills and time sheets certified by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Recommendations related to design/scope/etc. pertaining to package arising out during HAZOP study
shall be incorporated / included by the vendor without any time/cost implications to the employer.
Requirement of Employment Visa for Foreign Nationals
All foreign nationals coming to India for execution of Projects / Orders will have to apply for Employment
Visa only and that grant of Employment Visa would be subject to strict adherence of following norms:
i) Employment Visa is granted only for the skilled and qualified professional or to a person who is
being engaged or appointed by a company, organization, Industry or undertaking etc. in India on
contract or employment basis at a senior level, skilled position such as technical expert, senior
executive or in managerial position etc.
ii) Request for employment Visa for jobs for which large number of qualified Indian are available, is
not considered.
iii) Under no circumstances an Employment Visa is granted for routine, ordinary secretarial / clerical
jobs.
Bidders are advised in their own interest to check latest Visa rules from Indian Embassy/ High
Commission in their country in case foreign nationals are required to be deputed to Indian during
execution of the Order.
Signature with Name & Date and
Seal/Stamp of the Bidder
Page 1 of 1
Page 221 of 1744

PO- BORL RESIDENTIAL COMPLEX
BINA, DISTRICT SAGAR
MADHYA PRADESH, INDIA- 470124
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Page 222 of 1744
INDEX
SECTION NO/
CLAUSE NO.
I
DEFINITION OF TERMS
DESCRIPTION
II
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
GENERAL INFORMATION
Location of Site and Accessability
Scope of Work
Water Supply
Power Supply
Land for Contractors field office, Godown and workshop
Safety standards for Temporary buildings
Collection of Data Tenderers Responsibility
Retired Government or company officers
Signing of Contract
Field Management
Rates to be in Figures and Words
III
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
GENERAL
Interpretation of Contract Document
Singular and Plural
Special Conditionsof Contract
Contractor to obtain his own information
Security Deposit/Contract Performance Guarantee
Time of Performance
Force majeure
Extension of time
Price Reduction due to delay
Sum payable by way of compensation to be considered as reasonable
compensation without reference to actual loss
Forfeiture of security deposit
Action when whole of security deposit is forfeited
Contractor remains liable to pay compensation of action not taken under clause 3.12
Compensation for alteration in or restriction of work
Change in constitution
On Demise of Contractor
Members of the Owner or individually
Owner not bound by personal representations.
Contractor's office at site
Contractor's subordinate staff and their conduct.
Subletting of work
Power of entry
Contractor's responsibility with the Mechanical Electrical, inter-communication
system, air conditioning contractor and other agencies
Other agencies at site
Notices
Rights of various interests
Right of Owner to determine/ terminate Contract
Patents and royalties
Liens
Operation of Contract
Scope and Intent
Type of Contract
Schedule of Quantities
Contract Sum
Contract Bills
Change of Constitution
Owner Not Bound By Personal Representations
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
3.28
3.29
3.30
3.31
3.32
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
Page 223 of 1744
SECTION NO/
DESCRIPTION
CLAUSE NO.
3.38
Cancellation Of Contract In Full Or Part
3.39
Typographical Or Clerical Errors
IV
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
V
PERFORMANCE OF WORKS
Execution of works
Coordination and inspection of work
Work in mansoon and dewatering
Work on Sundays and holidays
General conditions for construction and erection work
Drawings to be supplied by the Owner
Drawings to be supplied by the Contractor
Setting out works
Responsibility for level and alignment
Materials to be supplied by Contractor
Materials procured with assistance of Owner
Materials obtained from dismantling
Articles of value found
Discrepancies between instructions
Alteration in specifications and designs and extra works
Action where no specification issued
Abnormal rates
Inspection of works
Assistance to engineers
Test for quality works
Samples
Action and compensation in case of bad work
Suspension of works
Owner may do part of work
Possession prior to completion
Defect Liability Period from the date of issue of completion certificate
5.10
CONTRACTORS
FIELD
ORGANIZATION/
SUB-CONTRACTORS
AND
EQUIPMENTS
Office accommodation's at site
Contractors field organization and equipment
Equipment and staff assistance from the Contractor
Contractor's subordinate staff and their conducts
Labour
Sub-contracts
Labour regulations
Site order book
Contractor's responsibility with the mechanical, electrical inter-communication
system, Air conditioning contractors and the agencies
Other agents at site
VI
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
CERTIFICATE AND PAYMENTS

Schedule of rates and payments
Procedure for measurement/ billing of work in progress
Lumpsum items in tender
Running account payments to be regarded as advance
Notice of claims for additional payment
Payment of contractor's bill
Receipt of payment
Rates For Same Items of Work
Deduction for Uncorrected Work
Fluctuations
Unfixed Goods And Materials
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
Page 224 of 1744
SECTION NO/
DESCRIPTION
CLAUSE NO.
6.12
Completion certificate
6.13
Final decision and final certificate
6.14
Certificate and payments no evidence of completion
VII
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
TAXES AND INSURANCE

Taxes, duties, octroi etc.
Statutory variations in taxes/duties
Cenvat
Insurance
Damage to property
VIII
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
LABOUR LAWS AND SAFETY REGULATIONS

Labour laws
Implementation of apprentices Act 1961
Contractor to indemnify the Owner
Health and sanitary arrangements for workers
Safety regulation
Arbitration
Jurisdiction
Statutory Requirements
IX
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
9.9.5
9.9.6
9.9.7
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
9.17
9.18
9.19
SAFETY CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL WORKS

Compliance with Statutory Requirement
Implementation of Safety Regulations
Relevant Indian Standard Codes on Safety
Contractors Obligation on Safety
Major Contracts
Qualification and Experience of Manpower to be deployed
Health Assurance
Restrictions in use of manpower and Normal Timings for work
Training
Mandatory
Training of Contractor's Proprietors, Partners, Directors and Managers
Supervisors Training
Worker's Training
Refresher Training
Administration of Training
Contractors Respobility for Training his employees
Issue of Entry Pass
Obligatiion to follow work permit system
Requirement of supervision
Use of Personal Protection Equipment
Hazard Communcation
Injury Notification and Investigation
Requirement of House keeping
Display Board at site
Participation in safety activities
Note
Appendix-A
Appendix-B
Appendix-C
Appendix-D
Appendix-E
: Proforma of Agreement
: Form of Income Tax Clearance Certificate
: Proforma of Bank Guarantee
: Completion Certificate
: Format of Hypotehcation Bond
Appendix-F : Format for InformatioN by Contractor

Appendix-G : Cenvatable Excise Duty Declaration
.
Page 225 of 1744
SECTION -I
DEFINITION OF TERMS
1.0
In the Contract Documents, as herein defined, where the context so admits, the
following words and expressions will have the following meanings. Any word or phrase
defined in the body of the Contract Documents as opposed to being defined in this
Clause 1.0, Section 1 of the General Conditions of Contract, shall have the meaning
assigned to it in such definition throughout the Contract Document, unless the contrary
is expressly stated or the contrary clearly appears from the context:
1.1
Approved or Approval means an approval granted in writing.
1.2
Applicable Law shall mean all statutes, including the act, codes, ordinances,
decrees, rules, regulations, municipal by-laws, judicial or arbitral or administrative or
ministerial or departmental or regulatory judgments, orders, decisions, rulings or
awards, policies, voluntary restraints, guidelines, or any provisions of such laws,
including general principles of common and civil law and equity, binding on or
affecting the Parties referred to in the context in which such word is used.
1.3
Bidder means the Person who has submitted the Tender to the Owner, for executing
the Work.
1.4
"Contractor" means the Bidder(includes his/ its legal representative, successor and
permitted assigns) whose Tender has been accepted by the Owner pursuant to
delivery of the Fax of Acceptance.
1.5
"Contract Documents" mean collectively the (i) Tender;(ii) Designs;(iii) Drawings;(iv)

Specifications;(v) agreed variations, if any; and (vi) all other document constituting the
Tender and acceptance thereof including these General Conditions of Contract and the
Special Conditions of Contract.
1.6
"Contract" shall mean the legally binding contract to be entered into between the
Owner and the Contractor in the format prescribed in Annexure [], for executing the
Work, together with all Contract Documents.
1.7
"Completion Certificate" means the certificate to be issued by Engineer-In Charge to

the Contractor in accordance with Clause 6.12, confirming the Work assigned to the
Contractor by the Owner having been completed, to the satisfaction of EIC.
1.8
"Drawings" includes all maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any
modifications annexed to the Contract Document Approved in writing by the EIC and
such other drawings as may, from time to time, be furnished or Approved in writing by
the EIC.
1.9
Earnest Money means such amounts as deposited by a Bidder with the Owner, at
the time of submission of its Tender.
1.10
The 'Engineer-in-Charge' (EIC) shall mean the engineer in charge designated as

such by the Owner and shall include those who are expressly authorized by the
Owner to act for and on his behalf for operation of the Contract.
1.11
"Equipment" means all appliances and equipment of whatsoever nature for the use in
or for the execution, completion, operation of / maintenance of the Work unless
intended to form part of the Permanent work.
1.12
"Final Certificate" in relation to a work means the certificate issued by the EIC after
the Period of Liability is over.
.
Page 226 of 1744
1.13
Fax of Acceptance or Fax of Acceptance of Bid shall mean intimation by the

Owner through a Fax/Letter to successful Contractor that his Bid has been accepted in
accordance with the provisions contained in the said Fax of Acceptance of Bid.
1.14
Notice in Writing or Written Notice shall mean a notice in written, typed or printed
characters sent (unless delivered personally or otherwise proved to have been
received) by registered post to the last known private or business address or registered
office of the addressee.
1.15
"Owner" means Bharat Oman Refineries Limited, a company incorporated in India

having its registered office at Bharat Oman Refineries Limited, BORL Res. Complex,
Bina District: Sagar 470124 , Madhya Pradesh and corporate office at BPCL Refinery,
Mahul, Mumbai 400 074 and shall include their successors or assigns.
1.16
"Permanent Work" means and includes works which will be incorporated in and form a
part of the Work to be handed over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of
the Contract.
1.17
"Period of Liability" in relation to a work means the specified period from the date of
issue of Completion Certificate up to the date of issue of Final Certificate during which
the Contractor stands responsible for rectifying all defects that may appear in the
Works.
1.18
Person means and includes any natural person, limited or unlimited liability company,
corporation (including any non-profit corporation), partnership (whether registered,
unregistered, general, limited or unlimited), sole proprietorship, trust, firm, union,
unincorporated association, joint venture, joint stock company, Hindu undivided family,
estate, court, tribunal, agency, Government, ministry, department, commission, selfregulatory organization, arbitrator, board, or other entity, enterprise, authority, or
business organization whether or not required to be incorporated or registered under
any Applicable Law or any agency or political subdivision thereof or any other entity
that may be treated as a person under Applicable Law.
1.19.
Schedule of Quantities shall be such as given in the Contract Bill.
1.20
"Subcontractor" means any person or firm or company (other than the Contractor) to
whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor, with the prior written
consent of the EIC, and the legal representatives, successors and permitted assigns of
such person, firm or company.
1.21
Site In-Charge shall have such meaning as ascribed to it in Clause 5.2 below.
1.22
"Specification" shall mean the various technical specifications attached and referred
to in the Contract Documents. It shall also include the latest editions, including all
addenda / corrigenda, of relevant Indian Standard Specifications, specifications of the
other countries published before entering into Contract.
1.23
"Tender" means the tender submitted by the Contractor for acceptance by the
Owner.
1.24
The Site" means the areas on which the Works are to be executed or carried out
and any other places provided by the Owner for purpose of the Contract.
1.25
"Work" shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract or part
thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or substituted
works as required for purpose of the Contract.
Page 227 of 1744
SECTION II
GENERAL INFORMATION
2.1
LOCATION OF SITE & ACCESSIBILITY
2.1.1
The Owner is operating a grass-root Refinery of 6 MMTPA at Bina in the State of

Madhya Pradesh.
2.1.2
The Site is located at a distance of 17 km from Bina town/ Bina Railway Junction. The
nearest railway station is Agasod Bina. The nearest port is Kandla, which is approx.
700 km from the Site. The nearest airport is at Bhopal, which is approx.150 km.
2.1.3
Non-availability of access roads or permits or entry of vehicles and equipment's to any

specific area shall, in no case be the cause to condone any delay in the execution of
the Works or be the cause for any claims by the Contractor for extra compensation.
2.2
SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be as set out in the Schedule of Rate(s), Special Conditions of
Contract, Scope of Work (SOW) and specifications.
The Contractor shall provide all necessary materials, equipment, labour etc. for the
execution and maintenance of the Work till completion unless otherwise mentioned in
Annexure SOW or other Contract Document All material that go with the Work to be
used by the Contractor shall be Approved by Engineer-in-Charge, prior to procurement
and use. The Contractor shall secure all such Approvals from the EIC at the earliest, so
as to ensure that seeking such Approvals does not delay the execution of the Work by
the Contractor, since time is of the essence of the Contract.
2.3
WATER SUPPLY
Contractor will make his own arrangement for supply of water. All pumping installation,
pipe net work and distribution system will have to be carried out by the Contractor at
his own cost.
2.4
POWER SUPPLY
The Contractor will make his own arrangement for power supply/ Portable generators
as required. All the works will be done as per IEA regulations and passed by the
Engineer-in-Charge. The temporary line will be removed forthwith after the completion
of the work or if there is any hindrance caused to other works due to the alignment of
these lines, the contractor will reroute or remove the temporary line at his own cost.
Owner shall not, however, arrange the supply of electricity.
2.5
LAND FOR CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE, GODOWN ANDWORKSHOP

The Owner may, at its discretion and convenience and for the duration of the
execution of the Work, make available near the Site, limited land for the construction
of Contractor's field office, godowns, workshop and assembly yard required for the
execution of the Contract.
The Contractor shall at, its own cost and expense, construct all such temporary
buildings and provide suitable water supply and sanitary arrangement, as approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor hereby covenants that the Contractor shall,
upon completion of the Work undertaken by the Contractor under the Contract, remove
all such temporary structures erected and have the area provided by the Owner near
the Site cleaned, as directed by EIC, to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the Engineer-in-Charge may,
at the cost, risk and expense of the Contractor, remove all such structures and dispose
off the debris as the EIC deems fit and get the Site cleared as aforesaid. The
.
Page 228 of 1744
Contractor shall forthwith be required to pay all expenses so incurred in this regard and
shall have no claim in respect of any such debris disposed off, as aforesaid.
Notwithstanding anything contained in this Clause 2.5, the Owner reserves the right to
direct the Contractor for security reasons or for material interest or otherwise, at any
time during the pendency of the Contract, to vacate the land provided by the Owner, as
set out hereinabove, by serving a 7 (seven) days notice to the Contractor.
2.6
SAFETY STANDARDS FOR TEMPORARY BUILDINGS

All temporary buildings, sheds, workshops, field station etc. be constructed by the
Contractor, shall be in conformation with the safety and security regulations of the local
laws and bye-laws of the area/ State of Madhya Pradesh, as regards the type of
structure.
2.7
COLLECTION OF DATA BIDDERS RESPONSIBILITY

The Bidder shall be deemed to have visited the Site and its surroundings, to acquaint
himself fully of the Site and no claims whatsoever will be entertained on the plea of
ignorance or difficulties involved in execution of Work or carriage of materials.
2.8
RETIRED GOVERNMENT OR OWNERS OFFICERS

No engineer of Gazetted rank or other Gazetted officer, employed in engineering or
administrative duties in an engineering department of any State/ Central Government or
of the Owner (Ex Government Employee) is allowed to work as a Contractor or its
employee/ consultant/ advisor for a period of 2 (two) years from the date of his
retirement from Government service or the employment of the Owner, without the
previous written consent of the Owner.
The Contract, if awarded, is liable to be canceled by the Owner, without cause or
liability, if either the Contractor or any of its employees is found, at any time, to be an Ex
Government Employee executing any part of the Work without obtaining the permission
of the relevant State / Central Government or of the Owner before submission of
Tender, or engagement in the Contractor's service as the case may be.
2.9
SIGNING OF THE CONTRACT

Refer Special Conditions of Contract.
Failure on the part of the successful Bidder to sign the Contract within the time period
stipulated in Clause 2.9.1 above shall lead to forfeiture of Earnest Money deposited by
the Bidder at the time of submission of its Tender and the acceptance issued by the
Owner to such Bidders Tender shall be considered as withdrawn and canceled, without
any obligation towards such Bidder.
2.10
FIELD MANAGEMENT
2.10.1 The field management will be the responsibility of the Engineer-in-Charge. The
Engineer-in-Charge may also authorize one or more of his representatives to perform
his duties and functions.
2.10.2 Coordination of Work - The Engineer-in-Charge shall coordinate the work of various
agencies engaged at Site so as to ensure minimum disruption of work carried out by
different agencies simultaneously. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to plan
and execute the Work strictly in accordance with the Site instructions and instructions
issued by the EIC, to avoid hindrance to the works executed by other agencies/
contractors.
2.11
RATES TO BE IN FIGURES AND WORDS
Page 229 of 1744
The Bidder should quote in English, both in figures as well as in words, the rates and
amounts tendered by the Bidder in the Schedule of Rates of Tender, submitted by the
Bidder for each item and in such a way that interpolation is not possible. The amount for
each item should be worked out and entered and requisite total given of all items be in
both figures and words. The tendered amount for the Work shall be entered in the
Tender, duly executed by the Bidder.
In the event of any discrepancies between the rates in figures and words or the amount
shown in the Tender, the following procedure shall be followed by the Owner, to clear
such discrepancy:
a)
When there is difference between the rates in figures and words, the
rate which corresponds to the amount worked out by the Bidder shall
be taken as correct.
b)
When the rate quoted by the Bidder in figures and words tally but the
amount is incorrect, the rate quoted by the Bidder shall be taken as
correct.
c)
When it is not possible to ascertain the correct rate by either of above

methods, the rate quoted in words shall be taken as correct.
d)
If the total amount written against an item does not correspond to the
rate written in figures and if the rate in words is not written by the
bidder, then the higher of the rates, i.e. higher of the rate worked out by
dividing the amount by the notional quantity or the rate quoted, shall be
considered for evaluation. In the event that such a bid is determined as
the lowest bid, the lower of the rates shall be considered for award of
works.
Page 230 of 1744
SECTION III
GENERAL TERMS OF CONTRACT
3.1
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENT
3.1.1
Should there be any discrepancy, inconsistency, error or omission in the Contract or any
Contract Document, such discrepancy, inconsistency, error may be referred to
Engineer-in-Charge, who shall give his decisions and issue to the Contractor,
instructions directing in what manner the Work is to be carried out. The Contractor
agrees that the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and conclusive and the
Contractor shall carry out Work, strictly in accordance with this decision.
3.1.2
Work shown upon the Drawings but not mentioned in the Specifications or described in
the Specifications without being shown on the Drawings shall nevertheless be held to be
included in the same manner as if they had been specifically shown upon the Drawings
and described in the Specifications.
3.1.3
Headings and marginal notes to the clauses of these General Conditions of Contract or
to Specifications or to any other Contract Document are solely for the purpose of giving
a concise indication and not a summary of the contents thereof, and they shall never be
deemed to be part thereof or be used in the interpretation or construction thereof of the
Contract.
3.1.4
References to a statute or statutory provision include (a) that statute or provision as

from time to time modified, re-enacted or consolidated; and (b) any subordinate
legislation made from time to time under that statute or statutory provision.
3.1.5
The words including, include, in particular and words of similar effect shall not be
deemed to limit the general effect of the words that precede them.
3.1.6
References to employees, consultants, of the Contractor or workmen appointed by

the Contractor shall deem to include a reference to the employees, directors, agents
and/or workmen of the Contractor and any Sub-contractors appointed by the
Contractor.
3.2
SINGULAR AND PLURAL

In these Contract Documents unless otherwise stated specifically, the singular shall
include the plural and vice-versa wherever the context so requires.
3.3
3.3.1
Special Conditions of Contract shall be read in conjunction with these General

Conditions of Contracts, Specifications, Drawings and any other documents forming
part of the Contract Documents, wherever the context so requires.
3.3.2
Notwithstanding the subdivision of the documents into these separate sections and
volumes every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary to and
complementary of every other part and shall be read with and into the Contract so far
as it may be practicable to do so.
3.3.3
Where any portion of these General Conditions of Contract is repugnant to or at

variance with any provisions of the Special Conditions of Contract then, unless a
different intention appears, the provisions of the Special Conditions of Contract shall be
deemed to override the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract and shall to
the extent of such repugnancy or variations, prevail.
3.3.4
Wherever it is mentioned in the Specifications and/or the Contract Documents that the
Contractor shall perform certain Work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that
the Contractor shall do so at its own cost, risk and expense.
.
Page 231 of 1744
3.3.5
The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the relevant Indian Standards, the
job specifications contained herein and codes referred to. Where the job specifications
stipulate requirements, in addition to those contained in the standard codes and
specifications, these additional requirements shall also be satisfied.
3.4
CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN HIS OWN INFORMATION

The Bidder, in fixing its rate shall for all purposes whatsoever be deemed to have
himself independently obtained all necessary information for the purpose of preparing
the Tender. The correctness of the details given in the Contract Documents to help the
Bidder to make up the Tender is not guaranteed in any manner whatsoever.
The Bidder shall be deemed to have examined the Contract Documents, to have
generally obtained its own information, in all matters whatsoever that might affect the
carrying out the Works at the Scheduled Rates and to have satisfied itself to the
sufficiency to its Tender. Any error in description of quantity or omission there from
shall not vitiate the Contract or release the successful Bidder/ Contractor from
executing the Work comprised in the Contract according to Drawings and
Specifications at the Scheduled Rates. The Bidder is deemed to have known the
scope, nature and magnitude of the Works, the requirements of the Owner under the
Tender, the requirement of materials and labour involved etc. and as to what all Works
the Bidder has to complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents whatever be
the defects, omissions or errors that may be found in the Contract Documents. The
Bidder shall be deemed to have visited the Site and its surroundings, to have satisfied
itself to the nature of all existing structures, if any, roads, bridges and culverts, means
of transport and communications, whether by land, water or air, and as to possible
interruptions thereto and the access to and regress from the Site, to have made
enquiries, examined and satisfied itself as to the Site for obtaining sand, stones, bricks
and other materials, the sites for disposal of surplus materials, the available
accommodation as to whatever required, depots and such other buildings as may be
necessary for executing and completing the Works, to have made local independent
enquiries as to the subsoil water and variations thereof, storms, prevailing winds,
climatic conditions and all other similar matters affecting these Works. The Bidder is
deemed to have acquainted himself as to its liability for payment of Government taxes,
customs duty and other charges. No claims whatsoever will be entertained by the
Owner from the Contractor, on plea of ignorance or difficulties involved in execution of
Work or carriage of materials at the Site or any other reason whatsoever.
Any neglect or failure on the part of the Contractor in obtaining necessary and reliable
information upon the foregoing or any other matters affecting the Contract shall not
relieve it from any risks or liabilities or the entire responsibility from completing the
Works at the Schedule Rates and time in strict accordance with the Contract
Documents.
No verbal agreement or inference from conversation with any officer or employee of the
Owner either before or after the execution of the Contract shall in any way affect or
modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
3.5
SECURITY DEPOSIT
3.5.1
A sum of 10% of the total Contract Value of the Tender shall be deposited by the
Contractor as security deposit with the Owner (Security Deposit)This may be
deposited initially at 2.5% of the value of contract (referred as initial Security Deposit)
within 10 days of receipt by him of the notifications of acceptance of tender and the
balance 7.5% will be recovered in installments through deductions at the rate of 10% of
the value of each running account bill till the total security deposit amount is collected,
after which no further deductions from bills will be made on this account, subject to
clause 3.5.3 below. The Earnest Money deposited with the Tender shall be adjusted
towards Security Deposit, provided, it is furnished by demand draft Alternatively, the
Contractor may, at his option, deposit the full amount of 10% of the accepted value of
the tender towards the Security Deposit within 10 days of receipt by him of the
notifications accepting his tender.
.
Page 232 of 1744
3.5.2
Contractor can also furnish the Security Deposit amount through a Bank Guarantee
from schedule 'A' Bank in the form prescribed under Appendix C to the satisfaction of
the Owner.
3.5.3
If the Contractor / subcontractor or their employees shall break, deface or destroy any
property belonging to the Owner or other agency during the execution of the contract,
the same shall be made good by the Contractor at his own expenses and in default
thereof, the Engineer-in-Charge may cause the same to be made good by other
agencies and recover expenses from the Contractor (for which the certificate of the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be final). These expenses can be recovered from the Security
Deposit if recovery from other sources is not possible.
3.5.4
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, but subject to

Clause 3.5.7, all compensation or other sums of money payable by the Contractor to
the Owner under terms of the Contract may, at the option of the Owner, be deducted or
set off from (a) any sums which may be due or may become due to the Contractor by
the Owner on any account whatsoever; or (b) by way of invocation of the Security
Deposit/Contract Performance Guarantee. In the event of his Security Deposit or
Contract Performance Guarantee being reduced by reasons of any such deductions or
invocation as aforesaid, the Contractor shall within three days from such reduction/
invocation, make good in cash, bank draft or Government Securities endorsed as
aforesaid any sum or sums which may have been deducted from or realized out of his
Security Deposit or Contract Performance Guarantee, or any part thereof. No interest
shall be payable by the Owner from sum deposited as Security Deposit/ Contract
Performance Guarantee.
3.5.5
The Security Deposit / Contract Performance Guarantee shall be held by the Owner, as
security for the due performance of the Contractor's obligations under the Contract,
provided that nothing herein stated shall make it incumbent upon the Owner to utilize the
Security Deposit/ Contract Performance Bank Guarantee in preference to any other
remedy which the Owner may have, nor shall be construed as confining the claims of
the Owner against the Contractor to the quantum of the Security Deposit/Contract
Performance Guarantee.
3.5.6
The Contractor shall ensure that the bank guarantee towards security deposit shall be
kept valid till three months after the expiry of the Defect Liability Period and thereafter
satisfactory completion/ rectification of defects and after making necessary adjustment
for any defect left unattended, the security deposit in Cash or Bank Guarantee as
applicable shall be released.
3.5.7
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Contract, the Parties agree
that any remedies available to the Owner under this Contract for recovery of amounts
claimed by the Owner from the Contractor (including indemnification rights) are
independent of, and in addition to, such other rights and remedies as the Owner may
have under this Contract, law or in equity or otherwise, including the right to seek
damages, specific performance, rescission, restitution or other injunctive relief, none of
which rights or remedies shall be affected or diminished thereby
3.6
TIME OF PERFORMANCE
3.6.1
The work covered by this contract shall be commenced within five working days after
the receipt of the Fax of Acceptance of Bid or the period as mentioned in Fax of
Acceptance of Bid or Receipt of instructions to commence work whichever is later and
be completed in stages on or before the dates as mentioned in the time schedule of
completion of work. The contractor should bear in mind that time is the essence of this
agreement unless such time be extended pursuant to the provision of clause No. 3.8.
Request for revision of Construction time after tenders are opened will not be
considered.
3.6.2
TIME SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION

.
Page 233 of 1744
The general time schedule of construction is given in the tender document. Contractor
should prepare a detailed monthly or weekly construction program jointly with the
Engineer-in-Charge within two weeks of receipt of Letter of Intent or acceptance of
tender. The work shall be executed strictly as per the time schedule given in this
document. The period of construction given includes the time required for testing,
rectification's, if any, retesting and completion in all respects to the entire satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.7
FORCE MAJEURE
3.7.1
Events of Force Majeure

Events of Force Majeure shall mean any event or circumstance that adversely affects,
prevents or delays any party to the Contract in the performance of its obligations in
accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, but only if and to the extent that
such events and circumstances are not within the affected partys reasonable control,
directly or indirectly, and which the affected party could not have prevented through the
employment of prudent utility practices or through reasonable skill and care, and which
the party cannot remedy by exercise of due diligence.
3.7.2
Effect of Force Majeure - Should any Event of Force Majeure prevent or delay the
performance by a party of any of its obligations under the Contract then, provided that
notice is given to the party in accordance with the provisions of clause 3.7.4, the party
which is prevented or delayed in the performance of its obligations shall be excused
from performance or performance in accordance with the time specified herein, for so
long as the relevant Event of Force Majeure continues and to the extent that such
partys performance is prevented, hindered or delayed thereby..
3.7.3
Instances of Force Majeure

Events of Force of Force Majeure shall include, without limitation, but subject to the
provisions of clause 3.7.1, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.7.4
Acts of God
Acts of war or the public enemy whether war be declared or not.
Public disorders, insurrection, revolution, rebellion, sabotage, riots or violent
demonstrations; and
Explosions, fires, earthquakes or other natural calamities and
Strikes or lockouts or other industrial action by workers or employees.
Notice of Force Majeure: Procedure

If either party desires to invoke an Event of Force Majeure as a cause for delay in the
performance of any obligation hereunder, that party shall, not later than 7 days after the
commencement of such Event of Force Majeure or at such time as a notice can be
practically given if the Event of Force Majeure prevents the giving of notice, give written
notice to the other party as detailed below:
a) the date of commencement and nature of the Event of Force Majeure; and
b) the date on which the Event of Force Majeure terminated (if before the date of
notice) or alternatively, if the Event of Force Majeure is continuing, its expected
duration, to the extent known by the notifying party.
3.7.5
Mitigation of delay
The party affected by the Event of Force Majeure shall use all reasonable efforts to
prevent and reduce to a minimum and mitigate the effect of any delay occasioned by
any Event of Force Majeure, including recourse to alternate acceptable sources of
services, materials and supplies and ways of executing the Work and reasonable
adjustment of work activities.
.
Page 234 of 1744
3.7.6
Costs During Force Majeure

In the Event of Force Majeure conditions occurring, each party shall bear its own costs
incurred resulting from such event(s).
3.8
EXTENSION OF TIME
If the Contractor desires an extension of the time for completion of the Work on
grounds of it having been unavoidably hindered in its execution or on any other
grounds due to a Force Majeure Event, the Contractor shall apply, in writing to the
Engineer-in-Charge at the earliest and not later than 7 days of the date of such
hindrance detailing the grounds and reasons on account of which the Contractor
desires such extension. The Engineer-in-Charge shall, if in his opinion (which shall be
final), considers the grounds set out by the Contractor as reasonable grounds,
authorize such extension of time as the EIC may, in his opinion seems it to be
necessary and proper, provided such extension in time is granted only once.
Should the Force Majeure condition continues beyond reasonable period, of which
Engineer-In-Charge will be sole judge, the Owner will be entitled to terminate the
Contract and process final bill based on value of Work already done by the Contractor.
3.9
PRICE REDUCTION DUE TO DELAY

The time allowed for carrying out the work as entered in the Contract, shall be strictly
observed by the Contractor. The work shall throughout the stipulated period of the
contract be proceeded with all the diligence (time being essence of the Contract) and
the contractor shall pay to the Owner as price reduction, an amount equal to 1/2% (half
percent) of the contract value, for every week of delay or part thereof, subject to a
maximum price reduction of 5% (five percent) of the contract value.
3.10
SUM PAYABLE BY WAY OF PRICE REDUCTION TO BE CONSIDERED AS

REASONABLE PRICE REDUCTION WITHOUT REFERENCE TO ACTUAL LOSS
All sums payable by way of price reduction under any of the conditions shall be
considered as reasonable price reduction without reference to the actual loss or
damage which shall have been sustained by the Owner.
3.11
FORFEITURE OF SECURITY DEPOSIT

Notwithstanding anything contained herein, whenever any claim against the Contractor
for the payment of any sum of money arises out of or under the Contract or the Work or
in relation to carrying out the Work, the Owner shall, at its option and without prejudice
to any other rights and entitlements it may have under other Contract Documents,
under Applicable Laws or equity, be entitled to recover such sum by appropriating in
part or whole, the Security Deposit of the Contractor, and to sell any Government
securities etc. forming part of such security, in the event the Security Deposit/Contract
Performance Guarantee amount is insufficient to fulfil the dues of the Contractor
against the Owner, the Owner shall be entitled to recover the balance amounts due
payable by the Contractor by deducting the said amounts from any sums then due and
payable by the Owner to the Contractor or which at any time thereafter may become
due payable to the Contractor, till such time the Owner has not recovered its entire due
amounts. The Contractor shall pay to the Owner forthwith on demand, any balance
amounts remaining due.
3.12
ACTION WHEN WHOLE OF SECURITY DEPOSIT IS FORFEITED
3.12.1 In any case in which under any clause or clauses of the Contract, the Owner shall have
forfeited the whole of the Security Deposit and Contract Performance Guarantee
(whether paid in one sum or deducted by installment) or the Contractor would have
committed a breach of any of the terms contained in the Contract or would have shown
its inability to pay the amounts payable in terms of Clause 3.10, the Owner shall, at its
.
Page 235 of 1744
option, have the right, subject to Clause 3.5.7 to adopt any of the following recourses as
the Owner may deem best suited to his interest and investments:
a)
b)
c)
To rescind the Contract (of which rescission notice in writing to the Contractor
under the hand of the Owner shall be conclusive evidence) in which case the
security deposit/ contract performance guarantee of the Contractor shall stand
forfeited and be absolutely at the disposal of the Owner.
To deploy an agency to carry out the Work or any part of the Work, debiting
Contractor with the cost paid to such agency plus 10% (to cover all
departmental charges) for which a certificate of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
final and conclusive against the Contractor and crediting him with the value of
the work done in all respects in the manner and at the same rates as if it had
been carried out by the Contractor under the term of his contract. The
certificate of Engineer-in-Charge as to the value of the work done shall be final
and conclusive against the Contractor.
To measure up the Work of the Contractor and to take such part thereof as
shall be unexecuted out of his hand to give it to another contractor to complete
in which case any expenses which may be incurred in excess of the sum which
would have been paid to the original Contractor, if the whole Work had been
executed by him (of the amount of which excess, the certificate in writing of the
Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and conclusive) shall be borne and paid by
the original Contractor and may be deducted from any money due to him by the
Owner under the contract or otherwise or from his security deposit or from the
proceeds of sale thereof, of a sufficient part thereof.
3.12.2 In the event of any of the above recourses being adopted by the Owner at its discretion,
the Contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any loss sustained by the
Contractor by reason of it having purchased or procured any materials or Equipment or
incurred or suffered any other expenses or entered into any agreements/ sub-contracts
or made any advances on account of or with a view to the execution of the Work of the
performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be paid
any sum for any Work actually performed under the Contract unless the Engineer-inCharge certifies in writing, the performance of such work, and the value payable in
respect thereof and the Contractor shall only be entitled to be paid the value so certified
by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.13
CONTRACTOR REMAINS LIABLE TO PAY COMPENSATION OF ACTION NOT

TAKEN UNDER CLAUSE 3.12.
In any case in which any of the rights conferred upon the Owner by Clause 3.12 hereof
shall have become exercisable and the same had not been exercised by the Owner,
the non-exercise thereof shall not constitute a waiver of any of the conditions hereof
and such rights shall, notwithstanding be exercised by the Owner in the event of any
further case of default by the Contractor, for which by any clause hereof the Contractor
is declared liable to pay compensation and the liability of the Contractor for past and
future compensation shall remain unaffected. In the event of the Owner putting in force
the rights under sub-clause (a), (b) or (c) vested in him under the preceding clause, the
Owner may, if it so desires take possession of all or any Equipments, plant, machinery,
materials and stores in or upon the Works or the Site thereof belonging to the
Contractor or procured by the Contractor and intended to be used for the execution of
the Work or any part thereof paying or allowing for the same in account at the contract
rates or in case of these not being applicable at current market rates to be certified by
the Engineer-in-Charge whose certificate thereof shall be final otherwise the Engineerin-Charge may give notice in writing to the contractor or his clerk of the works, foreman
or other authorized agent, requiring him to remove such tools, plant, materials or stores
from the premises (within a time to be specified in such notice), and in the event of the
contractor failing to comply with any such requisition, the Engineer-in-Charge may
remove them at the contractor's expense or sell them by auction or private sale, at the
cost, risk and expense of the Contractor and without any further notice as to the date,
time or place of sale and utilize such amounts towards completing the Work or not sell
the equipments and use the same, at the cost and expense of the Contractor, to
complete the Work originally assigned to the Contractor. In such eventuality, the Owner
shall book only the cost of labour etc. in the name of the Contractor and not the cost of
.
Page 236 of 1744
material seized by the Owner, to be utilized for completing the Work. In the event the
equipments are sold, in the manner set out hereinabove, any additional amount left
with the Owner from such sales, after recovering all its cost and expenses shall be
refunded by the Owner to the Contractor. A certificate of the Engineer-in-Charge in
relation to the value at which the material/ Equipment is sold and/or cost incurred in
completing the Work shall be final, conclusive and binding on the Contractor and no
disputes shall be entertained by the Owner in this regard, except for granting the
Contractor a reasonable opportunity to present its case before the EIC alone.
3.14
COMPENSATION FOR ALTERATION IN OR RESTRICTION OF WORK

If at any time from the commencement of the Work, the Owner, for any reasons
whatsoever not require the whole or part of the Work as specified in the Tender, to be
carried out, the Engineer-in-Charge shall give notice in writing of the same to the
Contractor, who shall have no claim to any payment or compensation whatsoever
including on account of any profit or advantage which the Contractor might have
derived from the execution of the Work in full, but which the Contractor did not derive,
in consequence of the full amount of the Work not having been carried out. The
Contractor further shall have no claims for compensation by reason of any alterations
having been made in the original Specifications, Drawings, designs and instructions
which shall involve any curtailment of the work as originally contemplated.
3.15
CHANGE IN CONSTITUTION
Where the Contractor is a partnership firm the prior Approval, in writing, of the Owner
shall be obtained before any change is made in the constitution of the firm - Where the
Contractor is an individual or a Hindu undivided family business concern, such
Approval as aforesaid shall likewise be obtained before Contractor enters into any
agreement with other parties where under, the reconstituted firm/ other Person would
have the right to carry out the Work hereby undertaken by the Contractor. In either case
if prior Approval as aforesaid is not obtained, the Contract shall be deemed to have
been allotted in contravention of Clauses 3.21 hereof and the same action may be
taken and the same consequences shall ensure as provided in the said clause.
3.16
ON DEMISE OF CONTRACTOR
Without prejudice to any of the rights or remedies under the Contract, if the Contractor
(being an individual) dies, the Owner shall have the option of terminating the Contract
without compensation to the legal heirs of the Contractor.
3.17
MEMBERS OF THE OWNER OR INDIVIDUALLY

No director or official or employee of the Owner shall, in any way be personally bound
or liable for the acts or obligations of the Owner under the Contract or answerable for
any default or omission in the observance or performance of any of the acts, matters or
things which are herein contained.
3.18
OWNER NOT BOUND BY PERSONAL REPRESENTATIONS

The Contractor shall neither be entitled to increase the Schedule of Rates after
submitting the Tender nor shall have any other right or claim whatsoever by reason of
representation, explanation or statement or alleged representation, promise or
guarantees given or alleged to have been given to him by any Person.
3.19
CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE AT SITE

The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office at the Site for the accommodation
of its agent and staff and such office shall be open at all reasonable hours to receive
instruction, notices, or other communications from the Owner.
3.20
CONTRACTOR'S SUBORDINATE STAFF AND THEIR CONDUCT

.
Page 237 of 1744
3.19.1 The Contractor shall, within a period of 7 days from the date of execution of the
Contract, name and depute a qualified engineer having sufficient experience in carrying
out work of similar nature, to whom the equipments, materials, if any, shall be issued
and instructions for works given. The Contractor shall also provide, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge, sufficient and qualified staff to superintend the execution of the
Works, competent sub-agents, foreman and leading hands including those specially
qualified by previous experience to supervise the type of works comprised in the
Contract, in such manner as will ensure Work of the best quality and expeditious
working. Whenever in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, additional properly
qualified supervision staff is considered necessary, they shall be employed by the
contractor without additional charges on account thereof. The Contractor shall ensure
to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that Subcontractors, if any shall provide
competent and efficient supervision over the work entrusted to them.
3.19.2 If and whenever any of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's agents, sub-agents,
assistants, foreman or others employees are, in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge,
guilty of any misconduct or are incompetent or insufficiently qualified or negligent in the
performance of their duties hereunder or that in the opinion of the Owner or Engineerin-Charge, it is undesirable for administrative or any other reason for such person or
persons to be employed for executing the Works, the Contractor, if so directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall at once remove such person or persons from employment
thereon or services. Any person or persons so removed from the Works shall not again
be employed or appointed in connection with the Works without the written permission
of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any person so removed from the Works shall be
immediately replaced by the Contractor, at its own expense, by another qualified and
competent substitute, should the contractor be requested to repatriate any person
removed from the works he shall do so and shall bear all costs in connection herewith.
3.19.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper behavior of all its staff and its
Subcontractor(s) staff, foreman, workmen, and others and shall exercise a proper
degree of control over each of them and in particular and without prejudice to the said
generality, the Contractor shall be bound to prohibit and prevent any employees from
tress-passing or acting in any way detrimental or prejudicial to the interest of the Owner
or the community or of the properties or occupiers of land and properties in the
neighborhood and in the event of such employee so trespassing, the Contractor shall
be responsible there for and relieve the Owner of all consequent claims, actions, losses
and/or damages or injury or any other grounds whatsoever. The decision of the
Engineer-in-Charge upon any matter arising under this Clause shall be final and
binding on the Contractor.
3.19.4 If and when required by the Owner, all Contractors personnel entering upon the
Owners premises shall be properly identified by badges of a type acceptable to the
Owner which must be worn by such personnel, all times during the period they are at
the Owners premises.
3.21
SUB LETTING OF WORK

i)
No part of the Contract nor any share or interest there shall in any manner or
degree be transferred assigned sublet by the Contractor directly or indirectly to
any firm or corporation whosoever except as provided for in the succeeding subclause, without the consent writing of the Owner.
ii)
Subcontractors for temporary works etc. - The Owner may at its discretion give
written consent to subcontractor for execution of any part of the works at the
site, being entered into by the Contractor provided each individual subcontract
is submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge before entered into and is approved by
him.
iii)
List of subcontractors to be supplied - At the commencement of job the

contractors shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge list of all subcontractors or
firms for approval with particulars of the general nature of the subcontract or
works.
.
Page 238 of 1744
iv)
Contractor's liability not limited by Subcontractors: Notwithstanding any

subletting or Subcontracting with such Approval as aforesaid and
notwithstanding that the Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of any
Sub contracts, the Contractor shall be and shall remain solely responsible all
acts of the Subcontractor and its employees/ workmen/ agents for the quality
and proper and expeditious execution of the Works and the performance of all
the conditions of the Contract in all respects as if such subletting or
subcontracting had not taken place and as if such work had been done directly
by the Contractor.
v)
Owner may terminate subcontracts: If any Subcontractor engaged upon the

works at the site executes any work which in the opinion of the Engineer-inCharge is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may by
written notice to the Contractor require him to terminate such subcontract and
the Contractor upon the receipt of such notice shall terminate such subcontract
and the latter shall forthwith leave the works, failing which the Owner shall have
right to remove such subcontractors from the site.
vi)
No remedy for action taken under this clause: No action taken by the Owner
under the clause shall release the Contractor of any of its liabilities under the
Contract or give rise to any right to compensation, extension of time or otherwise
failing which the Owner shall have the right to remove such subcontractors from
the site.
The Contractor shall be responsible to cause its Subcontractors to comply with
all Applicable Laws and permits, and shall assume liability for all acts or
omissions of any Subcontractor as if the acts or omissions were the acts or
omissions of the Contractor. All references to the acts, omissions or negligence
of the Contractor shall be deemed to include a reference to the acts, omissions
or negligence of its Subcontractors.
The Operator shall ensure that all agreements with Subcontractors include
language which will effectively subjugate such agreements to the Contract. The
Contractor shall also ensure that appropriate language shall be included in all
such agreements with Subcontractors which ensures that all rights/ benefits
accruable to the Contractor out of such agreements is irrevocably assigned to
the benefit of the Owner and the Owner shall always have the right to enforce
such beneficial rights.
3.22
POWER OF ENTRY
If the Contractor shall not commence the Work in the manner previously described in
the Contract or if he shall, at any time in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge.
i)
Fail to carryout the Works in conformity with the Contract Documents, or
ii)
Fail to carryout the Works in accordance with the time schedule, or
iii)
suspend the Work or the Works for a period of seven days without authority from the
Engineer-in-Charge or
iv)
Fail to carryout and execute the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, or
v)
Fail to supply sufficient or suitable constructional plant, Equipment, temporary works,

labour, materials or things, or
vi)
Commit or suffer or permit any other breach of any of the provisions of the Contract
Documents on its part to be performed or observed or persist in any of the above
mentioned breaches of the Contract for the seven days, after notice in writing shall
have been given to the Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge requiring such breach to
be remedied, or
.
Page 239 of 1744
vii)
Abandon the Works, or
viii)
During the continuance of the Contract, become bankrupt, is generally unable to pay
debts as they become due, make any arrangement or composition with its creditors, or
permit any execution to be levied or go into liquidation whether compulsory or voluntary
(including but not limited to appointment of a provisional manager, trustee or liquidator)
not being merely a voluntary liquidation for the purpose of amalgamation or
reconstruction then in any such case.
Then in any one or more instances mentioned above, the Owner shall have the right to
terminate the Contract in accordance with the provisions of this Contract.
The Owner shall have, without prejudice to other rights and remedies available to it
under the Contract Documents, Applicable Laws or in equity, the right to enter upon the
works and take possession thereof and of the materials, temporary works, Equipments
(belonging to the Contractor), and stock thereon, and to revoke the Contractor's license
to use the same, and to complete the works, by its agents, other contractor or
workmen, or to relate the same upon any terms and to such other person, firm or
corporation as the Owner in its absolute discretion may think proper to employ and for
the purpose aforesaid to use or authorize the use of any materials, temporary works,
Equipments and stock as aforesaid without making payment or allowance to the
Contractor for the said material other than such as may be certified in writing by the
Engineer-in-Charge to be reasonable, and without making any payment or allowance to
the Contractor for the use of the temporary said works, Equipments and stock or being
liable for any loss of damage thereto, and if the Owner shall by reason of its taking
possession of the works or of the works being completed by other contractors (due
account being taken of any such extra work or works which may be omitted) then the
Owner shall, without prejudice to the other rights and remedies, have the right to deduct
amount of such excess as certified by the Engineer-in-Charge from the Security
Deposit, Contract Performance Guarantee and/or any money which may be due for
work done by the Contractor under the Contract and not paid for. Any deficiency shall
forthwith be made good and paid to the Owner by the Contractor and the Owner shall
have power to sell in such manner and for such price as he may think fit all or any of
the Equipments, materials etc. constructed by or belonging to and to recoup and retain
the said deficiency or any part thereof out of the proceeds of the sale.
3.23
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY WITH THE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,

INTERCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS AND
OTHER AGENCIES
3.23.1 Without repugnance to any other condition, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
executing the Work in close co-operation and co-ordinate the works with other
contractors at the Site or their authorized representatives.
3.23.2 The Contractor shall conform in all respects with the provisions of any Applicable Laws
or bye-laws of any local or duly constituted authorities or public bodies which may be
applicable form time to time to the Works or any temporary works. The Contractor shall
keep the Owner indemnified against all penalties and liabilities of every kind arising out
of non-adherence to such statutes, ordinances, Applicable Laws, rules, regulations etc.
3.24
OTHER AGENCIES AT SITE
3.24.1 The Contractor shall have to execute the Work in such place and condition where other
agencies will also be engaged for other works. No claim shall be entertained to works
being executed in the above circumstances.
3.25
NOTICES
3.25.1 Any notice, letter, documents to be given hereunder by the Owner or the Engineer-inCharge may be served on the Contractor or its duly authorized representative at the Site
or may be served by registered mail direct to the address furnished by the Contractor.
.
Page 240 of 1744
Proof of issue of any such notice could be conclusive of the Contractor having been duly
informed of all contents therein.
Any communications to be given by the Contractor to the Owner shall be valid when
given in writing by registered mail and speed post directed to the address furnished by
the Owner.
Any such notices and other documents shall:
(a)
(b)
3.26
3.27
3.28
if delivered by hand, be deemed to have been given and received at the place
of receipt on the date of delivery;
if mailed, be deemed to have been given and received at the place of receipt
on the date of actual receipt. In the event of postal disruption, such notices or
documents must either be delivered personally or sent by facsimile
transmission.
RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS

i)
The Owner reserves the right to distribute the Work between more than one
contractor. The Contractor shall cooperate and afford other contractors
reasonable opportunity for access to the works for the carriage and storage of
materials and execution of their works.
ii)
Wherever the Work being done by any department of the Owner or by other
contractors appointed by the Owner is contingent upon work covered by the
Contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be
determined by the Engineer-in-Charge to secure the completion of the various
portions of the work in general harmony.
RIGHT OF OWNER TO DETERMINE/ TERMINATE CONTRACT

i)
In addition to other grounds set out in these General Conditions of Contract

elsewhere, the Owner shall, at any time be entitled to determine and terminate
the Contract, if in the opinion of the Owner the cessation of the work becomes
necessary owing to paucity of funds or for any other cause whatsoever, in
which case the cost of Approved materials at the site at current market rates as
verified and Approved by Engineer-in-Charge and of the value of the work done
to date by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Owner shall be paid for in
full at the rates specified in the Contract. A notice in writing from the Owner to
the Contractor of such determination and termination and the reason therefore,
shall be the conclusive proof of the fact that the Contract has been so
determined and terminated by the Owner.
ii)
Should the Contract be determined under sub-clause (i) of this clause and the
Contractor claims payments to compensate expenditure incurred by him in the
expectation of completing the whole of the Work, the Owner shall consider and
admit such claim as are deemed fair and reasonable and are supported by
vouchers to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Owner's decision
on the necessity and propriety of any such expenditure shall be final and
conclusive and binding on the contractor. The Contractors submission of the
Tender shall be considered to be its deemed acceptance of all terms of the
Contract Documents including this clause.
PATENTS AND ROYALTIES
3.28.1 The Contractor, if licensed under and patent covering equipment, machinery, materials
or compositions of matter to be used or supplied or methods and process to be
practiced or employed in the performance of the Contract, agrees to pay all royalties and
license fees which may be due with respect thereto. If any equipment, machinery,
materials or composition of matters, to be used or supplied or methods and processed
to be practiced or employed in the performance of the Contract is covered by a patent
under which the Contractor is not licensed then the Contractor before supplying or using
the equipment, machinery materials, composition method or processes shall obtain such
.
Page 241 of 1744
licenses and pay such royalties and license fees as may be necessary for performances
of the Contract. In the event the Contractor fails to pay any such royalty or obtain any
such license, any suit for infringement of such patents which is brought against the
contractors or the Owner as a result of such failure will be defended by the Contractor at
its own expense and the Contractor will pay any damages and costs awarded in such
suit. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner if the Contractor has acquired
knowledge of any plant under which a suit for infringement could be reasonably brought
because of the use by the Owner of any equipment, machinery, materials, process,
methods to the supplied hereunder. The Contractor agrees to and does hereby grant to
Owner, together with the right to extend the same to any of the subsidiaries of the
Owner as irrevocable, royalty-free license to use in any country, and invention made by
the Contractor or its employee in or as a result of the performance of the work under the
Contract.
3.28.2 The drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducibles, models plans, specification and
copies thereof, furnished by the Owner as well as drawings, tracings, reproducibles,
plans, specifications, design, calculations etc. prepared by the Contractor for the
purposes of execution of works covered in or connected with the Contract shall be the
property of the Owner and shall not be used for any other work but are to be delivered to
the Owner at the completion of the Contract.
3.24.1 Where so desired by Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor agrees to respect the secrecy
of any document, drawings etc. issued to him for the execution of the Contract, and
restrict access to such documents, drawings etc. to the minimum and further, the
Contractor agrees to execute an individual SECRECY agreement from each or any
person employed by the Contractor having access to such documents, drawings and to
any other agency or individual without the written Approval by Engineer-in-Charge.
3.29
LIENS
3.29.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract, if at any time, there
should be evidence or any lien or claim for which the Owner might have become liable
and which is chargeable to the Contractor, the Owner shall, without prejudice to other
rights and remedies available to the Owner, have the right to retain out of any payment
then due or thereafter to become due an amount sufficient to completely indemnify the
Owner against such lien or claim and if such lien or claim be valid the Owner may pay
and discharge the same and deduct the amount so paid from any money which may be
or may become due and payable to the Contractor. If any lien or claim remain unsettled
after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund or pay to the Owner all moneys
that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien or claim including all
costs and reasonable expenses.
3.29.2 Contractor will not disclose details of the work to any person or persons except those
engaged in its performance, and only to the extent required for the particular portion of
the work being done.
3.29.3 Contractor will not give any items concerning details of the work to the press or a news
disseminating agency without prior written Approval from. Contractor shall not take any
pictures on site without written Approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.30
OPERATION OF CONTRACT
3.30.1 Law Governing - Regardless of the place of contracting, place of performance or

otherwise, this Agreement, and all amendments modifications, alterations, or
supplements, thereto shall be governed by the laws of India and particularly the State of
Madhya Pradesh for the nature, validity and interpretation thereof.
3.30.2 Non waiver of defaults - Any failure by the Owner or the Contractor at any time, or from
time to time, to enforce or require the strict keeping and performance of any of the terms
or conditions of this agreement, or to exercise a right/ power hereunder, shall not
constitute a waiver of such terms, conditions or rights/ power, and shall not affect or
.
Page 242 of 1744
impair same, or the right of the Owner or the Contractor, as the case may be, at any
time to avail itself of same.
3.31
SCOPE AND INTENT
3.31.1 Scope: The general character and the scope of the work is illustrated and defined by the
Annexure SOW, the Specifications and the Bills of Quantities herewith attached and the
signed Drawings. If the Contractor shall find any discrepancy in or divergence between
the Drawings and or the Contract Bills he shall immediately give to the Owner a written
notice specifying the discrepancy or divergence and the Owner shall issue instructions
in regard thereto, which shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
3.31.2 Extent: The Contractor shall carry out and complete the work in every respect in
accordance with the Contract Documents, and with the directions of and to the
reasonable satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner may in its absolute discretion and from
time to time issue further drawings, details and/or written instructions, written directions
and written explanations all of which are collectively referred to as Owner's instructions.
All such Drawings and instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, true
developments thereof and reasonably inferable there from.
3.31.3 Intent: The intention of the Document is to include all labour and materials, equipment
and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the Work. All such Drawings
and instructions shall be consistent with the Contract Documents, true developments
thereof and reasonably inferable there from. Materials of work described in words, which
so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such
recognized standard.
3.31.4 The descriptions given in the Schedule of Quantities shall, unless otherwise stated, be
held to include wastage on materials, carriage and cartage, carrying and return of
empties, hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other labourers necessary
in and for the full and entire execution and completion of the work as aforesaid in
accordance with good practice and recognized principles.
3.32
TYPE OF CONTRACT
3.32.1 The Contract shall be a lump sum contract.
3.33
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
3.33.1 The Schedule of Quantities given in the Contract Bill is provisional and is meant to
indicate the intent of the work and to provide a uniform basis for tendering.
3.33.2 The Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease the tendered quantities or revise
specifications, drawings, designs of any or every item or delete them at any stage of
work. The successful Bidder claim for compensation or damages on account of these
shall not be entertained. Such deviations will be adjusted at the rates contained in the
Contractor at prevailing market rates, if the rates are not available in the Contract, by
issuing variation order(s). In case it becomes necessary for the Owner to temporarily
suspend or postpone the work, partly, or fully due to unforeseen circumstances, the
Owner shall not be liable for any compensation on account of resultant delays.
3.33.3 Any error in description or in quantity or omission of items from Contract Bill shall not
vitiate the Contract but shall be treated as a variation.
3.34
CONTRACT SUM
3.34.1 The Contract sum shall not be adjusted or altered in any way whatsoever otherwise than
in accordance with the express provisions of these conditions and subject to any error
whether of Arithmetic or not in the computation of the Contract Sum shall be deemed to
have been accepted by the parties hereto.
.
Page 243 of 1744
3.35
CONTRACT BILLS
3.35.1 The quality and quantity of the work included in the contract sum shall be deemed to be
that which is set out in the Contract Bills which Bills unless otherwise expressly stated in
respect of any specified item shall be deemed to have been prepared in accordance
with the principles of the standard method of measurement of building works last before
issued by the Indian Standard Institution but same as aforesaid nothing contained in the
Contract Bills shall override, modify or affect in any way whatsoever the application or
interpretation of that which is contained in these conditions.
3.35.2 Any error in description or in a quantity or omission of items from the Contract Bills shall
not vitiate the Contract but shall be corrected and deemed to be a variation required by
the Owner.
3.36
Signature of Bidder/ tender by other than individuals

The Bidder shall contain the name, residence and place of business of Person or
Persons making the tender and shall be signed by the Bidder with his usual signature
with company stamp. Partnership firms shall furnish the full names of all partners in the
Tender. It should be signed in the partnership name by all the partners or in case of a
company by duly authorized representative followed by the name and designation of the
person signing with company stamp.
Tender by company or corporation registered under the Applicable Laws shall be signed
by the authorized representative and a power of attorney in that behalf shall accompany
the Tender.
When a Bidder signs a Tender in a language other than English, the total amount
tendered should in addition be written in the same language. One witness should attest
the signature at least.
3.37
OWNER NOT BOUND BY PERSONAL REPRESENTATIONS

The contractor shall not be entitled to any increase on the schedule rates or any other
right or claim whatsoever by reason of representation, promise or guarantee given or
alleged to have been given to him by any person.
3.38
CANCELLATION OF CONTRACT IN FULL OR PART:
3.38.1 The Owner reserves its right to cancel the Contract in the event of one or more of the
following situations, If the Contractor:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
shall offer or give or agree to give to any person in the Owner service or to any
other person on its behalf any gift or consideration of any kind as an inducement
or reward for doing or forbearing to do or for having done or forborne to do any
acting relation to the obtaining or execution of this or any other contractor for the
Owner: or
shall enter into a contract with the Owner in connection with which commission
has been paid or agreed to be paid by him or to his knowledge, unless the
particulars of any such commission and the terms of payment thereof have been
previously disclosed in writing to the Accepting Authority/ Engineer-in-Charge ;
or
shall obtain a contract with the Owner as a result of wrong tendering or other
non bonafide methods of competitive tendering ; or
being an individual, or a firm, , such individual or any partner of the firm (as
applicable) shall at any time be adjudged bankrupt, insolvent, generally unable
to pay debts or have a receiving order or order for administration of his estate
made against him or shall take or become subject to any proceedings for
bankruptcy, liquidation or composition (other than a solvent restructuring or
reorganization) under any Applicable Laws relating to insolvency or bankruptcy
for the time being force or make any conveyance or assignment of his/its assets
or composition or arrangement for the benefit of his/its creditors or purport so to
.
Page 244 of 1744
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
do or if any application be made under any Applicable Laws relating to

insolvency for the time being in force for the sequestration of its estate or if a
trust deed be executed by him for benefit of its creditors ; or
where the Contractor is a company, (a) making of a general assignment for the
benefit of creditors (b) admission of any proceedings against the Contractor for
its bankruptcy or insolvency, or similar action or seeking liquidation, winding up,
reorganization, arrangement, compromise, adjustment, protection, relief, or
composition of it or its debts under any law relating to bankruptcy, insolvency or
reorganization or relief of debtors or seeking appointment of a receiver or
provisional liquidator or other similar official for all or any substantial part of its
property; (c) institution of proceedings by the Contractor seeking to adjudicate
itself bankrupt or insolvent, or seeking liquidation, winding up, reorganization,
arrangement, compromise, adjustment, protection, relief, or composition of itself
or its debts under any law relating to bankruptcy, insolvency or reorganization or
relief of debtors (including passing of a resolution to authorize any of the
aforesaid actions), or
Shall suffer an execution being levied on its goods and allow it to be continued
for a period of 15 days or
Assigns, transfers, sublets (engagement of labour on a piece-work basis or of
labour with materials not to be incorporated in the work, shall not be deemed to
be subletting) or otherwise parts with or attempts to assign, transfer sublet or
otherwise part with the entire works or any portion thereof without the prior
written Approval of the Accepting Authority/Owner.
3.38.2 The Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy which shall have
accrued or shall accrue hereafter to the Owner, by a notice in writing to cancel the
Contract as whole or only such items of work in default from the Contract.
3.38.3 The Engineer-in-Charge shall on such cancellation by the Ownerhave powers to:
(i)
(ii)
Take possession of the Siteand any materials, equipments, implements, stores,

etc., thereon, and/ or
Carry out the incomplete Work by any means at the risk and cost of the
Contractor.
3.38.4 The Owner in the event of cancellation will be entitled to procure the requirement in the
open market and recover excess payment over and above the Contractor's agreed
price, if any, from the Contractor, reserving to itself the right to forfeit the Security
Deposit/ Contract Performance Guarantee, if any, made by the Contractor against the
Contract.
3.38.5 On cancellation of the Contract in full or in part, the EIC shall determine what amount, if
any, is recoverable from the Contractor for completion of the works or part of the works
or in case the works or part of the works is not to be completed the loss of damage
suffered by the Owner on account of the said non performance. In determining the
aforesaid amounts credit shall be given to the Contractor for the value of the work
executed by him up to the time of cancellation, the value of Contractors materials if any,
taken over and incorporated in the work and use of plant and machinery, if any
belonging to the Contractor. The Owner in that event will be entitled to procure the
requirement in the open market and recover excess payment over the Contractor's
agreed price, if any, from the Contractor, reserving to itself the right to forfeit the Security
Deposit/ Contract Performance Guarantee.
3.38.6 The Contractor is aware that the said goods are required by the Owner for the ultimate
purpose of materials production and that non-delivery may cause loss of production and
consequently loss of profit to the Owner. In this event of the Owner exercising the option
to claim damages for non-delivery other than by way of difference between the market
price and the contract price. The Contractor shall pay to the Owner, fair compensation to
be agreed upon between the Owner and the Contractor.
3.38.7 The provision of this clause shall not prejudice the right of the Owner from invoking the
provisions of clause 'Delayed Delivery' as aforesaid.
.
Page 245 of 1744
3.38.8 Any excess expenditure incurred or to be incurred by the Owner in completing the works
or part of the works or the excess loss or damages suffered or may be suffered by the
Owner as aforesaid after allowing such credit shall without prejudice to any other
contractor on any account, and if such moneys are not sufficient the Contractor shall be
called upon in writing and shall be liable to pay the same within 7 days.
3.38.9 If the Contractor shall fail to pay the required sum within the aforesaid period of 30 days,
the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to sell any or all of the Contractors unused
materials, Equipments, implements, temporary building etc. and apply the proceeds of
sale thereof towards the satisfaction of any sums due from the Contractor under the
Contract and if thereafter there be any balance outstanding from the Contractor, it shall
be recovered in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
3.38.10 Any sums in excess of the amounts due to the Owner and unsold materials,
Equipments, etc. shall be returned to the Contractor provided always that if cost or
anticipated cost of completion by the Owner of the Works or part of the Works is less
than the amount which the Contractor would have been paid had he completed the
works or part of the works, such benefits shall not accrue to the Contractor.
3.39
CONTRACTOR AS INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR

The Contractor shall be an independent contractor with respect to the Work assigned to
him under the Contract and other services offered by the Contractor hereunder, and
neither Contractor nor its Subcontractors nor the employees of other shall be deemed
to be agents, representatives, employees or servants of the Owner in the performance
of the Work or any part thereof, or in any manner dealt with herein. The Owner and the
Contractor covenant and agree that in the performance of the Work by the Contractor,
the Contractor shall not perform any act or make any representation to any Person to
the effect that the Contractor or any of its agents, representatives or Subcontractors is
represented to be an agent or partner or joint venture partner or collaborator of the
Owner.
3.40
CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER

The Contractor will defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its agents, officers,
directors, subcontractors and employees from and against any and all claims, damages,
losses, liabilities, expenses (including reasonable legal fees), penalties, demands and
causes of action arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work provided
that any such claims, damages, loss and/or expense arise out of: (a) the gross
negligence, fraud or willful act of the Contractor or any of its agents, employees or
officers: (b) any violation of Applicable Law by the Contractor or any of its agents,
employees or officers: (c) breach by the Contractor of the Contract Documents and/or
any documents executed or instructions or Approvals issued, pursuant to the Contract
Documents; and/or (d) material misrepresentation to the Owner by the Contractor.
3.41
TYPOGRAPHICAL OR CLERICAL ERRORS
3.41.1 The Owners clarification regarding partially omitted particulars or typographical or

clerical errors shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
Page 246 of 1744
SECTION IV
PERFORMANCE OF WORK
4.1
EXECUTION OF WORKS
4.1.1
All the Works shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the Contract
Documents, Applicable Laws and with such explanatory detailed Drawings,
Specifications, and instructions as may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor
by the Engineer-in-Charge whether mentioned in the Contract or not. The Contractor
shall be responsible for ensuring that Works throughout are executed in the most
substantial, proper and workman like manner with the quality of material and
workmanship in strict accordance with the Specifications and to the entire satisfaction
of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.1.2
Wherever it is mentioned in the Specifications that the Contractor shall perform certain
Work or provide certain facilities/ materials, it is understood that the Contractor shall do,
so at its cost, risk and expense.
4.1.3
The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the relevant Indian Standards, the
job specification contained herein and codes referred to. Where the job specification
stipulate requirements in addition to those contained in the standard codes and
specifications, such additional requirements shall also be satisfied.
4.2
COORDINATION AND INSPECTION OF WORK

The coordination and inspection of the day to day work under the Contract shall be the
responsibility of the Engineer-in-Charge. The written instructions regarding any
particular job will normally be passed by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized
representative. A work order book will be maintained by the Contractor for each sector
in which the aforesaid written instructions will be entered. These will be signed by the
Contractor or its authorized representative by way of acknowledgment each time, within
12 hours of receipt.
4.3
WORK IN MONSOON AND DEWATERING
4.3.1
The completion of the Work shall entail working in all season including the monsoon
season also. The Contractor must maintain adequate labour force required for
executing the Work and execute the same as per the time schedule prescribed in the
Contract. No extra rate will be considered for work executed in monsoon season.
4.3.2
During monsoon and other period, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep
the working Site free from stranded water/ water logging, at its own cost and expense.
4.4
WORK ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS

For carrying out work on Sundays and Holidays, the contractor will approach the
Engineer-in-Charge or his representative at least two days in advance and obtain
permission in writing.
4.5
4.5.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR EXECUTION OF WORK

Place of work
The Work has to be executed at Bina Refinery, Bina (MP). The Contractor should
apprise himself of all the conditions prevailing in such location and the restrictions
placed on movement of personnel and Equipment, types of equipment and tools
permitted, working methods allowed etc. in the light of security and safety regulations
operative in the area. The safety regulations to be complied with, by the Contractor are
given in the Contract Documents. No idle time wages or compensation for temporary
.
Page 247 of 1744
stoppage of work or restrictions would be paid, and the rates quoted for the various
items of work should cover the cost of all such contingencies and eventualities.
Substantial structures and utilities exist both above ground and underground, adjacent
to the work site. (The Work may get restrained by the existence of such structures and
utilities.) Special care is necessary in transportation, storage, working of Equipments
and other activities to protect the existing features and prevent damage to the Owners
facility. Necessary protective structures, barricades etc. have to be erected at various
places as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. No extra payment for such protective Works
will be made by the Owner unless specially provided in the Schedule of Rates
Approved by the Owner.
Owner will extend all necessary help for co-ordination with external agencies, if any, if
requested for by the Contractor.
4.5.2
The working time or the time of work is 48 hours per week. Overtime work is permitted
in cases of need and the Owner will not compensate the Contractor for the same. Shift
working at 2 or 3 shifts per day may become necessary and the Contractor should take
this aspect into consideration for formulating his rates for quotation. No extra claims will
be entertained by the Owner on any account whatsoever.
4.5.3
The Contractor must arrange for the placement of workers in such a way that the
delayed completing of the work or any part thereof for any reasons whatsoever will not
affect their proper employment. The Owner will not entertain any claim for idle time
payment whatsoever.
4.5.4
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, reports at regular intervals regarding the
state and progress of Work. The details and performa of the report will mutually be
agreed after the award of Contract.
4.6
DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER
4.6.1
Where Drawings are attached with the Tender, these shall be for the general guidance
of the Contractor to enable him to visualize the type of work contemplated and scope of
work involved. The Contractor will be deemed to have studied the Drawings and formed
an idea about the work involved.
4.6.2
Detailed working drawings on the basis of which actual execution of the Work is to
proceed will be furnished from time to time by the Owner or the Engineer-in-Charge or
his representative during the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall be deemed to
have gone through the drawings supplied to him thoroughly and carefully and in
conjunction with all other connected drawings and bring to the notice of the Engineerin-Charge, discrepancies, if any, therein before actually carrying out the Work. In case
of such discrepancies, the Operator shall act in accordance with the EICs instructions.
4.6.3
Copies of all detailed working drawings relating to the Works shall be kept at the
Contractor's office of the Site and shall be made available to the Engineer-in-Charge at
any time during the term of the Contract. The Drawings and other documents issued by
the Owner shall be returned to the Owner on completion of the Works. Reference is
also invited to enclosed Drawings and other Contract Documents.
4.7
DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR
4.7.1
Where drawings/ data are to be furnished by the Contractor, they shall be as

enumerated in the Special Conditions of Contract, and shall be furnished within the
specified time.
4.7.2
Where Approval of Drawings before execution of a Work has been specified, it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to have these drawings prepared as per the directions of
Engineer-in-Charge and get the same Approved before proceeding with such Work.
Any changes that may have become necessary in these drawings during the execution
of the Work shall have to carried out by the Contractor to the satisfaction of Engineer.
Page 248 of 1744
in-charge at no extra cost. All final Drawings shall bear the certification stamps as
indicated below duly signed by both the Contractor and the Engineer-in-Charge.
"Certified true for
.......................................................Project
Agreement No. ...............................................
Signed
CONTRACTOR
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE
4.7.3
A period of 3 weeks from the date of receipt shall be required for Approval of drawings
4.8
SETTING OUT WORKS
4.8.1
The Engineer-in-Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the four corners of the
Site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set out the works and shall
provide efficient staff for the said purpose and shall be solely responsible for the
accuracy of such setting out.
4.8.2
The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all stakes,
templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall take all necessary
precaution to prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be responsible for the
consequences of such removal or disturbance should the same take place and for their
efficient and timely reinstatement. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the
maintenance of all existing survey marks, boundary marks, distance marks and center
line marks, either existing or supplied and fixed by the Contractor. The work shall be set
out to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Approval thereof or joining in
setting out the work, shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities.
4.8.3
Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense, provide
all necessary reference and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags, ranging, rods, strings
and other materials for proper layout of the Work in accordance with the scheme, for
bearing marks acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge. The center longitudinal or face
lines and cross lines shall be marked by means of small masonry pillars. Each pillar
shall have distinct mark at the centre to enable theodolite to be set over it. No work
shall be started until all these points are checked and Approved by the Engineer-inCharge in writing but such Approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities. The Contractor shall also provide all labour, material and other
facilities, as necessary, for the proper checking of layout and inspection of the points
while executing the Work.
4.8.4
Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the Site of units of work under construction
should be protected and fenced by the Contractor.
4.8.5
On completion of works, the Contractor must submit the geodetic documents according
to which the Work was carried out to the Owner/ EIC for its confirmation/ observations.
4.9
RESPONSIBILITY FOR LEVEL AND ALIGNMENT

The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal and
vertical alignment, the levels and correctness of every part of the Work and shall rectify
effectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be carried out by
the Contractor, at his own cost, risk and expense, when instructions are issued to that
effect by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.10
MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR
4.10.1 The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required for
executing the Work including tools, tackles and Equipments for the completion and
maintenance of the works except the materials which will be issued by Owner and shall
make his own arrangement for procuring such materials and for the transport thereof.
The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if so
.
Page 249 of 1744
desired by the Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature in this regard.
The Owner will insist on the procurement of materials which bear ISI stamp and / or
which are supplied by reputed suppliers borne on DGS & D list.
4.10.2 All materials procured should meet the Specifications given in the Contract Documents.
The Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test certificates for
any batch of any material procured. Before procuring, the Contractor should get the
Approval of Engineer-in-Charge for any material to be used for the Works.
4.10.3 Manufacturer's certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by the Contractor.
If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge any tests are required to be
conducted on the materials supplied by the Contractor, these will be arranged by the
Contractor, promptly at his own cost and expense.
4.11
MATERIALS PROCURED WITH ASSISTANCE OF OWNER

Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all the clause of the
Contract Documents where any materials for the execution of the Contract are procured
with the assistance of the Owner, either by issue from Owner's stock or purchase made
under orders or permits or license issued by the Government, the Contractor shall hold
the said material as trustee for the Owner and use such materials economically and
solely for the purpose of the Contract and not dispose them off without the permission of
the Owner in any manner whatsoever and return, if required by the Engineer-in-Charge
all surplus or unserviceable materials that may be left with him after the completion of
the Contract or at its termination for any reason whatsoever.
In the event of breach of the aforesaid condition, the contractor shall in terms of the
licenses on permits, and / or for criminal breach of trust, be liable to compensate the
Owner at double rate or high rate, in the event of those materials at that time having
higher rate or not being available in the market, then any other rate as determined by
the Engineer-in-Charge and his decision in this regard shall be final, conclusive and
binding on the Contractor.
4.12
MATERIALS OBTAINED FROM DISMANTLING

If the Contractor in the course of execution of the Work is called upon to dismantle any
part, for reasons other than those stipulated in clauses 4.20 and 4.24 hereunder, the
materials obtained in the work of dismantling etc. will be considered as the Owner's
property and will be disposed off by the Owner or by the Contractor after receiving the
Owners written consent, to the best advantage of the Owner.
4.13
ARTICLES OF VALUE FOUND

All gold, silver and other materials, of any description and all precious stones, coins,
treasure, relics, antiquities and other similar things which shall be found in, under or
upon the Site, shall be property of the Owner/ Government of India and the Contractor
shall duly preserve the same to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall
from time to time deliver the same to such person or persons indicated by the Owner.
4.14
DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN INSTRUCTIONS

Should any discrepancy occur between the various instructions furnished to the
Contractor, his agents or staff or any doubt, arise as to the meaning of any such
instructions or should there be any misunderstanding between the Contractor's staff
and the Engineer-in-Charge's staff, the Contractor shall refer the matter immediately in
writing to the Engineer-in-Charge whose decision thereon shall be final and conclusive
and no claim for losses alleged to have been caused by such discrepancies between
instructions, or doubts, or misunderstanding shall in any event be admissible against
the Owner.
4.15
ALTERATIONS IN SPECIFICATIONS AND DESIGNS AND EXTRA WORK

.
Page 250 of 1744
4.15.1 The Engineer-in-Charge shall have power to make any alterations in, omissions from,
additions to or substitution for, the Schedule of Rates, the original Specifications,
Drawings, designs and instructions that may appear to him to be necessary or
advisable during the progress of the Work and the Contractor shall be bound to carry
out such altered, extra, new items of work in accordance with any instructions which
may be given to him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-charge and such alterations,
omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the Contract in any manner
whatsoever and any altered additional or substituted work which the Contractor may be
directed to do in the manner above specified as part of the Work shall be carried out by
the Contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which he agreed to do the
main work. The time for completion of work may be extended for the part of the
particular job at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, for only such alterations,
additions or substitutions of the work, as he may consider as just and reasonable. The
rates for such additional, altered or substituted work under this clause shall be worked
out in accordance with the following provisions:
4.16
a)
If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the
Contract, the Contractor is bound to carry out the additional, altered or
substituted work at the same rates as are specified in the Contract.
b)
If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically
provided in the Contract, the rates will be derived from the rates for similar
class of works as specified in the Contract. The opinion of the Engineer-inCharge, as to whether the rates can be reasonably so derived from the
items in the Contract, will be final and binding on the Contractor.
c)
If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work cannot be

determined in the manner specified in sub-clause (a) and (b) above, then
Contractor shall, within 7 days of the date of receipt of order to carry out the
work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge of the rates he intends to charge for
such class of work, supported by analysis of the rate or rates claimed, and
Engineer-in-Charge shall determine the rate or rates on the basis of
prevailing market rates of such materials plus 10% to cover Contractor's
supervision, overheads & profit; and labour cost at Schedule of Labour
Rates and approve such payment accordingly. The opinion of the Engineerin-Charge as to current market rates of materials and the quantum of labour
involved per unit of measurement will be final and binding on the Contractor.
d)
Provision contained in sub-clause (a), (b) & (c) above will apply where the
value of alterations, additions and substitutions do not exceed plus or minus
25% of total contract value.
ACTION WHERE NO SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED

In case of any class of work for which there is no Specification given by the Owner in
the Contract Documents, such work shall be carried out in accordance with Indian
Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard Specifications do not cover the
same, the Work should be carried out as per standard Engineering Practice subject to
the Approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.17
ABNORMAL RATES
The Bidder is expected to quote rate for each item after careful analysis of cost
involved for the completion of Work, considering all Specifications and conditions of
Contract. This will avoid loss of profit or gain, in case of curtailment or change of
specification for any item. In case it is noticed that the rates for any item, quoted by the
Bidder are unusually high or unusually low it will be sufficient cause for the rejection of
the Tender, unless the Owner is convinced about the reasonableness of the rates on
scrutiny of the analysis for such rate to be furnished by the Bidder on demand and
before the execution of the Contract.
4.18
INSPECTION OF WORK
.
Page 251 of 1744
4.18.1
The Engineer-in-Charge will have full power and authority to inspect the Works at any
time wherever in progress either on the Site or at the Contractor's premises /
workshops wherever situated, premises / workshops of any person, firm or corporation
where work in connection with the Contract may be in hand or where materials are
being or are to be supplied, and the Contractor shall afford or procure for the Engineerin-Charge every facility and assistance to carry out such inspection. The Contractor
shall, at all times during the usual working hours and at all other time for which
reasonable notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative to
visit the Works have been given to the Contractor, either himself be present to receive
order and instructions or post his authorized representative/ Site In-Charge duly
accredited in writing for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's agent shall be
considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor himself.
The Contractor shall give not less than seven days, notice in writing to the Engineer-inCharge before covering up or placing any work beyond reach of inspection and
measurement. In the event of breach of above the same shall be at Contractor's risk
and expenses for carrying out such measurement or inspection.
4.18.2
No material shall be dispatched by the Contractor before obtaining the Approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge in writing..
The Contractor is to provide, at all times during the execution of the Work and the
maintenance period, proper means of access with ladders, gangways, etc. and the
necessary attendance to move and adopt, as directed for inspection or measurement of
the works by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.19
ASSISTANCE TO THE ENGINEERS

The Contractor shall make available to the Engineer-in-Charge, free of cost necessary
instruments and assistance in checking of the progress of the Works and taking
measurement of work.
4.20
TESTS FOR QUALITY OF WORK
4.20.1 All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the Contract Documents
and in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be
subjected from time to time to such test at Contractor's cost as the Engineer-in-Charge
may direct at the place of manufacturer or fabrication or on the Site or at all or any such
places. The Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, labour and materials as
are normally required for examining, measuring and testing any workmanship as may
be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge.
4.20.2 All the tests necessary in connection with the execution of the Work as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall be carried out at the field testing laboratory of the Owner by
paying the charges as decided by the Owner from time to time. In case of nonavailability of testing facility with the Owner, the required test shall be carried out at the
cost and expense of the Contractor at Government or any other testing laboratory as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.20.3 If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials or
workmanship not supplied by the Contractor, such tests shall be carried out by the
Contractor as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge and cost of such tests shall be
reimbursed by the Owner.
4.21
SAMPLES
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge for Approval when requested or
if required by the Specifications, adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be
used in the Work. Such samples shall be submitted before the Work is commenced and
in ample time to permit tests and examinations thereof. The Contractor shall ensure
that all materials furnished and finishing applied in actual Work shall be fully identical to
the Approved samples.
.
Page 252 of 1744
4.22
ACTION AND COMPENSATION IN CASE OF BAD WORK

If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge that any work has been executed with
unsound, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials of any inferior
description, or that any materials or articles provided by the Contractor for the
execution of the work are unsound or of a quality inferior to that contracted for, or
otherwise not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall on demand in
writing from the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative, specifying the
work, materials or articles complained of, notwithstanding that the same have been
inadvertently passed, certified and paid for forthwith shall rectify or remove and
reconstruct the works specified and provide other proper and suitable materials or
articles at his own expense and cost, and in the event of failure to do so within a period
to be specified by the Engineer-in-Charge in his demand aforesaid, the Contractor shall
be liable to pay compensation at the rate of one percent of the estimated cost of the
whole work, for every week limited to a maximum of 10 percent of the estimated cost
the whole work, while his failure to do so shall continue and in the case of any such
failure the Engineer-in-Charge may on expiry of notice period rectify or remove and reexecute the work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles
complained of as the case may be, at the risk and expense of the Contractor in all
respects. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to any question raising under this
clause shall be final, conclusive and binding on the Contractor.
4.23
4.24
SUSPENSION OF WORKS
i)
Subject to the provisions of sub-para (ii) of this clause, the Contractor shall, if
ordered in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or his representative temporarily
suspend the works or any part thereof for such period and such time as so
ordered and shall not, after receiving such written order, proceed with the Work
therein ordered to be suspended, until he shall have received a written order to
proceed therewith. The Contractor shall not be entitled to claim compensation
for any loss or damage sustained by him by reason of temporary suspension of
the Works aforesaid. An extension of time for completion corresponding with the
delay caused by any such suspension of the works as aforesaid will be granted
to the Contractor, should he apply for the same, provided that suspension was
not consequent to any default or failure on the part of the Contractor and
provided such extension does not cause any losses to the Owner on account of
shut down of Owners facility for more than the stipulated time.
ii )
In case of suspension of entire work, ordered in writing by Engineer-in-Charge,

for a period of more than 6 (six) months, the Contractor shall have the option to
terminate the Contract. In such termination, the Contractor shall be entitled to
amounts for such work as duly executed by the Contractor, to the satisfaction
of the Owner and no other amounts/ compensation of any nature shall be paid
to the Contractor for such suspended period.
OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK

Upon failure of the Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with
the provisions of the Contract, the Owner shall, subject to Clause 3.5.7 additionally
have the right to place additional labour force, tools, equipments and materials on such
parts of the work, instead of assuming charge for the entire Work. In such cases, the
Owner may designate or also engage another contractor to carry out the said work. In
such cases, the Owner shall deduct from the amount which otherwise might become
due to the Contractor, the cost of such work and materials with ten percent added to
cover all departmental charges and should the total amount thereof exceed the amount
due to the Contractor, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.
4.25
POSSESSION PRIOR TO COMPLETION

The Engineer-in-Charge shall have the right to take possession of or use any
completed or partially completed work or part of the work at any time, with or without
.
Page 253 of 1744
notice. Such possession or use shall not be deemed to be an acceptance of any work
completed in accordance with the Contract. If such prior possession or use by the
Engineer-in-Charge delays the progress of work, equitable adjustment in the time of
completion will be made and the Contract shall be deemed to be modified accordingly,
at the option of the Owner.
4.26
TWELVE MONTHS PERIOD OF LIABILITY FROM THE DATE OF ISSUE OF

COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
4.26.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from the
date of issue of Completion Certificate. Any damage or defect, that may lie
undiscovered at the time of issue of Completion Certificate, connected in any way with
the Equipment or materials supplied by him or in the workmanship shall be rectified or
replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and expense as deemed necessary by the
Engineer-in-Charge or in default, the Engineer-in-Charge may cause the same made
good by other workmen and deduct expenses (for which the certificate of Engineer-inCharge shall be final) from any sums that may be then or at any time thereafter, become
due to the Contractor or from his Security Deposit / Contract Performance Guarantee.
4.26.2 If the Contractor feels that any variation in work or quality of materials or proportions
would be beneficial or necessary to fulfill the guarantees called for, he shall bring this to
the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge in writing. The work will not be considered as
complete and taken over by the Owner until all the temporary works, labour, Site office
and staff colonies etc. constructed by the Contractor is removed and work site cleaned
to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
4.26.3 Care of Work - From the commencement to completion of Works, the Contractor shall
take full responsibility for the care of all Works including all temporary work, and in case
any damage or loss or injury happens to the Work or any part thereof or to any
temporary work, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor shall at its own cost and
expense, repair and make good the same, so that at completion the work shall be in
good order and in conformity in every respect with the requirements of the Contract, the
Engineer-in-Charge's instructions and the Contract Documents.
4.26.4 Defects prior to taking over - At any time, before the work is taken over, the Engineerin-Charge shall
a)
Decide that any work done or materials used by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor is defective or not in accordance with the Contract or the
Approval issued by EIC or that the Works or any portion thereof are defective
or do not fulfill the requirements of Contract (all such matters being herein after
called 'Defects' in this clause) and
b)
As soon as reasonably practicable, gives to the Contractor, notice, in writing of

the said Defect specifying particulars of the defects alleged to exist or to have
occurred, then the Contractor shall at his own cost and expense and with all
speed make good the Defects so specified.
In the case the Contractor shall fail to do so, the Owner may subject to Clause 3.5.7
take, at the cost and expense of the Contractor, steps such as may in all circumstances
be reasonable to make good such Defects. The expenditure, so incurred by the Owner
shall be recovered from the amount due to the Contractor or from the Security
Deposit/Contract Performance Guarantee. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge with
regard to the amount to be recovered from the Contractor will be final and binding on
the Contractor. As soon as the Works have been completed in accordance unless
otherwise approved by the EIC, in writing. If any defect is not, remedied within a
reasonable time, the Owner may proceed to do the Work at the Contractor's cost, risk
and expense and deduct from the final bill or the Security Deposit such amount as may
be decided by the Owner. If by reason of any default on the part of the Contractor a
Completion Certificate has not been issued in respect of every portion of the Work
within one month after the date fixed in the Contract for the completion of the Works,
the Owner shall be at his liberty to use the Works or any portion thereof in respect of
.
Page 254 of 1744
which a Completion Certificate has not been issued provided that the Works or the
portion thereof so used as aforesaid shall be afforded reasonable opportunity for
completing these works for the issue of Completion Certificate.
Page 255 of 1744
SECTION V
CONTRACTORS FIELD ORGANIZATION/ SUB-CONTRACTORS AND EQUIPMENTS
5.1
OFFICE ACCOMMODATION AT SITE :

The Contractor shall provide and maintain an office at the Site at his own cost and
expense for the accommodation of his agents and staff and such office shall be open at
all reasonable hours to receive instruction, notices or other communications from the
Owner/ EIC.
The Contractor shall also provide, erect and maintain where directed by the Owner,
simple watertight office accommodation for the Owner/ EIC / their personnel. The
accommodation shall be well lighted, ventilated and provided with windows, doors with a
lock. This should be minimum of 250 sq.ft. area with a provision of a separate toilet.
5.2
CONTRACTORS FIELD ORGANIZATION AND EQUIPMENT :

Contractor's Site In-charge: The Contractor shall, for the entire term of the Contract,
keep on his roles, qualified and competent engineers, one of whom will be designated
as Site In-Charge and who will be responsible for the carrying out of the Works to the
true meaning of the Drawings, Specifications and Schedule of the Quantities. Any
instructions and directions given by the Owner/ EIC to the Site In-Charge shall be
deemed to have been issued to the Contractor. Attention is called to the importance of
requesting instructions from the Owner/ EIC before undertaking any Work where
Owners/ EICs directions or instructions are required. Any Work done in advance of
such instructions will be liable to be removed by the Contractor at his own cost and
expense, and without any liability to the Owner.
Equipment: The Contractor shall provide and install all necessary hoists, ladders,
scaffolding, tools, tackles, plants, Equipments, transport for labour/ materials and plant
necessary for the proper carrying on execution and completion of the Work, to the
satisfaction of the Owner/EIC.
Watchman: The Contractor shall make his own security arrangements to guard the Site
and premises at all times, at his own cost and expense. The security arrangements shall
be adequate to maintain strict control on the movement of material, Equipments and
labour. The Contractor shall extend the security arrangements to guard the materials
stored and/or fixed on the premises by the Subcontractor(s) also. It is clarified that this
security arrangement to be made by the Contractor shall be subject to and under the
control of the overall security arrangement of the Refinery which is controlled by the
Owner.
Storage of Materials: The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain proper
sheds for the storage and protection of the materials etc. and also for the execution
of Work which may be prepared on the Site.
Scaffolding, Staging, Guard-rails: The Contractor shall provide steel scaffolding,
staging, guard-rails, and temporary stairs which shall be required during construction or
for execution of Work. The support for the scaffolding, staging, guard-rails and
temporary stairs shall be strong and adequate for the particular situation. The temporary
access, if any set up shall be rigid and strong enough to avoid any chance of mishaps.
The arrangement proposed shall be subject to the Approval of the Owner/ EIC.
5.3
EQUIPMENT AND STAFF ASSISTANCE FROM THECONTRACTOR

Theodolite, levels, plumb bobs, prismatic compass, chain, steel and metallic tapes and
all other electrical/electronic instruments found necessary for the Works shall be
.
Page 256 of 1744
provided by the Contractor for the due performance of the Contract and as instructed by
Owner/ EIC. The EIC, Clerk of works or a personnel authorized by EIC may use any or
all measurement instruments or tools belonging to the Contractor as and when he
chooses to, for checking the complete Works as well as the work in progress.
The Contractor will provide all scaffolding and ladders that may be necessary for taking
measurement at Site
The Contractor should provide all the apparatus required for conducting on site tests.
The Contractor shall provide the following Equipments and machinery in good working
condition and in the required number at the Site during the entire period of the Contract,
as and when required:
5.4
(i)
No plant, machinery, temporary works, Equipments or materials or any part

thereof shall be removed from the Site, without the consent of the Owner,
which shall not be unreasonably withheld where the same is no longer
immediately required for the purpose of completion of the works.
(ii)
The Owner shall not, at any time be liable for the loss of or injury to any of the
Equipment, plant, machinery, temporary works or materials which have been
deemed to become the property of the Owner under sub-clause (i) of this
Clause.
CONTRACTORS SUBORDINATE STAFF AND THEIR CONDUCTS:

5.4.1
The Contractor, on the date of award of the Contract, shall name and depute a
qualified engineer having sufficient experience in carrying out work of similar
nature to whom the equipments, materials, if any, shall be issued and
instructions for Works given. The Contractor shall also provide, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge sufficient and qualified staff to
superintend the execution of the Works, competent sub-agents, supervisor and
leading hands including those specially qualified by previous experience to
supervise the type of Works comprised in the Contract in such manner as will
ensure work of the best quality and expeditious working. Whenever in the
opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, additional properly qualified supervision staff
is considered necessary, they shall be employed by the Contractor without
additional charges on account thereof. The Contractor shall ensure to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge that Subcontractors, if any shall provide
competent and efficient supervision over the Work entrusted to them.
5.4.2
If and whenever any of the Contractors or Subcontractor's agents, assistants,

supervisor or other employees, are in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge guilty of
any misconduct or be incompetent or insufficiently qualified or negligent in the
performance of their duties or that in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer-inCharge, it is undesirable for administrative or any other reason for such person
or persons to be employed in the Works, the Contractor, if so directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall at once remove such person or persons from his
employment thereon. Any person or persons so removed from the Works shall
not again be employed in connection with the Works without the written
permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any person so removed from the Works
shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor, at his own cost and expense
by a qualified and competent substitute. Should the Contractor be requested to
repatriate any person removed from the Works, he shall do so and shall bear all
costs in connection herewith.
5.4.3
5.5
All Contractors personnel entering upon the Owners premises shall be properly
identified by badges issued by the Owner which must be worn all times on
Owners premises.
LABOUR :
.
Page 257 of 1744
The Contractor shall employ labour in sufficient number either directly or through
Subcontractors, when such subletting is permitted, to maintain the required rate of
progress and of quality to ensure workmanship or the degree specified in the Contract
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Contractor shall employ no child labour and shall comply with the provisions of
Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation Act) 1986. If female labour is engaged the
Contractor shall make necessary provisions for safeguarding small children and
keeping them clear of the site of operation. Labours may be permitted to stay at the
designated area at the Site. However any compliance required to be made or any
deposits to be paid with local regulating authorities shall be done / borne by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for payment of all wages, salaries, allowances and
payments of whatever nature due and payable to the workman, staff, officers, and
technicians engaged by him for the purpose of completion of the Contract, directly
without intervention of any intermediaries and without any liability to the Owner.
The Contractor also undertakes that no amount by way of commission or otherwise is
deducted by him or intermediaries from the wages of the workmen. It is specifically
understood and agreed between the parties that there is no privity of contract between
the Owner and the workmen, staff, Subcontractors and officers engaged by the
Contractor and that it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor for payment of
dues to such workmen, staff and officers. It is further clarified that these workmen,
staff, officers etc., hired by the Contractor shall not have any claims of any nature
against the Owner and all their claims shall lie only against the Contractor or the
Subcontractor, as the case may be.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-Charge fort nightly a distributions return
of the number and descriptions by trade of the people employed on the Works. The
Contractor shall also submit on the 4th and 19th of every month to the Engineer-inCharge a true statement showing in respect of the second half of the preceding month
and first half of the current month (i) the circumstance under which they happened and
the extent of damage and injury caused by them (ii) the member of female workers who
have been allowed maternity benefits provided under the provisions of the Maternity
Benefit Act, 1961 and the rules framed thereunder. In the event of any loss/ damages
caused to the Owner on account of the failure on the part of the Contractor to comply
with the applicable provisions of the Labour Regulations as detailed in Clause 5.7 below,
then without prejudice to the other rights available to the Owner under the terms of this
Contact, the Contractor shall be liable to indemnify the Owner and hold it harmless to
the extent of such loss/ damage suffered by the Owner (including payments if any made
by the Owner under and for observance of the Labour regulations). It is clarified that
such liability on the part of the Contractor shall be without prejudice to its right to claim
indemnity from its Subcontractor.
5.6
SUB-CONTRACTS
The whole of the Works included in the Contract shall be executed by the Contractor
to whom the Work is entrusted and the Contractor shall not directly or indirectly
transfer assign or undulate the Contract or any part share thereof or any interest
therein without the prior written consent of the Owner and no undertakings shall relieve
the Contractor from the full and entire responsibilities of the Contract or from active
superintendence of the Works during the progress.
The Contractor or his agent shall be in attendance at the superintend the executions of
Works with such additional assistance in each trade as the Engineer-in-Charge may
consider necessary. Order given to the Contractor's agent shall be considered to have
the same force as if they have been given to the Contractor himself.
The Contractor will be responsible for the complete co-ordination of all the Works
including that of Subcontractors, for arranging runs of all services and working to the
requirements and layouts of the specialists trades for execution of the Works.
.
Page 258 of 1744
5.7
(i)
The Contractor shall make payment to the nominated Subcontractor within

three days of the Contractors receipts of the payment from the Owner against
the Contractors certificates, provided that before any certificate is issued, the
Contractor shall upon request, furnish to the Owner proof that all nominated
Subcontractors accounts included in previous certificate have been duly
discharged in default whereof the Owner may pay the nominated
Subcontractor upon a certificate of the Owner and deduct the amount thereof
from any sums due to the Contractor. The exercise of the power shall not
create privity of contract as between Owner and Subcontractor.
(ii)
The Owner in their absolute discretion may recommend payment to the

nominated Subcontractor directed by the Owner and deduct the amount
thereof from the same due or which may become due to the Contractor or
recover the same as a debt from the Contractor.
LABOUR REGULATIONS :
The Contractor will comply with, carry out, observe and perform all the provisions of
the Contract Labour (Regulations and Abolition Act), 1970(as amended from time to
time) and the rules framed thereunder, the Minimum Wages Act 1948 (as amended
from time to time) and the rules framed thereunder, the Payment of Wages Act 1936
(as amended from time to time) and the rules framed thereunder, the Workers
Compensation Act 1923 (as amended from time to time) and the rules framed
thereunder, the Employees Provident Fund And Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952 (as
amended from time to time) and the rules and the schemes framed thereunder, the
Employees State Insurance Act 1948 (as amended from time to time) and the rules
framed thereunder, the Maternity Benefit Act 1961 (as amended from time to time) and
the rules framed thereunder, the Industrial Dispute Act, 1947 (as amended from time
to time) and the rules framed thereunder, and all other applicable central as well as
state acts, laws, rules, regulations, notifications and orders, as may be in force from
time to time in relation to labour, contract labour, workmen, employees and conditions
of their service(Labour Regulations).
The Contractor shall also ensure and be responsible to see that any Subcontractor to
whom he may have sub-contracted any part of the Work also complies with, carries
out and observes all the provisions of the Labour Regulations.
If the Contractor or the Subcontractor(s) shall fail to comply with, carry out, observe or
perform or shall commit a breach of any of the provisions of the Labour Regulations,
and if the Owner there upon complies with the said Labour Regulations and for that
purpose has to make any payment or payments of any nature whatsoever to the
labour employed by the Contractor or by the Subcontractor or the Owner suffer any
losses, damages, costs, charges and expenses and the Contractor or any
Subcontractor of his fails to comply with, carry out, observe or perform or shall commit
a breach of any of the provisions of the Labour Regulations and as a result thereof the
Owner is prosecuted or any legal or other proceeding are taken against the Owner and
the Owner suffers any other losses or damages then the Contractor shall indemnify
and keep and hold the Owner and all its employees harmless and indemnified against
all such payments which the Owner may be required or may have to make whether to
the workman of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor or to any other party or parties
or authority or authorities whatsoever and against all such fines, penalties,
compensation, damages or other amounts as aforesaid and against all losses,
damages, cost, charges and expenses. It may be clarified that the above shall be
without prejudice to any other rights or remedies which the Owner may have against
the Contractor under the Contract Documents, Applicable Laws or in equity, for the
recovery of the aforesaid amounts mentioned in this Clause. The Owners hall further
be entitled to deduct all such amounts from any payments, that may be or may
become due to the Contractor under the Contract Documents or under any other
contract or otherwise howsoever. The EIC shall certify the amount or amounts to be so
paid by the Contractor to the Owner and his certificate in respect thereof shall be final
and binding on the Contractor.
.
Page 259 of 1744
5.8
SITE ORDER BOOK :

The Engineer-in-Charge shall communicate or confirm his instructions to the Contractor
in respect of the executions of Work in a work site order book maintained in the office
of EIC. The Site In-Charge shall confirm receipt of such instructions by signing the
relevant entries in the book.
Any instructions issued by the Site-in-Charge orally, shall be of no immediate effect but
shall be confirmed in writing by the Contractor to the Site-in-Charge within seven days
and if not dissented from in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge to the Contractor within 7
days from receipt of Contractors confirmation shall take effect as from the expirations of
the letter said 7 days.
Provided always that (a) if the Engineer-in-Charge within 7 days of giving such oral
instructions himself confirm the same in writing, then the Contractor shall not be obliged
to confirm as aforesaid and the said instruction shall take effect as from the date of
Engineer-in-Charges confirmation and (b) provided that if neither the Contractor nor the
Engineer-in-charge shall confirm such oral instructions in the manner and at the time
aforesaid but the Contractor shall nevertheless comply with the same then the EngineerIn-Charge may confirm the same in writing at any time prior to the issue of the Final
Certificate and the said instructions shall there upon be deemed to have taken effect on
the date on which it was issued.
The Contractor shall provide and do everything necessary for the proper execution of
the Works according to the true intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specifications
taken together, whether the same may or may not be particularly shown on the
Drawings or Described in the Schedule of Quantities, provided that the same can be
reasonably inferred therein from. Figured dimensions and all dimensions and
particulars to be taken from the actual work.
The whole of the Work must be proceeded with such section and at such times as
directed by the Owner.
The EIC may, from time to time, issue further drawings or written instructions which
are hereafter collectively referred to as EICs Instructions in regard to:a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
The variation or modification of the design quality or quantity of Works or the

addition or omission or substitution of any Work.
Any discrepancy in the Drawings or between the Schedule of Quantities and / or
drawings and /or specifications.
The removal from the Site of any materials brought thereon by the Contractor
and / or the substitution on any material thereof.
The removal or re-execution or both of any Works executed by the Contractor.
The dismissal from the Works of any persons employed thereupon.
The opening up for inspection of any Work covered up.
The amending and making good of any defects of Works improperly carried out.
The Contractor shall forthwith comply with and execute any Work comprised in
such EICs Instructions. Any instructions given verbally shall be deemed as
instructions for the proper execution of the Works as long as they do not involve
any extra charges.
If the Contractor after receipt of written notice from the EIC requiring compliance within
seven days fails to comply with such Drawings or EICs instructions or both as the EIC
may issue, Owner may employ and pay other persons to execute any such work
whatsoever that may be necessary to give effect to such Drawings on EICs
instructions and all cost incurred in connection therewith as certified by the EIC shall
become due to the Contractor under the Contract or may be recovered as a debt.
5.9
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY WITH THE MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL

INTER-COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND OTHER AGENCIES :
.
Page 260 of 1744
Without repugnance to any other condition, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
executing the Work and to work in close co-operation and co-ordinate the works with
other contractors or their authorized representatives and the Contractor will put up a
joint scheme, showing the arrangements, with other contractors / agencies for carrying
his portion of Work to the Engineer-in-Charge, and get the Approval. The Contractor
before finally submitting the schemes to the Engineer-in-Charge shall have the written
agreement to such scheme of the other agencies. The Engineer-in-Charge, before
communicating his Approval of the scheme, with any required modifications shall get the
final agreement of all the agencies, which shall be binding. No claim in any manner what
so ever shall be entertained on account of the above.
The Contractor shall conform in all respects, with the provisions of any statutory
regulations, ordinances or by laws of any local or duly constituted authorities or public
bodies which may be applicable from time to time to the Works or any temporary
works. The Contractor shall keep the Owner harmless and indemnified against any
and all penalties and liabilities of every kind arising out of non-adherence to any
Applicable Laws.
5.10
OTHER AGENTS AT SITE :

The Contractor shall have to execute the Work in such place and condition where
other agencies will also be engaged for other works such as site grading, filling and
levelling, electrical and mechanical engineering works etc. No claim shall be
entertained to Works being executed in the above circumstances.
Page 261 of 1744
SECTION VI
CERTIFICATES AND PAYMENTS
6.1
SCHEDULE OF RATES AND PAYMENTS
i)
CONTRACTOR'S REMUNERATION
The price to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor for the whole of the Work to be
done and the performance of all the obligations undertaken by the Contractor under the
Contract Documents shall be ascertained by the application of the respective Schedule
of Rates (the inclusive nature of which is more particularly defined by way of application
but not of limitation, with the succeeding sub-clause of this clause) and payment to be
made accordingly for the Work actually executed and Approved by the Engineer-inCharge. The sum so ascertained shall (excepting only as and to the extent expressly
provided herein) constitute the sole and inclusive remuneration of the Contractor under
the Contract and no further payment whatsoever shall be or become due or payable to
the Contractor under the Contract.
ii )
Schedule of rates to be inclusive

The prices/ rates quoted by the Contractor shall remain firm till the issue of Final
Certificate and shall not be subject to escalation. Schedule of Rates, shall be deemed
to include and cover all costs, expense and liabilities of every description and all risk of
every kind to be taken in executing, completing and handing over the Work to the
Owner by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be deemed to have known the nature,
scope, magnitude and the extent of the Works and materials required, though the
Contract Documents may not fully and precisely furnish them. He shall make such
provision in the Schedule of Rates as he may consider necessary to cover the cost of
such items of work and materials as may be reasonable and necessary to complete the
Works. The opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the items of work which are
necessary and reasonable for completion of work shall be final and binding on the
Contractor, although the same may not be shown on or described specially in the
Contract Documents.
Generality of this present provision shall not be deemed to cut down or limited in any
way because in certain cases it may and in other cases it may not be expressly stated
that the Contractor shall do or perform a work or supply articles or perform services at
his own cost or without addition of payment or without extra charges or words to the
same effect or that it may be stated or not stated that the same are included in and
covered by the Schedule of Rates.
iii )
Schedule of Rates to cover Equipments, materials, labour etc. - Without in any
way limiting the provision of the preceding sub-clause, the Schedule of Rates shall be
deemed to include and cover the cost of all constructional work, temporary work
(except as provided for herein), pumps, materials, labour, the insurance, fuel, stores,
and appliances to be supplied by the Contractor and other matters in connection with
each item in the Schedule of Rates and the execution of the Works or any portion
thereof, finished complete in every respect and maintained as shown or described in
the Contract Documents or may be ordered in writing during the continuance of the
Contract.
iv)
Schedule of rates to cover royalties, rents and claims - The Schedule of Rates
shall be deemed to include and cover the cost of all royalties and fees for the articles
and processes, protected by letters, or otherwise incorporated in or used in connection
with the Works, also all royalties, rents and other payments in connection with obtaining
materials of whatsoever kind for the Works and shall include an indemnity to the Owner
which the Contractor hereby gives against all actions, proceedings, claims, damages,
costs and expenses arising from the incorporation in or use on the Works of any such
articles, processes or materials. Octroi or other municipal or local board charges if
levied on materials, equipment or machineries to be brought to the Site for use on Work
shall be borne by the Contractor.
.
Page 262 of 1744
v)
Schedule of rates to cover taxes and duties - No exemption or reduction of
customs duties, excise duties, sales tax, quay or any port dues, transport charges,
stamp duties or state Government or local body or Municipal Taxes or duties, Taxes or
charges shall be deemed to be included in and covered by the Schedule of Rates. The
Contractor shall also obtain and pay for all permits or other privileges necessary to
complete the work.
vi)
Schedule of rates to cover risks of delay - The Schedule of Rates shall be
deemed to include and cover the risk of all possibilities of delay and interference with
the Contractor's conduct of Work which occur from any cause including orders of the
Owner, in the exercise of his powers and on account of extension of time granted due
to various reasons and for all other possible or probable causes of delay.
v)
Schedule of rates cannot be altered

For work under unit rate basis, no alteration will be allowed in the schedule of
item of Works (i.e. description of item) or any of them being modified, altered,
extended, diminished or omitted. The Schedule of Rates are fully inclusive rates
which have been fixed by the Contractor and agreed to by the Owner and
cannot be altered.
For such unit rate contract, the payment will be made according to the Work
actually carried out, for which purpose an item wise, work wise, Schedule of
Rates shall be furnished, suitable for evaluating the value of Work done and
preparing running account bills.
6.2
PROCEDURE FOR MEASUREMENT/ BILLING OF WORK IN PROGRESS

i)
MEASUREMENTS
All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works in progress will be jointly
measured by the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge and the Contractor's
authorized agent progressively. Such measurement will be got recorded in the
measurement book by the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative and
signed in token of acceptance by the contractor or his authorized representative.
For the purpose of taking joint measurement the contractor's representative shall be
bound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge. If, however, he
absents for any reason whatsoever the measurement will be taken by the Engineer-inCharge or his representative and this will be deemed to be correct and binding on the
contractor.
ii)
BILLING
The contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma based on joint measurements in
quintuplicate along with soft copy to the Engineer-in-Charge of the work giving abstract
and detailed measurements for the various items executed during a month, before the
expiry of the 1st week of the succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge shall take or
cause to be taken the requisite measurements for the purpose of having the same
verified and the claim, as far as admissible, adjusted, if possible, before the expiry of 10
days from presentation of the bill.
iii) SECURED ADVANCE ON MATERIALS

In case of tenders for completed item of work, contractor may be allowed Payments on
the security of materials (pre-identified and described in special condition of contract)
brought to site for execution of the contracted item of work, to the extent of 75% of the
value of materials against documentary evidence with test & inspection certificate and
after furnishing a Hypothecation Bond in the format (attached herewith as Appendix-E),
on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value and shall provide the owner
satisfactory evidence of insurance of insurable materials (pre-identified and described
in Special Condition of Contract) for full value of the material during storage and
.
Page 263 of 1744
erection against all insurable risks (including explosion) in the joint names of owner and
the contractor. However, such Secured Advance shall not be payable for items defined
in the tender document or where the material is issued by Owner. Recoveries of
payments so made, would not be postponed until the whole of work entrusted to the
contractor is completed. They shall be adjusted from his bill, for work done as the
materials are used, the necessary deductions being made whenever the items of work
in which they are used are billed for. The decision regarding the imperishable nature of
the materials on which the above is applicable, shall be at the discretion of Engineer-inCharge.
iv) DISPUTE IN MODE OF MEASUREMENTS
In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement not covered by the contract to
be adopted for any item of work, mode of measurement as per latest Indian Standard
Specifications shall be followed.
6.3
LUMPSUM ITEMS IN TENDER

For the items in the Tender where it includes lumpsum in respect of parts of work the
Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of the items at the same rates as are
payable under the Contract for such items, or if the part of the Work in question is not
complete/ not capable of measurement, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, the
Engineer-in-Charge may at his discretion approve the lumpsum amount entered in the
Tender or a percentage thereof and the certificate in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be final and conclusive against the Contractor with regards to any sum of or sums
payable to him under the provisions of this clause.
6.4
RUNNING ACCOUNT PAYMENTS TO BE REGARDED AS ADVANCES

All running account payments shall be regarded as payment by way of advance against
the final payment only and not as payments for work actually done and completed and
shall not preclude the requiring of bad, unsound and imperfect, or unskilled work to be
removed and taken away and reconstructed or re-erected or be considered as an
admission of the due performance of the Contract, or any part thereof in this respect, or
of the accruing of any claim by the Contractor, nor shall it conclude, determine or effect
in any way the powers of the Owner under these conditions or any of them as to the
final settlement and the adjustments of the accounts or otherwise, or in any other way
vary or effect the Contract. The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one
month of the date of physical completion of the Work, otherwise the Engineer-inCharge certificate of the measurement and of total amount payable for the Work
accordingly shall be final and binding on all parties.
The Contractor shall make out an assessment of the Work performed during the
preceding week and submit a Weekly Running Account Bill (in the form prescribed by
the Owner) in triplicate to the Site Engineer for the work performed during the said
month/ period.
If there has been an omission or failure to perform any service(s)/ work during the
month/ period, Contractor shall make a deduction from the Running Account Bill for
each such omission or failure at the rate(s) elsewhere herein prescribed in this behalf
and in respect of any omission or failure for which no specific rate for deduction has
been prescribed, at the rate(s) or in the amount(s) specified in this behalf by the
Engineer-in- Charge.
The amount certified for payment by the Engineer-in-Charge on any Running Account
Bill shall be conclusive for the determination of any on account payment and no claim
shall be entertained by the Owner contrary thereto or in contradiction thereof. Payment
of the Running Account Bills shall be made to the Contractor within 15 (fifteen) days of
receipt and acceptance of relative Bill(s) by the Site Engineer. Final Bill payment will be
released within 30 days time.
6.5
NOTICE OF CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL PAYMENT

.
Page 264 of 1744
Should the Contractor consider that he is entitled to any extra payment or

compensation or to make any claims whatsoever in respect of the works, he shall
forthwith give notice in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge that he intends to claim extra
payment and/or compensation. Such notice shall be given to the Engineer-in-Charge
within two days from the ordering of any work or happening of any event upon which
the Contractor bases such claims, and such notice shall contain full particulars of the
nature of such claim with full details and amount claimed. Failure on part of the
Contractor to put forward any claim with the necessary particulars as above within the
time above shall be an absolute waiver thereof.
6.6
PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S BILL

No Payment shall be made for works estimated to cost less than Rs.50,000/- till the
whole of the work shall have been completed and a certificate of completion given. But
in case of works estimated to cost more that Rs.50,000/- the contractor on submitting
the bill thereof be entitled to receive a monthly payment proportion to the part thereof
approved and passed by the Engineer-in-Charge, whose certificate of such approval
and passing of the sums so payable shall be final and conclusive against the
contractor. This payment will be made after making necessary deductions as stipulated
elsewhere in the contract document for materials, security deposit or any moneys due
to the Owner etc. payment due to the contractor shall be made by the Owner if so
directed, by Crossed Account Payee Cheque forwarding the same to registered office
or the notified office of the contractor. In no case will Owner be responsible if the
Cheque is mislaid or misappropriated by unauthorized person/ persons. In all cases,
the contractor shall present his bill duly pre-receipted on proper revenue stamp.
All payments shall be made in Indian currency.
6.7
RECEIPT OF PAYMENT
Receipt for payment made on account of work when executed by a firm must be signed
by a person holding due power of attorney in this respect on behalf of the Contractor,
except when the Contractor are described in their tender as a limited company in which
case the receipts must be signed in the name of the company by one of its principal
officers or by some other person having authority to give effectual receipt for the
company.
6.8
RATES FOR SAME ITEMS OF WORK

In case where the same item of work is mentioned at one or more places in the
Schedule of Quantities, the lowest of the rates quoted by the Contractor for the item
shall be taken for the payment of this item.
6.9
DEDUCTION FOR UNCORRECTED WORK

If the Owner deems in-expedient to correct work damaged or not done in accordance
with the Contract, an equitable deduction from the Contract price shall be made
therefore.
6.10
FLUCTUATIONS
The Contractor shall not claim any extras for fluctuation of price and the Contract Price
shall not be subject to any rise or fall of prices.
6.11
UNFIXED GOODS AND MATERIALS

Unfixed materials and goods intended, delivered to and placed on adjacent to the work
shall not be removed except for use upon the work unless the Owner/ Architect has
consented in writing to such removal which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
Where the value of any such materials or goods has been included in any Interim
.
Page 265 of 1744
Certificate under the Contract for which the Contractor has received payment, such
material and goods shall become the property of the Owner.
6.12
COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
6.12.1 Application for Completion Certificate

When the Contractor fulfills his obligation under clause 4.26.4 he shall be eligible to
apply for Completion Certificate. The Contractor may apply for separate Completion
Certificate in respect of each such portion of the work by submitting the completion
documents along with such application for Completion Certificate.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall normally issue to the Contractor the Completion
Certificate within one month after receiving an application thereof from the Contractor
after verifying from the completion documents and satisfying himself that the work has
been completed in accordance with and as set out in the construction and erection
drawings and the Contract Documents.
The Contractor, after obtaining the Completion Certificate is eligible to present the final
bill for the work executed by him under the terms of Contract.
6.12.2 Completion Certificate
Within10 days of the completion of the work in all respects the Contractor shall be
furnished with a certificate in the format (attached herewith as Appendix-D) by the
Engineer-in-Charge of such completion, but no certificate shall be given nor shall the
work be deemed to have been executed until all scaffolding, surplus materials and
rubbish is cleared off the site completely or until the work shall have been measured by
the Engineer-in-Charge whose measurement shall be binding and conclusive. The work
will not be considered complete and taken over by the Owner, until all the temporary
works are removed and cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
If the Contractor shall fail to comply with the requirements of this clause on or before
the date fixed for the completion of the work, the Engineer-in-Charge may at the
expense of the Contractor remove such temporary works and dispose of the same as
he thinks fit and clean off the site to his entire satisfaction, and the Contractor shall
forthwith pay the amount of all expenses so incurred and shall have no claim in respect
of any such temporary works as aforesaid, except for any sum actually realized by the
sale thereof.
Completion Certificate Documents - For the purpose of clause 5.8, the following will be
deemed to form the completion documents.
i)
The Technical documents according to which the work was carried out.
ii)
Three sets of construction drawings showing therein the modification and

corrections made during the course of execution signed by the Engineer-inCharge.
iii)
Completion Certificate for 'embedded' and 'covered' up works.
iv)
Certificates of tests performed for various works.
v)
Certificates of final levels as set out for various works.
vi)
Materials appropriation statement for the materials issued by the Owner for the
works and list of surplus materials returned to the Owner's store duly supported
by necessary documents.
Page 266 of 1744
6.13
FINAL DECISION AND FINAL CERTIFICATE

Upon Expiry of the period of liability and subject to the Engineer-in-Charge being
satisfied that the works have been duly maintained by the Contractor during monsoon
or such period as herein before provided in clause 4.26.1 and that the Contractor has in
all respect duly made up any subsidence and performed all his obligations under the
Contract, the Engineer-in-Charge shall (without prejudice to the rights of the Owner to
retain the provisions of relevant clause hereof) give a certificate herein referred to as
the Final Certificate to that effect. The Contractor shall not be considered to have
fulfilled the whole of his obligations under the Contract until Final Certificate have been
given by the Engineer-in-Charge notwithstanding any previous entry upon the work and
taking possession, working or using of the same or any part thereof by the Owner.
6.14
CERTIFICATE AND PAYMENTS NO EVIDENCE OF COMPLETION

Except the Final Certificate, no other certificates or payments against a certificate or on
general account shall be taken to be an admission by the Owner of the due
performance of the Contract of any part thereof or of occupancy or validity of any claim
bythe Contractor.
Page 267 of 1744
SECTION VII
TAXES AND INSURANCE
7.1 INCOME TAX, WORKS CONTRACT TAX, SALES TAX, MISCELLANEOUS PAYMENTS:
a) Royalty:
All royalties etc., as may be required for any Borrow Areas, including right
of way etc. to be arranged by Contractor shall be deemed to have been
included in the quoted prices.
Contractor's quoted rates should include the royalty on different applicable
items as per the prevailing State Government rates. Any increase in
prevailing rate of royalty shall be borne by the Contractor at no extra cost
to Owner.
Royalty, only for free issue materials, if any, shall be borne by Owner.
b) Income tax/ other statutory deductions at the prevailing rate will be deducted
from Contractors bills as per Income Tax Act/ other Applicable Laws.
c) Service Tax:
d)
i.
Refer SCC.
ii.
As per Cenvat Credit Rules 2004, Owner can avail credit on payment of
service tax to the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish the following
information in invoice, bill/ challan issued by him:
Name and address of the Contractor
Service tax registration number/ STC No.
Sr no. of the invoice/ bill/ challan
Date of issue
Description and value of input service
Service tax paid/ payable
Cenvat:
i.
It is to be noted that the Contractor shall be required to submit the valid

documentary evidence(s) for Excise Duty paid by them to concerned
authorities for Owner to claim CENVAT benefit.
ii.
Necessary documents such as Transporters copy of challan / Bill of Entry

Triplicate Copy for availing CENVAT benefit to be given in the name of the
Owner indicating consignee as the Owner for availing Excise Duty, Copy of
Registration with Central Excise Authority and any other document required
by the Owner shall be furnished by Contractor to enable Owner to claim
CENVAT. Payment shall only be made as per payment terms indicated in
Bidding Document against R.A. Bills against receipt of requisite document
(cenvatable documents) in this regard from the Contractor.
iii.
The classification of goods as per Central Excise should be correctly done to

ensure that CENVAT benefits are not lost by the Owner on account of any
error on the part of the Contractor. The Owner shall be at liberty to withhold
the payment of CENVATABLE duties (viz. Central Excise Duties etc.) if the
Page 268 of 1744
requirements as specified in the Clause are not fulfilled by the Contractor.

The price of materials shall stand reduced accordingly.
iv.
The Contractor shall furnish the details of Excise Duty component included in
his Price for the purpose of CENVAT benefit.
v.
The amount of ED indicated, as part of Quoted Price shall be considered for

evaluation of their offer. Contractor is required to pay all taxes and duties
nevertheless and must furnish CENVATABLE documents for the amount of
ED paid by him, subject to minimum of the amount of ED indicated by him in
the bid document.
In case Contractor fails to submit necessary
CENVATABLE documents for the amount of ED & CVD indicated and
considered for evaluation then the necessary recovery shall be made from the
Contractor bills. In case of any quantity variation during the execution of the
Contract, the above amount shall be adjusted accordingly.
e)
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner shall not bear any liability in respect of:
i)
Personal taxes on the personnel deployed by Contractor, his SubContractor and Agent etc.
ii) The Corporate Taxes in respect of Contractor and his Sub-Contractor
and other Agents, Indian or foreign based.
iii) Any other taxes/ duties/levies except for those specified under para a)
to e) above.
f)
Firm Prices:
Contract Price shall remain firm and fixed till the completion of Work in all
respects and no escalation in prices on any account shall be admissible to the
Contractor.
7.2 TAXES, DUTIES, OCTROI ETC.

The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for the
payment of any and all taxes, duties, Octroi etc. now or hereafter imposed, increased
modified, and all the sales taxes, now in force and hereafter increased, imposed, or
modified from time to time in respect of works and materials and all contributions and
taxes for unemployment compensation, insurance and old age pensions or annuities
now or hereafter imposed by any Central or State Governmental authorities which are
imposed with respect to or covered by the wages, salaries, or other compensations
paid to the persons employed by the Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible
for the compliance with all obligations and restrictions imposed by the Labour Law or
any other law affecting employer - employee relationship and the Contractor further
agrees to comply and secure the compliance by all subcontractors, with all applicable
Central, State, Municipal and Local laws and regulations and requirements of any
Central, State or Local Government agency or authority, Contractor further agrees to
defend, indemnify and hold harmless from any liability or penalty which may be
imposed by the Central, State or Local Authorities by reason of any violation by
Contractor or Subcontractor of such laws, regulations or requirements and also from all
claims, suits or proceeding that may be brought against the Owner arising under,
growing out of, or by reason of the work provided for by the Contract by third parties, or
by Central or State Government authority or any administrative subdivision thereof.
7.3 STATUTORY VARIATIONS IN TAXES/DUTIES
7.3.1
Refer SCC
Page 269 of 1744
7.4 INSURANCE
Contractor shall at his own expense carry and maintain insurance with reputable
insurance companies to the satisfaction of the Owner as follows:
i)
Employees State Insurance Act

The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for the
compliance with all obligations imposed by the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948,
and the Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold Owner harmless from
any liability or penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or Local Authority
by reason of any asserted violation by the Contractor or Subcontractor, of the
Employees State Insurance Act, 1948 and also from all claims suits or proceedings that
may be brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of or by reason of the
work provided for by the Contract whether brought by employees of the Contractor, by
third parties or by Central or State Government authority or any political subdivision
thereof.
The Contractor agrees to filling, with the Employees State Insurance Corporation, the
Declaration Forms and all forms which may be required in respect of the Contractor's or
Subcontractor's employees and who are employed in the work provided for or those
covered by ESI Act under any amendment to the Act from time to time. The Contractor
shall deduct and secure the agreement of the subcontractor to deduct the employee's
contribution as per the first schedule of the Employee State Insurance Act from wages
and affix the Employee's contribution Cards at Wages payment intervals. The Contractor
shall remit and secure the agreement of the subcontractor to remit to the State Bank of
India, Employees State Insurance Corporation Account, the Employee's contribution as
required by the Act. The Contractor agrees to maintain all Cards and records as
required under the Act in respect of employees and the payments and the Contractor
shall secure the agreement of the subcontractor to maintain such records. Any
expenses incurred for the contributions, making contribution or maintaining records shall
be to the Contractor's or subcontractor's account.
The Owner shall retain such sum as may necessary, from the total contract value until
the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contributions as required by the
employees State Insurance Act, 1948 have been paid.
ii)
Workman's Compensation And Employee's Liability Insurances

Insurance shall be effected for all the Contractor's employees engaged in the
performance of the Contract. If any of the work is sublet, the Contractor shall require
the subcontractor to provide workman's compensation and employee's liability
insurance for the latter's employees if such employees are not covered under the
Contractor's insurance.
iii)
Any other insurance required under Applicable Law or regulations or by Owner

Owner shall cover Project Materials and Equipment under an overall Marine-cumErection Insurance Policy. Contractor shall carry and maintain any and all other
insurance's which may be required under any law or regulation from time to time. He
shall also carry and maintain any other insurance which may be required by the Owner.
iv )
Automobile Liability Insurance

Contractor shall take out an Automobile Liability Insurance to cover all risks to Owner
for each of his vehicles plying on works of the Contract and these insurances shall be
valid for the total contract period. No extra payments will be made for this insurance.
Owner shall not be liable for any damage or loss not made good by the insurance
company, should such damage or loss result from unauthorized use of the Vehicle.
Page 270 of 1744
v)
Third party risk liability insurance

A policy to cover 3
Contractor:
rd
party risk liability to the following limits shall be taken by the
I)
Maximum damage payable in the grant of single accident Rs.1,00,000 only

(Rupees One Lac Only)
II)
Maximum damage payable in course of the entire construction period

Rs.10,00,000 only (Rupees Ten Lacs only)
7.5 DAMAGE TO PROPERTY

i)
Contractor shall be responsible for making good, to the satisfaction of the Owner any
loss of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner or
being executed or procured or being procured by the Owner or of other agencies within
the premises of all the work or the Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/or
the negligence or willful acts or commission of the Contractor, his employees agents,
representative or subcontractor.
ii)
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims for damage
to property other than Owner's property arising under or by reason of this agreement if
such claims result from the fault and/or negligence or willful acts or commissions of the
Contractor his employees, agents, representative or subcontractors.
Page 271 of 1744
SECTION VIII
LABOUR LAWS & SAFETY REGULATIONS
8.1
LABOUR LAWS
The Contractor undertakes to ensure due and complete compliance with all Applicable
Laws including without limitation the Labour Regulations, applicable to the labour,
personnel contract labour, workmen, employees employed / appointed or whose
services are otherwise availed of by the Contractor or the Subcontractor. Applicable
Laws include without limitation, (i) The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 (as amended from
time to time) and the rules framed there under, (ii) the Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act 1970 (as amended from time to time) and the rules framed there under,
(iii) The Workmens Compensation Act 1923 (as amended from time to time) and the
rules framed there under, (iv) The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 (as amended from time
to time) and the rules framed there under, (v) the Provident Fund & Miscellaneous
Provisions Act, 1952 etc.
The consideration payable under this Contract is inclusive of all the amounts payable by
the Contractor to its Subcontractors, its workmen, staff, employees, agents etc. The
Contractor shall keep the Owner harmless and indemnified, for the entire term of the
Contract and thereafter, for and against any and all demands, claims liabilities arising
out of or in relation to such payments or demands from workmen, employees, subcontractors, agents of the Contractor or Subcontractors or any demands or claims of any
statutory and competent authorities of the Central / State Government. Further, the
Owner shall have right, exercisable at its discretion, to inspect the records of the
Contractor / its Subcontractor(s) at any time and prescribe necessary correction or
additional steps in this regard for checking / ensuring compliance with this Clause and
other Applicable Laws and in the event the Contractor failing to effect such compliance
within the time prescribed by the Owner, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold from the
amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor, such amounts as are payable to the
workmen / employees / agents / of the Contractor / Sub-contractors or to Subcontractors under any Applicable Laws including the Labour Regulations and make such
payments to the workmen/ employees/ agents/ Subcontractors.
8.2
IMPLEMENTATION OF APPRENTICES ACT 1961

The Contractor shall comply with provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and the rules /
orders issued there under from time to time. If he fails to do so, his failure will be breach
of the Contract and the Engineer-in-Charge may, at his discretion, cancel the Contract.
The Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any
violation by him of the provision of the Apprentices Act, 1961.
8.3
CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER
i)
The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and employee of
the Owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge and his staff against all actions, proceedings,
claims, demands, costs, expenses whatsoever arising out of or in connection with the
matters referred to in these General Conditions of Contract and other Contract
Documents and all actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs and expenses which
may be made against the Owner for or in respect of or arising out of any failure by the
Contractor in the performance of his obligations under the Contract Documents. The
Owner shall not be liable for or in respect of any demand or compensation payable
under Applicable Law in respect of or in consequences of any accident or injury to any
workmen/ employee/ agent/ Subcontractor of the Contractor or other person in the
employment of the Contractor or his sub-contractor and the Contractor shall indemnify
and keep indemnified the Owner against all such damages and compensations and
against all claims, damage, proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in
respect thereof or in relation thereto.
Page 272 of 1744
ii)
Payment of claims and damages

Should the Owner have to pay any money in respect of such claims or demands as
aforesaid, the amount so paid and the costs and expenses so incurred by the Owner in
this regard shall be charged to and paid by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not
be at liberty to dispute or question the rights of the Owner to demand such payments,
notwithstanding the same may have been made without his consent or authority or
under Applicable Laws or otherwise to the contrary.
In every case to which by virtue of the provisions of Section 12, Subsection (i) of the
Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923 or other applicable provisions of the Workmen's
Compensation Act or any other act, the Owner is obliged to pay compensation to a
workmen employed by the Contractor in execution of the Works, the Owner will recover
from the Contractor, the amount of compensation so paid and without prejudice to the
rights of the Owner under the said section 12, subsection (2) of the said act, the Owner
shall be at liberty to recover such amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the
Security Deposit and / or from any sum due payable by the Owner to the Contractor
whether under the Contract or otherwise. The Owner shall not be bound to contest any
claim made under section 12, subsection (i) of the said Act except on the written
request of the Contractor and upon his giving to the Owner full security for all costs and
expenses which the Owner may incur in this regard (including reasonable legal fees)
for which the Owner might become liable, in consequence of contesting such claims.
iii)
Employment Liability
a)
The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or employing
persons for the execution of the Work. All employees engaged by the Contractor shall
be on his/their pay roll and paid by him/them. All disputes or differences between the
Contractor and his/their employees shall be settled by him/them. The Owner has
absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of the Contractor. The
Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and keep the Owner harmless and indemnified
against all losses or damages or liability arising out of or in the course of the Contractor
employing persons or relations with his/their employees. The Contractor shall make
regular and full payment of wages and on any complaint by the any employee of the
Contractor or his Subcontractor regarding nonpayment of wages/salaries or other dues,
Owner reserves the right to make such payments directly, to such employee or
subcontractor of the Contractor and recover the amount in full from the bills of the
Contractor, and the Contractor shall not claim any compensation or reimbursement
thereof. The Contractor shall comply with the Minimum Wages Act applicable to the
area with regard to payment of wages or his employees and also of employees of his
subcontractor.
b)
The Contractor shall advise in writing, to all of his employees and the
employees of his subcontractors as follows:It is fully understood that your appointment
and / or deployment is only in connection with the execution of the Contract to us from
the Owner and it does not give you any right of claim for employment by the Owner.
8.4
HEALTH AND SANITARY ARRANGEMENTS FOR WORKERS

In respect of all labour directly or indirectly employed in the Works for performance of
the Contractors part of the Contract, the Contractor shall comply with or cause to be
complied with all the rules and regulations of the local sanitary and other authorities or
as framed by the Owner from time to time for the protection of health and sanitary
arrangements for all workers.
8.5
SAFETY REGULATIONS
i)
In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the performance
of Contractor, the Contractor shall at his own expense arrange for all safety provisions
as per safety codes of CPWD, Indian Standard Institution, The Electricity Act, The
Mines Act and any such other acts as applicable.
.
Page 273 of 1744
ii)
The Contractor shall ensure that he, his Subcontractor and his, or their personnel or
representatives shall comply with all Fire / Safety regulations issued from time to time
by the Owner or otherwise howsoever and should any injury resulting in death or not or
loss / or damage due to Fire to any property or a portion thereof, occurred as a result of
failure to comply with such regulations, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the
consequences thereof and shall keep the Owner harmless and indemnified.
8.6
ARBITRATION
a)
Any dispute or difference of any nature whatsoever any claim, cross-claim,

counter-claim or set off of the Owner against the Contractor or regarding any
right, liability, act, omission, or account of any of the parties hereto arising out of
or in relation to the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Sole Arbitration
of the Managing Director of Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd., or of an Officer of
Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd. who may be nominated by the Managing Director.
The Contractor will not be entitled to raise any objection to any such arbitrator
on the ground that the arbitrator is an Officer of the Owner or that he has dealt
with the matters to which the Contract relates to or that in the course of his
duties as an Officer of the Owner he had expressed views on all or any other
matters in dispute or difference. In the event of the arbitrator to whom the matter
is originally referred being transferred or vacating his office or being unable to
act for any reason, the Managing Director as aforesaid at the time of such
transfer, vacation of office or inability to act may at the discretion of the
Managing Director designate another person to act as arbitrator in accordance
with the terms of the Contact to the end and intent that the original Arbitrator
shall be entitled to continue the arbitration proceedings notwithstanding his
transfer or vacation of office as an Officer of the Owner, if the Managing Director
does not designate another person to act as arbitrator on such transfer or
vacation of office or inability of original arbitrator. Such persons shall be entitled
to proceed with the reference from the point at which it was left by his
predecessor. It is also be a term of the Contract that no person other than the
Managing Director or a person nominated by such Managing Director of the
Owner shall act as the sole arbitrator hereunder. The award of the arbitrator so
appointed shall be final conclusive and binding on all parties to the Contract.
The Arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the provisions of the
(Indian) Arbitration Act and Conciliation Act, 1996 or any statutory modification
or re-enactment thereof and the rules made there under for the time being in
force.
b)
The award shall be in writing and published by the Arbitrator within 60 days after
entering upon the reference or within such extended time not exceeding further
three months as the Sole Arbitrator shall in writing under his own hands appoint.
The parties hereto shall be deemed to have irrevocably given their consent to
the Arbitrator to make and publish the award within the period referred to herein
above and shall not be entitled to raise any objection or protect thereto under
any circumstances whatsoever. The award rendered shall be a reasoned award
and shall be binding on the parties.
c)
The arbitrator shall be at liberty to appoint, if necessary any accountant or

engineering or other technical person to assist him, and to act by the opinion so
taken.
d)
The arbitrator shall have power to make one or more awards whether interim or
otherwise in respect of the dispute and difference and in particular will be
entitled to make separate awards in respect of claims or cross-claims of the
parties.
e)
The arbitrator shall be entitled to direct any one of the parties to pay the costs of
the other party in such manner and to such extent as the arbitrator may in his
discretion determine and shall also be entitled to required one or both the
parties to deposit funds in such proportion to meet arbitrators expenses
whenever called upon to do so.
.
Page 274 of 1744
f)
8.7
The language of the proceedings will be English and the place of proceedings
will be Bina, District Sagar (MP).
JURISDICTION
Subject to Clause 8.6 above, Courts of competent jurisdiction in the State of Madhya
Pradesh shall alone shall have jurisdiction to entertain any application or other
proceedings in respect of anything arising under the Contract Documents. Any award or
awards made by the Sole Arbitrator shall be filed, if required, in the Courts of competent
jurisdiction in the State of Madhya Pradesh alone.
8.8
STATUTORYREQUIREMENTS
(a)
The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions
of the Contract Labour(Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 and shall pay rates
of wages and observe hours of work/conditions of employment according to the
rules in force from time to time.
(b)
The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provisions of the
Workmens Compensation Act, 1923 and shall ensure safe working conditions
for his workers as well as workers of his sub-contractors/ agencies etc.
(c)
The Contractor shall comply with provisions of payment of all Applicable Laws,
including without limitation, as per the following acts:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
Payment of wages Act, 1936

Workmens Compensation Act, 1923
Industrial Dispute Act, 1947
Minimum Wages Act, 1948
Employees State Insurance Act, 1948
Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
Mines Act, 1952 or
Employee Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952
Building and Other Construction Work Act/ Cess Act
(d)
Any amendments/ modifications thereof or any other Applicable Law relating

thereto and rules made there under from time to time.
(e)
The Contractor shall be liable to pay his contributions and his employees
contributions to the State insurance scheme in respect of all labour employed by
him for the executions of the Contract, in accordance with the provisions of the
Employees State Insurance Act of 1948 as amended from time to time. In case
the Contractor fails to submit full details of his account of labour employed and
the contributions payable, the Engineer-in-Charge shall recover from running
bills of the Contractor an amount of the contribution assessed by him. The
amount so recovered shall be adjusted against the actual contribution payable
for Employees state insurance.
(f)
Engineer-in-Charge shall on a report having been made by an inspecting office

as defined in the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 have the
power to deduct from the money due to the Contractor any sum required or
estimated to be required for making good the loss suffered by a worker (s) by
reasons of non-fulfillment of conditions of the Contract for the benefit of workers
no-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or their wages which are
not justified by the terms of Contract or non-observance of the aforesaid
regulation.
g)
Local labour will have to be engaged to the extent possible and as stipulated by
M. P. State Government.
Page 275 of 1744
(h)
The Contractor shall comply to Madhya Pradesh Labour Welfare Fund Act as
applicable during execution of contract and make contribution as per section 9
of the Madhya Pradesh Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1982 and all other applicable
provisions under which it is mandatory to deposit Labour Welfare Fund on
biannual basis at the end of each 6 months period. The present (Jan 2014)
biannual rate of contribution is as under:
i)
ii)
Employee/ Worker Contribution: Rs 6.00 per employee/ worker.

Employer Contribution: Rs 18.00 per employee/ worker. (Minimum
Employer Contribution shall be Rs 500.00).
The contribution is payable through bank Demand Draft in favour of Welfare

Commissioner, M.P. Labour Welfare Board Bhopal payable at Bhopal
along with statement of employees and employer contribution in the Form A.
The address of welfare authority is as under:
M.P. Labour Welfare Board
83, Malviya Nagar, Bhopal (M.P.)
Pin 462 002
Page 276 of 1744
SECTION-IX
SAFETY CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL WORKS
9.1
COMPLIANCE WITH STATUTORY REQUIREMENT

Any consultants, contractors or other third parties working in the field shall abide by
a)
The safety regulations for working in areas of the work as defined in scope of
work.
b)
All requirements under The Factories Act 1948 and the rules framed thereunder in the M P Factories Rules, as applicable.
c)
Applicable Environment Regulations in force and also the systems and

procedures in M.P/ state of work.
Contractor shall follow complete HSE (Health, Safety and Environmental Policy) of the Owner
.
9.2
IMPLEMENTATION OF SAFETY REGULATIONS:
The Contractor shall at his own expense arrange and comply with all safety provisions
as stipulated by the company / Bureau of Indian Standards/the Electricity act/Factory
act/OISD and other acts as applicable, in respect of all personnel, directly or indirectly
employed by the Contractor for the work. The Contractor shall ensure that he, his
Subcontractor and workers employed by him shall comply with all fire/safety/health
regulations issued from time to time by the company.
If he fails to do so, his failure will be a breach of the Contract and Engineer-in-charge
may, at his discretion, stop all works or cancel the Contract. The Contractor shall also
be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation by him of the
safety requirements. Should any injury to people or loss or damage due to fire/or
accident to any property or a portion thereof occur as a result of failure to comply with
such regulations, the Contractor shall be held responsible for the consequences
thereof and shall keep the company harmless and indemnified.
9.3
RELEVANT INDIAN STANDARD CODES ON SAFETY

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
IS :3764 -1992-Excavation work-code of safety

IS :4014(Part 1 &2)-1967-Safety regulations for steel tubular scaffolding
IS :3696(Part 1)-1987-Safety code for scaffolds
IS :3696(Part 2)-1987-Safety code for Ladders
IS:7293-1974 -Safety code for working with construction machinery
IS:4081-1986 -Safety codes for blasting and related drilling operations
IS:3016-1982 -Code of practice for fire precautions in welding and cutting
operations
IS:4130-1991-Demolition of buildings-Code of safety
IS:5216(Part 1 & 2)-1982-Recommendation on safety procedures and practices in
Electrical work.
IS:5121-1969-Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
IS:10667-1983-Guide for selection of industrial safety equipment for protection foot
and leg.
IS:1989(Part 2)-1986-Leather safety boots and shoes for heavy metal industry
IS:6994(PART 1)-1973-Specification for safety gloves: part -1- Leather and cotton
gloves
IS: 2925-1984-Specification for Industrial safety helmets
IS:3521-1983-Industrial safety belts and harnesses
Page 277 of 1744
9.4
CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS ON HSE

Safety action plan for each construction site prepared by the Owner shall be binding on
Contractor and shall adhere to the same.
The Contractor shall at all times designate a supervisor possessing required
experience and skill for safety and health duties. Some examples of duties, which shall
be assigned, are: (i)
Observance of safety action plan for the work and conditions stipulated in the
tender/agreement.
(ii)
Provision, construction and maintenance of safety facilities like access
roadways, pedestrian routes, barricades and overhead protection.
(iii)
Construction and installation of safety signs
(iv)
Safety provisions peculiar to each trade
(v)
Testing of lifting machinery's such as cranes and goods hoists and lifting gears
such as ropes and shackles.
(vi)
Inspection and maintenance of access facilities such as scaffolds and ladders.
(vii)
Inspection and cleaning of welfare facilities such as toilets, clothing,
accommodation and canteens.
(viii)
Transmission of the relevant parts of the safety plans to each work group.
(ix)
Emergency and evacuation plans.
(x)
Information to management quickly about unsafe practice and defective
equipment.
(xi)
Dissemination of information's on health and safety.
(xii)
Attend safety meetings and provide all information's about safety and health
and also implement at work spot resolutions taken during the meetings.
(xiii)
Assist Owners Engineers in conducting the mock drill.
(xiv)
Maintain vigil on use of personal protective equipment by the workers.
(xv)
Safety talks to supervisors and workers.
9.5
MAJOR CONTRACTS:
All contractors who employ more than 50 workers, the following facilities are to be
provided by the Contractor at site at his own cost.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Arrangement for clean drinking water close to work spot

Toilet facilities
Canteen where tea and snacks are available
A crche where 10 or more women workers are having children below the
age of six years.
5. Transport arrangement for attending to emergencies
6. Arrangement of First Aid.
9.6
QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE OF MANPOWER TO BE DEPLOYED

Contractors shall deploy only experienced and qualified supervisors and workmen,
who are well conversant with the safety & environment regulations in the Sea and
Coastal areas.
The supervisors should be so qualified and experienced that they should be able to
assimilate the safety training inputs provided for such works.
Past experience must be on same type of job for which the supervisors would be
engaged.
Contractors skilled workmen like Surveyors, Electronic Engineers, Sampling and
laboratory technicians, riggers other specialized equipment operators like power
generators etc. must have sufficient past experience and skills on relevant jobs. The
Electricians to be deployed on the job must have valid Wireman License.
All workmen must be capable of following instructions and training.
.
Page 278 of 1744
9.7
HEALTH ASSURANCE
Contractors will ensure that a qualified (minimum MBBS) medical practitioner
registered with the State Medical Council has medically examined all his workers
including supervisors, who would be deployed on the job. Only medically sound
persons as certified by the medical practitioner would be allowed on the job.
The medical certificates older by more than six months will not be accepted.
Health Assurance certificates submitted by the contractors may be periodically
checked at random by Engineer In Charge/ Owners authorities.
9.8
RESTRICTIONS IN USE OF MAN POWER AND NORMAL TIMINGS FOR WORK

Contractor shall put all efforts to deploy minimum manpower to execute the work
awarded to him in stipulated time by using modern techniques & mechanization.
Contractors deploying minimum manpower will be given due weights while renewing
his registration.
No Contractors employees shall normally work for more than 8 hours a day and not
more than 48 hours in a week of seven days. After every 48 hours of working, an
employee must get one full days rest.
The normal duty timings for Contractors employees shall be between 8.30 AM and
17.30 PM.
Any deviation from above shall be with express permission from the Engineer-incharge.
9.9
TRAINING
9.9.1
Contractor must ensure that all his supervisors have undergone safety training.
9.9.2
Contractors responsibility for training his employees
9.10
a)
Contractor must ensure that all his supervisors have undergone safety training
and keep document of such training. He shall also ensure that each of his
employees has received and understood from his supervisors necessary
training on safety for working in the Refinery/ Township premises.
b)
Contractor must maintain records of training provided by him to his employees.

Such records must clearly mention a) what training has been provide, b) date,
time and duration of such training, c) who has provided the training, d) names of
workers who attended such training etc.
c)
The records maintained in the form of a register must be available for

examination by the Engineer-in-charge or his representative who will sign on the
register as a token of his Approval.
ISSUE OF ENTRY PASS FOR REFINERY/ TOWN-SHIP PREMISES

Contractor shall follow the entry/ gate pass system for refinery/ township as
implemented by the Owner.
9.11
OBLIGATION TO FOLLOW WORK PERMIT SYSTEM

a)
Do not carry out any work without a valid work permit issued by authorized
persons in the refinery/ township.
b)
After obtaining a valid work permit and before the actual commencement of the
work, also obtain a clearance certificate from the officer of the unit/plant where
.
Page 279 of 1744
the work is to be carried out.
9.12
9.13
c)
Comply with all the Fire and Safety permit conditions specified in the permit
and the clearance.
e)
Prepare a safety action plan specific to the work before starting the work. Also
ensure that all supervisors and workers involved in the work properly
understand and follow the safety action plan.
f)
Display permit / clearance at site for checking by concerned officials whenever

required.
REQUIREMENT OF SUPERVISION
a)
Contractor will not carry out any work without having a supervisor present at
site. If it is required to work simultaneously in more than one location under the
same Contract, one supervisor must be put in each of the locations. If a
supervisor has to leave his site for any reason, he must stop his site activities
for that period of time.
b)
Contractor must provide at least one full time on site safety supervisor when the
Contractor has engaged a man-power in excess of 50 in contract activities in the
Refinery. If the manpower is less than 50, the onsite safety co-ordination
responsibilities shall be assumed by any one of the Contractor's other
supervisory staff. In both the cases, the Contractor must specify in writing the
name of such persons to the Engineer-in Charge and Manager safety.
c)
Contractors safety coordinator or his supervisor responsible for safety as the

case may be shall conduct at his work-site and document formal safety
inspections and audits at least once in a week. Such documents are to be
submitted to Engineer-in-Charge for his review and record.
d)
Contractors safety supervisor or the supervisor responsible for safety shall

maintain separate safety register which will include 1) List of activities being
carried out at site; 2) Safety Training details of all supervisors and workmen 3)
records of all accidents, first aid cases and near misses; 4) Records of all PPEs
being used at site; 5) Records of lifting tools and tackles including slings of all
types; 6) Records of pressure vessels if any at his site; 7) Records of all welding
machines, gas cutting sets, compressors, generators, pressure regulators,
portable power tools, hand tools etc. 8) Copies of safety inspection reports
made by the safety supervisor as well as by the Owner's representative.
e)
The contractors whose safety records are not satisfactory will be viewed seriously
and necessary action (viz. cancellation of Registration/Contracts) shall be taken
against him.
USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Contractor's all supervisors and workmen must use following Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE) without which permission to work will be denied.
a) Hard Hat b) Safety Shoes c) Boiler Suits d) Hand Gloves as per job requirement e)
safety belt as applicable f) Eye protection goggles etc.
The PPEs shall be of standard quality and ISI approved.
9.14
HAZARD COMMUNICATION
a)
Contractor must familiarize himself from the Owner, Engineer-in-Charge about

all known potential fire, explosion or toxic release hazards related to his
.
Page 280 of 1744
contract. He in turn will ensure that same information has been passed to his
supervisors and workmen. Proper record of such dissemination of information
must be made by the Contractor and submit to the Engineer-in-Charge on
demand failing which further continuation of work may be withheld.
9.15
b)
In the event of any Contractor's employee spotting a fire or any serious hazards
in work premises, he shall identify himself and report location of FIRE when
Engg In Charge/ FIRE STATION OPERATOR is on the line. He shall wait
until the fire message is repeated by the Fire Operator and location confirmed.
c)
The Contractor must ensure that each one of his employees clearly understand
this Fire Communication requirement. This may be ensured by the Contractor
while providing on the job training.
INJURY NOTIFICATION AND INVESTIGATION

Contractor must -
9.16
a)
Report to the Owner supervisor on the job any injury sustained by any of his
employees or any near miss or any hazardous / dangerous incident at his work
site. Hiding of any accident or near miss would be viewed as serious
misconduct.
b)
Arrange to provide FIRST AID immediately to the injured employee.
c)
Keep and maintain proper records of all such incidents in respect of his
personnel / work site.
d)
Submit to the Engineer-in-Charge a first information report as per prescribed

Performa within 4 hours of the incident.
e)
Arrange to immediately investigate the incident and furnish within 24 hours a

written investigation report in prescribed Performa to the Owner/Engineer - In
Charge.
REQUIREMENT OF HOUSE KEEPING

Contractor must ensure highest standard of housekeeping in his area of work on a day
to day basis. An unsatisfactory housekeeping will earn negative rating, which will attract
penal actions like cancellation of registration/contract.
9.17
DISPLAY BOARDS AT SITE

Contractor must provide and maintain in his work site
a)
Appropriate display board displaying information as per the Owners Work Site
Display Board specification.
b) Safety performance score board.

9.18
PARTICIPATION IN SAFETY ACTIVITIES

Contractor must attend all scheduled safety meetings as would be intimated to him by
the Engineer-in-Charge.
Contractor also must ensure that all his employees participate in safety promotional
activities organized in the work premises.
Page 281 of 1744
9.19
NOTE
a)
Every person other than an employee of the Owner or a casual visitor

entering in the work site would be governed by the above conditions.
b)
The term supervisor would mean any person who oversees the work of a
group of workmen. All other persons would be considered as workmen.
c)
Violation of any of the above special conditions of safety would attract penal
actions including termination of the Contract/registration.
d)
Meticulous adherence to these requirements would be documented by the

engineer-in-charge on conclusion of the work and placed in the dossier of
the Contractor. This performance would be given adequate weights at the
time of renewal of the registration.
e)
Any dispute arising out of these conditions shall be referred by the

engineer-in-charge to the Owner.
Page 282 of 1744
APPENDIX A (PROFORMA)
CONTRACT AGREEMENT - As per BORLs format to be issued to Contractor subsequently.
Page 283 of 1744
APPENDIX - B
FORM OF INCOME TAX CLEARANCE CERTIFICATE
1.
Name and Style (of the company, firm, HUF or individual) in which the applicant is
assessed or assessable to Income Tax and address for the purpose of assessment
______________________________________________________________
2.
Names and addresses of all companies, firms or association of persons in which the
applicant is substantially interested in his individual or fiduciary capacity.
Note: For the purpose of clause (2) above, the words "Substantially Interested" would
have the same meaning as in explanation to section 40A(2).
3.
Income-tax Circle / Ward / District in which the applicant is assessed to Income tax and
the Permanent A/c. no.
4.
The following particulars are to be furnished concerning the Income-tax

assessments for the preceding five years.
Year
Total
Income
assessed
2
1
5.
a)
Tax demanded
3
Tax
Paid
4
Balance
Due.
5
Whether any penalty for concealment has been imposed under the provision of
st
the Income-tax Act, 1961or wealth Tax 1957on or after 1 April, 1975.
i)
If the answer is in affirmative give the date, amount of penalty imposed and
section under which imposed.
ii)
Whether any appeal has been filed against the penalty order before the
Appellate Assistant Commissioner of Income-tax or before the Income-tax
appellate Tribunal. If so, the result thereof along with the date of Appellate
order.
b)
whether convicted for an offence within the meaning of section 277 of the
Income-tax act, 1961 or under Section 36(2) of the wealth Tax, 1957 or
under section 199/200 of the Indian Penal code.
If so, the date of the
conviction order.
c)
Total contract amount received by the applicant, whose name is mentioned

against (1) above, during the preceding accounting years (Give date of the
previous year) being previous years of
6.
In case there has been no Income - Tax assessment for any year, whether returns have
been submitted under section 139(1) and 139(2) and 139(3) of the Income-tax Act, 1961
or tax has been paid in advance under section 210(3) of Income-tax Act, 1961 and if so,
the amount of income returned for each year and tax for each of the four years
mentioned above and the Income-tax Circle/ Ward/District concerned where such
returns have been filed, give reasons for the same.
7.
8.
Whether any attachment or certificate proceedings pending in respect of arrears.

The name and address of branch(es) if any
I declare that the above information is correct and complete to the best of my
information and belief.
Signature of Contractor ___________________________________
.
Page 284 of 1744
Registration No.______________________ Signature____________

Address : ______________________________________________
Date
: ______________________________________________
I hereby certify that :

i)
The assesses has furnished complete information about all companies in

which he is substantially interested and the firms and associations of persons
in which he is partner or member respectively.
ii)
The returns of income due from the assesses have been filed.
iii) The assesses has paid all tax demands due other than those which have been
stayed by competent authority.
iv) The assesses has been cooperating with the Department in facilitating the
completion of the pending assessments.
a)
The period of three years has expired from the date of Appellate order of the
Income-tax Appellate Tribunal confirming or partially conforming the penalty
levied on or after 1-4-75 under section 271(1) of the Income tax act, 1961, or
u/s 18(1) of the Wealth tax Act, 1957.
OR
In cases where no appeal has been filed by the assesses against the penalty
imposed on or after, 1-4-75 u/s 271(1) of the Income Tax Act, 1961, or u/s
18(1) of the Wealth Tax Act, 1957, the period of three years has expired from
the date of the imposition of the penalty
b)
The period of three years has expired from the date of the order of conviction on
or after 1-4-75 u/s 277 of the Income-tax Act, or under section 36(2) of the
Wealth Tax Act 1957, or u/s 199/200 of the Indian Penal Code.
Delete whichever is inapplicable.
i)
There is no information before me that the companies in which the assesses is

substantially interested and the firms and associations of persons in which he is
partner or member, respectively and deliberately not filing the returns or not
paying the tax demands or not co-operating with the Department in facilitating
the completion of the pending assessments.
ii)
There us no information before me that persons having a substantial interest in

the applicant company / being members of the applicant association/being
partners of the applicant firm are deliberately not filing their returns of income
tax or not paying their tax demands or not co-operating in facilitating the
completion of the pending assessments.
This certificate is valid for a year from the date of issue.
Date :
Signature of I.T.O.____________________
Circle/Ward/District
Seal : _________________________
Page 285 of 1744
APPENDIX-C
PROFORMA OF BANK GUARANTEE
(On non-judicial paper of appropriate value)
To
Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd,
Village+ Post- Agasod
Dist-Sagar - 470113
Madhya Pradesh
Dear Sirs,
M/s...(hereinafter
referred
as
BIDDER
/
SUPPLIER)
(..BIDDERS / SUPPLIERS name and address) have
taken tender for the WORK of ____________________________________________
(Name of work) for Bharat Oman Refineries Limited, Bina with registered office at Admin
Building, BORL Refinery Complex, Bina, Dist-Sagar- 470113, Madhya Pradesh, India
(hereinafter referred as BORL) , Vide Tender / Fax Of Acceptance / Purchase Order
reference ______________________ dated ___________________________
The tender conditions provide that the BIDDER / SUPPLIER shall pay a sum of
Rs.________________(Rupees_____________________________) as Earnest Money /
Initial Security Deposit / Full security deposit in the form therein mentioned.
The form of payment of Earnest Money / Initial security deposit/ Full security deposit
includes guarantee executed by schedule 'A' Bank, undertaking full responsibility to
indemnify BORL in case of default .The said BIDDER / SUPPLIER have approached us
and at their request and in consideration of the premises, we ________________(Bank's
Name) having our Office at _____________________ (hereinafter referred as
"GUARANTOR") have agreed to give such guarantee as hereinafter mentioned
1. GUARANTOR hereby undertake and agree that if default shall be made by BIDDER /
SUPPLIER in performing any of the terms and conditions of the tender, GUARANTOR
do hereby irrevocably bind themselves and undertake to pay to BORL on first demand
in writing by BORL without protest or demur or proof or condition and without
reference to the BIDDER/ SUPPLIER the said amount of Rs. ____________(Rupees
___________________)
2. BORL shall have the full liberty without reference to GUARANTOR and without
affecting this guarantee to postpone for any time or from time to time the exercise of
any of the powers and rights conferred on BORL under the tender with said
BIDDER/SUPPLIER and to enforce or to forbear from endorsing any powers or rights
or by reason of time being given to the said BIDDER/SUPPLIER which under law
relating to the sureties would but for provision have the effect of releasing the
GUARANTOR.
3. BORL
shall
have
the
right
to
recover
the
said
sum
of
Rs.____________________________ (Rupees_______________________) from
GUARANTOR in manner aforesaid and such rights shall not be affected or suspended
by reason of the fact that any dispute or disputes have been raised by the said
BIDDER /SUPPLIER and or that any dispute or dispute are pending before any officer,
tribunal or court.
4. The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation
or winding up, dissolution or change of constitution or insolvency of the said
_____________________________ (BIDDER'S / SUPPLIER'S Name)
5. GUARANTOR'S
liability
under
this
guarantee
is
restricted
to
Rs
_____________________ (Rupees___________________). This guarantee shall
.
Page 286 of 1744
remain in force until _____________________ ____________. Unless a demand

under guarantee is made against GUARANTOR within the aforesaid date, all rights
under the said guarantee shall be forfeited and GUARANTOR shall be relived and
discharged from all liabilities there under.
6. GUARANTOR have power to issue this guarantee in your favour under Memorandum
and Articles of Association and the undersigned has full power to do under the Power
of Attorney dated ___________________granted to him by the Bank.
Yours faithfully,
___________________
Bank by its Constituted Attorney
Signature of a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the bank
The term "Bidder" shall be applicable for the participants in the tender before
finalization of contract for submission of Earnest Money Deposit and for all
correspondence, while the term "SUPPLIER "shall be applicable for successful
bidder to whom job shall be awarded and for deposit of Initial Security Deposit /
Full security deposit as per tender conditions.
Page 287 of 1744
APPENDIX-D
PROFORMA OF COMPLETION CERTIFICATE
Name of the Work
Name of the Contractor
Contract No. & Date
Date of commencement of work
Actual date of completion of the work
Extension of time granted
Yes/No/Recommended.
If yes, the letter ref.
Date.
Value of completed work
Date of taking over of the completed work
Rs.
Certified that the above work has been completed in all respects as per drawings,
specifications and directions of Engineer-in-Chargeon _________ and has been taken
over from the Contractor.
It is also certified that the Contractor has cleared/cleaned the site (witnessed by the
concerned engineer from the Owner on dated.___________) as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
_____________________
ENGINEER-IN-CHARGE
Name:
Countersigned:
______________________
DEPARTMENTAL HEAD
Name:
Page 288 of 1744
APPENDIX-E
FORMAT OF HYPOTHECATION BOND
Re:
Letter of Hypothecation
Dear Sirs,
WHEREAS Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (hereinafter called "the OWNER" which expression
shall include its successors and assigns) has awarded me*/us* a contract for
_________________________________ (hereinafter called "the works" which expression shall
include any and all amendments and/or variations therein and extra works) on the terms and
conditions stated in the Acceptance of Tender No. _________________________dated
_________________ (hereinafter called "the Contract" which expression shall include any
amendments thereto and/or variations therein and any formal contract executed in supersession
thereof).
AND WHEREAS The OWNER has at my*/our* request agreed to advance (hereinafter called
"The said advance") to me*/us* upto __________________ of the value of
_____________________ (hereinafter called "the said material") brought by me*/us* to site of
works for permanent incorporation in the works upon the conditions, inter-alia of my*/our*
furnishing security and binding myself*/ourselves* in the matter hereinafter appearing.
NOW THEREFORE, the consideration of the premises aforesaid I*/We* ______________
carrying on business in sole proprietor ship*/partnership* under the name and style
of____________________so as to bind myself*/ourself* and my*/our* executors, administrators,
representatives and permitted assigns/ successors and permitted assigns, DO HEREBY
undertake to and agree with the OWNER as follows:
The value of the said materials for the purpose of calculating the said advance shall be
determined by the Engineer-in-charge, whose computation in this behalf shall be final and
binding.
The said advance shall be confined to such of the said materials as are brought to the site of
work for permanent incorporation in the works to meet the reasonable requirements of the works
for the time being as determined by the Engineer-in-charge, whose decision shall be final.
Without prejudice to any other mode of recovery available to the OWNER, the said advance may
be recovered from my*/our* Running Account Bills and Final bill(s) to the extent of the value as
determined by the Engineer-in-charge (whose decision shall be final) of the said materials
incorporated in the works covered by the relative bill(s).
I*/We* shall maintain and cause to the maintained a daily account of the said materials brought
to the site of works for permanent incorporation in the works and or all issue made there from,
and shall fortnightly or oftener as required by the Engineer-in-charge, submit an inventory of the
said materials at site as verified by the Site Engineer.
I*/We* shall forthwith on demand and without protest or demur repay the OWNER the
unadjusted balance of the said advance for the time being remaining unpaid, and shall until
repayment thereof pay interest on the balance demanded at the rate of 17.5% (Seventeen point
five percent) per annum from the expiry of 7 (Seven) days from the date of demand and until
repayment thereof in full.
As security for the said advance and the unadjusted balance thereof remaining from time to time
I*/We* do hereby hypothecate by way of first charge to and in favour of the OWNER the whole of
my*/our* present and future materials which now have been brought to or may hereafter from
time to time during the continuance of this security be brought to or in or upon or about the site
of works for permanent incorporation in the works, the materials herein hypothecated being
inclusive or the said materials, but not confined thereto, AND:
.
Page 289 of 1744
I)
Should the unadjusted balance for the time being of the said advance at any time
exceed ____________of the value of the said materials hypothecated to the
OWNER as determined by the Engineer-in-charge (whose decision shall be final)
I*/We* upon being required by the OWNER shall be forthwith provide further
materials approved by the OWNER of a sufficient value to make good the shortfall,
or shall pay the OWNER an amount sufficient to make good the shortfall:
II)
I*/We* shall allow the OWNER and its servants, and agents at all times to take
inspections of the materials hereby hypothecated to the OWNER and of all my*/our*
books and records pertaining thereto and produce as and when required by the
OWNER and/or its servants or agents any and all such evidence as it/they may
require to procure the cost and value of any of the materials hereby hypothecated;
III)
The materials hereby hypothecated shall be kept at my*/our* risk and expense in all
respects and I*/We* shall at my*/our* own expenses during the continuance of this
security keep the said materials in good and marketable condition and insured
against such risks as the OWNER may require for the full marketable or
replacement value thereof in the joint names myself*/ourselves*and the OWNER in
an insurance company or companies to be approved by the OWNER and shall
deliver the policy(i.e.s) of insurance and the receipt for the last premium paid for
every such policy of insurance to the OWNER with exclusive right in the OWNER to
receive all proceeds of any such insurance and undertake on my*/our* part to pay to
the OWNER all proceeds of any policy relative to the materials hereby hypothecated
received by me*/us* during the continuance of this security and undertake to renew
and keep in full force and effect and maintain such insurance throughout the
continuity of this security and to deliver to the OWNER the renewal receipt and
policies therefore, with right in the OWNER to apply all sums received under any
insurance as aforesaid in or towards the liquidation of the said advance or the
unadjusted balance thereof for the time being outstanding;
IV)
It shall be lawful for the OWNER and its servants, agents and nominees at any time
during the continuance of this security and without any notice to me*/us* to enter
into or upon any place or premises where or wherein any of the materials hereby
hypothecated may be situated or kept or stored (and to effect such entry, if
necessary as my*/our* attorney and in my*/our* name for which purpose and to do
all acts, deeds and things deemed necessary by the OWNER in connection
therewith I/WE do hereby appoint and authorize the OWNER and its servants and
gents and nominees), and to inspect, value superintend, dispose of and/or take
particulars of all or any part of the materials hereby hypothecated and to check any
statements, accounts, reports and information relative thereto AND also if I*/We*
shall fail to repay on demand any monies which ought to be paid by me*/us*
hereunder or shall commit any breach of this agreement of under any circumstances
which in the sole judgment for the OWNER is prejudicial to or imperil or is likely to
prejudice or imperil the security created hereunder or if distress or execution is
levied or enforced against any of my*/our* property or assets whatsoever or I*/We*
shall suspend or cease to carry on business or if the said Contract is cancelled or
terminated, then and in any such case, it shall be lawful for the OWNER to take
charge, of seize, recover, receive appoint receivers, remove and/or take possession
of all or any part of the materials hereby hypothecated and either forthwith or any
time and from time to time sell, realize or dispose of the same in any manner
including by public auction or tender or private contract and whether with or without
intervention of the court all or any part of the materials hereby hypothecated or
otherwise deal therewith in such manner and upon such terms and conditions as the
OWNER in its discretion thinks fit;
V)
I*/We* hereby undertake to give immediate possession to the OWNER on demand

of all materials hereby hypothecated to the OWNER, and agree to accept the
accounts of sales and realizations given by the OWNER as conclusive proof of
amounts realized and relative expenses and to pay on demand any shortfall or
deficiencies therein shown, the proceeds of sale or otherwise realizations of the
materials hereby hypothecated to the OWNER to be applied by the OWNER in or
towards the repayment of the said/or the unadjusted balance thereof for the time
being;
.
Page 290 of 1744
VI)
Subject to the powers of the OWNER and my*/our* obligations hereunder, I*/WE*
shall be entitled to use the materials here by hypothecated to the OWNER in the
ordinary course of construction/ performance of the works so long as I*/We* an*/are*
not prohibited in writing by the OWNER from time to time.
The materials hereby hypothecated and all proceeds of sales and other realizations and
proceeds of insurance thereof shall always to be kept distinguishable and be held as the
exclusive property of the OWNER specifically appropriable to the security hereby created
and I*/We* shall not without the prior permission of the OWNER create any mortgage or
encumbrance whatsoever upon or over or affecting the same or any part thereof, nor
otherwise suffer or allow to be done anything that may prejudice the security hereby created.
The material hereby hypothecated and presently brought upon, lying, stored or be in or upon
the site of works are my*/our* exclusive and un-cumbered property with full right in me*/us*
to create the security in respect thereof in favour of the OWNER as herein envisaged, and
all future materials which are or shall be brought into, laying stored or be in or upon or about
the site of works for permanent incorporation in the works shall likewise be my/our exclusive
property without any charge, lien or interest in any other person and shall be exclusively
appropriable to the security hereby created in favour of the OWNER.
The OWNER shall not in any way be responsible in respect of the quantity, weight, amount
value, condition and final turn out or otherwise of or for the materials hereby hypothecated to
the OWNER, if the same happen to be in the possession of the OWNER and for any loss,
destruction or deterioration thereof, or damage thereto caused by theft, pilferage, robbery,
fire, riot or civil commotion malicious damage or otherwise howsoever, whatever may be the
circumstances or the reason under or for which the loss, destruction deterioration or
damage, including any act, commission, negligence or default of the OWNER or any of its
nominees, agents or servants.
The security hereby created shall operate and be a continuing security for the unadjusted
balance of the said advance from time to time due to the OWNER notwithstanding that there
may be a nil balance at any time or from time to time and notwithstanding that the said
advance or unadjusted balance may exceed the limits of the said advance as herein
envisaged.
All expressions herein used and not herein defined shall unless repugnant to the subject or
contract thereof carry the meaning assigned to them under the said contract.
Your faithfully,
_____________
Name**
Place:
Date:
NOTE: *Strike out what is not applicable.
** To be signed by all the partners of a partnership firm.
*** Signature(s) is/are not to be witnessed.
Page 291 of 1744
Page 292 of 1744
APPENDIX-F
INFORMATION FORMAT FOR CONTRACTORS/ CONSULTANTS
1.
Name of the Contractor/ Consultant
2.
Postal Address (Office)
Telephone No : Office
Fax No.
3.
: Office
Contract Person
Mobile No.
E-mail
Name of Mumbai representative of the

Contractor/ Consultant(if any)
Address
:
:
Telephone No
:
Fax No.
:
Mobile No.
:
E-mail
4.
Constitution of the Contractor/

Consultant
Name of the person(s) holding the

Power of Attorney/ resolution and
their present nationality with their
liabilities
Names ofDirector/Partners, their

present nationality with their
liabilities.
Partnership deed / Article of

Association of Memorandum of
Association (Attach Xerox copies)
5.
Whether holding valid license for the

trade, if so give details (Documents to be
attached)
6.
Type of works / trade
Page 293 of 1744
7.
a) Description of work executed in the

last 3 (three) years (along with cost
and time overrun) for major clients in
the tabular form containing following
fields
:
:
Description of the job

Name of the Client and location of
the job
Contract value
Actual value of job executed
Schedule completion period
Actual completion
(PO copies and performance reports from
clients are to be attached)
8.
Details of approvals and registration with

other companies (Attach Xerox copies)
9.
Maximum value of single work order which

has been completed (PO copy and
performance report of the same to be
submitted)
10.
a. Minimum value of contact you are

interested in
b. Maximum value of contract you

can undertake
c.
Type of work you intend to

undertake
11.
List of machinery,
workshop owned
12.
List of personnel employed (engineers,

supervisors, technicians, skilled workers,
unskilled workers, office staff etc.)
Please attach bio-data of supervisors,

engineers and key personnel
ISO 9000/14000 certificate (if, any)
Submit the copyof following documents
13.
14.
tools,
Safety assurance plan
Quality assurance plan
equipment,
Page 294 of 1744
15.
Provide data on safety records / accident

statistics for past 3 years
Provident fund No (Documents to
be attached)
ESIC No. (Documents to be
attached)
Sales Tax Registration No.

(Documents to be attached)
Registration No. Under WCT Act

along with full address of the
sales tax assessing authority
under whose jurisdiction the
Contractor falls (Documents to be
attached)
Service Tax Registration

(Documentary evidence required)
16
17.
18.
:
:
:
:
:
:
Service Tax Return for last year

(Documentary evidence required)
a) Name of the Bankers
b) Current year solvency certificate

(Original or attested by issuing
bank)
Income Tax Returns for last 3 years along

with PAN (Documents to be attached)
a) Last Years Turnover
b) Last 3 yearsBalance Sheet with

Auditors note etc.
:
:
19.
20.
c) Last 3 years Profit& Loss Account

Are your partners / directors related to any
other organization, and if so, please
furnish details.
a. Whether any partner is an exemployee of any State/ Central
Government/ the Owner? if so,
give details.
:
:
b. Whether you have under your

employment, dismissed any State/
Central Government/ Owners
servant / employee.
21.
Whether you are connected with any other

party already registered with us and if so,
give details
22.
Supporting services from outside agencies
:
.
Page 295 of 1744
(Give details)
23.
Details about litigation (pending as well as

settled) if any.
24.
Any other special / relevant information
Place: ___________________
Signature: __________________
Date: ____________________
Designation: ________________
COMPANY SEAL
Page 296 of 1744
APPENDIX-G
DETAILS OF CENVATABLE EXCISE DUTY (SP3)
SOR NO
Sr No OF SOR
NAME OF
MATERILAS
CENVATABLE DUTY (IN

RUPEES)
(IN FIGURE)
(IN WORDS)
TOTAL
NOTE :- 1.Total of Cenvatable Excise duty indicated above shall be deducted from Total
quoted price for the purpose of evaluation.
Cenvatable Excise Duty component mentioned in this FORM shall be considered
as mandatory discount and shall be adjusted from all R.A. bills on pro-rata
basis. The Cenvatable Excise duty shall be reimbursed to the Contractor upon
production of documentary evidence to enable owner to claim Cenvat Benefit
subject to the ceiling mentioned in this FORM. Further, such Cenvatable excise
duty shall be reimbursed only for the items, which are eligible for Cenvat
Benefit as per excise ruled and as per SCC. Statutory variation in Cenvatable
Excise Duty shall not have any effect on the mandatory discount mentioned
above.
In case of change in quantity for the above items during execution, the
Cenvatable amount for such items shall be adjusted proportionately.
(Signature & Stamp of Contractor)

AT
Page 297 of 1744
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PART-II PRICE SECTION
Prepared by:
Page 298 of 1744
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Bidding Document No.: AK/A702-029-PF-TN-4070/1006

Name of Work: VPSA Oxygen Plant
NAME OF BIDDER:
Index to Price Schedule

Description
Sl. No.
Page 299 of 1744
Form No. / No. of Sheets
COVER PAGE
INDEX TO PRICE SCHEDULE
PREAMBLE
TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE
BREAK-UP OF TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE OF FORM SP-0
3.1
Schedule of Price for Design and Detailed Engineering
SP-1 (1 Sheet)
3.2
Schedule of Price for Supply Portion
SP-2 (1 Sheet)
3.3
Schedule of Price for Construction / Installation

Portion
SP-3 (1 Sheet)
1 Sheet
1 Sheet
1 Sheet
SP-0 (1 Sheet)
FURTHER BREAK-UP OF PRICES OF FORM SP-1, SP-2 &

SP-3
4.1
Breakup of price for Design and Detailed Engineering
SP-4 (1 Sheet)
4.2
Breakup of price for Supply Portion
SP-5 (3 Sheets)
4.3
Breakup of price for Construction / Installation

Portion
SP-6 (2 Sheets)
Recommended Spares for Two years normal

Operation & Maintenance (O&M)
SP-7 (1 Sheet)
Details of Taxes & Duties included in Quoted Total

Lumpsum Price
SP-8 (1 Sheet)
Guaranteed Power Consumption Figures
SP-9 (1 Sheet)
PER DIEM CHARGES FOR PARTICIPATION IN HAZOP

STUDY
SP-10 (1 Sheet)

NAME OF BIDDER:
PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF PRICES

1.0
2.0
The price quoted shall be lumpsum price on turnkey basis. Unless the basic parameter changes or
additional/ extra requirements are made, total payments to be made to the Contractor shall be
limited to lumpsum price indicated, irrespective of the progressive payments made during execution
based on the split up of price.
Obligation of the Contractor is not limited to the quantities that the Contractor may either indicate in
the Breakup of Total Lumpsum Price along with his bid or in further detailed breakup of Total
Lumpsum Price furnished after award of Work. Contractor shall carry out entire scope of
work/supplies/Services as detailed in various sections/volumes of the Bidding Document within the
Total quoted Lumpsum Price.
3.0
Total Lumpsum Price quoted by the Contractor shall include cost of any other supplies/work(s)
/Services not specifically mentioned in the Bidding Document but necessary for the efficient, trouble
free operation of the Plant and to make this package job complete in all respect as per Bidding
Document.
4.0
Contractor to note that breakup of Total Lumpsum Price is for interim payment purposes only and
total price payable under the Contract shall be restricted to the Total Lumpsum Price/Contract Price.
5.0
The Price for Design & Engineering Component quoted in FORM SP-1 shall not exceed 10% (Ten
percent) of the Total Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
6.0
The Price for Supply component (FORM SP-2) shall not exceed 60% (Sixty percent) of the Total
Lumpsum Price quoted in FORM SP-0.
7.0
Spares for start-up/commissioning and mandatory spares required are in CONTRACTOR's scope and
are deemed to be included in their quoted Total Lumpsum Price.
8.0
In case of any contradiction between Total Lumpsum Price quoted in SP-0 and breakup of Total
Lumpsum Price quoted in SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, SP-4, SP-5, SP-6, the following order of precedence shall
apply:
(i) SP-0;
(ii) SP-1, SP-2, SP-3;
(iii) SP-4, SP-5, SP-6;
9.0
Page 300 of 1744
Following Forms of Schedule of Price are also enclosed.

i) Form SP-7, indicating 2 years O&M spares,
ii) Form SP-8, indicating the details of Taxes & Duties included in Total Lumpsum Price.
iii) Form SP-9 indicating Guaranteed Figures for Power Consumption.
iv) Form SP-10 indicating Per Diem charges for Vendor participation in HAZOP Study
Page 301 of 1744
FORM SP-0
NAME OF BIDDER:
TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE

SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
The scope of work shall cover design, engineering, procurement of materials and bought
out components, manufacture, assembly, insulation, inspection, testing and painting at
works, packing and supply, unloading & storage at site, local handling,
erection/installation, testing & commissioning, painting at site, training of purchasers
personnel, performance guarantee run test at site of VPSA Oxygen plant package as Lump
Sum Turnkey package as per scope of work, P&IDs, drawings, data sheets, standards,
specifications etc.
UNIT
INDIAN COMPONENT (INDIAN RUPEES)

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
FOREIGN COMPONENT (CURRENCY_____)

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
LS
(TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE):

Notes:
(i)
Total LUMPSUM PRICE as per FORM SP-0 is inclusive of all taxes, duties, levies etc.
(ii)
Break up of TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE (Total Lumpsum Price) has been furnished as per FORM SP-1 (schedule of lumpsum price for design and detailed engineering), FORM SP-2 (schedule of lumpsum price for supply) and FORM SP-3
(schedule of lumpsum price for construction).
(iii)
Further break up of FORM SP-1, SP-2 and SP-3 has been furnished as per FORM SP-4, SP-5 and SP-6 respectively.
(iv)
The above Total Lumpsum Price is inclusive of Pre-commissioning/Commissioning Spares, Mandatory Spares and Engineering Spares/Consumables.
Page 4 of 17
Page 302 of 1744
FORM SP-1
NAME OF BIDDER:
BREAKUP OF TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE

Schedule of Lump-sum Price For Design And Detailed Engineering
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
1-A
Design and Detailed Engineering portion of VPSA Oxygen Plant as

per Bidding Document.
LS

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
Page 303 of 1744
FORM SP-2
NAME OF BIDDER:

Schedule of Lump-sum Price for Supply
SL. NO.
1-B
DESCRIPTION
Supply of equipments/materials of VPSA Oxygen Plant as per
Bidding Document (other than supply of construction materials
for Civil, Structural and site Painting works, which shall be
included in FORM SP-3 / FORM SP-6).
UNIT

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
LS
Page 304 of 1744
FORM SP-3
NAME OF BIDDER:

Schedule of Lump-sum Price for Construction/Installation
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
1-C
CONSTRUCTION, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

OF VPSA Oxygen Plant as per Bidding Document.
LS

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
FORM SP-4
NAME OF BIDDER:
FURTHER BREAK-UP OF LUMPSUM PRICE FOR DESIGN & DETAILED ENGINEERING
SL. NO.
1-A

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
Design and Detailed Engineering of VPSA Oxygen Plant, Break up of FORM SP-1 Price:
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
1-A.1
Residual design & Basic Engineering
L.S.
1-A.2
Detailed Engineering & Document Approval
L.S.
1-A.3
As Built Documentation
L.S.
1-A.4
Vendors final documents for supply items duly certified by TPI
L.S.
Page 305 of 1744
TOTAL:

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
L.S.
Page 306 of 1744
FORM SP-5
NAME OF BIDDER:
FURTHER BREAK-UP OF LUMPSUM PRICE FOR SUPPLY PORTION

SL. NO.
1-B
1-B.1

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
Supply of equipments/materials (other than supply of construction materials for Civil, Structural and site Painting works, which shall be included in FORM SP-3 / FORM SP-6)-Break up of FORM SP-2 Price:
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
VPSA Oxygen Plant comprising of two chains and consisting of

following major items:
i.
Suction filter for air blower unit (1 No. for each chain)
L.S.
ii.
Roots air blower with electric motor (1 No. for each chain)
L.S.
iii.
Adsorber vessels (one in adsorption and one in regeneration)

along with all accessories.(1 pair for each chain)
L.S.
iv.
First fill of Adsorbents (Zeolite based Molecular Sieve)
L.S.
v.
Switchover valves, as required
L.S.
vi.
1 No. Online O2 analyzer in product gaseous oxygen line as per

instrumentation specification.
L.S.
vii.
viii.
ix.
Vacuum pump with separate electric motor along with all

accessories (1 No. for each chain)
Silencers/sound attenuators as required. Equipment and
accessories for ventilation suitable for installation in Acoustic
proof building. (for each chain)
Venting arrangement for waste gases up to a safe height with
silencers (for each chain)
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
x.
Structural steel skid supports for various equipment/piping
L.S.
xi.
One (1) No. buffer vessel of adequate capacity (common for both
chains) to meet the continuous demand of O2 gas.
L.S.
xii.
Two (2) Nos. (1working+1standby) Reciprocating Oxygen

compressor with electric motor drive and other accessories viz.
pulsation damper, intercooler, after cooler etc. as required
(common for both chains).
L.S.
1-B.2
Material handling facilities:
Page 9 of 17
Page 307 of 1744
FORM SP-5
NAME OF BIDDER:

DESCRIPTION
UNIT
1-B.3

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
Supply
of equipments/materials
(other
supply of of
construction
materials for Civil, Structural and site Painting works, which shall be included in FORM SP-3 / FORM SP-6)-Break up of FORM SP-2 Price:
1
No. EOT
crane of adequate capacity
forthan
maintenance
air
L.S.
blower, vacuum pumps, valves, heat exchangers etc in the RCC
building.
1 No. EOT crane of adequate capacity for maintenance of the
L.S.
oxygen compressors in structural shed.
1 No. Electric hoist with monorail for maintenance of ventilation
L.S.
blowers in blower room
L.S.
Ventilation system for Blower/pump house
1-B.4
Foundation Bolts, nuts, washers and other installation materials.
L.S.
1-B.5
Access platforms, ladders, staircases for equipment, machinery,

instruments and valves for operation and maintenance.
L.S.
1-B.6
First fill including flushing fluid for all hydraulic oils (for power
packs) and lubricating oils, greases etc. and replenishment of any
loss of these during commissioning.
L.S.
SL. NO.
i.
ii.
iii.
1-B.7
1-B.8
1-B.9
1-B.10
1-B.11
1-B.12
1-B.13
All Piping Materials (Including Pipes, Valves, Flanges, fittings,

fasteners, gaskets and other material) as required/ specified for
the entire package.
Insulation (both thermal and acoustic insulation) of Equipment
and Piping wherever required. Bidder shall also supply extra
10% of insulation material to take care of field joints and damage
during transportation.
All Electrical Materials (Including all types of Cables and Cable
trays, Junction boxes, control stations, lighting system, fixtures
and accessories, etc ) as required/ specified for the entire
package.
All Instrumentation and control materials (Including monitoring
equipment, all types of field instruments, cables, cable ducts,
cable trays, spares etc.) as required/ specified for the entire
package.
Mandatory Spares as per specification
Commissioning spares, as required
Special Tools and Tackles for erection and start up of equipment
and for operation and maintenance.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
Page 10 of 17
Page 308 of 1744
FORM SP-5
NAME OF BIDDER:

SL. NO.
1-B.14

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
Supply
of
equipments/materials
(other
than
supply
of
construction
materials
for
Civil,
Structural
and
site
Painting
works,
which
shall
be
included
in
FORM
SP-3
/
FORM
SP-6)-Break
up
of FORM SP-2 Price:
ANY OTHER ITEM NOT MENTIONED ABOVE BUT REQUIRED FOR
L.S.
COMPLETION OF WORK (BIDDERS TO SPECIFY)
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
TOTAL:
(i)
L.S.
NOTE:
The minor materials for Mechanical Equipment, Electrical, Instrumentation which are required in connection with site installation activities are included under Construction Portion Form SP-6 in relevant items.
Page 11 of 17
FORM SP-6
Name of Work:
NAME OF BIDDER:
FURTHER BREAK-UP OF LUMPSUM PRICE FOR CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION PORTION

SL. NO.
1-C
1-C.1.

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
CONSTRUCTION, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND TESTING - BREAK UP OF FORM SP-3 PRICE:
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL WORKS INCLUSIVE OF SUPPLY OF

ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
(a)
RCC building with acoustic proof lining for housing air blower,
vacuum pump, valve skid etc.
L.S.
(b)
Structural shed with roof and side sheeting etc. for housing
Reciprocating oxygen compressors alongwith necessary
barricading
L.S.
(c)
Any other Building / Shed as required for functional operation of

the VPSA Oxygen Package
L.S.
Equipment (Both static and vibratory) foundations for pumps,

blowers, tank, vessels and any other auxiliary equipment etc.
L.S.
(d)
(e)
(f)
1-C.2
(a)
(b)
1-C.3
1-C.4
1-C.5
1-C.6
1-C.7
1-C.8
Pavement work, Drain, approach road, electrical and other

trenches.
Micro-grading etc.
INSTALLATION INCLUSIVE OF INSTALLATION MATERIAL AS
REQUIRED (OTHER THAN THOSE CONSIDERED IN FORM SP2/SP-5)
All blowers, pumps, vessels, tanks, Gear Reducers with drives,
auxiliaries, miscellaneous items etc.
EOT cranes
All Piping work
All Electrical work
All Instrumentation work
All Painting works including supply of materials
Pre-commissioning & commissioning and trial run of VPSA
Oxygen Plant
Conducting Performance Guarantee Test Runs
Page 309 of 1744
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
Page 12 of 17

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
FORM SP-6
Name of Work:
NAME OF BIDDER:
FURTHER BREAK-UP OF LUMPSUM PRICE FOR CONSTRUCTION / INSTALLATION PORTION

SL. NO.
1-C.9

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
CONSTRUCTION, INSTALLATION,
AND
MISCELLANEOUS
- Any other itemCOMMISSIONING
not covered above
butTESTING - BREAK UP OF FORM SP-3 PRICE:
L.S.
required for the completion of work.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
TOTAL:
(i)

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
L.S.
NOTE:
The breakup of prices given above are exclusive of supply of materials covered in FORM SP-5 but are inclusive of materials for Civil, Structural, General Civil, Painting etc.
Page 310 of 1744
Page 13 of 17
Page 311 of 1744
FORM SP-7
NAME OF BIDDER:
PRICE SCHEDULE OF RECOMMENDED SPARES FOR TWO YEARS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION OF RECOMMENDED
SPARES
UNIT
QTY.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
TOTAL AMOUNT (CURRENCY___)

IN FIGURES
IN WORDS
(E)
(F)
BIDDER TO SUBMIT THEIR DETAILED PRICE SCHEDULE FOR RECOMMENDED SPARES AS PER BIDDING DOCUMENT.
NOTE:
Contractor to provide itemized priced list of two years Operation and Maintenance (O&M) spares, which is inclusive of all taxes,
duties, levies etc. Prices of O&M spares shall be kept valid for a period of 12 months after Contractual Mechanical Completion.
Owner reserves the right to place the order for such O & M spares.
FORM SP-8
NAME OF BIDDER:
DETAILS OF TAXES & DUTIES INCLUDED IN QUOTED TOTAL LUMPSUM PRICE

AMOUNT (INR)
SL. NO.
DESCRIPTION
Excise Duty included in LS Price
CST with Form 'C' on Supplies

included in LS Price
CST without Form 'C' on Supplies
included in LS Price
MP VAT on Supplies included in LS
Price
Service Tax included in LS Price
3
4
5
AMOUNT ON WHICH
APPLICABLE
(A)
% APPLICABLE
AMOUNT OF TAX / DUTY
CENVATABLE / VATABLE
PORTION OF TAX/DUTY
ELIGIBLE FOR INPUT TAX
CREDIT AND INCLUDED IN (C)
(B)
(C) = (A) X (B)
(D)
Swachh Bharat Cess included in LS

Price
Krishi Kalyan Cess included in LS Price
Basic Custom Duty (in case of

Imported items) included in LS Price
Customs Educational Cess and

Customs Secondary & Higher
Education Cess included in LS Price
10
CVD included in LS Price
11
SAD/AID included in LS Price
12
Entry Tax included in LS Price
NOTES:
Amounts of Cenvatable Excise Duty, Vatable MP VAT, Cenvatable Service Tax, Cenvatable Krishi Kalyan Cess and Cenvatable CVD &
SAD/AID indicated in Column (D) above shall be deducted from the total Lump Sum price for the purpose of evaluation.
Cenvatable/ Vatable Component mentioned in this FORM shall be considered as mandatory discount and shall be adjusted from
Contractors Invoices on pro-rata basis. The Cenvatable/Vatable amount shall be reimbursed to the Contractor upon production of
documentary evidence enabling Owner to claim Cenvat Benefit/ Input Tax Credit, subject to the ceiling mentioned in this FORM. Further,
such Cenvatable/ Vatable amount shall be reimbursed only for the materials which are eligible for Cenvat Benefit/Input Tax Credit as per
rules and provisions of Bidding Document.
The Service Tax amount indicated by the Bidder in this Form shall include both, namely, (i) the amount of Service Tax payable by the
bidder and reimbursable by Owner (ii) the amount of Service Tax, if any, directly payable by Owner , as applicable to recipient of service,
as per the reverse charge rule of Service Tax.
The Service Tax, if any, to be payable by the Owner under reverse charge rule shall not be reimbursed to the Contractor but shall be
directly submitted to the Service Tax Authorities by Owner. If the same has already been reimbursed / paid to the Contractor for
whatsoever reason, the said amount, as submitted by the Owner to Service Tax Authorities, shall be deducted / recovered / adjusted
from the payment due to the Contractor.
In case a bidder considers more than one rate of any particulat Tax/ Duty then the details above shall be furnsihed for each rate of such
Tax/Duty.
Page 312 of 1744
Page 15 of 17
Page 313 of 1744
FORM SP-9
NAME OF BIDDER:
GUARANTEED POWER CONSUMPTION FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SL. NO.
1
DESCRIPTION OF UTILITIES
Total (average) power consumption for working Air
Blowers, working Vacuum Pumps & operating
Reciprocating Compressor.
BIDDERS GUARANTEED POWER

CONSUMPTION ( IN kWhr/hr) AT MOTOR TERMINALS
.KWHr/Hr(In Figures)
KWHr/Hr(In Words)
NOTE:
1 Guaranteed Power Consumption shall be with respect to equipment as per Doc No. A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 and
Annexure -B of Doc No. A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 enclosed in the technical part of the Bidding Document.
2 Loading on account of Guaranteed Power Consumption shall be considered for evaluation as per Doc No. A702-02982-41-LP-4070 enclosed in the technical part of the Bidding Document.
3 All other notes mentioned in Guaranteed Power Consumption Format (Annexure-B) of Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-CL4070 attached with the tender shall be referred.
4 In case of Discrepancy between In Word and In Figures, Guarantee Power Consumption quoted In Words shall
prevail.
Page 314 of 1744
FORM SP-10
NAME OF BIDDER:
PER DIEM CHARGES FOR PARTICIPATION IN HAZOP STUDY

SL. No.
Description
Per Manday charges (Per person) for 8 hours work on normal working day
excluding Service Tax & Swachh Bharat Cess (Currency_________)
Rate in Figure
1.01
Rate in Words
Per diem rate for vendor's participation

during HAZOP study of VPSA Oxygen
Plant
Notes:
The per diem rates for vendor's specialist visit shall be based on "Terms & Conditions for Vendor participation in Hazop
Study" enclosed with the RFQ. Above quoted Per Manday charges for participation during Hazop Study for 4 (Four)
mandays shall be considered for price evaluation.
Swachh Bharat Cess as applicable on Services shall be loaded to bidder's quoted Prices for respective services for
purpose of evaluation being Non Cenvatable.
Cenvatable Service Tax applicable per diem rate for participation in Hazop Study: Extra @ 14%
Non Cenvatable Swachh Bharat Cess applicable per diem rate for participation in Hazop Study Extra @ 0.5%
Cenvatable Krishi Kalyan Cess applicable per diem rate for participation in Hazop Study Extra @ 0.5%
Present applicable rate of Withholding Tax considered by Foreign Bidder: Included @______%
Page 315 of 1744

PROJECT
AT
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Part - II: TECHNICAL SECTION
Prepared by:
Page 316 of 1744
Technical Specifications
VPSA Oxygen Plant

Tender No. A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070
Page 317 of 1744
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SI-4070
Rev A
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO
BIDDERS FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 1 of 3
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(MACHINERY DIVISION)
A
Rev.
No
PROJECT
REVAMP AND CAPACITY

ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL
REFINERY
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT
ENGINEERS INDIA LTD.
JOB NO.
A702
18/03/2016
ISSUED WITH TENDER
ANAND
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Format No. EIL 1641-1924 Rev. 1
PPP
Checked
by
PPP
Approved
by
Page 318 of 1744
BIDDERS FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.0
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SI-4070
Rev A
Page 2 of 3
Scope
This document is intended to outline the procedures envisaged for execution of this
enquiry including pre-bid & in-bid requirements.
2.0
Special Requirements
2.1
This bid is intended for ZERO DEVIATION BIDDING No POST-BID

CORRESPONDENCE is envisaged. Bidders must follow the following guidelines to
achieve the same. Bidder to attend Pre-Bid meetings along with filled in datasheets,
PFD & deviations with respect to standards/specifications only. All the Bidder queries
shall be discussed & reverted in pre-bid meeting only.
2.2
Pre-Bid stage:
i)
The bidders shall be invited for an extensive pre-bid meeting after floating of
enquiry. Participation in pre-bid meeting is MANDATORY for all the bidders. The
Pre-bid meeting shall be attended by competent representative(s) of bidder who is
competent enough to discuss and conclude all the technical and commercial
issues.
ii)
In case, any of the bidders is not attending the PRE- BID meeting, it shall be
understood that the bidder does not have any comments/ deviations to RFQ
requirements. In case, any deviations/clarifications are furnished by such bidder in
his Bid or the Bid is incomplete, the complete bid is likely to be rejected.
iii)
Bidder shall submit their clarifications/deviations with respect to RFQ

requirements during Pre-bid meeting only. After which Owner/Consultant reserves
the right not to entertain any clarifications/deviations.
iv) Bidder to note that only technically infeasible deviations shall be discussed during
PRE- BID meeting provided a suitable justification for the same is furnished.
Purchasers decision on such deviations shall be treated as FINAL. Deviations,
which can be complied either with extra cost and/or with time implications, shall
not be permitted.
It is in Bidders interest to ensure that all technical deviations are sorted out in the
pre-bid meeting stage only.
v)
Conflicts, if any, between various documents attached in the material shall be

highlighted by the bidder during pre-bid meeting and purchasers decision shall be
final.
Any conflict brought to purchasers notice during pre-bid stage shall be subject to
purchasers clarification/ decision during that stage and the same shall be
complied to by the bidder without any cost/ time implications.
vi) Conclusion agreed in PRE- BID meeting shall be issued as Record Notes of Prebid Meeting / Reply to Pre-bid Queries to the bidders present in the pre-bid
meeting and the same shall be considered as part of enquiry document.
vii) In case the parameters and/or scope of certain item(s) included in the TENDER
get revised due to revision in process requirements or discussion during pre-bid
meeting and/or any other reasons, an amendment (clearly identifying the
changes) shall be issued.
BIDDERS FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SI-4070
Rev A
Page 3 of 3
viii) Individual meeting shall also be arranged with each bidder separately to discuss
and finalise the offered system, datasheets, etc. Bidder shall necessarily bring &
discuss/ finalize the following documents during the pre-bid meeting:
(a) Duly filled in Proven Track Record Proforma along with BQC supporting
documents.
(b) Completely filled in equipment datasheet.
(c) Proposed package layout, preliminary PFD / P&ID of the offered system
(d) Basic dimension of acoustic proof building & compressor shed.
(e) Deviations / exceptions / clarifications / conflicts.
(f) Duly filled & signed/stamped Technical Compliance Statements/Technical
Checklists.
(g) Tentative Utility Consumption data including electrical load data, schedule of
lubricants, chemicals & consumables, etc.
ix) Minute of Pre-bid meeting signed with individual bidder, shall be considered as
part of bid and binding on bidder, even if bidder has not enclosed the Minutes of
pre-bid meeting along with the bid. The information contained therein shall be
incorporated into the Purchase Requisition also.
2.3
Page 319 of 1744
In-Bid requirement:
i)
ii)
iii)
Duly filled & signed/stamped Technical Checklist (Doc. No A702-029-82-41-CL4070) along with Annexures-A & B.
Duly filled in Proven Track Record Proforma along with BQC supporting
documents.
All documents required to be submitted with bid as per Vendor Data Requirement
(A702-029-82-41-VR-4070)
Page 320 of 1744
TECHNICAL CHECK LIST

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 1 of 6

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
18.03.2015
ISSUED WITH TENDER
BKD
ANAND
PPP
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 321 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 2 of 6
Bidder to note that bidders quotation shall be evaluated (technically) based on bidders
reply/confirmation to this technical checklist only. Bidders offer shall be considered
incomplete and may not be considered for technical evaluation by purchaser if duly
filled-in, signed & stamped check list is not submitted along with bid. Bidder is required to
give categorical reply to each point of this technical checklist, so that bidders offer can be
properly evaluated.
Bidder's reply "Not Confirmed" is not warranted and may lead to technical rejection of their bid.
However, Bidder may provide certain clarification, incase absolutely necessary, without
deviating to bid requirement. Written confirmation shall have precedence over any clarification
whatsoever.
Sl.
Description
BIDDERS
CLARIFICATION
No
ANSWER
(If Any)
(Confirmed /
Not Confirmed)
1. Please note that this is a No deviation bid.
Hence no deviation to the TENDER specification
is acceptable. Bidder to submit all their
clarification during the pre-bid query stage. No
further deviation/clarifications shall be allowed in
the technical offer. Bidder to confirm that there is
no technical deviation in their offer w.r.t. the
TENDER/ agreements in pre-bid query reply.
Bidder is also required to submit duly filled,
signed and stamped Annexure-A of this
document as a confirmation/compliance along
with the bid.
2. Confirm that the bidder has quoted for the total
scope of supply & services as per TENDER
specification and attachments. Any deviation to
this requirement may lead to the bid being
considered as incomplete and liable for
rejection.
3. Bidder will have single point responsibility for
complete scope of work covered under this
requisition. Confirm compliance.
4. Bidder to confirm categorical compliance to all
clauses of Specifications, Data Sheets, Process
Data Sheets, Drawings and other requirements of
requisition.
5. Bidder to note that data sheets, drawings and
other technical details submitted with bid shall be
retained for information only.
Bidders documents/ drawings shall be reviewed
as per the Vendor Data Requirements (Doc No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070) during post order
stage for checking/ensuring compliance with
Tender specification/Contract requirement.
Confirm compliance.
6. Bidder to note that, if any comment arises during
detail engineering from EIL/ Owner (to ensure
compliance with Tender Specification/Contract
requirement), same shall be incorporated by
Page 322 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sl.
No
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Description
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 3 of 6
BIDDERS
ANSWER
(Confirmed /
Not Confirmed)
CLARIFICATION
(If Any)
vendor without any time and price implication.

Confirm compliance.
Bidder to confirm that their offered package shall
be accommodated within the space allocated for
the package.
Bidder to confirm that they have quoted per diem
rate for participation in HAZOP Study meeting
related to this package to be conducted by
Owner/EIL office in India.
Bidder to confirm that all equipment/packages
shall be sourced from Owner/EIL approved
vendor list attached with this requisition. Any
Vendors if proposed by the bidder for any item
where no list is provided in the requisition, the
makes of same shall have adequate Proven
Track Record (PTR) in similar application and
shall be subject to OWNER approval during detail
engineering without any time and cost implication
to Owner.
Bidder to confirm that the supply of all
consumables viz. first fill of oils & lubricants,
dessicants etc. and replenishment of any loss of
these during commissioning have been included
in their scope.
Bidder to confirm that they will supply mandatory
spares as per the clause no. 9.3 of Job
Specification (Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SP4070) and the price of the same has been
included in the base price.
Bidder to confirm that Special Tools and Tackles
as required for normal operation and
maintenance have been included by the bidder in
the base price of package.
Or else bidder to confirm that special tool &
tackles are not required.
Bidder to confirm that commissioning spares
have been quoted and price of the same is
included in the base price of package.
Bidder to confirm that in case during
commissioning, additional spares are required
over and above the quoted commissioning
spares, then the same shall be supplied by
bidder without any commercial implication.
Bidder to confirm that list of recommended
spares for two (2) years normal operation &
maintenance with itemized price along with
quantity as per format attached with price
schedule has been included in the bid. Owner
(M/s BORL) shall decide and order these spares
separately.
Confirm that Third Party Inspection (TPI) has
Page 323 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sl.
No
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 4 of 6
BIDDERS
ANSWER
(Confirmed /
Not Confirmed)
Description
CLARIFICATION
(If Any)
been quoted in accordance with Commercial

requirements.
Bidder to confirm that price for 3-D modelling as
per piping specification & EIL spec 8-76-0022
has been included in the lump sum price of the
package
Confirm that the Inspection & Testing
requirements
as
specified
in
the
Bid
Specifications shall be complied.
Confirm that Consumption rate of Utilities (such
as electric power, cooling water, service water
etc.) required from the OWNER have been
furnished in the bid.
Confirm that all Drawings / Data required to be
submitted with bid as per Vendor Data
Requirements (Doc No. A702-029-82-41-VR4070) have been included in the Bidders
proposal.
Confirm that in the event of order, all drawings,
documents and data shall be furnished in
accordance with Vendor Data Requirements
(Doc No. A702-029-82-41-VR-4070).
22. Confirm that erection, testing, commissioning

and performance guarantee testing and training
to owners personnel at site is included in the
lump sum price of the package.
___________
Bidders Seal
_________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative
Page 324 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 5 of 6
Annexure-A
TECHNICAL COMPLIANCE STATEMENT
(TO BE SIGNED BY VENDOR'S PRINCIPAL CORPORATE LEVEL SIGNATORY ON COMPANY LETTERHEAD)
I, ON BEHALF OF M/s
CONFIRM THAT THE PROPOSAL OF VPSA
OXYGEN PLANT QUOTED BY M/s
FOR REVAMP AND
CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT PROJECT OF BORL REFINERY, AGAINST MATERIAL

REQUISITION/TENDER/PACKAGE
No.
A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070
IS
IN
TOTAL
COMPLIANCE TO THE SCOPE AS WELL AS ALL THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

AND NO DEVIATION, VARIATION OR RESERVATION WHATSOEVER HAS BEEN
MENTIONED IN THE TECHNICAL OFFER. IT IS FURTHER AGREED THAT THE
TECHNICAL DETAILS FURNISHED IN OUR OFFER WILL BE REVIEWED BY EIL/
CLIENT DURING DETAILED ENGINEERING STAGE AFTER ORDER AND ANY
CHANGE REQUIRED TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF ENQUIRY SPECIFICATION
INCLUDING AMENDMENT(S) (IF ANY) WILL BE INCORPORATED BY US WITHOUT
ANY PRICE AND TIME IMPLICATION.
____________
Bidders Seal
___________________________________
Signature of Authorized Representative
Page 325 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-CL-4070 Rev.A
Page 6 of 6
Annexure-B
S.NO
DESCRIPTION
1.
GUARANTEED POWER
CONSUMPTION ( IN kWhr/hr) AT
MOTOR TERMINALS
Total
(average)
power
consumption for working Air
Blowers, Vacuum Pumps &
operating
Reciprocating
Compressor.
Note:
1) Vendor shall quote the guaranteed power consumption for loading & penality purpose.
Vendor shall submit the guaranteed power consumption along with the Price bid in this
format and submit the copy of the same along with unpriced bid mentioning Guaranteed
power consumption as Quoted.
2) No other power consuming equipment shall be considered for power calculation.
3) During PG test, power consumption shall be measured in respective energy meters of
each motor (Air Blower, Vacuum Pump & Operating Reciprocating compressor) located
in substation. Energy consumption measured in respective energy meters of each motor
shall be added to arrive at the overall energy consumption. As this measurement of
energy also includes losses within cables the same will be subtracted from the overall
energy measured value to arrive at energy consumption at Motor terminals by
measurement & computation method.
4) Guaranteed power consumption shall be quoted in kWhr / hr.
5) Guaranteed power consumption shall be recorded for 72 hrs. and average consumption
of power over 72 hours test shall be considered.
6) No positive tolerance shall be permissible for Guaranteed power value.
7) Vendor to also refer Loading & Penalty criteria (A702-029-82-41-LP-4070) attached with
Tender..
Page 326 of 1744
DOCUMENT No.

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 1 of 5
LOADING & PENALITY CRITERIA

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
18.03.2016
ISSUED WITH TENDER
ANAND
PPP
PB/RKT
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 327 of 1744
DOCUMENT No.

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.0
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 2 of 5
SCOPE:
This specification describes the Loading & penalty criteria applicable to VPSA Oxygen
Plant.
2.0
GUARANTEE , PRICE REDUCTION AND LOADING CRITERIA
2.1
General
This section describes the guarantee requirements which the VPSA Oxygen Plant fulfill,
the penalty for shortfall in guaranteed parameters and the rejection of the plant by Owner.
2.2
Guarantees
Apart from guarantee requirement as stated in General Conditions for Contracts (GCC),
Vendor shall guarantee the following.
2.2.1
Workmanship Guarantee
The Vendor shall guarantee the Owner that the entire plant inclusive of all equipment,
component and items (Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation etc.) shall be free from
faulty design, poor workmanship and improper material of construction and that the plant
is of sufficient size and capacity, using the most energy efficient state-of-the-art
technology to fulfill the operating conditions satisfactorily as specified in the bid package.
Should any defect in design, material, workmanship or operating characteristics develop
within the guarantee period, Vendor shall make all necessary alterations, modifications,
repairs and replacement free of charge within one month of notification/detection without
any commercial implication to the Owner.
2.2.2
Performance guarantee
2.2.2.1 General
a) Vendor shall guarantee the performance parameters of the plant as a whole to meet
the plant performance parameters as specified in the bid package.
b) The Vendor shall submit the detail test procedure and methods of computation of
results for review by the Owner/Consultant.
c) The guarantee parameters shall be adjusted to account for variation in ambient
conditions prevailing at site during performance testing. Necessary calculations,
correction curves shall have to be furnished by the Vendor for this purpose during
detail engineering which shall be final.
2.2.2.2
All necessary instruments required for measuring performance guarantee parameters

shall be either provided in the system or arranged by the Vendor. These instruments shall
be tested and calibrated from reputed test houses approved by Consultant/Owner and
calibration certificates shall be issued before putting them into use.
a) Vendor shall not be absolved of his responsibility of proving the performance
guarantee parameters at site, should owner be compelled to carry out some work on
the plant due to any emergency situation or safety requirement or due to inordinate
delay in taking an action on the part of the Vendor when notified.
b) The Vendor shall be solely responsible for proving the performance guarantee
parameters at site.
2.2.2.3
Performance Guarantee Parameters For VPSA Oxygen Plant:

Page 328 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
a)
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 3 of 5
Product Purity:
Vendor shall guarantee the Oxygen purity as specified below, with maximum negative
tolerance of instantaneous oxygen purity of 1%. However, the average Oxygen purity
shall not fall below 90% in any case over a continuous period of 72 hrs of PG test duration.
Oxygen purity (average)
:
90% (v) min.
b)
Capacity :
Vendor shall guarantee the Oxygen generation capacity of the VPSA Oxygen Plant as
specified below.
Oxygen:
182 TPD (as 100% of gaseous oxygen)
During performance guarantee test, Oxygen generation capacity shall be measured
keeping the Oxygen purity, Dew point of Oxygen & Battery limit pressure of Oxygen at
guaranteed level.
c)
Battery limit pressure of Oxygen gas: - Vendor shall guarantee the minimum pressure of
Oxygen gas as 1.5 kg/cm2 (g) at the package battery limit.
d)
Dew point of Oxygen Gas: - Vendor shall guarantee the dew point of Oxygen gas as
) 46 Deg C at atmospheric pressure.
e)
Electric Power Consumption: Guaranteed Electrical power requirement for VPSA Oxygen
Plant by Vendor to generate 182 TPD (as 100% of gaseous oxygen) Gaseous Oxygen
shall be considered for loading and PG test.
f)
Turn-Down Capacity: 50% of total Oxygen generation capacity without Oxygen venting.
Vendor shall demonstrate the turndown operation of the plant to the satisfaction of
Owner/Consultant for a period of minimum 8 hrs and during turndown operation all other
Process Guarantee parameters (Oxygen Purity, dew point of oxygen & Battery limit
pressure of Oxygen) shall be met.
2.3
(-
Repair/Rectification/Modification
In case the unit fails to meet the guaranteed parameters, the Vendor shall carryout,
necessary repair, rectification and modification within the time frame defined in the
contract or as mutually agreed with the Owner/Purchaser, at his own risk and cost to
establish the guaranteed parameters in the final performance test. All costs involved for
above activities i.e. supply of manpower, materials, consumables and machines etc. shall
be to Vendor's account.
Even after carrying out such works if the guaranteed performance parameters are not
met with, penalty shall be leviable as specified below for shortfall in guaranteed
parameters.
2.4
PENALTY
Price Reduction Due To Non-Fulfillment of Guaranteed Parameters
Price reduction shall be applicable in case of shortfall in product capacity and/or increase
in Electricity consumption. Any shortfall in the product purity shall make the plant liable
for rejection.
2.4.1 Price Reduction due to shortfall in product capacity :

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 4 of 5
For every 1% (or part there of) shortfall in Oxygen gas production (provided Oxygen
purity, Oxygen pressure at battery limit & Oxygen dew point are maintained as per
requirement), 1 % of the total contract price shall be deducted.
2.4.2
Price Reduction due to higher Electricity Consumption

For every 1% (or part there of) increase in Electricity consumption (total power of Air Blower,
Vacuum Pump & operating Reciprocating compressor), 1% of the order value shall be
deducted.
2.4.3
Vendor shall note that the total reduction in price and penalty on account of para 2.4.1 and
2.4.2 above will not exceed 10% (ten percent) of the order value.
2.4.4
No benefit shall be passed on to the VENDOR in case the guaranteed power consumption
demonstrated by him during performance guarantee run is lesser than the quoted figure in
bid.
2.5
REJECTION
The owner reserves the right to reject the VPSA Oxygen Plant Package under the following
conditions.
2.5.1
If average purity of Oxygen gas is below the specified level (i.e 90% (vol) minimum).
Maximum negative tolerance for instantaneous oxygen purity shall not exceed by 1% (vol).
2.5.2
If the Oxygen pressure at the package battery limit falls below specified value (i.e 1.5 kg/cm2
(g))
2.5.3
If the dew point of Oxygen gas is higher than (-)46 0C at atmospheric pressure.
2.5.4
If the Oxygen production capacity is short by more than 5% of specified guaranteed capacity.
2.5.5
If the total power consumption exceeds by 5 % of the guaranteed value indicated by vendor
in their bid.
2.6
LOADING FOR GUARANTEED POWER CONSUMPTION
2.6.1
Vendor shall furnish the guaranteed total Electrical power consumption per hour (for Air
Blower, Vacuum Pump & operating reciprocating compressor). The guaranteed power
consumption for guaranteed capacity, as mentioned in the offer by Vendor, shall be
considered for loading purposes for comparison with other offers.
Page 329 of 1744
The Differential Operating Cost (DOC) of the plant shall be loaded to the original Oxygen
plant cost quoted by the Vendor. The differential operating cost shall be calculated as per
the formula given below.
DOC
(PV - PL) X CP X 8000 X DF
Where;
DOC
Differential Operating Cost
PL
Lowest value of total power consumption per hour

(kWhr/hr) given by a technically acceptable vendor.
PV
Total power consumption per hour (kWhr/hr) as given

by the vendor.

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
CP
DF
DF
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-LP-4070 Rev.A
Page 5 of 5
Cost of Power = Rs. 8.1/ kWhr

Discounting factor for loading, Discounting factor (DF) is
defined as under :
n = k+1
[1 / {1+ (X/100)}n]
n=2
Number of operating years for which loading is to be done, i.e.,

20 Years
10.25 %
2.6.2
Loading on account of guaranteed power shall be limited to maximum 10% of quoted order
value.
2.6.3
Vendor shall refer Guaranteed Power Consumption format in Annexure-B of Technical

Checklist (A702-029-82-41-CL-4070) attached with TENDER.
Page 330 of 1744
Vendor shall submit the guaranteed power consumption along with the Price bid in the
format (Annexure-B of Technical Checklist A702-029-82-41-CL-4070) and submit the copy
of the same along with unpriced bid mentioning Guaranteed power consumption as
Quoted.
Page 331 of 1744

Document No.:
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE
A702-029-16-51-CF-4070 Rev A
Page 1 of 2
PROJECT ,BORL

(INSTRUMENTATION)
FOR
PROJECT
OWNER

BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders Signature and

Stamp
29.02.2016
ISSUED FOR TENDER
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Format No. EIL-1641-1924 Rev.1
KP
ASDB
SB
Prepared
Checked
Approved
by
by
by
Page 332 of 1744

Document No.:
(INSTRUMENTATION)
A702-029-16-51-CF-4070 Rev A
Page 2 of 2
PROJECT ,BORL
COMPLIANCE STATEMENT / QUERY
BIDDERS CONFIRMATION /
ANSWER
Please note that it is mandatory to furnish replies to

the technical queries listed below, without which
bidders offer will be considered as incomplete.
1
Please confirm categorical compliance to the scope

of work, job specifications various technical
specifications, drawings and documents, relevant
control & instrumentation specification in the bid
package. Also, confirm that all other equipment,
materials and work not explicitly mentioned but
nevertheless required to fulfill the functional
requirements of Revamp and capacity enhancement
project of BORL refinery shall be deemed to be
included in the scope of bidder with no additional cost
and time implication to the owner.
Confirm that the all instrumentation items, their

accessories etc. supplied shall be of one of the
approved makes given in the VENDOR LIST
attached with bid package.
Please confirm compliance to Drawings/ Documents

requirements.
Please confirm compliance to requirements of

mandatory spare parts, commissioning spares,
installed spares, operational & maintenance spares
etc.
Notes:
1. The Bidder shall indicate his reply in the space provided in the Technical Questionnaire. In
case space provided is not adequate, the reply may be furnished separately under suitably
numbered annexure / attachments duly referred against the comment / query.
2. The Compliance Statements / Queries are required to be categorically confirmed /
answered by the bidder and the completely filled in Tech questionnaire shall be submitted
together with the Bid.
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-TCL-4070-Rev. 0
Page 1 of 3
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

PROJECT
OWNER
BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED, BINA
PMC
ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
01.02.2016
ISSUED FOR BIDS
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 333 of 1744
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SI.
No
CONFIRMATION STATEMENT / QUERY
1.
Confirm that the scope of work shall be complied in all respects

as specified in the bid document. All equipments, materials and
work not explicitly mentioned but nevertheless required to fulfill
the functional requirements shall be deemed to be included in
the scope of bidder with no additional cost and time implication
to the owner.
2.
A detailed list of drawings / documents including design

calculations, design drawings, bar bending schedules (for RCC
works) and fabrication drawings (for structural steel works) &
structure wise quantity statement (showing anticipated, released
and balance quantities of concrete, structural steel and piles)
shall be submitted to Owner/ Owners representative for review.
The drawing list and quantity statement shall be updated every
month and submitted to Owner/ Owners representative.
3.
Confirm that all deliverables (document index /documents,

drawings/ specifications/ drawings for statutory approval, asbuilt drawings, list of sub vendors/authorized applicators for
specialized items / Monthly/Weekly report showing status of
submitted documents/ schedule of submission, category of
submitted documents, etc.) as elaborated in scope of work &
supply shall be submitted by the contractor.
4.
The design and drawings for each independent buildings /

structures shall be submitted by contractor in one lot so as to
facilitate an overall systematic review.
5.
The bulk MTO for Cement, Reinforcement bars (diameter wise)

and structural steel (section wise) shall be submitted to
Owner/Owners representative within 45 days from the date of
release of TOI/ LOI. It shall also be updated at 50% and 90%
stages of engineering progress and submitted to Owner/
Owners representative for information.
6.
Structural design and drawings for any structure/ building/

equipment foundation shall be submitted only after the
reference architectural drawings/ general arrangement
drawings, equipment data sheets, equipment layout vendor
drawings, etc. (on the basis of which structural design &
drawings are prepared) have been reviewed at least in Code2
by the concerned specialist of Owner/ Owners representative.
Copies of these reviewed reference documents shall also be
submitted along with structural design and drawings while
submitting them to Owner/ Owners representative for review.
7.
Page 2 of 3
BIDDERS
CONFIRMATION / ANSWER
Internationally accepted commercial software viz. STAADPRO,

COSMOS, GT STRUDL, NISA or equivalent are permitted for
analysis and design. In case software packages (commercially
available or in-house developed) other than listed above are
intended to be used for analysis and design, the same shall be
informed in writing to Owner/Owners representative. A
validation report consisting of calculations and relevant
computer files containing input and detailed output shall be
submitted by the Contractor. Only after getting written approval
from Owner/ Owners representative for the same, such
intended software can be used by the contractor for detailed
analysis and design.
Page 334 of 1744
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-TCL-4070-Rev.0
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
SI.
No
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
CONFIRMATION STATEMENT / QUERY
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-TCL-4070-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
BIDDERS
CONFIRMATION / ANSWER
General philosophy of designs of all the structures and

equipment foundations along with explanatory sketches and
basis of design / analysis shall be submitted and got reviewed
by Owner/ Owners representative before the contractor
proceeds with the final design and construction drawings.
Any deviation from the stipulations of the contract document, if
necessary, shall be sought in the specified format.
Please confirm that the area has been physically surveyed by
bidder and well acquainted with the area and collected relevant
site information.
Please note & confirm that all approaches (from main road
around unit battery limit) for construction, erection, maintenance,
emergency evacuation, fire fighting etc. are in bidders scope of
work.
Please note and confirm that required earth for filling and micrograding shall be arranged by the bidder. Borrow areas will be
identified by the contractor anywhere outside the Refinery
complex. Royalty etc. shall be borne by the contactor for
borrowing earth. Bidder shall also dispose surplus earth/ debris
etc. anywhere within the refinery complex.
All fire fighting equipments shall be as per BIS or equivalent and
acceptable to TAC. Confirm compliance.
Notes: 1. The Bidder shall indicate his reply in the space provided in the Technical confirmation. In case
space provided is not adequate, the reply may be furnished separately under suitably numbered
annexure/ attachments duly referred against the comment / query.
2. The confirmation statements/ Queries are required to be categorically confirmed/answered by the
bidder and the completely filled in Technical questionnaire shall be submitted together with the Bid.
Page 335 of 1744
Page 336 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
SCOPE OF SUPPLY / WORK

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 1 of 23

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT
JOB NO.
A702
MACHINERY DIVISION
A
Rev.
No
18/03/2016
Date
ISSUED WITH TENDER

Purpose
ANAND
PPP
PPP
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 337 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.0
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 2 of 23
SCOPE OF SUPPLY/WORK
Bidder shall bid for complete scope of supply/work on turnkey basis and agree to take
single point responsibility for the entire scope of the package.
1.1
Scope of supply
The scope of supply shall conform to P&ID (Doc No A702-79-41-29-1199) & Datasheet
for VPSA Oxygen Plant (Doc No A702-29-79-DS-1806) and shall include but not limited
to the following materials and supplies as per the specifications and drawings/
documents/standards enclosed and forming a part of the Tender.
Sl.
No.
1.
Item
Quantity
1 Set
VPSA Oxygen Plant (Tag No : 029-LZ-00-1006)

Two (2) Nos. chain (each of 91 TPD, as 100% of gaseous oxygen)
of VPSA oxygen plant with design capacity of 182 TPD (as 100% of
gaseous oxygen) & 90% min (vol.) purity of oxygen.
Each VPSA oxygen plant chain shall consist of the following major
items:
(i)
One (1) No. suction filter for air blower unit
(ii)
One (1) No. of Roots air blower mainly comprises of:
(iii)
One (1) No. electric motor
Non return valve at the outlet
Intercooler/aftercooler as required
One pair of adsorber vessels (one in adsorption and one in

regeneration) along with all accessories.
(iv) First fill of Adsorbents (Zeolite based Molecular Sieve)

(v)
Switchover valves, as required.
(vi) Online O2 analyzers in product gaseous oxygen line as per

instrumentation specification.
(vii) One (1) No. vacuum pump with separate electric motor along
with all accessories.
(viii) Silencers/sound attenuators as required. Equipment and
accessories for ventilation suitable for installation in Acoustic
proof building.
(ix) Venting arrangement for waste gases up to a safe height with
silencers.
(x)
Structural steel skid supports for various equipment/piping.
(xi) Necessary interlocks.

(xii) Foundation bolts & nuts and washers for all the equipments
and skids.
(xiii) Lifting lugs and earthing lugs.
(xiv) Insulation (both thermal and acoustic insulation) of Equipment
and Piping wherever required. Bidder shall also supply extra
10% of insulation material to take care of field joints and
damage during transportation.
Page 338 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sl.
No.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 3 of 23
Item
Quantity
(xv) All inter connecting piping, flanges, gaskets, bolts and nuts
and all type of structural supports for all piping as elaborated in
piping specifications. All the piping connections/ tie in points at
the package battery limit shall be terminated with flanged
connection.
2.
(i) One (1) No. buffer vessel of required capacity common for both
chains to meet the continuous demand of O2 gas.
(ii) Two (2) Nos. (1working+1standby) Reciprocating Oxygen
compressor with electric motor drive and other accessories viz.
pulsation damper, intercooler, after cooler etc. as required,
common for both chains.
3.
RCC building with acoustic proof lining for housing air blower,
vacuum pump, valve skid etc.
Lot
Equipment and accessories for ventilation, as required, suitable for

installation in Acoustic proof building.
4.
5.
Structural shed with roof and side sheeting etc. for housing
Reciprocating oxygen compressors. Necessary barricading shall
also be done to avoid unauthorized access
Lot
Lot
Material handling facilities:

1 No. EOT crane of adequate capacity for maintenance of air
blower, vacuum pumps, valves heat exchangers etc in the RCC
building.
1 No. EOT crane of adequate capacity for maintenance of the
oxygen compressors in structural shed.
1 No. Electric hoist with monorail for maintenance of ventilation
blowers in blower room
Suitable Material handling facilities viz. Trolley mounted Chain
pulley block, Electric Hoist, etc. shall also be provided for the
maintenance of the EOT cranes and other equipments, wherever
required
6.
7.
8.
9.
Foundation for all equipment including piling, supports complete with

grouting, foundation bolts, nuts, washers etc.
Lot
Surface preparation and painting of equipment as per attached

Painting specification (Doc.No.A702-000-79-PLS-01) for highly
corrosive industrial environment.
All supporting structures for equipment, tanks, pipe racks, cable
racks, platforms pipe supports etc.
Access platforms, ladders, staircases for equipment, machinery,
instruments and valves for operation and maintenance including the
Connecting platform for all PSA vessels top manholes for easy
maintenance.
Page 339 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sl.
No.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 4 of 23
Item
Quantity
First fill of desiccants and replenishment of any loss of these during

commissioning.
First fill including flushing fluid for all hydraulic oils (for power packs)
and lubricating oils, greases etc. and replenishment of any loss of
these during commissioning.
15.
All rotating equipment as per ANNEXURE-1 of this document

Lot
All electricals as per ANNEXURE-2 of this document
Lot
All instrumentation and control as per ANNEXURE-3 of this Lot
document.
All piping as per ANNEXURE-4 of this document.
Lot
16.
All civil & structurals as per ANNEXURE-5 of this document.
17.
Vendor shall carry-out HAZOP study for the complete VPSA oxygen Lot
Plant system and submit final HAZOP report for records. Package
vendor shall also participate in HAZOP review meeting for VPSA
Oxygen plant conducted at Owner/EIL office at New Delhi. Vendor
shall also provide any hardware/software required based on the
observations/ recommendation made by HAZOP committee without
any commercial implication. The same shall be justified, in case not
required as per Vendors proven experience.
18.
3D modeling of complete plant. Refer Annexure-3, Annexure-4 & Lot

Annexure-5 of this document.
19.
Special tools and tackles for erection and start up of equipment and
for operation and maintenance. Prices for the same shall be included
in the Lump Sum price quoted.
Lot
20.
Commissioning spares, as required. Prices for the same shall be

included in the Lump Sum price quoted.
Lot
21.
Mandatory spares as per list provided in Cl. No 9.3 of Job Lot

Specification for VPSA oxygen Plant (Doc. No A702-029-82-41-SP4070). Also refer Mandatory spares defined in Mandatory spare parts
(Electrical), Doc. No. A702-029-16-50-MS-4070 and Mandatory
spare (Instrumentation), Doc No: A702-029-16-51-SL-4070 shall be
supplied by Vendor. Prices for the same shall be included in the
Lump Sum price quoted.
22.
Quotation for recommended spares for two years normal operation Lot
and maintenance for complete package. Itemized price list of 2 years
spares along with recommended quantity for complete package
including mechanical, electrical & instrumentation items to be
submitted along with the bid. Owner shall order these spares
separately.
Drawings and Documents as per Vendor Data Requirement (Refer Lot
document A702-029-82-41-VR-4070). Also refer Electrical VDR (Doc.
No A702-029-16-50-VR-4070), Instrumentation VDR (Doc. No A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070) & Piping VDR (Doc. No.-A702-029-1643-VDR-4070).
Any other equipment, materials and supplies within the Battery Limits
so as to make the system complete in all respect for its safe and
efficient operation. Any additional items or feature required, during
23.
24.
Lot
Page 340 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sl.
No.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 5 of 23
Item
Quantity
detail engineering for the completeness and trouble-free performance

of the system shall be included in the Package Vendors scope
without any price implications, as long as system performance &
technical requirements within the battery limits of the plant as defined
under this specification are kept unchanged.
1.2
Scope of Services
Vendors scope of services shall include, but not limited to the following.
1.2.1
Design, engineering and manufacturing.
1.2.2
Procurement of equipment and materials.
1.2.3
Fabrication, assembly, inspection and testing at works.
1.2.4
Surface preparation, protective coating and painting, including supply of paint at works.
1.2.5
Packing and Supply.
1.2.6
Receipt, unloading, storage and handling at site.
1.2.7
Establishment and maintaining the site office in connection with the site work.
1.2.8
All Civil works connected with Construction of Building, pavement, drainage facilities,
cables or pipe trenches, foundation, structural steel works, grouting etc; Piling (if required)
and soil treatment for the foundation. (Refer Annexure-5 of this document for details)
1.2.9
Design and construction of RCC foundations.
1.2.10
Erection of VPSA oxygen Plant package. The same shall be carried out to the satisfaction
of the purchaser (or his authorised representative).
1.2.11
Filling up of Lubricants, desiccants etc.
1.2.12
Commissioning and Performance guarantee test run of VPSA oxygen Plant package.
1.2.13
Touch-up/ repair painting, painting at site including supply of paint.
1.2.14
On-site training at project site to Owners personnel for operation and maintenance.
Bidder shall impart training to Owners operating and maintenance personnel at site for the
offered VPSA oxygen plant including all electrical, instrumentation. The cost towards these
training activities shall be included in the basic cost of the package. Minimum no. of Client
personnel shall be considered as: 10 operators and 4 engineers from Mechanical, Electrical
& Instrumentation. Also refer Annexure -3 of this document.
1.2.15
Preparation and submission of drawings and documents as specified under Vendor Data
Requirement.
1.2.16
Participation of vendor in the HAZOP study to be conducted on the offered VPSA oxygen
Plant (as part of utility system of entire complex) at Engineers India Bhawan (EIB), New
Delhi and incorporation of HAZOP recommendations in the P&ID/System. Per Diem rate for
the above participation shall be indicated by the bidder along with the bid. Total Four (2)
man-days will be considered for evaluation of bids/price comparison.
1.2.17
Third party inspection as per commercial part of TENDER.
1.2.18
Vendor shall obtain all applicable statutory clearances, permits from local, statutory and
other bodies.
1.2.19
Disposal of all excavated matters and cleaning up of the entire area.
1.2.20
Electrical works as per Annexure 2 of this document.
1.2.21
Instrumentation works as per Annexure 3 of this document.
Page 341 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.2.22
Piping works as per Annexure -4 of this document.
1.2.23
Structural works as per Annexure 5 of this document.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 6 of 23
1.3
Exclusions
1.3.1
The following items shall be provided by the purchaser and are excluded from
Vendors scope:
a) Battery Limit isolation valves and downstream flanges.
b) All work outside plant battery limit.
c) Supply of utilities like electric power, service water, cooling water, etc. are
excluded from Vendors scope. However, utilities will be supplied at single point at
battery limit. Further distribution shall be in vendors scope (also refer Annexure-2
for more details).
NOTE: Anything, which is not mentioned in exclusion within the plant battery limit shall be in the
scope of the contractor.
2.0
BATTERY LIMIT
Bidder must furnish dimensioned preliminary plant and equipment layout, along with bid,
taking care of available space.
i.
All battery limit piping shall have flange connection. Flanges rating shall be as per P&ID,
EIL-PMS (Doc No. A702-6-44-0005-4070).
ii.
Operating platforms shall be provided for operation of B/L isolation valves by Package
Vendor.
iii.
Bidder shall supply battery limit valve for each line with all gaskets and fastener.
Page 342 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 7 of 23
ANNEXURE-1 Details of scope of Supply/Work Rotating Equipment

Vendor shall furnish all equipment, drivers, auxiliary systems, instruments, controls and safety
devices as per the enquiry document.
Vendor's scope of supply for rotating equipment items shall include but not be limited to the following
for VSPA package required for Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project of BORL Refinery:
Sr. No.
Description
1.0
Oxygen Compressor (Reciprocating Type)

(Refer also Eqpt. data sheets and related specifications for full details)
1.1
Horizontal Balanced Opposed Electric Motor Driven Reciprocating Compressor along with
all its accessories and auxiliaries
Rigid Flanged Coupling
All suction and discharge volume bottle/pulsation dampeners for each stage
Relief Valves at discharge of each stage
Non Return Valve, compressor discharge valve type, at final stage discharge
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
Frame Lube oil System (console type) for the compressor and driver motor (if force feed
lubrication is required for motor) as per API 618
Dedicated CW console for Closed Circuit Cooling water system for the compressor for
cooling of cylinders and packing (as per API-618), including all piping and fittings for
cylinder jackets and Packings/Heat Exchangers.
Packing / Distance piece vent, drain and purging system
Capacity Control system as per P&ID
Machine Monitoring System for continuous monitoring of machine vibration, temperatures,
rod drop etc
All other necessary mechanical, electrical, instrumentation & controls items for safe,
smooth and efficient operation of complete Compressor Train
Wet/Liquid Ring Vacuum Pump (As Applicable)
Vacuum Pump- electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries
Coupling (non-lubricated, flexible metallic type) with spacer and with non sparking guard.
Shaft sealing system (DE / NDE Side) complete with skid mounted seal flushing system,
associated instrumentation & controls and piping for all pumps/compressors.
Suitable automatic spillback/bypass arrangement if required to meet the turndown
requirement.
Relief valve at discharge outlet
Separator along all its accessories
Water Cooler along all its accessories
Recirculation Pump electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries, if
required
Fabricated Steel Base Plate: Common for Compressor, Pump, separator and cooler
smooth and efficient operation of complete Vacuum Pump Unit
Dry Vacuum Pump (As applicable)
Vacuum Pump- electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries
Coupling (non-lubricated, flexible metallic type) with spacer and with non sparking guard.
Page 343 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Sr. No.
3.4
3.5
3.6
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.10
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 8 of 23
Description
associated instrumentation & controls and piping
Relief valve at discharge outlet
Fabricated Steel Base Plate: Common for Pump & driver
smooth and efficient operation of complete Vacuum Pump Unit
Blower
Blower electric motor driven along with all its accessories and auxiliaries
Couplings (Flexible) and non sparking Guard
associated instrumentation & controls and piping
Inlet and Exhaust Silencer.
Inlet and outlet Bellows (SS).
Acoustic Housing for complete Blower/Motor Package.(if Required)
Pressure Relief valve.
Vibration Isolators for the complete Package.
smooth and efficient operation of complete Blower Package
Page 344 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 9 of 23
ANNEXURE-2 Details of scope of Supply/Work Electrical

1.0
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1
Vendors scope, shall include sizing, design, engineering, manufacturing, supply, testing at
manufacturers works, packing and delivery at site of all the electrical equipment viz. motors,
local control panels etc. including supply of all commissioning spares, special tools & tackles
as per the specifications and data sheets enclosed with the requisition. The major electrical
equipment for package includes:
Motors as per enclosed data sheet.

Local Control Panel
Local control station (LCS) for motors away from LCP
Other misc. Electrical consumers (Heaters etc., as required) for VPSA Oxygen Plant.
All interconnecting cabling (including supply of cables) between the equipments within the
package battery limits, if any.
Earthing of electrical equipments within the plant and provision/ connections for bonding
with main plant earth grid.
Vendor shall supply cable glands and tinned Cu / Al lugs for equipment supplied by them.
1.2
Installation, testing & commissioning at site of the electrical items is included in vendors
scope. Vendors scope shall also include providing all specialised tools & tackles / instruments
required for the above service.
1.3
Scope of 3D modelling shall be as specified elsewhere in the Tender and same shall be in
accordance with EIL spec. 8-76-0022
1.4
Bidder shall furnish the following electrical layout drawings / documents post bid during
detailed engineering :
i) Lighting Layout drawing and Bill of Material
ii) Earthing Layout drawing and Bill of Material
iii) Lightning Protection layout drawing and Bill of Material
2.0
Exclusions
a) Supply of 6.6kV feeders for all HV Motor.

b) Supply of 415V feeders for auxiliary motors/ Lube oil heater/ other misc electrical loads (as
applicable).
c) Supply and laying of all power, control, space heater & signal cables from field to Substation /
Control room.
Page 345 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 10 of 23
Annexure-3: Details of scope of Supply/Work Instrumentation

1. INSTRUMENTATION
1.1
Scope of Design & Engineering
Design and detailed engineering including residual
engineering (Note-1) of instrumentation and controls
of VPSA Oxygen Plant Package based on P&IDs (to
be developed by Bidder) and other technical
requirements described in various documents
attached with the Tender.
This shall include detailed engineering including
preparation of engineering drawings/ documents,
specification data sheets, sizing, selection of
materials, review of vendor drawings / documents for
all supply items and preparation of engineering
drawings/ documents for PLC and DCS.
1.1.1
All type of field instruments including local gauge
board mounted instruments, local panel mounted
instruments, required to complete the job in all
respect.
1.1.2
Local Panels
1.1.3
Local gauge boards (if required)
1.1.4
Machine Monitoring System
1.1.5
Separate PLC for VPSA Oxygen Plant Package
system located in SRR-3(Satellite rack room -3). All
required hardware, software, serial interface card,
inter-panel wiring and any services required from
DCS/PLC vendor to establish the communication
between package PLC and DCS is in bidder scope.
1.1.6
DCS and main plant PLC
1.2
Instrumentation and control
Scope of Procurement / Supply
1.2.1
Supply of all items related to instrumentation and
control system for VPSA Oxygen Plant Package as
per final approved P&IDs for VPSA Oxygen Plant
Package to be developed by bidder and technical
specification attached elsewhere in the Tender and as
recommended by bidder. The scope of supply shall
include but not limited to following:
1.2.2
All type of field instruments as per scope P&ID
including local gauge board mounted instruments,
local panel mounted instruments, required to complete
the job in all respect.
1.2.3
Local control panels with all instruments and
accessories duly mounted on it.
1.2.4
Local gauge boards with all instruments and
accessories duly mounted on it.
1.2.5
PLC system along with necessary hardware
(marshalling racks, relay cabinets, barriers etc) and
software. All additional hardware, software, to
establish two way serial communications between
purchasers DCS and bidder supplied PLC system.
1.2.6
PLC Operator cum Engineering Station with Laser Jet
Printer in SRR-3.
Bidder
Purchaser
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 346 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.2.7
1.2.7.1
1.2.7.2
1.2.7.3
1.2.7.4
1.2.7.5
1.2.7.6
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.5
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
1.6.7
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 11 of 23
Machine Monitoring System (Bentrly Nevada 3500

or Shinkawa VM7 series)(Note-7)
Field mounted sensors like vibration, axial
displacement, key phasor and temperature probes
etc.
Proximitors /junction boxes/ GI conduits for special
cables
upto
junction
boxes
for
vibration/
temperature/speed sensors in field
Monitors/ racks located in Satellite Rack Room#3
Panel/ cabinet for monitors/ rack in Satellite Rack
Room including terminals, barriers, I/O cards etc., duly
mounted on panel/ cabinet
MMS Display unit mounted in local panel in field
Laptop PC for the configuration of MMS system with
all required configuration software and hardware
including interconnecting serial communication cables,
adaptors and all other accessories.
All installation materials like sample probe along with
interconnecting tubes and calibration unit for
analyzers.
Alarms, signals & power Junction boxes for
following:
For interconnection between field instruments and
local control panel / Gauge boards (if applicable)
For interconnection between Field / Local Panel and
SRR-3.
Three way junction boxes in field for connection to
loop powered indicators wherever required.
Serial links between field & SRR-3 (if applicable).
For distribution of power to various instruments / local
panel.
Power distribution boards for distribution of 110 VAC
UPS and 240 VAC Non-UPS to various bidder
supplied equipments in SRR-3 (like PLC based control
system, Operator cum Engineering station,MMS,
printer, etc.) and Field (instruments and local panel).
Cables (signal, alarm, thermocouple extension,
RTD, power supply, serial communication) for
following:
Between individual instruments and junction boxes
mounted in field.
Between field instruments and local panel.
Multipair cables between junction boxes/local panels
and bidder supplied PLC at SRR-3
All interconnection TCP/IP cables with all required
accessories like Network Switch between PLC and
Operator cum Engineering station.
Power supply cables between power distribution
boards provided by Bidder to various instruments,
panels and accessories provided by bidder.
Between bidder supplied PLC and purchasers DCS
for serial data interface
Between bidder supplied PLC, and purchasers
DCS/PLC for hardwired signals.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Note-6)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 347 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.6.8
1.6.9
1.6.10
1.6.11
1.6.12
1.7
1.8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.8.7
1.8.8
1.8.9
1.8.10
1.8.11
1.8.12
1.8.13
1.8.14
1.8.15
1.8.16
1.8.17
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 12 of 23
Between field mounted vibration and temperature

sensors/transmitters/JBs of MMS and MMS
monitor/racks in SRR-3
Between MMS cabinets and VPSA package PLC in
SRR-3.
Between MMS monitors and purchasers DCS for
serial data interface
Serial cable between MMS system monitors/ racks in
Satellite Rack Room-3 and MMS Display mounted in
local panel at field.
Any other special cables from field /local panels to
SRR-3 (if applicable)
Universal type hand held configurator (2 nos.) for
Smart transmitters and Control valve positioners.
Installation & Erection Materials for skid and non
skid instruments:
All installation and erection materials such as impulse
tubes, pipes, valves, fittings, manifolds etc.
Instrument stanchions, supports and all types of
consumables and accessories for mounting all bidder
supplied instruments and accessories, local panel,
gauge boards etc.
Cable glands, and PVC sleeves (cable shrouds) for
different types of cables.
Cable trays (perforated trays, angle trays) from
instruments to junction boxes for instruments, along
with supports within package battery limit.
Cable trays/ Cable Ducts/ RCC Cable Trench
(wherever required) for cable laying from package
battery limit to Main cable duct.
GI/ copper earthing strip,earthing lugs and & earthing
cables for earthing of all instrumentation items
including junction boxes, field instruments, local panel
etc. to earthing pits.
Furniture for bidder supplied control system in SRR-3
Pre-fabricated FRP Canopies for field mounted
electronic/ electrical instruments
Sunshield/ weather hood for local panel
All piping and pipe fittings, tubes and tube fittings for
instrument air supply distribution and steam tracing
(wherever applicable) for instruments supplied by
bidder.
Insulation and painting of instruments and impulse
lines, as applicable, in line with insulation and painting
specifications attached elsewhere in Tender.
Installation material for junction boxes and power
distribution boards.
Any other installation material required for installation
and commissioning of various instruments and
systems supplied by Bidder.
Start-up & Commissioning spares
Installed spares
Consumable spares for 6 months
Mandatory spares
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Page 348 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
1.8.18
1.8.19
1.8.20
1.8.21
1.9
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.10
1.10.1
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.10.4
1.10.5
1.10.6
1.10.7
1.10.8
1.10.9
1.10.10
1.11
1.12
1.12.1
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 13 of 23
2 years operational spares (to be quoted separately)

Supply of drawings and documents as listed in Vendor
Data Requirement
Any special tools or tackles, if required, for
instrumentation
Any additional instrument required in the opinion of
bidder for meeting functional requirements, safe and
efficient operation, which is not listed specifically in
this document.
Factory testing & calibration
Carrying out/ witnessing shop testing and calibration
of all instruments as per approved Inspection Test
Plan / FAT procedure.
Factory acceptance test for PLC and MMS
Installation, field calibration/ testing, Loop
checking, pre-commissioning and commissioning
Installation of all Field instruments, junction boxes and
accessories in bidders scope of supply
Installation of Local panel/local gauge board supplied
by bidder (as applicable)
Installation of Instrument cable trays within package
battery limit.
Laying & Termination of all cables supplied by bidder
including special cables in package unit.
Laying & Termination of all cables from package
battery limit to bidder supplied PLC and MMS at SRR3.
Instrument air distribution for all bidder supplied
instruments as required with in package battery limit.
Steam tracing and insulation of instrument impulse
lines as applicable for all Bidder supplied instruments.
Installation of power distribution boards with in
package battery limit.
Instrument
Cable
tray/duct/trench
(wherever
applicable) outside package battery limit.
Supervision of installation, hookups, testing and
commissioning of PLC and MMS supplied by bidder.
Coordination:
Coordination with
Purchaser,
Purchaser DCS vendor
Purchasers instrumentation erection contractor
for successful commissioning of the VPSA Oxygen
Plant Package Unit.
Training:
Programmable Logic Controller
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(Note-2)
Yes
At site:
Yes
3 days for each batch
(2 batches, 4 persons in each batch)
The training shall include detail operation, configuration, modification,
troubleshooting, preventive/ breakdown maintenance etc. as minimum.
Page 349 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 14 of 23
Notes:
1. Residual engineering includes instrument sizing, Thermowell Wake frequency calculation, utility
consumption, specifying derived data in process data sheets, type and material selection of
instruments wherever required. Residual engineering shall also include actual transfer/
implementation of the information provided in the form of notes in P&ID and instrument data
sheets/ equipment data sheets and other documents provided in bid.
2. Bidder shall provide required assistance to Purchasers instrumentation erection contractor, DCS
vendor during interface between bidders supplied PLC based control system &MMS and
Purchasers DCS.
3. EIL/Owner shall witness testing of any or all items at various stages during manufacture and/or
final stage before shipment as per approved Inspection Test Plan. All system oriented items shall
undergo factory testing and integrated factory acceptance test. Testing shall be carried out as per
approved procedure. No such item shall leave manufacturers works without factory acceptance
test.
4. Any activity specifically not listed in this document, does not absolve the vendor of their
responsibility to include such activities in their scope of work, which otherwise is necessary, to
complete instrumentation work for VPSA Oxygen Plant Package unit. All such activities shall be
carried out by the vendor without any implication. Instrument Job Specification shall be read in
conjunction with scope of work.
5. Any items not covered in this section, which form part of the vendors standard package and are
required for ease of operation, control safety and interlock requirement shall be supplied by
Bidder without any implication.
6. Multipair cables used by purchaser will be 12 pair and 6 pair types only. Bidder shall select
junction boxes and panel cable entries accordingly.
7. Machine monitoring shall be provided for reciprocating gas compressors (driver rating
>=1600KW).For other items e.g. Air blower and vacuum pump, vibration and temperature
monitoring shall be as per manufacturer standard. In case, vibration and temperature monitoring
signals for these other items are not connected to bidders MMS, the same shall be connected to
bidders package PLC.
Page 350 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 15 of 23
Annexure-4: Details of scope of Supply/Work Piping

1.
All piping in Vendors scope, the Design, Engineering, Fabrication, Inspection & Testing shall
be designed as per ASME B 31.3 and steam & condensate, which shall meet the
requirements of Indian boiler regulation (IBR).
2.
Vendor shall obtain statutory approval from IBR authority for IBR lines coming under his
scope.
3.
Refer P&ID No. A702-79-41-99-1199, Rev.0 and Piping battery limit orientation (piping scope
drawing) for VPSA Oxygen Plant (A702-029-16-43-SK-4070, Rev.A) for scope of work.
4.
The entire package shall consist of various skids of different sizes and there shall be only one
battery limit for the entire skid as per Scope Drawing VPSA Oxygen Plant (Doc. No.- A702029-16-43-SK-4070) and skid layout shall be submitted to OWNER/EIL for review.
5.
Vendor shall note that OWNER/ EIL reserves the right to alter the sequence of lines at battery
limit during engineering design and drawing review and the contractor shall be bound to follow
the changed sequence and location of battery limit interface. No extra claims raised by
Vendor or any extension of time schedule for project completion shall be entertained by
OWNER/EIL on account of the above modification.
6.
All companion flanges along with gaskets and nuts & bolts/studs shall be in bidders scope of
supply and shall be as per attached Piping Material Specification (doc. No.-A702-6-44-00054070).
7.
All other auxilliary systems and drain piping shall be in vendors scope.
8.
Drain piping for CBD, OWS & Condensate shall be joined together in a separate common
manifold to terminate at single point locations for CBD, OWS & Condensate respectively.
These points shall be minimized. CBD points shall generally be 2 and at EL 100100 buttwelded connection. OWS & Condensate shall be funnel points. Vendor shall terminate OWS
& Condensate piping at EL 100050.
9.
Elevation of bottom of piping at grade shall be 600 mm.
10.
Minimum elevation of overhead piping shall be such that a clear gap of 2.2 M headroom is
available below pipe/insulation/supports.
11.
Minimum height of equipment foundations shall be 300 mm from finished grade level.
12.
All open vents to atmosphere shall be vented to safe locations at least 3 M above nearest
operating floor or platform located within a radius of 6 M for steam and 8 M for
hydrocarbon/toxic discharge.
13.
Hydrostatic test, leak test, Non destructive Examination shall be carried out by vendor as per
applicable piping design codes.
14.
Hydrostatic vents and drains shall be provided at High points and Low points respectively as
per approved PMS.
15.
16.
All Bare pipes of size 14 and above shall be supported with corrosion pad.
Adequate space shall be provided for removal of equipment components for routine
maintenance.
Page 351 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 16 of 23
17.
Vendor shall ensure that required operation & maintenance platforms and access are
provided and also ensure that no interference with Owners piping while routing the lines
under their scope.
18.
All instruments and valves requiring attention during normal operation shall be conveniently
operable.
19.
Piping system shall be adequately flexible to cater for thermal expansion/ contraction under
start-up, operating and shut down conditions. Vendor shall carry out the flexibility analysis of
the piping systems as applicable pertaining to vendor scope using CAESAR-II software
package and ensure & confirm that all lines are safe in Design/Operating conditions etc.
20.
All lines shall be anchored at Vendor battery limit (Vendor Scope). Anchor loads shall be
furnished to OWNER/EIL. Provisions shall be kept for loads on account of purchaser piping at
these anchor points.
21.
Battery limit isolation valves along with drains/vents and platform arrangements required for
access of valves is in Vendors scope.
22.
The job piping materials specification as applicable to incoming and outgoing lines is provided
as doc no. A702-6-44-0005-4070. Vendor shall follow these piping classes as shown in
P&IDs. If any other Piping Material Specification is applicable same shall be given to the
successful bidder post order stage. Basic details for valves are provided in the Piping Material
Specification. Detail Valve material specification (A702-6-44-0006-4070) is also attached with
TENDER.
23.
All other incidental / auxiliary / ancillary / accessory or any enabling work / materials not
specifically mentioned in the specifications but necessary for the execution and completion of
work shall be in the scope of the vendor..
24.
Complete engineering, supply of materials & pre fabricated spools, instruments, supervision,
insulation & painting etc., up to battery limit is in VPSA Oxygen Plant Vendors scope.
25.
All piping general arrangement drawings, battery limit tie-in drawing shall be submitted to
OWNER/EIL for review.
26.
All material shall be procured from OWNER/ EIL approved Vendor.
27.
Painting and insulation wherever required shall be done as per respective job specifications.
28.
3D model of entire skid shall be submitted to BORL/EIL by vendor for review purpose. 3D
modelling to be done through PDMS VERSION 12.1 SP4 for the entire package as per 3D
modelling specification (Doc. No. A702-029-16-43-DP-4070).
29.
Vendor to submit General Arrangement Drawings (GADs) generated from 3-D model (PDMS)
of all the piping coming under vendor scope.
30.
Design and supply of all pipe supports and the supporting attachments/materials to the pipe
are in vendors scope of supply.
31.
Vendor to complete the Package and comply with the specifications, standards and drawingss
as per list of attachments
Page 352 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 17 of 23
Annexure-5: Details of scope of Supply/Work Structural

ARCHITECTURAL
1. General
The scope of architectural works under this contract shall include design, detailed engineering,
procurement, supply and construction of all relevant works as per specifications enclosed with the bid
document.
Scope of work by the Contractor shall consist of Architectural design & detail engineering including
preparation of Architectural drawings, construction including construction supervision & supply of all
materials, labour, tools & tackles etc., obtaining approvals from Statutory Authorities, supply of
deliverables like drawings, documents, preparation of As-built drawings etc and co-ordination with
EIL & the Owner etc. all complete for the following buildings:
RCC building for housing blowers, vacuum pumps etc
The building shall be RCC frame structure with brick masonry wall and RCC roof (or sloping steel
roof with precoated galvalume steel sheeting as per clients requirement) and shall comprise of
areas for housing blowers, vaccum pumps, loading/unloading area etc as per functional requirement.
Contractor shall design and construct the building conforming to all bid requirements and standard/
codal requirements as governing.
Structural shed is required for housing reciprocating compressor
All sheds shall be steel structure, precoated galvalume steel sheet roofing and side cladding.
Suitable detail engineering layout as per functional requirement of these buildings shall be prepared
and submitted by the contractor.
Any other Building / Shed as required for functional operation of the VPSA Oxygen
Package
All buildings shall be RCC frame structure with brick masonry wall and RCC roof (or sloping steel
roof as per clients requirement)
All sheds shall be Steel structure, precoated galvalume steel sheet roofing and side cladding.
2. Detail Engineering
Detail Engineering shall be based on "Architectural design basis" and approved preliminary
drawings. The Contractor shall prepare construction drawings and submit the same to Owner/PMC
for review/ approval. The requirement of deliverables by the Contractor for detail engineering is
indicated elsewhere.
3. Construction
The Contractor in strict conformity with Owner/PMC reviewed/approved construction drawings, using
materials as per Specifications, Standards & List of Approved Manufacturers as attached in the
Tender Documents shall carry out construction including construction supervision. Construction shall
include supply of all materials, labours, plants, tools & tackles by the Contractor unless specifically
mentioned elsewhere in the Tender Document.
4. Statutory Approvals
The Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals from statutory authorities such as Factory
Inspector, Local Municipal or Development Authorities as applicable for the design and construction.
The Contractor shall also prepare all drawings, documents as required for obtaining such approvals
Page 353 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 18 of 23
and perform necessary submissions to the authority concerned. Any changes/ modifications etc. in
design/construction required for obtaining such approvals shall also be done by the Contractor
without any time & cost implication to the Owner or PMC.
5. Scope of Supply
Owners Scope of Supply : NIL
Contractors Scope of Supply:
All architectural materials (consumables/ non-consumables) required for satisfactory completion of
the job shall be supplied by the contractor.
6. Deliverables by the Contractor
Drawings / Documents Required after Award of contract
The Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule of submission of deliverables as indicated herewith
for review by Owner/PMC as per agreed schedule. Such a schedule shall be made in line with the
overall time schedule indicated elsewhere in the Tender Documents. Submission of all deliverables
shall be as per the said schedule as reviewed by Owner/PMC.
All deliverables shall be prepared using Computer software and shall be complete in all respects
including correct titles indicating Owner, Consultant, Contractor, Project name, PMC Job No., Dates,
Issues, Revisions and signatures of Performer, Checker & Approver of the Contractor.
Incomplete, unsigned & unchecked Documents/ Drawings shall not be accepted and shall be
returned.
All revisions shall be clearly pointed out clouded for easy identification/ review.
All deliverables shall be submitted in requisite number of prints as per methodology mentioned
elsewhere in the Tender Documents.
Deliverables by the Contractor shall be as listed herewith.
7. Drawings
A.
Preliminary Architectural Drawings of the buildings in accordance with bid indicating
Plans, Sections & Elevations & Architectural treatment. Such preliminary drawings shall be prepared
after finalisation of sizes & layout of the required spaces/ areas/ rooms and review of the same by the
originating department of PMC.
B.
Construction drawings of all the Buildings shall be prepared incorporating comments etc. on
the preliminary Drawings.
Construction Drawings shall contain the followings.
Plan of all levels, Terrace Plan, Key Plan.

Sections as required for complete understanding of the Design & Construction.
Elevations of all sides.
Door/Window details.
False ceiling details & layouts.
Schedule of Architectural Finishes.
Architectural details as required.
Page 354 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 19 of 23
Any other Dwg as required for complete understanding of the Design & Construction.
Drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD software of latest (at the time of floating the Tender)
version.
Drawings shall be prepared in 1:100 or 1:50 scale. For Construction details, Door Window Details the
scale shall be 1:20 to 25. For key plans larger but legible scale may be used.
The Contractor shall prepare & submit specifications of materials etc., which are not covered or
attached in the Tender Documents for review by Owner/PMC.
8. Documents/ Drawings for Statutory Approval
The Contractor shall prepare & submit Documents/Drawings for Statutory Approval in accordance
with the statutory requirement for Information/Record of Owner/PMC.
9. As Built Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare & submit As-built drawings both in requisite no. of hard prints as well as
in form of computer files for Information/Record of Owner/PMC.
10. List of Sub- vendors/ authorised applicators for specialised items
List of Approved Manufacturers of Architectural / Building Products LL -1649-0401
Rev 0
11. Review of the Contractor's Drawings/Documents

Drawings/ Documents submitted by the Contractor shall be reviewed by Owner/PMC within agreed
upon time schedule.
It shall be Owner/ PMC's right to review any/ all or none of the Drawings/ Documents submitted by
the Contractor.
Review by Owner/ PMC shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for correct Design,
Engineering and Construction. The sole responsibility of the correctness of Design, Engineering &
Construction shall lie with the Contractor irrespective of the fact that the Drawings/Documents
submitted are reviewed or not reviewed by Owner/PMC. The Contractor shall correct all faulty design
& construction detected at any stage of work without any cost & time implication to PMC or the
Owner.
Following Parameters of Design & Drawings shall not be reviewed.
A.
Adequacy of provisions (in terms of spaces, services & utilities) and space/ area/ Room sizes
for Plant Buildings or Plant Areas in other Buildings. The Contractor shall ensure correctness of such
provisions vis--vis Owner/ PMC reviewed/ approved G.A. drawings & submit Architectural dwgs only
after approval/ review of such provisions by concerned deptt. of PMC.
B.
Correctness of Drawings in terms of dimensions, matching of Plan, Elevation, Section, etc.
These parameters may be reviewed at random only.
C.
Location, Co-ordinates, Orientation & Road/Ground/Pavement levels. The Contractor shall
ensure correctness of these vis--vis EIL reviewed/approved G.A. drawings.
Page 355 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 20 of 23
STRUCTURAL
1. Design, detailing, supply and construction of substructure & superstructure for the following
buildings/sheds/structures mentioned below.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
Housing blower, Vacuum pump house.

Housing reciprocating compressor shed etc.
Any other Building / Shed as required for functional operation of the VPSA Oxygen Package
Pipe Racks & pipe supports etc.
2. Design, detailing, supply and construction of equipment (Both static and vibratory) foundations
such as pump, tank and any other auxiliary equipment etc.
3. Adequacy check of existing foundation & superstructure and strengthening of the same if
required, wherever existing structure is used. Design, detailing, supply and construction of the
same is in the scope of contractor.
4. Design, detailing, supply and construction of foundation and supporting structures for blowers,
vacuum pumps, adsorber vessels, surge tank, coolers, silencers, oxygen analyser, reciprocating
oxygen compressors, inter cooler/ after cooler for air blower and oxygen compressor, any other
equipment, pumps, exchangers etc..
5. Design, detailing, supply and construction of foundation and supporting structures of cable rack,
pipe supports/ sleepers, operating/ maintenance platforms , rectangular & circular platforms on/
around of equipment and structures, walkways, cross-overs, skids, trenches, pits, sump,
drains(precast RCC covers) etc.
6. Design of foundation of all structures/equipment foundations etc. should be as per the document
of Geotechnical data for VPSA oxygen plant (A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0) attached in the
tender.
7. Monorails or over head cranes of required capacity for operation/maintenance of equipments/
pumps in pipe racks, sheds or other structures if required.
8. Water proofing/ leak proofing and damp proofing construction for UG trenches, liquid retaining
structures, tanks, pits, sumps etc. wherever specified/ directed by engineer-in-charge.
9. Painting/ protective lining/ tilting/ coatings etc are to be done wherever required, as per the job
specification enclosed.
10. Painting to structural steel shall be as per EIL Job specification no. A702-000-79-41-PLS-01.
Environmental classification shall be considered as Industrial.
11. Dismantling and re-erecting of steel structures wherever required.
12. Dismantling/ Demolishing of PCC, RCC & Brickwork etc at all depths below plinth level and at all
heights above plinth level including disposal of unserviceable item outside refinery and stacking &
depositing of serviceable items in Owners scrap yard, location as approved by Engineer-inCharge.
13. Dismantling/ Demolishing of structural steel works and sheeting at all heights above plinth level
including disposal of unserviceable item outside refinery and stacking & depositing of serviceable
items in Owners scrap yard, location as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
Design, detailing and construction of any barricading arrangement required in or around unit/
worksite considering safety aspects at any stage prior to the commissioning of the plant is in the
scope of contractor.
14. In addition contractor is to dismantle and remove the same from site after completion of the
project.
15. Preparation of fabrication drawings for all structural steel works and bar bending schedules for all
RCC works.
16. Supplying and mixing of approved brand of bipolar concrete penetrating corrosion inhibiting
admixture in concrete in superstructure and substructure for protection of reinforcement against
corrosion as per EIL specification 6-68-0017.
17. Providing and fixing electro-forged hot dipped galvanized MS gratings and Handrails on platform
and stairs.
Page 356 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 21 of 23
18. Obtaining statutory approval from local authorities, Development Authorities or any other
concerned authorities before starting the works at site.
19. Furnishing activity wise work programme and taking necessary approvals from the related
department in the refinery before carrying out any activity.
20. 3-D Modeling of all structures including foundations. The system to be adopted is specified
elsewhere in the document.
21. Monthly/ weekly progress report clearly mentioning BOQ, status of submitted approved & pending
drawings/ documents.
22. Documentation of AS BUILT drawings/ details for all works as specified elsewhere in this
package.
23. Any other Civil Structural & Architectural Works, not specifically mentioned herein, but required for
the satisfactory and successful completion of the project as per directions of the Engineer-inCharge shall also be in the scope of the contractor.
24. All materials (consumables/ non-consumables) required for the execution of Civil Structural works
under this contract shall be in the scope of the Contractor.
Page 357 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 22 of 23
UG GENERAL CIVIL
1. Clearing and stripping of area within battery limit including contractors storage yard, removing
grass, vegetation growth, roots, cutting of trees if any etc. and disposal of unserviceable material
inside Refinery complex.
2. Earthwork in excavation for all depths in all types of soils for civil works, removal and disposing
the excavated unserviceable soil anywhere within refinery limit or as per direction of Engineer-inCharge.
3. Graded site with average FGL (Finished Grade Level) of 417.0 m above MSL shall be handed
over to the contractor for VPSA Oxygen plant. However, micro grading of the area up to required
levels after completion of construction work shall be in bidders scope. Filling/ Cutting required to
bring the site up to the finished levels is in the scope of Contractor. Earth required for micro
grading and make up to RCC paved levels shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost
from the approved borrow areas. Borrow areas will be identified by contractor anywhere outside
the complex. However, contractor shall have to bear the cost of royalties etc. as applicable.
4. Construction of RCC pavement for the plant as per specifications and drawings for the new
facilities within new PVSA plant battery limit as per final approved equipment layout is in bidders
scope. The HPP of RCC pavement inside Plant shall be 417.3 m above MSL (Mean Sea Level).
Thickness shown in the standards enclosed with tender are minimum. However, contractor to
provide RCC pavement as per actual loading condition.Contractor shall do the earth work under
RCC pavement to make up the levels with approved earth.
5. Design and construction of RCC storm water drains covered with HDG grating inside VPSA
Oxygen plant battery limit / area for the new facilities. Contractor shall provide proper slopes to
collect run off in the drains and connect it to nearest existing drain outside VPSA Oxygen plant
battery limit. The interconnecting drains in unpaved areas shall be of Stone masonry. Hook up
with existing drain shall be provided by the contractor. Existing storm water drains damaged
during construction period shall be reconstructed / made good to original position by the
contractor himself.
6. Portable fire extinguishers for new facilities within new VPSA Oxygen plant shall be provided by
the contractor as per OISD-116. All the equipments connected with fire protection system shall
either be BIS marked or from companies which carry ISO certification.
7. All necessary civil works required for piping, piping supports, mechanical, instrumentation,
electrical works which have not been exclusively covered shall also form part of scope of work.
8. Any temporary work/ activities like roads, approaches, hard stand etc. required to complete the
work shall be provided and constructed by the contractor.
9. Disposal of surplus earth, debris to debris disposal yard located inside the refinery complex.
10. The contractor shall prepare the necessary construction/ fabrication drawing and shall submit to
EIL/ Owner for review/ approval. No execution of any work shall be done without
reviewed/approved drawing. If during review, any changes/ modifications are required to be done,
the same shall be done by the contractor at no extra time and cost implication.
11. Documentation of AS BUILT details for all works as specified elsewhere in this bid package.
12. Setting up of WORKSITE establishment and CONTRACTORS facilities.
13. Any other civil and structural works required/directed by Client / Engineer-in charge for the
satisfactory and successful completion of the project.
1.1 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 STRUCTURAL
Apart from the conditions mentioned in the Doc No.A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
and standard specifications no. 6-68-0021 & 6-68-0022, the following shall be
strictly adhered to.
1.4.1.1
Contractor shall make necessary arrangement for placing the anchor bolts in
position before concreting. Whenever there are more than four foundation bolts,
these shall be fixed by using template. In case bolts are not available at site at the
Page 358 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 Rev.A
Page 23 of 23
time of casting of foundation, proper pockets shall be left as per direction of the
Owner/Owners representatives Resident Construction Manager.
1.4.1.2
Contractor shall ensure lateral stability by providing box/built-up sections for

columns wherever it is not feasible to provide vertical bracing in either direction.
1.4.1.3
For all structures, which are required to be designed as per provisions of the latest
edition of IS: 1893, the recommendations given in Seismic Design Basis (Doc No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-001) shall be followed.
1.4.1.4
All designs, detailing & construction shall strictly conform to enclosed standards,
specifications & drawings.
1.4.1.5
Sequence of construction is to be shown on the AFC drawings by indicating

construction joints wherever required.
1.4.1.6
Steel structure fabrication for all steel structures shall be of modular construction.
1.4.1.7
Erection scheme of structural steel modules shall be submitted by contractor for

EIL RCMs approval.
1.4.1.8
Contractor shall depute his concerned Civil-Structural design engineer to

Owner/Owners representatives review office as and when required for review of
his
documents.
During
such
reviews
involving
computer
aided
analysis/design/drafting of structures, the contractor shall make his own
arrangement of Personal Computer (PC) in the form of Laptop in the premises of
Owner/Owners representatives review office. This is required to expeditiously
resolve all the comments including those involving the use of PC by contractor in
his submission. The contractor shall ensure that these PC's are fully operational
along with necessary software already loaded including the input/output/drawing
files of the structures being reviewed. The contractor shall revise and re-submit
the analysis/design and drawings as required during review.
1.4.1.9
Verification of foundation loading data for all equipments/structures/stacks etc,

which form part of the comprehensive packages supplied by the respective
vendors, shall be entirely the responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall ensure
that wind/ seismic loadings are strictly in line with the basic wind pressures/site
spectra curves enclosed with this bid package.
1.4.1.10 Net Safe Bearing Capacity of Soil considered for the design of foundation shall be
mentioned in drawings for all structures and equipments.
1.4.1.11 Payment clauses mentioned in the attached specification standard stand deleted,
since the same are not applicable for Lump sump package.
Page 359 of 1744
Document No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806
Rev. No.
1
Page 1 of
3
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCESS DATA SHEET
PROJECT Debottlenecking Project-Bina Refinery

CLIENT BORL-Bina
UNIT
OXYGEN ENRICHMENT
JOB NO. A702
UNIT NO. 29
SERVICE VACUUM PRESSURE SWING ADSORPTION PACKAGE
ITEM NO.
29-LZ-00-1006
1. NO. OF CHAIN (NOTE-1)
:
2(TWO NOS.)
1
2. CAPACITY OF PLANT
GASEOUS OXYGEN
TURN DOWN
3. SPECIFICATIONS
A
FEED: AMBIENT AIR
:
:
182 TPD (AS 100% OF OXYGEN)
50 % OF CHAIN CAPACITY WITH NO OXYGEN VENTING
B/L CONDITIONS
OXYGEN
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
(NOTE-2)
PRODUCT OXYGEN COMPOSITION

OXYGEN (NOTE-3)
NITROGEN (NOTE-4)
DEW POINT
% VOL
% VOL
KG/CM2 G (NOTE-5)
DEG C
:
:
:
90(MIN) 1
REMAINING
(-) 46 DEGC @ ATM PRESSURE
:
:
:
:
AT VPSA PLANT PACKAGE B/L

MIN
NOR
MAX
MECH DESIGN
1.5
BY VENDOR
AMB
65
NOTES :
1. EACH CHAIN SHALL CONSIST OF AIR FILTERS,1 BLOWER WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR, 1VACUUM PUMP WITH ELECTRIC
MOTOTR, 1 PAIR OF ADSORBER VESSEL AND ASSOCIATED PIPING & CYCLOMATIC VALVE/CHANGEOVER VALVE ETC.
2. A) ROOTS AIR BLOWER WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE SHALL BE PROVIDED TO MEET THE REQUIRED
AIR DEMAND. BLOWER SHALL HAVE IT'S DEDICATED SUCTION FILTER.
B) AIR BLOWER SHALL HAVE IT'S INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PANEL INCLUDING ALL INSTRUMENTS
REQUIRED TO ESTABLISH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PACKAGE.
C) BLOWER SHALL HAVE NON RETURN VALVE AT THE OUTLET.
D) AIR BLOWER SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR THE MAX. HUMIDITY AND MAXIMUM TEMP. CONDITIONS OF BINA.
E) BYPASS ARRANGEMENT WITH AUTO CONTROL VALVES TO BE PROVIDED.
3. ONLINE O2 ANALYSERS TO BE PROVIDED IN THE PRODUCT GASEOUS OXYGEN LINE BY THE PACKAGE VENDOR.
4. THE WASTE GAS CONTAINING NITROGEN, WATER, CARBON-DI-OXIDE SHALL BE DISCHARGE TO AIR THROUGH
SILENCER.
5. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE 2 NOs (1W+1S) COMPRESSORS WITH ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE,COMMON FOR
BOTH CHAINS, TO MEET REQUIRED PRESSURE LEVEL AT THE BATTERY LIMIT.EACH COMPRESSOR SHALL HAVE IT'S
DEDICATED PULSATION DAMPNER , INTERCOOLER, AFTER COOLER ETC.
1
6. TWO NOS.( ONE IN ADSORPTION AND ONE IN REGENERATION) ADSORBERS FOR EACH CHAIN WITH MOLECULAR
SIEVE ADSORBENTS SHALL BE PROVIDED. THE MOLECULAR SIEVE SELECTION SHALL BE SUCH THAT PACKAGE
TURN AROUND SHALL NOT HAPPEN IN LESS THAN FOUR YEARS.
7. VACUUM PUMP WITH SEPARATE ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE SHALL BE PROVIDED
8. ONE O2 BUFFER VESSEL OF REQUIRED VOLUME TO MEET THE CONTINUOUS DEMAND OF O2 GAS SHALL BE
PROVIDED. IT SHALL BE COMMON FOR BOTH CHAINS. OFF SPEC O2 GAS VENTING THROUGH SILENCER WITH
NECESSARY CONTROL VALVES LINKED WITH O2 ANALYSER SHALL BE PROVIDED.
1
0
Rev. No.
14.01.2016
17.09.2015
Date
Format No. 3-0241-10 Rev. 0
REVISED AS MARKED
ISSUED FOR ENGG.
Purpose
SGM
PP
SA
Prepared
By
Reviewed
By
Approved
By
Copyrights EIL - all rights reserved (Generated through PDSIS)
Page 360 of 1744
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCESS DATA SHEET
PROJECT
UNIT
ITEM NO.
Document No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806
Rev. No.
1
Page 2 of
3
CLIENT BORL-Bina
JOB NO. A702
UNIT NO. 29
Debottlenecking Project-Bina Refinery

OXYGEN ENRICHMENT
29-LZ-00-1006
9. UTILITIES CONDITIONS
COOLING WATER
SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
SUPPLY PRESSURE
RETURN TEMPERATURE
RETURN PRESSURE
LP STEAM
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
SERVICE WATER
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
INSTRUMENT AIR
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
NITROGEN
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
DM WATER
TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE
MINIMUM
NORMAL
MAXIMUM
DESIGN
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
33
4.3
(NOTE-19)
33
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
SATD.
3
175
4
190
5
240
7
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4
65
14.5
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4.5
AMB
6.5
50
7
65
10.5
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4.5
AMB
6.5
AMB
7
65
10.5
DEG C
KG/CM2 G
AMB
4.5
40
5.4
45
6.4
65
15.8
65
7
65
7
45
10. METEOROLOGICAL DESIGN DATA:

1
2
3
4
5
1
0
Rev. No.
ELEVATION ABOVE MEAN SEA LEVEL, M

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE MBAR
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
RELATIVE HUMIDITY %
RAIN FALL DATA a) FOR 1 HOUR PERIOD
b) FOR 24 HOUR PERIOD
6 WIND DATA
a) WIND VELOCITY
b) WIND DIRECTION
411.6(AVG)
936.3(MIN),947.4(NORMAL),954.2(MAX)
tmin= 1.1 degC
tmax:=45.6degC
54@42degC
7 DESIGN DRY BULB TEMPERATURE, DEGC

8 DESIGN WET BULB TEMPERATURE, DEGC
9 LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE FOR MDMT, DEGC
10. DESIGN AIR TEMPERATURE FOR AIR
COOLED EXCHANGERSWHERE
FOLLOWED BY WATER COOLING
11. DESIGN AIR TEMPERATURE FOR AIR
COOLED EXCHANGERS WHERE NOT
FOLLOWED
WATER COOLING
BY WATER COOLING
12. COINCIDENT TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE
HUMIDITY FOR AIR BLOWER / AIR COMPRESSOR
DESIGN.
42 DEGC
23.7DEGC
1.1 DEGC
45.6 DEGC
14.01.2016
17.09.2015
Date
284.5 MM(MAX)
2 km/hr(MIN)-25km/hr(MAX)
WEST TO EAST
45.6 DEGC
42 DEG C & 54%
REVISED AS MARKED
ISSUED FOR ENGG.
Purpose
SGM
PP
SA
Prepared
By
Reviewed
By
Approved
By
Page 361 of 1744
MISCELLANEOUS
PROCESS DATA SHEET
PROJECT
UNIT
ITEM NO.
Document No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806
Rev. No.
1
Page 3 of
3
CLIENT BORL-Bina
JOB NO. A702
UNIT NO. 29
Debottlenecking Project-Bina Refinery

OXYGEN ENRICHMENT
29-LZ-00-1006
11. NOISE LEVEL FROM THE MACHINES/ PACKAGE SHALL NOT EXCEED 85 dB(A) AT ONE METER DISTANCE FROM ALL
ROTATING EQUIPMENTS APLLICABLE WITHIN THE PACKAGE. SOUND ATTENUATORS, ANTI NOISE BOX, IF REQUIRED
SHALL BE PROVIDED BY PACKAGE VENDOR TO MEET THE ABOVE NOISE LEVEL.
12. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL CONSIDER SHELTER FOR ALL THE PROCESS MACHINERIES AND OUTDOOR
ATMOSPHERE FOR ALL THE VESSELS.
13. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE NECESSARY INSTRUMENTS FOR THE MEASUREMENT OF PERFORMANCE
PARAMETERS OF THE PACKAGE AND IT SHALL INCLUDE (AS A MINIMUM) FLOW TRANSMITTER, PRESSURE
TRANSMITTER,TEMP. TRANSMITTER, DEW POINT ANALYSER, O2 ANALYSER ETC. VENDOR TO PROVIDE
NECESAARY CONTROL FOR FLUCTUATING DEMAND OF OXYGEN PRODUCT.
14. MOC:
1. OXYGEN PIPING DOWNSTREAM OF ADSORBER VESSEL SHALL BE SS304L/SS316L.
2.O2 BUFFER VESSEL/COLLECTION TANK SHALL BE SS304L/SS316L.
3. ALL COMPONENTS/PIPINGS OF RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH OXYGEN SHALL BE
SS304L/SS316L.
4. FOR PIPING OF ALL OTHER SERVICES RELEVANT PMS SHALL BE FOLLOWED.
5..THE MOC OF CYCLOMATIC VALVE/CHANGEOVER VALVE SHALL BE AS PER VENDOR .
15. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE PLC BASED CONTROL PANEL/ SYSTEM FOR THE TOTAL PACKAGE
16. PACKAGE VENDOR SHALL GUARANTEE THE FOLLOWING PROCESS PARAMETERS:
A) CAPACITY
B) PURITY OF O2 GAS: 90% VOL(MIN) 1
C) DEW POINT OF O2 GAS: (-) 46DEGC AT ATM. PRESSURE.
D) B/L PRESSURE OF O2 GAS: 1.5 KG/CM2(g)
E) UTILITY
- ELECTRICAL POWER
17. PACKAGE VENDOR TO REFER EIL P & ID NO. A702-79-41-29-1199 FOR B/L AND UTILITY PIPING/
INSTRUMENTATION DETAILS.
18. AVAILABLE AREA REQUIRED FOR VPSA TO BE CONFIRMED BY VENDOR.
19. VENDOR TO PROVIDE 1+1 PSVs IF REQUIRED TO PREVENT OVERPRESSURIZATION DUE TO BLOCK DISCHARGE.
20. COOLING WATER PRESSURE DROP WITHIN VENDOR B/L TO BE RESTRICTED WITHIN 0.7 KG/CM2.
1
0
Rev. No.
14.01.2016
17.09.2015
Date
REVISED AS MARKED
ISSUED FOR ENGG.
Purpose
SGM
PP
SA
Prepared
By
Reviewed
By
Approved
By
Page 362 of 1744
Page 363 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 1 of 14
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
18/03/2016
Rev.
No
Date
ISSUED WITH TENDER

Purpose
BKD
ANAND
PPP
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 364 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 2 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.0
SITE CONDITIONS AND CLIMATE DATA ................................................................................. 3
3.0
SUBVENDORS FOR AUXILLIARY EQUlPMENT / SUB-SYSTEMS: .................................... 4
4.0
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT AND AUXILIARIES .............................................................. 4
5.0
DESIGN BASIS ................................................................................................................................ 5
6.0
CODES & STANDARDS ................................................................................................................. 6
7.0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................... 7
8.0
INSPECTION & TESTING ............................................................................................................ 10
9.0
SPARE PARTS ............................................................................................................................... 12
10.0
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES ............................................................................................. 13
11.0
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING ................................................................................ 13
12.0
PACKING AND IDENTIFICATION .............................................................................................. 13
13.0
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENT ............................................................................................... 14
14.0
CONFLICT ....................................................................................................................................... 14
Page 365 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 3 of 14
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The intent of this document is to outline the requirements for the design, engineering,
procurement of materials and bought out components, manufacture, assembly, insulation,
inspection, testing and painting at works, packing and supply, unloading & storage at site,
local handling, erection/installation, testing & commissioning, painting at site, training of
purchasers personnel, performance guarantee run test at site of VPSA Oxygen plant
package as Lump Sum Turnkey package for BORL at Bina, Madhya Pradesh, India.
1.2
The system shall be complete with all mechanical, structural, electrical, instrumentation,
piping, pressure vessels, heat exchangers, pumps, compressors, handling equipment,
other interconnecting and safety items as required for smooth and trouble free operation of
the package.
Package vendor shall be responsible for furnishing all specified equipment and
documentation.
1.3
Detail scope of supply and services shall be as per Scope of Supply/Work for VPSA
Oxygen plant (A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070).
1.4
The system supplied shall be complete in every respect ready for installation and
operation and any item not specifically mentioned in this specification but nevertheless
required for proper design, operation, maintenance and safety of the equipment/personnel
shall be deemed to have been specified by the purchaser and included in the scope of
supply of the vendor.
2.0
SITE CONDITIONS AND CLIMATE DATA
2.1
Site locations and Climate:

-
Plant Location
State
Nearest Important Town
Nearest Railway Station
Nearest Port
Nearest Airport
:
:
:
:
:
:
Bina
Madhya Pradesh
Bina
Bina
Kandla
Bhopal
Temperature, Relative humidity and Wind data for the plant site are as follows:
S.
Parameter
No
(A) METEOROLOGICAL DATA
1
Elevation above mean sea level, m
2
Barometric
2
pressure, mbar
3
4
5
Ambient
3
temperature, C
Relative
4
humidity, %
Rainfall
5
data: mm
(a) for 1-hour period
(b) for 24-hour period
6
Wind
6
data:
(a) Wind Velocity, km/hr
(b) Prevailing Wind Direction
(B) DATA FOR EQUIPMENT DESIGN
1
Design dry bulb temperature, C
Design
2
wet bulb temperature, C
Minimum
Normal
Average
Maximum
Design
411.6
936.3
947.4
954.2
1.2
16.4
54
45.6
80
284.5
2
W to E
25
42
23.7
Page 366 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
3
4
5
6
2.2
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 4 of 14
Low
3
ambient temperature for Min Design Metal Temperature:,
C
Coincident temperature and humidity for Air Blower and
Air Compressor design:
Design
4
air temperature for air cooled exchangers in general, C
Design
5
air temperature for air cooled exchangers in critical
services not followed by water cooled trim exchangers, C
1.1
42 C & 54
% RH
45.6
45.6
Seismic Data
Seismic forces shall be as per IS: 1893 and site specific seismic spectra (A702-000-16-54DB-0001) enclosed with TENDER.
3.0
SUBVENDORS FOR AUXILLIARY EQUlPMENT / SUB-SYSTEMS:
3.1
For following items, Vendor may follow EIL Vendor list attached with the TENDER or
propose additional vendor list having satisfactory Proven Track Record (PTR) in similar
service, which shall be reviewed during detail engineering. Clients/EIL decision shall be
final and vendor is obliged to comply with the same without any commercial implication.
Adsorber vessel
Surge tank
Coolers
Silencers
For sub vendor selection criteria pertaining to Rotating, Electrical and

Instrumentation items, vendor to refer respective specification attached with
TENDER.
3.2
All sub ordered items of this package shall be sourced from Owner/EILs approved
Vendors listed in Master Vendor/ Supplier List attached elsewhere in the TENDER. Any
Vendors if proposed by the bidder for any item where no list is provided in the requisition,
the makes of same shall have adequate Proven Track Record (PTR) in similar application
and shall be subject to OWNER approval during detail engineering without any time and
cost implication to Owner.
4.0
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT AND AUXILIARIES
4.1
Purpose
4.1.1
VPSA Oxygen Plant shall be utilized for production of gaseous oxygen by Vacuum
pressure swing adsorption technology as per attached Process Data Sheets (Doc. No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806) and P&ID (P&ID No. A702-79-41-29-1199).
4.2
Process Description
4.2.1
Atmospheric air after filtration is drawn by blower, compressed and fed to the adsorbent
vessel.
4.2.2
The adsorbent, zeolite based Molecular sieve, selectively captures Nitrogen, CO2 and
moisture leaving pure oxygen as a product which is routed to a surge tank.
4.2.3
The surge tank ensures continuous availability of quality product as the beds switch over
from pressure to vacuum.
Page 367 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 5 of 14
4.2.4
Oxygen compressor shall suck oxygen from the surge tank and compress it to the
desired pressure as per process datasheet.
4.2.5
The adsorbent is then regenerated by sucking (pressure reduction) the entrapped gas of
the vessel by vacuum pump. The residual gas predominantly Nitrogen, CO2 and moisture
is then discharged into the atmosphere.
4.2.6
Thus two bed VPSA system relies on swing in pressure from above atmospheric to below
atmospheric (vacuum) to each bed sequentially from adsorption to desorption.
4.3
Utility System:
4.3.1 All utilities as per P&ID attached with bid shall be provided to Package Vendor at single
point as indicated in the Piping Scope drawing. Pressure and Temperature conditions of
Utilities shall be as per Process Data Sheet (Doc no. A702-29-79-DS-1806) attached with
bid. For quality of utilities, refer Process BEDB Part B (A702-02-41-ODB-01) attached
with the bid. Any additional hardware to suit the utility condition required by Package
Vendor, shall be included by them in their scope. Other requirements of Process BEDB
Part B (A702-02-41-ODB-01) applicable for this Package shall be complied by the
Package Vendor.
4.3.2 Electric Power shall be provided as specified in Electrical Job Specification (Doc. No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070)
5.0
DESIGN BASIS
5.1
Vendor shall confirm that their offer completely complies with the bid specification without
any deviation. Deviation if any shall lead to rejection of bids. Vendor to note that Technical
deviations/ clarifications, if any shall be submitted before pre-bid meeting for resolution.
Vendor is not allowed to attach any deviation list along with bid and Vendor shall comply
with bid specification in total without any deviation.
5.2
The equipment and facilities shall be designed to meet the requirements as specified in
this specification and other documents attached with this TENDER.
5.3
Package layouts shall be prepared taking into consideration various factors like
requirement of operability, approach, safety, withdrawal space requirement, maintenance,
foundation requirements etc. for convenient operation and as specified in piping layout
requirements.
5.4
All structure including Pipe rack, compressor shed shall be of structural steel and shall be
designed and engineered by VPSA Oxygen vendor. However minimum size/elevation
shall be as per layouts attached elsewhere in the enquiry document.
5.5
All the applicable Safety Codes, National & local Laws and regulation shall be followed by
the Vendor for the design, engineering and fabrication of the equipment.
5.6
The available space for the complete plant is as indicated in the enclosed scope drawing
(Drg No. A702-029-16-43-SK-4070). Vendor shall furnish preliminary plant and equipment
layout (along with the bid) taking care of the available space.
The oxygen compressors are required to be housed in the separate structural shed in the
allocated plot area in the enclosed scope drawing (Drg. No. A702-029-16-43-SK-4070)
and the size of this oxygen compressor shed shall be accordingly decided and informed
during bidding stage. While sizing the oxygen gas compressor shed, working clearance on
all sides and maintenance space for impellers removal, heat exchangers bundle removal
must be considered. One number EOT crane of adequate capacity shall also be
Page 368 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 6 of 14
considered for the maintenance of the oxygen compressors. Piping for utilities and
products shall be terminated at the battery limit as indicated in Piping Scope drawing. All
piping shall be provided with isolation valves at the battery limits by Vendor. Exact location
of terminations of all piping shall be decided during detail engineering stage.
5.7
The unit shall be field proven for similar duty and its design shall take into consideration
normal preventive and running maintenance of the unit and their auxiliaries. Prototype or
extensive modifications of basic designs are unacceptable.
5.8
Each systems and sub-systems shall be laid out and constructed for convenience and
safety of operation and maintenance. All equipment shall be oriented to permit servicing in
such a way so as to require minimum dismantling.
5.9
All equipment and structures shall be designed for installation in environmental and
seismic conditions as applicable.
5.10
Rotating component/equipment shall be balanced both statically and dynamically.
5.11
Operation hazards shall be estimated by employing sound engineering judgement. All

couplings, gears and exposed rotating parts shall be provided with adequate guards.
5.12
EOT cranes of adequate capacity shall be provided for the maintenance of the vacuum
pumps, air blowers, compressors etc.
5.13
Equipment design and engineering shall incorporate adequate safety features (as per
applicable specifications of respective equipment as well as Health, Safety and
Environment Codes & Standards) to provide protection to operating personnel, equipment
and environment.
5.14
Design of all electrical systems shall be in accordance with the technical specifications of
electrical system attached with this TENDER.
5.15
All instrumentation and controls shall meet the requirement of instrumentation work
specification attached with this TENDER.
6.0
CODES & STANDARDS

Latest editions along with addenda (if any) of below mentioned Codes and Standards shall
be applicable. Vendor shall follow all other specifications and standards, which are being
specifically mentioned in the bid document and attached.
6.1
Latest editions of the following codes and standards shall govern.

Heat Exchangers
TEMA C and ASME Sec.VIII Div. I
Pressure Vessels
Piping
Air Blower, Vacuum
Pump and Oxygen
compressor
:
:
ASME Sec. VIII Div.l & Div.2 and ElL

Standard 6-12-0030
ASME B 31.3
Refer
attached
Rotating
equipment
specification.
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent
or superior with prior approval of Client/PMC.
Page 369 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 7 of 14
6.2
For provisions not covered by the above codes

engineering practices and norms of vendor shall govern.
& standards,
established
6.3
In case of conflict between international codes and standards and ElL specification
and standards, the later shall prevail.
7.0
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
7.1
General
7.1.1
The entire VPSA Oxygen Plant shall be as per Process datasheet no. A702-29-79DS-1806 and this TENDER.
7.1.2
The VPSA Oxygen Plant shall be operated by PLC based control system located in
SRR-3 (Satellite Rack Room -3). Also, Bidder shall refer Instrumentation specification
for more details.
7.1.3
The schematic P&ID flow diagram No. A702-79-41-29-1199 attached with this
requisition shall be applicable for the plant. Bidder shall develop a detailed P&ID
incorporating all equipment instruments, line size etc. during detailed engineering.
7.1.4
The system shall be capable of operating on a continuous as well as intermittent basis

and shall be completely automatic requiring no operator attention, with all cycle control
valves actuated by a control system.
7.1.5
The plant shall be complete with all equipment, inter connecting piping,
instrumentation, control system, adsorbent charge and shop painting ( Primer+Finish).
The package piping having interface with owners piping shall be brought to the edge
of the package battery limit and terminated with a flange.
7.1.6
Silencers shall be provided on vent piping/exhausters to reduce noise level. Noise

level at any part of the plant shall be such as to restrict the noise level within 85 dBA at
any point located 1 metre away from the outer surface of the equipment excluding Air
Blower & Vacuum Pump which will be located in acoustic building. However, the noise
level outside the building housing vacuum pump, blowers etc shall be within 85 dBA at
any point located 1 metre away from the building outer surface.
7.1.7
All interconnecting piping between skids/modules shall also be fully prefabricated,

tested and delivered to site, so that only hook-up connections are required to be done
at site. However, Package Vendor to check suitability of transporting such items to
site.
7.1.8
All skids along with interconnected piping shall be assembled and match marked at
vendors works for easy assembly at site.
7.1.9
Bidder can provide either bypass control valve or unloading arrangement for feed
blower based on their standard proven practice.
7.1.10
In case of wet type of vacuum pump system, seal soft water (being DM Water) shall be
once through and to be recycled. Bidder shall provide necessary hardware and design
the system for re-utilizing the DM water. Pump configuration shall be 1 working + 1
stand by.
Page 370 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 8 of 14
7.2
Pressure Vessels
7.2.1
All the pressure vessels including adsorber vessel shall be designed, fabricated,
inspected and tested as per ASME Sec. VIII Div.I & Div.II and ElL standard
specifications for pressure vessels for package item6-12-0030. For design of Oxygen
Buffer vessel PD5500 is also acceptable.
7.2.2
Vessels subjected to cyclic loading shall, in addition, meet the following requirements:
a) Fatigue analysis report for adsorber vessels shall be furnished for information.
b) Killed carbon steel materiel, SA 516 Gr. 60 or superior w.r.t susceptibility to fatigue
load shall be used for Adsorber vessels. MOC for Oxygen Buffer vessel shall be
SS304L/SS316L as per Process Data Sheet.
c) Vessel circumferential and longitudinal welds and nozzle to shell head welded
joints shall be 100% radiographed.
d) All nozzle attachments shall be with full penetration welds.
e) All nozzles shall be self-reinforcing type.
7.2.3
Adsorbers shall be complete with their respective adsorbent bed support and inlet and
outlet nozzle screens. MOC of Bed screens shall be Stainless steel grade.
7.2.4
All vessels shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with codes and
specifications referred in this specification.
7.2.5
Vessels shall be fitted with safety valve, pressure and temperature gauges, manhole,
vent, drain and utility connections, as required.
7.3
Rotating Equipment
Refer Annexure-1 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 and
job specification for rotating equipment for VPSA Oxygen Plant (A702-029-82-41-SP4070) attached with the TENDER
7.4
Pressurization System
7.4.1
RCC building (with acoustic insulation) housing air blower, vacuum pump etc. shall be
provided with ventilation facility.
7.4.2
Ventilation blowers shall be housed in a blower room.
7.4.3
Blower room shall also be provided with pressurisation and ventilation system.
7.4.4
Pressurisation and ventilation system shall sized based on the following

-
Ventilation air requirement shall be calculated based on 3-5C temperature rise

of incoming air to room depending upon the suitability of electricals/equipment
for the room temperature being maintained.
Minimum air changes per hour shall be 12 in the room.
Pressurized areas shall have over pressure of 5mm WG.
The supply air fan capacity shall not be less than 125% of total air requirement
Air intakes shall be located in non-hazardous and chemical fume-free areas at

adequate elevation to protect against rains and dust. The room shall be provided
with noise proof airtight doors, bird screen, inlet louvers and replaceable filters
for air inlet.
Page 371 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 9 of 14
7.4.5
A common inlet air filter with air supply fan with motors (1 working + 1 installed standby)
shall be provided for delivering the required quantity of air into the RCC building.
7.4.6
The relevant clauses of standard specification for ventilation/pressurisation plant, std. no.
6-36-0002 shall be followed.
7.4.7
The height of blower room shall be decided considering overhead handling of equipment
for maintenance by a monorail mounted electric hoist with motorized trolley, to be
provided by vendor.
7.5
Material Handling Facilities
7.5.1
EOT Cranes-
a.
Package vendor shall refer EIL Standard Specification no. 6-48-0002 for EOT Crane
specification attached with this tender. The crane shall be used for material handling
during maintenance of various machine installed in the RCC building and Compressor
Shed. Package Vendors scope of supply/work for EOT crane shall include the following
as a minimum:
EOT complete with all accessories and components.
Gantry rail for crane, along with fixtures & welding material, end stoppers at all four
corners for complete bay length as required.
Electrical power supply to the EOT crane shall be through trailing cables hanged
on festoon system travelling on the channels. Power supply live RYB visible
indicator bulbs shall be installed on walkway from where maintenance personal
enters.
Load break switches for power supply (to be installed at shop floor) and cablings.
EOT crane shall be designed as per duty class of M5 as per IS 3177 & IS 807.
b.
The cranes shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, inspected & tested (at
manufacturers work & at site) as per above mentioned standards or equivalent
international standards.
c.
The bridge structure of Overhead Travelling Cranes shall be made from box (double
web) type, plate type, or fabricated from rolled sections. The structure shall be double
girder type.
d.
Cranes shall be designed for minimum head room above the highest hook position and
for closest approach of the hooks to each end stop.
e.
The minimum capacity of EOT crane shall be maximum weight of the component to be
lifted plus 10 % margin.
f.
Package vendor shall select the crane of suitable capacity to meet the maintenance
requirements of compressors, air blowers, vacuum pumps, etc. Auxiliary hoist shall also
be provided in case the selected crane capacity is 15 MT or higher. Capacity of auxiliary
shall be 20% margin of the main hook capacity
g.
Unless otherwise stated, the following hoisting and travel speeds with corresponding
acceleration shall be used:Hoisting: 2.0 m/min, 7 cm/s2
Cross travel: 10.0 m/min, 7 cm/s2
Page 372 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 10 of 14
Long travel: 15.0 m/min, 8 cm/s2

Higher operating speeds may be considered for higher lifts and longer bay lengths
h.
Suitable inching (creep) speed mechanisms shall be provided for main hook and
auxiliary hook (if applicable) to facilitate accurate spotting of the load. Creep speed for
main hoist and Auxiliary hoist shall be 10% of the main hoisting speed and Auxiliary
speed respectively.
i.
The end carriage shall be fitted with safety stops to prevent crane from falling more than
one inch in the event of breakage of a track wheel or axle.
j.
End carriage/crab shall be designed so as to enable the track wheels to be withdrawn

readily. Jacking pads shall be provided for jacking up the crane for changing crane
wheels.
k.
The colour of the crane shall be Golden Yellow.
l.
DC electromagnetic or Electro hydraulic thrustor brake shall be used for the hoisting
motion. Electro hydraulic thrustor-operated brakes shall be used for the cross and long
travel motions. The brakes shall be such that they are applied when the power supply to
the brake is interrupted or when the circuit breaker is open or when the controller is
brought to off position. Braking torque for LT and CT motion shall not be less than 125%
of maximum torque of selected motor.
m.
EOT Crane shall be normally operated by RRC (Radio Remote Control).
n.
Maintenance walkways with suitable access shall be provided on both sides along the
long travel.
o.
One connecting walking way shall also be provided atleast on one gable end.
7.6
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
job specification for electrical for Cryogenic Nitrogen Plant (A702-029-16-50-SP-4070)
attached with the TENDER.
7.7
INSTRUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
Refer Annexure-3 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070 as well
as Job specification for cryogenic Nitrogen plant (A702-029-16-51-SP-4070) for
Instrumentation works of Package.
7.8
PIPING REQUIREMENTS
Refer Annexure-4 of Scope of work/supply Doc. No. A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070,
Design Basis for piping (A702-029-80-41-0005) & Scope drawing VPSA oxygen plant
(A702-130-16-43-SK-3001) attached with the TENDER.
7.9
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

Job specification for VPSA oxygen plant (A702-039-81-41-SP-0011) attached with the
TENDER.
8.0
INSPECTION & TESTING
8.1
Inspection:
8.1.1
Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's /

Sub-vendor's works by Employer / its authorized inspection agency. Package vendor shall
Page 373 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 11 of 14
submit Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) before commencement of fabrication. The approved
QAP shall form the basis for equipment inspection.
8.1.2
Vendor shall extend necessary services and facilities in this regard. Third Party Inspection
shall be as per commercial section of TENDER.
8.1.3
Testing at works shall be minimum as per the following:

a. Cl. No. 4.2 of Standard Specification no. 6-48-0002 for EOT Crane
b. Cl. No. 4.2 of Standard Specification no. 6-36-0002 for ventilation/pressurisation
plant.
c. Cl. No. 4.2 of Standard Specification no. 6-61-0014 for Electric hoist.
d. Vendor shall perform test and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to requirement of this specification.
e. All pressure vessel and heat exchangers shall be inspected and hydro tested as per
applicable codes and EIL standards.
f. The specific inspection and testing requirement for the compressors, vacuum pumps,
heat exchangers, Pressure vessels, electrical, instrumentation, etc. shall be as
specified in their respective specification and Data sheets.
g. The vendor shall perform simulated testing on control panel and valve actuators and
limit switches at his shop to ensure operation of all controls and valve systems. Test
shall verify operation and automatic shutdown of the system.
h. Wherever radiography is indicated as FULL or 100%, all longitudinal and
circumferential seams including flange to neck, pipe to pipe and pipe to fitting shall be
100% radiographed.
i. All safety and trip devices shall be fully calibrated before dispatch and shall be
subject to field calibration test. The control panels shall be tested for continuity and
sequence of operation, at works prior to dispatch.
j. Any or all test, at purchasers option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorized
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check up and in
no way absolve the vendor of his responsibility.
8.1.4
For equipment, piping, valves, etc. the following certificates shall be furnished to
Owner/Consultant.
a. Testing certificates
b. Material certificate
c. Shop test for performance
d. Non-destructive examination (DPT, Radiography etc.)
e. Site fabrication test (for piping etc.)
Vendor shall also furnish any other certificates, which are considered essential by
Owners representative. In this connection, see the Vendor Data Requirement also.
8.2
Testing At Site
Testing at site shall be as per the respective Standard Specification/ Job Speciation and
other documents attached/ referred with this bid document.
8.3
Performance Guarantee Testing At Site
8.3.1
Package vendor shall guarantee the performance parameters individually for each
equipment and the plant as a whole to meet the plant performance parameters as
specified in the bid document.
Page 374 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 12 of 14
8.3.2
Since the complete plant cannot be assembled and performance tested at Package
vendors work, all major equipment shall be individually performance tested at works, and
the final performance testing of the completely assembled plant shall be carried out at site
under the supervision of package vendor, under prevailing site conditions. The Package
vendor shall submit the detail test procedure and methods of computation of results for
review by the Employer/Consultant before conducting the performance testing.
8.3.3
Package vendor shall conduct a performance guarantee test run of the plant after
commissioning and necessary manpower support, labour assistance shall be provided
through mechanical erection contractor available at site. The procedure for Pre
commissioning, commissioning & performance testing shall be submitted for Employer/
Consultants review and shall be mutually agreed.
8.3.4
EIL standard no. 7-76-0103, Instructions to vendor for site performance guarantee
requirements for package units shall be applicable for the performance testing.
Following clause of Standard Specification for Instructions to Vendor for Site
Performance Guarantee Requirements for Package Units (Doc. No. 7-76-0103) stands
modified:S. No.
1.
Clause No.
5.2
Description
Add the sentence to the Clause 5.2 - All calibration
reports/certificates shall not be older than 6 months from the
date of conducting Performance guarantee test.
8.3.5
Package vendor to also refer Loading and penalty criteria for VPSA Plant (Doc No. A702029-82-41-LP-4070) attached with the Tender.
8.3.6
The duration of performance testing shall be maximum 72 hours continuous (or as decided
by Owner/ EIL during PG test procedure review).
8.3.7
VPSA Oxygen system Performance guarantees testing shall be carried out while required
air flow is maintained as per package vendors approved PFD/PDS.
9.0
SPARE PARTS
9.1
Recommended Spares
Vendor shall furnish quotation of recommended spares (Mechanical, Electrical, and
instrumentation) for two (2) years normal operation and maintenance of equipment with
itemized price list, separately for each module along with the Bid. These shall be ordered
by purchaser separately. The un-priced copy of itemized list of spares shall be attached
with technical offer also. The price of these spares shall not be considered for commercial
evaluation/ price comparison.
9.2
Commissioning Spares
Vendor shall supply adequate quantity of commissioning spares, so as to ensure that
commissioning of the system is not hampered for shortage of commissioning spares.
Vendor shall include the cost of the commissioning spares in the lump sum quoted price.
In case, during commissioning, any spare is used from two (2) years operation and
maintenance spares or mandatory spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor
without any cost implication, within a mutually agreed time.
9.2.1
All spares parts shall be wrapped and packaged so that they are preserved in original asnew condition, under normal conditions of storage to be anticipated in India, and shall be
properly tagged and coded so that later identification for intended equipment usage will be
facilitated. The two (2) years recommended spares and commissioning spares shall be
packaged separately and clearly marked as Spare Parts and Commissioning Spares
respectively.
9.3
Mandatory Spares
Page 375 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 13 of 14
Vendor shall supply the following Mandatory spares for the system. Price of Mandatory
Spares shall be included in the base price quoted.
Mandatory Spares
Sl. No.
Item/ tag no.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Part Description
Quantity Required
Complete set of installed filter 1 set for each chain
elements for suction filter
Switching valves for each type 1 set for each chain
and
size
associated
with
adsorber skid, Air Blower and
Vacuum Pump.
29-LZ-00-1006
Gaskets for each type, size and 2 sets for each chain
rating for piping and vessels.
Gasket for coolers for each joint 4 sets for each chain
Bolts & nuts for each type & size 10 % (subject to min
for piping and vessels
2 nos.) for each chain
Mandatory spares for Instrumentation items as per Instrumentation Doc. No.
A702-029-16-51-SL-1001
Mandatory spares for Electrical items as per Electrical Doc. No. A702-02916-50-MS-4070.
Mandatory spares for Rotating Equipments as per Doc. No. A702-029-16-45SL-4070.
Remarks:
1. The word Set means the quantity required for full replacement of that part in one machine.
2. Vendor shall include all the mandatory spares as defined above & as applicable
to the proposed design of the equipment.
3. Spare parts shall be identical in all respects to the parts fitted on the main
equipment, including dimensions, material of construction & heat treatment
9.4
All spares parts furnished by the vendor shall be wrapped and packaged so that they are
preserved in original as-new condition, under normal conditions of storage to be
anticipated at site, and shall be properly tagged and coded so that later identification for
intended equipment usage will be facilitated. They shall be packaged separately clearly
marked as spare parts and shipped at the same time as the equipment.
10.0
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLES

The vendor shall provide a set of new and unused special tools and tackles, if required for
day to day operation and maintenance of the offered equipment / system. Vendor shall
include the cost of the special tools and tackles in his lump sum quoted price.
11.0
PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATING

Equipment and materials supplied shall be painted after tests at shop (primer+finish coat)
and after installation & testing at site in accordance with the attached painting specification
(Doc no. A702-000-79-41-PLS-01). Touch up painting at site. Corrosive environment shall
be considered for selection of painting.
12.0
a.
PACKING AND IDENTIFICATION

All packing shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment may
be dismantled into major components suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed
to provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match
Page 376 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-SP-4070 Rev A
Page 14 of 14
marked for site erection. Equipment shall also be protected to be suitable for prolonged
outdoor storage of around 12 months in the eventuality of delayed erection.
b.
Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main
equipment, its denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
The packaging shall be suitable for the shipping through sea transportation.
c.
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together
with equipment.
d.
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make,
year of manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer.
13.0
VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENT

The vendor shall furnish drawing and documents along with his bid and post order for
review/ information as per document No. A702-029-82-41-VR-4070. Also refer Electrical
VDR (Doc. No A702-029-16-50-VR-4070), Instrumentation VDR (Doc. No A702-029-1651-VDR-4070), structural VDR (A702-029-81-41-VDR-4070) and piping VDR (A702-02916-43-VDR-4070).
14.0
CONFLICT
In case of any conflict among various documents, following order of precedence shall
govern:
Process Package / Process Data sheet / P&ID / Licensor Specification
Scope of Work
This Job specification and Datasheet
EIL Standard Specification
Other Codes & Standard
However all conflicts / discrepancies in the above mentioned documents shall be
submitted to EIL for approval and EIL/Owner decision shall be final without any
commercial Implication to owner/EIL.
Page 377 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 4
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(Tender No. A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070)
PROJECT:
A
Rev.
No

OF BINA REFINERY
OWNER :
M/s BORL, Bina (MP)
JOB NO. :
A702
07.03.2016
Date
Issued with Tender
AKM
VB
ANPS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 378 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 4
1.0
General
1.1
This specification covers major aspects of design, manufacture, supervision of installation,

testing and commissioning of electrics for VPSA Oxygen Plant.
1.2
The equipment shall conform to this specification, enclosed data sheets and standard
specifications.
1.3
In case of conflict between requirements specified in various documents, the more stringent
one shall be followed. Owner / PMCs decision shall be binding. The same shall be complied
without any time / cost implication to Owner.
2.0
Scope
Refer Document no A702-029-82-41-SOW-4070.
3.0
Site Conditions
The equipments offered in the VPSA oxygen plant shall be suitable for continuous operation
under the following site conditions:
Design ambient temperature
40 C
Minimum ambient temperature
1.1 C
Maximum ambient temperature
45.6 C
Altitude above M.S.L.
1000 M
Relative Humidity
86 %
Atmosphere
Humid & highly corrosive
The environment is highly corrosive due to presence of chemical vapours; hence all the
equipment shall be provided with anti-corrosive epoxy paint.
4.0
5.0
6.0
Power Supply system from Owner

Medium voltage motors
High voltage motors
System frequency
:
:
:
415V 10 %
6.6kV 10 %
50Hz 3 %
Utilization Voltage
Motors rated upto 132 kW
Motors rated above 132 kW
Anti-condensation heaters
:
:
:
415V, 3 ph
6.6kV, 3 ph
240V, 1 ph
Area Classification & Equipment selection
a) Area classification for the package shall be Safe Area.

b) HV motors shall conform to EIL Specification 6-51-0031 and HV Motor data sheet no. A702029-16-50-DS-4071.
c) MV motors shall be energy efficient IE2 and shall conform to EIL Specification 6-51-0064 and
motor data sheet no. A702-029-16-50-DS-4072.
7.0
Special Requirements:
Page 379 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 3 of 4
7.1
Variation / Clarifications against the standard specification of HV motor 6-51-0031 and MV

Motor 6-51-0064, shall be as per the MOU agreed with EIL by respective motor manufacturer.
No further deviations to Tender requirements shall be entertained.
7.2
Ammeter on field LCS for motor suitable for 4-20mA signal through transducers.
7.3
All Control cable shall be 1.5 sqmm copper, twisted pair overall shielded type.
7.4
All HT/LT power and control cables shall be XLPE insulated & FRLS type.
7.5
All MV Power & control Cables shall be with stranded conductors.
7.6
All power cables 2.5 sqmm to 16 sqmm shall be with copper conductor and above 16 sqmm
shall be aluminium conductor.
7.7
In case of HV Motors, having rating greater than or equal to 1500 kW, 3 numbers class PS CTs
for motor differential protection shall be provided in the neutral terminal box. Exact specification
of CTs (CT ratio, Knee point voltage, Imag, etc.) shall be given during detailed engineering so
that it matches with the corresponding CTs provided on switchgear side. There shall be no cost
& time implication on account of these.
7.8
Local Control Panel / Local Control Station
7.7.1
Local Control Panel shall be used for starting / stopping of motors. Following facilities shall be
provided as a minimum on Control panel
a) Start/Stop push buttons for motor
b) Ammeters for all motors rated above 5.5 kW.
c) Selector switches
Selector switch (Local/Remote, Auto/Manual) shall be provided as per P&ID & operational
requirements.
For all other control and indication requirements refer elsewhere in Tender. Local control
panels/Local control stations shall be provided with FRP canopy.
7.7.2
Separate local control stations shall be provided for motor located away from LCP. Local
control stations shall conform to EIL spec. 6-51-0014 and the same shall be provided with
following facilities as minimum:
a) Start/Stop push buttons for motor
b) Ammeters for all driver motors rated above 5.5 kW.
c) Selector switches (As required)
7.7.3
Local push button control station shall be wired directly from the switchboard installed in the
substation.
7.7.4
Emergency push buttons as required for plant operation and safety etc. shall be provided.
8.0
Spares
8.1
Mandatory spares for electrical system shall be supplied as per doc no. A702-029-16-50-MS4070.
8.2
Vendor shall submit a list with unit prices of recommended spares for two years of normal
operation for all electrical equipment along with their bid.
8.3
Recommended list of maintenance spares for two years operation shall include the following
as a minimum for motors. Vendor shall ensure to quote for the same.
a.) Bearing for DE/NDE-one set
b.) Terminal box cover with screws
Page 380 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(ELECTRICAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-16-50-SP-4070
Rev. A
Page 4 of 4
c.) Fan
d.) Terminal block
8.4
Commissioning spares, special tools and tackles, if required shall be supplied by vendor.
9.0
All the electrical items/ equipments, even if not defined here, but required for completion &
commissioning of the VPSA Oxygen Plant Package shall be included in the scope of vendor.
10.0
All power and control cable sizes shall be finalised during detailed Engineering. Provisions as
required in vendors equipment for termination of the same shall be made accordingly without
any cost & time implications to owner.
11.0
Vendor to note that, if there is any requirement of emergency electrical power for the auxiliary
equipments supplied with the main motor/blower, same shall be informed.
12.0
Prefabricated FRP canopy shall be provided for all outdoor electrical equipments.
13.0
Vendor shall supply cable glands and tinned Cu/ Al crimping type lugs for equipment supplied
by them (Material of lugs will be dependent on the incoming cable conductor material, i.e. Al/
Cu lugs for Al/ Cu cables, which will be informed during detail engineering. No cost / time
implication shall be applicable on account of this). For outdoor equipment, double
compression type Nickel plated brass weather proof cable glands shall be supplied. The size
of cable glands supplied shall be appropriate to the size of cable.
14.0
VENDOR LIST
1) List of approved vendors for Electrical equipment/components is as per vendor list attached
elsewhere in the Tender.
2) Additional makes of imported items shall be subject to Owner/EILs approval during detailed
engineering.
3) Vendor may procure material from any of the listed vendors. However current validity and
range of approval as per EIL enlistment letter, workload, stability and solvency need to be
verified by the vendor before placement of order.
15.0
LIST OF ATTACHMENTS
Refer document no. A702-029-82-41-LL-4070.
Page 381 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE,
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT,BORL
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 1 of 21
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
FOR
PROJECT
OWNER
A
Rev.
No

BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
. 29.02.2016
Date
Issued for Tender
Purpose
KP
Prepared
by
ASDB
SB
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 382 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 2 of 21
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
TYPE & LOCATION OF CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTS
3.0
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
4.0
FIELD INSTRUMENTS
5.0
LOCAL PANEL REQUIREMENT
6.0
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT
7.0
INSTRUMENT AIR REQUIREMENT
8.0
CABLES AND CABLE GLANDS
9.0
JUNCTION BOXES
10.0
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
11.0
MISCELLANEOUS
12.0
SPARES
13.0
INSPECTION AND TESTING
14.0
LOGISTIC SUPPORT
15.0
VENDOR LIST
16.0
LIST OF ATTACHEMENTS
Page 383 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
S. No.
1.
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 3 of 21
GENERAL
Location of field equipments/
instruments
Area classification
Hazardous area
As per area classification mentioned in

Electrical section of tender.
Type of instrumentation
Electronic
Type of instruments
Smart
Operational requirements
Local panels,
SRR-3(satellite rack room-3) and CCR (central
control room).
Type of interlock & shutdown
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
system
supplied by Package vendor.
Logic representation
ISA
Distance
between
field 400 meters
equipments and SRR-3
Order of priority in case of any
In the event of any conflict between this
conflict between Tender
specification, data sheets, standard
documents
specifications, related standards, codes etc:
the following order of priority shall govern:
a) Statutory Regulations
b) Job Specifications
c) Standard Specifications
d) Codes & Standards
However, Bidder shall inform EIL/ Purchaser
for any discrepancy for resolution before
proceeding.
TYPE & LOCATION OF CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTS
Control, Monitoring, Interlock and PLC based control system supplied by bidder.
shutdown:
Bidder to note that this package PLC shall be
connected to purchasers DCS through
MODBUS serial link. During initial start up and
commissioning, the operation of the VPSA
oxygen plant shall be possible from the bidder
supplied operator cum engineering station
located at
SRR-3. However after plant
stabilization the operation will be carried out
from the purchasers DCS workstation located
at central control room.
Repeat alarms in local panels
As specified in P&IDs, equipment data sheets
and elsewhere in the package.
Start/ Stop, Auto/ Manual, Local/ Shall be directly wired to MCC.
Remote commands for all
electrical drives from local control
stations in field
Status signals of drives from
Shall be wired to bidders PLC marshalling
MCC
cabinet in SRR-3.
Machine Monitoring System
Bently Nevada BN 3500 series or Shinkawa
VM7 series(Refer Machine monitoring
system configuration drawing :A702-02916-51-3171)
Page 384 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 4 of 21
2.5.1
Monitors/ racks mounted in

Located in SRR-3, with LCD display unit
panel/ cabinet
located in local panels (purged enclosure).
2.5.2
4 Channel vibration modules, 6 channel temperature modules shall be provided as
per requirement.
2.5.3
Colour of panel/ cabinet (exterior) Shall match with colour of other panels/
located in MCR
cabinets in Satellite Rack Room (to be
communicated to successful Bidder during
detail engineering).
2.5.4
Shutdown signals
Potential free contacts required from monitors/
rack to bidders PLC. Bidder shall provide
relay module with programmable relays in
each rack.
2.5.5
Dual Redundant serial data
interface
between
Machine
Required
monitoring
system
and
purchasers DCS
Dual redundant serial data interface shall be provided by Bidder from Machine Monitoring
System to purchasers DCS through Modbus RTU protocol via RS 422/ 485 interfaces.
Bidder shall provide all required hardware, modules etc. for this interface. Bidder shall
provide Modbus Address Mapping List for this interface to purchasers DCS vendor for
configuring the interface.
2.5.6
Requirement of Connectivity with Bidder shall ensure the following for
Purchasers Condition Monitoring connectivity with Purchasers Condition
System.
Monitoring System :
(i) Bidder shall provide hardware like
communication processors in each rack.
(ii) Enabling software required if any for
connecting
to
Purchasers
Condition
Monitoring System for acquisition of raw data
from various monitors with respect to each
sensor shall be provided by Bidder.
(iii) Individual monitors shall have provision for
giving raw data (hardwired) to the Condition
Monitoring System.
3.
PLC BASED CONTROL SYSTEM
3.1
Type of control system and
Programmable Logic Controller (By Bidder).
Interlock & shutdown
All control system hardware shall be suitably
mounted in Rack (preferably 800 x 800 x
2100mm).
3.2
Location
SRR-3(for control, monitoring and normal
operation.)
3.3
PLC Scan Time
250 msec
3.4
Control processor loading
50 %
3.5
PLC Operator cum Engineering 1 No. at SRR-3 with Laser Jet Printer to be
Station PC
supplied by Bidder.
3.6
Type of screen
LED screen size of 22, shall have the latest
hardware, software and operating system
specifications password protected DVD reader
and writer, keyboard, optical mouse, all
software driver discs, Ethernet card with ports,
serial and parallel ports, sound card, graphics
card, PCI slots, etc as a minimum)
3.7
DCS operator station
Operator console (supplied by Purchaser)
Page 385 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 5 of 21
DCS operator console shall be used to view

graphics tag list, trends and purchaser will
able to operate the plant.
Existing DCS operator work station shall be
used to operate the VPSA plant.
Bidder to develop VPSA graphics in the PLC
HMI based on final P&IDs and Operation
philosophy.
Same
graphics
will
be
implemented in purchasers DCS console.
Resolution of SOE(sequence of Same as PLC scan time.
event)
Functional Requirements (*)
Interlock logics
Control algorithm
Sequence of Events
Dynamic Graphics
Configuration
DMR
Controller, communication modules, bus,
power supply, I/O cards,all shall be dual
redundant.
Power Supply
Redundant
Interposing Relays
Required.
Interface with purchasers DCS
Hardwired interface
Hardwired signal interface between Package
PLC and purchasers DCS/PLC shall be as
per approved P&IDs and functional loop
schematics. Bidder shall provide all necessary
hardware (I/O cards, signal multipliers,
isolators, relays etc.) in package PLC cabinets
wired up to terminal racks. Interface signals
shall be isolated 4-20 mA DC or potential free
contacts.
As a minimum following shall be considered in
hardwired interface:
4 to 20mA analog input from purchasers
control system for FIC-8401, FIC-2401 and
FIC-2402.
5 number digital input from purchasers control
system.
5 number digital output to purchasers control
system.
Serial interface
All hardware/ software required for connecting
package PLC to purchasers DCS through
redundant RS422 / 485 serial links with
MODBUS RTU protocol shall be supplied by
Bidder. For this interface, purchasers DCS
shall be considered as master. Bidder shall
provide the necessary converters. Serial link
shall be dual redundant. Coordination and
commissioning of this serial link at site with
purchasers DCS is bidders responsibility.
This serial communications shall be two way
between this PLC and DCS.
Page 386 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 6 of 21
Operator shall be able to view the graphics tag

list, trends and able to operate the plant from
DCS operation located in central control room.
Bidder to provide detail address mapping list
for communication from bidder supplied PLC
to purchaser DCS, PLC program Backup,
licensed software to run VPSA application
graphics in engineering station.
3.16
Interlock scheme
4.
4.1
FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
Process instrument type for
alarm/ shutdown
Ingress protection for instruments
and enclosures in field
4.2
4.3
Hazardous area protection for

instruments (Note-1)
All critical parameters e.g. pressure,

temperature, flow, current etc of VPSA
available on local panel shall be made
available on DCS.
Bidder shall provide the interlock and
shutdown schemes complete for package and
duly implemented and incorporated in Bidder
supplied PLC in the form of:
a) Logic diagram
b) Logic write up including Sequence of startup, shutdown & normal operation for
purchasers information.
Transmitter (switch action generated through
control system).
IP 65 as a minimum for transmitter, junction
boxes and SOVs (wherever applicable).
IP55 as a minimum for local panels.
Intrinsically safe in general. Solenoid valves
shall be flame proof (EExd). Junction boxes &
cable glands for flameproof instrument shall
be flameproof. Increased safety/ nonincendive concept is not acceptable for
instruments including Junction boxes and
Cable Glands.
Page 387 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 7 of 21
Note-1: Certification for use in hazardous area shall be as follows:

For all intrinsically safe / explosion / flameproof equipment / instruments which are
manufactured abroad and certified by any statutory authority like BASEEFA, FM,
UL, PTB, ATEX, LCIE etc. should also have the approval of PESO(Petroleum
Explosives safety organizer) / CCE(Chief Controller of Explosives),Nagpur.
For all flame proof equipments manufactured locally (indigenously), the testing
shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like CIMFR / ERTL etc. The
instruments shall in addition bear the valid approval from PESO (Petroleum
Explosives safety organizer) / CCE (Chief Controller of Explosives), Nagpur and a
valid BIS license.
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.3.1
4.4.3.2
4.4.3.3
4.5
a)
b)
c)
d)
For all intrinsically safe equipment manufactured locally (indigenously), the testing
shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like CIMFR / ERTL etc. The
equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval from PESO (Petroleum
Explosives safety organizer) / CCE (Chief Controller of Explosives), Nagpur.
Approvals other than above shall neither be offered nor will these be acceptable.
Transmitters
Type of Transmitter
Smart type with HART protocol
All make and model nos. of Smart transmitter and positioners provided by bidder
shall be suitable for calibration with bidders supplied universal type hand held
Configurator.
Integral LCD type output meter
Required (Display output in user configurable
engineering units) with each transmitter.
Temperature transmitter
Required for all temperature elements except
for bearing temperature element. Field remote
mounted,
but
not
head
mounted.
Thermocouple element shall be used for all
standard applications. RTD shall be used for
motor bearing and winding temperature. Dual
compartment type temperature transmitter
shall be used.
Level Transmitter
Selection of Level transmitters shall be based
on guidelines given below:
Level up to 2400 mm except for
Generally Guided Wave Radar type
services requiring purge or where
liquid might boil
Interface applications
Displacer type (external displacer) type to be
where GWR are not suitable.
Level above 2400 mm and for
Differential pressure type
services requiring purge, or where
liquid might boil
Transmitter accuracy (PT, PDT,
As given Below.
FT, DP LT)
For ranges of 760 mm WC
0.075% within a turndown of 1:10 of the
offered span
For ranges < 760 mm WC
0.15% within a turndown of 1:10 of the
offered span
Dia. Seal type with ranges 500 0.25% within a turndown of 1:10 of the
mm WC
offered span
Dia. Seal type with ranges < 500 0.5% within a turndown of 1:10 of the offered
mm WC
span
Page 388 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
4.6
a)
b)
c)
4.7
a)
b)
c)
4.8
4.9
a)
Temp. Transmitter accuracy (with

cold junction compensation with
thermocouple element)
For temperature > 350 C
For temperature between 150 C
to 350 C
For temperature < 150 C
Temp. Transmitter accuracy (with
RTD element)
For temperature range > 350 C
For temperature range between
150 C to 350 C
For temperature range < 150 C
Indicator in local panel (other
than vibration monitoring)
wherever required
Control valve positioner
Type
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 8 of 21
0.25% of range
0.5% of range
0.75% of range
0.075% of full scale

0.15% of full scale
0.2% of full scale
Microprocessor based, intrinsically safe. Loop
powered (MTL 600 series or equivalent).
4.14
a)
4.15
a)
Smart type with HART protocol (latest version)

(Note-2).
Note-2: The positioners shall be provided with necessary hardware/ software for
maintenance, diagnostics, programming etc.
Vibration effect
Shall have minimum vibration effect when
mounted on the control valve, which shall be
less than 1% of output span as per SAMA
PMC 31.1.
Positioner enclosure
Metallic
Control valve limit switches
Proximity type, intrinsically safe
Air Filter Regulator filter size
5 micron
Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve insulation class
Class H
Solenoid valve body material
SS316
For solenoid valves with Field Manual Reset, reset shall be through separate push
button (i.e. not integral reset with solenoid valve).
Pressure gauges
Case material
SS304
Safety type, solid front case for
Required for toxic service or with ranges 0 to
pressure gauge
100 kg/cm2g and above.
Temperature gauges
Bi-metallic type.
Case material
SS 304
Thermocouple
Duplex, Generally K type
Grounded/ ungrounded
Grounded type
4.16
RTD (wherever applicable)
4.17
Thermowell flange material
4.18
Terminal blocks
4.19
Terminals
b)
c)
4.10
4.11
4.12
a)
b)
4.13
a)
b)
PT-100, 3 wire, calibration as per IEC

60751.RTD shall be with class A accuracy.
Minimum 316 SS or better for thermowells and
thermowell flanges.
Internal terminal block for all instruments, antivibration type, suitable for terminating a
minimum of 1.5 mm2 size cable conductors.
Flying leads are not acceptable.
Screw less clamp type Phoenix or equivalent
Page 389 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 9 of 21
Barriers (wherever applicable)

IBR, H2 service testing and any
other special requirements
SS Tag plate
MTL 5000 series or equivalent P&F Series

Required, wherever applicable as per
PMS attached elsewhere in Tender.
Required for all instruments, gauge board, and
local panel.
Threaded end connections for instruments shall be to NPT as per ANSI B 1.20.1.
Flanged end connections shall be as per ANSI B 16.5. All flanges and flanged
valves shall have smooth surface finish (125 250 AARH) as per ASME B46.1.
LOCAL PANEL REQUIREMENT
Construction details
Free standing structure
Enclosure
Explosion proof.
All items like pushbuttons, selector switches,
lamps etc. mounted on Local control panel /
local gauge board shall be Explosion proof
suitable for the specified hazardous area
classification..
Purged enclosure
Other instrument items for which housing is
(if required)
not available in flameproof enclosures may be
provided in a purged enclosure protected by
type Z purging as per NFPA 496.
Material for all hinges, screws
Stainless steel
and other non-metallic parts
Alarm annunciator in local panel
Explosion proof type
Cable entry
Bottom
Incoming switch & fuse
Required
Power indication on panel front
Required
Lamp test facility
Required
Type of Emergency
Push type with protective cover.
Shutdown Push buttons in
local panel
Installed spares
Contractor shall include 20% spare status
lamps/ windows in alarm annunciator/
switches/ push buttons/ terminals in local
control panel.
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENT (Note-3)
Instruments & control system
110 V AC 50 Hz UPS
Interlock & shutdown
110 V AC 50 Hz UPS
Interrogation voltage for contact
24 V DC
input
Intrinsically safe transmitters
24 V DC
(loop powered)
Proximity type limit switches
24 V DC
Level gauge illumination
240 V AC 50 Hz (Non-UPS)
Panel lighting
240 V AC 50 Hz (Non-UPS)
Page 390 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 10 of 21
Note-3:
(i) Purchaser will provide one redundant power feeder of 110VAC UPS near
Bidder supplied PLC cabinet at SSR-3. Further distribution of power to various
equipments supplied by Bidder like PLC Engineering PC, Printers, MMS cabinet
etc. at SRR-3 and to any other voltage levels as required shall be carried out by
Bidder.
Purchaser will provide one additional power feeder of 110VAC UPS near Field
(local control panel, Analyzers, etc.).Further distribution, derivation to any other
voltage levels as required in field shall be carried out by Bidder.
(ii) Purchaser shall provide one power feeder for 240 V AC Non UPS near PLC
cabinet in SRR-3 for lighting purpose. Further distribution of same to Bidder
supplied PLC and MMS cabinets in SRR-3 shall be carried out by Bidder.
Purchaser will provide one additional power feeder of 240VAC Non UPS near
Field (local control panel, Analyzers, etc.) for lighting purpose.Further distribution
as required in field shall be carried out by Bidder.
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
8.
Bidder shall indicate estimated power consumption for 110 V AC (UPS) & 240 V
AC non UPS along with bid.
INSTRUMENT AIR REQUIREMENT (Note-4)
Minimum Pressure
4.5 Kg/cm2 g
Normal Pressure
6.5 Kg/ cm2 g
Maximum Pressure
7.0 Kg/ cm2 g
Note-4: Purchaser will provide one instrument air connection at battery limit of
VPSA Oxygen Plant Package. Further distribution of instrument air to all items
supplied by Bidder, shall be in Bidders scope.
CABLES & CABLE GLANDS
8.1
Type (single pair as well as

mulipair)
8.2
Flame retardant and low smoke
8.3
Cable glands
8.4
8.5
Slipper type PVC sleeves (cable

shrouds)
Cable entries
9.
JUNCTION BOXES
9.1
Separate JBs for signals

connected to PLC
Separate JBs for different type of
signals.
9.2
1.5 mm twisted in pair individually and overall

shielded with aluminium Mylar tape with drain
wire and armoured.
Required, Flame retardant as per IEC 60332
Cat. A.
SS 304, double compression type suitable for
armoured cables. Flameproof for flameproof
instruments/ junction boxes. Weather proof
cable glands shall be used for intrinsically safe
instruments.
Required (over cable glands for all cable
entries in junction boxes).
Generally NPTF for signal, NPTF
for power, 1 NPTF for 6 pair ,
1.5 NPTF for 12 pair/ 8 Triad.
Yes.
Yes.
Example: Separate JBs for signals for
Intrinsically safe & flameproof instruments,
4~20 mA signals,
Contacts,
Page 391 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
9.3
Type of JBs
9.4
Cable entry in JBs
10.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
10.1
Instrument impulse lines
10.2
Piping material used in

installation hook up
Tubing used in impulse line
10.3
10.4
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 11 of 21
Thermocouples/ RTDs (if JB applicable),

Solenoid valves,
Limit switches (proximity type).
Remote
field
mounted
indicators
in
interlock/control application shall be 1-in, 2 out
barrier from SRR-3.
Shall be suitable for 6 pair or 12 pair signal
cables.
From side or bottom
Piping for all hydrocarbon, high pressure

service (>= 600#)
(Note-5),
Tubing for utilities, upto 600#.
Note-5: Remote type Installation Standards shall be followed in general.
Instrument valve manifold

Impulse line isolation valve (after
first isolation valve which shall be
Gate type)
Impulse line vent & drain valves
Instrument air isolation valve for
each instrument
SS fittings
Instrument connection sizes
10.9
Instrument air supply tubing,

steam tracing tubing
10.10
10.12
Spacer Ring for diaphragm

seal installation with vent/
drain connection with valves
and plugs.
Radiography, IBR testing, Post
Weld Heat Treatment, Stress
relieving requirement etc.
Cable routing
10.13
Spare space in cable trays
10.14
Mounting of junction boxes
10.15
11.
Ferruling inside instrument JBs

MISCELLANEOUS
11.1
Proven track record
10.11
SPECIFICATION No.
As per Piping Material specifications.

Minimum SS 316 tube, OD size with 1.2
mm wall thickness
Integral type
Globe type
Gate type
Ball valve of SS 316
Swagelok/Parker
As per 7-52-0001 and 7-52-0002 attached with
Job Specification.
6 mm OD (min.) with 1 mm wall thickness SS
Tube for Air supply and 6 mm OD Copper tube
with 1 mm wall thickens for steam tracing.
Required
As per Piping Material Specifications

GI mild steel trays of 2.5 mm thickness.
Ladder trays shall be MS hot dip galvanized.
Cable trays shall have at least 50% spare
space.
All junction boxes shall be mounted at battery
limit by contractor.
Heat shrinkable printed sleeve type
The instruments as being offered / supplied
should have been operating satisfactorily
under similar process conditions for at least 6
Page 392 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
11.2
Vendor list
11.3
Specialty services
11.4
Painting Requirement
11.5
Logistic Support
12.
12.1
12.2
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 12 of 21
months.
Refer vendor list (Sl.No.15) provided with this
specification .Instrument vendor list attached
is for the make only, and not for any specific
Model. For any item, the offered model for
same must meet specifications and PTR
requirement. For items not appearing in
vendor list, after order Bidder shall furnish
proposed sub-vendor list for purchasers
approval.
For Machine monitoring system installation,
testing & commissioning shall be done under
supervision of respective manufacturers
specialists. Bidder to make specialists
services available.
Painting of installation material, instrument
supports and structural supports shall be as
per painting specification attached elsewhere
in Tender.
Logistic support certificate as per S.No 14,
from the suppliers of PLC and MMS shall be
provided by Bidder along with the offer.
SPARES (Note-6)
Startup & Commissioning spares Bidder shall provide instrument start up &
commissioning
spares
for
successful
commissioning of VPSA Oxygen Plant
Package.
Vendor shall procure these spares as per
recommendation of sub vendors/Suppliers and
these shall be available at the time of
commissioning. These shall include all
instrumentation and control items including for
sub-package items. Bidder shall note that in
case any additional spare is required during
erection and commissioning over and above
erection and commissioning spares, the same
shall be supplied by bidder without any time
and cost implications. Also, if any spares are
consumed
during
commissioning
from
mandatory spares, the same shall be
replenished by bidder without any cost
implication.
Installed Spares
Bidder shall provide installed spares as given
below:
I. For Programmable Logic Controller/MMS:
I/O Level- 20%
Marshalling Level- 20%
Spare Space :
I/O Level- 10%
Marshalling Rack- 10%
II. For each Local Panel
Status lamps, switches, push buttons and
other accessories like relays, MCBs, terminals
Page 393 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 13 of 21
etc.:- 20% duly wired.

12.3
12.4
12.5
13.
13.1
Consumable spares for 6 months
Bidder shall provide consumables for 6

months of continuous consumption and the
price shall be included in the base price. This
shall include printer paper, toner / cartridge,
etc.
Mandatory Spares
Bidder shall provide Mandatory spares as per
Mandatory spares list, A702-029-16-51-SL4070 attached.
Recommended Spares
Bidder shall separately quote spares item wise
for two years operation separately. Prices for
these spares shall not be included in the base
price of the package.
(Note-6): Requirements of spares indicated in any other Standard specification
attached with Tender shall not be considered unless specifically mentioned above.
INSPECTION & TESTING
Factory
1
testing & inspection of all Yes.
instrument items including PLC
and MMS by Vendors authorized
representatives, EIL/Purchaser,
unless specified otherwise.
14. LOGISTIC SUPPORT CERTIFICATE

1. Vendor must furnish Certificate for providing necessary support services in favour of the
Owner (M/s BORL) committing themselves to provide logistic support and performance
guarantee to purchaser in the format furnished along with this portion of Tender.
2. The Certificate must be signed with seal by the official signatory on the companys letter
head.
Certificate for logistics support
(To be signed by Manufacturers corporate level signatory on company's letterhead)

I, on behalf of M/s
confirm that the *
Model No. __________________
quoted by M/s
for BORL, Revamp and capacity enhancement
project, shall continue to be supported by us.
The quoted item shall not be withdrawn from Indian market as a matter of our corporate policy.
I further confirm that in case of placement of order by BORL on M/s
, we shall continue
to support M/s
in providing back-up engineering, maintenance support and
spare part to BORL for a period of 10 years from the date of placement of order.
SIGNATURE WITH SEAL

Page 394 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 14 of 21
AUTHORIZED, SENIOR MANAGEMENT LEVEL

* PLC.
15. VENDOR LIST:

1 ) FIELD INSTRUMENTS (P,DP,F,L,T,TD)
ABB AUTOMATION PRODUCTS GMBH
ABB INDIA LTD-BANGALORE
EMERSON PROCES MGMT ASIA PACIFIC PTE LTD
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT INDIA PVT LTD
ENDRESS + HAUSER INSTRUMENTS INTL. AG
ENDRESS + HAUSER (I) PVT LTD.
FUJI ELECTRIC SYSTEMS CO. LTD
HONEYWELL AUTOMATION INDIA LTD
HONEYWELL INC.
INVENSYS INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YOKOGAWA INDIA LIMITED
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
2) PRESSURE GAUGES
AN INSTRUMENTS PVT LTD
ASHCROFT INDIA PVT LTD
BADOTHERM PROCESS INSTRUMENTS B.V.
BAUMER BOURDON HAENNI SAS
BRITISH ROTOTHERM CO.LTD
BUDENBERG GAUGE CO. LTD
DRESSER INC.
GAUGES BOURDON (I) PVT. LTD. (GEN.INST)
H GURU INSTRUMENTS(SOUTH INDIA)PVT. LTD
H.GURU INDUSTRIES
MANOMETER (INDIA) PVT. LTD.
NAGANO KEIKI SEISAKUSHO LTD
WALCHANDNAGAR INDUSTRIES LTD(TIWAC DIVN)
WIKA ALEXANDER WIEGAND & CO GMBH
WIKA INSTRUMENTS INDIA PVT LTD
INDIA
INDIA
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
U.K.
U.K.
USA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
3) TEMP.ELEMENTS & THERMOWELLS

ABB AUTOMATION LTD
ALTOP INDUSTRIES LTD.
DAILY THERMETRICS CORPORATION
DETRIV INSTRUMENTATION & ELECTRONICS LTD
GAYESCO LLC
GENERAL INSTRUMENTS CONSORTIUM
JAPAN THERMOWELL CO LTD
PYRO-ELECTRIC INSTRUMENTS GOA PVT LTD
TECHNO INSTRUMENTS
TEMP-TECH
TEMPSENS INSTRUMENTS INDIA PVT LTD
THERMO ELECTRIC CO. INC.
THERMO-COUPLE PRODUCTS CO
THERMO-ELECTRA B.V
THERMAL INSTRUMENT (I) P LTD (GEN.INST.)
TM TECNOMATIC SPA
INDIA
INDIA
USA
INDIA
USA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
ITALY
Page 395 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 15 of 21
INDIA
4) SPL. LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (GUIDED WAVE

RADAR)
ABB INC (FORMLY K622)
ENDRESS + HAUSER INSTRUMENTS INTL. AG
ENDRESS + HAUSER (I) PVT LTD.
KROHNE MESSTECHNIK GMBH & CO KG
L & J TECHNOLOGIES
MAGNETROL INTERNATIONAL N.V.
VEGA GRIESHABER KG
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
SINGAPORE
INDIA
INDIA
5) CONTROL VALVES
ARCA REGLER GMBH
AST APPARECCHI DI SICUREZZA E TENUTA SPA
CCI VALVE TECHNOLOGY GMBH
CONTINENTAL VALVE LTD
DRESSER PRODUITS INDUSTRIELS
DRESSER VALVE INDIA PVT LTD
EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT CHENNAI LTD.
FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROL PVT LTD-BANGALOR
FLOWSERVE PTE LTD
FORBES MARSHALL ARCA P LTD.
ITALVALV S.N.C
KENT INTROL UK LTD (FORM. A-718)
KOSO INDIA PVT LTD (FORM.K176)
METSO FLOW CONTROL OY(M700)
MIL CONTROLS LIMITED
MOTOYAMA ENGG WORKS LTD
SAMSON AG MESS-UND REGELTECHNIK
SAMSON CONTROLS PVT LTD
SEVERN GLOCON LTD
SEVERN GLOCON INDIA PVT LTD
SPX VALVES & CONTROLS (FORMERLY DEZURIK)
WEIR VALVES & CONTROLS UK LTD
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
6) PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

ANDERSON GREENWOOD CROSBY
AST APPARECCHI DI SICUREZZA E TENUTA SPA
BHEL (TRICHY)
BLISS ANAND PVT LTD
CURTISS WRIGHT FLOW CONTROL CORPORATION
DRESSER INC.
FUKUI SEISAKUSHO CO LTD
INSTRUMENTATION LTD. (PALGHAT)
LESER GMBH & CO. KG
NAKAKITA SEISAKUSHO CO LTD
TYCO SANMAR LTD
WEIR BDK VALVES-A UNIT OF WEIR INDIA PVT
INDIA
ITLAY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
GERMANY
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
7) PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER

ABB LTD (BANGALORE)
INDIA
Page 396 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
ASEA BROWN BOVERY LIMITED

EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PVT
LTD.
GE FANUC AUTOMATION NORTH AMERICA
GE FANUC SYSTEMS PVT LTD
HIMA PAUL HILDEBRANDT GMBH + CO KG
HONEYWELL INC.
ICS TRIPLEX
INVENSYS SOFTWARE SYSTEMS (S) PTE LTD
LARSEN & TOUBRO LTD
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INDIA LTD
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC INDIA PVT LTD
SIEMENS AG GERMANY
SIEMENS LIMITED
YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD.
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 16 of 21
INDIA
INDIA
U.S.A.
INDIA
GERMANY
U.S.A.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.S.A.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
8) SIGNAL CABLES
ASSOCIATED CABLES PVT LTD.
ASSOCIATED FLEXIBLES AND WIRES (P) LTD.
CMI LIMITED
CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD.
DELTON CABLES LIMITED
ELKAY TELELINKS LTD.
KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED
POLYCAB WIRES PVT LTD.
RALLISON ELECTRICALS PVT. LTD.
SUYOG ELECTRICALS LTD.
T C COMMUNICATION PVT. LTD.(T243)
THERMO CABLES LTD. (FORM. T-150)
UDEY PYROCABLES PVT. LTD.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
9) THERMO COUPLE EXTN. CABLES

ASSOCIATED CABLES PVT LTD.
ASSOCIATED FLEXIBLES AND WIRES (P) LTD.
CORDS CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD.
DELTON CABLES LIMITED
KEI INDUSTRIES LIMITED
THERMO CABLES LTD.
T C COMMUNICATION PVT. LTD.
UDEY PYROCABLES PVT. LTD.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
10) SOLENOID VALVES

AVCON CONTROLS PVT. LTD.
ASCO NUMATICS (INDIA) P. LIMITED
ASCO JOUCOMATIC LTD
ALCON ALEXANDER CONTROLS LIMITED
ASCO JOUCOMATIC SA
HERION WERKE
PRECISION INSTRUMENT COMPANY
ROTEX AUTOMATION LTD.
SCHRADER DUNCAN LIMITED
THOMPSON VALVES LTD
VERSA BV
U.K.
INDIA
FRANCE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
NETHERLANDS
Page 397 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 17 of 21
11) ON/OFF VALVES

CAMERON ITALY SRL
CONTINENTAL VALVE LTD
EL-O-MATIC INDIA (PVT) LTD
FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROLS PVT. LTD.
FLOWSERVE PTE LTD
HINDLE COCKBURNS LIMITED
ITALVALV S.N.C
KITAMURA VALVE MANUFACTURING CO LTD
KITZ CORPORATION OF EUROPE S.A.
KOSO INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED (K179B)
L & T VALVES LIMITED
MICROFINISH VALVES PVT LIMITED
METSO AUTOMATION PTE LTD(FORMERLY NELES)
PIBIVIESSE S.R.L.
TYCO VALVES & CONTROLS
PENTAIR VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT LTD
PERRIN GMBH
ROTEX MANUFACTURERS & ENGINEERS P LTD.
SINGAPORE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
ITALY
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
FINLAND
JAPAN
INDIA
ITALY
GERMANY
U.S.A.
INDIA.
INDIA
GERMANY
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
12) CONTROL PANEL AND ACCESSORIES

ACCUSONIC CONTROLS PVT LTD
ELECTRONIC CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
ELECTRONIC INSTRMNTATION & CONTROL P LTD
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS & APPLIANCES PVT LTD
INSTRUMENTATION LTD
IRIS AUTOMATION PVT LTD
POSITRONICS PVT LTD
PRIMA AUTOMATION INDIA PVT LTD
PYROTECH ELECTRONICS PVT LTD
RADHA KRISHNA CONTROLS
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
13) ORIFICE PLATE AND FLANGES

BALIGA LIGHTING EQUIPMENTS (P) LIMITED
CAMERON LTD.
COMFIT & VALVES PVT. LTD.
DANIEL MEASURMNT & CONTROL ASIA PACIFIC
EUREKA INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS (P) LTD.
GURU NANAK ENGG WORKS
INSTRUMENTATION LTD. (PALGHAT)
MICRO PRECISION PRODUCTS PVT LTD
MINCO (INDIA) PVT LTD (GEN. INST.)
PETROL VALVES SRL
PIETRO FIORENTINI SPA
STAR-MECH CONTROLS (INDIA) PVT LTD
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
SINGAPORE
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
ITALY
INDIA
Page 398 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
TM TECNOMATIC SPA
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 18 of 21
ITALY
14) TEMPERATURE.GAUGES (BI METALLIC, FILLED SYSTEM)

ASHCROFT INDIA PVT LTD
BADOTHERM PROCESS INSTRUMENTS B.V.
BAUMER BOURDON HAENNI SAS
BAUMER TECHNOLOGIES INDIA PVT.LTD
DRESSER INC.
GAUGES BOURDON (I) PVT. LTD. (GEN.INST)
GOA INSTRUMENTS INDUSTRIES PVT. LTD.
H GURU INSTRUMENTS (SOUTH INDIA) PVT. LTD
H.GURU INDUSTRIES
NAGANO KEIKI SEISAKUSHO LTD
SOLARTRON ISA
WALCHANDNAGAR INDUSTRIES LTD (TIWAC DIVN)
INDIA
INDIA
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
INDIA
U.S.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
U.K.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
15) SELF ACTUATED PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE

ELSTER-INSTROMET NV-FORMER. I563
EMERSON PROCES MGMT CHENNAI PVT LTD
ESME VALVES LTD.
GORTER CONTROLS B.V.
NIRMAL INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PVT. LTD.
PIETRO FIORENTINI SPA
RICHARDS INDUSTRIES (FORMERLY TRELOAR)
RMG REGEL+MESSTECHNIK GMBH
SAMSON CONTROLS PVT LTD
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K
NETHERLANDS
INDIA
ITALY
U.S.A
GERMANY
INDIA
INDIA
16) VARIABLE AREA FLOW METERS (I, T)

ABB AUTOMATION PRODUCTS LTD
ALFLOW GLASS EQUIPMENTS
ASA SPA
BROOKS INSTRUMENT
EUREKA INDUSTRIAL EQUIPMENTS (P) LTD.
HEINRICHS MESSTECHNIK GMBH
INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERS PVT. LTD.
KROHNE MARSHALL PVT. LTD
KROHNE MESSTECHNIK GMBH & CO KG
PLACKA INSTRUMENTS INDIA P LTD
ROTA YOKOGAWA GMBH & CO. KG
TOKYO KEISO CO LTD
YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
INDIA
GERMANY
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
17) PILOT OPERATED SAFETY VALVE

ANDERSON GREENWOOD CROSBY
AST APPARECCHI DI SICUREZZA E TENUTA
BLISS ANAND PVT LTD
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
Page 399 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 19 of 21
CAMERON LTD
CURTISS WRIGHT FLOW CONTROL CORPORATION
DRESSER INC.
LESER GMBH & CO. KG
TYCO SANMAR LTD
WEIR VALVES & CONTROLS FRANCE
U.K.
INDIA
INDIA.
GERMANY
INDIA
FRANCE
18) DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES

BAUMER TECHNOLOGIES INDIA PVT LTD
GAUGE BOURDEN PVT LTD
HIRLEKAR PRECISION ENGINEERING PVT LTD
SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
19) SPECIAL CONTROL VALVES (BUTTERFLY)

FLOWSERVE INDIA CONTROL PVT LTD
FLOWSERVE PTE LTD
ITALVALV S.N.C
METSO FLOW CONTROL
TYCO VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
20) SPECIAL CONTROL VALVES (MIXED)

FLOWSERVE PTE LTD
ITALVALV S.N.C
KITAMURA VALVE MANUFACTURING CO LTD
METSO FLOW CONTROL OY
KOSO INDIA PVT LTD
TYCO VALVES & CONTROLS INDIA PVT. LTD.
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
ITALY
INDIA
JAPAN
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
U.K.
INDIA
21) PROCESS STREAM ANALYSERS (O2-ZIRCONIA)

ABB AUTOMATION LTD
ABB INDIA LTD (BANGALORE)
AMETEK
GE SENSING EMEA
U.K
INDIA
USA
SINGAPORE
INDIA
IRELAND
Page 400 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SYSTECH INSTRUMENTS
SECO CONTROLS PVT LTD
SERVOMEX GROUP LTD.
TELEDYNE ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 20 of 21
UK
INDIA
UK
USA
JAPAN
INDIA
22) PROCESS STREAM ANALYSER-MOISTURE/ DEW PT

AMETEK
USA
COSA XENTAUR CORPORATION
USA
GE SENSING EMEA
INDIA
MICHELL INSTRUMENTS LTD
U.K.
SERVOMEX GROUP LTD.
INDIA
USA
23) PROCESS STREAM ANALYSER (PARAMAGNETIC-O2)
ABB AUTOMATION LTD

ABB INDIA LTD (BANGALORE)
GE SENSING EMEA
HORIBA LTD
SERVOMEX GROUP LTD.
SICK AG
SIEMENS AG
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
INDIA
GERMANY
INDIA
USA
JAPAN
INDIA
JOB SPECIFICATION
(INSTRUMENTATION)
REVAMP AND CAPACITY
SPECIFICATION No.
A702-029-16-51-SP-4070, Rev A
Page 21 of 21
16. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS:
S. No.
1.
Document
Technical
Compliance
No. of
Document No.
Rev.
Dated
A609-029-16-51-CF-4070
29/02/2016
sheets
Statement
2.
Vendor Data Requirements
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
29/02/2016
3.
Mandatory spares
A702-029-16-51-SL-4070
29/02/2016
4.
System Configuration Diagram
A702-029-16-51-3170
for VPSA oxygen plant

5.
Machine
monitoring
system
A702-029-16-51-3171
Standard
Specification
for
29/02/2016
1
6-52-0052
Package Units
7.
configuration drawing
6.
29/02/2016
0
16/03/15
74
6-52-0040
30/06/15
36
7-52-0001
27/01/15
9.
Standard
Specification
for
Programmable Logic Controllers
Standard for Inst. Connection on
vessels, standpipes and tanks
Instrument Connection On Pipes
7-52-0002
27/01/15
10.
Thermowell
7-52-0035
3
21/03/12
19/07/11
8.
&
Built-up
Thermowell
11.
Page 401 of 1744
Thermocouple/RTD
with Thermowell
Assembly
7-52-0036
Page 402 of 1744
GEOTECHNICAL DATA FOR

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014
Rev.
0
Page 1 of 10
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT :

PROJECT
OWNER :
BORL
PMC
EIL
JOB NO. :
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
0
Rev.
No
01.02.2016
Date
ISSUED FOR BID
Purpose
SK
SB
VKP
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Page 403 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 10
GEOTECHNICAL DATA FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

1.0
GENERAL
M/s. BORL proposes to construct a VPSA Oxygen Plant and its associate facilities to
cater the requirements of the Debottlenecking project of Bina refinery at Bina, Madhya
Pradesh.
Subsoil data and foundation recommendations included herein are based on soil
investigations carried out in the near vicinity of proposed plant area. Borehole logs
available in the nearby area are enclosed for reference. Bidder shall carry out
confirmatory soil investigations to check and confirm the soil conditions and/or to
develop additional soil data as required for foundation design purposes and submit
the report to PMC/Owner for their review. However, the recommended bearing
capacities included herein shall not be exceeded in any case. Notwithstanding the
information given herein, no extra claim on time and/or cost shall be entertained by owner
in case of change in any data due to subsoil variations.
2.0
SCOPE OF WORK
2.1
Carrying out confirmatory soil investigation consisting of minimum 2 nos. boreholes of

10m deep and 1 nos. block vibration test to generate required soil parameters including
laboratory tests as per relevant IS codes in the proposed area. Specification and scheme
for soil investigation shall be submitted to Owner/PMC for review and approval.
2.2
A Foundation Design Basis/Comprehensive Geotechnical Recommendation

Document shall be prepared by the bidder clearly stating type of foundations for all
structures/facilities covered under VPSA Oxygen Plant package giving all back-up
calculations and the same shall be submitted to PMC/Owner for their review before
execution.
2.3
It is incumbent upon the bidder to seek all technical clarifications concerning the job prior
to the bid preparation. No such clarifications shall be entertained after the award of job.
Notwithstanding this, the decision of Engineer-in-Charge, in case of any disputes shall be
final. However, it must be clearly understood by the contractor that any extra claim and/or
time extension shall not be granted under any circumstances.
3.0
GROUND TOPOGRAPHY
The proposed area of the VPSA Oxygen plant is graded. Details of Natural Ground Levels
(NGL) as existed prior to accomplishment of general site grading work is varying from RL
416.00m to RL 416.50m and the finished ground level of the area is RL 416.0m. Hence,
filling of 0.5m to 1.0m has taken place in the proposed plant area. However, for exact
details regarding finished ground level and depth of cut/fill in the proposed area, reference
may be made to drawings/documents enclosed elsewhere in the tender.
4.0
SUB-SOIL PROFILE
Available borehole log of boreholes NB-12, NB-13, NB-25 & NB-26 are enclosed for
reference.
Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 404 of 1744
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 10
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
5.0
GROUND WATER TABLE

For design purpose, ground water table may be considered at depth of 2.0m below
finished ground level (FGL).
6.0
FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS
6.1
Shallow Foundations
Bearing capacities as given in the Table-1 below are recommended for the design of
shallow foundations. Bearing capacities have been worked out based on the available
borehole logs, laboratory test results and broad engineering judgment.
Table-1
Width of
Foundation
(M)
Shape of
Foundation
Depth of
foundation
below FGL/NGL
whichever is
lower (m)
Net Safe
Bearing
Capacity
in Shear
(T/M2)
Net Safe Bearing

Capacity in (T/M2) for
settlement of
25 mm
40 mm
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
L/B1.5
1 to 6
Do
1.0
20
20
20
Raft
1.0
20
20
Note:
6.2
i)
Minimum width of foundation shall be 1.0m.
ii)
The above values given in column (iv) may be increased by 25% under wind and
50% under seismic conditions.
iii)
Foundation pit bottom shall be covered with mud mat immediately after completion
of excavation.
iv)
Any filled up soil/loose soil/soft patch/oil contaminated soil if encountered at

foundation level shall be completely removed and replaced with well-compacted
sand fill.
Minor/Lightly Loaded Structures not Sensitive to Settlement

Foundations may be placed at 750mm below FGL for net allowable safe bearing capacity
not exceeding 6.0 T/m2 up to 2.0m width of foundation. In case, rock strata is encountered
at surface/shallower depths, foundations may be designed considering net safe bearing
capacity of 15 T/m2 with minimum embedment of 500mm inside the rock strata.
Prior to placement of foundation excavated pit shall be well compacted. However, if any
loose/soft soil is encountered at the foundation depth, the same shall be removed and
refilled with excavated soil and compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm thickness to
95% of maximum laboratory dry density as per IS 2720 part VIII.
Page 405 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 10
Minimum width of foundation shall be 1.0m. Back filling after casting of foundations shall
be done as per the clause no. 11.0.
7.0
UNDER GROUND PIPING

The following parameters are given for design of underground piping:
8.0
1.
Modulus of Elasticity (E)
80-100 kg/cm2
2.
Density of moist soil (b)
1750 kg/m3
3.
K factor
0.17
DEEP EXCAVATIONS
In case of deep excavations, special measures like side supports/proper slope and
appropriate dewatering system may have to be resorted to. It shall be contractors
responsibility to mobilize necessary equipment to carryout deep excavations wherever
required without any extra cost and time implication to the owner.
9.0
ROADS AND PAVEMENT

Laying of road/pavement formation shall be as per IRC-37 (latest edition). Proper
cambering and top sealing of the road and pavement shall be provided to restrict the
ingress of rain-water in sub-grade.
10.0
AGGRESSIVENESS OF SOIL AND GROUND WATER TO FOUNDATION CONCRETE

Chemical analysis of ground water & soil samples shows maximum chloride and sulphate
content are within the permissible limit. Therefore, no special precautions for concreting of
sub-structures against chloride and sulphate are required. Ordinary Portland
cement/Portland slag cement/Portland Pozzolana cement may be used for all sub
structure concreting works.
11.0
BACK FILLING
The soil available in this plant area is suitable for back filling. The back filling in
foundations may be done with excavated soil as per directions of Engineer-in-charge. This
shall be laid in layers not exceeding 200mm loose thickness and compacted to 90%
Standard Proctor Density.
Page 406 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 10
Page 407 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 6 of 10
Page 408 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 7 of 10
Page 409 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 8 of 10
Page 410 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 9 of 10
Page 411 of 1744

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-SP-0014 Rev. 0
Page 10 of 10
Page 412 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION FOR

SURFACE PREPARATION AND
PROTECTIVE COATING
JOB SPECIFICATION No.

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 1 OF 49
DEBOTTLE NECKING PROJECT BORL
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
PROTECTIVE COATING
(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
1-5-2015
Issued after revision
SAHIL / DHANANJAY
SRIDHAR
P. SAHA
25.03.2015
ISSUED AS JOB SPECIFICATION
SAHIL / DHANANJAY
SRIDHAR
P. SAHA
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked
by
Approved by
Page 413 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 2 OF 49
AS
CS
SS
DFT
WFT
ID
IRN
LTCS
MS
NB
OD
RCC
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Alloy Steel
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
Dry Film Thickness
Wet Film Thickness
Internal Diameter
Low Temperature Carbon Steel
Mild Steel
Nominal Bore
Outside Diameter
Reinforced Cement Concrete
Page 414 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 3 OF 49
CONTENTS
SL.
NO
PAGE
NO.
DESCRIPTION
1.0
Scope .
2.0
General
3.0
Reference Codes & Standards......
4.0
Equipment
5.0
Surface Preparation, Shop Primer, Coating Application & Repair and Documentation.
6.0
Paint Materials..
14
7.0
Coating Systems...
19
8.0
Storage..
20
9.0
Paint colour code for piping and equipment ...
20
10.0
Recommended paint colour code
22
11.0
Painting for civil defense requirements
29
12.0
Selection of paint materials..
29
13.0
Quality Control, Inspection and Testing.
29
14.0
Guarantee ..... 33
15.0
Annexure 1 (coating systems)..................................................................................
34
Page 415 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 4 OF 49
1.0
SCOPE
This specification outlines the technical requirement of protective coating for new
construction. This specification shall be applicable for shop & field painting of equipment,
structures, vessels, piping, storage tanks, vessels, chimneys, under insulation painting for hot
and cold insulation of equipments and piping etc.
This specification shall not be applicable for gratings and structural members which are
galvanized as per other standard given elsewhere in the contract.
2.0
EXTENT OF WORK
2.0.1
In general, this specification is applied but not limited to the following:
All uninsulated Carbon Steel & Alloy Steel equipments like vessels, Columns, storage
Tanks, Exchangers if any, parts of boilers etc.
All uninsulated carbon steel, low alloy and related piping, fittings and valves (including
painting of identification marks), furnace ducts and stacks.
All insulated parts of vessels, boilers, chimneys, stacks, piping and steam piping and if any
other insulated items present.
All items contained in a package unit as necessary.
All structural steel work, pipe, structural steel supports, handrails, platforms etc.
Flare lines, external surfaces of MS chimney with or without refractory lining and internal
surfaces of MS chimney without refractory lining. (If present)
Identification of colour bands on all piping as required including insulated aluminium clad,
SS and nonferrous piping.
Identification lettering/ numbering on all painted surfaces of equipment/piping insulated

aluminium clad, SS and non-ferrous piping.
Marking / identification signs on painted surfaces of equipment/piping including

hazardous service.
Supply of all primers, paints and all other materials required for painting (other than Owner
supplied materials)
Painting of pre-erection/fabrication and Shop primer.
Repair work of damaged pre-erection/ fabrication and shop primer and weld joints in the
field/site before and after erection as required.
All internal surfaces of CS storage tanks & vessels and RCC tanks in ETP plant.
Page 416 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 5 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
2.0.2
Quality control, testing and inspection during all stages of work (surface preparation,
application of coating and testing of furnished coating).
The following surfaces and materials shall not require painting in general. However, if there
is any specific requirement by the owner, the same shall be painted as per the relevant
specifications:
a.
Un-insulated austenitic stainless steel.
b.
Plastic and/or plastic coated materials.
c.
Galvanized steel .
d.
Non-ferrous materials like aluminum, Cu-Ni alloy.
Clause c of 2.0.2 is not applicable for hand railing/staircases/ladders

2.1
Documents
2.1.1
The contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the following documents issued to
him for execution of work.
a.
Bill of quantities for piping, equipment, machinery and structures etc.
b.
Piping Line List.
c.
Painting specifications including special civil defense requirements.
2.2
Unless otherwise instructed, final paint coating (i.e., application of field primer, wherever
required, intermediate and top coats) on pre-erection/ shop primed equipments shall be
applied at site, only after all welding, testing on systems are completed as well as after
completion of steam purging wherever required .
2.3
Changes and deviations required for any specific job due to clients requirement or otherwise
shall be referred to EIL for deviation permit.
3.0
REFERENCE CODES & STANDARDS
3.1
The following standards & codes are referred in this specification. Latest revision of these
shall be referred.
IS-101
IS-2379
ISO-12944 1thru 8
:
:
:
ASTM-Vol 6.01&6.03 :
ANSI A 13.1
:
Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels

Indian Standard for Pipe line identification-color code
Corrosion Protection of steel Structures by Protective Paint
System
American standard test methods for Paints and Coatings.
Scheme for identification of piping systems: American
National Standards Institution
Page 417 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 6 OF 49
SSPC
: Steel Structures Painting Council
EIL STANDARD 6-79-0011 : Standard specification for tape coating for underground
plant piping
3.2
Surface Preparation Standards
The latest editions of any of the following standards shall be followed for surface preparation:
3.2.1
ISO 8501-1 / SIS-05 59 00: ISO standard for Preparation of steel substrates before
application of paints and related products. This standard contains photographs of the various
standards on four different degrees of rusted steel and as such is preferable for inspection
purpose by the Engineer-In-Charge.
3.2.2
Steel Structures Painting Council, U.S.A. (Surface Preparation Specifications (SSPC-SP).
3.2.3
National Association of Corrosion Engineers, U.S.A., (NACE).
3.2.4
Various International Standards equivalent to Swedish Standard for surface preparations are
given in Table-I.
3.3
The contractor shall arrange, at his own cost, to keep a set of latest edition of above standards
and codes at site.
4.0
EQUIPMENT
4.1
All tools, brushes, rollers, spray guns, blast material, hand power tools for cleaning and all
equipments, scaffolding materials, shot & grit blasting equipments & air compressors etc.
required to be used shall be suitable for the work and all in good order and shall be arranged
by the contractor at site and in sufficient quantity. The manufacturers test certificates / data
sheets for all the above items shall be reviewed by Engineer-in-charge at site before start of
work.
4.2
Mechanical mixer shall be used for paint mixing operations in case of two pack systems except
that the Engineer-In-Charge may allow the hand mixing of small quantities at his discretion in
case of specific requirement for touch up work only.
5.0
SURFACE PREPARATION, SHOP PRIMER COATING APPLICATION & REPAIR

AND DOCUMENTATION
5.1
General
5.1.1
In order to achieve the maximum durability, one or more of following methods of surface
preparation shall be followed, depending on condition of surface to be painted and as instructed
by Engineer-In-Charge. Adhesion of the paint film to surface depends largely on the degree of
cleanliness of the metal surface. Proper surface preparation contributes more to the success of
the paint protective system.
a.
Abrasive blast cleaning
b.
Mechanical or power tool cleaning
Page 418 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 7 OF 49
5.1.2
Mill scale, rust, rust scale and foreign matter shall be removed fully to ensure that a clean and
dry surface is obtained. Unless otherwise specified, surface preparation shall be done as per
provisions of relevant tables given elsewhere in this specification.
Before surface preparation by blast cleaning, the surface shall be degreased by aromatic
solvent to remove all grease, oil etc.
5.1.3
Irrespective of whether external or internal surface to be coated, blast cleaning shall not be
performed where dust can contaminate surfaces undergoing such cleaning or during humid
weather conditions having humidity exceed 85%. In case of internal coating of storage tanks,
dehumidifier shall be used, to control humidity level below 60%. Dehumidifier should depress
the dew point of air in the enclosed space, sufficient enough so as to maintain it 3C below the
metal substrate temperature during centre period of blasting and coating application. During
the interval time between application of primer coat and subsequent intermediate and top coats
or between blast cleaning completion and start of application of primer coat, dehumidifier unit
should be in continuous operation to ensure that no condensation occurs on substrate.
Dehumidifier should be able to maintain grain drop (moisture removal) at the rate of 25 grains
per pound of air per hour. Dehumidifier should have capacity of at least 2 air changes per hour
of the enclosed space. All necessary psychometric data should be collected by contractor for
the given site conditions before starting operation of dehumidifier to ensure that desired values
of dew point, moisture content in enclosed scope is achieved.
Dehumidification to be maintained round the clock for surface preparation and painting till the
total coating application is over.
Dehumidifier shall not be stopped under any condition till the entire blasted surface is primed
to the satisfaction of the technical representative of the paint manufacturer interested with
quality assurance for the work. In case the dehumidifier breaks down in middle of the job, the
same shall be replaced at the risk and the cost of the contractor and the entire unfinished work
shall be repeated.
5.1.4
The Engineer in-charge shall have the right to disallow usage of dehumidifier if the
performance is not meeting the specified requirements. Under such circumstances the
contractor shall remove the equipment and replace the same with another equipment to provide
satisfactory results without any additional cost to the owner.
5.1.5
Irrespective of the method of surface preparation, the first coat of primer must be applied by
airless spray/ air assisted conventional spray if recommended by the paint manufacturer on dry
surface. This should be done immediately and in any case within 4 hours of cleaning of surface.
However, at times of unfavorable weather conditions, the Engineer-In-Charge shall have the
liberty to control the time period, at his sole discretion and/or to insist on re-cleaning, as may
be required, before primer application is taken up. In general, during unfavorable weather
conditions, blasting and painting shall be avoided as far as practicable.
5.1.6
The external surface of R.C.C. chimney to be painted shall be dry and clean. Any loose particle
of sand, cement, aggregate etc. shall be removed by scrubbing with soft wire brush. Acid
etching with 10-15% HCL solution for about 15 minutes shall be carried and surface must be
thoroughly washed with water to remove acid & loose particles and then dried completely
before application of paint.
Page 419 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 8 OF 49
5.2
Procedure for Surface Preparation
5.2.1
Air Blast Cleaning with abrasives

The surfaces shall be blast cleaned using the mixture of abrasives like mixture of iron shots
and grit only at pressure of 7kg/cm2 at an appropriate distance and angle depending of nozzle
size maintaining constant velocity and pressure. Chilled cast iron or steel shall be in the form
of shot or grit of size in the range of G16 G42 conforming to SSPC AB1 and S250 grade
size of steel shots (maximum) to obtain a desired surface profile of 35-50 microns trough to
peak. For all other abrasives, size shall be in the range of G16 G24. The combination of steel
grits and shots shall be normally in the ratio of 3:1. The quality of abrasives shall be free from
contaminants and impurities and shall meet the requirements of SSPC AB1. Compressed air
shall be free from moisture and oil. The blasting nozzles should be venturi style with tungsten
carbide or boron carbide as the materials for liners. Nozzles orifice may vary from 3/16 to
. On completion of blasting operation, the blasted surface shall be clean and free from any
scale or rust and must show a grey white metallic luster. Primer/first coat of paint shall be
applied within 4 hours of surface preparation. Blast cleaning shall not be done outdoors in bad
weather without adequate protection or when there is dew on the metal, which is to be cleaned.
Surface profile shall be uniform to provide good key to the paint adhesion (i.e. 35 to 50
microns). If possible vacuum collector shall be installed for collecting the abrasives and
recycling.
5.2.2
Mechanical or Power Tool Cleaning

Power tool cleaning shall be done by mechanical striking tools, chipping hammers, grinding
wheels or rotating steel wire- brushes. Excessive burnish of surface shall be avoided as it can
reduce paint adhesion. On completion of cleaning, the detached rust mill scale etc. shall be
removed by clean rags and /or washed by water or steam and thoroughly dried with
compressed air jet before application of paint.
5.3
Non-Compatible Shop Coat Primer

For equipments on which application of total protective coating (Primer + Intermediate + top
coat) is carried out at shop, compatibility of finish coat with primer should be checked with
paint manufacturer. If the shop coat is in satisfactory condition showing no major defect upon
arrival at site, the shop coat shall not be removed.
5.4
Shop coated equipments (coated with Primer & finishing coat) should not be repainted unless
paint is damaged. Repair shall be carried out as per Table 5.0 of paint systems depending upon
compatibility of paint.
5.5
Shop primed equipment and surfaces will only be 'spot cleaned' in damaged areas by means
of power tool brush cleaning or hand tool cleaning and then spot primed before applying one
coat of field primer unless otherwise specified. If shop primer is not compatible with field
primer then shop coated primer should be completely removed before application of selected
paint system for particular environment.
5.6
For Package units/equipment, shop primer should be as per the paint system given in this
specification. However, manufacturers standard can be followed after review.
Page 420 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 9 OF 49
5.7
Coating Procedure and Application

All paint coatings shall be applied by airless spray excepting at the following special cases
where application can be carried out by brush subject to suitability of the application of
the paint product by brush.
- Spot repair
- Stripe coating on edges
- Small bore parts not suitable for spray application.
Irregular surfaces such as sharp edges, welds, small brackets, and interstices may stripe
coated to ensure specified DFT is achieved. Paint manufacturer recommendation should
be followed before deciding for brush application.
5.7.1
Surface shall not be coated in rain, wind or in environment where injurious airborne elements
exists, when the steel surface temperature is less than 5oF above dew point when the relative
humidity is greater than 85% or when the temperature is below 40oF and when the
ambient/substrate temp is below the paint manufacturers recommended temperature of
application and curing. De-humidifier equipment shall be used to control RH and Dew point.
The paint application shall not be done when the wind speed exceeds 20km per hour.
5.7.2
Blast cleaned surface shall be coated with one complete application of primer as soon as
practicable but in no case later than 4 hrs the same day.
5.7.3
To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of material shall be applied as a continuous film
uniform thickness free of probes. Any spots or areas missed in application shall be recoated
and permitted to dry before the next coat is applied. Applied paint should have the desired
wet film thickness.
5.7.4
Each coat shall be in proper state of cure or dryness before the application of succeeding coat.
Material shall be considered dry for recoating when an additional coat can be applied without
the development of any detrimental film irregularities, such as lifting or loss of adhesion of
the under coat. Manufacturer instruction shall be followed for inter coat interval.
5.7.5
When the successive coat of the same colour have been specified, alternate coat shall be tinted,
when practical, sufficiently to produce enough contrast to indicate complete coverage of the
surface. The tinting material shall be compatible with the material and not detrimental to its
service life and shall be recommended by the original paint manufacturer.
5.7.6
Airless spray application shall be in accordance with the following procedure: as per steel
structure paint Manual Vol.1 & Vol.2 by SSPC, USA, Air less spray relies on hydraulic
pressure rather than air atomization to produce the desired spray. An air compressor or electric
motor is used to operate a pump to produce pressures of 1000 to 6000 psi. paint is delivered
to the spray gun at this pressure through a single hose within the gun, a single paint stream is
divided into separate streams, which are forced through a small orifice resulting in atomization
of paint without the use of air. This results in more rapid coverage with less over spray. Airless
spray usually is faster, cleaner, more economical and easier to use than conventional air spray.
Airless spray equipment is mounted on wheels, and paint is aspirated in a hose that sucks paint
from any container, including drums. The unit shall have in built agitator that keep the paint
uniformly mixed during the spraying. The unit shall consist of in built strainer. Usually very
Page 421 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 10 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
small quantity of thinning is required before spray. In case of high build epoxy coating (two
packs). 30:1 pump ratio and 0.020-0.023 tip size will provide a good spray pattern. Ideally
fluid hoses should not be less than 3/8 ID and not longer than 50 ft to obtain optimum results.
In case of gun choking, de-choking steps shall be followed immediately.
5.7.7
Brush application of paint shall be in accordance with the following:

a.
Brushes shall be of a style and quality that will enable proper application of paint.
b.
Round or oval brushes are most suitable for rivets, bolts, irregular surface, and rough
or pitted steel. Wide flat brushes are suitable for large flat areas, but they shall not
have width over five inches.
c.
Paint shall be applied into all corners.
d.
Any runs or sags shall be brushed out.
e.
There shall be a minimum of brush marks left in the applied paint.
f.
Surfaces not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray, doubers, or sheepkin.
5.7.8
For each coat the painter should know the WFT corresponding to the specified DFT and
standardize the paint application technique to achieve the desired WFT. This has to be ensured
in the qualification trial.
5.7.9
The paint manufacturers instruction shall be followed as far as practicable at all times for best
results. Particular attention shall be paid to instructions for storage, mixing and thinning and
over coating intervals etc.
5.8
Drying of Coated Surfaces
5.8.1
No coat shall be applied until the preceding coat has dried. The material shall be considered
dry for re-coating when another coat can be applied without the development of any film
irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoats. Drying time of the applied coat
should not exceed maximum specified for it as a first coat; if it exceeds the paint material has
possibly deteriorated or maxing is faulty.
5.8.2
No paint shall be force dried under conditions which will cause chalking, wrinkling, blistering
formation of pores, or detrimentally affect the conditions of the paint.
5.8.3
No drier shall be added to paint on the job unless specifically called for in the manufacturers
specification for the paint.
Paint shall be protected from rain, condensation, contamination, snow and freezing until dry
to the fullest extent practicable.
5.8.4
5.9
Spot Repair of Damaged Primer
5.9.1
Where pre erection shop primer has been damaged at isolated localized spots during handling
and transportation, or after erection / welding, the repair of damaged coating of pre-erection /
Page 422 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 11 OF 49
pre-fabrication or shop primer shall be done as given below and as per the Table 5.0 of this
specification.
5.9.2
Repair of damaged inorganic zinc silicate pre-erection / pre-fabrication or shop primer

(F9) after erection / welding in the design temperature of -90oC to 400oC and damaged
silicone aluminium (F-12) pre-erection / pre-fabrication or shop primer after erection /
welding for design temperature range of 401 550 C.
Surface Preparation: Quickly remove the primer from damaged area by mechanical scraping
and emery paper conforming to SSPC-SP-3 to expose the white metal. Blast clean the surface,
if possible. Feather the primed surface over the intact adjacent surface surrounding the
damaged area by emery paper.
Primer coating: One coat of F-9 shall be applied wherever damage was observed on preerection / pre fabrication or shop primer of inorganic zinc silicate coating (F-9). Similarly one
coat of F-12 shall be applied wherever damage observed on pre-erection / pre-fabrication shop
primer of silicone aluminium (F-12).
5.9.3
Wherever if damaged areas are found extensive and spread over large areas, then entire preerection / pre-fabrication or shop primer shall be removed by blasting to achieve SSPC-SP10 then entire blasted surface shall be primed again with F-9 or F-12 as applicable for the
intended design temp. (See note under table 5.0).
5.10
Paint Application
5.10.1
Shop priming/pre-erection priming with F9 or F12 shall be done only on blasted surface
(SSPC-SP-10)
5.10.2
Shop priming / pre-erection priming with F9 or F12 shall be done only with airless spray.
5.10.3
Assessment of Painting Requirement

The paint system to be applied for a specific job shall be arrived at sequentially as given below:
- Identify the environment from area classification details and chose the appropriate table.
- Identify the design temperature from the technical documents
- Identify the specific field paint system and surface preparation requirement from the above
identified table and temperature range.
- Identify the shop priming requirement from Table 4.0 based on compatibility of the above
paint system.
- Identify the need of repair of shop primer and execute as per Table 5.0.
5.11
Documentation / Records
5.11.1
A written quality plan with procedure for qualification trials and for the actual work including
test and inspection plan & procedure for approval before start of work.
Page 423 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 12 OF 49
5.11.2
Daily progress report with details of weather conditions, particular of applications, no of coats
and type of materials applied, anomalies, progress of work versus program.
5.11.3
Results of measurement of temperatures relative humidity, surface profile, film thickness,

holiday detection, adhesion tests with signature of appropriate authority.
5.11.4
Particulars of surface preparation and paint application during trials and during the work.
5.11.5
Details of non-compliance, rejects and repairs.
5.11.6
Type of testing equipments and calibration.
5.11.7
Code and batch numbers of paint materials used.

The coating applicator must maintain a job record consisting of all the information as per
5.11.2 -5.11.7 above as well as the approved procedure of work (5.11.1 above). The job record
consisting of information as required in accordance to 5.11.2 5.11.7 shall be entered on daily
basis and should be daily signed by Engineer-in-charge.
Page 424 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 13 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
TABLE-1 (FOR CLAUSE 5.0)

SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS
Sl.
No.
DESCRIPTION
VARIOUS INTERNATIONAL
STANDARDS (EQUIVALENT)
ISO 8501-1/ SSPC-SP, NACE,
SIS-05 59 00
USA
USA
Manual or hand tool cleaning

1
3.1
Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale and

loose paint, chipping, scrapping, standing and ST.2
wire brushing. Surface should have a faint
metallic sheen
Mechanical or power tool cleaning
Removal of loose rust loose mill scale and
loose paint to degree specified by power tool ST.3
chipping, de-scaling, sanding, wire brushing
and grinding, after removal of dust, surface
should have a pronounced metallic sheen.
Dry abrasive Blast cleaning
There are four common grades of blast
cleaning
White metal
Blast cleaning to white metal cleanliness.
Removal of all visible rust. Mill scale, paint
& foreign matter 100% cleanliness with
desired surface profile.
Near white metal
SA 3
Blast cleaning to near white metal cleanliness,

until at least 95% of each element of surface
area is free of all visible residues with desired
surface profile.
3.2
SA 2
Commercial Blast
3.3
Blast cleaning until at least two-third of each

element of surface area is free of all visible
residues with desired surface profile.
SA 2
SSPC-SP-2
--
SSPC-SP-3
--
REMARKS
This method is
applied when the
surface is exposed
to
normal
atmospheric
conditions
when
other
methods
cannot be adopted
and also for spot
cleaning
during
maintenance
painting.
Where extremely
clean surface can be
SSPC-SP-5 NACE#1 expected
for
prolong life of paint
system.
The
minimum
requirement
for
chemically resistant
paint systems such
as epoxy, vinyl,
polyurethane based
SSPC-SPand inorganic zinc
NACE#2
10
silicate paints, also
for
conventional
paint systems used
under
fairly
corrosive conditions
to obtain desired life
of paint system.
For steel required to
be painted with
conventional paints
for exposure to
SSPC-SP-6
NO.3
mildly
corrosive
atmosphere
for
longer life of the
paint systems.
Brush-off Blast
3.4
Blast cleaning to white metal cleanliness,

removal of all visible rust, mill scale, paint &
foreign matter. Surface profile is not so
important
SA 1
SSPC-SP-7
NO.4
Page 425 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 14 OF 49
6.0 PAINT MATERIALS*

TABLE No. 2 PRIMERS
Sl. No. DESCRIPTION
3
4
6
7
10
11
P-2
Chlorinated
rubber Zinc
Phosphate
Technical name
primer.
Type and
composition
P-4
Etch
primer/wash
primer
P-6
Epoxy zinc
phosphate
primer
Single pack,
air drying
chlorinated
rubber based
medium
plasticised
with
unsaponifiabl
e plasticizer,
pigmented
with zinc
phosphate.
Two pack
polyvinyl
butyral resin
medium cured
with phosphoric
acid solution
pigmented with
zinc tetroxy
chromate.
Two
component
polyamine
cured epoxy
resin
medium,
pigmented
with zinc
phosphate.
40 3
101
501
783
603
40-45
8-10
40-50
100-125
65-75
8-10
8-10
8-10
6.0-7.2
8-9
1.30.05
1.20.05
1.40.05
1.410.03
2.30.03
30 minutes
2 hrs.
After 30 min.
3 hrs.
30 minutes.
24 hrs
12
8 hrs.
24 hrs.
8 hrs
5days
NA
Min.: 12
hrs.at 20oC
& 50 % RH
Volume Solids
%
DFT (Dry Film
thickness) per
coat in microns
Theoritical
covering
capacity in
M2/coat/ litre
Weight per litre
in kgs/litre
Touch dry at
30oC
(minimum)
Hard dry at
30oC
(maximum.)
Overcoating
interval
Pot life at 30oC
for two
component
paints
Temperature
(Resistance
(minimum)
F-8
Self priming type
surface tolerant
high build epoxy
coating (complete
rust control
coating).
F-9
Inorganic
zinc silicate
coating
A two pack
air drying self
curing
solvent based
inorganic
Two pack epoxy
zinc silicate
resin based suitable
coating with
pigmented and
minimum
capable of adhering
80% zinc
to manually
content on
prepared surface
dry film. The
and old coating.
final cure of
the dry film
shall pass the
MEK rub
test.
Min.: 8 hrs
Min: 4-6 hrs.
Min.:8hrs.
Min.: 10 hrs
Not
Applicable
Not applicable
6 - 8 hrs.
90 minutes.
4-6 hrs.
60 oC
Dry service
NA
Dry service
80oC
Dry service
80 oC
Dry service
400 oC
Dry service
Page 426 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 15 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
TABLE No. 3 FINISH PAINTS

Sl.
No
DESCRIPTION
Technical name
F-2
Acrylic
Polyurethane
finish paint
F-3
F-6A/B
F-6C
Chlorinated rubber Epoxy-High Build Solvent less epoxy

based finish paint
coating
coating
Single
pack
Two-pack
plasticised
aliphatic
chlorinated rubber
isocynate
based medium with
cured acrylic chemical
and
finish paint.
weather
resistant
pigments.
F-6A
Two-pack
Aromatic
amine
cured epoxy resin
medium suitably
pigmented.
F-6B: polyamide
cured epoxy resin
medium suitably
pigmented
Two pack, cured with

Amine
Adduct;
catalyzed epoxy resin
suitably pigmented
Type and composition
40 3
382
603
991
Volume Solids %
DFT (Dry Film thickness)
per coat in microns
30-40
30-40
100-125
200-500
Theoritical covering
capacity in M2/coat/litre
11-15
11-15
5-6
2-3
1.150.03
1.150.03
1.420.03
1.400.03
30 minutes
30 minutes.
3 hrs.
3 hrs.
6
7
9
10
11
Weight per liter in

kgs/litre
Touch dry at 30oC
Hard dry at 30oC (max)
Full cure at 30oC (for
immersion/ high
temperature service)
Over-coating interval at 30
o
C
Pot life (approx.) at 30oC
for two component paints
Temperature
(minimum)
Resistance
16 hrs
8 hrs
Min.12 hrs.
6-8 hrs.
80 oC
Dry service
min
8 hrs
5 days
16 hrs
Min.: Overnight
Min.: Overnight
Max.: 5 days
Min.: 8 hrs.
Max.: 48 hrs.
Not applicable
4-6 hrs
30 minutes
60 oC
Immersion service
80oC
Dry service
120oC(Dry service),
50oC (Immersion
service)
Page 427 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 16 OF 49
TABLE No. 3 (CONTD.) FINISH PAINTS
Sl.
No
DESCRIPTION
F-11
F-7
F-12
Technical name
Heat resistant
synthetic medium
based two pack
Aluminium paint
suitable upto 250oC
dry temp.
High build coal tar

epoxy coating.
Heat resistant silicone

Aluminium paint suitable
upto 500oC dry temp.
Type & composition
Heat resistant
synthetic medium
based two pack
Aluminium paint
suitable upto 250oC.
Two pack polyamide

cured epoxy resin
blended with coaltar
medium,
suitably
pigmented
Single pack silicone resin

based medium with
Aluminium flakes.
Volume Solids %
DFT (Dry Film
thickness) per coat in
microns
380.03
653
202
15-20
100-125
15-20
10-12
5.2-6.5
8-10
capacity in M2/coat/
litre
Weight per liter in

kgs/litre
0.950.03
1.400.03
1.000.03
Touch dry at 30oC

(maximum)
3 hrs.
4 hrs.
30 minutes.
12 hrs
48 hrs
24 hrs
NA
5 days
NA
Hard dry at 30oC

(maximum)
Full cure 30oC (for
immersion /high
Over-coating interval
Min. 24 hrs
Min.: 24 hrs
Max.: 5 days.
Min.: 24 hrs
10
Pot life at 30oC for two

component paints
Not applicable
4-6 hrs.
Not applicable
11
Temperature
Resistance (minimum)
250oC
Dry service
125oC
Immersion service
500oC
Dry service
Page 428 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 17 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
TABLE No.3 (CONTD.) FINISH PAINTS

Sl.
No
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
DESCRIPTION
Technical name
F-14
F-16
F-17
Ambient
temperature
curing Poly Siloxane
coating/High build cold
applied
inorganic
copolymer
based
aluminium coating.
Novalac epoxy
phenolic
coating cured
with
Polyamine
adduct hardner
Suitable
for
under
insulation coating of CS
and SS piping for high
temperature service
Novalac epoxy
phenolic
coating cured
with
Polyamine
adduct hardner
602
98-100
703
Two-component
Epoxy
phenolic
coating cured with
Polyamine adduct
hardner
system
(primer
+
intermediate coat +
finish paint)
Two pack ambient
temperature curing
epoxy
phenolic
coating
system
suitable
for
application under
insulation
of
CS/SS piping
703
100-125
75-100
75-100
125- 150
5-8
4-5
7.0- 9.0
6.5 - 8
1.450.03
1.650.03
1.3
1.7
4 hrs
3 hrs
1 hr
2 hrs
24 hrs
24 hrs
16 hrs
168 hrs (7 days)
168 hrs (7 days)
168 hrs (7
days)
Min. 6 hrs
Max.5 days
Min. 36 hrs
Max.21 days
Min.16 hrs
Max. Not applicable
Min. 16 hrs
Max.21 days
4 hrs
4-6 hrs
1 hr
1 hr
up to 600 deg C
-45oC to 150oC
for immersion
service
Polyamine cured
coal tar epoxy
Specially
formulated
polyamine cured
Type & composition coal tar epoxy
suitable
for
application under
insulation
Volume Solids %
DFT (Dry Film
thickness) per coat
in microns
capacity in M2/coat/
litre
Weight per liter in
kgs/litre (mix paint)
Touch dry at 30oC
(maximum)
Hard dry at 30oC
(maximum)
Full cure 30oC (for
immersion /high
temp. service)
Over-coating
interval
Pot life at 30oC for
two component
paints
Temperature
Resistance
F-15
-45oC to 125oC
under insulation
And immersion
-45oC to 150oC
under insulation &
immersion
24 hrs
*Paint manufacturers shall furnish the characteristics of all paints materials on original printed
literature, along with the test certificate for all specified characteristics given in this specification.
All the paint materials shall be of first quality and conform to the above general characteristics as per
the Tables 2 and 3.
Page 429 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 18 OF 49
NOTES (for tables 2 & 3):

1. Covering capacity and DFT depends on method of application. Covering capacity
specified above is theoretical. Allowing the losses during application, min specified DFT
should be maintained.
2. All primers and finish coats should be cold cured and air drying unless otherwise
specified.
3. All paints shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for surface
preparation, intervals, curing and application. The surface preparation, quality and
workmanship should be ensured. In case of conflict between this specification and
manufacturers recommendation, the same shall be clarified through EILs SMMS
department.
4. Technical data sheets for all paints shall be supplied at the time of submission of
quotations for full filling Material approval Request (MAR) requirement.
5. F-16: Ambient temperature curing poly siloxane Coating or high build cold applied
inorganic co-polymer based aluminium coating.
Page 430 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 19 OF 49
7.0
COATING SYSTEMS
The coating system should be selected based on the Plant location as given below:
Classification based on Plant Location:
a) Plant located in Inland area (more than 50 km from coast);
Environment Classification Industrial
-
For offsite areas: Table 6.0 to be followed
For all unit areas including DM,CPP and Cooling Tower: Table 7.0 to be followed
b) Plant located on sea coast or within 50 km from sea coast;

Environment classification- Industrial marine
-
For offsite area, as well as all unit area including DM, CPP, Cooling Tower: Table
7.0 to be followed
c) For external surface of above ground tanks, table 9.0 to be followed for all locations
(Inland or coastal)
7.1
COATING SYSTEM SELECTION CRITERIA
Repair of pre-erection/pre-fabrication or shop primer after erection/welding

For all un-insulated CS, LTCS & low allow steel items in all Environments
Coating system for offsite area (inland plants)
(Carbon Steel, LTCS & Low Alloy Steel)
For external surfaces of Un-insulated & aboveground Structures, Piping, Vessels,
Equipments, Pumps, etc..
Coating system for unit areas as well as DM, CPP, cooling tower of inland
plants and for all areas (unit, offsite, DM, CPP, etc.) of coastal plants
(carbon steel, LTCS & low alloy steels)
For external surfaces of un-insulated and above ground structures, piping, vessels,
equipments, external surface of MS chimney/stacks, RCC chimney, internal surface
of MS chimney without refractory lining, towers, columns, pumps, compressors,
blowers etc.
Coating system for effluent treatment plant (ETP)
External coating systems for un-insulated carbon steel and low alloy steel
storage tanks (For all plant locations, All Process Units & Off-sites)
Internal coating systems for carbon steel and low alloy storage tanks
All Process Units & Off-sites
ANNEXURE 1
Table 5.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 6.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 7.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 8.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 9.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 10.0
Page 431 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 20 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
Coating systems for external side of underground carbon steel plant piping
and underground vessels
Painting under insulation (all environments)
All areas (Process Units & Off-sites) for insulated Piping, Storage Tanks,
Equipments etc (Note-1); (For Carbon Steel, LTCS, Low Alloy Steel & Stainless
Steel)
Coating system for carbon steel components of coolers / condensers (internal
protection) for fresh water service
Fresh Water boxes, channels, partition plates, end covers and tube sheets etc.
Coating system (internal protection) for galvanized or non ferrous or stainless
steel/ duplex stainless steel components of coolers/ condensers for fresh water
service
ANNEXURE 1
Table 11.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 12.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 13.0
ANNEXURE 1
Table 14.0
Notes:
1. Repair of Pre-Erection/Pre-Fabrication & Shop priming after erection/ welding shall be done as per
Table 5.0 of ANNEXURE-1
8.0
STORAGE
8.1
All paints and painting materials shall be stored only in rooms to be arranged by contractor and
approved by Engineer-in-charge for the purpose. All necessary precautions shall be taken to
prevent fire. The storage building shall preferably be separate from adjacent building. A
signboard bearing the word PAINT STORAGE NO NAKED LIGHT HIGHLY
INFLAMABLE shall be clearly displayed outside. Manufacturers recommendation shall be
followed for storage of paint materials.
9.0
PAINT COLOUR CODE FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

Unless otherwise specified, the following shall be followed:
9.1
IDENTIFICATION
The system of colour coding consists of a ground colour and secondary colour bands
superimposed over the ground colour. The ground colour identifies the basic nature of the
service and secondary colour band over the ground colour distinguishes the particular service.
The ground colour shall be applied over the entire length of the un-insulated pipes. For insulated
lines ground colour shall be provided as per specified length and interval to identify the basic
nature of service and secondary colour bands to be painted on these specified length to identify
the particular service. Above colour code is applicable for both unit and offsite pipelines.
The following ground colour designation for identification of basis classification of various
important services shall be followed.
Post Office Red
Fire protection materials
Off White / Aluminium Steam (all pressures)
Canary Yellow
Chemicals and dangerous materials

Page 432 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 21 OF 49
Dark Admiralty Grey

Orange
Oxide red
Black
Sky blue
Sea green
Crude oil, lube oil

Volatile petroleum products (motor sprit and lighter)
Non-Volatile petroleum products (kerosene and heavier,
including waxy distillates and diesel, gas oil)
Residual oils, still bottoms, slop oils and asphalts, fuel oil
Water (all purities and temperatures)
Air and its components and Freon
9.1.1
Secondary colours: The narrow bands presenting the secondary colour which identifies the
specific service may be applied by painting or preferably by use of adhesive plastic tapes of the
specific colour.
9.2
COLOUR BANDS AND IDENTIFICATION LETTERING
9.2.1
The following specifications of colour bands shall be followed for identifying the piping
contents, size and location of bands & letters. The bandwidth and size of letters in legends will
depend to some extent upon the pipe diameter. Either white or black letters are selected to
provide maximum contrast to the band colour. Bands usually are 100 mm wide and regardless
of band width, are spaced 50 mm apart when two bands are employed.
Colour bands and size of lettering for piping:
Outside diameter of pipe
or covering in mm
19 to 32
38 to 51
64 to 150
200 to 250
Over 250
Width of colour bands in

mm
200
200
300
600
800
Size of legend Letters in

mm
13
19
32
64
89
In addition, ground colour as per specified length should be provided on insulated piping for
easy identification of nature of fluid, on which the colour bands should be painted for
identification of each service. The length of the ground colour should be 3 times the width of
normal bands or 2 meters, whichever is suitable depending on the length of the pipe.
Size of letters stenciled/ written for equipment shall be as given below:
Column and vessel
:
150 mm (Height)
Pump, compressor and other machinery
:
50 mm (Height)
In addition, the contents of the pipe and/or direction of flow may be further indicated by arrows
and legend. If a hazard is involved it must be identified clearly by legend.
9.2.2
Colour bands: The location and size of bands, as recommended, when used, shall be applied to
the pipe.
- On both sides of the valves, tees and other fittings of importance.
- Where the pipe enters and emerges from walls and where it emerges from road & walkway
overpasses, unit battery limits.
- At uniform intervals along long sections of the pipe.
- Adjacent to tanks, vessels, and pumps.
Page 433 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 22 OF 49
9.2.3
For piping, writing of name of service and direction of flow for all the lines shall be done at
following locations:
9.2.3.1
Offsite Lines: Both sides of culverts, any one side of walkways, near tank dykes, at
tank inlet/outlet points and suction/ discharge of pumps/ compressors.
9.2.3.2
Unit Lines: At the battery limit, suction/ discharge of pumps/ compressors, near
vessels, columns, Tanks, Exchangers etc.
9.2.4
The letters will be in black on pipes painted with light shade colours and white on pipes painted
with dark shade colours to give good contrast.
9.2.5
Only writing of service name shall be done on stainless steel lines. Precautions should be taken
while painting by using low chloride content painting to avoid any damage to the stainless steel
pipes. It is preferable to use adhesive plastic tapes to protect stainless steel pipes.
9.2.6
Colour band specification:

a) Unit Area: Bands at intervals of 6.0 meters.
Offsite Area: Bands at intervals of 10.0 meters.
b) Each pipe segment will have minimum one band indication, irrespective of length.
c) The bands shall also be displayed near walkways, both sides of culverts, tanks dykes, tanks,
vessels, suction and discharge of pumps/ compressors, unit battery limit, near valves of line, etc.
9.3
For alloy steel/ stainless steel pipes and fittings in stores/ fabrication yard, color band (Minimum
wide) should be applied along the complete length of pipe, bends/ tees, side-curved surface
(on thickness) of flanges as well as valves as per the metallurgy.
9.4
In case of camouflaging requirements of civil defense or any other locational requirements, the
same shall be followed accordingly.
9.5
The specification for application of the complete Piping identification colour code, including
base and bands colours, are presented in the enclosed table.
10.0
RECOMMENDED PAINT COLOUR CODE

Unless otherwise specified and/or specific requirement of the OWNER, following colour
coding may be followed:
SR.
No.
SERVICE
RECOMMNDED COLOUR FOR

PAINT SYSTEM
RAL COLOUR CODE

BASE
COLOUR
BAND
COLOUR
7012
7012
7012
2011
3001
6010
HYDROCARBON LINES (UNINSULATED)

1
2
3
4
CRUDE SOUR
CRUDE SWEET
LUBE OILS
FLARE LINES
Dark Admiralty grey with 1 orange band

Dark Admiralty grey with 1 red band
Dark Admiralty grey with 1 green band
Heat Resistant Aluminium
9006
Page 434 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 23 OF 49
5
6
7
8
9
LPG
PROPYLENE
NAPTHA
M.S.
AV.GASOLINE (96 RON)
10
11
21
22
23
24
GASOLINE (regular, leaded)

GASOLINE (premium,
leaded)
GASOLINE (white)
GASOLINE (Aviation
100/130)
GASOLINE (Aviation
115/145)
N-PENTANE
DIESEL OIL (White)
DIESEL OIL (Black)
KEROSENE
HY.KEROSENE
DISUFIDE OIL (EXMEROX)
M.T.O
DHPPA
FLUSHING OIL
LAB FS
25
LAB RS
26
27
28
29
30
LAB (Off. Spec)

N-PARAFFIN
HEAVY ALKYLATE
BLOW DOWN, VAPOR
LINE
BLOWDOWN
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
A.T.F.
TOULENE
BENZENE
LAB PRODUCT
FUEL OIL
FULE OIL (Aromatic rich)
ASPHALT
SLOP AND WASTE OILS
SLOP AROMATICS
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Orange with 1 oxide red band

Orange with 2 blue bands
Orange with 1 green band
Orange with 1 dark admiralty grey band
Orange with 1 band each of green, white
and red bands
Orange with 1 black band
Orange with 1 blue band
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011 6010
3009
5013
6010
7012
9010 3001
2011
2011
9005
5013
Orange with 1 white band

Orange with 1 red band
2011
2011
9010
3001
Orange with 1 purple band
2011
4006
Orange with 2 blue bands

Oxide red with 1 white band
Oxide red with 1 yellow band
Oxide red with 1 green band
Oxide red with 2 green bands
Oxide red with 1 black band
2011
3009
3009
3009
3009
3009
5013
9010
1023
6010
6010
9005
Oxide red with 3 green bands

Oxide red with 2 white bands
Oxide red with 2 black bands
Oxide red with 2 dark admiralty grey
bands
Oxide red with 3 dark admiralty grey
bands
Oxide red with 1 light grey band
Oxide red with 1-blue band
Oxide red with red band
Off white / Aluminum with 1-Brown
band
Off white / Aluminum with 2 brown
bands
Leaf brown with 1 white band
Leaf brown with 1 yellow band
Leaf brown with 1 green band
Leaf brown with 1 blue band
Black with 1 yellow band
Black with 2 yellow bands
Black with 1 white band
Black with 1 orange band
Black with 2 orange bands
3009
3009
3009
3009
6010
9010
9005
7012
3009
7012
3009
3009
3009
9006
7035
5013
3001
8004
9006
8004
8003
8003
8003
8003
9005
9005
9005
9005
9005
9010
1023
6010
5013
1023
1023
9010
2011
2011
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
1012
5000
9005
9010
5013
9006
9005
CHEMICAL LINES
40
41
42
43
44
45
TRI-SODIUM PHOSPHATE
CAUSTIC SODA
SODIUM CHLORIDE
AMMONIA
CORROSION INHIBITOR
HEXAMETA PHOSPHATE
Canary yellow with 1 violet band

Canary yellow with 1 black band
Canary yellow with 1 white band
Canary yellow with 1 blue band
Canary yellow with 1 Aluminum band
Canary yellow with 2 black bands
Page 435 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 24 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
46
47
48
49
50
ACID LINES
RICH AMINE
LEAN AMINE
SOLVENT
LCS
Golden Yellow with 1 red band

Canary yellow with 2 blue bands
Canary yellow with 3 blue bands
Canary yellow with 1 green band
Canary yellow with 1 smoke grey
1004
1012
1012
1012
1012
3001
5013
5013
6010
7031
WATER LINES
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
RAW WATER
INDUSTRIAL WATER
TREATED WATER
DRINKING WATER
COOLING WATER
SERVICE WATER
TEMPERED WATER
Sky blue with 1 black band

Sky blue with 2 signal red band
Sky blue with 1 oxide red band
Sky blue with 1 green band
Sky blue with 1 light brown band
Sky blue with 1 signal red brown
Sky blue with 2 green bands
5015
5015
5015
5015
5015
5015
5015
9005
3001
3009
6010
1011
3001
6010
58
59
DM WATER
DM WATER ABOVE 150F
Sky blue with 1 aluminum band

Sky blue with 2 black bands
5015
5015
9006
9005
60
61
62
SOUR WATER
STRIPPED WATER
ETP TREATED WATER
Sky blue with 2 yellow bands

Sky blue with 2 blue bands
Sky blue with 2 oxide red bands
5015
5015
5015
1013
5013
3009
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (ABOVE GROUND)

63
FIRE WATER FOAM &

EXTINGUISHERS
Post office red
3002
AIR & OTHER GAS LINES (UNINSULATED)

64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
SERVICE AIR
INSTRUMENT AIR
NITROGEN
FREON
CHLORINE
SO2
H2S
GAS (Fuel)
GAS (Sour)
GAS (Sweet)
HYDROGEN
Sea green with 1 signal red band

Sea green with 1 black band
Sea green with 1 orange band
Sea green with 1 yellow band
Canary yellow with 1 oxide band
Canary yellow with 2 white bands
Orange with 2 red oxide bands
Orange with 1 aluminum band
Orange with 2 aluminum bands
Orange with 2 signal red band
Orange with 1 light green band
6018
6018
6018
6018
1012
1012
2011
2011
2011
2011
2011
3001
9005
2011
1023
3009
9010
3009
9006
9006
3001
6021
9006
9006
9006
9006
1023
3001
2011
6021
5015
9010
STEAM AND CONDENSATE LINES (UNINSULATED)

75
76
77
78
HP STEAM
MP STEAM
MLP STEAM
LP STEAM
79
CONDENSATE
Off white / Aluminum with 1 yellow band

Off white / Aluminum with 1 red band
Off white / Aluminum with 1 orange band
Off white / Aluminum with 1 light green
band
Sky blue with 1 white band
Page 436 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 25 OF 49
80
81
CONDENSATE ABOVE
150F
BFW
Sky blue with 3 oxide red band
5015
3009
Sky blue with 2 red bands
5015
3001
Note: For all insulated steam lines, the colour coding shall be follow as given for un-insulated lines with the
specified length of color bands.
INSULATED HYDROCARBON PIPING
82
IFO SUPPLY
83
IFO RETURN
84
HPS
85
BITUMEN
86
CLO
87
VB TAR
88
89
VR AM (BITUMEN / VBU
FEED)
VR BH
90
VAC. SLOP
91
SLOP
92
CRUDE SWEET
93
CRUDE OUR
94
VGO / HCU
95
OHCU BOTOM / FCCU

FEED
1Black ground colour with 1 yellow band

in centre
Black ground colour with 1 green band in
centre
Black ground colour with 1 red band in
centre
Black ground colour with 2 red bands in
centre
Black ground colour with 1 brown band
in centre
Black ground colour with 2 brown bands
in centre
1 Black ground colour with 1 blue band
in centre
1 Black ground colour with 2 blue bands
in centre
1 Black ground colour with 1 white band
in centre
1 Black ground colour with 1 orange band
in centre
1 Dark admiralty grey ground colour with
1 red band in centre
1 Dark admiralty grey ground colour with
1 orange band in centre
1 Oxide red ground colour with 2 steel
grey bands in centre
1 Oxide red ground colour with 2 steel
grey bands in centre
9005
1023
9005
6010
9005
3001
9005
3001
9005
8004
9005
8004
9005
5013
9005
5013
9005
9010
9005
2011
7012
3001
7012
2011
3009
7011
3009
7011
UNINSULATED EQUIPMENTS, TANKS AND STRUCTURES

96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
HEATER STRUCTURE
HEATER CASING
VESSELS & COLUMNS
HYDROGEN BULLETS
LPG VESSELS
SO2 VESSEL
HEAT EXCHANGER
FO TANK AND HOT
TANKS
ALL OTHER TANKS
CAUSTIC / AMINE / ACID
TANKS
SOUR WATER
Steel grey
Heat resistant aluminium
Aluminium
Pink
Oxide red
Canary yellow
Heat resistant aluminium
Black
7011
9006
9006
3014
3009
1012
9006
9005
Aluminum / Off white

Golden yellow
9006
1004
Sky Blue
5015
Page 437 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 26 OF 49
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
OUTER SURFACE IN
BOILER HOUSE
COMPRESSORS AND
BLOWERS
PUMPS
MOTORS & SWITCH GEAR
HAND RAILING
STAIRCASE, LADDER
AND WALKWAYS
LOAD LIFTING
EQUIPMENT AND
MONORAILS ETC
GENERAL STRUCTURE
Heat resistant aluminum
9006
Dark admiralty grey
7012
Navy blue
Bluish green
Signal red
Black
5014
5024
3001
9005
Leaf brown
8003
Black
9005
PIPES AND FITTINGS OF ALLOY STEEL AND SS MATERIAL IN STORE

115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
IBR
9Cr-1Mo
5Cr-0.5Mo
21/4Cr-1 Mo
11/4Cr- Mo
SS-304
SS-316
SS-321
Signal red
Verdigris green
Satin blue
Aircraft yellow
Traffic Yellow
Dark blue grey
Dark violet
Navy blue
3001
6021
5012
1026
1023
5008
4005
5014
SAFETY COLOUR SCHEMES

123
124
DANGEROUS
OBSTRUCTION
DANGEROUS OR
EXPOSED PARTS OF
MACHINERY
Black and alert orange band

Alert orange
9005
2008
2008
Note: All LPG service PSVs shall be painted Deep Blue.

All drains & Vents shall be painted in Main line colour.
The colour code scheme is for identification of piping service group, It consists of a ground
colour and 1 / 2 colour bands.
10.2
Ground Colour
On uninsulated pipes, the entire pipe has to be painted in ground colour., and on metal cladded
insulated lines, minimum 2M long portion should be painted.
10.3
Colour Bands
Location of colour bands:
At Battery Limits
Intersection points & change of direction points in piping
Midway of piping section, near valves, across culverts
At 50 M interval on long stretch pipes
At starting and termination points.
Page 438 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 27 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
Minimum width:
NB
3 and below
Above 3 to 6
Above 6 to 12
Above 12
Width
75 mm
NB X 25 MM
NB X 18 MM
NB X 15 MM
!!! Note:
For insulated pipes, NB indicates
OD of the insulation
Sequence :
Colour bands shall be arranged in sequence showing Table above and the sequence follows the direction
of flow. The width of the 1st Band to 2nd band is 4:1,
!!! Note : Wherever deemed required by Process Department or Safety, pipes handling hazardous
substances will be given hazard marking of 30 mm wide diagonal stripes of Black and Golden Yellow
as per IS : 2379.
10.4
Special Camouflage Painting for Uninsulated Crude and Product Storage Tanks.
Paint specification shall be as per standards.
Camouflage painting scheme for Defense requirement in irregular patches will be applied with
3 colours
Dark Green
5
:
:
Light green
3
:
:
Medium Brown
2
The patches shall be irregular and asymmetrical and inclined at 30 to 60 Degrees.

Patches should be continuous at surface meeting lines / points.
Slits / holes shall be painted in dark green shade.
Width of patches shall be 1 to 2 meters.
10.5
Identification Markings on Equipment / Piping

Equipment tag Numbers shall be Stenciled / neatly painted using normal 'Arial' Lettering Style
on all equipment and piping (Both insulated & uninsulated) after completion of all paint works.
Lettering colour shall be either BLACK or WHITE, depending upon the background, so as to
obtain good contrast.
Operations Group shall specify location.
Sizes shall be:
Columns, Vessels, Heaters:
Pumps and other M/c
150 mm
50 mm
Page 439 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 28 OF 49
Piping
Storage Tanks
10.6.
OD / 2 with Maximum 100 MM.

(As per Drawings)
Colour Coding for Control Valve

a) Carbon steel body
Alloy steel body
Stainless steel body
- Light grey
- Canary yellow
- Natural
b) The actuator of the Control valve shall be painted as :

Direct action (open on air failure) valves
Reverse acting (close on air failure) valves
- Green
- Red
The painting Status shall be comprehensively updated every 6 months for compliance
10.7
Colour Coding for Structural & Others
Sl
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10.8
Item
Color
Indicative
Dark Admiralty Grey

Black
Black
Black
Signal Red
Signal Red
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pipe rack structural

Chequered Plate ( Both faces)
Grating
Ladder Rungs & Railing Vertical Posts
Hand Rail, Middle rail, Toe Plate
Ladder Vertical Posts
Building Structural, Steel Columns, brackets,
beams, bracings, roof trusses, purling, side
grits, louvers, stringers
Overhead Monorail
Gantry Girder & Monorail
Monorail Stopper Plates
Coke Cutting System
EOT / HOT Cranes
Transformers, & Battery room structural
14
Electrical Motors
Dark Blue
Dark Admiralty Grey

Signal Red
Dark Green
Signal Red.
Signal red
Canary Yellow
Dark Admiralty Grey
IDENTIFICATION OF VESSELS, PIPING ETC

Equipment number shall be stenciled in black or white on each vessel, column, equipment &
machinery (insulated or uninsulated) after painting. Line number in black or white shall be
stenciled on all the pipe lines of more than one location as directed by Engineer-In-Charge;
Size of letter printed shall be as below:
Column & Vessels
Pump, compressor & other machinery
Piping
150mm (high)
50mm (high)
40-150 mm
Page 440 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 29 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
Identification of Storage Tanks

The storage tanks shall be marked as detailed in the drawing.
11.0
PAINTING FOR CIVIL DEFENCE REQUIREMENTS

Following items shall be painted for camouflaging if required by the OWNER.
a.
All Columns
b.
All tanks in Offsite
c.
Large Vessels
d.
Spheres
Two coats of selected finishing paint as per defense requirement shall be applied in a particular
pattern as per 20.3 and as per the instructions of Engineer-In-Charge.
Method of Camouflaging
Disruptive painting for camouflaging shall be done in three colours in the ratio of 5:3:2 (all
matte finish).
Dark Green
5
Light Green
3
Dark Medium Brown

2
11.1
The patches should be asymmetrical and irregular.
11.2
The patches should be inclined at 30 to 60 to the horizontal.
11.3
The patches should be continuous where two surfaces meet at an angle.
11.4
The patches should not coincide with corners.
11.5
Slits and holes shall be painted in dark shades.
11.6
Width of patches should be 1 to 2 meters.
12.0
SELECTION OF PAINTING MATERIALS

Paint manufacturers are expected to conduct periodic evaluation/testing of products including
long term performance tests which shall include following
-Resistance to Moisture vapour permeability for 2000h (ASTM 2247)
-Cyclic tests for 4200h (ISO7253 & ASTM D 5894-10)
-Resistance to water immersion (ASTM D870)
Contractor shall submit MAR (Material Approval Request) along with datasheets, MSDS,
relevant information and test results including test results of long term tests for all paint products
against system indicated for approval. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the quality
of the paints meeting technical requirements of the products as per approved datasheets. Along
with the delivery of the paint products, the contractor shall furnish batch wise test report from
the manufacturer.
Page 441 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 30 OF 49
Once the paint material is supplied to site, In addition to the quality control system as specified
in section 13.0, for each product, the supplier shall organize random sampling and testing in a
third party laboratory as per discretion of the Engineer-in-charge. Failing to meet the specified
quality requirements may cause rejection of the paint products.
.
13.0
QUALITY CONTROL, INSPECTION AND TESTING
13.1
All painting materials including primers and thinners brought to site by contractor for
application shall be procured directly from manufactures as per specifications and shall be
accompanied by manufacturer's test certificates. Paint formulations without certificates are not
acceptable (see section 12.0).
The painting work shall be subject to inspection by Engineer-In-Charge at all times. In
particular, following stage-wise inspection will be performed and contractor shall offer the
work for inspection and approval of every stage before proceeding with the next stage. The
record of inspection shall be maintained in the registers. Stages of inspection are as follows:
(a)
(b)
(c)
13.2
Surface preparation
Primer application
Each coat of paint
During surface preparation, following tests are to be carried out:

-
Test for presence of oil/grease and contamination

The steel substrate after degreasing as per SSPC-SP 1 shall be tested as per following
procedure to validate absence of oil and grease contamination.
a) Visual inspection - Continue degreasing until all visible signs of contamination are
removed.
b) Conduct a solvent evaporation test by applying several drops or a small splash of
residue-free tri-chloromethane on the suspect area especially pitting, crevice corrosion
areas or depressed areas. An evaporation ring formation is indicative of oil and grease
contamination.
Continue degreasing and inspection till test is passed.
Tests for surface finish of blasted surface shall be done by visual inspection using SSPCVIS1. Clear cellophane tape test as per ISO 8502-3 shall be used to confirm absence of
dust on blasted surface. Checks shall be done on each component at least once per 200 m2
of blasted surface and minimum of 3 checks per shift.
Test for presence of soluble salt as per method ISO 8502-9. Maximum allowable salt
content shall be considered 20 mg/m2 (2 mg/cm2). Checks shall be done on each
component at least once per 200 m2 of blasted surface and minimum of 3 checks per shift.
In case salt exceeds specified limit, the contaminated surface shall be cleaned by method
as per Annexure-C of IS 12944-4 (water cleaning). After cleaning surface shall be retested
for salt after drying.
Page 442 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 31 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
Blast Profile Measurement:

The angular profile depth measurement shall be done by profile tape as per method NACE
Standard RP 0287 or ASTM D 4417 method B (Profile depth gauge micrometer). Spot
measurement shall be carried out every 15m2 of blasted surface. At each spot three
measurements shall be taken over an area of 10 cm2 and average of measurements to be
recorded and reported.
If profile is <65 microns blasting shall continue till greater than 65 microns depth profile
is achieved.
Tests for blasting media, blasting air

Blasting Media (For every fresh batch of media and one random test during blasting)
Blasting Media shall be visually inspected for absence of contamination and debris using
10 X magnification.
a) Inspection for the absence of oil contamination shall be conducted using following
procedure:
-
Fill a small clean 200 ml bottle half full of abrasive.
Fill the bottle with potable water, cap and shake the bottle.
Inspect water for oil film/slick. If present, the blasting media is not to be used.
b) Soluble salt contamination if suspected shall be verified by method ASTM D 4940. If

present, media to be replaced.
c) Clean blasting equipment, especially pot and hoses, and then replace blasting media
and retest.
Test for Blasting Air (Once Daily before start of blasting and once at random during
blasting)
The air for blasting shall be free from moisture and oil. The compressor air shall be
checked for oil and water contamination per ASTM D 4285.
In addition to above, record should include type of shop primer already applied on equipment
e.g. zinc silicate, or zinc rich epoxy, or zinc phosphate.
Any defect noticed during the various stages of inspection shall be rectified by the contractor
to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-In-Charge before proceeding further. Irrespective of the
inspection, repair and approval at intermediate stages of work, contractor shall be responsible
for making good any defects found during final inspection/guarantee period/defect liability
period as defined in general condition of contract. Dry film thickness (DFT) shall be checked
and recorded after application of each coat and extra coat of paint should be applied to makeup the DFT specified without any extra cost to owner, the extra coat should have prior approval
of Engineer-in-charge.
Page 443 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 32 OF 49
13.3
Primer Application
After surface preparation, the primer should be applied to cover the crevices, corners, sharp
edges etc. in the presence of inspector nominated by Engineer-In-Charge.
The shades of successive coats should be slightly different in colour in order to ensure
application of individual coats, the thickness of each coat and complete coverage should be
checked as per provision of this specification. This should be approved by Engineer-In-Charge
before application of successive coats.
The contractor shall provide standard thickness measurement instrument with appropriate
range(s) for measuring.
Dry film thickness of each coat, surface profile, gauge for checking of surface profile in case
of sand blasting. Holiday detectors and pinhole detector & protector whenever required for
checking in case of immersion conditions.
Prior to application of paints on surfaces of chimneys, the thickness of the individual coat shall
be checked by application of each coat of same paint on M.S.test panel. The thickness of paint
on test panels shall be determined by using gauge such as 'Elko meter'. The thickness of each
coat shall be checked as per provision of this specification. This shall be approved by EngineerIn-Charge before application of paints on surface of chimney.
At the discretion of Engineer-In-Charge, the paint manufacturer must provide the expert
technical service at site as and when required. This service should be free of cost and without
any obligation to the owner, as it would be in the interest of the manufacturer to ensure that
both surface preparation and application are carried out as per their recommendations. The
contractor is responsible to arrange the same.
13.4
Final inspection of finished coating shall consist of measurement of:

1) Paint dry film thickness (DFT),
2) Adhesion, and,
3) Holiday detection check as well as for finish and workmanship.
1) Coating DFT measurement shall be as per ISO 2808. Type II electromagnetic gauges
should be used for ferrous substrates. DFT gauge calibration, number of measurement shall
be as per SSPC-DA 2. Measured DFT shall be within + 10% of the dry film thickness,
specified in the specifications.
2) Adhesion of the primer to the steel substrate and intercoat adhesion of the subsequent coat(s)
after curing for at least a week after application of the topcoat shall be examined by a knife
test in accordance with ASTM D 6677. For the knife test, if the rating is better than 8, the
adhesion is considered acceptable. The adhesion is destructive and tested areas shall be
repaired afterward using the spot repair procedure. Alternatively, the applicator may
perform the adhesion test on a steel panel coated using the same surface preparation and
coating application procedure as the work piece. Adhesion testing shall be carried out for
each component at least once per 200 m2 (2000 ft2) of coated surface.
3) Holiday testing shall be conducted in accordance with NACE SP 0188. For immersion
services, 100% of coated area shall be inspected for holidays. For atmospheric exposure,
Page 444 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 33 OF 49
10% of coated area which must include weld seams, corners and edges to be holiday tested.
Voltage at which test is to be carried out will depend upon DFT of coating being tested and
shall be as per NACE SP 0188. Any holiday is unacceptable and should be marked and
repaired immediately.
The contractor shall arrange for spot checking of paint materials for Specific gravity, glow time
(ford cup) and spreading rate.
13.5
Final Inspection of coating system

A final inspection shall be conducted prior to the acceptance of the work. The coating contractor
and the facility owner shall both be present and they shall sign an agreed inspection report. Such
reports shall include:
General
- Names of the coating contractor and the responsible personnel
- Dates when work was performed
Coating Materials
- Information on coating materials being applied
- Condition of coating materials received
Environmental Conditions
- Weather and ambient conditions
- Coating periods
Surface Preparation
- Condition of surface before preparation
- Tools and methods used to prepare surface
- Condition of surface after preparation
Coating Application
- Equipment used
- Mixing procedure prior to application
- Coating application techniques used
Testing
- Type and calibration of inspection instruments used
- Type of quality control tests performed, and results
14.0
GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee that the chemical and physical properties of paint materials used
are in accordance with the specifications contained herein/to be provided during execution of
work.
Page 445 of 1744

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 34 OF 49

PROTECTIVE COATING
ANNEXURE 1
(COATING SYSTEMS)

SURFACE PREPARATION AND PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 35 OF 49
TABLE 5.0
REPAIR OF PRE-ERECTION/PRE-FABRICATION OR SHOP PRIMER AFTER
ERECTION/WELDING
Sl.
No.
Design Temp.
in oC
Surface Preparation
Coating System
Total DFT
in Microns (min.)
5.1
-90 to 400
SSPC-SP-3
1 coat of F-9
65-75
Remarks
See note below and

clause 5.9.3
5.2
401 to 550
SSPC-SP-3
1 coat of F-12
20-25
NOTES:
The application and repair of pre-erection/pre-fabrication or Shop Primer given in above tables shall be
done for all the items to be painted. In case the damages to primer are severe and spread over large
area, entire primer shall be removed by blasting to achieve SSPC-SP-10 and surfaces to be primed
again with F-9 or F-12 as applicable.
Page 446 of 1744
Page 447 of 1744


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 36 OF 49
TABLE 6.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR OFFSITE AREA (INLAND PLANTS)*
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. oC
Surface Preparation
& Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
6.1
-90 to 15
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
6.2
6.3
-16 to 80
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
81 to 250
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
6.4
251 to
400
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
6.5
401 to
550
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-12 @
20-25 DFT/coat
Coating System
(Post-erection / Field)
Primer
Finish Coat
None
None
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
65-75
No
overcoating over
F-9
is
allowed
1 coat of P-6
@50 DFT +
1 coat of
F-6B@100
1 coat of F2 @ 50
DFT/coat
265-275
None
2 coats of F11 @ 20
DFT/coat;
(2x20=40)
105-115
None
2 coats of F12 @ 20
DFT/coat
(2x20=40)
105-115
None
2 coats of F12 @20-25

DFT/coat
(2x20=40)
60-75
F-12 shall be
ambient
temperature
curing type


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 37 OF 49
*Flare line within unit or offsite areas shall be coated as per Sl.no.7.3 of Table 7.0
NOTES:
1
The list of items given in the heading of the above table is not exhaustive. There may be more items
for a particular contract where these specifications are used. The Contractor is fully responsible for
completing painting including prefabrication primer for all the items supplied and fabricated through
his scope of work as per tender document.
If the Pre-erection/Pre-fabrication & Shop Primer has already been completed, the same shall not be
repeated again in the field. In case the damages of primer are severe and spread over large areas, the
engineer-in-charge may decide & advise re-blasting and priming again. Repair of pre-fabrication/preErection primer, if required, shall be done as per Table 5.0.
In case of coating systems as per Sl. Nos. 6.3 and 6.5, the color bands shall be applied over the
Aluminum paint as per the Color coding requirement for specific service of piping given in Clause 9.0.
All coating system including surface preparation, primer, and finish coat for piping shall be done at
field only.
Page 448 of 1744
Page 449 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 38 OF 49
TABLE 7.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR UNIT AREAS AS WELL AS DM, CPP & COOLING TOWER
OF INLAND PLANTS AND FOR ALL AREAS (UNIT, OFFSITE, DM, CPP, etc.) OF
COASTAL PLANTS (Carbon steel, LTCS & Low alloy steels)
Sl.
No.
7.1
Design
Temp. oC
-90 to -15
Surface
Preparation &
Preerection/Shop
Primer
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
Coating System
Primer
Finish Coat
Total DFT
in Microns
(min.)
None
None
65-75
Remarks
a) No over coating on
F-9 is allowed
b) F-12 shall be
ambient temperature
curing type
7.2
7.3
7.4
-14 to 80
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
81 to 400
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/coat
401 to 550
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-12 @
20-25 DFT/coat
1 coat of P-6
@ 40
DFT/coat
None
None
2 coats of F-6B
@ 100
DFT/coat + 1
coat of F-2 @
40 DFT/coat;
(2x100 + 40=
240)
2 coats of F-12
@ 20
DFT/coat
2x20=40
2 coats of F-12
@ 20-25
DFT/coat;
(2x20=40)
345-355
c)
Finish
coat
including
primer
compatible
with
finish coat (i.e. field
primer) shall be
applied at site only.
Finish coating is not
permitted
at
equipment
manufacture shop.
105-115
60-75
Page 450 of 1744


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 39 OF 49
NOTES:
1.
The list of items given in the heading of the above table is not exhaustive. There may be more
items for a particular contract where these specifications are used. The Contractor is fully
responsible for completing painting including prefabrication primer for all the items
supplied and fabricated through his scope of work as per tender document.
2.
If the Pre-erection/Pre-fabrication & Shop Primer has already been completed, the same shall
not be repeated again in the field. In case the damages of primer are severe and spread over
large areas, the engineer-in-charge may decide & advise re-blasting and priming again. Repair
of pre-fabrication/pre-erection primer, if required, shall be done as per Table 5.0.
3.
For external surface of RCC Chimney, 2 coats of F-6 @ 100 DFT/coat to obtain total DFT
of 200 shall be applied after proper surface preparation as per guidelines in clause 5.1.6.
4.
In case of paint systems as per Sl. Nos. 7.3 and 7.4, the colour bands shall be applied over the
Aluminum paint as per the Color coding requirement for specific service of piping given in
Clause 9.0.
5.
All coating system including surface preparation, primer, finish coat for piping shall be done
at site/field only.
Page 451 of 1744


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 40 OF 49
TABLE 8.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR EFFLUENT TREATMENT PLANT (ETP)
Sl.
No.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
Design Temp.
in oC
Coating System
Surface Preparation
Primer
Finish Coat
Total DFT in
Microns
(min.)
Remarks
For External Surfaces of C.S./M.S. items: Screens, Walk way bridges, Baffles, Dual media filters, Vertical pumps, piping
in treated effluent sump, bio sludge pump, Screw pump and pump house, CS tanks, sumps and vessels.
2 coats of
F-6A @100
1 coat of F-9 @
DFT/coat + 1
-14 to 80
SSPS-SP-10
305-315
65-75 DFT/coat
coat of F-2 @
40 DFT/coat;
(2x100+40=240)
For Internal Surfaces of CS/MS Items: Bio-sludge sump, Filter feed sump, Process sump, Sanitary sump, Transfer sump,
Sludge, Slop oil tank, scrapping mechanism in Clarifier
3 coats of F-6A
1 coat of F-9 @ @100
-14 to 80
SSPS-SP-10
365-375
Note:1
65-75 DFT/coat. DFT/coat
(3x100=300)
All R.C.C./concrete surfaces exposed to effluent water / liquid such as tanks, structures, drains etc. in Process sump, TPI
separator (Process and Oil), Aeration Tank and Transfer sump etc.
Blast cleaning to SSPCEpoxy screed lining
SP guide lines and Acid
shall be applied as per
-14 to 80
etching with 10-15%
Epoxy Screed lining
3mm
specific manufacturer
HCl acid followed by
and
Engineer-inthorough water washing.
Charge instructions
C.S/M.S Dual media filters (Internal), Chemical dosing tanks(internal) such as Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP) and Urea
Natural Rubber lining
shall be applied as per
Natural Rubber Lining
Up to 60
SSPC-SP-10
4.5mm
specific manufacturer
(As per IS 4682, Part 1)
and Engineer-inCharge instructions
NOTES
1. The paint /coating manufacturers shall provide their Quality control test certificate of
coating materials (F-6A) for immersion service of the exposed effluent given in 8.2.
Page 452 of 1744


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 41 OF 49
TABLE 9.0
EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR UNINSULATED CARBON
ALLOY STEEL STORAGE TANKS
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. oC
Coating system (Field)

(see note 1 below)
Surface
Preparation
(Field)
Primer
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.2
9.2.1
Total DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
All external surfaces of shell, wind girders, appurtenances, roof tops of all above ground tank including top side of external
and internal floating roof and associated external structural works.
-14 to 80
81 to 150
151 to 500
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
1coat of F-9 @ 65-75 2 coats of F-6B @ 100

DFT/coat + 1coat of P- DFT /coat + 1 coat of F6 @ 40 DFT/ coat ;
2 @ 40 DFT/ coat;
1 coat of F-15 primer

@ 80 DFT/ coat + 1 1 coat of F-15 finish coat
coat
of
F-15 @80 DFT/ coat + 1coat
intermediate coat @ of F-2 @ 40 DFT/ coat;
80 DFT/coat ;
2 coats of F-12 @20
DFT/ coat
1coat of F-9 @ 65-75
Or
DFT/coat
1 coat of F-16 @ 50
DFT / coat
345-355
F-6 should be
suitable for
occasional water
immersion
280
105
or
115
External surfaces of bottom plate (soil side) for all storage tanks.
-14 to 80
9.2.2
81 to 150
9.2.3
151 to 550
9.3
Finish Coat
STEEL AND LOW
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
365-375
F-7 should be
suitable for
immersion
service of the
products given

@ 80 DFT/ coat + 1
coat
of
F-15 1 coat of F-15 finish coat
intermediate coat @ @ 80 DFT/ coat
80
DFT/coat
;
(80+80=160)
240
1 coat of F-16 @ 125 1 coat of F-16 @ 125

DFT /coat
DFT /coat
250
1 coat of F-9 @
65-75 DFT/ coat
3 coats of F-7@ 100

DFT/coat (3x100=300)
For underside of the bottom plate (in case tank is not lifted during PWHT) (see Note 2c)
-180 to 650
For CS
SSPC SP-6
Commercia
l Blast
1 coat of inert
polymeric matrix
coating @ 125
2 coats of inert
polymeric matrix
coating @ 125
350-400
Page 453 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 42 OF 49
For SS
SSPC SP-1
with nonchloride
solvent
NOTES
1.
2.
All paint coating application including primer for tankage shall be carried out at field after erection
and completion of all welding.
For underside of bottom plate :
a) Painting shall be carried out before laying of bottom plate for tanks with Non-Post Weld Heat
Treatment (PWHT).
b) For tanks with PWHT, painting shall be carried out after PWHT.
c) In case tank is not lifted during PWHT then painting shall be applied before laying of bottom
plate, Sl.no. 9.3 shall be followed.
Caution: PWHT temperature shall not exceed 650oC.
Page 454 of 1744


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 43 OF 49
TABLE 10.0
INTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR CARBON STEEL AND LOW ALLOY STORAGE
TANKS & VESSELS
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp oC
Surface
Preparation
(Field)

(see note 1 below)
Primer
10.1
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
Total DFT
in Microns (min.)
Finish Coat
CRUDE OIL, ATF, TURPENTINE OIL, LUBRICATING OIL AND VEGETABLE OIL
Underside of floating roof, internal surface of cone roof, inside of bottom plate, Internal surfaces of Shell including wetted and free board height, oil side surfaces of deck plates, oil side surfaces of pontoons, roof structures,
structural steel, ladders and other CS internals
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
1 coat of F-15
80 DFT/coat + 1
-14 to 90
SSPC-SP-10
primer @ 80
240-300
coat of F-15 finish
DFT/ coat
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat;
PETROLEUM PRODUCTS & INTERMEDIATES like LDO, HSD , GAS OIL, FEEDS of FCC-PC,
FCC-LCO, VGO-HDT, ISOM, DHDT, REFORMATE, DCU, NHT & GASOLINE, NAPHTHA,
ISOMERATE AND KEROSENE.
Underside of Floating roofs, internal surface of cone roof, inside of bottom plate, internal surfaces of Bare shell
for full height, underside of floating roof, oil side surfaces of deck plates, oil side surfaces of pontoons, support
structures and ladders etc.
-14 to 45
46 to 90
SSPC-SP-10
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of F-9
@
75 DFT/coat
75
Note 2
1 coat of F-15
primer @ 80
DFT/ coat
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
80 DFT/coat + 1
coat of F-15 finish
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat;
240-300
10.3
POTABLE, RAW & FIRE WATER

All internal surfaces, accessories and roof structures of Cone and Dome roof tanks
10.3.1
1 Coats of P-6
@
100
DFT/coat;
10.4
-14 to 60
SSPC-SP-10
2 Coats of F-6A @
100 DFT/ Coat;
(2x100=200)
300-350
Note-4
DE-MINERALIZED (DM) WATER & CONDENSATES etc

10.4.1
-14 to 60
SSPC-SP-10
1 Coats of P-6
@
100 DFT/coat;
10.4.2
61 to 100
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of F-15
primer @ 80
DFT/ coat
10.5
Remarks
2 coats of F-6C @
200 DFT/ coat;
(2x200=400)
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
80 DFT/coat + 1
coat of F-15 finish
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat;
(80+80=160)
400-450
240-300
HYDROCHLORIC ACID (HCl) 10 %

Page 455 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 44 OF 49
-14 to 60
10.6
10.8
10.9
10.9.1
10.10
10.11
10.11.1
None
4.5 mm
AGGRESSIVE SOLVENTS LIKE HEXANE, HEXENE, BENZENE, XYLENE AND TOLUENE

-14 to
65
10.7
SSPC-SP-10
Natural Rubber
Lining
(As per IS 4682, Part
1)
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of F-9 @ 75
DFT/ coat
---
75
ETHYLENE GLYCOL (EG) TANKS

Internal shell-full height, bottom plate, underside of roof and all accessories
3 coats of
vinyl chloride coAll
SSPC-SP-10
None
polymer @
225
75 /Coat;
(3x75=225)
Inside pontoon and inside of double deck of all floating roofs
-14 to
1 coat of F-8 @
1 coat of F-8 @ 100
SSPC-SP-3
200
80
100 DFT/coat
DFT/coat
WET SLOPS, AMINE solutions, SOUR WATER , WATER DRAW OFF
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
-14 to
80 DFT/coat + 1
SSPC-SP-10
240
90
@ 80 DFT/ coat
coat of F-15 finish
coat @ 80 DFT/
coat; (80+80=160)
VACUUM RESIDUE, FUEL OIL , DRY SLOP, BITUMEN AND OTHER HIGH TEMPERATURE
HYDROCARBON LIQUIDS
Underside of floating roof, internal surface of cone roof, bottom plate, inside of bare shell including wetted and non
wetted surfaces, oil side surfaces of deck plates, oil side surfaces of pontoons, roof structures, structural steel and
ladders
1 coat of F-17
intermediate coat @
1 coat of F-17
125 DFT/coat + 1
Up to
SSPC-SP-10
primer @ 125
coat of F-17 finish
375
Note:3
o
150 C
DFT/ coat
coat @125 DFT/
coat;
(125+125=250)
ALKALIS UP TO 50 % CONCENTRATION
2 Coats of F-6 A @
Up to
SSPC-SP-10
100 DFT/coat;
280-100
o
60 C
@ 80 DFT/ coat
(2x100=200)
NOTES
1.
All paint coating application including primer shall be carried out after erection and completion of
all welding work at site.
2.
F-6A should be suitable and resistant for immersion service for the respective Hydrocarbons.
3.
This system can be used where maximum operating temperature is below 150oC and design
temperature is up to 200oC. For operating temperatures >150 oC, contractor shall propose suitable
coating system for review/approval by owner/PMC.
4
F-6 A shall be suitable for drinking water service and should have competent authority certification.


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 45 OF 49
TABLE 11.0
COATING SYSTEMS FOR EXTERNAL SIDE OF UNDERGROUND CARBON STEEL PLANT PIPING
AND UNDERGROUND VESSELS
Sl.
No.
11.1
Design Temp.
in oC
Surface
Preparation
&
Shop Primer
Surface
Preparation &
Primer
Underground carbon steel plant piping
SSPC-SP-10;
11.1.1
25 to 65
---
1 coat of
synthetic fast
drying primer
25 @ DFT/
coat
SSPC-SP-10;
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
Page 456 of 1744
66 to 150
---
1 coat of F-17
primer @ 125
DFT/ coat
SSPC-SP-10;
Finish Coat
1 layer of coaltar tape

coating @ 2mm +1 coat
of synthetic fast drying
primer 25 @ DFT/ coat
+ 1 layer of coal tar tape
coating @ 2mm /layer as
per
EIL Standard
Specification .No
6-79-0011 (latest
edition)
1 coat of F-17
intermediate coat @
125 DFT/coat + 1 coat
of F-17 finish coat
@125 DFT/ coat
1 coat of F-16 finish

1 coat of F-16
coat @125 DFT/ coat
primer @ 125
DFT/ coat
External side of un-insulated underground storage vessels
151 to 400
---
-40 to 80
SSPC-SP-10;
1 coat of F-9
@
65-75 DFT/
coat
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
4 mm
The primer
DFT is not
measurable.
Reconciliati
on primer
shall be
done by
coverage of
maximum
10
sq.m/litre
375
250
---
3 coats of F-7 @ 100

DFT/coat
365-375
81 to 150
SSPC-SP-10;
1 coat of F-17
primer @
125 DFT/
coat
---
1 coat of
F-17
intermediate coat
@
of
F-17 finish coat
@125 DFT/ coat
375
151 to 400
SSPC-SP-10;
1 coat of F-16
primer @
125 DFT/
coat
---
1 coat of F-16 finish coat

@125 DFT/ coat
250
Page 457 of 1744


A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 46 OF 49
TABLE 12.0
PAINTING UNDER INSULATION (ALL ENVIRONMENTS)
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. in oC
Surface Preparation &

Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
Paint system (Field)

Primer
Finish paint
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
12.1
Carbon steel, LTCS and low allow steel Piping, Storage tanks, equipments etc
SSPC-SP-10;
DFT/coat
12.1.1
-45 to 125
1coat of F-9 @
none
75 DFT/coat
12.1.2
126 to 400
SSPC-SP-10;
1coat of F-9 @
75 DFT/coat for up to
400 oC
none
DFT/coat
305- 315
125-135
1 coat of F-12 @20

DFT/coat for 400-450 oC
12.2
Stainless Steel, Alloy Steel, Alloy-20 Piping & Equipments (Note:2)
none
1 coat of F-15
intermediate coat @
of F-15 finish coat @
80 DFT/coat;
(80+80=160)
240
12.2.1
-30 to 125
SSPC-SP-10
(15-25 surface profile)
1 coat of F-15@ 80
DFT/coat
12.2.2
126 to 500
1 coat of F-16@ 125

DFT/coat
none
1 coat of F-16@ 125

DFT/coat
250
>500
Painting, if any, shall be

as per required for
insulation system suitable
for exposure temperature
---
---
---
12.2.3
12.3
Cyclic service of SS, Alloy Steel and CS
-180 to 350
SSPC-SP-10
1 coat of modified poly
siloxane or inert
polymeric matrix
coating*@ 125
DFT/coat
none
1 coat of modified poly

siloxane or inert
polymer matrix
coating*@ 125
DFT/coat
250
* Alternatively Thermally Sprayed Aluminium (TSA) is acceptable.

AMERCOAT 738/JOTATEMP-650 or equivalent is acceptable.
Page 458 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 47 OF 49
NOTES
1. The blast cleaning abrasives for SS and Alloy steel surfaces shall be SS grits/shots or
Aluminium oxide grits/shots.
2. For piping with cyclic temperature of -45 to125 deg. C Sr.no 12.2.1 is applicable.

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 48 OF 49

TABLE 13.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR CARBON STEEL COMPONENTS OF COOLERS / CONDENSERS
(INTERNAL PROTECTION) FOR WATER SERVICE
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. in oC
Surface Preparation
& Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
13.1
Up to 80 oC
SSPC-SP-10
13.2
80 to 140
SSPC-SP-10
Coating System
Total
Final DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
Primer
Finish paint
1 coat of F-15
@ 80
DFT/coat
2 coats of F-15 @
80 DFT/coat
240
---
1 coat of Glass
Fibre Reinforced
Novolac epoxy of
1.5 mm DFT
1500
TABLE 14.0
COATING SYSTEM (INTERNAL PROTECTION) FOR GALVANIZED OR NON FERROUS
OR STAINLESS STEEL/ DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL COMPONENTS OF COOLERS/
CONDENSERS FOR WATER SERVICE
Page 459 of 1744
Sl.
No.
Design
Temp. in oC
Surface Preparation
& Pre-erection/Shop
Primer
14.1
Up to 80
Sweep Blasting
14.2
80 to 140
Sweep Blasting
Coating System
Total Final
DFT
in Microns
(min.)
Remarks
Primer
Finish paint
1 coat of F-15 @
80 DFT/coat;
1 coat of F-15 @
80 DFT/coat;
160
---
1 coat of Glass
Fibre Reinforced
Novolac epoxy of
1.5 mm DFT
1500
TABLE 15.0
COATING SYSTEM FOR ROLLING & STATIONERY LADDERS, SPIRAL
STAIRWAYS AND HAND RAILS IN ALL LOCATION
Sl.
No.
8.1
Design
Temp. in
o
C
Coating System
Total DFT
in Microns (min.)
Up to 60
Hot Dip Galvanizing to 80-85 microns (600-610

gm/m2)as per IS 4759, 2629, 4736, 2633 +
1 coat of P-6 @ 40 DFT/coat + 1 coat of F-2 @ 40
microns DFT/coat
80 microns of finish coat

(excluding the thickness of
galvanizing )
Page 460 of 1744

PROTECTIVE COATING

A702-000-79-41-PLS-01
Rev.1
PAGE 49 OF 49
NOTES:
1
No galvanized specimen shall have thickness less than 80 microns.
Repair of the damaged area of galvanized coatings due to welding during erection shall be
carried out as per recommended practice IS 11759 using cold galvanizing spray process.
Organic Paint systems are not acceptable for repair.
After repair of damaged galvanized coating by Cold Galvanized, the repaired area shall be
top coated with paint system as given in Table 15.0 above (i.e., 1 coat of P-6 @ 40
DFT/coat + 1 coat of F-2 @ 40 DFT/coat).
Approved Cold Galvanizing manufacturers are ZINGA, LOCKTITE or Z.R.C.
Page 461 of 1744
3D MODELING SPECIFICATION FOR

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(29-LZ-00-1006)
Doc No.: A702-029-16-43-DP-4070

Rev. 0
Page 1 of 2
3D-MODELING SPECIFICATION
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(29-LZ-00-1006)
0
Rev.
No
PROJECT
: REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT
LOCATION
PROJECT
: BINA (MP), INDIA
CLIENT
: M/s. BORL
EIL JOB NO
: A702
01/02/2016
Issued with VPSA Oxygen Plant Tender
SKS
NK
PM
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Date
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T1 Rev. 1
Copyrights EIL All rights reserved
Page 462 of 1744
3D MODELING SPECIFICATION FOR

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
(29-LZ-00-1006)
Doc No.: A702-029-16-43-DP-4070

Rev. 0
Page 2 of 2
3D Model specification for VPSA Oxygen Plant (29-LZ-00-1006)

Vendor shall carry out complete 3D Modelling using PDMS VERSION 12.1 SP4. Before starting
3D medeling, vendor shall consult EIL for project database creation for 3D modeling.
Complete internal Piping i.e., all piping within battery limit of VPSA Oxygen Plant Vendors
scope, above ground piping , big bore and small bore, except tubing, for all piping materials
shall be modelled. Details shall include all pipes, valves, flanges, fittings, reducers, spectacle
blinds, drains, temperature/pressure connections, sample points, drip legs, jacketed pipes,
fittings and flanges etc. All piping special items like expansion bellows, slide valves, and special
valves with purge points, Steam traps, strainers etc. with near exact geometry. Steam supply
and condensate recovery stations up to the first isolation valves in tracer lines. Complete vessel
trims with level instruments, equipment/instrument vents/drains utility connections, pressure
gauges etc. with exact geometry. All pipe supports along with concrete pedestals to be
modelled in complete details and all spring hangers, roller supports, Rotational stops, Anchors
,Structural steel members used for the pipe supports to be modelled in complete details.
a.) All Skid mounted Equipments and Packaged units/modular units to be modelled with
exact geometry including but not limited to : manholes with davits, pipe davits on top
platforms, nozzles, stiffener rings, bellows, break flanges, platforms, ladders, handrails,
lifting lugs etc., for all the equipments in the skid like, vessels, columns, reactor,
receivers, pumps with motors, compressors with details of volume bottles, cylinders
etc., blowers, centrifugal compressors, air coolers with motors and fans, filters, blow
down drums, tanks, all equipments within packages and heat exchangers etc.
Equipments supports: skirts, support legs/lugs, saddles to be modelled along with the
equipments.
b.) Structural frames, drip pans, structural supports, canopies, platform etc. and all other
structural member i.e. primary and secondary shall be modelled in structural mode of
PDMS with true shape and member size.
c.) All in- line instruments like control valves, safety valves, Rota-meters, orifice plate etc.
shall be modelled with near exact geometry.
d.) Maintenance areas around equipments, davit swing areas, swing elbows sweep areas,
bundle removal areas, drop out areas to be modelled as soft envelopes and should be
used for clash detections.
Vendor shall submit 3D model along with Design database in CD at 30%, 60% and 90%
progress stage for purchasers review. Complete updated / as built 3D model along with Design
database shall also be delivered at completion of the job.
Page 463 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-MS-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 2

(ELECTRICAL)

(ELECTRICAL)
(Tender No. A702-029-82-41-PF-T-4070)
PROJECT :

OF BINA REFINERY
OWNER
M/s BORL, BINA
JOB NO.
A702
07.03.2016
Issued with Tender
AKM
VB
ANPS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 464 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-MS-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 2

(ELECTRICAL)
MANDATORY SPARES (ELECTRICAL)
Bidder shall include the following mandatory spares for Electrical equipments
Sl. No.
1.0
1.1
1.2
2.0
2.1
2.2
Item Description
HV induction motors (one set of spare for each rating &
type)
Bearing ( DE & NDE )
Terminal studs/bushing assembly
Quantity
1 set
1 set each
MV induction motor 37 kW & above (one set of

spare for each rating & type)
Bearing set (DE & NDE)
Terminal studs/bushing assembly
1 set
1 set each
NOTES:
1.
The word TYPE means the Make, Model no., Type, Range, Size/ Length, Rating, Material as
applicable.
2.
Mandatory spares as indicated above do not cover commissioning spares.
3.
Mandatory spares as indicated above do not cover two year O&M spares.
4.
Mandatory spares shall be applicable for electrical items of motors/sub-packages as per
mandatory spares philosophy specified elsewhere in the bid document.
Page 465 of 1744
MANDATORY SPARES
INSTRUMENTATION
PROJECT ,BORL
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-16-51-SL-4070 ,REV A
Page 1 of 2
MANDATORY SPARES
INSTRUMENTATION:
1.1
This section defines the Philosophy for mandatory spares to be supplied by the Bidder as
part of the contract.
1.2
Bidder shall supply mandatory spares for applicable Instruments and systems.
1.3
The list below indicates the Minimum requirement for mandatory spares for Instruments/
Accessories and systems. However additional mandatory spares if and as recommended by
Instrument/ System Manufacturer shall be supplied by Bidder without any cost and time
implication.
1.4
Bidder shall also refer notes given at the end of this section for working out mandatory
spares requirement.
1.5
Bidder shall submit a list of these spares as per the percentage of total installed quantity
during detail engineering. The spare list shall not be reviewed during evaluation. This shall
be reviewed and approved by EIL during detail engineering. However any change required to
meet the quantity as per philosophy specified below shall be done without any price and
delivery implication by the vendor
1.6
Mandatory spares shall be quoted and included in Base lump sum price as per the following
table.
S. No.
1.0
1.1
PART DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY REQUIRED
3.0
Field Instruments
Pressure Gauges, Temperature Gauges, Level
Gauge, Differential Pressure Gauges, Field
Indicators, RTD/ Thermocouple (with Thermowell),
Thermowells
Transmitters (Smart) for Pressure, Level (excluding
guided wave radar transmitter and displacer), Flow
(excluding special flowmeter), Temperature &
Differential Pressure (complete transmitter)
Line Mounted Instruments
Control Valves, Shutdown Valves
Soft parts like gasket, O-ring, seal-ring, packing
material
Installation Material
3.1
Instrument Valves and Valve Manifolds
3.2
Tube Fittings
3.3
3.4
Cables
Cable Glands
4.0
Sub-system like PLC,

system (if applicable)
1.2
2.0
2.1
a.i)
Machine
10% subject to minimum 1

No. of each type
10% subject to minimum 1
No. of each type
1 no. for each valve.
10% subject to minimum one

number, whichever is higher,
of each type
of each type
10% of the length of each type
of each type
Monitoring
Page 466 of 1744
MANDATORY SPARES
INSTRUMENTATION
PROJECT ,BORL
S. No.
4.1
PART DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-16-51-SL-4070 ,REV A
Page 2 of 2
QUANTITY REQUIRED
Modules used like I/O Cards, all type of processor 5% or minimum one of each
cards, all type of power supply cards, communication type of module including
cards, Interface cards, controller cards etc. as processor module.
required for the System
NOTES:
1. The word TYPE means the Make, Model no., Type, Range, Size/ Length, Rating,
Material as applicable.
2. Wherever % age is identified, Bidder shall supply next rounded figure.
3. The terminology used under Part Description is the commonly used name of the part and
may vary from manufacturer to manufacturer.
4. The above list indicates Predefined Mandatory spares excluding the Consumable spares,
Commissioning spares and installed engineering spares for system-oriented items. The
Commissioning spares like spare fuses, lamps, terminals etc. shall also be part of bidder
scope of supply. The installed engineering spares for Local Control Panels etc. shall be as
per specification 6-52-0052.
5. Bidder can recommend additional spares based on his experience.
6. Upon receipt of order, Bidder to submit finalized list of 2 years operation & maintenance
spares for approval. The list shall indicate all details like part description, reference drawing
no., part no., MOC, quantity, bearing make & no., etc. For instrumentation, make, model,
range must be indicated. The list shall also be submitted in "EXCEL" format.
Page 467 of 1744
Page 468 of 1744
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 1 of 6
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT
REVAMP
AND
ENHANCEMENT PROJECT
REFINERY
OWNER
BORL, BINA
CONSULTANT :
JOB NO.
A702
CAPACITY
OF BORL
18.03.2016
ISSUED WITH TENDER
BKD
AK
PPP
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 469 of 1744
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 2 of 6
DATA SHEET FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT PACKAGE

Project :
Job No.
: Revamp And Capacity

Enhancement Project Of
BORL Refinery
: A702
Client
: Bharat Oman Refinery limited
Item No.
: 29-LZ-00-1006
Unit
: 029
Service
: Oxygen
Enrichment
Location
: Bina, Madhya Pradesh
No. of chains : 2 Nos. each of equal
capacity
SPECIFICATION FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT : For Process Specification and other process
related details of VPSA Oxygen plant, Vendor to refer Process Data sheet (Doc. no. A702-29-79DS-1806).
1.0
OPERATING DATA
1.1
CAPACITY
1.1.1
Plant Capacity of VPSA plant
182 TPD (as 100% of oxygen)
1.1.2
Turndown (%) of chain capacity with no
50
oxygen venting of a chain.
1.1.3
Product Specification
90% (Minimum)
Oxygen (Vol %)
1.1.4
Oil Content
NIL
1.1.5
- 46 C
Dew Point @ atm. Press
1.1.6
Capacity of each chain
91 TPD (as 100% of oxygen)
1.2
B/L Conditions
1.2.1
Pressure, kg/cm2 'g'
1.5 (Min)
1.2.2
Temperature, C
*
2
1.2.3
Mech. Design Press, kg/cm 'g'
*
1.2.4
Mech. Design Temp. C
65
1.3
Plant Operation
Automatic with manual override
1.3.1
Type
Suitable for both
1.3.2
Continuous / Intermittent
1.3.3
Location of Plant
Open air with Process Machineries in
building /shed
1.3.4
Utilities available at B/L
As per Process Datasheet (Doc No.
A702-29-79-DS-1806)
1.4
Plot Size
1.4.1
Overall size of plant (L x B), m
*
1.5
Site Data
1.5.1
Altitude above MSL
411.6 M
1.5.2
Ambient Temperature, Deg. C
1.1/45.6 (Minimum/ Maximum)
1.5.3
RH% at 42 Deg. C
54
1.5.4
Design for earthquake & Wind Load
As per Structural spec.
2.0
MANUFACTURER'S DATA (Vendor to fill all information and furnish with
his bid)
2.1
VPSA Oxygen Plant
2.1.1
Make / Model
*
2.1.2
No. of chain
*
2.1.3
Capacity of each chain
*
2.1.4
Turndown (%) of chain capacity with no
*
oxygen venting of a chain.
2.1.5
O2 quantity at outlet, Nm3/hr (or) TPD
*
2.1.6
O2 gas pressure at the B/L, kg/cm 2 'g'
*
Page 470 of 1744
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
2.3.1.2
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
2.3.2
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
2.3.2.3
2.3.2.4
2.3.2.5
2.3.2.6
2.3.2.7
2.3.2.8
2.3.2.9
2.3.2.10
2.3.2.11
2.3.2.12
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 3 of 6
Product quality
Oxygen Purity, Vol. %
Nitrogen, Vol. %
CO2, Vol %
Carbon Mono oxide, Vol %
Dew Point of Oxygen gas @ atm
.pressure
Equipment specifications
Inlet air system
*
*
*
*
*
Filters
Type/Make
Quantity
Particle size, microns
Filtration efficiency
Filtration area
Material of filtering element
Pr. drop, kg/cm2(normal)
max. allowable pr. drop, kg/cm2
Pr. gauge
Alarm
Insulation type/thickness
Size inlet/outlet piping
Air Blower system
No. of air blowers
Type of air blower
Air Blower make / Model
Capacity of Air Blower, NM3 / Hr
Air inlet Pressure to Blower, kg/cm 2 'g'
Air outlet Pressure, kg/cm 2 'g'
Air inlet Temperature, C
Air outlet Temperature, C
Total Air flow to Adsorption, Nm3/hr
Sound pressure level of Air Blower, dB
(A)
Rated power of Motor, kW & RPM
Material of construction
I.
casing
II.
Impeller
Condenser
Type
Make/model
Fluid Shell Side/tube side
Condensing Temperature, deg C
Heat rejection capacity, Kcal/hr
Water flow rate, M3/hr
Water Temp. in-out, deg C
LMTD, deg C
Fouling Factor, Shell side/Tube side, m2
hr oC/KCal
Water velocity, mps
Pr. drop tube side, m (WC)
No of passes & No of tubes
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Yes
No
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Water/air
Shell & Tube
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Page 471 of 1744
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
2.3.2.13
2.3.2.14
2.3.2.15
2.3.2.16
2.3.2.17
2.3.2.18
2.3.2.19
2.3.2.20
2.3.2.21
2.3.2.22
2.3.2.23
2.3.2.24
2.3.2.25
2.3.2.26
2.3.2.27
2.3.2.28
2.3.2.29
2.3.2.30
2.3.2.31
2.3.2.32
2.3.2.33
2.3.2.34
2.3.2.35
2.3.2.36
2.3.2.37
2.3.2.38
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
2.3.3
2.3.3.1
2.3.3.2
2.3.3.3
2.3.3.4
2.3.3.5
2.3.3.6
I.
II.
Tube length & tube O.D, mm

Total tube-shell surface Area, m2
Fin spacing, fpi
Design Pr. shell-tube side, Kg/cm2g
Hydro test Pr. shell side, Kg/cm2g
Hydro test Pr. tube side, Kg/cm2g
TEMA class/code
Tube to tube sheet joint
Thick tube/tube Sheet/shell, mm
Overall length/dia, meters-inches/meters
Dry wt/operating wt., Kg
Shell nozzle type/class in-out
Overall heat transfer coefficient
Accessories
Gate/globe valve at water in/out
Water in/out connections with flanges
Gas out connections with flanges&
valves
Purge/vent/relief/charging/drain valves
Tee for descaling
Controls/instruments/safety devices on
equipment/on line
Safety relief valve
Water flow switch
Flow meter with isolation valves
6" Dia. industrial type thermometer water
In/out
Pr. gauges at water in/out
Material of Construction
End covers
Fins
Water boxes
Shell*
Channel*
Channel cover
Tube sheet
Baffles/Tube supports
Tube
Bolts & Nuts
*Denotes to be Radiographed. Spot
radiography shall be carried out for all
welded joints of shell before welding to
tube sheet. Tube sheet joint with shell,
shall be DP tested.
Adsorption system
Adsorber vessel design code
Adsorber design pressure , kg/cm2 g
Adsorber design temperature, C
Adsorber vessel size, Dia. * Ht.
Adsorber vessel MOC
Cycle Time
Cycle Time Adsorption , sec
Cycle Time Regeneration , sec
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 4 of 6
*
*
*
*
*
*
C/ASME Sec VIII Div I
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
A 516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
A516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
A516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
A516Gr60/70, A 106GrB
SA 516 Gr. 60
Inhibited Admirality brass
SA 193 B7/SA 194 2H
ASME Sec. VIII Div.1 & 2

*
*
*
*
*
*
Page 472 of 1744
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
III.
IV.
2.3.3.7
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
2.3.4
2.3.4.1
2.3.4.2
2.3.4.3
2.3.4.4
2.3.4.5
2.3.4.6
2.3.4.7
2.3.4.8
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
2.3.5
2.3.5.1
2.3.5.2
2.3.5.3
2.3.5.4
2.3.5.5
2.3.5.6
2.3.5.7
2.3.5.8
2.3.6
2.3.6.1
2.3.6.2
2.3.6.3
2.3.6.4
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
Cycle Time Pressurisation , sec

Cycle Time De-pressurisation , sec
Adsorbent
Type
Quality/Grade
Manufacturer
Form ( spherical / cylindrical )
Size
Surface Area, m2/gm
Bulk Density packed, kg/m3
Bulk Density loose , kg/m3
Crushing Strength , kg/cm2
Static Adsorption Capacity, %
Dynamic Adsorption Capacity, %
Quantity / Bed, kg
Adsorber Skid Size (Lx W x H) mm
Weight, kgs.
Vacuum System
Number of Vacuum Pumps
Type of vacuum pump
Vac. Pump manufacturer & model
Vac. Pump capacity, Nm3/hr
Vac. Pressure level, mm of H2 O
Sound pressure level of Vac. Pump, dB
(A)
Silencer Details
No. of Silencer
Silencer make / model
Inlet sound pressure level, dB (A)
Outlet sound pressure level, dB (A)
Silencer Design code
Silencer MOC
Shell
Diffuser Pipe
Insulation material
O2 gas Compression system
No. of O2 gas compressors
Type of Compressor
Make / model of compressor
No. of stages
Capacity of Compressor, Nm3/hr
Inlet pressure to Compressor, kg/cm2 g
Outlet pressure, kg/cm2 g
O2 gas Buffer vessel
Buffer vessel design code
Buffer vessel volume
Buffer vessel size, dia. x Ht.
Buffer vessel MOC
Utility Consumption
Instrument Air, Nm3/hr
Plant Air , Nm3/hr
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 5 of 6
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
02 nos. ( 1W+1S )
Positive displacement (Reciprocating)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
SS304 L/SS316L
*
*
Page 473 of 1744
DATA SHEET
FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
DOCUMENT No.
A702-029-82-41-DS-4070 Rev. A
Page 6 of 6
Cooling Water, Nm3/hr

LP steam
Service water
DM water
Electric Power, kW
Air blower
Vacuum Pump
Reciprocating Compressor
PLC
Any other Utility ( Vendor to specify )
*
*
*
*
*
Notes:
Vendor to ensure uninterrupted Oxygen supply at required pressure continuously.
Performance shall be guaranteed and demonstrated as per product specification given
in PDS No. A702- 29-79- DS-1806.
3.0
WEIGHT SCHEDULE
(To be filled-in by the Vendor)
Size (L x B x H)
*
Weight (kgs)
*
3.1
Air filter
3.2
Air Blower skid ( for both )
3.3
Adsorber vessel skid ( for both )
3.4
Vac. Pump skid ( for both )
3.5
Silencer
3.6
Heat exchanger ( if applicable )
3.7
Recip. Compressor skid / one unit
3.8
Control panels (Local)
3.9
Control room panels
3.10
Others ( specify)
Page 474 of 1744
Datasheet No.
A702-029-16-50-DS-4070
Rev : A
Page 1 of 1
DATA SHEET
MV CABLE
PURCHASER'S DATA
Revamp and capacity enhancement project
Project
Client
M/S BORL
A Site conditions
45.6
1 Maximum ambient temperature:
C
1.1
2 Minimum ambient temperature:
C
40
3 Design ambient temperature:
C
B Technical particulars
1 System voltage
Nominal
Highest
415 V
500 V
3.3kV(E)
3.6 kV
3.3kV(UE)
3.6 kV
6.6kV(E)
7.2 kV
6.6kV(UE)
7.2 kV
11kV(E)
12 kV
11kV(UE)
12 kV
22kV(E)
24 kV
33kV(E)
36 kV
2 Frequency
Voltage grade
650/1100V
1.9/3.3kV
3.3/3.3kV
3.8/6.6kV
6.6/6.6kV
6.35/11kV
11/11kV
12.7/22kV
19/33kV
50
Location
Unit
BINA
VPSA Plant
4
5
6
Relative humidity:
Altitude
Environment:
Conductor material
86
MV Power cable
MV control cable
Hz
< 1000 m
Humid & corrosive
Copper & Alu

Copper
Installation under DGMS jurisdiction
No
Applicable spec.
6-51-0051 Rev 6
3%
MANUFACTURER'S DATA
1
2
3
4
5
Name of manufacturer
MR/PR item no.
Cable type/ code
Conductor material
Conductor semiconducting screen (HV cables)
Material
Thickness
Insulation
Type of compound
Thickness
Insulation semiconducting screen (HV cables)
Material
Thickness
Copper tape
Thickness
10
11
12
mm
mm
13
14
15
mm
mm
16
17
18
19
Inner sheath
Type of compound
Thickness
Nominal dia under armour
Calculated dia under armour
Armour
Material
Type
Size
Nominal dia under outersheath
Calculated dia under outersheath
Outersheath
Type of compound
Thickness
Nominal outer dia of cable
Tolerance on outer dia
Weight of cable per km
Maximum drum length
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
%
kg
mtr.
Notes
1
E- Earthed system
UE-Un Earthed system
A
Rev. No.
07.03.2016
Date
Format No: EIL 1650-3002 Rev.2
ISSUED WITH TENDER

Purpose
AKM
Prepared by
VB
Checked by
ANPS
Approved by
Copyrights EIL - All rights reserved
Conductor material
Aluminium
Copper & Aluminium
Armouring
Yes
No
Frequency
60
50
Tolerance
5%
3%
Format No: EIL 1650-3002 Rev.2
Page 475 of 1744
Datasheet No.
A702-040-16-50-DS-4071
Rev.No. A
Page 1 of 1
DATA SHEET
HIGH VOLTAGE SQUIRREL CAGE
INDUCTION MOTOR
PURCHASER's DATA
A. Site conditions
1 Ambient temperature,
2
B.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
minimum:
maximum:
design:
1.1
45.6
40
86
C
C
C
%
Relative humidity:
Technical particulars
Motor tag no.:
Driven equipment name:
Voltage:
6.6. kV 10%
Phase:
Three
Frequency:
50 Hz 3%
Fault level:
40 kA
0.25
Fault duration:
sec.
System earthing:
Resistance Earthed
Duty:
Continuous
Method of starting:
D.O.L.
Cable size:
Later
mm
Cable type:
Al. cond. XLPE insulated
Temperature rise:
80 C
Cooling:
CACA/TETV/TEFC
Insulation class:
F with temp. rise limited to Class B
3
4
5
Atmospheric condition:
Altitude:
Location:
17
18
19
20
21
22
Hazardous area classification:

Gas group:
Type of explosion protection:
Type of ingress protection:
24
25
26
27
28
Humid & highly corrosive

< 1000 m
Outdoor
Refer Job Spec.

Refer Job Spec.
Refer Job Spec.
IP 55
Required
Refer Job Spec.
Reacceleration:
Diff. protection CTs:
CT specs.:
Color shade:
Thermisters:
RTD: (Note-2)
BTD: (Note-2)
RTD/BTD monitoring device:
29 Applicable specification:
632 as per IS 5
EIL spec. 6-51-0031
DRIVEN EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER's DATA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Suggested motor rating:

Manufacturer:
Type of driver mounting:
Driven equipment:
Shaft kW:
kW at maximum load:
Speed:
Rotation of eqpt. from coupling end:
kW
kW
kW
RPM
9 Coupling type:
10 Torque required,
starting:
11
maximum:
12 GD2 of eqpt.,
including flywheel:
excluding flywheel:
13 Maximum thrust:
14 Pulsation rate:
15 Starting condition:
mkg
mkg
kgm2
kgm2
kg
MOTOR MANUFACTURER's DATA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
kW
Rating:
19 Space heater - voltage & power:
1Ph 230V AC
Manufacturer:
2
20 Moment of inertia, GD :
Frame designation:
kgm2
21 DE/NDE bearing type & no.:
No. of poles:
RPM
22 Type of lubrication:
Full load speed:
23 Type of main terminal box:
Mounting:
mkg
24 Type of neutral terminal box:
Full load torque (FLT):
% of FLT 25 No. of Terminals
Starting torque:
% of FLT 26 Weight of motor:
kg
Break down or pull out torque:
A
27 Thermisters,
no.
Full load current (FLC):
quantity:
% of FLC
make:
type:
Starting current at 100% voltage: (Note-3)
28 RTD,
no.
Rotation viewed from coupling end:
quantity:
sec.
make:
type:
Starting time at 80%/100% voltage:
29 BTD,
no.
Locked rotor withstand time (cold/hot) at,
quantity:
80% voltage:
sec.
make:
type:
100% voltage:
sec.
30 Shaft voltage:
V
15 Time (Te) for Increased Safety Motor
sec.
31 Critical speed, 1st/2nd stage:
RPM
32 Pressurization panel:
at 100% Voltage
16 Efficiency at
75%/100% Load:
%
make:
type:
17 Power factor at 75%/100% load:
33 Canopy:
18 Heating/Cooling Time Const. (min.)
min
34 Fan rotation Design Universal/Fixed/Can be changed
Notes :
1. Starting time calculations shall be based on operating conditions specified in Material Requisition eg. Open valve
condition/closed valve condition, at no load/under load, as applicable.
2. RTDs and BTDs are required for motors with specfic features/ratings as indicated in clause 7.0 of EIL Spec. 6-51-0031
3. HV motors rated upto 2MW, shall be designed such that the starting current is <= 600% of FLC (incl. of +ve tol.). For
higher ratings same shall be reviewed on case to case basis with purchaser.
A
Rev.
07.03.16
Date
Format No. EIL-1650-687H Rev.3

Page 476 of 1744
Issued with Tender

Purpose
AKM
Prepared
VB
Checked
ANPS
Approved
Datasheet No.
A702-029-16-50-DS-4072
Rev : A
Page 1 of 1
DATA SHEET
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SQUIRREL CAGE
INDUCTION MOTOR
PURCHASER's DATA
A. Site conditions
1 Ambient temperature,
2
B.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Relative humidity:
Technical particulars
Motor tag no.:
Driven equipment name:
Voltage:
Phase:
Frequency:
System Fault level:
Method of starting:
Winding connection:
No.of terminals:
Cable size:
Cable type:
Temperature rise:
Cooling:
minimum:
maximum:
design:
1.1
45.6
40
86
C
C
C
%
3
4
5
6
Atmospheric condition: Humid & highly corrosive

Altitude:
< 1000 m
Location:
Outdoor
*
*
415 V 10%
Three
50 Hz 3%
1 sec
50 kA
D.O.L.
Delta
6
Later
mm
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Insulation class:
Hazardous area classification:
Gas group,Temp Class:
Type of explosion protection:
Type of ingress protection:
Color shade:
Thermisters:
RTD:
BTD:
RTD/BTD monitoring device:
80
TEFC
24 Applicable specification:
F (temp rise limited to class B)

Refer Job Spec.
Refer Job Spec.
Refer Job Spec.
IP 55
632 as per IS 5
AYFY
EIL spec. 6-51-0064
and IS/IEC Codes
DRIVEN EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER's DATA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Suggested motor rating:

Manufacturer:
BkW at full load:
kW at end of curve:
Speed:
Driven equipment:
Coupling type:
kW
Torque required,
kW
kW
RPM
10 GD2 of eqpt.,
starting:
maximum:
including flywheel:
excluding flywheel:
11 Thrust,
up:
down:
12 Starting condition:
mkg
mkg
2
kgm
kgm2
kg
kg
MOTOR MANUFACTURER's DATA

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Rating:
Manufacturer:
No. of poles:
Frame designation:
Full load speed:
Mounting:
Full load torque (FLT):
Starting torque:
Break down or pull out torque:
Full load current (FLC):
Note-3
Starting current at 100% voltage:
75% voltage:
Starting time at,
100% voltage:
14 Locked rotor withstand time (cold/hot) at,
75% voltage:
100% voltage:
15 Time (Te) for Increased Safety motors
at 100% Voltage
kW
16 Space heater-Voltage/Power (Note-2): 1Ph, 230V AC/

17 Efficiency at,
75% Load:
%
100% Load:
%
18 Power factor at,
Starting:
RPM
100% load:
2
19 Moment of inertia, GD2:
kgm
mkg
20 NDE bearing type & no.:
% of FLT 21 DE bearing type & no.:
%
22 Type of lubrication:
A
23 Weight of motor:
kg
% of FLC 24 Thermisters,
no.
quantity:
make:
type:
sec.
25 RTD,
no.
quantity:
sec.
make:
type:
26 BTD,
no.
quantity:
sec.
make:
type:
sec.
27 Shaft voltage:
V
sec.
28 Critical speed, 1st/2nd stage:
RPM
29 Canopy :
Notes :
1 Starting time calculations shall be based on operating conditions specified on Material Requisition eg. open valve
condition/ closed valve condition, at no load/full load, as applicable.
2 For motors rated 30kW and above.
The starting current (as % rated current) shall be limited to maximum 600-700% (based on number of poles and KW
3
rating) as per IS 12615:2011, subject to IS tolerance.
* To be filled by vendor.
A
Rev. No.
07.03.2016
Date
Format No. 1650-687 Rev.3

Page 477 of 1744
Issued with Tender

Purpose
AKM
Prepared by
VB
Checked by
ANPS
Approved by
The drawing, design and details given on this format are the property of ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED. They are merely loaned on the borrower's express agreement that they will not be reproduced, copied,
exhibited or used, except in the limited way permitted by a written consent given by the lender to the borrower for the intended use.EIL-1650-1281-A4-210 X 297
ELECTRICAL LOAD DATA
NOTES: 1. Vendor shall fill the details of all electrical power consumer loads, which are included in the scope of this Tender and submit with the
same.
Page 478 of 1744

NEW DELHI
Project: Revamp & Capacity

Enhancement Project
Client:
Load Data
DOCUMENT NO.
Date
Rev
A702-029-16-50-DS-4073
09.03.2016
M/s BORL, Bina

Sheet 1 of 3
MOTOR
S.NO
Page 479 of 1744
TAG NO.
SERVICE

NEW DELHI
Make
Type of
enclosure

Enhancement Project
Client:
Applicable standard
for hazardous area
application
Load Data
Motor kW
Duty
(continuous
/intermittent)
No. of
poles
Type
designation
for cooling
DOCUMENT NO.
Date
Rev
A702-029-16-50-DS-4073
09.03.2016
M/s BORL, Bina

Sheet 2 of 3
OTHER ELECTRICAL LOADS

S.NO
Page 480 of 1744
TAG NO.
SERVICE

NEW DELHI
Make

Enhancement Project
Client:
Type of
enclosure
Applicable standard
for hazardous area
application
Load Data
Rated KW
Duty
Voltage
(continuous
/intermittent)
DOCUMENT NO.
Date
Rev
A702-029-16-50-DS-4073
09.03.2016
M/s BORL, Bina

Sheet 3 of 3

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT (MACHINERY
EQUIPMENT)
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 8

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
18-MAR-2016
ISSUED WITH TENDER
AK/PL
PPP
PPP
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Page 481 of 1744

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 8

The following drawings/documents marked "
" shall be furnished by the bidder.
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR (SPP)

S.
N
O.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
1.
Document Control Index (DCI) or Supplier /

Vendor Drawing & Documentation Schedule
(This shall be the first document to be
submitted by vendor immediately after FOI)
2. List of Mandatory Spares (indicating exact
name of the part, part no. and material of
construction)
3. List of recommended commissioning spares
(indicating exact name of the part, part no. and
material of construction)
4. List of recommended Special Tools & Tackles
(indicating exact name of the part and part no.)
5. General Arrangement showing compressor,
drive transmission system (as applicable) &
driver including all assosciated accessories &
auxiliaries [like pulsation supressors/ drain
pots, lube oil system, cylinder/ packing
lubricator system (as applicable), closed circuit
cooling water system, local control panel] along
with interface connections/ terminal point
details including their location co-ordinates,
maintenance space for rotor removal/ rod
removal etc., erection & maintenance weights,
capa
6. Foundation drawing of compressor train [i.e. for
compressor, drive transmission system (as
applicable) & driver] including details of
openings in the foundation, load points loaction
and their details, foundation load data (static &
dynamic), foundation bolts, their location,
foundation bolt pocket dimensions, details of
insert plates, recommended type of grout, grout
thickness, make, grade and quantity.
7. Foundation drawing of auxiliaries to be installed
at grade such as drain pots (as applicable),
lube oil system, cylinder/ packing lubricator
system (as applicable), closed ciurcuit cooling
water system, Local control panel etc.
8. Allowable forces and moments at compressor
suction and discharge nozzles.
9. Utility consumption data including electric load
data.
10. Schedule of lubricants, chemicals &
consumables with their specifications.
11. List of Purchaser's interface points with their
connection details
Page 482 of 1744

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 3 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
12. Data Sheets alongwith performance curves for

Reciprocating Compressor
13. Piping & Instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) for
Process Gas System including Spill back
Control & Process controls
Distance piece purging and cylinder/ packing
lubrication system (as applicable)
Capacity Control system
16. P&ID for Lube Oil System
Cylinder/ packing cooling water system (as
applicable)
Utility Distribution System
Bearing Temperature, Vibration and rod drop
monitoring System (as applicable)
20. General Arrangement Drawings (certified
dimensional outline drawing) for Reciprocating
Compressor
dimensional outline drawing) for Coupling for
compressor train
dimensional outline drawing) for LO skid (as
applicable)
dimensional outline drawing) for Cooling water
skid (as applicable)
dimensional outline drawing) for Pulsation
suppressors and drain pots
25. Cross Sectional Drawings (with Bill of Materials
& Part No's) for Reciprocating Compressor
26. Test Procedure(s) : Witness tests as specified
in data sheets / other specs enclosed in the
inquiry / MR or as required by approved
ITP/QAP
27. Lateral Analysis Reports of Compressor, Gear
Box (as applicable) and Electric motor drive
28. Acoustic & vibration Simulation Study Report
29. Train Torsional & Lateral Analysis Report (as

applicable)
30. Rod load reversal diagram for each load step
separate for each stage
31. Sizing calculations for Volume bottles/Pulsation
Dampeners
32. Installation, Operation & Maintenance manuals
for complete compressor package
33. Precommissioning & commissioning procedure
Page 483 of 1744

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 4 of 8
ROTARY COMPRESSOR-LOBE TYPE

S.
N
O.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
List of Mandatory Spares (indicating exact
construction)
List of recommended commissioning spares
(indicating exact name of the part, part no. and
material of construction)
List of recommended Special Tools & Tackles
(indicating exact name of the part and part no.)
Test Procedure(s) : Witness tests as specified
ITP/QAP
General Arrangement showing compressor,
drive transmission system (as applicable) &
electric motor driver including all assosciated
auxiliary systems [like sealing system, lube oil
system, local control panel, injection panels (as
applicable) and rundown tank etc.] along with
interface connections/ terminal point details
including their location cordinates, maintenance
space, erection & maintenance weights,
capacity & hook height of maintenance crane
etc.
Foundation drawing of compressor train [i.e. for
compressor, drive transmission system (as
applicable) & electric motor driver] including
details of load points loaction and their details,
foundation load data (static & dynamic),
foundation bolts, their location, foundation bolt
pocket dimensions and recommended type of
grout, grout thickness, make, grade and
quantity.
Utility consumption data including electric load
data.
Schedule of lubricants, chemicals &
consumables with their specifications.
List of Purchaser's interface points with their
connection details
Installation, Operation & Maintenance manuals
Precommissioning & commissioning procedure
Piping & Instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) for
Utility & Cooling Water Distribution System
Data Sheets alongwith performance curves for
Compressor
Piping & Instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) for
Process Air System including Process controls
General Arrangement Drawings (certified
dimensional outline drawing) for Compressor
Page 484 of 1744
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 5 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
16. Cross Sectional Drawings (with Bill of Materials

& Part No's) for Compressor
17. Test Procedure(s) : Witness tests as specified
ITP/QAP
REMARKS
WET/LIQUID RING VACUUM PUMP

S.
N
O.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Document Control Index (DCI) or Supplier /

Vendor Drawing & Documentation Schedule
(This shall be the first document to be
submitted by vendor immediately after FOI)
Equipment Manufacturers general reference list
along with Equipment Manufacturers latest
Catalogue
Filled in Equipment Data Sheet and
performance curves along with a copy of
approved process data sheet (for reference)
General arrangement drawing (certified
dimensional outline drawings including details
of foundation where required) of Pumps, Main
Motor Driver, Couplings, auxiliaries etc.
Equipment layout showing main as well all
associated equipment/skids (pump/s,
motors,separator, cooler, instrumentation,
electrical & piping with associated accessories
& valves etc.) with interface piping connection,
maintenance space, cable trays etc.
Foundation layout showing foundation details
of main as well all associated equipment/skids
(pump/s,motors, separator, cooler,
instrumentation, electrical & piping with
associated accessories & valves etc.)
P&ID for Process gas system,seal system,
cooling water,N2 Instrument air etc.
Cross-sectional drawings with bill of materials
9.
List of Mandatory Spares (indicating exact

construction)
10. List of Spares: Commissioning Spares, Special
Tools & Tackles
11. Tabulation of Utility consumption data including
electric load data, schedule of lubricants,
chemicals & consumables with specifications
12. Material Test Certificates (Chemical and
Physical Properties)
Page 485 of 1744

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 6 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
13. Shop test procedures including mechanical

running test, performance test as applicable for
pump package
14. Inspection & Test Reports (all tests)
REMARKS
@
@
15. Installation, Operation & Maintenance manuals

for complete LRVP package
16. Precommissioning & commissioning procedure
for complete fan package
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

S.
N
O.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
3.
Filled in Technical Check List (Doc. No. A702029-82-41-CL-4070) with bid compliance
statement attached as Annexures-A & B of the
check list
Filled in Data Sheets
4.
Sizing/ Selection Calculation
5.
Flow Diagrams(s) and P&IDs with write-up

operation
Overall Package layout with major dimensions
including battery limit details and load data
GA Drawing and cross-section drawing of
adsorber vessel, suction filter, silencers,
coolers etc. along with MOC , nozzle
orientation, bill of material etc.
Insulation detail alongwith schedule of quantity
(if applicable)
Mechanical Design Calculations for vessels/
dessicant calculation and adsorber sizing
calculations.
Equipment load data and foundation/ anchor
plan with pocket details.
Torque speed characteristics (motor & driven
equipment)
Foundation layout & load data for foundation
design with pocket details.
Coupling and Gear box data/ drawings
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
14. Cooling water, Lube oil, Seal oil schematic

diagram (as applicable)
15. Cross sectional drawings for Lube oil/ Seal oil
reservoir/ accumulator shaft seal etc.
16. List of recommended spare parts for Two (2)
years normal operation & maintenance.
Page 486 of 1744

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
S.
N
O.
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 7 of 8
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
17. List of Mandatory Spares

18. List of Commissioning Spares
19. List of Special Tools & Tackles, if any.
20. List of sub-vendors
21. Utility consumption figures
22. Pre Commissioning and Commissioning
Procedure
23. Performance Guarantee Test Procedure as
applicable
24. Installation, operation & maintenance manuals
containing all certified drawings & documents
including prolonged storage procedure
25. Quality Assurance Plan
26. Weight Schedule of equipment/package
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Material Test Certificates

Non destructive test reports
Hydrostatic Test Certificate
Mechanical Performance Test Reports
Type Test Certificate for Electrical Items
PWHT Test Reports
Vibration Signature for each machine
Dimensional Check Test Certificate
Any other Test Report
As Built Drawings
37. General Arrangement drawing for complete

assembled plant.
38. Drawing showing basic dimensions of the
accoustic building (including accoustic level
inside the building), compressor shed etc.
39. Equipment Layout drawing for Accoustic Proof
Buiding
40. Equipment Layout drawing for Compressor
Shelter
41. Other Electrical/ Instrumentation/ Piping/
structural/ static equipment documents
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
Refer respective
specification
Notes :
1. "TICK" denotes applicability.
2. Post order, drawing / document review shall commence only after approval of Document Control Index (DCI).
3. All post order documents shall be submitted / approved through EIL eDMS portal.
4. Final documentation shall be submitted in hard copy (Six prints) and soft ( two CDs/DVDs ) in addition to
submission through EIL eDMS.
5. Refer - 6-78-0001: Specification for quality management system from Bidders.
Page 487 of 1744

FOR
EQUIPMENT)
Document No.
A702-029-82-41-VR-4070
Rev. A
Page 8 of 8
6. Refer - 6-78-0002: Specification for documentation requirements from Contractors.

7. Post order- The schedule of drawing / data submission shall be mutually agreed between EIL & the bidder /
contractor / supplier during finalization of Document Control Index (DCI).
8. "@" indicates submission of documents to Inspection Agency.
9. Bill of Material shall form part of the respective drawing.
10. Major interface drawings have already been identified under remarks column. However, list of other
interface drawings shall be identified and their submission schedule shall be finalized during KOM or post order
stage.
Page 488 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 1 of 5

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
10-MAR-2016
Issued with Tender
AKM
VB
ANPS
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Page 489 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 2 of 5

PACKAGED EQUIPMENT
POST ORDER
S.
N
O.
DESCRIPTION
1.
Schedule of Vendor Documents
2.
Guaranteed max. Power Consumption
3.
Electrical load data
4.
Equipment layout
5.
Cable layout
6.
Sizing calculation
7.
Cable schedule
8.
Interconnection diagram
9.
Electrical interface with owner
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
10. Technical details/Data sheets for major

equipment
11. Motor data sheet
12. GA and internal arrangement drawing for
panels
13. Schematic/Logic diagrams
14. Interconnection/Wiring diagrams
15. Bill Of Material
16. List of recommended maintenance spares
17. Type Test certificates
18. Inspection & Test Plan (ITP) -For review by
Inspection Dept.
19. Test certificates
Refer Note-'*'
20. Catalogues and brochures

21. Installation manual
22. Operation/maintenance manual
23. Equipment storage procedure at site
MV MOTOR
Page 490 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
POST ORDER
S.
N
O.
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
Data Sheets (Duly filled-in)
3.
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : GA Drawing

For motors < 75kW
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : GA Drawing
For motors >= 75kW
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Installation
Plan/Mounting Details
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Terminal
Box Arrangement
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Name Plate
Drawing
Performance Curves : Speed Torque Curves
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3 of 5
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
9.
Performance Curves : Speed-Current/Time

Curves
10. Performance Curves : Thermal Withstand
Curves (Hot & Cold)
11. Performance Curves : P.f. & Efficiency Curves
Inspection Dept.
13. Test Records
Refer Note-'*'
14. Type Test Certificates for similar equipment

16. List of Maintenance Spares
18. List of Special Tools & Tackles
19. Data Books/ Manuals : Installation Manual
20. Data Books/ Manuals : Operating/ Maintenance
Manual
21. Data Books/ Manuals : Catalogues/ Brochures
HV MOTOR
S.
N
O.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
1.
2.
Data Sheets (Duly filled-in)
3.
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : GA
Drawings
Page 491 of 1744
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
S.
N
O.
Page 4 of 5
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
4.
Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Installation

Plan/Mounting Details
5. Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Bearing
Assembly Drawing
6. Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Rotor
Dimensional Drawing
7. Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Sectional
View Drawing
8. Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Air/Water
Cooler Drawing
9. Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Terminal
Box Arrangement
10. Dimensional/Assembly Drawings : Name Plate
Drawing
11. Schematic/Unit Connection Diagram
12. Performance Curves : Speed Torque Curves
13. Performance Curves : Speed-Current/Time
Curves
14. Performance Curves : Thermal Withstand
Curves (Hot & Cold)
15. Performance Curves : P.f. & Efficiency Curves
16. Test Records
Inspection Dept.
18. Statutory approval certificate
Refer Note-'*'
19. Type Test Certificates for similar equipment

21. List of Maintenance Spares
23. List of Special Tools & Tackles
24. Data Books/ Manuals : Installation Manual
25. Data Books/ Manuals : Operating/ Maintenance
Manual
26. Data Books/ Manuals : Catalogues/ Brochures
27. Details of proven track record (for motors
>2MW)
Notes :
Page 492 of 1744

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Document No.
A702-029-16-50-VDR-4070
Rev. A
Page 5 of 5
7. Refer - 6-78-0003: Specification for documentation requirement from Suppliers.
8. All drawings & documents shall be submitted in A4 or A3 paper sizes. Documents in higher paper size shall
be submitted in exceptional circumstances or as indicated in the MR/Tender.
12. Also refer other department's VDR :13. Instrumentation
14. Packaged Equipment
15. '*' indicates the following:
a. Equipments whose ITP is attached with Contract -ITP for respective equipment shall be followed. Therefore,
no ITP is to be furnished for review for those equipments.
b. Equipments whose ITP is not attached with Contract-Manufacturer's ITP shall be submitted by Packager/
Vendor/Contractor to respective Regional Procurement Office (RPO) near to manufacturer's works for approval
by EIL Inspection.
16. All technical details and documents furnished with bids shall be treated as data for engineering. These shall
however be subject to Purchasers review after order placement and bidder shall comply to MR/Tender
requirements without any cost & time implication to EIL/Owner.
Page 493 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 1 of 3

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
29-FEB-2016
Issued for Tender
KP
ASDB
SB
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Page 494 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 2 of 3

S.
N
O.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
1.
Drawing and Document Schedule
2.
Piping and Instrument Diagram
3.
Sub-Vendor List for Instruments and

accessories
Only for those items

not covered in
purchaser's vendor list
4.
Instrument Sizing calculations
Note-12
5.
7.
Estimated Utility consumption data for

Instrument power supply (110 V AC UPS & 240
V AC), Instrument air and other utilities as
required
Purchase Requisition for all instruments
(including catalog with model decoding)
Functional schematic
8.
Logic diagrams
9.
Instrument loop drawings
6.
Junction box drawings
10. Panel front arrangement

11. Power Supply Distribution
12. Wiring diagram for panels
13. I/O assignment
14. Instrument Tray layout
15. Instrument Cable Schedule
16. Instrument Location Plans
17. Instrument Installation Drawings
18. Bill Of Material for installation items
19. Spare part list for 2 years operation
20. Spare part list for Start up, Commissioning &
Consumables
21. Spare part list for Mandatory Spares
22. Inspection and test procedure
23. Complete catalogues with part list for all vendor
supplied instruments, control, etc.
24. Installation, operation, Programming and
maintenance manuals
25. System Configuration diagrams for PLC and
MMS
Page 495 of 1744
Note-12
Document No.
A702-029-16-51-VDR-4070
Rev. A

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
S.
N
O.
Page 3 of 3
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
26. Factory Testing and Acceptance procedure for

system oriented items
27. Instrumentation/ Electrical interface details
28. Filled up Technical Compliance Statement (as
per A702-029-16-51-CF-4070)
Notes :
12. These shall be part of respective instruments PR(Purchase requisition).
Page 496 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-43-VDR-4070
Rev. 0

FOR
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT TENDER
Page 1 of 3

FOR
10-MAR-2016
Issued with VPSA Oxygen Plant Tender
SKS
NK
PNR
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
Page 497 of 1744
Document No.
A702-029-16-43-VDR-4070
Rev. 0

FOR
Page 2 of 3

S.
N
O.
1.
2.
3.
POST ORDER
DESCRIPTION
Piping General arrangement Drawings &
Equipment Layout.
Drawings - Battery Limit Interface with valving
arrangement
3D MODEL along with design database in CD 30% Stage
4.
5.
6.
AS BUILT - Piping General arrangement

Drawings .
As Built - Drawings - Battery Limit Interface with
valving arrangement
As Built - 3D-Model with complete editable data
base
IBR Package
7.
8.
9.
WITH
BID
FOR
REVIEW
FOR
RECORD
WITH
DATA
BOOK
(FINAL)
REMARKS
Plans and Elevations
Reviewed 3D Models
with Tag points
resolution for 30%
model reviews shall be
provided for records.
Reviewed 3D Models
with Tag points
resolution for 60%
Reviewed 3D Models
with Tag points
resolution for 90%
10. Flexibility Analysis line index

11. Flexibility Analysis Reports with stress
isometrics marked with computer nodal points
and support type
Only for critical

systems identified in
flexibility analysis line
index
12. Piping Supports Standards

13. Special Pipe supports
14. As Built - Equipment Layout
15. As-built Isometrics for all lines
Notes :
Page 498 of 1744

FOR
Document No.
A702-029-16-43-VDR-4070
Rev. 0
Page 3 of 3

Page 499 of 1744
Page 500 of 1744
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 1 of 66
Debottlenecking Project
Bina Refinery, BORL
BASIC ENGINEERING DESIGN BASIS

(PART-B)
BORL
EIL
07.08.2015
ISSUED AS AGREED
PB
SA
SA
08.06.2015
REVISED AS MARKED AND ISSUED FOR CLIENT

APPROVAL
PB
SA
SA
29.05.2015
ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
PB
SA
SA
20.03.2015
ENGINEERING/CLIENT COMMENTS INCORPORATED,

ISSUED FOR APPROVAL
PB
SA
SA
ISSUED FOR CLIENT COMMENTS
PB
Reena
Purpose
Prepared
by
Reviewed
by
B
A
Rev. No.
16.01.2015
Date
Approved
by
Page 501 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 2 of 66
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section #
Contents
page #
SECTION 1.0
INTRODUCTION
04
SECTION 2.0
DEFINITION OF PROJECT
2.1
Single Point Mooring
2.2
Onshore Crude Oil Terminal
2.3
Cross-country pipeline
2.4
7.8 MMTPA refinery
2.5
Unit numbers
2.6
Units of measurement
05
05
05
05
05
08
10
SECTION 3.0
PLANT LOCATION
11
SECTION 4.0
METEOROLOGIAL DATA
4.1
Elevation above mean sea level
4.2
Barometric pressure
4.3
Ambient temperature
4.4
Relative humidity
4.5
Data for equipment design
4.6
Rainfall data
4.7
Wind data
4.8
Earthquake design criteria
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
SECTION 5.0
ECONOMIC OPTIMISATION CRITERIA

5.1
Unit rates for feed, product and utilities
5.2
Optimisation criteria
5.3
Plant life
13
13
13
13
SECTION 6.0
UTILITY SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
Utility pressure and temperature levels
6.2
Steam & Condensate systems
6.3
Water systems
6.4
Compressed air and nitrogen systems
6.5
Fuel systems
6.6
Flare systems
6.7
Electrical system
6.8
Caustic system
6.9
Flushing oil systems
6.10 Hot oil system
14
15
17
18
21
21
24
25
26
27
28
Page 502 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 3 of 66
Section #
SECTION 7.0
Contents
GENERAL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
7.1
Energy integration
7.2
Vacuum design
7.3
Feed, intermediate and product storage
7.4
Aromatics handling
7.5
Metallurgy
7.6
Corrosion Allowance
7.7
Lining and cladding thickness
SECTION 8.0
EQUIPMENT DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

8.1
Overdesign philosophy
8.2
Selection of mechanical design conditions
8.3
Heat Exchangers
8.4
Fired Heaters
8.5
Vessels
8.6
Towers
8.7
Pumps
8.8
Compressors
8.9
Steam Turbine drives
8.10 IBR requirements
31
31
32
34
37
39
42
44
47
48
48
SECTION 9.0
INSTRUMENTATION
9.1
Control Philosophy
9.2
General requirements
9.3
Level Instruments
9.4
Flow Instruments
9.5
Startup / shutdown from control room
9.6
Status lamps in control room
9.7
Control valve manifold
9.8
Pressure relief valve
9.9
Control philosophy for vendor packages
9.10 Standard instrumentation
9.11 Critical Exchanger Sparing
9.12 Sampling System
9.13 Strainers
9.14
Utility Battery Limit Isolation
9.15
Battery Limit Isolation
50
50
50
52
52
53
53
53
54
54
54
55
55
55
56
57
SECTION 10.0
SECTION 11.0
SECTION 12.0
SECTION 13.0
SECTION 14.0
SECTION 15.0
PIPING & INSULATION

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
SAFETY
PFDs AND P&IDs
NUMBERING SYSTEM
STANDARDS & CODES
58
59
60
61
62
66
page #
29
29
29
29
30
30
30
30
Page 503 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 4 of 66
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL) is operating a 6 MMTPA Refinery located at Bina,
Madhya Pradesh, India, with associated crude receipt and handling facilities, cross country
pipelines, marketing terminal etc.
BORL intends to augment the processing capacity of the facilities from present
6MMTPA to 7.8 MMTPA considering low cost debottlenecking. In order to minimize the
cost and shutdown time for implementation of project, increase in crude capacity will be
achieved in consideration of minimizing hardware modifications using in-built design
margin. . Engineers India Limited (EIL) have been retained by BORL to provide services
for Project Management Consultancy,
The design basis presented here intends to provide the licensors and engineering
contractors with the technical informaion required to complete the engineering design
specifications of the complex in a uniform and consistent manner.
1.2
Basic Engineering Design Basis (BEDB) for all facilities, containing technical
information agreed between the owner and PMC and specific licensor recommendations
shall be binding on the process design and engineering of units, utility systems and offsite
facilities. The BEDBs for each facility are in two parts:
Part-A:
Unit Design Basis providing necessary data for a specific process unit.
For licensor units, the requirements of Part-A design will be suitably
incorporated in Licensor design basis document.
Part-B:
Basic Engineering Design basis defining overall project requirements for

making all units compatible and ensuring uniform design practices for the
total complex.
This document constitutes Part-B of the Basic Engineering Design Basis.
Page 504 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
2.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 5 of 66
DEFINITION OF PROJECT:
The project consists of enhancing the crude processing of Bina Refinery from existing
6.0 million tons per annum (MMTPA) to 7.8 MMTPA located at Bina, District Sagar,
Madhya Pradesh. The project comprises revamp of process units, utilities, offsites and
product dispatch facilities. Marketing is excluded from this project definition.
The project comprises the revamp of following facilities also:
2.1
Single Point Mooring (SPM) of CALM type near Vadinar, Gujarat, and associated
offshore and onshore pipelines, PLEM, etc., upto crude oil terminal.
2.2
Onshore Crude Oil Terminal (COT) at Vadinar, Jamnagar district, Gujarat, including
crude tanks, pump station, utilities, control room, and supporting facilities.
2.3
Cross-country pipeline (CCPL) from COT to refinery, which is about 943 km long,
including intermediate pump stations, utilities, offsites, supporting infrastructures at each
pump station, tele-supervisory and communication system (using optical fibre), etc.
2.4
7.8 MMTPA Refinery
2.4.1 Crude oils to be processed in the refinery are:

The CDU/VDU unit will be designed to process the following crude mix:
100% Kuwait.
In addition to above, following check cases will be worked out:
Check case-1: 65:35 weight blend of Arab Light and Arab Heavy
Check case-2: 100% Basrah Light
2.4.2 Crude oil assays, selected are latest and recommended in Spiral Crude Manager and are
finalized by Owner:
a) Kuwait Export:
b) Arab Light:
c) Arab Heavy:
d) Basrah Light:
KUWAT304, May 2008

ARBLT332, Nov 2008
ARAHV277, May 2009
BASRL300, Jan 2011
2.4.3 The products from the refinery are:

a) Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)
c) Regular Gasoline BS V
d) Naphtha
e) Aviation Turbine Fuel (ATF)
f) Superior Kersine Oil (SKO)
g) High Speed Diesel (HSD) BS V
i) Sulphur
J) Pet Coke
Page 505 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 6 of 66
2.4.4 The refinery essentially consists of the following facilities:

Sl
FACILITY
Tentative Capacity(Note 1)
PROCESS UNITS
tons/annum
Crude Distillation Unit
7,800,000
Vacuum Distillation Unit
To match CDU
Integrated Hydrocracker and Diesel HDT
2,625,000/2,372,000
Delayed Coker Unit
1,822,000
Hydrogen generation unit
98,000
Naphtha Hydrotreating & Splitter Unit
1,553,000
Isomerisation unit
Catalytic Reforming Unit
620,000
799,200
ATF Treating Unit
711,000
LPG Treating unit
179,345
Fuel gas Amine treating unit
103,252
0
0
0
468 TPH RA
Amine Regeneration unit (Rich Amine basis)

Sour Water Stripping unit - single stage
162 TPH
Sour Water Stripping unit - two stage
65 TPH
Sulphur Recovery unit, VPSA- O2 Enrichment
3 x 243 TPD
UTILITY SYSTEMS
Grid=100 MW, STG=3*33
MW
Power receipt and distribution

Steam generation and distribution (Fly ash, coal, pet coke,
lime stone handling system)
CFBC= 225 (2W+1S)TPH
Condensate Recovery system
3*50 TPH
Emergency power generation
4MW
Internal fuel oil & fuel gas
18TPH/22TPH
Raw water receipt and treatment plant
2*1500M3/HR
760M3/HR
Bearing Cooling Water System

Service Water system
85(NOR)/240(MAX) M3/HR
Demineralised Water plant
515M3/HR
Boiler Feed Water system
190M3/HR
Drinking Water system

Recirculating Cooling Water system(Refinery/CPP)
90M3/HR
28000/30000M3/HR
Fire Water system

Plant Air / Instrument Air system
2*8825 Nm3/hr
Page 506 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Sl
FACILITY
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 7 of 66
Tentative Capacity(Note 1)
3000 Nm3/hr
Nitrogen system
Flare & Blowdown systems
Flushing oil systems
Utility Boiler
160 TPH
OFFSITE FACILITIES
Crude Oil storage and pumping
4*60000 m3/hr
Intermediate storage and pumps

Product storage and transfer to marketing
Process interconnecting piping
Utility interconnecting piping
Marketing terminal connecting piping
Catalyst and chemicals storage and handling
Sulphur storage and handling
Effluent Treatment Plant
375 m3/hr
Hydrocarbon leakage detection system

Solids disposal system
Oily Water / Storm Water Sewer/CRWS
Natural Gas Receipt, Conditioning and Distribution facilities
4 MM SCM/Day
INFRASTRUCTURE, etc
Workshop
Laboratory
Fire Station
Fire detection and protection
Communications
Ware house
Medical Centre
EMS/ AMS Station
Administration Building
Documentation Center
Canteen Facility
Training Centre
Security Office / Others
Notes: Unit capacities listed are tentative and are based on 8280 onstream hours.
Page 507 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
2.5
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 8 of 66
UNIT NUMBERS
Sl
FACILITY
UNIT NUMBER
CRUDE RECEIPT
Single Point Mooring
01
Sub-sea Pipeline
02
Crude Oil Terminal
03
Cross Country Pipeline
04
PROCESS UNITS (REFINERY)

Crude Distillation Unit
11
Vacuum Distillation Unit
12
Naphtha Stabilizer Unit
13
Delayed Coker Unit
14
Isomerisation Unit
15
Integrated Hydrocracker & diesel HDT
16
Hydrogen Generation unit
18
Naphtha Hydrotreater and Splitter unit
19
Catalytic Reforming unit
20
LPG Amine Treating unit (SR LPG & CR LPG & Caustic wash)
21
Fuel Gas treating unit
22
ATF Treating Unit
24
Amine Regeneration unit
27
Sour Water Stripping unit
28
Sulphur Recovery unit/ VPSA- O2 Enrichment
29
UTILITY SYSTEMS (REFINERY)

Steam & Power generation system(Fly ash, coal, pet coke, lime
stone handling system)
31
Steam/ condensate receipt and distribution
32
Internal fuel oil & fuel gas
33
Raw water intake and transfer upto refinery / Bearing Cooling

Water System
45
Construction water intake and transfer upto refinery
46
Construction water reservoir (with in refinery)
47
Raw water receipt and treatment plant, drinking water system
34
Demineralised Water plant
35
Boiler Feed Water system
36
Recirculating Cooling Water system
37
Plant Air / Instrument Air system
38
Nitrogen system
39
Page 508 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Sl
FACILITY
Flare & Blowdown systems
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 9 of 66
UNIT NUMBER
40
Fire Water system
41
Flushing Oil system

Utility Boiler
42
49
Drinking Water System
74
OFFSITE FACILITIES (REFINERY)

Crude Oil storage and pumping
51
Intermediate storage and pumps
52
Catalyst and chemicals storage and handling
54
Sulphur storage and handling
55
Effluent treatment, collection, disposal
56
Hydrocarbon leakage detection system
57
Solids disposal system
58
Oily Water / Storm Water Sewer/CRWS
59
Process interconnecting piping
61
Utility interconnecting piping
62
Marketing terminal connecting piping

Natural Gas Receipt, Conditioning and Distribution facilities
63
64
INFRASTRUCTURE, etc (REFINERY)

Electricals
71
Workshop
Laboratory
Fire Station
Fire detection and protection
Communications
Ware house
Medical Centre
EMS/ AMS Station
Administration Building
Computer Centre
Canteen Facility
Training Centre
Others
Page 509 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 10 of 66
2.6
UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
2.6.1 All engineering specifications shall be issued in the MKS system of measurement, with
the exception of piping/ tubing sizes which shall be reported in inches. Additionally,
licensor's own engineering standards shall be issuable with extant units of measurement.
2.6.2 System of measurement for this project shall be: mks
mks
Temperature
Pressure (gauge)
Pressure (absolute)
Mass
Length
kg/cm2
kg/cm2(a)
kg
m-mm
Liq relative density
sp gr ToC/15oC
Liq absolute density
kg/m3 at 15oC
Vap flowing density
kg/m3
Furnace draft
mm of WC
Vacuum
mm of Hg
Flowing mass
kg/hr
Flowing vapor
Nm3/hr
Flowing liquid
m3/hr
Standard vapor
Nm3/hr at 0oC
& 1.033 kg/cm2a
Standard liquid
Sm3/hr at 15oC
Enthalpy
kcal/kg
Heat Rate
106kcal/hr
Viscosity
cP
Kinematic Viscosity
cS
Composition
Power
Vol %
kW
2.6.3 Material Balance in PFD shall be reported in m3/hr as well as MT/day.
Page 510 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
3.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 11 of 66
PLANT LOCATION
Refer Engineering Design Basis for complete details of plant location. This section
presents extracts from the referred document which are relevant towards preparing
process engineering specifications in BEDP.
The proposed project is expansion of Bharat Oman Refineries Limited (BORL), located
in Bina, Dist. Sagar in Madhya Pradesh. The site is located approximately at Latitude of
241048N and longitude of 78120E.
The site is well connected by state highways and road network. The nearest important
town is Bina,, which is 15 Km from the site. The nearest airport to the site location is
Bhopal, which is 165 Km away from the Bina Refinery site and the nearest rail junction is
Bina which is situated on the broad guage line between New Delhi to Bhopal.
The power required after post expansion is proposed to be met by utilizing full capacity
of existing CPP (99 MW) and balance from augmented grid (Grid augmentation for 220
kV is envisaged to receive 100 MW power).
The expansion envisaged for various process units is proposed to be done within the
battery limit or in immediate vicinity of the existing units. Thus the administration
building and other associated facilities shall be kept same as that of existing one.
3.1
Site Location
- State
- Nearest Important Town
- Nearest Railway
- Nearest Port
- Nearest Airport
:
;
:
:
:
Madhya Pradesh
Bina
Bina
Kandla
Bhopal
3.2
Source of Water
River Betwa
3.3
Rainy season
June to September
Page 511 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 12 of 66
4.0
METEOROLOGICAL DESIGN DATA

Refer Engineering Design Basis for complete details of meteorological design data. This
section presents extracts from the refered document which are relevant towards preparing
process engineering specifications in BDEP.
4.1
Elevation above mean sea level:
4.2
Barometric pressure, mbar :
936.3
Min,
4.3
Ambient temperature:
1.1oC
Min,
4.4
Relative humidity:
16.4
Min,
947.4
80
411.6 m
Avg
Nor,
954.2
Max
Nor,
45.6oC
Max
Max,
54
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
Design
Data for equipment design:

Design dry bulb / wet bulb temperature :
42oC / 23.7C
Low ambient temperature for Min Design Metal Temperature:
1.1oC
Coincident temperature and humidity for Air Blower and
Air Compressor design:
42oC & 54%RH
4.5.4 a) Design air temperature for air cooled exchangers in general:
45.6C
b) Design air temperature for air cooled exchangers in critical services
not followed by water cooled trim exchangers:
45.6C
4.6
Rainfall data:
4.6.1 For a 1 hour period
4.6.2 For a 24-hour period
4.7
Wind data
4.7.1 Wind velocity:
4.7.2 Direction of prevailing wind
4.8
Earthquake design criterion
No data
284.5 mm
2 km/hr
Max
Max
Min,
25 km/hr
W to E
Max
As per site spectra curve
Page 512 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 13 of 66
5.0
ECONOMIC OPTIMISATION CRITERIA (This section is not applicable)
5.1
Unit rates for feed, product and utilities

Cost of feed / product streams are in Table-5.1 while utility costs are in Table-5.2.
Table-5.1 : Feed and Product unit rates
Sl#
FEED / PRODUCT
Crude Oil: Arab Light
Crude Oil: Arab Heavy
LPG
Motor Spirit (Euro V)
Naphtha
Kerosine
7
8
Aviation Turbine Fuel
Coke
10
Sulphur
cif Rs / MT
cif US$/MT
Diesel (Euro V)
Table-5.2 : Utility unit rates

Sl#
UTILITY
UNIT
Power
Kwh
High pressure steam
Tons
Medium Pressure steam
Tons
Low Pressure steam
Tons
Rs/ Unit
US$/unit
Notes: 5.1 Exchange rate for : 1 US $ = Rs.

5.2
Optimisation criteria
Incremental investment shall be recovered within a 3 year period based on a straightline payback method.
5.3
Plant life
5.3.1 Plant operating life for economic calculation shall be taken as 15 years.
5.3.2 Plant equipment design life shall be considered as follows:
a) 30 years for heavy wall reactors and separators
b) 20 years for columns, vessels, heat exchanger shells and similar services.
c) 10 years for piping, furnace tubes, High Alloy exchanger tube bundles.
d) 5 years for Carbon Steel / Low Alloy heat exchanger tube bundles.
Page 513 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 14 of 66
5.3.3
Health-up checks not required for the equipments run for less than 10 years. Since,
BORL is operating less than 10 years, it is concluded that health check-up will not be
required and hence de-rating of hardware will not be considered.
6.0
UTILITY SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
Utility pressure and temperature levels, as made available at battery limits at grade level
of a process unit, are indicated in Table-6.1.
Page 514 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 15 of 66
Table-6.1: Utility conditions at unit battery limits

Sl
Parameter
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Mech Design
HIGH PRESSURE (HP) STEAM

Pressure, kg/cm g
37
38
40
46
Temperature, oC *
370 (Note8)
380
390
420
MEDIUM PRESSURE (MP) STEAM

2
Pressure, kg/cm g
16.0
17.0
18.0
22.0
Temperature, oC
260
270
280
350
LOW PRESSURE (LP) STEAM

2
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
Temperature, C
4
3.0
4.0
5.0
7.0
saturated
175
190
240
2.0
2.5
7.0
90
95
120
CONDENSATE RETURN
Pressure, kg/cm2g
1.5
Temperature, oC
5
SERVICE WATER / BEARING COOLING WATER

2
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
Temperature, C
5
4.0
NOTE-3
AMB
65
COOLING WATER (NOTE-4)

Supply Pressure Kg/cm2g
3.5 / 4.3
Return pressure kg/cm2g
1.5 / 2.3 0
Supply Temperature C
7.0 (Note-5)
33
Return Temperature C
6
7.0
33
65
45
65
DEMINERALISED WATER
Pressure, kg/cm2g
o
Temperature, C
7
4.5
5.0
5.5
15.8 (Note-6)
Amb
40
45
65
HP BOILER FEED WATER (Note-7)

2
Pressure, kg/cm g
75
Temperature, oC
150
MP BOILER FEED WATER
26.0
29.0
45
Temperature, C
105
110
150
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
PLANT AIR
Pressure, kg/cm2g
3.5
7.0
8.0
10.5
Temperature, oC
amb
amb
50
65
INSTRUMENT AIR
2
Pressure, kg/cm g
o
Temperature, C
10
4.5
6.5
7.0
10.5
amb
amb
50
65
FUEL GAS

Bina Refinery, BORL
Pressure, kg/cm2g
o
Temperature, C
11
3.0
3.5
6.0
amb
40
60
75
10.0
19.6
8.0
2.0
9.0
19.6
CRUDE UNIT FUEL OIL

13
3.0
2.0
3.5
4.0
11.5
11.5
NITROGEN
Pressure, kg/cm2g
o
Temperature, C
Page 515 of 1744
2.5
REFINERY FUEL OIL
12
Note:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 16 of 66
1.
4.5
6.5
7.0
10.5
amb
amb
amb
65
6.
Mechanical design conditions of utility systems will be verified during detailed engineering
based on final hydraulics.
The battery limit pressures for liquid lines at individual unit battery limits will vary depending
up on the location of the unit.
These shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
In view of large elevation difference between SW / BCW pumping facility and process units
(All Process units being at higher elevation), all the service water and bearing cooling water
lines located at higher plateau in the process unit area shall have design pressure of 10.5
kg/cm2g and units (ETP) in the lower plateau shall have deign pressure of 14.0 kg/cm2g.
Supply pressure 3.5 kg/cm2g for DCU and MS block. Other process units it is 4.3 kg/cm2g.
Design pressure for cooling water consumers which are fed from CPP cooling tower is 16.5
kg/cm2g.
The design pressure corresponds to lower elevation units.
7.
8.
HP boiler feed water requirement is fed from HGU unit.

Minimum HP temperature should be considered as 330 C for new equipment
2.
3.
4.
5.
Page 516 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
6.2
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 17 of 66
STEAM & CONDENSATE SYSTEMS
6.2.1 Steam turbine drives and ejectors shall be rated based on MINIMUM steam conditions.
All other steam consuming equipment shall be rated based on NORMAL steam
conditions. NORMAL steam conditions shall be used for utility estimates, heat and
material balances, battery limits connectivities, etc. All steam generating equipment shall
be rated based on delivering steam at MAXIMUM conditions to the header. However
Licensor of MS block M/s UOP have taken a deviation to this and equipment consuming
steam in UOP designed units will be specified for minimum steam conditions.
6.2.2 Handling condensate at various unit battery limits is as given below :
a)
Pure Condensate: This is condensate produced by a source where the possibility

of contamination by leakage across the heat transfer surface is minimal. This is
ascertained by comparing the process and steam side operating pressures for the
exchanger. If the process side operating pressure is lower than the steam side
operating pressure, possibility of contamination of condensate produced with
process fluid is minimal and the condensate produced from such a source is
deemed pure condensate.
b)
Suspect Condensate: This is condensate produced by a source where the

possibility of contamination by leakage across the heat transfer surface exists.
This is ascertained by comparing the process and steam side operating pressures
for the exchanger. If the process side operating pressure is higher than the steam
side operating pressure, possibility of contamination of condensate produced with
process fluid exists and the condensate produced from such a source is deemed
suspect condensate.
c)
Surface Condenser Condensate: Condensate produced by the surface condenser of

a condensing type steam turbine is normally considered as pure.
d)
Tracer / Traps Condensate: Condensate produced by the tracing is suspect

condensate.
6.2.3 Condensate handling within Process units:

a)
Condensate coming from the exchangers (Suspect and pure Condensates) which
may be consuming HP, MP or LP steam.
-
No cooling of the flashed condensate is envisaged within process units.

HP and MP level condensate generated within units shall be flashed
within the respective units in a LP flash drum for recovery of LP steam.
LP condensate shall be flashed at atmospheric pressure and the flashed
condensate is pumped to OSBL. LP flash vessel is equipped with vent
condenser to minimise loss of condensate flashing. Each unit shall have
separate headers for collection of suspect condensate and pure condensate
Page 517 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
b)
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 18 of 66
within process unit.

HC detector / conductivity analyser shall be provided in the pure and surface
condensate headers respectively at each unit B/L to detect any leakages into
the condensate system.
Piping provision will be kept in each process unit to manually divert the pure
/ surface condensate (when contaminated) into suspect condensate header
after checking the quality of contaminated condensate.
Condensate obtained from the steam drives in the process unit.

Condensate obtained from the condensing type steam drives shall be collected
and pumped through dedicated surface condensate header to polished condensate
tanks in the Condensate polishing unit. However, connections for routing it to
CPU Feed tanks shall also be provided in case of contamination.
c)
6.3
Each unit shall have dedicated condensate recovery system for recovering
condensate discharged from process steam traps and tracer / steam traps. Steam
trap / tracer condensate in the respective units shall be recovered in an
atmospheric buried drum by gravity and pumped to CPU through suspect
condensate header.
WATER SYSTEMS
6.3.1 The quality of raw water / filtered water (utility water) / circulating cooling water / oncethrough cooling water / DM Water / Boiler Feed Water are as per Table-6.2 & Table-6.3
Page 518 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Table-6.2: Water Quality
Sl
Parameter
Filtered Raw
Water
DM Water
Cooling Water
7.5 - 8.0
6.7-7.3
7.5 - 8.0
<1
Nil
10-15
Total suspended solids, mg/l
<0.5
Total dissolved solids, mg/l
200-250
0.1 max
400-650
<0.2
M. Alkalinity, mg/l
95-120
100 - 120
Ca Hardness as CaCO3, mg/l
60-75
260-340
154-190
Nil
360-500
Total Silica as SiO2, mg/l
<25
<0.01
35 40
Colloidal Silica as SiO2, mg/l
<5
Sodium as Na, mg/l
Potassium as K, mg/l
Chlorides as Cl, mg/l
20-25
Nil
45 - 60
0.3 - 0.6
35-45
300 - 550
Organophosphates as PO4, mg/l
8 - 10
Inorganic phosphates as PO4, mg/l
Nitrates as NO3, mg/l
Dissolved oxygen, mg/l
< 0.1
0.02 max
<5
<5
30-40
Zinc as Zn, mg/l
1-2
Chromium as Cr, mg/l
Polymeric dispersant, mg/l
20 - 30
Zinc Sulphate as Zn, mg/l
1-2
Benzotriazole, mg/l
0.2-0.5
pH
Turbidity, NTU (5 min settled)
Conductivity@20 C, micromho/cm
Total Hardness as CaCO3, mg/l
Free chlorine, mg/l

Sulphates as SO4, mg/l
Total Iron + Manganese, mg/l

Lead as Pb, microgram/l
Organic Matter as KmnO4 @100C
Note:
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 19 of 66
For further details on water qualities, reference is to be made to respective utility system design basis.
Page 519 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 20 of 66
Table 6.3: BFW Quality

Sl#
UNIT
RANGE
pH at 25 deg.C (copper alloy pre-bolier system)
DESCRIPTION
8.8 9.2
pH at 25 deg.C (copper free pre-bolier system)
9.0 9.4
Dissolved Oxygen (max)
ppm
0.007
Total Iron as Fe (max)
ppm
0.01
Total copper as Cu (max)
ppm
0.005
Total Silica SiO2 (max)
ppm
0.02
Micro
mhos/cm
ppm
ppm
0.2
Specific electrical conductivity at 25 deg.C measured

after Cation exchanger in the H+ form and after CO2
removal (max)
Hydrazine Residual (max)
Total Organic carbon
0.01 0.02
0.2
10
Total Hardness (ppm of CaCO3)
ppm
Nil
Note: BFW Quality reported is as per existing. Refer Design basis Part A of
package.
Steam power of utility
6.3.2 Typical Cooling Water piping and instrumentation at heat exchangers:

Figure - 6.1
Typical cooling water piping and instrumentation at heat exchangers
PSV
X 1
To Floor
LO
Sc
-1
TI
Page 520 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 21 of 66
6.4
COMPRESSED AIR & NITROGEN SYSTEMS
6.4.1 The specifications of plant air and instrument air are indicated in Table-6.4. The
HCU/DHT unit shall be served through a dedicated instrument air header originating
from compressed air plant through separate HP instrument air receiver.
Table-6.4: Plant Air & Instrument Air quality
Sl
Parameter
Dew Point at atmospheric pressure
Oil Content, ppm
Plant Air
Instr. Air
water-free
(-)40oC
nil
nil
6.4.2 Nitrogen shall be generated from a cryogenic air separation unit with the specifications as
in Table-6.5. The Catalytic Reformer unit in the refinery shall be served through a
dedicated nitrogen header originating from the nitrogen plant through separate liquid
nitrogen storage and vaporiser:
Table-6.5: Nitrogen quality
Sl
Parameter
Nitrogen
(-) 100 oC
Dew Point at atmospheric pressure
Oil Content, ppm
Nitrogen purity, vol%
99.99
Oxygen content, vol ppm
3 max
Carbon dioxide content, vol ppm
1 max
Carbon monoxide content, vol ppm
nil
nil
6.5
FUEL SYSTEMS
6.5.1 Original design comprises of two separate liquid fuel systems, low sulphur fuel (1.0 wt%)
for CDU/VDU and high sulphur fuel (2.0 wt%) for rest of the refinery operations. Each
fuel system consists of dedicated fuel oil storage tanks in offsites, pumps, piping from
offsites to CDU/VDU, day storage tanks and pumps in CDU/VDU and respective fuel
supply lines.
Current environment requirement is 0.5 wt% sulphur in fuel for CDU/VDU as well as for
rest of the refinery.
Appropriate modification shall be done post revamp.
Two separate liquid fuel systems are specified. The Crude & Vacuum Distillation unit
fuel oil system and Refinery fuel oil system. Low sulphur fuel oil (sulphur is 0.5 wt%
max) is used as liquid fuel in heaters. Liquid fuel composition data are indicated in
Table-6.5. Fuel gas composition data are indicated in Table-6.6. Main burner and pilot
burner fuel gas are same. Natural Gas backup considered for fuel gas in the Refinery.
6.5.2 Burner turndown requirements have to meet at liquid fuel pressures at burner not less
than the normal anticipated return header pressure indicated in Table-6.6. The fuel oil
system shall be designed for a recirculation rate of 2:1.
6.5.3 Fuel gas liquid knockout drums will be common for a group of functionally clustered
Page 521 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 22 of 66
units, to be finalised during detailed engineering. Separate knockout drums will be

considered only when found technically and operationally unavoidable.
6.5.4 Fuel gas piping shall be steam traced within and outside the unit battery limits.
6.5.5 In-line strainers are required for burner piping for each unit. These shall be located not
more than 20 metres upstream of the burner manifold and shall be provided as 1 serving
+ 1 spare strainer with mesh sizes 100 for Fuel Oil, 200 for Fuel Gas and 200 for
atomising steam. All mesh sizes are Tyler standard.
6.5.6 Liquid fuel temperature shall be assumed to drop by 5oC between unit battery limits and
burner manifold.
Table-6.6: Fuel Oil Composition

REFINERY FUEL OIL
Parameter
Sl
Note:
1.
2.
BLEND 1
UCO (45.25 wt%)+
HCU Kero
(45.25wt%)+
HCGO(9.5wt%)
BLEND 2
HCU KERO (98.38
wt%) + HCGO (9.62
Wt%)
UCO +HCU Kero +

HCGO
HCU Kero + HCGO
830
798.6
0.5, max
0.5, max
1.
Name
2.
Density @ 15oC, kg/m3
3.
Sulphur content, wt%
4.
Nitrogen content, wppm
465
472
5.
Nickel content, wppm
<1
<1
6.
Vanadium content, wppm
<1
<1
7.
Sodium content, wppm
8.
Flash Point, oC
48.6
41.32
9.
Viscosity @ 50 oC, cst
3.3
0.94
10.
Viscosity @ 100 oC, cst
1.4
0.57
11.
Initial Boiling Point @ 1atm,,

ASTM D86 oC
142
144
12.
Conradson Carbon Residue,

wt%
0.04
0.04
13.
LHV, kcal/kg
9500-9850
9500-9850
Refinery current fuel blend is 40 ~ 45 wt% UCO, 40 ~ 45% HCU Kero and balance HCGO in order to
reach sulphur level of 0.5 wt% max.
Provision of VR shall be kept for Fuel Oil Blending.
Page 522 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 23 of 66
Table-6.7: Fuel Gas Composition
Sl
Parameter
Name
Case #
Composition, mol%
LPG
Low MW
High MW
Startup
Hydrogen
48.72
75.56
42.29
0.0
Carbon Dioxide
0.08
0.05
0.12
Carbon Monoxide
0.0
0.0
0.0
Oxygen
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
0.0
150 ppmv
150 ppmv
150 ppmv
4ppmv
0.0
0.07
0.8
Methane
0.55
27.10
13.54
33.74
Ethane
13.86
6.96
15.4
Ethylene
1.03
0.64
1.49
Propane
3.48
1.37
2.33
Propene
0.29
0.18
0.42
i-Butane
0.68
0.26
0.38
0.015
26.0
n-Butane
2.33
1.27
0.46
0.015
35.0
Butenes
0.01
1.84
0.01
0.02
0.07
2.57
0.01
14.65
0.0
0.01
15.05
Water
C5+
NH3
NG
Normal
Hydrogen Sulphide
FG
Molecular weight
LHV, kcal/kg
Nitrogen mole%
12420
7.62
14840
12250
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
92.57
92.77
6.5
0.0
2.0
0.0
0.27
36.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
11750
52.7
10980
0.43
Page 523 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 24 of 66
6.6
FLARE & BLOWDOWN SYSTEMS
6.6.1 Flare systems are separate for normal hydrocarbons and acid gases from Sulphur block.
No separate header for hydrogen rich flare gas is planned.
6.6.2 Apart from the main knock-out drums near the flare stack, individual units shall be
provided with a flare knock-out drum whenever significant liquid relief is anticipated
from the pressure relieving devices. This is a stipulation of OISD standard # 106.
Licensor / unit designer / contractor shall specify a horizontal unit flare KOD, sized to
separate out liquid droplets down to a size of 400 .
6.6.3 Maximum hydrocarbon flare backpressure, to be considered for sizing of pressure relief
devices, is 1.4 kg/cm2g at unit battery limits and 1.7 kg/cm2g at PSV outlet.
6.6.4 Maximum acid gas flare backpressure, to be considered for sizing of pressure relief
devices, is 0.5 kg/cm2g at unit battery limits and 0.7 kg/cm2g at PSV outlet.
6.6.5 All hydrocarbon-bearing discharges of all molecular weights from pressure relief /
pressure control devices shall be discharged to closed flare system. For hydrogen rich
services with relieving temperatures higher than 300oC, the flare gases could have been
vented to atmosphere. However, for BORL, current BEDP data of all licensed and open
art units do not indicate occurrence of such releases in the refinery.
6.6.6 For pressure relief valves on steam services, the maximum allowable overpressure shall
be considered as 5% as per stipulations of Indian Boiler Regulations.
6.6.7 All intermittent non-congealing hydrocarbon drains from equipment shall be routed to a
buried Closed Blowdown (CBD) system while congealing hydrocarbon drains will be
displaced with flushing oil into identified rundown headers. The CBD drum shall be a
horizontal underground vessel, floating with flare header. For physically contiguous
units, CBD vessels can be common, if found suited to equipment layout and underground
piping slope considerations, to be decided during detailed engineering. The drums may
be provided with appropriate heating (with LP Steam) and / or cooling as considered
necessary by unit design. Two vertical submerged centrifugal pumps (one operating and
one installed spare) shall pump out the drum inventory to a slop header at a battery limits
pressure of 5 kg/cm2.
For Vacuum unit & Hydrocracker unit, congealing blow down system shall be employed.
This system consists of evacuation header, congealing blow down header and congealing
blow down pumps. The congealing blow downs are pumped to black slop header after
cooling.
6.6.8 Refer section 6.2 for condensate blow down system.
Page 524 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
6.7
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 25 of 66
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
6.7.1 Voltage levels are:

Table-6.8 : Voltage levels
Motor power range
From
Through
< 0.18 kW
0.18 kW
132 kW
> 132 kW
Nameplate
Voltage
Phase
Frequency
(Hertz)
240 V
50
415 V
50
6600 V
50
6.7.2 Licensor shall provide the list of drivers requiring reacceleration feature to ensure faster
start-up and / or to minimise plant down time in case of process disturbances due to
momentary voltage drip or brief interruption (upto 5 seconds) in normal power supply. In
case of very large number of drivers requiring reacceleration facility, stagewise grouping
of such drivers, depending upon permissible time of failure shall be provided by licensor.
6.7.3 Emergency power requirement, if any, for safe shutdown / quick start-up after failure of
normal power supply for duration beyond which reacceleration feature is incapacitated,
shall be provided along with the list of drivers.
6.7.4 Licensor shall indicate auto restart requirement for motors in the datasheet.
6.7.5
For new post-revamp system VFD type drives may be considered if applicable for
process feed control / energy optimization.
6.7.6
Voltage level of all new instruments to be considered as per existing system for proper
integration.
Page 525 of 1744
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 26 of 66
Bina Refinery, BORL
6.8
CAUSTIC STORAGE, PREPARATION, DISTRIBUTION
6.8.1 Commercial caustic of 46% (weight) shall be received by the owner and stored in the
Offsite area. Caustic of 12% (weight) strength shall be prepared and stored in the same
area from where it shall be pumped to process units. Consuming units shall have
necessary facilities to store this caustic and to prepare / store caustic solutions of lower
strength, as needed. Caustic of 20% (weight) is prepared and stored in the same area from
where it shall be pumped to RODM and ETP.
6.8.2 Caustic handling equipment shall be of Carbon Steel construction and stress relieved
whenever required for the operating temperatures selected.
6.8.3 Spent caustic from all units shall be degassed before leaving the unit. The spent caustic
bulk streams shall be pumped out or pushed out under system pressure to the effluent
treatment plant (ETP) or to other potential consumers such as injection into crude.
Residual spent caustic shall be drained into OWS. A common spent caustic oxidator will
be evaluated for processing the spent caustic received at the ETP for reduction of BOD.
6.8.4 Battery limit conditions for caustic distribution are as per Table-6.9.
Table-6.9 : Caustic streams
Sl#
Caustic stream
Operating condition
P, kg/cm2g
20% Caustic
Spent Caustic
T, oC
6.0 kg/cm2g, 40 C (to be

confirmed)
6.0 Kg/cm2g, 40 C (to be
confirmed)
Mechanical Design
P, kg/cm2g
T, oC
18.0
65
by design
65
Page 526 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 27 of 66
6.9
FLUSHING OIL SYSTEMS
6.9.1 Three flushing oil systems are envisaged in the refinery:
(i) Normal Flushing Oil (FLO)
(ii) Heavy Flushing Oil (HFLO)
(iii) Instrument/Pump Seal Flushing Oil (IFLO)
(iv) Pressurized Flushing Oil
6.9.2 Normal Flushing Oil: Normal flushing oil (FLO) shall be straight-run light gas oil,
charged to a refinery header from the crude unit to a pressure of 7 kg/cm2 at 40oC. FLO
is also stored in offsites (DHDT feed tanks are used for this purpose) from where it can
be charged as a backup into the same header. This FLO is to be used for startup /
shutdown flush out of heavy oil equipment and also as external flush for pump API seal
plans, instrument flushing as suited. A centralised FLO booster system, as required, will
be implemented during detailed engineering to receive this FLO in an adequately sized
surge vessel and pump it into a higher pressure header, as found necessary. FLO line from
Offsites forms the equipment-flushing header. This is used for flushing of equipments &
lines which normally carry heavy viscous liquids. This system is applicable to
CDU/VDU, DCU and HCU/DHDT units.
6.9.3 Heavy Flushing Oil: Heavy flushing oil (HFLO) shall be straight-run vacuum gas oil of a
cut to be decided by contractor. A centralised HFLO system will be located in Vacuum
Distillation unit, charging to a header at a pressure to be determined by contractor and at a
temperature of around 80 - 110C. This HFLO can be used as external flush for those
pump API seal plans where FLO cannot be used because of vapour blowout possibilities
inside the seals. This system is applicable to CDU/VDU only.
6.9.4 Instrument/ Pump Seal Flushing Oil: Instrument flushing is normally Diesel streams from
crude unit. As a back up flushing oil is also provided.
In CDU/VDU, flushing oil system for instrument/pump seal consists of the following:
Nitrogen blanketed flushing oil drum which normally uses internal GO as
flushing oil and also has back up of FLO from offsites.
LP and HP FLO pumps which receive suction from FLO drum through filters
o
LP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at three different pressure
levels for effective purging of instruments and pump seals (plan no 32)
o
HP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at high pressure for purging
of instrument
In DCU, flushing oil system for instrument/pump seal consists of the following:
Nitrogen blanketed flushing oil drum which normally uses internal LCGO as
flushing oil and also has back up of FLO from offsites
LP and HP FLO pumps which receive suction from FLO drum through filters
o
LP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at three different pressure
levels for effective purging of instruments and pump seals (plan no 32)
o
HP flushing oil pump generates flushing oil at high pressure for purging
of instrument.6.9.5
Page 527 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 28 of 66
6.9.5 Pressurized flushing oil system FLO from offsites is boosted by pumps (Pressurized
FLO Pumps) for flushing of equipments in heavy congealing services in CDU/VDU,
DCU and HCU/DHDT units.
6.10 HOT OIL SYSTEM
6.10.1 A hot oil system will be installed as a part of MS block. This hot oil is used as
reboiling medium for two reboilers in Penex unit and Naphtha stabilizer reboiler in
Naphtha stabilizer unit.
Page 528 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
7.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 29 of 66
GENERAL DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
7.1.0 Energy integration

7.1.1 The design endeavour towards overall energy efficiency shall call for unit-level and total
plant-level optimisation of energy. Designer of a particular unit shall indicate at the
outset of design activities:
(a) The total energy consumption expressed as equivalent fuel oil (Btu/bbl or FOE%) and
a comparison with Solomen bench marking shall be provide by licensor in basic
design package.
(b) The preferred temperatures for hot feeds and products from an energy integration
standpoint, if these are significantly different from that stipulated in unit PDB.
(c) Energy shall be preferentially recovered into process streams. Steam generation shall
be considered thereafter to recover excess available energy. Steam generation level
shall be chosen to preferably meet the steam requirements within a unit.
(d) Low-level energy recoverable for external consumption, say, for Boiler Feed Water
preheat serving other units.
7.2.0 Vacuum Design
7.2.1 Vacuum design conditions shall be stipulated for:
(a) Equipment operating normally under vacuum conditions
(b) Equipment that are subjected to vacuum conditions during start-up, shutdown,
regeneration or evacuation
(c) Liquid full vessels that can be blocked in and cooled down
(d) Distillation columns and associated equipment that can be subjected to vacuum
conditions through loss of heat input.
(e) All steam users consuming steam during normal operation.
7.2.2 Vacuum design conditions are not to be specified for the eventuality of blocking in after
equipment steam-out or operator maloperation.
7.3.0 Feed, intermediate and product storage
7.3.1 The design specifications of tankage outside the unit battery limits shall be prepared by
EIL, as defined in the relevant scope of work. Should the designer of a particular process
unit have specific requirements towards associated tankage such as, inert gas blanketing
and the required minimum purity of the inert gas, material of construction, etc.
For new storages, TFMS shall incorporate guidelines / recommendations from relevant
OISD/API RP 545/MB Lal committee report (for example; ROSOV, Rim seal foam
protection, High Volume Long Range Monitors, bypass conductors in floating roof tanks
for lightening protection, electrical insulation of all gauge and guide pole assemblies, gas
detectors, level measurement practices etc.)
Page 529 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 30 of 66
7.4.0 Aromatics handling

7.4.1 Special precautions shall apply towards handling process streams containing more than
1% (weight) or more benzene or 25% (weight) or more C6 through C9 aromatics.
The design and equipment provisions shall be:
(a) Closed sampling point piping as defined in standard details P&ID
(b) Dual mechanical seals for pumps
(c) Connecting the following to the unit closed blowdown (CBD) system:
- vessel and pump drains
- control valve, level gage and level instrument drains
- drains of other equiment which can be isolated for maintenance
7.5.0 Metallurgy
7.5.1 Metallurgy shall be specified by respective unit designer based on process considerations.
If a unit designer has specific stipulations towards either an associated upstream or
downstream unit for, say, piping metallurgy, exchanger tube metallurgy, etc., the same
shall be identified by unit designer during the finalisation of DB.
7.6.0 Corrosion Allowance
7.6.1 Minimum corrosion allowance shall be as follows :
Service
Min.Corrosion Allowance, mm
- C.S. vessels
3.0
- Alloy Steel vessles
1.5
- Clad/ lined vessels
Clad/ lining thickness
- S.S. vessels
nil
7.7.0 Lining/ Cladding thickness
7.7.1 The minimum lining/ cladding thickness of 3 mm shall be used until different thickness
is required from process considerations.
Page 530 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
8.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 31 of 66
EQUIPMENT DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
8.1.0 Overdesign philosophy

8.1.1 Overdesign philosophy
Owner does not wish to add any margin for overdesign of equipment over and above the
margins built in by unit designer as per designer's own practice.
Unit designer to indicate specific equipment margins considered for stable operation of
the plant.
8.1.2 Definition of critical equipment service
A critical service equipment is defined as equipment that must be maintained in operation
in the event of power failure in order to protect personnel, equipment or catalyst or safe
shutdown
Page 531 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 32 of 66
8.2.0 Selection Of Mechanical Design Conditions

Equipment and piping systems shall be designed for the most stringent coincident
temperature and pressure conditions, accommodating the maximum expected working
pressure and temperature without causing a relief condition. The design shall be such
that instrument safeguarding systems are not relied upon for overpressure protection.
Abnormal conditions shall be evaluated considering a single contingency. A double or
multiple contingency shall not be considered, but, if one failure is a result of another
failure, both failures are to be considered as one contingency. Guide for "Pressure relief
and depressurising systems", API RP 521 shall be followed for evaluating failures.
8.2.1 Mechanical design pressure for pressure systems
a) The design pressure for a pressure system, protected by a pressure relief device
connected to the flare system, shall be the higher of the following:
i) For operating pressures above 70 kg/cm2g, design pressure shall be equal to the
105% of maximum working pressure, subject to a minimum of 77 kg/cm2g.
ii) For operating pressure upto and including 70 kg/cm2g, design pressure shall be
maximum of following:
Maximum operating pressure x 1.1
Maximum opearting pressure + 2.0
3.5 kg/cm2g
b) The design pressure of pressure system protected by a pressure relief device and not
connected with flare system shall be maximum operating pressure plus 0.7 kg/cm2.
c) The design pressure calculated shall be at the top of a vertical vessel or at the highest
point of a horizontal vessel. The design pressure at the bottom of the vessel shall be
determined by adding the maximum operating liquid head and any pressure gradient
within the vessel.
d) Vessels operating under vacuum shall be, in general, designed for an external
pressure of 1.033 kg/cm2abs and full internal vacuum, unless otherwise specified.
Vacuum design stipulations shall be as per section 7.2.0.
e) Emergency vacuum pressure of 0.4 kg/cm2abs can also be considered by licensor
based on the process requirements.
f) For a full liquid system at the discharge of a centrifugal pump, the mechanical design
pressure shall be as under:
where,
Pdes
Pmax suction + Pmax
Pmax suction
Mechanical design pressure at suction vessel

bottom + static head at maximum liquid level.
Page 532 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Pmax
g)
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 33 of 66
Pump differential pressure at pump shutoff head

with maximum operating density. If not known,
consider Pmax = 1.20 x Pnor for constant speed
pump and Pmax= 1.1 x 1.20 x Pnor for variable
speed (steam turbine or variable electric driver)
pump and Pmax = 1.30 x Pnor for high head,
multistage pumps.
For a full liquid system at the discharge of a positive displacement pump, the
mechanical design pressure shall be the higher of :
Pdes
Prated discharge + 2 kg/cm2
Pdes
1.1 x Prated discharge
OR
h) For shell-and-tube heat exchangers, the low pressure (LP) side shall be preferably
specified with a mechanical design pressure at least equal to 10/13 th of high pressure
(HP) side mechanical design pressure, in order to avoid having to install a pressure
relief device on the LP side. The "10/13 th criteria shall necessarily be adhered to in
the following situations:
(1) LP fluid is on the tube side.
(2) Relief discharge cannot be connected to flare header owing to nature of fluid.
(3) Relief discharge is two-phase.
(4) Liquid relief cannot be connected to a closed blowdown system.
(5) When the "10/13 th criteria calls for an increase by less than a factor of 1.5 of the
mechanical design pressure of the LP side as would be calculated from normal
estimation procedures.
However, based on process considerations and designer's own practice, heat
exchanger can be designed without upgrading design pressure by providing tube
rupture pressure relief valve after getting consent on case to case basis from owner.
8.2.2 Mechanical design pressure for storage tanks and atmospheric vessels
a) Design pressure of storage tanks shall be in accordance with API-620, API-650 and
API-2000, as appropriate.
b) Blanketed storage tanks shall have a blanketing pressure of 150 mmwc, unless a
higher pressure is deemed necessary from process considerations. The design
pressure of blanketed storage tanks shall be determined to allow adequate
overpressure for outbreathing and emergency relief devices. The blanketed tanks shall
also be designed for 50mm vacuum.
8.2.3 Mechanical design temperature
a) The design temperatures for vessels operating at or above 0oC shall be equal to the
maximum operating temperature plus 10oC, or, the maximum temperature in
emergency situations at least equal to the temperature corresponding to pressure relief
Page 533 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 34 of 66
conditions for an operational failure case, subject to minimum design temperature of

65oC. Fire case relieving temperature shall not be specified as the governing design
temperature of a vessel. The design temperatures for vessels operating below 0oC
shall be the lowest operating temperature.
b) Vessels provided with drying air / gas connection shall have a design temperature
equal to the drying air / gas normal temperature plus 10 oC.
c) For pressure vessels storing refrigerants or liquefied hydrocarbons at ambient
temperature, the lowest design temperature (based on complete depressurisation)
shall correspond to the coincident design pressure when this lowest design
temperature is reached. The coincident design pressure can be different from the
maximum design pressure specified for the vessel depending upon the system under
consideration. However, if this calls for a change in metallurgy, then other methods
to avoid this situation is to be adopted.
d) Each set of mechanical design pressure and temperature, for the possible operations
as defined above, shall be mentioned in process specification sheet.
8.2.4 Steam-out conditions
Vessels provided with steam out conditions shall be designed for the following steam out
conditions when LP Steam is considered adequate:
a) Pressure
b) Temperature
:
:
0.5 kg/cm2
190 oC
If a specific equipment requires steam out with MP steam, steam out temperature shall be
specified accordingly.
8.2.5 Minimum Design Metal Temperature (MDMT)
Licensor / designer shall specify MDMT based on international design practice.
Page 534 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 35 of 66
8.3.0 Heat Exchangers

Reference is made to Thermal design basis for heat exchangers (Shell & Tube, Air cooled
heat exchangers). Document no. 6743-00-05-45-DB-01.
8.3.1.1 Break-in temperature for air cooled heat exchange shall be:
(a) 55oC for air cooled heat exchange not followed by water cooled heat exchange.
(b) 65oC for air cooled heat exchange followed by water cooled heat exchange.
8.3.1.2 Metallurgy for cooling mediums

Table: 8.1
Type of water
Cooling Water
Tempered Water
Tube
Carbon Steel
Carbon Steel
Channel
Carbon Steel
Carbon Steel
Channel cover
Carbon Steel
Carbon Steel
8.3.1.3 Lube oil coolers for LO/SO console of compressors shall use SS tubes.
8.3.2
Fouling factors
8.3.2.1 Fouling factors for process streams :
Fouling factors for process streams shall be decided by designer based on past
experience and good design practices. However, owners overriding considerations
towards fouling factors for specific units or process streams shall be the basis of
specifications, if spelt out in respective unit DBs.
8.3.2.2 Fouling factors for utility streams :
a) Cooling Water:
0.0004 hr-m2-oC/kcal
b) Tempered Water
c) Steam
8.3.3 Constraints on tube-side velocities:
Cooling water:
Residues, Heavy oils:
Slurry oils:
Minimum (m/sec)
1.0 @ normal flow
1.0 @ turndown
1.5 @ turndown
Maximum (m/sec)
2.3 @ turnup
8.3.4 Fin fan control schemes

8.3.4.1 When fluid outlet temperature requires to be controlled (whether automatic or regulated
manually, say, for seasonal climatic variation) or when stipulated to conserve power,
100% of fans in a section of an air cooled exchanger bay shall be specified with variable
speed motors.
8.3.4.2 All fin fan coolers shall be provided with start / stop push buttons located near the fan
and in the control room. Vibration swiches and control room alarms for fans shall be
provided if recommended by vendor.
Page 535 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 36 of 66
For new fin coolers, wireless vibration probes with control room indications, alarms shall
be considered Two probes shall be provided at fan bearing and two at motor.
8.3.5 For new Air Fin Coolers , header shall be specified as follows:
a) Cover Type header of all fluids up to design pressure of 50 kg/cm2 (g)
b) Plug Type header of all fluids with design pressure higher than 50 kg/cm2 (g) to
avoid any leakages.
8.3.6 Condensate control for steam consumers
For steam flows < 500 kg/hr to a steam-heated exchanger, steam traps shall be considered
for condensate removal. For larger consumers, condensate shall be collected in a pot
provided with a level control valve for condensate withdrawal. The condensate pot top
elevation shall be 300mm lower than the exchanger geriatrix or bottom tangent line
unless warranted otherwise from a process control scheme consideration.
Figure-8.1
Typical condensate pot control scheme
STEAM
GERIATRIX OR TANGENT LINE

AS REQUIRED
LG
CONDENSATE
8.3.7 The use of compablock, plate type exchangers, helical baffle/tubes or precoated tubes
for appropriate services shall be evaluated as applicable for post revamp scenario.
Page 536 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 37 of 66
8.4.0 Fired Heaters

Reference is made to Engineering design basis for Fired Heaters and air preheating
system A702-00-05-45-DB-01.
8.4.1 Selection of fuel
All fired heaters shall be designed for 100% firing on either fuel oil or fuel gas or in any
combination of these. However, for duties less than 1.5 MMKcal/hr, , NHTAuxiliary
Heaters and Hydrocracker reactor heaters only gas firing shall be considered. Deviations
from this criteria, if any, shall be explained and agreed upon on a case-to-case basis.
8.4.2 Target efficiencies
Achievable fired heater efficiencies depend on service, process temperatures, furnace heat
duty and quality of fuel. For new heaters,Target efficiency of 90% or higher, as indicated
in preliminary API data sheets, is to be achieved considering options such as cast tube
and glass tube air preheaters, steam generation and superheat, etc.
Best achievable efficiency up to 90% shall be targeted subjected to heat potential in
existing system.
8.4.3 Provision shall be made for coil purging, snuffing steam and water washing of fan
impellers and out-board air preheaters.
8.4.4 Standard fired heater piping & instrumentation:
Refer drawings A702-02-41-00-1181 (latest revision) for existing fired heaters and A70202-41-00-1181A (latest revision) for new fired heaters which depict the generic minimum
fired heater piping and instrumentation requirements to be implemented during detailed
engineering. The standard fired heater piping shall include, as a minimum, the features
and items listed below. :
a) Pass-flow control (wherever identified), low flow pre-alarm, low-low flow trip
b) Pressure control of fuel gas / fuel oil, differential pressure control on atomising steam
c) Shutdown valves on fuel oil supply, fuel oil return and main fuel gas, actuated on
respective loss of fuel supplies, loss of feed, emergency shutdown, etc. Shutdown
valve on pilot gas line actuated only for emergency shutdown.
d) Low pressure pre-alarm and low-low pressure trip on fuel gas and fuel oil.
e) Local indicators of temperature and pressure on fuel gas, fuel oil and steam
f) Emergency shutdown.
g) Emergency coil steam, manual or automated as specified.
h) Draft gage connections at burners, below convection section, above and below stack
damper.
i) Flue gas sampling connections below convection section and below stack damper.
j) OnlineOxygen analyser, NOx analyser, SOx analyser, CO analyzer and SPM analyser
connections.For location of analyzers refer doc No. A702-00-05-45-DB (Fired Heater
Design Basis).
k) Temperature measurement connections below convection section, below stack
damper, at hearth level.
Page 537 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 38 of 66
l) Coils having horse shoe type bend shall be flanged at their terminal connections (like
cross overs and furnace inlets/ outlets).
m) An adequate number of flanged connections shall be provided for steaming out, water
freeing, steam air decoking and chemical cleaning.
n) Skin thermocouples shall be provided for measuring temperature of furnace tubes. In
each furnace two additional type B thermocouples shall be installed close to the skin
thermocouples for checking purpose. These type B thermocouples shall be
connected to an accessible terminal box for connection to a portable instrument.
o) Furnace very high pressure to trip the furnace.
p) Very high coil outlet temperature to trip the furnace.
8.4.5 Coke thicknesses for hydraulic calculations

Coke laydown shall take place in fired heaters handling hydrocarbons containing coke
precursors. Heater tube diameter selection and hydraulics shall take cognisance of this in
respective unit DBs.
8.4.6 For new heaters, venturi tube instead of Pitot tube for combustion air flow
measurement shall be used. 0
Page 538 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 39 of 66
8.5.0 Vessels
Reference is made to Engineering design basis, Static Equipment section 2.4 document
number: A702-999-16-46-EDB-1001.
8.5.1 Hold-up criteria:
Following is the hold up criteria for new vessels, for existing/modified vessels hold up
time shall be considered on case to case basis.
(a) For feed surge drums, the total hold-up provided shall be at least 10 minutes of design
flow of feed with the hold-up being available between the measured minimum and
maximum levels. Alarm points, if configured, shall allow a hold-up of 1 minute
between the alarm point and the corresponding low or high level. Shutdowns, if
configured, shall allow a hold-up of 1 minute between the shutdown point and the
corresponding low or high level alarm point.
(b) For liquid product accumulators with product to storage, the hold-up provided shall
be at least 3 minutes of design flow between measured high and low levels.
(c) For overhead accumulators, the liquid hold-up provided shall be at least 5 minutes of
the reflux design flow. Additional hold-up shall be provided for the net product,
which shall be 3 minutes of product flow, when the product goes to storage, and 5
minutes of product flow, when the product feeds a downstream tower.
(d) For horizontal vessels, the normal liquid level shall be fixed at 50% of the vessel
diameter.
8.5.2
Nozzle requirements for vessels and towers:
8.5.2.1 Minimum process nozzle size on vessel shall be 2" NB . Minimum instrument
nozzle size for internally lined vessels / towers shall b 3" NB.
8.5.2.2 The following nozzle services shall be specified with at least 300# rating, even if process
conditions call for a lower pressure rating:
(a) All nozzles upto:
2" NB
(b) Pressure relief valve connection:
Yes
(c) Level instrument standpipes:
Yes
(d) All instrumentation connections:
Yes
8.5.2.3 Thermowell nozzles on vessels shall be flanged and will be 2" minimum ID. Nominal
diameter shall be specified to ensure this minimum ID or ID of lining.
8.5.2.4 Steamout connections will be provided on vessels which are stipulated to be steamed out
during normal startups of shutdowns. Steamout nozzles shall be located on the head of
horizontal vessels and at minimum elevation above the bottom tangent line for vertical
vessels.Steamout nozzles shall be hard-piped for all pressure vessels handling
hydrocarbons.
8.5.2.5 For vessels less than 1000mm diameter, where no access is required, hand holes shall be
provided in place of body flanges. Vessels and columns with diameter up to 1000 mm
shall be provided with 450 NB manhole. Vessels and columns with diameter greater than
Page 539 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 40 of 66
1000 mm and up to 1500 mm shall be provided with 500 NB manhole. However, if

required, vessels and columns with diameter 1500 mm and above may be provided with
600 NB manhole
In vertical vessels provided with demisters, at least one manway shall be provided in the
top head and one manway in the bottom section, to facilitate access from both sides of the
demister.
In horizontal vessels, the manway shall be preferably located on the vessel head, away
from the end that has internals such as internal displacers or baffles. Large horizontal
vessels above 3000 mm tangent length will additionally be provided with a blanked-off
ventilation nozzle at the top of the vessel, near the end opposite the manway. The vessel
vent nozzle can be welded to the ventilation nozzle blind flange.
In trayed columns, manways shall be provided in the top head, below the bottom tray, at
the feed tray, at any other tray at which removable internals are located, and at
intermediate points so that the maximum spacing of manways in the trayed section does
not exceed 10 meters .
8.5.2.6 Steamout, vent and drain nozzles and ventilation nozzles shall be as follows:
Table: 8.2
Vessel volume
Length
(Horizontal vessel)
less than 6.0 m3

3
6.0 - 15.0 m
more than 15 m
Vent nozzle
Drain
nozzle
Ventilation
nozzle
2" NB
2" NB
2" NB
2" NB
2" NB
3" NB
3000 mm - 4500 mm
4" NB
4500 mm - 7500 mm
6" NB
>7500 mm
8" NB
8.5.2.7 Level instrument nozzles (refer also section 9.3, "level instruments") shall be provided as
below, unless BDEP packages indicate other special recommendations:
(a)
When directly mounted on a vessel, two flanged nozzles affording 2" ID shall be
provided. When mounted on a standpipe, two flanged 2" NB nozzles shall be
provided. For ranges greater than 48 inches, differential pressure level
transmitters shall be considered, preferably mounted from the standpipe having
level gages.
(b)
The visible length of the level gauge shall cover the maximum operating range .
When level gauge is used in conjunction with a level instrument, the visible range
of the level gauge shall cover the entire range of level instrument..
Page 540 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 41 of 66
8.5.3
Vessel size limitations
8.5.3.1 Single-piece heavy equipment such as Reactors considered to be shop-fabricated and
transported to site shall have to be within the following shipping envelope (dimensions
including projections):
a)
b)
c)
Maximum length = 33 metres

Maximum width / diameter = 6 metres
Maximum weight = 400 tons
8.5.3.2 For general single piece equipment ODC limits, reference is to be made to Engineering
Design Basis.
8.5.4 New coalescer shall be provided with an upstream duplex type filtration system.
8.5.5
Instrument air vessels shall be provided for new units.
Page 541 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 42 of 66
8.6.0 Towers
8.6.1 Tray selection
Valve trays, in general, will be preferred except for liquid-liquid mass transfer
applications and for services where some extent of fouling is anticipated. Single-pass,
Two-pass and Four-pass trays can be envisaged as appropriate. Three-pass trays are not
preferred.
8.6.2 Tray / packing turndown
All trays and packings shall be designed for the same turndown as defined in respective
unit PDB. In some services, the reflux and reboiler rates may be turned down to a ratio
different from the unit turndown, while still meeting the overall turndown.
8.6.3 Hold-up criteria for tower bottoms & tower draw-offs
The following is the hold up criteria for new columns. For existing/modified columns,
holdup time shall be checked on case to case basis.
(a) When tower bottoms directly feed another tower, the hold-up provided shall be at
least 5 minutes of design flow of net product (excluding circulating flows such as
bottoms quench) between high and low levels.
(b) When tower bottoms go to storage or to a downstream unit having a feed surge drum,
the hold-up provided shall be at least 3 minutes of design flow of net product
between high and low levels.
(c) When a low alarm is configured, the volume between low liquid level and low level
alarm point shall afford a hold-up of 1 minute. This will be in addition to the surge
requirement. When a low-low alarm is configured for shutdown, provide at least an
additional 1 minute of hold-up between the low level alarm point and the low-low
level shutdown point.
(d) When a high alarm is configured, the volume between high liquid level and highlevel
alarm point shall afford a hold-up of 1 minute. This will be in addition to the surge
requirement. When a high-high alarm is configured for shutdown, provide at least an
additional 1 minute of hold-up between the high level alarm point and the high-high
level shutdown point.
(e) Hold up criteria for draw off trays:
Surge for thermosyphon reboiler feed

1 min
Surge on draw off for circulating reflux

1 min
Surge for tower bottom quench

2 min
Surge on draw off for product (chimney tray)

2 min
8.6.4 For columns of diameter 900mm, flanged column sections shall be used. For such
columns, each set of 15 to 20 (maximum) trays should be approachable from column
manholes one above and one below the set of trays. Each packed bed will have a manhole
each above and below the bed. 300# manholes shall be provided just above the packing
support plates, for removal of packings. These shall be two in number and opposite each
other. In case the column diameter permits, one of the handholes shall be replaced by
manhole.
Page 542 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 43 of 66
For new coloumns, Tray selection and handhole requirement:

(a) Trayed Columns: Manways shall be provided above top tray, below the bottom tray,
at the feed tray, at any other tray at which removable internals are located and
intermediate points so that the maximum spacing of manways in the trayed section
does not exeed 10 meters.
(b) Column Diameter <=900 mm:
1. Flange Column section shall be used.
2. Trays shall be Cartridge type configuration for <800 mm column diameter & shall
be of turn up- turn down configuration for column diameter between 800 mm and
900 mm.
(c) Other Trayed Column: Each set of 15 to 20 (max) trays should be approachable from
column manholes on above and one below the set of trays.
(d) Packed Columns:
1. Each packed bed will have a manhole each above and below bed.
2. For packed beds with random packing, hand holes shall be provided just above
the packing support plates, for removal of packing. These shall be two in number
and opposite to each other for large diameter columns.
3. However, in the smaller diameter columns, if the column diameter permits, one of
the hand holes shall be replaced by manhole.
8.6.5 Datasheet requirements for towers
(a) Trays shall be numbered from bottom to top.
(b) Cartridge trays shall be considered for diameters less than 800 mm
(c) Proper size tray manway shall be provided on each tray.
8.6.6 Nozzle requirements for towers:
Refer item 8.5.2 under "vessels".
Page 543 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 44 of 66
8.7.0 Pumps
Reference is made to Engineering Design basis (Rotating Equipment) document number
A702-999-16-45-EDB-1001.
For all rotating equipment, noise level (driver + driver equipment train + auxiliaries) shall
be specified as not to exceed 88 dBA when measured at one-meter distance from the
equipment skid in any direction. This requirement is not applicable for equipment of
infrequent operation such as diesel engine driven fire water pump package/ emergency
DG sets. However, this will not be a criteria for rejecting the pump vendor. Equipment
with noise levels higher than 85 dBA but upto 88 dBA when measured at 1 meter
distance from the equipment skid will technically be accepted.
8.7.1
Selection of type of pumps

(a) All pumps for process service shall be specified according to API-610 (10th Edition),
Licensor/EIL specifications. Pumps for water service and other general purpose
process services shall be specified according to Licensor (if any) /EIL specifications
(b) Pump specifications shall assume unsheltered outdoor location. The piperack above
the pumpbay may accommodate air-cooled heat exchangers, in which case, the unit
has to be provided with a safety system to minimise accidental pump hydrocarbon
leakages from being fanned out as an explosive vapor cloud.
(c) In special applications, low flow, high head, high head integrally geared pumps can
be specified, if found necessary.
(e) All centrifugal pumps having rolling element bearings shall be suitable for pure oil
mist lubrication.
8.7.2 Sparing of pumps

8.7.2.1 Process pump services in continuous service will, in general, be provided with installed
spare. Intermittent pump services such as chemical unloading, batch make-up, etc., shall
not be provided with installed spare. These shall be decided on a case-to-case basis and
possibility of common spares shall be examined.
8.7.2.2 Where more than one operating pump is found necessary for a service, or when defined
by owner, pump capacity and spare shall be as follows:
Table: 8.3
# Operating pumps
Rated capacity per pump
Spare pumps
50% of total normal flow
Remarks
Page 544 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 45 of 66
8.7.3 Specification of pump seals

8.7.3.1 Single mechanical seals shall normally be specified for centrifugal pumps unless other
considerations prevail. Seal flushing where necessary, shall preferably be with the
process fluid itself through an appropriate API seal plan for all clean liquids.
For new pumps, under hydrocarbon and hazardous services, seal plan shall be as per API
682 (latest edition). New Pumps with double mechanical seals operating above 250 deg C
shall be provided with circulating external seal flushing plan. For flushing oil system
available in the units, refer section 6.9
8.7.3.2 External seal flushing oil shall be made a requirement only when a self-flushing plan is
infeasible. . For flushing oil system data, refer item 6.9.
8.7.3.3 Dual mechanical seals shall necessarily be specified for the following pump services:
(a) Process liquids: butanes and lighter (any temperature), Hot Gasoline.
(b) Sour waters >100 ppm H2S
(c) Residue streams, operating temperature > autoignition temperature
(d) Dirty service or environmentally hazardous service.
8.7.3.4 For vacuum services or having temperature of 175C and above, stationary bellow seal
shall be specified.
8.7.4
Specification of drives
Motor drives shall be normally specified for pumps. Steam turbine drivers will be
specified as required for criticial services (see section 8.1).
8.7.5 Minimum flow bypass provisions & controls

8.7.5.1 MFB shall necessarily be provided for the following:
(a) High pressure, multistage pumps.
(b) Pumps with a control valve at the discharge manipulated by suction vessel level.
(c) Low capacity pumps
8.7.5.2 The scheme for an MFB will usually be a spillback line with constant bypass flow
through a restriction orifice and a globe valve. A separate MFB for each pump (operating
as well as standby) shall be considered.
8.7.5.3 For large capacity pumps, except recirculating service pumps, an automatic MFB with a
protective minimum flow control shall be provided to save the pumping energy.
8.7.5.4 For low capacity pumps, where forward flow can go below the minimum pump flow
during unit operation, minimum flow shall be added to maximum pump flow to specify
rated flow of the pump.
8.7.6 Pump cooling:
Treated raw water is used as bearing cooling water (BCW). BCW return is returned to
underground sump through a header and a funnel. BCW is pumped to the Cooling water
return header.
Page 545 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
8.7.7
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 46 of 66
Motor specification for autostart pumps:

For autostart pumps, electric motor shall be specified for end of the curve condition
with discharge valve fully open conditions.
8.7.8.1 Warm up bypass across pump discharge for hot pumps shall be as given below.
Globe
3/4"
8.7.8.2 For new systems, isolation valves shall be provided upstream of globe valve.
8.7.8.3 For very high pressure drop (i.e. 15 kg/cm2g or above) across globe valve, a restriction
orifice shall be provided for new systems.
8.7.9
Pumps taking suction from vessels containing greater than 7m3 of LPG, Hot Gasoline
and Hot auto-ignition material will be protected by changing pump suction and
discharge isolation valves to fire-safe remotely actuated valves. The valves to be motor
operated (MOVs) from a safe location. For new systems, MOV safe location shall be
considered 15m.
These pumps shall have a DCS stop facility in central control room along with running
lamp indication.
The MOVs shall have position (open & close) indicators. The new MOVs shall have
position (open & close) indicators and inching facility. Hand switches to close and open
from the field from a safe distance and from control room shall be provided.
Start permissive interlock shall be provided for the pump to start only when suction
valve in open position.
Page 546 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 47 of 66
8.8.0 Compressors
8.8.1 Selection of type of compressors
(a) Specification of a compressor shall assume installation under a compressor shed.
(b) Centrifugal compressors, conforming to API Standard 617, will be specified where
suitable. Axial compressors are not preferred below capacities of 150,000 Nm3/hr.
Centrifugal compressors shall not be spared but specifications shall be given for a
spare rotor. Driver selection shall be based on process requirements, criticality of
service, capital cost and owner's preference as per respective unit DB.
(c) Reciprocating compressors, conforming to API Standard 618, shall be specified with
adequate spare capacity to allow maintenance of one machine while the plant remains
onstream. Motor drivers shall be specified normally.
(d) Screw compressors, conforming to API Standard 619, can be specified in special
cases where found to have an operating, economic or maintenance advantage over
other choices. Screw compressors shall not be spared but specifications shall be
given for a spare rotor. Driver selection shall be as for centrifugal compressors.
8.8.2 Compressor controls
For compressor controls PLC in control room shall be considered instead of the
conventional relay logics.
8.8.3 Compressor seals:
Owner has preference for only dry gas seal.
Page 547 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 48 of 66
8.9.0 Steam Turbine drives

8.9.1 When to select a steam turbine drive?
Steam turbine drives shall be specified in extremely critical services where even shortterm failure of a drive can result in a shutdown from where an operational recovery is
difficult, time-consuming or has a large economic penalty, such as irreversible catalyst
poisoning.
Steam turbine drives shall also be specified for the following drives that, among other
considerations, shall ensure that a power failure does not automatically lead to a steam
failure:
(a) Cogeneration/ Steam generation plant BFW pumps
(b) Compressor lube oil pumps, turbine condensate pumps
(c) Emergency evacuation pumps
8.9.2 Preferred type of steam turbine drive: backpressure or condensing?
a) Backpressure steam turbine for a large driver in an unit can be evaluated only when
there is a matching large consumer of the letdown steam within the same or
immediately neighboring unit. Condensing steam turbine drives shall otherwise be
considered.
b) When there is a large use of LP steam, a back pressure steam turbine to drive a pump/
compressor shall be considered in the unit to minimise let down through pressure
reducing station (PRDS) from MP steam level to LP steam level.
8.9.3 Condensing turbine exhaust
Steam condensing pressure at turbine exhaust shall be considered as 0.14 kg/cm2(a) for
the purpose of basic engineering specifications. Only water cooling shall be considered
for exhaust condensation. Cleanliness factor of 0.6 shall be considered for surface
condensers.
8.10 IBR Requirements

8.10.1 Steam generators/ steam users shall meet IBR regulations. Major IBR requirements are
summarised below:
a) Vessels : Any closed vessel exceeding 22.75 litres (five gallons) in capacity which is
used exclusively for generating steam under pressure and include any mounting or
other fittings attached to such vessels, which is wholly or partly under pressure when
steam is shut-off.
b) Piping: Any pipe through which steam passes and if:
i) Steam pressure exceeds 3.5 Kg/cm2 g or,
ii) Pipe size exceeds 254 mm internal diameter
c) The following are not in IBR scope:
i) Steam Tracing
Page 548 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 49 of 66
ii) Heating coils

iii) Tubes of tanks
d) All steam users (heat exchangers, vessels, condensate pots etc.) where condensate is
flashed to atmospheric pressure i.e. downstream is not connected to IBR system are
not under IBR and IBR specification break is done at last isolation valve upstream of
equipment.
e) All steam users where downstream piping is connected to IBR i.e. condensate is
flashed to generate IBR steam are covered under IBR
f) Deareator, BFW pumps are not under IBR and IBR starts from BFW pump discharge.
8.10.2 Material Certificate:
a) All item part of steam piping i.e. pipes, valves, fittings, traps, safety valves must have
material certificates, countersigned by the local boiler inspectors.
b) For imported items - Certificates issued by an authority empowered by Central
Boilers Board (As listed in the Appendix C of IBR) or under the law in force in a
foreign country in respect of boilers manufactured in that country may be accepted.
c) All drawings coming under preview of IBR shall be certified by Local Boiler
Inspector.
8.10.3 All datasheets of equipment which come under IBR scope shall have the annotation:
"IBR is applicable".
Page 549 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
9.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 50 of 66
INSTRUMENTATION
Reference is made to Engineering design basis (Instrumentation) document number
6743-15-16-51-DB-01.
9.1
9.1.1
Control Philosophy:
Process Control shall be facilitated through a centralised state-of-art Digital Control
System (DCS). All process interlocks and shutdowns shall be implemented through
Quad Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). Redundancy in the field shall be
provided based on process requirement.
9.1.2
Field bus technology (FF) to be considered for all open/ close loops except safety
systems and complex/critical loops. All transmitters/other field devices for open loops
should have interoperability between FF devices including FF interface card in
host/DCS system.
9.1.3.
PLC should have SIL 3 or TUV AK6 class with sequence of event recording facilities.
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
General requirements:
All symbols in P&ID shall be as per ISA.
Transmitters for shutdown service shall be separate from transmitters for control and
monitoring.
9.2.3
i) All MCC signals will be interfaced through isolating relays and fuse terminals to
PLC/DCS.
ii) All solenoid valve operation shall be through the PLC only, and should be shown
in corresponding logic diagram. No direct operated solenoid valves shall be
considered. Shutdown valves shall be provided with double SOV with 120V DC
Push buttons and status indication shall be realised in DCS except for shutdown
applications. No hardwired indicators/recorders shall be used.
9.2.4
9.2.5
For shutdown valves, requirement of Tight Shut Off (TSO) shall be indicated wherever
applicable. All TSO valve shall be of class V as default as a specific owner
requirement.
9.2.6
Signals of PLC with repeat alarm indication in DCS shall be shown connected to DCS
from PLC through software link.
9.2.7
Nozzle sizes for all instruments shall be 3" minimum for all internally lined vessels.
For others, size of instrument nozzles shall be as per relevant EIL standards.
9.2.8
Process Switch type shall be as follows:

a) For Flow, Pressure, level, temperature switches shall be realised through field
transmitters along with set point generated in control system
b) Package items shall have tripping through transmitters.
Direct actuated field switches can be used for package items including pump seal
packages and in special cases as recommended by licensor.
Page 550 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 51 of 66
9.2.9
Continuous flushing oil purge (except for bitumen) shall be provided for flow, level and
pressure transmitters in heavy residue services.
9.2.10
All temperature elements shall have minimum line size expansion of 4".
9.2.11
One single tapping point shall not be used for connecting multiple instruments on
process lines.
9.2.12
Where local loop indicators are used in a DCS loop (for repeat indication), such
indicators shall bear a suffixed instrument tag number to distinguish these from the
DCS instruments.
9.2.13
Transmitters for flow, pressure and differential pressure shall be Smart Type (0.075%
accuracy) with HART Protocol. This is not applicable for filed bus type transmitters.
For new systems, wireless transmitters will be used for pump seal plan instruments of
pressure and level measurement and vibration/accelerometers for non-critcal pumps.
9.2.14
Licensor may elect to utilize a 2 out of 3 logic through PLC where deemed
appropriate for unit/equipment shutdown. The following are some of the critical
equipment where 2 out of 3 voting logic is required. LICENSOR to determine other
shutdown logics where it is required to employ 2 out of 3 voting logic.
1
2
3.
4.
Critical Compressor trip instruments.

Charge Pump trip instruments.
Reactor trip instruments.
Furnace shutdown only for high high fire box pressure
9.2.15
Hydrocarbon detectors should be infrared (IR) type in general.
9.2.16
ISA type K thermocouples are preferred for General Service. Pt-100 RTDs may be used
in special applications
9.2.17
Proximity type position switches (intrinsically safe) with voltage level of 24 V DC to be

used for control valves.
9.2.18
Licensor to furnish specification for testing requirement for control valves, flanges etc
for H2 service, NACE service.
9.2.19
Control valve positioners to be Electro-pneumatic (Smart/FF) type.
9.2.20
As per Instrumentation Design Basis for Bina Refinery, temperature transmitters to be

generally used with temperature elements, except for special applications where no
temperature transmitter to be used. Temperature transmitters will be field mounted
(but not head-mounted). Foundation Fieldbus type transmitter for Open loops. Smart
type transmitter for closed loops and Safety system loops. Licensor to review this and
incorporate/ clarify in case of any objection.
Page 551 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 52 of 66
9.2.21
New on/off valves which are used in shutdown application shall be provided with
redundant SOVs.
9.3
9.3.1
Level instruments:
Standpipe, 2" NB shall be considered for only clean, non-viscous and non-crystallising
services. Standpipes shall be used if more than 4 vessels nozzles are anticipated for
mounting all the level instruments in a given practice. Additionally, it is client's
requirement that all standpipes shall be provided with isolation valves.
9.3.2
Standpipe shall not have any instruments other than for measurement of level except
local pressure instruments. Standpipe accommodating level gauge/ transmitterfor
control and indication shall be separate from standpipe / vessel tappings for level
switches for alarm and trip.
9.3.3
Tank Level Gauges shall be Servo type for Feed & Product tanks with Tank Farm
Management System integrated with DCS.
For highly viscous liquids stored in fixed roof tanks, Radar type gauges shall be
considered. Temperature & density measurement with the servo gauges shall be
considered. For temperature measurement of hydrocarbon tanks, average temp
measurement over the entire liquid column in tank should be considered.
For new tankages, two types of level measuring instruments (servo and radar type) shall
be considered as MB Lal committee report. SIL(safety integrity level) of the tank level
control must be improved and independent overfill protection meeting requirement of
Part 1 of EN 61511 shall be provided.
9.3.4
Interface type level instruments shall be clearly identified in the P&ID.
9.3.5
Level instrument tappings shall be from vessel / stand pipe only and not from process
line.
Diaphragm seals shall be indicated for congealing / high viscosity service for pressures
upto 600#.
9.3.6
9.3.7
Guided Wave Radar type level transmitter (instead of external displacer type) may be
used for level measurement up to 1219mm for existing and 2400 mm for new systems
in applications other than liquid-liquid interface cases. Displacer type may be used in
interface application where guided wave radar are not suitable.
9.3.8
Radar type level transmitters shall be used for new underground CBD vessels.
9.4
9.4.1
Flow instruments:
Where flow measurement (except mass flow meters) is stipulated with pressure and
temperature compensation, the pressure and temperature elements shall be shown and
tagged in P&ID.
9.4.2
Where only local flow indication is required, a calibrated differential pressure gauge
across the flow element may be used.
For open Art unit BDEP, instead of modification, orifice plates shall be replaced
9.4.3
Page 552 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 53 of 66
wherever required. Mass flow meters shall be evaluated before replacement.

Block & Bypass valves are to be provided for Mass Flow meters, Integral Orifices,
Positive Displacement meters and Rotameters.
Liquid flow measurement process data shall include density at standard conditions in
addition to flowing density, normal / minimum / maximum flows, temperaure, pressure
etc.
Ultrasonic clamp on flow meters shall be provided for new raw water lines.
0
9.5
Startup / shutdown operation from control room

The following emergency operations shall be enabled from the control room, in
addition to implied field operations:
a) Single emergency shutdown of total complex.
b) Respective unit emergency shutdown.
c) Fired heater emergency shutdown.
d) Rotating equipment shutdown as identified in BDEP document or if coming
under the purview of safety isolation as per 12.8.
e) Shutdown valves to fail-safe position. Solenoid valve reset will be through
separate push button from field.
f)
Damper and gate operation.
g) Remote stopping facilities for pumps handling hydrocarbon above auto ignition
temperature.
9.6
Status lamps in control room:

a) All critical rotating equipment as specifically identified in BDEP document or if
coming under the purview of safety isolation as per 12.8.
b) Alarm window in control room for all compressors.
9.7
9.7.1
Control valve manifold:

Control valves upto 8" size and in steam service shall be provided with a manifold of
block and bypass valves. Bypass valves shall be of globe type. Control valves not
having block and bypass provision shall be provided with handwheel for manual
operation. For control valve above 8" size, block and bypass requirement shall be
decided on case to case basis. Control valves in fuel lines to fired equipment should be
provided with minimum stop arrangement. The stop devices shall not form part of the
hand wheel mechanism.
For new systems, with very high pressure drop (i.e, 15 kg/cm2g or above) across
control valve, the bypass globe valve shall be provided with restriction orifice.
9.7.2
All control valves shall be provided with 3/4" drain valves close to the upstream flange
of the control valve. The drain valve shall be provided with a blind flange.
[In special cases where a control valve service has to handle a wide variation of flows
and pressure drops, more than one control valve in parallel may be specified as
appropriate].
9.7.3
Block and bypass sizes of control valve shall be based on API standard. Block valve
size shall be same as line size and bypass valve shall be same as control valve size.

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 54 of 66
9.7.4
Shutdown valves shall not be provided with block/ bypass valves unless dictated by
specific designers recommendation or process requirement, depicted in final BDEP or
FEED packages. Shut down valves shall not have any hand-wheel, limit stops . after
shutting off. Fluid pressure to assist in keeping the valve closed. The actuator should be
capable of opening the valve against the full upstream pressure.
9.7.5
For new Control valves connected to flare shall be of class VI type.
9.8
Pressure relief valves (PSV)
9.8.1 All PSVs stipulated for operational failures such as cooling water failure, blocked outlet,
local power failure etc shall have installed spare. For a PSV stipulated for exclusively for
non-operational failure such as external fire or heat exchangers tube rupture, an installed
spare is not essential and has to be evaluated on a case to case basis.
9.8.2 When a spare PSV is provided (except for the case of steam and air services), all PSVs
shall be provided with upstream isolation valves to allow a PSV to be taken off-line.
Downstream isolation valves are not be provided unless required by licensor due to
process requirements. The isolation valves shall be locked open (LO) for the in-line PSVs
and locked close (LC) for the spare PSV.
New PSV shall be provided with upstream and downstream isolation valves with lock
open and lock close facility.
9.8.3 PSVs in steam service (including spare) shall have no isolation, as per IBR. PSVs in
air service shall have only upstream LO/LC isolation valves.
9.8.4 No spare pressure relief valve shall be provided for thermal relief.
9.8.5 Pressure relief valve on spare equipment shall have isolation valve on discharge side
only if connected to closed system.
9.8.6 All pressure relief valves connected to the flare systems or to a closed system shall be
balanced bellows type.
9.8.7 All new PSVs in the hydrocarbon service shall have isolation valves at the inlet and
outlet. (Process Needs to take care in P&IDSs)
9.9
Control philosophy for vendor package items
9.9.1 For all vendor package supplies, monitoring, control and logics shall be implemented in
control room with minimum instrumentation in local panel for startup and shutdowns.
Vibration monitors shall be located in in local panel with purged enclosures with repeat
indications in control room. For new packages, vibration monitors shall be located in
SRR with repeat indications in local panel with purged enclosures. .
9.9.2
Page 553 of 1744
For turbine-driven centrifugal compressors and charge pumps, the logic implementation
shall be done through a separate PLC. For other packages, the logic implementation shall
be through a common PLC.
Page 554 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
9.10
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 55 of 66
Standard Instrumentation:
(a) Packed towers :
1. Each packed bed in a tower shall be provided with differential pressure
measurement and local indication. Critical sections such as Vacuum Tower wash
oil zone, shall have indication in DCS. These shall be finalised during P&ID
review.
2. Basket strainers shall be provided in feed and reflux lines going to a tower with
packed internals. The strainers shall be 1 operating + 1 standby, each provided
with isolation valves to enable maintenance with the unit on-line. The strainers
shall be located as close as possible to the respective tower inlet nozzle.
(b) Heat Exchangers: As a minimum, the following shall be provided1. Thermowell to facilitate measurement at inlet and outlet of each exchanger for
each process fluid (except utilities) when no other temperature indication is
provided.
2. DCS temperature indication across each heat exchange service.
3. For all water cooled exchangers, the water side instrumentation shall consist of a
local temperature indicator (gage), a sample connection and a PSV for thermal
relief, all installed on the cooling water outlet line, between the exchanger flange
and the downstream isolation valve..
4. All water cooled exchangers shall be provided with inlet and outlet isolation
valves on the water side.
5. A heat exchanger that can be taken out of service for maintenance, without
having to shut down the unit, shall be provided with isolation and bypass facility.
(c) Mass Flow Transmitters (with block and bypass valves ) shall be provided on
common feed & product lines. Ultrasonic flow meters shall be provided in new
flare lines
(d) Local Pressure & temperature Instruments at the battery limit on the feed &
product lines shall not be provided.
(e) In general local pressure instruments on any service except pump discharge line
are not to be provided unless required by process reason.
9.11 Critical exchanger sparing

Cooling water exchanger in critical services such as overhead condensers,WGC
interstage and after stage coolers etc shall have two shells in parallel each shell sized at
50% of the design capacity. Each exchanger shell is to have isolation valves to isolate the
exchanger in the event of tube leaks. The impact of isolation valves on pressure relief
system will be discussed on case to case basis.
9.12 Sampling system shall be closed sampling system.
9.13 For line size less than 2 Y type strainers and for 2 and above T type strainers shall be
Page 555 of 1744
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 56 of 66
Bina Refinery, BORL
provided. However for steam service irrespective of line size Y type strainer shall be
provided.
9.14 Utility header instrumentation at battery limit provided in table: 9.1

Table-9.1 : Standard utility header instrumentation at battery limits
UTILITY
local
PI
MP STEAM
DCS
PI
PAL/
PAH
local
TI
DCS
TI
LP STEAM
Condensate
CW supply
TAL/
TAH
DCS
FI
FAL/
FAH
DCS
FQ
CW return
Instrument Air
PAL
Plant Air
Inert Gas
Fuel Gas
Fuel Oil
DM Water
Service Water
Flare
Page 556 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
9.15
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 57 of 66
Battery limit isolation : All incoming and outgoing streams from a unit shall be provided
with double block gate valves with a spectacle blind and bleeder in between, as below.
Figure-9.1
Standard battery limit isolation
Page 557 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 58 of 66
10.0
PIPING & INSULATION
10.1
Refer to Engineering Design Basis A702-999-16-43-EDB-1001 for overall piping design

considerations, for insulation, painting and corrosion protection standards.
10.1.1 Insulation thickness to be adopted as per EIL standard and the insulation thickness shall
be selected from the insulation thickness tables attached as Annexure I with this
document.
10.1.2 It is mandatory to adhere to stipulations of OISD standard # 118 for minimum interequipment spacing and inter-distance between process unit and offsites. Relevant tables
are included in the referred document.
10.2
EPC contractor will review and incorporate uniform PMS classes into P&IDs of all
facilities for material control during project implementation stage.
10.3
Steam tracing shall be specified for all onplot (ISBL) piping handling congealing
services. Tracing shall be done with Medium Pressure Steam, defined in Table-6.1,
unless specified otherwise. Offsite congealing service piping shall be completely
electric-traced.
10.4
Gear-aided operation shall be as per PMS. For valves of 16" size and above, motoroperated valves can be considered and indicated on P&IDs, if envisaged.
10.5
All special purpose valves shall be tagged in P&IDs or identified in appropriate piping
class. The BDEP shall contain appropriate specifications towards the same.
10.6
All piping within a process unit shall be above ground except for oily water sewer and
closed blowdown, Bearing cooling water systems. Cooling water supply and return
headers and firewater header can be provided underground, if found suited or necessary.
10.7
All condensing vapour lines shall be specified with no pockets, free draining requirement.
10.8
Line shall be designed for steam out conditions for hydrocarbon services.
10.9
Technical staircase shall be provided for vertical equipment for ease for Operation/
Maintenance. Wherever not possible, interconnection of vertical equipment with
neighboring equipment at a height of every 10 meters shall be ensured. Piping/ Structure
needs to take care in their respective EDB/drawing.
10.10 Silencer drain line shall be at least 1 and above. (Process needs to take care in P&IDs).
10.11 Spool between the vessel and isolation valve shall be minimized/eliminated for taking
vessel out for maintenance.
10.12 For new units, instrument air header shall be SS type. 0
10.13 New strainers in HC service shall be hard piped to OWS with isolation valve.
Page 558 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 59 of 66
11.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
11.1
Emission and effluent norms should comply with the new standards for oil refinery
industry notified vide G.S.R 186 (E) of 18/03/2008 .
11.2
All unit designers have to necessarily furnish complete effluent characteristics as

requested in the format of Exhibit-I.
11.3
SO2 ground level concentration contribution of the refinery shall be less than 40g/m3
outside the fence.
11.4
Noise level :
i) 85 dB(A) at 1 meter from source
ii) 70 dB(A) at the fence
11.5
Total sulphur emission from refinery complex shall be maximum 29.25 TPD.
11.6
Facilities for Zero Discharge shall be considered.
Page 559 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 60 of 66
12.0
SAFETY
12.1
Push buttons for stopping critical motors, if required, shall be provided at a safe location.
This is in addition to usual start/ stop push buttons provided for such motors.
12.2
Emergency lights in plant area and control room shall be provided and these shall be
incandescent type.
12.3
Suction/ discharge valves of suction filter should be close to the pump in order to avoid
hydrocarbon wastage during filter cleaning and pump maintenance.
12.4
Gas detectors shall be provided in the critical process and offsites areas . The number
and location of the gas detectors shall be based on applicable standards. The requirement
of steam / air curtain shall be based on licensor requirement.
12.5
Flare line isolation valve should be installed only in the horizontal line with stem in
horizontal position to avoid free fall of gate and blockage of flare system. Each flare
header leaving a unit shall be provided with such isolation valves to facilitate
maintenance of flare piping and pressure relief valves within the unit.
12.6
12.7
Communication system to cover all areas of plants and offsites shall be provided.
Dip hatch for the tanks should have the aluminium guide extended upto top surface of the
tanks (Short guides may cause serious hazards). Dip hatch cover should be ensured with a
rubber gasket for non sparking.
Page 560 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 61 of 66
13.0
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS &

PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS
13.1
The following standard legend P&IDs shall be adhered to across all process facilities:
(1) Standard symbols & nomenclature:
(2) General notes & typical details:
Drawing # A702-02-41-00-1191, Rev B

Drawing # A702-02-41-00-1192, Rev A
13.2
Instrument requirements for P&IDs:

1) Control valve/ Shut-down valve sizes with failure position shall be indicated.
2) Pressure relief valve sizes with orifice designation and set points shall be indicated.
3) Interlocks shall be shown with sequence numbers matched to cause-and-effect matrix.
4) Minimum Flow stoppers, handwheels for control valves, as required shall be shown.
5) Advance Control loops, split-range controls, etc., shall be explained and
mathematically depicted where necessary.
6) Solenoid valves, signal convertors and limit switches shall be shown where
stipulated.
7) Coupons and corrosion probes wherever required shall be shown in P&IDs by
licensors.
13.3
Preferred drawing size and media:

All P&IDs and PCDs shall preferably be drawn in drawing size ISO A1. The CAD
software used shall be AUTOCAD Version 2008 or later in layer concept. Licensor /
designer shall submit two sets of software copies of all P&IDs at both comments issue
and
final
issue
stage
of
BDEP.
Page 561 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
14.0
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 62 of 66
NUMBERING SYSTEM
14.1 Equipment Numbering system: Equipment numbering shall be as per BORL requirement.
14.1.1 Existing Equipments: The numbering system is:
17 - EE - AS - 301
Serial number
Sub-cost centre
Cost centre
Unit number
14.1.2 Modified/Replacement of Existing Equipments: Modified/replaced equipment tag
numbers will be followed by (N)
17 - EE - AS - 302(N)
Serial number with suffix(N)
Sub-cost centre
Cost centre
Unit number
14.1.2.1 New Equipment in existing service: New tag number shall be in continuation with the
existing tag number, followed by (N). For example:
For Pumps: 17-PA-CF-301C(N) (when existing pump tags are 17-PA-CF-301A/B)
For Compressors: 17-KA-RP-801D(N) (when existing compressor tags are
17-KA-RP-801A/B/C)
For Vessel: 17-VV-VI-802D(N) (when existing vessel tags are 17-VV-VI-802A/B/C)
14.1.3 New Equipments: New equipments tag number will start from 1001 onwards.
17 - EE - AS - 1001
Serial number
Sub-cost centre
Cost centre
Unit number
14.1.4 The unit numbers have been defined in section 2.5. The Cost and Sub-cost centres
serving as equipment designations, are summarised in Table 14.1, covering the
requirement of basic engineering. The serial number shall be as assigned by unit
designer. Separate series can be used to designate different sections within the same unit.
Page 562 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 63 of 66
14.2 PFD/ P&ID's numbering system:

14.2.1 Existing PFD/P&ID: Specific to the numbering of Process Flow Diagrams and Piping &
Instrumentation Diagrams, the following system shall be adhered to by all licensors /
designers:
XXWWW-ZZ 17 - 1112
Serial number
Unit number
Designers own
requirement
14.2.2 New PFD/P&IDs will be in continuation of existing PFD/P&IDs numbering following
the existing numbering philosophy.
14.2.3 Dismantle P&IDs: Specific to the numbering of Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams,
the following system shall be adhered to by all licensors / designers:
XXWWW-ZZ 17 - 1112D
Serial number with suffix D
Unit number
Designers own
requirement
14.2.4 This numbering essentially ensures that the first part of the drawing number takes care of
a licensor's or designer's own company numbering requirements while the second part of
the number ensures a uniform philosophy for all PFD / P&ID serial numbers which will
then be utilised for numbering instruments and lines as per 14.3 and 14.4 below.
14.2.5 In the four-digit drawing serial number, the digits shall be used as follows:
First digit:
Second digit:
Last 2 digits:
'0' for PFDs and '1' for P&IDs, '2' for PCDs.
'0' for iso size A0, '1' for iso size A1, so forth.
Serial number starting from '11' for P&IDs, from '01' for PFDs.
Page 563 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 64 of 66
14.3 Line numbering:

14.3.1 Existing Line: Numbering shall be as outlined below:
12" - P - 17 - 1201 - B1A - Ih
Insulation designation
Piping class designation
Serial number
Unit number
Service designation
Line size, inches
14.3.2 Replaced Lines: Serial number shall be followed by suffix N
12" - P - 17 - 1202N - B1A - Ih
Serial number with suffix N
Unit number
Service designation
Line size, inches
14.3.3 New Lines: For Completely new lines (new service), Last two digits of serial number will
start from 101 onwards.
12" - P - 17 - 12101 - B1A - Ih
Serial number
Unit number
Service designation
Line size, inches
14.3.4 Service designation and insulation designation are listed in legend drawing # A702-02-4100-1191, Rev B, issued along with.
14.3.5 In the four-digit line serial number, the digits shall be used as follows:
First 2 digits:
Last 2 digits:
Same as last 2 digits of P&ID serial number.'

Serial number starting from '01' (for existing)
Serial number starting from '101' (for new)
Page 564 of 1744

Bina Refinery, BORL
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 65 of 66
14.4 Instrument numbering:

14.4.1 Existing Instrument: numbering shall be as outlined below:
17
PIC - 1201
Serial number
Instrument designation
Unit number (not indicated in
P&ID tag but used in instrument
specification / list)
14.4.2 Modified/replaced Instruments: serial numbers will be followed by N
17
PIC - 1202N
Serial number with suffix N
14.4.3 New Instruments: For Completely new instruments (new service), Last two digits of
serial number will start from 51.
17
PIC - 1251
Serial number
14.4.4 Instrument depiction shall be as per ISA. The relevant table for the alphabetic depiction
of instrument type is included in drawing # A702-02-41-00-1191, Rev B.
14.4.5 In the four-digit instrument serial number, the digits shall be used as follows:
First 2 digits:
Last 2 digits:
Same as last 2 digits of P&ID serial number.

Serial number starting from '01'. (for existing)
Serial number starting from '51' (for new)
In case of existing instruments, tag numbers having last two digits more than 50 (Eg.
DCU instrument flushing oil P&ID), the new instrument tag numbering shall be in
continuation with the numbering of existing instruments and accordingly appropriate
note shall be provided in the P&ID.
14.5 Document numbering system:

14.5.1 With the exception of the above documents, licensor / designer shall follow their
respective company procedures for document numbering.
Page 565 of 1744
Document No.
A702-02-41-ODB-01
Rev. 0
Page 66 of 66
Bina Refinery, BORL
Table-14.1: Equipment designation
Cost
Centre
Subcost
Centre
AU
00
CC
00
CC
Description
Cost
Centre
Subcost
Centre
Description
RCC Tanks
LM
00
Fired boiler
Columns, general
LS
00
Flare stock
WI
Columns w/ uncoded internals
LW
00
Waste heat boiler
CT
00
Trays, general
LZ
00
Undefined package equipment
CW
00
Demister for columns
ML
00
Scraper launcher
CP
00
Packed internals for columns
MR
00
Scraper receiver
EA
00
Air cooled heat exchangers
MT
00
Turbo generator
EA
FN
Fans, Air cooled heat exchangers
PA
CF
Pump, Centrifugal
EE
00
Shell & tube heat exch (S&T Hx)
PA
DF
Pump, Diaphragm
EE
AS
S&T Hx, AES, Floating head
PA
GR
Pump, Gear
EE
BM
S&T Hx, BEM, Fixed tubesheet
PA
JK
Pump, Centirfugal jacketed
EE
BU
S&T Hx, BEU
PA
MT
Pump, Metering
EE
AT
S&T Hx, AKT, Kettle
PA
RP
Pump, Reciprocating
EE
AL
S&T Hx, AEL, Fixed tubesheet
PA
SM
Pump, Centrifugal submerged
EE
DP
Double pipe
PA
VT
Pump, Vertical turbine
EP
00
Plate heat exchanger
PM
00
Pump drive, Electric motor
FF
00
Fired furnace, general
PT
00
Pump drive, Steam turbine
FD
00
Direct fired heater
PR
00
Power recovery turbine
FP
00
Air preheater
RB
00
Reactor / Regenerator (R/R)
FI
00
Incinerator
RM
00
R/R mechanical mixer
GJ
00
Cyclones
RT
00
R/R trays
GN
00
Filter, general
RP
00
R/R packed internals
JA
00
Vacuum system
TB
00
Storage bins
JE
00
Evaporator, general
TH
00
Storage hoppers
JS
00
Static Mixer, general
TI
00
Storage silos
JJ
00
Expansion joint, general
TM
00
Storage tank mechanical mixers
JM
00
Air mixer
TS
00
Storage spheres
KA
RP
Compressor, Reciprocating
TT
00
Storage tanks, general
KA
CF
Compressor, Centrifugal
TT
FR
Storage tanks, floating roof
KA
SC
Compressor, Screw
TT
CR
Storage tanks, cone roof
KA
LR
Compressor, Liquid Ring
VV
00
Vesssels, general
KA
RT
Compressor, Rotary
VV
HI
Vessels, horizontal w/ internals
KA
TL
Compressor, Twin lobe
VV
HW
Vessels, hroizontal, no internals
KA
DF
Compressor, Diaphragm
VV
VI
Vessels, vertical, w/ internals
KM
00
Compressor Drive, Electric motor
VV
VW
Vessels, vertical, no internals
KT
00
Compressor Drive, Steam turbine
VM
00
Mechanical mixer for vessels
LA
00
Air conditioning plant
VW
00
Demister for vessels
LC
00
Refrigeration plant
VP
00
Packing for vessels
LE
00
DM water plant
WH
00
Piping item, steam traps
LF
00
Condensate polishing unit
WK
00
Piping item, air traps
LG
00
Chlorinator
WG
00
Piping item, in-line strainers
LH
00
Effluent treatment plant
WJ
00
Piping item, expansion joint
LI
00
Inert gas generator
WB
00
Piping item, valves
LJ
00
Air drier
XZ
00
Electrical, miscellaneous
LK
00
Cooling Tower
FA
00
Flame arrestor
15.0
STANDARDS & CODES
15.1
Standards and Codes shall be as per respective sections of PMC Engineering Design
Basis.
Page 566 of 1744
Document No.
VENDOR LIST FOR ELECTRICAL
A702-029-16-50-OD-4070
Rev. No. A
Page 1 of 2
VENDOR LIST
FOR
ELECTRICAL
PROJECT:

OF BINA REFINERY
OWNER :
M/s BORL, Bina (MP)
JOB NO. :
A702
09.03.16
ISSUED WITH TENDER
AKM
VB
ANPS
Rev. No
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Reviewed
by
Approved
by
Document No.
VENDOR LIST FOR ELECTRICAL
A702-029-16-50-OD-5100
Rev No. A
Page 2 of 2
VENDOR LIST FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

ITEM
VENDOR
Cables-MV-Power-XLPE
Associated Flexibles and Wires, Cords Cable Industries, Finolex,

Gemscab, Havells, KEI Industries, KEC International, Polycab,
Rallisn Electriicals, Sriram Cables, Torrent Cables, Universal
Cables
Cables-Control-XLPE
Associated Cables, Associated Flexibles and Wires, CMI Limited,

Cords Cable Industries, Delton Cables, Elkay Telelinks, Finolex
Cables, Gemscab, Havells, Icon Cable, KEI Industries, KEC
International, North Eastern Cables, Ploycab, Rallison, Sriram,
Scot Innovation Wires,Suyog Electricals, Torrent Cables, Thermo
Cables, Universal Cables
Control Station
Baliga Lighting Equipments, EX-Protecta, Electrical Equipment

Corporation, Flexpro, Flameproof Equipments, FCG Power
Industries, FCG Flameproof Control Gears, Petroleum Safety
Products, Sudhir Switchgears.
MOTOR-INDUCTION-HV (INDL.
TYPE SAFE AREA
ABB INDIA LTD (BARODA), BHEL-BHOPAL, CROMPTON GREAVES

LTD., KIRLOSKAR ELECTRIC CO LTD, MARATHON ELECTRIC
MOTOR I LTD
MOTOR INDUCTION-MV
(INDL.TYPE SAFE AREA)
ABB Ltd, Bharath Bijlee, Crompton Greaves, Kirloskar Electric,

Laxmi Hydraulics, Marathon Motor, SIEMENS LIMITED
Motors imported
Asea Brown Bovery limited, NIDEC ASI SPA, GE ENERGY POWER

CONVERSION FRANCE SAS, CEMP SRL, GENERAL ELECTRIC
CANADA, HYUNDAI HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO. LTD, JEUMONT SA /
FRAMATONE ANP, Hitachi ltd, Loher gmbh, Siemens AG, Toshiba
Corporation, Weg Equipmentos, Lloyd Dynamowerke, WEGEuro

Indusria Electrica,
NOTES:
1.
Vendor may procure material from any of OWNERs approved vendors. However
current validity and range of approval as per enlistment letter, workload, stability
and solvency need to be verified by the Vendor before placement of order.
2.
For components other than the above, vendor shall submit past track record for the
proposed sub-vendors and obtain written approval from Owner before placing
order.
Page 567 of 1744
Page 568 of 1744
Page 569 of 1744
Page 570 of 1744
Page 571 of 1744
Page 572 of 1744
Page 573 of 1744
Page 574 of 1744
Page 575 of 1744
Page 576 of 1744
Page 577 of 1744
Page 578 of 1744
Page 579 of 1744
Page 580 of 1744
Page 581 of 1744
Page 582 of 1744
Page 583 of 1744
Page 584 of 1744
Page 585 of 1744
Page 586 of 1744
Page 587 of 1744
Page 588 of 1744
Page 589 of 1744
Page 590 of 1744
Page 591 of 1744
Page 592 of 1744
Page 593 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 2 of 23
Table of Contents
1.0 SCOPE .................................................. 4
2.0 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS .......... 4
2.1 ABBREVIATIONS........................................... 4
2.2 CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS ........................ 4
3.0 GENERAL / DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 8
3.1 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION ............................... 8
3.2 LOADS ................................................. 10
3.2.1 DEAD LOADS ........................................... 10
3.2.2 IMPOSED LOADS ........................................ 10
3.2.2.1 LIVE LOADS........................................... 10
3.2.2.2 HYDRO-TEST LOAD .................................... 11
3.2.2.3 OPERATING LOAD OF EQUIPMENT ........................ 11
3.2.2.4 BUNDLE PULL ......................................... 11
3.2.2.5 PIPING LOAD.......................................... 12
3.2.2.6 IMPACT & VIBRATORY LOADS ............................ 12
3.2.3 WIND LOAD ............................................ 12
3.2.4 SEISMIC LOAD .......................................... 13
3.2.5 BLAST FORCES ......................................... 13
3.2.6 OTHER LOADS .......................................... 13
3.3 FLOORING DETAILS FOR BUILDINGS & SHEDS .................. 13
4.0 SPECIFIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 14
4.1 FOUNDATION DESIGN ..................................... 14
4.1.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS ................................ 14
4.1.2 FACTORS OF SAFETY IN FOUNDATION DESIGN................ 15
4.1.3 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT ............................... 16
4.1.4 MINIMUM COVER TO FOUNDATION BOLT/ POCKET ............. 16
4.1.5 HEIGHT OF PEDESTAL ................................... 16
4.1.6 GROUTING & MINIMUM GROUT THICKNESS ................... 16
4.2 RCC STRUCTURES & FOUNDATIONS ......................... 17
4.2.1 GENERAL/ DESIGN METHODS.............................. 17
4.2.2 CONCRETE ............................................ 17
4.2.2.1 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT & MAXIMUM WATER-CEMENT RATIO 18
4.2.3 REINFORCEMENT BARS .................................. 18
4.2.4 MINIMUM COVER TO MAIN REINFORCEMENT ................. 19
4.2.5 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENT.... 19
Page 594 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 3 of 23
4.3 STEEL STRUCTURES ...................................... 20

4.3.1 GENERAL/ DESIGN METHODS.............................. 20
4.3.2 GRADE OF STEEL ....................................... 20
4.3.3 LIMITING PERMISSIBLE STRESSES.......................... 21
4.3.4 LIMITING DEFLECTION ................................... 21
4.3.4.1 LIMITING VERTICAL DEFLECTION ......................... 21
4.3.4.2 LIMITING HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION ....................... 21
4.3.5 MINIMUM THICKNESS .................................... 22
4.3.6 ELECTRICAL SWITCHYARD STRUCTURE & TRANSMISSION TOWER 22
4.3.7 PROTECTIVE COATING ................................... 23
4.4 MASONRY WORKS ........................................ 23
4.4.1 GENERAL .............................................. 23
4.4.2 CEMENT MORTAR ....................................... 23
4.4.3 FIRE WALLS ............................................ 23
4.5 SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS ................................... 23
4.5.1 PIPE RACK ............................................. 23
4.5.2 RCC & STEEL CHIMNEYS ................................. 23
4.5.3 MACHINE FOUNDATIONS ................................. 23
4.5.4 BARRICADING .......................................... 23
Page 595 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 4 of 23

(Structural)
1.0 SCOPE
This document specifies the design criteria and loads that shall be taken into account for the
civil-structural design of all industrial plant and non-plant structures and buildings pertaining
to the project.
2.0 ABBREVIATIONS, CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS

2.1 ABBREVIATIONS
Code
DBE
EDB
FBEC
FFL
FGL
FOS
HPP
MCE
MOC
NA
PCC
RCC
SBC
TMT
UOM
Description
Design basis earthquake
Engineering design basis
Fusion bonded epoxy coating
Finished floor level
Finished grade level
Factor of safety
High point of pavement
Maximum considered earthquake
Material of construction
Not applicable
Plain cement concrete
Reinforced cement concrete
Safe bearing capacity
Thermo-mechanically treated
Units of Measurement
2.2 CODES & STANDARDS / PUBLICATIONS

S.No. Description
1
Paving Bitumen - Specification
2
Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregates
from Natural Sources for Concrete
3
Classification of Commercial Timbers & their
Zonal Distribution
4
Specification for Expanded Metal Steel Sheets
for General Purposes
5
Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars and
Hard-Drawn
Steel
Wire
for
Concrete
Reinforcement
6
Specification for Portland Slag Cement
7
Code of practice for plain & reinforced
concrete
8
Specification for Test Sieves: Part-I Wire Cloth
Test Sieves
9
Methods of Test for Strength of Concrete
10
General construction in steel - Code of
practice
11
Code of practice for use of cold formed light
gauge steel structural members in general
building construction.
12
Code of Practice for use of Structural Steel in
Overhead Transmission Line Towers
Standards / Codes
IS:73
IS:383
IS:399
IS:412
IS:432
IS:455
IS:456
IS:460
IS:516
IS:800
IS:801
IS:802
Page 596 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 5 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Description
Code of Practice for Design, Fabrication and
Erection of Vertical Mild Steel Cylindrical
Welded Storage Tanks
Code of Practice for use of Steel Tubes in
General Building Construction
Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam,
Column, Channel and Angle Sections
Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel
Sections
Covered electrodes for manual metal arc
welding of carbon and carbon manganese
steel
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding
for general construction in mild steel
Code of practice for design loads
Code of Practice for Design of Structural
Timber In Building
Common Burnt Clay Building BricksSpecification
Method of Identification of Natural Building
Stones
Method of Test for Determination of Water
Absorption, Apparent Specific Gravity and
Porosity of Natural Building Stones
Recommendations for Dimensions and
Workmanship of Natural Building
Stones for Masonry Work
Recommendations for Dressing of Natural
Building Stones
Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes Specification
Bitumen-Mastic for Flooring -Specification
Steel Tubes, Tubulars and other Wrought
Steel Fittings
Specification for Bitumen Felts for Water
Proofing and Damp-Proofing
Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of
Product Grade 'C' - Part-1: Hexagon Head
Bolts
Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded
Steel Fasteners
Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement
Specification for Hard-Drawn Steel Wire
Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement
Code of practice for construction of stone
masonry
High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And
Wires for Concrete ReinforcementSpecification
Specification for Hot Applied Sealing
Compounds for Joints in Concrete
Preformed Fillers for Expansion Joint in
Concrete Pavement and Structures (non
extruding and resilient type)
Standards / Codes
IS:803
IS:806
IS:808
IS:811
IS:814
IS:816
IS:875
IS:883
IS:1077
IS:1123
IS:1124
IS:1127
IS:1129
IS:1161
IS:1195
IS:1239
IS:1322
IS:1363
IS:1367
IS:1489
IS:1566
IS:1597
IS:1786
IS:1834
IS:1838
Page 597 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 6 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
Description
Criteria for earthquake resistant design of
structures
Code of practice for design & construction of
foundations in soil - general requirements
Code of practice for structural use of
unreinforced masonry
Specification for Plain Washers
Hot Rolled Low, Medium and High Tensile
Structural Steel
Specification for Sand for Masonry Mortars
Specification for Concrete Masonry Units
Code of Practice for Brickworks
Code of Practice for Preparation and Use of
Masonry Mortars
Steel Wire Ropes for General Engineering
Purposes - Specification
Specification for Thimbles for Wire Ropes
Bulldog Grips - Specification
Methods of Test For Aggregates for Concrete
(Part-II)
Methods for Sampling of Aggregates for
Concrete
Drop Forged Sockets for Wire Ropes for
General Engineering Purposes
Recommended practice for hot dipped
galvanising of iron and steel
Methods for testing uniformity of coating of
zinc coated articles
Integral Waterproofing
Compounds
for
Cement Mortar and Concrete -Specification
Code of practice for Design and construction
of Pile foundations
raft foundations
machine foundations
Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and
Chemical) for Water and Wastewater
Specification for Bitumen Mastic for use in
Water-Proofing of Roofs
Specification for Bitumen Primer for use in
Waterproofing and Damp-Proofing
Code of practice for concrete structures for
storage of liquids
Specification for Ballies for General Purposes
Specification for Masonry Cement
Methods of Tests of Burnt Clay Building
Bricks
Steel Chequered Plates - Specification
Specification for Structural Timber in Building
Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts
High Strength Bolts in Steel Structures - Code
of Practice
Standards / Codes
IS:1893
IS:1904
IS:1905
IS:2016
IS:2062
IS:2116
IS:2185
IS:2212
IS:2250
IS:2266
IS:2315
IS:2361
IS:2386
IS:2430
IS:2485
IS:2629
IS:2633
IS:2645
IS:2911
IS:2950
IS:2974
IS:3025
IS:3037
IS:3384
IS:3370
IS:3337
IS:3466
IS:3495
IS:3502
IS:3629
IS:3757
IS:4000
Page 598 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 7 of 23

(Structural)
S.No. Description
70
Methods of Physical Tests for Hydraulic
Cement
71
Recommendations on Stacking and Storage
of Construction Materials and Components at
Site
72
Code of practice for design and construction of
foundation for transmission line towers and
poles
73
Code of practice for earthquake resistant
design and construction of buildings
74
Hollow Steel Sections for Structural Use
75
Unplasticized PVC Pipes for Potable Water
Supplies -Specification
76
Plywood for Concrete Shuttering Work Specification
77
Criteria for blast resistant design of structures
for explosions above ground
78
Criteria for design of Reinforced concrete bins
79
Criteria for design of RCC chimneys
80
Determination of dynamic properties of soil
81
Cement paint
82
Methods of Sampling of Clay Building Bricks
83
Specification for Bitumen Mastic for Tanking
and Damp-Proofing
84
Code of practice for determination of bearing
capacity of shallow foundations
85
Code of practice for anti-termite measures in
buildings
86
Specification for High Alumina Cement For
Structural Use
87
Code of Practice for Water-Proofing of
Underground Water Reservoirs and
Swimming Pools
88
steel chimney
89
Method for determination of mass of zinc
coating on zinc coated iron and steel articles
90
Specification for Glass Fibre Base Bitumen
Felts
91
Code of practice for damp-proofing using
bitumen mastic
92
Code of practice for calculation of settlements
of foundations
93
Specification for 43 grade Ordinary Portland
Cement
94
Specification for Bitumen Mastic, Anti-Static
and Electrically Conducting
Grade
95
Chlorpyrifos emulsifiable concentrates
96
Concrete Admixtures -Specification
97
Criteria for design of steel bins for storage of
bulk materials
98
Recommendations for metal arc welding of
carbon and carbon manganese steel
Standards / Codes
IS:4031
IS:4082
IS:4091
IS:4326
IS:4923
IS:4985
IS:4990
IS:4991
IS:4995
IS:4998
IS:5249
IS:5410
IS:5454
IS:5871
IS:6403
IS:6313
IS:6452
IS:6494
IS:6533
IS:6745
IS:7193
IS:7198
IS:8009
IS:8112
IS:8374
IS:8944
IS:9103
IS:9178
IS:9595
Page 599 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 8 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
Description
Code of Practice for Design and Construction
of Shallow Foundations on Rocks
Two parts polysulphide based sealants
Provision of Water-Stops at Transverse
Contraction Joints in Masonry and Concrete
Dams - Code of Practice
Specification for 53 Grade Ordinary Portland
cement
Specification for sulphate resisting Portland
cement
Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Sections for
Beams, Columns and Bearing PilesDimensions and Section Properties
Pulverised Fuel Ash Lime Bricks Specifications
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated Reinforcing
Bars
Code of practice for ductile detailing of
reinforced concrete structures subjected to
seismic forces
Process control room safety
Fire-proofing in Oil & Gas industry
Standards / Codes
IS:12070
IS:12118
IS:12200
IS:12269
IS:12330
IS:12778
IS:12894
IS:13620
IS:13920
OISD-STD-163
OISD-STD-164
Note: The above list is suggestive and not exhaustive. Apart from these basic codes any
other related code shall also be followed wherever required. All codes & standards shall be
latest revision with all amendments issued there to.
3.0 GENERAL / DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

3.1 MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
S.No.
1.0
1.1
Name of
Structure
Technological
structures
Supporting
process
equipments
Material of
Construction
Level up
to
Fire Proofing
up to
Steel
Top
Steel
Top
As per OISDSTD-164
or
10.0m above
HPP,
whichever is
higher.
Air
cooler
supporting
level.
1.2
Supporting
coolers
2.0
2.1
Pipe Rack
Inside
process RCC
unit (without air
cooler)
air
upto first
tier level
above
HPP
Remarks
Refer Note-a
NA
Page 600 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 9 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
Name of
Material of
Structure
Construction
Inside
process Steel
unit (without air
cooler)
Level up
to
Above
RCC
portion
upto top
2.3
Inside
process RCC
unit(with
air
cooler)
2.4
Inside
process Steel
unit(with
air
cooler)
2.5
3.0
Offsite area
All Shed type
structures
e.g.
compressor
house,pump
house etc.
All plant & nonplant
buildings,
including blastresistant
buildings
All
enabling
buildings
e.g.
Warehouse,
cement godown
etc.
Cable trenches
Steel
Steel
upto first
tier level
above
HPP
Above
RCC
portion
upto top
Top
Top
NA
NA
Ref. Note-b
RCC
Top
NA
Ref. Note-c
RCC/ Steel
Top
NA
Ref. Note-d
2.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
Precast/Cast-insitu RCC
Fire Proofing
up to
As
per
OISDSTD164 or 10.0m
above
HPP,
whichever is
higher.
NA
Remarks
Refer Note-a
Air
cooler
supporting
level.
NA
Notes:
a) Blind floor below air cooler shall be in RCC over metal decking (left-in-shuttering)
b)
Roofing & side cladding shall be as per Engineering Design Basis - Architectural.
c) Buildings shall have RCC floors & masonry infill walls, however blast-resistant buildings
shall have RCC walls.
d)
Material of construction for buildings shall be as per Engineering Design Basis Architectural.
e) Electro-forged galvanized grating shall be used for flooring at all operating floors, unless
RCC floor is required from operations considerations (e.g. blind floor below air coolers
supported on technological structure & pipe rack, plant & non-plant buildings), however
chequered plate shall be provided for walkway along crane girders.
f) Fire-proofing material for steel structures wherever required, shall be as follows:
i) Concrete for structures, supporting transfer line & two phase flow line above 6" diameter.
ii) Vermiculite for all other structures, however fire-proofing upto 1.8 m from HPP shall be
in concrete.
Page 601 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 10 of 23
3.2 LOADS
3.2.1 DEAD LOADS
The weight of all permanent construction, including foundation, walls, floors, roofs, partitions,
fire-proofing, stairways and fixed service and other equipments including all fixtures,
platforms, ladders and attached piping but excluding their content. If piping weight is not
indicated separately or included in the weight of the equipment, the same shall be taken as
10% of the weight of the equipment. Component of soil backfill weight over foundation slab
shall be considered as foundation dead load.
The dead load of false ceiling shall be considered as 0.75KN/sqm, wherever required.
The unit weight of materials in general, should be in accordance with IS: 875. Part-1. Also,
the following unit weights should be considered for the purpose of Design:
Reinforced Concrete - 25.0 kN/m3
Plain Concrete - 24.0 kN/m3
Structural Steel - 78.5 kN/m3
Backfill Soil - 18.0 kN/m3
Brickwork - 19.0 kN/m3
3.2.2 IMPOSED LOADS

Following may be considered under Imposed Loads:
3.2.2.1 LIVE LOADS

Live loads shall, in general, be as per IS:875. However, the following minimum live loads
shall be considered in the design of structures to account for maintenance and erection as
well:
S.No. Title / Description
1.0
Process
Building/
Technological
Structure
(open/
closed)
1.1
Operating area
1.2
Maintenance area
2.0
Compressor
House/
TG house
2.1
Operating area
2.2
Maintenance area
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.0
4.1
Service platform
Vessel/ Tower
Isolated platform (for
valve operation)
Access way
Cross over
Sub-station/
Control
room floors
Panel floor
Value
UOM
5.0
7.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
7.5
7.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
3.0
2.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
2.5
2.0
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
10.0
kN/sqm
Remarks
(or as specified by
machine vendor)
Page 602 of 1744

(Structural)
S.No. Title / Description

4.2
Unknown
partition
(definition as per Cl.
3.1.2 of IS:875 Part-2)
5.0
Office building
5.1
Office area
5.2
Lobby
5.3
Exit way
5.4
Unknown
partition
(definition as per Cl.
3.1.2 of IS:875 Part-2)
6.0
Laboratory
6.1
Upper floors
7.0
Cooling tower
7.1
Operating platform/ Hot
water basin cover slab
8.0
Staircase
8.1
Process
building/
Technological structure
8.2
Office
8.3
Sub-station/
Control
room
8.4
Laboratory
8.5
Service platforms
9.0
Walkway
9.1
Gantry girder
Value
1.0
UOM
kN/sqm
3.0
5.0
5.0
1.0
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
4.0
kN/sqm
3.0
kN/sqm
5.0
kN/sqm
5.0
3.0
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
3.0
2.5
kN/sqm
kN/sqm
3.0
kN/sqm
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 11 of 23
Remarks
Note:
a) Live load on various types of roofs shall be as per the requirements given in IS:875 Part 2.
3.2.2.2 HYDRO-TEST LOAD

All equipment foundations & supporting structures shall be designed for Hydro-test load.
Hydro-test shall be considered for one equipment at a time. Further, under hydro-test
condition the wind force shall be taken as 25% of normal wind loading.
3.2.2.3 OPERATING LOAD OF EQUIPMENT

Operating loads shall include the maximum designed equipment inventory in the operating
cycle of the plant. For silos, the contents shall be considered as operating loads.
3.2.2.4 BUNDLE PULL

S.No.
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
Project Philosophy
Bundle pull for different types of Exchangers shall be taken as under unless
otherwise specified in the equipment data sheet:
For Fixed type, no bundle pull is considered.
For Kettle type, bundle pull to be considered as 0.3 times the bundle weight.
For all other types, bundle pull to be considered as 0.86 times the bundle weight or
30N/mm of diameter, whichever is greater.
Total Bundle Pull shall be considered on fixed pedestal alone.
Page 603 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 12 of 23

(Structural)
3.2.2.5 PIPING LOAD

Piping load to be considered maximum of the following:
a. Actual load as given by piping department.
b. For pipe rack, refer clause 4.5.1
3.2.2.6 IMPACT & VIBRATORY LOADS

Structures subjected to impact or vibratory loads shall be designed as per the provisions of
IS:875 & IS:2974.
3.2.3 WIND LOAD

Wind loads shall generally be as per IS:875 except for switch yard structures & transmission
towers for which IS:802 shall be applicable.
S.No.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.0
3.1
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Title / Description
Basic wind Speed, Vb
k1 (Probability factor, risk
coefficient)
For permanent structures
For temporary structures
For
boundary
wall/
barricading
k2 (Terrain,
height
&
structure size factor)
for category
Value
39
UOM
m/sec
1.00
0.9
0.71
-NA-NA-NA-
-NA-
k3 (Topography factor)
Mean probable design life
for computation of wind
forces shall be considered
as follows:
All structures (units & offsite)
temporary sheds, structures
such as those used during
construction operations (for
example, formwork
and
false work),
structures
during construction stages
and boundary walls
buildings and structures
presenting a low degree of
hazard to life and property in
the event of failure, such as
isolated towers in wooded
areas, farm buildings other
than residential buildings.
important buildings and
structures such as power
plant structures.
1.00
-NA-
50
5
Years
Years
25
Years
100
Years
Remarks
Based onVb
-NAClass of structure
(A/B/C) shall be as
per
its
relevant
horizontal & vertical
dimensions.
Page 604 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 13 of 23

(Structural)
Note: To account for surface area of piping, platforms and other attachments fixed to the
equipment the surface area of the equipment (vessel/ column) exposed to wind shall be
increased by 20% or as specified in the mechanical data sheet of the equipment.
3.2.4 SEISMIC LOAD

Seismic forces shall be based on Zone III as per IS:1893 (Part 1 & 4) and Site Specific
Seismic Spectra Document No. A702-000-16-54-DB-0001. Category-1 structures shall be
designed for MCE & checked for DBE.
3.2.5 BLAST FORCES

S.No.
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
2.0
Project Philosophy
Structures subjected to blast forces generated due to accidental blasts from
hydrocarbon ignitions shall be designed to withstand maximum of the following:
Actual blast pressure,
Minimum equivalent static pressure of 3 psi (20.7 kN/sqm) as per OISD-STD-163
As recommended in Rapid Risk Analysis (RRA) Report
Blast proof building shall be designed as per IS:4991 & OISD-STD-163.
3.2.6 OTHER LOADS

S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
Project Philosophy
Apart from the specified live loads, any other equipment load or possible overloading
during construction/ erection/ hydro-test of equipment or piping/ maintenance shall
also be considered in the design.
Design of all structures shall also consider any other relevant and consequential
load/ stress imparted to the structure.
All liquid retaining/ storage structures shall be designed assuming liquid up to the full
height of wall irrespective of provision of any over flow arrangement.
Pressure relief valves or similar pressure relieving devices shall not be made in
underground water retaining/ storage RCC structures.
Water basin in cooling tower shall be designed for the weight of water up to top of
parapet wall.
All buildings/ structures shall be designed to resist the worst combination of the
above loads (in accordance with IS:875 Part-5 - other than earthquake loads).
However wind/ seismic loads shall not be considered in combination together or with
loads during maintenance.
3.3 FLOORING DETAILS FOR BUILDINGS & SHEDS

S.No. Description
Flooring Type I
1.0
Sub Grade
1.1
Earth-fill
base To be provided
compacted to 95%
dry density.
1.2
Compacted layer of 200 mm thick
sand
over
thoroughly
compacted
Earth
fill (mm)
2.0
Structural
Grade
Slab
Flooring Type II
Flooring Type III
To be provided
To be provided
200 mm thick
150 mm thick
Page 605 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 14 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
2.1
2.2
Description
Lean
concrete
1:5:10 over sand
layer (mm)
Structural
nonsuspended slab in
M20
Grade
concrete
(Reinforced with 8
mm dia bars @
200 c/c both ways)
over lean concrete
Flooring Type I
50 mm thick
Flooring Type II
50 mm thick
Flooring Type III

50 mm thick
150 mm thick slab 150 mm thick slab 100 mm thick slab

with reinforcement with reinforcement without
placed in
two reinforcement.
placed centrally.
layers (at top &
bottom).
Note:
a) Flooring details as given above shall be adopted for the non-suspended ground floor
slabs for buildings & sheds only as categorized for various flooring types.
b) Flooring Type I shall be considered for Plant Buildings such as Control Rooms, SubStations, Pump Houses, Utility Compressor Houses, Parking Areas, Stores, Porches.
c) Flooring Type II shall be considered for Ware Houses, Workshops, Cement Godowns,
Fire Stations, Process Compressor Houses.
d) Flooring Type III shall be considered for Non-plant Buildings such as Administration,
Laboratory, Canteen, Time Office, Gate House, Training Centre, Guest House, Residential
buildings.
e) Floor finish for all the above three types of flooring shall be as per Engineering Design
Basis - Architectural.
f) Reinforcement steel shall be as per clause 4.2.3 of this document.
g) 20 mm gap to be provided between floor slab and equipment foundation/ column and
shall be sealed using joint sealing compound.
h) Outdoor pavements shall be as per Engineering Design Basis - General Civil.
4.0 SPECIFIC DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

4.1 FOUNDATION DESIGN
4.1.1 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
Project Philosophy
Minimum depth of foundation for all structures/ buildings shall be as per
Geotechnical Recommendations.
Factors of safety against overturning and sliding shall be as per clause 4.1.2 of this
document.
For stability checks the weight of soil as overburden (soil backfill weight over
foundation slab) shall be as per clause 4.1.2 of this document.
The design ground water level shall be as per the Geotechnical Recommendations
and the hydrostatic pressure shall be adequately accounted for in design.
Page 606 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 15 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
Project Philosophy
Allowable net safe bearing capacity (SBC) of soil for isolated/ raft/ tank foundations
shall be based on the settlement criteria for dead plus imposed load conditions.
For foundations in unit areas, utility areas and foundations for plant
buildings,settlement to be considered as 25mm.
For foundations for Non-plant buildings, settlement to be considered as 40mm
For raft foundations, settlement to be considered as 40mm.
For foundation for cone/dome roof storage Tanks, settlement to be considered as
300mm at edge.
For foundations for cone/dome roof storage tanks, differential settlement to be
considered as 1 in 300 along periphery.
For foundations for Floating roof storage Tanks, settlement to be considered as
150mm at edge.
For foundations for Floating roof storage tanks, differential settlement to be
considered as 1 in 500 along periphery.
Pile capacities(for compression, shear and uplift/tension) shall be per Geotechnical
Recommendations.
For transient loadings, e.g. wind/ seismic, SBC (safe bearing capacity) based on
shear criteria shall be considered instead of considering settlement as design
criteria.
Permissible increase in SBC/ Pile capacities (for compression, shear and uplift/
tension) shall be as per the Geotechnical Recommendations.
Foundation for vibrating equipment shall be kept independent of building
floors/foundations and other adjacent foundations.
4.1.2 FACTORS OF SAFETY IN FOUNDATION DESIGN

S.No.
Type of
Structure
FOS
OTW/S
(EL) (i)
FOS
OT-NW/S
(EL) (ii)
1.0
All
Structures,
Equipments
in
Units & Offsite
Overhead tank
Flood
Light
Mast
Retaining Wall
Flare supporting
structure
Blast-resistant
structure
Transmission
Tower/ Switch
Yard Structure
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
FOS OTN-W/S
(OL) (iv)
FOS
SL-W/S
(v)
FOS SLN-W/S (vi)
1.5
FOS
OTW/S
(OL)
(iii)
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
-
1.5
1.5
1.5
-
1.5
2.0/1.2*
1.5
1.5/1.2*
1.5
2.0
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.75
Legend:
(i) OT-W/S (EL) - FOS against Overturning with Wind/ Seismic in Erection condition.
(ii) OT-N-W/S (EL) - FOS against Overturning without Wind/ Seismic in Erection condition.
(iii) OT-W/S (OL) - FOS against Overturning with Wind/ Seismic in Operating condition.
(iv)
OT-N-W/S (OL) - FOS against Overturning without Wind/ Seismic in Operating
condition.
(v) SL-W/S - FOS against Sliding with Wind/ Seismic.
Page 607 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 16 of 23

(Structural)
(vi)
SL-N-W/S - FOS against Sliding without Wind/ Seismic.
Note:
a) * For Blast Pressure.
b) Minimum factor of safety against uplift shall be 1.2 for all structures (in case of sumps,
lining weight shall not be included)
c) Percentage weight of overburden shall be taken as 100% & to be considered on projected
plan area of footing.
4.1.3 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

No anti termite treatment shall be provided inside the unit areas except buildings. All offsite
and utility plant/ non-plant buildings shall be provided with anti-termite treatment as per
IS:6313 and IS:8944
4.1.4 MINIMUM COVER TO FOUNDATION BOLT/ POCKET

S.No. Project Philosophy
1.0
Minimum distance from the centerline of foundation bolt/ anchor bolt to edge of
pedestal shall be the maximum of the following:
1.1
Clear distance from the edge of the base plate/ base frame to the outer edge of the
pedestal shall be minimum 50 mm.
1.2
Clear distance from the face of pocket to the outer edge of the pedestal shall be 100
mm.
1.3
Clear distance from the edge of the sleeve or anchor plate to the edge of pedestal
shall be 100 mm
4.1.5 HEIGHT OF PEDESTAL

S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
Project Philosophy
The minimum projection of pedestals supporting any steel structure/ column bases
shall be 300 mm/ 150 mm above the high point of pavement/ finished grade/ finished
floor level whichever is higher, for outdoor and indoor located pedestals respectively.
Offsite pipe rack/ pipe bridge/ pipe support pedestals shall be of minimum 500 mm
height above FGL.
The maximum projection of pedestals for staircase/ ladder shall be 200 mm.
4.1.6 GROUTING & MINIMUM GROUT THICKNESS

1.0
The thickness of grout shall be as follows:
1.1
Minimum 50 mm for columns (equipment) unless otherwise required in equipment
datasheet.
1.2
Minimum 30 mm & maximum 50 mm for all other foundations/ structures, unless
otherwise required in equipment/ vendor data sheet.
2.0
All anchor bolt sleeves/ pockets and spaces under column bases, shoe plates etc.
shall be grouted with free flow, non shrink (premix type) grout with 28 day minimum
cube crushing strength of 40 N/sq mm.
3.0
Ordinary cement sand (1:2) grout shall only be used under the base plates of crossovers, short pipe supports (not exceeding 1.5 m height) and small operating
platforms (not exceeding 2.0 m height) not supporting any equipment.
Page 608 of 1744

(Structural)
S.No.
4.0
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 17 of 23
Project Philosophy
Grouting requirement for machines and equipments are not covered here. The same
shall be governed by vendor's requirement.
4.2 RCC STRUCTURES & FOUNDATIONS

4.2.1 GENERAL/ DESIGN METHODS
1.0
All buildings, structures, foundations, machine/ equipment foundations, liquid
retaining/ storage structures, trenches, pits etc. shall be of RCC and designed based
on the following IS Codes in general and other relevant IS Codes applicable: IS:456,
IS:875, IS:1893, IS:1904, IS:2911, IS:2950, IS:2974, IS:3370, IS:4091, IS:4326, IS:
4991, IS:4995, IS:4998, IS:5249, IS:6403, IS:8009, IS:13920.
2.0
Only limit state method as per IS:456 shall be followed in the design unless
otherwise specified elsewhere in this document for special structures.
3.0
All structures shall be of frame type construction, with ductile detailing as per
IS:13920.
4.0
Where the specified design depth of ground water table so warrants all underground
pits, tunnels, basements etc. (excluding appurtenances of storm water/effluent
collection system, cable trench, pipe trench) shall be of leak-proof RCC construction
using approved make of water-proofing compounds.
5.0
All liquid retaining/ storage RCC structures shall be leak-proof and designed as uncracked section as per IS: 3370. However, the parts of such structures not coming
in contact with the liquid shall be designed according to IS:456 except ribs of beams
of suspended floor slabs, counter forts of walls (located on the side remote from the
liquid) and roof which shall be designed as un-cracked section. No increase in
permissible stresses in concrete and reinforcement shall be made under wind or
seismic conditions for such structures.
6.0
The walls and base slabs of liquid retaining/ storage structures shall be provided
with reinforcement on both faces for thickness greater than or equal to 150 mm. In
all liquid retaining structures, PVC water bars (minimum size 230 mm wide x 5 mm
thick) shall be provided at each construction joint(horizontal and vertical).
7.0
Water basin and other primary framing members of Cooling towers or similar liquid
retaining structures which remain constantly in contact with water (stored/ sprayed)
shall be designed as un-cracked sections.
4.2.2 CONCRETE
S.No.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.0
Project Philosophy
The minimum grade of reinforced cement concrete to be used for superstructures
and substructure (unless otherwise specified in Geotechnical Recommendations and
higher of the two shall be followed for substructure) shall be M25(design mix)as per
IS:456 based on moderate exposure condition.
Generally the use of one of the following type of cements shall be considered:
43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) conforming to IS:8112.
Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC, fly ash based) conforming to IS:1489 Part 1.
Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC, calcined clay based) conforming to IS:1489
Part2.
Portland Slag Cement confirming (PSC) to IS:455.
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement (SRC) confirming to IS:12330 shall be used
only for Sulphur Pit and Sulphur Yard of Sulphur Unit.
Minimum cement content for concrete in foundation shall be as per Geotechnical
Recommendations document.
Page 609 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 18 of 23

4.0
75 mm thick lean concrete of grade 1:5:10(nominal mix) shall be provided under all
RCC foundations (except under base slab of liquid retaining structures). The lean
concrete shall extend 50 mm beyond the foundation edges on all sides.
5.0
100 mm thick lean concrete of grade M15(nominal mix) shall be provided under
base slab of liquid retaining structures. The lean concrete shall extend 75 mm
beyond the foundation edges on all sides.
6.0
Plain Cement Concrete (PCC) mud mat of grade M20(nominal mix) of minimum 150
mm thickness shall be provided under all masonry wall foundations.
7.0
Plain cement concrete of grade M20 or 1:1.5:3 of minimum 40 mm thickness shall
be provided as damp proof course at plinth level of all masonry walls and to be
coated with bitumen emulsion.
8.0
Crystalline water-proofing compound of approved make shall be mixed with concrete
for all liquid retaining/ leak-proof structures.
9.0
From durability considerations the minimum cement content and maximum free
water-cement ratio shall be as per clause 4.2.2.1 of this document.
10.0
However, the maximum cement content shall not exceed 450 kg/cum.
4.2.2.1 MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT & MAXIMUM WATER-CEMENT RATIO

Minimum cement content & maximum water-cement ratio shall be corresponding to the
grade of concrete shall be as per Table 5 of IS:456.
4.2.3 REINFORCEMENT BARS

S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
3.1
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
Project Philosophy
High strength deformed TMT bars of grade Fe500D conforming to IS:1786 shall be
used as reinforcement for all structures.
18 gauge black soft annealed SWG wire shall be used for binding of reinforcement
bars.
Corrosion protection of reinforcement bars:
Bi-polar concrete penetrating corrosion inhibiting admixture shall be used in all
concrete works.
Minimum and maximum bar spacing for foundations, slabs, stirrups for Beams, Ties
for columns, pedestals, Walls etc. should be 100mm and 300mm respectively. Bar
spacing should be provided in multiples of 25mm.
Minimum bar diameter:
Piles-main bars----------------------------------------- 12mm
Piles Ties----------------------------------------------- 8mm
Major Foundation e.g. Raft --------------------------- 12mm
Block Foundation-Main Bars ------------------------- 12mm
Block Foundation - Tie Bars -------------------------- 12mm
Minor Foundation (Local foundation etc.) ----------- 12mm
Column, Pedestal - Main Bars ------------------------- 12mm
Column, Pedestal Ties --------------------------------- 8mm
Beam - Main Bars ------------------------------------------ 12mm
Beam - Anchor Bars -------------------------------------- 10mm
Beam Stirrups -------------------------------------------- 8mm
Slab & Wall - Main Bars ---------------------------------- 10mm
Slab & Wall - Distribution Bars --------------------------- 8mm
Minor Elements such as Chajjas, Lintel Beams, etc --- 8mm
Slab and Wall for Blast proof building ------------------ 12mm
Page 610 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 19 of 23
4.2.4 MINIMUM COVER TO MAIN REINFORCEMENT

Clear cover shall be considered over links/ stirrups/ ties. Unless otherwise specified in
Geotechnical Recommendations, minimum clear cover to RCC elements shall be provided
as follows:
S.No.
1.0
2.0
2.1
2.2
3.0
3.1
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
Title / Description
Foundation slab, base slab,
pedestal, plinth beam
Pile Cap
Bottom face
Top & sides
Retaining Wall, Basement
and Pit Wall:
Face in contact with earth
Free face
Column
Tie beam, Floor beam, Roof
beam
Floor
slab,
Roof
slab,
Canopy, Lintel
Liquid retaining structure
Face in contact with liquid
Face away from liquid but in
contact with earth
Free face
Value
50
UOM
mm
100
50
mm
mm
50
30
50
40
mm
mm
mm
mm
30
mm
30
50
mm
mm
30
mm
4.2.5 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ELEMENT

The following minimum thickness shall be followed:
S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
4.1
4.2
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
Title / Description
Footings (all types, with or
without beams)
Tapered Footing
Pile Cap
Liquid retaining/ Leak-proof
structure/ Basement/ Pit:
Base slab
Walls
Floor/ Roof Slab, Walkway,
Canopy slab
Cable/
Pipe
Trench/
Launder Walls & Base Slab
Parapet
Louver/ Fin
Louver (in contact with
liquid)
Precast Trench
Cover/
Precast Floor Slab
Value
300
UOM
mm
150(At edge)
300(Average)
500
mm
300
150
150
mm
mm
mm
125
mm
100
100
125
mm
mm
mm
125
mm
mm
Page 611 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 20 of 23
4.3 STEEL STRUCTURES

4.3.1 GENERAL/ DESIGN METHODS
S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
Project Philosophy
Design, fabrication and erection of the above work shall be carried out in accordance
with the following IS Codes as applicable to the specific structures, viz. IS:800,
IS:801, IS:802, IS:806, IS:814, IS:816, IS:875, IS:1893, IS:6533, IS:9178, IS:9595,
etc. Basic consideration of structural frame work shall primarily be stability, ease of
fabrication/ erection and overall economy satisfying relevant Indian Standard Codes
of Practice. Simple and fully rigid design as per IS:800 shall be used. Where fully
rigid joints are adopted they shall generally be confined to the major axis of the
column member.
All Structural Steel elements continuously exposed to temperatures above 215 DEG
C shall be designed for reduced stress as per Clause 16.4 (Fig 24) of IS:800.
Crane gantry girders shall generally be of welded construction and of single span
lengths. Chequered plate shall be used for gantry girder walkway flooring.
Steel staircases for main approaches to operating platforms shall have channels
provided as stringers with minimum clear width of 750 mm and slope of
approximately 41 degree. The vertical height between successive landings shall not
be less than 2.6 m nor exceed 4.0 m. Treads shall be minimum 230 mm wide made
of electro-forged galvanized grating(with suitable nosing) spaced equally so as to
restrict the rise to maximum 200 mm.
Hand rails 1000 mm high (from top of grating/ top of chequered plate/ FFL), shall be
provided to all walkways, platforms, staircases. Toe plate (100 mm x 5 mm) shall be
provided for all horizontal hand railing (except for hand railing in inclined portion of
staircases). Spacing of vertical posts shall be 1,500 mm (maximum). Two types of
hand railing shall be provided as follows:
For technological structures, walkways, platforms (except platform around/ on
circular/ horizontal vessels), staircases: Top rail, mid-rail and vertical post shall be
NB 32 mm diameter medium grade MS tubes.
For platforms around circular vessels: Top rail shall be NB 32 mm diameter medium
grade MS tubes, mid rail shall be 50x6 MS flat and vertical post shall be of angle
section L50x50x6.
Electro-forged hot-dipped galvanized MS Gratings shall be as per EIL Standard No.
7-68-0697.
Welded connections shall be adopted during shop fabrication, except where only
bolted connections are required (viz. removable members, galvanized electrical
switchyard structures and transmission towers). Field/ site connections shall be
bolted/ welded.
Structural connections shall have minimum two bolts of 16 mm diameter, unless
otherwise limited by the size of members.
Minimum two nuts shall be used for all anchor bolts except for crossovers, platforms
on grade & T- supports.
4.3.2 GRADE OF STEEL

1.0
Structural steel shall be Grade E250 (Fe410W) Quality B0/ Quality BR conforming to
IS:2062.
2.0
Tubular/ hollow steel shall be of Grade Yst 310.
3.0
Properties of steel sections shall be as follows:
3.1
Rolled Section as per IS:808
3.2
Parallel flanged sections as per IS:12778
3.3
Circular Hollow Sections (CHS) as per IS:1161
Page 612 of 1744

(Structural)
S.No.
3.4
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 21 of 23
Project Philosophy
Square Hollow Sections (SHS)/ Rectangular Hollow Sections (RHS) as per IS:4923
4.3.3 LIMITING PERMISSIBLE STRESSES

S.No.
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.0
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.0
3.1
3.2
Project Philosophy
Permissible stresses in structural members shall be as follows:
Hot rolled sections (excluding transmission towers and switchyard structures) as
specified in IS:800
Cold formed light gauge sections as specified in IS:801
Transmission towers & switchyard structures as specified in IS:802
Tubular structures as specified in IS:806
Permissible stresses in bolts shall be as follows:
Hot rolled sections (excluding transmission towers and switchyard structures) as
specified in IS:800
Transmission towers & switchyard structures as specified in IS:802
Permissible stresses in welds shall be as follows:
Metal Arc Welding as specified in IS:816
4.3.4 LIMITING DEFLECTION

4.3.4.1 LIMITING VERTICAL DEFLECTION
The limiting permissible vertical deflection for structural steel members shall be as specified
below, where 'L' represents the span:
S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
Title / Description
Gantry
girder
for
electric
overhead crane (capacity up to
50 T)
Gantry
girder
for
electric
overhead crane (capacity over
50 T)
Gantry girder for manually
operated crane
Girder/ beam for supporting
dynamic equipment/hoist
Purlins supporting any type of
roofing material under (dead load
+ live load) or (dead load + wind
load) conditions
Value
L/750
UOM
Same as 'L'
L/1000
Same as 'L'
L/500
Same as 'L'
L/450
Same as 'L'
L/200
Same as 'L'
Note:
a)
Limiting permissible vertical deflection for grating/chequered plate shall be L/200 or
6mm whichever is minimum.
b)
Limiting permissible vertical deflection for other structures/ structural components,not
covered in the above table, shall be as specified in relevant BIS Codes.
4.3.4.2 LIMITING HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION

The limiting permissible horizontal deflection for structural steel members shall be as
specified below, where 'H' represents the height:
Page 613 of 1744
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 22 of 23

(Structural)
S.No.
1.0
Title / Description
Multi storeyed steel structure/
building
Flare
stack
supporting
structure
2.0
Value
H/325
UOM
Same as 'H'
H/200
Same as 'H'
4.3.5 MINIMUM THICKNESS

The minimum thickness of various structural components (hot rolled sections) shall be as
given:
S.No.
1.0
Title / Description
Trusses, purlins, side
girts & bracings
Columns, beams
Gussets in trusses &
girders
upto and including
12m span
above 12m span
Stiffeners
Base plates
Chequered plate
Grating
2.0
3.0
3.1
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
Value
6
UOM
mm
mm
mm
10
8
10
6
3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Remarks
(on plain)
Notes:
a)
For transmission towers & switchyard structures the minimum thickness of various
structural components shall be as per IS: 802.
b) The minimum thickness for rolled beams and channels shall be mean flange thickness
regardless of the web thickness.
c) The minimum thickness of structural components (except gratings & chequered plates)
which are directly exposed to weather and inaccessible for repainting shall be 8 mm.
d)
The minimum thickness of tubes shall be as specified in IS:806.
e) Structural members exposed to marked corrosive action shall be increased in thickness

or otherwise suitably protected against corrosion.
4.3.6 ELECTRICAL SWITCHYARD STRUCTURE & TRANSMISSION TOWER

S.No.
1.0
Project Philosophy
All electrical switchyard structure and transmission tower shall be of structural steel
with bolted connections and designed as per of IS:802.
2.0
Structural steel members including bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dip
galvanized in accordance with relevant IS Codes. The Zinc coating on tower
members shall not be less than 900 g/sqm of the surface area.
Page 614 of 1744

(Structural)
Document No.
A702-999-16-48-EDB-1001
Rev No. 0
Page 23 of 23
4.3.7 PROTECTIVE COATING

Protective Coating (including surface preparation, shop primer, field primer & finish coat) to
Structural Steel , Ladders, Spiral Stairways & Hand Rails shall be as per the "Job
Specifications for Surface Preparation and Protective Coating(New Construction)" No.
A702-000-06-42-PLS-01. Painting shall not be provided on grating after galvanization
(galvanizing shall be minimum 900 g/sqm of surface area as per EIL std. no. 7-68-0697).
4.4 MASONRY WORKS

4.4.1 GENERAL
S.No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
Project Philosophy
All masonry works shall be designed in accordance with IS:1077, IS:1905, IS:1597,
IS:2185, IS:4326, IS:12894 and other relevant IS Codes as applicable.
Brick masonry shall be of Class 5.0 as per IS:1077
All external brick masonry walls shall be of minimum 230 mm thickness respectively
except for fire walls.
4.4.2 CEMENT MORTAR

All masonry work shall be constructed in 1:6 cement sand mortar for brick masonry of one
brick thickness or more while half brick partition walls shall be constructed in 1:4 cement
sand mortar with two numbers of 6 mm diameter MS bars provided at every fourth course
properly anchored with cross walls or pillars.
4.4.3 FIRE WALLS

Thickness of all masonry firewalls shall 345 mm or as per OISD-STD-173, whichever is
more.
4.5 SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS

4.5.1 PIPE RACK
Pipe rack shall be designed as per EIL Design Guide 8-76-0020 "Guidelines for pipe rack
design".
4.5.2 RCC & STEEL CHIMNEYS

RCC and Steel chimneys shall be designed as per the requirements of EIL Standard
Specification No. 6-68-0053, IS:4998 and IS:6533.
4.5.3 MACHINE FOUNDATIONS

Machine foundations shall satisfy the requirements of IS:2974 and any other parameter as
specified by the machine manufacturer.
4.5.4 BARRICADING
Foundation and super structure shall be designed as per POSD/ General Civil requirements
of location & height, keeping in view the mean probable design life of structure.
SITE SPECIFIC SEISMIC SPECTRA,

DEBOTTLENECKING PROJECT FOR
BINA REFINERY, BORL
Document No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-0001
Rev. No.0
Page 1 of 3
PROJECT
: Debottlenecking of Bina Refinery
OWNER
: BORL
CONSULTANT
: Engineers India Ltd.
JOB NO.
: A702
27/03/2015
ISSUED FOR IMPLEMENTATION
Rev. No
Date
Purpose
Page 615 of 1744
MBA
Prepared
by
GGSA
SVRS
Reviewed by
Approved by
Page 616 of 1744

BINA REFINERY, BORL
1.0
Document No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-0001
Rev. No.0
Page 2 of 3

Spectral Acceleration Coefficients (Sa/g) for Design Basis Earthquake (DBE)
(Numerical values tabulated below)
Table 1: Spectral Acceleration Coefficients (Sa/g) for Design Basis Earthquake (DBE)
Time
Period
(Sec)
0.00
0.05
0.10
0.13
0.20
0.27
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.80
1.00
1.20
1.40
1.60
1.80
2.00
2.40
2.80
3.00
3.20
3.40
3.60
3.80
4.00
4.20
4.40
4.60
4.80
5.00
Percentage of critical damping

0.5
0.052
0.218
0.346
0.353
0.356
0.353
0.349
0.311
0.270
0.228
0.165
0.126
0.101
0.082
0.071
0.060
0.055
0.045
0.038
0.035
0.033
0.031
0.029
0.028
0.026
0.025
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
1.0
0.052
0.190
0.284
0.291
0.295
0.293
0.289
0.261
0.230
0.198
0.147
0.113
0.092
0.076
0.066
0.056
0.052
0.042
0.037
0.034
0.032
0.030
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
2.0
3.0
0.052
0.135
0.159
0.169
0.172
0.172
0.171
0.162
0.150
0.138
0.109
0.089
0.074
0.064
0.055
0.049
0.045
0.037
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.026
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.019
0.052
0.127
0.146
0.153
0.156
0.155
0.155
0.146
0.133
0.122
0.098
0.081
0.068
0.059
0.051
0.045
0.042
0.035
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.026
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.017
4.0
5.0
7.0
0.052
0.118
0.133
0.138
0.139
0.139
0.139
0.130
0.116
0.105
0.087
0.074
0.062
0.054
0.047
0.041
0.038
0.032
0.028
0.027
0.025
0.024
0.023
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.052
0.110
0.120
0.123
0.123
0.123
0.123
0.113
0.099
0.089
0.077
0.066
0.056
0.049
0.043
0.037
0.034
0.030
0.026
0.025
0.023
0.022
0.021
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.016
0.015
0.052
0.100
0.110
0.112
0.113
0.113
0.113
0.105
0.092
0.083
0.071
0.060
0.051
0.044
0.038
0.033
0.030
0.027
0.024
0.023
0.022
0.020
0.019
0.018
0.017
0.016
0.016
0.015
0.014
0.014
The spectral acceleration values for periods greater than 5.0 seconds shall be considered same as that for 5.0 seconds.

BINA REFINERY, BORL
Document No.
A702-000-16-54-DB-0001
Rev. No.0
Page 3 of 3
NOTES:
1. The spectral acceleration coefficients in Table 1 are in accordance with Section 8.3.1 of
IS 1893(Part 4):2005.
2. The spectral acceleration coefficients for Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) shall
be considered as twice of the Design based earthquake (DBE).
3. For methodology of calculation of seismic forces and other seismic design criteria, refer
latest revisions of the following codes:
IS 1893 (Part 1)
IS 1893 (Part 4)
:
:
General provisions and buildings

Industrial structures including stack-like structures
4. All parameters shall be in accordance with the above mentioned codes. However, in
Table 2, the response reduction factors of some of the structures/equipment specific to
the project are included for guidance. In case of ambiguity between the values
mentioned here and those mentioned in the code, lower value shall be considered in
the analysis/design.
5. When cylindrical storage tanks are designed as per API 650 using site-specific design
methods, the percentage of critical damping and response reduction shall be taken in
accordance with the API 650.
6. An appropriate effect of fluid structure interaction (sloshing) shall be considered while
designing the Horton sphere. The percentage of critical damping for Horton sphere shall
be taken as per Table 4 of IS 1893 (Part 4): 2005.
Table 2: Response reduction factors of some of the structures/equipments
Structure/Equipment
Piperack: Designed as RC Special Moment Resisting Frame

(SMRF).
5.0
Piperack: Designed as RC Special Moment Resisting Frame

(SMRF) upto 10 m and steel frame beyond 10 m.
4.0
Technological structure: In the direction of concentric

braces.
4.0
Technological structure: In the direction of Steel moment

resisting frame designed as per SP 6(6)
5.0
Staircase structure: Steel frame with concentric braces in

both directions
4.0
Steel Reactor, Column and Vessels
2.0
Silos
2.0
Page 617 of 1744
Response
Reduction
Factor (R)
S.
No.
Page 618 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 1 of 12
ANNEXURE I (TO PMS)
JOB
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
Client
: BORL
Project : LCEP, BINA REFINERY

Location : BINA, MADHYA PRADESH
Job No. : A702
A
Rev.
No
06.04.2015
ISSUED FOR REFERENCE/PACKAGE
NK
SD
MI
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved by
Date
Page 619 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
AARH
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
AWWA
BIS
BSI
BW
CA
DIN
FRP
GOST
HDPE
IBR
JIS
LTCS
MSS
NACE
NDT
PMS
PP
PTFE
PVC
PVDF
RTJ
SW
: Arithmetic Average Roughness Height

: American National Standards Institute
: American Petroleum Institute
: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
: American Society for Testing and Materials
: American Water Works Association
: Bureau of Indian Standards
: British Standards Institute
: Butt Weld
: Corrosion Allowance
: Deutsches Institut fr Normung
: Fiber Reinforced Plastic
: Russian Standard (Gosudarstvennyy Stan dart)
: High Density Poly Ethylene
: Indian Boiler Regulations
: Japanese Industrial Standards
: Low Temperature Carbon Steel
: Manufacturers Standardization Society
: National Association of Corrosion Engineers
: Non Destructive Testing
: Piping Material Specification
: Poly Propylene
: Poly Tetra Flouro Ethylene
: Poly Vinyl Chloride
: Poly Vinylidene Flouride
: Ring Type Joint
: Socket Weld
Page 620 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
Description
Page No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERRED CODES & STANDARDS
3.0
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
4.0
CLASS DESIGNATION CODE
5.0
PIPES
6.0
FLANGES
7.0
FITTINGS
8.0
BENDS, MITRES & REDUCERS FABRICATED FROM PIPE
9.0
GASKETS
10.0
BOLTING
11.0
THREADS
12.0
VALVES
13.0
NDT SPECIFICATIONS
14.0
WELDING SPECIFICATIONS
15.0
CAUSTIC SODA SERVICE GRAPH
12
TABLE FOR MIDDLE NUMBER
TABLE FOR PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE RATING FOR BALL, PLUG

AND BUTTERFLY VALVES
11
Page 621 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 4 of 12
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification (PMS) covers the various piping classes for Process and utility Piping.
1.2
Deviations from this specification may be necessary to conform to specific job requirements.
2.0
REFERRED CODES & STANDARDS
2.1
All Piping shall be designed in accordance with the Process Piping Code, ASME B31.3. A
particular edition (indicated in Design Basis), once selected shall be followed throughout the
job.
2.2
Editions and addenda (if any) of referred Codes and Standards shall be as per the Job
Engineering Design Basis (Piping).
2.3
For the sake of brevity, the initials of the society to which the codes are referred to may be
omitted in the specification. For example; B16.5 is a code referring to ASME; A106 is a
standard referring to ASTM.
2.4
For JOB PMS, ASME B31.3 & ASME B16.5 have been followed.
3.0
MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1
Individual piping Class has been generally designed to cover a set of services operating within
pressure-temperature combination as per ASME B16.5 / B16.34 or part of it.
3.2
The PMS shall be strictly adhered to in the design, requisitioning, purchasing, fabrication and
testing of the piping system. However, deviations of material may occur due to design
conditions and/or availability. All substitutions must be duly approved.
3.3
Unless mentioned otherwise, pipe thicknesses in the specs are for above ground piping.
4.0
CLASS DESIGNATION CODE

The class designation shall consist of not more than three components made up of a letter,
number & letter; e.g.B1A.
4.1
The first letter indicates pressure rating.

A
B
C
150 Class
300 Class
400 Class
D
E
F
600 Class
900 Class
1500 Class
G
J
K
2500 Class
125/150 Class
UNCLASSIFIED
4.2
The middle number indicates difference in the specifications within the same rating and
material as enlisted in the Table attached.
4.3
The third letter indicates type of material.

A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Carbon
Carbon Moly.
1.0 % Cr., 0.5 % Moly.
1.25 % Cr., 0.5 % Moly.
2.25 % Cr., 1.0 % Moly.
5.0 % Cr., 0.5 % Moly.
9.0 % Cr., 1.0 % Moly.
3.5 % Ni.
Nickel / Titanum
Stainless steel type 304, 304H, 304L.
Aluminium
Stabilised stainless steel type 316, 316H, 321, 347.
316L
Page 622 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
Y
Z
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 5 of 12
Monel / Alloy 20
Hastalloy / Inconel / Incoloy
Lead
PVC & FRP, PP / FRP, PVDF / FRP
Cast Iron / Silicon Iron
Duplex Stainless Steel
Cupro-Nickel
Lined steel (Rubber Lined, Teflon Lined, Cement lined etc).
HDPE / PDVF / Teflon / PVC
5.0
PIPES
5.1
Pipe dimension shall be in accordance with ASME B36.10, IS:1239 & IS:3589 for wrought
steel and wrought iron pipe; to B36.10 / B36.19 for stainless steel pipe and respective ASTM
Standard for non-ferrous and non- metallic pipes.
5.2
Pipe made by acid-bessemer process shall not be acceptable, steel pipe shall be made by
open hearth, electric furnace or basic Oxygen process.
5.3
All pipe threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1 except where otherwise noted.
5.4
Pipe thicknesses not covered in different classes of this specification shall be calculated to
meet specific job requirement based on actual max. design condition to economise on
thickness. However, in such cases the thickness shall be calculated at not less than 80% of
class rating unless defined otherwise in the Job Engineering Design Basis (Piping).
5.5
Maximum of 10% of Corrosion Allowance may be adjusted to optimize on pipe schedule.

However, if CA is suffixed by 'minimum', this downward adjustment shall not be used.
5.6
Non-standard pipe sizes 1", 2", 3", 5" and 22" shall not be treated as a part of this
specification unless these sizes are separately called out.
6.0
FLANGES
6.1
Flanges shall be in accordance with the following codes, except where otherwise noted:
Upto 24" (150# -1500#)
Upto 12" , 2500#
Above 24"
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.47 SERIES 'B' / AWWA / EIL' STD.
Flanges to ASME B16.47 SERIES 'A' or any other standard (e.g. DIN, GOST, JIS etc.) may be
specified to mate with equipment or valve flanges with the corresponding bolting.
6.2
Finish of steel flange faces shall be as follows:

Stock Finish
Serrated Finish / 125 AARH /
Smooth finish
63 AARH
:
:
1000 in AARH max.

Serrations with 125-250in AARH
32 TO 63 in AARH
6.3
Brinnel hardness for RTJ groove shall be at least 20 BHN more than that of corresponding
gasket as specified.
6.4
Fig.8 Fl and SPCR & BLN shall be as per B16.48 up to 24" (150-1500#) & upto 12" for 2500#.
For other sizes, refer EIL Std 7-44-0162.
Page 623 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 6 of 12
7.0
FITTINGS
7.1
Forged steel SW and threaded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11, unless
otherwise specified. For items not covered under B16.11, reference may be made to BS 3799
or appropriate MSS-SP-Std.
7.2
BW Fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, unless otherwise specified.
7.3
Dimensions of steel BW fittings for sizes not covered in ASME B16.9 shall conform to MSSSP-48.
7.4
Usage of unions shall be restricted to utilities only.
8.0
BENDS, MITRES AND REDUCERS FABRICATED FROM PIPE
8.1
Miters and Reducers fabricated from Pipe may be used if specified in particular Piping Class.
Miters require higher thickness than corresponding Pipe / Elbow to hold the same pressure
(Refer ASME B31.3).
9.0
GASKETS
9.1
Non-metallic gaskets shall conform to B16.21 (corresponding to B16.5) upto 24", and B16.21
(corresponding to B16.47B) beyond 24", unless otherwise specified.
9.2
Spiral wound gaskets (SP.WND or SPWD) and Ring Joint gaskets shall conform to B16.20.
10.0
BOLTING
10.1
All bolts shall conform to B18.2.1, nuts to be B18.2.2. Reference shall also be made to B16.5
for studs.
10.2
Threads shall be to coarse Thread Series, B1.1, having Class 2A allowances for bolts and
studs, and Class 2B tolerance for nuts.
10.3
Nuts for Bolts and Studs shall be the American Standard Hexagon Heavy Series.
11.0
THREADS
11.1
Threads for threaded Pipes, Fittings, Flanges and Valves shall be in accordance with B1.20.1
taper threads, unless otherwise specified.
11.2
Upto 204 deg.C, threaded joints shall be made with 1" width PTFE joining tape.
11.3
Above 204 deg.C, threaded joints shall be seal welded with a full strength fillet weld.
11.4
All threaded joints irrespective of pressure and temperature on lines carrying toxic fluid shall
be seal welded with a full strength fillet weld.
12.0
VALVES
12.1
Face to Face / End to End dimension of valves shall conform to B16.10 to the extent covered.
For valves not covered in B16.10, reference shall be made to BS EN 558-1 for PN Designated
Flanged valves, BS EN 558-2 for Class designated Flanged valves and BS EN 12627 for Butt
Welding end valves and / or the manufacturer's drawings.
12.2
Flange / weld ends of the valve shall be as per the corresponding Flange / Fitting ends of the
piping class, unless otherwise specified.
12.3
Pressure-temperature rating for flanged and butt welding end valves shall be as per ASME
B16.34 except for ball, plug & butterfly valves. For these valves refer TABLE FOR
Page 624 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 7 of 12
PRESSURE-TEMP RATING FOR BALL, PLUG AND BUTTERFLY VALVES. Wall thickness
of valve body at different locations should not be less than as calculated as per B16.34.
12.4
Unless called-out specifically, valves shall be as per the following Standards:
Valve
Size
Rating
Des. Std.
Testing Std.
Gate
1/2"- 1-1/2"
800 / 1500
API 602/ ISO 15761
API-598
Globe / Check
-do-
800 / 1500
BS EN ISO 15761
BS EN 12266-1
Gate
2"-24"
150 / 300 / 600
API 600/ ISO 10434
API-598
Gate
26"-42"
150 / 300
B-16.34
API 598/ BS EN
12266-1
Globe
2"-16"
150
BS-1873
Globe
2"-12"
300/600
BS-1873
BS 6755 Pt-I/BS EN
12266-1
-do-
Check
2"-24"
-do-
BS-1868
-do-
Gate/
Globe/Check
2"-8"
900 / 1500 / 2500
B-16.34
(Refer 12.6 also)
API 598 / BS EN
12266-1
Ball
1/2"-16"
150 / 300 / 600
BS EN ISO 17292 /
API 6D
BS EN 12266-1 / API598
Ball
1/2"-8"
900/ 1500 / 2500
API 6D
API-598
Plug
1/2"-12"
All
API-599 /BS 5353
API-598 / (BS 6755

Pt.I/ BS EN 12266-1)
Btrfly
3" & above
All
API-609 / BS EN
593 / AWWA C504
API-598 / BS EN
12266-1/ AWWA
Diaphram
ALL
BS-5156
BS-6755 Pt-I/ BS EN
12266-1
Bronze
RELEVANT IS STD.
RELEVANT IS STD.
Cast Iron
RELEVANT IS STD.
RELEVANT IS STD.
12.5
If not covered in 12.3, the valve shall be as per B16.34 / relevant MSS-SP Standard.
12.6
For details of the valves specifications, refer Job specifications A702-6-44-0006. Features not
covered by A702-6-44-0006 and the relevant code shall be to the manufacturer's standard.
12.7
Unless otherwise specifically called for, up to 600# rating, 2" and larger size steel Gate, Globe
& Check valves in Hydrocarbon and utility service shall have bolted bonnets. Pressure-seal
bonnets or covers shall be used for Classes 900# and above to minimize bonnet leakage.
However, valves with Pr-seal Bonnet shall have wall thickness & stem diameter as per API600, (if required). Welded bonnets or screwed & seal welded bonnets are acceptable for sizes
lower than 2" for Classes 900# & above.
13.0
For Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) specification, refers Job specification A702-6-44-0016.
14.0
For Welding specifications, refer EIL specs. Welding Specification for fabrication of piping (677-0001) & Welding charts for piping classes (6-77-0005).
15.0
For Caustic Soda service graph' refer sheet 12 of 12.
Page 625 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 8 of 12

Middle
Number
Carbon Steel
A
CA=1.5
CA=1.5
(IBR)
CA=1.5
(CAT'D)
CA=1.5
(LTCS)
CA=1.5
(Hydrogen)
CA=4.5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
AlloySteel
B, C, D, E, F, G, H
CA=1.5
CA=1.5 (IBR)
CA=6.0
CA=3.0
CA=1.5
(Hydrogen)>230OC
CA=4.5
CA=1.5
(Vacuum)
CA=1.5
(Conc.Sulphuric Acid)
CA=3.0
CA=1.5
(Offsites)
CA=3.0
(Hardness controlled)
12
13
SS304 / SS304H /
SS304L
K
CA=NIL
(SS304)
CA=NIL
(SS304-CRYO)
CA=NIL
(CAT 'D' SS304)
CA=1.5
(SS304H)
CA=3.0
(SS304H)
CA=1.5
(SS304L)
CA=NIL
(SS304L-Vacuum)
CA=1.5
(SS304L-CRYO)
CA=1.5
(SS304)
SS 316 / 316H / 321 /

321H / 347
M
CA=NIL
(SS316)
CA=NIL
(SS321-CRYO)
CA=1.5
(SS321)
CA=NIL
(SS321)
CA=NIL
(SS316H) H2
CA=NIL
(SS316H)
CA=NIL
(SS347)
CA=1.5
(SS347)
CA=1.5
(SS316)
CA=NIL
(SS304L)
CA=NIL
(SS304-IBR)
CA=6.0
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
32
33
CA=3.0
(Liquid Sulphur)
CA=4.5
CA=4.5 (NACE)
(NACE)
CA=3.0
(dry Chlorine)
CA=1.5
(Oxygen)
CA=3.0
(Caustic / Amine,
Stress relieved)
CA=1.5
(Jacket for A15A)
CA=1.5
(Tracing)
CA=1.5
(Fire Water)
CA=1.5
(SS304 H2 & CO2)
CA=1.5
(SS304L - NACE)
CA=1.5
(SS321H - H2)
CA=1.5
(SS321 - NACE)
CA=NIL
(SS304L-Oxygen)
CA=NIL
(Tracing)
NOTE: USE MIDDLE NUMBERS 21 TO 30, 40 TO 79 & 91 TO 99 FOR PROJECT DEPENDENT

CLASSES.
Page 626 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 9 of 12

Middle
Number
SS316L
NICKEL /TITANUM
J
ALLUMINIUM
N
1
CA=NIL
CA=NIL (NICKEL)
P
CA=NIL (MONEL)
CA=1.5 (CRYO)
CA=1.5 (NICKEL)
CA=1.5 (MONEL)
CA=NIL (TITANUM)
CA=NIL(ALLOY 20)
CA=1.5 (TITANUM)
CA=1.5 (ALLOY 20)
CA=1.5 H2
CA=NIL (Vacuum)
MONEL / ALLOY 20
7
8
9
10
11
CA=NIL
12
13
14
15
16
CA=1.5(NACE)
17
18
CA=NIL
OXYGEN
(MONEL)
19
20
32
33
CLASSES.
Page 627 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 10 of 12

Middle
Number
1
Hastelloy /
Inconel /
Incoloy
Q
CA=NIL
(INCONEL 600)
2
3
CA = NIL
(INCOLOY 800)
CA = 1.5
(INCOLOY 800)
PVC / FRP
LINED STEEL
CA=NIL
(PVC)
CA=1.5 (PVC
/ FRP)
CA=NIL
(FRP)
CA = NIL
(TEF LINED)
CA = NIL
(RUBBER
LINED
SOFT)
CA = NIL (RUBBER
LINED SEMI HARD)
30% HCL
CA = 3.0 (<= 2) & NIL
(>=
3)
(CEMENT
LINED) CAT D SEA
WATER
HDPE / PVDF / TEFLON

Z
CA=NIL
(HDPE) H2SO4
CA = NIL (HDPE) 30%

HCL
CA = NIL (HDPE) 50%
HF
CA = 1.5
(INCOLOY
800H)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
32
33
CA = 3.0 (<= 2) & NIL

(>=
3)
(CEMENT
LINED) FIRE WATER
(SEA)

CLASSES.
Page 628 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 11 of 12
TABLE FOR PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATING FOR BALL, PLUG & BUTTERFLY VALVES
PRESSURE IN kg / cm2
ITEM
PRESSURE
RATING
(PIPING
CLASS)
SIZE
RANGE
(NB
INCHES)
PLUG
(Soft
Seated)
100
120
19.99 19.58
19.2
17.93
17.2
16.12 15.22
7.03
52.00 51.02
49.8
41.85
37.3
27.4
19.15
7.03
600# (AS PER

PMS)
104.1 98.46
91.4
64.61
49.3
38.6
29.68
17.6
150# (AS PER

PMS)
19.33
18.63
17.6
16.89 15.82 14.93 14.06
52.02 50.35 48.26
43.4
40.0
300# (AS PER

PMS)
300# (AS PER

PMS)
Upto 16
PLUG
300# (AS PER
(Lubricate
PMS)
d)
600# (AS PER
PMS)
150#
19.3
150
175
200
>200
37.4
35.23
28.1
DO
NOT
19.99 19.58 19.12 18.05 17.28 16.12 15.15 14.28
USE
Upto 12
150# (A3A,
A5Y)
150# (A33A,
A33Y)
50
Upto 8
150# (AS PER

PMS)
Butterfly
(Soft
Seat)
-29
TO
38
65
150# (AS PER

PMS)
BALL
(Soft
Seated)
TEMPERATURE IN OC
52.0
51.1
49.96
47.3
46.82
46.1
45.5
44.6
104.1 102.2 99.95
94.7
93.74
92.3
91.1
89.4
10.55 10.55 10.55

Upto 48
DONT USE
16
16
19.99 19.58
16
19.2
17.93 17.20 16.12 15.22
7.03
NOTE: IF THE CLASS PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE IS LOWER THAN THIS TABLE, CLASS
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE TO BE FOLLOWED.
Page 629 of 1744
JOB PIPING MATERIAL

SPECIFICATION
GENERAL NOTES
14.6
26.4
A702-6-44-0005-A1 Rev.A
Page 12 of 12
36
44
CAUSTIC SODA SERVICE GRAPH

DEGREE BAUME aBE
14.6
26.4
36
44
50.2
280
260
AREA C
APPLICATION OF NICKEL ALLOYS TO BE CONSIDERED IN THIS
AREA
240
NICKEL ALLOY TRIM

FOR VALVES IN
AREAS B AND C
220
AREA B
200
CARBON STEEL
STESS RELIEVE WELDS & BENDS
TEMPERATURE F
180
160
140
120
AREA A
100
CARBON STEEL
80
NO STESS RELIEF NECESSARY
60
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
40
CONCENTRATED NaOH, % BY WEIGHT
50
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 1 of 40
A
Rev. No
28/01/2016
Spec Name :
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Spec Desc. :
Client
BORL
Project
Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project BORL

Ref
Location
BINA, M.P., INDIA
Job No.
A702
Dept/Sec.
16/43
ISSUED WITH VPSA OXYGEN PLANT TENDER
Date

Page 630 of 1744
Purpose
SKS
NK
Prepared by
Checked by
PNR
Approved by
Copyright EIL- All rights reserved
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 2 of 40
Abbreviations:
Template No. 5-0000-0001-T2 Rev.

Page 631 of 1744
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 3 of 40
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
1
Description
Piping Material Specifications (A702-6-44-0005-4070) Rev.A

Page 632 of 1744
Pages
40
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 4 of 40
Dept./Sect. :
Project : Revamp and Capacity Enhancement Project BORL Ref

Location : BINA, M.P., INDIA
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

Piping
Class
Rating
A1K
150
A22A
150
1.5
A3A
150
A6K
Sl. No
C.A
Spl.
Reqt.
Basic
Material
Remarks
Service
SS 304
PURE NON CORROSIVE OR MILD CORROSIVE

HYDROCARBONS
FLAMMABLE/NON FLAMMABLE & NON
LETHAL HYDROCARBONS, LUBE OIL (AFTER
FILTERS), CHEMICALS ETC.
CARBON STEEL
HYDROCARBON,STEAM (IBR), BOILER FEED

WATER (IBR) & CONDENSATE (IBR)
SRU+OFFSITES+C
DU/VDU+DCU+HC
U
1.5
CARBON STEEL
NON CORROSIVE UTILITIES (ABOVE

GROUND) CATEGORY "D" FLUID - COOLING
WATER, INSTRUMENT AIR(2" & ABOVE),
PLANT AIR, INERT GAS, CARBON DI OXIDE
(DRY), NITROGEN, CONDENSATE & BOILER
FEED SUCTION (NON IBR). THIS CLASS DOES
NOT COVER UNDERGROUND PIPING AND
THE FIRE WATER SERVICE. FOR SIZES
ABOVE 30", TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
RATINGS SHALL BE 70 DEG.C & 7.0 KG/CM2G
RESPECTIVELY.
UOP-MS-1,
DCU,CDU/VDU
150
1.5
SS 304L
CORROSIVE PROCESS SERVICE FLAMMABLE/NON FLAMMABLE, TOXIC/NON

TOXIC BUT NON LETHAL - FLARE GAS, ACID
GAS WITH CONDENSATE, REFLUX,
CORROSIVE WATER, RICH AMINE, ETC.
A91A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
CATEGORY 'D' FLUID-A/G & U/G COOLING

WATER, U/G BEARING COOLING WATER
RETURN.
UNITS & OFFSITES
J3A
150
CS (Galv.)
INSTRUMENT AIR (UP TO 1.5")
UOP-MS-2
IBR
SERVICE
Notes :
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 633 of 1744
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 5 of 40
: BORL
Client
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A1K
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
CORROSION ALLOWANCE :
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT :
Sheet 1 of 5
A1K
150
SS 304
0
MM
TEMPERATURE (Deg. C) AND PRESSURE ( Kg/Sq. cm g ) RATINGS

TEMP
-29
38
93
149
204
260
316
343
371
PRESS
19.33
19.33
16.17
14.41
13.35
11.95
9.84
8.78
7.73
SERVICE
PURE NON CORROSIVE OR MILD CORROSIVE HYDROCARBONS
FLAMMABLE/NON FLAMMABLE & NON LETHAL HYDROCARBONS, LUBE OIL (AFTER FILTERS), CHEMICALS ETC.
NOTES
5
7
FOR PERMANENT 'T' TYPE BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY
STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0300; FOR SPACER AND BLIND REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0162.
FOR RESTRICTION ON USE OF BALL,PLUG & BUTTERFLY VALVES,REFER GENERAL NOTES.
101 NDT REQUIREMENTS AS PER JOB STANDARD A702-6-44-0016.
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
FLANGED, TO BE KEPT MINIMUM
1.5" & BELOW
SW COUPLING
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
REFER EILSTD 7-44-0350, DF3
ON LINES >= 2.0"
AS PER P&ID OR 0.75". REFER EIL STD. 7-44-0351, D4
ON LINES <= 1.5"
REFER EIL STD. 7-44-0350, VF3
ON LINES >= 2.0"
AS PER P&ID OR 0.75". REFER EIL STD 7-44-0351, V4
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-0353
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW NIPPLE WITH VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-44-0354
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 634 of 1744
A1K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 6 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
P P P R R R R R
P P P P R R R R
T
T T
P
H
P
H
P P P P P R R R
H H H H H H H H
R
H
T H
T H
T H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H
H
H
18.000
16.000
14.000
12.000
10.000
8.000
6.000
5.000
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
24.000
T
R
R
R
R
22.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
20.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T P R
T P P R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : A1K
BRANCH PIPE (SIZE IN INCHES)
BRANCH PIPE ( SIZE IN INCHES)
RUN PIPE (SIZE IN INCHES)

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 635 of 1744
THREADOLET
A1K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 7 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A1K
Sheet 3 of 5
Note :(The shaded portion of PMS body shows Field Fabricated Items)
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
.75
80S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312 TP304
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33577Z0
PIP
PIPE
1.5
40S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312 TP304
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33577Z0
PIP
PIPE
40S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312 TP304
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33517Z0
PIP
PIPE
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312 TP304
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33517Z0
PIP
PIPE
10
24
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358 TP304

CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI35513Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
.75
B-36.19
ASTM A 312 TP304
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33567Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
1.5
B-36.19
ASTM A 312 TP304
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33567Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, RF/125AARH
FWC4127Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.WN
.5
1.5
FLG
FLNG.LJ
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150,
STK/MAX1000AARH
FLC012EZ0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, RF/125AARH
FBC4127Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, FF/125AARH
FGK4121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
150, FF/125AARH
FCK4121Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WA642D2Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW, 1.5D
WAG874Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW, 1.5D
WAG894Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WB642D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW, 1.5D
WBG874Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW, 1.5D
WBG894Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WE642D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WEG874ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WEG894ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WR642D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 636 of 1744
A1K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 8 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A1K
Sheet 4 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
TRED
T.RED
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WRG874ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WRG894ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WUG874ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WUG894ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WVG874ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW
WVG894ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
PBE
WNH426ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
PBE
WPH426ZZ0
CAP
CAP
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW
WFG874ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WJ642D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WK642D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WL642D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304
SW, 3000
WM642D2Z0
STB
STUB.END
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-S
BW, 125AARH
WSG8741Z0
STB
STUB.END
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304-WX
BW, 125AARH
WSG8941Z0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.5
1.5
API 602/ ISO BODY-ASTM A 182 SW, 800, 3000, B15761

GR.F304,TRIM16.11, SHT NO.- 51045
STELLITED,STEMSS 304
51045ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
API 600/ ISO BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, 150, B-16.5,

GR.CF8,TRIM-SS
10434
RF/125AARH, SHT
304
NO.- 51345
51345ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A 182 SW, 800, 3000, BGR.F304,TRIM16.11, SHT NO.- 52045

STELLITED,STEMSS304
52045ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873
BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, 150, B-16.5,

GR.CF8,TRIM-SS
RF/125AARH, SHT
304
NO.- 52345
52345ZZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 637 of 1744
A1K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 9 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A1K
Sheet 5 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A 182 SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53045

GR.F304,TRIMSTELLITED
53045ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
GR.CF8,TRIM-SS
NO.- 53345
304
53345ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
16
BS EN ISO
17292

RF/125AARH, SHT
GR.CF8 / ASTM A
182 GR.F304,TRIM- NO.- 54345
SEAT-RPTFE
54345ZZZ0
PLV
VLV.PLUG
.5
24
BS-5353

GR.F304 / ASTM A RF/125AARH, SHT
351 GR.CF8,TRIM- NO.- 55345
PLUG-SS304/SS316
55345ZZZ0
.5
24
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
.5
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
GK65072Z0
SPIRAL, 150
Trap/Strainer Group
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A240TP304;INT:S CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
S304
ST14131Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A182GR.F304;IN
T:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP307D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
EIL'STD
B:A403GR.WP304S;INT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP15344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
10
24
EIL'STD
B:A403GR.WP304WX;INT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP15444Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 638 of 1744
A1K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 10 of 40
: BORL
Client
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A22A
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Sheet 1 of 6
A22A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM
IBR SERVICE

TEMP
38
93
149
204
260
316
343
371
PRESS
20.03
20.03
18.28
16.17
14.06
11.95
9.84
8.79
7.73
SERVICE
HYDROCARBON,STEAM (IBR), BOILER FEED WATER (IBR) & CONDENSATE (IBR)
NOTES
7
ALL PIPES,FITTINGS,VALVES,FLANGES,TRAPS AND STRAINERS SHALL BE TESTED AND TEST CERTIFICATE IN FORM
III A FOR PIPE AND FORM III C FOR OTHERS SHALL BE REQD. DULY COUNTERSIGNED BY IBR AUTHORITY OR ITS
APPROVED REPRESENTATIVE.
9
CARBON CONTENT SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.25% FOR ALL PIPES,FITTINGS FLANGES ETC. THAT MAY REQUIRE
WELDING. MOREOVER,FOR FLANGES THE SULPHUR AND PHOSPHOROUS SHALL ALSO BE LIMITED TO 0.05% EACH.
73 GATE VALVES OF SIZE 26" AND ABOVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS-1414 AND FLANGE ENDS SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ASME B16.47 SERIES B.
76 FOR PERMANENT BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY STRAINERS,REFER
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
122 ASBESTOS FREE GASKETS AND STEM PACKING SHALL BE USED FOR ALL VALVES
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
SW COUPLING
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-0353.

(USE A702-7-44-0353 FOR MS BLOCK ONLY)
SW NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-44-0354
(USE A702-7-44-0354 FOR MS BLOCK ONLY)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 639 of 1744
A22A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 11 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
T
T P
T P P
T P P P
T
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 6
36.000
34.000
32.000
30.000
8.000
28.000
H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H
26.000
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
24.000
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
20.000
T H
T H
T H
18.000
R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H
16.000
P P P P P P P P
H H H H H H H H
14.000
P
H
12.000
P
H
10.000
T
T T
6.000
R R R R R R R
5.000
P P P P P P P P
4.000
3.500
3.000
R R R R R R R
2.500
P P P P P P P P
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : A22A

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 640 of 1744
THREADOLET
A22A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 12 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A22A
Sheet 3 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
.75
S160
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z1
PIP
PIPE
1.5
XS
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z1
PIP
PIPE
XS
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z1
PIP
PIPE
14
STD
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z1
PIP
PIPE
16
36
STD
B-36.10
ASTM A 672
GR.B60 CL.12
BE, E.FS.W
PI2A813Z1
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
.75
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z1
NIP
NIPPLE
1.5
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z1
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.WN
.5
20
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWC0127Z1
FLG
FLNG.WN
22
22
MSS-SP44
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWH0127Z1
FLG
FLNG.WN
24
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWC0127Z1
FLG
FLNG.WN
26
36
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWB0127Z1
FLG/30 FLNG.WN
0
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FWC0147Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
20
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
22
22
MSS-SP44
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBH0127Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
24
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z1
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26
36
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBB0127Z1
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z1
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z1
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26
36
EIL'STD
ASTM A 516 GR.70
150, FF/125AARH
FCE6321Z1
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WA602D3Z1
ELB90
ELBOW.90
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z1
ELB90
ELBOW.90
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z11
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 641 of 1744
A22A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 13 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A22A
Sheet 4 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z11
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
16
36
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WB602D3Z1
ELB45
ELBOW.45
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z1
ELB45
ELBOW.45
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z11
ELB45
ELBOW.45
16
36
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z11
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WE602D3Z1
TEQ
T.EQUAL
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z1
TEQ
T.EQUAL
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ1
TEQ
T.EQUAL
16
36
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ1
TRED
T.RED
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WR602D3Z1
TRED
T.RED
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z1
TRED
T.RED
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ1
TRED
T.RED
16
36
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ1
REDC
REDUC.CONC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ1
REDC
REDUC.CONC
16
36
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ1
REDE
REDUC.ECC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ1
REDE
REDUC.ECC
16
36
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ1
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ1
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ1
CAP
CAP
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 6000
WF60283Z1
CAP
CAP
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z1
CAP
CAP
36
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ1
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WJ602D3Z1
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 642 of 1744
A22A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 14 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A22A
Sheet 5 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z1
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WK602D3Z1
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z1
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WL602D3Z1
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z1
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WM602D3Z1
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z1
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51002
51002ZZZ1
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.5
1.5
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR STEEL
GAV
VLV.GATE
36
API-600

RF/125AARH, SHT
GR.WCB,TRIMNO.- 51302
13% CR STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED,STEM13%CR.STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR STEEL
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR STEEL
53302ZZZ1
CHV/1
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
216GR.WCB,TRIM- NO.- 53397
STELLITED,STEM13% CR.STEEL
53397ZZZ1
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
1.5
BS-5351

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
BODY SEAT-PEEK
54302ZZZ1
G3V
VLV.PISTON
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 643 of 1744
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 52002
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53002
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 64092
51302ZZZ1
73
52002ZZZ1
52302ZZZ1
53002ZZZ1
123
64092ZZZ1
A22A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 15 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A22A
Sheet 6 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
YCH
VLV.YSTCHK
24
ANSI-B16.34

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
65390ZZZ1
.5
36
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
.5
20
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK65072Z0
GAS
GASKET
22
22
B-16.20MSS-SP-44
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK85072Z0
GAS
GASKET
24
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK65072Z0
GAS
GASKET
26
48
B-16.20ANSI
B16.47B
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL+ I
RING
SPIRAL, 150
GK56272Z0
GAS/30 GASKET
0
.5
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 300
GK65074Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;T:13%CR;S: FLGD, THRMDNMC,

150,RF/125AARH
SS304
TR3065531
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A516GR.70;INT:S CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
S304
ST16831Z1
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP303D511
PSR
STRNR.PERM
24
MNF'STD
B:A216GR.WCB;IN
T:SS304
FLGD, Y-TYPE,
150,RF/125AARH
SP3805531
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 644 of 1744
A22A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 16 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A3A
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Sheet 1 of 8
A3A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM

TEMP
38
50
65
100
150
186
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
NON CORROSIVE UTILITIES (ABOVE GROUND) CATEGORY "D" FLUID - COOLING WATER, INSTRUMENT AIR(2" & ABOVE),
PLANT AIR, INERT GAS, CARBON DI OXIDE (DRY), NITROGEN, CONDENSATE & BOILER FEED SUCTION (NON IBR). THIS
CLASS DOES NOT COVER UNDERGROUND PIPING AND THE FIRE WATER SERVICE. FOR SIZES ABOVE 30",
TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RATINGS SHALL BE 70 DEG.C & 7.0 KG/CM2G RESPECTIVELY.
NOTES
6
FOR FABRICATED REDUCERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0485 & 7-44-0487. FOR MITRES, REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0033.
31
64
USE BUTTERFLY VALVES INSTEAD OF GATE VALVES FROM 10" ONWARDS IN WATER SERVICE AND UPTO 70 DEG C.
DESIGN PRESSURE FOR BUTTERFLY VALVES IS LIMITED UPTO 10 BAR.
AWWA C207 CL.D FLANGES SHALL BE OF HUB TYPE.
65
FORGINGS ARE ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF PLATE MATERIAL FOR BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS.
76
77
FOR PERMANENT BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 & 7-44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY STRAINERS,REFER
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
FOR SIZES > 24", SPACER & BLIND SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER AS PER ASME B31.3.
86
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR THE SPEC ARE PN10 RATED WITH A MAXIMUM PRESSURE OF 10.2 KG/CM2G.
97
USE 5-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZES FROM 16" TO 44", 6-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZES 48" TO 68" & 7-PIECE
MITRE FOR SIZES 72" TO 80". 45 DEG. MITRE SHALL REQUIRE ONE PIECE LESS.
FOR SIZES ABOVE 30", TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RATINGS SHALL BE 70 DEG.C & 7.0 KG/CM2G RESPECTIVELY.
98
99
BLIND FLANGES AND SPACER & BLINDS SPECIFIED TO MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR 70
DEG.C AND 7.0 KG/CM2G TO SUIT 150#, FF, 125AARH, AWWA C207 CL.D FLANGES.
110 IN SIZES ABOVE 48", WHERE WROUGHT ELBOWS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, SHOP FABRICATED MITRES AS PER B31.3
SHALL BE USED.
154 FOR PRESSURE CONNECTION USE GLOBE VALVE INSTEAD OF GATE VALVE IN ALL LINES OF MS BLOCK
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
155 FOR TEMP CONNECTION IN MS BLOCK, REFER DOC.NO. A702-7-44-0353.
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 645 of 1744
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 17 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A3A
Sheet 2 of 8
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
SW COUPLING 3000 LBS.
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
0.75" OR AS PER P&ID. REFER EIL STD. 7-44-351, D4
ON LINES <= 1.5"
REFER EIL STD. 7-44-350, VC1
ON LINES >= 2.0"
0.75" OR AS PER P&ID. REFER EIL STD 7-44-351, V1
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-353 (NOTE-155)
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW, SH HVY NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD
7-44-354 (NOTE-154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 646 of 1744
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 18 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Sheet 3 of 8
Pipe Class : A3A
T
T R
T P R
T P P R
T
P
P
P
P
T
P
P
P
P
P
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
66.000
64.000
62.000
60.000
58.000
56.000
54.000
52.000
50.000
48.000
46.000
44.000
42.000
40.000
38.000
36.000
34.000
32.000
30.000
8.000
28.000
H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
26.000
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
24.000
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
20.000
T H
T H
T H
18.000
P R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
16.000
P P P P P P P P
H H H H H H H H
14.000
P
H
12.000
P
H
10.000
T
T T
6.000
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
5.000
P P P P P P P P
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
P P P P P P P P
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
.500

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 647 of 1744
THREADOLET
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 19 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R R R
R R R
R R R
H H H
72.000
70.000
68.000
H H H
H H H
H H H
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 4 of 8
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Pipe Class : A3A
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 648 of 1744
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 20 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A3A
Sheet 5 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
1.5
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
12
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
14
18
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
20
24
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
26
48
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
50
60
14.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
64
72
16.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
76
80
18.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
1.5
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, C.WELDED
PN6D461Z0
FLNG.SW
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
FLG/30 FLNG.SW
0
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FSC0147Z0
FLG/30 FLNG.WN
0
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FWC0147Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLG
FLNG.SO
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
26
80
AWWA-C207 ASTM A 105

CL.D
150, FF/125AARH
FN40121Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26
48
AWWA-C207 ASTM A 285 GR.C

CL.D
150, FF/125AARH
FB45321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26
80
MNF'STD
ASTM A 285 GR.C
150, FF/125AARH
FCG5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ASTM A 105
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 649 of 1744
STD
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 21 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A3A
Sheet 6 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
14
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
ELB45
ELBOW.45
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
14
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
MIT90
MITRE.90
16
80
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WDKF141Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
16
80
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WGKF141Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
48
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
16
80
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WUKF14ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
14
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
16
80
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WVKF14ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 650 of 1744
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 22 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A3A
Sheet 7 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
.5
1.5
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51001
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.25
1.5
API 602/ ISO BODY-ASTM A

15761
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
API 600/ ISO BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, 150, B-16.5,

RF/125AARH, SHT
10434
13% CR.STEEL
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.25
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.25
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS 1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
53321ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
26
48
API-594
BODY-ASTM A 105
/A
216GR.WCB,TRIM13% CR.STEEL
FLGD, 150,
AWWAC207,
FF/125AARH, SHT
NO.- 53316
53316ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
16
BS EN ISO
17292

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
BODY SEATRPTFE
54321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
24
BS EN 593
BODY-ASTM A 216 WAFL, 150, B-16.5,

WAF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
56321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26
48
BS EN 593
BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, 150,

AWWAC207,
GR.WCB,TRIMFF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 56316
56316ZZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 651 of 1744
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 52001
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53001
51321ZZZ0
52001ZZZ0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 23 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A3A
Sheet 8 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
18
80
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
BOM
BOLT.M/C
.5
16
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
BM41418Z0
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
.5
24
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAX52Z0
GAS
GASKET
26
80
AWWA-C207 NONASBESTOS
CL.D
BS7531 GR X
FULLFACE, 150, 2 MM GK2AX22Z0
GAS/30 GASKET
0
.5
24
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
RING, 300, 2 MM
GKBAX54Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD

150,RF/125AARH
SS304
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
24
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 652 of 1744
TR3065530
A3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 24 of 40
: BORL
Client
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A6K
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Sheet 1 of 5
A6K
150
SS 304L
1.5
MM

TEMP
-29
38
93
149
204
260
316
343
371
PRESS
16.17
16.17
13.71
12.3
11.24
10.19
9.84
8.78
7.73
SERVICE
CORROSIVE PROCESS SERVICE - FLAMMABLE/NON FLAMMABLE, TOXIC/NON TOXIC BUT NON LETHAL - FLARE GAS,
ACID GAS WITH CONDENSATE, REFLUX, CORROSIVE WATER, RICH AMINE, ETC.
NOTES
5
32
CORROSION ALLOWANCE HAS BEEN ADJUSTED TO SELECT OPTIMUM SCHEDULE. REFER GENERAL NOTES TO PMS.

SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
SW COUPLING
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW NIPPLE WITH VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-44-0354
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 653 of 1744
A6K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 25 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
R R R R R R R R
R R R R R R R R
T
T T
P
H
P
H
R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H
R
H
T H
T H
T H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H
H
H
18.000
16.000
14.000
12.000
10.000
8.000
6.000
5.000
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
24.000
T
R
R
R
R
22.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
20.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : A6K

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 654 of 1744
THREADOLET
A6K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 26 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A6K
Sheet 3 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
.75
80S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33777Z0
PIP
PIPE
1.5
40S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PE, SEAMLESS
PI33777Z0
PIP
PIPE
40S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33717Z0
PIP
PIPE
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
BE, SEAMLESS
PI33717Z0
PIP
PIPE
10
14
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
PIP
PIPE
16
16
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
PIP
PIPE
18
18
6.35
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
PIP
PIPE
20
20
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
32
PIP
PIPE
24
24
10S
B-36.19
ASTM A 358
TP304L CL.1
BE, E.FS.W
PI36213Z0
32
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
.75
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33767Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
1.5
B-36.19
ASTM A 312
TP304L
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN33767Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, RF/125AARH
FWC4327Z0
32
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.WN
.5
1.5
FLG
FLNG.LJ
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150,
STK/MAX1000AARH
FLC012EZ0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, RF/125AARH
FBC4327Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, FF/125AARH
FGK4321Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
150, FF/125AARH
FCK4321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WA644D2Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW, 1.5D
WAG934Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW, 1.5D
WAG954Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WB644D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW, 1.5D
WBG934Z10
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 655 of 1744
A6K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 27 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A6K
Sheet 4 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW, 1.5D
WBG954Z10
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WE644D2Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
10
24
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
TEQ
T.EQUAL
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WEG934ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WEG954ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WR644D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WRG934ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WRG954ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WUG934ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WUG954ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WVG934ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
10
24
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW
WVG954ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
PBE
WNH446ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
PBE
WPH446ZZ0
CAP
CAP
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW
WFG934ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WJ644D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WK644D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WL644D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 182
GR.F304L
SW, 3000
WM644D2Z0
STB
STUB.END
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-S
BW, 125AARH
WSG9341Z0
STB
STUB.END
10
24
B-16.9
ASTM A 403
GR.WP304L-WX
BW, 125AARH
WSG9541Z0
.5
1.5
API-602
BODY-ASTM A 182 SW, 800, 3000, BGR.F304L,TRIM16.11, SHT NO.- 51050

STELLITED,STEMSS304L
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 656 of 1744
51050ZZZ0
A6K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 28 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A6K
Sheet 5 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
API-600

RF/125AARH, SHT
GR.CF3,TRIM-SS
NO.- 51350
304L
51350ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS-5352

GR.F304L,TRIMSTELLITED,STEMSS304L
52050ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873

RF/125AARH, SHT
GR.CF3,TRIM-SS
NO.- 52350
304L
52350ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS-5352

GR.F304L,TRIMSTELLITED
53050ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
GR.CF3,TRIM-SS
NO.- 53350
304L
53350ZZZ0
.5
24
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
.5
24
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316L+GRAFIL
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 657 of 1744
SPIRAL, 150
GK64972Z0
A6K
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 29 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Pipe Class : A91A
Sheet 1 of 8
A91A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM

TEMP
38
50
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
CATEGORY 'D' FLUID-A/G & U/G COOLING WATER, U/G BEARING COOLING WATER RETURN.
NOTES
6
10
64
USE 4-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR 8" & 10", 5-PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZES FROM 12" TO 54" AND 6-PIECE 90 DEG.
MITRE FOR SIZES 56" TO 80".(45 DEG. MITRE SHALL REQUIRE ONE PIECE LESS.)
65
76
77
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
86

102 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PARAMETERS AND BURIAL DEPTH
OF 1500 MM FOR SIZES UP TO 40" AND 1000MM FOR SIZES 42" & ABOVE.
105 FOR SIZES ABOVE 30", TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE RATINGS SHALL BE 65 DEG.C & 7.0 KG/CM2G RESPECTIVELY.
107 FOR SIZE ABOVE 24"SPACER AND BLIND AS PER EIL 'STD 7-44-0162
110 IN SIZES ABOVE 48", WHERE WROUGHT ELBOWS ARE NOT AVAILABLE, SHOP FABRICATED MITRES AS PER B31.3
SHALL BE USED.
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
201 TEMPERATURE RANGE FOR THIS CLASS HAS BEEN RESTRICTED AS PER NELSON CURVE IN API RP 941.
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 658 of 1744
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 30 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A91A
Sheet 2 of 8
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-353 (NOTE 155)
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
7-44-354 (NOTE 154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 659 of 1744
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 31 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Sheet 3 of 8
Pipe Class : A91A
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
50.000
52.000
54.000
56.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
66.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
64.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
62.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
60.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
58.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
48.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
46.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
44.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
42.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
40.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
38.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
36.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
34.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
20.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
18.000
T H
T H
T H
R R R
H H H
H H
H H H
H H H
H H H
16.000
P
H
8.000
P
H
6.000
T
T T
5.000
4.000
R R R R R R R R
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
R R R R R R R R
1.500
32.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
30.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
28.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
26.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
24.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
14.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
12.000
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
10.000
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
.500

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 660 of 1744
THREADOLET
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 32 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R R R
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
68.000
70.000
72.000
R R R
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 4 of 8
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Pipe Class : A91A

Page 661 of 1744
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 33 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A91A
Sheet 5 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
1.5
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
12
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
14
18
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
20
24
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
26
48
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
50
60
14.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
62
64
16.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
66
72
16.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
102
PIP
PIPE
74
82
18.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
102
NIP
NIPPLE
.5
1.5
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, C.WELDED
PN6D461Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SW
.5
1.5
FLG
FLNG.SO
24
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
26
90

CL.D
150, FF/125AARH
FN40121Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
24
B-16.5
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26
90

CL.D
150, FF/125AARH
FB45321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10
24
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26
90
JOB'STD
ASTM A 285 GR.C
150, FF/125AARH
FCF5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
ASTM A 105
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
ELB90
ELBOW.90
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 662 of 1744
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 34 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A91A
Sheet 6 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
ELB45
ELBOW.45
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
MIT90
MITRE.90
26
64
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WDKF141Z0
MIT90
MITRE.90
66
82
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW, 1.5D
WDKF241Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
26
64
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WGKF141Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
66
82
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW, 1.5D
WGKF241Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
50
82
MNF'STD
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEN754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
48
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
50
82
M, M
MNF'STD
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRN754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
64
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WUKF14ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
66
82
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW
WUKF24ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
64
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WVKF14ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
66
82
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.410
BW
WVKF24ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 663 of 1744
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 35 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A91A
Sheet 7 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
Note
No
Fitting Group
CAP
CAP
.5
1.5
CAP
CAP
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
48
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
50
90
CALC ASME-VIII
ASTM A 285 GR.C
BW
WF3J54ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
.5
1.5
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.25
1.5
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51001
51001ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
.25
1.5

15761
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51001
51001ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
24
API-600

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
51321ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
26
42
BS-1414

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 51920
51920ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
46
54
ANSI-B16.34

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 51921
51921ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
16
BS-1873

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 664 of 1744
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 52001
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53001
52001ZZZ0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 36 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : A91A
Sheet 8 of 8
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
CHV
VLV.CHECK
24
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
53321ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
26
48
API-594

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 53316
53316ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
.5
16
BS-5351

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
BODY SEATRPTFE
54321ZZZ0
PLV
VLV.PLUG
.5
BS-5353

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
PLUG-HARDENED
55397ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
24
BS-5155

WAF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
56321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26
48
BS-5155

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 56316
56316ZZZ0
201
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
18
82
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
BOM
BOLT.M/C
.5
16
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
BM41418Z0
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
.5
24
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
GAS
GASKET
26
82
CL.D
BS7531 GR X
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAX52Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD

150,RF/125AARH
SS304
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.5
24
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
.5
1.5
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
STD
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
24
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
26
48
MNF'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP33644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 665 of 1744
TR3065530
A91A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
: BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 37 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Pipe Class : J3A
Sheet 1 of 4
J3A
150
CS (Galv.)
0
MM

TEMP
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
INSTRUMENT AIR (UP TO 1.5")
NOTES
19
THREADED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH 1" WIDTH PTFE JOINING TAPE.
20
21
SURFACES WHERE GALVANISING HAS BEEN BURNT OFF SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED AND COLD GALVANISED WITH
ZINC COATING COMPOUND.
NO FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING IS PERMITTED IN INSTRUMENT AIR SERVICE.
89
FOR SIZES 2" & ABOVE, REFER A3A & A1A CLASSES

(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
ALL
UNIONS (SCRF)
ALL
SCREWED COUPLING
DRAINS
ALL
REFER EILSTD 7-44-0350, DC3
VENTS
ALL
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-0353 (NOTE-155)
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SCRD NIPPLE WITH VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-44-0354

(NOTE: 154)
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 666 of 1744
J3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 38 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 4
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
T
T
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
T
0.75
T T
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : J3A

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 667 of 1744
THREADOLET
J3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 39 of 40
: BORL
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : J3A
Sheet 3 of 4
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (GALV)
SCRM, WELDED
PI6D599Z0
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
.5
1.5
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SCRD
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FTC0721Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
.5
1.5
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FBC0721Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
.5
1.5
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0721Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WA60882Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WB60882Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WE60882Z0
TRED
T.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WR60882Z0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
.5
1.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WNH08EZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
.5
1.5
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WPH08EZZ0
CAP
CAP
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WF60882Z0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WJ60882Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WK60882Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WL60882Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
.5
1.5
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WM60882Z0
UNN
UNION
.5
1.5
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WQH0882Z0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
.5
1.5

15761
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
SCRF, 800, 3000, B51024ZZZ0

1.20.1, SHT NO.- 51024
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
SCRF, 800, 3000, B52024ZZZ0

1.20.1, SHT NO.- 52024
CHV
VLV.CHECK
.5
1.5
BS EN ISO
15761
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIM-13%
CR.STEEL
SCRF, 800, 3000, B53024ZZZ0

1.20.1, SHT NO.- 53024
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 668 of 1744
J3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
A702-6-44-0005-4070
Page 40 of 40
Dept./Sect. :

Pipe Class : J3A
Sheet 4 of 4
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Bolt Group
BOM
BOLT.M/C
.5
1.5
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
.5
1.5
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
BM41418Z0
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50

Page 669 of 1744
FULLFACE, 150, 2 MM GKBAX22Z0
J3A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 1 of 26

(A702-6-44-0005)
31/03/2015
Rev. No
BORL
Project
LCEP
Location
BINA, M.P., INDIA
Job No.
A702
ISSUED FOR TENDER
Date
Page 670 of 1744
Client
Purpose
SKS
NK
SD
Prepared by
Checked by
Approved by
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 2 of 26
Abbreviations:
Page 671 of 1744
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 3 of 26
CONTENTS
Sl. No.
Description
Page 672 of 1744
Pages
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 4 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Location BINA, M.P., INDIA
PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

Sl. No
Piping
Class
Rating
C.A
Spl.
Reqt.
Basic
Material
Remarks
Service
A94A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
FIRE WATER (ABOVE AND UNDER GROUND)
UNITS & OFFSITES
A95A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
CATEGORY 'D' FLUID-U/G AND A/G CRWS /

SS
A96A
150
1.5
CARBON STEEL
U/G AND A/G OWS
UNITS & OFFSITES
J2A
150
CS (Galv.)
POTABLE WATER (ABOVE GROUND/ UNDER

GROUND ),
FIRE WATER-SPRINKLER SYSTEM AFTER
ORIFICE
UOP-MS-2
Notes : 1. For PMS General notes refer Annexure-I of this document

2. For PMS Extracts refer Annexure-II of this document
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 673 of 1744
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 5 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A94A
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Sheet 1 of 5
A94A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM

TEMP
38
50
65
65
PRESS
14.7
14.7
14.7
18.9
14.7
SERVICE
FIRE WATER (ABOVE AND UNDER GROUND)
NOTES
5
65
88
AS PER TAC REQUIREMENTS, 10% OF THE BUTT WELD JOINTS SHALL BE RADIOGRAPHED. HOWEVER, 50% OF THESE
BUTT WELD JOINTS SHALL BE FIELD WELD JOINTS.
OF 1500MM.
151 NDT REQUIREMENT SHALL BE AS PER JOB SPECIFICATION A702-6-44-0016.
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-44-354

(NOTE 154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 674 of 1744
A94A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 6 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
32.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
36.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
34.000
R
H
H
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
20.000
H
H
H
R
H
H
H
H
H
18.000
T H
T H
T H
R R R
H H H
H H
H H H
H H H
H H H
16.000
P
H
8.000
P
H
6.000
T
T T
5.000
R R R R R R R
4.000
R R R R R R R R
3.500
3.000
2.500
R R R R R R R
2.000
R R R R R R R R
1.500
30.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
28.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
26.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
24.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
14.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
12.000
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
R
10.000
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : A94A
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 675 of 1744
THREADOLET
A94A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 7 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A94A
Sheet 3 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
1.50
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
2.00
6.00
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
14.00
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
PIP
PIPE
16.00
24.00
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
PIP
PIPE
26.00
32.00
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
PIP
PIPE
34.00
36.00
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.410
BE, WELDED
PI7E319Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
1.50
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN6D467Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SW
0.50
1.50
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.WN
26.00
36.00
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWB0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26.00
36.00
B-16.47-B
ASTM A 285 GR.C
150, FF/125AARH
FBB5321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10.00
24.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26.00
36.00
EIL'STD
ASTM A 285 GR.C
150, FF/125AARH
FCE5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
1.50
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 676 of 1744
A94A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 8 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A94A
Sheet 4 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
8.00
36.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
8.00
36.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
8.00
36.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
8.00
36.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
0.50
1.50
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51001
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.25
1.50
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
24.00
API-600

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 677 of 1744
51321ZZZ0
A94A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 9 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A94A
Sheet 5 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
26.00
42.00
BS-1414
BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, 150, B-16.47 B,

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
51397ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 52001
52001ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
2.00
16.00
BS-1873

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
24.00
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
53321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
3.00
24.00
BS-5155

WAF/125AAR, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
56320ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26.00
36.00
BS-5155

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
56310ZZZ0
0.50
36.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53001
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
RING, 150, 2 MM
GAS
GASKET
26.00
36.00
B-16.21ANSI
B16.47B
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
FULLFACE, 150, 2 MM GKAAX22Z0
GKBAX52Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.50
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
2.00
6.00
STD
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
8.00
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
26.00
36.00
MNF'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP33644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 678 of 1744
A94A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 10 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A95A
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Sheet 1 of 6
A95A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM

TEMP
38
50
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
CATEGORY 'D' FLUID-U/G AND A/G CRWS / SS
NOTES
6
64
65
76
77
EIL'STD 7-44-0300.
86
101 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PERAMETERS AND BURIAL DEPTH
OF 2500MM.
110 MITRES ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE IN PLACE OF ELBOWS FOR SIZES 8" TO 24"
300 USE 4 PIECE 90 DEG. MITRE FOR SIZE 8" TO 32" (45 DEG MITRE SHALL REQUIRE ONE PIECE LESS)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
7-44-354
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 679 of 1744
A95A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 11 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 6
32.000
30.000
8.000
28.000
H H H H H
H H H H H
H H H H H
26.000
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
24.000
H
H
H
22.000
H
H
H
20.000
T H
T H
T H
18.000
R R R R R
H H H H H
16.000
R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H
14.000
P
H
12.000
P
H
10.000
T
T T
6.000
R R R R R
5.000
R R R R R R R R
4.000
3.500
3.000
R R R R R
2.500
R R R R R R R R
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : A95A

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 680 of 1744
THREADOLET
A95A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 12 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A95A
Sheet 3 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
1.50
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PE, C.WELDED
PI6D471Z0
PIP
PIPE
2.00
6.00
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
BE, C.WELDED
PI6D411Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
10.00
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
12.00
16.00
8.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
18.00
20.00
10.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
24.00
28.00
12.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
PIP
PIPE
30.00
36.00
14.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
BE, WELDED
PI7D919Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
1.50
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (BLACK)
PBE, C.WELDED
PN6D461Z0
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FSC0127Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SW
0.50
1.50
FLG
FLNG.SO
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0127Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
26.00
32.00

CL.D
150, FF/125AARH
FN40121Z0
FLG/300 FLNG.SO
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FNC0147Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
26.00
32.00

CL.D
150, FF/125AARH
FB45321Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10.00
24.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
26.00
32.00
MNF'STD
ASTM A 285 GR.C
150, FF/125AARH
FCG5321Z0
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
64
64
65
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
1.50
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
8.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
6.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 681 of 1744
STD
A95A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 13 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A95A
Sheet 4 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
8.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
MIT90
MITRE.90
26.00
32.00
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WDKF141Z0
MIT45
MITRE.45
26.00
32.00
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW, 1.5D
WGKF141Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
8.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
8.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
8.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
26.00
32.00
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WUKF14ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
2.00
6.00
STD,
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
8.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
26.00
32.00
M, M
EIL'STD
IS-3589 GR.330
BW
WVKF14ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
STD,
STD
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
6.00
STD
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CAP
CAP
8.00
32.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 682 of 1744
A95A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 14 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A95A
Sheet 5 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
UNN
UNION
0.50
1.50
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WQH02D2Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51001
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.25
1.50
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
24.00
API-600

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
51321ZZZ0
GAV
VLV.GATE
26.00
42.00
BS-1414

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 51920
51920ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
2.00
16.00
BS-1873

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
24.00
BS-1868

RF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
53321ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
26.00
48.00
API-594

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 53316
53316ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
0.50
16.00
BS-5351

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
BODY SEATRPTFE
54321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
3.00
24.00
BS-5155

WAF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
56321ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26.00
48.00
BS-5155

AWWAC207,
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 56316
56316ZZZ0
18.00
32.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 52001
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53001
52001ZZZ0
52321ZZZ0
53001ZZZ0
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 683 of 1744
A95A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 15 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A95A
Sheet 6 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
(Inch)
(Inch)
0.50
16.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A307 GR.B,
NUT:A563 GR.B
NONASBESTOS
BS7531 GR X
Commodity
Code
Description
Note
No
Bolt Group
BOM
BOLT.M/C
BM41418Z0
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
GAS
GASKET
26.00
32.00
BS7531 GR X
CL.D
GAS/30
0
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL+ I
RING
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAX52Z0

SPIRAL, 300
GK66274Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD

150,RF/125AARH
SS304
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.50
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A285GR.C;INT:S
S304
CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
ST14431Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
2.00
6.00
STD
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
8.00
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 684 of 1744
TR3065530
A95A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 16 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A96A
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Sheet 1 of 6
A96A
150
CARBON STEEL
1.5
MM

TEMP
-29
38
93
149
204
260
PRESS
15
15
15
15
14.06
11.95
SERVICE
U/G AND A/G OWS
NOTES
5
7
FOR PERMANENT 'T' TYPE BW STRAINERS,REFER EIL'STD 7-44-0303 -44-0304; AND FOR TEMPORARY
73
GATE VALVES OF SIZE 26" AND ABOVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS-1414 AND FLANGE ENDS SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH ASME B16.47 SERIES B.
124 FOR TEMP. CONNECTION IN MS BLOCK(NHT/CCR/ISOM.) , UOP STANDARD 6-108-1 SHALL BE FOLLOWED EXCEPT
THE SIZE OF CONNECTION i.e. 1.5" INSTEAD OF SIZE 1.0" .
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
229 FOR U/G SERVICES, PIPE WALL THICKNESSES ARE CALCULATED BASED ON SOIL PARAMETERS, BURIAL DEPTH OF
2500MM AND LINE CONDITIONS OF 7KG/SQ.CM G PRESSURE & 65 DEG. C TEMP.
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
ALL
1.5" & BELOW
SW COUPLING
2.0" & ABOVE
BUTTWELDED
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-0353(NOTE 124
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SW NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-440354(NOTE 154)
DRAINS
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 685 of 1744
A96A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 17 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
R R R R R R R R
R R R R R R R R
T
T T
P
H
P
H
R R R R R R R R
H H H H H H H H
R
H
T H
T H
T H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H H H H H H H H
H
H
H
18.000
16.000
14.000
12.000
10.000
8.000
6.000
5.000
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
T
R
R
R
R
R
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 6
24.000
T
R
R
R
R
22.000
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
20.000
T
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
T R
T R R
T R R R
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : A96A

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 686 of 1744
THREADOLET
A96A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 18 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A96A
Sheet 3 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
0.75
S160
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z0
PIP
PIPE
1.00
1.50
XS
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PE, SEAMLESS
PI21977Z0
PIP
PIPE
2.00
2.00
XS
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z0
PIP
PIPE
3.00
6.00
STD
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
BE, SEAMLESS
PI21917Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
14.00
STD
B-36.10
API 5L GR.B PSL1
BE, WELDED
PI2E919Z0
PIP
PIPE
16.00
20.00
STD
B-36.10
API 5L GR.B PSL1
BE, WELDED
PI2E919Z0
PIP
PIPE
24.00
24.00
XS
B-36.10
API 5L GR.B PSL1
BE, WELDED
PI2E919Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
0.75
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
1.00
1.50
B-36.10
ASTM A 106 GR.B
PBE, SEAMLESS
PN21967Z0
FLG/300 FLNG.SW
0.50
1.50
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FSC0147Z0
FLG
FLNG.WN
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FWC0127Z0
FLG/600 FLNG.WN
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
600, RF/125AARH
FWC0167Z0
FLG/300 FLNG.WN
2.00
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
300, RF/125AARH
FWC0147Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
24.00
B-16.5
ASTM A 105
150, RF/125AARH
FBC0127Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0121Z0
FEF
SPCR&BLND
10.00
24.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A 105
150, FF/125AARH
FCK0121Z0
Flange Group
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WA602D3Z0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WA602D2Z0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
14.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WAG684Z10
ELB90
ELBOW.90
16.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WAG754Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WB602D3Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WB602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 687 of 1744
A96A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 19 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A96A
Sheet 4 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
14.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW, 1.5D
WBG684Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
16.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW, 1.5D
WBG754Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WE602D3Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WE602D2Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
14.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WEG684ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
16.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WEG754ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WR602D3Z0
TRED
T.RED
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WR602D2Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
14.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WRG684ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
16.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WRG754ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
2.00
14.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WUG684ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
16.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WUG754ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
2.00
14.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WVG684ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
16.00
24.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W
BW
WVG754ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WNH026ZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A 105
PBE
WPH026ZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 6000
WF60283Z0
CAP
CAP
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SCRF, 3000
WF60282Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
24.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB
BW
WFG684ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WJ602D3Z0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WJ602D2Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WK602D3Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WK602D2Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 688 of 1744
A96A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 20 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A96A
Sheet 5 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WL602D3Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WL602D2Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
0.75
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 6000
WM602D3Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
1.00
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A 105
SW, 3000
WM602D2Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 51001
51001ZZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.25
1.50
API-602
BODY-ASTM A
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
42.00
API-600

GR.WCB,TRIMRF/125AARH, SHT
13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 51301
51301ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
52001ZZZ0
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
2.00
16.00
BS-1873

13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 52301
52301ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
BS-5352
BODY-ASTM A
105,TRIMSTELLITED
53001ZZZ0
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
24.00
BS-1868

13% CR.STEEL
NO.- 53301
53301ZZZ0
BLV
VLV.BALL
0.50
16.00
BS-5351

/A
RF/125AARH, SHT
BODY SEATRPTFE
54301ZZZ0
PLV
VLV.PLUG
0.50
24.00
BS-5353

/A
RF/125AARH, SHT
PLUG-HARDENED
55301ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
3.00
24.00
API-609/BS5155

WAF/125AARH, SHT
/A
13% CR.STEEL
56301ZZZ0
BFV
VLV.BTRFLY
26.00
48.00
API-609

RF/125AARH, SHT
/A
13% CR.STEEL
56315ZZZ0
0.50
24.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A193 GR.B7,
NUT:A194 GR.2H
BS40404Z0
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 52001
SW, 800, 3000, B16.11, SHT NO.- 53001
73
Bolt Group
BOS
BOLT.STUD
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 689 of 1744
A96A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 21 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : A96A
Sheet 6 of 6
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 150
GK65072Z0
GAS/60
0
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 600
GK65076Z0
GAS/30
0
GASKET
0.50
24.00
B-16.20ANSI B16.5
SP.WND
SS316+GRAFIL
SPIRAL, 300
GK65074Z0
Trap/Strainer Group
TRP
TRAP.STEAM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD

150,RF/125AARH
SS304
TR3065530
TSR
STRNR.TEMP
1.50
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A516GR.70;INT:S CONETYPE,
150,FF/125AARH
S304
ST16831Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
0.50
1.50
MNF'STD
B:A105;INT:SS304
SW, Y-TYPE, 800
SP303D510
PSR
STRNR.PERM
2.00
14.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPB;IN
T:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13344Z0
PSR
STRNR.PERM
16.00
24.00
EIL'STD
B:A234GR.WPBW;I
NT:SS304
BW, T-TYPE
SP13644Z0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 690 of 1744
A96A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
:BORL
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 22 of 26
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
PIPE CLASS
:
RATING
:
BASE MATERIAL
:
Pipe Class : J2A
Sheet 1 of 5
J2A
150
CS (Galv.)
0
MM

TEMP
38
65
PRESS
10.55
10.55
10.55
SERVICE
POTABLE WATER (ABOVE GROUND/ UNDER GROUND ),
FIRE WATER-SPRINKLER SYSTEM AFTER ORIFICE
NOTES
19
THREADED JOINTS SHALL BE MADE WITH 1" WIDTH PTFE JOINING TAPE.
20
SURFACES WHERE GALVANISING HAS BEEN BURNT OFF SHALL BE WIRE BRUSHED AND COLD GALVANISED WITH
ZINC COATING COMPOUND.
OF 1500MM.
124 FOR TEMP. CONNECTION IN MS BLOCK(NHT/CCR/ISOM.) , UOP STANDARD 6-108-1 SHALL BE FOLLOWED EXCEPT
THE SIZE OF CONNECTION i.e. 1.5" INSTEAD OF SIZE 1.0" .
(NHT/CCR/ISOM.)
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM
MAINTAINENCE
JOINTS
SIZE
DESCRIPTION
A.CODE
1.5" & BELOW
UNIONS (SCRF) TO BE KEPT MINIMUM
2" & ABOVE
FLANGED (SCREWED) TO BE KEPT MINIMUM
PIPE JOINTS
UPTO 6"
SCREWED COUPLING
DRAINS
ON LINES <= 1.5"
REFER EIL STD 7-44-0350, DC3
ON LINES >= 2.0"
ON LINES <= 1.5"
REFER EIL STD 7-440350, VC3
ON LINES >= 2.0"
TEMP.CONN
1.5"
FLANGED. REFER EIL STD 7-44-0353 (NOTE 124)
PRESS.CONN
0.75"
SCRD NIPPLE WITH GATE VALVE TO SPEC AS PER EIL STD 7-440354 (NOTE 154)
VENTS
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 691 of 1744
J2A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 23 of 26
:BORL
Dept./Sect. :
16/43
Project :LCEP
T
T
T
T
T T
T T
T T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
1.0
0.75
0.5
Sheet 2 of 5
6.000
T
T
5.000
T
T T
4.000
3.500
3.000
2.500
2.000
1.500
1.250
1.000
.750
.500
72.
70.
68.
66.
64.
62.
60.
58.
56.
54.
52.
50.
48.
46.
44.
42.
40.
38.
36.
34.
32.
30.
28.
26.
24.
22.
20.
18.
16.
14.
12.
10.
8.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.25
T
1.0
T T
0.75
0.5 T T T
Pipe Class : J2A

CODE DESCRIPTION
F
SADDLE FUSED JT
TEES
H. COUPLING
WELDOLETS
PIPE TO PIPE
INSTRUMENT TEE
REINFORCED
Refer Notes
SOCKOLETS
SWEEPOLET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 692 of 1744
THREADOLET
J2A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 24 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : J2A
Sheet 3 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Pipe Group
PIP
PIPE
0.50
6.00
HVY
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (GALV)
SCRM, WELDED
PI6D599Z0
PIP
PIPE
8.00
8.00
6.0
IS-3589
IS-3589 GR.330
(GALV)
BE, WELDED
PI7E219Z0
NIP
NIPPLE
0.50
1.50
IS-1239-I
IS-1239 (GALV)
TOE, WELDED
PN6D5G9Z0
Flange Group
FLG
FLNG.SCRD
0.50
6.00
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FTC0721Z0
FLG
FLNG.SO
8.00
8.00
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, RF/125AARH
FNC0727Z0
FLB
FLNG.BLIND
0.50
8.00
B-16.5
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FBC0721Z0
FEF
FLNG.FIG.8
0.50
8.00
ASMEB16.48
ASTM A
105(GALV.)
150, FF/125AARH
FGK0721Z0
Fitting Group
ELB90
ELBOW.90
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WA60882Z0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WALE98ZZ0
ELB90
ELBOW.90
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW, 1.5D
WAG764Z10
ELB45
ELBOW.45
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WB60882Z0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WBLE98ZZ0
ELB45
ELBOW.45
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW, 1.5D
WBG764Z10
TEQ
T.EQUAL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WE60882Z0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WELE98ZZ0
TEQ
T.EQUAL
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WEG764ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WR60882Z0
TRED
T.RED
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WRLE98ZZ0
TRED
T.RED
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WRG764ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
0.50
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WULE98ZZ0
REDC
REDUC.CONC
8.00
8.00
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WUG764ZZ0
REDE
REDUC.ECC
0.50
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WVLE98ZZ0
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 693 of 1744
M, M
M, M
J2A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 25 of 26
:BORL
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : J2A
Sheet 4 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
Note
No
Fitting Group
REDE
REDUC.ECC
8.00
8.00
M, M
B-16.9
ASTM A 234
GR.WPB-W(GALV)
BW
WVG764ZZ0
SWGC
SWAGE.CONC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WNH08EZZ0
SWGE
SWAGE.ECC
0.50
3.00
M, M
BS-3799
ASTM A
105(GALV)
TBE
WPH08EZZ0
CAP
CAP
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WF60882Z0
CAP
CAP
2.00
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WFLE98ZZ0
CPLF
CPLNG.FULL
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WJ60882Z0
CPLH
CPLNG.HALF
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WK60882Z0
CPLL
CPLNG.LH
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WL60882Z0
CPLR
CPLNG.RED
0.50
1.50
B-16.11
ASTM A
105(GALV)
SCRF, 3000
WM60882Z0
UNN
UNION
0.50
6.00
IS-1239-II
IS-1239(PART-II)
(GALV)
SCRF, NA
WQLE98ZZ0
Valves Group
GAV
VLV.GATE
0.50
1.50
IS:778 CL.2
BODY-IS 318 GR.2

LEADED TIN
BRONZE,TRIM- IS
320 ALLOY HT2
SCRF, CL.2, 3000, B51080ZZZ0

1.20.1, SHT NO.- 51080
GAV
VLV.GATE
2.00
8.00
IS:780
BODY-IS 210
GR.FG 200,TRIMIS 320 ALLOY HT2
FLGD, PN1.6, B-16.1,

FF/125AARH, SHT
NO.- 51380
GLV
VLV.GLOBE
0.50
1.50
IS:778 CL.2
BODY-IS 318 GR2

LEADED TIN
BRONZE,TRIM- IS
320 ALLOY HT2
SCRF, CL.2, 3000, B52080ZZZ0

1.20.1, SHT NO.- 52080
CHV
VLV.CHECK
0.50
1.50
IS:778 CL.2
BODY-IS 318 GR2

LEADED TIN
BRONZE,TRIM- IS
320 ALLOY HT2
SCRF, CL.2, 3000, B53080ZZZ0

1.20.1, SHT NO.- 53080
CHV
VLV.CHECK
2.00
6.00
IS:5312 (PT1)
BODY-IS 210
GR.FG 200,TRIMIS 320 ALLOY HT2
FLGD, PN1.6, B-16.1,

FF/125AARH, SHT
NO.- 53380
0.50
8.00
B-18.2
BOLT:A307
GR.B(GALV),
NUT:A563
GR.B(GALV)
0.50
6.00
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
BUTYL RUBBER
51380ZZZ0
53380ZZZ0
Bolt Group
BOM
BOLT.M/C
BM41519Z0
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 694 of 1744
FULLFACE, 150, 2 MM GKB0422Z0
J2A
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
:BORL
A702-6-44-0005 Rev. A
Page 26 of 26
16/43
Dept./Sect. :
Project :LCEP
Pipe Class : J2A
Sheet 5 of 5
Input
Id.
Item
Type
Lower Upper
Size
Size
(Inch)
(Inch)
8.00
8.00
Sch/
Thk
Dmn. STD Material
Description
Commodity
Code
B-16.21ANSI B16.5
RING, 150, 2 MM
GKBAA52Z0
Note
No
Gasket Group
GAS
GASKET
Package
: IPMCS
Report No.
: 50
Page 695 of 1744
GRAPHITE WITH
SS316 TANGED
INS
J2A
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 1 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51001
GATE VALVE SPECIFICATION

PIPING CLASS : A10A, A11A, A1A,
A20A, A32A, A3A, A3A1,

A91A, A93A, A94A, A95A, A96A, A9A, B1A,
B28A, B32A, B6A, B9A, D1A, D28A, D9A
STANDARD
: API 602/ ISO 15761
TAG NO. : 51001

RATING
: 800
SIZE RANGE : 0.25" TO
DESCRIPTION
JOB SPECIFICATION NO.
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
13% CR.STEEL (NO CASTING)
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM
CORROSION INHIBITED DIE FORMED FLEXIBLE

GRAPHITE WITH BRAIDED ANTI EXTRUSION
RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
MALLEABLE IRON/CAST ST/FAB.ST/DUCT. IRON
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP.WND SS316- GRAFOIL FILLER
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP. 427 DEG. C.

INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2975 PSIG.
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
(For category -II MRs only )
RATING:
ENDS:
SW 3000 TO B-16.11
BODY
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
Sheet No. 1 of 1
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
SEAT : 2175 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
THIS VALVE SPEC SHEET SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH TECHNICAL NOTES FOR VALVES.
ONLY IN THE CASE OF CATEGORY - II MRs,BIDDER SHALL CLEARLY WRITE ALL/ ANY DEVIATION AGAINST
EACH PART/ MATERIAL OF VALVE IN THE SPACE PROVIDED FOR AND WHEREVER BIDDER AGREES WITH
EIL'S SPEC BIDDER SHALL INDICATE "AGREED".
NO CUTTING/ OVERWRITING BY BIDDER ON EIL'S SPEC IS ALLOWED.
VALVES AS PER API-602 AND TESTING AS PER API-598 ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
02/01/1995
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009

Page 696 of 1744
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
51001
Copyright EIL-All rights reserved
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 2 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51002

TAG NO. : 51002
RATING
: 800
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316 - GRAFOIL F1LLER
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
I.B.R
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2975 PSIG.
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
STEAM/CONDENSATE/BOILER FEED WATER;

MAX TEMP. 427 DEG. C.
SEAT : 2175 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598 & IBR.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE SUPPLIED WITH IBR CERTIFICATE IN FORM-III C.
ALL VALVES SHALL BE PAINTED RED ON BODY-BONNET JOINT.
VALVES TO COMPLY WITH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS OF IBR ALSO.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 697 of 1744
51002
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 3 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51024

TAG NO. : 51024
RATING
: 800
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SCRF 3000 TO B-1.20.1
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
13% CR.STEEL FACING/13%

CR.STEEL/STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE
13% CR.STEEL FACING/13%

CR.STEEL/STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316 - GRAFOIL FILLER
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 75 DEG. C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2975 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SEAT : 2175 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
05/05/2008

Page 698 of 1744
51024
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 4 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51045

TAG NO. : 51045
RATING
: 800
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304
STEM
RISING
SS 304 (NO CASTING)
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR.2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316-GRAFOIL FILLER
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 454 DEG.C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2900 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SEAT : 2125 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 699 of 1744
51045
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 5 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51050

TAG NO. : 51050
RATING
: 800
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
API-602
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304L
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304L
STEM
RISING
SS 304L (NO CASTING)
WEDGE DISC
SOLID
STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316L-GRAFOIL FILLER
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 427 DEG.C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
INTEGRAL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2400 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SEAT : 1775 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 700 of 1744
51050
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 6 of 21
TAG NO. : 51302

RATING
: 150
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
36.0"
ENDS
API-600
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID/FLEXIBLE
13% CR STEEL FACING/13% CR. STEEL
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316-GRAFOIL FILLER/CORRUGATED

SOFT IRON
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR
REFER TECHNICAL NOTES FOR PURCHASE OF

VALVES.
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
I.B.R
Sheet No. 1 of 1
Tag No: 51302
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:

MAX. TEMP. 371 DEG.C.
13% CR STEEL
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 450 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER API 598 & IBR FOR SIZES UPTO 24" AND AS PER BS 6755(PART-1) & IBR FOR SIZES
26" & ABOVE.
5% VALVE CASTINGS UPTO 24" AND 100% VALVE CASTINGS 26" AND ABOVE SHALL UNDERGO
RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
GATE VALVES OF SIZE 26" AND ABOVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH BS-1414 AND FLANGE ENDS SHALL
BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME B16.47 SERIES B.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 701 of 1744
51302
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 7 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51321

TAG NO. : 51321
RATING
: 150
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS : A3A, A3A1, A91A, A94A, A95A

STANDARD
: API 600/ ISO 10434
24.0"
ENDS
: FLGD TO B-16.5 RF/125AARH
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
SOLID/FLEXIBLE
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET

SS 316
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR

VALVES.
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
BACK SEAT &
SHOULDER
13% CR STEEL
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 450 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
RADIOGRAPHY OF VALVE CASTINGS NOT REQUIRED.
VALVES AS PER API-600 AND TESTING AS PER API-598 ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009

Page 702 of 1744
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
51321
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 8 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43

TAG NO. : 51345
RATING
: 150
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
API-600
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 351 GR CF8
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 351 GR.CF8
STEM
RISING
SS 304 (NO CASTING)
WEDGE DISC
SOLID/FLEXIBLE
SS 304
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NONRENEWABLE
SS 304
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET

SS316
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR

VALVES.
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 371 DEG.C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
SS 304
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 425 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
Tag No: 51345
DESCRIPTION
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SEAT : 325 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10 % VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREATED.
WELD REPAIRS, IF ANY, SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 703 of 1744
51345
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 9 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 51350

TAG NO. : 51350
RATING
: 150
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
API-600
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 351 GR.CF3
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 351 GR.CF3
STEM
RISING
WEDGE DISC
FLEXIBLE
SS 304L
BODY SEAT RING
NONRENEWABLE/RENE
WABLE
SS 304L
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
NON RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316L-GRAFOIL FILLER/CORRUGATED

SS316L
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR

VALVES.
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 371 DEG C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
SS 304L
OTHERS
O.S & Y.
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 425 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SEAT : 325 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10 % VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
WELD REPAIRS IF ANY SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 704 of 1744
51350
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 10 of 21
Tag No: 52001
GLOBE VALVE SPECIFICATION

A3A, A3A1, A91A, A94A,

A95A, A96A, A9A, B1A, B9A, D1A, D9A
STANDARD
: BS EN ISO 15761
TAG NO. : 52001

RATING
: 800
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 105
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
STEM
RISING
DISC
LOOSE PLUG TYPE
STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
MAX TEMP 427 DEG.C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
INTEGRAL
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2975 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
SEAT : 2175 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
VALVES AS PER BS-5352 AND TESTING AS PER BS 6755(PART-I) ARE ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
02/01/1995
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009

Page 705 of 1744
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
52001
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 11 of 21
Tag No: 52050

TAG NO. : 52050
RATING
: 800
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304L
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304L
STEM
RISING
SS 304L (NO CASTING), 32 RMS FINISH
DISC
LOOSE PLUG TYPE
STELLITED
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
MAX TEMP 427 DEG.C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
INTEGRAL
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2400 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
SEAT : 1775 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-1).
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 706 of 1744
52050
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 12 of 21
Tag No: 52321

TAG NO. : 52321
RATING
: 150

STANDARD
: BS-1873
16.0"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
STEM
RISING
DISC
LOOSE PLUG
TYPE/BALL TYP
13% CR STEEL FACING/13% CR STEEL
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

RINGS
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316-GRAFOIL FILLER/ CORRUGATED

SS316
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR

VALVES.
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
BACK SEAT &
SHOULDER
13% CR STEEL
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 450 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS EN 12266-1.
VALVE TESTING AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I) IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009

Page 707 of 1744
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
52321
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 13 of 21
TAG NO. : 52350

RATING
: 150
Sheet No. 1 of 1
Tag No: 52350

PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
16.0"
ENDS
BS-1873
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 351 GR.CF3
BONNET
BOLTED
ASTM A 351 GR.CF3
STEM
RISING
DISC
LOOSE PLUG
TYPE/BALL TYP
SS 304L
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
SS 304L
STEM PACKING
RENEWABLE WITH
VALVE OPEN ON
STREAM

GRAPHITE PACKING WITH BRAIDED ANTI
EXTRUSION RINGS
HAND WHEEL
RISING
BONNET BOLTS
ASTM A193 GR B7
BONNET NUTS
ASTM A194 GR 2H
BONNET GASKET
SP WND SS316L-GRAFOIL FILLER/CORRUGATED

SS316L
REQUIREMENT OF
GEAR OPERATOR

VALVES.
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
OTHERS
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
OS&Y
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITION
MAX TEMP 371 DEG C.
BACK SEAT &

SHOULDER
SS 304L
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 425 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
80 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-1).
10% VALVE CASTINGS SHALL UNDERGO RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
13/08/2007

Page 708 of 1744
52350
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 14 of 21
Tag No: 53001
CHECK VALVE SPECIFICATION

A3A, A3A1, A91A, A94A,

A95A, A96A, A9A, B1A, B9A, D1A, D9A
STANDARD
: BS EN ISO 15761
TAG NO. : 53001

RATING
: 800
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
FORGED
ASTM A 105
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
DISC/PISTON
SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
BODY SEAT RING
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
LIFT CHECK TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 427 DEG.C.
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2975 PSIG
SEAT : 2175 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
VALVES SHALL BE OF STANDARD BORE DESIGN.
VALVES AS PER BS-5352 AND TESTING AS PER BS 6755(PART-I) IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE .
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
02/01/1995
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009

Page 709 of 1744
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
53001
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 15 of 21
Tag No: 53002

TAG NO. : 53002
RATING
: 800
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
FORGED
ASTM A 105
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 105
DISC/PISTON
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
BODY SEAT RING
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
STELLITED
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
LIFT CHECK TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
I.B.R

MAX. TEMP. 427 DEG.C.
BODY : 2975 PSIG
SEAT : 2175 PSIG
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755(PART-I)& IBR
ALL VALVES SHALL BE PAINTED RED ON BODY-COVER JOINT.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 710 of 1744
53002
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 16 of 21
Tag No: 53045

TAG NO. : 53045
RATING
: 800
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304
DISC/PISTON
BODY SEAT RING
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
STELLITED
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
LIFT CHECK TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 454 DEG. C.
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2900 PSIG
SEAT : 2125 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I)
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 711 of 1744
53045
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
Page 17 of 21
Tag No: 53050

TAG NO. : 53050
RATING
: 800
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
1.5"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
BS-5352
:
: SW 3000 TO B-16.11
MATERIAL
BODY
FORGED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304L
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 182 GR.F304L
DISC/PISTON
BODY SEAT RING
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
DESCRIPTION
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
STELLITED
NONRENEWABLE/RENE
WABLE
STELLITED
DISC HINGE/HINGE
PIN
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
TYPE
LIFT CHECK TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
MAX TEMP 427 DEG.C.
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 2400 PSIG
SEAT : 1775 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I).
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 712 of 1744
53050
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 18 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 53302

TAG NO. : 53302
RATING
: 150
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
BS-1868
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
DISC
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
HINGE PIN
13% CR STEEL(NO CASTING)
DISC HINGE
13% CR. STEEL/A216 GR WCB/A515 GR 70;
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET

SOFT IRON
BY PASSES
TYPE
SWING CHECK TYPE
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
I.B.R
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE

MAX TEMP 371 DEG.C.
13% CR STEEL(NO CASTING)/SS410/SS304
BODY : 450 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS 6755(PART-I)& IBR
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 713 of 1744
53302
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 19 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43

TAG NO. : 53321
RATING
: 150
Sheet No. 1 of 1
Tag No: 53321
DESCRIPTION

STANDARD
: BS 1868
24.0"
ENDS
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 216 GR.WCB
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
FACED WITH 13% CR.STEEL/13% CR.STEEL
DISC
BODY SEAT RING
RENEWABLE/NON
RENEWABLE
HINGE PIN
13% CR STEEL(NO CASTING)
DISC HINGE
13% CR STEEL/A216 GR WCB/A515 GR 70
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET

SS316
BY PASSES
SWING CHECK TYPE
TYPE
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
13% CR STEEL(NO CASTING)/SS410/SS304
WASHER,NUT,PIN
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
SEAT : 325 PSIG
BODY : 450 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
TESTING SHALL BE AS PER BS EN 12266-1.
VALVE TESTING AS PER BS 6755 (PART-I) IS ALSO ACCEPTABLE.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
14/12/2000
28/05/2001
30/06/2009

Page 714 of 1744
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
53321
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 20 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 53345

TAG NO. : 53345
RATING
: 150
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
BS-1868
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 351 GR CF8
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 351 GR.CF8
DISC
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SS 304
BODY SEAT RING
SS 304
DISC HINGE
SS 304;
HINGE PIN
SS304(NO CASTING)
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
BY PASSES
TYPE
SWING CHECK TYPE
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
SS 304 (NO CASTING)
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 425 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 715 of 1744
53345
VALVE MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
Client
: BORL
Project
: LCEP
A702-6-44-0006 Rev. A
Page 21 of 21
Dept./Sect. : 16/43
Tag No: 53350

TAG NO. : 53350
RATING
: 150
DESCRIPTION
PIPING CLASS :
STANDARD
24.0"
ENDS
BS-1868
:
: FLGD
CONSTRUCTION
MATERIAL
BODY
CAST
ASTM A 351 GR.CF3
COVER
BOLTED
ASTM A 351 GR.CF3
DISC
Sheet No. 1 of 1
MANUF'S OFFER
STANDARD:
MFGRS CAT/FIG:
RATING:
ENDS:
SS 304L
BODY SEAT RING
SS 304L
HINGE PIN
SS 304L(NO CASTING)
DISC HINGE
SS 304L;
COVER STUD BOLT
ASTM A193 GR B7
COVER NUT
ASTM A194 GR 2H
COVER GASKET
BY PASSES
TYPE
SWING CHECK TYPE
REQUIREMENT OF
RADIOGRAPHY

VALVES.
OTHERS
SPECIAL SERVICE
CONDITIONS
WASHER,NUT,PIN
SS 304L(NO CASTING)
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE
BODY : 425 PSIG
SEAT : 325 PSIG
TEST PRESSURE
WITH AIR
NOTES
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ALL CASTINGS SHALL BE SOLUTION HEAT TREARED
WELD REPAIR, IF ANY, SHALL BE CARRIED OUT BEFORE SOLUTION HEAT TREATMENT.
SHEET REV. NO.

DATE
SIGNATURE
&
SEAL
OF MANUFACTURER
0
19/02/2007

Page 716 of 1744
53350
Page 717 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 1 of 13
ikbfiax ds v/oalkRed ijh{k.k dh

vko';drkvksa gsrq ekud fofunsZ'k
NON DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
REQUIREMENTS OF PIPING
PROJECT: REVAMP AND CAPACITY ENHANCEMENT

OWNER : M/S BORL
JOB NO. : A702
Abbreviations:
07/03/2016
ISSUED WITH VPSA OXYGEN PLANT TENDER
SKS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
PM
Checked
by
PNR
Approved
by
Page 718 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
DP/LP :
Dye/Liquid Penetrant
MP
Magnetic Particle
CS
Carbon Steel
AS
Alloy Steel
SS
Stainless Steel
ASTM :
American Society for Testing & Materials
ASME :
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
IBR
Indian Boiler Regulations
PMS:
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 2 of 13
Page 719 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 3 of 13
CONTENTS
S.NO
TITLE
1.
GENERAL
2.
VISUAL EXAMINATION
3.
4.
TABLE-I (with applicable Notes to Table-I)
PAGE NO.
Page 720 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 4 of 13
This specification covers the general requirements for non destructive examination of
shop & field fabricated piping.
1.2
RELATED CODES & ENGINEERING STANDARDS

Referred codes / standards are as follows. Latest editions of the Codes/Standards referred
to shall be followed.
a)
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Codes, Section V & VIII (Div.1) including
addenda.
b)
ASME B31.3
c)
ASME B16.5
d)
ASME B16.34
e)
Job Piping Material Specification, A702-6-44-0005-4070
f)
Welding Specification Charts for Piping Classes, Revamp & Capacity

enhancement Project of Bina refinery
g)
Standard Specification for Fabrication & Erection of Piping 6-44-0012
h)
ASTM E10
i)
Welding Specification for Fabrication of Piping, 6-77-0001
j)
Design Guide for Radiography Requirements, 8-77-0010
k)
Indian Boiler Regulations (IBR)
2.
VISUAL EXAMINATION
2.1
Weld shall be visually inspected wherever accessible in accordance with the following
requirements:
a)
Internal misalignment
1.5 mm or less
b)
Cracks or lack of fusion
not permitted
c)
Incomplete penetration
Depth shall not exceed the lesser of 0.8mm or 0.2

times thickness of thinner component joined by
butt-weld. The total length of such imperfections
shall not exceed 38 mm in any 150 mm of weld
length.
d)
Surface porosity and

exposed slag inclusions
(For nom. wall thickness
4.7 mm and less)
not permitted
Page 721 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
e)
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 5 of 13
(Suck up)
For single sided welded joints, concavity of the

root surface shall not reduce the total thickness
of joint, including reinforcement, to less than the
thickness of the thinner of the components being
joined.
f)
Weld ripples irregularities
2.5 mm or less.
g)
Lack of uniformity in bead

width
2.5 mm or less.
h)
Lack of uniformity of leg

length
2.5 mm or less.
i)
Unevenness of bead
2.0 mm or less.
j)
Weld undercutting
0.8 mm or 1/4 thickness of thinner components

joined by butt weld, whichever is less. (shall be
smooth finished)
k)
Overlap
1.5 mm or less
l)
Bead deflection
2.5 mm or less
m)
External weld reinforcement and internal weld protrusion (when backing rings are
not used) shall be fused with and shall merge smoothly into the component
surfaces. The height of the lesser projection of external weld reinforcement or
internal weld protrusion from the adjacent base material surface shall not exceed
the following limits:
n)
Concave root surface
Wall thickness of thinner

component joined by butt
weld (mm)
Weld reinforcement or internal weld protrusion

(mm) max
6.4 and under

Over 6.4 -12.7
Over 12.7 -25.4
Over 25.4
1.6
3.2
4.0
4.8
Throat thickness of fillet welds:

Nominal thickness of the thinner component x 0.7 or more.
o)
Flattening
Flattening of a bend, as measured by difference between the nominal outside
diameter and minimum or maximum diameter at any cross section shall not
exceed 5 % of the nominal outside diameter of pipe.
p)
Reduction of wall thickness

Reduction of wall thickness of a bend, as measured by difference between the
nominal thickness and minimum thickness shall not exceed 10 % of the nominal
wall thickness of pipe.
Page 722 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 6 of 13
2.2
Welds having any of imperfections which exceed the limitations specified in various
clauses of 2.1 shall be repaired by welding, grinding or overlaying etc. Number of times
of repair welding for the same weld, however shall conform to applicable notes to Table
1- Note 6(b) b.5.
3.
3.1
The type and extent of weld examination shall be in accordance with Table-1. All visual
and supplementary methods of girth weld examination shall be in accordance with ASME
B31.3 & the requirements of this standard specification.
3.2
Welds between dissimilar materials shall be examined by method & to the extent required
for the material having the more stringent examination.
Page 723 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
4.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 7 of 13
TABLE-I (with applicable notes)
TABLE 1 : CLASS, TYPE & EXTENT OF WELD EXAMINATION

INSPECTION CLASS: I
INSPN.
CLASS
SERVICE
MATERIAL P.NO. TEMP. PRESS. APPLICABLE

TYPE OF WELD EXAMINED
TYPE OF
(NOTE 3)
DEG.C CLASS
PIPING
EXAMINATION
B16.5/
CLASS
GIRTH SOCKET ATTACH- FAB.
B16.34
BUTT WELD
MENT
BRANCH
WELD (NOTE 2) WELD
WELD
(NOTE 1)
0
TO
186
AUSTENIC
S.S.
- 29
TO
186
HDPE
---
- 20
TO
50
CATEGORY 'D' CARBON

FLUID
STEEL
SERVICE
CURPO
NICKEL
34
10
11
FAB.
WELDS
OF
MITRES /
REDUC.
12
13
A3A, J3A,
A91A
150#
UPTO
10.55
KG/CM2
a)
VISUAL
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
b)
LP (NOTE 4, 6, 9)
---
---
---
10%
10%
- 29
TO
60
REMARKS FOR ABOVE TABLE:

1.
LP TEST NOT APPLICABLE TO NON-METALLIC CLASSES.
2.
MITRES & FABRICATED REDUCERS ARE PERMITTED ONLY IF SPECIFIED IN PMS.
Page 724 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 8 of 13
TABLE 1: CLASS, TYPE & EXTENT OF WELD EXAMINATION (CONTD.)

INSPECTION CLASS: II
INSPN.
CLASS
SERVICE
1
II
2
a)
ALL SERVICES
COVERED
UNDER
INSPECTION
CLASS-I, BUT,
EXCEEDING
CATAGORY 'D'
PR./T EMP
LIMITATIONS.
MATERIAL P. TEMP. PRESS. APPLICABLE

(NOTE 3) NO. DEG.C CLASS
PIPING
CLASS
B16.5/
B16.34
CARBON
STEEL
- 29
TO
400
150#
b)
ALL SERVICES
CARBON
OTHER THAN
STEEL (IBR)
THOSE
COVERED
UNDER
INSPECTION
CLASS-I BUT
NON-TOXIC, NOT
SUBJECTED TO
SEVERE CYCLIC
CONDITIONS.
TYPE OF
EXAMINATION
GIRTH
BUTT
WELD
a)
VISUAL
A22A

SOCKET ATTACH FAB.
BRANCH
WELD -MENT
(NOTE 2) WELD
WELD
(NOTE 1)
10
11
12
FAB.
WELDS
OF
MITRES/
REDUC.
13
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
b)
RADIOGRAPHY
(NOTE 5,6)
10%
---
---
---
50%
c)
MP / LP (NOTE
4,6,10,11)
---
10%
---
10%
50%
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE-7
NOTE-7
NOTE-7
d)
HARDNESS

1.
2.
FOR A22A IBR SERVICE NOTE- 8 IS ALSO APPLICABLE.

Page 725 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 9 of 13
TABLE 1: CLASS, TYPE & EXTENT OF WELD EXAMINATION (CONTD.)

INSPECTION CLASS: III (CONTD.)
INSPN.
CLASS
SERVICE
MATERIAL P. TEMP. PRESS. APPLICABLE

TYPE OF
(NOTE 3) NO. DEG.C CLASS
PIPING
EXAMINATION
CLASS
B16.5/
GIRTH
B16.34
BUTT
WELD
III
ALL GENERAL
(CONTD) SERVICES
EXCEPT THOSE
SUBJECT TO
SEVERE
CYCLIC
CONDITIONS.
STEELS
WITH
Cr > 2%
& < 5%
5 ALL
3.5 Ni STEEL
9 - 80
TO
120
AUSTENITIC
STAINLESS
STEEL
8 - 29
TO
371
150#
- 29
TO
500
300#
TO
600#

SOCKET ATTACH FAB.
WELD -MENT BRANCH
(NOTE 2) WELD
WELDS
(NOTE 1)
10
11
FAB.
WELDS
OF
MITRES /
REDUC.)
12
13
150#
TO
600#
a)
VISUAL
A1K, A6K,
b)
RADIOGRAPHY
(NOTE 5,6)
c)
LP / MP (NOTE
4,6,10,11)
d)
HARDNESS
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
20%
---
---
---
100%
---
20%
---
20%
---
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
NOTE 7
AUSTENITIC
SS (IBR)
1.
NOTE- 7 FOR HARDNESS IS NOT VALID FOR P. NOS. 8, & 9.
2.
3.
RADIOGRAPHY IS NOT REQUIRED FOR DM WATER SERVICE IN A1K SPEC.
Page 726 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 10 of 13
Applicable Notes to Table-I

1.
Branch welds shall consist of the welds between the pipe & reinforcing element (if any),
nozzles & reinforcing element and the pipe & nozzle under the reinforcing element.
Reinforcing element to be interpreted as pads, saddles, weldolets, sockolets etc.
2.
Seal welds of threaded joints shall be given the same examination as socket welds.
3.
Unless specifically stated, all materials shall be for "Non-IBR" service.
4.
Magnetic Particle & the Liquid Penetrant method of examination shall be in accordance
with Section V of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Article VII and VI
respectively. The entire area of the accessible finished weld surface shall be examined.
Selected root runs, subject to a maximum of 10%, before finished weld, may also be
examined, at the discretion of the engineer-in-charge.
5.
a)
Wherever MP / LP testing is specified, either MP or LP test may be used. But

wherever only MP test is specified, LP method of examination may be used only
if MP examination is impracticable in the field as concurred by EIL site-in charge.
b)
"Random 10%" of Liquid Penetrant / Magnetic Particle test shall mean testing, by
applicable test, one weld for each ten welds or less made by the same welding
procedure or operator or both. Similarly "Random 20%" shall mean testing, by
applicable test, one weld for each five welds or less made by the same welding
procedure or operator or both.
c)
When Liquid Penetrant examination is specified, the surface shall be free of

peened discontinuities. Abrasive blast cleaning shall be followed by light surface
grinding prior to Liquid Penetrant examination.
d)
Inspection shall be performed in the welds excluding those for which radiography
has been done.
e)
Girth weld, branch weld, attachment weld & socket weld of 3-1/2% Ni steel shall
be Liquid Penetrant tested only when welded with austenitic material where MP
test has been specified.
Radiography:
a)
"Random 10% or 20% radiography" shall mean examining not less than one from
each 10 welds or less in case of "Random 10% radiography" or one from each
five welds or less in case of "Random 20% radiography" made by the same
welding procedure or welder or both. Irrespective of percentage, no. of welds to
be radiographed shall be minimum 1. However first two welds made by each
welder shall also be radiographed in case of "Random radiography". Welds
selected for examination shall not include flange welds and shall be radiographed
for their entire length. However, where it is impossible or impracticable to
examine the entire weld length of field welds for either random or 100%
radiography, and if the same impossibility is agreeable to EIL site-in- charge, then
a single 120 deg. exposure of the weld length may be given a Magnetic Particle
test or Liquid Penetrant test. However in such cases for ferro-magnetic materials,
only MP test shall be acceptable for classes higher than 600#.
b)
In-process examination shall not be substituted for any required radiographic

examination.
Page 727 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
c)
6.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 11 of 13
Number of radiographs per one circumferential weld shall be as per ASME Sec.V
Articles 2 and 22.
When radiography or other non destructive inspection is specified, acceptance criteria for
repairs or defects shall be as follows:
a)
In case of 100% examination, any unacceptable weld shall be repaired and

reinspected.
b)
If required random examination reveals a defect requiring repair, then:

b.1
Two additional examinations of same type shall be made of the same kind
of item (if welded joint, then by the same welding procedure or operator
or both).
b.2
If the group of items examined as required by b.1 above is acceptable, the

items requiring repair shall be repaired or replaced and reexamined as
required and all items represented by this additional examination shall be
accepted.
b.3
If any of the items examined as required by b.1 above reveals a defect

requiring repair, two further comparable items shall be examined for each
defective item found by examination.
b.4
If all the items examined as required by b.3 are acceptable, the items
requiring repair shall be repaired or replaced and reexamined as required,
and all items represented by this further examination shall be accepted.
b.5
Number of times repair welding could be done for the same weld before
acceptance shall be as follows:
b.6
Material
No. of times repair welding is allowed
C.S. upto 300 #
3 or less
C.S. above 300 #
2 or less
Killed steel
2 or less
Low alloy steel
2 or less
Austenitic S.S.
2 or less
3.5 Ni steel
2 or less
Al & Al base alloy
2 or less
Cu & Cu base alloy
2 or less
Others
2 or less
Welds not found acceptable for allowed number of times of repair as per
b.5 above shall be replaced and reexamined.
Page 728 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
b.7
7.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 12 of 13
If any of the items examined as required by b.4 above reveals a defect

requiring repair, all items represented by these examinations shall be
either :
-
repaired or replaced and reexamined as required.
fully examined and repaired or replaced as necessary, and

reexamined as necessary.
Hardness Test:
a)
Hardness test shall be in accordance with ASTM specification E10.

Hardness tests of the heat affected zone shall be made at a point as near as
practicable to the edge of the weld. One test per weld shall be performed.
b)
Hardness test where specifically called out in Table-I of this specification

or in PMS, shall be carried out irrespective of thickness and to the extent
(%age) as mentioned therein.
c)
All welds which are given heat treatment shall be hardness tested.
Hardness test shall be performed after final heat treatment.
d)
A minimum of 10% of welds, hot bends, and hot formed components in

each furnace heat treated batch and 100% of those which are locally heat
treated shall be hardness tested.
e)
Hardness test requirement not covered in this specification shall be as per

ASME B31.3.
f)
The hardness limit applies to the weld and heat affected zone. Following
hardness values shall be maintained:
g)
Base Metal Group
Maximum
Hardness
(BHN/RC)
CS
238BHN/RC22
CS (NACE), Caustic,
Amine, H2
200BHN
Cr Upto 2%
225BHN
Cr 2.25%-10%
241BHN
18/8 SS (NACE)
RC22
Duplex SS (NACE)
RC28
Inconel 625 (NACE)
RC35
In case hardness values are mentioned in both Welding Specification

Charts for Piping Classes, IREP project & table given in Note-7(f), the
lower of the two values shall be applicable.
Page 729 of 1744
JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR NON DESTRUCTIVE
OF PIPING
8.
A702-6-44-0016-4070
Rev. A
Page 13 of 13
For IBR service lines, following IBR requirements shall apply in addition to the notes 4, 5, 6,
7, 12 and Table I. In case of conflict between above notes and these requirements, the more
stringent ones shall apply. IBR piping shall be erected of IBR inspector approved material and
construction procedure. Erected piping shall be hydrotested, inspected and approved by IBR
inspector.
a)
Piping over 102 mm (4") bore:

10% of welds made by each welder on a pipeline with a minimum of two welds per
welder, selected at random, shall be subjected to radiography.
b)
Piping 102 mm (4") bore and under, but not less than 38 mm (1-1/2") bore:
Two percent of welds made by each welder on a pipeline with a minimum of one weld
per welder, selected at random, shall be subjected to radiography or may be cut for
visual examination and tests.
c)
Piping less than 38 mm (1.5") bore:

Special tests are not normally required but 2% of welds by each welder on a pipe line
may be cut out from the pipeline for the visual examination and bend tests.
d)
Retests:
If any test specimen is unsatisfactory, two further weld specimens for retests shall be
selected from the production welds and subjected to tests. In the event of failure of
any retest specimens, the production welds carried out by this welder subsequent to
the previous test shall be given special consideration.
9.
For fabricated fittings LP test shall be done on the final pass of welding only, in addition to
visual examination.
10.
For mitres and fabricated reducers, LP / MP test shall be done on root pass in addition to
radiography applicable to circumferential joint of respective piping class.
11.
For branch connections, LP/MP test shall be done on root pass and final pass.
12.
10% of the butt weld joints shall be radiographed, however, 50% of these butt weld joints
shall be field weld joints.
13.
In addition to radiography, butt weld joints for NACE classes (A16A, B16A, D16A, etc) shall
be wet fluorescent magnetic particle tested.
14.
For lined specs, testing (MP/LP/Radiography etc.) shall be performed before lining.
15.
Weld deposits should be checked for ferrite content. A Ferrite Number (FN) of not less than
3 percent and not more than 10 percent is required to avoid sigma phase embrittlement during
post weld heat treatment and high temperature service. FN may be determined by use of a
Ferrite scope or may be calculated using Schaeffler or DeLong diagrams (the De Long
diagram should be used if FCAW welding is performed). Ferrite scope measurements must be
made prior to post weld heat treatment to be meaningful.
Page 730 of 1744
Page 731 of 1744
REF. DWG. NO.
REFERENCE DRAWING TITLE
N55000
N
NOTES :N50000
Take off point

Terminal point
N45000
N40000
GREEN
BEL
WI
DE
E55000
E50000
N35000
E45000
E40000
IDE
0MW
.
0
0
2
T
EN
BE
LT
200
.0
MW
IDE
A
E-9
RV
4/8
FC
63.9
UR
9T
VE
P-1
-9A
OF
CU
RV
E-9
B
CU
OF
P-1
4/8
37
T
CH
CH
4/9
15.1
4T
F CUR
VE-9C
CH 4/
909.03
SUB - STN-15
CH 4/
987.13
TP
TP-1 O
-2 OF
CURV
E-9C
CH
CH
4/9
42.1
P-2
O
3T
P-2
OF
C
UR
VE
-9B
GR
EE
NB
ELT
200
.0
M
GR
E
NITROGEN PLANT
(BY BOCIL)
SRR-7
(32.5X12.0)
POND
DET-2
EE
GR
LT
BE
0
0.
20
M
E
ID
W
EN
E
GR
LT
BE
0.
20
POND
P.S.
W
SULPHUR YARD
E
ID
GRE
EN
BEL
T2
00.
0M
LIQUID SULPHUR
LOADING GANTRY
WEIGH
BRIDGE
0M
SULPHUR
TANKS
GREEN BELT 200.0 M WIDE
WID
E
D
25
24
B
A
24
28
30
25
DATE
26
30
1.0
16.5
REVISIONS
BY
CHKD APPD
14.5
25
25
45
16.5
24
30
16.5
BHARAT OMAN
REFINERIES LIMITED
12.5
12.5
25.0
16.5
16.5
9.0
JOB NO.
UNIT
DIVN. DEPT.
DWG. NO.
3-1641-0500 REV.2
REV.
A0-1189 x 841
Page 732 of 1744
SCALE
Page 733 of 1744
Page 734 of 1744
1
3
4
4
DRAWINGS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-DR-4070 Rev.0
Page 1 of 3
DRAWINGS
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
02.02.2016
ISSUED FOR BIDS
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 735 of 1744
DRAWINGS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 736 of 1744
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-DR-4070-Rev.0
Page 2 of 3
DRAWINGS
STRUCTURAL
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-DR-4070-Rev.0
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
Page 3 of 3
LIST OF DRAWINGS
S.N.
TITLE
REV
SHTS
Overall plot plan
A702-000-16-47-0001
Cross section details of stone masonry drain
A702-000-81-41-34140
Cross section of Road
A702-000-81-41-44701
Page 737 of 1744
DRAWING NO
Page 738 of 1744
Page 739 of 1744
Page 740 of 1744
Page 741 of 1744
Page 742 of 1744
Page 743 of 1744
Page 744 of 1744
Page 745 of 1744
Page 746 of 1744
Page 747 of 1744
Page 748 of 1744
Page 749 of 1744
Page 750 of 1744
Page 751 of 1744
Page 752 of 1744
Page 753 of 1744
Page 754 of 1744
Page 755 of 1744
Page 756 of 1744
Page 757 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
gz:Er OW.5
,
- ovl
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6 -48 -0002 Rev. 6

Page 1 of 14
micico f4f4RM'
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
25/09/14
REVISED AND REISSUED
28/06/13
DS
SPC
PB
DM
07/07/10
SPC
PB
MIUDM
ND
31/07/06
PPP
AK
SMA
VJN
06/05/02
AK
SMA
NN
GRR
23/02/98
PPP
AK
NN
AS
04/02/92
ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION

(RECOMPOSED IN AUGUST 1995)
SCM
AK
KNP
RNS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
Approved by
Page 758 of 1744
$'fg- rf 2f51dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iA Glrol
of mdra Uncleital,N)
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:
BHN
CT
E1L
GA
HTB
IS
LT
MOC
MT
QA
SS
SWL
Brinell Hardness Nurnber

Cross Travel
Enoineers India Limited
General Arrangement
High Tensile Brass
Indian Standard
Long Travel
Metric Tonnes
Quality Assurance
Stainless Steel
Safe Working Load
Packaged Equipment Standards Committee

Convenor: Mr. P. Bhattacharjee
Members : Mr. Sanjay Mazumdar

Mr. P. P Pandey
Mr. Shishupal Choudhaiy
Mr. R.R Shrivastava
Mr. K.0 Paikar
Mr. A. Natarajan
Mr. K.V.K Naidu (Projects)
Page 759 of 1744
k31
fa2e5
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
of ifitho
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 14
Contents
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
5.0
PROTECTION AND PAINTING
6.0
PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION
7.0
SPARE PARTS
ANNEXURE-I
.14
Page 760 of 1744
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
GoA nt Indo UndeitakiN,
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 14
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Electric Overhead Travelling (EOT) Crane, complete
with al I accessories.
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

2.1
This standard is based on the following Indian Standards, and the standards referred therein,
which shall be deemed to be part of this standard:
IS-3177
Code of practice for Electric Overhead Travelling Cranes and

Gantry Cranes other than Steel Work Cranes.
IS-807
Design, Erection and Testing (Structural Portion) of Cranes and

Hoists Code of practice
1S- 15560
Point hooks with shank up to 160 Tonne-Specification
IS-5749
Specification for Forged Ramshorn Hooks
IS- 3443
Specification for Crane Rail Sections
IS-2266
Steel Wire Ropes for General Engineering PurposesSpecification
IS-304
Specification for High Tensile Brass Ingots and Castings
IS-305
Specification for Aluminium Bronze Ingots and Castings
E1L Std.- 7-76-0103
Instructions to Vendor for Site Perfonnance guarantee

Requirements for Package units.
Latest revision of the above-inentioned standards as on the date of enquiry shall be applicable.
2.2
Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3
For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable good engineering
practices and norms of the industry shall be applicable.
2.4
National laws and statutory provisions, together with any Local by-laws for the state wherein
crane is required to be installed shall be complied with.
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

Technical requirements of EOT Crane shall be as per Codes and Standards referred in Clause
2.1 above, subject to the following additions, deletions and modifications:
3.1
Addition / Deletion / Modifications to IS-3177: 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010)

i)
Clause no. 7.4.8.2 (Addition): For double girder EOT crane, a full-length platform
shall be provided on drive side girder. Two short platforrns shall be provided on nondrive side girder at both ends.
ii)
Clause no. 8.1.1 (Modification): Unless otherwise specified, for crane capacity of less
than 50MT, lifting hooks shall comply with IS 15560 and for crane capacity of 50MT
and above , lifting hook shall be Ramshorn type and shall comply with IS 5749.
Page 761 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
GuN inda
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 14
i)
Clause no. 8.1.2 (Modification): lIook latch shall be provided on al I hooks.
iv)
Clause no. 8.3.1 (Addition): Wire ropes shall be either 6x36 or 6x37 construction,
unless specified otherw ise.
v)
Clause no. 8.4.3 (Modification): The drum shall be flanged on both ends.
vi)
Clause no. 8.4.7 (Modification): In case drum is fabricated from seamless pipe, then
the diameter of the drums at the bottom of the groove need not be standardized.
vi i)
Clause no. 8.4.7 (Modification): Cast iron drum shall not be acceptable.
viii)
Clause no. 8.5.4 (Modification): Nylon sheaves shall not be acceptable.
ix)
Clause no. 8.6.3 (Modification): Wheel hardness value specified is not applicable for
HTB/ Aluminium bronze tyres.
x)
Clause no. 8.6.4 (Modification): The wheel shall be made of forged steel. MOC of
wheel shall be C55Mn75 or superior.
xi)
Clause no. 8.6.11 (Addition): The width of wheel tread shall be 35 mm and 15mm
more than the rail bead, for Long travel and Cross travel wheels respectively, unless
specified otherwise.
xii)
Clause no. 8.7.1 (Modification): All bearings shall be anti friction type with dust proof
seals. Bearings L io life shall be minimum 10000 hrs for M5 duty class and 25000 hrs
for M6-M7 duty class. All bearings shall be of SKF/ FAG/ NTN make only
xiii)
Clause no. 8.7.3 (Deletion): Clause not applicable.
xiv)
Clause no. 8.11.2 (Modification): Spring buffer shall be used. Plastic / Rubber /
Polyurethane buffers are not acceptable.
xv)
Clause no. 8.12.3 (Addition): In case electro-hydraulic thruster type brake is provided
for hoisting motion, the same shall be provided with anti drop circuitry to arrest
dropping of load while brake is applied.
xvi)
Clause no. 8.12.4, 8.12.5 (Addition): Braking torque for LT and CT motion shall not
be less than 125% of maximum torque of selected motor.
xvii) Clause no. 14.5 (Addition): Unless otherwise specified, Radio Remote Control (RRC),
conforming to IS:3177 along with the following additional features shall be provided:
a)
There shall be common push button for siren and START and a separate push
button for ander bridge lights. Crane shall start with time delay after the siren is
blown.
b)
Operating range shall be 50 meters approx. for radio remote.
c)
Two sets of long life Nickel Cadmium batteries for the transmitter along with a
battery charger shall be provided ( i.e 1 set installed battery + 1 set spare battery +
1 charger) for each radio remote.
d)
Necessary operating license/ permission for the RRC system on the Crane shall
be arranged by the Vendor from the statutory bodies. License fee, if any should be
borne by the Vendor for the first time on behalf of Owner/EIL.
xviii) Clause 12 to 25 Section-3 (Modification): In case of any conflict between Electrical

Specifications of Material Requisition/Tender and electrical requirements specified in
the above refeiTed Indian Standard, the former shall prevail.
xix)
General (Addition):
a) Crane shall be designed for Mechanism Class "M5" as minimum unless
otherwise specified in datasheet.
Page 762 of 1744
flfjreg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ntiba I lnklettakiir4,
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6 -48 -0002 Rev. 6

Page 6 of 14
For crane with more than 10 MT capacity, LT motion shall be provided with two
speeds. Second speed shall not exceed 50% of main LT speed.
The end carriage shall be fitted with safety stops to prevent crane from falling
more than one inch in the event of breakage of a track wheel or axle.
End carriage/ crab shall be designed so as to enable the track wheels to be
withdrawn readily. jacking pads shall be provided for jacking up the crane for
changing crane wheels.
xx)
3.2
Clause no 22.1 (Addition): Repair cages shall be provided below the end carriage for
maintenance of DSL (shrouded conductor system) and current collectors. The
approach to repair cage will be provided from bridge platform by a ladder.
Special Requirements for Hazardous Area Cranes

i)
MOC of wheel shall be solid construction in High Tensile Brass / Aluminium Bronze
or all Wheels shall be provided with High Tensile Brass /Aluminium bronze /SS tyres
on core wheel of forged C55Mn75 or superior MOC. The minimum thickness of tyres
shall be 30mm at the tread.
The minimum core diameter of the wheel on which the HTB/Aluminium bronze tyre is
shrunk, shall be calculated as per the formula given in Clause .no 8.6.6 of IS-3177.
ii)
Wheel hardness value as specified in Clause. no. 8.6.3 of 1S-3177 is not applicable for
Cranes having HTB/Aluminium bronze/SS tyres.
iii)
Main hoisting hook and Auxiliary hoisting hook material shall be of forged stainless
steel / bronze coated forged steel.
iv)
The buffer striking surface shall be lined with HTB/Aluminium

bronze/Rubber/Polyurethane liner.
v)
Any mechanism where two non-lubricated parts mate, one of them shall be of nonferrous material like HTB or Aluminium Bronze.
vi)
Coupling guards shall be non ferrous/non metallic type.
vii)
All electrical components/equipments shall meet the requirements of respective area

classification.
3.3
Noise levet shall not exceed 85 dB (A) at one (1) meter distance from the source of noise.
4.0
4.1
Equipment shall be subjected to stage-wise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall submit Quality
Assurance (QA) plan before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA plan shall foffn the
basis for equipment inspection.
4.2
Testing at Works
4.2.1
Vendor shall perfoun tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of Clause 26 and 27 of IS-3177. Load and over load
tests shall also be carried out at vendor's works.
42.2 Any or all the tests, at purchaser's option, shall be witnessed by purchaser/its authorised
inspection agency. However, such inspection shall be regarded as check-up and shall in no way
absolve the vendor of his responsibility.
Page 763 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
of Indu Undeitdk,,,q)
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 14
4.3
Performance Testing and Guarantees
4.3.1
A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance of
the equipment after commissioning in accordance with PG test procedure prepared as per EIL
Standard 7-76-0103.
The procedure of performance testing shall be submitted for Purchaser's review and shall be
mutually agreed between the purchaser and the vendor.
4.3.2 A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the performance of
the Crane after commissioning as per clause 28 of IS-3177. Following parameters shall be
guaranteed.
i)
SWL of Main and Auxiliary Hoists
i i)
LT, CT and Hoisting Speeds.
iii)
Deflection of bridge girder
4.3.3 All parts of the crane shall operate satisfactorily with no undue friction, noise or display of any
other unfavourable characteristics during the performance test.
4.3.4 All equipment and component parts shall be guaranteed by the vendor against defective
material and design for a period as specified in Purchaser's general purchase conditions.
4.3.5 If any defect occurs during the guaranteed period the Vendor shall make all necessary
alterations, repairs and replacement at their own cost.
4.3.6 Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the vendor, and shall
be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test. Only test load shall be
provided by purchaser near test site.
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING
5.1
Unless otherwise specified in job specification, surface preparation and painting system for
fabricated items shall be as below:
Surface
preparation
Primer
SSPC-SP-10
(SA-2)
Finish Paint
One (1) coat of F-9

(Inorganic zinc silicate) @
65-75 ilm DFT/coat.
Two (2) coats of F-6A (High build

epoxy finish coating cured with
One (1) coat of P-6

(Epoxy zinc phosphate) @
40 gin DFT/coat.
One (1) coat of F-2 (AcrylicPolyurethane finish paint) @ 401..tm

DFT/coat.
polyamine hardener)
DFT/coat
@ 100 gm
Total DFT of Primer + finish shall

be 345 (minimum).
Refer Table no. 6.1, 6.2 6.3 & 6.4 attached at the end of this specification for the properties of
different paints (primer/finish paint) as mentioned above.
Refer Annexure-I for the List of recommended manufacturers of paints attached at the end of
this specification.
Page 764 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
140,1 1,1 India lInth,r131.,,,
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 14
5.2
Surface preparation and paintings for all bought out components shall be as per respective subvendor's standards suitablc for industrial corrosive environment.
5.3
The colour of Crane shall be golden yellow, unless otherwise specified.
5.4
All machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected against rust with a thick coat of grease.
6.0
6.1
All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment shall be
dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed to
provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match marked
for site erection.
6.2
Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small iterns shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main equipment,
item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
6.3
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together with
equipment.
6.4
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year of
manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
6.5
Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at site.
7.0
SPARE PARTS
7.1
Vendor shall submit list of spare parts with recommended quantities and itemised prices for
first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and referencing of spare parts
shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment is facilitated.
7.2
Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related factors of equipment
reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts and
availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
7.3
Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The commissioning
spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at site. Any
commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the commissioning
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time implication to
purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise spares from 2
years' operation spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be handed
over to owner.
Page 765 of 1744
iaWs
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 14
TABLE No. 6.1 PRI E

SI.
No.
P-2
DESCRIPT1 N
P-4
Chleriasted
l
Trchnical nme
priracrish
wa
rubbin- Zill
Phosphate primer. prrner
Sinsit pack, air
Typr actd t.-uutpusitivil
Volume ScIids %
DFT (Dri Film

thicknes,$) per c.uut it
Two pack
Iryingcbkirinalett polyvinyl butyral
resin medium
rublier based
curod with
maditun
phowituik; auld
pla:4.-. 1sed vtith
solulion
urisapcnilizble
pigmented with
plagieizen
zinc tetroxy
pignieeted with
chromate.
' c ii i li hate.
.
P-4
Eipy inc
phosphatc prirrier
Two component
polyamine crred
epoxy resin
mediurn,
p[guteuted widi
zinc phesphate,
P-7
21NG A,
LOCKITIE
ZRC
col4 galvonizing
One pook
Synthetic Itesin
based zinc
gairani2ing
lmilatiitinig arliu
92% of electrolync
zinc dust of
99.95%purity.
,
40 3
'
40-45
I 0 I
55 I
8-10
8-10
8-10
8-10
Ituzikg
130d/5
1.219.05
1.44.05
2.67 kg at 15IC
30 minurtes
2 hrs.
Afler 30 min.
10 ntinutes
40-5Dp
macrons
5
6
ity in M2/conti litrr

Weight per Inre in
kpilitre
Touch dry at 3CPC

minimum)
Hard dry at 30. 0
9
10
II
..
(maxirnuin.)
Overconting interval
Pot life at 3cre for two
8 hiS.
24 iirS.
8 hrs
24 hrs.
Min.: 8 hrs
Vtin: 4-6 lus,
Min.:81urs.
Dilin.:4 hrs
corportent painta
Tarrpozture (Resistuce
a
(mnuenum)
bl
Applicae
50C
Dr! service
Not applicable
6 - 8 lu.N..,
Unitirnited
NA
STC
Dry servicee
50C
Dry service
Not
Dry service
Page 766 of 1744
02d5
Slil
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ol
I Indp(1,3king,

6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 14
TABLE No, 6.2 FINI

SL
rio
DESCRITTION
Technical nane
Type ind
itiQl.'
Voluatc Solids %
DFT (Dry FRIn
thiclutess) per ,....oat in
microns
Thearitical covering
en ` in
F-2
F-3
Acrylic
Odorinatexl
Polyureihane rubber based
fiaish pairt fiaish pai nt
Single pack
plasticised
oblerin.sted
Two-pack
aliplunie
rubber based
rnedium with
isacynate
eared acrylic cheinical and
foish paint. weather
resistant
L.- s.
382
.10 3
F-dAili
F-6C
High build coal

lens
Epoxy-Iltab Build Selvent
tv
owing
ePoxY
cpoxy oaattitg
cootiag,
1-6A
Two-pack
Aroruatic
amine
eurcd epo>y resin
suitably
Inediurn
pigmentedF-6B: peiyarnidle
eured epoxy resin
meclium suitably
.i
nt4e4
6{3
Two
cured
Amiine
Adduct
.act
.,Ick, Two
. . ''''
''' .
_
with poryamute
cured
resin
epoxy
blended
cotalvzed
epor,
r....sin nsedrure,
.
suttably
surtably
,
pittmented
pi
991
653
30-10sr
30-40
100-125a
200-500
100-125p
11-15
11-15
5-6
2-3
,-,
$-L-6,5
1.150.03
1.150.03
1.4210.03
1.40-10.03
1:10:k0li3
30 minutes
30 rninutes.
3 hrs.
3 hrs.
4 hrs.
/r,4 /coatilitre
Weigilt Pes iikr ff'
kgs4itre
Touch dry at 30ee
1-1 d dry at 30C
(max)
Full core ar 30*C (for
inunetsinni high
Over-coatin,g interval
at 30C
Pot lifr..lapprox.) at
10 3.0C for two
canyenent paints
Temperature
Resistante
II (minirnurn)
16 his
8 hrs
r.11;11.12 hrs.
6_8 hr5,
80 'C
Dry service
rein
8 hrs
5 days
48 hrs
16 hrs
5 days
Ivrto.;
everni In
Min,: Overright
Max.: 5 days
iitia,; 8 hrs,
Max.: 48 113.
144in.; 24 hrs
Max.: 5 days.
Nett
applicable
4-6 hrs
10 tninntcs
4-6 lis
80C
Dry service
1120C(Dry
servicc.),
50C
(Imucrsion
service)
II25C
Irnrnersion
.
service
60C
Ilwmion
service
Page 767 of 1744
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in lluN ld
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 11 of 14
TAB Na. 5.3 Ft1VISH PAINTS

1
hcr
F-A
1 N1
Self priming type

urfact telerant
high build epoxy
conting (cornpktc
rust cultrul
coating).
Teclune 1 nasur
Two pnek epory

rcsin based
sultable
pigrnented and
capeble of
position
Klbering to
ari ua I I y
prepared surface
and old coutuag.
ITI
3
4
Volume Solids "A.

DFT (Dry Film
thxlc.ncss) per uunit in
m crans
Theoritied coverinir
capazity in heicoati
itre
Weight per Iner in
kgsThare
Touch dry at 30C
10
F-12
F-11
ticsM ttsistant
Iner;artit zinc
silicatc contng
tic mrdium
twopnck
Paint
seitahle upta
zerc dry temp.
A tun park air
driing self euring
solvent based
Inot-tanic zhe
Heat tesistant
s)nthetic medium
based
SIlicliteceatmg with
park
. .
.
zinc
miThimum 8"
Alumunum pont
, ,,
conten1 can ary rarn
sutable upto
The Enal cure of
250PC
the dry film diall
pass the MEK mb
test.
3M4O.03
60+3
Iltat rtsistant
silicone
.
, ,
Alurnmann raint
sititable upto
5000c diy tonap_
Single pack
stheaue resm
based medium
with mominium
ankei.
''''
100-125
0.5-75g
15-20g
15-2014
15.0-7.2
8-9
10-12
8-10
1A1+0.03
2340.03
0.95+4.03
1.00+0 03
3 hrs.
30 minmes.
3 hrs.
30 minutes.
24 hrs
12
12 hrs
24 hrs
Sdays
"NA
NA
NA
Ovcr-coatingintental
f'10 hrs
Min.: 1,2 hrs.at 20C

!k. 30%R.11
Min. 24 nrs
Min.: 24 hrs
Pet life ai 30C for two

component paints
90 minutcs.
4.6 lu.
Nu aapplicxblc
Not applk.ahle
80 C
E:try service
400C
Dry scryke
2 0C
Dry service
500C
Dry service
(rnaxinsum)
78+1
F-9
1 farti dry at 30C

(mastinnun)
Full ;ure 30C (for
immersion /high
Temperntire
Rasistance (ux
Page 768 of 1744
IA,2A
laWs
Iii
I .0,1 t
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lindertakmg,
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 12 of 14
TABLE No. 6A FINISIR FAINTS

51.
No
DESCR1PTION
Technical name
' Type & coposition

m
Volurne Solids Vo
OFT (Dry Film
thickricss)per coat in
uniroos
Theorki cal covering
capacity in M2 feoati
litre
Weight per Itter in
kgsflite (inix palhlt)
Touch dry at 30C
(rnardmurn)
Hard dry ar 301`C
(maximuni)
Fu11 cure 30C (for
immersion ihigh
temp. service)
Over-coating interval
5
6
7
9
10
Pot life at 30C for

two cemponent
paints
Temperature
Resistaate
11
F-14
F-15
Two-corriponent
Epoxy
phenolie
coatin
g cured with
Polyarnine cured Polyarnine adduct
bardner
systern
coal mr epoxy
(primer
+
intermediate coat
+ linisb paint)
Two pack ambient
Spec1ally
temperature curing
fortradatcd
epoxy
phenolic
polyarnin
e
cured
..
system
coatmg
. ..
coal Mr eprocy
suitabie
for
for
suitable
uppliea(ion under
application under inwatiott
of
insulation
CS/SS piping
7 03
703
F-16
F-17
Ambient temperature
unOR Polv Silaxane
'
b id
cn.."-. ,,,,,,
cvs'" .5''' 111 .
cold appbed inorgante
copolymer
based
. .
aluminturn
coating
.
stutable
for under
insulation coating
f
CS and SS piping for
high
temperature
service.
Two
high build epoxy

pheaolicfnovalac
phenolic
epoxy
coatlig cured with
Pol
ine add utt
tur
dner system
Two
Amerceat 738 front

PPG Protective &
,
Manne Coattngs or
Interthent 7S1 CSA of
lotemational
(Aizzo
Nobc1).NO4C: 6
contponent
SOI'Vent flree type
cninpofte
tOlveid frOe type
6012
high build epoxy

phenolicinovalae
epenty
phenolic
coating cured with
Polyarniac addot:t
hardner system
98-100
100-125
75-100E
75-100
125- 150
5-8
4-5
7,0- 9.0
6.5 - 8
1.451-0.03
1,6510,03
1,3
1.7
4 hrs
3 hrs
1 hr
2 hrs
24 hrs
24 hrs
16 hrs
24 hrs
168 hrs (7 days)
168 hrs (7 days)
..
168 hrs (7 days)
Min. 6 hrs
Max.5 days
Min. 36 hrs
fvtax.2I d
Min.16 hrs
Max, Not appl icable
Min. 16 hrs
Max.2 1 days
4 hrs
4-6 hrs
I hr
1 hr
-45C to 125C
under insulation
And irrunersion
a) upto 400 C for C.

Steel & S. Steel for
.45C to 150C
i inertherrn 751 CSA
-45C to 150C for
under insulation &
.
b) upto 480 "'C for C. & upto 600 0(. ., amrnersloiri service
immersion
Steel
NOlt: 5)
for S. Steel for
Amercoat 738
Page 769 of 1744
g
SIJ1 IMJ e
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 13 of 14
NOTES (for tables 6. I to 6.4):

I. Covering capacity and DFT depends on method of application. Covering capacity
specified abovc are thcoretical. Allowing thc losses during application, min specified
DFT should be rnaintained.
2. All primers and finish coats
specified.
be eold cured and air drying un]ess otherwise
3. All paints shall be applied In accordance with manufacturer's instructions for surface
preparation, intervals, euring and application. The surface preparation, quality and
workmanship should be ensured. In case of conflict between this specification and
manufacturer's recornrnendation, the same shall be clarificd through EIL SMMS
department,
4. Technical data sheets for all paints shall be supplied at the time of subrnission of
quotations.
5. F-I5: Two-component Epoxy phenolie coating cured with Polyamine adduct hardner
system (primer + interrnediate coat + finish paint) suitable upto 225C (Intertherm 228
from M/s Alzzo Nobcl Coatings India Pvt Ltd. Bangalore). For all other companies, the
temperature resistanee shall be a maximum of 1 50C.
6. F-16: Ambient temperature ctxring epoxy poly siloxane Coating or high build cold
applied inorganic co-polymer based aluminiurn coating.
Amereoat 738 from PPG Protective & Marine coatings. Mumbai, is suitable up to
480C for CS surfaces and 600C for SS surfaces.
Intertherm 751 from Akzo Nobel Coatings India Pvt Ltd. Bangalore, Inorganic copolym er cold applied Aluminium spray coaaing iis suitable upto 400C of CS & SS
surfaces.
Copyright EIL Ali rights reserved
Page 770 of 1744
ul
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iAi,rM of Indo Undett.31,,n,4i
FOR
E.O.T. CRANE
6-48-0002 Rev. 6
Page 14 of 14
ANNEXURE-I
LIST OF RECOMIE-NDED 3LkNITACTURERS
Indian Vendors
3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1 0.
11_
12_
13_
14.
15_
16.
1'7.
1. 8_
19.
20_
Asian Paints (I) Ltd., Mtunbai

Berger Paints Ltd_, .Kolkata
Good1ass Neroiac Paints Ltd., Mumbai
Cheinguard Coatings, Muinbai(For Ameron. USA Products orly)
Chokugu Manne paints Pte. Ltd., Mumbai/Singapore
Shalimar Paints Ltd., Kolkata
Sigina Coatings. Minnbai.
CDC Carboline Ltd.: Chennai
Prcriner products Ltd., M.umbai
Coromandel Paints & Chemicals Ltd., Visakhapatnam
Anupani Enterprise-, 'Kolicata
Grand Polycoats, Vadodata
Bombay Paints Ltd., Munibai
Akzo Nobel Coatings and Sealants Pv. Ltd.. Bangalore
Cipy Polyurethanes Pvt. Ltd, Pune
Gunjan Paints Ltd , Ahmedabad
Advance Paints Ltd., Munibai
VCM Polyurethane Paints (for polyurethane paints .only)
Jomn Paints, Chennai(Singapore)
Chembond Chemicals Ltd, Navi Mumbai
Vendors
1.
2.
3,
4_
5.
6.
7.
Sigma Coatings, S'-ngapore

Ameroa, USA
Kiinsai Paints., Japan
Hempel Paints, USA
Valspar Corporation., USA
Akzo NobelInternational Coafings, UK
Jotun Painft, Singapore
Frir ni.-lunnidifientinn equipment (nn Rent21 Rasis)

l.
Techniral Drying Equipment (Asia) Pvt_ Limited Gurgaon. Haryana
.
- g chenuc
The fo1iomg are approved vendors for speciality items (phosphatin
1. Mark-chem Incorporated, Mumbai
2_Cbemtreat India Ltd., Nav: Mumbai
Page 771 of 1744
Page 772 of 1744
Page 773 of 1744
Page 774 of 1744
Page 775 of 1744
Page 776 of 1744
Page 777 of 1744
Page 778 of 1744
Page 779 of 1744
ara_.1t4
faf5ieg
rwasrld51,121714,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, ,ndia Un.,tak.ng)
11
FOR
VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
SYSTEM
11 C1
V
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 11
0:111ct/RICI fl.171
Rev)
FOR
SYSTEM
10/05/11
AA
APSA
MK"
23/08/05
AN
AJ
PKR
VJN
22/04/98
KLS
MST
NN
AS
18/01/91
ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION.

RECOMPOSED IN AUGUST 1995
KLS
RB
KNP
RNS
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
0
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Convenor
DM
Approved by
Page 780 of 1744
51
r Egleg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Gout 0/ India Undertak.91
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
AMCA
ASHRAE
ASME
BKW
BS
dB
GI
GSS
IS
SMACNA
UL
: Air Movement and Control Association

: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
: Brake Kilo Watt
: British Standards
: Decibel
: Galvanised Iron
: Galvanised Steel Sheet
: Indian Standard
: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
: Underwriters Laboratories
Packaged Equipment Standards Committee

Convenor:
Mr. Manoj Kumar
Members :
Mr. A.P.S. Ahluwalia

Mr. P.Bhattacharjee
Mr. P.P.Pandey
Mr. S.Choudhary
Mr. R. R. Shrivastava
Mr. M.P.Jain (Projects)
Page 781 of 1744
401 q-I
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ifg-4,
102-eg
FOR
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
SYSTEM
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
3.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0 INSPECTION AND TESTING
5.0 PROTECTION AND PAINTING
11
6.0 PACKAGING AND IDENTIFICATION
11
7.0 SPARE PARTS
11
Page 782 of 1744
ENGINEERS
lafaelei rCft
FOR
INDIA LIMITED VENTILATION/PRESSURISATION
$i ar fafflegW
elea =WO
(A Govl of India Undenalond)
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
(011M
1.0
frEI
Page 4 of 11
GENERAL
This specification outlines the minimum requirements under which the manufacturer shall
design, manufacture, test and supply the Ventilation/Pressurisation System, complete with all
accessories.
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
2.1
Latest editions of the following codes and standards as on the date of enquiry shall govern:
IS:4894
: Centrifugal Fan s
IS:3588
: Specification for Electrical Axial Flow Fans
IS:2312
: Propeller type A.C. Ventilating Fans
IS:2494 (Part-2)
: V-belts - Endless V-belts for industrial purposes-Part 2 Fire resistant

and antistatic V-belts Specification
IS:3142
: Pulleys-V-Grooved Pulleys for Endless V-Belts Sections Z, A, B, C,

D and E and Endless Wedge Belts Sections SPZ, SPA, SPB and SPC
- Specification
IS:3103
: Code of Practice for Industrial Ventilation
IS:277
: Galvanized Steel Sheets (Plain and Corrugated) - Specification
IS:2062
: Hot Rolled low, medium and high tensile structural steel
IS 655
: Air Ducts- Specification
BS EN 779
: Particulate air filters for general ventilation Determination of the

filtration performance.
AMCA-210
: Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic

Performance Rating.
ASHRAE
: Handbooks of:
- Fundamentals.
- HVAC Systems and Equipments.
- HVAC Applications.
2.2
Other international standards may also be acceptable subject to their being equivalent or
superior to those listed above, with prior approval of purchaser.
2.3
For provisions not covered by the above codes & standards, applicable good engineering
practices and norms shall govern.
3.0
3.1
For hazardous area application, fans shall be of non-Sparking construction.
3.2
Noise level shall not exceed 85 dB(A) at lm distance from fan.
3.3
The extent of over pressure in pressurised room shall be minimum 3 mm water column, unless
otherwise specified in data sheet/Job specification.
3.4
Centrifugal Fan
3.4.1
Fan casing shall be of heavy gauge steel volute chamber, rigidly reinforced and supported by
structural angles to prevent drumming. The joints shall be sealed airtight.
Page 783 of 1744
faigjeg
Igar
lailellakedireanagrok)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 11
3.4.2
Larger sizes of fans shall have split casing for ease of maintenance of rotor as per manufacture
standard practice.
3.4.3
The fan impeller shall have die-formed backward curved blades welded to the rim and back
plate to have a smooth contour.
3.4.4
Fan inlet screen, shall be galvanised wire mesh of 10 mm square.
3.4.5
The rotor assembly shall be dynamically balanced.
3.4.6
Fan operating speed shall not be more than 90% of the maximum permissible speed.
3.4.7
Bearings shall be sealed against ingress of dust. Bearings and Plummer block shall be of
SKF/FAG/NTN make only.
3.4.8
Bearings housed in plummer blocks shall be grease lubricated and of air-cooled design. Nipple
for greasing shall be provided.
3.4.9
Fan & driver shall be bolted rigidly on a common steel structural base frame grouted on a precast concrete block floating on neoprene vibration isolators.
3.4.10 All supports, brackets, gaskets, foundation & fixing bolts etc. shall be supplied by vendor.
3.4.11 Torque-speed characteristics of fan and motor shall be matched.
3.4.12 Volume control damper of multi louvered type & flame resistant canvas connection with
metallic flanges shall be provided at fan outlet.
3.4.13 V grooved Taper lock pulleys shall be provided with antistatic belts for drive.
3.4.14 Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/sec.
3.4.15 Electric motor drivers shall have a maximum continuous rating (MCR) (i.e., service factor
equal to 1) not lower than the following:
Centrifugal fan Rated BKW
Motor MCR (% of Fan Rated BKW)
Less than 22
125%
22 to 55
115%
More than 55
110%
The motor rating shall also be adequate for operation of centrifugal fan at specified minimum
ambient conditions at rated speed in un-throttled conditions.
3.5
Axial Fan
3.5.1
Fans shall be heavy duty Industrial type suitable for continuous operation.
3.5.2
Fan impeller shall be in metallurgy suitable for the fluid being handled. High efficiency
aerofoil section multi bladed impeller shall be used.
3.5.3
Impeller shall be dynamically balanced on a precision machine to minimise noise and

vibration.
Page 784 of 1744
51gar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Et&
Govt of India Undertaking)
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 11
3.5.4
Fan shall be suitable for mounting in duct/wall or as specified in job specifications/ data sheet.
Casing shall be all welded sheet metal construction with flanges on both sides.
3.6
Air Distribution Ducting, Diffusers/Grilles
3.6.1
Air Intake into each blower room shall be by provision of suitable opening in the wall through
louvers with bird protection screen.
3.6.2
All ducts shall be made of galvanised steel sheets conforming to atleast grade 120 of IS: 277.
3.6.3
Ducts shall be designed, fabricated and flanged as per IS: 655.
3.6.4
Duct flanges shall be supported with anchor fasteners in the roof. Anchor fasteners shall be
provided by vendor. Duct supporting hangers shall be used at a spacing not exceeding 2
meters.
3.6.5
All flange joints shall have 6mm thick Neoprene packing as gasket stuck to the flanges with
adhesive (viz., resins like Araldite or equivalent).
3.6.6
The entire duct shall be made air tight with the help of sealant (Foster 32:17 or MIRACLE D
617 or equivalent).
3.6.7
Ductwork shall be provided with following accessories as a minimum:

Turning Guide Vanes.
Splitter Damper with control rod & locking device.
Volume Control Damper (opposed bladed type with minimum 18 gauge blades and 16
gauge casing of GSS) in the main branches.
Fire resistant flexible connection between duct chute and supply air grill (if required).
Access doors for fire dampers.
3.6.8
Supply air grilles shall be provided fitted with sponge foam tape. Volume control damper shall
be provided with each supply air grille. Volume control damper shall be key operated from the
front of grille. Supply air grilles shall be provided with vertical & horizontal adjustable
louvers.
3.6.9
Grilles shall be of powder coated steel/ anodised aluminium construction with anodised
aluminium angle frame.
3.6.10 Both horizontal branch and low-pressure ducts shall be designed by the "Equal Friction"
method with a pressure drop less than 2.5 mm WG/30 m. Duct velocity shall not exceed 9.2
m/sec for main supply air duct. For branch ducts leading to grilles, velocity shall be restricted
to 5.1 m/sec.
3.6.11 All outlets/Grilles shall be designed with a terminal velocity not exceeding 3.8 m/sec.
Manufacturers' published data shall be taken into account for proper air throw/distribution,
noise, and pressure drop. Selection must be made to ensure sound levels below NC 40. Sound
attenuators shall be installed in ducts, as required.
3.6.12 Where a branch duct takes off from a main supply air duct, an extractor shall be installed.
Each extractor shall be adjustable to a fixed position to divert the required volume of air to
each branch duct.
Page 785 of 1744
Igar iEte-eu
2920AZ CMS)
F-r) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undonak.n9)
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 11
3.6.13 Transition sections should be constructed such that the included angle for a converging section
is less than 15 degrees and for diverging section, less than 10 degrees. When space limitations
require transitions using larger angles, splitters shall be installed in the transition (except for
fan discharge). Duct transition through fire rated wall should not impair the rating of wall.
3.6.14 All damper linkages shall be of SS-304 material.
3.7
Intake Louvers
3.7.1
Intake louvers shall be of 20G G.I. Sheet constructed in plain strips of about 120mm width
and maximum 1000mm length. The edges of the louvers shall be bent to provide lip to restrict
carryover of rainwater falling on louvers.
3.7.2
Louvers shall be riveted at ends and fitted in 18G G.I. sheet channel framework to be fixed
with nuts and bolts on grouting frame in the wall opening.
3.7.3
Intake louvers shall be selected considering maximum velocity across louvers as 2.54 m/sec.
3.8
Filters
3.8.1
Filter media shall be multi mesh (4/5 ply) high-density polyethylene and crimped to form deep
folds with efficiency of 95% to particles of 10 microns unless specified otherwise in data
sheet.
3.8.2
Filter shall be selected for a clean pressure drop of 6.5mm WG maximum.
3.8.3
Filters shall be suitable for mounting in carbon steel framework bolted to grouting frame.
3.8.4
Each filter frame shall be fixed with suitable gaskets to ensure proper sealing.
3.8.5
Filter shall be selected considering maximum velocity across filter as 1.78 m/sec.
3.9
Relief Dampers
3.9.1
Relief dampers are required to release excessive positive pressure inside the room beyond
design over pressure.
3.9.2
Relief dampers shall be counter weight actuated louver type with angle iron framework.
Louvers shall be hinged/riveted on rods, which are connected to common operating linkage
system. Operating mechanism should be free from all constraints and easy to get operated
automatically. Excessive air pressure should result in a horizontal force on louvers and torque
created by this force open the damper against counter weight and, when excessive air pressure
is released, it should close by action of counter weight.
3.9.3
Dampers shall be fitted on angle iron framework furnished by vendor complete with fixing
frame. Unless otherwise mentioned in Data Sheet, Damper blades shall be 20 Gauge G.I.
Sheet.
3.10
Fire Dampers
3.10.1 A combination of Fire and smoke dampers shall be installed in supply air path. These shall
conform to UL-555 and UL-555S for 1.5 hour fire rating and smoke leakage class I with
temperature category 176C. Type test certificate for fire dampers (equal or higher size of
same design) shall be furnished.
Page 786 of 1744
1092i
1fa
Og ,DI
faa-eg
I ./10, erel112 CPT ORM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.4
Gov. of India UnOeftalong)
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 11
3.10.2 The fire dampers shall be provided with limit switches for indication of open/close position of
dampers on vendor's local panel.
3.10.3 Fire dampers shall be electric motorized type with spring return unless otherwise specified by
Purchaser. Fire damper shall be arranged in fail-safe configuration, i.e. damper shall be in
open position when power is ON. In case of power failure, damper shall close by spring
action. Signal from the purchaser's fire and gas panel shall be made available at vendor's local
control panel in the form of potential free contact. The wiring from the contact up to actuator
motor shall be done by vendor. The same signal shall be used for tripping the fans.
3.11 Water Manometer
3.11.1 Water manometer shall be of inclined tube manometer.
3.11.2 Vendor shall include all connections, tubes and stand.
3.11.3 One water manometer is required for measuring over-pressure of room with respect to outside
and the other for measuring pressure drop across filter.
3.12 Air Pressure Switch
Air pressure switch will be provided, if specified in Job specification. Air Pressure switch will
actuate an alarm, in case of failure of pressurisation.
3.13 Specific Requirements for Offshore Applications
3.13.1 All fire dampers shall be pneumatically operated.
3.13.2 Fire dampers shall be automatic, fail safe type (i.e. damper shall automatically close by spring
action in case of failure of pneumatic air supply) and shall operate pneumatically.
3.13.3 All sheet metal duct work shall be constructed of tested quality Stainless Steel (SS-304)
sheets. All ductwork shall be as per SMACNA. Thickness of sheet shall be minimum as per
following table:
Classification of
Duct by Pressure.
Long side of duct

(L), mm
Low Pressure Duct
Medium
Pressure Duct
and High
Pressure Duct
Thickness of Sheet, Min.

(mm)
L < 750
0.5
750< L < 1500
0.6
1500< L < 2200
L<450
0.8
2200 < L
450 < L < 1200
1.0
1200 <L
1.2
3.13.4 Ventilation for Battery room shall be by means of forced filtered air supply and forced air
exhaust system. Minimum 15 air changes/hr. shall be considered to dilute hydrogen air
mixture below ignitable level. 100% standby shall be provided for supply and exhaust fans for
Battery Room ventilation. All fans shall be provided with a back draft damper to prevent short
circuit of air flow under idle conditions. Electricals for Battery room ventilation equipment
shall be suitable for area classification defined in the data sheet.
Page 787 of 1744
Eteez
MK, 2i20,17 4713q0.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 11
3.13.5 Ventilation for Emergency Generator room and TG room shall be by means of forced filtered
air supply and forced air-exhaust system. 100% standby shall be provided for supply and
exhaust fans in TG and EG rooms. Air circulation rate is to be calculated based on maximum
room temperature rise of 5C above ambient DBT or minimum 15 air charges/ hr whichever is
maximum.
3.13.6 Mechanical Workshop, Repair room shall be ventilated by means of forced filtered air supply
and forced air exhaust system. 100% standby shall be provided for supply and exhaust fans.
Minimum 12 air changes/hr shall be considered for ventilation.
3.13.7 For all ventilation systems, the air supply may be through ducting with grills, if so required
due to hazardous area in the vicinity. In any case the intake and exhaust shall not be located
on the same side of wall close to each other. The materials shall be selected suitable for
corrosive saliferous environment. In addition, rotating equipment shall be of spark proof
design.
3.13.8 Material of construction of major Ventilation and pressurization equipment shall be as
follows. All other items shall be as per manufacturer's standard design suitable for outdoor
saliferous and humid environment of an offshore platform.
M.O.0
Equipment
Fan Shaft
Steel epoxy coated with brass ring/lining for

spark proof design/Aluminium Bronze Blades.
SS-304
Filters
SS Mesh
Filter Casing
SS-304
Grilles/Diffusers
SS-304
Duct material
SS-304
Damper Casing
SS-304
Damper Bush
Bronze
Damper shaft and other operating

linkages
All fasteners for ducting, grilles etc.
SS-304
Fan Impeller
SS-304
4.0
4.1
Equipment shall be subjected to stagewise expediting, inspection and testing at vendor's/subvendor's works by purchaser/its authorised inspection agency. Vendor shall submit Quality
Assurance (QA) Plans before commencement of fabrication. Approved QA Plans shall form
the basis for equipment inspection.
4.2
Testing at Works
4.2.1
Vendor shall perform tests and inspection necessary to ensure that the material and
workmanship conform to the requirement of this specification.
Page 788 of 1744
O ar
g
fafku
1.11.21. 2WE1Z 0110,10.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
SYSTEM
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 10 of 11
4.2.2
Inspection & identification of raw materials as per approved quality plan. Test certificates
for materials, shall be produced for EIL Inspection.
4.2.3
Dynamic balancing of rotating assembly of fans.
4.2.4
General mechanical checks on fan assembly trueness, alignment clearances etc. for fans.
4.2.5
Mechanical running of fans, for 1 hour and general check on mechanical operation including
noise and vibration limits.
4.2.6
Performance test of fans at Manufacturer's Works/at Site as per applicable code depending
on availability of testing facility. However, for offshore application performance test at shop
is mandatory.
4.2.7
Type test certificate of fire damper as per UL-555 and UL-555S shall be furnished.
4.2.8
Visual and dimensional examination of various equipment components.
4.2.9
Any or all the tests may at EIL/Purchaser's option be witnessed by EIL/ purchaser.
However, such inspections shall be regarded as check-up and in no way absolve the vendor
of his responsibility.
4.3
Testing at Site
4.3.1
Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly and inspection of
manufacturer's test certificates.
4.3.2
Checking of calibration of Controls & Instrumentation.
4.4
Performance Testing and Guarantees at Site.
4.4.1
A field performance test shall be conducted by the vendor to demonstrate the guaranteed
performance after commissioning in accordance with test procedure to be prepared as per EIL
Std. No. 7-76-0103.
The procedure of performance testing shall be submitted for Purchaser's review and shall be
mutually agreed between the purchaser and the vendor.
4.4.2
The following shall be guaranteed and demonstrated during the performance testing:
Air flow rate across intake louvers & filters.
Pressure drop across filters.
Noise level in pressurized/ventilated room and fan noise.
Air flow rate through each SA grille.
Positive pressure within space.
Functioning of Pressure Relief Dampers.
4.4.3
Necessary instruments for the performance testing shall be arranged by the vendor, and shall
be tested and calibrated before undertaking the performance test.
4.4.4
The performance test shall be for the period of 4 hours of continuous operation.
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev: 0
Page 789 of 1744
lfgar 1851-es
(NIPT, FROM' ffA WSW)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
India Undertaking)

FOR
6-36-0002 Rev. 3
Page 11 of 11
SYSTEM
5.0
PROTECTION AND PAINTING
5.1
Surface preparation and painting shall be done as per Standard Specification for Shop and
Field painting (specification no.6-44-0004).
5.2
Stainless steel surfaces, both inside and outside, shall be pickled and passivated.
5.3
Machined and bearing surfaces shall be protected with varnish or thick coat of grease.
6.0
6.1
All packaging shall be done in such a manner as to reduce the volume. The equipment may be
dismantled into major components, suitable for shipment and shall be properly packed to
provide adequate protection during shipment. All assemblies shall be properly match marked
for site erection.
6.2
Attachments, spare parts of the equipment and small items shall be packed separately in
wooden-cases. Each item shall be appropriately tagged with identification of main equipment,
item denomination and reference number of the respective assembly drawing.
6.3
Detailed packing list in water-proof envelope shall be inserted in the package together with
equipment.
6.4
Each equipment shall have an identification plate giving salient equipment data, make, year of
manufacture, equipment number, name of manufacturer etc.
6.5
Vendor shall furnish procedure for prolonged storage of supplied equipment/ material at site.
7.0
SPARE PARTS
7.1
Vendor shall submit list of spare parts with recommended quantities and itemised prices for
first two years of operation of the equipment. Proper coding and referencing of spare parts
shall be done so that later identification with appropriate equipment is facilitated.
7.2
Recommended spares and their quantities should take into account related factors of
equipment reliability, effect of equipment downtime upon production or safety, cost of parts
and availability of vendor's service facilities around the proposed location of equipment.
7.3
Vendor shall also submit a list of commissioning spares with quantities. The commissioning
spares shall be sufficient for trouble free commissioning of the system at site. Any
commissioning spares required during commissioning, over and above, the commissioning
spares supplied, shall be made available by the vendor without any cost and time implication
to purchaser. If for any reason, during commissioning, vendor needs to utilise spares from 2
years' operational spares, the same shall be replenished by vendor within a reasonable time
without any cost implication to purchaser. Any unused commissioning spares shall be handed
over to owner.
Page 790 of 1744
ENGINEERS
lakgINDIA LIMITED
mren ewaire mjvam)
(A Gavt at India Undertaking)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
REQUIREMENTS FROM
BIDDERS
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 7
64)(11 Chrlf qui ciall -51-04ff

u tea aliikrrat t ?drift'
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Rev.
No
General Revision
12.03.15
04.06.09
Purpose
Date
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ

QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared by
Checked
by
SC
Standards
Committee
Convener
ND
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 791 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lft2
(AG'"ind'Undelt6ung)

SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
CV
Curriculum Vitae
ISO
MR
PO
Purchase Order
PR
QA
Quality Assurance
QMS

Convener:
Mr. M.P. Jain
Members:

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)

Page 792 of 1744
Igar
Oiren
llks
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
'A
Govt
At ' nth' Und"k"V)
SPECIFICATION FOR QUALITY STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev.
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
Clause
No.
Title
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 DEFINITIONS
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.0 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL
5.0 QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
6.0 AUDITS
7.0 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
Page
4
4
4
4
4
7
7
$1g-zg
IA GOVt of
120.2 .I J40.9)
India Undertaking)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 7
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Quality Management System requirements to be
met by BIDDER for following purpose:

QMS requirements to be met by suppliers/contractors after award of work/

during contract execution.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Bidder
For the purpose of this specification, the word "BIDDER" means the person(s), firm,
company or organization who is under the process of being contracted by EIL /
synonymous to supplier, contractor or vendor.
2.2
Project Quality Plan

Document tailored from Standard Quality Management System Manual of BIDDER,
specifying how the quality requirements of the project will be met.
2.3
Owner
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

6-78-0002
6-78-0003
4.0
Specification for Documentation

Requirements from
Contractors
QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL

Unless otherwise agreed with EIL / Owner, the BIDDER proposed quality system
shall fully satisfy all relevant requirements of ISO 9001 "Quality Management
Systems Requirements." Evidence of compliance shall be current certificate of
quality system registration to ISO 9001 or a recent compliance audit recommending
registration from a certification agency. The quality system shall provide the
planned and systematic control of all quality related activities for execution of
contract. Implementation of the system shall be in accordance with BIDDER'S
Quality Manual and PROJECT specific Quality Plan.
5.0
5.1
Page 793 of 1744
faReg
own
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
el
QUALITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

BIDDER shall prepare and submit for review / record, Project Quality Plan / Quality
Assurance Plan for contracted scope / job. The BIDDER'S Quality Plan shall
address all of the applicable elements of ISO 9001, identify responsible parties
within BIDDER'S organization, for the implementation / control of each area,
reference the applicable procedures used to control / assure each area, and verify
the documents produced for each area. The Project Quality Plan shall necessarily
define control or make reference to the relevant procedures, for design and
engineering, purchase, documentation, record control, bid evaluation, inspection,
production/manufacturing, preservation, packaging and storage, quality control at

Page 794 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gavt of India undertaking'

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 7
construction site, pre-commissioning, commissioning and handing over (as

applicable) in line with contract requirement and scope of work.
5.2
BIDDER shall identify all specified or implied statutory and regulatory requirements
and communicate the same to all concerned in his organization and his sub
contractor's organization for compliance.
5.3
BIDDER shall deploy competent and trained personnel for various activities for
fulfillment of PO / contract. BIDDER shall arrange adequate infrastructure and work
environment to ensure that the specification and quality of the deliverable are
maintained.
5.4
BIDDER shall do the quality planning for all activities involved in delivery of order.
The quality planning shall cover as minimum the following:
Resources
Product / deliverable characteristics to be controlled.
Process characteristics to ensure the identified product characteristics are
realized
Identification of any measurement requirements, acceptance criteria
Records to be generated
Need for any documented procedure
The quality planning shall result into the quality assurance plan, inspection and test
plans (ITPs) and job procedures for the project activities in the scope of bidder.
These documents shall be submitted to EIL/Owner for review/approval, before
5.5
Requirements for sub-contracting / purchasing of services specified in contract /

tender shall be adhered to. In general all outsourced items will be from approved
vendors of EIL. Wherever requirements are not specified, or approved sub vendors
do not exist, the sub-contractor shall establish and maintain a system for purchasing
/ sub-contracting to ensure that purchased product / service conforms to specified
requirements. Criteria for selection of sub-contractor, evaluation, re-evaluation,
maintenance of purchasing data and verification of purchased product (subcontractor services), constitute important components of this requirement.
5.6
BIDDER shall plan and carry production and service provision under controlled
conditions. Controlled conditions shall include, as applicable
the availability of information that describes the characteristics of the product
the availability of work instructions
the use of suitable equipment
the availability and use of monitoring and measuring devices
the implementation of monitoring and measurement
the implementation of release, delivery and post-delivery activities
5.7
BIDDER shall validate any processes for production and service provision where
resulting output cannot be verified by subsequent monitoring and measurement.
This includes any process where deficiencies become apparent only after the
product is in use or service has been delivered.
5.8
BIDDER shall establish a system for identification and traceability of product /

deliverable throughout product realization. Product status with respect to inspection
and testing requirements shall be identified.

ei
lge.ji id5fez
Oren erRRIZ .71.1.113,70
5.9
Page 795 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undettaking)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 7
BIDDER shall identify, verify, protect and safeguard EIL / Owner property (material /
document) provided for use or incorporation into the product. If any Owner / EIL
property is lost, damaged or otherwise found to be unsuitable for use, this shall be
reported to the EIL / Owner.
5.10
BIDDER shall ensure the conformity of product / deliverable during internal

processing and delivery to the intended destination. Requirements mentioned in the
tender shall be adhered to.
5.11
BIDDER shall establish system to ensure that inspection and testing activities are
carried out in line with requirements. Where necessary, measuring equipments
shall be calibrated at specified frequency, against national or international
measurement standards; where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded. The measuring equipments shall be protected from
damage during handling, maintenance and storage.
5.12
BIDDER shall ensure effective monitoring, using suitable methods, of the processes
involved in production and other related processes for delivery of the scope of
contract.
5.13
BIDDER shall monitor and measure the characteristics of the product/deliverable to

verify that product requirement has been met. The inspection (stage as well as
final) by BIDDER and EIL / Owner personnel shall be carried out strictly as per the
ITPs forming part of the contract. Product release or service delivery shall not
proceed until the planned arrangements have been satisfactorily completed, unless
otherwise approved by relevant authority and where applicable by Owner / EIL.
5.14
BIDDER shall establish and maintain a documented procedure to ensure that the
product which does not conform to requirements is identified and controlled to
prevent its unintended use or delivery
5.15
All non-conformities (NCs) / deficiencies found by the BIDDER'S inspection /

surveillance staff shall be duly recorded, including their disposal action shall be
recorded and resolved suitably. Effective corrective and preventive action shall be
implemented by the BIDDER so that similar NCs including deficiencies do not recur.
5.16
All deficiencies noticed and reported by EIL / Owner shall be analyzed by the
BIDDER and appropriate corrective and preventive actions shall be implemented.
BIDDER shall intimate EIL / Owner of all such corrective and preventive action
implemented by him.
5.17
BIDDER should follow the standards, specifications and approved drawings.

Concessions/Deviations shall be allowed only in case of unavoidable circumstances.
In such situations Concession/deviation request must be made by the BIDDER
URL of EIL eDMS is
through online system of EIL eDMS.
http://edocx.eil . co . in/vportal.
5.18
BIDDER shall have documented procedure for control of documents.
5.19
All project records shall be carefully kept, maintained and protected for any damage
or loss until the project completion, then handed over to EIL / Owner as per contract
requirement (Refer Specification Nos. 6-78-0002 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Contractors and 6-78-0003 - Specification for Documentation
Requirements from Suppliers), or disposed as per relevant project procedure.
Page 796 of 1744
ei
IftJr
kif51ft.
wirer riraxem3Tmil
6.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of India UndertakIngi

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
6-78-0001 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 7
AUDITS
BIDDER shall plan and carry out the QMS audit for the job. Quality audit programme
shall cover design, procurement, construction management and commissioning as
applicable including activities carried out by sub-vendors and sub-contractors. This
shall be additional to the certification body surveillance audits carried out under
BIDDER'S own ISO 9001 certification scheme.
The audit programmes and audit reports shall be available with bidder for scrutiny
by EIL / Owner. EIL or Owner's representative reserves the right to attend, as a
witness, any audit conducted during the execution of the WORKS.
In addition to above EIL, Owner and third party appointed by EIL/Owner may also
perform Quality and Technical compliance audits. BIDDER shall provide assistance
and access to their systems and sub-contractor / vendor systems as required for this
purpose. Any deficiencies noted shall be immediately rectified by BIDDER.
7.0
BIDDER shall submit following QMS documents immediately after award of work
(Within one week) for record / review by EIL / Owner.
Organization chart (for complete organization structure and for the project)
Project Quality Plan/Quality Assurance Plan
Job specific Inspection Test Plans, if not attached with PR
Job Procedures
Inspection/Test Formats
In addition to above QMS documents, following documentation shall be maintained
by the BIDDER for submission to EIL / Owner on demand at any point of time during
execution of the project.
Quality Manual
Certificate of approval for compliance to ISO: 9001 standard
Procedure for Control of Non-conforming Product
Procedure for Control of Documents
Sample audit report of the QMS internal and external audits conducted during
last one year
Customer satisfaction reports from at least 2 customers, during the last one
year
Project QMS audit report
Technical audit reports for the project
Corrective action report on the audits
Documents as specified above are minimum requirements. BIDDER shall submit
any other document/data required for completion of the job as per EIL/Owner
instructions.
Page 797 of 1744

ENGINEERS
101
** el!2RAfi'aA
Meavow INDIA LIMITED
IAIRON
IA GoN. Of India Undeftakingi
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 8
51(t)01
-4-4-<R1
tr-g 1-4-4vr
SPECIFICATION FOR
FROM CONTRACTORS
12.03.15
General Revision
04.06.09
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
MPJ
QMS
Standards
Committee
QMS
Standards
Committee
SCT
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SC
ND
Standards
Committee
Standards
Bureau
Convener
Chairman
Approved by
Page 798 of 1744
k311 ei
51g-a 015teg
1.1FA
2IETIN
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
DCI
eDMS -
FOA
Fax of Acceptance
HOD
IC
IRN
ITP
LOA
MOU
QMS
URL

Convener:
Mr. M.P. Jain
Members:

Mr. S.K. Kaul (C&P)

Page 799 of 1744
adaelei m,4 ENGINEERS

$1fgar 051ft
INDIA UMITED
Merl evensmaR3sTWIl
(A Govt of India UndertakIng)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
Clause
Title
Page
No.
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
3.0
4.0
DEFINITIONS
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4
4
4
4
Attachments
Page 800 of 1744
k391-4elei TEED ENGINERS

INDIA EL IMITED
lit15reg,
1.0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 8
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Documentation Requirements from Contractors
All documents/data against the Tender / Contract shall be developed and submitted
to ElUOwner by the contractor for review / records, in line with this specification.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Contractor
For the purpose of this specification, the word "CONTRACTOR" means the
person(s), firm, company or organization who is under the process of being
contracted by EIL / Owner for delivery of some products and services. The word is
considered synonymous to bidder, supplier or vendor.
2.2
Owner
3.0
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
6-78-0001

from Bidders
4.0
4.1
Documents/Data to be submitted by the Contractor
4.1.1
The contractor shall submit the documents and data against the Tender/Contract as
per the list specified in respective Tender/Contract.
4.1.2
Review of the contractor drawings by EIL would be only to review the compatibility
with basic designs and concepts and in no way absolve the contractor of his
responsibility/contractual obligation to comply with Tender/Contract requirements,
applicable codes, specifications and statutory rules/regulations. Any error/deficiency
noticed during any stage of manufacturing/execution/installation shall be promptly
corrected by the contractor without any extra cost or time, whether or not comments
on the same were received from EIL during the drawing review stage.
4.1.3

QMS
Drawing/Document Control Index
4.1.4
- 1week
- 2weeks
Index/Schedule
Documents as specified in Tender/Contract are minimum requirements. Contractor

shall submit any other document/data required for completion of the job as per
EIL/Owner instructions.

Page 801 of 1744
ei
acs
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 8
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
Before submitting the drawings and documents, contractor shall ensure that the
following information are properly entered in each drawing:
Tender Number
Name of Project
Owner
Main Contractor (if work is sub-contracted)
4.3
Review and Approval of Documents by Contractor
4.3.1

signed/stamped by contractor before submission. Revision number shall be changed
during submission of the revised contractor documents and all revisions shall be
highlighted by clouds. Whenever the contractor require any subcontractor drawings
to be reviewed by EIL, the same shall be submitted by the contractor after duly
reviewed, approved and stamped by the contractor. Direct submission of subcontractor's drawings without contractor's approval shall not be entertained.
4.4
Document Category
4.4.1
Review
Category
Following review codes shall be used for review of contractor Drawings/Documents:

Review Code 1

fabrication/ Construction as per the document.
Review Code 2
Proceed with manufacture/ fabrication/

Construction as per commented document.
Revised document required
Review Code 3

Document is retained for Records. Proceed with

manufacture/ fabrication
Void
4.5
4.5.1

Contractor shall create and submit Document Control Index (DCI) for review based on
date of submission.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tra
4.5.2
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 8
Drawings/documents and data shall be uploaded on the EIL eDMS Portal. The detail
guidelines for uploading documents on EIL eDMS Portal are available on following
URL
http://edocx.ei Lco. i n/vporta I
4.5.3
Page 802 of 1744
/A Govt of India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
Statutory Approvals
Wherever approval by any statutory body is required to be taken by Contractor, the
Contractor shall submit copy of approval by the authority to EIL.
4.5.4
Details of Contact Persons of Contractor

After placement of order contractor shall assign a Project Manager for that order. The
Manager.
4.5.5

Contractor shall submit monthly progress report and updated procurement,
engineering and manufacturing status (schedule vs. actual) every month. First report
shall be submitted within 2 weeks from FOA/LOA. In case of exigencies, EIL/Owner
can ask for report submission as required on weekly/fortnightly/adhoc basis depending
upon supply status and contractor shall furnish such reports promptly without any price
implication. Format for progress report shall be submitted by the contractor during
kick off meeting or within one week of receiving FOA/LOA, whichever is earlier.
4.5.6

Inspection and test plans attached if any, to the tender are generic and indicative only.
Immediately after receipt of the order, contractor shall submit within one week of
receiving FOA/LOA, job specific ITPs based on the indicative ITPs. Further, contractor
shall also submit Quality Assurance Plan for project activities in the scope of contract,
starting from manufacturing to handing over/ commissioning, these plans shall
cover/identify the activities, relevant procedure, if any, code of conformance,
resources for performance and checking/monitoring, approval requirements and
authority, records to be generated and audit scope by EIL/Owner.
For EPCC/LSTK/Package contracts, the contractor shall prepare a list of items/
equipments and their inspection categorization plans for all items included in the scope
of supply immediately after receipt of order and obtain approval for the same from EIL.
The items shall be categorized into different categories depending upon their criticality
for the scope of inspection of TPIA and/or EIL.
4.5.7

Contractor shall ensure that all documents viz. documents reviewed, manufacture's
test certificate etc., mentioned in Inspection Release Note(IRN), issued by EIL/third
party against the materials supplied by contractor., are sent to EIL along with the IRN.
IRN/ IC shall be issued by EIL Inspector/ third party inspection agency only after all
the drawings/documents as per DCI are submitted and are accepted under review
code-1 & code R. Material/Equipments dispatch from contractor's/sub vender's works
shall not commence till above condition is met.
Page 803 of 1744
Ogof
IOM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0,1.I
(A Govt W
Indio Undertalung)
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 8
Note: Non fulfilling above requirement shall result into appropriate penalty or withholding of payment as per conditions of Tender/Contract.
4.6
Final Documentation
4.6.1
As built Drawings
Shop/Site changes made by contractor after approval of drawings under 'Code 1' by
EIL and deviations granted through online system , if any, shall be marked in hard
copies of drawings which shall then be stamped 'As-built' by the contractor. These
'As-built' drawings shall be reviewed and stamped by EIL Inspector/Site
engineer/TPIA also. Format for completeness of final documents (Format No. 3-780004) is attached with this specification. Contractor shall prepare scanned images
files of all marked up 'As built' drawings. Simultaneously contractor shall
incorporate the shop/site changes in the native soft files of the drawings also.
4.6.2
As built Final Documents

As built final documents shall be submitted as listed in Tender/Contract.
4.6.3

Final Documentation shall be bound in hard board plastic folder(s) of size 265 mm x
315 mm (10 1 /2 inch x 12 1 /2 inch) and shall not be more that 75 mm thick. It may be of
index of contents of that particular volume. Where numbers of volumes are more,
0.15 mm thick duly fixed and pressed on folder cover and will have 2 lever clips. In
must be incorporated by contractor. Spiral/Spico bound documents shall not be
Each volume shall contain on cover a title block indicating Tender No., name of project,
name of customer, package equipment tag no. & name (if applicable). Each volume
will have hard front cover and a reinforced spine to fit thickness of book. These spines
will also have the title printed on them. Title shall include also volume number (say 11
of 15) etc.
4.6.4
Submission of Soft copies

Contractor shall submit to EIL, the scanned images files as well as the native files of
In addition to hard copies, contractor shall submit electronic file (CD-ROM) covering
soft copies of all the final drawings and documents, all text documents prepared on
documents, while for catalogues/manuals/proprietary information and data PDF files
can be furnished).
Page 804 of 1744
laraeles ENGINEERS
Ogell 22-eg W INDIA LIMITED

4.6.5
SPECIFICATION FOR
DOCUMENTATION
REQUIREMENTS FROM
CONTRACTORS
No.
6-78-0002 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 8
Contractor shall get the completeness of final documentation verified by EIL/TPIA and
duly signed by EIL or TPIA as applicable to the document folder.
Page 805 of 1744

fEr) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$afg7:11 tel5leg
Men eRali 4,30.0
DOCUMENTATION
Customer
Project
EIL's Job No.
Purchase Order No./
Contract No.
Tender No.
Rev. No. :
Name of the Work/

Equipment
Tag. No.
Works Order No.
Requisition.
Signature
Signature
Date
Date
Name
Name
Designation
Designation
Department
Department
Supplier/Contractor
EIL/TPIA
arTilittl/APPROVED
gTffTeR/ Sig
eilegiltk
tvi .
4/ Name: ......... .. . ......
...........
.....
..................
f4-41--/ Date: ..... .... ......

Format No. 3-78-0004, Rev. 1/ 12.03.2015
Page 806 of 1744
Page 807 of 1744
Page 808 of 1744
Page 809 of 1744
Page 810 of 1744
Page 811 of 1744
Page 812 of 1744
Page 813 of 1744
Page 814 of 1744
Page 815 of 1744
Page 816 of 1744
Page 817 of 1744
Page 818 of 1744
Page 819 of 1744
ENGINEERS
$ig-ar ffieg INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeftalongl
SPECIFICATION
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 18
5c1-k111
d-wci
r("R
f~r
SPECIFICATION
FOR
HIGH VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS
\k.
t
20.11.13
26.09.07
09.04.02
01.02.97
30.01.89
Rev.
No
Date
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
REVISED AND RE-ISSUED
SPECIFICATION
Purpose
'41
., -
CV/'' 7,Q
SA
BRB
UAP/JMS SC
SD
BRB
JMS
VC
UG
AAN
VPS
SKG
AAN
VPS
SG
AS
VPS
VPS
SKG
RCPC
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards Standards
Comm ittee Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 820 of 1744
$1&:1T12-&g
1.1127f c.-WsrxeMIJVCISA)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of incha Undeltaking)

SPECIFICATION
FOR HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 2 of 18
Abbreviations:
BIS
BS
CIMFR
CT
EIL
FM
FRP
IEC
IEEE
IS
JEC
LCIE
LRWT
NEMA
PO
PVC
p.u.
r.m.s
RPM
TETV
UL
VDE
CEA
DOL
VFD
OEM
TPIA
PESO
Bureau of Indian Standard

British Standards
Central Institute of Mines and Fuel Research
Current Transformer
Factory Mutual
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic
International Electro-technical Commission
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Indian Standard
Japanese Electro-technical Committee
Laboratoire Central des Industries Electriques
Locked Rotor Withstand Time
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Purchase Order
Poly Vinyl Chloride
per unit
Root Mean Square
Revolutions per Minute
Totally enclosed Tube Ventilated
Underwriter's Laboratories
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
Central Electricity Authority
Direct On line
Variable Frequency drive
Original Equipment manufacturers
Third party Inspection Agency
Petroleum & Explosives safety organisation
Electrical Standards Committee

Convenor:
Mr. UA Patro
Members:
Mr. BR Bhogal
Ms. S. Anand
Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary
Ms. N.P. Guha
Page 821 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Go" of India Undedok,nd)

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 3 of 18
CONTENTS
.4
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.0
OPERATING CONDITIONS
5.0
PERFORMANCE
6.0
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
7.0
CONTROL, ALARM AND TRIP DEVICES
13
8.0
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
14
9.0
NOISE LEVEL
16
10.0
MOTOR VIBRATIONS
16
11.0
CRITICAL SPEEDS
16
12.0
PAINTING
16
13.0
16
14.0
CERTIFICATION
. 17
15.0
PACKING AND DESPATCH
4
.5
..5
18
Page 822 of 1744
7111~1
$1g-aiffUn
r IMf
6
cv,er+W ,151~)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undetalong)

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 4 of 18
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply of high
voltage squirrel cage induction motors.
2.1
The squirrel cage induction motors and their components shall comply with the latest
editions of following standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) unless
otherwise specified:
IS - 5
Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels
IS - 325Three phase induction motors
IS - 1271
Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
IS - 2071
Methods of high voltage testing
IS - 2253
Designation for type & construction and mounting arrangement of
rotating electrical machines
IS - 2968
Dimensions of slide rails for electrical motors
IS - 4029
Guide for testing of three phase induction motors
IS - 4889
Method of determination of efficiency of rotating electrical machines
IS - 6362
Designation of methods of cooling of rotating electrical machines
IS - 7816
Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines
IS - 8223
Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines
IS 8789
Values of performance characteristics for three phase induction motors
IS - 12065
Permissible limits of noise level for rotating Electrical Machines
IS - 12075
Mechanical vibration of Rotating Electrical Machines with shaft heights
56 mm and higher measurement, evaluation and limits of vibration
severity
IS - 13529
Guide on effects of unbalanced voltages on the performance of three
phase induction motors
IS - 13555
Guide for selection and application of three phase induction motors for
different types of driven equipments
IS - 14222
Impulse voltage withstands levels of rotating electrical machines with
form-wound stator coils
IS - 14568
Dimension and output series for rotating electrical machines, frame
numbers 355 to 1000 and flange numbers 1180 to 2360
IS / IEC60079-0 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres (General Requirements)
IS/IEC60079-1 Equipment protection by Flame proof enclosures "d'.
IS/IEC60079-2 Explosive protection by pressurized enclosure "p"
IS/IEC60079-7 Explosive atmospheres-Equipment protection by increased safety "e"
IS/IEC60079-15 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Construction, test &
marking of type of protection "n"
IS/ IEC: 60529 Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IS/IEC-60034-1 Rotating Electrical machines Rating & Performance.
IS/IEC-60034-5 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical
machinery.
IS/IEC 60034-8: Terminal marking and direction of rotation for rotating electrical machinery.
2.2
In case of imported motors, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3
The motors shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
regulations currently in force in the country.
Page 823 of 1744
SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR HIGH VOLTAGE INDUCTION
Govt of India Undedaking)
MOTORS
t31
$1g-ar fafe5
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 18
2.4
In case Indian Standards are not available, standards issued by

IEC/BS/VDE/IEEE/JEC/NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5
In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents,

the most stringent one shall prevail. However, owner's decision in this regard shall be
final and binding.
3.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

3.1
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of the art technology and proven
field track record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2
Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the
offered equipment at least for 10 years from the date of supply.
3.3
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL
before phasing out the product/spares to enable the end user for placement of order for
spares and services.
4.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS

4.1
Ambient Conditions
Motors shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmospheres
found in refineries, fertilizer, petrochemical and metallurgical plants. Service conditions
shall be as specified in the motor data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a
design ambient temperature of 40C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above
mean sea level shall be taken into consideration.
Frequency and Voltage variations.
4.2
Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall be designed for continuous operation at rated
output under the following conditions:
a)
b)
c)
4.3
The terminal voltage differing from its rated value by not more than 6 % or
The frequency differing from its rated value by not more than 3 %
Any combination of (a) and (b)
Starting
a)
Motors shall be designed for direct on line starting or other method of starting as
specified in datasheet.
b)
Motors shall be designed for re-acceleration with full load after a momentary loss
of voltage with the possibility of application of 100% of the rated voltage when the
residual voltage has dropped down to 50% and is in phase opposition to the applied
voltage.
Motors shall be designed to allow the minimum number of starts on full load
indicated in Table below:-
c)
Min. Number of starts

No. of consecutive start-ups with
initial temperature of the motor at
ambient level (cold.)
Up to 500 KW
500 to 1000
KW
Above 1000
KW
Copyright EIL AII rights reserved
Page 824 of 1744
$'gar
92es
.417,2~ ,P727.4
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undenaking)

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 6 of 18
No. of consecutive start-ups with

initial temperature of the motor at
full load operating level (hot)
Unless otherwise specified, the locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at
100% voltage (time tE for increased safety i.e. Ex e motor) shall be minimum 5
seconds more than the starting time at 100 % voltage, under specified load
conditions.
d)
4.4
Unless otherwise stated in the motor data sheet, motors shall be suitable for starting at
80% of the rated voltage against the torque speed characteristics of the driven equipment.
a)
Starting torque and minimum torque of the motor shall be compatible with the
speed torque characteristics of the driven equipment under specified starting and
operating conditions.
b)
For heavy duty drives such as blowers, crushers, compressors etc., high starting
torque motors shall be provided.
This shall be checked against the speed torque characteristics of the load and the
thermal withstand characteristics of the motors.
4.5
The pull out torque at rated voltage shall be not less than 175 percent of the rated load
torque with no negative tolerance. In case of motors driving equipments with pulsating
loads (e.g. reciprocating compressors), the minimum value of the pull out torque at 80%
of rated voltage shall be more than the peak value of the pulsating torque and the current
pulsation shall be limited to 40%.
Unless otherwise agreed, the pull out torque shall not exceed 300% of the rated load
torque.
4.6
Direction of rotation
Motors shall preferably be suitable for either direction of rotation. In case unidirectional
fan is provided for motors, direction of rotation for which the motor is designed shall be
permanently indicated by means of an arrow. Any alteration required for obtaining a
change in the direction of rotation such as reversal of the fan, must be clearly specified.
Motors which are suitable for only one direction of rotation shall have this direction of
rotation clearly indicated on the motor together with the phase sequence of the terminals
associated with this rotation in indelible marking. Motors suitable for bi-directional
rotation shall be provided with a double headed arrow. Directional arrow should be
manufactured from corrosion resistant material.
Normally, clockwise rotation is desired as observed from the driving (coupling) end,
when the terminals ABC are connected to a supply giving a terminal phase sequence in
the order ABC. Counter clockwise rotation of the motor shall be obtained by connecting
the supply to terminals so that the phase sequence corresponds to the reversed
alphabetical sequence of the terminal letters. Ample space shall be provided at the
terminal box for interchanging external leads C and A for this purpose.
Page 825 of 1744
$1fg-ar 2fai
dg
1.11277 232,7,retTR,~3)

SPECIFICATION
ENGINEEFZS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Ift Govt of Intha Undertakingt
MOTORS
Page 7 of 18
5.0 PERFORMANCE
5.1
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty (S1 ), unless otherwise specified.
5.2
Motors shall have adequate torque to accelerate the load from zero to full speed under the
specified starting and operating conditions.
5.3
Starting current shall be 500% subject to IS/IEC tolerance for motors up to 1000 kW. For
motors above 1000 kW, it shall be agreed with purchaser for each case.
5.4
In particular cases, when the starting current is to be limited, care shall be taken such that
the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying
with clause 4.3 above of this specification.
5.5
In particular cases, when the starting with reduced voltage is specified, care shall be taken
such that the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time
complying with clause 4.4 and 4.5 above of this specification.
5.6
Motors fed by variable frequency drive shall additionally meet the following requirements:
5.6.1 The motors shall be suitable for the current wave forms produced by the power supply
including harmonics generated by the drive.
5.6.2 The motors shall be designed to operate continuously at any speed over the range (1
100%) of rated speed or as specified in data sheet. The characteristics shall be based on the
application in terms of constant torque / variable torque as per the driven equipment.
Additional cooling fan shall be provided if required to limit the temperature rise to
specified limits.
5.6.3 The motors shall withstand torque pulsation resulting from harmonics generated by the
solid state power supply.
5.6.4 The motors required to be transferred to DOL bypass mode shall be rated for specified
variations in line voltage and frequency.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
6.1
Windings
6.1.1
Motors shall be provided with class-F insulation. The permissible temperature rise above
the specified ambient temperature shall be limited to those specified in the applicable
Indian Standards for class-B insulation.
6.1.2 The windings, along with the stator, shall be tropicalised and shall be vacuum
impregnated(resin poor type).
Winding shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operation. In
this respect, special care shall be taken for the stator windings of direct-on-line starting
squirrel cage motors. Insulation shall be provided between coils of different phases which
lie together.
6.1.3 Core laminations must be capable of withstanding burnout for rewind at 400C without
damage or loosening.
Page 826 of 1744
11
5g-a 1&2e-g
CI,CP1t,
R1~1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inche Undertahrng)
SPECIFICATION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 18
In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads, special attention shall be paid
to the joints of rotor bars and end rings to avoid premature failures due to induced fatigue
stresses.
For Ex n and Ex e motors, the conductor insulation must be carried right up to the
terminal clamp.
6.1.4 Motors shall be designed to withstand impulse voltages specified in applicable Indian
Standards/relevant IEC. The wave shape shall be as per IS/relevant IEC.
6.1.5 Windings of motors shall be star connected. For VFD fed motors, the main winding
connected in `Delta' can also be considered acceptable subject to motor manufacturer
having adequate proven track record.
6.2
Terminals, terminal boxes and cable entries
6.2.1 The ends of the winding shall be brought out into a terminal box. The terminations shall
be by means of clamp type bushing or bushings with adequately sized bolted terminals.
Line terminals shall be properly insulated from the frame with material resistant to
tracking.
6.2.2 The terminal box shall be located on the right hand side viewed from the driving
(coupling) end. Unless otherwise specified, the terminal box shall be suitable for side
cable entry. The size of the cable end boxes shall be large enough to provide a minimum
distance of 600 mm between cable gland plate and terminal lug.
6.2.3 The neutral point of the star windings shall also be brought out to a separate terminal box.
This shall house the current transformers for differential protection of motors wherever
required and shall be located on the opposite side of main terminal box.
6.2.4 The main and neutral terminal box shall be of fabricated sheet steel. The main terminal
box shall be phase segregated type, unless otherwise agreed.
Motors can have elastimold phase insulated terminals in a common box. Ex d type (flame
proof) motors can have phase insulated terminal box of Exd rating whereas Ex p type
(pressurized) motors can have phase insulated terminal box of Ex d/Ex p rating. Ex d
(Flameproof) motors with non phase segregated & non phase insulated flameproof
terminal box duly tested at independent test laboratory can be considered acceptable
subject to motor manufacturer having adequate proven track record.
6.2.5 The terminal box must be of robust construction, with necessary clearance, creepage
distances between live parts and between live parts to earth considering air insulation and
without any compound filling.
6.2.6 The terminal box shall be provided with pressure relief flaps/devices for increase safety
i.e. Ex e motors, non-sparking i.e. Ex n motors and safe area motors, as per
manufacturer's standard.
6.2.7 The terminal box shall be capable of withstanding the fault current for a period of 0.25
seconds specified in the motor data sheet.
6.2.8 Appropriate phase markings as per IS shall be provided inside the terminal box. The
markings shall be non-removable and indelible.
Page 827 of 1744
Og-u02eg
1~1rrrmrr
en 3,70.1)
SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR HIGH VOLTAGE 1NDUCTION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
(A Govt of rttha Undertalon91
Page 9 of 18
6.2.9 The terminal box shall be provided with entries for suitable cable glands corresponding to
the size of the specified cables.
Equipment and accessories provided shall conform to the hazardous area classification
and the environmental conditions as specified in the motor data sheet.
6.2.10 An adequately sized earth terminal shall be provided for cable armour termination. It is
essential that all metal parts (mounting rail and cable glands) are bonded and connected to
the earth system. Bonding straps are also required across joints on non-active parts.
6.2.11 Separate terminal boxes shall be provided for space heaters, resistance temperature
detectors and vibration probes.
6.2.12 Main and neutral terminal box covers must be provided with handles to facilitate easy
removal.
6.3
Motor casing and type of enclosure
6.3.1
All Motors shall be suitable for installation directly outdoor and must have degree of
protection corresponding to IP-55 as per IS.
6.3.2 All internal and external metallic parts, which can come into contact with cooling air
(Piping, air supply and discharge conduits, protective grills air deflectors, filters and
supports etc.) shall be of corrosion resistant material or appropriately treated to resist
corrosive agents which may be present in the atmosphere. Screws and bolts shall be of
rust proof material or protected against corrosion.
6.3.3 Effective equipotential bonding straps to guard against the occurrence of sparks due to
presence of circulating currents shall be provided in type Ex n, Ex e and Ex p motors.
6.4
Bearing and lubrication
6.4.1
Motors shall have grease lubricated ball or roller type bearings or of the manufacturer's
standard type. However, 2 pole motors above 750 kW rating shall be provided with
sleeve bearings as a minimum. Sleeve bearings when provided shall be of proven design.
6.4.2 The bearings shall be chosen to give a minimum L- 10 rating life of 5 yrs. (40,000 hrs) at
rated operating conditions.
(The L -10 rating life is the number of hours at constant speed that 90 % of a group of
identical bearings will complete or exceed before the first evidence of the failure ).
6.4.3 Where bearing supports are attached to the motor casing adequate bracing shall be
provided on these supports to reduce vibrations and ensure long life of the bearings.
Bearings shall be adequate to absorb axial thrust in either direction produced by the motor
itself or due to shaft expansion.
6.4.4 Motor bearings exposed to high temperatures (e.g. motors for hot oil/boiler feed pumps)
shall have adequate provisions for cooling of bearings.
6.4.5 Vertical motors shall be provided with thrust bearings suitable for the load imposed by
the driven equipment.
6.4.6 Motors shall be designed to permit removing/replacement of bearings.
Page 828 of 1744
$1g-ar
6.4.7
vnrnav on.intatIO

SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
(A Govt of India Undettaking)
MOTORS
Page 10 of 18
Grease lubricated bearings

Bearings shall be capable of grease injection from outside without removal of covers.
The bearing boxes shall be provided with labyrinth seals, to prevent loss of grease or
entry of dust or moisture. When grease nipples are provided, these shall be associated,
where necessary, with appropriately located relief devices, which ensure passage of
grease through the bearings.
The motors shall have facility for on-line greasing.
6.4.8
Sleeve bearings
Sleeve type bearings shall be fitted with oil rings for continuous lubrication. The oil
reservoirs shall have a form suitable for allowing settling of any solids or residual
particles contained in the oil.
The covers shall be provided with suitable openings for adding and draining oil, together
with an overflow plug and level indication. The shaft shall have perfect seals so as to
prevent entry of dust or moisture.
6.4.9
Forced lubrication bearings

The oil lubrication system shall be independent of the driven machine. Common
lubrication system for the driven equipment and the motor can be accepted provided it is
separate from the seal oil system. The common lubrication system shall be provided with
suitable degassing equipments to extract gas reducing the probability of gas entering the
motor.
In the independent lubrication system, oil supply shall be guaranteed by one of the
following methods:
With a mechanical pump co-axial with the motor and supplemented by a separate
electric motor driven pump for initial lubrication during start up and stopping
operations.
With a separate electric motor driven pump. In this case the lubricating system
shall consist of two identical motor driven pumps, one running and one acting as
standby.
In addition to the pumps, the lubrication system shall be supplied complete with the
following as a minimum:
a)
An oil cooler of shell and tube type with tubes of inhibited admiralty brass.
Internal coolers shall not be accepted. To prevent the oil from being
contaminated, if the cooler fails, the oil side operating pressure shall be higher
than the water side operating pressure.
b)
An austenitic stainless steel oil reservoir with the following characteristic :

The capacity to avoid frequent filling, to provide adequate allowance for system
rundown and to provide a retention time of at least 3 minutes to settle
Provision to eliminate air and minimize flotation of foreign matter to the pump
suction
Page 829 of 1744
31
$.1gzff 02&g
1,1,3~
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Govt ot Ind,a UnclertaNingt

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 11 of 18
Fill connections, reflex type level indicators and breathers suitable for outdoor
use
Sloped bottoms and connections for complete drainage
Clean out openings as large as is practicable
A bypass line that returns below the oil level to eliminate aeration and static
electricity
A thermostat with two electrical contacts for alarm & tripping in case of high oil
temperature
c)
A supply and return system
d)
A duplex full flow filter with replaceable elements and filtration of 25 tm

nominal or finer as recommended by the bearing manufacturer. Filter cartridge
material shall be corrosion resistant. Metal mesh or sintered metal filter elements
shall not be acceptable. The filter shall not be equipped with a relief valve or an
automatic bypass
e)
The motor driven auxiliary pumps shall be provided with suction stainer and an
automatic/manual control system arranged to start automatically on low oil
pressure and with manual shutdown only
Sight flow indicators in each bearing drain line
g)
Temperature gauges (with thermowells) in the reservoir, after the oil cooler and
each bearing drain line
h)
Low oil pressure alarm and shutdown switches
i)
A pressure gauge (valved for removal) for each pressure level and a pressure
differential indicator to measure filter pressure drop
j)
Thermostatically controlled electric immersion heater with a sheath of austenitic

stainless steel for heating the charge capacity of oil before start-up in cold
weather. The heating device shall have sufficient capacity to heat the oil in the
reservoir from the specified minimum site ambient temperature to the start-up
temperature, as required by the manufacturer, within 12 hours. The watt density
of heater shall not exceed 2.33 watts per sq. mm.
k)
The oil pumps shall have steel casings unless they are enclosed in a reservoir. All
other oil containing pressure components shall be steel.
A control panel shall be provided for operation & control of the lubrication system. The
control panel shall include fuses, electrical contactors and thermal relays for the
protection and operation of the motor driven pumps, push-buttons, auxiliary relays and
timer relays for the automatic and manual starting up and shutting down of the oil pump.
Equipment and accessories provided shall conform to the hazardous area and the
environmental conditions specified in the motor data Sheet.
Armoured cables suitable for high temperature duty shall be used for extemal electrical
connections between the control panel and the lubrication system.
Page 830 of 1744
31
51g-ar
051eg
t-Ircort'as JOONO
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
GoN of Indu UnOeflaking)

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 12 of 18
6.4.10 Bearing Insulation-Shaft Voltage

Induced voltage at the shaft end of the motor at no load shall not exceed 250 mV r.m.s.
for roller and ball bearings and 400 mV r.m.s. for sleeve bearings. The non driving end
bearing shall be insulated from the motor frame to avoid circulating current.
The insulated bearing end shield or pedestal shall bear a prominent warning and
manufacturer shall provide detailed drawings showing insulation arrangement.
6.5
Cooling System
All motors shall preferably be self-ventilated. Motors with higher outputs having
manufacturer's standard designs using forced ventilation cooling or closed circuit cooling
employing external coolants may also be considered.
6.5.1
Self Ventilated Motors

A11 motors shall be fan cooled. The fans shall be of corrosion resistant material and
appropriately protected. For fertilizer plants, brass or bronze are not permitted materials.
The material of fan for motors to be used in hazardous areas shall be anti-static and nonsparking type.
Motors for installation in dusty atmospheres or in the presence of sand, fuels or other
suspended solid particles in the air shall be fitted with filters for the cooling air. The
filters shall be easily accessible for inspection and removable for cleaning and re-use. The
material of the filters and supports trays shall be rust proof or protected against oxidation
or corrosion.
6.5.2
Motors with forced ventilation

Motors with forced ventilation shall be equipped with two motor driven fans each capable
of supplying the full quantity of cooling air required by the motor at full load.
Where air cooler design permits provision of one fan only; the second fan shall be
supplied loose. Cooler design shall allow easy replacement of fan in such case.
The ventilating system shall include the flanges for the air intake and the mating flanges
for the discharge ducts. An airflow indicator as described in paragraph 7.3 (a) shall also
be provided.
Motors and fans used for forced ventilation shall conform to the hazardous area
classification and environmental conditions specified in the motor data sheet.
6.5.3
Motors with closed circuit cooling with water to air heat exchangers
The material of the heat exchangers shall be corrosion resistant (e.g. cupro-nickel alloy,
muntz metal, admiralty brass) and suitable for the type of water used. The heat
exchangers shall be designed for minimum water pressure of 5 kg / cm 2 and with head
losses not greater than 0.5 kg / cm 2 , unless otherwise agreed.
The heat exchangers shall be arranged by the side(s) of the motor, if possible. Screens
shall be provided to protect the motor windings from water leaks or leakage in the tubes.
Suitable drains shall be fitted for draining water in case of leakage. The cooling system
Page 831 of 1744
Og'w 42es
(.1127,,,,man.3~1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of
Undertak,o9)

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 13 of 18
shall include the trip and alarm devices mentioned in paragraph 7.3 (b). Heat exchangers
for identical motors shall be interchangeable.
6.5.4
Motors with closed circuit cooling with air to air heat exchangers
The heat exchanger tubes shall be of steel or extruded aluminium. All exposed surfaces of
the heat exchanger and of the motors shall be safeguarded against corrosion by
immersion in varnish followed by baking.
Joints between the heat exchanger and the main body of the motor shall be sealed by
weather-proof gaskets.
6.6 Rotor
The rotor shall be of squirrel cage type, dynamically balanced to provide a low vibration
level and a long service Life to the bearings. The accepted values of vibrations for a motor
at rated voltage and speed shall not exceed those given in the IS. The shaft ends shall be
provided with suitably threaded hole or holes to facilitate the assembly or removal of
couplings and bearing races.
6.7
Shaft extension
Motors shall be provided with a single, bare shaft extension with key way and key.
Motor shaft shall be sized to withstand 10 times the rated design torque.
6.8
Lifting hooks
All motors shall be provided with lifting facility (i.e. hooks etc.) of adequate capacity.
6.9
For motors provided with heat exchangers, lifting facility shall also be provided for the
heat exchanger.
Earth terminals
Two earth terminals shall be provided on the frame of each motor at diametrically
opposite points. Minimum size of the stud shall be 12 mm. Necessary nuts and spring
washers shall be provided for earth connection. These earth terminals shall be in addition
to the earth terminals provided in the terminal box for earthing of the armour.
7.0 CONTROL, ALARM AND TRIP DEVICES

All electrical contacts for the devices described below (e.g. at sections 7.3 & 7.4) shall
have a current carrying capacity not lower than 5 A and a minimum interrupting capacity
of 1 A at 220 V DC or 5 A at 240 V AC.
The contacts shall be located in explosion proof or totally sealed housing according to the
type of motor enclosure. The cable ends shall be brought together to the terminal box.
Any external connections between the housing containing the relay contacts and the
terminal box shall be carried out by insulated copper wires in steel conduits or by PVC
insulated, armoured, copper conductor cables with cable entries through double
compression type cable glands.
Page 832 of 1744
5-fg-ar Ofdl
eg
tmZrt ofsfewfut~)
7.1

SPECIFICATION
ENGINEERS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Govt of Indw Undertaking)
MOTORS
Page 14 of 18
IA
Measurement of winding temperature

Motors with outputs greater than 750 KW or those provided with filters for cooling air
irrespective of output shall be provided with platinum resistance temperature measuring
devices of 100 ohms resistance at 0C and a temperature co-efficient of 3.85 x 10 -3
located in suitable positions to measure the winding temperature. A minimum of three
(one per phase) detectors shall be provided between the coil sides to measure the winding
temperature and three (one per phase ), preferably at the base of the slots, to measure core
temperature, each placed 120 apart. TETV motors may not be provided with core
temperature detectors.
A separate terminal box shall be provided for the temperature detectors for hook up with
a remote located control / monitoring unit.
7.2
Measurement of bearing temperature

Motors with sleeve type self-lubricated bearing shall be provided with :
a)
b)
7.3
Two mercury bulb type, indicating dial thermometers for checking of bearing
temperatures.
For motors with output greater than 750 KW, a resistance type of temperature
measuring device shall be provided for bearings with connections terminating in
the common terminal box for winding temperature detectors.
Measurement of cooling medium for heat exchangers

Motors with forced ventilation and those with air water heat exchangers shall be provided
with:
a)
An airflow circulation indicator with electrical trip contacts that operate if the
flow of cooling air is interrupted or is inadequate.
b)
A cooling water flow circulation indicator with electrical trip contacts, which
close if the flow of cooling water is interrupted or is inadequate. The indicator
shall be located on the discharge piping of the heat exchanger.
7.4
Pressurization Control Panel

All pressurized motors (Type Ex p) shall be provided with a control panel for controlling
the initial purging and pressurization of the motor. The pressurization control panel shall
be mounted on the motor itself and shall be suitable for the hazardous area classification
specified in the motor data sheet.
The panel shall be complete with but not limited to the following items :
Timers
Push buttons for purging/pressurization
Solenoid valves/dampers
Indicating lamps for purging ON, purging OVER etc.
Pressure switches and flow switches with alarm and trip contacts.
8.0 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

8.1
Current transformers
Unless otherwise specified, motors rated 1500 KW and above shall have differential
protection and shall be equipped with current transformers suitably designed for
installation in the neutral terminal box.
Page 833 of 1744
$'gzrr IMfdleg
e../cnfc',
771~1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of looia Undedakongi
SPECIFICATION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 15 of 18
Unless otherwise specified, the CTs shall be supplied along with the motor and mounted
in the terminal box, which shall be suitable for housing the CTs and providing the
necessary connections. CT terminals shall be brought out to a separate auxiliary terminal
box.
These transformers shall have a secondary current of 1 A, and the characteristics of the
CTs (Vk, RcT and Im) shall be finalized at detailed engineering stage in consultation with
the purchaser. CT ratio shall be as indicated in the motor data sheet.
8.2
Anti condensation heaters

All motors shall be provided with 240 V anti-condensation heaters, sized and located so
as to prevent condensation of moisture during shut down periods. The heaters shall
remain 'ON' when the motor is not in service and shall not cause damage to the windings.
Motors with heaters installed in hazardous atmospheres (Zone-1 or Zone-2), shall
conform to the provisions of applicable Indian standards and temperature classification
The heater leads shall be brought out to a separate terminal box of the same specification
and grade of protection as the main power terminal box.
A warning label with indelible red inscription shall be provided on the motor to indicate
that the heater supply shall be isolated before carrying out any work on the motor.
8.3
Special tools and spanners

Motors with special features (e.g. motors with single bearing, explosion proof and
increased safety motors) shall be provided with a set of spanners and special tools,
required for dismantling and maintenance of the motor.
8.4
Motors shall be supplied complete with double compression Nickel plated brass (or
Aluminum, if specifically required) cable glands, crimp type tinned Cu cable lugs for all
power, space heater and auxiliary cables (for the specified cable sizes) and first filling of
lube oil for forced lubricated bearings.
8.5
Auxiliary motors, if any, shall be as per relevant Indian / International standards and shall
be suitable for the hazardous classification as specified in the motor data sheet.
8.6
Name plates
A stainless steel name plate manufactured from series 300 stainless steel and having
information as per IS shall be provided on each motor. In addition to the motor rating
plate, a separate number plate for motor tag number shall be fixed in a readily visible
position. This number shall be as per the motor data sheets.
Additional information as stipulated in applicable Standards shall be included in the name
plate for motors meant for use in hazardous atmospheres.
Page 834 of 1744
off
til2R c0vente11
,1,11r0,-.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt 01 In0. Undeltaking)
SPECIFICATION
MOTORS
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
Page 16 of 18
9.0 NOISE LEVEL

The permissible noise level shall not exceed the stipulations laid down in IS.
10.0 MOTOR VIBRATION
Motor vibrations at bearing housing shall be within the limits of IS, unless otherwise
specified for the driven equipment. Limits of shaft vibration for motors with sleeve
bearings shall be as per IEC-60034-14.
Two and four pole motors having sleeve bearings with forced oil lubrication shall be
provided with proximity probes to measure the shaft vibration adjacent and relative to the
bearings.
11.0 CRITICAL SPEEDS
The first actual critical speed of stiff rotors shall not be lower than 125% of the
synchronous speed. For flexible rotors, this shall be between 60% and 80% of the
synchronous speed. The second actual synchronous speed shall be above 125% of the
synchronous speed.
12.0 PAINTING
All metal surfaces shall undergo manufacturer's standard cleaning /painting cycle. After
preparation of the under surface, the equipment shall be painted with two coats of epoxy
based final paint. Color shade of final paint shall be 632 of IS: 5/ RAL-7035. All
unpainted steel parts shall be suitably treated to prevent rust formation. If these parts are
moving elements, then these shall be greased.

13.1
All tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's shop under his care and expense.
13.2
The manufacturer shall submit all internal test records of the tests carried out by him on
the bought-out items, motor sub-assembly and complete motor assembly.
13.3
All the type, routine and other acceptance tests shall be witnessed by EIL Inspector/TPIA
(appointed by OEM supplier.)
13.4
Tests certificates duly signed by the EIL Inspector/TPIA (appointed by OEM supplier.)
shall be a part of final documentation.
The following type tests (on one motor of each rating and frame size) shall be carried out
as per applicable Indian Standards and shall form part of acceptance testing :
Full load test and measurement of voltage, current, power & slip
a)
Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque and pull out
b)
torque
c)
Measurement of efficiency and p.f. at 100%, 75% and 50% load
d)
Temperature rise test
Momentary overload test
e)
f)
Tan delta test
Measurement of noise level
g)
Over speed test
i)
Measurement of radial & axial clearance between fan & stationary parts &
i)
measurement of radial air gap (if provision for measurement is not available in
fully assembled motor stage records/calculations to be reviewed by Inspection)
Page 835 of 1744
$ifg-ar
ca
C1,4>T2 Jrcr.4
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Incha Undertakm91

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 17 of 18
13.5
Routine tests shall be carried out on all motors.

The manufacturer shall carry out routine tests as per applicable Indian Standards. Routine
tests not limited to the following shall form part of acceptance testing:
General visual checks/dimensional check, name plate details including punching
a)
of statutory references.
Verification of type of terminals ( for Ex e , Exd & Ex n motors )
b)
Free rotation of shaft, direction of rotation
c)
Measurement of winding resistance
d)
Reduced voltage starting and running at no load.
e)
No load test and measurement of voltage, speed current, wattage
f)
Locked rotor test at reduced voltage and measurement of voltage, speed, current,
g)
wattage
Insulation resistance test ( before & after high voltage test )
h)
i)
Polarisation index
j)
High voltage test
k)
Vibration measurement (under no load)
Measurement of shaft vibrations in case of sleeve bearing motors
I)
Verification of mark of End play on shaft and measurement of end play, incase of
m)
sleeve bearing motors.
n)
Bearing noise
o)
Shaft voltage
p)
Resistance measurement of space heaters, RTDs & BTDs
Operation
of control panel ( for Ex-p motors )
q)
r)
Tests on the Ex d enclosures as per IS
13.6
The manufacturer shall submit the following certificates for verification by the
EIL/Owner's Inspector:
Test certificate from recognised testing laboratory for area classification.
a)
BIS
certificate for indigenous FLP motors and accessories as applicable.
b)
CCOE/PESO approved certificates for motors and accessories as applicable
c)
Fault level of terminal box
d)
Degree of protection of enclosure
e)
Impulse test certificate for coils
f)
Hydraulic
test certificate for coolers
g)
13.7
For VFD fed motors, all tests as specified in the VFD specification shall be followed in
addition to the above.
13.8
In case any of the Type & Routine tests mentioned above can not be carried out due to
manufacturer's test bed limitations etc., altematively calculations to establish the required
parameters as per International codes eg IEC, JEC etc. may be accepted which shall be
furnished to attending inspector. However, acceptance of calculations in place of actual
test shall be with prior approval (agreement between motor manufacturer & purchaser).
13.9
Though the motors shall be accepted on the basis of the satisfactory result of the testing at
the shop, it shall not absolve the Vendor from liability regarding the proper functioning of
the motors coupled to the driven equipment at site.
14.0 CERTIFICATION
The motors and associated equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/ CPRI/ ERTL/ Baseefal LCIE/ UL/ FM or equivalent).
All indigenous motors shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by Indian
testing agencies. All motors (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
Page 836 of 1744
31
Ogu 2f51-dg
'
,~ s-frcnr2 M,3,1-0.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ol InOia Undedaking)

SPECIFICATION
6-51-0031 Rev. 5
MOTORS
Page 18 of 18
approvals (e.g. PESO, DGMS etc. as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous
flameproof motors shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory
authorities.
15.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH
All the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of
handling during transportation.
The equipment shall be properly packed for
transportation by ship/rail or trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets
before being placed in crates/cases to prevent damage to finish. Crates/cases shall have
skid bottom for handling. Special notations such as Tragile', `This side up', `Centre of
gravity', `Weight', Òwner's particulars', `PO Nos.' etc. shall be clearly marked on the
package together with other details as per purchaser order.
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing
shall be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient
temperature, unless otherwise agreed.
Page 837 of 1744
lafsizeigh ENGINEERS
ezialiteuvr INDIA LIMITED

(WM eliMAECISIWI)
(A Govt of InOu Undeftalong)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
MEDIUM AND HIGH VOLTAGE
CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 10
Wig "CO ZW 41cit4A

c;sici Yd
an'rgrkv
Iffq 141-44T
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CABLES & ACCESSORIES
11.04.11
20.04.09
15/03/04
30/07/98
08/12/92
04/06/84
Rev
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
42i4A411
)d. 4CAN DM
AMPS
UAP
PB
UAP
JMS
ND
RKM
MN
VPS
SKG
SKG
RKM
VPS
AS
RKM
SG
GNT
RCD
SG
GNT
Prepared
by
Checked
by
StandardsCommitteeC
onvenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 838 of 1744
49.41
-ag,INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertakmg)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
BIS
BS
British Standard
CEA
DGMS
Director General of Mines and Safety
EPR
Ethylene Propylene Rubber
FR
Flame Retardant
HR PVC
Heat Resistant Polyvinyl Chloride
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IEC
International Electro technical Commission
IS
Indian Standards
NEMA
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
UV
Ultra Violet
XLPE
Cross linked Polyethylene

Convenor:
Mr. UA Patro
Members:
Mr. AK Tickoo
Mr. MP Jain
Mr. BR Bhogal
Mr. Arun Kumar
Mr. KK Gera
Mr. Saeed Akhtar
EiT lei ENGINEERS
IJMITED
eiges 0151eg NW INDIA
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
SCOPE
2.0
STANDARDS
3.0
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
4.0
CABLE ACCESSORIES
5.0
INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPANCE
6.0
1.0
Page 839 of 1744
SPECIFICATION
FOR
Page 840 of 1744
d01
eJ MA ENGINEERS
Ogem faVegNiie INDIA LIMITED

(A Govt of Ind Undertalong)
1.11,E71
1.0
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 10
SCOPE
This specification along with data sheets covers requirements for design, manufacture, testing
at works and supply of Flame Retardant Medium & High Voltage cables and cable jointing /
terminating accessories for medium and high voltage systems.
2.0
STANDARDS
2.1
The cables and cables jointing & terminating accessories shall comply with the latest edition
of the following standards as applicable:
IS: 209
IS: 1554
IS: 3961(Pt-2) :
IS: 3975
IS: 5831
IS: 6380
IS: 7098
IS: 8130
IS: 10418
IS: 10462 (Pt-1):
IS: 10810
IS: 13573
IEC: 60331-21:
IEC: 60332-3 :
NEMA-WC70 :
NEMA-WC53 :
DIN-53387
ASTM-G-154 :
BS: 7846
Specification for zinc.

PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables.
Recommended current ratings for cables: Part - 2 PVC Insulated and
PVC sheathed heavy-duty cables.
Mild steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of cables.
PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
Specification for elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables.
Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables.
Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
Drums for electric cables.
Fictitious calculation method for determination of dimensions of
protective coverings of cables: Part - I Electrometric and thermoplastic insulated cables.
Methods of test for cables:
Part 41: Mass of zinc coating on steel armour
Part 58: Oxygen index test
Part-61: Flame retardant test
Part-62:Fire resistance test for bunched cables.
Joints and terminations for polymeric cables for working voltages
from 6.6kV up to and including 33kV.
Tests for electric cables under fire conditions circuit integrity
Procedures and requirements Cables of rated voltage up and
including 0.6/1.0kV.
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
Standard for non shielded power cables rated 2000V or less for
the distribution of electrical energy.
Standard test methods for extruded dielectric power, control,
instrumentation and portable cables for test.
Artificial weathering and ageing of plastics and elastomers by
exposure to filtered xenon arc radiation.
Standard practice for operating fluorescent light apparatus for UV
exposure of non metallic materials.
Electric cables- 600/1000V armoured fire resistant cables having
thermosetting insulation and low emission of smoke and corrosive
gases when affected by fire.
2.2
The cables and accessories shall also conform to the provisions of CEA Regulations and other
statutory regulations, as applicable.
2.3
In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents for the
project, the most stringent one shall prevail. However, Owner's decision in this regard will be
final and binding.
Page 841 of 1744
Ofgtadital ENGINEERS
Igar laPlegvair INDIALIMITED
IMIPM 010=713113,1071)
IA
Govt of !Ma Undertalong)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 10
3.0
GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
3.1
The cables shall be suitable for laying in trays, trenches, ducts, and conduits and for
underground-buried installation with uncontrolled backfill and possibility of flooding by water
and chemicals.
3.2
Outer sheath of all cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of oxygen index
shall be 29 at 27 + 2 C. In addition suitable chemicals shall be added into the PVC compound
of the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.
3.3
All cables covered in this specification shall be flame retardant (FR). The outer sheath of
cables shall possess flame propagation properties meeting requirements as per IS-10810 (Part62) category AF.
3.4
Sequential marking of the length of the cable in metres shall be provided on the outer sheath at
every one metre. The embossing/engraving shall be legible and indelible.
3.5
The overall diameter of the cables shall be strictly as per the values declared by the
manufacturer in the technical information subject to a maximum tolerance of 2 mm up to
overall diameter of 60mm and 3mm for beyond 60mm.
3.6
PVC/ Rubber end caps shall be supplied free of cost for each drum with a minimum of eight
per thousand metre length. In addition, ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with caps to
avoid ingress of water during transportation and storage.
3.7
The cables meant to be used in mining area under the jurisdiction of DGMS shall comply with
the requirements as specified in the Job specification/ Datasheet.
3.8
Medium Voltage Cables
3.8.1
All power/control cables for use on medium voltage systems shall be heavy-duty type,
650/1100V grade with aluminium/ copper conductor, PVC insulated, inner-sheathed,
armoured/ unarmoured and overall PVC sheathed.
3.8.2
The conductors shall be solid for conductor of nominal area up to and including 6mm 2 and
stranded beyond 6mm2. Conductors of nominal area less than 16 mm 2 shall be circular only.
Conductors of nominal area 16 mm 2 and above may be circular or shaped as per IS 8130.
Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall have sizes as per Table 1 of IS 1554 (Part-1).
3.8.3
The core insulation shall be with PVC compound applied over the conductor by extrusion and
shall conform to the requirements of type 'A' compound as per IS: 5831. The thickness of
insulation and the tolerance on thickness of insulation shall be as per Table 2 of IS: 1554 (Part1). Control cables having 6 cores and above shall be identified with prominent and indelible
Arabic numerals on the outer surface of the insulation. Colour of the numbers shall contrast
with the colour of insulation with a spacing of maximum 50 mm between two consecutive
numbers. Colour coding for cables up to 5 cores shall be as per Indian standard.
3.8.4
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid-up cores by extrusion and shall be of PVC
conforming to the requirements of Type ST-1 PVC compound as per IS: 5831. The minimum
thickness of inner sheath shall be as per IS: 1554 (Part-1). Single core cables shall have no
inner sheath.
laraelefah ENGINEERS
$gui laPleg INV INDIA LIMITED
taiRTI ekR617,413 10570
3.8.5
IA Govt of
India undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 10
All cables shall be provided with armour except those specifically specified as unarmoured.
For multicore cables, the armour shall be by single round galvanised steel wires where the
calculated diameter below armouring does not exceed 13 mm and by galvanised steel strips
where this dimension is greater than 13 mm. Requirement and methods of tests for armour
material and uniformity of galvanisation shall be as per IS - 3975 and IS -10810 (Part 41). The
dimensions of armour shall be as per method (b) of IS - 1554 (Part -1). For single core cables,
the armour shall be with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5 mm diameter.
For mining cables, the size and type of armour shall be such that the combined conductance of
armour shall be equivalent to 75 percent of the conductance of the largest conductor of the
cable.
3.8.6
The outer sheath for the cables shall be applied by extrusion and shall be of PVC compound
conforming to the requirements of type ST-1 compound as per IS: 5831. The minimum and
average thickness of outer sheath for unarmoured cables and minimum thickness of outer
sheath for armoured cables shall be as per IS: 1554 (Part -1).
3.8.7
Where specified, 1100V grade power cables shall also be XLPE insulated and shall meet the
requirement specified in IS-7098 (Part-1).
3.8.8
If heat resisting PVC cables are specified in the data sheet, the following shall be the
requirements:
It shall be possible to continuously operate the cable at a maximum conductor temperature of
85 C. PVC compounds used for HR PVC cables shall be as follows:
c.
3.8.9
Conductor insulation
Inner sheath
Outer sheath
-Type C
-Type ST 2
-Type ST 2
The fire survival cables shall meet the following additional requirements :
The insulation shall be of EPR or equivalent material with glass mica tape below or
above insulation.
The cables shall meet requirement of circuit integrity test for a minimum period of 3
hours at max. Temperature of 9500 C.
3.9
High Voltage Cables
3.9.1
Power cables for 3.3kV up to and including 33kV systems shall be Aluminium/ Copper
conductor, XLPE insulated, sheathed, armoured/ unarmoured and overall PVC sheathed.
3.9.2
The conductors shall be stranded and compacted circular for all cables.
3.9.3
All cables rated 3.8/ 6.6kV and above shall be provided with both conductor screening and
insulation screening. The conductors shall be provided with non-metallic extruded semi
conducting screen.
3.9.4
The core insulation shall be with cross linked polyethylene insulating compound dry cured,
applied by extrusion. It shall be free from voids and shall withstand all mechanical and
thermal stresses under steady state and transient operating conditions. It shall conform to the
properties given in Table-1 of IS: 7098 (Part -2).
Page 842 of 1744
st=4-zeigh ENGINEERS
Ogeir figeg Tar INDIA LIMITED

MIETT
(A Govt of
India undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 10
3.9.5
The insulation screen shall consist of non-metallic extruded semi-conducting compound in

combination with a non-magnetic metallic copper screen. The copper screen for all the three
cores together shall be capable of carrying the single line to ground fault current value and the
duration specified in the data sheet.
3.9.6
The conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation screen shall all be extruded in one
operation by 'Triple Extrusion' process to ensure perfect bonding between the layers. The core
identification shall be by coloured strips or by printed numerals.
3.9.7
The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion and shall conform to the
requirements of type ST 2 compound of IS: 5831. The extruded inner sheath shall be of
uniform thickness. In case of single core cables, there shall be extruded inner sheath between
insulation metallic screen and armouring.
3.9.8
All cables shall be provided with armour except those specifically specified as unarmoured.
For multicore cables, the armour shall be by galvanised steel strips. Requirement and methods
of tests for armour material and uniformity of galvanisation shall be as per IS - 3975 and IS 10810 (Part 41). The dimensions of armour shall be as per method (b) of IS - 7098 (Part -2).
For single core cables, the armour shall be with H4 grade hard drawn aluminium round wire of
2.5 mm diameter.
3.9.9
The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion over the armouring and shall be of
PVC compound conforming to the requirements of Type ST 2 compound of IS: 5831. The
minimum and average thickness of outer sheath for unarmoured cables and minimum
thickness of outer sheath for armoured cables shall be as per IS: 7098 (Part-2).
3.9.10 The thickness of the insulation, inner sheath shall be governed by values given in IS: 7098
(Part -2).
4.0
CABLE ACCESSORIES
4.1
The termination and straight through jointing kits for use on the systems shall be suitable for
the type of cables offered as per this specification and shall meet requirements of IS 13573.
4.2
The accessories shall be supplied in kit form. Each component of the kit shall carry the
manufacturer's mark of origin.
4.3
The kit shall include all stress grading, insulating and sealing materials apart from conductor
fittings and consumable items. An installation instruction sheet shall also be included in each
kit.
4.4
The contents of the accessories kit including all consumable shall be suitable for storage
without deterioration at a temperature of 45 C, with shelf life extending to more than 5 years.
4.5
Terminating Kits
Page 843 of 1744
The terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to an indoor switchgear or
to a weatherproof cable box of an outdoor mounted transformer/ motor. For outdoor
terminations, weather shields/ sealing ends and any other accessories required shall also form
part of the kit. The terminating kits shall be from one of the makes/ types mentioned in the
data sheet.
Page 844 of 1744
15iFEZRT M., ENGINEERS

Ogea tatateumr INDIA LIMITED
INKRIOREINE,613411.0
4.6
IA Govt of inda Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 10
Jointing Kits
The straight through jointing kits shall be suitable for installation on overhead trays, concrete
lined trenches, and ducts and for underground burial with uncontrolled backfill and possibility
of flooding by water and chemicals. These shall have protection against any mechanical
damage and suitably designed to be protected against rodent and termite attack. The inner
sheath similar to that provided for cables shall be provided as part of straight through joint.
The jointing kits shall be from one of the makes/ types mentioned in the data sheet.
5.0
INSPECTION, TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE

The cables shall be tested and inspected at the manufacturer's works. Manufacturer shall
furnish all necessary information concerning the raw material supply to EIL/ Owner's
inspectors. The inspector shall have free access to the manufacturer's works for the purpose of
inspecting the process of manufacture in all its stages and he will have the power to reject any
material, which appears to him to be of unsuitable description or of unsatisfactory quality. For
HV cables, the vendor shall give at least 2 weeks advance notice to the purchaser, regarding
the date of testing to enable him or his representative to witness the tests.
5.1
Cables
5.1.1
After completion of manufacture of cables and prior to despatch, the cables shall be subjected
to type, routine, acceptance and special tests as detailed below. The test reports for all cables
shall be got approved from the Engineer before despatch of the cables.
5.1.2
All routine tests, acceptance tests, type tests and additional type tests for improved fire
performance shall be carried out as listed in IS: 1554 (Part-1) and IS: 7098 (Part-2) on PVC
and XLPE insulated cables respectively.
5.1.3
The test requirements for PVC insulation and sheath of cables shall be as per latest revision of
IS: 5831.
5.1.4
Test for Resistance to Ultra Violet Radiation: This test shall be carried out as per DIN 53387
or ASTM-G-154 on outer sheath. The retention value of tensile strength and ultimate
elongation after the test shall be minimum 60 % of tensile strength and ultimate elongation
before the test. Test certificates with respect to this test (not older than one year) from
recognised testing laboratory to be furnished for review by EIL before despatch clearance of
cables. In case test certificates are not available, test is to be conducted by vendor at his own
cost in any recognised test laboratory or in house testing laboratory, before despatch clearance
of cables. Sampling for this test is to be done randomly once for each order, provided outer
sheath remains same.
5.1.5
Acceptance tests as per IS-1554 (Part-1) and IS-7098 (Part-2) and the following special tests
to be performed on the cables as per sampling plan for all cables. However these tests are
required to be witnessed by EIL/ Owner for HV cables.
a.
Accelerated water absorption test for insulation as per NEMA-WC-70. (For PVC
insulated cables) and as per NEMA-WC-53 (for XLPE/ EPR insulated cables). Test
certificates with respect to this test (not older than one year) from recognised testing
laboratory to be furnished for review by EIL before despatch clearance of cables. In
case test certificates are not available, test is to be conducted by vendor at his own cost
in any recognized test laboratory or in house testing laboratory, before despatch
clearance of cables. Sampling for this test is to be done randomly once for each order,
provided type of insulation remains same.
Page 845 of 1744
ISMZelk, ENGINEERS
Elfaegmw INDIA LIMITED
(041eneiztofoON3M111.1)
(A Govt of Inds
undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 10
Dielectric Retention Test: The dielectric strength of the cable insulation tested in
accordance with NEMA-WC-70 at 75 1 C shall not be less than 50 % of the
original dielectric strength. (For PVC insulated cables). Test certificates with respect
to this test (not older than one year) from recognised testing laboratory to be furnished
for review by EIL before despatch clearance of cables. In case test certificates are not
available, test is to be conducted by vendor at his own cost in any recognized test
laboratory or in house testing laboratory, before despatch clearance of cables.
Sampling for this test is to be done randomly and once for each order.
Oxygen Index Test: The test shall be carried out as per IS-10810 (Part 58). Sampling
to be done for every offered lot/size as per sampling plan.
Flammability Test: The test shall be carried out on finished cable as per IS-10810
(Part 61 & 62). Sampling for these tests is to be done randomly once for each order,
provided outer sheath remains same. The acceptance criteria for tests conducted shall
be as under:
Part-61-The cable meets the requirement if there is no visible damage on the test
specimen within 300 mm from its upper end
Part-62-The maximum extent of the charred portion measured on the test sample
should not have reached a height exceeding 2.5 m above the bottom edge of the burner
at the front of the ladder.
Test for rodent and termite repulsion property shall be done by analysing the property
by chemical method.
5.1.6
The test for circuit integrity for fire survival cables shall be carried out as per [EC-60331
(Part-21).
5.2
Cable Accessories
Type tests should have been carried out to prove the general qualities and design of a given
type of termination/ jointing system as per IS-13573. The type test certificates from
independent testing laboratory shall be submitted before despatch.
6.0
6.1
Cables shall be despatched in non-returnable wooden or steel drums of suitable barrel

diameter, securely battened, with the take-off end fully protected against mechanical damage.
The wood used for construction of the drum shall be properly seasoned, sound and free from
defects. Wood preservatives shall be applied to the entire drum. Ferrous parts used shall be
treated with a suitable rust preventive finish or coating to avoid rusting during transit or
storage.
6.2
On the flange of the drum, necessary information such as project title, manufacturer's name,
type, size, voltage grade of cable, length of cable in metres, drum no., cable code, BIS
certification mark, gross weight etc. shall be printed. An arrow shall be printed on the drum
with suitable instructions to show the direction of rotation of the drum.
Page 846 of 1744
6.3
Oftefilk
-, ENGINEERS
ar laRegvir INDIA LIMITED
Inerr zwmuanagins!)
(A Govt
India Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0051 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 10
Cables shall be supplied in drum lengths as follows:
6.3.1 MV Cables
Multicore Power cables upto 6 mm2
Multicore Power cables from 10 mm2 up to 300 mm2
Single Core Power cables upto 630 mm2
Control cables upto 61 cores
1000 m
500 m
1000 m
1000 m
6.3.2 HV Power Cables Upto 11kV (E) Grade

500 m
1000 m
750 m
Three Core cables upto 400 mm2

Single Core cables upto 400 mm2
Single Core cables above 400 mm 2 and upto 1000 mm2
6.3.3 HV Power Cables Above 11kV (E) Grade and upto 33kV (E) Grade
Three Core cables upto 300 mm2 grade
Single Core cables upto 400 mm2
Single Core cables above 400 mm 2 and upto 1000 mm2
350 m
1000 m
500 m
However exact drum lengths shall be finalised during order execution. A tolerance of 3 %
shall be permissible for each drum. However overall tolerance on each size of cable shall be
limited to 2%.
k31
$iga fiffleg
Page 847 of 1744
1.12M ~I, 4,1 JvA,N,
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT MEDIUM
VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind,a Underlaking)

6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 12
-gurg
d71E.
Wf"kil 11
fqw
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFICIENT
MEDIUM VOLTAGE
INDUCTION MOTORS
REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

1 12.08.14 SPECIFICATION
0
Rev.
No
20.04.09 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION

Date
Purpose
SS/SHIRALI
SD
Prepared by
KJ
BRB
BRB
JMS
ND
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Checked
by
SC
Approved by
Page 848 of 1744
ENGINEERS
fa;1W5 w INDIA LIMITED
31
1.177T s'1,,
,q51.7~1)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
AL
BASEEFA
BIS
Aluminium
British Approvals Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres
BS
CEA
CIMFR
British Standards
CPRI
CT
CU
Central power research institute

Current Transformer
DGMS
DOL
EIL
ERTL
FM
FRP
IEC
IEEE
IP
IS
Copper
Directorate General of Mines Safety
Direct On Line
Electronics Regional test laboratory
Factory Mutual
Fiber Reinforced Plastic
International Electro-technical Commission
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers
Ingress Protection
Indian Standard
Japanese Electro-technical Committee
JEC
KLPL
LCIE
Karandikar laboratories Pvt. Ltd.

NEMA
PESO

Petroleum and Explosive Safety Organisation
PO
PVC
RPM
Purchase Order
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Revolutions per Minute
Variable Frequency Drive
UL
VFD
VDE

Convenor:
Mr. B.R. Bhogal
Members:
Ms. S. Anand
Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. M.K. Sahu
Mr. A.K. Chaudhary (Inspection)
Ms. N.P. Guha (Project)
--1
gzx Wes
ENGINEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
INWR 290O 2151JY4M,
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
4.0
OPERATING CONDITIONS
5.0
PERFORMANCE
6.0
CONSTRUCTION DETAILS
7.0
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
10
8.0
CRITICAL SPEEDS
10
9.0
PAINTING
10
10.0
11
11.0
CERTIFICATION
11
12.0
11
Page 849 of 1744
Page 850 of 1744
31
02-'
eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
2.1~,151~11
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 12
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, packing and supply of energy
efficient-High efficiency (IE2) three phase medium voltage squirrel cage induction motors.
2.1
The squirrel cage induction motors and their components shall comply with the latest editions of
following standards issued by BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) unless otherwise specified:
IS - 5
IS - 325
IS - 1076
IS - 1231
IS - 1271
IS - 2223
IS - 2253
IS - 2254
IS - 2968
IS - 4029
IS - 4889
IS - 6362
IS - 7816
IS - 8223
IS - 8789
IS - 9283
IS - 12065
IS - 12075
IS 12615
IS - 12824
IS - 13529
IS - 13555
IS - 14568
IS / IEC60079-0:
IS/IEC-60079-1:
IS/IEC60079-2 :
IS/IEC60079-7 :
Colours for ready mixed paints and enamels.

Three phase induction motors.
Preferred numbers.
Dimensions of three phase foot mounted induction motors.
Electrical insulation- Thermal evaluation and designation.
Dimensions of flange mounted AC Induction motors.
Designation for types of construction and mounting arrangement of
rotating electrical machines.
Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps.
Dimensions of slide rails electric motors.
Guide for testing three phase induction motors.
Method of determination of efficiency of rotating electrical machines.
Designation of methods of cooling of rotating electrical machines.
Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines.
Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines.
Values of performance characteristics for three phase induction
motors.
Motors for submersible pump sets.
Permissible limits of noise level for rotating electrical machines.
Mechanical vibration of rotating Electrical Machines with shaft
heights 56 mm and higher - measurement, evaluation and limits of
vibration severity.
Energy Efficient induction motors - Three phase squirrel cage.
Type of duty and classes of rating assigned to rotating electrical
machines.
Guide on effects of unbalanced voltages on the performance of three
phase cage induction motors.
Guide for selection and application of three phase induction motors
for different types of driven equipment.
Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines, frame
numbers 355 to 1000 and flange numbers 1180 to 2360.
Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres (General
requirements)
Explosive atmospheres-Equipment protection by flame proof
enclosures "d".
Explosive protection by pressurized enclosure "p".
Explosive atmospheres-Equipment protection by increased safety
IS/ IEC: 60529 :
Construction, test & marking of type of protection "n" electrical

apparatus.
Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IS/IEC 60034-1 :
Rotating electrical machines:-Rating & Performance
IS/IEC-60034-5:
Degrees of protection provided by the internal design of rotating

electrical machines.
IS/IEC-60079-15:
5g-u
Page 851 of 1744
ENGINEERS
f&IJeg INDIA LIMITED
k31 --1
1.7E,, c-1,cnr1,711.3~11
IS/IEC 60034-8:
IS/IEC 61241:
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 12
Rotating electrical machines-Terminal marking and direction of rotation

Electrical apparatus for use in the presence of combustible dust
2.2
In case of imported motors, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian Standards.
2.3
The motors shall also conform to the provisions of CEA regulations and other statutory
regulations currently in force in the country.
2.4
In case Indian Standards are not available, standards issued by IEC/ BS/ VDE/ IEEE/
JEC/NEMA or equivalent agency shall be applicable.
2.5
In case of any conflict between requirements specified in various applicable documents, the
most stringent one shall prevail. However, owner's decision in this regard shall be final and
binding.

3.1
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of the art technology and proven field track
record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2
Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the offered
equipment at least for 10 years from the date of supply.
3.3
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL before
phasing out the product/spares to ensure the end user for placement of order for spares and
services.
4.0 OPERATING CONDITIONS

4.1
Ambient Conditions
Motors shall be suitable for operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmosphere found in
refineries, petrochemical, fertilizer and metallurgical plants. Service conditions shall be as
specified in the motor data sheet. If not specifically mentioned therein, a design ambient
temperature of 40 C and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above mean sea Level shall be
taken into consideration.
4.2
Frequency and Voltage Variations

Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall be designed for continuous operation at rated output
under the following conditions:
a)
b)
c)
4.3
The terminal voltage differing from its rated value by not more than + 6 % or
The frequency differing from its rated value by not more the + 3 % or
Any combination of (a) and (b)
Starting
a)
b)
c)
Motors shall be designed for direct-on-line starting or other method of starting as

specified in datasheet.
Motors shall be designed for re-acceleration under full load after a momentary loss of
voltage with the residual voltage being 100% and is in phase opposition to the applied
voltage.
Minimum locked rotor thermal withstand time at rated voltage shall be 10 seconds
under cold conditions and 8 seconds under hot conditions. In addition, Locked Rotor
$'fg-ar fafai
e5
two,/, 151,19M,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 12
withstand time under hot conditions at 75% & 100% voltages, shall be minimum 1.4
times the starting time at the corresponding voltage.
d)
Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall be suitable for starting under specified load
conditions with 75 % of the rated voltage at the motor terminals.
e)
Motors shall be designed to allow the minimum number of consecutive starts indicated
in Table below:
Starts
No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temp. of the
motor at ambient level (cold)
No. of consecutive start-ups with initial temp. of the
motor at full load operating level (hot).
4.4
Min. no. of consecutive starts

3
2
Direction of Rotation
Motors shall be suitable for either direction of rotation. In case unidirectional fan is provided for
motors, direction of rotation for which the motor is designed shall be permanently indicated by
means of an arrow. Directional arrow should be manufactured from corrosion resistant material.
When a motor is provided with bi-directional fans, a double-headed arrow should be provided.
Normally, clockwise rotation is desired as observed from the driving (coupling) end, when the
terminals UVW are connected to a power supply giving a terminal phase sequence in the order
UVW. Counter-clockwise rotation of the motor shall be obtained by connecting the power
supply to terminals so that the phase sequence corresponds to the reversed alphabetical
sequence of the terminal letters. Ample space shall be provided at the terminal box for
interchanging any two external leads for obtaining the reverse phase sequence.
5.0 PERFORMANCE
5.1
Motors shall be rated for continuous duty (Si), unless otherwise specified.
5.2
Unless specified, the starting current (as % rated current) shall be limited to maximum 600700% (based on number of poles and KW rating) as per IS 12615:2011, subject to IS tolerance
5.3
In particular cases, when the starting current is to be limited, care shall be taken such that the
design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying to clause
4.3 above of this specification. Unless otherwise specified the minimum pull-up torque of
motors, at rated voltage & frequency shall be minimum 50% of the rated full load torque.
5.4
In particular cases, when the starting with reduced voltage is specified, care shall be taken such
that the design values of torque meets the load requirement while at the same time complying to
clause 4.3 above of this specification.
5.5
Starting torque and minimum torque of the motor shall be compatible with the speed torque
curve of the driven equipment under specified starting and operating conditions.
In case where characteristics of driven equipment are not available while selecting the motor,
minimum starting torque shall be 110% of rated value for motors up to 75 kW and shall be 90%
of rated value for motors above 75 kW.
5.6
The breakdown torque at the rated voltage shall be not less than 175% of the rated load torque
with no negative tolerance. Unless otherwise agreed, the breakdown torque shall not exceed
300% of the rated load torque.
Page 852 of 1744
Copyright EIL -All rights reserved
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN oi Undetak.91
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 12
In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads (e.g. reciprocating compressors,
crushers, ball mills) the minimum value of pull out torque at 75% of the rated voltage shall be
more than the peak value of pulsating torque and the current pulsation shall be limited to 40%.
5.7
Motors fed by variable frequency drive shall additionally meet the following requirements.
5.7.1 The motors shall be suitable for the current wave forms produced by the power supply including
harmonics generated by the drive. The necessary coordination by motor manufacturers with
drive manufacturers regarding harmonics generated by VFD shall be taken care and
incorporated in motor design suitably.
5.7.2 The motors shall be designed to operate continuously at any speed over the range as per process
requirement with minimum range as 10-100% of rated speed or as specified in data sheet. The
characteristics shall be baked on the application in terms of constant torque / variable torque as
per the driven equipment. Additional cooling fan shall be provided if required to limit the
temperature rise to specified limits, alternatively option of applying suitable de-rating may be
considered.
5.7.3 The motors shall withstand torque pulsation resulting from harmonics generated by the solid
state power supply.
5.7.4 The motors required to be transferred to DOL bypass mode shall be rated for specified
variations in line voltage and frequency.
5.8
The minimum values for performance characteristics of these motors shall be as given in the
tables 1, 2 & 3 of IS 12615-2011 for 1E2 motors, subjected to tolerance as per IS/IEC. Motor
meant for application with VFD, the efficiency value can be one class lower as per IS.
6.0 CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS

6.1
Windings
6.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be provided with class 'B' insulation as a minimum. In
case of motors with class 'F' insulation, the permissible temperature rise above the specified
ambient temperature shall be limited to those specified in the applicable Indian standards for
class 'B' insulation.
6.1.2 The winding shall be tropicalised. The windings shall preferably be vacuum impregnated.
Alternately the windings shall be suitably varnished, baked and treated with epoxy gel for
operating satisfactorily in humid and corrosive atmospheres.
6.1.3 Windings shall be adequately braced to prevent any relative movement during operation. In this
respect, particular care shall be taken for the stator windings for direct-on-line starting squirrel
cage motors. Insulation shall be provided between coils of different phases that lie together.
Core laminations must be capable of withstanding burnout for rewind at 350 C without damage
or loosening.
6.1.4 In case of motors driving equipment with pulsating loads, special care shall be taken for the
joints of rotor bars and end rings to avoid premature failures due to induced fatigue stresses.
6.1.5 The windings shall be connected in delta. However, for motors rated 2.2 kW and below, star
connection may be accepted. In case of motors with star-delta starting, the motor windings shall
be fully insulated for delta connection.
Page 853 of 1744
5Igur
fdaeg
---,,,,,,aw,ansmsn.
Page 854 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 12
6.1.6 The ends of the windings shall be brought out into a terminal box. These shall be terminated by
means of terminals mounted on an insulating base made of non-hygroscopic and non-flammable
material.
6.1.7 All motors shall be provided with six terminals and suitable links to connect them in star or in
delta except for motors rated up to and including 2.2 kW which may be accepted with three
terminals.
6.2
Terminal Box and Cable Entries
6.2.1 Unless otherwise agreed, the terminal box shall be located on the right hand side as viewed from
the driving (coupling) end. The terminal box shall have side cable entry from non-driving end.
However, as a special case, terminal box located on top may also be accepted, particularly for
hazardous area motors, in case manufacturer has only top mounted terminal box design which is
duly tested/certified by CIMFR and approved by PESO for installation in hazardous area. The
terminal box design shall allow rotation in steps of 90 C to facilitate cable entry from any
direction at site.
6.2.2 Terminal box cover shall be provided with handles to facilitate easy removal. However, for
terminal box covers weighing less than 5 kg., terminal box covers without handles can be
accepted.
6.2.3 The terminal box shall be provided entries for suitable cable glands corresponding to the size of
the specified cable. Crimp type tinned Copper lugs and nickel-plated brass (or aluminum if
specifically required), double compression type cable glands shall be supplied along with the
motors for the specified cable sizes for power and space heater cables.
6.2.4 For flameproof motors, terminal box can be provided in increased safety Èxe' execution.
6.2.5 The terminals, cable lugs, terminal box, cable entries and cable glands shall be suitable for the
maximum cables sizes as specified below for 2 pole, 4 pole or 6 pole motors:
Motor rating up to and including
2.2 kW and below
3.7 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
9.3 kW
11.0 kW
15.0 kW
18.5 kW
22.0 kW
30.0 kW
37.0 kW
45.0 kW
55.0 kW
75.0 kW
90.0 kW
110.0 kW
125.0 kW/132 kW
160.0 kW
Size of phase conductor (mm2)

2.5 cu
6 cu
10 cu
16 cu
16 cu
16 cu
50 Al.
70 Al
70 Al
95 Al
120 Al
150 Al
240 Al
2x95 Al
2x120 Al
2x240 Al
2x240 Al
2x240 Al
6.2.6 Cable sizes for motors having synchronous speeds 750 RPM and below shall be as agreed
between the purchaser and manufacturer.
Page 855 of 1744
rr fa2es
1.12,f elvostVO51,~11
6.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertalong)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 12
Motor Casing and Type of Enclosure
6.3.1 The minimum degree of motor enclosures including terminal boxes and bearing housing shall
be IP-55 as per IS.
6.3.2 Motors for outdoor use shall be suitable for installation and satisfactory operation without any
protective shelter or canopy. Motor casing shall be provided with a suitable drain for removal of
condensed moisture except in case of flameproof motors (Type Ex d/Exde).
6.3.3
A11 internal and external metallic parts, which may come into contact with cooling air, shall be
of corrosion resistant material or appropriately treated to resist the corrosive agents, which may
be present in the atmosphere. Screws and bolts shall be of rust proof material or protected
against corrosion.
6.3.4 Unless otherwise agreed, motors shall have standard frame sizes (min.) for various output
ratings as stipulated in IS.
6.4
Bearing and Lubrication
6.4.1
Motors shall have grease lubricated ball or roller bearings. In all cases, the bearings shall be
chosen to provide a minimum L-10 rating life of 5 years, (40, 000 hours) at rated operating
conditions
(The L-10 rating life is the number of hours at constant speed that 90% of a group of identical
bearings will complete or exceed before the first evidence of failure).
6.4.2 The bearings shall be adequate to absorb axial thrust produced by the motor itself or due to shaft
expansion. Motors designed to handle external thrust from the driven equipment shall be
supplied with a thrust bearing at the non-driving end.
6.4.3 In cases such as pumps for hot liquids where the driven equipment operates at high
temperatures, bearings shall be cooled by a shaft-mounted fan. This shall ensure efficient
ventilation of the bearing and disperse the heat transmitted from the driven equipment by
conduction or convection.
6.4.4 Bearings shall be capable of grease injection from outside without removal of covers with
motors in the running conditions. The bearing boxes shall be provided with necessary features
to prevent Loss of grease or entry of dust / moisture e.g. labyrinth seal/ oil seal/ V seal. Where
grease nipples are provided, these shall be associated, where necessary, with appropriately
located relief devices, which ensure passage of grease through the bearings.
6.4.5 Pre-lubricated sealed bearings may be considered provided a full guarantee is given for 4 to 5
years of trouble-free service without the necessity of re-lubrication.
6.5
Cooling System
All motors shall be self ventilated, fan cooled. Fans shall be corrosion resistant or appropriately
protected. They shall be suitable for motor rotation in either direction without affecting the
performance of the motor. If this is not possible for large outputs, it shall be possible to reverse
the fan without affecting the balancing of the motor.
For motors operating in hazardous area, the fans shall be of an anti-static non-sparking material.
Ogzrr
Mt
Page 856 of 1744
c-lecnrc'
ENG1NEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
411
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 10 of 12
6.6 Rotor
The rotor shall be of squirrel cage type, dynamically balanced to provide a low vibration Level
and long service life for the bearings. Die cast aluminum rotors for motors in hazardous areas
may be accepted provided the same are type tested and approved by competent authorities.
6.7
Shaft Extension
Motors shall be provided with a single shaft extension with key-way and full key. Motor shaft
shall be sized to withstand 10 times the rated design torque.
6.8
Lifting Hooks
A11 motors weighing more than 30 kg. shall be provided with lifting hooks of adequate capacity.
6.9
Earth Terminals
Two earth terminals located preferably on diametrically opposite sides shall be provided for
each motor. Necessary nuts and spring washers shall be provided for earth connection.
7.0 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES

7.1
Anti-Condensation Heaters
All motors rated 30 kW and above shall be provided with 240 V anti-condensation heaters,
sized and located so as to prevent condensation of moisture during shutdown periods.
For motors with heaters installed in hazardous atmospheres (Zone - 1 or Zone - 2), such heaters
shall conform to the provisions of applicable Indian Standards and temperature classification
The heater leads shall be brought out, preferably, to a separate terminal box which shall be of
the same specification and grade of protection as the main terminal box.
A warning label with indelible red inscription shall be provided on the motor to indicate that the
heater supply shall be isolated before carrying out any work on the motor.
7.2
Name Plates
In addition to the motor rating plate, a separate number plate for motor tag number shall be
fixed in a readily visible position. This number shall be as per the motor data sheets.
8.0 CRITICAL SPEEDS

The first actual critical speed of stiff rotors shall not be lower than 120 % of the synchronous
speed. For flexible rotors this shall be between 60 % and 80 % of the synchronous speed; the
second actual critical speed shall be above 120 % of the synchronous speed.
9.0 PAINTING
A11 metal surfaces shall undergo manufacturer's standard cleaning /painting cycle. After
preparation of the under surface, the equipment shall be painted with two coats of epoxy based
final paint. Color shade of final paint shall be 632 of IS: 5/ RAL-7035. All unpainted steel parts
shall be suitably treated to prevent rust formation. If these parts are moving elements, then these
shall be greased.
f laZ5 la
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt o7 Indo Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ENERGY EFFIC1ENT MEDIUM
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 11 of 12

10.1
All tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's shop under his care and expense.
10.2
The manufacturer shall submit all internal test records of the tests carried out by him on the
bought-out items, motor sub-assembly and complete motor assembly.
10.3
The manufacturer shall carry out the following routine and acceptance tests as per applicable
Standards/ITP on all the motors.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
i)
Visual check (Nameplate, terminal box location, terminal type, clearance, size, entries,
space adequacy & gland size, direction of rotation etc.)
Dimension check (shaft height etc.)
Cable glands, cable lugs size and no. of entries in terminal box.
Winding resistance
No load test & measurement of voltage, speed, current, power input
Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque, breakdown torque
Reduced voltage starting & running
Insulation resistance before and after high voltage test
High voltage
Vibration
10.4
The manufacturer shall submit the following type test certificates (one sample from each
type/rating):
Full load test & measurement of voltage, current, power slip, power factor, bearing,
a)
noise
Efficiency & pf at 100%, 75% and 50% load
b)
Temperature rise test
c)
d)
Momentary overload test
e)
Vibration
f)
Noise Level
Over speed
g)
Measurement of starting torque, starting current, full load torque.
h)
10.5
For VFD fed motors, all tests as specified in the VFD specification shall be followed in addition
to the above.
11.0 CERTIFICATION
The motors and associated equipment shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/ CPRI/ ERTL/ BASEEFA/ LCIE/ UL/ FM/ KLPL or
equivalent). All indigenous motors shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by
recognised testing agencies. A11 motors (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
approvals (e.g. PESO, DGMS etc). as applicable for the specified location. All indigenous
fiameproof motors shall have valid BIS license and marking as required by statutory authorities.
12.0 PACKING AND DESPATCH
A11 the equipment shall be divided into several sections for protection and ease of handling
during transportation. The equipment shall be properly packed for transportation by ship/rail or
trailer. The equipment shall be wrapped in polythene sheets before being placed in crates/cases
to prevent damage to the finish. Crates/cases shall have skid bottom for handling. Special
notations such as `Fragile', `This nide up', `Center of gravity', Weighe, Òwner's particulars',
`PO Nos.' etc. shall be clearly marked on the package together with other details as per purchase
order.
Page 857 of 1744
fg".2x
elvOrt'4,
13~1)
ENGINEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ot InOla Undertahmg)
SPECIFICATION
FOR
6-51-0064 Rev. 1
Page 12 of 12
The equipment may be stored outdoors for long periods before installation. The packing shall
be completely suitable for outdoor storage in areas with heavy rains/high ambient temperature,
unless otherwise agreed.
Page 858 of 1744
Page 859 of 1744
2fai&
$11g-a
l
1.111,
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
ENGINEERS
G INDIA LIMITED
c.14.101J,I21.11
IA Govt of Inflia Undeftalong)
c:v1 4taictv(
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 10
rc1W1 34efv(ull
SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELECTRICS OF PACKAGE
EQUIPMENT
21.11.13
Revised and issued as standard specification
VB
Vk,T
UAPJMS
25.04.08
RS
IKG
JMS
VC
28.03.03
LS
AAN
VPS
SKG
03.04.97
Re-firmed and issued as standard specification
VCB
VPS
SG
AS
04.06.86
Issued as standard specification
CSM
VPS
GNT
RCPC
Standards
Com m ittee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
by
Approved by
Page 860 of 1744
k31 __I
$gZ;1T
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fffl-eg
I NRR 2W-G5R ,131,3,40.)
IA GOvt of )nth. Undert.h.9)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
Alternating current
Bureau of Indian Standard
British Standards
Chief Controller of Explosives
Cold Rolled Cold Annealed
Current Transformer
Direct current
Directorate General of Mines Safety
Factory Mutual
Galvanised Iron
High Rupturing Capacity
Indian Electricity
International Electrotechnical Commission
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineer
Ingress Protection
Indian Standard
Light Emitting Diode
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
National Electric Code
Oil Industry Safety Directorate
Per Unit
Power Distribution Board
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Continuous duty
Standard Wire Gauge
Volt
AC
BIS
BS
CCE
CIIVIFR
CRCA
CT
DC
DGMS
FM
GI
HRC
IE
IEC
IEEE
IP
IS
LCIE
LED
MCCB
NEC
NEMA
OISD
P.U.
PDB
PVC
S1
SWG
UL
V
VDE

Convenor:
Mr. U. A. Patro
Members:
Mr. B. R. Bhogal
Ms. S Anand
Mr. Parag Gupta
Mr. A. K. Chaudhary (Inspection)
Ms. N. P. Guha (Project)
Page 861 of 1744
.5112.1t4 a.. ENGINEERS

Og-ar 22eg INDIA LIMITED
,.fr2-,
IA GoN of Indo Undertalong)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
4.0
SITE CONDITIONS
5.0
AREA CLASSIFICATION AND EQUIPMENT SELECTION
6.0
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
7.0
CABLING SYSTEM
8.0
EARTHING SYSTEM
9.0
LIGHTING SYSTEM
10.0
INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
10
Page 862 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1gzulaa&-g
1.11771 ef,rTIM,3,
Govt of inaia UndertaNingt
7"ar,U
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 10
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification defines the requirements for design, engineering, shop-supervision,

testing, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of electrical equipment and facilities
for package equipment as covered in the job Specifications and data sheets.
1.2
For the purpose of this specification, the term 'package equipment' or 'package' denotes the
complete integrated equipment to be supplied by the vendor comprising of all main and
auxiliary equipment and associated local panel(s). The package equipment may be mounted
on a common skid and/or installed on a common platform/area in the field, as specified
elsewhere. Unless otherwise specified, the local panel shall include the power distribution to
various loads along with the necessary controls, interlocks, indications and alarms. The local
panel may either be mounted on the equipment skid/platform or separately but not very far
from the main equipment.
1.3
It is not intended to cover all aspects of design but to indicate the basic requirements only.
Vendor shall ensure that the design and installation on the skid is carried out as per good
engineering practice, relevant codes and shall meet the requirements of safety, reliability,
ease of maintenance and operation, aesthetics, scope of future expansion and maximum
interchangeability of the equipment. Vendor shall acquaint himself with EIL standards,
specifications, inspection test plans and field testing procedures as deemed necessary for
proper execution of work.
1.4
Compliance with this specification and /or review of any of the vendor documents shall not
relieve the vendor of his responsibility and his contractual obligations with regard to the
completeness and satisfactory operation of the package.

2.1
All electrical equipment and the complete package shall meet the requirements of this
specification and enclosed data sheets, in addition to the relevant Publications and Codes of
Practice of Bureau of Indian Standards, EIL Standards, statutory regulations and good
engineering practices. Complete system must also conform to the latest revisions of the
following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
CEA Regulations
Fire Insurance Regulations
Petroleum Rules and any other regulations laid down by Chief Controller of
Explosives
The Factory Act and regulations laid down by Factory Inspectorate
Regulations laid down by local statutory authorities and Electrical Inspectorate
Oil Mines Regulations (For Projects under DGMS jurisdiction).
2.2
In case of imported equipments, standards of the country of origin shall be applicable if these
standards are equivalent or stringent than the applicable Indian standards.
2.3
Vendor shall provide all assistance required for obtaining approvals from statutory
authorities for materials, plant design/ drawings and complete installation.
2.4
Where Indian Standards do not exist, the relevant IEC/ BS/ VDE/ IEEE/ NEMA standards
shall apply. Any other international standard may also be followed provided it is equivalent
to or more stringent than the standards specified above.
2.5
In case of any contradiction between various referred standard / specification /datasheet and
statutory regulations, most stringent requirement shall prevail. However owner's decision in
this regard will be final and binding.
Page 863 of 1744
$.fgzrr laaj
eg
laIWR elvottlOth3~11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Undertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 10

3.1
The offered equipment shall be brand new with state of art technology and proven field track
record. No prototype equipment shall be offered.
3.2
Vendor shall ensure availability of spare parts and maintenance support services for the
offered equipment at least for 15years from the date of supply.
3.3
Vendor shall give a notice of at least one year to the end user of equipment and EIL before
phasing out the product/ spares to enable the end user for placement of order for spares and
services.
4.0 SITE CONDITIONS

The equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation under the site conditions specified
elsewhere. If not specifically mentioned, a design ambient temperature of maximum 40C
and an altitude not exceeding 1000 meters above mean sea level shall be considered for
design purpose.
5.0 AREA CLASSIFICATION AND EQUIPMENT SELECTION
5.1
In case of storage, handling or processing of flammable materials within the battery limits of
the package, area classification shall be carried out in line with IS: 5572, Indian Petroleum
Rules, OISD standard-113 and DGMS guidelines where applicable. Where specified, the
an 'Area Classification Drawing' indicating the zones of hazardous
vendor shall furnish
groups. A list of flammable materials handled along with
area and the applicable gas
their properties like flash point, ignition temperature, explosive limits etc. shall also be
furnished.
5.2
All the electrical equipment installed in hazardous areas shall be selected as per IS-5571,
where applicable, and shall meet the requirements of relevant IS, IEC or NEC Standards and
statutory regulations. However, electrical equipment for Zone-2 areas as a minimum shall be
Ex è'/ Ex 'n' type as specified in data sheet, subject to the same being acceptable to the
concerned statutory authorities. Increased safety (Type Ex èl) equipment shall not be used in
zone-1 areas. Ordinary industrial electrical equipment (even though permitted for use in
Div.2 area as per NEC, USA) shall not be used in Zone-2 areas.
5.3
Electrical equipments for hazardous areas shall have test certificates issued by recognised
independent test house (CIMFR/BASEEFA/LCIE/PTB/UL/FM OR equivalent). All
indigenous equipment shall conform to Indian standards and shall be certified by Indian
testing agencies. All equipment (indigenous & imported) shall also have valid statutory
approvals as applicable for the specified locations.
5.4
Electrical equipment for hazardous areas shall, generally, be suitable for gas groups IIA and
IIB and temperature Class -T3 as applicable to the selected type of explosion protection. In
case of hydrogen or hydrogen-hydrocarbon mixtures having more than 30% hydrogen, the
gas group to be considered, shall be IIC.
5.5
All electric motors for agitators/mixers and metering pumps handling flammable materials
and oil sump pumps, shall be flameproof (Type Ex-de), irrespective of the area being
classified as Zone-2 or Zone-1.
5.6
In case the package equipment is to be located in a classified hazardous area, the same shall
be indicated in the data sheet. In such a case, the offered equipment/package shall conform to
whichever are the more stringent requirements, i.e. either due to materials being handled in
the package or hazardous location in which package is installed.
Page 864 of 1744
.31
ogur
ff5leg
1.112-, riecr,W,
InJa2F+1/
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind. Und,,tak,n9)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 10
6.0 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

6.1
General Requirements
6.1.1
Specifications of all equipments/items, shall be furnished by the vendor for owner's review.
However, certain minimum requirements for the major equipment are highlighted in this
section.
6.1.2 All equipment and components shall be new and supplied by approved reputed
manufacturers. Equipment requiring specialised maintenance or operation shall be avoided
as far as possible and prototype equipment shall not be accepted. A11 equipment shall be
complete with all necessary weather and anticorrosion protection including tropicalization to
prevent damage due to climate, saline atmosphere, dust and corrosive vapours.
6.1.3 All equipment / material shall be protected for inland / marine transport, carriage at site and
outdoor storage during transit and at site. Vendor shall be responsible for any damage to the
equipment during transit. A11 packages shall be clearly, legibly and durably marked with
uniform block letters giving the relevant equipment/ material details. Each package shall
contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope.
6.1.4 All electrical components and equipment shall be sized to suit the maximum load under the
most severe operating conditions. Rated voltage and frequency for the equipment shall be as
indicated in enclosed data sheet.
6.1.5
All spares required for testing and commissioning the package shall be included along with
any special tools and tackles required for operation and maintenance.
6.2
Medium Voltage Motors

All medium voltage induction motors shall meet the requirements of the enclosed data sheet
and EIL standard specification.
6.3
Power Distribution Board/Local Panel
6.3.1 This shall meet the requirements of data sheets and the following specific requirements.
6.3.2 Unless otherwise specified, the Power Distribution Board (PDB) may be incorporated as part
of the Local Panel. The PDB shall include necessary power distribution equipment as
applicable for the package equipment in addition to the associated controls, interlocks,
indications and alarms. A11 motor starters shall be Direct-on-line type unless specified
otherwise. In case of skid-mounted package equipment located in hazardous area, this panel
shall also be installed on skid unless specified otherwise to install elsewhere in a safe area
and the emergency stop push buttons to be provided near the equipment.
6.3.3 The panel shall be free standing, metal enclosed, dust and vermin proof type having
minimum IP-42 degree of protection as per IS:13947 (Part-1). Panels for outdoor locations
shall be weatherproof and supplied with a sheet steel kiosk or have internal and external
doors with a rain shelter. The panel shall be designed to ensure maximum safety during
operation, inspection, connection of cables and maintenance with energised busbars and
without any special precautions. Ample space shall be provided inside the panel for any
future addition of components in the panel. Power and control equipment shall be segregated
inside the panel as far as practicable. The maximum height of the operating handle/switches
shall not exceed 1800mm and the minimum height shall not be below 300mm.
Page 865 of 1744
_Jt4
ENGINEERS
Ogzu fM2- g INDIA LIMITED
INTUR exagt ,1,3,421.3)
(N GoN ol Ind. UndeNakIng)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 10
6.3.4 The panel shall have an integral base frame and shall be sheet steel clad, fabricated out of 14
SWG CRCA sheet steel except that doors and covers may be of 16 SWG thickness.
Necessary stiffeners shall be provided on doors / covers to prevent buckling. Large size
doors and covers or those on which substantial relays/meters are mounted shall be fabricated
out of 14 SWG CRCA sheet steel. All doors shall be hinged type, and all covers, doors,
openings and gland plates shall be provided with neoprene gaskets. All hardware shall be
corrosion resistant. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be secured against loosening and shall
be made of galvanized, zinc passivated or cadmium plated high quality steel. Unless
otherwise specified, the panel shall be suitable for bottom cable entry. The gland plate and
cable glands shall be provided with the panel.
6.3.5 The panels, to be installed in a hazardous area, shall be of flameproof type Ex(d). All
hazardous area equipment (except motors) shall be provided with cast light metal alloy
enclosure.
6.3.6 Outgoing motor feeders shall be provided with switch, fuse, thermal overload relay with
single phasing preventor or Motor Protection Relay and contactors for operation / safety
isolation. All switches shall be load-break, heavy duty, air-break type with the operating
handle mounted on the compartment door. Load break switch or MCCB shall be provided as
main incoming switch complete with necessary mechanical interlocks, door interlock and
defeat mechanism. Motor duty switches of AC-23 duty are also acceptable for outgoing
motor feeders.
6.3.7 All fuses shall be non-deteriorating HRC cartridge, pressure fitted, link type. The contactors
shall be air-break having AC-3 duty rating. Power contactors shall be rated for 100% of the
maximum continuous current (e.g. rated current of motor) with a minimum rating of 16
Amperes with AC-3 duty. Contactor coils shall be suitable for 240V AC control supply.
6.3 .8 Thermal overload relays shall be three element, pos itive acting, ambient temperature
compensated type with adjustable setting range and built-in protection feature against single
phasing which can operate even with 50% rated current. The relays shall be manual reset
type with the reset push button provided on the cubicle door.
6.3.9 All indicating instruments shall be moving iron, flush mounting type of 72mm x 72mm
square pattern of at least 1.5 accuracy class. LEDs provided for indication shall be cluster
type with adequate brightness and minimum 2Nos LEDs chips per light. LEDs shall be
connected in parallel and each LED chip having diameter not less than 3mm.
6.3.10 All control/selector switches shall be rotary back connected type having a cam-operated
contact mechanism with knob type handle. Ammeter selector switches shall have contacts
with make before break feature and additional locking facility shall be provided where
required.
6.3.11 All motor feeders shall be provided with a STOP (red) push button and necessary START
(green) push button and control/interlock switches. STOP push buttons shall have stay put
feature and additional locking facility shall be provided where required.
6.3.12 Current transformer fed ammeter shall be provided for all motors, which may have variable
loading or are required for process control. Feeders of 30 Amperes rating and above shall be
provided with a CT and ammeter as a standard. The current transformers shall have an
accuracy class 1.0 and instrument security factor not greater than 5.
6.3.13 All auxiliary devices for control, indication, measurement and alarm such as push buttons,
control and selector switches, indicating lamps, metering instruments, annunciators etc. shall
be mounted on the front door of the panel. Components requiring frequent inspection shall
be easily accessible.
Page 866 of 1744
~_it4
5fg-ar 02eg
14-1WR :12"41W 9513,70,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A
Govt ol innia
undedak.9)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 10
6.3.14 Control supply for the equipment shall normally be derived from an adequately sized
transformer in the panel connected across two phases.
6.3.15 Adequate number of potential-free contacts shall be provided in the control panel for any
remote control monitoring of the package equipment.
6.3.16 The panel shall be provided with an anti-condensation heater controlled through a switch
fuse and an adjustable thermostat.
6.3.17 Inside the panel, the wiring for power, control and signaling circuits shall be done with BIS
approved flame retardant PVC insulated copper conductors having 660/1100V grade
insulation. Power wiring shall be sized for the nominal rating of associated switch/contactor.
Minimum size of control wires shall be 1.5mm2 copper for control circuits having fuse rating
10 amperes or lesser. For control circuits with higher fuse rating, minimum 2.5mm2 copper
conductor shall be used. Wiring for AC and DC circuits shall have different colour coding.
Clamp type terminals shall be acceptable for direct termination of wires upto 1 Omm2 size.
For conductors larger than 10 mm2, bolted type terminals with crimping lugs shall be
provided. Each wire shall be terminated at a separate terminal. A minimum of 10% spare
terminals shall be provided on each terminal block. All incoming and outgoing wires from
the panel shall terminate on a suitable terminal strip/block. No such wire shall
terminate/emanate directly from a panel component. However, in case power supply
connections are to be looped, the loop wires are to be crimped together before fixing on
terminal strip, such that loop continuity is not lost in case wire is removed from terminal
strip.
6.3.18 An adequately sized earth bus shall be provided in the panel for connection to the main earth
grid. All non-current carrying metallic parts of the mounted equipment shall be earthed.
Doors and movable parts shall be earthed using flexible copper connections. The earth bus
shall be provided with alternate bands of yellow and green. All earth connection wires shall
be suitably colour coded.
6.3.19 Engraved nameplates shall be provided for all auxiliary devices mounted on the front of the
panel. Nameplate or polyester adhesive stickers shall be provided for each equipment inside
the panel.
6.3.20 All metal parts shall be thoroughly cleaned degreased and made free from rust. After
application of the primer, the panel shall be spray painted with two coats of final paint.
Colour shade of the final paint shall be 632 as per IS:5 unless otherwise specified. Powder
coating of panel shall also be acceptable.
6.3.21 At least one outgoing feeder of each rating and type shall be provided as spare in the PDB.
7.0 CABLING SYSTEM

7.1
Unless otherwise specified, a single point power supply shall be provided by the owner
through an aluminium/copper conductor, PVC insulated, armoured cable terminated at the
Power Distribution Board/Local Panel. The vendor shall provide all power and control
cabling between the PDB/ Local panel and the package equipment.
Page 867 of 1744
31
Ogu f8tffleg
tatwm rtvcort to,~)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Unclertaking)
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 9 of 10
7.2
Power and control cables for 415V system shall be of 1100V grade PVC insulation with
copper conductors up to 16mm2 and aluminum conductors beyond 16mm2, PVC inner
sheath, armouring and overall PVC sheath as per IS: 1554 (Part-I). The conductor size shall
be minimum 2.5mm2 copper. All power and control cables shall have extruded inner and
outer sheaths. Outer sheath of cables shall be black in colour and the minimum value of
oxygen index shall be 29 at 27+ 2 C. In addition, suitable chemicals shall be added into the
PVC compound of the outer sheath to protect the cable against rodent and termite attack.
Adequate derating factors shall be used for sizing the cables. At least one spare core shall be
provided in all control cables. All cable / wire shall be BIS approved.
7.3
All cables shall be heavy duty mining type, for all projects under DGMS jurisdiction. All
shall be covered with insulating material & efficiently protected from
such cables
mechanical damage and supported at sufficiently frequent intervals in a manner to prevent
damage to such cables. Cables and conductors where connected to motors and other
equipments shall be mechanically protected by securely attaching the metallic covering to
is efficiently sealed so as to
the apparatus and the insulating material at each cable end
prevent the diminution of its insulating properties.
7.4
All cabling on the equipment skid/platform shall be in GI cable trays/conduits. A11 cable
trays and accessories shall be prefabricated and hot dip galvanised. The minimum amount of
galvanising shall be 610g/m2 . All cables shall be identified close to their termination point by
cable number punched on 2mm thick aluminium straps securely fastened to each cable. In
case of control cables, all cores shall be identified at both ends by their terminal numbers
using PVC ferrules as per interconnection diagrams. A11 equipments shall be supplied with
double compression type nickel platedbrass cable glands and tinned copper lugs.
7.5
In case, PDB/Local Panel installed away from the equipment skid/platform, necessary cable
trenches/trays between panel and equipment shall be in owner's scope, unless otherwise
specified.
8.0 EARTHING SYSTEM

8.1
Earthing system design and installation shall generally be as per IS: 3043. One or more
number of G.I. earth plates shall be provided for the package equipment depending upon its
size. A11 metallic non-current carrying parts of electrical apparatus, current and potential
transformer secondaries, structural steel, vessels etc. shall be connected by at least two
distinct separate earth conductors to an earth plate. A11 earth plates shall be bonded together
and shall have the provision for interconnection to owner's main earth grid at two points.
Earth plates shall be of 360x80x1Omm size and shall be provided with adequate number of
tapped holes. Earth continuity bonding shall be provided across all pipe flange joints.
8.2
All hardware used for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanised or zinc passivated. The
amount of galvanizing shall be min. 610 g/m2 . Specially provided bolts, lugs and spring
washers shall be used for all earthing connections of equipment.
8.3
Unless specified otherwise in data sheet, equipment earthing shall be as per standard
equipment earthing schedule.
8.4
Earthing connections to equipment shall be made by means of bolts, lugs and spring washers
provided specifically for this purpose.
Page 868 of 1744
k31llaf
Ogur laffleg
1.117,1 C.12,1W C111 3,7"17,711
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IF Govt of Intha Undertaking
SPECIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICS OF
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
6-51-0093 Rev. 4
Page 10 of 10
9.0 LIGHTING SYSTEM

9.1
General lighting for area in which package is to be installed shall be provided by purchaser,
unless specified otherwise in data sheet.
9.2
Any other lighting requirements such as Local panel lighting shall be provided by vendor.
Power for such local lighting shall be obtained from a suitable feeder in PDB/Local Panel.
All lighting circuits shall have provision for isolation in both phases and neutral for packages
to be installed in hazardous areas. In areas under DGMS jurisdiction, the lighting system
shall conform to special requirements stipulated in CEA regulations.
10.0 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

10.1
All equipment shall be tested and inspected at vendor's works before dispatch to ensure
compliance with the relevant specifications and agreed quality assurance/ testing plan. The
owner or his authorized representative may visit the works during manufacture of various
electrical equipment / materials to assess the progress of work as well as to ascertain that
only quality raw materials are used for the same. He shall be given full assistance to carry out
the inspection. Purchaser's representative shall be given minimum two weeks' advance
notice for witnessing the final testing. The minimum testing / inspection requirements for aIl
components /equipment shall conform to the requirements stipulated in applicable codes and
standards. Test certificates including test records and performance curves etc. shall be
furnished by the vendor.
10.2
Vendor shall submit the field testing procedures for purchaser's approval. Field tests as per
the approved procedures shall be performed on the electrical system/ equipment before its
being put into service. All test equipment required for this purpose shall be arranged by the
vendor, in case testing and commissioning at site is included in his scope, and test reports
shall be approved by the site-in-charge before acceptance of the complete package.
Page 869 of 1744
pemesei s41161.1 11V 113 44 6uAdoo
0'Aei:1 Ld- 1000-00-8'0N lewiod
Aq peAcuddv
CD
c
03
oe
O.
(/)
D)
0 0.
cn
CD
0
co
Z
O <
JJ
JJ
G)
JJ
G)
penssi
Z OOZ 't0'OE
uo4enieweldw!
penss!-ed pue pas!ned
LOOZ 60'8Z
JJ
penss!--eu pue p es!ned
JJ
cn
panss!-ed pue pesp\ au
17 1. 0Z '1. 0'0
-18-9
STANDARD SPECFICATIN NO.
0.AGdLd- 1000-00-8 oN 4eW.I0d

Copyright EI L All rightsreserved
Page 870 of 1744
(1)(-)
o.
-o
<1)
crtz
dx
CD
44
. .
'--'
) '-'
5-' E'
" " " "

11 0"
!(.-.)nc-.)noi>ezi>
,...,, _
p,,cc
4. ,P-1
,aa'8,,=1-;~MAD 0,4 `<
>
m
m
tz>
>w
Cn
3"
7.
H in
(=r,
Aj,
n ,
y4
H Cr':
lw :zo = cl''? (,)

,.--....
,--
o
n -.
o
'Z' AD
2.
.<
>
=h
er
'-
c":)'
AD
a...-1
croAD
,__, PD.-.)
Onv)
CD '- R"gD)s-dn5D??,-'61)
t-1 .--s=
Sw
(-)
Ic'
..,.'"
s-0
ep ,..
-t. j* 9. -
-cs ,, ,-C 4 co
.,,,_,,,..,.....
ci) . - , cl
c) ,
,--3
. , cp ,-0 ,,T,1
r,
.-,,.(-.40,0t
- .0-b n
'"_, co
:;:-:
E,'
=
n
..-t-4"0
cn
,y... - CI)
,-,
-OCIOn
'-'r+
Cl.,
'' '-' 0 -C"
CD
,
~
--
,
.
cD CL.
:::' ,2
ril
c)
,-,- CD
n
CIA
0
5.,(-DVDCD-r'100
..t
CD '-'
tri
' r_er) $7,; *
oH
,...4,4.
'-'
'"Ch.r1)''' cp
cn
CD
~
7z:1
CD '
,E)
'"
1-11 9.,) riD
WF
CIA rp
.-. v]
,,, ..- cn.
.lo
co
,. co
CD ril
.-: >e
E)'- , FD'
9,2.
1Z 0)
V)
o
n
iS-D.4o
o
"
cn
"
CD
5-
C")
4(4
5"Z
,H- i *-
n -c:
-i'5
94
CrOrpn
LD. CH
D
.--
c ..-bn
(-13(I) n 4'
c.) -F)- cl)
g- '-'' o n
51'.
H H 7:i 00
to 't,5,..
't.12.
't "t 't pZ
Z Z 44
,pcn
-c
AD
....,)
C") -1 (") <
-d
,-+
'3A
9 -8- 9 '
;th
, R2
a,
_ 3..
... c,., szlHzi
ei)
cl.
rz" (..)
4) 3
. .:<., 4r: r) (D' O
-:
(")
-<
2,
1,,
o
CD
(-)
0. C)
c" = o ,)o~.-t-
.--,
- '
S:L
-r '-t
CD 0 C'-r (-)
,...;
(5 sH <9
(1)::.
-r -1 n
-_,-.
n
HH
r>
cr)
,--o- ,I,
7:
:Dt-zy
fw co
44
CD pD
n CFO
s)
cr
5
5
rj
45.
rri
rri
cir
n
-t.
0AQ
... ,.,
,a,
c/D
?":1
-''' 5 9 C) 9+ (%' 4. (D
C)
,- (-) 2 ,_,
CD r) :='-:
, -; (--)..,
.-',,,
,,,,,,,_
-1:1
?,3 -. P 0 .-05
(:)5rrl.P0 000
- > F;
o o
n
2
5,(1
.
9,,,,,,
,2.o
'-,
2,
)
-zo
o
orri
( 0
o o ,-i v, " CD "]
:8'
.,
-
cm CD..-1":1
,,,, ',',' (
'--i)' -g'
; (1-,
"? .c
") 'c,.. ''2 ,p,- n cpc
,(4
(-)
nnnnco
-rim
.71'r71-'8','
-0( r-' 4 n-ci sHmtrimm7,
,-dnnn
H
-ci
zJ ,H ,H
.1r-'2 l
r
.,
00
o
o 2:J
z
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO.
Inspection StandardsCommittee
sum3mitaaqqy
uldno 3 S
:adODSO'I
This InspectionandTest Plancoverstheminimumtestingrequirementsof Industrial typecontrol stations.
PO/PR & Standardsreferredthere in/Jobspecifications / Approved documents
..,,
5:
I
'g
SUPPLIER
o
o
Supplier' s
Test
Records
Page 871 of 1744
lA
Ci. .-3 ,-,

'-'
s-
ro co -z2;
,_,
r) cn CD
,-, cn c)
.-t
r-r-
Visual
Dimensions,Threads
Workmanship
PaintShade
Markingoneach piece forTagno.
etc.
Terminal sizes,Lugssize(whererequired)
Cable Gland size
Acceptance Tests:-
o
o
Final Inspection
IndustrialtypeControl
Station
Supplier's
TestRecords/
Independent
lab TC
-,
o
o
cs-
CD
Procedure
Material Inspection
Incomingmaterial like
Physical & Chemical Properties,Material
castings, Push Button,
Certificate, Accuracy, Makeetc.
terminals,glass,ammeter,
voltmeter, knob,switch,
etc
Inprocess Inspection
Visual,Dimension,Bill of water
.-
0 0
;'
4=.
C=
t,-) ti
i=:,
1,-.) t.) ~
SUB
SUPPLIER
ril
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
r=1n
i
cp-1
t=i
n
:
>
STAGE/ACTIVITY
pamasai sN 6p ity ii3 }146pAcloo
rC'l
INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS:
0lked L3- 1-000-00-8 'oN Teuuod
RECORD
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
Paintingand Packing
PaintingandPacking
Samples
Visual.
Suitableprotectiontoprevententryof
foreignmaterial.
Properpackingtopreventany
damageduringtransportation.
Page 872 of 1744
(D
rn
cn
<--;
cr
ris7.
cr
z
z
rs
ris
-tcs
cn
cn
r-ch
(")
Cr
cn
rD
'c7n
CD
cn
CD
":7
CID
'"1:1
cD
cn
os
et)
cn
cn
-1
-cs
,=c
C1)
cn
CD
CD
(1)
cn
Compilationof Inspectionreports,drawings,
etcasper VDR / PR
o ".
(1
9("D
CIC7 rD
t
o FD
rD
(')
CD
cn
i\.,
Final Document
submission
..
._.
Supplier' s
TestRecords
/ Inspection
Certificate
(IC)
Final data
folder
/Completenes
scertificate
cn
__,
.
Reviewof Internal TestReport

IC issuance

DocumentationandIC
cn
.__,
Testrecords
Documentationand IC
-+)
CD
::.
c
cr,
Certificates
fromtesting
agencies
EIL/TPIA
Submissionof Certificates
SUPPLIER
ElectricalOperationtest & BOM

High voltagetest
IR test beforeand after High voltage
Certificateof testingagency for
suitabilityof degreeof protection(as
applicable)
_
.
.
..-
Lnt fili
; 7=
-i=,
iJ
SUB
SUPPLIER
IIV 113P16pAcloo
Z
o
r
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
paniesai
(/)
1-18-9
CHARACTERISTICS
*Aall
STAGE/ACTIVITY
0Aed 23- 1000-00-9 oN
Page 873 of 1744
pemasai s4q 6P IIV 11341-1 6p Ado3
0'AoEl Ld- 1. 000-00-8'0N l ewJ od
Aq peAwddv
cr
cD
n.
(")
,
CD
mm
o.
1:
_13
-CJ
CJ
CD
7:1
Zo
0 <
co
4=,
O
uoRmeweldw! JOJ penssi
panss!--au pu e pes!ned
o
panss!-a8 pu e pes!A abi
.^:1I01-18-9
3NVId 1S
Page 874 of 1744
5: Er 5' 5
zt cn ,-1
,-1 ~"
-' tri
o
,
n
n
o
rd
qg
Z-
c-;
n
P)
-.4.AD
F
.,_ Cr
Y-3-
.-I <
= CD
5F
'-r19'4"'
co o
'''
co
Cn
CD
.._,
rD -.. LO ,,,
,E gl-":
,
crz
(1) H
`l) c4
cit:,.-,
n-,,,__.n
0
CD = 0 9 (:)
-,cp
-t-,n r>i<l
n , CC
cn
5"
':_ht:,,
os),) -c5,-.
(). = CD
,''4.1c4
CD 9 - C)
,<
cp
CrQ
=
.:h
..
C)
$2,)
R''
,-,
..
CIQ
_,
oo
a
rD
ro ,.c)
9,)
(c'D'
o
ED.
n"
"
v,
s),.-.4.)
(-)
1=0
Cl.
'H '-i 7:i /0 't 't 't 't

't 't Z Z
Z
,Q
C
0
,
onn
-t .-tn,,,
on ,-,
,--t' .-
rz,.. '="st :::t. (4 o-: P0 ,.-e_,.(,)c-)
-, r)-, '''s .-,.
n o......,;-,--o- po
n-o -to'-oncm
Ci ,O
.-1.-,
a
").cj
coci
, --..,<cl.n
-r-, c,)
s),)
4 o
-. c) --,..
,4 ',,*
~' "CS r, `C
,...,
~0
" o 7' 9 H --, o ! 94,4=9"2 '"
o,.. 2'
<-,
-t. s),) '- rD =' '... =
r' ._,
LA (,) .- ,--3 o
.-0 -, n
o 5 @-..2)
, cr (D
,`4
.7.. 'r',.- ,"=t) cc)
P)H ,--'-.
ocran
0
' )" " ,.-r.
()-2 CD"' "
"
.
(
9
,
i":7.,
t
w
-rri 0 CA ,=,
CD
o
CrD7
(I)
'i
(
'
'-5
v)
(4
.
P.
'-,O
CT
CD
cli
cn
rri
rii
,1
>
-I
44
z~ti
,-,:i
H
cr'
.11
ril
ar
n
9
-.
s2r)
0
-t
?.
n
"1 s-r1 "1. tll C7 1Z; C;) C] () () (-) td > ed

.
C-;
,....
0=1...-rco-t
'mei o , ,.., .-h ,,,, o ,,,
,
-,:i2
.-+
C).cre9 (1) k.
(') 0 CD (-) '-' * = 9)- c, n
4:
'
,
? 4 8 .c, c, . ,.--P - . , _r ..r i ; ' >
o
>
5i
.-3
tsaZ Ir1.13UN
C
c1 --1
'H 7:J
4
rrl Z ,.Z
.:,i cp ,_.]
' (-)
--3 tc.")
(-) -C't ''':'4 ":J
7zi ''''
/0 rd''' CD'' Z
r-, .c, .0 .0 r--, .-3
'cc5 4.--Inn
n'-'
rri
o-:
>
,H
.
0
CA
o
'a.
n ,....
CA
n
(
'-'"').
0 $=
(-)
ri-i
) tri
,:t.
t:, (-.,-t
,-,
-, '''
nonn
,-"
'" :
r, ,,,,- -, n
7- ff , - V.. s.
o
CM
rB)
-zi gp' .
cs. 1p.."c5 *
g .0-
.) C.)
CL
-.=
cD po C
r"
uolionilsuo3 Jo repawN
0ne2:1 Ld-1.000-00-9 oN 4ew.103

pamesaJ spA BIJ IIV 11341160c100
r-
Inspection Standards Committee

.âil101-18-9
suolmitaiqqv
uldnD DS
oc
co
o
adODS O'I
O
This Inspectionand TestPlancoverstheminimumtesting&inspectionrequirementsof High Voltage Squirrel Cage Induction Motors..
r)
o
...o
Cil
r)
CD
SUB
SUPPLIER
EOF INSPECTION
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
----.
Z (1>
H
,..,
...1
-] -t
-I eD
ShaftNDT
<-,-
r2:. (t)
'--h
rp o ,-,
r) sw
,-rj 0 S2
0 "
ri;
-3
sz.,
up
CA
,,
con
,,..,
r)
CA
ril
e'')
:
Chemical, Physical properties, finishasper

relevantstandard
Page 875 of 1744
CL
CD
-1
(1)
c)
(I)
co')
.-r
MotorAssembly
Vacuum impregnationand bracingof winding,

coreassembly, Rotor barsandendringsassembly,
Rotor balancing,Terminal boxmountingand
clearances in between, Bearingsetting, Heat
Exchangertype, Lubricationsystemtypeetcas
perSupplier's internal standards
'i
.--.
C>
0
-;;',`:
f.J.)
(....)
-
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
.--..
C>
C>
c: ..
~
O
b
Raw Material like Copper,

Framecastings, Core
laminations,Insulation
material,Shaft, Cooling fans,
Cagecovers,HeatExchanger,
Lubricationsystem,Bearings,
CT, RTD,BTDandTerminal
box,Cableglands,etc
l-)
Material Inspection
Procedures
IN
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
z V)
0
INSPECTION AND TEST REQUIREMENTS
pamasai sp.161-1 IIV 113411 60doo
PO/PR &Standardsreferredthere in /Job specifications / Approved documents.
0AGd L3- 1000-00-8 'oN ;ewiod
'' -1.
CD
o
c)
o
ocp
1,
n,
''0
rw
).)
v)
o
o
If-,
rii
W
r.) y CD
0 -i
-d V)
,-t
- o
-1 cn -t
o
.
CD
u)
0
o
5
o
o..
(,)
c''
,-,
C>
n)
CA
t-,-
c)
...,
cp
o
t
::)
c)-
n)
.. o
',7-,
' -t.,.
P., crq
o eD
to..
o
.4)
<
0
-t.
A.)
Crt:7
CD
CL,
......,
CD
.)
-.-'
n9"
cr)
-.
o
pi CD
co
r)
(i)
5
CD
n)
--,
o
c)
....
o
o.
.'=e' .
'-'
s)
()
o R,
g- C)
:-,
,Cr ,5
o .--
"o <
''' ,s2:. 5. c5-;
F1') < -: -c
(-)
gr
, 0 rD
"
0 .ts-1.-P) CD
cp
< ,-t
o fW f22 (7)
`-'
S=0
PD -= tw ,)
Cfg g cm
CD
,..,
...---
k
- C cy, (/)
,,
-- , -. cp
',:,- CD
cn
to. crct CD
'
c/) 0 CD cD
`-'
,`L). o
1`') 5- (') C)
crq '7,.,' rD
CL cp
c4 c)
r-cc.)zzi
o cD
5,
ril
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
5
-,CD '-d(1)
c)
5 -0 r9
c) c4 . o
o ;:,,
,
,.
z-' E -.
sw,
CD
(D O CL, r) 0
o o ...... tz,, CL,
cn _,
C2
fo., ,..
cn,
n) :),
><
r)
CD
cr
CD
,-,.
o
94
'-''
o ..., , .., tz0
,--
crD)
o (D
-'' Du
-. CfQ o
A)
.-c,
crq. o ,
..:-- , o -o
''''
'',
..
9 ci)
n)
DU
f=0
a 1=L.
,-,. -0
.. .c.,
,... Gc? -t ct.
<
___, ..,
Qvu rbooP.,
)(1)
FD-,
"
,,,
cnL4
c.,
0 -t ,-,
'-'
''' -
'"1
cp 5 5.
")
Clci
C2'''s < "4"
4 E,
0 0j ,
-. CD Cf)
5,
o
CD - '
CM )
cp
cr
- <CD
Cl.
,... tD
u)
,-,
..-
H
ro
CD
co
CHARACTERISTICS
0Aed Ld- 1000-00-8'0N el.UJOd

Page 876 of 1744
H , o- <, .7
5t:t, 0
o
e)
o., rt,
PD
.-s
s---'
o
,.j
o4
o
-,
o
4. z v,
o or
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
patuesal s;LI6P IIV 11311 6!.,Aclo3
Final Inspection
4,
SCOP]E OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
.nall101-18-9
un
0
-o
(1)
CD
g
cs
r)
CD
c) c)
o
.
-, 6
cl.,
'
E
v,
`r-c,
EIL/TPIA
C14
,,
CD
r2
,_," -1.,
,-s
z:
o
co 5
----
SUPPLIER
v) .5''
CD
CD
''' ,-3 (1)

co ,V)
el.
V.1
..
.=:
E+, , ,
'"
-, c) v) ''-' ,..,
H .1.
c) ,-,-.
cr) c:) 'i--)
,=,.,
s2
r)."-)
C/D
CD
n g'n
CD
--CM
co
'-'
5
cA
-cs
7:J cp
p.
---..
Page 877 of 1744
CP:
'"H --
SUB
SUPPLIER
'
-,i
4
CD
s..-,
CD
CD
UD
.-ci)
H
`-<
1:,
4
,c-4
2,
0
cp
Full load testand measurementofVoltage,

Current,Power, Slip, Efficiencyand Power
factorat 100%, 75%and 50% load
TempRisetest
Momentaryoverload test
NoiseLevel
Overspeed
Measurementof StartingTorque,Starting
Current, full Load Torque,Pullouttorque by
JEC(Logarithmicproportion Currentmethod
II).
Tan deltatest
Measurementof radialandaxialclearance
between fanandstationarypartsand
Measurementof airgap.(if provision for
measurement isnotavailable in fully
assembled motorstagerecords/calculationsto
bereviewed)

Testcertificate fromrecognized testing

laboratory forareaclassification.
BIScertificate for FLP motorsand accessories
asapplicable.
CCOE/PESOapproved certificates formotors
Submissionof Certificates/
and accessoriesasapplicable.
Documents
Fault level of Terminal Box
Degreeof protectionof enclosureasper latest
IS/IEC Standards.
Impulsetestcertificate forcoils
Hydraulictestcertificate forcoolers
i-;
E.
iN.)
i...)
.4,.
U1
E OF INSPECTION
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
.., .
CHARACTERISTICS
patuam sA 6P IIV 1134q 60doo
z c4
0r
'â21101-18-9
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
0'Agid L3- 1000-00-9 'oN ;eU1.103
,o
-t
CA
g
SUB
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
,---
0
0
c:
E OF INSPECTION
Testrecords
0
0
CompilationofInspectionreports,drawings,etc
asper VDR / PR
FinalDocumentsubmission
Documentationand IC
Supplier Test
Certificates/
Inspection
Certificate(IC)
Finaldata
folder
/Completeness
certificate
0
0
c :
Reviewof Internal Test Certificates

IC issuance
Documentationand IC
CD
c_
e)7'
c_
ci>
s),)
c)'
cn
Page 878 of 1744
c.
a.
c)..
o
c
r)
cl.,
n)
s:)..
t
S=0
r)
-,-
-t
(")
li
CD
Cl.
.....
.
o
cn
-.......
cn
r)
o
o
cr CD
..::s.)
----;
rc,
r)
-.
CD
'!'s
r)
;)
'z's
.
CD
C)
...
C)
5.
-
'...
.,c)$
ro
cu
CD
~t
CD
...
Ci.
tD-Pcn
Cn
.-t
-)
,f .
..
0
CL,
s),)
sc,,..
sc,..
cin
f5
0 >
=
u)
-cs
co
CD
,-;''
"
cs.
cn
cr
ro
s),)
('--)
CD
CD
cn
.-:
CD
,-0
-,.
(D
c)
,-,.
CD
qA
CD
(1)
,-1
CD
AD
i \ -)
Visual.
Suitableprotectiontoprevententryof
foreignmaterial.
Properpackingtopreventany damage
duringtransportation.
AD
t.))
"
O\
.--,
Ch
::
PaintingofMotorFrames
0 nal{ L3-1000-00-9 oN
01
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
CHARACTERISTICS
pamaseJ s4q 6P IIV 113 1y 6Odoo
C4
0 tn
11
NIVId IS3
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
Page 879 of 1744
pa/U 9Sal si Ll 6p 713 Iu 6u Adoo
0na:iLA - L. 0 00 -00 -8'oN leituod
Aq p aAw ddv
0.)
0 a
so.
m
o.) (4)
c
CD
0.
CD
0.
CD
6 CD
c-)
CD
A
7
CD
CD
C)
(f)
pa nss! -a}:j p ue p as! AaH
L. OZ10 . 91.
panssl -e p ue p es! Aej
L OOZ Z 117Z
p anssl -e p ue pes! Aa8
CD
CD
0
0
CD
41. 0Z *6040
p a nssi -e p ue p asha){
-I
E
0
>
<
>
Z
1-
gl)
C)
u)
m
-n >
0
z
9- nab Z01.- 1. 8- 9
ON NO LLVOI3133dSOINONVIS
Page 880 of 1744
co
co
PvelIP31A111A1
.0 4(7-
,7z2, El
(")
>
'-r1
rTi
rd
cA
H 1.,0
c4 6. =
a- -- - .
(-)
FD .
CD CD
C1/
=
5'
co
CD 7'
-'
AD
CM Fi .
=
0
=
=
i,-7. C"''
mh co
mmi
??
CD
AD
'0
'-<
O
a
=
AD 5
o -,.
--
>
co
O.
uct
AD
C " = CD
co
= AD En m cfp
'< '0 2
O 0 :R.
rd 0
cD C./) 0
AD
r- (44. v, F;
o
= -0 0
CD
C<- PD Ì = 0 G0 0
-,.
md S
E.,
-
CM
e-+
pa
.-'---h
1
0
a.
-I
Pp
=
CR
co k.. (-)
Z Au
cD 01-. 0 w <
CD = m CD
.:.1. '7 i
AD TZ
0 =
F. , , . 9.
co an =` X
" D'
CD c
Cr ismD- DI.
..1.
cl,
.--
=r
=- 0
7dFcn C'"
C
co -
AD
FD s3-
CD
v)
PD) rri P
5. ,
AD
5- 5 5' ,
Crg
c, Fir (.1)
.... cf):1-
CD
CD
-r
cn
!ZI
co
Er,I CD rl C7 '71 cp
7d 0
cn .-t 0 -t-
P:J
,?
-1
AD
cr
5, oP
co
CD
E' mcn
.Z'. "
=
0 ='' 4-1 =
<
(-) =
0 --
4-3
F--> . , -0
.--, 1 . = IDD - AD
"
b- ; CP4 u
CD mt 0 -t-
r) <
n
cn
0 .-
,
,..1.) CA
cn -- '-) = 0
/2, 7.... CM e,
crq H a y CD
a, ,....3 Gig
c4D
-1
4- CI: P.4- 0 0
-8
Po ca,
1 -.. < .... = CD _
t/D
n < IDD CL 0
0 ,ty m
5>"
t- .
CL .1
r"
Crg
2 = v9 Q-0 0 c--t
,--,' ("")
0 0 m
ct 4. 6 .
"d -4
.
- -I
rn,
?-17
cr
co
..0)
c- l .
AD
fm,
- ,
Fr
rrl
0
-t
z-CD-) .
C./)
CD
'1
AD
'd
-0 cD
.. = 0
-, 5 0
t , -, -4 0 ,, =4
ig. ((i)-) (.7. P a
., 0,
=
H - =. , L,-
'6' . (I) (I
O
ml
r)
r)
> ci)
cd >
trdinnnno::i>to>
mi- -I
,t
(m.:Inn(-) to
= = -t =
o 4
.)
-
"id --3 "ri rd 5 rd n 46;4

Emi rri
--]
H
-, c,
ca. CZ
a t. rD
cD
. 0
t--4
=
CD
r.;
tri
=
r" .0 .0
E E-)"
Jam) asegoind
'17
(")
t--' pj' = ,.,. = = = t., *T1 "r1 -7-1 cri rz,
..-0- -AD0
t-`71
1'0014 03B I ELI O1T 01\1
1AI
toaq qy
e
:su o
peaH uogons ong!sod Tax
0. A9 21 L3 - 1. 000-00-8'oN
pani asal sly 6u IIV11311-1 60c100
rn
13
cn
0)
CD
N.)
0
0)
tCD
Cn
Cn
0 -I
-0
C4
5
o z
0 2
I p3
0
m
0
E -4
s
ADZ
r=r-r,
gneu Z0 - b8-9
'ONNOLLVO I3103d S ONVONVIS
4
eD
Inspection Standards Committee
z
>
z
0
--1
m
cn
--1
a
ID
z
-n
-1 O
>x
0
m
g
0
i
0
X
Cn
"0
n)
(.0
0
Oa
0
a)
cn
m
c-)
I
E
m
v
9-A81:1 Z0V L8-9
Fa
'O NNOIIV3I A103dSCINVCINVI S
-i
,
n
4
ril
n
m
g
z
g
i=1
This InspectionandTest Plancovers theminimumtesting & inspecti onrequi rementsof threephasemediumvoltagesquirrel cage inducti onmotors .
PO/PR & Standardsreferred therei n/ Job specifications/Approved doc uments .
simawallm Oni 1S11 (my NOLLD IJSKI

100%
Material Test
Certificates /
Testrecords
1
1
1
1
Chemical ,Physicalproperti es, finish

asperrelevant standard
Page 881 of 1744
TestRecord s
MotorAssembly
Vacuum impregnationand bracingof

winding,core assembly,Rotor bars
andendringsassembly,Rotor
balancing,Terminal boxmountingand
clearances i n between,Beari ngsetti ng,
etc .aspersupplier' s internalstandards
N"--:'
o
In Process I nspection
0
0
,
I
RE CORD
SCOPlEOF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
RawMaterial :
Body(castingor fabrication),
Rotorshaft,Core l aminations, Copper,
Insulationmaterial,Bearings,Terminals,
Cable boxes, Cableglands,etc .
1 --.
7::::+
Material I nspection
1....
2.0
3.0
CHARACTERISTICS
Proced ures
IN)
IA
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
pam asai sly 6IJ IIV 11311.1 6p Ado0
SL
NO.
0. A9 :1L '*1 000-00- 8ONW111.1 03
.4,
Motor(Type Tests)
.Q)
CA
CD
4. 2,
R z
ta. =
v, ,.
0
et
...,-
5
" ioc,co
0 g
o 5.
CD
c::"
.....
c,
C)
'-11
= =
0
.'" "
'17
o co
co
'"
.1
0
frw'o
n
=
R z
4=, 2,
o
ot.
1:1)
=
B',
trc
C/) (4
,-,
fa)
C/)
(4.) CD
co
='
CD
-1
AD
co
"
FL
co
MI
o
co
c/)
.--r =
C/)
,
t....) CD
0vt =
F'D
v)
-,
00
o
'"-.
-t 6
c ,
-,
ts
co co
5- g. -ti
CfQ
CT'
,-+ 0
p n
co
CD cr
,
Ej F)
(i)
/o
ci)
=.
P
cm
(c) =)
(c)
co ,---,
0. CO
,--rC)
:...,
gi (91 crg .
x 1)) ,?:,,"
A)
.-I
CD
,__)
,...r.
rD
$1)
., / ES.
F.D4'
;Cs
=
a
p
= tt
.--
0
=
0
- y)
tz) (4
'''' '0
co"
co
- -
g
'""
=
N.. =1
cD P 'ICI
(/)
RECORD
0'A32:1 LA - W00-00 - 9ON leuu od
Page 882 of 1744
Full load testand measurement of

Voltage , Current, Power, Slip,
Power factor, Beari ng Noise .
Efficiencyand Pf at 1 00% , 75% and
50% load
Temp Risetest
Momentaryoverload test
Vibration
Noise Level
-,SI)
CD
q CfQ
a Fp' ,-,
,, ,, ...
'CS
::0 ...-. po
-
CD
f-F AD 0 CL
'0''
A)
=
Cr,.C
qD P
2
= 00
01. b
- onv)
CM
=
,-F =
r-t. $'3)7' 5 co - co
c4 (71)
cc)
< 0
XI " = c4 r) R - 5. co
0
7.0 a ? Fo0 ,--,
c/D
?
s:__.,
CL
V)
Pr 0
CD P .--,
..- N -1- ,----,
=
Al "
= cn .-- '
cA) lo CD Z
= o CD
i:1"
H
trq
R) (i)
CHARACTERISTICS
`.' "1 0
C
CL
PO
4
2-,
0
.-,
0PzJ
.5-,
'-'
0
H
0(,)
<
'8 e-9 S Cr
R n
Z
<
Z 5 a 7v r''' 5 <
. . ..... :-, p , ,..4_ (70" CD (:)
64 6-Q- c..) == a ci-.) -= -,Z
er ..C) ai
0 Cr
--1 = ="
'-'" '-'
SW
F4 CPP
= C)
...7..
7'
0 5L.,. <
0 <
Fi nal Inspecti on
r7
V)
,.....'
4.0
_4,
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
pa ' esai sp.1 6!-I II V - 113I4 6p Ado0
SL
NO.
SCOPlEOF INSPEC'LION
SUB
EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
SUPPLIER I
'ON N OLLVO IJ133d SaavaN vis
9- "t au ZEOL- L13- 9
>
Cl)
-1
CHARACTERISTICS
STAGE/ACTIVITY
cn
th
Ci)
C)
r' -n
I 0Z
>
E
0
<
0 z
E '6
Cl)
-rri
D
m
9. nati Z0 1.- 1. 8- 9
'ON NOLLVOI A13 3d SCl21VCIN V1S
SL
NO.
TION
SCOP1
SUB
SUPPLIER
EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
QUANTUM
OF CHECK
RECORD
100%
Packing li st/
Supplier' s
Records
Overspeed
Measurement of Starting Torque ,
Startingcurrent , full Load Torque ,
Pull outtorque byJEC *
CA
ort-
F.).
CD
rD
C
CD
cn
011
"
ta.
0
'..'
0 "10
':
FD
.--'
r-t-
Fij
e-... --..
pa o
.-i `'
* Measurementswill bemade inaccord ancewith standardJEC(Logarithmicproporti onmethod II & Iasperrotor design) .
Page 883 of 1744
100%
Final data
folder/
Completeness
certifi cate
Compilationof Inspectionreports,
drawings,etc .asper VDR / PR
:It

Reviewof Internal Test Reports
Testcertificate fromrecognized
testing laboratory forarea
classification.
BIScertificate for FLPmotorsand
accessori esasapplicable .
PESO approved certificates for
motorsand accessori esas
applicable .
Degree of protectionof enclosure
IC issuance
Final Documentsubmi ssion
Conn=
Documentationand IC
CO
Documentationand IC

rA
Paintingand Packing
Visual
Suitableprotectiontoprevent entry
of foreignmaterial .
Properpackingtoprevent any
damage duringtransportationand
storage .
cD
i,....)
01
cp,
6.0
Painting
c
c)
0
v,
5.0
pam asai sT4 61-1 IIV 11 3;q 61.1 Ado0
0'^92:I LA- 1. 000-00- 8ON leWJ Od
0'Aa21 Ld -100 0-00 -8ON 4ew.i od
Page 884 of 1744
pam asai s14 61.1 Ily 11 314 6p Ado3
C
c/)
CD
C-
$1,
-0
co
cr
(4
co
C
0
C)
C)
'1
IDD
C)
CD
CD
0
-C
(4
0
-0
co
C)
-o
(/)
co
;I)
CD
0
C
CD
(4
C
CD
( CD
co
CD
co
a a.
CA
-0 co
o
5-:
co
"CI
0
C
0
AD
`CI
(1)
0
0
Cr
co
CD
CD
fao
co
co
CD
$11
cn
cu
CD
(74 rD
CD
co
(7) o
. 0
CD rn
0 CD
"1:23
4
0
IsJ
_
O
c4
CD
CrtD
r)
o
CD
CL.
pC1
PZI
CD
C)
CD
7t
AD AD
CD cl
CL
co 's
CD
CD
a
cn <
co
a.
'CS
"
"CS pa
o ,:-"'
0
CD
CD e-
O g
;7)
-F).
,C=r)
CD
CI.
'H. 0
CD
- Samplesmust includemi n .1Noofeachtype),
CD
CD
"ON N OLLVOl d103 dS 421VONV1S
gn et! ZE O6- 68- 9
Page 885 of 1744
pamasal s4q 6P IIV 113 lq6pAclo3
0AoTI L3- 1000-00-8 "Igw-10.4
CO
C,
6"'
c,
t.,
c)
O
O
uoguwawaidui! Joj panssi
00
panss!-a-H pur paspka->i
ry
panss!-ag pue pasinax
cs,
STANDARD SPECFICATION NO.
'0N iewiod
.A9dL 3- 1000-00-8
pamaseJ s4LI 6P IIV 11311160doo

Page 886 of 1744
uldno .3.s -JN
7,,,
c cmc c ,.<
'.11
,.,zt ..Ti
c. -, ci) H '-'-. - CDC -o ...,-.
~ fl
- -1
.- r
9' cp
-3 C)
,=,.
ct r
ro
CD
.9_, Cm. -1 cA (,,-zr
po <7;
1,)
co
(I4 -t
0
(1)
.
co
C
0
t,t
0
C4
ct) C " r- cm v)
-i) c -t., e-1cp
p,, p2_, .5,.
4
,
rii
r.
- ,_, aro
o
D.
<
--3
'0 C.,
F).
CD
c
co
v)
'* ,-,-' '87 -,
.-s,
cm
0-
to >
>l
rn
rIrl
~ri
.<
(-)
o
5
to
cp '5Ci) .
cn
5'
-3
HH
til C
(...) 5_
0
cD
iiN)"- co (-) C C.
-t r)
, c,.,
--t
Ci) 0 (17 n ,>"- 5. H (D
r)
H (H
.D ,..-4C)
r)
Co
v) C)..,
co
0
C
0
0
<-P,-*
(-.)
cn
,_
,,, 5. .0, AD
.-,
'
eD
,-.
C'f.) .
AD CD
Olci 0
C
C .--.
s2
zJ,c
o
,-
-t
1:0
,---r'-
o tri
0 yH
C- cD
PD
..
L'
9
rc.
rD ,-,
Fo
5' 7,
ri
Ci) _
-. c)
Po
r) '"
,-,- 6
O
C
c)
`-<
-.
0
C
-, c, q --1 __, -) ,. ,. ,_ ()
t
5,- -3
AD
C
-t C +
-1
C.,Cf4"
cp
C v)
Cf4 rD 0
4 (4 '
,c) rri a 0,
p3 -0
co
,Th
v' c
'-.. 1P-, 0. -,-- 4
'" ,....
'.-1
,'..i. 'r.).
1
(1:1 ,.,
,..., iri g
ct)
r) co n
co0... --) (..)
CD
AD
c) -,-. up o
><
CD -t ,. C
..i
co 7c) t-' w) v,
"
2 ,8_. Fi)-'-c)
Cl. C1) AD
'0
ci)
o
P) ...
-j)- -. o
o" ,. r)
vp
C ,.0 cr' C cp
,- .-1 - (-) -
-t . -s
o tra c)
'0-'' rj
C Co :R.
ro
<
(1
9s4D
(,,
ril
0 C/") CD pt
CD
CIR
- eD
,.
R
-o
'') 5'
6"
g.
a)-' r)
cn. '')
,C1'-d'-d'td'-d'-d'-dZZZ4
..a
o
zb
5
:=,o-,
>
co
C
.
.0
rri
('$2-:',*
ril
c)
cir
-s
< " ,-1..1 .'t.t. t1 ! I , ! _,-9osn- ,,9,)
.
(
r
.
1)
_
,
?
:
1
)
,.
>
c
D
...
e: >
e.:71) '
CD
Cl.. cp
-,
,-,:3,
,,,
,
,,.(5,
E,
,
o
c
,
v,
-,5.
o
?
c)
,_,
,_t
o
C:
J
`
5
9
<
,
)
8
.
,
9
.,
,
-.
.
'"C) cs)
rri
H
=.
t=,,
"
7
"
o
n
.2> L4
-s
co
0C
C ".
r,
- <tl_,_) , ,,c) n ....

,-CD :A)
0 0
co
(0 CD
,-,
,-+ .2'
-t "
n
- CD
-, ,-.
0 o
Cl. -1. . CL, AD ,.-'.--,-, . 0 ..,
cn Q.
cA
CL CL cl) P' 0.
3.
=.
'"C
co
C- '5. ,-..
"-"
0 ..-t cID
CD
,_,
s..., o -
R- Q.,,..,
iii CA
,-, p_i
-1 .... o ,-$:,D et,nCna,,,,-, ,:r-- .-t
c ro en A)
rD
cp 51
CD Cn
n 5- '-'.
Cn crq
(-)
''' '""
r Tr
5 5 t CNC] n nto
rri
Hnnr(:1t nxHHHti tc
rr o
-,
(-)
(-)
0
1-' `-' '-' s'-'
1S3,1,
STANDARDSPECIFICATION NO.
InspectionStandardsCommittee
'AaRIS01-18-9
:suop.mnoacmy
-AaH
tJ
:adODSO'I
PO/PR / Standardsreferredthere in/Job specifications / Approved documents.
.,
Page 887 of 1744
Test Records
Test Records
Material Test
Certificates/
Test
Records/Thir
d Party Lab
certificates
100% forDrum
detailsand Sample
drums for balance
details
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Visual,Drum details, Size,Ends Capping,

Markingonoutersheath (such asIncremental
Length, Voltagegrade,manufacturer'sname),
Colourcoding,etc.
n
0
g
1
'
Finished Cable
,::'
Final Inspection
Sparktest,thicknessof insulation, Conductor

Resistance
0,
4.0
(....)
.,--,
Inspection during
insulation,sheathing
Purity,Dimensions, Physical and Chemical

Properties.
.--,
C>
Incomingrawmaterial
likeCopper, Aluminum,
PVC,XLPE, Galvanized
Armour.
t>>
7::::,
Material Inspection
,0
0
c:'
Procedures
=,
QUANTUM OF
CHECK
If.)
C5
CHARACTERISTICS
tN)
--,
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
PaMaSeJS41-16PIIV 11344 60c100
7Cln
0
3.0 INSPECTIONAND TEST REQUIREMENTS:
0nal{ Ld-6 000-00-8 'oN 4eWJOd
Q..
C.I)
..8,
,...,,,
:i
CD
-ri
7ZJ
cp
CD n
r) .--
5'
r- cn
CD
cn
0
CD
0..
(1)
----
-s N
,-t
CD
Z
--__.
cn
-t
r)
c>r) -.
v)
r- cn
CD ...(j
n
Page 888 of 1744
ET.
-t-
a.--4--;
----,__,
ro
Cl.
,.,
.9,
o
"
Q.,
ri>
-t
IZS
CD
---,
'.
0
1
::$
<D
----...
.1 CD CD
.----.... ----..
E;i .
,4), ,a>""
-r- cp
CD
-----
."1:$
C1C7
li
..- .
-.
c>
c>
'E go'
rp
'zi -t
0
n
----0 (1)
,---
-Q
>
CI)
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
Supplier's
Test Records
t-)
(= t1 ZS
(1)
cn
o
cn
cn
,,
,--,
cr
FD-.
1:0
v)
-4.
`...
E7D
CD
C/D '""
:P.
Conductor Resistance.
High Voltage
Partial Discharge(forXLPEonly)
Checkcalibrationstatusof all testing
equipment.
Dimensionchecksoverall dia,over/under
armour,thicknessof insulation,sheath,
copperscreen dimension,etc.
ConductorResistance
Insulationresistance /Volumeresistivity
High Voltagetests
Partial Discharge(for XLPE)
HotSet(for XLPE insulation)
TestsonConductorasapplicable
TestsonPVC/XLPEInsulation & Sheath *
Armour Galvanization- diptest
Volumeresistivity, Insulationresistance
Tensileandelon :ation(withouta:ein :)
test

applicable
as
Flammability
per
specification.
Accelerated waterabsorptiontestasper
NEMA(Electrical method ) #
Test forresistancetoUltraViolet
Radiation #
OxygenIndextestasperIS/IEC
Rodent & Termiterepulsioncheck
Drum length /surface finish check byrewinding
Test forcircuit integrity for firesurvival
cablesasperIEC(If applicable)
Cn
QUANTUM OF
CHECK
ll)
CD
e-.
s.....,
- $2,3
CD Cr
'-cS
r) ....
r> c
C) tI
i....)
Finished Cable(Routine
Tests)
CHARACTERISTICS
patuasai sp.1 61J I IV 113 41-1 60doo
i-)
'AnfIS01-18-9
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
0'A32:1 Ld - 1,000-00-9 oN 4eLtuod
ri
l
n
o
x
,,
7:1
SupplierTC
& IC
0
CD
CD
cr
rD
DZ1.
1:$
rD
Co.
e+ rD
(,)
CD
ro
cr
-<
rrl
CD
CD
(7,
ro
(,)
cr
rt)
(1)
Final data
folder
/Completenes
scertificate
c:
CD
0
CD
E-4 0
-cs
-<
co
s:0
o
21,
r.)
rb
r)
'--3
CD
C/)
--
11
rit's
s:0
c7"
ro
t-+
F4
CD
<
?").
CD
ro
c",)"
CL,
er,
CD
CD
-6
cr cra
("D
Compilationof Inspectionreports,drawings,
etcasper
VDR
/ PR
("D
Test Records
r)
<1>
("D
1=1
x
cr
<
rD
CD
CD
o
E
o H
Final Documentsubmission
* r) *
- Samplesmust includemin1Noof each type),
Page 889 of 1744
Reviewof Routine,Acceptance,Typetest
reports.
IC issuance
(1)
01
0
9:7 \
,--,
CI1
Documentationand IC
i.)
Documentationand IC
Sample
Painting
0nal{ L3- 1.000-00-9 '0N Tewiod
Dielectric Retention.
Typetestson PVC insulationand Sheath
High Voltagetest(Water Immersion)
Dielectricpower factortestsas functionof
voltage,temperature.
(XLPEcables)
Heatingcycletest(XLPECables)
Im.ulsewithstand test(XLPEcables
Visual
Dimensions
Typetests** asperIS/IEC
SCOPE OF INSPECTION
SUB
SUPPLIER EIL/TPIA
SUPPLIER
pemasai s41.16!J IIV 71311-150doo
QUANTUM OF
CHECK
CHARACTERISTICS
cn 0
4A.
b'l
Cableaccessories
C11
0
Finished Cable
(Typetests **)
-A.
0"
Z
C
STAGE/ ACTIVITY
C/)
CA
0AGd LA- 6000-00-9 'oN teu.00d

CopyrightEI L Allrightsreserved
Page 890 of 1744
CD
CD
CD
cn
CD
ri)
CD
cn
t
CD
AD
ci)
13,7
c7
CD
r=0
>1:t
`LS
O
Q_
CD
CD
CD.
0
CD
CD
CD
'1:21
CD
c)
CD
,,cn1
o
-s
CD
0..
01.
Er.
>
-<
vs
co
CD
CD
CD
cn
CD
CD
CD
CD
r[,
v,
CD
'cn
CIA cp
"
{.D
1)
-s
CD
c.h
co
cn
SO
CD
r)
r)
t..)
t=1
ci)
STANDARDSPECIFICATIONNO.
.âll
ulel
ei
41177I riecnrc, QA 3Vfii1)
AND
7-51-0103 Rev. 5
FIXING DETAILS
400
50 I 50 I 50 I 50 I 50
25
STANDARD No.
TYPICAL EARTH PLATE
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
50 I 50
Page 1 of 1
FOR CONNECTION WITH

G.I. STRIP OF SIZE 75x10.
(TYPICAL)
25
i
II
If
10 DIA HOLES FOR

8MM DIA BOLTS
FOR CONNECTION WITH

G.I. STRIP OF SIZE 50x6
AND BELOW (TYP.)
G.I. EARTH PLATE

WELDED CARBON STEEL
BOLT-8 MM DIA
RCC STRUCTURE
.L
\i \
4.-1
STEEL
STRUCTURE
,,\./ V---, 4
1E1
12 DIA G.I. SPACER

PIPE (TYP.)
'A v/Ar/ A
RN
rArArAv/AVA
1111
111111
Allr All All% All
Air Air Alr
NI MN
G.I. NUT, SPRING

AND PLAIN
WASHERS (TYP.)
G.I. ANCHOR
BOLT 8 MM DIA
SEE
NOTE-1
10 MM THICK G.I.
EARTH PLATE (TYP.)
(SEE NOTE 2)
LOCK NUT & BOLT
0
SEE
NOTE-1
MI\ NM
AN%A AIWA
-I-
10
G.I. EARTH
STRIP
IUI
UPI
G.I. EARTH
PLATE
TYPICAL FIXING DETAIL

OF G.I. EARTH STRIP
TO EARTH PLATE
NOTES:ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
OF EARTH PLATE ON
R.C.C. STRUCTURES
TYPICAL INSTALLATION
OF EARTH PLATE ON
STEEL STRUCTURES
27.06.11
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED
BP
4
Rev.
No.
31.01.07
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED
BP
Prepared
by
Date
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O

Page 891 of 1744
Purpose
WHERE FIRE PROOFING OF STEEL

STRUCTURES ARE ENCOUNTERED
LENGTH OF CARBON STEEL BOLTS
SHALL BE SUITABLY INCREASED FOR
FIXING OF EARTH PLATE.
ALL CONNECTIONS WITH EARTH PLATE
SHALL BE MADE WITH 8MM DIA.
BOLT, NUT, SPRING AND PLAIN WASHERS.
CRIMP TYPE CABLE LUGS SHALL BE
USED FOR CONNECTION WITH G.I.
WIRE ROPE.
S
RKS/AKJ
Checked
by
UAP
DM
VC
JMS
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
.7 el
1ge_11 taffleg
WM ,rameMMWM
(A Onvt of India Unde.takg)
STANDARD
EQUIPMENT
No.
7-51-0116 Rev. 6
EARTHING SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 1
EARTH CONDUCTOR SIZE
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT
(SEE NOTE-1)
MOTORS UPTO 3.7KW
8 SWG SOLID G.I. WIRE
MOTORS FROM 5.5KW TO 30KW & WELDING RECEPTACLES
10 MM (3/8") DIA G.I. WIRE ROPE
MOTORS ABOVE 30KW INCLUDING HV MOTORS
16 MM (5/8") DIA G.I. WIRE ROPE/

40x5 MM G.I. STRIP
BUILDING COLUMNS
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
STORAGE TANKS (VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL)
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
LOADING RACKS
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
VESSELS & HEAT EXCHANGERS
40 x 5 G.I. STRIP
SMALL EQUIPMENT & INSTRUMENTS
LIGHTING, POWER & INSTRUMENT PANELS
10 MM (3/8") DIA G.I. WIRE ROPE
MAIN EARTH BUS / MV & HV SWITCH GEAR

INTERCONNECTIONS/ POWER TRANSFORMER
AS SPECIFIED
EHV & HV SUBSTATIONS
AS SPECIFIED
PUSH BUTTON STATIONS
STREET LIGHT POLES
10 MM
(3/8") DIA G.I. WIRE ROPE
LIGHTING TRANSFORMER
16 MM
(5/8") DIA G.I. WIRE ROPE
PIPE RACK
40X5 G.I. STRIP
BONDING OF PIPE
25 SQ. MM INSULATED FLEXIBLE CU. CABLE
NOTE:EARTH CONNECTIONS TO INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT FROM NEAREST EARTH PLATE / GRID MAY ALSO
BE DONE ALTERNATIVELY USING ALUMINIUM / COPPER CONDUCTOR PVC INSULATED CORE OF SIZE
NOT LESS THAN HALF THE CROSSSECTION OF RESPECTTIVE POWER CABLE TO EQUIPMENT
(MOTOR, PANEL ETC.). CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE USING CRIMP TYPE OF LUGS.
2.
6
5
Rev.
No.
GREEN COLOR SLEEVING (ABOUT 50 MM LENGTH) SHALL BE PROVIDED AT BOTH ENDS TO

DENOTE EARTHING.
27.06.11 REVISED AND ISSUED

31.01.07 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED
Date

Page 892 of 1744
Purpose
k/
BP
Prepared
SC
RKS/AKJ
Checked
by
by
BP
UAP
JMS
DM
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
ala_it4
Ogar0154'dg
Page 893 of 1744
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
INSTRUMENTATION OF
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A Govt of Indla Undertaking)
PACKAGE UNITS
Ada
Page 1 of 58
fry
*o-t-al21mm ITFTW fq fff -kmRT

INSTRUMENTATION OF PACKAGE
UNITS
16.03.15
29.06.09
25.06.97
REVISED AND REISSUED.
30.06.86 ISSUED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION.
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RG
RP
TGM
ND
RK
BRS
RB
AS
RK
RB
AKV
AK
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
$'1gal faiW
&
INDIA LIMITED
Page 894 of 1744
IA Govt of India Undeflaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 58
Abbreviations:
AARH
AC
AWG
CPU
CRCA
DCS
DPDT
DPST
DTM
DVD
EDDL
FDT
FF
FISCO
FNICO
HART
HIC
HMI
HT
110
IP
IU
LAS
LED
LT
MAWP
MCB
MCC
MR
NB
NC
NO
NPT
NPTF
NPTM
P&ID
PID
PLC
PTC
PTFE
PVC
RAM
RB
RTD
.
:.
.:
.
:.
:.
.:
:.
:.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:.
.
.
-.
.
.
-.
:.
.
.
:.
:.
:.
.
:.
Arithmetic Average Roughness Height

Alternating Current
American Wire Gauge
Central Processing Unit
Cold Rolled Cold Annealed
Distributed Control System
Double Pole Double Throw
Double Pole Single Throw
Device Tool Manager
Digital Versatile Disc
Electronic Device Description Language
Field Device Tool
Foundation Fieldbus
Fieldbus Intrinsically Safety Concept
Fieldbus Non-Incendive Concept
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Hand Indicating controller
Human Machine Interface
High Tension
Input /Output
Ingress Protection
Interface Unit
Link Activity Scheduler
Low Tension
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
Miniature Circuit Breaker
Motor Control Center
Nominal Bore
Normally Close
Normally Open
National Pipe Threads
National Pipe Threads Female
National Pipe Threads Male
Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
Proportional, Integral and Derivative
Performance Test Code
Poly Tetra Fluoro Ethylene
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Random Access Memory
Rockwell Hardness in B Scale
Resistance Temperature Detector
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
n31
Oe.11
tlf5ieg
IvIten eivtutzmatmissif
Page 895 of 1744
RTU
SOV
SPDT
TFT
TMR
UPS
URV
WC
Govt of India UrvIertaktng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 58
Remote Terminal Unit

Solenoid Valve
Single Pole Double Throw
Thin Film Transistor
Triple Modular Redundant
Uninterrupted Power Supply
Upper Range Value
Water Column
Instrumentation Standards Committee

Convener
Members
: Mr. Rajiv Gupta

: Mr S Bhowal
Mr M Nandi
Mr R K Gupta
Ms Rima Kundu
Mr S Mahesh Kumar
Ms. N.P.Guha (Proj.)
Page 896 of 1744
sl ar Wes
g
43* ENGINEERS
NV, rieaxt
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of hrhA Unde,taong)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 58
CONTENTS
PART I
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTATION
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
12
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
19
4.0
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS
20
5.0
LIST OF DOCUMENTS ATTACHED
46
PART II
SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIAL, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING
47
1.0
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
48
2.0
INSTALLATION
54
3.0
TESTING AND CALIBRATION
56
4.0
COMMISSIONING
58
ANNEXURES:
ANNEXURE I
ANNEXURE II
MATERIAL SELECTION CHART

BLANK FORMATS
e1
ENGINEERS
OQzll taRcg INDIA LIMITED
Page 897 of 1744
n AVIRot ottratte On avast.
Govt
Ind.
unciertakog)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 58
PART I
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF
INSTRUMENTATION
Page 898 of 1744
$1g-ar
laf5teg
r.tea v/vore attow)i)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GovtofIndia Undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 58
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This specification together with the attachments covers the design and engineering of
instruments, control systems, accessories and materials, along with special test equipments,
where the supply is part of a package being supplied by vendor. This specification is general
and all instruments/systems included may not be required for the proposed package. The
scope shall be as defined in the scope of supply of Instrumentation.
1.1.2
The detailed scope of work, specific job requirements, exclusions, deviations, additions etc.
if any, will be indicated in Scope of Supply of Instrumentation and Job Specification of
Instrumentation included in the material requisition.
1.1.3
This specification provides only the qualitative specifications of commonly used

instruments. Specifications of Instruments not covered in this specification shall be
submitted by vendor for review by Purchaser.
1.1.4
Vendor shall be fully responsible for design, material selection, sizing and selection of the
proper instruments for their system. The compliance to this specification does not absolve
the vendor of the responsibility towards contractual obligations with regards to
completeness, proper selection, satisfactory operation and easy maintenance of the unit.
1.1.5
All items, as offered, shall be field proven and should have completed trouble free
satisfactory operation for a period of minimum 6 months on the bid due date in the similar
application with the process conditions similar to those as specified in the purchaser's data
sheets. Items with proto-type design or items not meeting provenness criteria specified
above shall not be offered
1.1.6
In the event of any conflict between this specifications, data sheets, related standards, codes
etc., the vendor shall refer the matter to the purchaser for clarification and only after
obtaining the same should proceed with the manufacturing/engineering of the item in
question. DCS/ PLC is not included in this specification. Vendor shall refer specifications
attached separately in case DCS/ PLC is included in scope of supply.
1.2
Bids
1.2.1
Vendor shall provide the following information along with their offer:
Compliance to Complete Material Requisition/Tender.
Utility requirements including Power consumption and Instrument air supply
consumption. The offer shall indicate the power requirement for Uninterrupted Power
Supply (UPS), Non-UPS and DC power clearly indicating the locations for each.
Estimated heat load for the equipment located in control room.
Control room size and layout (Tentative)
1.2.2
Vendor shall clearly define the operational philosophy proposed, which shall be in line with
requirements specified in the job specification. Vendor shall also clearly indicate the
provision of control panels and control systems required for the package along with offer.
1.2.3
Documents like Instrument list and typical specifications and any other details if submitted
by vendor in their bid, shall not be reviewed and shall be retained for records only. All such
details shall be submitted by vendor only after the finalisation of P&ID (Piping and
Instrument Diagram) during detail engineering. No implication shall be admissible on the
Copyright EL All rights reserved
Og.r..1101Wteg
Page 899 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOta UndettakIngt

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 58
basis of these documents and vendor shall be responsible for completeness and correctness
of the same with respect to Purchase Requisition/Tender.
1.2.4
Vendor's offer, catalogues, drawings, instrument manuals etc. shall be in English.
1.2.5
In addition to mandatory spares, commissioning and consumables indicated elsewhere in

this specification, Vendor shall also quote recommended spares for 2 years normal operation
for the complete instrument and control system for the offered package.
1.3
Applicable National/International Standards:
1.3.1
Design and terminology shall comply, as a minimum, with the latest edition of following
codes, standard practices and publications, unless otherwise specified:
AGA
American Gas Association, Gas Measurement Committee

Orifice Metering of Natural Gas and Other Related
Report No.3
Hydrocarbon Fluids Concentric, Square-Edged Orifice
Meters
Report No.7 - Measurement of Natural Gas by Turbine Meter
AG181
Foundation Fieldbus System Engineering Guidelines
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

1.20.1
Pipe Threads.
Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24
16.5
Metric/Inch Standard
16.47-B
Large diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60
Metric/Inch Standard
Ring Joint Gaskets and Grooves for Steel Pipe Flanges.
16.20
ANSI/FCI
American National Standards Institute/Fluid Controls Institute

70.2 Control valve seat leakage classification.
API
American Petroleum Institute

Sizing, Selection and Installation of Pressure Relieving
RP 520
System in Refineries.
Part-I -
Sizing and Selection
Part-II -
Installation
Guide for Pressure Relieving and Depressurising Systems.
RP 521
RP 526
Flanged Steel Safety Relief Valves.
Seat Tightness of Pressure Relief Valves.
RP 527
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards.
MPMS
RP 551
Process Measurement Instrumentation.
Part 1 -
Process Control and Instrumentation.
RP 552
Transmission Systems
RP 554
Process Instrumentation and Control
RP 555
Process Analysers
Venting Atmospheric and low pressure storage tank.
S 2000
S 670
Machinery Protection Systems
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), Section VIII,
Division 1: Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels.
PTC 19.3 TW :2010 & ERATA 2012
THERMOWELLS Performance Test
Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes using Orifice, Nozzle
MFC-3M
and Venturi

Page 900 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tgz1T tte--'
eg
1.1F, eironeffoJosoi)
(A Go. of WO UndeffOk,o9)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
MFC-14M
ASTM
BS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 58
Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes using Small Bore

Precision Orifice Meters
American Society for Tests and Materials

British Standards
EN 50288-7
Multi Element Metallic Cables used in Analogue and Digital
Communication and Control Part-7 : Sectional
specification for Instrumentation and Control cables
EN 10204
Inspection Document for Metallic Products
IBR
Indian Boiler Regulations.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission.

60079
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas atmosphere.
60085
Electrical Insulation Thermal Evaluation and Designation
60332
Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire conditions
- Part 1-1: Test for vertical flame propagation for a single
insulated wire or cable - Apparatus
Parts and Sections
60529
Classification of degree of protection provided by enclosures.
60534-2
Industrial Process Control Valves-Flow capacity.
60584-2
Thermocouples Tolerances
60751
Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometer and Platinum
Resistance Sensors
61285
Industrial Process Control Safety of Analyser Houses
61000-4
Electromagnetic compatibility for Industrial Process
measurement and Control equipment
61158
Foundation Fieldbus Specifications
61804-3
Functional blocks for process control part 3 Electronic
Device Description Language (EDDL)
IS
Indian
Standard

5
319
1239
1271
1554

2074
3624
5831
7358
8784
ISA
Colours for ready mixed paints.

Specification for free cutting Brass bars, rods and sections
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings
Specification of Thermal Evaluation and Classification of
Electrical Insulation
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables-working
Part I voltage upto and including 1100V
Ready mixed paints, air drying, red oxide- zinc chrome.
Specification for pressure and vacuum gauges
PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
Specifications for Thermocouples
Thermocouple compensating cables
International Society of Automation

S-5.2
Binary logic diagrams for process operations.
S 7.0.01
Quality standard for Instrument Air
S-75.xx
Standards related to Control Valves
ISO 5167
Measurement of fluid flow by means of orifice plates, nozzles and venturi

tubes inserted in circular cross-section conduits
ITK
Interoperability Test Kit (latest version)
Page 901 of 1744

INSTRUMENTATION OF
INDIA LIMITED
PACKAGE UNITS
(A Gov/ of India Untlertakolg)
ENGINEERS
k3
1
tif5lreg
.W1
03/1
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 58
NACE
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NEC
National Electric Code
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA-496
National Fire Protection Association - Purged and pressurised enclosures for

electrical equipment
OSHA
Occupational Safety and Health Authorit.
SAMA
Scientific Apparatus Maker's Association
1.4
Drawing and Data
1.4.1
Detailed drawings, data and catalogues required from the vendor shall be as per Vendor
Data Requirement attached elsewhere in the Material Requisition / Tender.
1.4.2
The minimum requirements expected from the various documents listed in Vendor Data
Requirement shall be as follows:
1.4.2.1

This document lists out all drawings and documents prepared and/or submitted by vendor to
purchaser after placement of order through vendor portal. Following information shall be
available in this document:
Name and number of each drawing and document listed.
Expected and Actual date of submission to purchaser.
c) Review category of the documents
1.4.2.2
Instrument Index
Instrument Index lists out all instruments appearing on the P&ID without any exception. It
is a basic instrument document which is necessary for the smooth execution of a job and is
also a reference document after the completion of job. Instrument Index shall be prepared in
EIL Format. In case, any other format is used, it must contain all information as listed in
this format as a minimum.
1.4.2.3
Sub Vendor List (for Instruments and Accessories)

This document shall list out all instrument items and accessories including control system
along with the name of the sub-vendors from whom vendor is likely to procure these items.
Instrument Sub-vendor shall meet the enlistment conditions of Ell, approval at the time of
placing the order on sub-vendor for the Project Approved Vendor List. The EIL approval
conditions are available with the Sub-Vendors. Vendor shall follow the approval
requirement.
For Instruments / items not covered in the vendor list, Vendor shall get approval from
purchaser/ owner for the vendors proposed, prior to the placement of order. In such cases the
sub-vendors suggested shall be manufacturer of repute and it shall meet the provenness
criteria specified in this document.
1.4.2.4
Instrument Sizing Calculations

Instrument sizing calculations provide information regarding sizing (as per standards
specified else-where in this document), type, selection and other related information.

ENGINEERS
51:4231a5teg
INDIA LIMITED
Page 902 of 1744
1.1771 rirc.t .,,J,12M11
IAGoNatIWOUndfr,dkiO,

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 10 of 58
Following sizing calculations shall be applicable, in general, duly approved by the authority
indicated in Vendor's Standard Quality Plan;
Control valve including noise and velocity.
Pressure relief valves/pilot operated pressure relief valves/rupture disc/breather
valve/flame arrester.
Flow element including orifice plates, averaging pitot tubes, venturi, flow nozzle etc.
Utility consumption calculation including power supply (UPS/Non UPS), Instrument
air, steam for tracing, cooling water, nitrogen etc.
Cable sizing calculations for power cables.
Intrinsically safe loop calculation for proper selection of cables considering various
entity parameters.
Segment loading calculations.
Thermowell wake frequency calculations as pe ASME PTC 19.3 TW-2010
1.4.2.5 Utility Requirements
This document lists out the following information regarding utilities required by the vendor;
List of utilities required i.e. Power (UPS, Non UPS), Instrument air, Cooling water,
steam for tracing, Nitrogen etc.
Location and estimated/actual requirement at each location. The requirement shall be
listed as minimum/normal/maximum.
Incase of AC power, the In-rush current with duration and power factor shall also be
indicated for each location.
In case of cooling requirement of any instrument/equipment, vendor shall provide the
detail of pressure/flow requirement with location.
1.4.2.6 Nozzle Elevation for Level Instruments
Nozzle elevation for level Instruments represent the nozzle elevation, nozzle sizes and
rating, requirement of stand-pipes, type of level instrument etc. for all the vessels, columns,
exchangers and tanks.
1.4.2.7 Purchase Requisition (PR)
Purchase Requisition shall contain following information as a minimum but updated in line
with the finally accepted offer of the successful vendor including:Instrument specifications including detailed instrument data sheet and special
requirements, if any
Testing and Inspection requirements
Vendor data requirements
Other related documents like Standard Specifications, Quality Assurance requirements etc.
1.4.2.8 Functional Schematics
Functional Schematics details out the functionality of all the loops shown on the P&ID
including their correlation. The schematic shows all the hardware necessary to configure a
loop including their physical location, their interconnection and important software blocks as
applicable to make a loop complete. Similar loops may be combined under the same
functional schematic.
Page 903 of 1744

tg-ar Oa&
erraretraJwom,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gort of intha Under/along)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 11 of 58
1.4.2.9 Logic Diagrams

Logic diagram is a logic representation of process interlock and shutdown system and details
out the functionality, in a schematic form, as either process cause and effect table shown on
the P&ID or in a separate write-up. The schematic shall be prepared based on ISA S5.2 A
Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations and shall show the physical location of
Input/output devices, their interconnection with functional blocks, bench status of all
electrical devices etc. The schematic shall also be supplemented with operational
requirements like startup and process bypasses, reset and shut down push buttons, selector
switches, status lamp etc.
1.4.2.10 Segment Drawing
The FF segment drawing provides the complete segment design details indicating all the
devices of a segment, the Tag names, device control/monitoring functional requirements,
spur length, FF Junction box barriers connectivity, termination details, location of JB etc.
1.4.2.11 Instrument Loop drawings
Each loop shall have a separate Instrument Loop drawing which shall show each component
from field device to final receiver including physical location; initiating device, its terminal
number; junction box with its terminal number; cable number with pair number/polarity;
receiver instrument terminals/cabinet terminals; system functional blocks of loop in
simplified manner (without configuration details).
1.4.2.12 Control Room Layout
Control room layout drawing shall show the location of control panels, system cabinets,
marshalling racks and other auxiliary cabinets, consoles with monitors, hard wired consoles,
printers, non-system panels/cabinets including panels/cabinets for packages, LEL panel, fire
alarms panels or any other equipment required to be installed in control room. The layout
shall be prepared on control room architectural drawing and shall also show layout of
equipment in engineering room/computer room etc.
1.4.2.13 Panel Front Arrangement
This drawing shall show the arrangement of panel mounted instruments like indicating
instruments, alarm annunicator, indicating lamps, push buttons/switches etc. including their
approximate sizes and their mounting locations.
1.4.2.14 Configuration Diagram
This drawing is a graphical representation of all major hardwares required in a configurable
control system which are necessary to meet all the expected functional requirements.
1.4.2.15 Dynamic Graphic Display Drawings
These drawings provide a graphic representation of P&ID's arranged in a sequence which
when displayed on the HMI, shall provide easy and logical operational views.
1.4.2.16 Input/ Output Assignment
This document indicates the physical assignment of various I/O modules and their respective
channels to various physical inputs and outputs.
1.4.2.17 Instrument Duct/ Tray/ Trench Layout
Page 904 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ogar
g tif5te
t412,, ,-trotte ott3O0A1
Govt 0 Indo Unclean,

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 12 of 58
Instrument duct/tray trench drawing shows the routing of main instrument duct/tray trench in
the unit/plant. The drawing shall be prepared on plot-plan/ Equipment layout and shall show
the size, cross-section at various locations, general notes, symbols, reference drawings and
the control room entry.
1.4.2.18 Instrument Location Plans
Instrument Location Plans shall show the location of instruments, location of tapping points,
location of local panels, junction boxes, main cable trenches, instrument air distribution
scheme etc. These drawings are prepared on equipment layout drawings in 1:50 or 1:100
scale depending on density of instruments.
1.4.2.19 Instrument Cable Schedule
The instrument cable schedule shall show all instrument and power cables required for
complete instrumentation. The document shall show tag number, cable number, type, length
and size of cables, type of junction box, identity of local panel, control room panel/cabinet
location etc. The document shall also show the size of terminals considered for power
junction boxes and the dimensions of cable considered by the contractor.
The cable schedule document shall include all single & multi pair cables indicating
terminations of instruments, field junction boxes and respective termination in satellite rack
room cabinets. The instrument cable schedule shall be prepared on ElL format.
1.4.2.20 3D Modelling:
Whenever 3D modeling is included in package vendor's scope, it shall include the following
instrumentation items as a minimum:
Instrument Cable Duct.
Analyser shelter/ cabinet.
Local Control Panels.
Prefabricated Hook-ups
Gas Detectors
CCTV
Instrument Junction Boxes
Instrument Stanchions and Canopy
2.0
DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
2.1
Instrumentation shall be complete in every respect in accordance with latest approved

P&IDs for the safe, efficient and easy operation, start up and shut down of the plant.
2.2
All instruments and equipments shall be suitable for use in a hot, humid and tropical
industrial climate in which corrosive gases and/or chemicals may be present. As a
minimum, all instruments and enclosures in field shall be metallic construction, dust proof
and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529 and secure against the ingress of fumes,
dampness, insects and vermin. All external surfaces shall be suitably treated to provide
protection against corrosive plant atmosphere.
2.3
The design of electronic instruments shall be in compliance with the electromagnetic

compatibility requirements as per IEC 61000-4 'Electromagnetic compatibility for Industrial
Process measurement and Control equipment.
n31
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ifgar idtareg
1.1E'A 292tATUOT.AVA/
2.4
Page 905 of 1744
IA Govt of InOta
Undertak.ng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 13 of 58
Instrument Requirements for Classified Area:

Certified Intrinsically Safe (IS) equipment as per IEC-60079-11 shall be used, in
general, in hazardous area, for conventional loops.
Field instruments in fieldbus loops shall be designed and certified as per the hazardous
area protection specified in Job Specification.
In case intrinsically safe equipment is not available, flameproof enclosures as per IEC60079-01 may be considered.
Junction boxes, cable glands and accessories required for flameproof instruments shall
also be certified flameproof.
All non flameproof panels and cabinets installed in classified area shall be purged as per
requirements specified in NFPA-496, as a minimum.
Other type of protection specified in IEC-60079 shall not be used.
2.5
Statutory Approvals
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all statutory approvals, as applicable, for
all instruments and control systems.
In addition, equipments/instruments/systems located in the hazardous area shall be
certified by the local statutory authorities for their use in the area of their installation. In
general following certification shall be given:
For all intrinsically safe/ FISCO/FINICO/ explosion proof/flameproof equipments/
instruments/systems or equipments with any other type of protection allowable as
per this package which are manufactured abroad and certified by any statutory
authority like Laboratorie Central Des Industries Electriques (LCIE), British
Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres (Baseefa),
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Factory Mutual(FM), Underwriters
laboratories(UL) etc. for compliance to ATEX directives or other equivalent
standards. All these equipments/ instruments/systems shall additionally have the
approval of Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO)/ Chief
Controller of Explosives (CCE), Nagpur, if installed in INDIA and the same is
mandatory.
For all flame proof equipments manufactured locally (indigenously), the testing
shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like Central Institute of
Mining & Fuel research (CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing Laboratory
(ERTL) etc. The equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval from
Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO)/ Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCE), Nagpur and a valid BIS license.
iii) For all intrinsically safe equipment manufactured locally (indigenously), the
testing shall be carried out by any of the approved test house like Central Institute
of Mining & Fuel research(CIMFR)/ Electronics Regional Testing
Laboratory(ERTL) etc. The equipment shall in addition bear the valid approval
from Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation (PESO)/ Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCE), Nagpur.
c) Approvals other than above shall neither be offered nor will these be acceptable.
2.6
Following units of measurement shall be applicable, unless indicated specifically otherwise:

Flow
Liquid

Steam
M3/11
kg/h
Page 906 of 1744
50Z:Eq
ENGINEERS
51gaf Weg
INDIA LIMITED
n oqR ,Neant CIA ,141,0,
A GoK otino undertak.9)
PressureNacuum

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
Gas & Vapour
Nm3/h
Gauge
kg/cm2g
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 14 of 58
mm of H2O
Vacuum
kg/cm2
mm of H2O
Temperature
Level
Analysis
ppm
Conductivity
micro siemens
Viscosity
mPa.s (cP)
2.7
Local control loops shall be avoided. In case these are unavoidable, these shall be electronic
field mounted manual loading station only.
2.8
Ranges for instruments shall be selected in general, such that in normal process operation
the indication is between 35% to 65% of the range i.e. middle 30% of the full working
range.
2.9
Field mounted direct actuated Flow and Temperature switches shall not be used. Instead,
transmitters shall be used along with flow element/temperature element. Process switches
shall not be considered unless its use is unavoidable and the same shall be subject to
purchaser's approval. In case switch has been considered, same shall be provided with
sealed micro switch contacts rated for the specified application. Also contacts shall be SPDT
type unless otherwise specified. Contacts used in intrinsically safe applications shall be
suitable for the application.
2.10
Intrinsically Safe System Requirements (for Non Fieldbus Instruments)

Following points must be considered while designing an intrinsically safe system;
All intrinsic safety barriers shall be active type isolating barriers only, with three port
isolation.
Barriers must be selected based on entity concept. Cable parameters shall also be
considered while matching entity parameters.
Each instrument in the hazardous area and the intrinsic safe barrier shall be certified for
intrinsic safety by any statutory authority.
Each input and output in a loop shall have separate barrier. No barrier shall be shared
between two loops or input/outputs.
Any device required to be connected to any intrinsically safe loop in the hazardous side
permanently or temporarily shall also be certified intrinsically safe.
Configuration tools whenever required for any intrinsically safe item, which forms part
of the intrinsically safe item, shall also be certified intrinsically safe.
2.11
Power Supplies and their Distribution

a) Power supply shall be made available at the following voltage levels, unless otherwise
specified:
0
For Instruments, Control Systems,
240V AC/110V AC
Analyzers
n31
ENGINEERS
Igar
Page 907 of 1744
INDIA LIMITED
OIRT ,12,V77 aRJQCITA)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
Solenoid Valves, Relays, lamps
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 15 of 58
24V DC/110V DC 10%/

240 AC/ 110 V AC UPS
Input interrogation voltage

Panel/cabinets lighting
24V DC/110V DC 10%

240V AC Non-UPS 10%
In case 24 V DC is required for Input interrogation, relays and lamps, any other vendor
supplied instruments/ electronics), same shall be considered by the vendor using dual
redundant power packs (110 V AC to 24 V DC converter). 24 V DC feeders shall not be
provided by Purchaser unless indicated specifically in the job specifications.
All instruments, control systems (PLC and DCS) and analyser system shall be able to
operate at the following UPS specification:
Voltage level
240V AC/110V AC 10%
Frequency
50 Hz 3 Hz
Switch over time :
5 milli seconds.
Power feeders shall be supplied to the vendor at only one location. All further
distribution within the package shall be taken care of by the vendor. Number and size of
power feeders shall be informed during detail engineering. Vendor shall provide
adequate number and size of terminals and cable glands required.
d) Instrument power circuits shall be individually protected and isolated from fault with
the help of fuses and DPST switches. Power supply to the individual instrument shall
be disconnected with the help of DPST switch and protected with the help of fuses.
Miniature circuit breakers (MCB's) may be selected in place of switch fuse unit in case
protection is provided for overload protection.
2.12
Alarm Philosophy
Alarms shall be provided to give audible and visual warning of any process and
machine malfunction in the package.
All trips shall have a pre-trip warning alarm in addition to alarm at the trip condition.
Package alarms including pre-trip warning alarms and trip alarms (shutdown alarms)
shall be annunciated on the local panel as per approved P&ID.
Rotating equipments shall have the status indication provided on the local panel as per
approved P&ID.
e) 'Fail-safe' type with normally closed alarm contacts shall be used.
2.13
All line or equipment mounted instruments like control valves, pressure relief valves,
thermo-wells, orifice flanges, level instruments etc., installed on pipes and vessels under
IBR shall be certified by IBR or their authorized representative.
2.14
Location of process connections shall be from the side or from the top of the process
equipment but not from the bottom. This requirement is applicable to both pipes and vessels.
The location of lower side connection for level measurement when necessary shall be
extended inside the equipment with the approval of purchaser to prevent plugging due to dirt
or other suspended solids. In addition, the connections shall be short, vertical or horizontal
and without any pockets.
2.15
Material of construction of instruments shall be as per the material selection chart, attached
as Annexure I of this specification, as a minimum. However vendor is responsible to ensure
that the selected material is consistent with temperature, pressure, corrosion conditions and
other process requirements.

Page 908 of 1744
'
a
$T4Zif
my', twaxt ...5,...
ENGINEERS
laWeg
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt 07 Groba Undenak,r,g )

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
2.16
Field Transmitters
2.16.1
SMART Field Transmitters:
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 16 of 58
2.16.1.1 The field transmitters in all conventional loops shall be smart type only unless specified
otherwise. Field transmitters for flow, pressure, temperature, differential pressure and level
applications shall be yoke mounted type unless specified otherwise. Meter electronics used
for flow measurement etc. shall include all the associated items like pre-amplifier, converter,
transmitter, integrator, integral output meter etc.
2.16.1.2 Field transmitter shall be intrinsically safe and meter electronics shall be intrinsically safe, in
general. In case, intrinsically safe is not available from the approved vendor list enclosed
with this MR/tender, flameproof enclosure is acceptable. In case sensor/ pick up coil is
intrinsically safe, suitable barrier shall be provided and installed in flameproof enclosure.
2.16.1.3 These transmitters shall be 2 wire systems having 4 - 20 mA DC output with superimposed
digital signal having simultaneous analog and digital communication with HART
communication protocol, unless otherwise specified.
2.16.1.4 The transmitter shall be microprocessor based and it shall incorporate a non-volatile memory
which shall store complete configuration data of transmitter and sensor characterization. All
necessary signal conversions, including conversion to produce output with the required
protocol shall be carried out in the transmitter electronics. The configuration data of the
instruments shall be stored in a non-volatile memory such that this remains unchanged
because of power fluctuations or power off condition. In case vendor standard instrument
has battery backed RAM, vendor to ensure that battery drain alarm is provided as diagnostic
maintenance message.
2.16.1.5 Transmitter shall also run complete diagnostic subroutines and shall provide diagnostic
alarm messages for sensor as well as transmitter healthiness. In the event of detection
failure, the output shall be driven to a predefined value, which shall be field configurable.
2.16.1.6 Universal hand held configurator / terminal for the configuration and maintenance of
instruments with HART output shall be provided for all HART based smart instruments.
2.16.2
Fieldbus Field Transmitter and devices:
2.16.2.1 Fieldbus transmitters/ devices shall be provided, if specified, in fieldbus loops.

2.16.2.2 Field bus based transmitter/ devices shall meet the following requirements;
All instruments must satisfy the requirements of the fieldbus registration laboratory
with applicable checkmark like foundation field bus, profibus etc as specified in Job
Specification.
All instruments shall be polarity in-sensitive. Also transmitter shall be LAS capability.
Line plugging detection facility shall be provided, whenever specified in data sheet.
All instruments shall have Analog Input (AI) block and Proportional, Integration and
Differential (PID) control block, as a minimum.
All instruments must be interoperable and shall have valid interoperability test
clearance like ITK latest version for foundation field bus or equivalent for profibus PA,
as applicable.
The field bus instruments shall support peer to peer communication with two wire
communication and bus powered supply.
All instruments shall support EDDL or FDT/DTM requirements.
ENGINEERS
ttliteg
Og en
.AF,,,,AIA' AAJAA,A)
Page 909 of 1744
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Ind Undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 17 of 58
Internal software shall be configured by the vendor including the following information
such as serial number, Device Tag (Tag Number) and Process description
All instruments shall be capable of supporting incremental Device descriptor (DD) for
extra functionality and for software revisions in device memory.
Soft copy of the Device Descriptor (DD) files for configuring the FF device parameters
and common file format (CFF) files for integrating the device into the system shall be
provided by the bidder for offline configuration by System vendor immediately after
despatch.
Fieldbus based field indicator shall be able to indicate all signals available in the
fieldbus segment, selectively.
2.16.2.3 The fieldbus / devices provided shall be able to communicate with latest universal fieldbus
communicator.
2.16.3
Accuracy of transmitters (Pressure & Differential pressure), smart as well as fieldbus based
shall be as follows:
Type of Transmitter
Range of Transmitter
Accuracy for the rangeability of 1:10
Direct
760 mm WC and above
Equal to or better than 0.075%
Direct
Less than 760 mm WC
Diaphragm seal
500 mm WC and above
Diaphragm seal
Less than 500 mm WC
The accuracy is defined as the combined effect of repeatability, linearity and hysteresis.
2.16.4
Transmitter shall update the output at least 8 times a second unless otherwise specified.
Unless specified otherwise in purchaser's specification, transmitter response time shall be as
follows:
For transmitter range of 760 mm WC and above, the response time shall be equal to or
better than 500 milliseconds.
For transmitter range below 760mm WC, the response shall be equal to or better than 1
second.
The response time of the transmitter shall be considered as the sum of dead time and 63.2%
step response time of the transmitter.
2.16.5
Unless specified otherwise, the over-range/static pressure protection of the transmitter shall
be as follows;
Over range/ static pressure <N1>
Range of Transmitter
Pressure
(kg/cm2)
Pressure
Transmitter Differential
Transmitter (kg/cm2)
0 < (V < 250 mm WC
20
20
250 < < 1000 mm WC
45
52
1000 < < 5000 mm WC
45
70

Page 910 of 1744
5/gZif 2151eg w
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Unclenaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 18 of 58
5000 < < 10000 mm WC
45
160
1 < < 10 kg/cm2
52
160
10 < 0 < 100 kg/cm2
160
210
> 100 kg/cm2
210
210
<N1> However if the Over range/ static pressure value specified above is less than the
maximum/ design pressure of service conditions, offered instrument shall be suitable for the
maximum/ design pressure.
2.16.6
Diaphragm seal DP transmitters in flow measurement with a DP of less than 250 mmWC
shall be avoided and alternate type of flow meters shall be provided for such cases suitable to
the process condition.
2.16.7 All transmitters shall have vent and drain facility and the same shall be provided with metallic
plugs. All the cable entries shall also be provided with metallic plugs.
2.17
Instrument Connections
2.17.1
The connections of instruments installed on vessels, tanks, standpipes and piping shall be as
per following EIL Standards.
7-52-0001
Instrument Connections on Vessels and tanks.
7-52-0002
Instrument connection on Piping.
2.17.2
Pneumatic instrument connections for signal and air supply shall be 1/4" NPT (F).
2.17.3
Electrical cable entry connection shall be 1/2" NPT (F)/ 3/4"NPT (F) as per the cable size.
Suitable cable gland shall be used.
2.17.4
End connections shall meet the following, unless, otherwise specified:

Threaded end connection shall be NPT as per ASME B1.20.1.
Flanged end connection shall be as per ASME B16.5 or ASME B16.47B or AWWA
C207 Cl D as per related Piping Specification.
When Flanges are Raised Face (RF) type, the face finish shall be as per ASME B 16.5
and shall be as follows:
125 AARH
: 125 to 250 microinch AARH
63 AARH
: 32 to 63 micro inch AARH
Grooves of ring type joint flanges shall be octagonal as per ASME B 16.20 and
groove finish shall be as follows:
63 AARH
: 32 to 63 micro inch AARH
2.18
Instrument Air Supply
2.18.1
Air supply at pressure specified elsewhere shall be made available to the vendor at the
battery limit for distribution to the instruments.
2.18.2
Pneumatic Instruments shall operate on air supply of 1.4 kg/cm2g and shall have
transmission and output signal of 0.2 to 1.0 kg/cm2g.
Page 911 of 1744
15iF4TE?
Vligieg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 19 of 58
2.18.3
Instrument air quality shall be as per ISA- S 7.0.01and free from corrosive, hazardous and
toxic contaminants.
2.19
Interface with Main Control Room
2.19.1
Wherever applicable, instrument junction boxes shall be provided as interface between

purchaser and vendor. Marshalling details between purchaser-vendor cabling shall be shown
with corresponding junction box termination number allocated against appropriate
purchaser's/vendor's instrument tag number in the format provided by purchaser.
2.19.2
Direct signals from package/package skid

All signals from package skid/battery limit to purchaser's control room shall be terminated
in the junctions boxes located at the battery limit. Separate junction boxes shall be used for
the following type of signals:
Fieldbus based Signals
Intrinsically Safe Analog Inputs/Outputs (4-20mA)
Non -intrinsically Safe Analog Inputs/Outputs (4-20mA)
Intrinsically Safe Thermocouple Inputs
Intrinsically Safe RTD Inputs
Intrinsically Safe contact Inputs
Non-Intrinsically Safe contact Inputs
Intrinsically safe contact Outputs
Non-Intrinsically Safe contact Outputs
DCS and PLC signals shall be further segregated and shall in no case be mixed up.
2.19.3
Repeat Signals from Package Local Panel

Where signals as indicated in Clause 2.19.2 is less in number and do not justify
separate junction boxes, all such signals may be routed via local control panel.
All such signals shall be terminated on separate terminal strips in the local control
panel. The terminal strips shall be segregated as per Clause 2.19.2.
c) Intrinsically safe barriers for all such signals, wherever required, shall be provided.
The above shall only be considered with prior approval from purchaser.
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
3.1
Mandatory Spares
Unless specified otherwise, the following mandatory spares shall be provided by vendor.
3.1.1
Predefined Mandatory Spares

Mandatory spares shall be ware-house spares and shall be supplied as loose items.
3.1.1.1
Higher of 10% or minimum one of each type (range, type, material and rating ) of complete
instruments for commonly used instruments such as transmitter, gauges, temperature
elements, switches, probes.

Page 912 of 1744
Ifgzrr tlf5t-eg
1.1,1 evecnre aA,NmN,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Me Unde,fakng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 20 of 58
3.1.1.2
For Control valve one set of packing and bonnet gasket with tag, one set of stem seal o-ring
for each actuator and piston o-ring additionally for each piston actuated valve, line bolting
(set of studs and nut) and set of gasket with each tag no.
3.1.2
Commissioning Spares
Vendor shall be responsible to supply all spares which are found necessary to replace while
performing pre-commissioning and commissioning activities and this includes system
oriented items (hardware / software).
3.1.3
Consumable spares
Vendor shall supply consumable spares for six months of normal operation.
3.1.4
Engineering Spares
3.1.4.1
For Control system, installed spare module of higher of 10% or minimum one of
input/output modules (including termination panels, if applicable) to enhance the system
functional requirements of control system.
3.1.4.2
For Hardwired console / Local control panel:

A minimum of 20% spare windows with alarm modules shall be provided in alarm
annunciator.
A minimum of 20% spare status lamps / switches / pushbuttons / terminals or one no of
each type, whichever is higher, shall be provided.
For pneumatic panels, 10% spare instrument air header branch lines and 15% spare
bulkheads and tapping points shall be provided in each panel.
Control panels shall have additional spare-space as per clause 4.2.8 of this specification.
3.2
Spares for 2 years normal operation

Vendor shall supply a list of recommended spare parts for each instrument and system
required for two (2) years of normal operation. These spares shall be quoted separately.
4.0
GENERAL SPECIFICATION OF INSTRUMENTS
4.1
Panel Board Instruments
4.1.1
Alarm Annunciator shall either be solid state type or microprocessor based programmable
type with plug in modules and integral power supply. Window display shall be back lighted
incandescent lamps or cluster LED type integral power supply. For window display with
back lighted incandescent lamps two numbers of incandescent lamps of minimum 5 watt
each shall be provided for each window. For cluster type LED display, the number of
LED's in the cluster matrix windows shall be sufficient to provide illumination level of at
least 150 lumens. The circuit shall be designed in such a way that removal/failure of one
lamp or LED from a window/ cluster shall not hamper functioning of that particular
window/display. The annunciator lamps shall be replaceable from the front of the enclosure
panel. In general, dedicated alarm logic module shall be used for each alarm input.
However, when micro processor based alarm Annunciator is offered failure of one
microprocessor shall not affect more than four alarm windows.
Intrinsically safe annunciator circuit, when used, shall have power supply unit in a safe area.
Annunciator alarm sequence shall be as per F3A of ISA.
$fgaf
Page 913 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tiaeg
lanTer 212a7 CANTRI
IA Govt 01 India Undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 21 of 58
The design of the alarm annunciator system shall be such that transient alarms of less than
330 milliseconds duration shall be automatically rejected.
4.2
Panel Design
4.2.1
All panels shall be supplied in pre-tubed/pre-wired condition and shall be completely tested
at manufacturer's works prior to dispatch.
4.2.2
Panels shall be free standing type. Panels with instruments mounted on the front shall be
fabricated from 3 mm thick cold rolled steel sheet. If the same is not available, 4 mm thick
hot rolled steel sheet shall be used. All other panels shall be fabricated from 2mm thick cold
rolled steel sheet. Angle iron framework shall use a minimum section of 50 x 50 x 4 mm
angle. Panel painting procedure shall include blast cleaning, grinding, chemical cleaning,
surface finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high grade lacquer with wet blasting
wherever required. Two coats of paint in the panel colour shall be provided for non-glossy
high satin finish. Final coat shall be given after assembly at site.
Unless otherwise specified, exterior/interior portion of all panels and closed cabinets shall
have a colour as per RAL-7035. Channel base shall be of black colour.
4.2.3
Panel shall be enclosed cubicle type with each section of typically 2100 mm high, 1200 mm
wide and 800 mm deep mounted on 100 mm channel base.
4.2.4
Enclosed cubicle panels shall have removable hinged doors for easy maintenance and
accessibility of the instruments. Doors shall be double leaved type with handle and shall be
provided with lock and key. Adequate illumination shall be provided inside the panel. All
light fittings shall be suitable for 240 V, 50 Hz AC. Power supply greater than 240 V shall
also not enter the control panel.
4.2.5
All cable entries to the panel shall be from panel bottom only using cable glands of adequate
size. Cable gland plate thickness shall be a minimum of 3 mm cold rolled cold annealed
(CRCA) as a minimum. All unused cable entries must be plugged.
4.2.6
Space heater shall be provided where condensation is expected. The space heater provided
shall be with temperature cut off and manual control.
4.2.7
The design of panel shall incorporate provision for expansion by installing adequate spare
capacity. Each panel shall be designed to accommodate the following additional equipment,
as a minimum:
20% of panel front/inside mounted instruments including lamps, push buttons,
switches, relays etc.
20% additional power feeders each provided with switch fuse assembly.
20% additional spare windows in alarm annunciators.
20% spare cable entry points.
4.2.8
Panel layout shall be designed considering ease of operation. No push button or hand switch
shall be located below 600 mm. Instrument mounting heights, in general, shall be as follows:
Electronic Instruments
Annunciators
c)
Electric push buttons/
Bottom row
1100 mm
Middle row
1350 mm
Top row
1600 mm
1950 mm
700 mm
,r_Jt4
5"gar
faf51--eg
1.12M c'crg, ern ,1-45411
Page 914 of 1744

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of inda Undenaking)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 22 of 58
switches, lamps etc.

4.2.9
The internal panel layout shall be designed considering proper approach for instruments,
terminals and other accessories for maintenance, easy removal and online calibration. No
instrument, terminals, power distribution box etc shall be mounted on the panel side plates
inside the panel.
4.2.10
All lamps, status as well as alarm, shall be provided with lamp test facility. One single lamp
test push button shall be used for each panel. Logic for lamp test shall not be implemented
through relay logic in the panel.
4.2.11
Colour Scheme
Status Lamps
On/Open/Permissive
Green
Off/Close/Emergency
Red
Alarms
e)
Normal/Pre-trip alarms
Amber
Shutdown alarms
Red
Push/Pull buttons
On/Open
Green
Off/Close
Red
Emergency shut-down (ESD)
Red
(Push-button with cover/

Mushroom push button)
4.2.12
Panel Piping and Tubing
4.2.12.1 The instrument air header shall be adequately sized with 1/2" branches, SS packless isolation
valves and shall be complete with suitable dual filter-cum-air reducing station.
4.2.12.2 Panel tubing from the bulk head to the panel instruments and instrument air supply to the
panel instruments shall be of 6 mm x lmm thick SS 316L tubing.
4.2.12.3 The tubing shall be laid in plastic slotted ducts. Panel air header and tube fittings shall be of
SS 316.
4.2.12.4 Each tube shall be identified at both the terminating ends.
4.2.13
Panel Wiring
4.2.13.1 Open terminals shall generally be avoided. Terminal strips shall preferably be mounted in an
enclosure. Fused terminal may be used wherever necessary. All terminals shall be of
mechanical screw clamp/screwless type with pressure plates as per the job specification.
Self-insulating crimping wire lugs shall be used for all terminations on terminal blocks,
whereas forked tongue type or lug with eyehole type shall be used for termination on
screwed terminals such as on relays, push buttons, lamp etc. Terminal blocks shall be rated
for 600 V.
4.2.13.2 A minimum of 1 mm multi stranded PVC insulated copper conductor shall be used in
general. All wiring shall be laid in the PVC troughs. No trough shall be more than 70%
full.
2
Page 915 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
zroaretraarasso
(A Govt ol India Undedaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 23 of 58
4.2.13.3 Wires carrying measurement signals associated with thermocouples, resistance

thermometers and other low level signals shall be routed in separate troughs/wire ways and
not alongwith power cables. Power wiring and control wiring shall be separated by not less
than 150 mm. The crossing, if unavoidable, shall be as close to right angles as possible.
4.2.13.4 Extension cables/wires shall be used for all thermocouple inputs. These wires shall be
routed in separate troughs/wire-ways.
4.2.13.5 All intrinsically safe wires shall be routed in separate wire ways from non-intrinsically safe
and power wiring. Intrinsically safe wiring and terminals shall be light blue in colour and
shall be separated from non-intrinsically safe terminals atleast by 50 mm.
4.2.13.6 All incoming power feeders shall be terminated on separate terminals suitable for the
incoming feeder size. These shall be located at the bottom of the panel and shall be suitably
covered for protection against accidental shorting and for human safety.
4.2.13.7 Power supply shall be made available at one point. Further power distribution network shall
be designed such that a single power fault in any instrument branch system shall not cause a
trip of the entire system. Each consumer shall be provided with a separate switch and fuse
for isolation and protection of the system.
4.2.14
Electrical Wiring
All the cabinets, consoles and panels shall be completely wired. Interconnections shall
preferably be done with the help of pre-tracked cables. Vendor may follow their standard
wiring practices, however the requirements specified herein must be complied.
All wiring shall conform to API RP 552- Transmission Systems. Different signal level
cables shall be routed with separation distances as recommended by code.
All wiring inside racks, cabinets, and back of the panels shall be housed in covered,
non-flammable plastic raceways arranged to permit easy assembly to various
instruments for maintenance, adjustments, repair and removal.
All wiring in the raceways shall be properly clamped. All incoming cable shall be
terminated by vendor at marshalling rack with cable glanding including supply of
cable glands. Total wiring cross-sectional area shall not exceed 50% of the raceway
cross sectional area.
Separate wiring raceways shall be used for power supply wiring, DC and low level
signal wiring, and intrinsically safe wiring. Parallel runs of AC and DC wiring closer
than 300mm shall be avoided.
Vendor can alternately offer prefabricated cables for interconnection between
different cabinets and panels.
Wire termination shall be done using self-insulating crimping lugs. More than two
wires shall not be terminated on one side of single terminal. The use of shorting links
for looping shall not be done.

g)
4.2.15
No splicing is allowed in between wire / cable straight run.
Terminals and Terminal Blocks

Terminals shall be non-hygroscopic type made up of unbreakable, fire-retardant, safe
extinguishable, halogen free polyamide compound.
Terminals shall be suitable for wires up to 2.5 sq. mm base solid or stranded
conductor in general. For power cables, higher size terminals shall be used.
c)
The metal parts of terminals shall be of high quality (pure electrolytic) copper and
shall be tin or nickel plated (of thickness up to 15 micron).

INSTRUMENTATION OF
INDIA LIMITED
PACKAGE UNITS
(A Govt of Indo Undertaking)
ENGINEERS
Ogar Weg
Page 916 of 1744
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 24 of 58
The spring material for all terminals shall be chrome nickel spring steel of high tensile
strength and of excellent corrosion resistance. All terminal / terminal blocks shall be
DIN Rail mounted type and shall be easily removable. The size of the terminal blocks
/ terminals of different types shall be consistent and identical.
All terminal blocks shall be mounted on suitable anodised metallic or plastic standoff.
f)
4.2.16
Terminal strips shall be arranged group-wise for incoming and outgoing cables
separately. Terminal blocks for intrinsically safe wiring shall be separate. 20% spare
terminals shall be provided, as a minimum, preferably in each terminal strip.
Following design philosophy shall be followed while deciding the internal layout of panels,
as a minimum;
Distance between terminal strip and
100 mm (min.)+ trough
side of the panel upto 50 terminals
width
Distance between two adjacent terminal :
100mm (min.)+trough
strips
width
Distance between gland plate and
300mm (min.)
bottom of the strip

Distance of terminal strip
100mm (min.)
from instrument/trough/panel top

4.3
Local Control Panel (LCP)
4.3.1
Local control panel for the package units shall be installed within the battery limit of the
package considering operational and maintenance requirements and accessibility. In case of
skid mounted packages, panel shall be located away from the skid.
In case local control panel is housed outdoor i.e. not in a local control room, it shall be
designed to meet IP-55 requirements. In addition, panel must be provided with a rain cum
sun shade/canopy.
4.3.2
Local control panel/panels shall be totally enclosed cubicles. Panel sizing shall be carried
out based on equipment being installed keeping in view the maintenance clearances and
easiness of operation. Although the panel dimensions shall be guided by the actual
requirements, typical dimensions shall be 2100 mm height x 1200 mm width x 1000 mm
depth. In any case, vendor shall not proceed with panel manufacturing before getting prior
approval from the purchaser.
4.3.3
Local control panels located in the hazardous area shall either be purged type or flame proof
Ex'd' or weather proof with Ex'd' components such as lamps, push buttons, switches etc. as
specified in job specification. In case pressurized panels are specified the same shall be
purged and pressurized as per NFPA 496 requirements to render space within the panel non
hazardous. For panels located in IEC Zone 2, hazardous area type Z purging shall be used
with a purge fail alarm in main control room. In case, panels are located in Zone 1, the
power shall be cut off on perssurisation failure as per x-purge requirements of NFPA-496.
An alarm shall be provided on local panel and a contact shall be provided for remote
annunciation, whenever the panel pressurization falls below 2.5 mm of H2O. A protective
device to protect the panel from over pressure must be provided.
Page 917 of 1744
faiteg
Lrr
.1771 eletnfr IN OW,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undeoalong)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 25 of 58
4.3.4
Panel pressurisation with start-up panel purging scheme shall be fully automatic however it
shall be started manually from a push button. Solenoid valves and differential pressure
switch required for panel purging shall be flameproof, however other items like relays,
switches/pushbuttons, timers etc. shall be located in a flameproof housing. Other items like
valves, restriction orifice plates, dual filter regulators, pressure gauges, rotameters etc
required for pressurization shall also be located in the non-pressurized section of the panel.
4.3.5
It shall be possible to switch off incoming power to panel from panel front. All such power
on/off switches shall be flameproof type.
In addition, all those devices and terminals, which cannot be powered off from on/off
switches shall also be located inside flameproof enclosures.
4.3.6
All hinges, screws and other non-painted metallic parts shall be of stainless steel material.
4.3.7
All other requirements as specified in clause 4.2 of this specification shall also be applicable
for local control panels.
4.3.8
Whenever weatherproof local panel is provided by vendor for classified area, the Alarm
Annunciator shall be intrinsically safe and push button, lamps; selector switches shall be
flame-proof "Exd" type mounted on LCP. IS Barriers/ relays for IS alarm annunciator shall
be supplied by vendor along with IS annunciator and potential free non-flameproof contact
for the same shall be considered from the PLC / DCS/ control systems. The IS power supply
module for alarm annunciator shall be installed in a flameproof box in local panel by bidder.
For Lamps, wet contact shall be considered from the PLC/ control system and the lamp test
logic shall be realised in PLC/ control system. The Power supply distribution box inside the
Local Panel shall also be flame-proof "Exd'. IS PCs for display of loop powered indicators
shall be used in weather-proof local panels in case no. of tag local display more than Five
tags. The same IS PC can also be used for local display of vibration and temperature
monitoring system parameters at field instead of separate display unit at field. For 5 or less
number of tags for local indication, normal IS loop powered indicators shall be provided on
weather proof local panel.
Intrinsically Safe (IS) type with minimum 15" Display (Remote interactive PC terminal) unit
certified suitable for the hazardous area shall be mounted on the panel front of local control
panel of the package, wherever IS PC is considered. All local control panel mounted field
remote output indicators, wherever required as per approved P&IDs, shall be displayed in
this remote PC. Single serial interface (RS 485 with Modbus RTU protocol) corresponding
to these signals from control system shall be considered and vendor's scope shall include all
necessary converters, power supply module, connectors at both ends along with serial
communication cables for connecting to serial interface cards.
The PC terminal shall be equipped with necessary keyboard suitable for specified hazardous
area.
4.4
Local Gauge Board
4.4.1
Local gauge board shall be used to install skid-mounted instruments like pressure gauges,
temperature gauges and transmitters.
4.4.2
Location of local gauge boards, when provided, shall be decided to allow easy access at the
rear and front for all instruments and accessories for maintenance and operation.
4.4.3
Gauge board shall be constructed from 3 mm stainless steel sheet with other necessary SS
supporting structure.

Page 918 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.117,enflz751..07-415.3,
IA Go, 01 Indo
undertakng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6 - 52 -0052 Rev. 3
Page 26 of 58
4.4.4
Local gauge board shall be supplied with all instruments installed and completely in
tubed/wired condition before shipment.
4.4.5
All pressure transmitters and gauges shall be provided with block and bleed valves securely
fastened. Identification tags shall be securely fastened for easy identification. Wherever local
temperature indicator is required with temperature transmitter, Loop powered indicator shall
be provided.
4.5
Temperature Instruments
4.5.1
Thermowells
All temperature elements shall be provided with thermowells fabricated out of bar stock
of minimum SS 316 material as per EIL Standard 7-52-0035. The base of the
thermowells shall be chosen to fit the instrument without air gap for minimizing
measurement lag.
Built-up thermowells shall be used in low pressure and low velocity services like in
fired heaters and also where thermowell immersion lengths greater than 500 mm are
required.
Immersion length of thermowells shall be as follows:
Line Size
Immersion length
From 4" to 6"
280 mm
From 8" to 20"
320 mm
>20" and Vessels / columns
400 mm
In special applications, not covered above, vendor shall decide the immersion length
based on actual requirements. Immersion length is based on 200 mm length between
flange face and outer wall of pipe and 200 mm length between flange face and outer
wall of the vessel.
Any pipe line less than 4" nominal bore shall be blown to 4" size to install thermowell.
e) Thermowell flange and well material shall be as per material selection chart.
0 The vibration analysis shall be carried out as per PTC 19.3 TW:2010 (latest version)
and corrective measures shall be taken as necessary.
4.5.2
Temperature Gauges
Local temperature gauges shall be in general bimetallic type. The temperature bulb
shall be of stainless steel construction. The gauge connection shall be all angles
adjustable. Gas filled type shall be used when measuring range is beyond the limits of
Bimetallic gauge or thermowell length exceeds 550 mm or in applications involving
excessive vibrations. Mercury filled type temperature gauge shall not be used.
All local temperature gauges shall have 150 mm dial size. The bulb size shall be
selected to suit the thermowell.
Cases shall be minimum 304 SS and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529.
Temperature gauges shall have accuracy of 1% URV (upper range value).
e) Bimetallic type dial thermometers shall be avoided where excessive vibrations are
enoniinterett, clich ac reriprnrating rnmpreccor clicrharr Only filled type with
Igar
Page 919 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0171, rirove JOOf

AI
IA
Govt of lode Unoertakng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 27 of 58
capillary extension shall be used in such cases. Capillary tubing shall be a minimum of
304 SS with stainless steel flexible armouring, and PVC covering over armour. Filled
type gauges shall be manufactured as per relevant SAMA class.
f) Thermometer stem adjustable gland with union connection and bushing shall be
suitable for 1/2" NPTF connection.
4.5.3
Temperature Elements
a) For remote temperature indication/recording/control/switch etc., resistance temperature
detector (RTD) shall be used upto 400 deg C (operating) and above 400 deg C
(operating) thermocouples shall be used. Elements shall be spring loaded, mineral
insulated and shall have stainless steel sheath as a minimum.
Thermocouple assemblies shall be furnished with weatherproof screw type heads as per
EIL Standard 7-52-0036.
Thermocouples shall be as per IEC-60584-2 and shall have a wire size of 18 AWG for
single and 20 AWG for duplex thermocouples. These shall be magnesium oxide (MgO)
filled grounded type, unless necessary otherwise. The type of thermocouple shall be
selected based on temperature. The selection of type shall be as per following
guidelines:
Copper-Constantan (ISA-Type-T)
(-) 200 to 200C
Chromel-Constantan (ISA-Type-E)
(-) 200 to 600C
lion- Constantan (ISA-Type-J)
0 to 600C
Chromel-Alumel (ISA-Type-K)
600 to 1200C
Platinum Rhodium-Platinum (ISA Type-S)
600 to 1600C
The design of thermocouple assemblies shall be such that replacement on line is

possible.
RTD (Resistance Temperature Detecter) shall be platinum element 3 wire type with
100 ohms resistance at 0C calibrated as per 1EC 60751. RTD shall be used within a
temperature range of -200 to 650C. Three-wire system shall be adopted in connecting
the element.
0 RTD shall be used where accuracies of the order of 0.25% or better and smaller
measuring spans are required.
g) Duplex element sensors shall be supplied. Two separate cable entries shall be provided
with plugs.
4.5.4
Temperature Transmitter
Temperature transmitters shall have a built-in linearising function to produce an output
linear to temperature range.
The Temperature transmitters with RTD shall have an accuracy of 0.075% of URV as a
minimum for range above 350 C, 0.15% of URV for temperature range 350 C to 150
C and 0.25% for calibrated range below 150 C.
The Temperature transmitters with cold junction compensation for thermocouple shall
have an accuracy of 0.25% of URV as a minimum for range above 350 C, 0.5% of
URV for temperature range between 350 C to 150 C and 0.75% for calibrated range
below 150 C.
Page 920 of 1744
el
$fgar 0151-'eg
.
0
71/FR c 1,4,n 1 ,1,1 070519

INSTRUMENTATION OF
INDIA LIMITED
PACKAGE UNITS
(A Govt of (Ado U n dertAk(A9t
ENGINEERS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 28 of 58
c) Transmitters shall be provided with dual compartment.

4.5.5
4.6
4.6.1
Burn out protection must be provided with temperature transmitters. Upscale or downscale
protection shall be decided based on its application to ensure fail-safe operation.
Pressure Instruments
Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauge dial shall be white with black figures. The dial face shall be marked
with pressure element material. Pointers shall have micrometer adjustment.
Pressure gauges shall be weatherproof with dial size of 150 mm and shall have features
like over range protection (at least 130% of max. operating pressure) and blowout
discs. Glass shall be shatter proof. Pressure gauge sensing element shall be of SS 316
and movement of SS 304, as a minimum.
Pressure gauges shall have an accuracy of 1% of URV as a minimum. Differential
pressures gauges, diaphragm seal pressure gauges and draft gauges may have an
accuracy of 2% of URV.
Over range protector and pulsation dampener, whenever used, shall be of SS 304, as a
minimum. Pulsation damepner shall be used for all pulsating services. It shall be
floating pin type, externally mounted and externally adjustable.
Pressure gauges with range 0-100 kg/cm 2g and more shall have safety type solid front
case.
Connection shall normally be 1/2" NPTM bottom.
Cases shall be minimum 304 SS and weatherproof to IP-65 as per IS/IEC-60529.
Ranges shall be so specified that the gauge normally operates in the middle third of the
scale and shall conform to IS-3624 standard dials, wherever possible.
Diaphragm seals shall be furnished where plugging of the element may occur or where
suitable material is not available in highly corrosive services. When chemical seals are
required, they shall be of the clean out type with flushing connection.
Where vibrations and pressure fluctuations are expected, glycerin filled type and
snubber shall be used.
k) Receiver pressure gauges for local transmitter output indication shall have 100 mm dial
with stainless steel element and 1/4" NPTM connection.
1) The pressure element shall be bourdon, diaphragm or bellows depending upon process
condition. Single diaphragm type Differential pressure gauges shall not be considered,
Instead double diaphragm type or bellows shall be considered.
4.6.2
Pressure/Differential Pressure Transmitters

Pressure/differential pressure transmitter shall have electronic state-of-art capacitance
or any other type of sensor meeting all functional specifications as per clause 2.16.
Element material for transmitters shall be 316 SS, as a minimum.
All transmitters shall have an integral output meter. Remote mounted meters may be
provided if required in addition.
Page 921 of 1744
t_7
Of5teS'
7- ) ENGINEERS
v INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India Undenakno

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 29 of 58
c) Diaphragm seal element with capillary shall be used for congealing, corrosive and
highly viscous services.
4.6.3
Pressure Switches
Process switches shall not be considered unless its use is unavoidable and the same
shall be subject to purchaser's approval
Pressure switches shall have either diaphragm or bellow type of process element with
SS 316 material of construction as a minimum. Switch type shall be sealed micro-type
with contact rating suitable for specific application. Also contacts shall be SPDT type
unless otherwise specified. Contacts used in intrinsically safe applications shall be
suitable as per the process condition.
Pressure switches shall be blind type with 1/2 NPTF process connection and shall be
operative in full-specified range. The switch differential shall be selected as per
operating conditions.
Pressure switches shall have repeatability of 0.5% of URV, as a minimum. Pressure
switch shall have over range protection of at least 130% of maximum working pressure.
The set pressure shall fall in the middle third (between 35% to 65%) of the adjustable
range in general. Set point shall be field adjustable.
4.7
Level Instruments
4.7.1
Level gauges
All gauge glasses shall be steel armoured reflex or transparent type with body and cover
material of forged carbon steel as a minimum and shall have tempered borosilicate glass
with asbestos or other suitable gasket. Transparent type of gauges shall be provided
with integral illuminators operating at 240 V 50 H z supply and shall be suitable for
electrical area classification specified. All gauge glasses must have a rating equal to or
more than the vessel design pressure and temperature.
Reflex type will be used for clean and colourless liquids, except liquids level interface.
For low temperature, low boiling point service, large chamber type will be used.
Transparent type will be used on acid, caustic, dirty or viscous, coloured liquids and
liquid interface. Transparent type with Mica or Kel-F shields shall be used for treated
water, boiler and condensate services, and for corrosive liquids, which will attack glass.
Tubular gauge glasses shall, in general, not be used in Hydrocarbon/hazardous services.
They may be used for non-hazardous services at ambient temperature and low pressures
(less than 10 kg/cm2g operating).
Large chamber gauges with frost shields shall be provided for cold services below 0 C.
Heating jacket shall be provided for viscous liquids with 1/2" flanged connection.
All gauges shall have top and bottom chamber connections, unless otherwise specified.
However side-side chamber connection is acceptable where nozzle installation is a
constraint. In addition each gauge shall be provided with ball check valves and pipe
union.
e) The visible range of level gauge shall be selected to cover the complete operating level
as well as measuring range of the other level instruments provided for the same
purpose. In general, the visible length and C to C distance of the top and bottom level
gauges shall be selected from the following:
Visible length
Centre to Centre Length

Page 922 of 1744
n31
idigte'g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India OnctertaAng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
220
470
470
720
720
970
980
1230
1230
1480
1490
1740
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 30 of 58
For side-side level gauge C to C distance shall be 10 mm less than visible length.
0
4.7.2
For level gauging in very viscous, corrosive liquids, liquids with crystals and high
pressure service, float operated magnetic gauges with 2" (50 mm) flanged end
connections, shall be used. C to C length of single magnetic level gauge shall not be
more than 2500mm.
Level Transmitter
Guided Wave Radar type instruments with external cage and side-side connections
shall normally be used for level and for interface level measurement upto 2400 mm.
Guided wave radar inst shall have 3mm accuracy.
Differential pressure transmitter shall be used for level measurement above 2400 mm,
for services requiring purge or where liquid might boil in external portion.
Differential Pressure transmitters for use on corrosive or fouling service shall generally
be diaphragm wafer with extended filled capillary type. Flush or extended diaphragm
type differential pressure transmitter shall be considered for special applications only.
Diaphragm material shall normally be stainless steel or any other special alloy.
e) For sump levels, Guided wave radar or non- contact type radar level instrument shall be
used depending on the application within accuracy 3mm.
0
Generally for top mounted level transmitters, internal guided wave radar type
instruments shall be used for level measurement upto 3000mm. Above that non-contact
type radar shall be used.
g) Level transmitters shall meet all requirements specified in clause 2.16.

4.7.3
Other Special types of level instruments like ultrasonic, hydrostatic, nucleonic, capacitance,
conductivity type shall be used as necessitated by application requirements.
4.7.4
For high pressure steam drum application at least one number conductivity type (Hydrastep
or equivalent) level instrument shall be provided. Also level gauges shall be of bi-color type
for such application.
4.7.5
For solid level measurement, type of instrument shall be ultrasonic/

electromechanical/capacitance/nucleonic/non-contact type radar as per the process
condition. The actual type selection shall be carried out based on the provenness of the
selected type for similar type of application.
4.8
Tank Level Instruments

a) Each tank shall be provided with minimum 2 types of tank level instruments operating
on different principles like one servo and other one radar (Antenna) type.
Page 923 of 1744
.111
.
lagleg^w
0 11277 29226,2 JP41.71,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Indld uneenaw.ng )

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 31 of 58
Radar type transmitter shall be provided with 3 mm accuracy for storage tanks and 1
mm for custody transfer. Whenever 3.0 mm accuracy is required, process connection
on vessel/ tank/ equipment for non-contact radar gauge can be 4" with 4" Carbon Steel
/ Stainless Steel (depending on the pipe schedule requirement) still well. However
wherever 1.0 mm accuracy is required (e.g. in custody application), process
connection on vessel/ tank/ equipment for non-contact radar gauge shall be 8" with 8"
Carbon Steel / Stainless Steel (depending on the pipe schedule requirement) still well.
For viscous service, nozzle connection shall be 24".
Servo type instruments shall have 6" process connection with 6" diameter still well,
with accuracy 3 mm for storage tanks and 1 mm for custody transfer. Raising or
lowering of displacer for calibration shall be possible on-line with the design of stillwell.
The wetted material like float, displacer, tape, wire etc. shall generally be 316 SS.
The accessories for servo-controlled level gauge shall include isolation ball valves for
pressurized tanks and calibration/maintenance chamber for all tanks. Each calibration
chamber shall be provided with a viewable window of blast proof glass. The
calibration chamber can be either integral to the instrument or separate. Whenever
calibration chamber is separate i.e. not integral to the tank level instrument, the material
of construction of calibration chamber shall be stainless steel. The calibration chamber
shall also permit insertion / removal of displacer for maintenance without removing the
instruments.
f)
4.9
Servo and Radar type instruments shall be capable of providing serial output as per
vendor standard protocol or field bus protocol as per IEC-61158 in addition to analog
4-20 mA DC current output. These instruments shall also be capable of accepting input
from multi element tank temperature sensors (thermocouple/ RTD), water cut probes
and transmit the same as a part of serial signal from the transmitter. Multi-element tank
temperature sensors when used shall be provided with 3" stillwell and 3" process
connection.
Flow Instruments
The selection of flow measurement instruments shall be based on the requirement of
accuracy, repeatability, location, physical properties of the flowing fluids handled, pressure
drop and ease of maintenance.
In-line flow instruments shall have a direction of flow indication clearly marked and easily
visible in the final installed position.
Flow switches shall not be used without prior approval from the purchaser.
4.9.1
Orifice Plates
a) Flow measurement shall normally be carried out by using thin square edged concentric
orifice plate mounted between a pair of weld neck flanges of minimum 300 pounds
ANSI rating for line size 2" and above. Flange taps shall be used for line sizes upto 14"
while D-D/2 taps shall be used for line sizes more than 14". The material of the orifice
plates shall be normally 316 SS, as a minimum.
Quadrant edge or quarter circle orifice plates shall be used for highly viscous liquids
and for pipe Reynold number below 10,000.
Page 924 of 1744
af-aeltii
fg-ar eleage0,01jEtoteg
0.1,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
AGoo 0 Indo Unelettak.g)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 32 of 58
Conical entrance type of orifice plates shall preferably be used for very highly viscous
liquids upto throat Reynolds number of 250. These plates shall be fabricated as per
Flow Measurement Hand Book by RW Miller.
Vent and Drain holes shall be provided for bore dia above 25.4 mm.
b) Sizing of orifice plate shall be carried out in accordance with ISO-5167 (Latest
Edition). For orifice plates not covered in ISO 5167, sizing methods shall be ASME
MFC-14M (latest Edition) or AGA Report No. 3 or 'Flow measurement-Engineering
Handbook' by RW Miller.
Honed metering runs or integral orifice type transmitter shall be used in line size with
1.5" (40 mm) nominal diameter or below.
Upstream and downstream straight length shall be provided based on maximum d/D
ratio of 0.75, in general. Where it is difficult to meet this requirement, the actual d/D
ratio can be considered for reducing the straight length as permitted by the codes. Flow
straighteners are to be considered, where straight runs are difficult to achieve otherwise.
f) Meter taps shall be horizontal for liquids, condensible vapours and steam. The taps
shall be on top for gas, non-condensible vapour, or liquids which boil at or below the
maximum design ambient temperature at operating pressure. Where piping clearances
are a factor, taps may be located upto 45 degree below the horizontal center line for
condensible vapour and liquid. The taps may be located upto 60 degree from vertical
for gas, non-condensible vapour and steam.
4.9.2
Venturi Flowmeters
Venturi shall be designed and constructed as per ISO 5167-4 (Latest Edition) or ASME
MFC-3M.
The Venturi Flow element shall be classical, machined, non truncated type.
c) Impulse piping connection for venturi tubes shall be provided with 1/2" NPTF
connection, unless otherwise specified in the data sheet.
Venturi tube shall be forged/cast construction in general. However fabricated
construction shall also be acceptable, wherever allowed as per ISO-5167.
Venturi tube shall be provided with Annular chamber / Piezo-metric Ring. Material of
construction of Annular chamber / Piezo-metric Ring shall be same as material of
Venturi tube.
Material of construction of Venturi tube shall be SS316 as a minimum. Material of
construction for Throat, Divergent section and Convergent section shall also be SS316
as a minimum. Flanges shall be provided as per the material specified in the datasheet.
Flow calibration for those Venturi tubes, which are necessitated due to their installations
outside the limits as defined in ISO 5167 for D (Pipe Inside Diameter), beta and
Reynolds numbers shall be considered in the base quote
4.9.3
Averaging Pitot Tube

Averaging pitot tube in general shall not be considered unless specifically required by the
purchaser. Averaging pitot tube shall meet the following requirements:
a) The flow sensor shall be continuous averaging velocity head producing type of pitot
tube with four or more equal averaging pitot tube sensing ports or continuous slots to
Page 925 of 1744
t31
2151-eg
WIRT FREW OA JG53,711

INSTRUMENTATION OF
INDIA LIMITED
PACKAGE UNITS
IA Govt of India Undertaing)
ENGINEERS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 33 of 58
suit line velocity profile. The sensor shall also incorporate a rear port for the
measurement of line static pressure.
Averaging pitot tube shall be of 3" flanged connection with isolation ball valve.
The insert retract mechanism shall be provided to allow on line removal and insertion
of the average Pitot tube under maximum pressure and flow condition.
Vibration analysis for each averaging pitot tube element shall be done for the indicated
flow condition to ensure that the averaging pitot tube is of sufficient thickness and
strength to withstand the vibration effects created due to Karman vortex shedding in the
fluid stream.
The free end of the averaging Pitot tube shall be pressure supported at the pipe wall.
However, for the large pipe sizes and where vibration analysis recommends the
requirement of end support, the end support/weld cap support shall be provided.
f) The offered averaging pitot tubes shall have 1% accuracy of actual value and
repeatability of 0.1% of actual value.
4.9.4
Variable area Flow Meters

Variable area flow meters or rotameters shall be provided as per the P&ID or where
rangeability in flow precludes the use of an orifice. Variable area flow meters shall be as per
ISA-RP 16.1, 16.2, 16.3, 16.4, 16.5 and 16.6. Metal tube rotameters shall be used for all
fluids. External devices for indicating or transmitting shall be magnetically coupled to the
float or extension.
Glass tube rotameters shall not be used unless it is necessitated for low range or for low
pressure utility services for local indication and where line size is 1-1/2" (40mm) or less
with the approval of purchaser.
Reducer shall be considered, in case the size of the flowmeter is less than the line size.
4.9.5
Mass Flow Meters

The mass flow meters shall meet the following requirement:
Flow meter shall be of in-line mounting design and shall be of flanged body
construction with stainless steel as minimum material of construction.
The mass flow meter shall be provided with the external flow tube housing. In all
such cases, the flow tube housing shall have provision to monitor housing pressure
continuously.
The mass flow meter shall have high vibration immunity.
The meter electronics shall be protected against transients induced by lighting and
power supply surges. Transient protection electronics shall preferably be provided in
the terminal block.
e)
Flow meter electronics shall be microprocessor based and shall include pre-amplifier,
converter, transmitter electronics and integral output meter. The indication on the
output meter shall be digital with engineering units.
The mass flow meter shall be capable of computing field density and shall incorporate
temperature sensor flow fluid temperature measurement. Whenever required, the flow
meter electronics shall have capabi lity to compute vnliimPtri, flow rates.
Page 926 of 1744
ENGINEERS
$'1g-af f
aWeg
INDIA LIMITED
'e--1
>men etro,te =Jot:ow
Govt of India Uottertok n og)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 34 of 58
The meter electronics shall be protected against transients induced by lightning and
power supply surges. Transient protection electronics shall preferably be provided in
the terminal block. The transient protection shall meet the requirements specified in
IEC-60587.
Unless specified otherwise in the job specification, the performance requirements for
the mass flow meter shall be as follows:
Flow meter accuracy:
+ 0.2% of mass flow rate for liquid service.

0.5% of mass flow rate for gas / vapour
service.
Flow meter repeatability:
0.1% of mass flow rate for liquid service.

0.25% of mass flow rate for gas / vapour
service.
The performance requirements specified above excludes the effect of zero stability of
the flow meter on these parameters.
Flow accuracy shall be maintained between the minimum and maximum flow. Where
only normal flow is specified, the maximum and minimum flows considered for the
purpose of sizing shall be:
Maximum flow = 1.4 times the normal flow
Minimum flow = 0.4 times the normal flow
When only maximum flow is specified minimum flow shall be considered as 0.2
times the maximum flow for sizing the meter.
The maximum pressure drop at meter maximum shall not exceed the allowable
pressure drop across the meter specified in the data sheet.
The meter shall be selected such that both accuracy and allowable pressure differential
across the meter are complied.
4.9.6
Ultrasonic flowmeter
Ultrasonic flow measurement shall be considered where non-intrusive flow measuring is
required.
The Ultrasonic flow meter shall be based on transit time technology.
The design used shall provide maximum reliability, maximum on-line performance and
minimum maintenance. It shall be immune to other impurities in the fluid stream.
Ultrasonic flow meters and the meter runs/flow conditioners shall be rated for the maximum
design pressure.
Spool piece type Ultrasonic flow meters shall have flanged end connections. Weld joints, if
any, shall be of radiographic quality.
Meter Sizing:
Selected meter size shall ensure that flow meter operates within 85% of their standard range
considering density and viscosity of the fluid. Extended range shall not be referred for the
meter selection.
Vendor to ensure the velocity in the Ultrasonic flow meter and meter run shall not exceed
maximum permissible velocity.
4.9.7
Target meters shall be considered for highly viscous hydrocarbon streams such as asphalt,
tar, polymers etc.
Page 927 of 1744
Oa&
.mom.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA ODA of loOla Underlaiong)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 35 of 58
4.9.8
Vortex meter shall be considered where high rangeability is the prime requirement.
4.9.9
Differential Pressure type flow transmitter shall meet all the requirements specified in clause
2.16.
4.9.10
Wedge flow meter shall be considered in slurry services or where powder deposits may form.
However, Diaphragm seal type DP transmitter shall be provided along with wedge flow
meter duly calibrated with both sensor and the transmitter.
4.10
Control Valves
4.10.1
Control valves shall normally be globe type. Other valve types like butterfly, ball, rotary
plug, angle or 3way etc., shall be selected as per service and process requirements.
4.10.2
Control valve sizing shall be carried out as per ISA S75-01. The valve shall permit upto
150% of normal flow or 110% of maximum flow, whichever is higher. In general, control
valves shall be sized so that the valve opening is as noted below:
At max. flow
about 90% open
At normal flow
about 75% open
At minimum flow
about 20% open.
4.10.3
Flanged control valves shall be used. Body material, body rating and flange rating shall be
as per piping specifications. However body and flange rating shall be minimum 300#.
4.10.4
Minimum control valve body size shall be 1" in general. Reduced trims can also be
considered.
4.10.5
For globe valves trim characteristics shall be equal percentage type unless required
otherwise. Control valve plugs shall be heavy top guided for single seated valves. Cage
guiding may be used in clean applications.
4.10.6
Anti-cavitation trim shall be selected wherever cavitation is expected in the valve. For
flashing services and hardened trim shall be used and anti-cavitation trim shall not be
provided.
4.10.7
Noise from control valve during operation shall be limited to OSHA specified level or
better. The maximum allowable noise is 85 dBA SPL (Sound Pressure Level). Source
treatment for noise may be performed by using special trims like low noise trims, in case
noise exceeds the specified level. Other methods based on merit are also permissible.
4.10.8
Valve seat leakage shall be minimum class IV as per ANSI/FCI 70.2 unless tight shutoff
requirement is required as per the P&ID.
4.10.9
Flanged bolted type gland packing boxes shall be used. Packing shall normally be PTFE on
liquid and gas service up to 200C (design). Graphite/grafoil shall be used above
200C(design) temperature. Asbestos based packing material shall not be used.
4.10.10
Bellows seal shall be used where it is required to isolate the packing from the process fluid
or where no leakage to atmosphere can be tolerated like toxic, explosive and precious fluids.
4.10.11
Material used for trim shall be minimum SS 316, with guide bushing of hardened stainless
steel like 440 C, 17-4 PH. For higher pressure drops (more than 10 kg/cm 2) or erosive and
slurry services and in general for all steam services, flashing and cavitating services, plug
and seat shall be stellited.

71
6

ligfa0
Page 928 of 1744
11
vilrvvt rirove on,tootto

INSTRUMENTATION OF
INDIA LIMITED
PACKAGE UNITS
IA Govt Of Ind. Undettekvt9)
ENGINEERS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 36 of 58
Special cases may require 17-4 PH seat ring and 440 C solid plugs or other materials like
Hastelloy, Monel etc.
4.10.12 Valve actuator shall be pneumatic spring opposed diaphragm type, in general. Piston type
actuators may be used for very high shut off pressure requirements. Additional equipment
including volume bottle necessary to meet fail safe condition shall also be included in case
double acting piston type actuator is selected. In either case, actuator shall be able to
withstand maximum shut-off pressure (1.5 times of design pressure) with the minimum
instrument air pressure specified.
4.10.13
Whenever limit switches are specified as inductive proximity type, these shall meet
NAMUR (DIN-19234) requirements.
4.10.14
Solenoid valves, wherever used, shall be universal and continuous rated type with class H
coil insulation. These shall be SS body as a minimum.
4.10.15
Self-actuating regulators for flow, pressure and temperature shall be used where loads are
constant and requirements of precision and accurate controls are not stringent.
4.10.16 The actuator shall be painted as below:

Direct action (open on air failure) valves
Green
Reverse acting (close on air failure) valve
Yellow
Actuator for shutdown valves
Red
Items like air volume tanks etc., supplied as an accessory along with the actuators, shall be
painted as per corresponding actuator.
4.11 ON-OFF VALVE
4.11.1 On-off valves shall have flanged end connections integral to the valve body. Top entry valve
design shall not be offered unless specifically indicated. Body rating of valve shall be
minimum 300g.
Whenever flangeless on-off valve body design is specified, following shall apply:
Wafer type or lug type body design for butterfly type on-off valves body size up to
6 inches.
Lug type body design for butterfly type of on-off valve body size more than 6
inches.
4.11.2 For on-off valves with fire safe design, flanged body construction shall only be acceptable.
4.11.3 For all services where full port valves are specified, following shall apply:
Port size shall be equal to line size for rating up to ASME Class 1500.
Port size shall not be less than one size than the line size for rating ASME Class
2500 and above.
4.11.4
For steam jacketed valves, the body and port size shall be one size lower than the on-off
valve end connections.
4.11.5
On-off valve body, bonnet, bottom flange, line flanges and other pressure containing
assemblies shall be of the same material of construction as specified for valve body.
$igar faaeg
eieaR?
4.11.6
Page 929 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inda UndertaI.9)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 37 of 58
In case of ball-type of on-off valves;

The valve design shall ensure valve seat and body protection against thermal expansion
of the entrapped fluid when the on-off valve is fully close.
For size up to 4" and rating up to ASME Class 300, the on-off valve shall have floating
ball design. For ratings ASME Class 600 and above, floating ball is acceptable for
sizes less than 2". For higher sizes trunion mounted ball design shall be provided.
4.11.7
Rotary type on-off valves like Ball valves, butterfly valves etc. shall have blow out proof
shaft guiding design.
4.11.8
Guide bushing shall be of a sufficiently hard material to resist side thrust on the plug or
shaft.
4.11.9
Vendor shall be responsible for trim design and selection of the on-off valve. However, it
must meet the following minimum requirements:
The valve characteristics shall be quick-opening (on-off) type.
Vendor shall select proper material pairs, surface finish, hardness and clearances to
avoid galling.
Valves operating under extreme temperature conditions, vendor shall consider
increased clearances at room temperature and seal welding of threaded seat rings
etc whenever required. Hard facing of trim including guide bushing shall be
considered for all valves operating at high temperatures (i.e. temperature more than
200C). For very low temperature application, material used shall have adequate
cold impact strength.
For all on-off valves including 3-way type of valves, stem and plug shall be
detachable and shall be attached together by suitable threaded design secured with
a pin to avoid plug rotation during operation.
4.11.10
Trim material and actuator colour shall be as specified for the control valve.
4.11.11
Leakage class of on-off valves shall be as specified in data sheet, where no class is
specified it shall be Class IV.
4.11.12
For on-off valves specified with Class VI / bubble tight (as per API) leakage class,
vendor shall select the soft seat (elastomer) material suitable for the process conditions
i.e., shut off pressure, maximum temperature and process fluid. Metal seated on-off
valves meeting the leakage class shall also be acceptable.
4.11.13
For application in vacuum service, vendor to provide inverted packing design suitable for
vacuum service. For pressure-cum-vacuum service, the on-off valve shall have dual
packing design suitable for the application. Dual packing design shall also be provided
for on-off valves in toxic service, with a facility to connect inert fluid between the
packings.
4.11.14
Valve actuator shall be designed to move the valve to the failure position as specified.
For failure position specified as 'fail-locked', vendor shall provide air reservoir with all
required accessories to meet the fail lock position of the valve.
4.11.15
Whenever double acting springless type of actuator is unavoidable, all accessories like
pilot valves, booster relays, non-return valve, pressure gauge, volume tank etc. shall be
provided to ensure desired action on air failure.
Page 930 of 1744
fel5reg
1.1,11 eiverenv,gdoei
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 38 of 58
4.11.16
The volume tank shall be of carbon steel construction and sized as per ASME Section
VIII with design pressure of 10kg/cm2g as a minimum. Each volume bottle shall be sized
for a minimum of 3 valve strokes
4.11.17
The actuator casings and diaphragms shall be designed for minimum twice the maximum
pneumatic operating pressure of the on-off valve.
4.11.18
Vendor shall be fully responsible for sizing and selection of correct actuator, while sizing
the actuator vendor shall consider minimum actuator thrust equal to two times (2) the
total force induced by shut off condition and the force required to overcome packing
friction.
4.11.19
Wherever the valves are indicated as fire safe, they shall be tested for fire safe as per BS
6755 (Part-2) when the valves are supplied with metal-to-metal seats and shall be tested
as per API 607 latest edition when the valves are provided with soft seats.
4.11.20
Wherever fire safe actuator and controls have been asked for, actuators and all
accessories such as solenoid valves, air volume bottles etc. shall meet the fire proof
requirement to ensure normal valve operation even during and after exposure to fire.
Vendor shall clearly define the schemes they propose to achieve the above requirements
and ensure that the proposed schemes shall meet the requirement in terms of type of
exposure and exposure time of the testing procedure given in BS 6755/API 607.
4.11.21
Vendor shall furnish type test certificate duly witnessed by third party inspection agency
like M/S LRIS,BV,DNV,TUV etc. for fire safe testing of valve, actuator and controls for
the offered models.
4.12
Smart Type and Field Bus Type Positioners

Digital smart positioners or field bus type of positioners with diagnostic capabilities shall be
provided as per job specific requirement. These shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
The positioner sensor and sensing mechanism shall be rugged and shall not be affected
by the line/valve vibration. The performance of the positioners shall be immune to
above vibration.
The positioner's output and input range shall be field adjustable without any hardware
modification. The output from the positioners shall be available for both single acting
as well as double acting actuator.
Each positioner shall be operable, configurable and accessible through HART
compatible hand held configurator/field bus configurator as applicable. Smart
positioners shall also have dedicated buttons for the above functions.
Control valve's operating signatures in the form of hard copy and soft copy for each
control valve provided with smart positioners shall be supplied. The necessary software
for advanced control valve diagnostics like seat ring condition, gland packing condition,
actuator leakage etc. shall also be included.
Fieldbus positioner shall have the capability to perform functions like PID etc.
All positioners shall have metallic casing and cover.
4.13
Pressure Relief Valves and Rupture Discs
/511=4TA 4Th\ ENGINEERS

INDIA LIMITED
/gar tiOleg
e
Page 931 of 1744
deter ?Wag
4.13.1
151 Wadi,

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 39 of 58
Pressure Relief Valves
4.13.1.1 All pressure relieving devices shall be designed in accordance with ASME code for 'Boilers
and Pressure Vessels', API-521 and Indian Boiler Regulations. The pressure relief valve
sizing shall be as per API 520. For mixed phase fluids, sizing shall be as per Leung-Omega
method (or Diers) sizing shall be followed. The orifice sizing, area and designation, valve
size and rating shall be as per API RP 526.
4.13.1.2 Pressure relief valves shall be full nozzle full lift type except for thermal relief valves.
4.13.1.3 Conventional valves shall be specified for constant back pressure while bellows seal type
valves shall be specified for variable back pressure. Pilot operated pressure relief valves
shall be used when Back pressure is greater than 50% of set pressure or when the difference
between operating pressure and set pressure is within 10% of the set pressure.
4.13.1.4 Lifting lever shall be specified for steam, air or water above 65 degree service. Open bonnet
shall be used for steam service.
4.13.1.5 The percentage accumulation in case of pressure relief valves/safety valves shall be as
follows:
Steam Service
- ASME SEC I(steam generation/consumption)
3%
- IBR (Before steam let-down station)
5%
- IBR (Distribution & utilities) and
10%
ASME Section VIII

Gas, Vapour or liquid for process service
10%
Liquid for thermal Relief
25/ 10% (as per Process requirement)
Fire exposure on unfired vessels
21%
4.13.1.6 3/4" x 1" threaded (NPT) modified nozzle type valves with typically 0.38 cm 2 orifice size
shall be specified for thermal relief. However, if discharge is connected to flare or with
variable back pressure more than 10% of set pressure, 1D2 flanged valves as per API-526
as a minimum to be provided.
4.13.1.7 The body material shall, as a minimum, be as per piping specifications. Nozzle and disc
material shall be SS 316 as a minimum with machined stainless steel guide and spindle.
Whenever semi nozzle designs are unavoidable, body material shall be atleast same as
nozzle and disc material.
4.13.1.8 The spring material of pressure relief valves shall be as follows unless otherwise necessary
because of process conditions;
(-)29 C to 230 C
Carbon steel with weather protective coating.
above 230C
Tungsten alloy steel.
Below ()29 C
316 Stainless Steel
4.13.1.9 Flanged connection shall be for standard sizes 1" or larger.

4.13.1.10 Where permissible, screwed connections shall be used on sizes 3/4" and below.
Page 932 of 1744
ligodaalez
IA Govt
1.111,1
4.13.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
of India Undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 40 of 58
Rupture Disc
4.13.2.1 Rupture discs shall be reverse buckling type, in general and shall be supplied in pre-torqued
holder assembly, which shall fit inside the inner diameter of the bolt circle of standard
flanges. Disc material shall be compatible with the vessel contents and shall be consistent
with the bursting requirements. Inconel discs shall be used above 100C if compatible with
the process fluid.
4.13.2.2 When rupture disc is used upstream of a pressure relief valve, a pressure gauge shall be
provided on the downstream of the disc to indicate any rupture of the disc in addition to an
excess flow check valve. In addition combination capacity factor of 0.9 shall be used for
sizing unless the combination has been tested and approved for any other combination
capacity factor.
4.13.2.3 The bursting tolerance of the rupture disc shall be 5% of the specified bursting pressure or
less, unless otherwise specified.
4.13.2.4 Vendor shall consider 5 nos. rupture discs (1 for testing + 1 for installation + 3 nos. spare) of
the same specifications.
4.14
Interlock and Shutdown System
4.14.1
Interlock and Shutdown System shall be an independent system with its own dedicated
primary element except for orifice flow measurement. For orifice flow element, separate set
of tapping for each flow transmitter for shut down / interlock shall be considered.
4.14.2
The system shall be designed fail safe and shall meet the following requirements, as a
minimum:
All initiating contacts shall be close (except limit switches for which contact shall close
when the limit reaches) under normal conditions and shall open under abnormal
conditions.
All relays and solenoid valves shall be energised under normal conditions and shall deenergize under abnormal conditions.
c)
If desired, because of operational or maintenance requirements, adequate trip by-pass

facilities are to be provided with warning lights to indicate that the trip has been
bypassed. Trip bypass alarms shall be provided in local as well as in remote location.
All such by-pass switches shall be key-operated type.
4.14.3
Each shutdown circuit and solenoid valve shall be provided with a switch-fuse unit
separately.
4.15
Instrumentation for Rotating Equipments

Rotating Equipment vendor shall be completely responsible for providing adequate
instrumentation for safe and efficient operation of the machine. The commonly used
instruments are being detailed out in the following clauses, however this does not absolve
the vendor of providing additional instrumentation, if required.
4.15.1 Anti surge and performance control system (ASC)

a)
Vendor shall be fully responsible for the complete design of Anti surge/performance
control system (ASC) including selection of type of flow element, controller Algorithm,
type of explosion protection, type and operating timings of final control element. Vendor
shall guarantee the performance of machine with the offered ASC system. Wherever
required, ASC system shall be designed in such a way that it is capable of correcting the
Ogar tlf5leg
Page 933 of 1744
ORR 21W I SR JWIf
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 41 of 58
compressor operating point so as to avoid surge in order to protect machine from possible
damage, to minimize process upsets and to minimize recirculation.
ASC system shall typically consist of but not limited to flow element, flow transmitter,
differential pressure transmitter, ASC controller, control valve and other accessories as
felt necessary by the vendor.
Vendor shall supply all the hardware and software related to the operation and safety of
the equipment. This shall include but not limited to the following;
Design and operation of surge control loop scheme based on offered equipment
performance.
Supply of all hardwares in antisurge control loop including dedicated controller,
transmitters, measuring elements, final control element etc.
Fast response transmitter and control valve etc. as required.
Algorithm required for antisurge/ Performance control application.
The ASC shall be a dedicated single loop controller on proprietary Hardware Platform or
single/multi loop controllers of common hardware platform such as PLC. The single loop
controller shall be dedicated controller for each Anti-surge or Performance control
application/Tag. Dedicated panel mounted facia shall be provided. The ASC system
when provided on common hardware platform shall be with redundant configuration as
minimum viz-dual processor, dual input/output, redundant communication & dual power
supply system. The multiloop controller/system shall be dedicated for Antisurge/Performance applications/Tags of each machine/each machine tag. Unless specified
otherwise dedicated panel facia for each application shall be provided to mount on
hardwired console in control room
It should be able to accept 4-20 mA signal from field or from HIC at purchaser DCS or
at LCP as a manual override to anti-surge control system with bump less transfer.
Auto-manual operation with bump less transfer shall be provided.

The controller response time (total time to read input, processing time and output) shall
be as per the machine dynamics and safety and shall be of the order of max. 40-milisec.
Any faster response required based on machine dynamics shall be considered by
vendor. The input sampling interval shall be as per machine dynamics within the
controller response time as above. The processor cycle time shall be considered to meet
the overall response time.
The ASC shall be field proven, specific to the make of machine and for the similar
application in hydrocarbon industries. Vendor shall provide the proven track record for
the offered ASC meeting the above.
The anti surge/performance control algorithm shall be implemented using standard
firmware in the controller/processor system.
The algorithm developed by vendor shall be specific for given application, surge
control, performance, load sharing etc. and shall be field proven for the compressor
make.
k)
The algorithm implemented in the system shall be protected against any

modifications/changes.

Page 934 of 1744
tia-eg
rir<Nt ...rwn.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOla Undertakmg)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 42 of 58
The configuration shall be stored in non-volatile memory or battery back-up for

configuration shall be provided (minimum 48 hours) in case of volatile memory along
with battery drain indication.
In case of ASC on common hardwired platform separate configurator with necessary
hard ware/ soft ware shall be provided for application programming.
Anti surge controller shall not be used for performing any other machine related inter
locks/logics.
All the instruments (transmitters, Positioner and temperature elements and / or
transmitters) connected with anti-surge control loop shall be flame proof "EExd" type
suitable for the area as specified. The suitability of smart transmitter/ Positioner shall be
confirmed by vendor and to be provided accordingly.
p) The ASC system vendor shall be fully responsible for the sizing and selection of the antisurge valve. Vendor to provide the sizing calculations duly vetted by ASC system
manufacturer.
4.15.2 Machine Monitoring System (MMS)
Machine Monitoring system shall be provided for continuous monitoring and indication of
machine parameters like vibration & axial displacement, bearing and winding temperature,
key-phasor etc.
4.15.2.1 Vibration and displacement monitoring system shall be as per API-670. The extent and type
of monitoring shall be as defined elsewhere. However, vendor shall furnish any additional
requirements for monitoring deemed essential by them with reasons. Two probes at 90
degree apart for each location shall be provided and connected to same dual channel monitor
for vibration monitoring.
4.15.2.2 The machine monitoring system shall be provided with preferably built in intrinsically safe
barrier and shall be duly mounted in separate panel. However, separate terminal blocks shall
be provided for terminating the field cables for maintenance purpose. Direct cable
termination on modules shall not be considered.
4.15.2.3 For MMS the display unit shall be provided at local control panel with necessary statutory
certification. Alternatively purged enclosure is also acceptable with necessary certification.
4.15.2.4 The sensing probe shall be accessible for adjustment, repair and replacement without
dismantling the machine.
4.15.2.5 Vendor shall provide hardwired Voted contact output of each parameter for Pre trip and trip
alarms for alarms/ interlock in purchaser's control system. The alarms/trips of the channels
within each monitor/ Module can be grouped together and common pre-trip alarm and
common trip contact for each monitor/ Module shall be provided. 4-20 mA signals from
Vibration & Temperature Monitoring System racks to DCS system are not required
separately, unless specified and vendor to ensure that all the parameters are available
through serial interface. For multi racks, vendor shall provide common serial interface
through multi drop link.
4.15.2.6 In addition to this, it shall be provided with necessary hardware (communication gateway
module) including the cable for serial data communication from monitoring system to
purchaser's DCS for machine monitoring through purchaser's DCS via redundant serial
data interface. This serial link shall be RS 422 / RS 485 with MODBUS RTU protocol.
Vendor shall furnish all details like pin configuration and tag number wise MODBUS
address mapping list etc. for smooth interfacing of this communication link with DCS.

n-11
lig-aria5teg
Wren c-lecm,...71iII.1,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undo,'along)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 43 of 58
Vendor shall also provide necessary hardware and software for providing raw data to
conditioning monitoring system for each rack.
4.15.2.7 Vendor shall also supply one common laptop based configuration unit for the package unit
with required configuration software (refer clause 4.17) and hardware for configuration of
MMS system including the serial communication cable required between configuration unit
(laptop) & MMS monitors.
4.15.2.8 Key Phasor
Key phasor system shall be provided by vendor for performing analysis of vibration signals
to determine machine malfunctions. It shall consist of a proximity probe and transmitter,
extension cable etc. and other accessories to make the system complete. Vendor shall
provide necessary reference on the shaft to determine one-per-turn occurrence.
4.15.2.9 Vibration and Axial Displacement Monitoring
Monitors shall be four channel types and shall meet the following specifications as a
minimum:
Continuous channel monitoring with each channel input from one probe. Readout
scale shall read higher of the sensors.
Each channel shall have two independent alarm levels one for pre trip alarm and one
for each trip and that can be set continuously over measurement range. Two relay
contacts for each pre-trip alarm and trip alarm per channel shall be provided.
Broken sensor failure detection without causing shut down.
LED lamps on monitor front for each channel to indicate pre-trip alarm, trip-alarm and
circuit fault conditions.
e)
4.15.2.10 Bearing & Winding Temperature Monitoring

a)
Page 935 of 1744
Selector switches on monitor front to read vibration/ displacement pre-trip alarm and
trip set points for each channel shall be provided.
Sensor shall be three wires RTD element of platinum having 100 ohms resistance at
0C.
The temperature sensor, cables, terminal heads, junction boxes etc. shall be capable of
withstanding the mechanical vibration and environment of a rotating machinery
atmosphere.
c)
Bearing and Winding temperature shall be monitored by means of a temperature

monitor. It shall meet following requirements:
Accept RTD inputs (platinum, I 00ohm at 0C).
Continuous six channel monitoring with each channel input from each RTD.
Read out scale shall read higher of the six temperatures.
Each channel shall have two independent alarm levels one for pre-trip alarm and
one for trip alarm and that can be set continuously over measurement range.
Broken sensor failure detection without causing shut down.
k3u
$earfat51-eg
Page 936 of 1744
101FR etormt J4317..
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
of n 000 U cWntak.9)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 44 of 58
Selector switches on monitor front, to read temperature, pre-trip alarm and trip set
points for each channel shall be provided.
Analog output 4-20 mA DC isolated signals shall be provided for each channel
for remote indication, if specified.
4.15.2.11
Wherever MMS is not specified, vendor shall provide suitable transmitter for all the
vibration and axial displacement, temperature, key phasor to provide 4-20mA signal to
purchaser's control system.
4.15.3
Speed Governor System
4.15.3.1
Digital microprocessor based system mounted in standalone cabinet and located in rack room
shall be provided. Fault tolerant triple modular redundant (TMR) system shall be supplied
unless otherwise specified in Job Specification.
4.15.3.2
HMI for operator interface shall be supplied loose with all mounting accessories for mounting
this HMI in purchaser's hardwired console in general. This shall include all basic features of
governor to enable operator to do all control and monitoring operations from console itself
4.15.3.3
This shall include features like assignable speed range, adjustable speed set point, remote
speed set point input, digital speed indication, adjustable speed ramp, override for testing the
external over speed trip system etc.
4.15.3.4
It should be able to accept 4-20 mA signal from HIC at purchaser's DCS or LCP as a manual
override to governor and pass on the same, after a bump less auto / manual selection and
local / remote selector switches configured in speed governor (shall be possible through
HMI) to governor valve as manual control.
4.15.3.5
Vendor shall provide all hardware & software in the system (including the cable for serial
data communication from system to purchaser's DCS) for serial communication link for all
data transfer from governor to purchaser's DCS. This serial link shall be RS 422 / RS 485
with MODBUS RTU protocol, vendor shall furnish all details like pin configuration and tag
number wise MODBUS address mapping list etc. For smooth interfacing of this
communication link with DCS.
4.15.4 Accumulator of Lube Oil System

4.15.4.1 If accumulators are used with nitrogen for lube oil dampening at the desired pressure to meet
the system requirement the following instrumentation with the accumulator to be provided
by vendor:
Accumulator shall have charge kit with isolation valves and connection hoses.
Standard nitrogen cylinders available in India are at pressure of 140 kg/cm 2g with
standard connection sizes. Vendor shall provide the complete regulator system with
protection for charging nitrogen from nitrogen cylinder to accumulator at the desired
pressure. Regulator shall be suitable for the inlet pressure variation of 140 to 150
kg/cm2g while charging with suitable inlet connection to match the Nitrogen cylinder
connection. Regulator system shall have pressure indicator, regulator, relief valve,
needle valve etc. as a minimum. Material of construction shall be stainless steel.
4.15.5
The compressor loading-unloading scheme for reciprocating compressors shall be provided

as per the minimum requirements specified in the job specifications. Manual as well as
automatic schemes shall be provided.
k31
lig-aria51-eg
Page 937 of 1744
1.112n 22nTre Tl JWISIC
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt O, India tinee11ak.9)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 45 of 58
4.15.6
Emergency switch shall be provided in the local panel/local. All such switches shall have a
protective cover to avoid inadvertent shutdown.
4.15.7
Vendor shall provide the following common alarms for purchaser:

Common machine pre-trip alarms.
Common machine trip alarm.
4.16
System Cabinets, Racks and Consoles
4.16.1
All system cabinets, marshalling racks and hardwired consoles shall be free standing and
enclosed cubicles type. All these items shall have bottom cable entry.
4.16.2
Cabinets shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet (CRCA) of minimum 2.0mm
thickness suitably reinforced to prevent warping and buckling. Doors shall be fabricated out
of 1.6 mm thick CRCA sheet. Cabinets having modular construction and with basic frame
structure of heavy duty aluminium shall also be acceptable.
4.16.3
Cabinet/Console finish shall include sand blasting, grinding, chemical cleaning, surface
finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high-grade lacquer with sanding between coats.
Two coats of paint in the cabinet colour and a final coat after assembly at site, shall be given
for non-glossy high satin finish.
4.16.4
In order to remove dissipated heat effectively vent louvers backed by wire fly screen shall be
provided. Further, ventilation fans shall be provided wherever required. High temperature
annunciation shall be provided on operator console.
4.16.5
Illumination shall be provided for all cabinets by fluorescent lamps, which shall be operated
by door switch.
4.16.6
All cabinets/racks/consoles shall be adequately sized to avoid any congestion. Wiring shall
be done as per guidelines provided in clause 4.2.14 of this specification.
4.16.7
The height and colour of the cabinets shall be inline with other equipments being installed in
the control room.
4.17
System software / License

Systems (like PLC, ASC, Speed Governor etc.) software shall include the operating system
and application program. The application program shall include software for performing
functions like interlock and shutdown logic, programming/program modification,
documentation etc. Two copies of application program and two sets of licensed system
software shall be supplied. The program language shall be English.
The licenses and application program shall allow:
Monitoring of system program for troubleshooting purpose.
Carrying out any modifications to the PLC/system program if need arises (engineering
license with proper validity)
Troubleshooting of any system related failures.
Monitoring of the system healthiness
The system shall be supplied with programming tools and related accessories.
$fg-af fafgrdg
tsflKa t'leage
5.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
I A Go, of India UndertaNng)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 46 of 58
LIST OF DOCUMENTS ATTACHED
7-52-0001
Page 938 of 1744

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
Instrument connections on vessels, standpipes and tanks
7-52-0002
Instrument connections on piping.
7-52-0035
Thermowell
7-52-0041
Orifice Plates and Flanges -Dimensional details.
7-52-0254
Duct Fabrication Bolted Construction Details
oi el
51gar015ieg
Page 939 of 1744
Wan
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt 01 Ind. Undenakmg)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 47 of 58
PART II
SPECIFICATION FOR MATERIAL, INSTALLATION,

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Page 940 of 1744
Oar
1#112,1 eiecnte
1.0
1.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Go of India Undellaktng)
,,o++1,

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 48 of 58
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Vendor shall ensure and supply all erection hardware required for the installation of
complete instrumentation which form a part of the package unit. This includes items like
cables, cable glands, junction boxes, instrument valves and manifolds, mounting accessories,
impulse piping/tubing, pipe/tube fittings, pneumatic signal tubes, air line pipes and fittings,
filter regulators, steam/electrical tracing, insulation materials, cable duct and trays, conduits,
prefabricated canopies for instruments, identification tags, structural material required for
instrument supports and trays etc.
1.2
Clause 1.1 above broadly covers the items required for any typical plant, however vendor
shall supply all necessary items to make the installation and commissioning work complete
in all respect, irrespective of whether these have been explicitly included in their scope or
not.
1.3
Salient feature and minimum requirement for some of the main installation materials is
being described in the following paragraphs. For items for which no specification has been
provided, vendor may follow their own specifications and prevailing international standards.
1.4
Cables
1.4.1
All cables shall have PVC insulated primary insulation of cable shall be 85C Polyvinyle
Chloride type as per IS-5831 and inner and outer sheath of cable shall be flame retardant
made of extruded PVC Type ST-2 at 90C as per IS-5831. Oxygen index of PVC shall be
over 30% at 27 C+2 C and temperature index shall be over 250C. However, Polyethylene
(PE) insulation shall be provided in IIC area classification.
1.4.2
In general cables shall be flame retardant as per standard IEC 60332 Part 3 Cat.A. However,
cables with fire-safe valves shall be fire resistant also as per the following.
1.4.2.1
The insulation grade shall be 650 V/1100 V as a minimum and shall meet insulation
resistance, voltage and spark test requirements as per BS-5308 Part-II.
1.4.2.2
All cables shall be twisted and armoured. Armour over inner jacket shall be of galvanised
steel wire/flat as per IS-1554 part I.
1.4.3
For signal and control cables, inner jacket colour shall be black. Outer jacket colour shall be
light blue for intrinsically safe application and black for others. For thermocouple extension
cables the inner and outer jacket colour shall be as per IEC.
1.4.4
Maximum DC resistance of the conductor of the completed cable shall not exceed the
following:
12.3 ohms/km at 20C for cables with 1.5 mm2 conductor.
39.7 ohms/km at 20C for cables with 0.5 mm2 conductor.
1.4.5
The mutual capacitance of the pair or adjacent cores shall not exceed 250 pF/m at a
frequency of 1 kHz whereas the same shall not exceed 100 pF/m for PE insulated cables.
The capacitance between any core and screen shall not exceed 400 pF/ m at a frequency of 1
kHz.
1.4.6
L/R ratio of adjacent cores shall not exceed 40 [tH/Q for cables with 1.5 mm 2 conductor and
25 p,H / Q for cables with 0.5 mm 2 conductor.
1.4.7
The drain wire resistance including shield shall not exceed 30 ohms/km.
51g-al lagteg
.
Page 941 of 1744
IMIR712 12ERROA,Sn.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Of India Undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 49 of 58
1.4.8
A pair of communication wire shall be provided for multipair/multitraid cables. Each wire
shall be 0.5 mm2 of plain annealed single or multi-strand copper conductor with 0.4 mm
thick 85C PVC insulation. Insulation shall be green and red colour coded.
1.4.9
Each multipair cables shall have 20% pairs as spare.
1.4.10
Running length of the cable shall be printed on the outer sheath at least at every 5 metre
interval.
1.4.11
Signal Cables
Single pair shielded signal/alarm cables shall be used between field instruments and
junction boxes/local control panels.
Multipair individually and overall shielded signal/alarm cables shall be used between
junction boxes/local control panels and control room, in general.
The single pair and triad cables shall be of 1 5 mm 2 conductor size made of electrolytic
copper conductor of 7 strands with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter, multipair cables
with 0.5 mm2 conductor size shall have 16 strands of annealed electrolytic grade copper
conductor with each strand of 0.2 mm diameter, multi triad cable or multi pair cable
with 1 5 mm2 conductor shall have 7 strands with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter, as
per the job specification.
Shield shall be aluminium backed mylar/polyester tape bonded together with the
metallic side down helically applied with either side having 25% overlap and 100%
coverage. The minimum shield thickness shall be 0.05 mm in case of single pair/traid
and 0.075 mm incase of multipair/triad cable.
Drain wire shall be provided for individual pair and overall shield which shall be 0.5
mm2 multi stranded bare tinned annealed copper conductor. The drain wire shall be in
continuous contact with aluminium side of the shield.
All multi pair cables shall have 6 pair/12 pairs only while multitriad cable shall have 6
triads/8 triads only.
1.4.12
Control Cables
Single pair control cables shall be used between field mounted solenoid valves and
junction boxes/local control panels and shall meet the requirements specified in para
1.4.11 above.
Multipair control cables shall be used between junction boxes/local control panel and
control room mounted devices in general. These cables shall have only overall
shielding.
c) These control cables shall have 1.5 sq mm conductor size with 7 stranded conductors of
annealed electrolytic grade copper, with each strand of 0.53 mm diameter.
1.4.13
Fieldbus Cables
Fieldbus cables shall be 16AWG (1.31 mm 2) for trunk and 18 AWG (0.82mm 2 ) for
spur twisted in pair individually and overall shielded with aluminium mylar tape with
drain wire and armoured. Other parameters shall be as per Type A defined in IEC61158-2.
Fieldbus cables shall be single pair or two pairs.
Field bus cable shall be field proven for FF applications.
Fieldbus cable shall comply with H1 cable test specification FF 844.
e) Outer jacket color shall be orange with 3 longitudinal blue stripes for spur cables and
black stripes for trunk cables.
Page 942 of 1744
,..-e Oa&
t-,,05,0,,.,4,,
OgZrf
1.4.14
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 50 of 58
Thermocouple Extension Cables

Single pair shielded thermocouple extension cables shall be used between
thermocouple head and junction boxes/ transmitters/local control panel mounted
instruments.
Multipair individually and overall shielded thermocouple extension cables shall be used
between junction boxes and control room mounted devices.
The type of thermocouple extension cables shall be compatible with thermocouple
used. In addition the colour coding of the primary insulation shall be as per IS-87841987 (R2004).
The cable shall have 16 AWG and 20AWG solid conductors for single and multipairs
respectively.
All thermocouple extension cable shall be matched and calibrated in accordance with
IEC-60584-2.
Shield shall be aluminium backed by mylar/polyester tape bonded together helically
applied with the metallic side down with either side having 25% overlap and 100%
coverage. Minimum shield thickness shall be 0.05 mm for single pair and 0.075 mm for
multipair cable. Drain wire shall be similar to individual pair and shall be in continuous
contact with the aluminium side of the overall shield.
Inductance shall not exceed 4mH/Km. However for J-type thermocouple inductance
could be 8 mH/km.
Electrostatic noise rejection ratio shall be over 76dB.
i) All multi-pair cables shall have 6 pairs/12 pairs only.
1.4.17
Power Supply and Other Cables

a) All power supply cables shall be as per IS-1554 Part I and shall have copper/aluminium
conductors depending on conductor size. Minimum conductor size shall be 2.5 mm2 of
copper conductor. For higher sizes (above 16 mm2), aluminium conductor can be
considered. All these cables shall be PVC insulated and armoured.
1.4.18
Any other special cable required for instruments shall also be supplied as per the
requirement. Vendor shall ensure that these cables are armoured type and shall meet all other
requirements specified in para 1.4.1 through 1.4.10, as applicable.
1.5
Cable Glands
Vendor shall supply all cable glands required for glanding the above mentioned cables
at field instrument side, local control panel side, junction boxes side and at control room
side.
All cables glands shall be of nickel-plated brass and shall be double compression type
suitable for armoured cables.
Flame proof glands wherever required shall be supplied with Ex (d) certification.
PVC Cable shrouds shall be provided with all the cable glands.
1.6
Junction Boxes (Non-Fieldbus loops)

Vendor shall supply junction boxes as per the cables selected, wherever required. These
shall be of die cast aluminium alloy (min. LM-6) body and shall be weather proof to
IP65 as a minimum.
These boxes shall have terminals suitable for minimum 4.0 mm 2 cable termination
mounted on rails. 20% spare terminals shall be supplied in each junction box.
Page 943 of 1744
n31
2151e
g
I NIR71 2.12M2 JP415.1,

OF
PACKAGE UNITS
ENGINEERS INSTRUMENTATION
INDIA UMITED
IA Govf of lixha Undertaking,
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 51 of 58
Telephone sockets and plugs shall be provided in junction boxes.

Flame proof junction boxes shall be used in explosion proof/ flame-proof instruments
circuits and supplied with Ex (d) certification. All such boxes shall be weatherproof
also.
e) Each junction box shall have a minimum 12 numbers of entries with 20% or 2 Nos. as
spare entries for branch cable and minimum 2 numbers of entries for multipair cable
with 1 No. spare. All entries shall be provided with suitable plugs.
0 Suitable 3-way power junction box shall be considered for higher size of incomer
power cable, which is not matching with the terminals provided in the control panel.
1.7
Junction Boxes for Fieldbus Loops
1.7.1
For Fieldbus segment, junction box shall be used for mounting the wiring/ terminal blocks to
terminate the trunk and spurs in the fieldbus networks.
Unless otherwise specified, vendor must use the following type of terminal blocks:
1.7.2
For all FISCO signals
Weatherproof terminal blocks
For all safe signals
Weather proof terminal blocks
For all Explosion proof signals
Explosion proof/Flameproof terminal blocks
Junction box for Fieldbus field barrier concept:

Fiedbus junction boxes with field barrier assembly/ assemblies shall be provided. Not more
than 12 spurs shall be considered in one junction box. Each junction shall not have more
than two segments and no. of field barrier assemblies shall be considered accordingly. Field
barrier assemblies in a segment shall be multidropped (shall not be daisy chained in a trunk).
Only one closed loop can be considered per segment. Remaining spur connections in the
segment can be used for open loop. For multi field barrier assembly in a junction box, Field
barrier assemblies shall be DIN rail mounted. Vendor shall terminate the spare pair of trunk
cable in DIN rail mounted terminal in junction box. One field barrier assembly shall contain:
Isolation facilities (EEx de) for isolating the field barrier assembly from fieldbus
trunk.
Not more than 6 spur / barriers connections and Not more than one field device in
each spur connection.
Internal short circuit protection for each spur (short circuit current <= 45 mA)
LED indicator for each spur short circuit.
Each spur shall be galvanically isolated from trunk.
Fieldbus terminator for each segment shall be inside junction box.
1.7.3
Housing of the fieldbus junction boxes shall be electropolished type SS 316.
1.7.4
Surge protectors on the field side shall be provided whenever specifically mentioned in job
specification either within the FFJB or along with the instrument.
1.7.5
Sufficient spacing shall be provided inside the Junction Boxes for mounting of field barrier
assemblies, termination and routing of Trunk/ Spur cables to the barrier/Megablocks,
sufficient space shall be provided for installing terminator etc. inside the Junction Box.
1.7.6
For spur and trunk cables, 20 % addition cable entries must be provided. Unused entries
shall be plugged.

$2-41-
Page 944 of 1744
tif5ilegt
Riven riecat AA saa dr
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt 0 India Undertaking)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 52 of 58
1.7.7
Each junction box shall be provided with sufficient entries with weatherproof, flameproof
plugs, as required. Trunk and spur entries shall be from the bottom.
1.8
Instrument Valves and Manifolds

Vendor shall supply instrument valves (miniature type) and valve manifolds wherever
required.
The hydrostatic test pressure for instrument miniature valves shall be 153 Kg/cm2g for
pipe class upto 600 and whereas for Instrument air lines, it shall be 41 Kg/cm2g. All
valves and manifolds shall be forged type only.
c) Valve body and trim material shall be 316 SS unless otherwise specified. Superior trim
material shall be selected as required by process conditions. Packing material in general
shall be of PTFE.
1.9
Impulse Piping/Tubing
Vendor shall supply 1/2" OD x 0.065" thick ASTM A 269 TP 316 L stainless steel
seamless tubes as a minimum for impulse lines.
Where the pressure (operating) exceeds 70kg/cm2g or if piping is specified as impulse
line, seamless pipes of size '/2" NB of required thickness shall be supplied with material
as per piping class.
Seamless tubes shall have a hardness of max 80 RB as typical.
Steam tracing shall be 10 mm OD copper tubes of electrolytic grade copper.
e) Instrument air tubing shall be 6 mm SS316L.
1.10
Pipes and Tube Fittings

Vendor shall supply flareless compression type of tube fitting and of three piece
construction.
The fitting/ferrule hardness shall not be less than RB 90 so as to ensure a minimum
hardness difference of 5 to 10 between tube and fittings. The fitting/ferrule shall be of
SS316 material.
Socket-weld type forged pipe fittings of suitable material and rating shall be supplied
for pipe fittings as per Piping Material Specification. The minimum rating shall be 3000
Lbs. Weld neck fittings shall be used where socket weld type are not allowed by piping
class.
Brass fittings, wherever used as per job specification, shall be suitable for use on
copper tubes conforming to ASTM B68 /B68M hardness not exceeding RB 50. All
fitting parts shall be manufactured from Brass as per IS-319 bar stock or equivalent and
shall be nickel plated.
e) All threaded fittings shall have NPT threads as per ANSI/ASME B 1.20.1 only.
1.11
Pneumatic Signal Tubes

Vendor shall supply 6mm OD x 1mm thick SS316L tube for pneumatic signal tubes.
Vendor shall avoid use of intermediate connections and shall estimate single length for
each instrument location.
=
Ogar Rift
Page 945 of 1744
1.12
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 53 of 58
Instrument Air Lines Fittings and Valves
Seamless galvanised, inside and outside, carbon steel pipes used for instrument air
distribution shall be as per IS 1239 class Heavy. In view of difficulty in bending such
pipes, elbows shall be used wherever bending is expected or A106 Gr B pipe shall be
supplied.
Galvanised forged screwed carbon steel screwed fittings of 2000 lbs rating fittings shall
be used.
c) Isolation valves on instrument air service shall be packless gland type full bore ball
valves. .
1.13
Air Filter Regulators

Instrument air filter regulator of suitable size, range and capacity shall be supplied for
each pneumatic instrument.
The body of the filter shall be anodised aluminium.
c) The filter shall have 5 micron sintered bronze filter element and shall be provided with
manual drain and 2" nominal size pressure gauge.
1.14
Cable Trays and Cable Ducts

All cables on the main pipe rack shall be laid in cable duct. Cable ducts shall be of
galvanised mild steel with SS bolts and shall be fabricated as per 'Duct Fabricationbolted Construction Details' standard No. 7-52-0254.
All branch cables/tubes shall run on cable trays.
These cable trays shall be made out of galvanised mild steel sheets of 2.5 mm
thickness. Ladder trays shall be of galvanised mild steel. 50 mm x 50 mm x 6mm thick
angle shall be used as a minimum.
The width shall be so selected that 50% of tray space is available for future use.
Suitable SS wire cable clamps shall be supplied for binding the cables/tubes at every
500 mm. Nuts/Bolts used for cable trays fixing shall be SS.
FRP cable trays shall be provided when specified.
1.15
Instrument Support/Structural Steel

a) Vendor shall supply instrument stands, stanchions and other structural steel material
required for supporting the cable trays, impulse lines and instruments.
1.16
Heat Tracing and Insulation

Heat tracing and insulation of line mounted instrument impulse lines shall be carried
out as per line specifications. Similar philosophy shall also be followed for equipment
mounted instruments. However, impulse lines for instruments/level instrument in
congealing, viscous services shall also be stream traced even though the
pipe/equipment not traced.
Instruments mounted on jacketed lines and jacketed equipments shall be jacketed only.
In case the jacketing of any particular instrument item is not possible, heat tracing may
be selected after intimation to Owner/ Owner Representative before proceeding ahead.
c) For all steam traced lines and steam jackets, a suitable type of steam trap must be
provided for proper and efficient tracing. Separate dedicated steam trap shall be used
for each instrument. Steam trap shall preferably be located on ground level with its

ENGINEERS
Ogal" fa5reg
Page 946 of 1744
lama viva,
,t
451 07-0 1,
INDIA LIMITED
A
Govt of India Undettakogl

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 54 of 58
outlet connected to drain funnel or as advised elsewhere in the package. Each

instrument to be traced shall be provided with steam isolation valve.
Wherever electric tracing is shown in the approved P&ID and selected for instruments
and instrument lines, this must be suitable for the line temperature rating.
Steam tracing shall be avoided inside any room/ or shelter. The heat tracing required
for analyzers shall be carried out by electrical tracing using prefabricated tube tracers.
0
Insulation of all in-line instruments like control valves, safety valves etc. shall be done
as per the line requirements. Also all direct equipment mounted instruments like level
gauge, displacer/float type instruments etc. shall be properly insulated as per insulation
requirements of the equipment on which these are installed.
The insulation with 25 mm dia. Sodium silicate inhibited ceramic fiber rope (fiber glass
/ SS wire braided) by spiral winding in position, wrapping the rope around piping so as
to cover the piping completely without leaving any gap, application of two layers of
self adhesive aluminum foil tape (min 0.1 mm thick) spirally wound over the rope
surface with the joints in two layers staggered. Ceramic fibre rope shall be of minimum
density 250 kg/m3 shall be made up of ceramic fibre insulation with other properties of
ceramic fibre rope confirming to 3.2.3 (1) of specification "6-44-0002 for hot
insulation" work.
Steam tracing shall be considered for instrument impulse line for cryogenic services
(i.e. operating temperature is less than 0 C).
2.0
INSTALLATION
2.1
Vendor shall be completely responsible for installation of all instruments within their battery
limit, in line with the installation standards (typical) furnished alongwith package
specification.
2.2
Whenever installation is beyond the scope of vendor/contractor, purchaser shall install the
instruments as per the details/documents/drawings provided by the vendor/contractor.
However, in such a case it must be ensured that complete installation materials shall be
supplied.
2.3
All direct mounted instruments like thermocouples, thermowells, temperature gauges,

pressure gauges, pressure switches etc. shall be installed in such a way that they have good
readability and accessibility.
2.4
The capillary of all capillary type instruments shall be supported properly and shall be
protected against mechanical damage.
2.5
All pressure/differential pressure instruments shall be provided with block and bleed/ bypass, drain/vent valves etc as per the installation standards, and shall have accessibility.
2.6
All primary piping/tubing (impulse lines) shall have a slope of 1 in 12 on the horizontal run.
2.7
All welding shall be carried out as per the relevant codes with proper electrodes. Any testing
(non destructive) like DP test and radiography on root weld and final weld shall be carried
out as applicable. All consumables shall be part of vendor's scope of supply. Any pre/post
weld treatment as required by the relevant codes shall be carried out.
2.8
All threaded joints shall be joined by PTFE tapes only.
2.9
All impulse lines shall be supported at regular intervals.
2.10
Instrument drain/vent connections shall be piped to safe area like oily water sewer or above
pipe racks to avoid accumulation of hazardous fluid in the plant atmosphere.
Igar la
Page 947 of 1744
leg
g
29-075,2 .770.1)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
INDIA LIMITED
PACKAGE UNITS
ENGINEERS
IA GoA of Incha Undeffak,N)
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 55 of 58
2.11
Steam tracing wherever required shall be carried out by 10 mm OD x 1 mm thick coper

tubes and condensate traps shall be provided to collect all the condensate and shall be piped
to the nearest pipe drain funnels.
2.12
All tubes/cables shall be properly laid on cable trays, which shall be supported at regular
intervals.
2.13
Separate routing or physical separation shall be maintained between signal, shut down and
power cables.
2.14
Wherever intrinsically safe system cabling is employed, the minimum separation of 150 mm
shall be adhered between IS (intrinsically safe) and non- IS signal cables.
2.15
The cases of instruments shall be earthed by earthing wire to the nearest earth bus bar for
safety reasons.
2.16
In case the cables are to be buried or laid in concrete trench the same shall be carried out by
vendor. In case civil work is carried out by purchaser, requirement of trenches shall be
provided with prior intimation to client.
2.17
Painting of angle trays, instrument supports and all structural supports shall be painted as
under :a) The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush and sand paper to
remove all scales. After cleaning, one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer shall be
given conforming to IS-2074 and allowed to dry. One coat of final paint shall be
applied.
Second and final coats of paint of final colour shall be given before handing over the
plant/ commissioning.
2.18
Installation of Systems ( MMS, Analysers etc.)
2.18.1
The system as applicable shall be installed by the system vendor who would be responsible
for installation and termination of interconnecting cables in the system racks/cabinets. All
interconnecting cables shall be identified and the individual cores/wires shall be properly
identified using ferrules. Direct-cross ferruling method shall be used for identification.
2.18.2
All system communication cables shall be laid in covered GI (galvanised iron) trays away
from power cables. Prefabricated cables shall be avoided for interconnection if these are to
be routed out side the cabinets. If unavoidable these should be laid in covered GI trays.
2.18.3
All panels/cabinets shall be properly leveled and secured firmly with the base supporting
structure. However, the consoles and printer stands need not be secured to base structure.
2.18.4
Grounding
Each cabinet, console and other equipment supplied as a part of system shall have
earthling lugs which shall be secured to the 'AC mains earthing bus'.
All circuit grounds, shields and drain wires shall be connected to the 'system ground'
bus which is isolated from 'AC mains earth'. This bus shall typically be 25 mm wide
and 6 mm thick of copper.
The total resistance of system ground shall be less than 5 ohms unless otherwise
recommended by system manufacturer.
c) Safety barriers, if used, shall be secured to 'Safety ground' which shall have typically
ground resistance of less than 1 ohm. The bus shall be designed considering a fault level
of 0.5 A at 250V r.m.s. per barrier.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$tgar Mieg
Page 948 of 1744
t.A
F,t t-tv,,,,A,Afo, 0
IA Govt of India UndeltakIng)

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 56 of 58
2.18.5
All other installation guidelines as recommended by system manufacturer shall be followed.
3.0
TESTING AND CALIBRATION
3.1
All impulse lines shall be tested hydrostatically at 1.5 times the design pressure / maximum
operating pressure. Ensure that instrument and vessel/piping is isolated during this test.
3.2
In case of special instruments/items where hydrotesting is not permitted due to service

conditions, the impulse lines testing shall be carried out by using air or nitrogen.
3.3
After pressure testing, all these impulse lines shall be drained and dried with dry air for 15
minutes to remove any traces of moisture, oil and dust.
3.4
Instrument air lines shall be duly tested for any leak after pressurising and isolating the main
root valve by soap solution and bubbler unit. After isolation, the rate of fall in pressure shall
be less than 1 kPa for every 4.4 metre (1 psi for each 100 feet) of tubing for a test period of 2
minutes.
3.5
All instrument cables shall be tested for continuity and insulation. While meggering the
cables for insulation testing, ensure that all instruments and barriers are isolated at both ends.
The megger testing at site is not required to be carried out for the field bus cables and
thermocouple extension cables. However, for field bus cables and thermocouple extension
cables, the loop resistance and capacitance shall be checked by the contractor before and
after the completion of cable laying.
3.6
All instruments supplied by the vendor shall be calibrated using proper test equipment.
3.7
All instruments shall be calibrated for 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% and vice versa.
3.8
All temperature gauges shall be calibrated using temperature baths.
3.9
All thermocouple activated instruments shall be calibrated by generating millivolts by a

potentiometer.
3.10
All transmitters shall be calibrated as per instrument ranges.
3.11
All displacer type level transmitters shall be calibrated with water or suitable fluids and
corrected for specific gravity.
3.12
All alarm and trip switches shall be calibrated over the entire range, finally set and checked
for alarm/trip points and reset points as per the alarm/trip set point schedule. After setting,
these shall be sealed.
3.13
All control valves, prior to stroke checking, shall be externally cleaned thoroughly. The full
stroke of valve shall be checked for opening and closing. Any adjustment required for
obtaining full stroke and reducing hysteresis shall be carried out. The hysteresis shall not be
more than 1% URV (upper range value) with positioners and 5% URV without positioners.
3.14
Solenoid valve shall be checked functionally for its operation and also compatibility with
respect to barrier.
3.15
Safety valves and relief valves shall be set/ tested by using dry air/nitrogen. Leakage if any
shall be removed by proper lapping of seat and disc.
3.16
All electronic/pneumatic receiver instruments shall be calibrated as per the manufacturer's

instructions. Controllers shall be aligned properly.
elf ttai
eg
141FR ,I,CP1149,710.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt India UnOettak nngt

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 57 of 58
3.17
All special instruments like analyzer shall be checked and calibrated as per manufacturer's
instructions. Prior to testing, all analyzer sample lines shall be thoroughly cleaned by carbon
tetra chloride or any other cleaning liquid. After cleaning, these lines shall be thoroughly
purged with dry nitrogen.
3.18
No oil should be used in oxygen and chlorine service lines.
3.19
The accuracy of overall loop shall be within 1% for electronic and 1.5% for pneumatic
loops.
3.20
After performing the calibration of all instruments, the entire loop shall be checked for
proper operation.
3.21
The entire shutdown scheme shall be simulated from the process trip switches/ control
system and the scheme shall be tested for its proper operation prior to start up of the unit.
3.22
If no instrument air is available vendor shall provide necessary nitrogen cylinders with
suitable regulators to carry out the above activity.
3.23
Testing Of Systems
3.23.1
All the system functions shall be checked thoroughly for proper functioning. These shall
include but not limited to the following tests:
Page 949 of 1744
Visual and mechanical.

Complete system configuration loading.
Demonstration of all system functions.
Checking of all systems displays.
Checking of correct functioning of all keyboards.
Demonstration of all system diagnostics.
Checking of proper functioning of all printers, hardcopy unit, and printing of all reports.
Checking of all disc drives.
Complete checking of logic system, loading of user's program and checkout of results.
Checking of correct changeover of the back-up/redundant units in case of failure of
main units.
Vendor shall also carryout the system checks as per respective items specifications wherever
provided along with package.
3.23.2
The input signals shall be simulated by disconnecting the field wires for all inputs. Wherever
control room mounted Transmitters/Converters/Receiver switches are used, the functioning
of same shall also be checked.
3.24
Loop Checking
3.24.1
Loop checking shall be carried out by vendor, which shall include proper functioning and
interconnection of all items in the loop.
3.24.2
All input signals shall be generated in the field and corresponding reading shall be checked
at all corresponding displays.
All the outputs shall be checked in the field, by physical verification of valve stroke or
operation of solenoid valve/pick-up of electrical contactor.

Page 950 of 1744
Ogar faajeg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A Govt of Indo Unclertakow

INSTRUMENTATION OF
PACKAGE UNITS
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 58 of 58
3.24.3
After loop checking is completed, vendor shall connect back any terminals and connections
removed during loop checking.
3.24.4
For fieldbus loops the segment verification shall be carried out by DCS vendor. Any field
side modifications required shall be carried out by vendor.
4.0
COMMISSIONING
4.1
This activity shall be carried out in a systematic manner so as to avoid any accident to plant
and operating personnel.
4.2
During the plant start up all the instruments calibration, controller alignment, trip point
settings shall be trimmed so as to meet the operation requirements.
4.3
Prior to guarantee run of any package unit, the vital instruments as required by vendor have
to be recalibrated and the results recorded.
Page 951 of 1744
ENGINEERS
Ogar faiRegWf
INDIA
LIMITED
AMA' WORM)
IA
Go. of Indus Und.slung)
Annexure Ito
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 5
1.0

GENERAL
1.1
Material selection chart defines the base material requirements for major instrument
items. The materials have been specified as per 'piping class' in which these
instruments are installed. Additional requirements like stelliting etc. shall be selected
based on process conditions.
1.2
Although materials as specified in Material Selection Chart shall be acceptable, in

general, this does not absolve vendor of the responsibility of proper selection of
material as per the fluid being handled and process conditions.
1.3
For all instruments in sour service requiring NACE as per Piping class, all materials
of construction shall meet the requirements specified in NACE MR 01-03 latest
edition. In addition, any other requirements if specified in respective piping class,
shall also be complied.
1.4
Impulse pipe material shall be as per the corresponding piping class. However, for
Impulse tubing material shall be 316L SS, as a minimum. Better material shall be
selected wherever required.
1.5
This gives details of selection criteria for most of the common EIL Piping Classes.
However, variations may exist from these in jobs and also new piping classes may
arise. In those circumstances, the material selection shall be based on the relevant job
piping classes and evaluation of actual requirements.
1.6
For testing requirement like Radiography, IBR, NACE, Hydrogen testing, Post weld
heat treatment, etc shall be followed as per piping material specification for the
respective piping class.
Page 952 of 1744
fiPzrekgi:
:h ENGINEERS
iaReg
14917A 2120,1,61JAMI,
INDIA LIMI1B
D
una,isonsi
in Govt Of InOta
CONTROL VALVE
SL.
NO
1.
2.
3.
4.
PIPING CLASS
A1A,A3A,A5A, A6A, A8A, A9A,

AI OA, A14A, A19A, A22A, A28A,
B IA, B5A, B6A, B9A, B I3A,
B19A, B28A
A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, B16A,
B23A, B24A, B26A, B68A
D23A, D26A
A2A, B2A, B21A, DI A, D9A,
D19A, D2A, D5A, ElA, E2A, FIA,
F2A, F5A
A4A, B4A, D4A
SS316
A216
Gr. WCB
SS316
SS316L
A216
Gr. WCB *
A216
Gr. WCB *
A216
Gr. WCB
SS 316L*
A216 Gr.
WCB *
A216 Gr.
WCB *
A216
Gr. WCB
SS 316L
*
SS 316L
*
SS 316
Inconnel
*
Inconnel
*
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS316
stellited
SS316
stellited
SS 321
SS316L
SS321
SS321
SS321
Stellited
SS 316
Stellited
SS 316
A352
Gr. LCB
A217
Gr. WC1
A217
Gr. WC6
A217
Gr. C5
A217Gr.
C12
A217Gr.
C12
A352
Gr. LC3
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF3
A351
Gr.CF8
A351
Gr. CF8M
A351
GrCF3M
A351
GrCF3M*
A351
GrCF3M*
A351 Gr.
CFIOM
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr
CF3
SS321
SS321
SS 316
stellited
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS 316L
stellited
SS316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 3I6L*
SS 316
Inconnel
*
Inconnel
*
SS 316L
SS 321
SS 321
SS 347
Stellited
SS316L
SS 347
8.
A4F, B3F, B4F
9.
A4G, B4G
10.
D4G
A217 Gr. C12
A1H, BIH, DIH
A352
Gr. LC3
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF3
A351
Gr. CF8
A351
Gr. CF8M
A351
Gr. CF3M
A351
Gr. CF3M*
A351
Gr. CF3M*
A351
Gr. CF1OM
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr.
CF8C
A351Gr. CF3
15.
B18K, D18K
16,
AIM, BIM
AIN, BIN, B6N
A26N
D26N
B4K, B5K
21.
A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M
22
D25M
23.
AllK, B11K
Nozzle /
disc
A216
Gr. WCB
AID, BID, B5D, D1D, D2D, F2D
B25K
Body /
Bonnet
Trim
7.
AIK, A2K,A3K, A22K, BIK, B2K,

D2K
D2K
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Body
A352
Gr. LCB
A217
Gr. WC1
A217
Gr. WC6
A217
Gr. C5
A217 Gr. C12
AlB, BIB, D1B, D2B
Annexure I to
6 -52 -0052 Rev3
Page 2 of 5
SS 316L
Stellited*
SS 316
Stellited
SS316
Stellited
SS316
Stellited
SS 321
SS321
SS 316
Stellited
SS 316L
Stellited
SS316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 3I6L*
SS 316L
Stellited*
SS 304H
Stellited
SS 321
SS 347
Stellited
SS316L
SS 316L*
Bellow
SS316L
SS321
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 316L
Page 953 of 1744
latitzieift ENGINEERS
itaieg W INDIA LIMITED
MOM evim2fenaae1oo
IA Goa of Inclo Undeotalang)
Annexure Ito
6-52-0052 Rev3
Page 3 of 5
ORIFICE/SENIOR ORIFICE
S.
NO
Flange/Body
Plate
Body
Sensor
AlA, A3A, A6A, A8A, A9A, A10A,

A105
A14A, A19A, A22A, B1A, B21A, B6A,
B9A, B13A, B19A, D1A, D9A, D19A,
E1A, F1A,
A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, B16A, B23A, A105 *
B24A, B26A, B68A, D23A, D26A
A2A, B2A, D2A, E2A, F2A,
A105
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316L*
SS 316*
SS 316L*
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
A4A, B4A, D4A
A350 GrLF2
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
A182
GrF1
AID, BID, B5D, DID,
A182
D2D, F2D
GrF11
A4F, B3F, B4F
A182
GrF5
A4G, B4G, D4G
A182
GrF9
AlH, B1H, D1H
A350
GrLF3
A1K, A2K, A3K, A22K, B1K, B2K, D2K A182
GrF304
B25K
A182
GrF304L
B18K, D18K
A182
GrF304
AIM, BIM
A182
GrF316
AIN, A26N*, B1N, B6N, D26N*
A182
GrF316L
A5A, B5A, D5A, F5A, F25A
A105
Note-1
B4K, B5K
A182
GrF304H
A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M
A182GrF321
SS316
SS316
SS316L
SS316
SS316
SS316L
SS 321
SS316
SS 321
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS321 or
Hastelloy-C
SS321 or
Hastelloy-C
SS316L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS316
SS316
SS316L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS321 or
Hastelloy-C
SS 316L
SS316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS321
SS316
D25M
A 1 82GrF347
SS347
SS316
AllK, B11K
A182GrF304L
SS316L
SS316
AlB, B1B, D1B, D2B
19.
FIELD TRANSMITTER
PIPING CLASS
SS316L with
gold plated
SS 316L
SS321 or
Hastelloy- C
SS316L with
gold plated
SS316L
Page 954 of 1744
ifft ENGINEERS
101

Itgar ial5tegW INDIA LIMITED
1.27121OMOOnaOarfl,
IA Govl ol Inda Undertalorg)
Annexure I to
6-52-0052 Rev3
Page 4 of 5
THERMOWELL
S.
NO
LEVEL INSTRUMENT
PIPING CLASS
Flange
Well
Cage/ Chamber
A105
SS 316
A106
Gr. B
A105 *
SS 316L
A106 GrB*
A105
SS 316
A106 GrB
A350 GrLF2
SS 316
A333 Gr6
A1B, B1B, D1B, D2B
A182 GrF1
SS 316
A335 GrP1
AID, B1D, B5D, D1D,

D2D, F2D
A4F, B3F, B4F,
A182 GrF11
SS 316
A335 GrP11
A182 GrF5
SS 321
A335 GrP5
A4G, B4G, D4G
A182 GrF9
SS 321
A335 GrP59
A1H, B1H, D1H
A350 GrLF3
SS 316
A333, Gr3
A1K, A2K, A22K, A3K, B 1K, B2K,

D2K
B25K
A182 GrF304
SS 316
A312 GrTP304
A182 GrF304L
SS 316L
A312 GrTP304L
B18K,D18K
A182 GrF304
SS 316
A312 GrTP304
AIM, BIM
A182 GrF316
SS 316
A312 GrTP316
AIN, BIN, B6N, A26N*, D26N*
A182 GrF316L
SS 316L
A312 GrTP316L
15.
B4K, B5K
A182 GrF304H
SS 304H
A312 GrTP304H
16
A70M, A74M, B70M, B74M
A182 GrF321
SS321
A312 GrTP321
D25M
A182 GrF347
SS347
A312 GrTP347
AUK, B11K
A182 GrF304L
SS316L
A312 GrTP304L
A1A, A3A, A6A, A8A, Al OA, A14A,

A19A, A22A, B1A, B21A, B6A, B9A,
B13A, B19A, D1A, E1A, F1A, A5A,
B5A, D5A, D9A, D19A, F5A
A16A, A23A, A26A, A68A, B16A,
B23A, B24A, B26A, B68A, D23A,
D26A
A2A, B2A, D2A, E2A, F2A
A4A, B4A, D4A
Page 955 of 1744
laffkle/ ift ENGINEERS

Ogeil
INDIA LIMITED
Eifilegyr
Govt ol India U.d.ak.n9)
Annexure Ito
6-52-0052 Rev3
Page 5 of 5
LEVEL GAUGE
SL.
NO
PIPING CLASS
Chamber
Cock
Body
Cock
Trim
PRESSURE, DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE AND VACUUM
GAUGE
Sensing
Diaphragm
Element
/ Socket
SS 316
SS 316
Al A, A3A , A6A, A8A,A10A,

A14A, A19A, A22A, B IA, B6A,
B9A, B13A, B19A, B21A, D1A,
D9A, D19A, E1A, F1A,A5A,
BSA, D5A, F5A
Al 6A, A23A, A26A, A68A,
B16A, B23A, B24A, B26A,
B68A, D23A, D26A
A2A, B2A, D2A, E2A, F2A
A105
A105
SS 316
A105*
A105*
SS
316L*
SS 316*
SS 316L*
A105
A105
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
A4A, B4A, D4A
A350
GrLF2
A182
GrF1
A182
GrF11
A182
GrF5
A182
GrF9
A350
GrLF3
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF304L
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF316
A182
GrF316L
A182
Gr. F304H
A350
GrLF2
A182
GrF1
A182
GrF11
A182
GrF5
A182
GrF9
A350
GrLF3
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF304L
A182
GrF304
A182
GrF316
A182
GrF316L
A182
GrF304
H
A182Gr
F321
Al 82Gr
F347
A182Gr
F304L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS316
SS 321
SS 316
SS 321
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 3I6L
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316
SS 316L
SS 316
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 316L
SS 304H
SS 316
SS 316
SS321
SS 316
SS347
SS 316
SS316L
SS 316
SS 321 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 347 or Hastelloy
or Inconel
SS 316L
AlB, B1B, D1B, D2B

AID, BID, B5D, DID,
D2D, F2D
A4F, B3F, B4F
A4G, B4G, D4G
AlH, B1H, DIH
A1K,A2K, A22K,A3K, B1K,
B2K, D2K
B25K
B18K, D18K
AIM, BIM
AIN, BIN, B6N, A26N*, D26N*
B4K, B5K
A70M,A74M, B70M, B74M,
D25M
AUK, BlIK
A182Gr.
F321
A182Gr.
F347
A182Gr.
F304L
Notes:
* Material shall be hardness controlled and shall comply with NACE MR-0103 latest edition.
For Hydrogen service wetted part material for switches, transmitters shall be SS 316L gold
plated, base material Hastelloy shall be avoided
SS 316L, SS 316Ti are also acceptable in place of SS316.
Page 956 of 1744
15IPZEC(ft
-- ENGINEERS
LIMITED
$ fliAegW7- INDIA
PACKAGE UNITS
IA Govt al India UncleMO.9)
ANNEXURE4I TO STANDARD
SPECIFICATION No.
6-52-0052 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 9
ANNEXURE-Il
Format of Instrumentation Index
Format of Point Data Base
Format for Functional Schematics
Format For cable Schedule (Non-FF)
Format For cable Schedule (FF)
Format for Logic Diagram
Format for Electrical/Instrumentation interface
Format for FF instrument details
Page 957 of 1744
-F.
g
,1'
1 .;f,,
'. .
. 8 E ''
e ` .0
g....
o
4.
cjj
,.. 73
o -; 6
a.
a.
a
,..., i Z
'-' Z
1/..
i "6
1: - z
cn `,..4
Ca
'4
g
00
=1
e
26
ea T.
3 7.
2 wl
X
CD
-.?
0
a -
3 ea
6
z
rn
g
-at
o
;..,
-,-
...: es Z
a
c.:,
co) 6
as Z
es
C
I
0
.2i
o.
6
z
o6
z ,..C
72
a>
.
.5-.4 .sto.
fig g
t.T.7
o
o
to
0.
i
0
3
6,
6e
oz
a
E-
Page 958 of 1744
2...
2
:
512
00
F
0
9
REV.
>, ..m a)
_c g
DATE
E5 0
_0 -0
a)
.0
C .....
a)
- .-
2
0
0 I.i_
_J
13.)
Li
....-
0" 17
0 C
fp
0)
WX
2_' -0
a. 0
X
a) a)
>
co cr.
'-
m ...-c
3 m
Om
s._ c
.
o- 0
_o
a> 0c
r -.,
L
c3
o
>,
a c
c0
Dx
a)
C 1;1
m
0 -n-
O :'-'
E
x i62_
,_
0
E t)
z
0
I-
42)
0
0
0
-5
CY
>, .>
m r:
.c eL
I-- .0
_J
5
Lu
1 >,
m ì)
LI
as
ee
Z
E
z
Cr
i--.
z
0
C..)
ci
(I) 0
w =
u., 4Lu
-c
Z aill
E
4- X
0
11'
>, -,i,,,
C.
CD
0.
03
0 -..
).- 0
0- C
0
m .15
r e_.
_13
a) x
TAG NUMBER
AL
AH
ALL
AHH
REMARKS
0 Q)
CO -6
1- 0
0 C
> 0
0 0
n
0
-0
- W
'O.
c 0
O) 0
"f7) -6
0 0
-0 z0
-o 12
c 1-2
0 a.
w
o) ,-c_ q,
30 .c)
I-4.
0 0
C
03
..C- =
I- i
U3
LIN
cr)
AM.
EIL
OW
Page 959 of 1744

NEW DELHI
PLANT
UNIT
CLIENT
DRAWING NUMBER
FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC
SHEET 1 OF 1
REV
E
E
a)
C. 1.I.-
Q)
0, -0
0
DATE
REV.
>, a)
L_c 3
-.0 o
L.
..... ,
0
.c
-0
.....
a)
c ....
a
_I
I-J-J
c
a)
in
co >,
a)
i.. .0
a_
xc
a) 0
>
2) Ci,
1_
0
a)
3 c
Om
%._ c
6- 8
.0
0
0 c
-C --
c
0
>,
'0 C
C0
0 >,
-o
o .,,,,
C ,
0 -4-
0
1. aa)
E 1'
w
L Q)
v0
>n .>
CO
.
0..
-C
I
0
-..
......-.I
0
LLI
W
I >,
0
J3
Q0
0
E
Z=
(.1) a)
I:t .0
W".4.1
Z .0
Z.-.5 4-
Z CILLI CD
,._ X
0 g)
>, Z
L._ (0
ID=
0.
0 4-
L.
0
CL c
CD 15
4,
-C 4,
.....
:a
I
=
0
C.)
TAG NUMBER
AL
AH
ALL
AHH
REMARKS
o LE
L- X
0
Q)
CO .6
I-
0
C
>0
00
0 -
75.
C
0,
.(a) -6
a>
0
o
-0
c2
0 cl.
a)
0) ic0
R _a
o
I_ .....
-o o
c
to
:-E F In
I i c,>
In
Aill&D.
E-11 7
. ) ENGINEERS INDIA LIMITED
Page 960 of 1744
NEW
DELI-II
PLANT
UNIT
CLIENT
DRAWING NUMBER
FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC
SHEET 1 OF 1
REV
Page 961 of 1744
k'
i
k'
cS
;
0
z
2
z es.
is
..
7,
!
7...,
Le
t,
s
Ei
'I'
"'
5 s .5
i&
,'1":/-
ti
..
mm
-,
te
&
P
3
o
3 k
,1E
x.
0
L'
5
a
.
.3-
ti
tij
i'
g
,
.
2
.
r ?.
i
1 fc
g
-e.:-..
4',
is
3
z
g
,
5
t
I 2 g
c. F
i i2
a
,_
z
1U
0 ui
aa
.7.- z 1 x
t,- ti
5
3 Z.
il
a u,
i1t
0.
E,
..4
CI
1-
-J _
<
I
I
0W
ZO
I
"
0
IX Ill
LLI Z
W
Z
(.9
ui
a_
>Ia.
0
_,
z
w
2-
.
Z E
'-:-''
o
o
i, t
r .
. E
,,,
V=
03g
.
z
5
. 4
.z
,
5
0
m
7
8
-.-.
"Co'
-n
c
=
5.
2
3
<
-
-0.
IV
E1
ti
-13
z m
M M
* c
X
0
rz
g
a,
t,
,,,
] o
x
z
0
>
r-
1.1
r
o
e
w
to
0
(1)
C7 co
CD
el.
rCD
32
5'
71
I1
--I
13
co
(J)
c3
=
-- - P 2
co
4
cigw wE
EP II-
cl)
-.=.
tla
3
P5
,
23
-1
e IF, I
1I
eI
f)
,
F, co
"'
z
P
--oz.
,
r.I.
--I
0
X
0
0a
cr
CD
--..
..... 0 g
.
, 5
-
z g.
o
1
X
0
0
.0
0
--i
ZF
p
z.,
.
>
0
;91
0
0
=
0
3
ID
CT
1
0
_1 c5
0
,<
-0
K
=I
m
0
o
-n
M
Z
Ti
_,.
o c
K
.r
. -n0) fi)
P..rt . 0- .7.CT
z
7.-1
Pg
I an5
53 z .
I, .
ga
11
1 I1 9
C
ig
1 3 -<
i 5g
0
ic
: 11p
Ii
,c
1 :
3r
1
zir 1
13
1
cn
co
zo
.-.
U)
0
=
Cn
a)
O
P"
CD
X
A
. ..
CD
Q.
C
CD
* X
-0 20
&
z CD-, z
p p
P
0
,-,
--I
11
;
q11
0)
K 3
F, a 2
(I
11
I 1
is I
M ,
fa .
CI
ZT
la 0 .r)
fi @
P a
F13
6
*
FT
z
0
(7-7 a
- o
f- =
xg
=
gE
=o:
2
z 0
..o
70
CD
3
a)
R-
S.'
9-
CA
Page 962 of 1744
1-
LU
z Z
cc
co
< 1..
0
LL
LL
ch
U
0
U
-J
a_
co
o
z0
re
<o.
2
Oo
lc
z6
<C
.1a..)
......
20
ce
8
.
2 re ci
8 0
2
1.- 0
0 ct
Lu
1
0
re
a.
W
0
re
Lu
-n
Co
CO
....
ct
W
_
1.1
W
11/ co
m
a o
<
<
u
z
0
t=
<
2
ga
w
0
0
0
re
<I a
m
w
LLI
F- i ,-Ill I- W
-J 0 -I
MZ M
<0 i-ii1 .:t
0
a
CI.
ui
0
<
0
Z
(X
<
Gz
2.c) m
0 2. -,
co
-,
0
0
(3j
M ix
III
I- Z
.-n
r.)
o-
IN
I
a-1
n4
cr
<-I
r4
rn
I
el
..-1
ni
V'
V'
IN
rfl
.1.
8g
ii
1g1
.i.
E
ci2 dc
LI
IIz
1/1
?
.....
-J
us
z
0
Z6
.13
9
23=
a>
_,O
-J
P.
a
2
o
w
0
<
0
m
0
1-<
l-
ui
_1
m
V
c.)
z
0
2
re
pl
Page 963 of 1744
co
us
0
CID
a. M
I
<
0
--'
0
ct
1_
z
o o
-,
O
Im
-)
P..
0
0
w
0
us
-J
m
a
0
0
z
o
<
I
o
m
u..
c:3,
us
so
au
La,
oi0
.2
o
0
o
2
I- I-
u
.
0
,
Fa'<
0
I
Z
Li
0
ci
z
0
L.L.,
,:i
0
g.
0
IX
_l
Z
I -1 -1
X
LA
_1
55
13
Z
0
a
,_
<4
14
z
L
C.,
_<
i'
w
d
I
E
II
<4
A
0
1....1
0
0
,-1
1-1-1
CI
co
x
-
cn
....
U
g
Z
0
II
I
I
0
0_
II
IX
U
V)
LA
1=1
M
64
U
II
l_D
0
_J
Ni
_J
.
P.
as
z
LA
C.)
)(n
cn _1
m ,:t
1a i
1- ix
ce, o
g
ra
,z
U 0
> 6
w O LA
1=1
ci
z
0
z
o
LD
Z
O0
1--
<
D
6I-
W6
0
< .=.)6
>u
IX -J
W<
o E
0
Z
Pi
CE
1 1
B
d
z
ea
0
Q
F-
Lez-v
JO M OIJOGI 914 01
Page 964 of 1744
ort x
SOS-Ii91 113
poqmwied ion 91DA/Jd pUD ADM mum otn UI visoxo pawl lou 'pommqxo 'pouooi 'po!doo 'p000poicloi oq ;ou
Jopuoi oto dq uomb IUDSUOD IJONIJM AUD
APodcud eta JD 9.19A00 ufqoop Dip puo buunuP ;NI
tog logy luouJooJBo 1190JdX9 9-19/A0JJOU ayl pUD pouool AIMMILLI 9JD 941 " alunn VION1 SH33NION3
89
z
2
.e
"6 .4,1
e
0
0
`6'
ro
z0
.<
toas
E
0.
0
0
0
o
S2
2t
z
E.
1
00
es.
0
00
Cl)
dz
1;'
pi
Page 965 of 1744
6.
"5 0
Z
0
0
a
E
LL
51.
_-.,
o cro
a
lia
0 (2. i3
F.
E 3 ...
a.
0
.
0
9
m
=
0
...
g
x
i-
0
r
LI
..c
15 m
v
I
c
-1
r4
-I
a
CD
.-
5
93
aa
0
0
XI
I
8
'
g
9.
a
g
>
or
g
0
a
5.
oa
0
0
t
i i
.5Z
co
5
*
a
5
a
gI 3
.
"-,
5
s .
8
3 .
ci
.
5
''
g
2,
.
a
a
a.
g
a
a s--
a
5
it
J
'8
8
4:
i
... ,c4--
. 0
5-
g
t
2
a
ca
g
2 II .
5
a'
id
-4
2,
cr
c
8a
Q :
,3",
a
.z
a0
1.
..c-I
2
-
a
5
8.
01
2
3
F
Z
9.1 -, -. -. _. _. _. -33 -J. -a -n

0 4, 0, -4 01 01 A C33 9..1- 0 <0 Co -.I 03 C73 A 43 f0 -.
cn
Z
o
Z
co
Z 8g3
It. 5
o.
8
ao
>
aa
a
.0.
0
8
g
e3
a.
P.
2
F.'
m
.
3z
00- 0
iii a:*
co
si
g
..
cr
'
'5
Fr;
a
tD
c
2m
a
%'
i I
co

s
i
gI
0
r...1
5...
5
a
3
E
0
$
if
,..e
2
9,,
co:
i
cii
a
3
c
C)
1
73
< 010
W s.
5'
a 2
:
CI
t
3f,
a
a
0
"..
en
73
3
a
e.
cr
8
1
a
F. E
5 0 .
3
5
c a
0
I 7
I
.
C
a
E
5
o
*
tocr
el
3,
a
5.
t
\Ia
5
0rj,
0 .E
-
m
o.
Z
?a;
t
o.
eo
5.
g
a
g.
a,
5'
0
a
0
v-
....
g
5
5"
Fi
o a
5 II
(1)
0
0
- .1!"
.,
2,
5
0
a
.
a
t"
a
a
a
O.
a
0
z
CT
a
a I
5
1
0
g
r5.-'
m5-'

n
Q.
5-. 0
P..
!.3,. a
ke
.
a
5
g
5
;
a 8
id
g:
g
5
-6-
a
ca.
t

,I.
m
-11
mXI
1
Z'
0o
-8
1
a
g
a ,
.0
g.- a
f(,
q
3
3g
.2.
-n
-n
t1
fi
i
2i
s
a
-2,
*
.:
.-
13.
q_ '
0
11
a
.a
...
=
II.'
5
0 ,
e73
8
i
;
?1
3
0
=',
It
co
-0a
q
-11
-11
LT
r-
0a
a
c
Y.
-n
-II
R
6
..
Z
0
Cn
-8
XI
o
o
7CI
.3
c;
.8
8
5
7
..<
3
eo
0a
*
.7 >
r.
a
ra
a
fro
=
a,
Page 966 of 1744
Page 967 of 1744
31 eitq
Oge-ff tifirdg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt of India UnOntalong)
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 1 of 36
VA
$i
FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
i di ei ch ch 5. el i
rag- TITRW ftrAmbrA.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS
Revised and Reissued
30.06.15
24.11.09
Revised and Reissued
22.04.98
Rev
Date
No
Purpose
t4R
SC
MA
MN
RP
TGM
ND
PM
RK
BRS
AS
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
committee
Convener
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 968 of 1744
ENGINEERS
gen EttalegNmiir-/ INDIA LIMITED
-
lee7r, erensre axJwifm)
Abbreviations:
AC
Baseefa
CPU
CSA
DC
DCS
DMR
DVD
EMI
ESD
EXIDA
FAT
FMEDA
HART
HW
HWC
IEEE
I/O
LAN
LCD
LCIE
LED
MIS
MTBF
MTTR
OPC
PC
P&ID
PID
PLC
PTB
PLC
RFI
SlL
TCP / IP
TMR
TUV
UHF
UPS
UL
VDU
VHF
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 2 of 36
Alternating Current
British Approval Service for Electrical Equipment in Flammable
Atmospheres
Central Processing Unit
Canadian Standards Association
Direct Current
Distributed Control System
Dual Modular Redundant
Digital Versatile Disc
Electromagnetic Interference
Emergency Shutdown System
Excellence in Dependable Automation
Factory Acceptance Test
Failure Modes, Effects and Diagnostic Analysis
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
Hardware
Hardwired Console
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
Input / Output
Local Area Network
Liquid Crystal Display
Laboratorie Central Industries Electriques
Management Information System
Mean Time Between Failure
Mean Time to Repair
OLE for Process Control
Personal Computer
Proportional, Integral and Derivative
Physikalisch Technische Bundersanstalt
Radio Frequency Interference
Safety Integrity Level
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol
Triple Modular Redundant
Technische Uberwachungs Vereine
Ultra High Frequency
Uninterrupted Power Supply
Video Display Unit
Very High Frequency
Instrumentation Standards Committee

Convener :
Mr. Rajiv Gupta
Members :
Mr. S Bhowal
Mr. M Nandi
Mr. R K Gupta
Ms. Rima Kundu
Mr. S Mahesh Kumar
Ms. N P Guha (Proj.)
Page 969 of 1744
1,39fa_Jei =,) ENGINEERS
fititeg
1.127t rlecnre oAdods.)
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt 01 India Undertalong)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 3 of 36
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
DEFINITIONS
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
12
4.0
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
14
5.0
TESTING, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND ACCEPTANCE
31
6.0
35
7.0
SHIPPING
.36
8.0
REJECTION
36
Page 970 of 1744
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
sige.il 251eg. INDIA
Govt of Inca Undenaking)
el
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 4 of 36
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This specification, defines the minimum functional requirements for the design, hardware,
software and firmware specifications, nameplate marking, testing and shipping of
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) designed for reliable, effective and optimum control
and monitoring of a process plant (hydrocarbon and non-hydrocarbon) and captive power
plant.
1.1.2
The related standards referred to herein and mentioned below shall be of the latest editions,
unless otherwise specified: -
API

RP 552
EEMUA
Engineering Equipment & Material User Association

191
BS
Alarm System - A Guide to Design, Management and

Procurement
British Standards
EN 10204
IS/IEC
Transmission Systems
Inspection Document for Metallic Products
Indian Standards / International Electrotechnical Commission

IS/1EC60079
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive atmospheres
IS/1EC60529
Classification of Degree of protection provided by

enclosures (IP Code).
IEC 60584-2
Thermocouples. Part 2: Tolerances
IEC 60617
Graphical Symbols for Diagram
IEC 60751
Industrial platinum resistance thermometers and platinum

temperature sensors
IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-3: Testing

and measurement techniques - Radiated, radio-frequency,
electromagnetic field immunity test.
IEC 61000-4-4
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-4: Testing

and Measurement Techniques Electrical Fast Transients
/ Burst Immunity Test
IEC 61000-4-5
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part 4-5: Testing

and Measurement Techniques Surge Immunity Test
IEC 61000-6-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Part-6-2: Generic

Standards Immunity for Industrial environments.
IEC 61508
Functional Safety of Electrical / Electronic /

Programmable Electronic Safety-related Systems.
Page 971 of 1744
rM
a
ENGINEERS
31
0g-a OW-6 11W INDIA LIMITED

1.11Eq, ekTorz aA 340.1)
IA Govt o In Underlalang)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 5 of 36
IEC 61131
Programmable Logic Controllers
IEC 61511
Functional Safety Safety Instrumented Systems for the

Process Industry Sector
IEC 61643-21 Low voltage surge protective devices - Part 21: Surge
protective devices connected to telecommunications and
signaling networks - Performance requirements and
testing methods
Lightning protection system components (LPSC) - Part 3:
Requirements for isolating spark gaps (ISG)
IEC 62561-3
IEEE 802.3
Telecommunication and Information Exchange between Systems Local

and Metropolitan Area Networks Specific Requirements Part 3: Carrier
Sense Multiple Access with Collisions Detection (CSMA / CD) Access
Method and Physical Layer Specifications
IS
Indian Standards
3043
International Society of Automation
ISA
ANSI/ISA
Code of Practice for Earthing
5.1
Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
5.2
Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations
5.3
Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control / Shared Display

Instrumentation, Logic and Computer System.
5.4
Instrument Loop Diagrams
5.5
Graphic Symbols for Process Displays
18.1
Annunciator Sequences and Specifications
71.01
Environmental Conditions for Process Management and

Control Systems: Temperature and Humidity
71.04
Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and

control Systems: Airborne Contaminants
American National Standards Institute / International Society of Automation

TR 99.00.01
ISO
Security technologies for Industrial Automation and

Control Systems
International Organization of Standardization

216
Writing Paper and Certain Classes of Printed matter-Trimmed

Sizes- A & B Series and indication of machine direction
9241-5
Ergonomic requirements for office work with visual display

terminals (VDTs) -- Part 5: Workstation layout and postural
requirements
Page 972 of 1744
k31
oaentapieg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of We Undertsk.0)
CONTROLLERS
9241-302
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.2
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 6 of 36
Ergonomics of human-system interaction -- Part 302:

Terminology for electronic visual displays
In the event of any conflict between this specification, data sheets, statutory regulations,
related standards, codes etc., the following order of priority shall govern:
a)
Statutory regulations
b)
Job Specifications/ Data Sheets
c)
Standard Specifications
d)
Codes and Standards
In addition to meeting purchaser's specifications in totality, vendor's extent of responsibility

shall also include the following:
a)
Purchaser's data sheets specify the minimum acceptable functional requirements for
the programmable logic controllers. It shall be vendor's responsibility to select proper
hardware, software and firmware to meet the specified functional requirements,
keeping the integrity of functional blocks specified in the configuration diagram
attached with the Requisition.
b)
Purchaser's data sheets specify the scan time / cycle time and loading requirements.
Vendor shall be responsible for sizing and selecting their standard product i.e.
hardware, software and firmware to meet the requirements specified in the purchaser's
data sheets.
c)
Adequacy of Bill of Material selected to meet purchaser's requirements including

spares. Vendor to note that bill of material shall not be verified by the purchaser
during evaluation stage. Any hardware, software and firmware required to meet the
purchaser's specified requirements shall be provided by the vendor without any
implication.
Bids
1.2.1
Vendor's quotation shall be strictly as per the bidding instructions to vendor attached with
the Requisition. Vendor's quotation shall enumerate and include the detailed specification of
each subsystem and each module of programmable logic controller, detailed system
configuration, hardware and software capabilities, programming aids, display facilities and
other relevant information.
1.2.2
Whenever a detailed technical offer is required, vendor's quotation shall include the
following:
a)
Compliance to the specifications.
b)
Detailed specification sheet for each sub-system. The specification sheet shall provide
information regarding hardware specifications, software specifications, redundancy
requirements, capacity, power consumption etc. of the programmable logic controllers
and its accessories. The material specifications and unit of measurement for various
items in vendor's specification sheets shall be to the same standards as those indicated
in purchaser's data sheets.
c)
System security features and design details.
Page 973 of 1744
ENGINEERS
zlf tlfilegW INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt. India Undertaking)
RIR, 012W WI3VIhA1
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 7 of 36
d)
Proven references for each offered model in line with clause 1.2.4 of this specification
whenever specifically indicated in the purchaser's specifications.
e)
A copy of approval for flameproof enclosure, intrinsic safety etc whenever specified,
from local statutory authority, as applicable, like Petroleum and Explosives Safety
Organisation (PESO) / Chief Controller of Explosives (CCE), Nagpur or Director
General of Mines Safety (DGMS) in India along with:
f)
g)
h)
i)
Test certificate from recognised house CIMFR (Central Institute of Mines & Fuel
Research) / ERTL (Electronics Research and Test Laboratory) etc. for specified
protection class as per relevant Indian Standard for all Indian manufactured
equipments or for equipments requiring DGMS approval.
ii)
Certificate of conformity from agencies like LCIE, Baseefa, PTB, CSA, UL etc.,
for compliance to ATEX or other recognised standards for all equipments
manufactured outside India.
Deviations on technical requirements shall not be entertained. In case vendor has any
valid technical reason to deviate from the specified requirement, they must include a
list of deviations item wise, summing up all the deviations from the purchaser's data
sheets and other technical specification along with the technical reasons for each of
these deviations.
Certificate for specified sm requirement (e.g. SIL-3) from Independent Testing
Agency (e.g. TUV/EXIDA).
Catalogues giving detailed technical specifications, model decoding details and other
related information for each item / sub-system covered in the bid.
1.2.3
The equipment being offered / supplied shall be of latest proven version available in the
current manufacturing range.
1.2.4
The system hardware, software and firmware as offered, shall be field proven and should
have been operating satisfactorily for a period of minimum 6 months continuously on the
bid due date in the validly similar size and application specified in the purchaser's data
sheet. Items with prototype design shall not be offered or supplied.
1.2.5
The detailed scope of work, specific job requirements, exclusions, deviations, additions etc.
shall be indicated in the job specifications which shall be part of Requisition
1.2.6
Whenever specified, vendor shall furnish tested values of failure rates, probability of failure
on demand and test intervals for safety integrity level analysis.
1.2.7
All documentation submitted by the vendor including their quotation, catalogues, drawings,
installation, operation and maintenance manuals shall be in English language only.
1.2.8
Vendor shall also quote for the following:

a)
Two year's operational spares for each sub-system and their accessories which shall
include the following as a minimum:
i) All type of electronic modules e.g. I/O modules, processor modules,
communication modules, power supply modules etc.
ii) All type of auxiliary items e.g. barriers / isolators, hardwired instruments,
annunciator modules, receiver switches, trip amplifiers, temperature element
converters etc.
Page 974 of 1744
ogar feta&
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(artier cleave rt71.3gartrt)
(A Goat of India Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 8 of 36
iii) Switches, lamps, fuses, connectors, terminals, pre-fabricated cables, circuit

breakers, relays etc.
iv) Video display units, keyboards, disc drives, PC's, network items (e.g. switches,
hubs etc.) etc.
b)
Any special tools and test equipments needed for the maintenance of PLCs and other
items being offered by vendor. Vendor must confirm in their offer if no special tools
or test equipments are needed for maintenance other than those specifically indicated
in purchaser's data sheet.
1.3
Drawings and Data
1.3.1
Detailed drawings, data, catalogues and manuals required from the vendor are indicated by
the purchaser in vendor data requirement sheets. The required number of prints and soft
copies shall be dispatched to the address mentioned, adhering to the time limits indicated.
1.3.2
Final documentation consisting of design manuals, installation manual, operation and

maintenance manual etc., submitted by the vendor after placement of purchase order shall
include the following, as a minimum:
a)
Specification sheet for each sub-system, auxiliary instrument and bought out item.
b)
Certified drawings for complete system including the following:

i)
System Configuration Diagram
ii)
General Arrangement drawings for panels, cabinets, marshalling racks,

hardwired consoles, operator console, programming terminal etc with complete
dimensional details, internal construction and weight in kilograms.
iii) Control room layouts e.g. console room, rack room and engineering room layout
with all dimensions in millimeters.
iv) Channel base frame drawings for console room, rack room and engineering
room.
v)
Input/ output assignment.
vi) Logic/ Ladder diagrams.

vii) Loop wiring diagram for all tags.
viii) Power supply distribution diagram.
ix) Memory loading calculations/ Scan time calculations.
x)
Modbus address mapping/ Protocol/ Pin Detail wherever required as per

requisition.
xi) Dynamic graphic diagrams.

xii) System grounding drawing.
Design manuals and functional design specifications which shall include hardware
design manual, software design manual and special software specifications.
Page 975 of 1744
ENGINEERS
Oaeir kliaeg WI INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
2.0
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 9 of 36
d)
Copy of type test certificates.
e)
Copy of test certificates for all tests indicated in this specification.
f)
Installation manual containing installation procedure for programmable logic

controllers and other items covered in the Requisition.
g)
Power-on, start-up and internal testing procedures.
h)
Software debugging and system configuration procedures.
i)
Calibration and maintenance manual containing maintenance procedures including

replacement of parts, application modification etc.
j)
Any other drawings and documents specifically indicated in vendor data requirement
enclosed with the Requisition.
DEFINITIONS
The various terms used in this specification are defined as follows:
2.1

The class of control systems which can be programmed to execute plant shutdown and / or
interlock / sequence logics to the specified safety integrity levels and also regulatory control
functions in specific applications.
2.2
Accessible
A system feature that is viewable by and interactive with the operator and allows the
operator to perform user permissible control action e.g. set point change, auto-manual
transfers or on-off actions.
2.3
Assignable
A system feature that permits an operator to direct a signal from one device to another
without the need for change in wiring, either by means of switches or via other data entry
devices like keyboard commands to the system.
2.4
Configurable
The capability to select and connect standard hardware modules to create a system or the
capability to change functionality or sizing of software functions by changing parameters
without having to modify or regenerate software.
2.5
1/0
Input / Output with respect to process / operator.
2.6
PLC Console (Operator)

PLC console (Operator) is the operator's main plant interface device through which operator
can view, monitor and control the plant and can give instructions to peripherals to execute
commands, and shall have protective access to configure and maintain the system.
Page 976 of 1744
ENGINEERS
Ogeir triitegW INDIA LIMITED

elVA,tet.Joto.tt
2.7
IA Govt of India undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 10 of 36
PLC Engineering Console (Programming)

PLC Engineering console (Programming) shall be the engineer's main interface device
through which engineer can configure / program and maintain the system, and shall have
protective access to monitor and control the plant, give instructions to peripherals to execute
commands.
2.8
Local Level
All those sub-systems, which directly interface with field devices shall be referred to as
local level.
2.9
Central Level
Operator Console and Programming Terminal, which present data acquired from local level
devices, shall be referred as Central Level.
2.10
Database
Database shall be defined as the information stored temporarily or permanently in the
system which can be accessed by various programs to meet all its functional requirements.
2.11
Loop Integrity
A system shall be said to have loop integrity if the failure of one component in the system/
sub-system does not affect more than one loop.
2.12
System Loading
System loading for a sub-system is defined as the percentage of time a sub-system spends in
carrying out various activities referred to the use of memory, CPU time and communication
capacity in the worst case of high sub-system operation out of the designed / designated
cycle time of the sub-system.
2.13
Redundancy
A system component shall be termed as redundant if it takes over automatically the
operation in the event of the failure of the main component without causing any interruption
in the system and upsetting the process. The repaired or replaced device shall be brought
in-line only through operator action without upsetting system operation.
2.14
Switchover Time
Time required for a back up instrument / system to come on-line automatically in case of the
failure of the main instrument / system.
2.15
Processor Cycle Time (tpc)

Processor cycle time is the measure of the processing speed of a processor. Processor cycle
time for a sub-system of the programmable logic controller shall be defined as follows:Processor cycle time for programmable logic controller shall be defined as the total time
taken by the processor to read input supplied by input module, execute all computations
(analog as well as logic as configured) and write the outputs for the output module.
Page 977 of 1744
.31`11Q.Jel. ,,M ENGINEERS

LlI
lelf5tegV0 INDIA LIMITED
1.127, FREW A.JWA)
2.16
(A Govt of India
undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 11 of 36
Scan Time (t,)
Scan time of a logic loops is the end-to-end response time of a sub-system and shall be
defined as follows:
The scan time for a logic loop shall be defined as the total time taken by a sub-system e.g.
programmable logic controller to read input from the input terminal, process input, execute
logic, updating logic output and write output at the output terminal for all the logics
configured within the subsystem.
2.17
User's Memory
Free memory space available after utilisation of memory required for system operation,
configuration and implementation of application and other system related functions for
implementation of user defined specific programs such as plant calculations, process
optimization or MIS (like free formatting of certain logs). The programs shall either be
written in high level language or system specific language.
2.18
Event
An event shall be defined as any action taken by the operator via operator keyboard or
switches on hardwired console like change of set point, change of control mode, start/stop of
motor, open/close of shut down valves, alarm acknowledge, etc.
2.19
Sequence of Event (SOE)
Arranging events in the sequence of their occurrence in time with a specified time resolution
by a program is defined as sequence of event.
2.20
Sequence of Event Recorder (SER)
Sequence of event recorder, when specified, shall identify, store and print alarms with the
specified time resolution between two events. SER shall also transfer data to operator sub
system over communication sub system.
2.21
Real Time Trend
Real time trend shall be defined as a continuously progressing graphical record showing
updated parameter with most recent value and a past record of minimum of 10 minutes
without pressing any additional key for moving backward in time.
2.22
Plant Information Network
High-level communication network which serves various users within a plant and transfer
information for the purpose of unit / plant monitoring. This network is different than control
network and is generally realised using open communication protocol network e.g. OPC etc.
2.23
Tag
A Tag is a collection of attributes that specify either a control loop or a process variable, or a
measured input, or a calculated value, or some combination of these, and all associated
control and output algorithms. Each tag is unique.
Page 978 of 1744
ks-afaziei m
s i ENGINEERS
sleji 051eg VIIIIPP INDIA

(.111712:121MMIJIVAA)
(A
LIMITED
Govt el We undertakm)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 12 of 36
3.0
SPARES PHILOSOPHY
3.1
The system including sequence of event recorder, hardwired instruments etc. shall meet the
following spare philosophy. This philosophy shall also be applicable for items like barriers,
relays, terminals, lamps, push buttons etc.
3.1.1
Mandatory Spares
Vendor shall include following mandatory spares in their scope of supply:
3.1.1.1
Installed Engineering Spares

Installed engineering spares shall be provided in each sub-system for each type of module to
enhance the specified system functional requirements by 20%. The basis of offering
installed engineering spares shall include:
a)
For a system with conventional and / or smart analog input / output, discrete (contact)
input / output, 20% spare input / output of each type shall be considered for
calculating I/O modules and all other related accessories.
b)
For all serial input / outputs to the system, 20% spare serial I/O ports of each type of
serial input / output shall be provided.
c)
20% spare accessories like relays, switches, lamps, fuses, circuit breakers, barriers,
isolators, terminals etc.
d)
The engineering spares shall be wired up to the field cable interface and shall be in
ready-to-operate condition when field cable is connected to spare assigned terminals.
e)
Spare pairs of the incoming cables shall be terminated on spare terminals in the
marshalling / barrier cabinets as applicable.
f)
The system shall be fully engineered considering 20% installed engineering spares
including processor loading.
3.1.1.2 Spare Space Requirement

In addition to installed engineering spares specified in Clause 3.1.1.1 of this specification,
the system shall be provided with following spare space:
a)
The cabinets of the of the programmable logic controller system shall have 10%
usable spare space for installing additional I/O cards of each type in future and the
PLC processor shall have additional 10% capacity to handle these I/0's. In addition,
provision shall be kept for internal wiring of the same up to the I/O terminals.
b)
Processor system of programmable logic controller shall have capability to execute

additional 20% logics.
c)
Each operator console shall contain 20% usable spare group and related display
capability in addition to as specified in para 3.1.1.1 of this specification.
d)
The system shall have capability to extend its historical trending, logging and user's
memory by 20% to meet future expansion with/without adding additional memory
modules.
e)
The communication sub-system shall have sufficient capacity to handle additional

data contributed by addition of 20% I/O over and above installed engineering spares.
Page 979 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
Ifgar 16101eu
101
NIVIT 21221W 01399.1,
f)
IA Govt of Me Undeftaloog)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 13 of 36
Usable spare space in cabinets to install 10% spare hardwired items like relays,
switches, lamps, fuses, circuit breakers, barriers, isolators, terminals etc. in future.
3.1.1.3 Spare Memory Requirement

a)
The system shall be provided with a minimum of 40% spare memory capacity, as
required for application program and data base to meet specified functional
requirements.
b)
It shall be possible to extend the memory by at least 20% over and above the actual
requirement at a later date.
3.1.1.4 Spare Software Capability

a)
Sufficient additional software capacity shall be available in the system to take care of
spares requirement as specified in para 3.1.1.1 and 3.1.1.2 of this specification to meet
all functional requirements as per para 4.0 of this specification.
b)
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the offered system shall have software
licenses to cover all the tag numbers indicated in the Requisition, including installed
engineering spares and spare space indicated in clause 3.1.1.1 and 3.1.1.2 of this
specification.
3.1.1.5 Predefined Mandatory Spares

a)
Mandatory spares shall be ware-house spares and shall be supplied as loose items.
b)
Mandatory spare module of 5% or one module of each type, whichever is higher, must
be supplied for each type of modules being used excluding modules used in consoles,
servers, Personal Computers.
c)
For items like, Video Display Units, keyboards, disc drives, network components,
hardwired instruments like barriers, lamps, fuses and circuit breakers, complete item
limited to 5% or minimum one of each type shall be supplied as predefined mandatory
spare. But this shall not include hardware like hard discs, terminals.
3.1.1.6 Consumable Spares

Any paper, ribbon, printer heads, toner and ink required for printers, video copier or any
other consumable item shall be supplied along with system required for minimum of six
months duration after system acceptance.
3.1.1.7 Commissioning Spares
Unless otherwise specified, vendor shall be responsible to supply all spares which are found
necessary to replace failed modules, failed sub-systems, or corrupted / faulty software while
performing pre-commissioning and commissioning activities.
3.1.2
Two Years Operational Spares

Two years operational spares shall be as per Clause 1.2.8(a) of this specification and shall be
quoted separately.
Page 980 of 1744
51fgar 05i-eg
(Nrerf rieme dflanddid
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A GoN of India Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 14 of 36
4.0
4.1
Design Requirements
4.1.1
Programmable logic controller shall be microprocessor based system which shall be used to
execute all the process and safety shut-down logic of the plant. When specified, it shall also
execute plant interlock logics and sequence operation and analog control. Programmable
logic controller shall be an independent unit and shall not depend on any of its functionality
on any other system including Distributed Control System.
In case of common engineering database for DCS and PLC, engineering data for DCS and
PLC shall be segregated and the data access shall be through respective engineering stations
of DCS and PLC only. Such configuration shall meet the SIL3 compliance by third party
certifying agency like TUV/ EXIDA etc
Moreover, wherever exchange of safety parameters between the different PLC sub-systems
is required for interlock execution, separate communication network shall be provided
between these PLC sub-systems. For SIL certified PLCs, this communication network
between PLC nodes shall also be SIL certified.
4.1.2
The system shall be of modular construction and expandable in future by adding additional
modules which shall be easily accessible for maintenance and repair. The type of modules
shall be kept to the minimum possible in order to have interchangeability and low inventory.
4.1.3
System Availability
a)
The system shall be designed 'fault tolerant' as a minimum by selecting high grade
components of proven quality and proper design of system electronics.
Redundancy shall be provided, as a minimum, as per this specification to improve
system availability and reliability. Due considerations shall be given to the
environmental conditions particularly for field mounted sub-system, if specified in job
specifications, during system design.
b)
The system shall have a high MTBF value and shall have well proven record of
operating in hydrocarbon plants.
c)
The system shall be designed with 99.995% or greater availability. The availability
shall be defined as follows:
Availability = Mean time Between Failure (MTBF)
MTBF + Mean time to repair (MTTR)
For the purpose of calculations, consider mean time to repairs as four (4) hours unless
the manufacturer recommends higher value for MTTR. It is therefore necessary that:
i) Vendor covers all necessary spare parts in 2 years recommended operational
spares which shall be necessary to meet specified MTTR time.
4.1.4
Operating Environmental Conditions
4.1.4.1
Environmentally Controlled Location Installation

a)
All subsystem of Programmable Logic Controllers located in Control Room, Local

Control Room or in Satellite Rack Room shall be able to operate satisfactorily from
15C to 30C and 20% to 80% non condensing humidity.
Page 981 of 1744
ei 0QA,
41. ENGINEERS
RairduW INDIA LIMITED
lailerr ?Vesta allageni)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 15 of 36
b)
In addition to above, all such sub-systems shall also be able to operate satisfactorily in
case of air conditioning failure with ambient temperature of 50C and 90% nonThe
condensing humidity until the system safe operating limits are exceeded.
minimum period of continuous operation in such condition shall be 48 hours at least
once in a month without any damage or degradation of system performance. Vendor,
therefore, shall provide continuous temperature monitoring for each cabinet housing
items / equipments generating heat, such as system cabinets, barrier cabinets, relay
cabinets, consoles etc and also provide alarm for operator alert in case the safe
operating temperature limits are exceeded. For marshalling cabinets and Power
distribution cabinets, temperature monitoring through temperature switches is
acceptable.
c)
Chemical filters have been provided in the incoming air conditioning air to limit the
concentration of contaminants below following limits:
Contaminants
(Corrosive Gases)
Concentration
SOx
< 0.01 ppm by volume
NOx
H2 S
C12
< 0.001ppm by volume
All sub-systems and system components shall be suitable for operating continuously
in the above mentioned corrosive environments.
4.1.4.2 Outdoor Installations
4.1.5
a)
Sub-systems or system components which are installed outdoor shall be suitable to

continuously operate at ambient temperature and humidity specified under ambient
conditions. The heat generation effect of current carrying for the electronic modules
shall also be considered. For this purpose, the system shall be rated for minimum 5
deg C more than the maximum ambient temperature specified. In case the system is
not suitable for the above conditions, necessary cooling arrangement shall be
provided.
b)
Unless otherwise specified, all PLC sub-systems or system components installed

outdoor shall have corrosive environmental protection coating meeting the
environmental classification class G3 as per ISA-S71.04.
Transient, Static and EMI / RFI Protection
4.1.5.1 The system shall be internally protected against system errors and hardware damage
resulting from:
a)
Electrical transients on power wiring.
b)
Electrical transients on signal wiring.
c)
Connecting and disconnecting devices or removing or inserting printed circuit boards

in the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).
4.1.5.2 All sub-systems and system components shall be capable of accepting various signal inputs
for its direct use while preventing noise errors due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or
radio frequency interference (RFI) including nearby radio stations, hand held two way
Page 982 of 1744
,531Re_it.-1
ENGINEERS
/INDIA LIMITED
Ogar idiReg 'Voir
14iTZA ei7aw7maaarA)
f A Govt of India Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 16 of 36
radios, solenoids, relays or contactors carrying heavy currents as per levels of

Environmental electromagnetic phenomenon defined in IEC-61000-6-2. The system shall
have total noise immunity from UHF / VHF radio communication equipments, (RFI) and
(EMI) noise generating equipments as per IEC-61000-4.
4.1.5.3 For interplant, inter unit and other system cables routed in the field, the level of surge
immunity required for equipment signal ports shall be increased to level 4 as defined in IEC61000-4-5 and the system shall operate according to performance criterion B as defined in
IEC-61000-6-2.
4.1.6
On-line Replacement
4.1.6.1 On-line replacement of any module of programmable logic controller shall be possible in
such a way that removal and addition of the module shall be possible and safe without
de-energising the system. Furthermore, there shall not be any interruption of the system and
process upset while replacing a faulty module in case of TMR, QUAD and dual redundant
PLCs.
4.1.6.2 Apart from system modules, power supply units shall be replaceable on-line without
disrupting the process and without affecting the system redundancies. It shall be possible to
hot swap any faulty system module without degrading the system safety or operation or
freezing the output status. The switchover to the healthy module shall be bumpless. The
swapped module shall take over the function of the failed module without any manual
programming.
4.1.7
Electrical Isolation
Galvanic or optical isolation shall be provided for all field signals. The isolation levels shall
be as follows:
Analog I/O channel to system ground
1500V AC
Discrete I/O channel to system ground
500V AC
External isolator shall be provided, if necessary to meet the above.

Isolation shall also be provided between Engineering / operator console/PLC programming
terminal and related sub-systems connected to it if there is any possibility of high voltage
being transmitted to the sub-systems.
4.1.8
Design Requirements of Equipments in Hazardous Area
4.1.8.1
Unless specifically indicated, the field devices are beyond the scope of this specification.
However vendor shall be fully responsible for integrating these devices with their system
including compiling and maintaining the engineering data base of these devices and
incorporating the data base into the Integrated Asset Management System (whenever
specified in the requisition).
4.1.8.2 General requirements

a)
Unless otherwise specified, all instruments in hazardous area shall be intrinsically safe
type. Other concepts shall be used when specified.
b)
For conventional instrumentation, entity concept shall be used for selecting proper
barriers / isolators.
Page 983 of 1744
faeieim ENGINEERS
r INDIA LIMITED
ages iiwiv
IA Govt o India Undertaking)
ele.re 0. 3.RM)
4.1.9
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 17 of 36
Repeat Signals
4.1.9.1 Unless otherwise specified in the job specifications, following philosophy shall be followed
for repeat signals:
a)
Whenever repeat signal/ contact outputs are required as per job specifications
following philosophy shall be followed:
i)
For intrinsically safe input, isolating barrier with dual output shall be utilized.
ii)
For Non-intrinsically safe input, isolator with dual output shall be utilized.
ii) For other contact inputs, repeat contact shall be provided using electromagnetic
relays.
4.1.10
Surge Protection
4.1.10.1 Surge protection devices (SPD's) shall be provided on the system to limit the surge voltages
reaching beyond the safe limits, under normal, abnormal or lightning strike condition.
Unless otherwise specified, SPD's shall be provided at least at the following locations:
a)
All serial signal cables (UTP / STP / coaxial and not fibre optical) going from or to
control system and from one location to another outside the control building at both
control system end.
b)
All power incoming cable (110V AC, 110V DC, 240V AC, etc), UPS or non UPS, at
the power supply distribution cabinet.
4.1.10.2 The selection of type and rating of SPD shall be selected such that the introduction of this
device shall not change the characteristics or reliability of an application, whether it is for
the protection of power system, signal such as analog or communication signal, as
applicable. The SPDs shall comply with the requirements of IEC-61643-21.
4.1.11
The system shall be designed fault tolerant and shall utilize high quality components of
proven quality. Any single system fault shall not degrade the system safety or functionality
or affect operation. The system shall have certified Safety Integrity Level as per IEC-61508
/ 61511 as applicable and specified in job specification. Unless otherwise specified, it shall
meet the availability requirement specified in Clause 4.1.3 of this specification.
4.1.12
Unless otherwise specified in the requisition, the scan time of programmable controller shall
be of the order of 250 milliseconds for SIL certified PLCs. The scan time for standard NonSIL PLCs shall be of the order of 100 milliseconds. Scan time for a PLC shall be as defined
under para 2.16 of this specification. The PLC processor sizing shall be done considering
the PLC scan time for the units as mentioned in the requisition. Other activities like
diagnostics routines, output / dump of data to peripherals, development of sequence blocks
or any other activity which consume processor time shall also be accounted while
computing scan time. For SIL certified PLCs, this shall also be in line with SIL certification.
4.1.13
Operation of the PLC shall be completely unaffected by a momentary power loss of the
order of 20 milliseconds.
4.1.14
The system shall be programmed in principle as per the logic diagrams.. Owner / Consultant
reserve the right to revise or review the logic diagrams even after acceptance of any offer.
The programming language of offered PLC shall be as per IEC 61131.
4.1.15
Whenever the requirement of SIL is specified for the PLC, it shall meet the requirements of
SIL level specified and shall be certified by an independent body (e.g. TUV/EXIDA) for
complying requirements of 1EC-61508 / 61511 as specified. For shutdown application
requiring SIL certification, PLC shall always meet SIL 3 requirements.
Page 984 of 1744
0 el
Elt5taG
g41
Cr eknIsRaA3017.11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
IA GON of India Undenak.9)
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
CONTROLLERS
Page 18 of 36
4.1.16 The system shall have extensive set of self diagnostics hardware and software for easy and
fast maintenance of PLC. Routine checks should run automatically at frequent intervals for
identifying any fault in software or hardware. Diagnostics shall be required at local as well
as console level.
4.1.17 Safety barriers shall be provided by the vendor for intrinsically safe input/output circuits
wherever specified. In such cases, the system shall be designed intrinsically safe based on
entity concept. The barriers shall be certified by a statutory authority like Baseefa, LC1E,
CSA, UL, PTB, CIMFR etc., for the use in the area classification as specified elsewhere in
the job specifications. The proper selection of the safety barriers shall be the vendor's total
responsibility. In case of smart transmitter, the entity parameters of the hand held terminals
shall also be considered while selecting proper barriers.
4.1.18
Unless otherwise specified all intrinsically safe barriers shall be 3 port isolating type only
providing isolation between;
i)
Input and output (non-hazardous to hazardous side of barriers)
ii)
Power supply and input
iii) Power supply and output

The minimum isolation level shall be 250V.
4.1.19
Alarm By-pass Switches
4.1.19.1 Startup by-pass (SBS) switches for alarms

All SBS's shall be configured in the ESD system (i.e. PLC) and shall be operable from
operator console. All such by-pass switches shall be alarmed and shall have audit trail.
4.1.20
All Emergency (ESD) switches shall he hardwired and shall preferably be pull type with red
coloured knob. Control room mounted ESD switches shall be installed on hardwired
console.
4.1.20.1 The ESD switch contact shall be used in ESD system (PLC etc) for logic implementation
and event history.
4.1.20.2 Additionally, wherever specified in the requisition, ESD switches shall also directly trip the
final ESD element without any intermediate device. Where multiplication of ESD switch
contacts is necessary, fail safe relays shall be utilized.
4.2
System Configuration
4.2.1
General
a)
PLC system configuration shall be as specified in the job specification. For

emergency shutdown system application specified with SIL classification, the system
configuration shall be TMR or QUAD or DMR as per the job specification and shall
be certified by independent agency e.g. TUV/ EXIDA.
b)
Regardless of the action feature selected (except for single architecture), the failure of
single component shall not result in a failure of correctly executed safety function.
The degradation mode for the selected configuration e.g. 4-2-0 or 3-2-0 or 3-2-1-0,
etc. shall be documented in SIL certification report.
Page 985 of 1744
*igenkreg
c)
4.2.2
IA Govt of India Unden.k..9)
CONTROLLERS
ENGINEERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 19 of 36
In general, the PLC system shall comprise of various sub-systems as described in the
subsequent clauses of 4.2.
Input/Output subsystem
4.2.2.1 Each I/O module shall have its own processor. I/0 modules configured in redundant
configuration, shall have their processors properly synchronised.
4.2.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, system shall accept analog 4 20mA inputs and contact inputs.
The maximum number of Input/Output per I/O module shall be limited as per the following
table.
Maximum
Si.
Type of Configuration
No. of I/Os
No.
Single I/O system
Dual I/O system
16
Triple Modular Redundant system (TMR)
32
Quadruple Modular redundant System (QUAD)
16
In case of PLC certified for SIL requirements, the maximum number of I/o's shall be
governed by the SIL certification applicable for specified SIL level.
4.2.2.3 Each I/0 shall be galvanically isolated from external control circuit by suitable means. The
minimum isolation level between I/0 and logic circuit shall be 1000 volts AC. External
isolators/ barriers / relays shall be provided for all inputs and outputs of the PLC.
4.2.2.4 Each I/O shall be protected against the reversal of polarity of the power voltage to I/O.
4.2.2.5 Each input shall be provided with filters to filter out any noise in the input line and contact
bouncing noise, as applicable.
4.2.2.6 All the inputs / outputs shall be double ended upto the I/O card i.e. two wires per input /
output and not with common return for all inputs/ outputs.
4.2.2.7 The interrogation voltage to the inputs and power supply for 2-wire instruments shall be
powered from separate redundant power supply / supplies and shall not be a part of PLC,
unless otherwise specified. This power supply shall be supplied at one point and shall be
distributed by the vendor.
4.2.2.8 a)
b)
Each I/O module channel status shall be represented on the operator console.
When specified, input module shall be capable of monitoring the input contacts for
any wire open fault and short circuit.
4.2.2.9 Analog Input Module

a)
Input module shall be able to accept 4-20 mA DC input from smart transmitters (e.g.
4 20mA HART).
b)
The module shall have 16 bit A/D resolution accuracy of 0.25% of full scale over the
entire range, unless otherwise specified.
Page 986 of 1744
ENGINEERS
Ogeff teMeg W INDIA LIMITED
2i2,15reGA.39111,3)
India Undettaking)
(A Govt.
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 20 of 36
4.2.2.10 Output Contact

a) Output contacts from the PLC shall be potential free dry contacts with contact rating as
per para 4.2.2.10 b) of this specification. Vendor must provide arc suppression device
for each output contact.
b) T
Si. No.
APPLICABLE FOR
VOLTAGE
RATING
CURRENT
RATING
1.
All output cards driving solenoid

valve and alarm annunciator system
unless otherwise specified
Category - I
110 V AC/ DC
0.5 A
24 V DC
2A
240 V AC
5.0 A
220 V DC /
110 V DC
0.2 A
'
Category - II
motors/pumps/compressor
All
unless otherwise
cards
output
specified.
Category - I
Category - II
c)
The category of contacts shall be specified in the Requisition. Each output shall be
short circuit proof and protected by fuse. Visual indication of fuse blown must be
provided for each module.
d)
When specified contact output module shall have monitored output features like wire
open and short circuit.
4.2.2.11 Where inputs or outputs have multiple field devices for the same measurement or device,
the corresponding inputs / outputs shall be configured in separate I/O modules.
4.2.2.12 Where single input signal is available for QUAD or TMR configuration, inputs shall be
multiplied to feed inputs to each input modules / channels.
4.2.2.13 PLC shall be provided with Auto I/O testing facility as a standard diagnostics features. PLCs
which do not have auto I/O testing facility, manual testing facility shall be provided to detect
any system fault. For manual testing, manual switches shall be provided to bypass each input
at a time and its effect on the output shall be monitored.
4.2.3
Processor System
4.2.3.1 The processor shall have capability to implement all the control functions required to
implement the logic scheme as logic/ladder diagram.
4.2.3.2 The size of the memory shall be sufficient for storage of the program instructions required
by the logic schemes and other functional requirements. Offer shall indicate the amount of
memory capacity occupied by the actual program and spare capacity available for future
program modifications or additions.
4.2.3.3 Memory shall be non-volatile. However in case volatile memory is provided, battery backup
shall be provided with a minimum of 3 months lifetime to keep the program storage intact.
A battery drain indication shall be provided at least one week before the battery gets drained.
Page 987 of 1744
ENGINEERS
51ge_al EViegw INDIA LIMITED
el
,..,-e,mm.agt.0
(A Govt of Ind( Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 21 of 36
4.2.3.4 Watchdog timer shall be a software device. The healthiness of processors shall be
continuously monitored by watchdog timer. Any hardware or software problem in the
processor system, which shall include, CPU, memory, power supply, communication
interface etc. shall cause the watch dog timer to report processor failure.
4.2.3.5 Wherever dual redundant processor is specified, redundancy shall be provided in such a way
that in case of failure of the main processor, the standby shall take over automatically. The
changeover shall be bumpless. Redundancy shall be provided for complete processor system
including processor, power supply and communication sub system.
4.2.3.6 In case of triple modular redundant system all the three processors shall execute the same
instructions/program and check their results and vote to correct any faulty result. The faulty
processor diagnostic shall be made available.
4.2.3.7 In case of Quad system, individual processor shall execute the same instructions/ programs
and check their results within same CPU module and majority vote to correct any faulty
result. The faulty processor diagnostic shall be made available.
4.2.3.8 Failure of a single processor in dual redundant, triple redundant system and two processors
in QUAD system shall not affect the system. In case of failure of complete processor system
i.e. both processors in case of dual configuration, two or more in case of triple redundant
system and more than two in case of QUAD system, outputs shall take failsafe state
automatically unless otherwise specified in the data sheets.
4.2.3.9 In case multiprocessor configuration is offered, the processors must be able to communicate
with each other over the interconnecting data link. Vendor must ensure that system
performance shall not be degraded by any means when such a system is offered.
4.2.3.10 It shall be possible to generate the first out alarm by the PLC in case where a group of
parameters are likely to trip a system.
4.2.4
PLC Console (Engineering / Programming)
4.2.4.1 The PLC console shall be used for programming, program storing, fault diagnostics and
alarm monitoring. Whenever specified, it shall also be possible to use this console for plant
operation. The functionality to operate as engineering / programming terminal or operator
terminal or both shall be as specified in the job specification.
4.2.4.2 It shall consist of at least one coloured 21" active matrix TFT type LCD display unit with
backlit LED and one programming / operating keyboard, mouse and printer. If laptop is
specified in the job specifications, the same shall be of 15" TFT type LCD display.
4.2.4.3 PLC console when used for plant operation shall also meet the functional requirements as
per clause 4.2.5 of this specification.
4.2.4.4 The keyboard shall be easy to operate with each key clearly identified.
4.2.4.5 All illegal entries shall be rejected by the terminal and shall be identified by warning signal
on VDU.
4.2.4.6 Manual forcing of any input or output contact connected to PLC shall be possible from
keyboard. Forced functions shall have an associated audit trail.
4.2.4.7 It shall be possible to modify, add or delete the application program on line without
affecting the outputs.
Page 988 of 1744
0 el
Ogai fafReg
(
ET, eleave 0,1,39M71)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of lode Uric/Making)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 22 of 36
4.2.4.8 PLC Console shall display logic and/or ladder diagram indicating power flow and shall
show description and status of each contact. It shall also be possible to display process
alarms and diagnostic messages as and when they appear. Further it shall also be able to
display I/O map in a user defined format.
4.2.4.9 It shall be possible to print out the ladder/logic diagram on the dedicated PLC printer. The
printer in addition shall also print out:
a) The diagnostic messages as and when generated and diagnostic reports, when called
for.
b)
Process alarms connected to the programmable logic controller as and when they
appear and alarm report whenever initiated. The choice of printing alarms on this
printer shall be operator selectable from a key lock / password protected switch on
PLC console.
c)
The I/O maps showing status of all inputs and corresponding outputs in a user defined
format.
4.2.4.10 The PLC console shall be provided with self diagnostics feature which shall display error
messages and initiate an audible alarm if the fault is detected. Wherever specified, a
potential free contact for diagnostic group alarm shall be provided which shall be connected
to the hardwired alarm annunciator system.
4.2.4.11 The system shall be able to identify the failure at least up to the module level including I/O
system and redundant processor and report print out.
4.2.5
PLC Console (Operator)
4.2.5.1 Where dedicated PLC operator console is specified, it shall be used for operation of plant,
fault diagnostics, alarm monitoring and report generation.
4.2.5.2 It shall consist of coloured 21" active matrix TFT type LCD display unit with backlit LED,
operator keyboard and printer unless specified otherwise.
4.2.5.3 At least two number cursor control devices shall be provided in addition to keyboard which
may include touch screen, mouse, track ball etc.
4.2.5.4 PLC operator console shall have complete graphic capability and shall be able to display
process dynamic graphics, overview and group view displays. It shall be possible to operate
the plant i.e. start and stop of rotating machinery, opening and closing of valves, PID
function etc. from dynamic graphics and group displays available on PLC operator console.
4.2.5.5 It shall be possible to monitor, historise and print out all process alarms, diagnostic alarms
and alarm reports.
4.2.5.6 The time stamping of all alarms shall be as per PLC processor time stamping or I/O module
stamping.
4.2.5.7 The system shall be able to store and display stored data wherever required. The minimum
storage capacity shall be for 30 days at 1 minute sample rate for all the inputs specified,
diagnostic alarms, process and first out alarms, manipulation data etc.
4.2.5.8 The system shall be able to generate shiftly, hourly, daily, weekly and monthly reports. The
log format shall be furnished during detailed engineering.
Page 989 of 1744
err
RA&
I.nen eleaxemr3rram)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Incite Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 23 of 36
4.2.5.9 The system shall be supplied with first out alarm generation capability. The resolution of
alarm shall be as per processor cycle time, as a minimum.
4.2.6
Communication Subsystem
4.2.6.1 The PLC communication subsystem shall be a digital communication bus that provides a
high speed data transfer rapidly and reliably between the processor, I/O sub-system, PLC
console and other devices connected in the PLC system.
4.2.6.2 Redundancy in PLC communication subsystem shall be provided as follows unless
otherwise specified:
a)
For single architecture, the communication subsystem between PLC processor and I/O
subsystem shall be single unless otherwise specified. This shall include single
communication bus and single interfaces/buffers.
b)
For dual I/O configuration, each I/O sub set shall have separate communication
interface and bus for connecting to PLC processors.
c)
For the triple redundant system, each processor shall have a separate set of PLC
communication subsystem.
d)
For the Quad systems each I/O subset shall have redundant communication interface
and bus for connecting to the redundant CPU modules.
e)
The communication subsystem between processor subsystem and PLC console shall
be dual redundant, consisting of two separate communication interfaces and two
buses, each one configured in redundant mode, unless this is only used as
programming aid.
4.2.6.3 In case of redundant PLC communication sub system, on the failure of the active device, the
redundant device shall take over automatically without interrupting the system operation.
Information about the failed device shall be displayed at local as well as on PLC console. It
shall be possible to manually switch over the communication from main bus / device to
redundant bus / device without interrupting any system function.
4.2.6.4 The mechanism used by the system for error checks and control shall be transparent to the
application information / program. Error checking shall be done on all data transfers by
suitable codes.
4.2.6.5 In general, PLC shall provide data in a well established protocol format preferably
MODBUS protocol.
Wherever remote I/O is specified in the requisition, it shall be redundant and SIL3 certified
(for SIL3 PLCs).Segregation for the remote I/O shall follow the same philosophy of group
wise PLC segregation specified in the requisition. Moreover, separate PLC in remote I/O
location with peer to peer communication with Host PLC through third party (TUV/ EXIDA
etc.) certified SIL3 redundant network is also acceptable for remote I/O requirement.
However, separate PLC shall be considered for each of the Remote I/O subsystem within
each location.
4.2.7
System Power Supplies
4.2.7.1
Unless specified otherwise, the programmable logic controller shall operate on uninterrupted
power supply (UPS). However the system shall be capable of operating satisfactorily at the
following power supply specifications:
Page 990 of 1744
ii
aeu
INTE'Ff tmecnTedg074,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
CONTROLLERS
Voltage
Frequency
Harmonic contents
Power interruption
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 24 of 36
110/ 240 V 10% (as specified in requisition)

50 Hz 3 Hz
Less than 5%
10 millisecond
4.2.7.2 The power supply system shall be supplied with dual PLC feeders each capable of handling
100% of the total power supply load requirements. In case of failure of one feeder,
redundant feeder shall supply the total load.
4.2.7.3 Each I/O rack shall be provided with redundant power supply system. The power supply for
the I/O racks shall be sized to take full load of the I/0 racks.
4.2.7.4 The processor rack shall be provided with separate power supply for each processor or
redundant power supply module for the processor rack such that failure of one power supply
does not affect the system operation.
4.2.8
Self Diagnostics
4.2.8.1 The system shall have an extensive set of self diagnostic routines which shall be able to
identify all permanent and transient system faults / failures at least up to module level
including redundant components and power supplies through detailed VDU displays and
report print out.
4.2.8.2
At the local level, failure of a module in any subsystem shall be identified by an individual
LED.
4.2.8.3 Diagnostic software shall have the capability to provide information about the failed
module/system either in the form of a system configuration display or provide information
in the form of a "statement".
4.2.8.4 Self diagnostic software shall have capability to detect faults which make the system
permanently close/open in the I/0 modules or I/0 signal conditioning modules (in case of
triple redundant system). This shall be achieved by automatically running the self diagnostic
software at cyclic intervals. However, system performance shall not be degraded during the
running of this diagnostic software.
4.2.8.5 System for the following functionalities shall be supplied when specified:
a)
Long storage historisation
b)
Log report generation
c)
First out alarm generation
4.2.8.6 System diagnostics shall be capable of identifying, locating and reporting the following
faults, as a minimum:
a)
Processor fault
b)
Communication fault
c)
I/O module fault
d)
Power supply fault
e)
Over temperature monitoring
Page 991 of 1744
W.
afaeleifr,
( ENGINEERS
INDIA 1JMITED
INDIA
idlileg
01Rn ertUn 4,1.390,71)
(A Gov! Cl India Undenalong)
CONTROLLERS
Permanently close / open (stuck on or off) fault
g)
Memory fault
h)
Signal redundancy fault
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 25 of 36
Any other additional diagnostic alarm if available as a standard shall also be provided by
vendor.
4.2.8.7 Testing software shall be capable of detecting faults in case of normally closed system as
well as in normally open system.
4.2.8.8 Feedback must be provided in case of triple redundant system and QUAD system from the
output voter system to detect any latest faults of the system in addition to other diagnostic
software.
4.2.9
System Software
4.2.9.1 The system software shall include all programs for the PLC and PLC console which are
required to perform all the PLC functions including communication and self-diagnostics.
Whenever PLC is specified for shutdown application with Sit classification, the system
shall be designed and engineered in full compliance with the requirement of IEC-61511.
Whenever different functional logics are combined within a common PLC, the safety related
I/O's of each functionality shall be kept segregated within the system.
4.2.9.2 Logic program shall also be recorded on the external electronic media like DVD which shall
be delivered in duplicate together with the system.
4.2.9.3 The PLC programming language for implementation of logic operations shall be based on
the following representations:
a)
Logic diagrams -
Binary logic symbols such as AND, OR, NOT Gates, Timers

and Flip-Flops.
b)
Ladder diagram -
Series / parallel connection of relay contacts.
c)
Combination of (a) & (b) above.
4.2.9.4 Diagnostic package and its related equipment and software shall be supplied. A list of
additional diagnostic packages available and the packages provided, including the
description and capabilities, shall be provided with separate quote, wherever asked.
4.2.9.5 It shall be possible to print out the ladder/logic diagram on a dedicated printer. The printer
shall also print out all diagnostic reports. The software package shall enable the owner to
modify/add/delete any part of program both on-line as well off-line and for documentation.
4.2.9.6 Software for the generation of various displays including dynamic graphics wherever
specified to be provided as per given below:
4.2.9.6.1 It shall be possible to display dynamic graphic of plant on the operator console VDU
screens. Graphic displays shall be field configurable only through PLC Console
(Programming terminal) with standard / user defined graphic symbols. Dynamic graphic
displays of different sections of the plant shall be displayed on different pages.
4.2.9.6.2 The system shall have graphic symbol library as per ISA-5.1 and 5.3. In addition standard
industrial symbols like distillation columns, heat exchangers, pumps, compressors, tanks etc.
shall also be provided as a standard.
Page 992 of 1744
101 el
5lg-ar flf51--eg
caireR rreant ,751.3.741.1)
fru) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gout of India Undeftakmg)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 26 of 36
4.2.9.6.3 Graphic displays shall be interactive type through which it shall be possible to control the
process. It shall also be possible to send motor start/stop and shutdown valve open/close
commands, as specified in job specifications, from this display
4.2.9.6.4 It shall be possible to view the process variable and alarm points and view and change set
point value, manipulated variable, controller mode etc. from the graphic display. Also
rotating machinery (i.e. compressor / pump) status and valve status shall be displayed on the
graphic display with different colours.
4.2.9.6.5 Various colours used in the generation of graphics like colour of the process lines, utility
lines, Instrument signal lines and event modifier conditions shall be finalised during detailed
engineering. The colours used to identify event modified conditions shall generally be as
follows unless otherwise indicated during detailed engineering.
Red
All points alarm
Blue
Valve open, pump running.
Green
Valve closed, pump stopped.
Flashing green :
Shut down valve transition state.
4.2.9.6.6 It shall be possible to go from any graphic page to related graphic pages or any group view
or alarm summary in single key stroke using soft key function.
4.2.9.7 The software for printing alarms, system as well as process, and events on the PLC printer
must be provided. All alarms must be printed as and when they appear.
4.2.9.8 Software package for displaying I/O map showing status of inputs and corresponding output
providing tag numbers as per logic diagram shall be offered. The I/O map format shall be
user definable.
4.2.10
Power Supply Distribution
4.2.10.1 All type of power supplies shall be made available at one point. Further distribution of
power supply shall be in vendor's scope.
4.2.10.2 In general, all output contacts and solenoids shall be powered with 110V10% DC/
24V10% DC power supply. However, the actual interrogation voltages shall be as per job
specifications and logic diagrams.
4.2.10.3 The distribution network for interrogation voltage shall be designed such that a single fault
in any branch shall not cause trip of the logic other than where the fault has occurred.
4.2.10.4 Sequential starting of various load centres shall be provided whenever specified.
4.2.10.5 Power distribution network must use bus bars of adequate capacity with DPDT (Double
Pole Double Throw) switches and HRC (High Rupture Capacity) fuses in each branch
network. Vendor may select circuit breaker if short circuit characteristics do not match the
HRC fuse.
4.2.10.6 All cubicles lighting shall be on 240 V, 50 Hz AC normal power supply.
4.2.11
PLC System Cabinets
4.2.11.1 All PLC system cabinets shall be completely wired with all modules in place. Inside cabinet
wiring shall preferably be done using ribbon type pre-fabricated cables.
Page 993 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
OfiljeG
Wren rwore =damp)
IA Govt of India Undertaking(
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 27 of 36
4.2.11.2 All the cabinets shall be free standing, enclosed type and shall be designed for bottom entry
of cables. Cabinet structure shall be sound and rigid. Cabinet shall be provided with remova
IS/IEC ble lifting lugs to permit lifting of the cabinets.
4.2.11.3 Cabinets shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet of minimum 1.5 mm thickness for
sides and rear and 2 mm thickness for doors and suitably reinforced to prevent warping and
buckling. The rack/ rail mounting plates inside the cabinets shall be of 3 mm thickness.
Cabinets shall be thoroughly deburred and all sharp edges shall be grounded smooth after
fabrication. Cabinet frame shall be of 9 fold profiled CRCA or of Angle iron frame using
minimum section of 50 x 50 x 4 mm angle.
4.2.11.4 Cabinet painting procedure shall include blast cleaning, grinding, chemical cleaning, surface
finishing by suitable filler and two coats of high grade lacquer with wet blasting wherever
required. Two coats of paint in the panel colour shall be provided for non-glossy high satin
finish. Final coat shall be given after assembly at site. Colour of the panels shall be as per
Requisition.
4.2.11.5 Each cabinet shall be maximum 2100 mm high (excluding 100 mm channel base), 800 mm
wide and 800 mm deep, in general. Construction shall be modular preferably to
accommodate 19" standard racks. All cabinets shall be of same height.
4.2.11.6 Cabinets shall be equipped with front and rear access doors. Doors shall be equipped with
lockable handles and concealed hinges with pull pins for easy door removal.
4.2.11.7 In order to effectively remove dissipated heat from the cabinets, ventilation fans along with
vent louvers backed by wire fly screen shall be provided as required. Ventilation fans shall
be provided in all cabinets where the temperature rise with all doors closed and all internal
and external loads energised shall exceed 10 C above the ambient temperature. A
temperature element (resistance temperature detector or semiconductor type sensor) shall be
provided in each System cabinets and temperature switch as a minimum in each
marshalling/ PDB cabinet for temperature measurement. Ventilation fans shall be provided
in dual configuration, as a minimum.
Each fan shall have a separate dedicated assembly and shall be replaceable on-line without
shutting down any equipment/ cabinet/ console in part or in complete.
Ventilation fan assembly shall operate at 240V AC power supply. Each fan shall have its
own dedicated circuit breaker.
Each ventilation fan shall be fitted with a protection type finger guard. Whenever, the
numbers of cabinets are compacted (supplied in mechanical joined conditions), each cabinet
shall be provided with separate ventilation fan assembly.
The maximum noise level with all fans operating and cubicle doors open shall not exceed
85dBA.
Following signals and alarms shall be provided separately as follows:
i)
Fan failure alarm for each system cabinet in PLC
ii)
Temperature indication of each system cabinet in PLC.
iii) A common high temperature and fan failure alarm in the PLC for each
marshalling / PDB cabinets for a group of maximum 10 cabinets as per the
requisition.
Page 994 of 1744
ENGINEERS
ED INDIA
LIMITED
Oae.ii faOleg
k-71
(A Govt of In Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 28 of 36
4.2.11.8 Internal illumination shall be provided for cabinets to ensure proper illumination level of 250
lux for performing maintenance activities.
Lamps shall be provided in each cabinet which shall be activated individually by door
operated switches. The lamps shall activate when door is opened and deactivate when the
door is closed. The door lock switches selected shall have undergone life cycle cyclic test of
at least 1000000 operations and test certificate for the same shall be provided from the
manufacturer. A manual over-ride switch shall be provided inside the cabinet which shall
keep the lamp (deactivated even when the door is open. Cabinets housing memories, which
are likely to be affected by fluorescent light, shall have incandescent lamps.
The cabinet lighting shall operate on 240V AC Non-UPS power supply.
4.2.11.9 Equipment within the cabinet shall be laid out in an accessible and logically segregated
manner. Cable glands shall be provided and supplied by vendor for incoming and outgoing
cables to prevent excessive stress on the individual terminals. All metal parts of the cabinet
shall be electrically continuous and shall be provided with a common grounding lug.
4.2.12
Control Panel /Hardwired Console
4.2.12.1 Control panels, if required, shall be non-graphic self supporting, free standing cubicle with
back doors made up of sectional steel panels. Each section shall be maximum 2100 mm
high, 1200 mm wide and 1000 mm deep and shall be mounted on 100 mm high channel
base. Care shall be taken to ensure that the face of the panel is truly flat and smooth.
4.2.12.2 Panels / hardwired console shall be fabricated from 3.0 mm thick cold rolled steel sheet.
Angle iron frame shall use a minimum section of 50x50x4mm angle.
4.2.12.3 Front of panel/console instrument nameplates shall be black laminated plastic with white
core. Nameplate shall be provided on the rear of the panel also for each instrument.
4.2.12.4 Document pocket / wallet shall be provided on the inner side of front and rear doors of each
cabinet and on the inner side of the door of each panel. Similar arrangement shall also be
made on the inner side of doors of console.
4.2.13
Wiring Requirements
4.2.13.1 All wiring shall conform to API RP 552- Transmission Systems. Different signal level
cables shall be routed with separation distances as recommended by this code.
4.2.13.2 All wiring inside racks, cabinets, and back of the panels shall be housed in covered, nonflammable plastic raceways arranged to permit easy assembly to various instruments for
maintenance, adjustments, repair and removal.
4.2.13.3 All wiring in the raceways shall be properly clamped. All incoming cable and outgoing
cables shall be terminated by vendor at marshalling rack. Total wiring cross-sectional area
shall not exceed 50% of the raceway cross sectional area.
4.2.13.4 Separate wiring raceways shall be used for power supply wiring, DC and low level signal
wiring, and intrinsically safe wiring. Parallel runs of AC and DC wiring closer than 300mm
shall be avoided.
4.2.13.5 Vendor can alternately offer prefabricated cables for interconnection between different
cabinets and panels.
Page 995 of 1744
4c
el
Ogar faf51-ag
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
laiRe eRasre enJCmm
Gov. or India Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 29 of 36
4.2.13.6 Wire termination shall be done using self insulating crimping lugs. More than two wires
shall not be terminated on one side of single terminal. The use of shorting links for looping
shall be avoided.
4.2.13.7 Terminal housing shall be strictly sized with considerations for accessibility and
maintenance. Minimum distance required between various components is listed below.
These distances are clear distances and are excluding the width of the raceways or any other
component / item mentioned herein. Following clearances should be considered:
a)
Distance between terminal strip and side of the cabinet parallel to the strip, up to 50
terminals, shall be minimum 50 mm.
b)
Distance between terminal strip and, top and bottom of the cabinet shall be minimum
75 mm.
c)
Distance between two adjacent terminal strips shall be minimum 100 mm.
d)
Additional distance for each additional 25 terminals shall be minimum 25 mm.
e)
Distance between cable gland plate and the bottom of the strip shall be minimum 300
MM.
4.2.13.8 All terminal / terminal blocks shall be DIN Rail mounted type and shall be easily
removable. The size of the terminal blocks / terminals of different types shall be consistent
and identical. All terminal blocks shall be mounted on suitable anodised metallic or plastic
stand-off.
4.2.13.9 No splicing is allowed in between wire/ cable straight run.
4.2.13.10 Terminal strips shall be arranged group-wise for incoming and outgoing cables separately.
Terminal blocks for intrinsically safe wiring shall be separate. 20% spare terminals shall be
provided, as a minimum, preferably in each terminal strip. Terminals shall be suitable for
wires up to 2.5 sq. mm base solid or stranded conductor in general. For power cables,
higher size terminals shall be used.
4.2.13.11 Cabinet and rack layout shall be made considering proper accessibility and maintenance.
4.3
Earthing
4.3.1
All system equipment such as marshalling cabinets, system cabinets and other powered
equipment shall be provided with following type of grounding system:
a)
Protective Earth / Electrical Earth
b)
System earth / signal earth
Both system earth and safety earth shall be totally separate from protective earth.
4.3.2
Protective Earth / Electrical Earth

a)
Earth metallic enclosure / cabinet / console etc. shall be provided with electrical earth
lug, as a minimum.
b)
Unless recommended otherwise by vendor, all earthing lugs of metallic equipment

indicated in Clause 4.3.2(a) above shall be connected individually to electrical
protective earthing system bus-bar / earthing station using a maximum of 10sq mm
solid copper conductor PVC insulated wires.
Page 996 of 1744
Ifgar leffWeg
ofrome Off JOCIf*If
c)
4.3.3
CONTROLLERS
ENGINEERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
G0v1 of Indio Undetalong)
Page 30 of 36
Where multiple cabinets are multiplexed together, earth looping with permanent
shorting link cables shall be acceptable. Earthing connection wires as indicated in
Clause No.4.3.2(b) above shall be used for connecting multiplexed cabinets to
protective earth station / bus-bar.
System Earth
a)
System earth shall be totally noise free dedicated earthing system and shall be fully
isolated from electrical protective earth. This earth must be very high integrity system
and shall be used to ground zero volt references and signal cable grounds.
b)
System earth shall be less than one (1) ohm grounding system or as per vendor's
recommendation with its own dedicated earth pits. The earth pits shall be suitably
located outside the control room and away from any heavy noise plant equipment.
The earth pit design shall be as per IS-3043 code of practice for earthing. A minimum
of two (2) number of earth pits, in redundant configuration, shall be provided in each
Control room / SRR / Remote I0 cabinet location for System earth. In case number of
pits required to meet system earth resistance are more than one (1) number, the
number of system earth pits shall be two times the actual number of pits required to
meet the redundancy requirement specified above. All these system earth pits shall be
securely connected with each other to form a one homogeneous system earth grid.
4.4
c)
Each marshalling / system cabinet etc. shall be provided with system earth bus-bar
which shall be insulated from the metallic body frame. This bus-bar shall be used to
earth also signal zero volt references and signal cable screens. Terminals used for
termination of spare conductor pairs / cores of multi-pair signal / control cables shall
be connected to system earth bus-bar. Shorting links shall be used for spare terminal
looping.
d)
System bus-bars in the multiplexed cabinets can be joined together by permanent

shorting links. System bus-bars of other cabinets can also be connected together
provided they are permanently joined using 35 sq. mm stranded copper conductor
cable.
c)
The redundant System earth pits at each location shall be connected to the Electrical
protective earthing system through suitable surge isolation and protection device for
lightning equipotential bonding. These lightning surge isolation and protection
devices shall comply to the requirements of IEC 62561-3.
Interface with DCS
The PLC shall be required to be interfaced to the Distributed Control System bus whenever
specified. A suitable interface shall be offered in order to achieve the following functions:
a)
Display of all input points under alarm/first out alarm connected to PLC or generated
by PLC, continuous indication for analog signal on the main DCS operator console.
b)
Generate shutdown reports on the logging printer of Distributed Control system.
c)
To receive certain operational commands from the operator console for the operation
of certain output devices connected to PLC
d)
To display diagnostic message of PLC.
In general, PLC shall provide data in a well established MODBUS protocol format.
The interface shall be dual redundant unless otherwise specified.
Page 997 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
015reg
lawn i9CmK 451.370.1)
GUN of India Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 31 of 36
The speed of data transfer shall be such that any change in I/O which is to be updated on the
operator console shall not exceed 3 second from the time event to update on the operator
console screen considering one second standard update rate in DCS operator console.
4.5
Sequence of Event (SOE) Function Requirement

Sequence of Event, whenever specified, for analog and digital inputs shall be generated and
time stamped in PLC. The maximum resolution between two events shall not exceed
specified PLC scan time unless specified otherwise. A separate SOE PC with colour 21"
active matrix TFT type LCD display unit with backlit LED and printer shall be provided for
PLC sub-system unless specified otherwise.
The following signals or changes of state shall also be logged as part of the Sequence of
Event functionality:
For each hard wired analog input:
Shutdown / trip alarm

Input Measurement diagnostic status (e.g. input out of range)
Maintenance override status (wherever provided)
Input force status.
For each hard wired digital input:
Shutdown / trip alarm

Input status (e.g., line breakage)
Maintenance override status (wherever provided)
Input force status.
5.0
TESTING, INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND ACCEPTANCE
5.1
General
5.1.1
This specification defines the basic guidelines to vendor for factory testing and acceptance,
installation, commissioning and field acceptance of the complete PLC system. On the basis
of this specification, vendor shall submit their own detailed testing, installation,
commissioning and acceptance procedure. For hardware, the procedure shall include test
name, purpose of test, test equipment / set up, definition of input, test procedure, results
expected and acceptance criteria. Similarly for software, it shall include test name, details of
the method, list of tests, sequence of execution, results expected and acceptance criteria. For
PLC system with SIL 3 requirement, certificate for hardware & software (Like TUV/
EXIDA) shall be verified.
5.1.2
The testing and acceptance of the system shall be carried out on the approved testing
procedures and criteria based on this specification and vendor's standard testing
requirements and procedures.
5.2
Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)
5.2.1
Vendor shall test and demonstrate the functional integrity of the system hardware and
software. No material or equipment shall be transported until all required tests are
successfully completed and certified "Ready for Shipment" by the owner/consultant.
5.2.2
The purchaser reserves the right to be involved and satisfy himself at each and every stage
of inspection. The purchaser shall be free to request any specific test on any equipment
Page 998 of 1744
fge.fi Elf51-eg
I .1127r eleoAeON3Odsa3)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt of India Undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 32 of 36
considered necessary by him although not listed in this specification, as a part of approval of
factory testing procedure. The cost of performing all tests shall be borne by the vendor.
5.2.3
Vendor to note that acceptance of any equipment or the exemption of inspection or testing
shall in no way absolve the vendor of the responsibility for delivering the equipment
meeting all the requirements specified in Requisition.
5.2.4
It shall be vendor's responsibility to modify and/or replace any hardware and modify the
software if the specified functions are not completely achieved satisfactorily during testing
and factory acceptance.
5.2.5
Schedule of FAT shall be included in the Vendor's proposal.
5.2.6
Vendor shall not replace any system component/module/sub-system unless it is failed. A log
of all failed components/modules in a sub- system shall be maintained which shall give
description of the failed component/module, effect of failure on the sub-system, cause of
failure and number of hours of operation before it failed. If malfunction of a
component/module in a sub-system repeats, the test shall terminate and vendor shall replace
the faulty component/module. Thereafter the test shall commence all over again. If even
after this replacement, the sub-system fails to meet the requirements, vendor shall replace
the full sub-system by the one meeting the requirements and the system shall be tested all
over again. If a sub-system fails during the test, which is not repaired and made operational
within four hours of active repair time after the failure, the test shall be suspended and
restarted all over again only after the vendor has replaced the device in the acceptable
operation.
5.2.7
Testing and FAT shall be carried out in two phases. The minimum requirements for testing
during these two phases shall be as follows:
5.2.7.1
Under the first phase, vendor shall perform tests at his works to ensure that all components
function in accordance with the specification for each type of test. A test report shall be
submitted for purchaser review within one week of completion of this test. Phase II testing
(witness inspection) shall start only after this.
All sub-systems shall undergo a minimum of 30 days (720 hours) burn-in period and this
can include FAT duration. Should there be a failure noted during FAT, this duration shall be
extended. It may include any such time for which the system has been kept powered on even
for system generation and Phase-I testing.
Following tests shall be performed by the vendor and reports shall be forwarded to
purchaser:
a)
Quality control test which shall be carried out to assure quality of all components
and modules in accordance with vendor's quality control and assurance
procedures.
b)
System pre-test which shall be physical check of all modules, racks, cabinets etc.
c)
System power-up test which shall test functionally all hardware and software. This
shall include testing of redundancy, System performance on power supply
variations, application software testing and system diagnostic verification.
5.2.7.2 The second phase of testing shall systematically, fully and functionally test all hardware and
software in the presence of purchaser representatives. All subsystems shall be
interconnected to simulate, as close as possible, the total integrated system. Following
minimum tests shall be carried out:-
Page 999 of 1744
ENGINEERS
ligar fat5eg INDIA LIMITED
1.1127i vwcnreoodOdvA)
Govt of Inda UndOttafongl
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 33 of 36
a)
Visual and mechanical testing, which shall be carried out in principle to assure
correct, proper, good and neat workmanship by the vendor This testing shall include
dimensional verification, Layout verification as per approved GA drawings,
Verification of Sheet thickness / Quality of painting (outer and inner) / Nameplates,
identifiers and tag plates / Adherence to ferruling philosophy / Dressing of wires /
prefabricated cables and clearances / Locks and handles as a minimum.
b)
Verification of Bill of Material. The Bill of material verification shall include both
hardware and software.
c)
Functional testing:
This shall include the simulation of each input and output to verify proper system response.
The testing as a minimum shall include:
i)
Complete system configuration loading.
ii)
Demonstration of all PLC system builder functions including addition/deletion of an

input/output, addition/ deletion of a rung or an element in a rung, generation of
dynamic graphics and other views, report generation etc.
iii)
100% checking of logics configured in the PLC by connecting switch/lamp at

input/output, by simulating inputs and verifying outputs preferably using simulator,
other related functions like forcing, first out shall also be verified.
iv)
Checking of scan time. Scan time verification shall be carried out during Factory
Acceptance Test based on the specified requirements considering discrete input by
given step change and Step input or slow ramp input (typical frequency of 4 cycles /
second) with amplitude corresponding to 16mA (4mA to 20mA or vice versa) for all
conventional analog and smart (HART) inputs from a signal generator. The scan time
values so observed shall be within 90% confidence level.
The inputs to the system shall be:
Step input i.e. 0 or 1 for all contact inputs. Step input can be generated by
wiring back a digital output configured for the purpose.
Step input or ramp input for all analog inputs. However, for PLC, the scan time
check with analog inputs shall only be for record purposes.
v)
Checking of all PLC console displays, keyboard and touch-screen operation

(wherever specified), printer/hard copier functions etc.
vi)
System redundancy checks including correct changeover of the back-up unit in case
of failure of main unit.
vii)
System diagnostic checking for all subsystems on local level as well as on console,
including checking of the testing software for I/O modules/signal conditioning
modules, when specified.
viii) Checking of output status on processor failure.
5.2.8
ix)
Checking of first-out alarm generation.
x)
Simulation of power failure and system restart auto boot-up of system configuration
and program after power restoration.
Vendor shall notify the purchaser at least three (3) weeks prior to factory acceptance test. In
the event that representative arrives and the system is not ready for testing, vendor shall be
liable for back charges for any extra time and expenses incurred.
^ ENGINEERS
k.11
Ogem EtWeggl'
11, INDIA LIMITED
Page 1000 of 1744
(A
?4,,ff
Govt
me undertaking)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 34 of 36
5.3
Installation, Testing and Commissioning
5.3.1
Vendor shall offer the services of an installation team which would install the equipment in
the control room, lay the interconnecting cables inside control room, check-out, test and
commission the system.
All technical personnel assigned to the site by the vendor shall be fully conversant with the
supplied system and software package, and shall have both hardware and software capability
to bring the system on line quickly and efficiently with a minimum of interference with
other concurrent construction and commissioning activities.
5.3.2
Vendor's responsibility at site shall include all activities necessary to be performed to

complete the job as per Requisition including:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
5.3.3
Receipt of hardware/software and checking for completeness of supplies.

Installation of the system including for free supply equipment, if any.
Field cable termination and inter-cabinet cabling and termination.
Check out equipment installation.
Checking of interconnections, hardware and software configuration, overall system
functioning etc.
Loop checking.
Field tests.
Commissioning and on-line debugging of the system.
Involvement during plant commissioning and performance of final acceptance test.
Co ordination for integration with DCS / other third party system.
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Field Inspection
5.3.3.1 All equipments shall be inspected thoroughly by vendor after its receipt at site for
completeness and proper functioning. Vendor must initiate the remedial action, in case
unsatisfactory operation of any item is observed, with intimation to Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.3.2 Vendor must document all observations including details of any malfunction observed.
Items/ equipments requiring total replacement must document the reasons for the same.
5.3.4
Loop Checking
5.3.4.1 Loop checking shall be carried out by vendor including checking the interconnections,
configuration and overall system functioning.
5.3.4.2 Vendor's scope of work as a part of system installation and loop checking shall include
termination of field cables in the control room, checking of interconnection between
instrument/equipment, glanding, ferruling/tagging of interconnecting cables in control room,
ferruling of field cables in control room and performing overall loop performance check.
5.3.4.3 Vendor shall coordinate with the field contractor for smooth and proper loop checking. Any
discrepancy found during checking shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Complete loop checking shall be performed in his/her or his/her authorised representative's
presence.
5.3.4.4 The input signals shall be simulated by disconnecting/connecting the field wires for all field
switches connected to PLC. All field transmitters connected to control room shall be loop
checked at 0%, 50% & 100% of full scale (for both increasing and decreasing signals).
Wherever receiver cards are used, the set point shall be generated by giving the input signal
to receiver card. All outputs shall be checked in field, either for actual operation of solenoid
valve or actual pick-up of electrical contactor for rotary equipments. Shutdown schemes
shall be checked for proper functioning, configuration and actuation.
511 Wei&
ENGINEERS
sigif fageg WV INDIA LIMITED
LIRA 292aAi as IrtClAI
(A Govt of India Olden Moog)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 35 of 36
5.3.4.5 After loop checking is completed, vendor shall connect back any terminals and connections
removed for loop checking.
5.4
System Acceptance
5.4.1
The owner shall provisionally takeover the system from vendor after System acceptance
test. System acceptance test shall be started only after the satisfactory performance of loop
checking and verification of all loop checking records by Engineer-in-charge.
5.4.2
The system acceptance test shall be carried out in the presence of owner's representative and
Engineer-in-charge or his authorised representative. The tests carried out in System
acceptance test shall be fully recorded and duly signed by all representatives participating in
the System Acceptance Testing.
5.4.3
Vendor shall carry out the following functional tests, as a part of system acceptance test, as a
minimum:-
Page 1001 of 1744
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
5.5
Hardware verification as per final Bill of Material.

Visual and mechanical check-up for proper workmanship, identification,
ferruling, nameplates etc.
System configuration as per approved configuration diagram.
Demonstration of all system function, display and diagnostics.
Checking of correct change-over of redundant devices.
Checking of various peripheral devices like printers and printing of all reports.
Complete checking of logic system, loading of user's program and checkout of
results.
Checking of proper functioning of all disc drives, alarm summary, alarm history
etc.
Proper information transfer on the information network by verifying system
displays and printout.
Final Acceptance Test

The owner will take over the system from the vendor after the final acceptance test, which is
defined as successful uninterrupted operation of the integrated system for three weeks.
Vendor's personnel shall be present during the test. Any malfunctioning of the system
components shall be replaced / repaired as required. Once the system failure is detected, the
acceptance test shall start all over again from the beginning. The warranty period
commences from the day owner takes over the system.
6.0
6.1
Vendor shall comply fully with the general requirements of PLC system including logistic
support services, documentation, warranty, maintenance contract and shipping instructions.
Post Warranty Maintenance Contract
Vendor shall quote separately for post warranty maintenance contract after warranty period
for five years for the complete system as per commercial terms and condition of the
requisition and the type (i.e. comprehensive or non-comprehensive) of post warranty
maintenance shall be as specified in job specification. The personnel deployed during postwarranty maintenance shall have thorough knowledge of the system and at least two years
of experience on the maintenance of similar system. Any other conditions of contract
required by vendor shall be explained in the offer.
16iaziEqA6 ENGINEERS
tifift mwr INDIA LIMITED
laiR77 2.12000 0,10,11.1)
CONTROLLERS
6-52-0040 Rev. 2
Page 36 of 36
7.0
SHIPPING
7.1
All the materials used for packing, wrapping, sealers, moisture resistant barriers and
corrosion preventers shall be of recognised brands and shall conform to the best standards in
the areas for the articles which are packed.
7.2
Workmanship shall be in accordance with best commercial practices and requirements of

applicable specification. There shall be no defects, imperfections or omissions which would
tend to impair the protection offered by the package as a whole.
7.3
The packing shall be suitable for storing in tropicalised climate, the ambient conditions,
being specified in job specifications.
7.4
Shipment shall be thoroughly checked for completeness before final packing and shipment.
Vendor shall be responsible for any delay in installation or commissioning schedule because
of incomplete supply of equipments.
8.0
REJECTION
8.1
Vendor shall make his offer in detail with respect to every item of the purchaser's
specifications. Any offer not conforming to this shall be summarily rejected.
Page 1002 of 1744
Page 1003 of 1744
paruesei s14 6!.1 IIV113414 6p Ado0
0'Ae?:1 Ld- 1000-00-8ON w 11/10d
panoiddy
("
al
c
7' 03
0 o.
lD
O3
3
7 u)
CD
0
o a.
o.
0 co
CD
fD
C-
C)
io
co
C131199131:I aNY C13S1A321
01
0
co
C1311SSI32i ONV 03S1A31:1
031198132iaNVC13S1A321
cn
cn
-o
cn
cn
cn
m
0
z
0
zz
m
0
z
C
0
m
0
z
z
Cl)
ti'net' 6000-ZS-L
S)INVI aNv S3dIdaNVIS"I3SS3A NO NO1103NNO0 INMAIMILSNI
.oN altIVCINVIS
2"
3"
4"
2"
.oN aavaNvis
3"
3"
CLADDED EQUIPMENTS
FIRST BLOCK
VALVE
EQUIPMENT/STANDPI
PE CONNECTION
INSTRUMENT
CONNECTION
FIRST BLOCK VALVE
EXTERNAL DISPLACER LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
EXTERNAL DISPLACER LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON STANDPIPE
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
EXTERNAL GUIDED WAVE LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
3" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
EXTERNAL GUIDED WAVE LEVEL INSTRUMENT ONSTANDPIPE
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
EXTERNAL MAGNETIC LEVEL INSTRUMENT/ GAUGEON

EQUIPMENT
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
3" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
EXTERNAL MAGNETICLEVEL INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON

STANDPIPE
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
FLGD.
2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
1 2" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
CA
C4
4t
4t
V1
CA
n
xJ
C4
4k
C/1
2 " FLGD.
3/4" SCRD.
3" FLGD.
qt
D.P. INSTRUMENT/ GAUGES ON VESSEL
'.
.:
2" FLGD.
'
SPECIAL LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT (CAPACITANCE

PROBE/ULTRASONIC PROBE/R.F.PROBE)
cA
LEVEL GAUGE ON STANDPIPE
'
FLGD.
LEVEL GAUGE ON VESSEL
"
2" FLGD.
.-)
4" FLGD.
FLGD.
1:.
4" FLGD.
to
2" FLGD.
4" FLGD.
VI
FLGD.
4" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
4 t
4" FLGD.
4" FLGD
C7
INTERNAL GUIDED WAVE LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON EQUIPMENT

MAGNETIC LEVEL INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE(INTERNAL -TOP
MOUNTED)
* 1
o.r
4" FLGD
INTERNAL DISPLACER / FLOAT LEVELINSTRUMENTS
EXTERNAL BALL FLOAT LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON STANDPIPE
3"
4"
-.4
EXTERNAL BALL FLOAT LEVEL INSTRUMENT ON VESSEL
0.
,4
EQUIPMENT/STANDPIPE
CONNECTION
F'
UNCLADDED EQUIPMENTS
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
O
O
INSTRUMENTCONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS
1/4 " SCRD.
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
1 4" FLGD.(NOTE-1)
3" FLGD.
(NOTE-1)
4" FLGD.
1 3" FLGD.
r)
xJ
e.
CA
4t
01
CA
4k
CA
',
:
>::'
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
FLGD.
Page 1004 of 1744
--4
EXTENDED DIAPHRAGM SEAL D.P. INSTR/ GAUGE ON VESSEL
FLGD.
D.
pemasei sp4 61.1 11V113146p4d00
INSTRUMENT/ GAUGES ON VESSEL

DIAPHRAGM SEAL D.P.
cA
D.P. INSTRUMENT/ GAUGES ON STANDPIPE
0AaH L3 1000 008coN lewio
r)
3" FLGD
4:
2 " FLGD/ 3"

FLGD
Page 1005 of 1744
--11
CJ
7t
FLGD.
1
o
t
4t
c.,
4t
t
I
o
3" FLGD.
3"FLGD.
%" SCRD
C)
STANDPIPE (RATING > 600#)
3" FLGD.
" SCRD
ZF:
...
C/1
2"FLGD.
3" FLGD.
lt
LA.>
..4..
STANDPIPE(RATING UP TO 600#)
3" FLGD.
c,
3"FLGD.
..e
t:C
MULTI-POINT TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS FOR TANKS
''''
2 " FLGD
C4
tr.,
!"J
THERMOWELL ON EQUIPMENT
..I'C'
3" FLGD.
4,L
3" FLGD.
i-i
2 " FLGD
2 " FLGD
l'j
l...7
:-"
DIAPHRAGM SEAL PRESSURE INSTRUMENT /GAUGE ON VESSEL
1:0
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
CA
C)
2 " FLGD
t,
>:....
2 " FLGD
....,
<
N.)
9
I.)
,...)
!'''
CHEMICAL SEAL PRESSURE INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON VESSEL
l....,
FLGD.
PRESSURE INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON STANDPIPE
3" FLGD.
()
z
2" FLGD.
PRESSURE INSTRUMENT/ GAUGE ON VESSEL
.L.,
CD
SF.
.:
C.4
8" FLGD.
',1
i..,7`
.1
Ch
24" FLGD.
l...J
.tit
0
CI
._,
;:s.,,-
3" FLGD.
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT - TUNING FORK
3" FLGD.
8" FLGD.
2" FLGD.
8" FLGD.
6" FLGD
1,-)
9,
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT- CAPACITANCE / ULTRASONIC/ RF

TYPE ON ATMOSPHERIC TANKS/PRESSURISED EQUIPMENTS
6" FLGD.
(BY INST)
8" FLGD.
6" FLGD.
6" FLGD
t,..)
J
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (RADAR) FOR PRESSURISED

EQUIPMENTS
24" FLGD.
Z
-<
t-.)
:I"
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (RADAR) ON ATMOSPHERIC TANK

(VISCOUS SERVICE)
CI)
8" FLGD.
;:.:`,
7
l,..)
w
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT(RADAR)ON ATMOSPHERIC TANK

(CLEAN SERVICE)
(BY INST)
6" FLGD.
6" FLGD.
N.)
r..)
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT(SERVO) FOR PRESSURISED

EQUIPMENT
11/2" FLGD (BY

INST)
INSTRUMENT
CONNECTION
FIRST BLOCK VALVE

%" SW (BY INST)
6" FLGD.
6" FLGD.
EQUIPMENT/STANDPI
PE CONNECTION
t,..)
,.
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (SERVO) ON ATMOSPHERIC TANKS
6 " FLGD.
FIRST BLOCK
VALVE
2 ci)
oP
:4:,
t,)
P
TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENT (MECHANICAL)
7-4
DIP TUBE LEVEL INSTRUMENT
t-1,
EQUIPMENT/STANDPIPE
CONNECTION
IIV-113ly 6pAdo0
TYPE OF INSTRUMENTS
CLADDED EQUIPMENTS
patuasai
UNCLADDED EQUIPMENTS
O
O
"oN C1211/CINV1S
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES AND TANKS
0'told
, L3- L000-00-8 'ON ;e mod
.oN 021VONVIS
R')
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON VESSEL, STANDPIPES ANDTANKS
4,(.44 t-)
ALL FLANGES/SW RATING SHALL BE AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION UNLESS PROJECT SPECIFICATION REQUIRES MIN . 300#.
cm
FOR ANY OTHER INSTRUMENTS NOT REFERED ABOVE THE CO
It
0.D OF EXTENDED DIAPHRAGM OF INSTRUMENT SHALL BESELECTED TO SUIT NOZZLE I .D OF EQUIPMENT.
AS PER PIPING SPECIFICATION/PROJECT PHILOSOPHY
IN CASE OF DIRECT MOUNTED FLANGED INSTRUMENTS AND WHERE FLANGEDTYPE FIRST ISOLATION VALVE ARE PROVIDED, BOLTING AND GASKETSSHALL BE IN PIPINGSCOPE.
INSTALLATION OFSTLL WELL OF TANK LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (SERVO, MECHANICALAND MULTIPOINT TEMPERATURE ELEMENT) ON TANKS ARE IN TANK VENDOR SCOPE.
Page 1006 of 1744
ECTION DETAILS SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT REQUIREMENT.
patuesai slq 6P IIV 1134116pAc100
07%a21Ld- 1000-00-8 ON lemod
Page 1007 of 1744
patuasai sp.i6p
ii3 1q6uAdoo
0*A821Ld- 1.000-00-9ON wwioj
Aq penoiddv
c
a SD gu
C a
7 0
0 w
= coa
CD
0.
cr m
m
CD
7:1
7
2
O
C)
zz
45.
0311SSI32i aNy CI3SIA321
0311SSI32i aNYCI3SIA3e1
NJ
z z
CO
0
O
C1311SSI3NCINVCI3SIA31:1
P `)
agnssial ONVCl3SIA321
0
z
-o
-a
cn
C)
z
C
C)
m
0
z
z
Cl)
ti"AON Z000-ZS-L
'oN
S3cIld NONOIIO3NNOO
ativaNVIS
2" FLGD
2" FLGD.
-t137,
n1
c
P
..:;"
-n
c)
P
2" FLGD
2" FLGD.
r
c-)
0
n1
h,
-;.',.7.
`11
C7
'(e'2)
;.,u.
c)
c
;.;,-,
L'..!
nn
,-, r
c)
p C7
1-;
.71
r-
w
-n
rC)
:7
r)
t-
...!
3
Is:
1
nn
rC)
0
w
.-1
nn
;:37
w
.:1
rC)
C7
P.
C
c
:37
3
E
a
'f=";
;:',,.'
3
C)
r
C)
ua
cc
l''
3 1
l'`.
'
.
;73',
:
;')..7.
ce,
a
C
El
u
-1
a ()
C) 20
V Z7
La
.11
on
,;,Z
P:,
P
(-,
C7
C)
r r r r =" c4
c c o
c)
i,-i x c)
Puuoc) *uu
r0
t!
E
u
-,1
C7
C)
w
1
nn
7.7
;..:'
;;;.7
.
3
.3
"
Ln
,1
2 P P.
cn C 0
-3 0 CI
... .
p
c
0
Qa
w
'
33!
..,
xi
C7
,,;.r
un
()
tr-
vu
r-
4
C
T
w
nn
n
70
C)
7
3
GO
C
(-.)
t'f<
r'
C)
?
.1
'"i.
n1
C7
rc
w
ni=1
Z7
C7
rC)
h6
r-c
3.,..t
L.,
-.6
rC)
C7
-.6
L..)
,
x
,,
::;.7
.
,..-, .,.'3 "Ea

,,.-: ';'....t...3 ..373 1".. 3 ::,3:
;1"!
,..< .
3
nn nn
'T1
nn
a a
r r" nn
r 2r' r r a
r r rc),c2,C)cncc)c)c)c)c)
c :.--, C7 .-.- C7 C7 0 0 C) C7
r
c
C)
C7
r-
W
.
-n
P2
P,
4, .":,:f.3
' on
.
"3:,
'
.
(J'i
,,
;;;Z,
cn
(..)
pD3
C7
;-...,:
r
c)
0
1",
!
nn
C7
7s
^':
cn
n
1`
65
r)
u'.3
hl
70
C7
*
.,'
LO
V
CA
c
,
c>
4t
/A
0,
c,
CD
4t
V
ci,
o
CD
4t
0,
c
,
CD
4L
PROCESS
CONNECTION
,.;
.11
tc.)
p
r"
C)
C7
r0
...
..;
...
;.. .c
aa
l'
-'i
C4
(::J
,-.
,
0 x
:.P
LO
,":3:
rC)
0
';',7
,
3
nn
c,
o
4t
11
/A
0,
'A" SCRD
!..,',.
LO
1..-
il
3
Go
70
P
w
.3:
n1
r-
CD
0
:37:
"Irl
V
cl,
o
'A" SCRD
rC)
P
__
c
P
r-
r-
Go
r)
Ln
LO
;;F:
;:r.
c,
o
4k
/A
0,
31770N/121111N3A
c)
P
-.
::...7
I.
-;:',7
r"
C
P
rc)
C)
Z.7
..
"T1
nn
.-
0
*
CD
u
r-
1
''.
W
n1
cn "< -in.
r- n 2 r- .
C) 7o ,,,
CJ 0
--3
* ...-,
''-!
.
n
70
C7
*
2
,,'
.
uo
.11
CA
.1
v
CA
o
c
,
4t
'A" FLGD
,',7,
Pc
C7
*
1:".C4
(-)
on
n
p0
C7
*
,; c: 65
PO tTi
rr
'A" SCRD*
FIRST BLOCK INSTRUMENTS

VALVE
CONNECTION
Y2" SW
'A" SCRD
'" SCRD*
'A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
%" BW
'A" SCRD
'A" SCRD**
'
A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
'A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
'A" FLGD
'A" FLGD
'A" SCRD
Copyright EIL All rightsreserved
0.A91:I L3- L.000-00-9*clisl)et.uioj
Page 1008 of 1744
CD
on
r)
." ,'0
w
-1
rCD
C7
:',,.:
cc
.-4
Cb
t21
FIRST BLOCKINSTRUMENTS
VALVE
CONNECTION
."
2" FLGD.
r-
1":!
on
r)
X
C7
rn
>
a
1,1
'A" FLGD
E3
'-'
J.
113131AI MOTH
A" SCRD*
::37
,
...
.;.1'7
.
-ri
rCD
Z
-q
on
rn
PROCESS
CONNECTION
.-
CD
.....
;7;7
4k
V /A
CA 0,
CD c
CD
o
4t ,
00
WHERE PIPINGCLASS RECOMMENDS

SCRDCONNECTION
..
CD
NJ
0
CD
.noN Z000-Z9-L
INSTRUMENT CONNECTION ON PIPES
'ING CLASS RECOMMENDS

WHERE PIPINGCLASS RECOMME NDS
BW # CONNECTION
FLGDCONNECTION
FIRST
INSTRUMENTS
BLOCK
CONNECTI
ON
VALVE
2" FLGD
.oN a avaNvis
lewiod
0'AO/AL3-1000-00-8
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
3" FLGD.
1" FLGD
1" FLGD
..;Z
1" FLGD
'A" SCRD
1A
' " FLGD
-,1
rC)
C
C
0
C
C)
x
C
'"SCRD
'A" SCRD
'
1 'A" FLGD
.11
'
,
1
VALVE
0
-c,
3" FLGD+
I" FLGD
3" FLGD
"r1
t-'
FIRST BLOCK
za
2
C)
>
rrcc
m
2
-0
3" FLGD
?c1
--.
1" FLGD
u,
PROCESS
H
O
'A" SCRD
r
c)
0
3" FLGD
(BY INST)
-1
r,
c)
0
CONNECTION CONNECTION
3" FLGD
3" FLGD
0
0
3" FLGD
z
0
C)
>
c.)
t-1-1
H
ul
3" FLGD+
F--)'
>
rn
o
z
X
3" FLGD
cn
n
zi
'A" SW/BW
-.1:
.,7
'A" SCRD*
m
z
0 !
-3
(-)
zJ
CA
.
's7.
.1
INSTRUMENTS
.'-'
n1
K
c
c
P
c
Cl)
,.."7
:.
3" FLGD
e
ti,
p
0,
CO
.<
0
K
m-i
r)
2
r-
....
..,z
(BY INST)
C)
<n
=
,...,
C:
>
'A" SW/BW
H
5
w0
PO
1 1/4"FLGD
VALVE
CI
r
<
rn
3" FLGD
oa
a
FIRST BLOCK
r r1
X
rrl
(n
CD
rrl
<
rn
v)
`-0
m
7y
3" FLGD
<
C/)
CONNECTION
3 " FLGD
0
P:J
o
...
,.-
PROCESS
:',..'
vi
3" FLGD
'
3/4" SCRD*
I
CONNECTION
:
r
.
1A
' " SW/BW
,-ri
r0
P
3" FLGD
>
.-3
5'
z
3" FLGD
INSTRUMENTS
VALVE
o
O
?:'
3/4"SW/BW#
,;;Z:
6a
,;z
,;z
,'
(-)
x)
0
*
,
,7,.
O,
CD
C,
4
k
'A" SCRD
r)
l'iZ.!
C,
xt
/A
cs
C,
--
FIRST BLOCK
cr
H
Xi
C
K
tri
Z
H
3" FLGD
t,
..)
V2" SCRD
F
U
-to
3" FLGD.
>2=-7
z
o m2
0, cA rn
poz,
i
- r)
700H H
,r
c4
> g
c,, m z
a
c
X 0
t-r1
rri til0H
0 ..n >
> .:J'
C
c., ct'
h
0
:c
(4
rri H
-cn cn >
0 tr r-
'A" SCRD.
3" FLGD.
3 C.)
3"FLGD
r0
3" FLGD
t...,.
3" FLGD
7.
3" FLGD
Ca
3/4" FLGD
aa
3" FLGD
_
..:
(BY INST)
.......,
(4.
INSTRUMENTS (SCRD.) <5>
^ri
r
0
5?
3" FLGD.
SCRD.
cn
r)
XI
P
%"SW/BW#
1-,:z.!
cA
3" FLGD
:.',
INSTRUMENTS <5>
DIAPHGRAM SEAL D.P.
c)
Lo
3" FLGD
q m >n -3
M2Z"-j=
xJ -000 m
n
THERMOWELL
1):',.!
41.
AVERAGINGPITOT TUBE
r
m
cn
c
,-,
-t,
r
DIAPHGRAM SEAL
PRESSUREINSTRUMENTS
.e
.
to
FLOWMETER ++
P.
c)
0
ON
_PRESSUREINSTRUMENTS
<5>
DIAPHGRAM(CHEMICAL)
SEAL PRESSURE
..-
-4
3/4" SCRD**
z r-n1 0
(n r- Z (4
4c4Mm
Oa
'A" SCRD*
(4,
Y>rcxr)
'0
[DP INSTRUMENTS <5>

PROCESS
Page 1009 of 1744
(.01 4:a. L.)
"Iv . .; > "11

* X'-'-rO
CM'X
rrI '-3
c4 .,
cn > E.-;) "il >
c:r"rn ; Z
.-<
XJ
, _ r, r,
(-) (./) > V) H>OZ
7r ii 0 --] CA m = -1 ' -7.,. 12 -4
rZ,..,-1:1 cliF5S2c4=
r; Z ni r0
c
Po C) rrl .5
r- rl
r)._,7JmCHn
---mH
-, -r.,
:C
'0
>H z
H3,2r1-Jmr44
r, 2 z r- c) ..4 po
m cnm - e-,HHrZC
> ,1 r- cn
- cn z cD
z c) 'z' 'd
m,2rHu,r,-,
PC
c) ,_ n(-) 24=z
-1 >
H
.n C: r- m ,
IT' ,....,
r- crl
;:rz
CY. '-2- P,.-lS 2,
H2 , u mcz3,mc
HcA ...-t.,4..m .-3
OH u 7:,==1'4>pc
4po z rri - - En rri,
H
(4 0 -cl
cn
m= m m
c zz,
-orri
HcA P''
-tlz
OH
+
+ + * 4t *
CONNECTION
WHERE PIPING CLASSSPECIFIES

CEMENT LINED PIPES
pamasai spAi IIV113114 6pAdo0
#009
FLOW METER
ORIFICE (DIAPHGRAMSEAL)
# 009 <
FLOW METER
ORIFICE
WHERE PIPING CLASS SPECIFIES

CLADDED PIPES
rn
Ca
0
Ca
up
S3dId NO NO1133NNO3IN3IN I11:11SNI

-nau Z000-Z9-L
TYPEOF
INSTRUMENTS
WHERE PIPINGCLASS SPECIFIES
RUBBER/TEFLON LINED PIPES
INSTRUMENTS
CONNECTION
(FLGD ) <5>
3" FLGD
.oN auvaNvis
Page 1010 of 1744
Oln-a-eifith ENGINEERS
azit 'Meg Ter INDIA LIMITED
1.11271MORMMORI)
STANDARD No.
THERMOWELL
IA Gm of India Underwonw
7-52-0035 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 3
cZ 34 mm
ct 1/2"NPT
r_
FOR CHAIN TERMINATION

(ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELL)
CHAIN
45 mm
FULL PENETRATION WELD
PLUG WITH CHAIN
I VT FLANGE

NO WELD MATERIAL
PROJECTION BEYOND RF
ID 11 mm
BORE TO BE CONCENTRIC
WITH 0.D. WITHIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
18 mm
(1)
NOTES - 1. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR ;

TEMPERATURE GAUGES, BEADED TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS AND DUPLEX TEMPERATURE ELEMENTS.
THERMOWELL UPTO 1500 CLASS AS PER ASME OR EQUIVALENT.
TYPE OF FLANGE SHALL BE RTJ FOR RATING (AS PER ASME CLASS) > 600.
DP TEST SHALL BE CARRIED OUT FOR ALL WELD JOINTS.
4. CHAIN AND PLUG SHALL BE APPLICABLE ONLY FOR TEST THERMOVVELLS.
3
21-03-12
REVISED & REISSUED
21-08-06
REVISED & REISSUED
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
ter
Manoj
MN
TGM
Prepared
by
Checked
by
4--v"
RI5/J
DTh-'
S M)
PM
VJN
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - Al rights reserved
Page 1011 of 1744
STANDARD No.
1511=4-a-eite,
ENGINEERS
DReg ie INDIA LIMITED
MET MaR
a51300,10
THERMOWELL
(A GOvl Of WM Undertgo001
7-52-0035 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 3
34 mm
q 1/2"NPT
CHAIN
r_
00 I's 1.0z"
Min
4!)
N
FOR OW TERMINATION
(ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELL)
PLUG WITH CHAIN
45 mm
1 1/7 FLANGE
ABM
6R

NO WELD MATERIAL
OD 21 mm
ID 7 mm
WRH O.D. WRMIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
JO
NOTES -
1. THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR ;

SINGLE TEMPERATURE ELEMENT.
THERMOWELL UPTO 1500 CLASS AS PER ASME OR EQUIVALENT.
TYPE OF FLANGE SHALL BE RTJ FOR RATING (AS PER ASME CLASS) > 600.
DP TEST SHALL BE CARRIED OUT FOR ALL WELD JOINTS.
4. CHAIN AND PLUG SHALL BE APPLICABLE ONLY FOR TEST THERMOWELLS.
21-03-12
REVISED & REISSUED
21-06-06
REVISED & REISSUED
Rev.
No.
16 mm
Date
Purpose
rtm.
Cit
MN
TOM
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SL MS
2116,-,)
p hi
PM
VJN
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1012 of 1744
safteiela ENGINEERS
au WaveINDIA LIMITED BUILT-UP THERMOWELL
1.4.1
STANDARD No.
7-52-0035 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 3
0 34 mm
45 mm
WELD
2' FLANGE

NO WELD MATERIAL
MACHINE TAPER TO BE CONCENTRIC

1Nt T 11 INSIDE DIAMETER WITHIN 10%
OF WALL THICKNESS
WITH O.D. WITHIN 10% OF
WALL THICKNESS
BAR STOCK
0 18 mm
NOTES:DP TEST SHALL BE CARRIED OUT FOR ALL WELD JOINTS.

TYPE OF FLANGE SHALL BE RTJ FOR RATING (AS PER ASME CLASS) >
3
2
Rev.
No.
21-03-12
21-08-08
Date
REVISED & REISSUED

REVISED & REISSUED
Purpose
eanoj
MN
Prepared
by
TGM
Checked
by
R JMS
PM
VJN
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL AI rights reserved
5
ravage e5 J4o534)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeftakong)
THERMOCOUPLE / RTD
ASSEMBLY
WITH THERMOWELL
STANDARD No.
7-52-0036 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
1/2" NPT
(NOTE-1)
CHAIN
UNION 1/2" NPT
NIPPLE 1/2" NPT
(NOTE-2)
THERMOWELL
NOTE - 1. IN THE CASE OF DUPLEX THERMOCOUPLE/RTD, TWO INDEPENDENT

CABLE ENTRIES SHALL BE PROVIDED.
2. FLANGE TYPE, SIZE AND RATING SHALL BE AS PER DATA SHEET.
3
2
Rev.
No.
19-07-11
22-07-05
Date

Page 1013 of 1744
Revised & Reissued

Reaffirmed and Reissued
Purpose
Manoj
MN
Prepared
by
TAM"
AKG
Checked
by
RP/JS
PM
Stds. Committee
Convenor
DM
VJN
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-SS-4020-Rev.0
Page 1 of 3
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
02.02.16
ISSUED FOR BIDS
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 1014 of 1744
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-SS-4020-Rev.0
Page 2 of 3
LIST OF STRUCTURAL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS:

PART-A (STRUCTURAL)
S.NO
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SPECIFICATION
NO
REV
NO
NO OF
SHEETS
6-68-0021
7+23
6-68-0022
14
6-68-0033
16
6-82-0001
87
6-82-2700
37
6-68-0002
15
6-68-0003
13
6-68-0004
30
6-68-0062
SPECIFICATION
NO
REV
NO.
NO. OF SHTS
Standard specification for earthwork for

under ground piping
Standard specification for chain link
fencing
Standard specification for classification of
soil for earth work in site grading
Standard specification for site grading &
rock cutting for site grading
Standard specification for roads and
flexible pavements
Standard specification for concrete
pavement
Standard specification for RCC pipe
culverts & ERC etc. and PVC pipe ERCs
6-65-0006
6-65-0013
6-65-0016
6-65-0017
12
6-65-0018
11
6-65-0019
10
6-65-0021
Standard specification civil - structural

lump-sum turn-key works (LSTK works)
general requirements
Standard specification civil - structural
lump-sum turn-key works (LSTK works)
material & construction
Standard specification civil &

structural works passive fire proofing
of steel structures (hydrocarbon pool
fire).
Standard specification for HSE
Management at construction site
Inspection & Test Plan (ITP) for Civil,
Structural & Architectural Works (EPCC /
LSTK Contracts)
Technical specifications- Civil &
Structural works- Material
Structural works- Earth Work
Structural works- Plain & Reinforced
cement concrete
Standard specification civil & structural
works vacuum dewatering concrete
system
PART-B (UG GENERAL GIVIL)
S.NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Page 1015 of 1744
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
8
9
Standard specification for underground &

above ground G.I. pipeline system water
services
Standard specification for portable fire
extinguisher.
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-SS-4020-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
6-65-0027
6-66-0004
Specification No.
REV
NO.
NO. OF SHTS
PART-C (ARCHITECTURAL)
Title
Sl. No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
Specification for Architectural Works General.

Specification for floor finishing
Specification for woodwork
Specification for Steel/ Aluminium doors,
windows & ventilators
Specification for plastering &
Pointing.
Specification for Roofing Treatment
Specification for whitewashing, Colour
washing, distempering, Painting &
polishing.
Specification for roofing.
Specification for sanitary fittings and
fixtures
Specification for False Ceiling, False
Flooring,
Underdeck
Insulation
&
Partitioning
Specification for fire check/ fire resistant
doors, windows and partitions
Specification for external faade system
with Structural Glazing
Specification for UPVC doors, windows &
Ventilators
Page 1016 of 1744
6-75-0001
07
6-75-0002
6-75-0003
6-75-0004
6
5
6
15
08
09
6-75-0005
09
6-75-0006
6-75-0007
5
5
09
15
6-75-0008
6-75-0009
5
5
08
06
6-75-0010
11
6-75-0011
10
6-75-0012
13
6-75-0013
10
Page 1017 of 1744
(A Govt
STANDARD SPECIFIZATION
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
India Undedaking)
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 1 of 7
W1
411-4
frl I
1W:4-R.
i
ch
CIVIL - STRUCTURAL
wrzt
vcildiqu
(vaATF.tie.*. wrzt)
LUMP-SUM TURN-KEY WORKS
(L. S. T. K. WORKS)
3irdltichclIV
0 30.08.2013
Rev.
No
ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
, '-'7
77)).
i, ilt
--/
4,L
GV
AS /
PKM
SC
DM
Standards
Standards
Prepared Checked Committee GM Bureau
Chairman
by
Convener
bY
Approved by
aele-i
tg-ar
fagreg
IN 2--k71,72 031,,,11
erl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt <A India Undegoking)
CIVIL -STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AFC
BIS
DC
DCIM
EDB
EIL
GAD
LOI
LSTK
MTO
PC
RCC
VDR
VP
Page 1018 of 1744
: Approved for Construction

: Document Control Index
: Document Control Index Module
: Engineering Design Basis
: Engineers India Limited
: General Arrangement Drawing
: Letter of Intent
: Lump-sum Turn-key
: Material Take-off
: Personal Computer
: Reinforced Cement Concrete
: Vendor Document Requirement
: Vendor Portal
Structural Standards Committee:

Convener:
Mr PK Mittal
Members:
Mr S Debnath
Mr Rajanji Srivastava
Mr PJ Singh
Mr Samir Das
Mr VS Chhaya (Projects)
Mr Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev 0
latade?
tif5ift
Merl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
Lindertahng )
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2 .0
DESIGN & DOCUMENT REVIEW
ANNEXURES:
Page 1019 of 1744
ANNEX U RE-1
ANNEXURE-2
ANNEXURE-3
ANNEXURE-4
ANNEXURE-5
ANNEXURE-6
ANNEXURE-7
ANNEXURE-8
ANNEXURE-9
ANNEXURE-10
ANNEXURE-11
ANNEXURE-12
ANNEXURE-l3
ANNEXURE-14
ANNEXU RE-15
: General Check List

: Format for Comment & Compliance Sheet
: Check List for analysis & Design of Normal foundations
: Check List for analysis & design of Foundation for Rotating equipments
: Check List for analysis & design of Liquid Retaining Structures
: Check List for analysis & design of Concrete buildings
: Check List for analysis & design of Shed type buildings
: Check List for analysis & design of Technological/ Process structures
: Check List for analysis & design of Pipe racks (unit/ offsite)
: Check List for analysis & design of Tall structures (concrete/ steel)
: Check List for analysis & design of Conveyor galleries & trestles
: Check List for analysis & design of Foundation for storage tanks
: Check List for analysis & design of Foundation for static equipments
: Check List for analysis & design of Furnace foundations
: Check List for preparation of Structural drawing
Wiel"
$figar Of5reg
5I,Frgr.1)
crqre
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undenalcng)
STANDC-,RD SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSI K WORKS
6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 4 of 7
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
Page 1020 of 1744
The design considerations given hereunder establish the minimum basic requirements for
civil-structural works for LSTK contracts.
This standard specification shall be read in conjunction with the Engineering Design Basis
document (EDB) issued for the Job and Standard Specification No. 6-68-0022 for Material &
Construction requirements.
All structures shall be designed for satisfactory performance and functions for which the same
are to be constructed.
Whenever any reference to BIS/ other code is made, the same shall be taken as the
latest revision (with all amendments issued there to) on the notified date of
submission of tender.
Apart from the codes mentioned in particular in the EDB document, all other relevant
codes related to the specific job under consideration and/ or referred to in the abovementioned codes, shall be followed wherever applicable. Reference to some of the
codes does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of other relevant codes.
In case of any variation/ contradiction between the provisions of BIS codes and the
requirements given in EDB document, the provisions given in EDB document shall
have precedence over all others. In absence of relevant BIS codes, reference to
corresponding British or American codes may be made (in that order of preference).
All designs, detailing and construction shall strictly conform to the standards,
specifications and 'specific requirements' enclosed with the tender. Only if relevant
information is not available in these documents, reference to relevant BIS code shall be
made.
1.2
A Document Control Index [DC1, i.e. detailed list of drawings/ documents, including
specifications, standards, design philosophy (foundation & superstructure), general notes,
design calculations, design drawings, Bulk Material Take-off (Bulk MTO), bar bending
schedules (for RCC works) and fabrication drawings (for structural steel works)] indicating
the document/ drawing category (review or record as applicable) together with the scheduled
and actual date of submission of the documents, shall be submitted by the Contractor through
the Document Control Index Module (DCIM) and kept updated at all times in the DCIM for
review by Owner/ owner's representative.
1.3
The Bulk MTO document containing Cement, Re-bars (diameter-wise) and Structural Steel
(section-wise) shall be submitted within 45 days from the date of receipt of LOI. The same
shall be updated at 50% & 90% stages of engineering.
1.4
Structure-wise quantity statements (showing anticipated, released and balance quantities of

concrete, structural steel and piles) shall be submitted by the Contractor and kept updated at
all times in the Document Control Index Module (DCIM) for review by Owner/ owner's
representative. The DCI shall also indicate the document/ drawing category (review or record
as applicable) together with the scheduled and actual date of submission of the documents.
1.5
Document Control Index Module (DCIM) is a web application that lets suppliers/ contractors
manage their Document Control Index (DCI) through an interface, submit their documents for
review/ record and get the reviewed/ approved documents/ drawings.
5"eilazitil
ENGINEERS
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
Ozd-ar 201e
-g
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD SPECIFY ATION No.
6-68-0021
Rev.0
LSTK WORKS
Page 5 of 7
2.0 DESIGN & DOCUMENT REVIEW

2.1
Before proceeding with design and drawing preparation, the Contractor shall submit detailed
philosophy of design of various parts of (all) the structures and foundations (including
equipment foundations) along with explanatory sketches for review by Owner/ owner's
representative. Only after the approval (including review and incorporation of comments as
offered during the review) of the design philosophy, the Contractor shall submit any design
document and/ or drawing for review or record or issue the same for construction.
2.2
The Contractor shall carry out the structural design of all structures and prepare complete set
of civil and structural approved for construction (AFC) drawings needed for correct and
accurate construction. The design/ drawing shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
design philosophy prepared for the structure (including "Design Criteria" given in the EDB)
and architectural/ structural general arrangement and shall incorporate all the comments/
suggestions given by Owner/ owner's representative without any extra cost to the Owner and
without any implication on the time-schedule for completion of works.
2.3
Design and detailing of the structures and foundations shall fulfill all functional requirements
for which the same is intended and it shall be ensured that adequate accesses, clearances,
clearing of interferences, provision of cutouts, etc. have been provided to make the structure/
foundation fully operational.
2.4
Construction of units/ structures identified for design/ drawing review (as referred in Vendor
Document Requirement (V DR) attached in the bid document or DCI) by Owner/ owner's
representative shall not be taken up at the site till these documents are reviewed by Owner/
owner's representative and comments/ suggestions given by Owner/ owner's representative
are incorporated along with submission of compliance sheet indicating incorporation of all
comments. For all other foundations and structures the Contractor shall directly submit the
AFC drawings to Engineer-in-Charge and construction of such works shall be taken up
immediately. Design and drawings for such foundations/ structures shall also be
simultaneously submitted in DCIM for Owner/ owner's representative's record. In the event
Owner/ owner's representative offers any comment on documents/ drawings of record
category, it shall be ensured by the Contractor that these comments are duly incorporated in
the documents/ drawings and revised set of document/ drawing is issued to site for
construction and simultaneously submitted in DCIM for Owner/ owner's representative's
record.
2.5
Submission of typical review category documents shall be taken up prior to corresponding

record category documents. Owner/ Owner's representative comments on typical review
category documents shall be duly taken care in all relevant record category documents as well
before issuing them for construction and simultaneously submitted in DCIM for Owner/
owner's representative's record.
Wherever review is carried out the same shall be restricted to following:
a)
b)
c)
Conformance of general arrangement of the structure to approved design philosophy

and design basis.
Overall framing of the building/ conceptual foundation system.
Detailed design and drawings including input/ output of computer analysis and design
vis-a-vis actual drawing.
Irrespective of the identified structures requiring review, the Contractor shall submit
complete set of design and drawings of all structure/ foundation systems.
Page 1021 of 1744
Page 1022 of 1744
!Oft:EY rs"
.,0,,) ENGINEERS
51g-err fdtA&G Nair INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ttt Indm Undettaking)
e-A ,TeeA,M-15AE
2.6
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS

6-68-0021
Rev.0
Page 6 of 7
To facilitate an overall systematic review, the Contractor shall ensure the following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Structural design/ drawings for any structure/ foundation are submitted for review
only if referenced input (e.g. architectural drawing, equipment layout, piping general
arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor drawing, etc.) have been
reviewed by the concerned Owner's specialist in approval/ review Code-2 or Code-1
and are available in the DCIM on or before the date of submission of structural
design/ drawings.
Design and drawings of each independent building/ structure are submitted
simultaneously
Relevant checklist(s) duly filled-up, signed (by the approver of civil-structural design/
drawing) & stamped, shall accompany each deliverable of civil-structural document/
drawing submitted by the contractor. The checklist(s) are to be used as a guide while
performing the related activities. The same are attached as annexure. All points listed
therein are mandatory check point. Other points/ observations/ comments may be
added based on need and judicious discretion depending on the importance of
activity/ deliverables.
Soft copy of files created as input for computer analysis/ design are also part of the
respective design documents.
All re-submissions are accompanied with a compliance statement (a document stating
point-wise compliance to all comments by Owner/ owner's representative on previous
submission)
2.7
In case the referenced input (e.g. geotechnical recommendations, architectural drawing,

equipment layout, piping general arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor
drawing, etc.) as applicable, reviewed by the concerned Owner's specialist in approval/
review Code-2 or Code-1 are not available in the DCIM on or before the date of submission
of structural design/ drawings for any structure/ foundation, the date of submission of
structural design/ drawings shall deemed to be considered as the date of submission of
approved reference drawing.
2.8
To ensure accuracy, correctness and completeness of documents before submission to Owner/

owner's representative, the Contractor shall ensure that all such submitted designs and
drawings are complete in all respects, thoroughly checked, stamped APPROVED FOR
CONSTRUCTION, and signed APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the fact that the same are prepared in
the Contractor's own design office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
Incomplete, unchecked, unsigned and unstamped design documents/ drawings shall not
be reviewed/ accepted for construction and shall be deemed to be considered as void/
withdrawn.
2.9
The accuracy/ correctness of all designs and drawings shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor and any delay/ loss/ damage to the Owner in respect of any mistake/ discrepancy/
anomaly in such designs and drawings shall be entirely borne by the Contractor.
2.10
Owner/ owner's representative reserves the right to review any/ all or none of the designs and
drawings. Review by Owner/ owner's representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correct design and execution of the works.
2.11
Revision of any design/ drawing/ detailing shall not be permitted unless the same is
necessitated due to comments on review of such documents by Owner/ owner's
representative. Such revisions shall be restricted to incorporation of these comments only and
no new details shall be added in the drawings unless called for by comments during review.
All revised portion shall be clearly marked and clouded on the respective drawing for easy
Ogar laOteg
dir.,1
451,1057i,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f A Govt A (AdA Undertaking)
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS

6-68-0021
Rev.O
Page 7 of 7
identification. Subsequent review of such revised documents, if required shall be limited to

revision as clouded.
2.12
All fabrication/ erection drawings and bar bending schedules shall be prepared by the
Contractor and shall be directly issued through DCIM for construction to the work. Such
drawings together with design calculations for all splices, joints and gusset plates shall
simultaneously be reviewed by Owner/ owner's representative at site (Resident Construction
Manager). The Owner/ owner's representative at site at his discretion may review all or some
or none of these designs & drawings.
Wherever such review is carried out the same shall be restricted to the following:
a)
b)
c)
2.13
Structural layouts, orientation, elevation of structural members.

Section/ size of members.
Adequacy of few critical connections and joints for their required strength.
For analysis and design of structures, latest version of internationally accepted commercial
software viz. STAAD.PRO or equivalent are permitted.
In case software packages (commercially available or in-house developed) other than above
are intended to be used for analysis and design, the same shall be informed in writing to
Owner/ owner's representative. A validation report consisting of calculations and relevant
computer files containing input and detailed output (also refer clause 2.14) shall be submitted
by the Contractor through DCIM. Only after getting written approval from Owner/ owner's
representative, to this effect, such intended software be put to use for detailed analysis and
design.
2.14
The following minimum documentation shall be submitted through DCIM for computer aided
analysis and design as a part of structural analysis & design document:
a)
b)
c)
2.15
Complete input and output files in native format.

Relevant sketches of structure geometry with node and member numbering, loading,
bending moment, shear force, deflected shape diagrams, etc.
Summary of member end forces, support reactions, stress ratio, deflections, etc.
Contractor shall depute the concerned Civil-Structural design engineer to the review office of
Owner/ owner's representative as and when required for review of contractor's documents.
During such reviews involving computer aided analysis/ design/ drafting of structures, the
contractor shall make his own arrangement of Personal Computer (PC) in the form of Lap-top
in the premises of review office of Owner/ owner's representative. This is required to
expeditiously resolve all the comments including those involving the use of PC by contractor
in his submission. The contractor shall ensure that these PC's are fully operational along with
necessary software already loaded including the input/ output/ drawing files of the structures
being reviewed. The contractor shall revise and re-submit the analysis/ design and drawings
as required during review, through DCIM.
Reviewing of designs/ drawings is not obligatory on the part of Owner/ owner's
representative and complete correctness/ soundness of the designs/ drawings and their
execution at the site shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor irrespective of the
fact whether the same has been reviewed by Owner/ owner's representative or not. Any
defect observed during construction or till the defect liability period of works' shall be
rectified and removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out whatever
modification or reconstruction is needed for the purpose, to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge/ Owner without any extra cost and/ or time implication to the
Owner.
Page 1023 of 1744
Page 1024 of 1744
4l.511faeitti telt ENGINEERS

\:
IP INDIA
5fgzutil,'
1.1TED
GENERAL CHECKLIST
1 ,111014,ml;
ANNEXURE-1
OF 6-68-0021
Page 1 of 2
Filled-up, signed (by the approver of civil-structural design/ drawing) & stamped
checklist shall accompany each submission of civil-structural document/ drawing by the
contractor:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
SI.
No.
1.
Contractor's
Response
Yes
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
I'MC Requirement
The submission is as per submission schedule as per
approved DC1.
The submission is as per submission sequence as per
approved DCI.
Basic documents prepared by the contractor (e.g. design
philosophy, specifications, standards, general notes, etc.) are
already approved.
Bulk MTO has been submitted.
All the referenced input (e.g. geotechnical recommendations.
architectural drawing, equipment layout, piping general
arrangement drawing (GAD), equipment data sheet, vendor
drawing, etc.) as applicable have been reviewed by the
concerned Owner's specialist in approval/ review Code-2 or
Code-1 and are available in the DC1M on or before the date
of submission of structural design/ drawings.
The design calculations being submitted herewith are
complete in all respects, thoroughly checked and confirm to
approved engineering design basis, relevant approved input
documents and applicable codes & standards, stamped
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION, and signed
APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the
fact that the same are prepared in the Contractor's own design
office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
The drawings being submitted herewith are complete in all
respects, thoroughly checked and confirm to approved design
calculations, approved general arrangement, stamped
APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION, and signed
APPROVED by the Contractor's own responsible civil/
structural graduate (minimum) engineer (irrespective of the
fact that the same are prepared in the Contractor's own design
office or by an approved agency/ sub-contractor).
The documents/ drawing being submitted are complete with
respect to the whole structure.
In case this submission is for drawings only, the related
analysis & design have already been submitted.
Structure-wise quantity statements (showing anticipated,
released and balance quantities of concrete, structural steel
and piles) are updated & submitted.
In case this submission is of record category document/
drawing, similar review category documents/ drawings have
already been submitted.
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
u Yes
Page 1025 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
aitlialeg
SI.
No.
13.
14.
GENERAL CHECKLIST
of .0. Vntl.rtike6ipl
PMC Requirement
In case this submission is of record category document/
drawing, the submitted document/ drawing incorporates
comments on the similar review category document/
drawing.
The accuracy/ correctness of all designs and drawings shall
be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and any delay/
loss/ damage to the Owner in respect of any mistake/
discrepancy/ anomaly in such designs and drawings shall be
entirely borne by the Contractor. Review by Owner/ owner's
representative shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correct design and execution of the works
Date:
ANNEXURE-1
OF 6-68-0021
Page 2 of 2
Contractor's
Response
Remarks
Yes
Yes
Name & Signature
Note:
Contractor to check & confirm that the submission meets the above requirements of
PMC and categorically tick Q mark in the "0 Yes" response.
Page 1026 of 1744
FORMAT FOR COMMENTS

& COMPLIANCE SHEET
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1. gZIT 054-63

--
It
AN NEXURE-2
OF 6-68-0021
Page 1 of 1
Filled-up, signed & stamped compliance sheet shall accompany each re-submission of
civil-structural document/ drawing by the contractor:
Document No. :
Rev. No.:
Date of Submission:
Date of Review:
Review Code: 1
Sl.
No.
1.
Reference Clause
3 DR oV
PMC Comments
Contractor's Response
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Review Code Legend:

Code 1
No comments.
Code 2
Proceed with manufacture/ fabrication as per commented document.

Revised document required.
Code 3
Document does not confirm to basic requirement as marked.

Resubmit for review.
Retained for Records.
Void.
Page 1027 of 1744
er
5tga tialer.,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
CHECKLIST FOR
ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF
NORMAL FOUNDATIONS
ANNEXURE-3
OF 6-68-0021
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SR.
NO.
CHECK/ CONTROL POINTS
Founding level/ depth of foundation with respect to HPP/ FGL/ NGL/ EGL/
FFL (strike out whichever is not applicable).
Requirement & Level of plinth/ tie beams.
Type, Shape & Dimensions of footing.
Adequacy of loading for foundation.
Correctness of the design forces as per analysis.
Selection of critical loading cases/ combinations.
Long/ short column effect for pedestal.
Size of pedestal:
a) type of anchor bolts
b) bolt spacing (with respect to clearance between the bolts)
C) edge distance of anchor bolts
d) depth of embedment of anchor bolts
Location co-ordinates & Orientation with respect to North direction.
10
Conformance to Geotechnical recommendations:

a) check for SBC at founding depth (w.r.t. settlement/ shear)
b) consideration of ground water table.
c) check for FOS against overturning, sliding
d) increase in SBC (limited to 25% for wind or seismic/ 100% for blast)
e) spacing of piles (within group & inter-group)
f) pile cut-off level
g) load check conforming to pile capacity
h) increase in pile capacities (limited to 50% for vertical & 25% for lateral
for wind/ seismic/ 50% for blast)
Projection of foundation outside battery limit is co-ordinated with Civil
Department for under-ground piping, etc.
11
12
Ductile detailing requirements for reinforcement, wherever applicable.
13
Internal co-ordination with all concerned departments.
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
1,4 NA
: Check carried out and found OK

: Check carried out and found not applicable
Page 1028 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ik
st g-aw
CHECK LIST FOR

FOUNDATION FOR
ROTATING EQUIPMENTS
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-4
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend

Approved (at least review code 2) inputs available.
Complete loading data:

a) reference line of machine, base frame dimensions and suction side &
discharge side (for pumps)
b) size of block/ deck, pedestal above HPP
c) static/dynamic loads (or dynamic load factor) & their location of
application (as per vendor)
d) permissible limiting values of vibration parameters
e) pocket dimensions, locations
f) grout type & thickness
g) whether anti-vibration pads are provided
Founding level/ depth of foundation w.r.t. HPP/ FGL/ NGL/ EGL/ FFL
,-)-
Value of C & net SBC from soil recommendations.

For pile foundations, the pile stiffness value.
Amplitude of vibration and resonance check in required modes.
No fouling with adjacent foundation as per equipment layout.
Check for limiting size of element(s).

Check for critical speed, whether the machine is variable speed or fixed
speed?
If variable speed motor is used, whether amplitude has been checked
considering the machine speed same as the natural frequency of the
foundation system.
Minimum reinforcement requirement as per IS:2974.
10
Specified number of construction joints & their details.
I1
Note for single pour.
12
Name & Signature
Date:
Leeend :
NA

Copyright El L All rights reserved
Page 1029 of 1744
,:11ENGINEERS
077
,
,- Ofirec, INDIA LIMITED
CHECK LIST FOR

LIQUID RETAINING
STRUCTURES
Page 1 of 1
I Job No.:
L Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-5
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Design method (cracked or un-cracked) to be identified for each element.
Check for stability & uplift as per respective structure/ pit/ tank w.r.t. water
table at various stages of construction.
Requirement of minimum thickness & reinforcement.
Reinforcement provided on both faces (for slab & walls).
Treatment to be given on surfaces in contact with earth.
Anti-corrosive treatment for structures storing corrosive liquids.

Requirement of joints, water stops, puddle flanges, giving notes for
execution sequences.
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

,31
`-tia_le-i
ENGINEERS
ogar laWeg INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind,. Undertaking,
CHECK LIST FOR

CONCRETE BUILDINGS
Page 1 of 4
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
1.0
Availability of Inputs
1.1
Approved Architecture drawings of building
1.1
Approved Plot Plan
1.3
Approved related Area Drawings
1.4
Contour plan
1.5
Approved Geotechnical Recommendation
1.6
Approved Electrical Drawings for Substation Building
1.7
Approved Instrumentation Drawings for Control Room Building
1.8
Vendor Inputs for:

a) Air Conditioning Equipments
b) Transformers etc.
c) Lift
2.0
Correctness of Inputs
2.1
With respect to Architecture Drawings:

a) Framing arrangement.
b) Level & Location:
Co-ordinate of building
i)
Finished Ground Level
ii)
Finished Floor Level
iii)
Approach Road Level
iv)
c) Brickwork arrangement
Length/ height of brickwork.
i)
Stability check for brickwork with Steel frame.
ii)
Flushing of Brickwork with frame structure.
iii)
Brick supporting arrangement for Rain water Pipe
iv)
encasing.
d) Requirement of expansion joints as per codal provisions.
e) Arrangement & levels of false flooring & false ceiling.
f) Clear height of floors.
g) Cross-checking of elevations at FFLs of Ground Floor, Upper
Floors, Roof etc., w.r.t. FGL, Approach Road Level.
h) Monorail location & extent of monorail beam for Substation
building.
With respect to Mechanical Drawings:
a) Lift Pit Size and loading available in Approved Mechanical/
Vendor Drawing.
b) Machine Room Details available in Approved Mechanical/
Vendor Drawing.
c) Cut-out details for duct in AC Plant room/ AHU rooms in
Approved Mechanical/ Vendor Drawing.
d) Details of pedestals for AC Plant/ AHU in Approved Mechanical/
Vendor drawing.
e) Monorail location & Capacity as per Approved Mechanical
drawing.
2.2
Page 1030 of 1744
el
Ogar 2154--eg
rtirefir ,iikairviati Jos.,
SR.
NO.
2.3
2.4
2 .5
2.6
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Ctoki of India Undertaking,
CHECK LIST FOR

CONCRETE BUILDINGS
3.1
Structure is analysed as 3D Framed Structure.
3.2
Uses of Codes as per approved EDB:

a) For Concrete (IS:456/ IS:13920)
b) For Steel (IS:800)
Grade of Material as per approved EDB:
a) Concrete
b) Reinforcement
c) Structural Steel
Covers as per approved EDB:
a) Foundation
b) Column
c) Beam
d) Slab
e) Wall
Checking of Minimum thickness as per approved EDB:
a) Foundation
b) Column
c) Beam
d) Slab
e) Wall
3.5
3.6
Page 1031 of 1744
Tick Mark
as per Legend
With respect to Electrical Drawings:

a) Transformer details.
b) LT-FIT Switch gear panel location.
c) Cable trench layout.
With respect to Instrumentation Drawings:
a) Panel resting arrangements.
b) Cable tray details.
c) Pipe sleeves details.
d) MCT location.
e) Cable tray in superstructure.
f) Cable trench layout.
With respect to General Civil Area Drawings:
a) Co-ordinates of building
b) Orientation of building with respect to North direction.
c) Approach Road level/ Finished Ground Level.
d) Contour for NGL from Plot Plan.
e) Fouling with existing/ proposed facilities from Area/ Foundation
drawing.
0 Underground facilities from Area Drawing.
With respect to Geotechnical Recommendation:
a) Type of foundation (Shallow or Pile).
b) Depth of foundation.
c) Net Allowable SBC for foundation from Geotechnical Report.
d) Pile Capacity from Geotechnical Report.
e) Diameter of Pile & Spacing of Piles from Geotechnical Report.
f) Specification of Piling.
g) Drawing of Pile.
Design Aspects
3.4
Page 2 of 4
3.0
3.3
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Loadings
~stn
5fga
SR.
NO.
3.6.1
1731,PT,1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A C.A uf Inclo lindenalng)
CHECK LIST FOR

CONCRETE BUILDINGS
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Page 3 of 4
Tick Mark
as per Legend
3.6.6
Dead Load:
a) Self weight
b) Slab load
c) Brick load
d) Gutter/ Parapet load
Live/ Imposed load as per approved EDB for panels, ducts, cables etc. on
floor, roof canopy, passage, lobby & stair case:
a) Office Building
b) Administrative building
c) Substation building
d) Control room
Seismic Load as per approved EDB:
a) Method of Seismic Analysis (Seismic Coefficient/ Response
Spectra).
b) Importance factor (Mention Value).
c) Response reduction factor accordingly consideration of ductile
detailing (Mention Value).
d) Damping factor (Mention Value).
e) Type of soil.
f) Type of structure.
g) Time period for frame structure as per IS:1893.
Wind load for Shed type Building
a) Basic Wind Speed (Mention Value).
b) Probability Factor (k1) (Mention Value).
c) Terrain, Height, Structure Size Factor (k2) (Mention Value).
d) Topography Factor (k3 ) (Mention Value).
Blast load for Control Room shall be as per RRA report (Mention Blast
Pressure).
Load combination shall be as per approved EDB:
3.7
Design of concrete member of building shall be as per IS:456/ IS:13920.
3.8
Ductile detailing requirements for Reinforcement, wherever applicable.
3.9
Slenderness check for design of columns.
3.10
Crack width of beam/ slab.
3.11
Deflection of slab/ staircase.
3.12
Foundation design.
3.12.1
Fouling of under-ground cable trench with foundations/ plinth beams etc.
3.12.2
Alignment of plinth beams with brick walls.
3.12.3
3.12.5
Factor of safety against overturning & Sliding as per approved EDB.

Checking of SBC/ pile capacity as per approved Geotechnical
Recommendation.
Maximum allowable settlement of soil as per approved EDB
3.12.6
Checking of modified pressure calculation in case of tension occurred.
3.12.7
Increase in stress shall be as per Geotechnical Recommendation.
3.12.8
Minimum percentage of reinforcement as per approved EDB
3.12.9
Minimum spacing of reinforcement bar as per approved EDB.
4.0
Internal coordination with other departments.
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.1.4
Page 1032 of 1744
dgar Hales
ele,r.mr,nrd
SR.
NO,
5.0
Page 1033 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undenakinc0
CHECK LIST FOR

CONCRETE BUILDINGS
ANNEXURE-6
OF 6-68-0021
Page 4 of 4
Tick Mark
as per Legend
MTO for super structure & Substructure

a) Area of building
b) Concrete in foundation
c) Concrete in superstructure
d) Reinforcement in foundation
e) Reinforcement in superstructure
f) Reinforcement per Cu. M. of Concrete for foundation
g) Reinforcement per Cu. M. of Concrete for superstructure
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1034 of 1744
.0'itia,z1e1. .
s- lgar tfil&,-
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMIT-ED
UndertA
CHECK LIST FOR

SHED TYPE BUILDINGS
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-7
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
Refer separate checklist for foundation.
Check fouling with machine/equipment foundation.
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Check the clear gap for isolation of rotating machine foundation.
/
3
Requirement of roof monitor, extent of side cladding & height of parapet

wall.
Identification of braced bay & maintenance bay.
Whether provision of extension of shed by one bay considered (for future).
Live loads & superimposed loads at various locations, including crane

loading & centerline distance between rails
Check the critical load combination for design.
Check the horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
Check flooring details conforming to likely superimposed load.
Compatibility between pedestal level & anchor bolts with base plate details.
Check whether correct limiting values of slenderness ratios for structural
elements (columns, beams, bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether correct effective lengths of structural elements (columns,
beams, bracings, etc.) used in design.
Check whether minimum 90% mass participation achieved (in both
horizontal directions) for calculating seismic forces.
10
11
12
13
Check over-all compliance to approved Architectural drawings.
14
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1035 of 1744
51.4-4101g16.-;
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(;ost
CHECK LIST FOR

TECHNOLOGICAL/
PROCESS STRUCTURES
Page 1 of 2
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-8
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
Check fouling with equipment foundation.
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Material of construction as per engineering design basis of the project and
departmental guidelines.
Check the application of equipment load (correction, magnitude & location).
'
Live load/ superimposed load considered for respective level/ floor, aircoolers, fire proofing load, etc. where applicable.
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
Whether loading due to one extra floor considered (for future expansion).
Check the estimation of seismic/ wind force to be applied at respective
level/ floor.
Check whether critical design forces from various likely load combinations
have been considered for the design of structural element/ foundation.
Identify critical areas where limiting beam sizes need to be provided for
avoiding any fouling.
Location of braced bay, co-ordinated with Piping. Bracing angle is within
30 & 60. Plan bracing considered.
Check the horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
Check the capacity of overhead mono-rails & its location with extent (in &
outside plan dimensions) w.r.t. the respective equipment.
Verify whether all vertical & horizontal piping loads have been correctly &
completely taken care.
Equipment supporting arrangement - check fouling with bottom nozzle or
hood.
Arrangement of intermediate/ secondary beams to clear opening
requirements.
14
Inter-connection with pipe rack.
15
16
17
18
19
/0
1I
Joint details:
a) reference standard no. is furnished
b) details for connections not available in standard are furnished
Compatibility between member sizes in General Arrangement
Reinforcement Details (in drawing).
Whether integrated analysis done with equipment/ piping.
&

Page 1036 of 1744
ias eltq
Ogar taireg
ttl, 01,13, t
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t
mt. ll+.ertak,,,,p
CHECK LIST FOR

TECHNOLOGICAL/
PROCESS STRUCTURES
ANNEXURE-8
OF 6-68-0021
Page 2 of 2
Tick Mark
SR.
NO.
?,-)
-
Check requirement of ductile detailing for reinforcement (for concrete

elements).
23
Summation of applied forces matched with reactions.
24
as per Legend
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1037 of 1744
1cI Ei ENGINEERS
,fit Ofireg ',pm, INDIA LIMITED
CHECK LIST FOR

PIPE RACKS
(UNIT/ OFFSITE)
Page 1 of 2
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-9
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
FOUNDATION
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Layout and configuration of pipe rack conforming to piping inputs/
approved equipment layout.
Levels of pipe rack/ tiers conforming to piping inputs/ approved equipment
layout.
Whether load due to one extra tier considered (for future expansion) to be
confirmed by Piping/ PMC.
Location of expansion joints and braced bays coordinated with Piping
department.
Material of construction as per engineering design basis of the project,
including fire-proofing requirements.
Check the loading considered given by piping conforming to the
requirement of design basis, including for fire proofing where applicable.
Check consideration of friction/ anchor/ guide loads as per design basis and
as forwarded by piping.
Check the layout & loading of Air-coolers including supports required for
inlet & outlet piping.
Check the routing of electrical cable trays & instrument duct to be supported
on the pipe rack and their respective loading as per design basis.
Check the horizontal & vertical clearances at road/ railway crossings.
3
4
6
7
8
9
i0
I1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Location and arrangement of vertical & horizontal bracing fulfilling design

requirements and confirmed by piping
Check whether additional load due to extra length of pipes have been
considered or not at the location where pipes are rising or getting dropped.
Check the level at top of grout w.r.t. actual profile of ground levels for offsite pipe rack.
Local design checks at junction locations
Whether any two-phase flow lines are there? If yes, have these been taken
care as per the Design basis.
Joint details:
a) reference standard no. is furnished
b) details for connections not available in standard are furnished
Compatibility between member sizes in General Arrangement
Reinforcement Details (in drawing).
19
Transverse beams are designed for horizontal bending.
20
Tray support members are provided as per electrical guidelines.
21
Battery Limit platform & approach for the same.
22
Bracing angle is within 30 & 60.
23
Inter-connection with technological structures.
&
Page 1038 of 1744
611faaeitAY16-1% ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IfgarttR.eg
'
SR.
NO.
CHECK LIST FOR

PIPE RACKS
(UNIT/ OFFSITE)
ANNEXURE-9
OF 6-68-0021
Page 2 of 2
Tick Mark
as per Legend

Fouling of vertical bracing with anchor bolt in pedestal (in drawing).
24

Check requirement of ductile detailing for reinforcement (for concrete
elements).
15
16
27
28
29
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1039 of 1744
el
J1
Ogar ttfReg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
;A Go, ot LJrvIelokr-gj
CHECK LIST FOR

TALL STRUCTURES
(CONCRETE/ STEEL)
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-10
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Check wind & seismic parameters considered.
Check estimation of wind forces.
Check estimation of seismic loads.
Check structural configuration and bracing system (vertical & horizontal).
Check analysis corresponding to critical wind/ seismic direction.

Check whether critical maximum design forces have been considered from
various load combinations for the design of respective elements.
8
9
Check for permissible horizontal (transverse & longitudinal) deflections.
10
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1040 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
r31
51=
gZff la
CHECK LIST FOR

CONVEYOR GALLERIES
& TRESTLES
Page
Tick Mark
as per Legend
SUB-STRUCTURE
SUPER-STRUCTURE
Check the system stability & dynamic analysis as per design basis/Job
specification.
Check the correctness in estimation of wind pressure corresponding to right
shape factor for exposed members.
Check the lateral load transfer from gallery to top of trestle.
Check the supporting arrangement of gallery for keeping proper provision
for expansion, check limiting vertical deflection.
1
2
3
4
1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-11
OF 6-68-0021
The analysis & design shall conform to the erection scheme being adopted.
lnte nal co-ordination with all concerned departments.
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1041 of 1744
ENGINEERS
KR-e-g*iir). INDIA LIMITED
51
1 fa_Je-1
(o,1 inaxl
H1,7,
et,1
CHECK LIST FOR

FOUNDATION FOR
STORAGE TANKS
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-12
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend

Check equality of bottom pressure below ring wall and intermediate
compacted soil mass.
Check the detailing/ arrangement of ring wall w.r.t. anchor bolts and clean
out drain, requirement of minimum edge clearance for Anchor Bolt.
Check the thickness, size, shape and spacing of piers with protective
coating/ lining for tanks storing corrosive liquid.
Check the special requirements/ consideration (size, solid concrete slab
below bottom plate, anchorage, counter weights etc.) for storage tanks
storing liquids at high pressure and/ or high/ low temperature.
I
,
...)
4
5
Location co-ordinates & Orientation w.r.t. North direction.
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :

Page 1042 of 1744
,46ilfazie-if-,, ENGINEERS
5taar faiter; INDIA LIMITED
Go, ,
CHECK LIST FOR

FOUNDATION FOR
STATIC EQUIPMENTS
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-13
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Design loads as per approved data sheet.
Check the input files for:

a) depth of foundation
b) depth of water table
c) wind/ seismic load as per Design Basis
d) support details as per data sheet
Check the out-put file for:
a) SBC conforming to Geo-Tech Recommendations
b) FOS against overturning
c) size restriction for likely fouling
,
..)
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1043 of 1744
i~IGieiei
0011,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
f.k.1
irxtii,
CHECK LIST FOR

FURNACE FOUNDATIONS
Page 1 of 1
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO.
ANNEXURE-14
OF 6-68-0021
Loading as per approved data sheet of equipment
Additional load due to supported ducts/ lining
Check for SBC at founding level and FOS against overturning
Size limitations if any to avoid fouling
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
INA

Page 1044 of 1744
41
MD, ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
CHECK LIST FOR

PREPARATION OF
STRUCTURAL DRAWING
Page 1 of 3
Job No.:
Rev. No.:
Project:
Document No.:
Document Title:
SR.
NO,
ANNEXURE-15
OF 6-68-0021
Tick Mark
as per Legend
GENERAL
Drawing number is as per approved DCI
Electronic file number is as per approved DCI
Draughting is as per design requirements
North line/ orientation as per input data
Notes comply with Job Specifications and General Notes
f
g
Field notes for specific instructions/ scope of work defined

Layout of grids and spacing/ dimensions/ equipment location, support,
orientation etc. as per input data
Referenced Drawings specified
i
.1
Referenced Standards specified

If not adequately clear in General Notes, grade of concrete and grade of
reinforcement bars specified
Bill of materials furnished (for the detailed portion)
1
m
2
a
b
Necessary internal co-ordination done with relevant departments as per

requirements
Resolution/ incorporation of comments received
FOUNDATIONS
Coordinates/ location is as per input data, suction side & discharge side (for
pump foundations) as per layout drawing
Referenced level and elevations specified are as per approved General Civil/
Architectural drawings/ Piping GAD (viz. NGL/ FGL/ HPP)
Elevation/ depth of foundation bottom furnished
Fouling with surrounding foundations/ services cleared
Any extra cover for rebar required and specified
Any extra minimum cement content required and specified
Thickness, projection and grade of lean concrete specified

Anchor bolt location and orientation specified
Adequacy of foundation depth checked to accommodate anchor bolt

assemblies
Anchor bolt description (as per standard) specified
Depth of pockets specified
Minimum cover on anchor bolts/ pockets checked
Fouling between anchor bolt assembly and pedestal rebar checked
Grout thickness specified
Reinforcement provided as per design/ codal requirements
Page 1045 of 1744
mad ENGINEERS
Ogui tVe--E; INDIA LIMITED
,rtfia Undert*.)1
SR.
NO,
CHECK LIST FOR

PREPARATION OF
STRUCTURAL DRAWING
ANNEXURE-15
OF 6-.68-0021
Page 2 of 3
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Links and ties detailed
Dowel lengths for column rebars staggered and specified
Depth of machine foundations with respect to building foundations checked
Separation detail for machine foundations and pouring sequence given
t
u
v
.
retaining
liquid
construction
joints
for
Requirement of water bars at
structures furnished
Requirement of protective painting
Field note for sequence of construction, if adjoining foundations are at
different level
For pump foundations, following field note shall compulsorily be added in
foundation drawings:
"The pump discharge nozzle is facing towards North/East/West/South".
(appropriate direction shall be selected as per layout drawing, in case
discharge is upwards, direction of suction nozzle shall be specified)
SUPER STRUCTURE Reinforced Cement Concrete
Layout is as per approved Piping GAD/ Architectural drawings
Requirement of expansion/ separation joints checked
Anchor bolt location and orientation specified
Anchor bolt description (as per standard) specified
Pockets for bolts located/oriented and specified
Depth of pockets/ length of bolts in RCC members checked
Minimum cover on anchor bolts/ pockets checked
Fouling between anchor bolt assembly and rebar checked
Grout thickness specified
Reinforcement provided as per design/ codal requirements
Cut-outs as per requirement provided with edge protection
Slope has been provided over RCC roof
Curb around all openings
Insert plates & pipe sleeves provided wherever required
Extra reinforcement around cut-outs & openings
Dowel bars for lap length & anchorage length
Nominal links in column, stin-ups for beams & their arrangement
SUPER STRUCTURE Structural steel
Layout is as per approved Piping GAD/ input drawings
Requirement of expansion/ separation joints checked
Bolting details for equipments specified
Member sizing and connection details furnished
Grating/ chequered plate requirements with supporting members furnished
Welding requirements furnished
Fire-proofing requirements furnished
Page 1046 of 1744
ENGINEERS
31
INDIA
LIMITED
ligat rtA,PRI,
r;,:, 04 ,rea. Undertak.g,
SR.
NO.
CHECK LIST FOR

PREPARATION OF
STRUCTURAL DRAWING
ANNEXURE-15
OF 6-68-0021
Page 3 of 3
Tick Mark
as per Legend
Requirement of removable floor/ handrails checked
Requirement of grouting holes in base plates specified
Vertical & Horizontal bracings provided as per piping clearance
Splicing location has been proposed/ suggested
Approach staircase/ ladder provided with proper landing at entry point
Toe plate around openings
Stiffness/ diaphragm plates have been suitably provided
Vertical clearance below monorail beam checked
Capacity of monorail specified & structurally stable cantilever projection

given
Drawing issued through DCIM (Document Control Index Module)
Name & Signature
Date:
Legend :
NA

Page 1047 of 1744
ENGINEERS
ladtx-iew,
egKW INDIA LIMITED
of idW.1f,,1,1,,Sfe
EON of India Undertaking)
CIVIL-STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
MATERIAL & CONSTRUCTION
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 1 of 14
litf4bral
fted-ff
CIVIL - STRUCTURAL
4cr Trxr
wrzt
(vackr-fr.a*. wr71-)
LUMP-SUM TURN-KEY WORKS
(L. S. T. K. WORKS)
ilia-WA LTd Pa-liul
0 31.07.2013
ISSUED AS SPECIFICATION
GV
AS/RS
PKM
Standards
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
DM
Standards
GM Bureau
Chairman
Prepared Checked Committee

Convener
by
by
Approved by
ENGINEERS
ar fdtle-g',1.--/ INDIA LIMITED
Og-
Page 1048 of 1744
IA Gov( of India undertaiong)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 2 of 14
Abbreviations:
1315
CPCIA
EIL
1.1SEG
IS
LSTK
OISD
PCC
PVC
RCC
STD
TMT

: Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture
: Engineers India Limited
: High Strength Friction Grip
: Indian Standard
: Lump-sum Turn-key
: Oil Industry Safety Directorate
: Plain Cement Concrete
: Polyvinyl Chloride
: Reinforced Cement Concrete
: Standard
: Thermo-mechanically Treated
Structural Standards Committee:
Convener:
Mr PK Mittal
Members:
Mr S Debnath
Mr Rajanji Srivastava
Mr PJ Singh
Mr Samir Das
Mr VS Chhaya (Projects)
Mr Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
IIkkjei
ENGINEERS
51garfdrge7, (314C.RFI INDIA LIMITED
,r.24,151
IA (knit of India Undertaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 3 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
REFERENCED CODES, STANDARDS & PUBLICATIONS
3.0
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Page 1049 of 1744
4.0
3.1
General
3.2
Water
3.3
Aggregate (for Concrete)
3.4
Sand (for Masonry & Filling)
3.5
Cement
3.6
Steel
3.7
Brick
3.8
Stone
3.9
Admixtures
3.10
Water Bars (Water Stops)
3.11
Bitumen/ Bituminous Materials
10
3.12
PVC Pipes
10
3.13
Wood/ Timber
10
3.14
Concrete Block Masonry
11
3.15
FaL-G Masonry
11
3.16
Anti-termite Compounds
11
3.17
Poly-sulphide Sealants
11
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
11
4.1
Construction
11
4.2
Tolerances
12
4.3
Hanger Scaffolding for Pipe Rack
14
Page 1050 of 1744
$1=d-ar
tg
CH", ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt a, Irt.tha Undertaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 4 of 14
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The material and construction considerations given hereunder establish the minimum basic
requirements for reinforced cement concrete (RCC), structural steel and masonry structures/
works.
This specification shall be read in conjunction with the Engineering Design Basis (EDB) for
the Job and Standard Specification No. 6-68-0021 for General requirements.
Project specific civil-structural requirements as mentioned in the Engineering Design Basis
(EDB) shall supersede the any such requirements given in this standard specification.
1.2
All codes referred in this document pertain to BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) publications
and bear prefix IS.
1.3
Whenever any reference to BIS code is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision
(with all amendments issued there to) on the notified date of submission of tender.
1.4
Apart from the BIS codes mentioned in particular in the various clauses of this document, all
other relevant codes related to the specific job under consideration and/ or referred to in the
above-mentioned codes, shall be followed wherever applicable. Reference to some of the
codes in the various clauses of this document does not limit or restrict the scope of
applicability of other relevant codes.
1.5
In case of any variation/ contradiction between the provisions of BIS codes and the
requirements given hereunder, the provisions given in this document shall have precedence
over all others. In absence of relevant BIS codes, reference to corresponding British or
American codes may be made (in that order of preference).
All material and construction shall strictly conform to the enclosed standards, specifications
and 'specific requirements'. Only if relevant information is not available in these
documents, reference to relevant BIS code shall be made.
2.0
REFERENCED CODES, STANDARDS & PUBLICATIONS

For list of applicable codes, standards & publications, reference to Engineering Design Basis
(EDB) shall be made.
3.0
MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1
General
The minimum requirements of various materials to be used in Civil and Structural works are
as below:
3.2
Water
a)
Water used in construction for all Civil & Structural works shall be clean and free
from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalies, organic matters and/ or other harmful
substances which may be deleterious to concrete, masonry or steel. The p11 value of
water sample shall not be less than 6. Potable water will be considered satisfactory.
All requirements of IS:456 have to be met.
b.)
Tests on water samples shall be carried out in accordance with IS:3025 and these shall
fulfil all the guidelines and requirements given in IS:456.
Page 1051 of 1744
(Mn,a) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Boot of India Undedalong,
c)
Aggregate (for Concrete)
3.3.1
General
3.3.3
3.3.4
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 5 of 14
Water for curing shall be of the same quality as used for concreting and masonry
works.
3.3
3.3.2
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
a)
Coarse and Fine aggregates for Civil and Structural Works shall conform in all
respects to IS:383 (Specification for Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural
Sources for Concrete). Aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source known
to produce the same satisfactorily. Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring
(crushed or uncrushed) stones, gravel and sand or a combination thereof. These shall
be chemically inert, hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins, adherent
coatings, injurious amounts of alkalies, vegetable matter and other deleterious
substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale, sea shells etc.
b)
Aggregates which may chemically react with alkalies of cement or might cause
corrosion of the reinforcement shall not be used.
c)
The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in the aggregates as determined in

accordance with IS:2386 Part II (Methods of Test For Aggregates for Concrete), shall
not exceed the limits defined in IS:383.
Coarse Aggregates
a)
Coarse aggregates are the aggregates, which are retained on 4.75 mm IS Sieve. It
shall have a specific gravity not less than 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis).
b)
These may be obtained from crushed or uncrushed gravel or stone and may be
supplied as single sized or graded. The grading of the aggregates shall be as per
1S:383 or as required by the mix design, to obtain densest possible concrete.
Fine Aggregates
a)
Fine aggregates are the aggregates which pass through 4.75 mm IS sieve but not
more than ten percent (10%) pass through 150 micron IS sieve. These shall comply
with the requirements of grading zones I, II and III of IS:383. Fine aggregates
conforming to grade zone IV shall not be used for reinforced concrete works.
b)
Fine aggregates shall consist of material resulting from natural disintegration of rock
and which has been deposited by streams or glacial agencies, or crushed stone sand
or gravel sand. Sand from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides, shall not
be used for filling or concrete works.
Sampling and Testing

The Contractor shall carry out all tests including mix designs of concrete, at the start of
work as well as during any stage of construction as per the requirement. Tests shall be
carried out in accordance with IS:516 (Methods of Test for Strength of Concrete) and
IS:2386 (Methods of Test For Aggregates for Concrete). The method of sampling shall be
in accordance with the requirements given in IS:2430.
3.3.5
Storage of Aggregates
a)
Storage of all types of aggregates at the site of work shall be as specified in 1S:4082.
Aggregates shall in no case be stored near excavated earth or directly over ground
surface.
b)
Fine aggregates delivered at the site in wet condition or becoming wet due to rain or
any other means, shall not be used for at least 24 hours. For the use of such
aggregates the contractor shall adjust the water content in accordance with IS:2386 to
achieve the desired mix.
ogilfai56 ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
R(l
Govl ,PI IrOki Undertaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
3.4
Sand (for Masonry & Filling)
3.4.1
Sand for Masonry Mortars
Page 1052 of 1744
3.4.2
Page 6 of 14
The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand,
manufactured sand or a combination of any of these. The sand shall be hard, durable,
clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the
amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified in IS:2116.
b)
The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts,
coal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft
fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the
hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.
c)
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the
sand, when tested in accordance with IS:2386, shall not be more than 5% by mass in
natural sand, or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand or manufactured sand. For
organic impurities, when determined in accordance with IS:2386, colour of the liquid
shall be lighter than that indicated by the standard solution specified in IS:2386.
Grading of Sand
The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as
specified below:
IS Sieve Designation
(IS:460 Part-1)
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
b)
3.4.4
6-68-0022
Rev.0
a)
a)
3.4.3
Percentage Passing
(by mass)
100
90 to 100
70 to 100
40 to 100
5 to 70
0 to 15
Reference to method
(IS:2386 Part-1)
In case of sand whose grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or
deficiency of coarse or fine particles, this shall be processed to comply with the
standard by screening through a suitably sized sieve and/ or blending with required
quantities of suitable sizes of natural sand particles or crushed stone screening which
are by themselves unsuitable. The various sizes of particles of which the sand is
composed shall be uniformly distributed throughout the mass.

a)
The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS:2430. The amount of material
required for each test shall be as specified in relevant parts of IS:2386. All tests shall
be carried out in accordance with the relevant parts of IS:2386.
b)
If further confirmation as to the satisfactory nature of the material is required,

compressive test on cement mortar cubes (1:6) may be made in accordance with
IS:2250 using the supplied material in place of standard sand and the strength value
so obtained shall be compared with that of another mortar made with a sand of
acceptable and comparable quality.
Sand for Filling

Sand for tilling shall meet the requirements of IS:383 and shall he natural sand or
manufactured sand, hard, strong, free from any organic and deleterious materials. Sand
obtained from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides shall not be used for
filling. Fine aggregates suitable for concreting works shall be suitable for filling also. No
sand below grading zone-III as per IS:383 shall be allowed for filling.
Page 1053 of 1744
e,r-o;)
ENGINEERS
5fgZir idfirdg 'OW INDIA LIMITED
[A l9v1
1771,-.1 ,1,1/2
3.5
111
India lindontakIng)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 7 of 14
Cement
Cement shall be as specified in the Engineering Design Basis.
3.6
Steel
3.6.1
General
All steel bars, sections, plates, and other miscellaneous steel materials, etc. shall be free
from loose mill scales, rust as well as oil, mud, paint or other coatings. The materials,
construction specifications such as dimensions, shape, weight, tolerances, testing etc, for all
materials covered under this section, shall conform to respective BIS codes.
3.6.2
Reinforcement Bars
Reinforcement shall be TMT (Thermo-mechanically treated) bars of minimum Grade
Fe500D (unless specified otherwise in the EDB/ Job Specifications), conforming to IS:1786
and bearing standard mark of the Bureau of Indian Standards.
Corrosion protection to reinforcement bars, if any shall be as specified in the EDB/ Job
Specification.
3.6.3
Structural Steel
Structural Steel shall be of minimum Grade E250A/E250B (unless specified otherwise in the
EDB/ Job Specifications) conforming to IS:2062 and bearing standard mark of the Bureau
of Indian Standards, excluding bars and rods of diameter/ thickness less than 6 mm and
structural (angle) below ISA 50x50x6.
3.6.4
Miscellaneous Steel Materials

Miscellaneous steel materials shall conform to the following BIS codes:
IS:412
a) Specification for Expanded Metal Steel Sheets for General Purposes
b) Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars and Hard-Drawn Steel Wire for IS:432
Concrete Reinforcement
c) Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws and Nuts of Product Grade 'C' Part 1 : IS:1363
Hexagon Head Bolts
IS:811
d) Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections.
e) Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
IS:1367
IS:2016
Plain washers
IS:2266
g) Steel wire ropes for general engineering purposes
h) Thimbles for wire ropes.
IS:2315
IS:2361
i) Bulldog grips
IS:1239
j) Mild Steel Tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fillings
1S:2485
k) Drop forged sockets for wire ropes for general engineering purposes
I) Steel chequered plates.
IS:3502
3.6.5
Connection Bolts
Connection bolts shall be FISFG (High Strength Friction Grip) bolts of minimum Property
Class 8.8, material and installation shall comply to requirements of 1S:3757 and IS:4000
respectively. The acceptable methods of tightening the bolts in order of preference are listed
below:
a)
"Automatic Torque Control" where tightening is by a torque control impact wrench

with automatic cut-off, calibrated to shut off at the desired bolts tension.
b)
"Stall Torque Control" where tightening is by a standard impact wrench, calibrated by

regulation of air pressure to "stall" at the desired bolt tension.
Page 1054 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
51g-ar til51-"
eg
1.1,7 ii-01,M1.3,1,-1.,
IA. Govt of
Undeffalong)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 8 of 14
c)
"Turn-of Nut" where tightening is by a standard impact wrench, by turning the nut 1/2
to 1/4 turn beyond the "snug" position. The snug position is that position where the
wrench begins to impact.
d)
"Manual Torque Control" where tightening is by hand wrench equipped with a torque
indicator and calibrated for the desired bolt tension.
All the bolts in a joint shall be tightened to a minimum tension value as per Table 3 of
IS:4000.
Properties of Bolt Class 4.6 wherever specified shall conform to IS:1367. Black hexagonal
nuts and washers wherever specified shall be as per IS:1363.
3.6.6
Anchor Bolts
Material for Anchor Bolts such as bars, washers, nuts, pipe sleeves and plates etc. shall be
as per relevant BIS codes mentioned in the EDB.
3.7
Brick
3.7.1
General
a)
All masonry' works shall be designed in accordance with IS:1077, IS:1905, IS:1597,
IS:2185, IS:4326, IS:12894 and other relevant IS Codes as applicable.
b)
Brick masonry shall be of Class 5.0 as per IS:1077.
c)
All external brick masonry walls shall be of minimum 230 mm thickness (except for
fire walls).
3.8
Stone
3.8.1
General
All Stones used for masonry works shall conform to the requirements of following BIS
codes:
a)
b)
c)
3.8.2
Method of identification of natural building stones

Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of
natural building stones for masonry work
Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones
IS:1123
IS:1127
IS:1129
Quality of Stones
d)
Stones shall be hard, dense, strong, sound, durable, clean and uniform in colour.
These shall also be free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amounts of alkalies,
vegetable matters and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite,
mica, sea shells etc. As far as possible, stones from one single quarry shall be used for
any one work. The strength of stones should be adequate to carry the imposed load
and shall meet all the requirements of IS:1905, taking into account the appropriate
crushing strength of stone and type of the mortar used. The percentage of water
absorption, when tested in accordance with IS:1124, shall not exceed 5%.
e)
The length of the stone shall not exceed 3 times the height. Width of stone on base
shall not be less than 1 50 mm and in no case exceed -1/4th thickness of the wall. Height
of the stone shall not be more than 300 mm.
3.9
Admixtures
3.9.1
General Requirements
a)
All concrete admixtures shall comply with the following Indian standards:
Page 1055 of 1744
Ail.v ENGINEERS
oot
Oga taitr,*ar INDIA LIMITED
ih Govt of India Undeltalong)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 9 of 14
i.
Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds
IS:2645
ii.
Specification for other admixtures for concrete
IS:9103
In case of non-availability of any IS code for testing and acceptability criteria,

relevant American, British or German Code shall be applicable.
3.9.2
b)
No admixture shall impair the durability of the concrete nor combine with the
ingredients to form harmful compounds, nor increase the risk of corrosion of
reinforcement. Use of admixtures shall not reduce the dry density of concrete. Once
the proportion of admixtures has been established, strict check shall be maintained
not to alter the proportions of ingredients and water-cement ratio of the Design Mix
during execution.
c)
The chloride contents in admixtures shall not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture or
0.03% by mass of the cement.
d)
Admixtures which do not meet the requirements stipulated in this document shall not
be used.
Corrosion Inhibiting Admixtures

Bipolar Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture (CPCIA) shall be added to
the concrete matrix for protection of embedded steel in concrete against corrosion.
The CPCIA shall be concrete penetrating type which upon addition into the concrete matrix
inhibits the corrosion process. It need not be in direct contact with the steel. Its vapour
penetrate through fissures, honeycomb structure of concrete, pure water solution added in
concrete and seals steel reinforcement at both anodic & cathodic sites, for inhibition. This is
due to the bipolar mechanism property of the system.
Non-concrete penetrating, nitrite & nitrate corrosion inhibitors shall not be used.
The dosage shall be 1% by weight of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer.
In case the product is not as per the "List of Approved Products for use in Civil Structural
Works", the same shall be got approved by the Owner/ Owner's representative.
3.9.3
3.10
Water Proofing Compounds (Crystalline/ Non-crystalline)

a)
The permeability of the specimen with the admixture shall be less than half of the
permeability with a similar specimen without the use of these compounds. These
compounds shall be used in such proportion as recommended by manufacturer but in
no case it shall exceed 3% by weight of cement.
b)
The initial setting time of the cement with the use of these compounds shall not be
less than 30 minutes and final setting time shall not be more than 10 hours. Tests
shall be carried out in accordance with 1S:4031.
c)
Compressive strength of the specimen at 3 days shall not be less than 160 kg/cm2 nor
80% of the 3 days compressive strength of mortar cubes prepared with same cement
and sand only, whichever is higher. Similarly compressive strength at 7 days shall not
be less than 220 kg/cm' nor less than 80% of the 7 days compressive strength
prepared with the same cement and sand only, whichever is higher. The test to
determine the compressive strength shall conform to IS:403 I .
Water Bars (Water Stops)

a)
PVC water bars shall be used in reinforced concrete construction of liquid retaining
structures or any other structure to safeguard them from hydrostatic pressure and
water leakage and any relative movement between two parts of the structure due to
thermal loading shrinkage or differential movement of foundations. These shall be
Format No 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 1056 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(:ot nt (nitia Undertaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 10 of 14
preformed and shall provide a permanent water tight seal along the entire joint in the
poured concrete structures. These shall also be flexible enough to withstand
deflection/ displacements at joints arising due to variation of temperatures or
settlement of foundations.
Performance requirements of PVC water bars shall meet the requirements of
IS:12200. These shall be of an approved make and of ribbed/ serrated/ plain type with
a bulb at the centre. The thickness and width of water bars shall in no case be less
than 5 mm and 150 mm respectively. However, for concrete sections greater than 300
mm thick, the width of water bars shall not be less than 230 mm.
b)
3.11
Bitumen/ Bituminous Materials

Bitumen to be used for various types of work shall meet all the requirements of relevant
BIS codes as given below:
IS:73
Specification of Paving Bitumen
Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring.(Grade IV)
IS:1195
IS:1322
Specification for Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp proofing
Specification for Bituminous compounds for water proofing and IS:1834
caulking purposes
V. Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete IS:1838
pavements and structures
vi. Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water proofing of roofs
IS:3037
vii Specification for bitumen primer for use in water proofing and damp IS:3384
proofing
IS:5871
vii Specification for Bitumen Mastic for Tanking and Damp proofing
IS:7193
ix. Specification for Glass fibre base coal tar pitch & bitumen felts
IS:7198
x. Code of practice for damp proofing using bitumen mastic
xi. Specification for bitumen Mastic, Anti Static and electrically conducting IS:8374
grade
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Tests and acceptable criteria shall be as per relevant BIS codes.

3.12
PVC Pipes
PVC Pipes shall conform to the requirements of IS:4985.
3.13
Wood/ Timber
a)
Wood recommended for platforms of cold vessels or below cold vessels/ exchangers
shall be hard and shall be of group A, grade I, and shall have safe permissible stress of
7 N/mm' in compression, perpendicular to grains on outside location as per IS:883.
General characteristics like durability, treatability etc. shall conform to IS:883 and
IS:3629.
b)
Timber required to be used for form work shall be fairly dry before use. It should
maintain its shape during the use and even when it comes into contact with moisture
from the concrete. Storage of Wood/ Timber shall be as per the requirements of
IS:4082.
c)
For proper identification and selection of suitable timber for form work, following
codes shall be referred.
i. Classification of commercial timbers & their zonal distribution
ii. Specification for ballies for general purposes
iii.Specification for Ply wood for concrete shuttering work
IS:399
1S:3337
IS:4990
Page 1057 of 1744
(4701,
- ENGINEERS
p*
dgal OW-eg -\-w INDIA LIMITED

Ih Govt pit India Undettaking)
3.14
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 11 of 14

Grade of solid and hollow concrete block masonry units shall be as follows:
a) Solid concrete blocks
b) Hollow concrete blocks
: Grade C(5.0)
: Grade A(5.5) closed cavity
The nominal dimensions (length, height & width), density & compressive strength of solid
& hollow concrete block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS:2185 (Part-1)
corresponding to the above mentioned grades.
Concrete block masonry of following thicknesses shall preferably be used:
a) 100 mm thickness
b) 200 mm thickness
c) 400 mm thickness (fire walls)
3.15
: Solid concrete block masonry

: Hollow concrete block (closed cavity) masonry
: Hollow concrete block (closed cavity) masonry
FaL-G Masonry
Pulverise Fuel Ash Lime Gypsum (commonly known as FaL-G) units shall be of Class 5 as
per IS:12894, however quantity of Gypsum (80% purity tested as per IS:1288) shall be 5%.
The nominal dimensions (length, height & width), density & compressive strength of FaLG block masonry units shall be in conformance to IS:12894 corresponding to the above
mentioned class.
FaL-G masonry of using modular units shall be of 180 mm thickness.
3.16
Anti-termite Compounds
Chloropyrifos emulsifiable concentrates (1%) conforming to IS:8944 shall be used for
treatment of soil for protection of buildings against attack by subterranean termites.
3.17
Poly-sulphide Sealants
All Poly-sulphide Sealants shall conform to IS:12118. Test conditions and requirements
shall be as given in the above referred BIS code.
4.0
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
4.1
Construction
4.1.1
All concrete works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS:456, IS:3370, IS:2974 and
other relevant BIS Codes. Concrete mix proportioning and design mix; sampling and
strength test of concrete, production and control of concrete, tolerances and placing of
reinforcement and for cover; transporting, placing, compacting and curing etc, inspection
and testing of structure (including requirement of non-destructive testing) shall be as
specified in IS:456.
4.1.2
Continuous concreting shall be clone for structures supporting dynamic equipment as per the
provisions of IS:2974.
4.1.3
The damp proof course shall be laid in two layers of equal thickness and each layer given
two coats of hot bitumen on top (grade VG 10 conforming to IS:73) at the rate of 1.7 kg/m2.
Dry sharp sand shall be sprinkled evenly over the top layer of bitumen before hardening.
4.1.4
Form work and stripping of form work shall be as per the provisions of IS: 456.
Page 1058 of 1744
(oz-14 ENGINEERS
lear fafift INDIA LIMITED
IA Goa rn 111010 Undegakingl
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 12 of 14
4.1.5
Only steel shuttering shall be used for civil construction.
4.1.6
Assembly of reinforcement in RCC structures shall conform to IS:456.
4.1.7
Fabrication of all structural steel works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS: 800/
IS:801/ IS:802/ IS:806 and other relevant BIS codes. Fabrication shall include cleaning,
straightening, cutting, bending, holding, bolting, welding, machining, painting, marking,
assembling, erecting, inspecting and testing etc. Welding procedure and welder qualification
shall be as per IS: 800 and/ or referenced BIS codes only.
4.1.8
Erection of all structural steel works including supply of plant & equipment, storing and
handling, setting out, field connections, field welding and security during erection shall
conform to IS:800/ IS:801/ IS:802/ IS:806.
4.1.9
All masonry works shall be carried out as per the provisions of IS:1597/ IS:2185/ IS:2212/
IS:4326 and other relevant BIS codes.
4.1.10
Construction of all other items of works shall conform to relevant Indian Standards and
sound engineering practices.
4.1.11
The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete safety pertaining to all construction
works.
4.2
Tolerances
4.2.1
The limits of dimensional tolerances for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete Structures
shall be as follows:
a.
Deviation from specified dimensions of cross section of -6 mm to +12 mm

columns and beams
b.
Deviation from dimensions of footings (refer note

below)
i.
Dimensions in plan
ii.
Eccentricity
iii.
Thickness
-12 mm to +50 mm
0.02 times the width
of footing in the
direction of deviation
but not more than 50
mm
0.05 times the
specified thickness
Note: Tolerances apply to cast-in-situ concrete dimensions

only, not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel or dowels.
c.
d.
e.
Deviation in length (major dimension of single unit)

i. Up to 3.0m
ii. 3.0m to 4.5m
iii. 4.5m to 6.0m
iv. additional deviation for every' subsequent 6m
6mm
9 min
12 mm
+ 6mm
Deviation in straightness or bow (deviation from

specified line) for a single or continuous member), e.g,
beam, column or slab edge:
i. tip to 3.0m
ii. 3.0m to 4.5m
iii. 4.5m to 6.0m
iv. additional deviation for every subsequent 6m
6 mm
9 mm
12 mm
6 mm
Deviation in squareness shall be measured taking the longer of two adjacent sides
as the base line. The shorter side shall not vary in its distance from a

5-1
11aelti. 4111* ENGINEERS
51g-ar fdfii-eg fots
INDIA LIMITED
NRT-1 were muyurH~
ovt ov Indla ndettaking)
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 13 of 14
perpendicular so that the difference between the greatest and shortest dimensions
exceeds 6mm. For this purpose, any error due to lack of straightness shall be
ignored. Squareness shall be checked with respect to the straight lines that are
most nearly parallel with the features being checked. When the nominal angle is
other than 90 degrees, the included angle between check lines shall be varied
accordingly.
f.
Deviation in twists shall be within a limit such that any corner shall not be more
than the limit given below from the plane containing other three corners:
i. Up to 600min wide and up to 6m in length : 6 mm
ii. over 600mm wide and for any length
: 12 mm
g.
Maximum deviation in flatness from a 1.5 m straight edge placed in any position
on a nominally plain surface shall not exceed 6mm.
42.2
The limits of dimensional tolerances for Steel Structures shall be as follows:
4.2.2.1
For columns and tower-type structures:

a.
Deviation of column axes at foundation top level

with respect to true axes
i.
In longitudinal direction
+5
ii.
In lateral direction
Deviation in the level of bearing surface of +5
columns at foundation top with respect to true level
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Out of plumb (verticality) of column axis from true

vertical axis, as measured at top
i.
Up to and including 30m height
lesser of H/1000 or 25mm
ii.
Over 30m height
lesser of +H/1200 or +35mm
Deviation in straightness in longitudinal & lesser of +H/1000 or +10mm
transverse planes of column at any point along the
height
Difference in the erected positions of adjacent pairs +5 mm
of columns along length or across width of building
prior to connecting trusses/ beams with respect to
true distance
Deviation in any bearing or seating level with +5 mm
respect to true level Up to 600mm wide and up to
6111 in length
Deviation in difference in bearing levels of a +5mm
member on adjacent pair of columns both across &
along the building
Notes:
I. Tolerance specified for out-ofplumbness should he read in conjunction with
Deviation in straightness.... ' & 'Difference in the erected positions.... '.
'II' is the column height in ',mi.
3. Tolerance limits as given under clause 4.2.2.1 above for steel structures are
applicable to concrete columns/ pedestals also.
4.1.2 1Trusses
a.
b.
Shift at the centre of span of top chord member

with respect to the vertical plane passing through
the centre of bottom chord
Lateral shift of top chord of truss at the centre of
span from the vertical plane passing through the

Page 1059 of 1744
+1/250 of height of truss in mm at

centre of span or 1 S mm,
whichever is less
+1/1500 of span of truss in mm or
10 mm, whichever is less
Page 1060 of 1744
z~r fairez--
03411,,) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1A (Awl 11 India llotlertaktrop
c.
d.
e.
4.2.2.3
centre of supports of the truss

Lateral shift in location of truss from its true
position
Lateral shift in location of purlin from true position
Deviation in difference of bearing levels of truss
from the true level
6-68-0022
Rev.0
Page 14 of 14
+10 mm
+5 mm
+1 /1200 of span of truss in mm or
20mm, whichever is less
Gantry girders and Rails

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.3
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL
LSTK WORKS
Shift in the centre line of crane rail with respect to [web thickness of
centre line of web of gantry girder
girder(mm)+2mm] / 2
Shift of alignment of crane rail (in plan) with 15m m
respect to true axis of crane rail at any point
Deviation in crane track gauge with respect to true
gauge
i.
For track gauge up-to and including 15m
mm
ii.
For track gauge more than 15m
45+0.25(S-15)] subject to
maximum +10 mm, where S in
metres is true gauge
Difference in level between crane track rails
(across the bay) at
i.
Supports of gantry girders
15 mm
ii.
Mid span of gantry girders
20 mm
Relative shift of crane rail surfaces (at joint) in plan
2 mm
and elevation
Hanger Scaffolding for Pipe Rack

Hanger scaffolding (fixed/ movable) shall be provided in the pipe rack to facilitate
mechanical works over the first tier & above. The same shall provide protection from falling
material as well as act as a safe working platform. This shall be provided about one meter
below the entire pipe rack first tier elevation.
The scaffolding shall be light weight, easy to remove when the work is complete. The deck
planks may be perforated sheets suitably folded at the ends and open web ladder type of
beams may be used to support them. These beams shall be supported on the hangers
provided from the beams of the pipe rack.
The design load under the working condition shall be 120 kg/m- and that for the limit state
of collapse shall be twice the same. However individual panel shall be designed for the
concentrated loads of 120 kg at spacing of 1 m and double that load for the limit state of
collapse.
Deflection of individual planks shall be maximum span/100. For the beam, the deflection
shall he controlled as per 1S:800-2007.
The design shall be supported by the properly testing of the checking for the specified loads.
After completion of work over the pipe rack, the contractor shall remove the hanging
scaffolding from the pipe rack and take back the scaffolding material.
Sitiazi
PASSIVE FIREPROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(HYDROCARBON POOL FIRE)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
212Zfire ..3457,
17
A Govt of IntAa UntlettakIngt
-111ch
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 1 of 16
"trITOn 7-4
Wrzi
CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
-,111
firwr afT9.449.
(111c:r)1611-1 TOTruff aT179)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
TITLE REVISED, UPDATED & REISSUED

AS SPECIFICATION
23.09.2013
23.06.2010 REVISED & REISSUED AS SPECIFICATION
02.05.2001
Rev.
No
Date
UPDATED & REISSUED AS

SPECIFICATION
Purpose
AJS
OY
l
3)41k
PKM
SC
DM
VK
ND
YPC
PKM
SC
RPM
SKP
SCJ
Prepared
by
MI
Standards
Checked Committee
by
Convenor
GM
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1061 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Llei
Igar tafgrdg
,12,
7,171,,F11
CA Govt of Indy UncleFtakogi
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 2 of 16
Abbreviations:
AS
:
ASTM :
BS
DFT
IS
OISD :
UL
QAP
Australian Standard
British Standard
Dry Film Thickness
Indian Standards
Oil Industry Safety Directorate
Underwriters' Laboratory
Quality Assurance Plan
Structural Standards Committee

Convenor :
Mr. P.K. Mittal
Members :
Mr. S.Debnath (Geotech)

Mr. P.J. Singh
Mr. Rajanji Srivastava
Mr. Samir Das (Architectural)
Mr. V.S. Chhaya (Projects)
Mr . Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
Special Invitees:
Mr. P.P. Lahiri (SMMS)
Mr. Prasenjit Saha (SMMS)

Page 1062 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undeftalong)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 3 of 16
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
.4
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
DESIGN BASIS
4.0
FIREPROOFING SYSTEM AND MATERIALS
5.0
SURFACE PREPARATION
6.0
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROOFING
7.0
APPLICATION METHOD
8.0
SCAFFOLDING & FORM WORK
10
9.0
FINISHING AND JOINT SEALING
10
10.0
TESTING REQUIREMENTS
10
11.0
PAYMENT
11
ANNEXURES
ATTACHMENT

Page 1063 of 1744
12-15
..16
k31
fg-Tx id5teg
14iRR
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Go vi of India Undeitaking)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 4 of 16
1.0 SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements of passive fire protection of external steel
structures against hydrocarbon pool fire. Structural steel members shall be fire proofed for 2
hours such that the protected steel substrate temperature shall be restricted to 538C, whereas in
case of equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports the steel temperature shall be restricted to 427C.
Following fireproofing materials and systems have been covered in this standard:
a) Type-I : In-situ cement concrete of minimum M30 Grade (for application up to 1.8m
from grade level for steel structures)
b) Type-II: Spray applied vermiculite based lightweight cementitiuos concrete (for application
above 1.8m of grade level for steel structures)
c) Type-Ill: Spray applied vermiculite based lightweight cementitiuos concrete (for application
over equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports)
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
UL 1709: Rapid Rise Fire Tests of Protection of Structural Steel

OISD-STD-164 : Fireproofing of Steel Supporting Structures in Oil & Gas Industry
NORSOK Standard M-501
Relevant ASTM Standards like ASTM C177, ASTM D790, ASTM D2240, ASTM E605,
ASTM E736, ASTM E760, ASTM E761, ASTM E84, ASTM E859, ASTM E937, ASTM
G21, etc.
Relevant BIS Standards like IS:383, IS:412, IS:455, 1S:456, IS:1367, IS:1489 (Part-I),
IS:1566, IS:2062. 1S:2585, IS:8112, IS:9103, IS:12269, IS:12330, etc.
Relevant British Standards like BS-8110, etc.
EIL Specification for Plain and Reinforced Cement Concrete No. : 6-68-0004
EIL Specification for Self Compacting Concrete No. : 6-68-0019
DESIGN BASIS
Fire resistance of a material is defined by fire rating, evaluated through a fire test based on
applied thickness and time taken to reach the defined critical steel temperature. Fire rating
adopted in the present standard is based on UL-1709 rapid rise fire tests of protection materials
for structural steel, conducted by Underwriters Laboratory, USA. In this test, fire resistance of a
material is evaluated on a W10x49 steel column as per UL-1709 fire curve and fire rating is
published in a UL design number under XR category for thickness and time. In addition to the
fire rating, under this test, material for exterior use is also evaluated for accelerated ageing, high
humidity, salt spray, wet-freeze-dry cycling, acid spray, solvent spray etc.
3.1 Fireproofing Thickness

Thickness of fireproof coating to be applied shall be based on the following:
a) Type-I : In-situ cement concrete for application up to 1.8m from grade level for steel
structures shall be applied with minimum 65mm thickness.
b) Type-II : Structural steel members such as column, beam etc. which shall be protected for 2
hours from reaching critical temperature 538C, shall be applied with vermiculite
based lightweight cementitious fireproof of thickness corresponding to 2 hours
fire rating as per respective UL design number under UL-1709 (XR category)
subject to a minimum of 30mm.
Page 1064 of 1744
eit4
051-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov( of India Undertaking
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 5 of 16
c) Type-III : For equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports (which shall be protected for 2 hours from
reaching critical temperature 427C), 2 hours fire rating as per UL design is not
adequate as the UL-1709 test is based on 538C critical temperature. Therefore for
the required fire protection from reaching 427C, higher thickness shall be
necessary. For this, fireproof thickness corresponding to 3 hours fire rating as per
respective UL design number under UL-1709 (XR category) shall be adopted
subject to a minimum of 30mm.
4.0
FIREPROOFING SYSTEM AND MATERIALS

All materials to be used shall conform to the requirements of UL-1709/ respective BIS codes/
respective acceptance criteria (as applicable). Materials shall meet the minimum acceptance
criteria given under this section. Samples, test results and approval certificates for all materials
shall be submitted and got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge before execution of work.
a) Vermiculite based lightweight cementitiuos fireproofing system shall have following
compatible components:
Primer
Reinforcing system
Fireproof coating as per UL-1709
Curing
Water shed sealing at terminating edges/ metal joints
Weather barrier finish coat
b) In-situ cement concrete fireproofing system shall have following compatible components:
4.1
Primer
Reinforcing system
Cement concrete
Curing
Water shed sealing at terminating edges/ metal joints
Weather barrier finish coat
Vermiculite Based Lightweight Cementitious Fireproofing Material

Vermiculite based lightweight cementitious fireproof material shall be UL certified for UL-1709
(Rapid rise fire test of protection materials for structural steels), UL classified under XR
category and covered under UL follow up service (indicated by UL mark/ sticker on the
packing). For list of UL certified materials. UL website (www.ul.com) shall be referred. The
essential criteria for the material shall be:
a)
b)
c)
Must be UL-1709 certified having UL design number under XR category

Listed on UL website under specified category
Bear UL-1709 mark/ sticker on packing bags/ container
The material shall be factory-blended, supplied in single component pre-mixed dry form, nonflaking and non-dusting suitable for spray-application, with added mold and fungi inhibitor.
Material shall not contain asbestos & mineral wool and shall not contain more than 1% Sulphate
(expressed in SO3). The material shall be free from toxicity release when subjected to heat.
In addition to the UL-1709 certificate, the contractor shall supply test certificate covering the
information for the supplied batches of material as per Attachment-I.
Fire proofing materials shall be stored in well ventilated, dry place away from source of heat &
direct sunlight. Special storage requirements such as temperature, humidity, stacking height, etc.
as per manufacturer's specifications shall be ensured.
Page 1065 of 1744
05f-e'-g
17-11.eM cvemre as1J9gui,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indo Untletlaking)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 6 of 16
4.2 Reinforcement (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ concrete)
4.2.1 Expanded Metal Steel Sheet/ Lath
Expanded metal steel sheet shall conform to IS:412, galvanized (having minimum zinc coating
of 250 g/m2) and shall weigh minimum 1.84 Kg/m2. Size of the mesh shall be 4.5x13.5mm.
4.2.2 Wire Fabric
Welded wire fabric to be used as reinforcement, shall conform to IS:1566 and shall be post weld
hot dipped galvanized having minimum zinc coating of 250 g/in' of uncoated wire surface.
Mesh size shall be 50mmx5Omm and thickness of wire shall be 2mm (Minimum).
4.2.3 Attachments
a) Mild Steel Tie Wire
MS Tie wires shall be minimum 16 SWG and galvanized (having minimum zinc coating of
100 g/m2).
b) Mild Steel Nuts
MS Nuts shall conform to IS:1367 and IS:2585.
c) Cover plates
Cover plates shall conform to IS:2062 Grade-A/ BR.
d) Cover blocks
Cover blocks shall be prepared in cement coarse sand mortar (1:3) with minimum
50mmx50mm size of thickness equal to half of the fireproofing thickness with MS Tie wire
of sufficient length protruding from them for tying with the wire fabric.
4.3 Curing Compounds (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ concrete)
Membrane curing may be used in lieu of moist curing with the permission of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Such compounds shall be compatible and applied to all exposed surfaces by
spraying or brushing as soon as possible after the material has set. Minimum film thickness of
such curing compounds shall be as per the recommendation of the manufacturer so as to obtain
an efficiency of 90% as specified by BS-8110. This film of curing compound shall be fully
removed from the surface after the specified curing period.
4.4 Water Shed Sealing at Terminating Edges/ Metal Joints (for both Vermiculite based
cementitious and In-situ concrete)
All termination of the fireproofing and steel junctions shall be sealed by non-bituminous
polysulfide or silicon rubber mastic sealant. The sealing compound shall be compatible and
approved by fireproofing material supplier.
4.5 Weather Barrier Finish Coat (for both Vermiculite based cementitious and In-situ
concrete)
a) Sealer Coat
A sealer coat of epoxy polyamide shall be applied over the fireproofing surface as a base for
the finish coat. The sealing compound shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing
material supplier.
Page 1066 of 1744
el
5fgaf fa5teg
(H10 2)-A)a)r, ,n1.3nliwii
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov) Al India Undertaking)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES

6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 7 of 16
b) Finish Coat
The finish coat shall be pre-qualified for coating system No. 1 of NORSOK Standard
M-501. Two coats of acrylic elastomeric or polyurethane coating shall be used as finish
coat. The sealing compound shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing material
supplier.
4.6 Water
Water shall conform to the requirements of IS:456.

4.7 Materials for In-situ Concrete
4.7.1 Cement
Type of cement to be used shall be as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004.

Fireproofing of all structures in Sulphur handling units shall necessarily be by using Sulphate
resisting Portland cement conforming to IS:12330.
4.7.2 Aggregates
a) Fine aggregates (Sand)
Fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements specified in EIL Specification No.
6-68-0004. Sand conforming to Zone IV shall not be used.
b) Coarse aggregates
Coarse aggregates shall conform to the requirements specified in EIL Specification No.
6-68-0004. Maximum size of aggregates shall be lOmm.
4.7.3 Admixture
Admixture shall conform to IS:9103. The admixture shall be mixed with concrete strictly as per
manufacturer's recommendation and shall also meet the requirements of IS:456.
5.0 SURFACE PREPARATION
Before starting the work, the contractor shall furnish the information about fireproofing material
as detailed in Attachment-I.
5.1 Surface Cleaning
All steel surfaces to be in contact with the fire proofing coating material, shall be cleaned of all
oil, grease, loose rust, scales and dust by using wire brushing and washing using detergents.
5.2 Mesh Support System
5.2.1 Welding of Nuts and Application of Primer
MS Nuts of M10 dia bolts shall be welded only to the equipment skirts/legs, angles and box
sections to be fire proofed. Maximum spacing of nuts shall be 300mm centre to centre in
staggered fashion. Nuts shall not be welded to the equipment skirts (to be welded by equipment
fabricator); unless directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Primer paint shall be applied to the MS nuts
and affected surfaces of the members due to welding after proper cleaning. Primer paint shall be
compatible with the primer already applied to the steel members.
Page 1067 of 1744
taf51-1-dg
451 3,1,
11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 8 of 16
5.2.2 Placement of Cover Blocks

Cover blocks shall be tied with the wire fabric at 300mm centre to centre along the span and at
suitable locations along the periphery' of the member. The whole arrangement shall be placed
over the Metal sheet/ lath and shall be held in position with the help of MS Tie wires wrapped at
cover block locations. Cover blocks shall not be used over equipment skirts/legs, angles and box
sections.
5.3 Fixing of Expanded Metal Steel Sheet/ Lath
Page 1068 of 1744
Metal sheet shall be kept in position true to line and face, and shall be attached firmly to
structural steel member by tack welding or with the help of clips and MS Tie wire at 300mm
centre to centre. Minimum lap of 75mm shall be provided wherever required, however laps
shall be avoided at bends. Metal sheet shall be supported with 3mm thick stiffener at the centre
in case depth of steel section exceeds 600mm. These stiffeners shall be placed at 600mm c/c
(maximum). Strands of the expanded metal steel sheet shall slope inwards & downwards.
5.4 Placement of Wire Fabric
Wire fabric shall be placed in the middle of coated material thickness. It shall be bent
confirming with outlines of finished encasement and rigidly secured in place by tie wire with all
the nuts or the cover blocks as the case may be. Minimum lap at ends and sides shall be 100mm
and lapped wire fabric shall be tied firmly.
6.0 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROOFING
6.1 Vermiculite Based Cementitious Material

6.1.1 Vermiculite based cementitious coating material shall meet the design requirements as specified
under clause 3.0 & 4.0.
6.1.2 The coating shall be non corrosive to the steel members & shall not be affected by
environmental conditions, whether natural or from local leaks, spillage or pollution. It shall also
be asbestos free.
6.1.3 The coating shall be able to withstand both thermal shock and impingement of water from fire
hoses and/or monitors.
6.1.4 The coating material shall be durable and easily repairable.

6.1.5 Application procedure of the coating shall be easy, non hazardous and also shall not interfere
with the working of the adjoining areas.
6.2 In-situ Concrete
6.2.1 Concrete mixing and placing shall be done as per EIL specification No. 6-68-0004.
6.2.2 Steel structures shall be fire proofed with concrete up to a minimum height of 1.8m from grade
for protection against mechanical damage or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. A suitable
slope of about 30 shall be provided at the junction of concrete and vermiculite based
cementitious fireproofing material to avoid accumulation of water.
6.2.3 Concrete shall be poured into well made forms properly oiled and made to correct dimensions.
Concrete shall be vibrated as necessary to ensure smooth surface, free from voids and
irregularities. Any defects, honeycomb etc. shall be made good by contractor at his own cost.
af-aeley
Ogzir
41k-71 two., MI OTC,"
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Al India Undertaking]
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 9 of 16
6.2.4 Self Compacting Concrete (SCC) conforming to EIL Specification No. 6-68-0019 can also be
used which do not require vibrators.
Page 1069 of 1744
7.0 APPLICATION METHOD

a) Application of fire proofing material coating shall be carried out by skilled and experienced
applicators.
b) Before start of application, pipes and equipments in the vicinity shall be covered with
polythene/ tarpaulin to protect them against damage. Open end of pipes shall be covered
with wooden plugs or with other suitable shielding materials.
c) Steel sections shall be covered with metal steel sheet/ lath before application of fire proofing
material. For equipment skirts/ saddles/ supports, the coating material shall be applied in
horizontal bands working upwards from the bottom of skirts/ saddles/ supports base plate.
All outside edges of the fire proofing shall be champhered by 20mm (Refer relevant
Annexures).
d) Thickness of fire proof coating shall be established by providing ground wires both in
vertical and horizontal directions. Ground wires shall be tight and true to line, and placed in
such a manner that they can be further tightened if required.
e) The fire proofing material, after application, shall be cured by keeping it in moist condition
for atleast 7 days (or as per vendor requirement) or else the surface shall be coated with a
membrane of approved curing compound. Brand name, name of manufacturer, test results
and method of application shall be submitted to and got approved from the Engineer-inCharge prior to procurement of curing compound.
7.1 Specific Requirement for Vermiculite Based Cementitious Material
7.1.1 The contractor responsible for fireproofing application shall be certified by the fireproofing
material vendor. Further, the application crew shall be pre-qualified through a mock application
to establish their skill to meet desired quality parameters. Application tools and machineries
shall also be approved by the fireproofing material vendor. The mock-up shall be demonstrated
on a test surface resembling the actual application conditions to ascertain skill of the applicator.
Installation surface shall be inspected within one hour of application for any shrinkage/ gaps/
cracks. Incase defects observed, the mixture and the method of application shall be adjusted for
successful mock-up.
Parameters maintained in successful mock-up i.e. mixing time, application methods etc. shall be
followed during actual application.
7.1.2 Vermiculite based cementitious material shall be mixed with water on a clean platform or in a
clean mixing box or in a suitable mixer as per manufacturer's specification. Water cement ratio
shall be adjusted so that vermiculite based cementitious coating adheres properly to steel surface
and does not sag or slide upon application.
7.1.3 Primer compatible with the vermiculite based cementitious coating shall be applied over the
steel surface after cleaning the shop primer if required as per the manufacturer's specification. If
primer as per manufacturer specification is not available then inorganic/ organic zinc rich primer
shall be used and applied with minimum two coats @ 65-90 micron DFT per coat.
7.1.4 Mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating shall generally be applied, over the steel surface,
with the help of spray gun except for small areas and inaccessible location, where application
with conventional hand tools shall be permitted. Mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating
shall be used within the pot life specified by the manufacturer. Under no circumstance rebound
material shall be used.
'e-1
5igal oienfre
25teg
14O771
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Covl of India Lindeflaking)
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 10 of 16
7.1.5 Parameters like water quality, % water addition, wet density check at mixer discharge and spray
head, slump test and other operating parameters like air pressure etc. shall be checked during
application to ensure achievement of specified quality parameters.
Page 1070 of 1744
7.1.6 Minimum thickness of fire proofing coating as specified under clause 3.1 shall be maintained.
7.1.7 Application of mixed vermiculite based cementitious coating shall not be carried out if the air
temperature or the temperature of the surface to be fire proofed is 4C or less. Provision shall be
made for adequate ventilation during and after application, until the coating is dry.
7.1.8 All patching of damaged fireproofing work shall be done by the contractor certified by the
fireproofing material vendor.
8.0 SCAFFOLDING & FORM WORK
8.1 The Contractor shall arrange all approaches, scaffolding, stair ways, ladder, working platform
etc, for carrying out the entire works safely. The working area shall be neatly maintained and all
the facilities required by Engineer-in-Charge for proper supervision of the work shall be
provided. In case, any special precaution is needed for the safety of the structure till the
completion of application, the Contractor shall make and provide all such arrangement to the
complete satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall remove the same after completion of
works.
8.2 Form work shall be adequately supported and braced to protect against deformation on account
of vibration during the application. Forms shall be oiled, dampened and cleaned before use. All
other requirements pertaining to the form work shall be as per EIL specification No. 6-68-0004.
9.0 FINISHING AND JOINT SEALING
9.1 Weather Barrier Finish Coat
In-situ concrete/ Vermiculite based cementitious fireproof coating shall be protected from
weather damage by means of suitable coating. The weather barrier coat shall be applied after full
curing (after a gap of min 28 days) and drying of the fire proofing coating. A sealer coat of
epoxy polyamide @ 50-7511 DFT shall be applied over the fireproofing surface as a base for the
finish coat. The finish coat shall be UV resistant, suitable to withstand mechanical abrasion/ air
erosion, shall be pre-qualified for coating system No.1 of NORSOK Standard M-501. Two coats
of acrylic elastomeric or polyurethane coating shall be used as finish coat @ 100-125 DFT per
coat. Number of coats shall be increased in case desired DFT not achieved. The coating system
for finish coat shall be compatible and approved by fireproofing material vendor.
9.2 Water Shed Sealing at Terminating Edges/ Metal Joints
All termination of vermiculite based cementitious fireproofing and steel junctions shall be
sloped to shed water and sealed by non-bituminous polysulfide or silicon rubber mastic sealant
to prevent water ingress into the fireproofing from these joints. The sealing shall be applied by
cutting a U shaped groove approx 10mm deep and 10mm wide in to the fireproofing
immediately adjacent to the junction. The sealing compound shall be approved by fireproofing
material vendor.
10.0 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
10.1 For Vermiculite Based Cementitious Fireproof Coating
Test samples shall be taken during application of coating, which shall be tested for bulk density
and compressive strength as per applicable standards. Hardness of the finish surface after curing
shall be measured by Shore D Durometer.
Test results shall comply with the requirements as mentioned in Attachment-I.
Ogzir fai4feg
Page 1071 of 1744
1.100, e7ea40 Cif J40,11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov( of /flth..1 Uncieltakingi
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 11 of 16
10.2 For In-situ Concrete
Testing of specimens and their Acceptance criteria shall be as per EIL specification No.
6-68-0004.
11.0 PAYMENT
11.1 Payment shall be made on square metre (m2 ) basis measured at the periphery of the actual
finished work or as calculated from construction drawing whichever is less.
11.2 The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all labour, material, formwork, plant & tools etc. required
for the successful and satisfactory completion of work including curing, curing compound,
admixtures, all cleaning operations before and after the work, preparation of the surface as
specified, primer paint to MS nuts and affected surfaces of members due to welding and
applying the primer coat if recommend by the manufacturer compatible with the primer already
applied, finishing the surface smooth, painting the surface with sealer coat and weather barrier
finish coats & sealing the joints with sealing compounds, providing required access, working
platforms, props, scaffolding and other safety measures including their removal after
completion.
11.3 The rate shall also be inclusive of supplying and welding of nuts, wherever required on
Structural Steel and equipment skirts/ saddles/ legs/ supports and fixing of reinforcement with
nuts/ cover blocks by using tying wire, wrapping of tying wire around metal sheet for holding
the reinforcement over cover blocks, supplying and fixing of metal sheet/lath, wire fabric, cover
plates, stiffeners, cover blocks and other required accessories for satisfactory completion of the
work as specified and directed.
11.4 The rates quoted shall be inclusive of the tests specified and directed to establish the quality and
strength of materials.
$1g- ii fa51&
- g
(441,
!fl
.3tRNI)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undellaking,
INSULATION
(TYP.)
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONPASSIVE FIRE PROOFING

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
v4
STANDARD SPECIFICATION NO
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 12 of 16
ANNEXURE-1
TANGENT LINE
SUPPORT RING
(BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
M S NUTS WELD+ TO SKIRT
WATER SHED SEALING

ALROUND (TYP.)
REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
FIRE PROOF COATING

MATERIAL (TYP.)
TYPEA (INSULATED VESSEL)

INSULATION
(TYP.)
SUPPORT RING
TANGENT LINE
WATER SHED SEALING

ALROUND TYP.
M S NUTS WEIIDED TO SKIRT

BY VESSEL FABRICATOR)
30'
REINFORCEMENT (TYP.)
FIRE PROOF COATING
MATERIAL (TYP.)
TYPEB (INSULATED VESSEL)
/1
SUPPORT RING
TANGENT LINE

WATER SHED SEALING
ALROUND (TYP.)
30'
FIRE PROOF COATING
MATERIAL (TYP.)
M S NUTS WELDED TO SKIRT

REINFORCEMEIIT (TYP.)
TYPEC (UNINSULATED VESSEL)
DETAIL OF FIRE PROOFING FOR SKIRTS OF VESSELS

NOTES: 1. OPENING FOR MANHOLE, VENT PIPES ETC. ARE NOT SHOWN IN THIS DRAWING.
2. f INDICATE THE FIRE PROOFING COATING THICKNESS.
Fnrmat Nn R-nr1-01101-F1 RPV 0
Page 1072 of 1744
nnhvrinht Fli - All rinhts rpsprvprl
zi
Ifg211051
-eg
'
tam e1eDF

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t15139-07i

6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 13 of 16
ANNEXURE-2
INSULATION
INSULATION
b()
TANGENT
LINE
INSULATION
TANGENT
TANGENT
LEG SUPPORT
LINE
LEG SUPPORT LINE
TOP OF
M.S. PLATE
M.S. PLATE
M.S. PLATE
REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING COATING

MATERIAL TYP.
REINFORCEMENT
AJ
REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING
OATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
LEG SUPPORT
WATER SHED SEALING
ALROUND (TYP)
3N
2N
PIPE LEG
ANGLE (ISA) LEG
R.S.JOIST (ISMB) LEG
INSULATED VESSEL WITH LEG SUPPORT
TANGENT
TANGENT
LINE
LINE
REINFORCEMENT
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
TANGENT
LINE
REINFORCEMENT
COATING MATERIAL
(TYP.)
REINFORCEMENT
LEG SUPPORT
LEG SUPPORT
2N
R.S.JOIST (ISMB) LEG
PIPE LEG
ANGLE (ISA) LEG
UNINSULATED VESSEL WITH LEG SUPPORT

REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
VESSEL SHELL
M.S. NUTS
(TYP)
FIRE PROOFING COATING

MATERIAL TYP
(TYP.)
SECTION 1 1
Format Nn e-on-ooni-F1 RPv
Page 1073 of 1744
SECTION 2-2
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
SECTION 3-3
Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvrl

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Igaitrag
crire-n efeamedstarekru
IA Goof of India Undertaking)

6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 14 of 16
ANNEXURE-3
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
COVER BLOCKS
COVER BLOCKS
EXPANDED METAL
STEEL SHEET
ow
II
3THK STIFFENER FOR

MEMBER DEPTH >600
0 600c/c
[ISECTIONS]
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
[CHANNELS]
EXPANDED METAL
STEEL SHEET
REINFORCEMENT
COVER BLOCKS
STAR COLUMN WITH I SECTIONS
ANGLE BRACING
DOUBLE ANGLE BRACING
CHANNEL BOX
FULLY ENCASED STEEL SECTION
Frwmat Nr, Fk-na-nnol-F1 Rpv
Page 1074 of 1744
norwrinht Fl) - All rinhts rpsprvpri
ENGINEERS
1 Elf5leb-w INDIA LIMITED
4-IER erearle 05139-0.1)

OF STEEL STRUCTURES

6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 15 of 16
ANNEXURE -4
6THK COVER PLATE

(TYP.)
REINFORCEMENT
(TYP.)
w
1:1
3THK STIFFENER FOR

MEMBER DEPTH >600
0 600c/c
FIRE PROOFING
COATING MATERIAL
WATER SHED
SEALING
(TYP.)
EXPANDED METAL
STEEL SHEET
tf
COVER BLOCKS
COVER BLOCKS
3THK STIFFENER FOR
MEMBER DEPTH >600
0 600c/c
[FOR CHANNELS]
[FOR ISECTIONS]
STEEL SECTION WITH TOP FLANGE EXPOSED

BEAM SECTIONS
FIRE PROOFING COATING MATERIAL

REINFORCEMENT
EXPANDED METAL STEEL SHEET
COVER BLOCKS
tf
tf
3THK STIFFENER FOR

MEMBER DEPTH >600
0 600c/c
COVER BLOCKS
FIRE PROOFING FOR BUILTUP SECTIONS
Fnrmat No
Page 1075 of 1744
RPV n
Cnnur nht Fll - All rinhts rpservprl
$14-ar 25teg
Page 1076 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go11 of India Undertaking)
PASSIVE FIRE PROOFING
OF STEEL STRUCTURES
6-68-0033 Rev.7
Page 16 of 16
ATTACHMENT-I
A) FIREPROOFING MATERIAL DATA TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR TO
SPECIFY
Primer to be used brand name, datasheet, application procedure

Finish coat system including sealer coat brand name, datasheet,
application procedure
Sealing compound details brand name, datasheet, application
procedure
Method statement for application
QAP for site quality control
B) FIREPROOFING MATERIAL TEST CERTIFICATE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
LIMITING
VALUES
STANDARDS
UL 1709
kg/m3
kg/m3
kg/cm2
kg/cm2
kPa
W/mK
gm/mm2
gm/mm2
400
700-800
25-40
20-25
500
Pass
40 min
0.19
0
0
0
0
Pass
<1%
ASTM E605
ASTM E761
ASTM D790
ASTM E736
ASTM E760
ASTM D2240
ASTM C177
ASTM E84
ASTM E84
ASTM E859
ASTM E937
ASTM G21
UNIT
Material brand name
UL design number
Manufacturer's certificate of
authorization submitted (in
case application by a
contractor other than
fireproofing material vendor)
Fireproofing material is
covered under UL follow up
service (products having UL
mark/ sticker on packing)
Loose material density
Applied dry density
Compressive Strength
Flexural strength
Bond Strength
Bond Impact
Hardness (Shore-D) 28 days
Thermal conductivity at 20C
Flame spread
Smoke development
Air erosion
Corrosion
Fungal Resistance
Sulphate content
(S03%)
CONTRACTOR
TO SPECIFY
XR
Date :
(Contractor's signature with seal)
Page 1077 of 1744
aarn 122
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
51
IA Govt of India Undertak.ng)

HEALTH, SAFETY &
ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 87
1-11-1 ul -f-zffl 'zr{

1141<ui
WkcIT
3T4tT9' irq

HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT
(HSE) MANAGEMENT
26/02/2014
REVISED & UPDATED
SM
RKD
SC
19/12/2012
REVISED & UPDATED
SM
SM
RKD
DM
13/02/2008
REVISED & UPDATED
AS
RK
SCB
VC
17/07/2007
REVISED & UPDATED
AS
MPJ
VNP
VC
11/08/2005
REVISED & UPDATED
MPJ
MPJ
VNP
VJN
Checked by
Standards
Comm ittee
Convenor
Rev
Date
Purpose
Prepared by
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1078 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 87
Abbreviations:
AERB
ANSI
BARC
BS
EIL
ELCB
EPC
EPCC
ESI
GCC
GM
GTAW
HOD
HSE
HV
IS
IE
JSA
LOTO
LPG
LSTK
MV
PPE
RCM
ROW
SCC
SLI
TBM
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Atomic Energy Regulatory Board

American National Standards Institute
Bhabha Atomic Research Centre
British Standard
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
Engineering, Procurement and Construction
Engineering, Procurement, Construction and Commissioning
Employee State Insurance
General Conditions of Contract
General Manager
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
Head of Department
Health, Safety & Environment
High Voltage
Indian Standard
Indian Electricity
Job Safety Analysis
Lock Out & Tag Out
Liquefied Petroleum Gas
Lump Sum Turn Key
Medium Voltage
Personal Protective Equipment
Resident Construction Manager or Site-in-Charge, as applicable
Right of Way
Safe Load Indicator
Tool Box Talks

Convenor :
Sh. RK Das, ED(Construction)
Members :
Sh. M.Deshpande, GM (C)

Sh. M. Natarajan, GM (C&P)
Sh Rakesh Nanda, DGM (Piping)
Sh. S Mukherjee, DGM (Construction)
Sh. Janak Kishore, DGM (Projects)
Sh. D. Jana, AGM (Construction)
Page 1079 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 87
CONTENTS
CLAUSE
TITLE
PAGE NO.
1.0
2.0
Scope
References
5
5
3.0
Requirement of Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) Management

System to be complied by Bidders
3.1
Management Responsibility
3.1.1
HSE Policy & Objective
3.1.2
Management System
3.2
3.3
5
5
5
3.1.3
Indemnification
3.1.4
3.1.5
Deployment & Qualification of Safety

Personnel
Implementation, Inspection & Monitoring
3.1.6
Behavior Based Safety
3.1.7
3.1.8
Awareness
Fire prevention & First-Aid
9
9
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
Documentation
Audit
Meetings
9
10
10
3.1.12
Intoxicating drinks & drugs and smoking
11
3.1.13
Penalty
11
3.1.14
Accident/Incident investigation
14
House Keeping
HSE Measures
3.3.1
Construction Hazards
3.3.2
Accessibility
14
15
15
16
3.3.3
Personal Protective Equipments (PPEs)
16
3.3.4
Working at height
17
3.3.5
Scaffoldings
18
3.3.6
Electrical installations
19
3.3.7
Welding/Gas cutting
21
3.3.8
Ergonomics and tools & tackles
22
3.3.9
3.3.10
Occupational Health
Hazardous substances
22
23
3.3.11
Slips, trips & falls
23
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.3.15
3.3.16
3.3.17
3.3.18
Radiation exposure
Explosives/Blasting operations
Demolition/Dismantling
Road Safety
Welfare measures
Environment Protection
Rules & Regulations
23
24
24
24
25
25
26
Contd to page 4
Page 1080 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 87
CONTENTS (contd. from page 3)
4.0
3.3.19
Weather Protection
3.3.20
Communication
3.3.21
Confined Space Entry
3.3.22
Heavy Lifts
3.3.23
Key performance indicators
3.3.24
Unsuitable Land Conditions
3.3.25
Under Water Inspection
3.3.26
Excavation
3.4
Tool Box talks
3.5
Training & Induction Programme
3.6
Additional safety requirements for working Inside a running
3.7
Self Assessment and Enhancement
3.8
HSE Promotion
3.9
LOTO for isolation of energy source
Details of HSE Management System by Contractor
4.1
On Award of Contract
4.2
During Job Execution
4.3
During short listing of the sub-contractors
Records
5.0
Appendices
1.
Standards/Codes on HSE
2.
Details of First AID Box
3.
Types of Fire Extinguishers & their Appln.
4.
Indicative List of statutory Acts & Rules
5.
Construction Hazards and their mitigation
6.
Training subjects / topics
7.
Construction Power Board ( typ)
8.
List of HSE procedures
Attachments (Reporting Formats)
I.
Safety Walk through Report
II.
Accident/Incident Report
III.
Suppl. Accident/Incident Investigation Report
IV.
Near Miss Incident Report/Dangerous occurrence
V.
Monthly HSE Report
VI.
Permit for Working at height
VII.
Permit for Working in Confined Space
VIII.
Permit for Radiation work
IX.
Permit for Demolishing/ Dismantling
X
Daily Safety Checklist
XI
Housekeeping assessment & compliance
XII
Inspection of temporary electrical booth / installation
XIII
Inspection for scaffolding
XIV
Permit for erection / modification & dismantling of
scaffolding
XV
Permit for heavy lift/critical erection
XVI
Permit Energy Isolation & De-Isolation
XVI
Permit for Excavation
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
33
33
34
35
Appendix-A
Appendix-B
Appendix-C
Appendix-D
Appendix-E
Appendix-F
Appendix-G
Appendix-H
HSE-1 Rev.0
HSE-2 Rev.0
HSE-3 Rev.0
HSE-4 Rev.0
HSE-5 Rev.0
HSE-6 Rev.0
HSE-7 Rev.0
HSE-8 Rev.0
HSE-9 Rev.0
HSE-10 Rev.0
HSE-11 Rev.0
HSE-12 Rev.0
HSE-13 Rev.0
HSE-14 Rev.0
HSE-15 Rev.0
HSE-16 Rev 0
HSE-17 Rev 0
Page 1081 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
1.0
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 87
SCOPE
This specification establishes the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) management
requirement to be complied by Contractors/Vendors including their sub-contractors/sub vendors
during construction.
This specification is not intended to replace the necessary professional judgment needed to
design & implement an effective HSE system for construction activities and the contractor is
expected to fulfill HSE requirements in this specification as a minimum. It is expected that
contractor shall implement best HSE practices beyond whatever are mentioned in this
specification.
Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of HSE
Management given in relevant Act(s)/legislations, General Conditions of Contract (GCC),
Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) and Job (Technical) Specifications. Where different
documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall apply.
2.0
REFERENCES
The document should be read in conjunction with following:
-
General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
Building and other construction workers Act,
Indian Factories Act
Job (Technical) specifications
Relevant International / National Codes (refer Appendix-A for standards/codes on HSE)
Relevant State & National Statutory requirements.
Operating Manuals Recommendation of Manufacturer of various construction Machineries
3.0
REQUIREMENTS OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM TO BE COMPLIED BY BIDDERS
3.1
Management Responsibility
3.1.1
HSE Policy & Objectives

The Contractor should have a documented HSE policy duly & objectives to demonstrate
commitment of their organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their line
of operations.
HSE Policy of the contractor shall be made available to Owner / EIL at the place of execution of
specific contract works, as a valid document.
3.1.2
Management System
The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover the HSE requirements &
commitments to fulfill them, including but not limited to what are specified under clause 1.0
and 2.0 above. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of its site specific HSE Plan from EIL /
Owner prior to commencement of any site works. Corporate as well as Site management of the
Contractor shall ensure compliance of their HSE Plan at work sites in its entirety & in true
spirit.
Page 1082 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.1.3
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 87
Indemnification
Contractor shall indemnify & hold harmless, Owner/EIL & their representatives, free from any
and all liabilities arising out of non-fulfillment of HSE requirements or its consequences.
3.1.4
Deployment & qualifications of Safety personnel

The Contractor shall designate/deploy various categories of HSE personnel at site as indicated
below in sufficient number. In no case, deployment of safety Supervisor / Safety Steward shall
substitute deployment of Safety Officer / Safety Engr what is indicated in relevant statute of
BOCW Act i.e deployment of safety officer/Safety Engineer is compulsory at project site. The
Safety supervisors, Safety stewards etc. would facilitate the HSE tasks at grass root level for
construction sites and shall assist Safety Officer / Engineers.
a)
Safety Steward
For every 250 workmen, one safety steward shall be deployed.
As a minimum, he shall preferably possess School leaving Certificate (of Class XII with
Physics & Chemistry etc.) and trained in fire-fighting as well as in safety/occupational
health related subjects, with minimum two year of practical experience in construction
work environment and preferably have adequate knowledge of the language spoken by
majority of the workers at the construction site.
b)
Safety Supervisor
For every 500workmen, one safety Supervisor shall be deployed.
As a minimum, he shall possess a recognized Degree in Science (with Physics &
Chemistry) or a diploma in Engg. or Tech. with minimum Two years of practical
experience in construction work environment and should possess requisite skills to deal
with construction safety & fire related day-to-day issues.
c)
Safety Officer / Safety Engineer

One for every 1000 workers or part thereof shall be deployed.
Safety officer/Engineer Should Possess following Qualification & Experience :
(i)
Recognized degree in any branch of Engg. or Tech. or Architecture with practical

experience of working in a building or other construction work in supervisory
capacity for a period of not less than two years, or possessing recognized diploma in
any branch of Engg. or Tech with practical experience of building or other
construction work in supervisory capacity for a period of not less than five years.
(ii)
Recognized degree or diploma in Industrial safety with one paper in Construction

Safety
(iii)
Preferably have adequate knowledge of the language spoken by majority of the

workers at the construction site.
Alternately
(i)
Person possessing Graduation Degree in Science with Physics & Chemistry and
degree or diploma in Industrial Safety (from any Indian institutes recognized by
Page 1083 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 87
AICTE or State Council of Tech. Education of any Indian State) with practical
experience of working in a building, plant or other construction works (as Safety
Officer, in line with Indian Factories Act, 1958) for a period of not less than five
years, may be considered as Safety Officer, in case Owner/Client of the project
agrees for /approves the same.
d)
HSE In-Charge
In case there is more than one Safety Officer at any project construction site, one of them,
who is senior most by experience (in HSE discipline), may be designated as HSE InCharge. Duties & responsibilities of such person shall be commensurate with that of
relevant statute and primarily to coordinate with top management of Client and contractors.
In case the statutory requirements i.e. State or Central Acts and / or Rules as applicable like
the Building and Other Construction Workers Regulation of Employment and Conditions
of Service- Act,1996 or State Rules (wherever notified), the Factories Act, 1948 or Rules
(wherever notified), etc. are more stringent than above clarifications, the same shall be
followed.
Contractors shall ensure physical availability of safety personnel at the place of specific
work location, where Hot Work Permit is required / granted. No work shall be started at
any of the project sites until above safety personnel & concerned Site Engineer of
Contractor are physically deployed at site. The Contractor shall submit a HSE organogram
clearly indicating the lines of responsibility and reporting system and elaborate the
responsibilities of safety personnel in their HSE Plan.
The Contractor shall verify & authenticate credentials of such safety personnel and furnish
Bio-Data/ Resume/ Curriculum Vitae of the safety personnel as above for EIL/Owners
approval, at least 1 month before the mobilization. The Contractor, whenever required,
shall arrange submission of original testimonials/certificates of their Safety personnel, to
EIL/Owner (for verification/scrutiny, etc.)
Imposition / Realization of penalty shall not absolve the Contractor from his/her
responsibility of deploying competent safety officer at site.
Adequate planning and deployment of safety personnel shall be ensured by the Contractor
so that field activities do not get affected because of non-deployment of competent &
qualified safety people in appropriate numbers.
3.1.5
Implementation, Inspection/Monitoring
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning, reporting, implementing and
monitoring all HSE requirements and compliance of all laws & statutory requirements.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the HSE requirements are clearly understood &
implemented conscientiously by their site personnel at all levels at site.
The Contractor shall ensure physical presence of their field engineers / supervisors, during
the continuation of their contract works / site activities including all material transportation
activities. Physical absence of experienced field engineers / supervisors of Contractor at
critical work spot during the course of work, may invite severe penalization as per the
discretion of EIC, including halting / stoppage of work.
Contractor shall furnish their annual Inspection Plan, with regard to project issues /subjects,
frequency and performers to EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall regularly review inspection report internally and implement all
practical steps / actions for improving the status continuously.
Page 1084 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.1.6
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 87
The Contractor shall ensure important safety checks right from beginning of works at every
work site locations and to this effect format No: HSE-10 Daily Safety Check List shall
be prepared by field engineer & duly checked by safety personnel for conformance.
The Contractor shall carry out inspection to identify various unsafe conditions of work
sites/machinery/equipments as well as unsafe acts
on the part of
workmen/supervisor/engineer while carrying out different project related works.
Adequate records for all inspections shall be maintained by the Contractor and the same
shall be furnished to EIL/Owner, whenever sought.
The Contractor shall not carry-out work by engaging single worker anywhere without any
supervisor anytime during day or night.
To demonstrate involvement/commitment of site management of Contractor, at least one
Safety Walk through in a month shall be carried out by Contractors head of site (along
with his area manager/field engineers) and a report shall be furnished to EIL/Owner as per
format No: HSE-1 Safety walk through report followed by compliance for unsatisfactory
remarks.
As a general practice lifting tools/tackles, machinery, accessories etc. shall be inspected,
tested and examined by competent people (approved by concerned State authorities) before
being used at site and also at periodical interval (e.g. during replacement,extension,
modification, elongation/reduction of machine/parts, etc.) as per relevant statutes. Hydra,
cranes, lifting machinery, mobile equipments / machinery / vehicles, etc. shall be inspected
regularly by only competent / experienced personnel at site and requisite records for such
inspections shall be maintained by every contractor. Contractor shall also maintain records
of maintenance of all other site machinery (e.g. generators, rectifiers, compressors, cutters,
etc.) & portable tools/equipments being used at project related works (e.g. drills, abrasive
wheels, punches, chisels, spanners, etc.). The Contractor shall not make use of arbitrarily
fabricated derricks at project site for lifting / lowering of construction materials.
Site facilities /temporary. installations, e.g. batching plant, cement godown, DG-room,
temporary electrical panels/distribution boards, shot-blasting booth, fabrication yards, etc.
and site welfare facilities, like labour colonies, canteen/pantry, rest-shelters, motor
cycle/bicycle-shed, site washing facilities, First-aid centers, urinals/toilets, etc. should be
periodically inspected by Contractor (preferably utilizing HR/Admn. personnel to inspect
site welfare facilities) and records to be maintained.
Behaviour Based Safety
The contractor shall develop a system to implement Behaviour-Based Safety (BBS)

through which work groups can identify, measure and change the behaviours of employees
and workers
The BBS process shall include the following:
Identify the behaviours critical to obtaining required safety performance.
Communicate the behaviours and how they are performed correctly to all
Observe the work force and record safe/at risk behaviours. Intervene with workers
to give positive reinforcement when safe behaviours are observed. Provide
coaching/correction when at risk behaviours are observed
Collect and record observation data
Summarize and analyze observation data
Communicate observation data and analysis results to all employees
Provide recognition or celebrate when safe behaviour improvements occur
Change behaviours to be observed or change activators or change consequences as
appropriate.
Communicate any changes to workforce
Contractor through its own HSE committee shall implement the above process.
The necessary procedures and reporting formats shall be developed by the contractor for
approval by EIL/Owner.
Page 1085 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.1.7
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 87
The HSE committee of contractor shall observe individuals behavior for safe practices
adapted for utilization/execution of work for following as a minimum:PPE
Tools & equipment
Hazard Identification & control
House keeping
Confined space entry
Hot works
Excavation
Loading & unloading
Work At height
Stacking & storage
Ergonomics
Procedures
Awareness and Motivation
3.1.8
The Contractor shall promote and develop awareness on Health, Safety and Environment
protection among all personnel working for the Contractor.
Regular awareness programs and fabrication shop / work site meetings at least on monthly
basis shall be arranged on HSE activities to cover hazards/risks involved in various
operations during construction.
Contractor to motivate & encourage the workmen & supervisory staff by issuing /
awarding them with tokens/ gifts/ mementos/ monetary incentives / certificates, etc.
Contractor shall assess & recognize the behavioral change of its site engineers / supervisors
periodically and constantly motivate / encourage them to implement HSE practices at
project works
Fire prevention & First-Aid
3.1.9
The Contractor shall arrange suitable First-aid measures such as First Aid Box (Refer
Appendix-B for details), trained personnel/nurse (male) to administer First Aid, stand-by
Ambulance vehicle and
The Contractor shall arrange installation of fire protection measures such as adequate
number of steel buckets with sand & water and adequate number of appropriate portable
fire extinguishers (Refer Appendix-C for details) to the satisfaction of EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall deploy trained supervisory personnel / field engineers to cater to any
emergency situation.
In case the number of workers exceeds 500, the Contractor shall position an Ambulance /
vehicle and nurse on round the clock basis very close to the worksite.
The Contractor shall arrange FIRE DRILL at each site at least once in three months,
involving site workmen and site supervisory personnel & engineers. The Contractor shall
maintain adequate record of such fire drills at project site
Documentation
The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive, planned and documented system covering the
following as a minimum for implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements and the
same shall be submitted for approval by owner/EIL.
HSE Organogram
Site specific HSE Plan
Safety Procedures, forms and Checklist. Indicative list of HSE procedures is attached as
Appendix :H
Inspections and Test Plan
Risk Assessment & Job Safety Analysis for critical works.
Page 1086 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 87
The monitoring for implementation shall be done by regular inspections and compliance of
the observations thereof. The Contractor shall get similar HSE requirements implemented
at his sub-contractor(s) work site/office. However, compliance of HSE requirements shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any review/approval by EIL/Owner shall not
absolve contractor of his responsibility/liability in relation to fulfilling all HSE
requirements.
3.1.10 Audit
The Contractor shall submit an Audit Plan to EIL/Owner indicating the type of audits and
covering following as minimum:
Internal HSE audits regularly at least on quarterly basis by engaging internal qualified
auditors (viz safety officers/Construction personnel having 5 years experience in
construction safety and Lead Auditor Course :OSHA 18001certification).
External HSE audits regularly at least on every six months by engaging qualified external
auditors (viz safety officers/Construction personnel having 10 years experience in
construction safety and Lead Auditor Course :OSHA 18001certification).
All HSE shortfalls/ non-conformances on HSE matters brought out during review/audit, shall be
resolved forthwith ( generally within a week) by Contractor & compliance report shall be
submitted to EIL/Owner.
In addition to above audits by contractor, the contractors work shall be subjected to HSE audit
by EIL/Owner at any point of time during the pendency of contract. The CONTRACTOR shall
take all actions required to comply with the findings of the Audit Report and issue regular
Compliance Reports for the same to OWNER/ EIL till all the findings of the Audit Report are
fully complied.
Failure to carry-out HSE Audits & its compliance (internal & external) by Contractor, shall
invite penalization.
3.1.11 Meetings
The Contractor shall ensure participation of his top most executive at site (viz. Resident
Construction Manager / Resident Engineer / Project Manager / Site-in-Charge) in Safety
Committee / HSE Committee meetings arranged by EIL/Owner usually on monthly basis
or as and when called for. In case Contractors top most executive at site is not in a
position to attend such meeting, he shall inform EIL/Owner in writing before the
commencement of such meeting indicating reasons of his absence and nominate his
representative failure to do so may invite very stringent penalization against the specific
Contractor, as deemed fit in Contract. The obligation of compliance of any observations
during the meeting shall be always time bound. The Contractor shall always assist
EIL/Owner to achieve the targets set by them on HSE management during the project
implementation.
In addition, the Contractor shall also arrange internal HSE meetings chaired by his top most
executive at site on weekly basis and maintain records. Such internal HSE meetings shall
essentially be attended by field engineers / supervisors (& not by safety personnel only) of
the Contractor and its associates. Records of such internal HSE meetings shall be
maintained by the Contractor for review by EIL/Owner or for any HSE Audits.
Agenda of internal HSE meeting should broadly cover: -
Page 1087 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 11 of 87
Confirmation of record notes / minutes of previous meeting

Discussion on outstanding subjects of previous points / subjects, if any
Incidents / Accidents (of all types) at project site, if any
Current topics related to site activities / subjects of discussion
House keeping
Behavioral Safety
Information / views / deliberations of members / site sub Contractors
Report from Owner / Client
Status of Safety awareness, Induction programs & Training programs
The time frame for such HSE meeting shall be religiously maintained by one and all.
3.1.12 Intoxicating drinks & drugs and Smoking
The Contractor shall ensure that his staff members & workers (permanent as well casual)
shall not be in a state of intoxication during working hours and shall abide by any law
relating to consumption & possession of intoxicating drinks or drugs in force.
The Contractor shall not allow any workman to commence any work at any locations of
project activity who is/are influenced / effected with the intake of alcohol, drugs or any
other intoxicating items being consumed prior to start of work or working day.
Awareness about local laws on this issue shall form part of the Induction Training and
compulsory work-site discipline.
The Contractor shall ensure that all personnel working for him comply with No-Smoking
requirements of the Owner as notified from time to time. Cigarettes, lighters, auto ignition
tools or appliances as well as intoxicating drugs, dry tobacco powder, etc. shall not be
allowed inside the project / plant complex.
Smoking shall be permitted only inside smoking booths exclusively designated &
authorized by the Owner/EIL.
3.1.13 Penalty
The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements. In case of noncompliances and also for repeated failure in implementation of any of the HSE provisions,
EIL/Owner may impose stoppage of work without any cost & time implication to the Owner
and/or impose a suitable penalty.
The amount of penalty to be levied against defaulted Contractor shall be up to a cumulative
limit of
2.0% (Two percent) of the contract value for Item Rate or Composite contracts with an overall
ceiling of 1, 00, 00, 000 (Rupees One crore)
0.5% (Zero decimal five percent) of the contract value for LSTK, OBE, EPC, EPCC or Package
contracts with an overall ceiling of 10, 00.00.000 (Rupees ten crores)
This penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified elsewhere in the contract. The
decision of imposing stop-work-instruction and imposition of penalty shall rest with
EIL/Owner. The same shall be binding on the Contractor. Imposition of penalty does not make
the Contractor eligible to continue the work in unsafe manner.
The amount of penalty applicable for the Contractor on different types of HSE violations is
specified below:
Page 1088 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3
4.
Violation of HSE norms
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 12 of 87
Penalty Amount
For not using personal protective equipment

Rs 500/- per day/ Item / Person.
(Helmet, Shoes, Goggles, Gloves, Full body harness,
Face shield, Boiler suit, etc.)
Working without Work Permit/Clearance
Rs 20000/- per occasion
Execution of work without deployment of requisite Rs. 5000/- per violation per day
field engineer / supervisor at work spot
Unsafe electrical practices (not installing ELCB,
Rs 10000/- per item per day.
using poor joints of cables, using naked wire without
top plug into socket, laying wire/cables on the roads,
electrical jobs by incompetent person, etc.)
5.
Working at height without full body harness, using

Rs. 10000/- per case per day.
non-standard/ rejected scaffolding and not arranging
fall protection arrangement as required, like handrails, life-lines, Safety Nets etc.
6.
Unsafe handling of compressed gas cylinders (No

trolley, jubilee clips double gauge regulator, and not
keeping cylinders vertical during storage/handling,
not using safety cap of cylinder).
Use of domestic LPG for cutting purpose / not using
flash back arresters on both the hoses/tubes on both
ends.
No fencing/barricading of excavated areas /
trenches.
Not providing shoring/strutting/proper slope and not
keeping the excavated earth at least 1.5M away from
excavated area.
Non display of scaffold tags, caution boards, list of
hospitals, emergency services available at work
locations.
Traffic rules violations like over speeding of
vehicles, rash driving, talking on mobile phones
during vehicle driving, wrong parking, not using seat
belts, vehicles not fitted with reverse horn / warning
alarms / flicker lamps during foggy weather.
Absence of Contractors RCM/SIC or his
nominated representative (prior approval must be
taken for each meeting for nomination) from site
HSE meetings whenever called by EIL/Owner &
failure to nominate his immediate deputy (in the siteorganogram) for such HSE meetings.
Failure to maintain HSE records by Contractor
Safety personnel, in line with approved HSE
Plan/Procedures/Contract specifications..
Failure to conduct daily site safety inspection (by
Contractors safety engineers/safety officers),
internal HSE meeting, internal HSE
Awareness/Motivation Program, Site HSE Training
and HSE audit at predefined frequencies (as
approved in HSE Plan).
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Rs 500/- per item per day.
Rs. 3000/- per occasion.

Rs. 3000/- per occasion.
Rs.5, 000/- per occasion.
Rs.1000/- per occasion per day

Rs. 2000/- per occasion per day
Rs10000/- per meeting.
Rs 10000/- per month.

Rs.10000/- per occasion.
Page 1089 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
Sl.
No.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
Violation of HSE norms
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 13 of 87
Penalty Amount
th
Failure to submit the monthly HSE report by 5 of

Rs. 10000/- per occasion and Rs.
subsequent month to Projects Engineer-in-Charge / 1000/- per day of further delay.
Owner
Poor House Keeping
Rs. 5000/- per occasion per subject
Failure to report & follow up accident (including
Near Miss) reporting system within specific timeframe.
Degradation of environment (not confining toxic
spills, spilling oil/lubricants onto ground)
Rs. 20000/- per occasion
Not medically examining the workers before

allowing them to work at height / to work in
confined space / to work in shot-blasting / to work
for painting / to work in bitumen or asphalt works,
not providing ear muffs while allowing them to work
in noise polluted areas, made them to work in air
polluted areas without respiratory protective devices,
etc.
Violation of any other safety condition as per job
HSE plan / work permit and HSE conditions of
contract (e.g. using crowbar on cable trenches,
improper welding booth, not keeping fire
extinguisher ready at hot work site, unsafe rigging
practices, non-availability of First-Aid box at site,
not using hood with respiratory devices by blaster
for shot//grit blasting, etc.)
Failure to carry-out Safety audit in time (internal &
external), close-out of identified shortfalls of
Observations of Safety Aspects(OSA),etc
Carrying out sand blasting instead of grit/shot
blasting
Failure to deploy adequately qualified and
competent Safety Officer
Utilization of hydra/ back-hoe loader for material
shifting or any other unauthorized /unsafe lifting
works
Any incident / accident at project site has been
caused because of willful negligence or gross
violation of safety measures / provisions on the part
of the Contractor or any of its sub-agencies
Any violation not covered above
Rs 5000/- per occasion per worker
Rs10000/- per occasion
Rs. 5000/- per occasion
Rs. 20,000/- per occasion

Rs. 50,000/- per day
Rs. 10000/- per day per Officer
Rs 25,000/- per occasion
Rs 10,00,000/-per occasion
To be decided by EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall make his field engineers/supervisors fully aware of the fact that they
keep track with the site workmen for their behavior and compliance of various HSE
requirements. Safety lapses / defects of project construction site shall be attributable to the
concerned job supervisor / engineer of the Contractor, (who remains directly responsible
for safely executing field works). For repeated HSE violations, concerned job supervisor /
engineer shall be reprimanded or appropriate action, as deemed fit, shall be initiated (with
an information to EIL & Owner) by the concerned Contractor.
Page 1090 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 14 of 87
Contractor shall initiate verbal warning shall be given to the worker/employee during his first
HSE violation. A written warning shall be issued on second violation and specific training shall
be arranged / provided by the Contractor to enhance HSE awareness/skill including feedback on
the mistakes/ flaws. Any further violation of HSE stipulations by the erring individuals shall
call for his forthright debar from the specific construction site. A record of warnings for each
worker/employee shall be maintained by the Contractor, like by punching their cards / Gate
passes or by displaying their names at the Project entry gate. Warnings, penalizations,
appreciations etc. shall be discussed in HSE Committee meetings by site Head of the
Contractor.
3.1.14 Accident/ Incident investigation
All accidents / incidents shall be informed to EIL/Owner at least telephonically by Contractor
immediately and in writing within 24 hours on Format No. HSE-2 as applicable , by Contractor.
Thereafter, a Supplementary Accident / Incident investigation Report on Format No. HSE-3
shall be submitted to EIL/Owner within 72 hours. Near Miss incident(s),Dangerous
accidents/incident shall also be reported on Format No. HSE-4 within 24 hours. The accident/
incident shall be investigated by a team of Contractors senior Site personnel (involving Site-inCharge or at least by his deputy) for establishing root-cause and recommending corrective &
preventive actions. Findings shall be documented and suitable actions taken to avoid
recurrences shall be communicated to EIL/Owner. Owner/EIL shall have the liberty to
independently investigate such occurrences and the Contractor shall extend all necessary help
and cooperation in this regard. EIL/Owner shall have the right to share the content of this report
with the outside world.
3.2
House Keeping
The Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained and shall ensure
inter alia; the followings:
a)
All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the working areas to designated
location(s).
b) Unused/surplus cables, steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at different places within
the working areas are removed to identify location(s).
c) All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible packing materials,
shall be removed from work place to identified location(s).
d) Roads shall be kept clear and materials like pipes, steel, sand, boulders, concrete, chips and
bricks etc shall not be allowed on the roads to obstruct free movement of men &
machineries.
e) Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked properly for erection.
f) Water logging on roads shall not be allowed.
g) No parking of trucks/trolleys, cranes and trailers etc shall be allowed on roads, which may
obstruct the traffic movement.
h) Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of the working
areas.
i) Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverized materials etc. shall be covered while moving
within the plant area/ or these materials shall be transported with top surface wet.
j) The contractor shall ensure that the atmosphere in plant area and on roads is free from
particulate matter like dust, sand, etc. by keeping the top surface wet for ease in breathing.
k) At least two exits for any unit area shall be assured at all times same arrangement is
preferable for digging pits / trench excavation / elevated work platforms / confined spaces
etc.
l) Welding cables and the power cable must be segregated and properly stored and used .The
same shall be laid away from the area of movement and shall be free from obstruction.
m) Schedule for upkeep/cleaning of site to be firmed up and implemented on regular basis
Page 1091 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 15 of 87
The Contractor shall carry-out regular checks (minimum one per fortnight) as per format No:
HSE-11 for maintaining high standard of housekeeping and maintain records for the same.
3.3
HSE Measures
3.3.1
Construction Hazards
The Contractor shall ensure identification of all Occupational Health, Safety & Environmental
hazards in the type of work he is going to undertake and enlist mitigation measures. Contractor
shall carry out Job Safety Analysis (JSA)/Risk Analysis specifically for high risk jobs/crtical
jobs like
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
v)
w)
x)
y)
z)
aa)
bb)
cc)
dd)
ee)
ff)
Working at height (+2.0 Mts height) for cold (incl. colour washing, painting, insulation
etc.) & hot works.
Work in confined space,
Deep excavations & trench cutting (depth > 2.0 mts.)
Operation & Maintenance of Batching Plant.
Shuttering / concreting (in single or multiple pour) for columns, parapets & roofs.
Erection & maintenance of Tower Crane.
Erection of structural steel members / roof-trusses / pipes at height more than 2.0 Mts. with
or without crane.
Erection of pipes (full length or fabricated) at height more than 2.0 Mts. height with Crane
of 100T capacity.
All lifts using 100T Crane plus mechanical pulling.
All lifts using two cranes in unison (Tandem Lifting).
Any lift exceeding 80% capacity of the lifting equipments (hydra, crane etc.).
Laying of pipes (isolated or fabricated) in deep narrow trenches manually or
mechanically.
Maintenance of crane / extension or reduction of crane-boom on roads or in yards.
Erection of any item at >2.0 Mts. height using 100T crane or of higher capacity
Hydrostatic test of pipes, vessels & columns and water-flushing.
Radiography jobs (in-plant & open field)
Work in Live Electrical installations / circuits
Handling of explosives & Blasting operations
Demolishing / dismantling activities
Welding / gas cutting jobs at height (+2.0 Mts.)
Lifting / placing roof-girders at height (+2.0 Mts.)
Lifting & laying of metallic / non-metallic sheet over roof/structures.
Lifting of pipes, gratings, equipments/vessels at heights (+2.0 Mts) with & without using
cranes
Calibration of equipment, instruments and functional tests at yards / work-sites.
Operability test of Pump, Motors (after coupling) & Compressors.
Cold or Hot works inside Confined Space.
Transportation & shifting of ODC consignments into project areas.
Working in charged/Live elect. Panels
Stress Relieving works (Electrically or by Gas-burners).
Pneumatic Tests
Card board blasting
Chemical cleaning
and take feedback from EIL/Owner. The necessary HSE measures devised shall be put in to
place, prior to start of an activity & also shall be maintained during the course of works, by the
Contractor. Copies of such JSAs shall be kept available at work sites by the Contractor to enable
all concerned carrying out checks / verification.
Page 1092 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 16 of 87
A list of typical construction hazards along with their effects & preventive measures is given in
Appendix-E.
3.3.2
Accessibility
The Contractor shall provide safe means of access(in sufficient numbers) & efficient exit to
any working place including provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various
stages during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen and EIL/Owner.
The Contractor shall implement use of all measures including use of life line, fallarresters, retractable fall arresters , safety nets etc. during the course of using all safe
accesses & exits, so that in no case any individual remains at risk of slip & fall during their
travel.
The access to operating plant / project complex shall be strictly regulated. Any person or
vehicle entering such complex shall undergo identification check, as per the procedures in
force / requirement of EIL/Owner.
Accessibility to confined space shall be governed by specific system / regulation, as
established at project site.
3.3.3
Personal Protective Equipments (PPEs)
The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff, workers and visitors including their subcontractor(s) have been issued (records to be kept) & wear appropriate PPEs like nape strap
type safety helmets preferably with head & sweat band with cotton chin strap
(made of industrial HDPE), safety shoes with steel toe cap and antiskid sole, full body
harness (C marked and conforming to EN361), protective goggles, gloves, ear muffs,
respiratory protective devices, etc. All these gadgets shall conform to applicable IS
Specifications/CE or other applicable international standards. The Contractor shall
implement a regular regime of inspecting physical conditions of the PPEs being issued /
used by the workmen of their own & also its sub-agencies and the damaged / unserviceable
PPEs shall be replaced forthwith.
Owner/EIL may issue a comprehensive color scheme for helmets to be used by various
agencies. The Contractor shall follow the scheme issued by the owner/EIL and shall choose
any colour other than white (for Owner) or blue (for EIL) All HSE personnel shall
preferably wear dark green band on their helmet so that workmen can approach them for
guidance during emergencies. HSE personnel shall preferably wear such dresses with
fluorescent stripes, which are noticeable during night, when light falls on them.
For shot blasting, the usage of protective face shield and helmets, gauntlet and protective
clothing is mandatory. Such protective clothing should conform relevant IS Specification.
For off-shore jobs/contracts, contractor shall provide PPEs (new) of all types to EIL &
Owner's personnel, at his (contractor's) cost. All personnel shall wear life jacket at all time.
An indicative list of HSE standards/codes is given under Appendix-A.
Contractor shall ensure procurement & usage of following safety equipments/ accessories
(conforming to applicable IS mark / CE standard) by their staff, workmen & visitors
including their subcontractors all through the span of project construction / precommissioning/ Commissioning:-
Page 1093 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
3.3.4
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 17 of 87
PPEs (Helmet, Spectacle, Ear-muff, Face shield, Hand gloves, Safety Shoes, Gum
boot)
Barricading tape / warning signs
Rechargeable Safety torch (flame-proof)
Safety nets (with tie-chords)
Fall arresters
Portable ladders (varying lengths)
Life-lines (steel wire-rope, dia not less than 8.0 mm)
Full body harness (double lanyard)
Lanyard
Karabiner
Retractable fall arresters (various length)
Portable fire extinguishers (DCP type) 5 kg capacity
Portable Multi Gas detector
Sound level meter
Digital Lux meter
Fire hoses & flow nozzles
Fire blankets / Fire retardant cloth (with eyelets)
Working at height
The Contractor shall issue permit for working (PFW) at height after verifying and
certifying the checkpoints as specified in the attached permit (Format No. HSE-6). He
shall also undertake to ensure compliance to the conditions of the permit during the
currency of the permit including adherence of personal protective equipments. Contractors
Safety Officer shall verify compliance status of the items of permit document after
implementation of action is completed by Contractors execution / field engineers at work
site. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) for specific works at height duly commented by
EIL/Owner, shall be kept attached with particular Permit for Work (PFW) at site for ready
reference & follow-up.
Such PFW shall be initially issued for one single shift or expected duration of normal work
and extended further for balance duration, if required. EIL/Owner can devise block-permit
system at any specific area, in consultation with project specific HSE Committee to specify
the time-period of validity of such PFW or its renewal. This permit shall be applicable in
areas where specific clearance from Owners operation Deptt. /Safety Deptt. is not
required. EIL / Owners field Engineers/Safety Officers/Area Coordinators may verify and
counter sign this permit (as an evidence of verification) during the execution of the job.
All personnel shall be medically examined & certified by registered doctor, confirming
their medical fitness for working at height. The fitness examination shall be done once in
six months.
In case work is undertaken without taking sufficient precautions as given in the permit, EIL
/Owner Engineers may exercise their authority to cancel such permit and stop the work till
satisfactory compliance/rectification is arranged made. Contractors are expected to
maintain a register for issuance of permit and extensions thereof including preserving the
used permits for verification during audits etc.
The Contractor shall arrange (at his cost) and ensure use of Fall Arrester Systems by his
workers. Fall arresters are to be used while climbing/descending tall structures or vessels /
columns etc. These arresters should lock automatically against the anchorage line,
restricting free fall of the user. The device is to be provided with a double security opening
system to ensure safe attachment or release of the user at any point of rope. In order to
Page 1094 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 18 of 87
avoid shock, the system should be capable of keeping the person in vertical position in case
of a fall.
3.3.5
The Contractor shall ensure that Full body harnesses conforming EN361 and having
authorized C marking is used by all personnel while working at height. The lanyards and
life lines should have enough tensile strength to take the load of the worker in case of a fall.
One end of the lanyard shall be firmly tied with the harnesses and the other end with life
line. The harness should be capable of keeping the workman vertical in case of a fall,
enabling him to rescue himself.
The Contractor shall provide Roof Top Walk Ladders for carrying out activities on sloping
roofs in order to reduce the chances of slippages and falls.
The Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System is used wherever the hazard of
fall from height is present. The safety net, preferably a knotted one with mesh ropes
conforming to IS 5175/ ISO 1140 shall have a border rope & tie cord of minimum 12mm
dia. The Safety Net shall be located not more than 6.0 meters below the working surface
extending on either side up to sufficient margin to arrest fall of persons working at different
heights.
In case of accidental fall of person on such Safety Net, the bottom most portion of Safety
Net should not touch any structure, object or ground.
The Contractor shall ensure positive isolation while working at different levels like in the
pipe rack areas. The working platforms with toe boards & hand rails shall be sufficiently
strong & shall have sufficient space to hold the workmen and tools & tackles including the
equipments required for executing the job. Such working platforms shall have mid-rails, to
enable people work safely in sitting posture.
Scaffoldings & Barricading
Suitable scaffoldings shall be provided to workmen for all works that cannot be safely done
from the ground or from solid construction except such short period work that can be safely
done using ladders or certified (by 3rd party competent person) man-basket. When a ladder
is used, an extra workman shall always be engaged for holding the ladder.
The Contractor shall ensure that the scaffolds used during construction activities shall be
strong enough to take the designed load. Main Contractor shall always furnish duly
approved construction-design details of scaffold & SWL (from competent designers) free
of charge, before they are being installed / constructed at site. Owner/EIL reserves the right
to ask the Contractor to submit certification and or design calculations from his Head office
/ Design/ Engineering expert regarding load carrying capacity of the scaffoldings.
All scaffolds shall be inspected by a competent Scaffolding Inspector of the Contractor. He

shall paste a GREEN tag (duly signed by competent Scaffolding Inspector) on each
scaffold found safe and a RED tag (duly signed by competent Scaffolding Inspector) on
each scaffold found unsafe. Scaffolds with GREEN tag only shall be permitted to be used
and Scaffolds with RED ones shall immediately be made inaccessible. Work being found
continuing on scaffolds with RED tag shall be considered unauthorized work by Contractor
and may invite penalization from EIL/Owner. For every 120-125 m2 /m3 area / volume or
its parts thereof minimum one TAG shall be provided.
The Contractor shall ensure positive barricading (indicative as well as protective) of the
excavated, radiography, heavy lift, high pressure hydrostatic & pneumatic testing and other
such areas. Sufficient warning signs shall be displayed along the barricading areas.
Page 1095 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.3.6
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 19 of 87
Scaffolding shall be constructed using foot seals or base plates only.
Electrical installations
All electrical installations/ connections shall be carried out as per the provisions of latest
revision of following codes/standards, in addition to the requirements of Statutory
Authorities and IE/applicable international rules & regulations:
-
OISD STD 173

SP 30 (BIS)
: Fire prevention & protection system for electrical installations

: National Electric Code
All electrical installations shall be approved by the concerned statutory authorities.
All temporary electrical installations / facilities shall be regularly checked by the

licensed/competent electricians of the Contractor and appropriate records shall be
maintained in format no: HSE-12 Inspection of temporary electrical booth/installation at
project construction site. Such inspection records are to be made available to EIL/Owner,
whenever asked for.
3.3.6.1 The Contractor shall meet the following requirements:

a.
Shall make Single Line Diagram (SLD) for providing connection to each equipments &
machinery and the same (duly approved by EIL/Owner) shall be pasted on the front face of
DBs (distribution boards) or JBs (Junction boxes) at every site. ( A typical Switch Board
Sketch is attached as Appendix -G )
b.
Ensure that electrical systems and equipment including tools & tackles used during
construction phase are properly selected, installed, used and maintained as per provisions
of the latest revision of the Indian Electrical/ applicable international regulations.
c.
Shall deploy qualified & licensed electricians for proper & safe installation and for regular
inspection of construction power distribution system/points including their earthing. A
copy of the license shall be submitted to EIL / Owner for records. Availability of at least
one competent (ITI qualified) / licensed electrician (by State Elec. authorities) shall be
ensured at site round the clock to attend to the normal/emergency jobs.
d.
All switchboards / welding machines shall be kept in well-ventilated & covered shed/ with
rain shed protection. The shed shall be elevated from the existing ground level to avoid
water logging inside the shed . Installation of electrical switch board must be done taking
care of the prevention of shock and safety of machine.
e.
No flammable materials shall be used for constructing the shed. Also flammable materials
shall not be stored in and around electrical equipment / switchboard. Adequate clearances
and operational space shall be provided around the equipment.
f.
Fire extinguishers and insulating mats shall be provided in all power distribution centers.
g.
Temporary electrical equipment shall not be employed in hazardous area without obtaining
safety permit.
h.
Proper housekeeping shall be done around the electrical installations.
i.
All temporary installations shall be tested before energizing, to ensure proper earthing,
bonding, suitability of protection system, adequacy of feeders/cables etc.
Page 1096 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 20 of 87
j.
All welders shall use hand gloves irrespective of holder voltage.
k.
Multilingual (Hindi, English and local language) caution boards, shock treatment charts and
instruction plate containing location of isolation point for incoming supply, name &
telephone No. of contact person in emergency shall be provided in substations and near all
distribution boards / local panels.
l.
Operation of earth leakage device shall be checked regularly by temporarily connecting

series test lamp (2 bulbs of equal rating connected in series) between phase and earth.
ELCB tester /test meter shall be used for testing ELCBs
m. Regular inspection of all installations at least once in a month. (Ref. Format HSE-12).
3.3.6.2 The following features shall also be ensured for all electrical installations during construction
phase by the contractor:
Each installation shall have a main switch with a protective device, installed in an
enclosure adjacent to the metering point. The operating height of the main switch shall not
exceed 1.5 M. The main switch shall be connected to the point of supply by means of
armoured cable.
The outgoing feeders shall be double or triple pole switches with fuses / MCBs. Loads in a
three phase circuit shall be balanced as far as possible and load on neutral should not
exceed 20% of load in the phase.
The installation shall be adequately protected against overload, short circuit and earth
leakage by the use of suitable protective devices. Fuses wherever used shall be HRC type.
Use of rewirable fuses shall be strictly prohibited. The earth leakage device shall have an
operating current not exceeding 30 mA.
All connections to the hand tools / welding receptacles shall be taken through proper
switches, sockets and plugs.
All single phase sockets shall be minimum 3 pin type only. All unused sockets shall be
provided with socket caps.
Only 3 core (P+N+E) overall sheathed flexible cables with minimum conductor size of 1.5
mm2 copper shall be used for all single phase hand tools.
Only metallic distribution boxes with double earthing shall be used at site. No wooden
boxes shall be used.
All power cables shall be terminated with compression type cable glands. Tinned copper
lugs shall be used for multi-strand wires / cables.
Cables shall be free from any insulation damage.
Minimum depth of cable trench shall be 750 mm for MV & control cables and 900 mm for
HV cables. These cables shall be laid over a sand layer and covered with sand, brick & soil
for ensuring mechanical protection. Cables shall not be laid in waterlogged area as far as
practicable. Cable route markers shall be provided at every 25 M of buried trench route.
When laid above ground, cables shall be properly cleated or supported on rigid poles of at
least 2.1 M high. Minimum head clearance of 6 meters shall be provided at road crossings.
Page 1097 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.3.7
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 21 of 87
Under ground road crossings for cables shall be avoided to the extent feasible. In any case
no under ground power cable shall be allowed to cross the roads without pipe sleeve.
All cable joints shall be done with proper jointing kit. No taped/ temporary joints shall be
used.
An independent earthing facility should preferably be established within the temporary

installation premises. All appliances and equipment shall be adequately earthed. In case of
armoured cables, the armour shall be bonded to the earthing system.
All cables and wire rope used for earth connections shall be terminated through tinned
copper lugs.
In case of local earthing, earth electrodes shall be buried near the supply point and earth
continuity wire shall be connected to local earth plate for further distribution to various
appliances. All insulated wires for earth connection shall have insulation of green colour.
Separate core shall be provided for neutral. Earth / Structures shall not be used as a neutral
in any case.
ON/OFF position of all switches shall be clearly designated / painted for easy isolation in
emergency.
Welding/ Gas cutting
Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrestors conforming to BS: 6158 or equivalent are
installed on all gas cylinders as well as at the torch end of the gas hose, while in use.
All cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys and provided with a closing key. Empty &
filled-up gas cylinders shall be stored separately with TAG, protecting them from direct
sun or rain. Minimum 2 nos. of Portable DCP type fire extinguishers (10 kg) shall be
maintained at the gas cylinder stores. Stacking & storing of compressed gas cylinders shall
be arranged away from DG set, hot works, Elect. Panels / Elec. boards, etc
The burner and the hose placed downstream of pressure reducer shall be equipped with
Flash Back Arrester/Non Return Valve device.
The hoses for acetylene and oxygen cylinders must be of different colours. Their
connections to cylinders and burners shall be made with a safety collar.
At end of work, the cylinders in use shall be closed and hoses depressurized.
Cutting of metals using gases, other than oxygen & acetylene, shall require written
concurrence from Owner.
All welding machines shall have effective earthing at least at distinctly isolated two points.
In order to help maintain good housekeeping, and to reduce fire hazard, live electrode bits
shall be contained safely and shall not be thrown directly on the ground.
The hoses of Acetylene and Oxygen shall be kept free from entanglement & away from
common pathways / walkways and preferably be hanged overhead in such a manner which
can avoid contact with cranes, hydra or other mobile construction machinery.
Hot spatters shall be contained / restricted appropriately (by making use of effective fireretardant cloth/fabric) and their flying-off as well as chance of contact with near-by
flammable materials shall be stopped.
The Contractor shall arrange adequate systems & practices for accumulation / collection of
metal & other scraps and remnant electrodes and their safe disposal at regular interval so as
to maintain the fabrication and other areas satisfactorily clean & tidy.
All gas cylinders must have a cylinder cap on at all times when not in use.
Page 1098 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.3.8
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 22 of 87
Ergonomics and tools & tackles
3.3.9
The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their qualification,
experience and state of health.
All lifting tools, tackles, equipment, accessories including cranes shall be tested
periodically by statutory/competent authority for their condition and load carrying capacity.
Valid test & fitness certificates from the applicable authority shall be submitted to
Owner/EIL for their review/acceptance before the lifting tools, tackles, equipment,
accessories and cranes are used.
The contractor shall not be allowed to use defective equipment or tools not adhering to
safety norms.
Contractor shall arrange non-sparking tools for project construction works in operating
plant areas / hydrocarbon prone areas.
Wherever required the Contractor shall make use of Elevated Work Platforms (EWP) or
Aerial Work Platforms (mobile or stationary) to avoid ergonomical risks and workmen
shall be debarred to board such elevated platform during the course of their shifting /
transportation.
Contractor shall ensure installation of Safe Load Indicator (SLI) on all cranes (while in use)
to minimize overloading risk. SLI shall have capability to continuously monitor and
display the load on the hook, and automatically compare it with the rated crane capacity at
the operating condition of the crane. The system shall also provide visual and audible
warnings at set capacity levels to alert the operator in case of violations.
The contractor shall be responsible for safe operations of different equipments mobilized
and used by him at the workplace like transport vehicles, engines, cranes, mobile ladders,
scaffoldings, work tools, etc.
The Contractor shall arrange periodical training for the operators of hydra, crane,
excavator, mobile machinery, etc. at site by utilizing services from renowned
manufacturers
Occupational Health
The contractor shall identify all operations that can adversely affect the health of its
workers and issue & implement mitigation measures.
For surface cleaning operations, sand blasting shall not be permitted even if not explicitly
stated elsewhere in the contract.
To eliminate radiation hazard, Tungsten electrodes used for Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
shall not contain Thorium.
Appropriate respiratory protective devices(hood with respiratory devices) shall be used to

protect workmen from inhalation of air borne contaminants like silica, asbestos, gases,
fumes, etc.
Workmen shall be made aware of correct methods for lifting, carrying, pushing & pulling
of heavy loads. Wherever possible, manual handling shall be replaced by mechanical lifting
equipments.
For jobs like drilling/demolishing/dismantling where noise pollution exceeds the specified
limit of 85 decibels, ear muffs shall be provided to the workers.
To avoid work related upper limb disorders (WRULD) and backaches, Display Screen
Equipments' workplace stations shall be carefully designed & used with proper sitting
postures. Power driven hand-held tools shall be maintained in good working condition to
Page 1099 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 23 of 87
minimize their vibrating effects and personnel using these tools shall be taught how to
operate them safely & how to maintain good blood circulation in hands.
The Contractor shall arrange health check up (by registered medical practitioner) for all the
workers at the time of induction. Health check may have to be repeated if the nature of duty
assigned to him is changed necessitating health check or doubt arises about his wellness.
EIL/Owner reserves the right to ask the contractor to submit medical test reports. Regular
health check-ups are mandatory for the workers assigned with Welding, Radiography,
Blasting, Painting, Heavy Lift and Height (>2m) jobs. All the health check-ups shall be
conducted by registered Medical practitioner and records are to be maintained by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure vaccination of all the workers including their families, during
the course of entire project span.
3.3.10 Hazardous substances
Hazardous, inflammable and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating, thinners, antitermite solutions, water proofing materials shall be stored in appropriate containers
preferably with lids having spillage catchment trays and shall be stored in a good ventilated
area. These containers shall be labeled with the name of the materials highlighting the
hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken. Respective MSDS
(Material Safety Data Sheet) shall be made available at site & may be referred whenever
problem arises.
Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials are likely to exceed the specified limit or
otherwise have harmful effects, appropriate personal protective equipments such as gloves,
goggles/face-shields, aprons, chemical resistant clothing, respirator, etc. shall be used.
The work place shall be checked prior to start of activities to identify the location, type and
condition of any asbestos materials which could be disturbed during the work. In case
asbestos material is detected, usage of appropriate PPEs by all personnel shall be ensured
and the matter shall be reported immediately to EIL/ Owner.
3.3.11 Slips, trips & falls

The contractor shall establish a regular cleaning and basic housekeeping programme that covers
all aspects of the workplace to help minimize the risk of slips, trips & falls. The contractor shall
take positive measures like keeping the work area tidy, storing waste in suitable containers &
harmful items separately, keeping passages, stairways, entrances & exits especially emergency
ones clear, cleaning up spillages immediately and replacing damaged carpet/ floor tiles, mats &
rugs at once to avoid slips, trips & falls.
3.3.12 Radiation exposure
All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing & non-ionizing radiation,
including ultraviolet rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate
shielding or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.
For Open Field Radiography works , requirements of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre
(BARC)/ Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB) shall be followed.
The Contractor shall implement an effective system of control (as described in the AERB
regulations) at site for handling radiography-sources & for avoiding its misuse & theft.
Page 1100 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 24 of 87
The contractor shall generate the Format No: HSE-8 Permit for radiation work before
start of work.
In case the radiography work has to be carried out at day time, suitable methodology to be
used so that other works, people are not affected.
3.3.13 Explosives/Blasting operations
Blasting operations shall be carried out as per latest Explosive Rules (Indian / International)
with prior permission. The Contractor shall obtain license from Chief Controller of
Explosives (CCoE) for collection, transportation, storage of explosives as well as for
carrying out blasting operations.
The Contractor shall prepare exclusive method statement (in cognizance with statutory
requirements) for diffusing unfired explosives, if any, at project site before carrying out
actual task. Nowhere blasting shall be carried out by the Contractor or its agency without
the involvement of competent supervisor and licensed blaster / shot blaster.
3.3.14 Demolition/ Dismantling
The contractor shall adhere to safe demolishing/ dismantling practices at all stages of work
to guard against unsafe working practices.
The contractor shall disconnect service lines (power, gas supply, water, etc.)/ make
alternate arrangements prior to start of work and restore them, if required as directed by
EIL/ Owner at no extra cost.
Before carrying out any demolition/ dismantling work, the contractor shall take prior
approval of EIL/Owner and generate the Format No.HSE-9. For revamp jobs in operating
plants where location of underground utilities is not known with certainty, the contractor
shall depute an experienced engineer for supervision and shall make adequate arrangements
for Fire fighting & First-Aid during the execution of these activities.
The Contractor shall arrange approved Job Safety Analysis (JSA) / Method Statement for
the specific demolition / dismantling task and corresponding action plan commensurate
with hazards / risks associated therein. In no case any activity related to demolition /
dismantling shall be carried out by the Contractor without engaging own supervision / field
engineer.
3.3.15 Road Safety
The Contractor shall ensure adequately planned road transport safety management system.
The vehicles shall be fitted with reverse warning alarms & flashing lights / fog-lights and
usage of seat belts shall be ensured.
The Contractor shall also ensure a separate pedestrian route for safety of the workers and
comply with all traffic rules & regulations, including maintaining speed limit of 20 kmph
or indicated by owner for all types of vehicles / mobile machinery. The maximum
allowable speed shall be adhered to.
In case of an alert or emergency, the Contractor must arrange clearance of all the routes,
roads, access. The Contractor shall deploy sufficient number of traffic controllers at project
site routes / roads/ accesses, to alert reversing movement of vehicles & machinery as well
as pedestrians.
Dumpers, Tippers, etc. shall not be allowed to carry workers within the plant area and also
to & from the labour colony to & from project sites.
Hydras shall only be allowed for handling the materials at fabrication/ storage yards and in
no case shall be allowed to transport the materials over project / plant roads.
Page 1101 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 25 of 87
The Contractor shall not deploy any such mobile machinery / equipments, which do not
have competent operator and / or experienced banks-man / signal-man. Such machinery /
equipments shall have effective limit-switches, reverse-alarm, front & rear-end lights etc.
and shall be maintained in good working order.
The Contractor shall not carry-out maintenance of vehicles / mobile machinery occupying
space on project / plant roads and shall always arrange close supervision for such works.
For pipeline jobs, the contractor shall submit a comprehensive plan covering transportation,
loading / unloading of pipes, movement of side booms, movement of vehicles on the ROW,
etc.
Contractors shall arrange /install visible road signs, diversion boards, caution boards, etc
on project roads for safe movement of men and machinery.
3.3.16 Welfare measures

Contractor shall, at the minimum, ensure the following facilities at work sites:
A crche at site where 10 or more female workers are having children below the age of 6
years.
Adequately ventilated / illuminated rooms at labour camps & its hygienic up-keeping.
Reasonable canteen facilities at site and in labour camps at appropriate location depending
upon site conditions. Contractor shall make use of industrial variety of LPG cylinder &
satisfactory illumination at the canteens. Necessary arrangement for efficient disposal of
wastes from canteens & urinals /toilets shall also be made and regular review shall be made
to maintain the ambience satisfactorily hygienic & shall also comply with all applicable
statutory requirements.
Adequately lighted & ventilated Rest rooms at site (separate for male workers and female
workers).
Urinals, Toilets, drinking water, washing facilities, adequate lighting at site and labour
camps, commensurate with applicable Laws / Legislation.
3.3.17 Environment Protection

Contractor shall ensure proper storage and utilization methodology of materials that are
detrimental to the environment. Where required, Contractor shall ensure that only the
environment friendly materials are selected and emphasize on recycling of waste materials,
such as metals, plastics, glass, paper, oil & solvents. The waste that cannot be minimized,
reused or recovered shall be stored and disposed of safely. In no way, toxic spills shall be
allowed to percolate into the ground. The contractor shall not use the empty areas for dumping
the wastes.
The contractor shall strive to conserve energy and water wherever feasible.
The contractor shall ensure dust free environment at workplace by sprinkling water on the
ground at frequent intervals. The air quality parameters for dust, poisonous gases, toxic releases,
harmful radiations, etc. shall be checked by the contractor on daily basis and whenever need
arises.
The contractor shall not be allowed to discharge chemicals, oil, silt, sewage, sullage and other
waste materials directly into the controlled waters like surface drains, streams, rivers, ponds. A
discharge plan suggesting the methods of treating the waste before discharging shall be
submitted to EIL/Owner for approval.
Page 1102 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 26 of 87
For pipeline jobs, top soil shall be stacked separately while making ROW through fields. This
fertile soil shall be placed back on top after backfilling.
For offshore construction barges, arrangements shall be made for safe disposal of human, food
& other wastes and applicable laws in this regard shall be followed.
3.3.18 Rules & Regulations
All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the environmental laws,
rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials, substances and wastes. Contractor shall
not dump, release or otherwise discharge or disposes off any such materials without the express
authorization of EIL/Owner. An indicative list of Statutory Acts & Rules relating to HSE is
given under Appendix-D.
3.3.19 Weather Protection
Contractor shall take appropriate measures to protect workers from severe storms, rain, solar
radiations, poisonous gases, dust, etc. by ensuring proper usage of PPEs like Sun glasses, Sun
screen lotions, respirators, dust masks, etc. and rearranging/ planning the construction activities
to suit the weather conditions. Effective arrangement (without creating inconvenience to project
facilities & permanent installations) for protecting workmen from hailstorm, drizzle in the form
of temporary shelter shall be made at site.
3.3.20 Communication
All persons deployed at the work site shall have access to effective means of communication so
that any untoward incident can be reported immediately and assistance sought by them.
All health & safety information shall be communicated in a simple & clear language easily
understood by the local workforce.
For information to all, typical subjects that should be communicated are: Inside the company (Top to down)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Quality Policy
HSE Policy contents
Environment Policy
HSE Objectives
Safety Cardinal Rules
HSE Target reached or missed
Praises & Warnings to personnel for HSE Management
Safety Walk Through Reports and safety defects / shortfalls (by management)
HSE Audit results
Revised Statutory Health & Safety provisions, if any
H & S publicity
Suggestions
Inside the Company (Bottom to up)

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Complaints
Compliances on safety defects / shortfalls
Suggestions
Proposals for changes & improvements
HSE Reports (including near-miss reports)
Page 1103 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 27 of 87
3.3.21 Confined Space Entry

The contractor shall generate a work permit (Format No. HSE -7) before entering a confined
space. People, who are permitted to enter into confined space, must be medically examined &
certified by registered doctor, confirming their medical fitness for working in confined space.
All necessary precautions mentioned therein shall be adhered to. An attendant shall be
positioned outside a confined space for extending help during an emergency. All appropriate
PPEs and air quality parameters shall be checked before entering a confined space. It shall be
ensured that the piping of the equipment which has to be opened is pressure- free by checking
that blinds are in place, vents are open and volume is drained. Inside confined space works, only
electrical facilities / installations of 24V shall be permitted. Contactor shall ensure usage of safe
& suitable arrangement of oxygen supply for individual workmen (during the course of work in
confined space), if oxygen concentration is found to be less than 19.5% (v/v) there.
3.3.22 Heavy Lifts
The contractor shall submit detailed rigging studies plan for EIL/ Owner approval prior to
lifting equipment which cannot be erected with a crane of approx. 100 MT capacity due to
constraints of its dimensions, location of foundation height, approach & weight.
Contractor shall generate the format no:HSE-15 Permit for heavy lift/critical erection
Prior to actual lifting activities, contractor shall check the validity of the crane inspection
certificate issued by statutory/ competent authority. This requirement shall also apply to all
rigging equipments utilized for the job.
The contractor shall, at all times, be responsible for all rigging activities.
The Contractor shall ensure medical fitness of all workmen who are engaged / involved in
erection of equipments, vessels etc. and such fitness checks shall be carried-out every six
months interval with the help of a registered medical practitioner & record shall be
maintained
Adequate safety measures such as positive barricading, usage of appropriate PPEs, permit
to work, etc. shall be taken during all heavy or critical lifts.
For lifting any material (irrespective of shape, size or volume), at any height, it is always
advisable to prepare a Plan of Erection (PoE) taking into consideration hazards & risks
associated therein this can enable people to put their own experiences of various natures
& side-by-side establish a practical method for risk-free erection / lifts. The contractor shall
prepare PoE & shall document the same, when risks are identified as medium or high
and the same shall be approved by its competent / qualified engineer.
3.3.23 Key Performance Indicators

The contractor shall measure an activity in both leading & trailing indicators for statistical and
performance measurement. The activities pertaining to key performance indicators are covered
in Monthly HSE Report (Format No. HSE-5). The contractor shall try to achieve a statistically
fair record and strive for its continual improvement.
Leading Indicators viz:-:
-
Number of Safety Inductions carried-out at site (for workmen & staff members)
Number of HSE inspections carried out
Number of Safety Walk Through carried-out by site-head.
Page 1104 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 28 of 87
Number of HSE shortfalls / lapses identified per contractor & closed-out in time.
Number of Safety Meetings conducted (in-house / with contractors)
Number of HSE Audits made (internal & external) vis--vis non conformances raised
Number of HSE Awareness / Motivational program conducted by contractors
Number of HSE Trainings conducted at site for supervisors & workmen
Study of Near miss case reported
Encouragements / Awards / Recognitions to workmen, job supervisors & field engineers.
Suggestions for improvement
Trailing Indicators viz:-:

-
Calculation of HSE statistics viz frequency rate, severity rate, LTA free manhours,etc
Analysis of incidents / accidents (nature, severity, types etc.)
Study of Incident / Accident with respect to :
Variety
Period of the year / project span
Timings of the incident / accident
Age profile of victims
Body parts involved
Penalty levied for causing incident / accident
3.3.24 Unsuitable Land Conditions

Contractor shall take appropriate measures and necessary work permits/clearances if work is to
be done in or around marshy areas, river crossings, mountains, monuments, etc. The Contractor
shall make right assessment and take all necessary action for developing work areas to make
them safe & suitable for crane operations or other vehicular movement before carrying out any
project related activity / operation. Contractor shall take all necessary actions to make the
surroundings of its site establishments (site office, stores, lay-down area etc.) work-worthy
safe and secure.
3.3.25 Under Water Inspection
Contractor shall ensure that boats and other means used for transportation, surveying &
investigation works shall be certified seaworthy by a recognized classification society. It shall
be equipped with all life saving devices like life jackets, adequate fire protection arrangements
and shall posses communication facilities like cellular phones, wireless, walkie-talkie. All
divers used for seabed surveys, underwater inspections shall have required authorized license,
suitable life saving kit. Number of hours of work by divers shall be limited as per regulations.
EIL/ Owner shall have the right to inspect the boat and scrutinize documents in this regard.
3.3.26 Excavation
The Contractor shall obtain permission from competent authorities prior to excavation wherever
required.
The Contractor shall locate the position of buried utilities (water line, cable route, etc.) by
referring to project / plant drawing / in consultation with EIL/Owner. The Contractor shall start
digging manually to locate the exact position of buried utilities & thereafter use mechanical
means.
The Contractor shall keep soil heaps at least 1.5 M away from edge or a distance equal to depth
of pit (whichever is more)
Page 1105 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 29 of 87
The Contractor shall maintain sufficient angle of repose during excavation shall also
provide slope or suitable bench as decided by EIL / Owner.
The Contractor shall arrange battering or benching wherever required for preventing
collapse of edge of excavations.
The Contractor shall identify & arrange de-watering pump or well-point system to prevent earth
collapse due to heavy rain / influx of underground water.
The Contractor shall arrange protective fencing / barricading with warning signal around
excavated pits, trenches, etc. along with minimum 2 (two) entries, exits / escape ladders.
The Contractor must avoid underpinning / under-cutting to prevent collapse of chunk of earth
during excavation
The Contractor shall use stoppers to prevent over-run of vehicle wheels at the edge of
excavated pits / trenches.
The Contractor shall arrange strengthening of shoring & strutting proactively to avoid
collapse of earth / edges due to vehicular movement in close proximity of excavated areas / pits
/ trenches, etc.
3.4
Tool Box Talks (TBT)

Contractor shall conduct daily TBT with workers prior to start of work and shall maintain
proper record of the meeting. A suggested format is given below. The TBT is to be conducted
by the immediate supervisor of the workers
The Contractor shall conduct TBT before start of every morning or evening shift or night shift
activities, for alerting the workers on specific hazards and their appropriate dos & donts. The
Contractor shall provide sufficient rests to the site workmen and their foremen to avert fatigue
& thereby endangering their lives during the course of site works.
TOOL BOX TALK RECORDING SHEET
Date & Time
Work Location
Subject (Nature of work)
Presenter
Hazards involved
Precautions to be taken
Worker's Name
Signature
Section
Remarks, in any
The topics during TBT shall include
-
Hazards related to work assigned on that day and precautions to be taken.

Any forthcoming HSE hazards/events/instruction/orders, etc.
The above record can be kept in local language, which workers can read. These records shall be
made available to EIL/ Owner whenever demanded.
Page 1106 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.5
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 30 of 87
Training & Induction Programme
Initial induction of workers into Construction oriented activities and appraising them about
the methodology of works and how to carry-out safely and the same should not be inter
mixed with Tool Box Talks or HSE Training. In this regard careful action should be made
& maintained for imparting HSE induction to every individual, irrespective of his
task/designation/level of employment, whereas, HSE Training should be imparted to
specific person/group of people who are to carry-out that specific task more than once for
example, Riggers must be trained for working at heights, welders must be trained for work
in confined space, fitters/carpenters, mesons must be trained for work at heights, etc.
Contractor shall conduct Safety induction programme on HSE for all his workers and
maintain records. The Gate Pass shall be issued only to those workers who successfully
qualify the Safety induction programme.
The Contractor shall brief the visitors about the HSE precautions which are required to be
taken before their proceeding to site and make necessary arrangements to issue appropriate
PPEs like Aprons, hard hats, ear-plugs, goggles & safety shoes etc., to his visitors. The
Contractor shall always maintain relevant acknowledgement from visitor on providing him
brief information on HSE actions.
Contractor shall ensure that all his personnel possess appropriate training to carry out the
assigned job safely. The training should be imparted in a language understood by them and
should specifically be trained about
-
Potential hazards to which they may be exposed at their workplace

Measures available for prevention and elimination of these hazards
The topics during training shall cover, at the minimum: -
Why safety should be considered during work - explanation

Education about hazards and precautions required
Employees duties & responsibilities
Emergency and evacuation plan
HSE requirements during project activities
Fire fighting and First-Aid
Use of PPEs
Occupational health issues dos & donts
Local laws on intoxicating drinks, drugs, smoking in force
Common environmental subjects lighting, ventilation, vibration, smoke/fumes etc.
Records of the training shall be kept and submitted to EIL/ Owner.
The Contractor shall make regular program for conducting Safety Training on various
topics related to various activities & their safe-guarding utilizing experienced persons /
outside agency / faculty. A program for Safety Training (indicative list as per Appendix F)
shall be furnished by the Contractor in its HSE Plan .
For offshore and jetty jobs, contractor shall ensure that all personnel deployed have
undergone a structured sea survival training including use of lifeboats, basket landing, use
of radio communication etc. from an agency acceptable to Owner/EIL.
Page 1107 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.6
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 31 of 87
ADDITIONAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR WORKING INSIDE A RUNNING

PLANT
As a minimum, the contractor shall ensure adherence to following safety requirements while
working in or in the close vicinity of an operating plant:
a)
Contractor shall obtain permits for Hot work, Cold work, Excavation and Confined Space
from Owner in the prescribed format.
b)
The contractor shall monitor record and compile list of his workers entering the operational
plant/unit each day and ensure & record their return after completing the job.
c)
Contractors workers and staff members shall use designated entrances and proceed by
designated routes to work areas only assigned to them. The workers shall not be allowed to
enter units' area, tanks area, pump rooms, etc. without work authorization permit.
d)
Work activities shall be planned in such a way so as to minimize the disruption of other
activities being carried out in an operational plant/unit and activities of other contractors.
e)
The contractor shall submit a list of all chemicals/toxic substances that are intended to be
used at site and shall take prior approval of the Owner.
f)
Specific training on working in a hydrocarbon plant shall be imparted to the work force and
mock drills shall be carried out for Rescue operations/First-Aid measures.
g)
Proper barricading/cordoning of the operational units/plants shall be done before starting

the construction activities. No unauthorized person shall be allowed to trespass. The height
and overall design of the barricading structure shall be finalized in consultation with the
Owner and shall be got approved from the Owner.
h)
Care shall be taken to prevent hitting underground facilities such as electrical cables,
hydrocarbon piping during execution of work.
i)
Barricading with water curtain shall be arranged in specific/critical areas where

hydrocarbon vapors are likely to be present such as near horton spheres or tanks.
Positioning of fire tenders (from owner) shall also be ensured during execution of critical
activities.
j)
Emergency evacuation plan shall be worked out and all workmen shall be apprised about
evacuation routes. Mock drill operations may also be conducted.
k)
Flammable gas test shall be conducted prior to any hot work using appropriate measuring
instruments. Sewers, drains, vents or any other gas escaping points shall be covered with
flame retardant tarpaulin.
l)
Respiratory devices shall be kept handy while working in confined zones where there is a
danger of inhalation of poisonous gases. Constant monitoring of presence of Gas/
Hydrocarbon shall be done.
m) Clearance shall be obtained from all parties before starting hot tapping, patchwork on live
lines and work on corroded tank roof.
n)
Positive isolation of line/equipment by blinding for welding/cutting/grinding shall be done.

Closing of valve will not be considered sufficient for isolation.
Page 1108 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
3.7
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 32 of 87
o)
Welding spatters shall be contained properly and in no case shall be allowed to fall on the
ground containing oil. Similar care shall be taken during cutting operations.
p)
The vehicles, cranes, engines, etc. shall be fitted with spark arresters on the exhaust pipe
and got it approved from Safety Department of the Owner.
q)
Plant air should not be used to clean any part of the body or clothing or use to blow off dirt
on the floor.
r)
Gas detectors should be installed in gas leakage prone areas as per requirement of Owner's
plant operation personnel.
s)
Experienced full time safety personnel shall be exclusively deployed to monitor safety
aspects in running plants.
Self Assessment And Enhancement

The contractor shall develop a method of check & balance through self assessment &
enhancement techniques and shall explore the opportunities for continual improvement in the
HSE system.
3.8
HSE Promotion
The contractor shall encourage his workforce to promote HSE efforts at workplace by way of
organizing workshops/seminars/training programmes, celebrating HSE awareness weeks &
National Safety Day, conducting quizzes & essay competitions, distributing pamphlets, posters
& material on HSE, providing incentives for maintaining good HSE practices and granting
incentives / bonus for completing the job without any lost time accident.
3.9
Lock Out and Tag Out (LOTO) for isolation of energy source
Contractor shall follow the LOTO/Isolation procedure of owner for all energy source
isolations installed/under purview by /of owner ie. Brown field
For all the other energy source (not under purview of client/owner) i.e Green field
Contractor shall develop a system to ensure the isolation of equipments, pipelines, Vessel,
electrical panels from the energy source covering following as minimum:-
Identification of all energy source viz electrical, mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic,

chemical, thermal, gravitational, radiation and other forms of stored or kinetic
energy.
Establishing the energy isolation devices viz: manually operated electrical circuit
breakers, disconnection switches, blind flanges, etc
Installation of Lock Out devices for preventing the inadvertent release of stored
energy and Tag Out devices ( Danger, Do Not operate or Do not Remove tags)
to indicate that testing, maintenance or servicing is underway and the device cannot
be operated until the tag out device is removed.
Lock Out and Tag out log book
Permit for isolation and de-isolation of energy source as per format NO: HSE-16
Availability of competent persons like experienced operators at substations, pump
house, units, etc, ; supervisors,etc.
Contractor shall ensure that all the sources are locked out and tagged properly before giving
clearance to start the job.
After the completion of job, contractor shall ensure all tools and tackles are removed
and nobody is present in the working area and signing on LOTO log book.
Page 1109 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 33 of 87
Only on confirmation of above the contractor will remove their lock and tag from the
isolation points and give instructions for energizing the same. Only the person carrying out
the task shall himself carry the key for the lock in /Lock out.
4.0
DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR
4.1
On Award Of Contract
The Contractor shall submit a comprehensive Health, Safety and Environment Plan or
programme for approval by EIL/Owner prior to start of work. The Contractor shall participate in
the pre-start meeting with EIL/Owner to finalize HSE Plans which shall including the
following:
-
4.2
HSE policy & Objectives

Job procedure to be followed by the Contractor for construction activities including
handling of equipments, scaffolding, electric installations, etc. describing the risks
involved, actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each activity. Indicative list
of procedures is enclosed as Annexure-H
EIL/Owner review/audit requirement.
Organization structure along with responsibility and authority, on HSE activities.
Administrative & disciplinary steps involving implementation of HSE requirements
Emergency evacuation plan/ procedures for site and labour camps
Job Safety Analysis for high risk jobs
Procedures for reporting & investigation of accidents and near misses.
HSE Inspection
HSE Training programmes at project site
HSE Awareness programmes, at project site
Reference to Rules, Regulations and statutory requirements.
HSE documentation viz reporting, analysis & record keeping.
During Job Execution

Contractor shall implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management programme
including but not limited to as brought out under para 3.0. Contractor shall also ensure:
to arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act, third party
liability insurance, registration under BOCW Act, etc, as applicable.
to arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable), like permits for hot
work, working at heights (Refer Format No. HSE-6), confined space (Refer Format No.
HSE-7), Radiation Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-8), Demolishing/ Dismantling
Work Permit (Refer Format No. HSE-9),Permit for erection/modification & dismantling of
scaffolding(Refer Format No:HSE-14), Permit for heavy lift/critical erection (Refer Format
No:HSE-15) ,Permit for energy Isolation & De-isolation (HSE-16) ,storage of chemical /
explosive materials & its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein. In this
regard, requirements of Oil industry Safety Directorate Standard No. Std -105 "Work
Permit Systems shall be complied with while working in existing Oil or Gas processing
plants. List of the persons involved shall be maintained as annexure to the work permit
issued for a particular activity.
to submit, timely, the completed checklist on HSE activities in Format No.HSE-1, Monthly
HSE report in Format No.HSE-5 (use of web based package (www.eil.co.in/conthse) is
compulsory wherever the facility is available else a hard copy is to be submitted), accident/
incident reports, investigation reports etc. as per EIL/Owner requirements. Compliance of
instructions on HSE shall be done by Contractor and informed urgently to EIL/Owner.
Page 1110 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
4.3
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 34 of 87
that his top most executive at site attends all the Safety Committee/HSE meetings arranged
by EIL/Owner and carries out safety walk through regularly. Only in case of his absence
from site that a second senior most person shall be nominated by him, in advance, and
communicated to EIL/Owner for performing the above tasks.
display at site office and at prominent locations HSE Policy, caution boards, list of
hospitals, emergency services available, safety signs like Men at work, Speed Limits,
Hazardous Area, various dos & donts, etc.
provide posters, banners for safe working to promote safety consciousness.
identify, assess, analyze & mitigate the construction hazards & incorporate relevant control
measures before actually executing site works. (HIRAC = Hazard Identification, Risk
Analysis and Control).
arrange testing, examination, inspection of own as well as borrowed construction

equipments / machinery (stationary & mobile) before being used at site and also at
periodical interval, through own resources and also by 3rd party competent agencies (as
deemed fit in statutes). Records of such test, examination etc. shall be maintained & shall
be submitted to EIL/Owner as & when asked for.
carryout audits/inspection (internal & external) at his works as well as sub contractor works
as per approved HSE plan/procedure/programme & submit the compliance reports of
identified shortfalls for EIL/Owner review.
arranging HSE training for site workmen (of his own & sub contractors) through internal or
external faculty at periodical intervals.
assistance & cooperate during HSE audits by EIL/Owner or any other 3rd party and submit
compliance report.
generate & submit of HSE records/report as per this specification.
apprise EIL/Owner on HSE activities at site regularly.
carry-out all dismantling activities safely, with prior approval of EIL/Owner representative.
The Contractor shall ensure that Hot works and painting works do not continue at the
same place / location at project site for which chance or probability of fire incident
exists.
During Short Listing Of The Sub-Contractors

The contractor shall review the HSE management system of the sub-contractors in line with the
requirements given in this specification. The contractor shall be held responsible for the
shortcomings observed in the HSE management system of the sub-contractor(s) during
execution of the job.
Page 1111 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
5.0
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 35 of 87
RECORDS
At the minimum, the contractor shall maintain/ submit HSE records in the following reporting
formats/:
Safety Walk Through Report
Accident/ Incident Report
Supplementary Accident/ Incident Investigation report
Near Miss Incident Report
Monthly HSE Report
Permit for working at height
Permit for working in confined space
Permit for radiation work
Permit for demolishing/ dismantling
Daily Safety checklist
House keeping Assessment & compliance
Inspection of temporary electrical booth/installation
Inspection for scaffolding
Permit for erection/modification &dismantling of scaffolding
Permit for heavy lift/critical erection.
Permit for Energy isolation and de-isolation.
Permit for Excavation
Inspection reports of Equipment/tools/tackles
Report of Toolbox talks
PPE issue report/register
Site inspection reports
Training records
HSE-1
HSE-2
HSE-3
HSE-4
HSE-5
HSE-5
HSE-7
HSE-8
HSE-9
HSE-10
HSE-11
HSE-12
HSE-13
HSE-14
HSE-15
HSE-16
HSE-17
*
As indicated in
specification
*
*
*
(*) The formats shall be developed in consultation with EIL/Owner
Page 1112 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 36 of 87
APPENDIX-A
(Sheet 1 of 2)
A.
IS CODES ON HSE
SP: 53
Safety code for the use, Care and protection of hand operated tools.
IS: 838
Code of practice for safety & health requirements in electric and gas welding
and cutting operations
IS: 1179
Eye & Face precautions during welding, equipment etc.
IS: 1860
Safety requirements for use, care and protection of abrasive grinding wheels.
IS: 1989 (Pt -II) Leather safety boots and shoes

IS: 2925
Industrial Safety Helmets
IS: 3016
Code of practice for fire safety precautions in welding & cutting operation.
IS: 3043
Code of practice for earthing
IS: 3764
Code of safety for excavation work
IS: 3786
Methods for computation of frequency and severity rates for industrial injuries
and classification of industrial accidents
IS: 3696
Safety Code of scaffolds and ladders
IS: 4083
Recommendations on stacking and storage of construction materials and

components at site
IS: 4770
Rubber gloves for electrical purposes
IS: 5121
Safety code for piling and other deep foundations
IS: 5216 (Pt-I) Recommendations on Safety procedures and practices in electrical works
IS: 5557
Industrial and Safety rubber lined boots
IS: 5983
Eye protectors
IS: 6519
Selection, care and repair of Safety footwear
IS: 6994 (Pt-I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton Gloves)
IS: 7293
Safety Code for working with construction Machinery
IS: 8519
Guide for selection of industrial safety equipment for body protection
IS: 9167
Ear protectors
IS: 11006
Flash back arrestor (Flame arrestor)
IS: 11016
General and safety requirements for machine tools and their operation
IS: 11057
Specification for Industrial safety nets
IS: 11226
Leather safety footwear having direct moulded rubber sole
IS: 11972
Code of practice for safety precaution to be taken when entering a sewerage

system
IS: 13367
Code of practice-safe use of cranes
IS: 13416
Recommendations for preventive measures against hazards at working place
Page 1113 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 37 of 87
APPENDIX-A
(Sheet 2 of 2)
B.
Safety Glasses
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ON HSE
ANSI Z 87.1, ANSI ZZ 87.1, AS 1337, BS 2092,

BS 1542, BS 679, DIN 4646/ 58311
Safety Shoes
ANSI Z 41.1, AS 2210, EN 345
Hand Gloves
BS 1651
Ear Muffs
BS 6344, ANSI S 31.9
Hard Hat
ANSI Z 89.1/89.2, AS 1808 , BS 5240, DIN 4840
Goggles
ANSI Z 87.1
Face Shield
ANSI Z 89.1
Breathing Apparatus
BS 4667, NIOSH
Welding & Cutting
ANSI Z 49.1
Safe handling of compressed: P-1
(Compressed Gas Association Gases in cylinders 1235

Jefferson Davis Highway,
Arlington VA 22202 - USA)
Full body harness
EN-361
Lanyard
EN-354
Karabiner
EN-362 and EN-12275
Page 1114 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 38 of 87
APPENDIX-B
DETAILS OF FIRST AID BOX
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------SL.
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
NO.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Small size Roller Bandages, 1 Inch Wide

Medium size Roller Bandages, 2 Inches Wide
Large size Roller Bandages, 4 Inches Wide
Large size Burn Dressing
Cotton Wool
Antiseptic Solution Dettol (100 ml.) or Savlon
Mercurochrome Solution (100 ml.) 2% in water
Ammonia Solution (20 ml.)
A Pair of Scissors
Adhesive Plaster (1.25 cm X 5 m)
Eye pads in Separate Sealed Pkt.
Tourniqut
Safety Pins
Tinc. Iodine/ Betadin (100 ml.)
Polythene Wash cup for washing eyes
Potassium Permanganate (20 gms.)
Tinc. Benzoine (100 ml.)
Triangular Bandages
Band Aid Dressing
Iodex/Moov (25 gms.)
Tongue Depressor
Boric Acid Powder (20 gms.)
Sodium Bicarbonate (20 gms.)
Dressing Powder (Nebasulf) (10 gms.)
Medicinal Glass
Duster
Booklet (English & Local Language)
Soap
Toothache Solution
Vicks (22 gms.)
Forceps
Note Book
Splints
Lock
Life Saving/Emergency/Over-the counter Drugs
(Finger Dressing small)

(Hand & Foot Dressing)
(Body Dressing Large)
(Burn Dressing Large)
(20 gms packing)
6 Pcs.
6 Pcs.
6 Pcs.
4 Pkts.
4 Pkts.
1 Bottle
1 Bottle
1 Bottle
1 Piece
1 Spool
4 pcs.
1 No.
1 Dozen
1 Bottle
1 No.
1 Pkt.
1 Bottle
2 Nos.
5 Pcs.
1 Bottle
1 No.
2 Pkt.
1 Pkt.
1 Bottle
1 No.
1 No.
1 No. each
1 No.
1 No.
1 Bottle
1 No.
1 No.
4 Nos.
1 Piece
As decided at site
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Box size: 14" x 12" x 4"

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : The medicines prescribed above are only indicative. Equivalent medicines can also be used.
A prescription, in this regard, shall be required from a qualified Physician.
Page 1115 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 39 of 87
APPENDIX-C
TYPE OF FIRES VIS--VIS FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire
Extinguisher
Water
Fire
Foam
Originated
from
paper, clothes, wood
Inflammable liquids
like alcohol, diesel,
petrol, edible oils,
bitumen
Originated
from
gases like LPG,
CNG, H2
Electrical fires
LEGEND :
Dry Powder
can control
minor surface
fires
can control
minor surface
fires
Multi purpose
(ABC)
CO2
: CAN BE USED
: NOT TO BE USED
Note: Fire extinguishing equipment must be checked at least once a year and after every use by an
authorized person. The equipment must have an inspection label on which the next inspection date is
given. Type of extinguisher shall clearly be marked on it.
Page 1116 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 40 of 87
APPENDIX-D
List of Statutory Acts & Rules Relating to HSE
-
The Indian Explosives Act and Rules
The Motor Vehicle Act and Central Motor Vehicle Rules
The Factories Act and concerned Factory Rules
The Petroleum Act and Petroleum Rules
The Workmen Compensation Act
The Gas Cylinder Rules and the Static & Mobile Pressure Vessels Rules
The Indian Electricity Act and Rules
The Indian Boiler Act and Regulations
The Water (Prevention & Control & Pollution) Act
The Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Cess Act
The Mines & Minerals (Regulation & Development) Act
The Air (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act
The Atomic Energy Act
The Radiation Protection Rules
The Indian Fisheries Act
The Indian Forest Act
The Wild Life (Protection) Act
The Environment (Protection) Act and Rules
The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules
The Manufacturing, Storage & import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules
The Public Liability Act
The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Condition of service)
Act
Other statutory acts Like EPF, ESIS, Minimum Wage Act.

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 41 of 87
APPENDIX-E (Sheet 1 of 12)

CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS, THEIR EFFECTS & PREVENTIVE MEASURES
ACTIVITY
(A)
EXCAVATION
Pit Excavation
upto 3.0m
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Falling into pit
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Personal injury
Earth Collapse
Suffocation/
Breathlessness
Buried
Contact with
buried electric
cables
Gas/ Oil
Electrocution
Explosion
Pipelines
Pit Excavation
beyond 3.0m
Page 1117 of 1744
Same as above
plus
Flooding due to
excessive rain/
underground
water
Digging in the
vicinity of
existing Building/
Structure
Movement of
vehicles/
equipments close
to the edge of cut.
Can cause
drowning situation
Building/Structure
may collapse
Loss of health &
wealth
May cause cave-in
or slides.
Persons may get
buried.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Provide guard rails/ barricade with warning
signal
Provide at least two entries/ exits.
Provide escape ladders.
Provide suitable size of shoring and strutting, if
required.
Keep soil heaps away from the edge equivalent to
1.5m or depth of pit whichever is more.
Don't allow vehicles to operate too close to
excavated areas. Maintain at least 2m distance
from edge of cut.
Maintain sufficient angle of repose. Provide
slope not less than 1:1 and suitable bench of 0.5m
width at every 1.5m depth of excavation in all
soils except hard rock.
Battering/benching the sides.
Obtain permission from competent authorities,
prior to excavation, if required.
Locate the position of buried utilities by referring
to plant drawings.
Start digging manually to locate the exact
position of buried utilities and thereafter use
mechanical means.
Prevent ingress of water
Provide ring buoys
Identify and provide suitable size dewatering
pump or well point system
Obtain prior approval of excavation method from
local authorities.
Use under-pining method
Construct retaining wall side by side.
Barricade the excavated area with proper lighting
arrangements
Maintain at least 2m distance from edge of cut
and use stop blocks to prevent over-run
Strengthen shoring and strutting

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 42 of 87
APPENDIX-E: (Sheet 2 of 12)

CONSTRUCTION HAZARDS, THEIR EFFECTS & PREVENTIVE MEASURES (Contd.)
ACTIVITY
Narrow deep
excavations for
pipelines, etc.
Rock by
excavation
blasting
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Same as above
plus
Frequent cave-in
or slides
Flooding due to
Hydro- static
testing
Improper
handling of
explosives
Uncontrolled
explosion
Rock excavation
by blasting
(Contd)
Scattering of
stone pieces in
atmosphere
Entrapping of
persons/ animals.
Misfire
Piling Work
Failure of piledriving
equipment
Noise pollution
Extruding
rods/casing
Working in the
vicinity of 'LiveElectricity'
(B)
CONCRETING
Page 1118 of 1744
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
May cause severe
injuries or prove
fatal
Battering/benching of sides
Provide escape ladders
May arise drowning Same as above plus

situation
Bail out accumulated water
Maintain adequate ventilation.
May prove fatal
Ensure proper storage, handling & carrying of
explosives by trained personnel.
Comply with the applicable explosive acts &
rules.
May cause severe
Allow only authorized persons to perform
injuries or prove
blasting operations.
fatal
Smoking and open flames are to be strictly
prohibited
Can hurt people
Use PPE like goggles, face mask, helmets etc.
May cause severe
injuries or prove
fatal
May explode
suddenly
Can hurt people
Can cause deafness
and psychological
imbalance.
Can hurt people
Can cause
electrocution/
Asphyxiation
Air pollution by
cement
Handling of
ingredients
May affect
Respiratory System
Hands may get
injured
Protruding
reinforcement
rods.
Feet may get

injured
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Barricade the area with red flags and blow siren

before blasting.
Do not return to site for at least 20 minutes or
unless announced safe by designated person.
Inspect Piling rigs and pulley blocks before the
beginning of each shift.
Use personal protective equipments like ear
plugs, muffs, etc.
Barricade the area and install sign boards
Provide first-aid
Keep sufficient distance from Live-Electricity as
per IS code.
Shut off the supply, if possible
Provide artificial/rescue breathing to the injured
Wear respirators or cover mouth and nose with
wet cloth.
Use gloves & other PPE.
Use Provide platform above reinforcement for
movement of workers.

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 43 of 87
APPENDIX-E : (Sheet 3 of 12)

ACTIVITY
Super-structure
Page 1119 of 1744
(C)
REINFORCEMENT
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Earthing of
electrical
mixers,
vibrators, etc.
not done.
Falling of
materials from
height
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Can cause
electrocution/
asphyxiation
Continuous
pouring by same
gang
Revolving of
concrete mixer/
vibrators
Same as above
plus
Deflection in
props or
shuttering
material
Passage to work
place
Cause tiredness of
workers and may
lead to accident.
Parts of body or
clothes may get
entrapped.
Shuttering/props
may collapse and
prove fatal
Curtailment and
binding of rods
Carrying of rods
for short
distances/at
heights
Checking of
clear distance/
cover with hands
Hitting projected
rods and
standing on
cantilever rods.
Persons may get

injured
Improperly tied and

designed
props/planks may
collapse
Persons may get
injured
Workers may get
injured their hands
and shoulders.
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Ensure earthing of equipments and proper
functioning of electrical circuit before
Use hard hats
Remove surplus material immediately from work
place.
Ensure lighting arrangements during night hours
Insist on shift pattern
Provide adequate rest to workers between
subsequent pours.
Allow only mixers with hopper
Provide safety cages around moving motors
Ensure proper mechanical locking of vibrator
Avoid excessive stacking on shuttering material
Check the design and strength of shuttering
material before commencement of work
Rectify immediately the deflection noted during
concreting.
Ensure the stability and strength of passage
before commencement of work.
Do not overload and stand under the passage.
Rods may cut or

injure the fingers
Use PPE like gloves, shoes, helmets, etc.

Avoid usage of shift tools
Provide suitable pads on shoulders and use safety
gloves.
Tie up rods in easily liftable bundles
Ensure proper staging.
Use measuring devices like tape, measuring rods,
etc.
Persons may get

injured and fell
down
Use safety shoes and avoid standing

unnecessarily on cantilever rods
Avoid wearing of loose clothes

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 44 of 87

ACTIVITY
(D)WELDING
AND GAS
CUTTING
Page 1120 of 1744
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Falling of material
from height
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
May prove fatal
Transportation of
rods by trucks/
trailers
Protruded rods may

hit the persons
Welding radiates
invisible
ultraviolet and
infra-red rays
Improper
placement of
oxygen and
acetylene cylinders
Radiation can
damage eyes and
skin.
Leakage/ cuts in
hoses
Opening-up of
cylinder
Welding of tanks,
container or pipes
storing flammable
liquids
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Use helmets
Provide safety nets
Use red flags/lights at the ends
Do not protrude the rods in front of or by the side
of driver's cabin.
Do not extend the rods 1/3rd of deck length or
1.5m whichever is less
Use specified shielding devices and other PPE of
correct specifications.
Avoid thoriated tungsten electrodes for GTAW
Explosion may occur Move out any leaking cylinder

Keep cylinders in vertical position
Use trolley for transportation of cylinders and
chain them
Use flashback arrestors
May cause fire
Purge regulators immediately and then turn off
Never use grease or oil on oxygen line
connections and copper fittings on acetylene lines
Inspect regularly gas carrying hoses
Always use red hose for acetylene & other
fuel gases and black for oxygen
Cylinder may burst
Always stand back from the regulator while
opening the cylinder
Turn valve slowly to avoid bursting
Cover the lug terminals to prevent short
circuiting
Explosion may occur Empty & purge them before welding
Never attach the ground cable to tanks, container
or pipe storing flammable liquids
Never use LPG for gas cutting

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 45 of 87

ACTIVITY
(E)
RADIOGRAPHY
(F) ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
AND USAGE
Page 1121 of 1744
(*)
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Ionizing
radiation
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Radiations may react
with the skin and can
cause cancer, skin
irritation, dermatitis,
etc.
Transpor-tation
and Storage of
Radiog-raphy
source
Same as above
Loss of Radio
isotope
Short circuiting
Same as above
Can cause
Electrocution or Fire
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Ensure Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB
before commencement of job.
Cordon off the area and install Radiation warning
symbols
Restrict the entry of unauthorized persons
Wear appropriate PPE and film badges issued by
BARC/AERB
Never touch or handle radiography source with
hands
Store radiography source inside a pit in an
exclusive isolated storage room with lock and
key arrangement. The pit should be approved by
BARC/AERB.
Radiography source should never be carried
either in passenger bus or in a passenger
compartment of trains.
BARC/AERB has to be informed before source
movement.
Permission from Director General of Civil
Aviation is required for booking radio isotopes
with airlines.
Try to locate with the help of Survey Meter.
Inform BARC/AERB (*)
Use rubberized hand gloves and other PPE
Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways.
Allow only licensed electricians to perform on
electrical facilities
Use one socket for one appliance
Ensure usage of only fully insulated wires or
cables
Don't place bare wire ends in a socket
Ensure earthing of machineries and equipments
Do not use damaged cords and avoid temporary
connections
Use spark-proof/flame proof type field
distribution boxes.
Atomic Energy Regulatory Board (AERB),

Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC)
Anushaktinagar, Mumbai 400 094

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 46 of 87

ACTIVITY
(G) FIRE
PREVENTION
AND
PROTECTION
Page 1122 of 1744
TYPE OF
HAZARD
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Overloading of
Electrical
System
Bursting of system
can occur which
leads to fire
Improper laying
of overhead and
underground
transmission
lines/cables
Can cause
electrocution and
prove fatal
Small fires can

become big ones
and may spread
to the
surrounding
areas
Cause burn injuries

and may prove fatal
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Do not allow open/bare connections
Provide all connections through ELCB
Protect electrical cables/equipment's from water
and naked flames
Check all connections before energizing
Display voltage and current ratings prominently
with 'Danger' signs.
Ensure approved cable size, voltage grade and
type
Switch off the electrical utilities when not in use
Do not allow unauthorized connections.
Ensure proper grid wise distribution of Power
Do not lay unarmoured cable directly on ground,
wall, roof of trees
Maintain at least 3m distance from HT cables
All temporary cables should be laid at least 750
mm below ground on 100 mm fine sand
overlying by brick soling
Provide proper sleeves at crossings/ intersections
Provide cable route markers indicating the type
and depth of cables at intervals not exceeding
30m and at the diversions/termination
In case a fire breaks out, press fire alarm system
and shout "Fire, Fire"
Keep buckets full of sand & water/ fire
extinguishing equipment near hazardous
locations
Confine smoking to 'Smoking Zones' only.
Train people for using specific type of fire
fighting equipments under different classes of fire
Keep fire doors/shutters, passages and exit doors
unobstructed
Maintain good housekeeping and first-aid boxes
(for details refer Appendix-B)
Don't obstruct assess to Fire extinguishers.
Do not use elevators for evacuation during fire.
Maintain lightening arrestors for elevated
structures
Stop all electrical motors with internal
combustion

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 47 of 87

ACTIVITY
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Improper
selection of Fire
extinguisher
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
It may not
extinguish the fire
Improper storage Same as above

of highly
inflammable
substances
(H)
VEHICULAR
MOVEMENT
Page 1123 of 1744
Short circuiting
of electrical
system
Same as above
Can cause
Electrocution
Crossing the
Speed Limits
(Rash driving)
Personal injury
Adverse weather
condition
Same as Above
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Move the vehicles from dangerous locations
Remove the load hanging from the crane booms
Remain out of the danger areas.
Ensure usage of correct fire extinguisher meant
for the specified fire (for details refer AppendixC).
Do not attempt to extinguish Oil and electric
fires with water. Use foam cylinders/CO2/sand
or earth.
Maintain safe distance of flammable substances
from source of ignition
Restrict the distribution of flammable materials
to only min. necessary amount
Construct specifically designed fuel storage
facilities
Keep chemicals in cool and dry place away from
heat. Ensure adequate ventilation
Before welding operation, remove or shield the
flammable material properly
Store flammable materials in stable racks,
correctly labeled preferably with catchment
trays.
Wipe off the spills immediately
Don't lay wires under carpets, mats or door ways
Use one socket for one appliance.
Use only fully insulated wires or cables
Do not allow open/bare connections
Provide all connections through ELCB
Ensure earthing of machineries and equipments
Obey speed limits and traffic rules strictly
Always expect the unexpected and be a
defensive driver
Use seat belts/helmets
Blow horn at intersections and during
overtaking operations.
Maintain the vehicle in good condition
Do not overtake on curves, bridges and slopes
Read the road ahead and ride to the left
Keep the wind screen and lights clean
Do not turn at speed.
Recognize the hazard, understand the defense
and act correctly in time.

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 48 of 87

ACTIVITY
(I)
PROOF
TESTING
(HYDROSTATI
C /PNEUMATIC
TESTING)
Page 1124 of 1744
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Consuming
alcohol before
and during the
driving
operation
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Same as above
Falling objects/
Mechanical
failure
May prove fatal
Bursting of
piping
Collapse of
tanks
Tanks flying off
May cause injury

and prove fatal
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Alcohol and driving do not mix well. Either
choose alcohol or driving.
If you have a choice between hitting a fixed
object or an on-coming vehicle, hit the fixed
object
Quit the steering at once and become a passenger.
Otherwise take sufficient rest and then drive.
Do not force the driver to drive fast and round the
clock.
Do not day dream while driving
Ensure effective braking system, adequate
visibility for the drives, reverse warning alarm..
Proper maintenance of the vehicle as per
manufacturer instructions
Prepare test procedure & obtain EIL/owner's
approval
Provide separate gauge for pressurizing pump
and piping/equipment
Check the calibration status of all pressure
gauges, dead weight testers and temperature
recorders
Take dial readings at suitable defined intervals
and ensure most of them fall between 40-60% of
the gauge scale range
Provide safety relief valve (set at pressure
slightly higher than test pressure) while testing
with air/ nitrogen
Ensure necessary precautions, stepwise increase
in pressure, tightening of bolts/nuts, grouting, etc.
before and during testing
Keep the vents open before opening any valve
while draining out of water used for hydro-testing
of tanks.
Pneumatic testing involves the hazard of released
energy stored in compressed gas. Specific care
must therefore be taken to minimize the chance
of brittle failure during a pneumatic leak test.
Test temperature is important in this regard and
must be considered when the designer chooses
the material of construction.

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 49 of 87

ACTIVITY
(J)
WORKING AT
HEIGHTS
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Person can fall

down
Material can fall

down
(K) CONFINED
SPACES
Page 1125 of 1744
Suffocation/
drowning
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
May sustain severe

injuries or prove
fatal
May hit the

scrap/material
stacked at the
ground or in
between
May hit the workers
working at lower
levels and prove
fatal
Unconsciousness,
death
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
A pressure relief device shall be provided, having
a set pressure not higher than the test pressure
plus the lesser of 345 KPa (50 psi) or 10% of the
test pressure.
The gas used as test fluid, if not air, shall be
nonflammable and nontoxic.
Provide guard rails/barricade at the work place
Use PPE like full body harness, life line, helmets,
safety shoes, etc.
Obtain a permit before starting the work at height
above 3 meters
Fall arrest and safety nets, etc. must be installed
Provide adequate working space (min. 0.6 m)
Tie/weld working platform with fixed support
Use roof top walk ladder while working on a
slopping roofs
Avoid movement on beams
Keep the work place neat and clean
Remove the scrap immediately
Same as above plus

Do not throw or drop materials or equipment
from height. I.e. do not bomb materials
All tools to be carried in a tool-kit
Bag or on working uniform
Remove scrap from the planks
Ensure wearing of helmet by the workers
working at lower levels
Use respiratory devices, if reqd.
Avoid over crowding inside a confined space
Provide Exhaust fans for ventilation
Do not wear loose clothes, neck ties, etc
Fulfill conditions of the permit
Page 1126 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 50 of 87

ACTIVITY
TYPE OF
HAZARD
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Check for presence of hydrocarbons, O2 level
Obtain work permit before entering a confined
space
Ensure that the connected piping of the
equipment which is to be opened is pressure
free, fluid has been drained, vents are open and
piping is positively isolated by a blind flange
(L)
HANDLING
AND
LIFTING
EQUIPMENTS
Presence of
foul smell and
toxic
substances
Inhalation can pose

threat to life
Ignition/ flame
can cause fire
Person may sustain

burn injuries or
explosion may occur
Failure of load
lifting and
moving
equipments
Can cause accident

and prove fatal
Same as above plus

Check for hydrocarbon and Aromatic compounds
before entering a confined space
Depute one person outside the confined space for
continuous monitoring and for extending help in
case of an emergency
Keep fire extinguishers at a hand distance
Remove surplus material and scrap immediately
Do not smoke inside a confined space
Do not allow gas cylinders inside a confined
space
Use low voltage (24V) lamps for lighting
Use tools with air motors or electric tools with
max. voltage of 24V
Remove all equipments at the end of the day
Avoid standing under the lifted load and within
the operating radius of cranes
Check periodically oil, brakes, gears, horns and
tyre pressure of all moving machinery
Check quality, size and condition of all chain
pulley blocks, slings, U-clamps, D-shackles, wire
ropes, etc.
Allow crane to move only on hard, firm and
leveled ground.
Allow lifting slings as short as possible and
check gunny packings at the friction points
Do not allow crane to tilt its boom while moving
Install Safe Load Indicator
Ensure certification by applicable authority
Page 1127 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 51 of 87

ACTIVITY
(M)
SCAFFOLDI
NG,
FORMWOR
K
AND
LADDERS
TYPE OF
HAZARD
Overloading of
lifting
equipments
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Same as above
Overhead
electrical wires
Can cause
electrocution and
fire
Person can fall

down
Person May sustain

severe injuries and
prove fatal
Failure of
scaffolding
material
Same as above
Material can
fall down
Persons working at
lower level gets
injured
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Safe lifting capacity of derricks and winches
written on them shall be got verified
The max. safe working load shall be marked on
all lifting equipments
Check the weight of columns and other heavy
items painted on them and accordingly decide
about the crane capacity, boom and angle of
erection
Allow only trained operators and riggers during
crane operation.
Do not allow boom or other parts of crane to
come within 3m reach of overhead HT cables
Hook and load being lifted shall preferably
remain in full visibility of crane operators.
Provide guard rails for working at height
Face ladder while climbing and use both hands.
Ladders shall extend about 1m above landing for
easy access and tying up purpose
Do not place ladders against movable objects and
maintain base at 1/4 unit of the working length of
the ladder.
Suspended scaffolds shall not be less than 500
mm wide and tied properly with ropes
No loose planks shall be allowed
Use PPE, like helmets, safety shoes,etc
Inspect visually all scaffolding materials for
stability and anchoring with permanent
structures.
Design scaffolding for max. load carrying
capacity.
Scaffolding planks shall not be less than 50X250
mm full thickness lumber or equivalent. These
shall be cleated or secured and must extend over
the end supports by at least 150mm and not more
than 300mm
Don't overload the scaffolds
Do not splice short ladders to make a longer one.
Vertical ladders shall not exceed 6m.
Remove excess material and scrap immediately
Carry the tools in a tool-kit bag only
Provide safety nets
Page 1128 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 52 of 87

TYPE OF
HAZARD
(N)
Personal
STRUCTUR negligence and
AL WORKS danger of fall
ACTIVITY
(O)
PIPELINE
WORKS
(P)
GRIT
BLASTING
EFFECT OF
HAZARD
Can cause injury or
casualty
Lifting/ slipping
of material
Same as above
Erection/
lowering failure
Can cause injury
Other
Same as above
Pollution in
neighboring
area, hit by grits
and high
pressure air
Can cause personal

injury
PREVENTIVE MEASURES
Do not take rest inside rooms built for welding
machines or electrical distribution system.
Avoid walking on beams at height
Wear helmet with chin strap and full body
harness while working at height.
Use hand gloves and goggles during grinding
operations
Cover or mark the sharp and projected edges
Do not stand within the operating radius of
cranes
Do not stand under the lifted load
Stack properly all the materials. Avoid slippage
during handling
Control longer pieces lifted up by cranes from
both ends
Remove loose materials from height
Ensure tightening of all nuts & bolts
Do not stand under the lifted load
Do not allow any person to come within the
radii of the side boom handling pipes
Check the load carrying capacity of the lifting
tools & tackles
Use safe Load Indicators
Use appropriate PPEs
Wear gum boots in marshy areas
Allow only one person to perform signaling
operations while lowering of pipes
Provide night caps on pipes
Provide end covers on pipes for stoppage of pigs
while testing/ cleaning operations
Ensure the blasting is done in enclosed shed.
Keep safe distance while blasting operations.
Wear positive pressure blast hood or helmet
with view window, ear-muff/plug, gloves,
overall or leather coat /apron, rubber shoes.
Page 1129 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 53 of 87
APPENDIX-F
TRAINING SUBJECTS / TOPICS
(For contractors personnel)

1.
The Law & Safety Statutory Requirement / Applicable statutes / Duties of employer / employee
2.
Policy & Administration Why HSE? / Duties & Responsibilities of Safety Personnel at project
site / Effect of incentive on accident prevention
3.
HSE & Supervision Duties of Supervisor / HSE integrated supervision /

responsible for site accidents?
4.
Safety Budget / Cost of Accidents Direct costs / Indirect costs
5.
Hazard Identification / Type of hazards / HIRAC
6.
Behavioural Safety & Motivation
7.
Housekeeping Storage / Stacking / Handling of materials / Hydra handling
8.
Occupational Health in Construction sector
9.
Personal Protective Equipments Respiratory & Non- respiratory
10.
Electricity & Safety ELCB / Fuse / Powered tools / Project illumination
11.
Handling of Compressed Gas Transportation / Storage / FBAs / Fire prevention
12.
Machine Safety Machine guarding / Maintenance
13.
Transportation Hazards & risks in transp. of materials / ODC consignments
14.
Cranes & Other Lifting machinery Legal requirements vis--vis essential safety requirements.
15.
Communication HSE Induction / TBTs / Safety Committee / Safety meeting /

propaganda / Publicity.
16.
Excavation Risks & Dangers / Safety measures
17.
Working at Heights Use of ladder / Work on roofs / Scaffolds / Double harness

line / Fall arrester / Safety Nets / Floor openings
18.
Hazards in Welding & important safety precautions
19.
Gas Cutting Hazards & safety measures
20.
Fire prevention & fire protection
Who should be held
Safety
lanyards / Life-
Page 1130 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 54 of 87
APPENDIX - G
CONSTRUCTION POWER BOARD( typ)
Page 1131 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 55 of 87
APPENDIX-H
LIST OF PROCEDURES (MINIMUM) TO BE FORMING PART OF HSE PLAN:A.
HSE Management Procedures:
B.
HSE Risk Management (including JSA/HIRA)

HSE Legal Compliance and Other Requirements
HSE Objectives & Performance
HSE Training and Competence (including Induction)
HSE Motivation & Award Scheme
HSE Audits
HSE Meetings
HSE Sub Contractor Management
HSE Emergency Management
HSE Incidents Reporting and Management
HSE Reports
HSE Management System Review
HSE Change Management
HSE procedure for Behaviour based Safety
First Aid & Management
Roles, Responsibility, accountabilities and Authorities
Job procedures/Safe Operating procedures
Setting Up Site & Signages

Handling of Electrical Appliances
Working at Height
Confined Space Entry
Permit to Work (including hot works)
Housekeeping
Lifting Operations
Transportation of materials including Manual Handling
Compressed Air Tools and Units
Earthmoving Operations & excavation
Scaffolding
Fire Prevention/Protection
Hazardous Substance handling & Storage
Radiation Hazard
Personal Protective Equipment
Page 1132 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 56 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 6)
SAFETY WALK-THROUGH REPORT
(Name & signature of walk through performer to be inserted at the bottom of each page)
Project
: _____________
Report no.
: ___________
Date
: _____________
Contractor
: ___________
Inspection by
:_____________
Owner
: ___________
Frequency
: Monthly
Job no.
: ___________
Note : Write NA wherever the item is not applicable

SL.
NO.
ITEM
1.
a)
HOUSEKEEPING
Waste containers provided and used
b)
Sanitary facilities adequate and Clean
c)
Passageways and Walkways Clear
d)
General neatness of working areas
e)
Other
2.
PERSONNEL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
a)
b)
Goggles; Shields
Face protection
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory/
No
Remarks
Action
Hearing protection
Foot protection
e)
Hand protection
f)
Respiratory Masks etc.
g)
Full body harness conforming to C, EN 361
h)
Hard hat (HDPE)
i)
Other
3.
EXCAVATIONS/OPENINGS
a)
b)
Openings properly covered or barricaded

Excavations shored
c)
Excavations barricaded
d)
Overnight lighting provided
e)
Other
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature)..
Page 1133 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 57 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
4.
WELDING & GAS CUTTING
a)
Gas cylinders chained upright
b)
Cables and hoses not obstructing
c)
Screens or shields used
d)
Flammable materials protected
e)
Live electrode bits contained properly
f)
Fire extinguisher (s) accessible
g)
Other
5.
SCAFFOLDING & BARRICADING
a)
Fully decked platforms
b)
Guard and intermediate rails in place
c)
Toe boards in place
d)
Adequate shoring
e)
Adequate access
f)
Positive barricading for critical activities
g)
Installation of warning signs
h)
Other
6.
LADDERS
a)
Extension side rails 1 m above
b)
Top of landing
c)
Properly secured
d)
Angle + 700 from horizontal
e)
Other
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory/
No
Remarks
Action
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature)..
Page 1134 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 58 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 3 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
7.
HOISTS, CRANES AND DERRICKS
a)
Condition of cables and sheaves OK
b)
Condition of slings, chains, hooks and eyes

O.K.
Inspection and maintenance log-books
maintained
Outriggers used
c)
d)
e)
f)
Reverse horn installed / active / coupled with

gear
Signs/barricades provided
g)
Signals observed and understood
h)
Qualified operators
i)
Other
8.
MACHINERY, TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
a)
Proper instruction
b)
Safety devices
c)
Proper cords
d)
Inspection and maintenance
e)
Other
9.
VEHICLE AND TRAFFIC
a)
Rules and regulations observed
b)
Inspection and maintenance
c)
Licensed drivers
d)
Other
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
Safety walk-through performer (Name & Signature)
Page 1135 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 59 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 4 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
10.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
a)
Emergency instructions posted
b)
Fire extinguishers provided
c)
Fire-aid equipment available
d)
Secured against storm damage
e)
General neatness
f)
In accordance with electrical requirements
g)
Other
11.
FIRE PREVENTION
a)
c)
Personnel trained & instructed to make use

of facility
Fire extinguishers checked periodically &
record maintained
No smoking in Prohibited areas.
d)
Fire Hydrants not obstructed Clear
e)
Other Regular fire drill conducted
12.
ELECTRICAL
a)
Use of 3-core armored cables everywhere
b)
Usage of 'All insulated' or 'double-insulated'

electrical tools
All electrical connection are routed through
ELCB
Natural Earthing at the source of power
(Main DB)
Continuity and tightness of earth conductor
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Effective covering of junction boxes, panels

and other energized wiring places
Ground fault circuit interrupters provided
h)
Prevention of tripping hazards maintained
f)
DCP extinguishers arranged & licensed

electrician engaged at site
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
Page 1136 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 60 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 5 of 6)
SL.
NO.
14.
a)
b)
c)
15.
a)
b)
c)
d)
16.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
17.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
18.
a)
b)
ITEM
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
HANDLING AND STORAGE OF

MATERIALS
Safely stored or stacked
Passageways clear / free from obstructions
Fire fighting facility in place
FLAMMABLE GASES AND LIQUIDS
Containers clearly identified / protected from
fire
Safe storage & transportation arrangement
made
Fire extinguishers positioned nearby
Facilities kept away from electric spark, hot
spatters & ignition source.
WORKING AT HEIGHT
Approved Erection plan and work permit in
place
Safe access, Safe work platform & Safety
nets provided
Life lines, Fall arrester, Full body harness
and with double lanyards used;
Health Check record available for workers
going up?
Protective handrails arranged around floor
openings
CONFINED SPACE
Work Permit obtained from requisite
authority
Test for toxic gas and sufficient availability
of oxygen conducted & status
Supervisor present at site & at least one
person outside the confined space for
monitoring deputed
Availability of safe means of entry, exit and
ventilation (register for entry & exit
maintained)
Fire extinguisher and first-aid facility
ensured
Lighting provision made by using 24V Lamp
Proper usage of PPEs ensured
RADIOGRAPHY
Proper storage and handling of source as per
BARC/ AERB guidelines (authorized
radiographer available)
Work permit obtained
Page 1137 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 61 of 87
HSE-1 REV 0
(Sheet 6 of 6)
SL.
NO.
ITEM
c)
Cordoning of the area done
d)
Use of appropriate PPE's ensured
e)
f)
HSE training to workers/supervisors

imparted during the fortnight (indicate topic)
Minimum occupancy of workplace ensured
19.
HEALTH CHECKS
a)
All Workers medically examined and found

be fit for working at heights (slinging,
rigging, painting etc.)
in confined space
in excavation / trenching
in shot blasting
Availability of First Aid box with contents
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
20.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Satisafctory
/ Yes
Non
satisfactory
/No
Remarks
Action
Proper sanitation at site, office and labour

camps
Arrangement of medical facilities.
Measures for dealing with illness at site &
labour camps.
Availability of Potable drinking water for
workmen & staff.
Provision of crches for children.
Stand by vehicle / ambulance available for
evacuation of injured
ENVIRONMENT
Chemical and Other Effluents properly
disposed
Cleaning liquid of pipes disposed off
properly
Seawater used for hydro-testing disposed off
as per agreed procedure
Lubricant Waste/Engine oils properly
disposed
Waste from Canteen, offices, sanitation etc
disposed properly
Disposal of surplus earth, stripping materials,
Oily rags and combustible materials done
properly
Green belt protection
Page 1138 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 62 of 87
HSE-2 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 3)
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT
(To be submitted by Contractor after every Incident / Accident within 24 hours to EIL/ Owner)
Report No.: ____________________________
Date:
______________________
Project site: ____________________________ Name of work: _______________________

Contractors name: ________________
Non-disabling injury (NonLTA)
Disabling injury (other LTA)
Fatal (LTA):
First Aid case (non LTA)
Contractors Job Engineer (name) ________
Hospitalized but resumed duty before end of 48 hrs

Hospitalized & failed to resume duty within next 48 hrs
Death / Expiry
Resume duty after first aid
Name of the injured: _______________________ Father's name of victim: _________________

Sub Contractors Name: .
Gate Pass No.:.. Age: _____Yrs. Victims medical fitness exam. (Pre-empl.) date: - ______
Date & time of Accident / Incident: _______________________________________________
Names of Witnesses: (1________________ (2)___________________ (3) ________________
Profession of victim:
Bar bender
Carpenter
Meson
Fitter
Helper
Gas cutter
Grinder
Welder
Electrician
Driver
Rigger
M/c.operator
Engineer
Manager
Other/specify
No formal education
Non-Matriculate
Matriculate
Graduate
Post- grad
Other/specify
NIL
Less than 2 yrs
2-5 yrs
5-10 yrs
11-15 yrs
15 years and above
Qualification
Job Experience
Location where the incident happened: ___________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________
Page 1139 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 63 of 87
HSE-2 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 3)
Activity / Works that was continuing during incident / accident: Excavation
Demolition
Concrete carrying
Concrete pouring
Transportation of materials
Transportation
(manually)
materials (mechanically)
Work on or adjacent to water
Work at height (+2.0 mts)
Scaffold preparation
Scaffold dismantling
Piling works
Welding
Grinding
Gas-cutting
Pipe fit-ups & fabrication
Structural fabrications
Machine works
Hydro-testing works
Electrical works
Erection activities
Other/specify
of
What exactly the victim was doing just before the incident / accident? ....................................
.
.
Nature of injury:
Bruise or Contusion
Abrasion (superficial wound)
Sprains or strains
Cut or Laceration
Puncture or Open wound
Burn
Absorption
Amputation
Inhalation
of
toxic
Poisonous fumes or gases
Fracture
or
Other/specify
Parts of body involved in incident / accident

Head
Face
Eyes
Throat
Arm (above wrist)
Hand (including wrist)
Fingers
Truck (Abdomen / Back /
Throat
Chest / Shoulder)
Leg (above ankle)
Foot (incl. ankle)
Multiple
Toes
Other/specify
Accident type:
Struck against
Struck by
Fall from Elevation
Fall on same level
caught in
caught under
caught in between
Rubbed or abraded
Contact with (Electricity)
Contact with chemicals or

oils
Vehicle accident
Contact
with
extremes)
Other/specify
(Temp./
Page 1140 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 64 of 87
HSE-2 REV 0
(Sheet 3 of 3)
Medical Aid provided: - (indicate specific aids / treatment etc.).

..
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Actions taken to prevent recurrence of similar incident / accident:
.
.
.
.
...
_____________________________________________________________________________
Intimation to local authorities (Dist Collector / Local Police Station / ESI authority): Yes / No / NA.
If yes, to whom ..
Safety Officer
Site Head / Resident Construction Manager
(Signature and Name)

Stamp of
To
:
:
Contractor
Owner
RCM/Site-in-charge EIL (3 copies)
Divisional Head (Constn) through RCM
Project Manager, EIL, through RCM

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
Page 1141 of 1744
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 65 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 5)
SUPPLEMENTARY INCIDENT / ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION REPORT

TICK THE APPROPRIATE ONE AS APPLICABLE (furnish within 72 hours)
Supplementary to Incident / Accident Report No: ______ (Copy enclosed)
Report No.: ____________________________
Date: ______________________
Project site: ____________________________ Name of work: _______________________
Contractors name: ________________
Non-disabling injury (NonLTA)
Disabling injury (other LTA)
Fatal (LTA):
First Aid case (non LTA)
Contractors Job Engineer (name) ________
Hospitalized but resumed duty before end of 48 hrs

Hospitalized & failed to resume duty within next 48 hrs
Death / Expiry
Resume duty after first aid
Name of the injured: _______________________ Father's name of victim: _________________

Sub Contractors Name: .
Gate Pass No.:.. Age: _____Yrs. Victims medical fitness exam. (Pre-empl.) date: - ______
Date & time of Accident / Incident: _______________________________________________
Names of Witnesses: (1________________ (2)___________________ (3) ________________
Profession of victim:
Bar bender
Carpenter
Meson
Fitter
Helper
Gas cutter
Grinder
Welder
Electrician
Driver
Rigger
M/c.operator
Engineer
Manager
Other/specify
No formal education
Non-Matriculate
Matriculate
Graduate
Post- grad
Other/specify
NIL
Less than 2 yrs
2-5 yrs
5-10 yrs
11-15 yrs
15 years and above
Qualification
Job Experience
Location where the incident happened: ___________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 66 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 5)
Activity / Works that was continuing during incident / accident: Excavation
Demolition
Concrete carrying
Concrete pouring
Transportation of materials
Transportation
(manually)
materials (mechanically)
Work on or adjacent to water
Work at height (+2.0 mts)
Scaffold preparation
Scaffold dismantling
Piling works
Welding
Grinding
Gas-cutting
Pipe fit-ups & fabrication
Structural fabrications
Machine works
Hydro-testing works
Electrical works
Erection activities
Other/specify
of
What exactly the victim was doing just before the incident / accident? ....................................
.
.
Particular of tools & tackles being used and condition of the same after incident/accident:
.........................................
Description
of
Incident/Accident
(How
the
incident
was
caused):
.
Nature of injury:
Page 1142 of 1744
Bruise or Contusion
Abrasion (superficial wound)
Sprains or strains
Cut or Laceration
Puncture or Open wound
Burn
Absorption
Amputation
Inhalation
of
toxic
Poisonous fumes or gases
Fracture
or
Other/specify
Parts of body involved in incident / accident

Head
Face
Eyes
Throat
Arm (above wrist)
Hand (including wrist)
Fingers
Truck (Abdomen / Back /
Throat
Chest / Shoulder)
Leg (above ankle)
Multiple
Foot (incl. ankle)
Toes
Other/specify

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 67 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 3 of 5)
Accident type:
Struck against
Struck by
Fall from Elevation
Fall on same level
caught in
caught under
caught in between
Rubbed or abraded
Contact with (Electricity)
Contact with chemicals or

oils
Vehicle accident
Contact
with
extremes)
Other/specify
(Temp./
Name & Designation of person who provided First-Aid to the victim: --------------------------------------Name & Telephone number of Hospital where the victim was treated_________________________
Mode of transport used for transporting victim Ambulance / Private car / Tempo / Truck / Others
How much time taken to shift the injured person to Hospital________________________________
In case of FATAL incident, indicate clearly the BOCW Registration No. of the victim
/Company
Comments of Medical Practitioner, who treated / attended the victim/injured (attached / described
here)_____________________________________________________________________
What actions are taken for investigation of the incident, please indicate clearly (Video film /
Photography / Measurements taken etc..)
Immediate cause (Please tick the right applicable)
Page 1143 of 1744
Hazardous
methods
or
procedures
inadequately
guarded
Environmental
hazards
(excess
noise/
space
constraint/
inadequate
ventilation
Poor housekeeping
Inadequate or improper
PPE
improper
illumination/Moving on oval
surface
Working on dangerous
equipment

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 68 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 4 of 5)
Failure to secure
Horse-play
Failure to use PPE
Inattention to surroundings
Improper use of hands &

body-parts
Bypassing
standard
procedures
Improper use of equipment
or tools & tackles
Others(specify)
By-passing safety devices
Unsafe mixing or placement

of tools & tackles
Operating without authority
excessive haste
Failure in communication
drug
or
influence
alcoholic
Basic cause
Over confidence
Impulsiveness
over-exertion
Faulty judgement or poor

understanding
Fatigue
Failing to keep attention

constantly
Defective vision
Nervousness & Fear
Slow reaction
Others(specify)
Ill health or sickness
Root cause
Inadequate Engg
Improper Design
Inadequate knowledge
Inadequate skill
Inadequate supervision
Improper work procedure
Substandard performance
Inadequate maintenance
Inadequate Planning &

organization
Inadequate training
Inadequate
compliance
with standard
Improper inspection
Others(specify)
Loss of man days and impact on site works, (if any)
Remarks from Contractors Safety Officer / Engineer

Was the victim performing relevant tasks for which he was engaged /employed?
Yes / No
Was the Supervisor present on work-site during the incident?
Yes / No
Have the causes of incident rightly identified?
Yes / No
Cause of Accident was_____________________________________________________________
Page 1144 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 69 of 87
HSE-3 REV 0
(Sheet 5 of 5)
Remedial measures recommended by Safety Officer of Contractor for avoiding similar incident in
future
Page 1145 of 1744
:
.
.
.
.
...
Intimation to local authorities (Dist Collector / Local Police Station / ESI authority): Yes / No / NA.
If yes, to whom ..
_____________________________________________________________________________
Safety Officer
Site Head / Resident Construction Manager

Stamp of
To :
:
Contractor
Owner
RCM// Site-in-charge of EIL (3 copies)
Project Manager EIL, through RCM
Page 1146 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 70 of 87
HSE-4 REV 0
NEAR MISS INCIDENT/ DANGEROUS OCCURRENCE SUGGESTED PROFORMA

(to be submitted within 24 hours)
Near Miss : Human injury escaped & no damage to property, equipment

or interruption to work.
Dangerous Occurrence: Damage to property, equipment or interruption of work, but not

resulting in personal injury/illness, e.g. Fire incident, collapse of structure, crane failure,
etc
Report No.: _________________
Name of Site: _________________________
Date: ______________________
Name of work: __________________________
Contractor: __________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Incident reported by
Date & Time of Incident
Location
__________________________________________________________________________________
Brief description of incident
__________________________________________________________________________________
Probable cause of incident
__________________________________________________________________________________
Suggested corrective action
__________________________________________________________________________________
Steps taken to avoid recurrence
To
:
:
Yes
No
Owner
RCM/Site-in-charge EIL (3 copies)
Project Manager EIL, through RCM
Page 1147 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 71 of 87
FORMAT NO.
:
HSE-5 REV 0
MONTHLY HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE) REPORT
(To be submitted by each Contractor)
Actual work start Date: _______________

Project: ____________________________
Name of the Contractor: ______________
Name of Work : _____________________
(Contractor in consultation with EIL
package(www.eil.co.in/conthse) only.
shall
For the Month of: __________________

Report No: ________________________
Status as on : ______________________
Job No : __________________________
generate the reports through web based
UPTO
PREVIOUS
MONTH
ITEM
THIS
MONTH
CUMULATIVE
1) Average number of Staff & Workmen

(average daily headcount, not man days)
2) Man-hours worked
3) Number of Induction programmes conducted
4) Number of HSE meetings organized at site
5) Number of HSE awareness programmes conducted at site
6) Number of Tool Box Talks conducted
7) Number of Lost Time Accidents (LTA)
8) Number of Loss Time Injuries (LTI)
Fatal
Other LTA
Fatalities
Other LTI
9) Number of Non-Loss Time Accidents

10) Number of First Aid Cases
11) Number of Near Miss Incidents
12) No. of unsafe acts/ practices detected
13) No. of disciplinary actions taken against staff/ workmen
14) Man-days lost due to accidents
15) LTA Free man-hours i.e. LTA free man-hours counted from the
Last LTA (enter date: .)
16) Frequency Rate (No. of LTA per 2 lacs man-hours worked)
17) Severity Rate (No. of man days lost per 2 lacs man-hours
worked)
18) Loss Time Injury Frequency (No. of LTI per 2 lacs man-hours
worked)
19) No. of activities for which Job Safety Analysis (JSA) completed
20) No. of incentives/ awards given
21) No. of occasions on which penalty imposed by EIL/ Owner
22) No. of Audits conducted
23) No. of pending NCs in above Audits
24) Compensation cases raised with Insurance
25) Compensation cases resolved and paid to workmen
26) Whether workmen compensation policy taken
27) Whether workmen compensation policy is valid
28) Whether workmen registered under ESI Act, as applicable
Remarks, if any
Date:
Prepared by Safety Officer
To : - OWNER
- RCM EIL (2 copies)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Approved by Site Head / Resident Construction Manager

Page 1148 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 72 of 87
:
HSE-6 REV 0
PERMIT FOR WORKING AT HEIGHTS (ABOVE 2.0 METER)
(In duplicate to be issued daily for site and for office)
Permit No..
Name of Main Contractor
Name of work executing agency / sub agency / vendor:...
Date
Exact Location of work
Nature of work ..Duration of work (from) (to) .......
Number of workers covered within this permit
(List enclosed with name & gate pass numbers.)
Sl.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Status of compliance
(Yes / No)
Items / Subjects
Work areas / Equipments inspected
Work area cordoned off
Adequate lighting is provided
Precautions against public traffic taken
Concerned persons in & around have been alerted & cautioned
Hazards / risks involved in routine / non-routine task assessed and control
measures have been implemented at specific task
ELCB provided for electrical connection & found working
Ladder safely attached / fixed
Scaffoldings are checked and TAGs are found used correctly
Working platforms are provided and are found sound /safe for use
Safe access & egress arrangements (e.g. ladders, fall arresters, life-lines etc.)
are satisfactorily incorporated
a.
Openings on platform / floors are effectively cordoned / covered
b.
Safety Nets are provided wherever required
Use of following safety gadgets by people working at area under this permit, is
checked and found satisfactory Safety helmet
Safety harness (full body) with double lanyard
Safety Shoes
Safety gloves
Safety goggles
Housekeeping of work area found satisfactorily tidy / clean & clear
Adequate measures have been taken for works being continued at the ground
level, when simultaneous works are permitted overhead at that very location.
Materials are not thrown from heights on to ground
Medical examination of workers are made & found satisfactory
Responsible job engineer / supervisor found physically present at work spot for
overall administration of work as well as safety of people.
Above items have been checked & compliance has been found in place. Hence work is permitted to
start / continue at the above-mentioned location. Work shall not start till identified lapses are rectified.
Additional Precautions, if any .
..
Work Permit issued by
Contractor Engineer/RCM
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer
AT THE END OF THE DAY/WORK:

All works at height are completed & workmen have returned safely from work location at
(time).. (date)
(Sig. Contractor Engineer)

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 73 of 87
HSE-7 REV 0
CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT

Project site ___________________________
Sr.No. _________________________
Name of the work ______________________
Date ___________________________
Name of Contractor ____________________
Nature of work ___________________
Exact location of work _____________
Safety Requirements POSITIVE ISOLATION OF THE VESSEL IS MANDATORY
(A) Has the equipment been ?
Y NR

Isolated
from
power/steam/air

isolated from liquid or
gases

depressurized
&/or
drained

blanked/
blinded/
disconnected
(B) Expected Residual Hazards

lack of O2

corrosive chemicals

heat/ steam / frost

(C) Protection Measures

gloves

protective clothing

grounded air duct/blower
/AC

Fire fighting arrangements

Page 1149 of 1744
Y NR

water
flushed
&/or
steamed
Man ways open &
ventilated
cont. inert gas flow
arranged
adequately cooled
Y NR

sources
lighting
combustible gas/ liquid

pyrophoric iron / scales
high humidity
ear plug / muff

dust / gas / air line mask
attendant with SCBA/air
mask
safety harness & lifeline
radiation
removed
proper
provided
H2S / toxic gases

electricity / static
ionizing radiation
goggles / face shield

personal gas alarm
rescue
equipment/team
communication
equipment
Authorization / Renewal (It is safe to enter the confined space)

No.
of
persons
Name of persons allowed
allowed
Signature
Contractor's
Supervisor
Contractor's
Safety Officer
Time
From
To
Signature
Workman
Permit Closure :
was closed
stopped
will continue on ...
(A)
Entry
(B)
Site left in a safe condition
(C)
Multilock
removed
key transferred
Ensured all men have come out Man-ways barricaded
Housekeeping done
Remarks, if any:
Page 1150 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 74 of 87
HSE-8 REV 0
RADIATION WORK PERMIT
Project
:
Name of the work
:
Name of site contractor :
Location of work
Source strength
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Cordoned distance (m) :

Name of Radiography agency
No. of workers engaged
Approved by Owner/EIL
The following items have been checked &compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit:
S. No.
Item description
Safety regulations as per BARC/AERB ensured while source in use/in transit & during
storage
Area cordoned off / safe working platform provided
Lighting arrangements for working during nights ensured
Warning signs/ flash lights installed
Cold work permit taken (if applicable)
PPEs like film badges, dosimeters used
Done
Additional precautions, if any ______________________________________________________

(Radiography Agencys BARC/AERB authorized Supervisor)
Permission is granted.
Permit is valid from ___________ AM/PM ____________ Date to ___________ AM/PM _________
Date
(Signature of permit issuing authority of site contractor)
Name
Permit renewal:
:Designation:
Permit extended up to
Date
Additional precautions required, if any
Date:
Sign of issuing authority with
date (of site contractor)
Time
Work completed/ stopped/ area cleared at ________ Hrs of Date ______________

(Sign. of permit issuing authority)
Name & Signature of site contractor:
Page 1151 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 75 of 87
:
HSE-9 REV 0
DEMOLISHING/DISMANTLING WORK PERMIT
:
Sr.No. :
:
Date :
:
Job No. :
Name of sub-contractor :
No. of workers to be engaged:

Line No./ Equipment No./ Structure to be dismantled

Location details of dismantling/ demolition with sketch : (clearly indicate the area)
The following items have been checked &compliance shall be ensured during currency of the
permit:
S.
No.
Item description
Done
Not
Applicable
Services like power, gas supply, water, etc. disconnected

Dismantling/ Demolishing method reviewed & approved
Usage of appropriate PPEs ensured
Precautions taken for neighbouring structures
First-Aid arrangements made
Fire fighting arrangements ensured
Precautions taken for blasting
(Contractors Supervisor)
(Contractors Safety Officer)
Permission is granted.
(Permit issuing authority)
Name
Date
:
:
Completion report :
Dismantling/ Demolishing is completed on _____________ Date at ____________ Hrs.
Materials/ debris transported to identified location
Tagging completed (as applicable)
Services like power, gas supply, water, etc. restored

(Permit issuing authority)
CONTRACTORs NAME
Page 1152 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 76 of 87
HSE-10 REV 0
DAILY SAFETY CHECKLIST
(To make use of before start of days work)
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Description of Job decided to perform : -
Use of PPE / Safety Gadgets
Sl.
No
1
2
3
4
Safety Helmets
Safety Shoes
Hand Gloves
Dust Musk
Sl.
No
6
7
8
9
Safety Goggles
10
PPEs
Compliance
(Yes / No)
PPEs
Compliance (Yes
/ No)
Face Shield
Full body harness
Fall Arrest System
Safety net
Horizontal life-line made
of steel wire, (dia not
less than 8.0 mm.)
(Serial No. 1 & 2 are compulsory for everyone. Specify & ensure use of other safety gadgets as required for the job)
Sl. No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Identify following important unsafe conditions: -
Conditions
Access to work site / emergency escape clear
Soil / Loose earth kept away from excavated pit / slope / ladder provided
Electrical wire / welding lead lying entangled on ground / welding m/c. booth
accessible
Elevated work platform / open ends are protected
Ground area cordoned off before lifting works or erection at height / ground
area checked & cordoned-off before start of height works
Structural members / erected pipes / wooden boards/pieces etc. are safely
anchored at heights and are not likely to fall down on people when working
beneath
Rope ladders tied-up on tall steel structures, long before are removed to get
rid of their use
Any Other
Yes / No
Indicate actions taken, if status of any of the above items is found No
Specific Safety guidelines / precautions, if any (communicated thro TBT)
Above conditions and PPE compliances are checked by undersigned and correct status are indicated after
verification
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 77 of 87
HSE-11 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 2)
HOUSEKEEPING ASSESSMENT & COMPLIANCE

Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
Name of contractor
Sl
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Page 1153 of 1744
:
:
:
: Fortnightly
Subjects of Review
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Satisafctory/
Yes
Non
satisfactory/No
Remarks
Action
Cleanliness at the Main entry / access of site

Ground condition / floor areas free from waterlogging / oil spillage
Ground & elevated floors free from rubbish /
wastes / accumulated debris / scraps.
Manholes / openings are covered / fenced
Trenches are barricaded / walkways are in place
Drains are cleaned / not choked / not occupied
by dumped materials
Sufficient CAUTION boards / instructions
displayed
Construction machinery are maintained &
parked in orderly manner.
Movement of site people are not obstructed
because of dumping / storing of construction
materials
Access / egress to Electrical Distribution Boards
/ Panels clear from wires / cables / earth-strips
etc.
Electrical panel rooms / sheds / MCC / Control
rooms / Substations etc. are clean & tidy and not
used for storing dress / clothes, tiffin-box or
bicycles.
Passage behind Elec. panels are free for access
Fire extinguishers / fire-buckets are accessible
without any difficulty.
Stair-steps, platforms & landings are clear & tidy
Sheds / rooms & work areas have got sufficient
illumination as well as ventilation
Cables / Wires / welding leads are routed /
hanged appropriately & are not creating unsafe
condition.
Stacking / storing of insulation materials or their
packing.
Removal or cleanliness of left-over sand,
concrete, brick-bats, insulation-materials, excess
earth, wastes etc.
Storing / stacking of sand, metal chips, re-bars,
steel pipes, valves, fittings etc.
One escape route at ground & minimum two
escape routes at elevation available,

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 78 of 87
HSE-11 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Sl
No.
Subjects of Review
Satisafctory/
Yes
Non
satisfactory/No
Remarks
Action
21. Captions / Posters / Slogans on various safety

instructions are displayed legibly in local
language
22. Cable trenches are water-free or regular
arrangement for taking out accumulated water
exists.
23. Windows of rooms / offices are regularly
cleaned
24. Facilities for cycle sheds, drinking water,
washing, rest-rooms etc. are maintained in tidy
manner.
25. Toilet, Urinals, Canteen / kitchen / pantry etc.
are maintained & free from obnoxious smell.
26. Construction tools / tackles are stored
systematically - the items are tagged / tested /
certified by competent third party.
27. Sufficient numbers of Dust-bins / Waste-bins
found at site and are regularly emptied.
Page 1154 of 1744
Additional remarks, if any
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Page 1155 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 79 of 87
HSE-12 REV 0
INSPECTION OF TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL BOOTH / INSTALLATION

Project
:
Name of the work
:
Name of contractor
:
Sub Station No:/Booth No
SL
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
SUBJECTS
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Location:
OBSERVATION (YES /NO)
ACTION TAKEN
Switchboards installed properly are in order and

protected from rain & water-logging.
Adequate illumination provided for switchboard
operation during night hours & the lamps are protected
from direct human contact.
Voltage ratings, DANGER signs, Shock-TreatmentChart displayed in the installation / booth
Fire extinguisher (DCP or CO2) & Sand Bucket kept in
close vicinity of Switchboards
Valid License & Competent Electrician / Wireman
available & name/ license no. displayed at booth /
installation.
General housekeeping in & around booth / installation
found in order.
Cable-route-markers for U/G cables provided.
Monthly inspection report of Electrical hand tools
available in booth / installation.
Insulated Mat provided in front of Elec. Panels.
Rubber hand gloves available/ used by Electricians
Availability of CAUTION boards for shutdown & / or
repairing works.
All incoming & outgoing feeders have proper MCCB /
HRC fuses / Switches.
Switchboards earthed at two distinctly isolated
locations.
Switchboards have adequate operating space at the front
face & at the rear face too.
All connections provided through 30mA ELCB.
Testing records of all ELCBs available at site
Only industrial type plugs & sockets are used.
Temporary connections are 3-core double insulated &
free from cuts & joints and 3rd core is earthed at both
ends
Socket boards are properly mounted on stand &
protected from water ingress.
Electrical equipments operating above 250V have two
earthing / double earthing.
All incoming / outgoing cables are properly glanded &
terminated with lugs.
Switch-boards are of industrial variety / type.
Sketch for installation / connection (SLD) made &
pasted & other safety labels/display boards
Labeling of incoming / outgoing feeders made.
All hand lamps are protected from direct contact.
All electrical cable / joints are in safe condition
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Page 1156 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 80 of 87
HSE-13 REV 0
(Sheet 1 of 2)
INSPECTION FOR SCAFFOLDING
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
Sl.
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Description
Yes
No
N.A
Actions
taken
Whether work permit is obtained to take up work at height above 1.5 Mts?
Whether atmospheric condition is stormy or raining and works at
heights have been permitted?
Whether steel pipes scaffoldings are used for units /off-site areas?
Whether scaffolding has been erected on rigid/firm/leveled surfaces /
ground? Whether foot-seals or base-plates are used beneath the uprights (vertical steel pipes)
Whether scaffold construction is as per IS specification with toe-board and
hand-rails (top-rail as well as mid-rail)?
Whether distance between two successive up-rights are less than 2.5 Mts
(height of scaffold & load carrying capacity governs the distance between
two uprights)
Whether all uprights are extended at least 900 mm above the top most
working platform (to enable fitting of handrails)?
Whether vertical distance of two successive ledgers is satisfactory?
(varying between 1.3 Mts. To 2.1 Mts)
Whether the peripheral areas of working at height are cordoned-off? (for
avoiding accident to people arising out of dropped / deflected materials)
Whether platform is provided? Is it safely approachable?
Whether end of scaffold platform / board are extended beyond transoms?
(125mm to 150 mm)
Whether CE / IS approved quality and worthy conditioned full-body safety
harness (with double lanyard & karabiners) are used while working at
heights?
Whether life-line of safety harness is anchored to an independent secured
support capable of withstanding load of a falling person?
Whether the area around the scaffold is cordoned off to prohibit the entry of
unauthorized person / vehicle?
Whether clamps used are of good condition, of adequate strength and free
from defects?
Whether ladder is placed at secured and leveled surface?
Whether water-pass and oil-spills are avoided around the scaffold structure?
Whether ladder is extended 1.5mts. above the landing point at height?
Whether more than one access/egress provided to the scaffold?
Whether ladder used are of adequate length and overlapping of short
ladders avoided?
Whether metallic ladders are placed much away from near-by electrical
transmission line?
Whether rungs of ladder are inspected and found in good order?
Whether fall-arresters provided on both the access/egress routes?
Whether diagonal (cross) bracings are provided at regular interval on the
scaffold?
Whether working platform on the scaffold has been made free from jolt
or gap?
Whether tools or materials are removed after completion of the days job at
heights?
Whether a valid Permit for Work (PFW) is obtained before taking up work
over asbestos or fragile roof?
Whether sufficient precaution is taken while working on fragile roof?
Page 1157 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 81 of 87
HSE-13 REV 0
(Sheet 2 of 2)
Sl.
No
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Description
Yes
No
N. A
Actions
taken
Whether provision is made to arrange duck ladder, crawling board for

working on fragile roof?
Whether scaffold has been inspected by qualified civil engineers prior to
their use?
Whether the scaffolding has been designed for the load to be borne by the
same?
Whether the erection and dismantling of the scaffolding is being done by
trained persons and under adequate supervision?
Whether safety net with proper working arrangement and life-line has
been provided?
Whether TAGS (Green for acceptable and Red for incomplete/unsafe
scaffolds) are used on scaffolds?
Whether sufficient illumination is provided in and around the scaffold
and access?
Whether emergency rescue / response arrangements are made in place
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Page 1158 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 82 of 87
HSE-14 REV 0
(sheet 1 of 2)
PERMIT FOR ERECTION / MODIFICATION & DISMANTLING OF SCAFFOLDING
Project
:
Sr.No. :
Name of the work
:
Date :
Name of contractor
:
Job No. :
Nature of activities
:
Duration: FromTo
SL.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
SUBJECTS / ITEMS
DONE
NOT
DONE
Specific task of Erection / Modification / Dismantling of scaffolds,

identified & TAGGED accordingly (before as well as after carryingout jobs).
People engaged in doing the job are identified & are certified by Job
Engineer of Main Contractor as experienced / trained.
Concerned persons are alerted by the Job Engineer of Main Contractor
in connection with possible hazards & what the workmen MUST do /
MUST not do.
Verification by Job Engineer of Main Contractor made for confirming
that all persons permitted to carry-out the jobs are making use of
Helmet, Safety Shoes, Goggles, Gloves & Double lanyard safety
harness and other relevant PPEs.
Area of work is effectively cordoned-off / barricaded / illuminated.
For taking-up / lowering down Scaffolding members / clamps /
couplings etc. appropriate ropes / pulleys/ chains etc. have been
arranged for use (not to throw any item) & the same have been
verified as fit for purpose.
Items / members of scaffold, being lowered are removed from the area
& stacked correctly.
Ropes, chains, pulley blocks etc. being used for lifting or lowering
scaffold items, are inspected by the Job Engineer & their certifications
as well as physical conditions have been found O.K, before signing
this PERMIT.
Safety Net / Life-line / Fall Arresters etc. are arranged in position and
Job Engineer has found working conditions favourable for activities to
start.
Scaffold erection or dismantling tasks are being supervised by
Experienced Engineer / Competent person.
Only competent & experienced people have been selected / engaged in
Scaffolding erection, modification or dismantling tasks.
Adequate & effective actions for traffic and movement of people
around the cordoned-off area taken to avoid inadvertent incident
Working platforms are protected with handrails & toe-boards.
Access & Exit (for reach & escape) are safe for use by people.
Tools, tackles to be used for above jobs are verified by job Engineers
of Main contractor as genuinely good and tied-up at height (to prevent
their fall).
Site important Telephone Nos. are made known to everyone
SOP (Safe Operating Procedure) for the specific task is made &
followed too.
Emergency vehicle has been arranged at work locations.
REMARKS
Names to be
noted
This permit for work shall be available at specific work location all the time.
After completion of work, permit shall be returned to safety cell of main contractor, without fail.
This Permit shall be issued maximum upto (Monday to Sunday).
Additional Precautions, if any
ACCORD OF PERMISSION (to be ticked) - YES ( ) / NO (

)
Inspected by
Contractor Engineer
Verification By
Contractor Safety Officer]

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 83 of 87
HSE-14 REV 0
(sheet 2of 2)
Everyday Site working conditions & performance of workmen shall be assessed / checked by Contractor
Site Engr. and Safety Officer shall verify the same .
Page 1159 of 1744
Name / Sign.
MONDAY
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
Site
Engr.
Safety
Off.
SUNDAY
Page 1160 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 84 of 87
HSE-15 REV 0
PERMIT FOR HEAVY LIFT/CRITCAL ERECTION

Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
Nature of activities
:
:
:
:
Location of work
:
Equipment/Structure to be erected:
SL.
NO.
1)
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Duration: FromTo
Name /Type of crane
:
Wt. of equipment/ structure to be erected :
Description of Item
Yes
8)
Is the crane type suitable for lift or as per erection

procedure?
Is the crane have the correct number of counterweights
fitted?
Availability of Load Certification of crane from
authorized agency.
Is the load chart of crane available in carne cabin/or with
Crane operator?
Is the device to check the Wind speed in crane is working?
Is the safety features in crane are working?
Availability of Load certification of slings and other
accessories from authorized agency
Availability of Licensee/certificate for crane operator from
authorized agency.
Availability of approved JSA for the subject activities.
9)
Availability of approved erection/rigging procedures.
10)
Availability of temporary gratings/ platforms for critical

lifting(as applicable)
Tool Box conducted before erection?
Has the area been cordoned off?
Are the authorized persons during erection are identified?
Does each person identified for erection understand their
roles and responsibilities?
Is the ground on which crane will rest or outrigger support
are correct?
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
Is hard stand requirement (if any) complied?
17)
Is the communication system (viz walkie talkies,etc are

working properly?
If more than one crane is lifting the load, is an
Intermediate rigger will supervise the lift?
If there is other obstruction within the operating radius of
the crane, have correct precautions been taken to prevent
collision?
18)
19)
20)
COMPLIANCE STATUS
No
Not applicable
Remarks
All the persons are wearing the requisite PPE?
Inspected & Issued by

Contractor Engineer/RCM
Verification By
Page 1161 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 85 of 87
HSE-16 REV 0
PERMIT FOR ENERGY ISOLATION & DE-ISOLATION

Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
ENERGY ISOLATION PERMIT

Clearance required from:..Hrs Date
To . ..Hrs .Date
Name of equipment/ energy source etc
.
Nature of job to be done: .
Area.Location:..
PERMIT VALIDATION
PERFORMING AUTHORITY
I hereby authorize the ..personnel(performer) The work and precautions will be carried out under my
to isolate the above equipment/energy source from all overall responsibility.(Testing/execution engineer)
sources of power and handover the equipment/energy
source for maintenance/repair.
Signature:
Date:
Issuing authority
Name:
Area Incharge/RCM
Signature:
Date:
Name:
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR CLEARANCE
1. Notify workers of intent to deenergize
2. Obtain lock,tag or locking/tagging devices
3. Shut down ,de energize, dissipate any
residual energies.
4. Apply lock ,tag and locking and/or tagging
devices
5. *Any other job specific precautions
6. Verify effectiveness of lockout by
attempting to restart.
7. Proper PPE is ensured
NORMALISING AFTER CLEARANCE

1. Notify workers of intent to re- energize
2. Conduct visual inspection to confirm that the
danger zone is clear of workers
3. Conduct visual inspection to confirm that tools
,equipments danger zone is clear of workers
4. Reposition the safety devices(interlocks,
valves, guards, covers ,sensors, as applicable, etc)
5. *Any other job specific normalizing details
6. Remove lock, tag and locking and/or tagging
devices.
7. Re energize.
I certify that the energy source mentioned above is 8. Confirm system is operating properly& safely
I certify that the energy source mentioned above is
isolated from all sources and is safe to start the work.
isolated from all sources and is safe to start the work.
Tag No:
Lock No:.
Tag No:
Lock No:.
Issuing authority
Issuing authority
Area Incharge/RCM
Area Incharge/RCM
Signature:
Date:
Signature:
Date:
Name:
Name:
(*to be included by contractor in consultation with (*to be included by contractor in consultation with
EIL/owner)
EIL/owner)
ENERGY DE-ISOLATION PERMIT
PERMIT VALIDATION
PERFORMING AUTHORITY
I hereby authorize the ..personnel(performer) I herby certify that the equipment/energy source
to de- isolate the above equipment/energy source from mentioned above has been de-isolated and is ready for
all sources of power and handover the equipment/energy normal operation.(Testing/execution engineer)
source for normal operation..
Issuing authority
Area Incharge/RCM
Signature:
Name:
Signature:
Name:
Date:
Date:
Countersigned by Issuing authority
Page 1162 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 86 of 87
HSE-17 REV 0
PERMIT FOR EXCAVATION
(depth 2m and above)

(Sheet 1of 2)
Project
Name of the work
Name of contractor
:
:
:
Sr.No. :
Date :
Job No. :
Job Description
Size of excavation
:
:
Location:
COMPLIANCE STATUS
Yes
No
Not
applicable
SL.
Description of Item
NO.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
Remarks
Suitable and sufficient risk assessments and method statements

has been carried to ensure that the work shall be undertaken in
accordance with specification and standard.
Are plans/details of underground services available and the
same has been reviewed?
Has survey done to locate the services/obstacles, etc.
Has the live services (electrical, water line, air line, telephone
line,etc) has been disabled for carrying out the job.
Is adequate barriers/fences to protect the excavation are in
place?
Is Adequate warning signs are in place?
Is Assessment of ground conditions done and remedial action (if
any) taken?
Safe access / egress (e.g. ramp / steps / ladders etc.) provided for
site workmen & supervisors.
Is the excavation work being undertaken in proximity of
structure, etc ? If Yes, its effect is considered?
Availability of competent person for supervising the excavation
work?
Adequate safe arrangement to prevent collapse of edges (e.g.
shoring / strutting / benching / sloping etc.) made at site.
Hard barricades (at least 1.0M away from edge & for excavation
near site access roads) with warning signs/caution boards are
provided
Accumulation / passage-ways of water at periphery of
excavation / trench stopped/ restricted.
Is the equipment being used for excavation has been checked for
adequacy and is in good working condition having all the safety
features?
Age & fitness of workmen ensured by medical test before
engagement in job ?
Arrangement of Monitoring of possible oxygen deficiency or
obnoxious gases done & action taken?
PERMIT GRANTED -
Yes /
No

Name & Signature of Site Engr
Contractor (Initiator)
Name & Signature of Safety Officer

Contractor
(Issuing authority)
Page 1163 of 1744

HEALTH, SAFETY &
FORMAT NO.
6-82-0001 Rev. 6
Page 87 of 87
HSE-17 REV 0
PERMIT FOR EXCAVATION
(Sheet 2of 2)
NOTES: 1. Slopes or benches for excavation beyond 2.0M depth shall be designed & approved by Contractors site
head.
2. Excavated earth to be kept at least 1.5M away from edges
3. Safety helmets, Safety shoes or gum-boots, gloves, goggles, Face shield, Safety Harness shall be essential
PPEs.
4. Permit shall be made in duplicate and original shall be available at site of work.
5. Permit shall be issued for maximum one week only (Monday to Sunday)
6. After completion of works, permit shall be closed & preserved for record purpose
GRANT OF PERMIT AND EXTENSIONS

Sl.
No.
Validity period
From ____To ____
Working Time
From _____To _____
Initiator (site
Engr. of Main
Contractor)
Issuing authority
(Safety Officer
of Main
Contractor)
Review by EIL /
Owner (Remarks
with date
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Additional safety instructions if any: 1.

2.
3.
Page 1164 of 1744
STANDARD SPECIFICATION No:
INSPECTION & TEST PLAN

FOR CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
Onfaelelift ENGINEERS
$agar &Reg w INDIA LIMITED
Go. of India Undertaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 1 of 37
tr4
R.1 TAcal ,
It cocil atildltil/
uct)c-I c4c61 7i1"4-4T3T1)
wre die -1W-414iffr tr4
Orrta)
litikEroT
INSPECTION & TEST PLAN (ITP)

CIVIL, STRUCTURAL &
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
(EPCC/LSTK CONTRACTS)
04.07.2011
SM
17.10.2005
MPJ
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
jetk\)
MKG
SMt-- INI-P
SPS
Prepared Checked
by
by
VNP
Standards
Standards
C
Committee
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1165 of 1744
Ifg-ar
afgft
NW,
eretlAF
JR17,".0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of India undenaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
ARCHITECTURALWORKS WORKS
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 2 of 37
Abbreviations:
AFC
BM
CI
CPT
GI
IRC
JB
MS
:
MT
NDT :
PCC :
PQR :
PT
:
PVC :
PWHT :
RCC :
:
RF
SPT
U/G
:
WBM :
WPS :
Approved For Construction

Bench Mark
Cast Iron
Cone Penetration Test
Galvanised Iron
Indian Road Congress
Junction Box
Mild Steel
Magnetic Particle Testing
Plain Cement concrete
Procedure Qualification Record
Penetration Testing
Poly Vinyl Chloride
Post Weld Heat Treatment
Reinforcement
Standard Penetration Test
Under Ground
Water Bound Macadam
Welding Procedure Specification

Convenor:
Sh. MK Garg, HOD (Construction)
Members :
Sh. VK Budhiraja, GM (C&P)

Sh. MP Jain, DGM (Projects)
Sh. Rakesh Nanda, DGM (Piping)
Sh. S Mukherjee, AGM (Construction)
Sh. GK Iyer, AGM (Construction)
Page 1166 of 1744
16iNazrei
Ifgzir 16115teg
1.11M

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
ENGINEERS
18, INDIA
LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undoflaking)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 3 of 37
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION
S.NO
DOCUMENT NO.
PAGE NO.
ITPS FOR CIVIL WORKS
Land and Topographical survey
1.
1 Soil Investigation
13.
2703 Rev 1
Excavation
2704 Rev 1
Backfilling
2705 Rev 1
Underground Piping (RCC/CI)
2706 Rev 1
10
WBM Roads
2707 Rev 1
11
I Black Topping(Premix Carpeting)

& Bituminous Macadam (BM)
I Tank Pads
2708 Rev 1
12
2709 Rev 1
13
1 Micro Grading
2710 Rev 1
14
2740 Rev 1
1 Under Ground Piping (Carbon
Steel)
ITPS FOR STRUCTURAL WORKS
15
1 Plain cement concrete

1
I RCC(Substructure)
2741 Rev 1
21
2742 Rev 1
22
RCC(Super structure)
2743Rev 1
23
Flooring/Pavement
2745 Rev 1
24
1 Brick Work
2746 Rev 1
25
I Structural Works
2747 Rev 1
26
I Piling works
2748 Rev 1
27
16.
2702 Rev 1
Site Grading
2701 Rev 1
ITPS FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

19.
2771 Rev 1
28
Plastering
2772 Rev 1
29
Doors and Windows
2773 Rev 1
30
Painting (building works)
2774 Rev 1
31
Sanitary fittings
2775 Rev 1
32
I Water proofing
2776 Rev 1
33
2777 Rev 1
34
1 Under Deck Insulation
2778 Rev 1
35
I Roofing Accessories
2779 Rev 1
36
2799 Rev 1
37
1 Antitermite Treatment
28.
False Flooring and False ceiling
Lighting works (Non plant

Buildings)
Page 1167 of 1744
ei
ENGINEERS
o ar saoleGw INDIA LIMITED
lot
1.17,1 eRasea3, aVaM)
(A Govt of India Undeftak,o9)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 4 of 37
GENERAL NOTE
The enclosed ITP's shall be followed for the works to be performed by the contractor. The
provisions indicated for stagewise inspection by EIL/Owner are the minimum and the Engineer-InCharge may decide to increase Hold Points/ Witness Points. Activities for which ITP's are not
given, contractor to develop and get the same approved by EIL/Owner well before start of the work.
Contractor to submit required reporting formats and job procedures for each activity listed in ITP's
and submit to EIL/Owner for approval, well before commencement of the activity. If the contractor
has to deviate from the given ITP for a valid reason, he shall obtain prior written approval of
EIL/Owner. Contractor to carry out 100% examination of all activities.
LEGEND
HP
Hold Point ;
A point which requires witnessing/inspection/verification and acceptance by Owner/EIL
before any further processing is permitted.
The Contractor shall not process the activity/item beyond a Hold Point without written
approval by Owner/ElL except where prior written permission for further processing is
available.
Witness Point ;
An activity which requires witnessing/inspection/verification by Owner/EIL when the
activity is performed.
After proper notification has been provided (notification modalities and period shall be
finalized before hand), the Contractor is not obliged to hold further processing if
Owner/EIL is not available to witness the activity or does not provide comments before
the date notified. Basis of acceptance shall be as per relevant technical specification.
Rw
Review of Contractor's documentation.

Surveillance Inspection by Owner/ EH
Monitoring or making observations to verify whether or not material/items or services
conform to specified requirements. Surveillance activities may include audit, inspections,
witness of testing, review of quality documentation & records, personnel qualifications,
etc.
WC :
100% Examination by Contractor.
Responsibility for execution of the inspection/testing is with the Contractor; Owner/EIL only
verifies examination or testing done by the Contractor at important stages
71
falaltg
1.+10, evelgru
k
JKITVID
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 5 of 37
ITP NO.: 2701 Rev 1

LAND & TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
SL.
NO.
1
2
ACTIVITY
Boundary markings and submission of
drgs./sketches
Review of calibration certificates of
instruments/ testing equipments
Field calibration, if any
CONTRACTOR
EIL
WC
WC
HP
WC
Block levels, contour plans, establishing

permanent bench marks with ref. to Survey of
India B.Ms. by check levels and submission
of relevant drgs. & records
WC
Protection of control points, permanent bench

marks and regular rechecking
WC
Submission of Master plan showing

monuments, structures exposed rocks, weirs,
water works, ponds, underground services if
crossing that area, etc.
INSPECTION & TEST DOCUMENTS
WC
Review Test and Inspection Documents
WC
Rw
Page 1168 of 1744
el
$iga
&Reg
(Aln max?
LTA 3.7WRI)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goa of India Undettalf mg)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 6 of 37
ITP NO.: 2702 Rev 1

SOIL INVESTIGATION
SL.
NO.
Page 1169 of 1744
CONTRACTOR
EIL
Positioning of test location
WC

WC
HP
WC
Boring & sampling
WC
In-situ testing (SPT, CPT, Plate load test, Soil

Resistivity, Block vibration test, etc.)
WC
S/Rw
Lab testing (as applicable)
WC
W/Rw
Monitoring of water level
WC
WC
Rw
ACTIVITY

k31 eit
ligai 054-dg
1.112n e9?PT2 oo J,70.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 7 of 37
ITP NO.: 2703 Rev 1

SITE GRADING
ACTIVITY
SL.
NO.
1.
2
Page 1170 of 1744
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT C
-
Clearing and stripping of soil including

disposal of unsuitable material
WC
CAT B
S
WC
HP
HP
WC
Taking and plotting of initial levels at specified

intervals for cutting as well as filling areas
Classification (Levels of strata) and testing of
filling soil for suitability including preparation
of Lead Charts to filling/disposal areas.
Proper warning of explosions, misfires and
storage of explosive materials (As applicable).
Breaking up of clods, lumps, etc. at the time of
filling and compaction.
Identification and suitability of borrow areas
for filling soil/murrum including verification
of payments for royalty, etc.
Compaction test for earth filling in specified
layers including finished areas.
Verification of final finished grade levels.
WC
S*
S*
WC
WC
WC
WC
S/Rw
WC
W/Rw
WC
S*
S*
Computation of Earth works.
WC
Rw*
Rw*
Record of tree cuttings, stacking of blasted

rocks and other quarry materials including
handing over to Owner
Preparation of "As built drawings
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Removal of Surplus earth/excavated material

and leveling in disposal areas.
Resolutions of obstacles/hindrances
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw

CAT B: All fillings
CAT C: All cuttings.
* In case quantum of earthwork is required to be certified by EIL then HP.
t.11
el
Ifgzif faf5leg
ItiitdA MAIL = atiatall
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Lindo itaaind)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 8 of 37
ITP NO.: 2704 Rev I

EXCAVATION
SL.
NO.
1.
2.
9.
1
2
3
4
5
Page 1171 of 1744
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT A
CAT B
CAT C

WC
HP
HP
Rw
WC
Layout checking
WC
Taking initial levels
WC
Slopes of excavation, benching,

overburden, shoring & strutting (in case of
deep excavation)
Check for sub-soil water, dewatering
requirements as per specifications.
Bottom level of excavation and compaction
WC
WC
WC
Stacking of different type of soils

separately
List of obstacles encountered (cables,
pipes, conduits, etc)
Barricading of excavated pits for safety &
protection from rain
FOR HARD ROCK
WC
WC
WC
Obtaining license from district authorities

for undertaking blasting operations
Storing of explosive materials as per
explosive rules
Prominent display of red flags around the
area to be blasted
Check the dimensions of bore holes
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
Stacking of hard rock for useable/non

useable including handing over to owner
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
CAT A : Equipment foundations, Plant buildings, Technological structure, etc.

CAT B : Non Plant buildings, pipe racks, pipe culverts, bridges, etc.
CAT C : Boundary walls, wing walls, manholes, drains, etc
ei
tzarWA!laPeg
eadasr7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov* of India Undedd(ong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 9 of 37
ITP NO.: 2705 Rev 1

BACK FILLING
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT A
3.
4.
Page 1172 of 1744
CAT B CAT C
Selection of materials/selected earth
WC
Check for treatment of soil, if any
WC

WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
Filling in specified layers, consolidating,

watering.
Compaction tests for layers
WC
WC
W/Rw
S/Rw
Rw
Filling to required levels
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw

CAT A : Equipment foundations, Plant buildings, Technological structure, etc.

CAT B : Non Plant buildings, pipe racks, pipe culverts, bridges, etc.
CATC : Boundary walls, wing walls, manholes, drains, etc
ligar 215fies
I NWT 11XT2 MJ,71771)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govi of India Undertaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 10 of 37
ITP NO.: 2706 Rev 1

UNDERGROUND PIPING (RCC/ CI)
ACTIVITY
SL.
NO.
3.
4.
11.
Page 1173 of 1744
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
NOTE 1
Checking of material
WC
NOTE 1
Adequate slope, benching in excavation for

safety purposes (if required)
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Layout, line & level
WC
Laying & jointing, grouting at

manholes/chambers
Check for supports/ firm bed/ sub soil water
level
Testing for leakages by blocking pipe ends
WC
WC
WC
Hydro-testing and other tests, Removal of

blockages, Cleaning & flushing of system
Backfilling in layers
WC
HP
WC
Rw
Rw
Check for MS rungs in proper position,

inlet/outlet pipe levels in manholes
Preparation of "As-built drawings"
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
For Incoming material Inspection please refer ITP no: 6-82-1010
CAT B: Main plant buildings, Utilities , offsites etc.
CATC: Non plant buildings, technological buildings admn. Buildings, Gate house, security
rooms, etc
ei
1m 0151--eg
1.11/71 2IMMIE MI JIMMI/
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of India Undertalong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 11 of 37
ITP NO.: 2707 Rev 1

WBM ROADS
SL.
NO.
1.
ACTIVITY

2.
9.
Page 1174 of 1744
Layout checking including Road crossings and

taking initial levels
Approval of source & checking/testing of

materials (wherever required)
Filling (if any), compaction, providing
cambers in sub-base including levels
Spreading metal to required thickness, line
& levels, dry rolling including spreading of
screening material
Check for camber and levels over
metalling
Spreading murrum/ sand, watering and
rolling
Checking thickness after each layer and
rectification thereof (if any)
Checking quantity of aggregate by
excavation of trial pits as per IRC Code
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP
Rw
WC
WC
WC
NOTE 1 NOTE 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE :
1)
CAT B:
Roads subjected to heavy loading, connected to main highway, main plant roads
CATC:
Balance Roads
31
5fgar
felgiegW
wren errenre =mom
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Indta UndeftaNingt

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 12 of 37
ITP NO.: 2708 Rev 1

BLACK TOPPING (PREMIX CARPETING) & BITUMINOUS MACADAM (BM)
SL.
NO.
13.
Page 1175 of 1744
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
Approval of source of materials
WC
Note 1

WC
HP
WC
Surface preparation & check for camber/level
WC
Checking/ testing of material wherever

required
Tack coat application
WC
WC
Laying of Premix carpeting/ BM including

rolling
Application of Seal coat
WC
WC
Check for camber and levels
WC
Check for bitumen temperature and

consumption
Thickness check of Premix carpet/ BM
WC
WC
Removal of surplus earth
WC
Berm preparation
WC
Final Inspection
WC
WC
Rw

NOTE : 1)
CAT B: All works
fg-ZITEtaleg
(NTT 2.12SW C111JVP,11)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeltaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 13 of 37
ITP NO.: 2709 Rev 1

TANK PADS
SL.
NO.
3.
4.
11 .
Page 1176 of 1744
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
NOTE 1
WC
CAT A
NOTE 1
Stripping the area
WC

WC
HP
Rw
WC
Layout and marking of ground level
WC
Excavation to required level, compaction of

sub-base
Checking/ testing of materials
WC
WC
Filling selected materials in specified layers,

rolling, watering
Compaction tests
WC
WC
W/Rw
Rw
Gravel filling under annular ring with

compaction and adding graded filler material
(As applicable)
WC
Anti-corrosive layer, consolidation
WC
Premix carpeting on side slopes
WC
Preparation of "As-built drawing" for erection
WC
Rw
Rw
Check for settlement of pads during hydro

testing of tanks
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
CAT A: All Site fabricated steel storage tanks for process fluid /Hydrocarbon, floating roof,
tanks having capacity 600cum or 10m dia and 8 m height.
CAT B: Site fabricated steel storage tanks for Raw water, Fire water, waste water, DM water,
etc. and all tanks not covered under "CAT A"
eiel.
$fg-zir faPe-g
.,12,17i20,retinJaim)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov' of India Uncleflalongo

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 14 of 37
ITP NO.: 2710 Rev 1

MICRO GRADING
ACTIVITY
SL.
NO.
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT C
1.
2.
7.
Page 1177 of 1744

WC
Rw
WC
Taking initial levels
WC
Clearing/ Removal of extra soil, debris, etc.

from site by transportation
WC
Taking final levels
WC
Verification of gradient of ground
WC
Finishing of ground surface by hand

compactor/ Roller (As applicable)
WC
Final inspection
WC
WC
Rw

CAT C: All works
Page 1178 of 1744
err056
10112,7 elERPIE O, 3,1301)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A GoN of India Undenaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 15 of 37
ITP NO.: 2740 Rev 1

FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING (CARBON STEEL) (Sheet 1 of 6)
SL.
NO
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CATC
WC
NOTE 1
NOTE 1
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
HP
HP
WC
HP
HP
iii) Approval of Final WPS/PQR
WC
HP
HP
Welder Performance Qualification Test
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
HP
HP
A.
PRIOR TO FABRICATION
Incoming materials
Welding Filler Material Approval/Qualification
Review of Manufacturer's Test Certificates/
other documents
Testing, if any
4.
WPS/PQR
Review of proposed Procedure
Testing
5.
5a.
6.
Certification & approval of welders

NDT Procedure Qualification
Review of proposed Procedure
Testing
iii) Approval of NDT procedure
Preparation of sketches from General
Arrangement drawings
Joint numbering
Approval of colour coding scheme
WC
Rw
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
10.
Monitoring of colour coding on pipes & fittings
WC
B.
1
FABRICATION (SHOP & FIELD)

Material as per piping class (check w.r.t.
approved colour coding procedure)
Fit-up check
WC
7.
Dimensional check
NOTE : 1)
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
For Incoming material Inspection please refer ITP No: 6-82-1010.
CAT B: All pressure lines, Fire Water line, Cooling Water line, etc.
CATC: Balance Works
Page 1179 of 1744
iftS
29een/2 maw.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Al
India Undenalong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 16 of 37
ITP NO.: 2740 Rev 1

SL.
NO
CONTRACTOR
ACTIVITY
EIL
CAT B
CAT C
2.
Pre-heat (if any)
WC
Check for purity of purging/shielding Gas (if

any)
WC
Purging (if any)
WC
Shielding rate (if any)
WC
Baking of Electrodes
WC
Inter-pass cleaning & Temperature check.
WC
Visual check of completed welds
WC
PT/MT
WC
WC
WC
Procedure Review
WC
HP
HP
Correctness of Testing arrangements
WC
Calibration of Pressure Gauges
WC
R.F. Pad testing, if any
WC
HP
Scrutiny of test packs for Mechanical & NDT

Clearance (Refer Annexure-1)
WC
HP
HP
Air/Water Flushing (preliminary)
WC
Addition of corrosion inhibitors, if required

Approval of make & quality
WC
HP
4.
S.
Radiography
Radiography)
marking
(for
Random
Radiography Interpretation
C.
3.
6
6a.
HYDROSTATIC/ PNEUMATIC TESTING
HP
CATC: Balance Works
Page 1180 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lfgai.,eroretm.vcroi)
lafReG
(A Gout of India Undertaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 17 of 37
ITP NO.: 2740 Rev 1

SL.
NO
ACTIVITY
Pneumatic/ Hydrostatic testing

Draining of water & Air drying
D.
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
CAT C
WC
WC
WC
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
HP
HP
LAYING
Trench excavation and levels
Cleaning of pipe surface
Approval of wrapping/coating material
manufacturers
WC
4.
Approval of agency for wrapping &

coating
WC
5.
Sample test of coating materials in

approved laboratory
WC
6.
Procedure qualification for wrapping &

coating
WC
Application of primer
WC
Coal tar temperature
WC
Coating & wrapping
WC
Check Thickness of coating (if

applicable)
WC
Calibration of Holiday tester
WC
HP
Rw
Holiday testing
WC
WC
HP
Rw
7.
8
13.
Peel test
NOTE : 1)
For Incoming material Inspection p ease refer ITP no: 6-82-1010
CATC: Balance Works
Page 1181 of 1744
ei
I
Q11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 18 of 37
ITP NO.: 2740 Rev 1

SL.
NO
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
Lifting arrangement
WC
Lowering (levels & orientation of

branches)
WC
CAT B
CAT C
Checking of wrapping & coating for

damages during lowering, their repair,
Holiday Testing, etc.
WC
Back filling & compaction
WC
Location, Brickwork, plaster of valve pit
WC
Top cover & Finish of valve pit
WC
Annex-2
Annex-2
Annex-1
Annex-1
E.
SYSTEM COMPLETION
1.
Tie in joints (Refer Annexure-2)
WC
Scrutiny of test packs for system testing

(Refer Annexure-1)
WC
3.
System testing
WC
HP
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
INSPECTION & TEST

DOCUMENTS
CATC: Balance Works
Page 1182 of 1744
laf Re,
Ifgar tif5Itg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
ITP NO.: 2740 Rev 1

FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING (CARBON STEEL)
SL.
NO
A.
1 a.
lb.
ACTIVITY
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 19 of 37
(Sheet 5 of 6)
ANNEXURE 1
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
HP
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
HP
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
HP
MECHANICAL COMPLETION
RECORD (U/G Piping)
Clearance for flushing & testing
Mechanical clearance
- Conformity with drawing
- Material as per Specification
Welding & NDT clearance
- Material as per Specification
- Fit-up check record
- Visual check of completed welds
- PT/MT
- Radiography
- PWHT & hardness
- RF pad testing
Flushing & Pressure testing
WC
Coating & wrapping

- Surface preparation
WC
Rw
- Primer application
WC
Rw
Rw
- Coating, wrapping & peel test
WC
Rw
- Holiday check
WC
Rw
Rw
Laying
- Trench leveling
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
Rw
- Lowering & checking for damages in

wrapping & coating, their repair,
Holiday testing, etc.
- Backfilling
WC
WC
CAT C: Balance works
eit4
$1g7laRieg
,,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ill Gout of India undenaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
ITP NO.: 2740 Rev 1

FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING (CARBON STEEL)
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 20 of 37
(Sheet 6 of 6)
ANNEXURE 2
TIE-IN
SL.
NO.
K.
Page 1183 of 1744
CONTRACTOR
EIL
FIT UP
WC
ROOT RUN DP
WC
FINAL RUN DP
WC
RADIOGRAPH REVIEW
WC
HP
PWHT HARDNESS
WC
Rw
RF PAD TESTING
WC
HP
CLEANING & PRIMING
WC
COATING, WRAPPING
WC
PEEL TEST
WC
HP
HOLIDAY TESTING
WC
HP
CHECKING FOR ANY DAMAGE IN

WRAPPING & COATING AFTER
LOWERING, THEIR REPAIR HOLIDAY
TESTING, ETC.
BACK FILLING
WC
WC
ACTIVITY
ENGINEERS
ligzil fatteg (7) INDIA LIMITED
elMrertInJWA)
ITP NO:

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 21 of 37
2741 Rev 1
PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE
SL.
NO.
1.
2.
7.
Page 1184 of 1744
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
S/Rw
Rw
Checking of layout and materials, compaction

of sub -grade
Mix proportion
WC
WC
Check for shuttering, dewatering if any.
WC
Concreting with proper compaction
WC
Checking of top level of PCC
WC
Rw
Curing
WC
WC
Rw
Rw

instruments/ testing
equipments
CAT B :
CAT C :
for filled-up area

for cutting area
ENGINEERS
I
an
ITP NO:
INDIA
LIMITED
Govt of India Undenaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
Page 22 of 37
2742 Rev 1
CAT C
WC
HP
HP
Rw
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Checking of layout & condition of PCC/ leveling course
WC
Incoming material checking
WC

Review of calibration certificates of instruments/
2.
6-82-2700 Rev 1
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE SUBSTRUCTURE

CON
ON
ACTIVITY
TRAC
EIL
TOR
CAT A CAT B
NO.
1
testing equipments

3.
NOTE NOTE 1
Design of mix &establishment of strength at site by trial

mix
Check for line & level of shuttering including its condition,
quality and rigidity.
Check for sub-soil water & dewatering arrangement, if any
WC
HP
HP
NOTE
1
HP
WC
WC
Reinforcement & covers to reinforcement
WC
Inserts, Anchor bolts and pipe sleeves, pockets, dowels,

etc.
Pour Card
WC
WC
Rw
Check for obstacles encountered (Electrical conduits, pipe

lines, etc.)
Concreting, testing, compaction & finishing
WC
WC
S/Rw
Rw
Casting of cubes
WC
Curing
WC
Testing of cubes
WC
Removal of shuttering
WC
Check for water tightness, rendering, if any
WC
Preparation of As-built drawings
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
18.
Page 1185 of 1744
Rw
Rw

Rw
NOTE : 1)
CAT A: Critical foundations of equipments i.e compressors, reactors, columns, stacks, foundations
subjected to dynamic loading and any other foundation with RCC Quantity > 250 Cum in
single pour ,etc.
CAT B: Unit Pipe racks, plant buildings and other equipment foundations not covered in category A,
etc
CAT C: Non critical pipe racks(branch pipe, offsite pipe rack, etc) non plant buildings ,pipe sleepers,
manhole, catch pit and balance works.
Rw
$ligai lad&
Page 1186 of 1744
1.11,21, Femeon JillITA)
ITP NO:
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of IntiA UndeMlong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
ENGINEERS
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 23 of 37
2743 Rev 1
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE (SUPER STRUCTURE)
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRA
CTOR
EIL
CAT A
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP
HP
Rw
2.
Review of calibration certificates of instruments/ testing

equipments
WC
HP
HP
HP
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Checking of layout
WC
Incoming material inspection
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Design of mix &establishment of strength at site by trial mix
WC
HP
HP
HP
Check for line & level of shuttering and scaffolding/ vertical

bracing including hoisting arrangements.
Reinforcement & covers to reinforcement
WC
WC
Inserts, bolts, pipe sleeves, MS rungs, concealed electrical

conduits, fan hooks, dowels, etc. including welding if any
Pockets/ openings
WC
WC
Expansion joints, if any
WC
Check for water stops, slopes, stoppers, if any
WC
Pour Card
WC
Rw
Concreting, testing, compaction & finishing
WC
Casting of cubes
WC
Curing
WC
Testing of cubes
WC
Removal of formwork/ staging
WC
Verification of dimensions viz AFC drawings and tolerances
WC
Check for water tightness, rendering, if any
WC
Preparation of As built drawing .
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
3.
20.


NOTE : 1)
CAT A: Super structure of foundations for Critical equipments ie compressors, reactors, columns,
stacks, foundations subjected to dynamic loading and super structure of any other
foundation with RCC Quantity > 250 Cum in single pour , Slabs of plant and non plant
buildings, etc.
CAT B: Unit Pipe racks, plant buildings and super structure of other equipment not covered in
category A, etc
manhole, catch pit and balance works.
iagj
eg
eirCIAT
Ent avitql
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Gout of India Unden.k.91

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 24 of 37
2745 Rev 1
RCC PAVEMENT/FLOORING
SL.
NO.
Page 1187 of 1744
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
Rw

WC
HP
WC
Layout checking/ excavation of all new

foundations
WC
WC
NOTE 1
Design of mix &establishment of strength at site

by trial mix
Check for proper back filling/compaction/
completion of sub - Structure works
Check for edges of shuttering, alternate panels
WC
HP
WC
WC
Check for slopes, thickness of flooring
WC
Shuttering, reinforcement (as applicable)
WC
Check for expansion joints/ Construction joints
WC
Check for concealed pipe embedment, earthing,

if any
Check for dividing strips, as applicable
WC
WC
Concreting, finishing, etc
WC
Checking for line, levels, slopes, joints, thickness

of flooring viz. AFC drawings
Curing
WC
WC
Grinding & polishing, as applicable
WC
Testing of concrete cubes (as applicable)
WC
Preparation of "As Built Drawings"
WC
Rw
WC
Rw

NOTE : 1)
CAT B: All works.
fag&
err
1.72. 2970X2 an Jg0.1)
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA

CIVIL, STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 25 of 37
2746 Rev 1
BRICK MASONARY
SL.
NO.
1.
2.
Page 1188 of 1744
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B
CAT C
Review of calibration certificates of instruments/

testing equipments
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Cleaning of surface
WC
Wetting/soaking of bricks
WC
Cement mortar proportion
WC
Staging & scaffolding
WC
Hacking of adjacent concrete surface
WC
Check for bond/closers, thickness of joints .
WC
Line, level & plumb
WC
Raking out joints, keys in brick work, if any
WC
Check for placement of Reinforcement bars in case of

partition brick work
WC
Embedment of fixtures
WC
Curing
WC
Preparation of 'As Built' Drawings
WC
Rw
Rw

NOTE : 1)
Rw
WC
CAT B: Load bearing walls

Page 1189 of 1744
LIf fdf51-eg
7.112R 212CIA7 397.f.1)
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt ol India Undettalongl
2.
3.
4.
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 26 of 37
2747 Rev 1
TURAL STEEL WORKS
ACTIVITY
NO
A
1.

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
PRE FABRICATION ACTIVITIES

Review of calibration certificates of instruments/ testing
equipments
Welding Filler material approval/ qualification
Manufacturing test certificates/ documents
Testing, if any
WPS/ PQR
Welders performance qualification
Layout checking
Welding equipment and accessories
Preparation and approval of Fabrication drawings
FABRICATION ACTIVITIES
Materials as per design drawing
Check straightness and non-warping of members
Dimensional and fit-up checks including provision of slopes
for deflection wherever required
Visual check for welding
Grinding including surface preparation for painting and
application of primer
Checking paint as per specs, shelf-life, etc.
Application of specified paint, painting thickness, etc.
FIELD ERECTION ACTIVITIES
Lifting arrangements including test certificates of lifting
tackles
Correctness of location
Orientation of bracing, lugs
Alignment & levels
Field welding (if any)
Grouting
Finishing coat of paint, thickness of paint etc.
Preparation of As-built drawings
C ONTRA
CTOR
EIL
CAT C
CAT A
CAT B
WC
HP
HP
WC
WC
S
Note 1
S
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
W
HP
W
Rw
W
HP
W
Rw
Rw
W
HP
W
-
WC
WC
WC
Rw
S
S
Rw
Rw
-
WC
WC
S
S
S
S
Rw
WC
WC
S
S
S
S
WC
S /Rw
S/Rw
Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
S
S
S
S
S
S
Rw
S
S
S
Rw
-S
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
S
S
Rw
Rw
Rw
Note 1
S
S

NOTE : 1)
Steel
structures
pertaining to equipments ie compressors, reactors, columns, stacks,
CAT A:
Technological structures.
CAT B: Steel structures pertaining to Unit Pipe racks, and other equipments not covered in category
A, etc.
CAT C: Steel structures of Non critical pipe racks (branch pipe, offsite pipe rack, etc) plant buildings
and non plant buildings, pipe sleepers, manhole, catch pit ,walkways, platforms at grade
levels, etc.
ei
Ifgar
EtRes
pan,
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
AGoot of India Undertaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 27 of 37
2748 Rev 1
PILING WORKS
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT A
CAT B
CATC
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Layout and ground level
WC
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
WC
HP
HP
HP
Design of mix &establishment of strength at site by trial

mix
Driving of piles & check for set point
WC
Check for depth of bore and lowering of cage measuring
WC
Pour Card
WC
HP
HP
Rw
Concreting, testing
WC
Casting of cubes/Testing
WC
10
WC
11
Check for cut off level of concreting & quantity of concrete

poured
Lifting of casing pipe
WC
12
Pile load tests (lateral/vertical/cyclic/pull out)
WC
Rw
Rw
13
Submission of pile load test report
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Rw
Page 1190 of 1744

NOTE : 1)
CAT A: Critical foundations of equipments ie compressors, reactors, columns, stacks, foundations

subjected to dynamic loading and any other foundation with RCC Quantity > 250 Cum in
single pour ,Technological structures,etc.
CAT B: Unit Pipe racks, plant buildings and other equipment foundations not covered in category A,
etc
manhole, catch pit ,etc
Isar tifgleg
ORM 2120W AAJW171)
ITP NO:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout. of India Undertaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 28 of 37
2771 Rev 1
ANTITERMITE TREATMENT
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CNTRACO TOR
EIL
CAT B
Testing of material & spraying devices including personal

protective equipments like facemask, gloves, shoes, etc.
WC
HP & Note 1
Preparation of surface for taking dosage of emulsion by

ramming of each layer of soil by roding the earth at
specified intervals
WC
3.
Backfilling and compaction in specified layers along with

application of emulsifier along the sides of masonry &
RCC structures
WC
Compaction of top surface for taking dosage of emulsifier

by roding the earth at specified intervals for the entire floor
area before concreting
WC
Check for consumption of emulsifier utilized
WC
WC
Rw
Page 1191 of 1744

NOTE : 1)
CAT B: All works
ei
Igar faileg
efioloi3O1,3fRoff)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov/ of India Undeftalong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 29 of 37
ITP NO: 2772 Rev 1

PLASTERING
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
CAT C
Check for completeness of all hidden jobs like piping,

conduiting, etc.
WC
2.
Check for grading of sand, Mix proportion
WC
Sample preparation for finish and its approval
WC
Neeru application on plaster (as applicable)
WC
Hacking and cleaning the surface, removing loose

particles, wetting the surface
WC
Checking of plaster thickness, plumb & even surface
WC
7.
Check for grooves, openings, rounding off the corners,

hollowness in plaster
WC
Curing
WC
WC
Rw
Page 1192 of 1744

CAT B: Area requiring special finish (e.g pebble dash finish etc.)
CATC: Balance works.
..i
I
AA
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goof of India Undertaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 30 of 37
2773 Rev 1
DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B CAT C
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Check for sections & dimensions
WC
Line, level & plumb
WC
Section joinery details
WC
Rw
Grouting with lugs/ dash fasteners
WC
Check for fixtures & fittings
WC
Check for thickness & type of glazing
WC
Check for rubber gasket, anodizing (as

applicable)
WC
Brand/ shade of paints, no. of coats including

surface preparation
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw
Page 1193 of 1744
NOTE : 1)
CAT B: Main plant buildings

lailfaelei;;,
ENGINEERS
Igar 015itsW INDIA LIMITED

MKT, fz.vran,),11:01)
ITP NO.:
(A Govl
of India UndeftakM)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 31 of 37
2774 Rev 1
PAINTING (BUILDING WORKS)
SL.
NO.
Page 1194 of 1744
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
Completion of surface preparation
WC
CAT B
-
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Confirmation of colour, shade & brand
HP
Check for number of coats and thickness
WC
Curing, if any
WC
INSPECTION & TEST

DOCUMENTS
WC
Rw
Rw
NOTE : 1)
CAT C
-

101
R5leg,
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
IA Govi of India Undedalong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 32 of 37
2775 Rev I
SANITARY FITTINGS
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
EIL
CONTRACTOR
CAT B CAT C
Page 1195 of 1744
WC
Note 1
Note 1
Checking of sample (as applicable)
WC
Check completeness of finishing works

w.r.t. line, level & position
Check proper fixing of the sanitary fittings
to give aesthetic appeal
Check for leakage
WC
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw
Rw

NOTE : 1)

lgar 256
ikeet, MIA? CMJ10,14)
ITP NO.:
Kt=Th\
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fA Govt of India Undertaking)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 33 of 37
2776 Rev 0
WATER PROOFING (ROOF)
SL.
NO.
Page 1196 of 1744
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
Surface preparation for screeding/ water proof

plastering
Mix proportion, thickness of screeding/ plastering
& slope towards rain water pipes
Formation of groove at specified height on
parapet wall
Incoming material inspection , no. of coats,
application procedure and consumption.
Termination of material in groove on vertical
plane
Check for hollowness, bubbles in water proofing,
if any
Conducting a sample of water proofing test by
flooding the area for specified interval (as
applicable)
Cleaning of surface
9.
Submission of Guarantee in the requisite

Performa
NOTE : 1)
WC
WC
WC
WC
W
S
S/Note 1
WC
WC
S
S/Rw
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw
CAT B: All works
Page 1197 of 1744
MI
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gov/ of India Undenaiong)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 34 of 37
2777 Rev 1
FALSE FLOORING AND FALSE CEILING
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
FALSE FLOORING
5.
Manufacturers Test Certificate
WC
Rw
WC
Note 1
Cleaning base floor
WC
Painting base floor with Polyurethane based paint

(as specified)
Proper line, level & layout
WC
WC
Manufacturers Test Certificate
WC
Rw
WC
Note 1
Surface preparation of panel boards
WC
Proper line, level & cut-outs
WC
Painting of panel boards
WC
WC
Rw
FALSE CEILING
5.

NOTE : 1)
CAT B: All works.
ii fdPittg
rivowe
051JVit5A)
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goo. of India Undertakingt

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 35 of 37
2778 Rev 1
UNDER DECK INSULATION
SL.
NO.
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
WC
Note 1
WC
WC
WC
Fixing of under-deck insulation with

adhesive
Fixing of dash fasteners at defined spacing
WC
Finishing
WC
WC
Rw
3.
4
Page 1198 of 1744
Incoming material checking including

density
Checking of adhesive, fasteners for
anchorage
Fixing of scaffolding, ladders, platforms

NOTE : 1)
CAT B: All works.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
faigies
iliM12,171017i1)
ITP NO.:

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 36 of 37
2779 Rev 1
ROOFING ACCESSORIES
SL.
NO.
5
6
ACTIVITY
CAT B
CAT C
WC
HP/Note 1
HP/Note 1
Check for mitring, overhang, laps, etc.
WC
Slopes line, level of sheets, barge boards,

ridges & gutters, overhang
of sheets
Bolting by drilling only, length of bolts, nos.,
anodizing and type of washers
Check for slopes of rain gutters, down take
pipes, north lighting curves/ supports for
gutters
Check for leakage/ passing of light
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Rw
Rw

NOTE :
1)
2)
Page 1199 of 1744
EIL
CONTRACTOR
Fixing arrangement need to be reviewed with respect to contract

specifications.
CAT B: Important structures (e.g Compressor House, Ware house and Pump house etc.)
CAT C: Balance works.
k31
51gzir
1Wits
WWI
742&517 951,304f711
ITP NO.:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of India Undenakng)

CIVIL,STRUCTURAL &
6-82-2700 Rev 1
Page 37 of 37
2799 Rev 1
LIGHTING WORKS (NON-PLANT BUILDINGS)
SL.
NO.
Page 1200 of 1744
ACTIVITY
CONTRACTOR
EIL
CAT B
Prepare detailed conduit layout diagram as per the

approved electrical drawing
Provide GJ/PVC sleeves in columns/beams at
identified locations to facilitate laying of conduit on
later date.
Ensure conduit & accessories material is inspected at
site before using
Ensure that the conduit is laid in line with execution
drawings & provide pull-wires as per requirement.
Check correctness of drop/JB locations
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Check threaded joints are proper
WC
Ensure all JB/Fan box are properly stuffed with jute
WC
Ensure conduits are properly tied to reinforcement

bars to prevent floating during concrete
Ensure proper supporting of conduit lengths
wherever required
Ensure adequate chasing depth for conduit portion
coming inside brick walls
Check workmanship towards joints and presence of
any foreign material inside the conduits
Ensure wiring material is inspected at site before use
WC
WC
WC
WC
WC
Ensure correctness of lighting wire size and no. of

wires as per the drawing in each conduit portion
Preparation of "As Built" drgs.
WC
WC
Rw
WC
Rw

CAT B: All works
ENGINEERS
401 el
Og eg tVregINDIA LIMITED
'A G.4 "6"Thded.k.9)

CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL FOR
EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING
No.
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 6
iiida
iiiicb 1-41-4RT
FOR CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
FOR EARTHWORK IN SITE GRADING
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC
SKC
NK
VDS
VJN
15.07.99
PKT
PCS
MMK
A SONI
29.12.89
ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
RPB
RP
RPB
RCPC
Prepared
by
Checked
by
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
16.02.06
1
0
Date
Page 1201 of 1744
DM
RPCS
23.05.11
Rev.
No
VK
ALOK
Purpose
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM
Standards
Committee (Engg)
Convenor
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

Page 2 of 6
6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Abbreviations:
gm/cc :
Gram Per Cubic Centimetre
General Civil Standards Committee

Convener:
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. D.C. Brahma
Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Raju Chutani
Mr. P.K. Mittal (Strl)
Mr. A.T. Dharmik (Piping)
Mr. U.A. Patro (Electrical)
Mr. J. K. Joshi (Environment)
Mr. S. Mukherjee (Construction)
Mr. M.P. Jain (Projects)
Page 1202 of 1744
n^l 1_J eI
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertak.9)

6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
SCOPE
2.0
ORDINARY SOIL
3.0
SOFT ROCK
4.0
HARD ROCK
5.0
FILLING SOIL
6.0
METHOD OF FILLING / FIELD DENSITY FOR SOIL COMPACTION
1.0
Page 1203 of 1744
/01
kje
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
Igaf
Emeg INDIA
wen errosrumarara)
(A Govt of India Undrtaking)
1.0

6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 6
SCOPE
This specification covers classification of soil for earthwork in excavation and filling for site
grading work. Method of field density for soil compaction, using soft rock and hard rock, is
also explained.
2.0
ORDINARY SOIL
2.1
Soft Soil / Loose Soil

Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, or to phawra,
rake or other ordinary digging implements such as:
Sand, gravel, loam, clay, mud, black cotton soil
Vegetables or organic soil, turf, peats, soft shale or loose moorum
Mud concrete below ground level
Any mixture of soil mentioned above.
2.2
Hard/ Dense Soil

Generally any soil, which requires close application of picks or jumpers or scarifier and
rippers to loosen the same, such as:
Stiff heavy clay, hard shale or compact moorum requiring grafting tool and/ or pick
and shovel
Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders
Soling of roads, paths etc. and hard core
Macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac etc.)
Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar below ground level
Soft conglomerate when the stone can be detached from the matrix with picks and
shovels
3.0
SOFT ROCK
This is fissured / disintegrated rocky strata, boulders (volume less than 0.4 m 3 and more than
0.028 M3) and also which cannot be quarried/ excavated by using above manual tools but can
be quarried/ excavated manually by using crow bars is classified as soft rock. Soft rock shall
include all kinds of stiff and stratified rock, such as shales, thinly bedded philites, laterite hard
conglomerate, lime stone, sand stone and unreinforced cement concrete below ground level.
Soft rock may be quarried or split with crow bar or picks and can also be excavated by rippers,
dozers and other mechanical equipment, but without the aid of blasting. If required, light
blasting may be restored to, for loosening the materials, but this will not, in any way entitle the
material to be classified as "Hard Rock".
4.0
HARD ROCK
4.1
Hard Rock (Not Requiring Blasting)

This shall include all types of hard and compact rock, having closely spaced fissures or joints,
on account of which blasting is not considered necessary.
Page 1204 of 1744
dolfaeitq
5'igar Elf5teg
WIER, 29M17
4.2
agi7P1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India
undertakm)

6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 6
Hard Rock (Requiring General Blasting)

This shall include all types of hard and compact rock occurring in unfissured masses or similar
foundations, boulders (volume more than 0.4m 3) for excavation in which blasting is
considered necessary such as quartzite, granite, basalt stones, reinforced cement concrete
(reinforcement to be cut through but not separated from concrete) below ground level and the
like.
4.3
Hard Rock (Requiring Controlled Blasting)

This type of excavation becomes necessary when excavation is done in formations, mentioned
in Clause 4.2, in the vicinity of existing foundations/ structures. Mode of blasting shall be
decided by Engineer-in-Charge, keeping in view the sensitivity of structures.
4.4
Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited)

Hard rock requiring blasting as described in clause 4.2 above, but when blasting is prohibited
for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiseling, splitter or any other agreed
method.
The use of excavation shall not be considered as a reason for classification under hard rock
requiring blasting unless clearly found necessary in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0
FILLING SOIL
5.1
Ordinary soil used for filling shall meet requirements of clause 4 of Standard Spec. No. 6-650017, for Site Grading.
5.2
Use of soft rock for filling shall be determined based on compaction test of filling material.
Well graded soft rock with sufficient fines should make a good filling material. This shall be
tested in field for compaction and then density of compacted soils shall be determined. Test
patches shall be made in field using this material and number of passes of rollers determined
for each patch. A minimum of 3 test patches of 10m x 10m shall be made. Density of
compaction shall be determined in each patch. A density of 1.90 gm/cc or more shall be
acceptable.
5.3
Use of hard rock with soft rock and soil for filling shall be determined based on compaction
test of rock material to be used for filling. Test patches shall be made as in case of soft rocks
and number of rolls shall be determined for each test patch. Density of material in all test
patches shall be found, which should not be less than 2.0 gm/cc.
5.4
The decision of Engineer-in-Charge with regard to suitability of such materials shall be final.
6.0
METHOD OF FILLING / FIELD DENSITY FOR SOIL COMPACTION
6.1
Filling With Soft Rock/ Hard Rock Soil

The earth for filling shall be rock soil mass, available from cutting areas. Filling shall be done
in loose thickness of 400 mm. Voids shall be filled with smaller size material to ensure well
graded and compacted fill. Watering, ramming and compacting with rollers or other suitable
means as approved by Engineer-in-Charge shall be done to achieve at least 90% maximum dry
density. Stones used in fill material shall not exceed 150 mm in size.
Page 1205 of 1744
Igar Elfgjeu
WWI 212MR7=309.31
6.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GON Of
'ride undertaking)

6-65-0016 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 6
Field Testing for Density

Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge, subject
to achieving the required density, before laying the next layer. In the event, if it is not possible
to conduct compaction test due to presence of stones, the compaction shall be determined at
site by excavating a pit of size 0.5m x 0.5m x 0.3m (depth) in compacted area. The excavated
soil shall be weighed. The pit shall be filled with water after laying a thin polythene sheet and
weight of water so filled shall be determined. Alternatively, sand can also be used for filling
the pit for determining the density.
Density of filled material shall be equal to the weight of soil / weight of water
This shall not be less than 1.90 gm/cc for soft rock and 2.0gm/cc for hard rock fill area. One
test per 4000 m2 compacted area shall be done for every layer of filling. Number of tests can
be increased due to variation in quality of fill material and / or at the discretion of Engineer-inCharge.
Page 1206 of 1744
00- 111A
i OP46-,
1)73vd)
( 4O,
e-,Od,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
No.
FOR SITE GRADING & ROCK
CUTTING FOR SITE GRADING
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 12
(-11 d
x.115 +1 WziF
*Bid
wadd4i coid
Trr-i-w *Mr
FOR SITE GRADING
AND ROCK CUTTING
FOR SITE GRADING
24.09.13
RBT
I)(S
RBB
23.05.11
ALOK
RKS
RBB
16.02.06
REViSLD & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC
SIKC
NK
VDS
25.06.99
PKT
PCS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
DM
VK
VJN
MMK
Standards
Committee
Convenor
DM
A SONI
GM
(Engg)
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
I ormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 1207 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fg-ar id5reg
rtecwaTaxgr.1)
IA Govt of India Unclettalong)
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 12
Abbreviations:
DGMS
Director General of Mines Safety
gm/cc
Gram Per Cubic Centimeter
IS
Indian Standard
NGL
Natural Grade Level

Convener:
Mr. R.B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. Rajan ji Srivastava (Structural)
Mr. Harish Chandra (Piping)
Mr. B. R. Bhogal (Electrical)
Mr. Praveen Goel (Environment)
Mr. V S Chhhaya (Projects)
rormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 1208 of 1744
$2ZIT faiAeg
Z
J44
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Al India Undertaking)
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 12
CONTENTS
1.0
2.0 CODES & STANDARDS
3.0 GENERAL
4.0 MATERIAL FOR EARTHWORK
5.0 CUTTING TREES
6.0 CLEARING AND STRIPPING
7.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION / CUTTING
8.0 EARTHWORK IN FILLING
9.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
10.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK
F-ormat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 1209 of 1744
SCOPE
ei
ENGINEERS
$1g-elf legreg
,t-twt riecv,ent3tros.0
1.0
INDIA LIMITED
IA
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 12
SCOPE
This specification and the method of measurements described thereon are applicable for earthwork
involved in Site Grading & Rock Cutting.

IS:2720 Part IV
IS:2720 Part V
IS:2720 Part VII
6-65-0016
NOTE:-
Methods of tests for soils.

Methods of tests for soils-Part 5 :Determination of liquid & plastic limit.
Methods of tests for soils Part-VII :Determination of water content Dry
Density Relation using Light Compaction.
Std. specification for classification of soil for earthwork in site grading.
Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.
3.0 GENERAL
3.1
CONTRACTOR shall maintain adequate drainage facilities at SITE at all times during the execution
of work. Additional ditches, drains & such other temporary means to achieve this, over and above
what is shown in the drawings, shall be provided and maintained by CONTRACTOR at his own cost.
3.2
Adequate dewatering facilities like dewatering pumps and piping etc. shall also be provided by the
CONTRACTOR for this work, including dewatering during excavation etc. as required, at his own
cost.
4.0 MATERIAL FOR EARTHWORK

4.1
Only soil considered suitable by the Engineer-in-charge shall be deployed for the construction and
that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off, as directed by Engineer-in-charge, at his own cost
and no claim for compensation will be entertained.
4.2
The CONTRACTOR shall give the samples of soil he proposes to use for filling, along with the
following characteristics of the samples, to Engineer-in-charge for approval, prior to collection and
use. The tests for these characteristics shall be done in a laboratory / test house as approved by
Engineer-in-charge.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
Mechanical analysis or grain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part IV.
Liquid limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
Plastic limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
Moisture density relationship as per IS: 2720 Part VII.
4.3
The soil used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or any organic
deleterious matter.
4.4
Soil having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used for filling purpose.
4.5
Soil having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5 gms/cc shall not be used.
4.6
Care shall be taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a manner that there is
no likelihood of its getting mixed with the material, proposed to be used, for filling.
4.7
The work shall be so planned and executed that the best available soil are reserved for the top
portion of Embankments.
5.0 CUTTING TREES

5.1
All trees having girth above 30 cms, which are not marked for preservation, shall be cut down and
their roots dug up to a depth of 1 metre from the existing ground level.
Page 1210 of 1744
Ogarfett54eg
tenen
ENGINEERS
w' INDIA LIMITED
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 12
5.2
All holes or hollows produced by digging up roots shall be carefully filled with approved soil,
including all leads and lifts, rammed and compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry
density of soil and levelled as directed.
5.3
All uprooted trees shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
5.4 Payment
Cutting of trees above 30 cms girth shall be paid per number. The rate quoted shall include cutting,
uprooting removing the trees within plant boundary as directed, including filling holes or hollows
produced by removal of roots etc. as per specifications.
6.0 CLEARING AND STRIPPING
6.1
All the areas, including depressions, where filling or cutting is to be carried out shall be cleared and
stripped completely of bushes, roots, vegetation, plantation trees, shrubs, trees upto 30 cms girth,
organic and other objectionable materials. All these shall be completely uprooted and virgin soil
exposed and not merely scrapped at the surface. The roots of trees of girth upto 30 cms shall be
removed to a minimum depth of 1M below existing ground level and holes, hollows filled up with
selected approved available soil within all leads and lifts and compacted to obtain 90% of laboratory
dry density of soil as per IS: 2720, Part VII and leveled as directed by Engineer-in-charge. All soft
patches must be worked out to remove soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and
the areas (areas coming under filling) compacted to obtain 90% of maximum laboratory dry density of
soil, as per IS: 2720 Part VII. The depth of stripping shall be generally 50 to 150 mm as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2
Material obtained from clearing shall be stacked or disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-charge
within a lead as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
6.3 Payment
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials obtained from
clearing. This shall be considered as part of cutting work in areas of cutting and filling work in areas
of filling and the rates quoted under the respective items of
i. Earthwork in Excavation/ Cutting
ii Earthwork in filling (both with available earth & earth obtained from approved borrow areas),
shall be inclusive of clearing and stripping with all operations described above in clause no.6 in
respective areas of cutting and filling.
No separate payment shall be made for clearing, stripping and disposal of materials obtained from
clearing of borrow areas for earth. This shall be considered as part of filling work in area of filling and
the rate quoted under the respective items.
7.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION / CUTTING
7.1
After clearing and stripping of areas as specified above in clause No.6, spot levels at intervals and
pattern as decided by the Engineer-in-charge, shall be taken jointly by CONTRACTOR and Engineerin-charge. Excavation / cutting shall commence only after the levels are signed by the contractor as a
token of his acceptance.
7.2
Excavation/ cutting shall be carried out strictly as per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
7.3
If the contractor excavates/ cuts beyond the required level, additional quantity of earthwork shall not
be paid for. The excavation taken below the specified level shall be made good by filling with
approved material, to the required compaction, at Contractor's cost.
Page 1211 of 1744
5fgarrem201--e-g
A2E1512 el5T
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 12
7.4
The final bed and sides of excavation must be levelled, dressed and compacted. In case of areas under
excavation for site grading, the final surface shall be levelled, dressed and consolidated by means of
sheep foot / power driven rollers to obtain maximum compaction. However, no test control is required
in such areas.
7.5
Shoring and strutting shall be adopted only with the permission of Engineer-in-charge in writing.
Such shoring and strutting shall follow the necessary specification.
7.6
Provisions for dewatering shall be governed by the relevant clauses.
7.7 Payment
Payment for Excavation shall be on the basis of volume of excavation calculated on the basis of joint
level taken as per clause 7.1 and the final finished grade levels, the volume being calculated by the
Trapezoidal rule including dewatering, if required. Intermediate payment will be on the basis of
volume calculated based on spot levels taken during the time of the billing. Reference is also invited
to clause 7.3.
8.0 EARTHWORK IN FILLING
8.1
After clearing, stripping and consolidation of areas as specified in clause 6, spot levels at intervals and
pattern as decided by Engineer-in-charge shall be taken jointly by the CONTRACTOR and Engineerin-Charge and filling shall commence only after the levels are signed by the CONTRACTOR as a
token of his acceptance. Approved fill Material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 30
cms in loose depth.
The contractor has to make his own approach and access roads from the borrow area to the
demarcated filling areas. While the CONTRACTOR may make use of such short cuts as may be
available to him for earth movement from borrow areas to the filling areas, the OWNER does not
guarantee any passage way or right of way for the CONTRACTOR's work other than available at site.
No claim shall also be admissible to the CONTRACTOR on account of his having to take longer
leads or routes for earth movement, than envisaged by him, either due to any road cuttings, nonavailability of routes, or any other grounds whatsoever.
In case total filling required in any area consists of soil both from borrow areas and available
approved excavated material from within plant area, then joint levels, shall be taken before
commencing filling with earth from borrow area.
However, earth available from borrow areas required for filling can be used only after the available
earth from excavation within demarcated area has been utilised and clearance to this effect obtained
from the Engineer-in-charge.
8.2
All clods, lumps etc, shall be broken before compaction.
8.3
Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer below has been thoroughly compacted
and tested to satisfy the requirements laid down in this specification.
8.4
Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or minus 2% of the
Optimum Moisture Content as described in IS: 2720 Part VII. The moisture content shall preferably
be on the wet side for potentially expansive soil.
8.5
After adjusting the Moisture Content as described in clause 8.4, the layers shall be thoroughly
compacted by either sheep foot roller or power driven roller or vibratory roller, as approved by
Engineer-in-charge, till the specified maximum laboratory dry density is obtained.
Page 1212 of 1744
$fg-ar tt154-eg
elecnterniJnertai
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA God of India Undertaking)
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 12
8.6
Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-charge, subject to achieving
the required density, before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per 500m2 for each layer
shall be conducted.
8.7
If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall be replaced and
method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-charge to obtain the required density.
8.8
The filling shall be finished in conformity with the alignment, levels, cross-section and dimensions as
shown in the drawing.
Earthen embankment shall be filled 300mm more on both sides, where height is more than 1M and
this extra filling shall be dressed, after compaction, in conformity with alignment, level, cross-section
and dimension as shown in the drawing, to achieve proper compaction in the slope. No extra payment
shall be made in this regard.
8.9
Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.10 Tolerances
General site grading, including cutting and filling in depressions, shall be carried out to within up
down tolerance of +5 cms of final lines, grades and slopes.
8.11 Earth Work in Filling in Open Lined/Unlined Wells
For earth work in filling in open lined/unlined wells, only locally available coarse sand shall be used,
in layers of 500 mm thickness. Each layer shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling water, before next
layer is filled up. Filling shall be done upto 1 m depth below NGL as above. Layers from a depth of
lm below NGL, upto NGL, shall also comprise of locally available coarse sand and compacted with
suitable Mechanical / manual means, to obtain same level of compaction as required for filling above
NGL. Filling above NGL shall be done as per Cl. 8.1 to 8.10 above.
8.12 Payment
8.12.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic metre of volume calculated on the basis of cross section
plotted from the levels of ground, where filling is to be carried out and the levels reached after filling
is duly consolidated, volume being calculated by Trapezoidal method.
8.12.2 In case of simultaneous cut and fill operation, wherever specified, payment shall be made on the basis
of one composite rate for cutting and filling. All other details about measurement etc. remaining
same as above.
8.12.3 Payment for filling in open wells, lined or unlined, shall be made on the basis of volume calculated on
the basis of average area mult6iplied with depth of open well
8.12.4 No extra payment shall be made towards testing.
9.0 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EARTH
9.1
Surplus earth and soil from excavation and general site grading shall be removed from the
construction areas to the area demarcated by the Engineer-in-charge.
9.2 Payment
Payment shall be made only for lead beyond initial lead from construction area. Rate shall include
loading, transportation, dumping, stacking the surplus earth and soil in the area demarcated by the
Engineer-in-charge.
Format No. 8-00-0001 -F1 Rev. 0
Page 1213 of 1744
~anwt?~t
ligar
1.41-e'ReieceredkJeteri)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov! of India Undertaking)
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 12
Payment shall be made on cubic metre basis of the difference of measurements of the volumes of the
excavation and the measurement of the filling with the excavated earth. However, the contractor's
entitlement to payment shall be restricted to the actual quantity of earth removed. Quantity generated
due to void in back filled volume of earth shall also be removed by the contractor at no extra cost and
this disposal of earth shall not be measured and paid under any item.
10.0 EXCAVATION IN ROCK
10.1
Blasting operations shall be carried out with the prior permission and in the presence of the Engineerin-charge or his authorised representative and during fixed time hours of the day. Blasting operations
shall be carried out as per Indian Explosive Rules 1983, amended up to date. The contractor shall have
a valid license from Controller of Explosives to carry out blasting operations as well as for obtaining
and storing the explosives as per Indian Explosive Rules (latest). All safety precautions such as
providing safety nylon netting etc. shall be carried out as per instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
In case the contractor is not having a valid license from Controller of Explosives to carry out blasting
operations and storing / handling explosives as per Indian Explosives Rules (latest). The contractor
may engage an agency for blasting who is having valid license required to carry out blasting
operation. Prior to start of blasting operation, contractor shall submit all the relevant licenses required
for blasting operation to Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.1 The contractor shall ensure that all workmen and the personnel at site except those who have actually
to light the fuse are evacuated from the unsafe area to be determined by the Engineer and warned by
loud speaker in local language to safe distance, not less than 200 metres at least 15 minutes before
firing time by sounding warning siren. The area shall be encircled by red flags. The contractor shall be
responsible for any accident to workmen, public or property due to blasting operation.
10.1.2 Gunpowder, gelatin and other safe explosives only shall be used wherever possible. Explosives with
nitroglycerine shall be used only under exceptional circumstances, with prior approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
10.1.3 All fuses shall be cut to the length required, before being inserted into the holes.
10.1.4 The no. of charges to be fired and the actual no. of shots heard shall be compared and the person
responsible must satisfy himself by examination that all the charges have exploded before work
people are permitted to approach the scene. The withdrawal of a charge, which has not exploded shall
under no circumstances be permitted, such charges shall be flooded with water and the hole marked
into a distinguishing manner. The next hole to be fired shall be at a distance of about 500 mm from
the unexploded hole and fired in the usual way.
The contractor or sub contractor or any of his competent authorised person shall be in charge of the
blasting operations and shall be held responsible for strictly observing the safety rules, particularly
applicable to blasting operations, in addition to other safety rules.
10.1.5 For blasting rocks with dynamite, the following general principles shall be observed.
In general, the following diameter of drills shall be used for different depth of boreholes.
From 1-2 metres
From 2-3.25 metres
From 3.25-4.75metres
25mm diameter
37-50mm diameter
50-65mm diameter
The boreholes should generally be not more than 1.5m deep and the distance apart should be from one
and a half to twice their depth.
Page 1214 of 1744
el
fdWes
tairerf ererreart
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 12
Cracks and fissures in the rock to be blasted shall be carefully studied to ascertain the best position for
the boreholes. The charge shall always be placed in a sound piece of rock, if possible not nearer than
300mm from the crack.
10.2 Rules for Blasting with Dynamite and other High Explosives
10.2.1 The Person-in-charge must show that he is thoroughly acquainted with the blasting operations and
that he understands the rules laid down herewith. He will be held responsible for any accident that
may occur. He must be a licenced blaster with a valid licence from DGMS.
10.2.2 Boreholes must be of such a size and uniform that the cartridges can easily pass down them.
10.2.3 The position of all holes to be drilled must be marked out with white paint and the person-in-charge
must take particular note of these positions.
10.2.4 The drilling operation after being finished, the person-in-charge must make a second inspection and
satisfy himself that the boreholes marked out by him have been drilled and cleaned properly.
10.2.5 The person-in-charge must prepare all charges necessary for boreholes.
10.2.6 Number of holes to be loaded and fired at one time shall be as per explosive rules. Boreholes must be
thoroughly cleared before a cartridge is inserted.
The loading is to be done by the person-in-charge himself and the position of the charge holes
carefully noted by him. Circular wooden tamping rods only to be used in charging holes with flat
bottom, (one cartridge at a time must be inserted) and cartridge gently pressed with the tamping rod.
10.2.7 Immediately before firing a blast, due warning must be given and the person-in-charge must see that
all the labours have retired to safety.
10.2.8 The safety fuses of the charged holes are to be lighted in the presence of the person-in-charge, who
must see that the fuses of the holes charged have properly ignited.
After the blast, the person-in-charge must carefully inspect the work and satisfy himself that all the
charges have exploded.
10.3 Misfires
10.3.1 Misfires are a source of great danger. If it is suspected that part of the blast to fire is delayed,
sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse before entering the danger zone. When fuse and blasting
caps are used, a safe time of at least an hour should be allowed.
10.3.2 None of the drillers are to work near these holes until the three following operations have been done
by the person-in-charge.
a.
The Person-in-charge should very carefully extract the tamping with a wooden scrapper and withdraw
the fuse with the primer and detonator attached, after which a fresh primer and detonator with fuse
should be placed in this hole and fired; or
b.
The hole may be cleared of 300mm of tamping and the direction then ascertained by placing a stick in
the hole. Another hole may then be drilled 150mm away and parallel to it: this hole to be then charged
and fired when the other charge should explode.
c.
Drilling in holes not completely exploded by blasting shall not be permitted.
Frnat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 1215 of 1744
t_71 LI
Og 0151-eg
(.7V-er
37;11,)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov) of India Undertaking)
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 10 of 12
10.4 Precautions Against Misfire

10.4.1 The safety fuse should be cut in an oblique direction with a knife.
10.4.2 All saw dust must be cleared from the inside of the detonator; this can be done by blowing down the
detonation and tapping the open end. No instrument shall be inserted into the detonator for this
purpose.
10.4.3 After inserting the fuse in the detonator, it shall be fixed by means of nippers.
10.4.4 If there is water present, or if the boreholes be damp, the junction of the fuse and detonator must be
made water tight by means of grease, white lead or tar.
10.4.5 The detonator should be inserted into the cartridge, so that about one third of the copper tube is left
exposed outside the explosives. The safety fuse outside the detonator, should be necessarily tied in
position in the cartridge. Waterproof fuse only to be used in the damp boreholes, or when water is
present in the borehole.
10.4.6 If a misfire has been found to be due to defective fuse, detonator or dynamite, the whole quantity or
box from which the detective article was used shall be rejected.
10.4.7 Storage of materials for blasting shall be as per statutory regulations / stipulations of the concerned
authorities.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to arrange for proper storage of explosives and obtain
required permissions from concerned authorities. No separate payment shall be payable for the above.
10.4.8. Cleaning of Excavation
Excavation shall be cleaned, trimmed to exact shape and all disturbed material and other debris shall
be removed. When the excavation have been taken out to the lines specified as shown on the drawings
and the surface cleaned as specified, the contractor shall notify the Engineer that the excavation is
ready for inspection and no further work shall be done with concrete or backfill until it has been
inspected and approved by the Engineer. Cost of this work is deemed to have been included in the unit
rates for excavation.
10.4.9. Use of Excavation Material
Where any material obtained from the excavation is, in the opinion of the Engineer, suitable for use in
a particular section of the work as fill or backfill, such material shall be selected and if necessary,
loaded, hauled, placed, spread and used to construct the fill or backfill with respect to the lines and
grades specified for the work. As far as possible the most suitable of the materials excavated for the
work shall be used to construct the fill and backfill embankments, roads and storage areas, where
required. The useful rock available shall be stacked at the locations as decided by the Engineer and
the cost of this work is deemed to have been included in the Unit rate of excavation.
Materials containing brush roots or other perishable materials shall not be considered suitable. The
suitability of the materials and their disposition in the work shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
10.4.10 Disposal of Surplus material
All surplus materials shall be carried away from the site and disposed at dumping sites selected by the
Engineer, up to a lead as indicated in the relevant items of the schedule of rates. The Engineer may
ask the contractor to dump the excavated materials in regular heaps, bunds, blankets, riprap with
regular slopes as directed by the Engineer and levelled so as to provide natural drainage. As a rule, all
Page 1216 of 1744
SZIf
E
g
ow?" 7:reenr7Ovi,grol)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 11 of 12
softer material shall be laid along the centre of heaps, with the harder and more weather resisting
materials forming the casing on the sides and the top. Excavated rocks, which can be used in soling as
road metals or for making concrete aggregate shall be stacked separately, as directed by the Engineer.
All such works as mentioned above is deemed to have been taken into account while quoting for the
excavation and the contractor for the above works shall claim no extras.
All rock excavated from the pits shall be the property of the Owner.
10.4.11 Stock Piles
When the removal of material from excavation progresses at a faster rate or at different times than
placement in backfill is being accomplished, such excavated materials shall be stock piled at approved
locations adjacent to the work until their use is authorised.
10.4.12 Spoil Areas
Material excavated for the works, which is rejected as unsuitable or not required by the Engineer,
shall be disposed of in spoil areas as specified by the Engineer.
The spoil areas shall be left in a neat and sighty condition and sloped to drain properly as may be
directed by the Engineer.
10.5
Control Blasting
10.5.1 General
This specification lays down the requirements for control blasting for rock excavations wherever
required.
Wherever required by the Engineer, the rock blasting shall be controlled, so that vibration generated
during the blasting do not cause damage to the buildings and installation around built up areas.
Similarly the rock pieces should not fly off the pits and thus damage the buildings and installation
around. Apart from the general precautions mentioned in the preceding paragraphs, following
protective measures are suggested as guidelines. Tenderers are requested to carefully check the site
conditions and submit the details of the scheme they propose to adopt for controlling the blast.
10.5.2 Protective Measures
a.
Short delay blasting with light charges shall be used.
b.
The blast hole shall be covered with 0.6 to 1.0 sqm. mild steel plate of minimum 6mm thickness.
c.
Reinforcement rod mesh, not less than 20mm dia at 150mm centres in both directions, shall be put
over the steel plates.
d.
Steel plate and reinforcements shall be inspected after every blasting operation and all twists shall be
removed before reuse, to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
e.
The thickness of the covering plate and the kind of dead weight shall be duly got approved from the
Engineer-in-Charge.
When blasting is necessary adjacent to partially or completely built structures, the contractor shall
take all precautions necessary to prevent flying rock from causing damage to the structures.
In no case shall blasting be allowed closer than 15m to any structure after concrete placing has started.
Page 1217 of 1744
ei
WWI tif5teieqN,751eg
JPIT,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
No.
6-65-0017 Rev. 5
Page 12 of 12
The contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused by blasting, whether permanent or
temporary structure and shall replace or repair the structures at his own cost.
10.6
Classification of soil
If soil of any classifications other than that specified in the Schedule of Rates is met during
excavation, the decision of the Engineer-in-charge as to the classification of soil, levels of the strata of
different classifications and their locations shall be binding.
In above case, the total quantity of Excavation shall be computed from the measurement of the area
excavated. The hard rock and soft rock shall be measured separately from the relevant stacks and each
shall be reduced by fifty percent for voids, and paid under the relevant items. The balance, that is the
total quantity of excavation minus the reduced (for voids) quantity of excavation for rocks shall be
paid as soil as per the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. However, the maximum payment shall be
limited to the volume of the area excavated, as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
Page 1218 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
evemetrshAtstrtvt)
IA Govt of India
Undertangi
No.
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
PAVEMENTS (UPTO WBM LAYER)
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 11
1-A.
ti chlY9-
Fa1:1411
(seri, At. 7i.
Hirictl
Tffib)
FOR ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
Ca r
7
24.06.13
RBT
RS
12.03.08
GAURAV
RKS
NK
VC
11.04.01
RC
PCS
MMK
MI
15.11.99
RB
PCS
MMK
AS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
DM
Approved by
Page 1219 of 1744
Page 1220 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
254-eg
1.4FR
cwanc,
1,10,137.1)
IA Govt d India Undedaking)
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 2 of 11
Abbreviations:
cm
Centimeter
IRC
IS
Indian Standard
mm
Millimeter
P.1
Plasticity Index
WBM
Water Bound Macadam

Convener:
Mr. R.B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. V S Chhhaya (Projects)
0 el
Ogar 1af54eg
Page 1221 of 1744
I 4117P1 t'ic,
nte Ag JERIn 11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA GoA of India Undertaking)
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS
4.0
FILLING WITH SAND/MURRUM
5.0
WATER BOUND MACADAM SUB BASE/BASE COURSE
6.0
CONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDERS OR BERMS
10
7.0
PAYMENT
10
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t.71 el
51g-ar tifleg
Page 1222 of 1744
IA Gov! 01 India Undertaking)
1.0
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 4 of 11
SCOPE
This specification covers the material and construction details for earthwork in filling for
embankments, filling with sand/murrum, WBM sub-base, WBM base course and shoulders for
roads and flexible pavements.
2.0 REFERENCES
2.1
2.2
Codes & Standards

IS: 460
Specifications for Test Sieves
IS 2430:
Methods for sampling of aggregates for concrete
IS: 2720
Methods of Test of Soil
IRC: 19
Standard Specification and Code of Practice for Water Bound

Macadam
IRC: 36
Recommended Practice for the Construction of Earth

Embankments for Road Works
Specifications
Specifications for Road and Bridge Works Ministry of Surface Transport (Road Wing)
NOTE: -Latest Edition of all Codes, Standards and Specifications shall be followed.
3.0 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS
3.1
Materials
Only those materials, considered suitable by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be employed for the
construction and that considered unsuitable shall be disposed off as directed by Engineer-inCharge at contractor's cost and no claim for compensation will be entertained. The Contractor
shall give the samples of earth, he proposes to use for filling along with the following
characteristics of the sample to Engineer-in-Charge prior to collection and use, for approval.
i)
Mechanical analysis or gain size analysis as per IS: 2720 Part IV.
ii)
Liquid limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
iii)
Plastic limit as per IS: 2720 Part V.
iv)
Moisture density relationship as per IS: 2720 Part VIII.
The material (soil) used for filling shall be free from boulders, lumps, tree roots, rubbish or
any organic deleterious matter.
Material (soil) having plasticity index less than 20 shall be used for filling purposes. Soil
having laboratory maximum dry density of less than 1.5gm/cc shall not be used. Care shall be
taken to see that unsuitable waste material is disposed off in such a manner that there is no
likelihood of its getting mixed with the materials proposed to be used for filling.
The work shall be so planned and e:ecuted such that the best available material (soil) is
reserved for the top portion of embankment.

_11
ENGINEERS
Ogar fdWg
Page 1223 of 1744
INDIA LIMITED
1.7271 eiem
c' 3,74,1)
3.2
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 5 of 11
Filling and Compaction
3.2.1 The area where filling is to be placed must be cleared of all loose material and virgin soil
must be exposed. Such exposed surface must be consolidated properly to obtain 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density of the soil as per IS: 2720 Part VIII. All soft patches must
be worked out to remove the soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and
compacted.
3.2.2 Payment for the removal of loose top soil as described in clause 3.2.1 above shall be
included in the item for earthwork in filling. No separate payment for consolidation of
exposed ground surface will be made. The rate quoted for the earth fill shall be inclusive of
the cost of clearing and stripping, consolidation, including watering, testing etc. of the
exposed ground.
3.2.3 Approved fill material shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 20 cm in loose
depth for embankment filling. Shoulder construction shall be so organised as to keep pace
with the construction of different layers of the pavement, which may require earth fill
thickness less than 20 cm. All clods, lumps etc. shall be broken before compaction.
3.2.4 In general the soil shall be spread uniformly over the entire width of embankment or
shoulder as the case may be. For large embankments, the spreading of soil shall be as
3.2.5 Successive layers of filling shall not be placed until the layer under construction has been
thoroughly compacted to satisfy the requirements laid down in this specification.
3.2.6 Prior to rolling, the moisture content of material shall be brought to within plus or minus
2% of the optimum moisture content as described in IS: 2720 - Part-VIII. The moisture
content shall preferably be on the wet side for potentially expensive soils.
3.2.7 After adjusting the moisture content as described in Clause 3.2.6, the layers shall be
thoroughly compacted by means of 8-10T rollers or equivalent vibratory rollers till 95% of
maximum laboratory dry density for embankment and 97% of maximum laboratory dry
density for sub-grade as per IS:2720 Part VIII is obtained.
3.2.8 Each layer shall be tested in field for density and accepted by Engineer-in-Charge subjected
to achieving the required density before laying the next layer. A minimum of one test per
500m2 area for each layer shall be conducted.
3.2.9 All type of rollers that should be employed for compaction shall be as per direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
3.2.10 If the layer fails to meet the required density, it shall be reworked or the material shall be
replaced and method of construction altered as directed by Engineer-in-Charge to obtain the
required density.
3.2.11 The filling shall be finished in conformity with alignment, levels, cross-sections and
dimensions as shown in the drawings.
3.2.12 Extra material shall be removed and disposed off as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
7-t-iraelei
dgar feifiteg
Page 1224 of 1744
iarrra eira(refIRJW1.(11
3.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govf of Ind. Undenalf(A9(
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 6 of 11
Tolerance
Embankment and shoulders for roads, units etc. shall be carried to within a tolerance of plus
minus 2.5 cm. from final lines but shall be to required grades and slopes.
4.0 FILLING WITH SAND/MURRUM

4.1
Sand having Plasticity Index 6 (Max) shall be used for filling. Sand for filling shall preferably
be locally available sand, clean and free from any chemical or other impurities. Murrum for
filling shall be clean and well graded. Sand/Murrum shall not contain any vegetation, organic,
clayey or other material and shall be obtained from a source approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.2
Murrum/Sand shall be spread in layers not exceeding 15 cm in loose thickness over the areas.
Each layer shall be uniform in density, quality of material and ' moisture content before
compaction. The moisture content shall be within two percent of the optimum moisture
content as per IS: 2720 Part VIII.
4.2.1
In case of pure sand, flooding with water is permissible.
4.3
Compaction of each layer shall be by mechanical means as per directions of Engineer-in-Charge. Only in accessible reaches shall be worked manually. Each layer shall be uniformly
compacted to obtain 85% relative density in case of sand and 95% of maximum laboratory dry
density in case of murram. If the material fails to achieve the required density, the layer shall
be reworked with necessary alteration in compaction, so that the required compaction is
obtained. A minimum of one test per 500 m2 area for each layer shall be conducted.
4.4
Subsequent layers shall be placed only after the layer already laid has been compacted to the
required density-and approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.5
The finished surface must be dressed to required grade and slope. Excess material must be
removed from compaction site, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 WATER BOUND MACADAM SUB BASE/BASE COURSE

The sub-base course shall consist of one or more layers, each of 100 mm compacted
thickness.
The base course shall consist of one or more layers, each of 75 mm compacted
thickness.
5.1
Materials
5.1.1
Stone Aggregate for WBM
5.1.1.1 The coarse aggregates shall be hard, crushed or broken stone metal from quarries approved by
Engineer-in-Charge, it shall be hard durable and free from flat elongated, soft and
disintegrated particles. It shall not have excess of dirt and other objectionable matter. The
quality, size and grading of the coarse aggregate shall be conforming to IRC: 19.
Copyright EIL Ail rights reserved
faziei
$'1g-Ii Rateg
Page 1225 of 1744
?iV,
firednosrawii
a)
b)
c)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 7 of 11
The grading of the coarse aggregates for the sub-base course shall be as below:
Size Range
Sieve
Designation
(IS: 460)
% by weight
passing the sieve
90mm to 45mm
Grade-I
125mm
90mm
63mm
45mm
22.4mm
100
90-100
25-60
0-15
0-5
The grading of the coarse aggregate for the base course shall be as below:
Size Range
Sieve
Designation
(IS: 460)
by weight
passing the sieve
63mm to 45mm
Grade-2
90mm
63mm
53mm
45mm
22.4mm
100
90-100
25-75
0-15
0-5
Physical requirement of coarse aggregates for sub-base course shall be as below:

i)
ii)
d)
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
Los Angles Abrasion Value

or
Aggregate Impact Value
60% (Maximum)
50% (Maximum)
Physical requirement of coarse aggregates for base course shall be as below:

i)
ii)
Los Angles Abrasion Value

or
Aggregate Impact value
40% (Maximum)
Flakiness index value
15% (Maximum)
50% (Maximum)
Samples of test shall be representative of the material to be used and collected as

per IS: 2430.
5.1.1.2 The aggregates shall be unloaded at the road side on firm, well drained ground, as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge. The various grades shall be placed separately and contamination by earth
and other extraneous matter shall be prevented effectively.
5.1.2
Screenings
5.1.2.1 Screening to fill voids in the course aggregates shall, as far as possible be the same material as
the course aggregates where it is decided by the Engineer-in-Charge to use other materials, the
same shall be predominantly non plastic materials such as kankar nodules gravel (other than
river-borne rounded aggregate) or murrum provided that the liquid limit and plasticity index
of such material is below 20 and 6 respectively and the fraction passing 75 micron sieve does
not exceed 10 percent.
Page 1226 of 1744
fg-ar 051-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
Grading Requirement of Screening

Sieve Designation
Size of
Screening
(IS: 460)
13.2mm
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 8 of 11
Percentage by Weight
Passing the Sieve
13.2mm
100
11.2mm
95-100
5.6mm
15-35
180micron
0-10
This grading, however, shall not be mandatory, in case either murrum or gravel is used as
screening.
For procurement of quantities for course aggregates and screenings required for 100mm and
75mm compacted thickness of WBM sub base course and base course shall be as per the
IRC- 19
5.1.3
Binding Material
Binding material, to prevent revelling of WBM, shall consist of fine grained material
possessing P.I value up to 6.
Application of binding material shall not be necessary where murrum or gravel is used as
screenings.
Binding material shall be obtained from quarries/ sources approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.2
Laying of WBM
5.2.1 Spreading Course Aggregates

5.2.1.1 The sub grade or sub-base to receive WBM course shall be prepared to the required grade and
camber. Before starting with WBM construction, side shoulders shall be constructed in
advance to a thickness corresponding to the compacted layer of the WBM course for lateral
confinement of aggregate. After shoulders are ready, their inside edge shall be trimmed
vertical to receive the aggregate. The practice of constructing WBM in a trench section
excavated on the embankment/formation must be avoided.
5.2.1.2 The coarse aggregate shall be spread uniformly and evenly on the prepared base in required
quantities from the stacks. The aggregate shall be spread to proper profiles by using
templates across the road about 6 m apart.
5.2.1.3 The surface of the aggregate spread shall be carefully, trued up and all high or low spots
remedied by removing or adding aggregate as may be required. The surface shall be
checked from time to time, during the spreading and rolling of the coarse aggregate to
ensure a finished surface without variation greater than 12 mm, when a 3 meter long straight
edge is laid parallel to centre line of the road.
5.2.1.4 The WBM layer shall be tested by depth blocks. No segregation on large or fine particle
shall be allowed and the coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no
pocket of fine materials.
5.2.1.5 The coarse aggregate shall not be spread in lengths more than 3 days average work in
advance of the rolling, spreading murrum and bonding of the preceding section.
5.2.2
Rolling Road Metal
5.2.2.1 Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregates, it shall be compacted to full
width by rolling with either three wheeled power roller of 8 to 10 tonne weight or equivalent
vibratory roller true to the line and camber as shown in the drawing. The course shall not
Page 1227 of 1744
rezlialfaaeg
,114,11 ,1313,70.4)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
fF GoN of India Undertaking)
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 9 of 11
be rolled when the sub-grade is soft or yielding or the rolling causes a wave like motion in
the base course or sub-grade. When rolling develops irregularities that exceed 12mm when
tested with a 3 meter straight edge, the irregular surface shall be loosened and then
aggregate added to or removed from it as required and the area rolled until it gives uniform
surface conforming to the desired cross-section and grade. The surface shall also be
checked transversely by template and any irregularities corrected as above. The use of
murrum to make up depression shall not be permitted.
5.2.2.2 The rolling shall begin from edges with roller running forward and backward until the edges
have been firmly compacted. The rolling shall then progress gradually from edges to the
centre parallel to the centre line of the road lapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel
track by one half width and shall continue until the entire area of the course has been rolled
by the rear wheel. On the super elevated portions of road, the rolling shall commence from
the lower edge and progress gradually towards the upper edge of the road.
5.2.2.3 Rolling shall be discontinued when aggregate are thoroughly keyed and creating of stone
wheel of roller is no longer visible partially compacted with sufficient void space in them to
permit application of screenings. Slight sprinkling of water may be done if required.
5.2.3
Application of Screening
5.2.3 After the coarse aggregate has been rolled as described in Clause 5.2.2, screenings shall be
applied uniformly and gradually over the surface to completely fill the interstices. Dry rolling
shall be continued while the screenings are being spread so that the jarring effect of the roll
will cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregates.
5.2.3.2 The screenings shall not be dumped in piles on coarse aggregate but shall be spread uniformly
in successive thin layers either by the spreading motion of hand shovels or by mechanic
spreaders.
5.2.3.3 The screenings shall be applied at a uniform and slow rate (in three or more applications so as
to ensure filling of all voids. Rolling and brooming shall continue with the spreading of the
screenings. Either mechanical brooms or hand brooms or both may be used. In no case shall
the screenings be applied so fast and thick as to form cakes or ridges on the surface
making the filling of voids difficult or preventing the direct bearings of the roller on the coarse
aggregates. The spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be performed on sections
which can be completed within one day's operation and shall continue until no more
screenings can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregates. Damp and wet screening
shall not be used under any circumstances.
5.2.3.4 The quantity of screenings used shall be such as to fill all voids in the water bound
macadam courses.
5.2.4
Sprinkling and Grouting
5.2.4.1 After spreading the screening, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept and
rolled. Hand brooms shall be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute
them evenly. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling shall be continued and additional
screenings applied where necessary until the coarse aggregates are well compacted and grout
of screenings and water form a wave ahead of wheels of the roller. Care shall be taken to see
that the base of the sub-grade does not get damaged due to the addition of the excessive
quantity of water during the construction.
ogar temeg
Page 1228 of 1744
1.112,1 217,
7,
7F JP05111
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A
Govt of India Undertalong)
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 10 of 11
5.2.5 Application of Binding Material

5.2.5.1 After the application of screenings as described above, the binding material shall be applied at
a uniform and slow rate (in two or more successive thin layers) so as to ensure filling of all
voids.
After each application of binding material, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water
and the resulting slurry swept in with hand brooms/ mechanical brooms or both so as to fill the
voids properly. This shall be followed by rolling with a 8-10 tone roller during which water
shall be applied to the wheels to wash down the binding material that may get stuck to them.
The spreading, rolling and brooming of binding material shall be performed on sections which
can be completed within one day's operation and shall continue until no more binding material
can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregates and until the slurry of the binding
material and water forms a wave ahead of the wheels of moving roller. Damp and wet binding
material shall not be used under any circumstances.
5.2.5.2 The quantity of binding material used shall be such as to fill all voids in the water bound
macadam.
5.2.6
Setting and drying

After final compaction of the course, the layer shall be allowed to dry overnight. Next
morning, hungry spots shall be filled with screenings or binding material as directed, lightly
sprinkled with water if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the
macadam has set.
5.2.7
Subsequent layers of WBM

Before laying the subsequent layers of WBM, the surface shall be scarified and reshaped to
the required camber and profile, and all ruts, depressions, pot holes etc. made good. The
second layer shall be laid after the surface preparation is approved by Engineer-in-Charge.
The specification and mode of measurement for subsequent layers of WBM will be similar
to that described before.
6.0 CONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDERS OR BERMS

6.1
After the WBM course is laid and compacted, the existing surface at side berms or shoulders
of the roadway must be scarified. Fresh quantity of approved earth must be spread in layers
for building up of berms upto the required level and scope.
The earth must be consolidated by at least three passes of an 8-10 tonne road roller. The edges
must be well compacted by suitable means to prevent edge slips and the work properly
trimmed and dressed.
7.0 PAYMENT
7.1
Filling in embankment, sub grade and shoulders
7.1.1 Payment for filling shall be made on cubic meter of volume calculated on the basis of cross
section plotted from the level of the ground surface prepared as described in clause 3.2
above and from where filling is to be carried out and the levels reached after filling and due
consolidation.
7.1.2 Rates for embankment, shoulder or fill formation shall include cost of breaking clods,
watering, consolidation, providing testing apparatus and testing the degree of consolidation,
providing and operating, including POL and operator charges of necessary road rollers and
other equipment, dressing and levelling of sides and top surfaces etc.
51g-ar tlf5rdg
Page 1229 of 1744
1.2M eiemirl?1,
1,0151,,i)
7.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
ROADS AND FLEXIBLE
No.
6-65-0018 Rev. 7
Page 11 of 11
Filling with sand / murrum
Payment for sand/murrum filling shall be made on the basis of volume of fill, after
placement and compaction. The rate quoted shall include cost of sand/murrum, royalties,
transportation, handling, compacting, watering, testing at various stages, dressing, removal
of surplus material and any other work incidental to this.
7.3
Water Bound Macadam Sub Base/ Base Course
Paying for laying WBM shall be made on square meter basis of each layer of WBM laid,
measured after consolidation and finishing. Rate shall include supply of all materials, royalty,
taxes, handling, transportation, spreading metal in layers, including screenings,
consolidation by power roller, binding with murrum or other approved binding material,
cost of carrying the material to work for all leads and lifts, providing and running roller
etc. complete as per specifications and satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
7.4
Subsequent layers of WBM

Payment for surface preparation, rectification of damaged portions of Proceeding layers of
water bound macadam and filling in ruts and depressions shall be made in M2 or M3 as %
per schedule of items. Payment for subsequent layer of WBM shall be made on M2 basis as
per Cl. No.5.2.6.
7.5
The payment clause indicated above are not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
ENGINEERS
Ifgzx idtaljtu
Page 1230 of 1744
INDIA LIMITED
ailZ7V AVOW (1513W771)
IA Govt Wide Undertaking)
FOR CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 10
-ftr-4-RT
(2141
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
tV"4--ALOK
RS
GG
SKC
VDS
PCS
RJAIN
MMK
RP
RPB
HVR
RCPC
Standards
Committee
GM
(Engg)
Standards
Bureau
23.05.11
20.01.05
15.7.98
31.3.82
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepare Checked
d by
by
Convenor
VK
DM
SKG
ASONI
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1231 of 1744
If ar fad&
g
Owen erenwa aa avidna)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout of India undettaiong)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
BS
British Standard
IRC
IS
Indian Standard
MS
Mild Steel
PCC
Plain Cement Concrete
RCC
WBM :
Water Bound Macadam

Convener:
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. D.C. Brahma
Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Raju Chutani
Og eir efinlanan.3n/anIO
tiOleg
Page 1232 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
In Go..4 d India Undertaking)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
GRADES, TYPE OF CONCRETE MIX, PROPORTIONING AND BATCHING
5.0
EQUIPMENTS
6.0
PREPARATION OF SUB GRADE
7.0
PREPARATION OF SUB BASE
8.0
FORMS
9.0
REINFORCEMENT, MIXING & PLACING OF CONCRETE
10.0
JOINTS
11.0
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
12.0
METHOD AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT
Itar(",,Mtafanaand,an
Eligtau
1.0
IA Govt of India Undenakingi
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 10
SCOPE
This specification establishes the requirements of material, laying and finishing of concrete
pavements.
2.0
REFERENCE CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS

IS: 456
Plain and Reinforced Concrete-Code of Practice.
IS: 1834
Specification for Hot Applied Sealing Compounds for Joints in

Concrete.
IS: 1838, Part-1
Specification for Preformed Fillers for Expansion Joints in Pavements

and Structures (Non Extruding and Resilient Type): Part 1 Bitumen
Impregnated Fibre.
IS: 2720, Part-8
Method of Test for Soils-Part 8: Determination of Water Content-Dry

Density Relation Using Heavy Compaction.
IS: 9214
Method of Determination of Modulus of Sub-grade Reaction (k

value) of Soils in the Field.
6-65-0018
Standard Specification for Roads and Flexible Pavement (Upto WBM

Layer)
6-68-0002
Technical Specification - Civil & Structural Works - Materials.
6-68-0004
Technical Specification - Civil & Structural Works Plain and

Reinforced Cement Concrete.
7-65-0404
RCC Pavement Details
In case of conflict between the Clauses mentioned in this Specification and those in above
Codes and Specifications, this Specification shall govern.
3.0
3.1
MATERIALS
Material for Cement Concrete viz. Cement, Sand, Coarse and Fine aggregate and water,
Reinforcements Bars, Embedment, Inserts and Admixture etc. shall be as described in EIL
Specification no. 6-68-0002.
3.2
Material for WBM shall be as described in ELL Specification no. 6-65-0018.
4.0
GRADES, TYPE OF CONCRETE MIX, PROPORTIONING AND BATCHING
4.1
Page 1233 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
The grades of concrete shall be as per standard.
4.2
Specification for Concrete mix, Mix Proportioning and Batching shall be as described in EIL
Specification no. 6-68-0004 and IS: 456.
5.0
EQUIPMENTS
All equipments like sub grade templates, hand tempers, vibrating screens, internal vibrators,
longitudinal floats, bridges, push brooms, straight edges, edging tools etc. shall be on the
worksite in first class working condition and shall have been inspected by the Engineer-inCharge before paving operations are permitted to start. Throughout the construction period,
the contractor shall maintain adequate equipment in first class working conditions to ensure
the proper execution of the work.
lafaleg W INDIAIndiaLIMITED
Oges
iafferr zietoreCOIJOCISal)
Undertaking)
(A Govt al
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 10
6.0
PREPARATION OF SUB GRADE
6.1
The area where concrete is to be placed must be cleared of all loose material and virgin soil
must be exposed. Such exposed surface must be consolidated properly to obtain 95% of
Maximum Laboratory Dry Density of the soil. All soft patches must be worked out to remove
the soft soil and selected approved earth must be filled back and compacted.
6.2
For areas, where pavement is to be laid on cutting / natural grade level, Sub grade shall be
thoroughly compacted to 95% of laboratory dry density as per IS: 2720 Part VIII. For filled
up areas, top 450 mm of the soil shall be compacted to 95% of laboratory dry density below
pavement in layers of 150 mm.
6.3
The difference between the sub grade levels of Type-I, Type-II and Type-III Concrete
pavements (due to difference in thickness of Type-I, Type-II and Type-III pavements) shall be
achieved by stripping the grade level and not by filling. Hence, site-grading level below
pavement shall be kept up to sub grade level of Type-II or Type-III as the case may be, to
avoid filling of smaller thickness at later stage.
6.4
The sub grade or sub base for laying of the concrete pavement shall comply with the following
requirements:
6.4.1
No soft spots shall be present in the sub grade.
6.4.2
The uniformly compacted sub grade or base course shall extend at least 300mm on either side
of the area to be concreted.
6.4.3
The sub grade shall be properly drained.
6.4.4
The minimum modules of sub grade in wet condition, reaction obtained with a Plate Bearing
Test as per IS: 9214, shall be 6.0 Kg/cm2/cm.
6.4.5
Sub grade shall be prepared to the lines and grades to match with the slope of pavement as
shown on the drawings.
7.0
PREPARATION OF SUB BASE
7.1
WBM under Type-1 Pavement (Ref. EIL Standard Drawing No. 7-65-0404)
WBM Base Coarse shall consist of 2 layers of WBM Gr.-II, each of 75mm compacted
thickness, as per IRC-19 and described in EIL Specification no. 6-65-0018.
7.2
PCC 1:5:10 under Type-II and Type-III Pavement (Ref. EIL Standard Drg. No. 7-65-0404).
73
PCC 1:5:10 in sub base layer shall be as described in EIL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
7.4
Sub Base layer shall be prepared to the lines and grades to match with the slope of pavement
as shown on the drawings.
7.5
No concrete shall be placed around manholes or other structures until they have been brought
to required grade and alignment. All sides of manholes / pits etc. shall have same elevation.
7.6
The sub base layer shall be in moist condition at the time of concrete placement.
Page 1234 of 1744
Page 1235 of 1744
2154eg
141,271AMIVLBIJ92,01)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 10
8.0
FORMS
8.1
All side Forms shall be of mild steel unless use of wooden sections is specially permitted. The
steel forms shall be of MS channel sections and their depth shall be equal to thickness of the
pavement. The sections shall have a length of at least 3.0m except on curves, where shorter
sections may be used. These forms should be provided with ample bracing and supports to
prevent the springing of the forms under the concrete pressure or thrust of machinery
operating nearby.
8.2
The forms should be in a sufficient number and they should not be removed until concrete has
hardened sufficiently.
8.3
In case wooden forms are permitted, these shall have minimum base width of 100 mm for
150mm or lesser thick slabs and 150mm for 200mm thick slabs.
9.0
REINFORCEMENT, MIXING & PLACING OF CONCRETE
9.1
Laying of Reinforcement
All reinforcement work shall confirm to IS: 456 and as described in EIL Specification no.
6-68-0004.
9.2
Mixing
Mixing shall be as described in EIL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
9.3
Placing
9.3.1
The place where concrete is to be poured should be clean and free from all loose dirt, wooden
pieces, dust, standing water etc.
9.3.2
Walking on reinforcement layers is not permissible. Walkways of wooden planks or similar

material can be placed with removable supports and should be independent of the
reinforcement. The reinforcement position should not be disturbed nor should it sag during
carriage and placement of concrete.
9.3.3
Placing and vibration should not take totally more than 20 minutes from time of mixing.
Method of placing should be got approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Segregation during
carriage and placement should be avoided. If during carriage concrete segregates, it should be
remixed before placement.
9.3.4
Concrete should not be dropped from a height of over 1.5m.
9.3.5
To ensure bond and water tightness between old concrete surface and fresh concrete to be
placed, the surface should be cleaned and roughened by "initial green cut" by wire brushing or
chipping. The initial green may be done by wire brush after 6 hours of placing concrete in
order to facilitate the work. Chipping can be done only after 48 hours. A layer of cement
slurry with 1:1 mix (1 cement: 1 sand) should be poured to obtain a uniform coating on old
concrete. Immediately thereafter, the fresh concrete should be poured.
9.3.6
Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be deposited on the
sub-grade in a single operation to the required depth and width of the pavement. Spreading
shall be as uniform as possible to avoid re-handling of concrete. Where however, a certain
amount of redistribution is necessary, it shall be done with shovels and not with rakes.
Concrete shall be vibrated with internal vibrators. Concrete shall be placed continuously until
completion of the part of the work between construction joints or as directed by Engineer-in-
Page 1236 of 1744
Of51-ze
Ogeir
Mieg
WWI FIRIA0M3W1171)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot india Undertaking)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 10
Charge continuously until completion of the part of the work between construction joints or as
9.3.7
Placing in inclement weather

All precautions shall be taken for concreting in extreme weather in accordance with the
relevant clauses of IS: 456. Due protection shall be provided to prevent cement being blown
away while proportioning and mixing during windy weather. No concreting shall be carried
out in continuous heavy rains. Necessary arrangements to cover the freshly poured concrete
shall be provided, to protect it from the direct rays of the sun and from drying winds.
9.3.8
All concreting placement should be co-coordinated with placement of conduits, inserts,

embedded parts etc. executed either by same agency or separately.
9.3.9
Concrete shall be laid in panels as shown in the standard drawing or as directed by Engineerin-Charge.
9.4
Compaction & Finishing
9.4.1
Compaction
The surface of the pavement shall be compacted either by means of power driven finish
machine or a vibrating hand screed. For areas where width of the pavement is very small,
hand consolidation and finishing shall be done as follows:
9.4.1.1 Concrete as soon as placed, shall be struck off uniformly and screeted to the crown and crosssection shown on the plans and to such level above the base that when compacted and
finished, the pavement shall conform to the grade and cross-section indicated by the plans.
The entire surface shall then be tamped until a close-knit dense surface is obtained.
9.4.1.2 The Tamper shall rest on the side forms and shall be drawn ahead with a swing motion in
combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with lateral shifts The aim of this
operation is compaction and screeding to the approximate level required. Subsequent tamping
should advance 75 mm at a time in the direction in which the work is proceeding and in final
stages, the tamping should be closer, about 12 mm at a time, until a level and dense surface is
obtained.
9.4.1.3 If so directed by Engineer-in-charge, hand operated vibrating tamper consisting of normal type
of hand tamper attached to a pneumatic or electric vibrating unit shall be used for compaction.
9.4.1.4 Segregated particles of coarse aggregate, which collect in front of the tamper, shall be thrown
outside the forms or thoroughly mixed by hand with a mass of concrete already on the base.
9.4.1.5 Compaction by tamping shall be carried on till the mortar in the mix just works up to the
surface. The surface shall be examined after compaction correction. If needed correction
shall be made by adding or removing concrete, followed by further compaction and finishing.
9.4.2
Floating
As soon as practicable, after concrete has been struck off and compacted, it shall be further
smoothened and compacted by means of a longitudinal float, 1200 mm long and 75 mm wide,
operated from a foot bridge.
0 el
ligz1T 'Meg
eietrw
10.271
9.4.3
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Inda Undotalong)
161.3,1011)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 8 of 10
Straight Edging
After floating is completed and excess water removed but while concrete is still plastic, the
slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a straight edge and rectified, if necessary.
9.4.4
Brooming
After belting and as soon as surplus water has risen to the surface, the pavement shall be given
a broom finish to produce corrugations of uniform appearance of not more than 1/16 inch in
depth.
9.4.5
Edging
Before the concrete has its initial set, the edges shall be carefully finished with an edger of the
radius required and pavement edge shall be left smooth and true to line.
9.5
Curing
Curing of concrete shall be as described in EL Specification no. 6-68-0004.
10.0
JOINTS
10.1
Wherever called for on the drawings, expansion joints, construction joints and sealing joints
shall be provided as per details indicated in the drawing and as directed by Engineer-inCharge.
10.2
Sealing of Joints
10.2.1 After the curing, the temporary seal or other intruded materials of all expansion and
contraction joints shall be removed completely and the slots filled with approved joint sealing
compound as conforming to IS: 1834, Type B. The filler material for Expansion and Sealing
joints shall be preformed fillers of Bitumen Impregnated Fiber, conforming to IS: 1838, Part-I.
10.2.2 The edges of the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed with a thin bituminous paint,
which shall be allowed to dry before the sealing compound is applied.
10.2.3 The primer shall be applied with a brush. The compositjon of primer shall be as follows:
Page 1237 of 1744
Name of Material
3.
Percent by weight
200-Penetration Bitumen
Blended
66
Light creosote oil

Hot/ Cold
14
Solvent Naphtha
20
The bitumen shall be melted and fluxed with oil. When cold, solvent Naphtha shall be added.
BITUMINOUS emulsion shall not be used as primers. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
sealing compound is not heated above 200C and the temperature does not exceed 180C for
long periods.
Ogex tal
eg
Page 1238 of 1744
I AIM FIEWAV 031.37}7171)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind. Undertaking)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 9 of 10
10.2.4 Sealing compound shall be poured into the joint opening in such a manner that the material
will not be spilled on the exposed surface of the concrete. When required to prevent pick up
under traffic, the exposed surface of the sealing compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime.
11.0
OPENING TO TRAFFIC
11.1
Traffic shall not be allowed for a period of 28 days after laying of concrete in pavement.
11.2
Before opening the pavement to traffic, all joints shall be filled and trimmed or topped out as
required.
11.3
Sampling, testing and acceptance of concrete work shall be according to IS: 456-2000
12.0
METHOD AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT
12.1
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
12.1.1 Payment for plane and reinforced concrete in pavements shall be made on cubic metre basis of
the volume of the actual finished work done and shall be inclusive of cost of providing Forms,
Pockets, Chamfers, Fillets, Grooves, Cement wash, Curing by normal moist curing or using
curing compound etc. as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The rates shall be deemed to include
complete cost of getting the respective mix designs approved, making and testing concrete
cubes and carrying out other tests including tests of various ingredients, as per specifications
and as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
12.1.2 No separate payment shall be made for any admixture used by the contractor for accelerating
or retarding the strength of concrete or for achieving specified workability / water tightness.
The rate quoted shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs related to any such additive /
admixture.
12.1.3 The rate shall however be exclusive of reinforcement, metal inserts, pipe sleeves and any filler
material in expansion / sealing joints.
12.1.4 Where the strength of concrete mix (nominal or design mix) as indicated by tests, lies in
between the strengths of two grades given in Table-1 of EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004 and
it is accepted by owner/Engineer-in-charge, such concrete shall be classified as a grade
belonging to the lower of the two grades between which it lies. In case the cube strength
shows higher results than those specified for the particular grade of the concrete, it shall not be
placed in the higher grade nor shall the Contractor be entitled for any extra payment on such
account. The concrete giving lower strength than specified may be accepted at reduced rates
after satisfying the safety of the structure by checking it with tests as specified or rejected
entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in Charge. The rejected concrete shall be dismantled
at no extra cost to the owner and no payment or extension of time shall be granted for the
concrete so rejected and the formwork and reinforcement used for the same. Cost of any
material supplied by the Owner free of cost shall be recovered from the contractor at double
the prevailing market rate. In case the concrete of lower strength can be improved by carrying
out some strengthening measures entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, then
Contractor shall carry out the said measures including all related tests at his own cost. If the
Contractor is able to make up the strength to the required grade by such improvement
measures to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, payment shall be made for the grade
achieved. However, if the strength of concrete is not made up to the strength of required grade,
payment shall be made only for the lower strength if such concrete is accepted by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
OPTie?
ENGINEERS
eir fatae INDIA LIMITED
g
(NR71 eieWle0A.3, 11:1174)
FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
No.
6-65-0019 Rev. 3
Page 10 of 10
12.1.5 Deductions for openings, pockets etc. shall be as specified in relevant Indian Standard Codes.
12.2
Reinforcement
12.2.1 Payment for plain round mild steel reinforcement bars and high strength deformed steel bars
shall be on the basis of weight of bare steel, irrespective of any coating applied, in metric tons.
The weight of the bar shall be derived from the sizes and corresponding unit weights given in
hand book of Bureau of Indian Standards. Standard hook length, chairs, spacer bars and
authorised laps only shall be included in the weight calculated. Binding wire shall not be
weighed nor otherwise measured. Measurement for weight shall not include cutting allowance
etc.
12.2.2 Rate quoted for reinforcement shall include cost of supplying, decoiling, straightening,
cleaning, cutting, bending, placing, binding, welding if required, and providing necessary
cover blocks of concrete.
12.3
Joints
Payment for expansion joints, construction joints and sealing joints shall be made on running
metre basis. The rate shall include cleaning of joints, filler material and sealing with approved
compound, all material, labour etc. complete, as per drawing.
Page 1239 of 1744
Ofazte
0?eir fat5leg
Page 1240 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
I WTI eliRDIV OA 3 11.1)
IA Govt 04 Oda Undertatongt
No.

PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 5
aTTT 1111
"arffzfr
auf 317 Tft wrrktrT
1-1111, q
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
/0/?`"//
3
23.05.11 REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
AS
RK
16.02.06
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
SKC
NK
15.2.98
31.3.82
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RC
Prepare
d by
RPB
Checked
by
DM
VDS
VJN
MMK
A SONI
HVR
Standards
GM
Committee (Engg)
Convenor
AK
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
og eir ofiteg w INDIA
(A Gait of India Undedabong)
ew.R,ou9.5.0
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ERC
Electrical Road Crossings
IRC
Instrumentation Road Crossings

Indian Standard
IS
PVC
Poly Vinyl Chloride
RCC

Convener:
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. D.C. Brahma
Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Raju Chutani
Mr. M. P. (Projects)
Page 1241 of 1744
Page 1242 of 1744
1511P-4eq
felf5rdg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt d India Undertaking)
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 MATERIALS
4.0 TRANSPORTATION AND STACKING
5.0 LOWERING AND LAYING OF RCC PIPES
6.0 LOWERING AND LAYING OF PVC PIPES
lajtheT
eir Rift
MIOT eliTIWOA3^.1)
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE
The scope of this specification covers RCC pipe culverts and ERC/ IRC crossings with RCC or PVC
pipes.
2.0
CODES & STANDARDS

IS: 458
Precast Concrete Pipes (with and without reinforcement)
IS: 783
Code of practice for laying of RCC pipes
IS: 4985
Unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies
NOTE:-
3.0
MATERIALS
3.1
All pipes must be new and perfectly sound, free from cracks, cylindrically straight and of standard
nominal diameter and length, with even texture. PVC Pipes shall be Class-I as per IS: 4985.
For pipe culverts, class of RCC pipe shall be NP3 / NP4 or as mentioned in the drawings.
3.2
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test certificate for acceptance of RCC/PVC pipes.
3.3
Spun yam for pipe joints shall be of best quality. It shall be free from dust etc.
4.0
TRANSPORTATION AND STACKING
4.1
The transportation of materials to the worksite and stacking shall be done in a manner to cause
minimum inconvenience to the traffic and other construction work.
4.2
The pipe shall be protected during handling against impact, shocks and free fall to avoid cracks and
damage.
4.3
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and security of materials transported and
stacked in the field.
4.4
Earthwork
Page 1243 of 1744
Refer standard specification No.6-68-0003 for earthwork.

5.0
LOWERING AND LAYING OF RCC PIPES
5.1
General
The laying and jointing of RCC pipes shall confirm to IS: 783.
The trench shall be checked for proper level, grade and alignment before lowering the pipes.
15iNTEq ENGINEERS
Ogeir 2151eu
5.2
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt. of India Undeftakong)
FOR PIPE CULVERTS
& ERC/ IRC CROSSING
No.
6-65-0021 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 5
Lowering
The RCC pipe shall be lowered cautiously to prevent disturbance to the bed and sides of the trench.
The heavy RCC pipes shall be lowered by means of proper tripods, chain pulley blocks or as directed
by Engineer-in-charge. Great care should be taken to prevent sand etc. from entering the pipes.
5.3
Laying
5.3.1
Laying of RCC pipes shall proceed up grade of slopes.
5.3.2
The error of grade shall not be rectified by packing up earth underneath the pipe. If required, concrete
shall be used for packing.
5.3.3
The end of RCC pipes shall be kept closed to keep dirt, mud and foreign materials out. Adequate
provision shall be made to prevent floating of pipes in the event of flooding of trenches.
The body of RCC pipe, for its entire length, shall rest on an even bed in the trench.
5.4
Jointing of RCC pipes.
5.4.1
Cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement: 2 sand) shall be slightly moistened and must on no account be soft or
sloppy and shall be carefully inserted by hand into the joint. The mortar shall than be punched and
caulked into the joint and more cement mortar added until the space of the joint has been filled
completely with tightly caulked mortar.
5.4.2
Any surplus mortar projecting inside the joint is to be removed and guarded against any damage. Sack
or gunny bags shall be drawn past each joint after completion.
5.5
Curing.
The Cement mortar joints in RCC pipes shall be cured at least for seven days.
5.6
Testing.
All joints in culvert pipelines shall be tested to a head of 1.5 m of water above the top of the highest
pipe, if required, by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.7
Payment
Payment shall be made on running meter basis, which includes supplying, transporting, lowering,
laying, jointing and curing, concreting around RCC pipes etc., all complete.
6.0
LOWERING AND LAYING OF PVC PIPES
6.1
Lowering and laying of PVC pipes shall be done as per IS: 4985. The jointing of the pipes shall be
done by expanding one end after heating and using solvent cement.
6.2
Payment
Page 1244 of 1744
Payment shall be made on running meter basis of PVC pipes, which includes supplying, transporting,
lowering, laying and jointing, concreting around PVC pipes etc., all complete.
Page 1245 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
31
Govt 01 lod. UndoOok,o9)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 1 of 15
-1
wrzi
ffrr-
MATERIALS
21.08.14
UPDATED &REISSUED
19.06.09
REAFFIRMED & REISSUED
AS
18.02.00
UPDATED & REISSUED
DPN
JUNE'94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Ol/
PKm
S.CHANDA
SCH
VINAY
KUMAR
N. DUARI
SKP
SC JAIN
A. SONI
SKP
GPL
A. SONI
Standards
Comm ittee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$g-a-
lA Govt ol India Undertalong)
larre,r eteentaarn.rosnet
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
Page 1246 of 1744
API
ASTM :
BIS
BS
British Standard
DIN
Deutsches Institut' fr Normung
IS
Indian Standards
PCC
Plain Cement Concrete
PVC
Poly Vinyl Chloride
RCC
Structural Standards
Committee
Convenor :
Mr. P.K. Mittal
Members :
Mr. S. Debnath (Geotech)

Mr. P.J. Singh
Mr. Samir Das (Architecture)
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Construction)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
_11
I
c-fro,f,frwro,
IA Govl of Intha Unclerfaking)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1 .0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
WATER
4.0
AGGREGATE
5.0
SAND
6.0
CEMENT
7.0
STEEL
8.0
BRICK
11
9.0
STONE
12
10.0
ADMIXTURES
12
1 1.0
WATER BARS (WATER STOPS)
14
12.0
BITUMEN/BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
14
13.0
PVC PIPES
15
14.0
WOOD/TIMBER
15
15.0
EPDXY COMPOUNDS
15
16.0
PAINT
15
17.0
ANTITERMITE COMPOUNDS
15
18.0
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANTS
15
Page 1247 of 1744
$fgZEI 02-'
dg
awn 2v-,Fros,covI,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
IA Govt ot Intha Undenakog)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 4 of 15
1.0 SCOPE
1.1
This specification establishes and defines the requirements of various materials to be used in
Civil and Structural works.
1.2
Whenever any reference to BIS Codes is made, the same shall be taken as the latest revision
(with all amendments issued thereto) as on the date of submission of the bid.
1.3
Apart from the BIS Codes mentioned in particular in the various clauses of this specification,
all other relevant codes related to specific job under consideration regarding quality, tests,
testing and/ or inspection procedures shall be applicable. Reference to some of the Codes in
the various clauses of this specification does not limit or restrict the scope of applicability of
other referred or relevant codes.
1.4
In case of any variation/contradiction between the provision of BIS Codes and this
specification, the provision given in this specification shall be followed.
1.5
All materials shall be of standard quality and shall be procured from renowned sources/
manufacturers approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor, to get all materials/ manufacturers approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to
procurement and placement of order.
1.6
Whenever called for by the Engineer-in-Charge all tests of the materials as specified by the
relevant BIS Codes shall be carried out by the Contractor in an approved laboratory and test
reports duly authenticated by the laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge for
his approval. If so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge, tests shall be conducted in the presence
of the Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized nominee.
1.7
Quality and acceptability of materials not covered under this specification shall be governed
by the relevant BIS Codes. In case BIS code is not available for the particular material, other
codes e.g. BS or DIN or API/ ASTM shall be considered. The decision of Engineer-in-Charge,
in this regard, shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
1.8
Whenever asked for, the Contractor shall submit representative samples of materials to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his inspection and approval. Approval of any sample does not
necessarily exempt the Contractor from submitting necessary test reports for the approved
material, as per the specification/relevant BIS Codes.
1.9
The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test reports on quality and suitability of any
material procured from them and their recommendation on storage, application, workmanship
etc. for the intended use. Submission of manufacturer's test reports does not restrict the
Engineer-in-Charge from asking fresh test results from an approved laboratory of the actual
material supplied from an approved manufacturer/ source at any stage of execution of work.
1.10
All costs relating to or arising out of carrying out the tests and submission of test reports and
or samples to the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval during the entire tenure of the work
shall be borne by the contractor and included in the quoted rates.
1.11
Materials for approval shall be separately stored and marked, as directed by the Engineer-inCharge and shall not be used in the works till these are approved.
1.12
All rejected materials shall be immediately removed from the site by the Contractor at his own
cost.
Page 1248 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
411.271 ,r2L/R? ATI JACISAD
A Govt ot Indta
Undenaxngi
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 5 of 15
2.0 REFERENCES
As mentioned in the respective clauses.
3.0 WATER
3.1
Water used in construction for all civil & structural works shall be clean and free from
injurious amount of oil, acids, alkalies, organic matters or other harmful substances which
may be deleterious to concrete, masonry or steel. The pH value of water sample shall be not
lens than 6. Potable water shall be considered satisfactory. Underground water can also be
used with the prior approval of Engineer-in-Charge, if it meets all the requirements of IS:456.
3.2
Tests on water samples shall be carried out in accordance with IS:3025 and they shall fulfill
all the guidelines and requirements given in IS:456.
3.3
The Engineer-in-Charge may require the Contractor to prove, that the concrete prepared with
water, proposed to be used, shall have average 28 days compressive strength not lower than
90% of the strength of concrete prepared with distilled water.
3.4
The Engineer-in-Charge may require the Contractor to get the water tested from an approved
laboratory before starting the construction work and in case the water contains any oil/ organic
matter or an excess of acid, alkalies or any injurious amount of salts etc., beyond the
permissible maximum limits given in IS:456, the Engineer-in-Charge may refuse to permit its
use. In case the water is supplied by the owner, contractor shall get himself satisfied regarding
its quality before using the same in his works at his own expense. In case there is any change
in source of water, water samples shall be tested again to meet the specified requirements.
3.5
Water shall be stored in tin barrels, steel tanks or water-tight reservoirs made with bricks /
stone or reinforced concrete. Brick/ stone masonry reservoirs shall have RCC Base slab and
shall be plastered inside, with 1 part of cement and 4 parts of sand and finished with neat
cement punning. These reservoirs shall be of sufficient capacity to meet the water
requirement, at any stage of construction.
3.6
Water for curing shall be of the same quality as used for concreting and masonry works. Sea
water shall not be used for preparation of cement mortar, concrete as well as for curing of
plain/reinforced concrete and masonry works. Sea water shall not be used for hydrotesting and
checking the leakage of liquid retaining structures also.
4.0 AGGREGATE
4.1
General
4.1.1 Coarse and fine aggregates for Civil and Structural Works shall conform in all respects to
IS:383 (Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete).
Aggregates shall be obtained from an approved source known to produce the same
satisfactorily. Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring (crushed or uncrushed) stones,
gravel and sand or a combination thereof. These shall be chemically inert, hard, strong, dense
durable, clean and free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amount of alkalies, vegetable
matter and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, shale, sea
shells etc.
4.1.2 Source and type of aggregates shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to
procurement. Change in source and type of aggregates, at later stage, shall not be generally
permitted; but under specific circumstances, Engineer-in-Charge can allow a change in source
and type of aggregate. Contractor shall produce necessary test certificates from approved
laboratories regarding the quality and suitability of the proposed aggregates and submit fresh
Page 1249 of 1744
$'fg'-ar
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Ind. UnderidMirg)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 6 of 15
mix design for approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any such change, if permitted by the
Engineer-in-Charge, shall be without any time and cost implication to the owner.
4.1.3 Aggregates which may chemically react with alkalies of cement or might cause corrosion of
the reinforcement, shall not be used. If so desired by the Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor
shall carry out alkali reactivity tests and submit the results to him for approval.
4.1.4 The maximum quantities of deleterious materials in the aggregates as determined in
accordance with IS:2386 - Part II (Methods of Test for aggregates for concrete), shall not
exceed the limits defined in IS: 383. No special test is required to prove the absence of such
deleterious matters if the aggregates are from a known source with satisfactory prior data on
the properties of concrete made with them. In case of newly developed quarry sites, the
contractor shall submit necessary test results as per IS:383 and IS:2386 to the Engineer-inCharge prior to his acceptance and approval. The method of Sampling shall be in accordance
with the requirements given in IS:2430.
4.1.5 Coarse and fine aggregates shall be batched separately. All-in-aggregate shall be used only
where specifically permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Separate sieve analysis and grading curves shall be prepared by the Contractor for any/ all
batches of coarse and fine aggregates, and submitted to the Engineer-in- Charge, whenever
asked for, to ensure conformity with those submitted along with the mix design.
4.1.6 Whenever required by Engineer-in-Charge, the aggregates (coarse/ fine) shall be washed and/
or sieved by the contractor before use in the works to obtain clean and graded aggregate at no
extra cost to the owner.
4.1.7 Aggregates not in conformity with the specifications shall be rejected and the Contractor shall
immediately remove them from the site of work.
4.2
Coarse Aggregates
4.2.1 Coarse aggregates are the aggregates, which are retained on 4.75 mm BIS Sieve. It shall have
a specific gravity not less than 2.6 (saturated surface dry basis).
4.2.2 These may be obtained from crushed or uncrushed gravel or stone as per clause 3.1 and may
be supplied as single sized or graded. The grading of the aggregates shall be as per IS:383 or
as required by the mix design, to obtain densest possible concrete. For this purpose, the
contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge at least three sets of mix design and test
results, each with different gradings of coarse aggregates, proposed to be used. The
Engineer-in-Charge may allow "All-in-aggregates" to be used provided they satisfy the
requirements of IS:383.
4.3
Fine Aggregates
4.3.1 Fine aggregates are the aggregates which pass through 4.75 mm BIS sieve but not more than
ten percent (10%) pass through 150 micron BIS sieve. These shall comply with the
requirements of grading zones I, II and III of IS:383. Fine aggregates conforming to grade
zone IV shall not be used for reinforced concrete works.
4.3.2 Fine aggregates shall consist of material resulting from natural disintegration of rock and
which has been deposited by streams or glacial agencies, or crushed stone sand or gravel sand.
Sand from sea shores, creeks or river banks affected by tides, shall not be used for filling or
concrete works.
Page 1250 of 1744
$gar fa2d
- g
1.11,1 etvm ,TA
4.4
ENGINEERS
IA Govt of Ind. UndettnO,ft9)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 7 of 15

The Contractor shall carry out all tests including mix designs of concrete, at his own expense,
at the start of work as well as during any stage of construction as required by the
Engineer-in-Charge. Test shall be carried out in accordance with IS:516 - Methods of test for
strength of concrete and IS:2386 - Methods of test for aggregates for concrete. Testing shall be
carried out from laboratories approved by the Engineer- in-Charge. The method of sampling
shall be in accordance with the requirements given in IS: 2430.
4.5
Storage of Aggregates
4.5.1
Storage of all types of aggregates at site of work shall be at contractor's expense and risk and
shall be stored as specified in IS:4082. Aggregates shall in no case be stored near to the
excavated earth or directly over ground surface.
4.5.2 The Contractor shall maintain sufficient quantities of aggregates, near to the place of work,
required for the continuity of the work. Each type and grade of aggregate shall be stored
separately on hard, farm surface having adequate slope for drainage of water.
4.5.3 Aggregates delivered at site in wet condition or becoming wet due to rain or any other means,
shall not be used for atleast 24 hours. The Contractor shall obtain prior approval of the
Engineer-in-charge for the use of such aggregates and shall adjust the water content in
accordance with IS:2386 to achieve the desired mix. In the absence of test results, and to allow
variation in mass of aggregates and water content on account of moisture content, the
Contractor can make suitable adjustment in the masses as per IS:456, for preparation of
nominal mix concrete only.
5.0 SAND
5.1
Sand for Masonry Mortars
5.1.1 The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand or a
combination of any of these. The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent
coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more
than specified in IS:2116.
5.1.2 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or
other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells
in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of
the mortar.
5.1.3 Unless found satisfactory as a result of further tests as may be specified by the Engineer-inCharge, or unless evidence of such performance is offered which is satisfactory to him, the
maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand, when tested
in accordance with IS:2386, shall not be more than 5% by mass in natural sand, or crushed
gravel sand or crushed stone sand. For organic impurities, when determined in accordance
with IS:2386, colour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by the standard solution
specified in IS:2386.
5.1.4
Grading of Sand
The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as specified
below:
Page 1251 of 1744
ENGINEERS
$1g-ar 02-eg canINDIA LIMITED
aiwn rttow,
IA Govt ot loOto UndettOMog)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 8 of 15
GRADING OF SAND FOR USE IN MASONRY MORTARS

IS SIEVE DESIGNATION
IS: 460 (PART I)
PERCENTAGE
PASSING BY MASS
REF. TO
METHOD OF
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
100
90 to 100
70 to 100
40 to 100
5 to 70
0 to 15
IS:2386 (Part I)
In case of a sand whose grading falls outside the specified limits due to excess or deficiency of
coarse or fine particles, this shall be processed to comply with the standard by screening
through a suitably sized sieve and/or blending with required quantities of suitable sizes of
natural sand particles or crushed stone screenings which are by themselves unsuitable. Based
on test results and in the light of practical experience with the use of local materials, deviation
in grading of sand may be considered by the Engineer-in-Charge. The various sizes of
particles of which the sand is composed shall be uniformly distributed throughout the mass.
5.1.5

The method of sampling shall be in accordance with IS:2430. The amount of material required
for each test shall be as specified in relevant parts of IS:2386. Any test which the engineer-incharge may require in connection with this, shall be carried out in accordance with the
relevant parts of IS:2386.
If further confirmation as to the satisfactory nature of the material is required, compressive test
on cement mortar cubes (1:6) may be made in accordance with IS:2250 using the supplied
material in place of standard sand and the strength value so obtained shall be compared with
that of another mortar made with a sand of acceptable and comparable quality.
5.2
Sand for Filling

Sand for filling shall meet the requirements of IS:383 and shall be natural sand, hard, strong,
free from any organic and deleterious materials. Any sand proposed for filling, shall be used
only after it is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Sand obtained from sea shores, creeks or
river banks affected by tides, shall not be used for filling. Fine aggregates suitable for
concreting works shall be suitable for filling also. No sand below grading zone-III as per
IS:383 shall be allowed for filling.
6.0 CEMENT
Cement to be used for civil and structural works shall be one of the following. Specific
requirement for the type of cement to be used shall be as shown in the drawings or as specified
in the contract or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Specification for 33 grade ordinary portland cement

Specification for portland slag cement
Specification for Portland pozzolana cement (fly ash based)
Specification for Portland pozzolana cement (calcined clay based)
Specification for Masonry Cement
Specification for high alumina cement for structural use
Page 1252 of 1744
IS:269
IS:8112
IS:12269
IS:455
IS:1489 Pt.1
IS:1489 Pt.2
IS:3466
IS:6452
rst
5g-u Ofaies
vtvotrv ,151.7,7~
6.1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOia Gneettalong)
MATERIALS
Specification for rapid hardening portland cement

Specification for Sulphate Resisting Portland cement
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 9 of 15
IS:8041
IS:8112
IS:12269
IS:12330
Storage at Site
6.1.1 The storage of cement (lifted from the Owner's godown or procured by the Contractor
himself) at the site of work shall be at contractor's expense and risk and shall meet the
requirements of IS:4082. The cement shall be stored above ground in a suitable weather tight
building or godown and in such a manner as to permit easy access for proper inspection and
also to prevent deterioration due to moisture. In the event of any damage occurring to the
quality of cement due to faulty storage or on account of negligence on the part of the
contractor, such damages shall be borne by the contractor himself.
6.1.2 A11 approved cement shall be arranged in batches with type, brand and date of receipt flagged
on them. A maximum of eight bags shall be stacked one over the other. Cement bags shall be
used in the same order as received from the manufacturer/ owner. The contractor shall
maintain a register, on day to day basis, giving the details of the receipt/ consumption, source
of supply and type of cement etc. The register shall always be accessible to the
Engineer-in-Charge for verification.
6.2
Tests after Delivery

Each consignment of cement supplied by Owner or contractor, shall, after delivery at site and
at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, be subjected to any or all of the tests and analyses,
required by the relevant Indian Standard Codes. In case the cement is supplied by the owner,
the contractor shall get himself satisfied regarding its quality before using the same in his
works at his own expense. The contractor shall carry out and bear the cost of all tests and
analyses required to ensure quality of cement before using in actual works, irrespective of the
fact whether the cement is supplied by the Owner or procured by him.
6.3
Rejection
The Engineer-in-Charge may reject at his discretion any cement, notwithstanding the
manufacturer's certificate or failing to meet the requirements of relevant BIS Codes for testing
of cement. He may similarly reject any cement which has deteriorated owing to inadequate
protection from moisture or due to intrusion of foreign matter or any other cause. Any cement
which is considered defective, shall not be used and shall be promptly removed from the site
by the contractor.
7.0 STEEL
7.1
General
All steel bars, sections, plates, and other miscellaneous steel materials, etc shall be free from
loose mill scales, rust as well as oil, mud, paint or other coatings. The materials, construction
specifications such as dimensions, shape, weight, tolerances, testing etc, for all materials
covered under this section, shall conform to respective BIS Codes. Steel sections shall be
conforming to IS:808 or IS:12778.
7.2
Reinforcement Bars
Reinforcement bars, to be used for civil and structural works shall be one of the following or
in combination thereof.
Page 1253 of 1744
ajL
1.1,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A GAA 011AA. UndelAkA91
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 10 of 15
Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel Bars and Hard-Drawn

Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement
Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement
Specification for plain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete.
Specification for High strength deformed steel bars and wires for
concrete reinforcement.
Specification for indented wire for prestressed concrete.
Specification for fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforcing bars
7.3
IS: 432
IS:1566
IS:1785
IS:1786
IS:6003
IS:13620
Structural Steel
Structural steel to be used for general structural purposes shall be one of the following or in
combination thereof.
Structural steel sections shall conform to following BIS Codes:
7.4
IS:1161
IS:1239
IS:2062
IS:4923
Steel tubes for structural purposes.

Mild Steel Tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings.
Steel for general structural purposes (Grade A/BR/B0).
Hollow steel sections for structural use.
Miscellaneous Steel Materials

Miscellaneous steel materials shall be conforming to the following BIS Codes.
7.4.1
Expanded Metal Steel Sheets for General purposes.

Mild steel bars of anchor bolts, rungs, metal inserts, grating etc.)
Hexagonal headbolts, screws & nuts of product grade C.
Cold formed light gauge structural steel sections.
Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
Plain washers
Steel wire ropes for general engineering purposes
Thimbles for wire ropes.
Bulldog grips.
Mild Steel Tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fillings.
(For Hand rail tubular sections).
Drop forged sockets for wire ropes for general engineering purposes.
Steel chequered plates.
Hexagonal bolts and nuts (M42 to M150).
High Strength Structural Bolts
High Strength Bolts
IS:412
IS:2062
IS:1363
IS:811
IS:1367
IS:2016
IS:2266
IS:2315
IS:2361
IS:1239
IS:2485
IS:3502
IS:3138
IS:3757
IS:4000
Anchor Bolts
Material for Anchor Bolts such as MS bars, washers, nuts, pipe sleeves and plates etc. shall be
as per relevant BIS Codes mentioned above.
7.5
Storage
The storage of all materials at site of work shall be at the contractor's expense and risk and
shall be done as per the requirements given in IS:4082. The contractor shall maintain the
proper records of receipt/consumption. The records shall always be accessible to the
Engineer-in-Charge for verification.
Page 1254 of 1744
$'gu la2eg
1.71,
,(31 JP41.3,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Tool ol Incha Undertalong)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 11 of 15
The reinforcement bars, structural steel sections and other miscellaneous steel materials etc,
shall be stored in such a way as to avoid and prevent deterioration, corrosion, bending,
twisting and wrapping. In case of any damage occurring to the material on account of faulty
storage or negligence by the contractor, same shall be borne by the contractor himself.
7.6

Materials supplied by the Owner or Contractor, shall, after delivery at site and at the discretion
of Engineer-in-Charge, be subjected to any or all of the tests, required by the relevant BIS
Codes. The Contractor shall carry out and bear the cost of such tests irrespective of the fact
whether the material is procured by the Owner or the contractor. In case steel is supplied by
the Owner, the Contractor shall get himself satisfied regarding its quality before using the
same in his works at his own expense.
7.7
Rejection
The Engineer-in-charge may reject at his discretion any material, not withstanding the
manufacturer's certificate or failing to meet the requirements of relevant BIS Codes for testing
of materials. He may similarly reject any material, which has deteriorated or corroded etc., due
to improper storage, handling or transport. Defective materials shall not be used and removed
from the site by the contractor at his own expense.
8.0 BRICK
8.1
General
Bricks for masonry works shall conform to IS:1077 - Specification for common burnt clay
building bricks and shall be of class 5.0 (with minimum compressive strength of 5.0 Nimm2 ).
Specific requirement for any other class of bricks shall be as shown in drawings or as
described in the contract for a particular site or type of work. Physical requirements, quality,
dimensions, tolerances etc. of common burnt clay building bricks shall conform to the
requirements of IS:1077.
Bricks shall be hand - moulded or machine moulded and shall be made from suitable soils.
The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be well burnt,
sound, hard, tough and uniform in colour. These shall be free from cracks, chips, flaws, stone
or humps of any kind.
8.2

The Contractor shall take samples of each type of brick as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge
as per the requirements of IS:5454 and tests shall be carried out as per IS:3495. The cost for
carrying out any or all the tests, shall be borne by the Contractor. The bricks, when tested, as
per IS:3495 shall have a minimum average compressive strength, as given in the Code, for a
particular class of brick. Water absorption shall not be more than 20% by its dry weight, when
soaked in cold water for 24 hours.
Brick samples so approved, shall be deposited with the Engineer-in-Charge. All subsequent
deliveries shall be upto the standards of the approved samples.
8.3
Stacking of Bricks
Bricks shall be stored at site as per the requirements given in IS:4082 and shall not be dumped
at site. They shall be unloaded from trucks to a place on a levelled surface near to the work
site. They shall be stacked in regular tiers even as they are unloaded, to minimise breakages
and defacement of bricks. The supply of bricks shall be so arranged that as far as possible, at
Page 1255 of 1744
$fg`z-z 2f5t-eg
(Att?rt ~treott,ivfOrs0
ENGINEERS
(A Govt of Indla Undertalong(
6-68-0002 Rev.4
MATERIALS
Page 12 of 15
least two days' requirements of bricks are available at site at any time. Bricks, of different
class, shall be stacked separately.
8.4
Local Bricks/ Class 3.5 Bricks.

Where shown on drawings, locally available bricks of non modular size (230 mm x 110 mm x
70 mm) in place of bricks of modular size (190 mm x 90 mm x 90 mm) can be usedtn case
the bricks satisfy the other requirements of IS:1077. Minimum compressive strength of these
bricks shall not be less than 3.5 N/mm2.
8.5

Concrete Block Masonry shall be as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0016.
9.0 STONE
9.1
General
All Stones used for masonry works shall conform to the requirements of following BIS Codes.
Method of identification of natural building stones.
Recommendations for dimensions and workmanship of natural
building stones for masonry work.
Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones.
9.2
IS:1123
IS:1127
IS:1129
Quality of Stones
Stones shall be of approved quality, hard, dense, strong, sound, durable, clean and uniform in
colour. They shall also be free from veins, adherent coatings, injurious amount of alkalies,
vegetable matters and other deleterious substances such as iron pyrites, coal, lignite, mica, sea
shells etc. Unless otherwise approved, stones from one single quarry shall be used for any one
work. The strength of stones should be adequate to carry the imposed load and shall meet all
the requirements of IS:1905, taking into account the appropriate crushing strength of stone and
type of the mortar used. The percentage of water absorption, when tested in accordance with
IS:1124, shall not exceed 5 percent.
Stones normally used, shall be small enough to be lifted and placed by hand. The length of the
stone shall not exceed 3 times the height. Width of stone on base shall not be less than 150
mm and in no case exceed 3/4th thickness of the wall. Height of the stone shall not be more
than 300 mm.
9.3
Unloading/Stacking
The stones shall be unloaded from the trucks to a site near to the place of work as defined in
IS:4082 and shall be stacked on a firm ground having adequate stope for drainage. The supply
of stones shall be so arranged that as far as possible, at least two days' requirements of stone
are available at site at any time.
10.0 ADMIXTURES
10.1 General Requirements for Admixtures
10.1.1 All concrete admixtures shall in general comply with the following BIS Codes unless
otherwise stipulated in this Specification.
Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds.
Specification for other admixtures for concrete.
Page 1256 of 1744
IS:2645
IS:9103
2Zff 22eg
rfroxtosi~o
ENGINEERS
lA Go, of Inclw Undertalong)
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 13 of 15
10.1.2 Generally, admixtures shall have ISI certification marks. However, even in case of BIS
certified admixtures, Engineer-in-Charge may require the Contractor to carry out and submit
any or all the tests (as specified in relevant BIS Codes), from BIS approved laboratories, over
and above the manufacturer's test certificate, before giving his final approval.
In case, admixtures certified by BIS are not available, the contractor shall submit to the
Engineer-in-Charge the type and/or proprietary brand of the admixture from only reputed
manufacturers along with necessary test certificates from BIS recognized/ BIS approved
laboratories or any other document directed by Engineer-in-Charge for the latter's final
approval. In such cases, names of at least two manufacturers shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge for his selection. In case, both the names are rejected, the contractor shall
submit a fresh list of two manufacturers for approval by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The Engineer-in-Charge may direct the contractor to submit test results as required by IS:2645
or IS:9103 for any admixture proposed to be used in the concrete in any approved laboratory
at his discretion at any stage of the work. The cost of any/all tests required to satisfy
compliance with this specification shall be borne by the Contractor.
In case of non-availability of any BIS code for testing and acceptability criteria, relevant
American, British or German Code shall be applicable.
10.1.3 Prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be obtained while using water reducing
admixtures in the concrete (PCC/ RCC) or mortar. Other type of admixtures such as
accelerating admixtures, retarding admixtures or air entraining admixtures, shall not be used
unless specified on the design drawings or prior approval taken from the design approving
authority. Once approved, utmost care shall be exercised at site by the Contractor to maintain
the consistency in the quality of admixture and the concrete/ mortar so produced.
10.1.4 The suitability and effectiveness of any admixture shall be verified by trial with the designed
concrete mixes using cement, aggregates together with any other materials to be actually used
in the works as per the direction of Engineer-in-Charge. If two or more admixtures are to be
used simultaneously in the same concrete mix, the Contractor must submit necessary test
results from an approved laboratory to show their interaction and compatibility. Any/all tests
specified in BIS Codes shall be carried out only with the type of material and mix design, to
be actually used in the work site.
10.1.5 No admixture shall impair the durability of the concrete nor combine with the ingredients to
form harmful compounds nor increase the risk of corrosion of reinforcement. Use of
admixtures shall not reduce the dry density of concrete. Once the proportion of admixture has
been established, strict check shall be maintained not to alter the proportions of ingredients
and water-cement ratio of the Design Mix during execution.
10.1.6 The chloride contents in admixtures shall not exceed 2% by mass of the admixture or 0.03%
by mass of the cement.
10.1.7 Admixtures which do not meet the requirements stipulated in this specification shall be
rejected and shall not be used.
10.2 Water Proofing Compounds
10.2.1 Water proofing compounds shall be mixed with cement only.
10.2.2 The permeability of the specimen with the admixture shall be less than half of the
permeability with similar specimen without the use of these compounds. These compounds
shall be used in such proportion as recommended by manufacturer but in no case it shall
exceed 3% by weight of cement.
Page 1257 of 1744
iI!K't t-t
112
2j g
1.1771
ENGINEERS
MATERIALS
IA SOvt of indla Undertaking)
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 14 of 15
10.2.3 The initial setting time of the cement with the use of these compounds shall not be less than 30
minutes and final setting time shall not be more than 10 hours. Test shall be carried out in
accordance with IS:4031.
10.2.4 Compressive strength of specimen at 3 days shall not be less than 160 kg/sq.cm nor 80% of
the 3 days compressive strength of mortar cubes prepared with same cement and sand only,
whichever is higher. Similarly compressive strength at 7 days shall not be less than 220
kg/sq.cm nor less than 80% of the 7 days compressive strength prepared with the same cement
and sand only, whichever is higher. The test to determine the compressive strength shall
conform to IS:4031.
10.3
Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture shall be as per EIL Specification No. 668-0017.
11.0 WATER BARS (WATER STOPS)

PVC water bars shall be used in reinforced concrete construction of liquid retaining structures
or any other structure to safeguard them from hydrostatic pressure and water leakage and any
relative movement between two parts of the structure due to thermal loading shrinkage or
differential movement of foundations. Wherever desired or shown in the drawings, they shall
be used at expansion/contraction/construction joints. These shall be pre-formed and shall
provide a permanent water tight seal along the entire joint in the poured concrete structures.
These shall also be flexible enough to withstand deflection/displacements at joints arising due
to variation of temperatures or settlement of foundations. The minimum thickness of water bar
shall be as shown on drawings or described in the schedule of rates and unless otherwise
mentioned, these shall be able to withstand a water head of at least 12 meters.
11.2
Performance requirements of PVC water bars shall meet the requirements of IS:12200. These
shall be of approved make and of ribbed/ serrated/ plane type with a bulb at the centre. The
thickness and width of water bars shall be as per schedule of rates/ drawings but in no case the
thickness shall be less than 5 mm and width less than 150 mm. The joining of the water bars
shall be carried out by vulcanising strictly as per the manufacturer's specifications. Lapped
joints shall not be allowed under any circumstances.
12.0 BITUMEN/BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

Bitumen to be used for various types of work shall meet all the requirements of relevant BIS
Codes as given below:
IS:73
Specification of Paving Bitumen.
IS:1195
Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring.
IS:1322
Specification for Bitumen felts for water proofing and damp proofing.
Specification for Bituminous compounds for water proofing
IS:1834
and caulking purposes.
Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint
IS:1838
in concrete pavements and structures.
IS:3037
Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water proofing of roofs.
Specification for bitumen primer for use in water proofing and damp proofing.IS:3384
IS:5871
Specification for Bitumen Mastic for Tanking and Damp proofing.
IS:7193
Specification for Glass fibre base coal tar pitch & bitumen felts.
IS:7198
Code of practise for damp proofing using bitumen mastic.
Specification for bitumen Mastic, Anti Static
IS:8374
and electrically conducting grade.
Page 1258 of 1744
$g-21
- 22-dg
'
vovot(V.I,AtotAt
ENGINEERS
Unctettaking)
(A Govt ot
lnd
MATERIALS
6-68-0002 Rev.4
Page 15 of 15
The type and grade shall be as shown on the drawings or as indicated in schedule of quantities
or as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. Tests and acceptable criteria shall be as per relevant BIS
Codes.
13.0 PVC PIPES
PVC Pipes shall conform to the requirements of IS:4985.
14.0 WOOD/ TIMBER
14.1
Wood recommended for platforms of cold vessels or below cold vessels/ exchangers shall be
hard and shall be of group A, grade I, and shall have safe permissible stress of 7 N/mm2 in
compression, perpendicular to grains on outside location as per IS:883. General characteristics
like durability, treatability etc. shall conform to IS:883 and IS:3629.
14.2
Timber required to be used for formwork shall be fairly dry before use. It should maintain its
shape during the use and even when it comes into contact with moisture from the concrete.
Storage of Wood/Timber shall be as per the requirements of IS:4082.
For proper identification and selection of suitable timber for formwork, following codes shall
be referred.
Classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution
Specification for ballies for general purposes.
Specification for Ply wood for concrete shuttering work.
IS:399
IS:3337
IS:4990
15.0 EPDXY CO1VIPOUNDS

Refer EIL Specification No. 6-68-0056.
16.0 PAINT
16.1
Refer EIL Specification No. 6-79-0020 or the job specification whichever applicable.
17.0 ANTITERMITE COIVIPOUNDS

17.1
Chloropyrifos emulsifiable concentrates (1%) conforming to IS:8944 shall be used for

treatment of soil for protection of buildings against attack by subterranean termites.
18.0 POLYSULPHIDE SEALANTS

Polysulphide Sealants shall conform to IS:12118 and be of approved make. Test conditions
and requirements shall be as given in the above referred BIS code.
Page 1259 of 1744
el,crrt CrA ,rvosal
ENGINEERS
INDIA IJMITED
Go of Inda UndenakIng)
EARTHWORK
TIT-4W
rfrftMa
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 1 of 13
k 11
ki<1110-Ich Wr.4
r4-1)
wrzi
EARTHWORK
21.08.14
REVISED & REISSUED
AJS
19.06.09
REVISED & REISSUED
AS
22.01.02
UPDATED & REISSUED
R SOOD
AUG'94
UPDATED & REISSUED
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
PKM
SC
SCH
VINAY
KUMAR
N. DUARI
R SOOD
H MATHUR
GRR
H MATHUR
GP LAHIRI
A. SONI
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards Standards
Comm ittee
Bureau
Convenor Chairman
Approved by

Page 1260 of 1744
tg-r:fr
412m,.-rroor,off1.3o-tro.o
ENQNEERS
A
Govt ol Indla Undeltakog)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 2 of 13
Abbreviations:
CNS :
Cohesive Non Swelling

Convenor :
Mr. PK Mittal
Members :
Mr. S Debnath (Geotech)

Mr. Rajanji Stivastava
Mr. PJ Singh
Mr. VS Chhaya (Projects)

Page 1261 of 1744
ENGINEERS
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
IA Govt ol Indo Undertakv,9)
Page 3 of 13
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
3.0
BACKFILLING MATERIAL
4.0
SETTING OUT
5.0
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION
6.0
SHORING AND STRUTTING
12
7.0
BACK FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS AND IN PLINTH
12
8.0
TRANSPORTATION OF SURPLUS EARTH
13
9.0
PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL
13
10.0
CLEAN UP
13

Page 1262 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Og-alf612ry dg
'
1.I0R 2.10 ,12 ,151,30215,
0
lA GoN ol Indo Undertalong)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 4 of 13
1.0 SCOPE
This specification deals with earth work in excavation and filling.
2.0 CLASSIFICATION OF SOIL
2.1
Ordinary Soil
2.1.1
Soft Soil/ Loose Soil

Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of pick and shovel, or to phawra,
rake or other ordinary digging implements such as:
a)
b)
c)
d)
2.1.2
Sand, gravel, loam, clay, mud, black cotton soil

Vegetables or organic soil, turf, peats, soft shale or loose murrum
Mud concrete below ground level
Any mixture of soil mentioned above.
Hard/ Dense Soil

Generally any soil, which requires close application of picks or jumpers or scarifier and
rippers to loosen the same, such as:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
2.2
Stiff heavy clay, hard shale or compact murrum requiring grafting tool and/ or pick
and shovel
Shingle and river or nallah bed boulders
Soling of roads, paths etc. and hard core
Macadam surface of any description (water bound, grouted tarmac etc.)
Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime or cement mortar below ground level
Soft conglomerate when the stone can be detached from the matrix with picks and
shovels
Soft Rock
This is fissured/ disintegrated rocky strata, boulders (volume more than 0.028 m3 and lens than
0.400 m3) and also which cannot be quarried/ excavated by using above manual tools but can
be quarried/ excavated manually by using crow bars is classified as soft rock. Soft rock shall
include all kinds of stiff and stratified rock, such as shales, thinly bedded philites, laterite hard
conglomerate, lime stone, sand stone and unreinforced cement concrete below ground level.
Soft rock may be quarried or split with crow bar or picks and can also be excavated by rippers,
dozers and other mechanical equipment, but without the aid of blasting. If required and
permitted, light blasting may be restored to, for loosening the materials, but this will not, in
any way entitle the material to be classified as "Hard Rock".
2.3 Hard Rock

2.3.1
Hard Rock (Not Requiring Blasting)

This shall include all types of hard and compact rock, having closely spaced fissures or joints,
on account of which blasting is not considered necessary and shall not be resorted unless
permitted by the Engineer-in charge.
2.3.2 Hard Rock (Requiring General Blasting)

This shall include all types of hard and compact rock occurring in unfissured masses or similar
foundations, boulders (volume more than 0.4 m3) for excavation in which blasting is
Fornnat No. 8-00-0001-F1 Rev. 0
Page 1263 of 1744
ar 22-
$11g-1..27122I2A2I2A~/
dg
ENGINEERS
IA Govt n11nGa Undertaking)
6-68-0003 Rev.5
EARTHWORK
Page 5 of 13
considered necessary such as quartzite, granite, basalt stones, reinforced cement concrete
(reinforcement to be cut through but not separated from concrete) below ground level and the
like.
2.3.3
Hard Rock (Requiring Controlled Blasting (Explosive/ Non-explosive)

This type of excavation becomes necessary when excavation is done in formations, mentioned
in Clause 2.3.2, in the vicinity of existing foundations/ structures. Mode of blasting shall be
decided by Engineer-in-Charge, keeping in view the sensitivity of structures.
2.3.4
Hard Rock (Blasting Prohibited)

Hard rock requiring blasting as described in clause 2.3.2 above, but when blasting is
prohibited for any reason and excavation has to be carried out by chiseling, pneumatic
breaking, splitter or any other agreed method.
The use of excavation shall not be considered as a reason for classification under hard rock
requiring blasting unless clearly found necessary in the opinion of Engineer-in-Charge.
3.0 BACKFILLING MATERIAL

3.1
Suitable Materials:
3.1.1 Back filling suitable material shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Additionally, they
shall be free from refuse, large stones or rocks or other material which might prevent proper
compaction or cause the compacted fill or embankment to perform inadequately or to have
insufficient stability or bearing capacity for the superimposed loads to which it is likely to be
subj ected.
3.1.2 Back filling of excavation in trenches, foundations and elsewhere shall consist of one of the
following materials as shown on drawing, or directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
i)
ii)
Soil
Selected earth from heaps or brought from borrow areas.
In case i) or ii) are not available, the Engineer-in-charge may approve use of any of the
following:
iii)
iv)
v)
Stone/ Gravel
Sand
CNS material.
3.1.3 The material shall be free from refuse, debris, roots, hard lumps and any other foreign organic
material.
3.2
Unsuit.,ble Materials
Unsuitable material shall include particles in excess of 75 mm size and that which is:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Organic material, logs, stumps and perishable materials.

Material susceptible to spontaneous combustion
Materials with undefined properties
Materials having a moisture content greater than the maximum specified
Building rubble and domestic and industrial wastes
Soils and rock susceptible to deterioration/ change of their properties.
Clay, silt and other loose or soft soils not in accordance with compaction criteria.

Page 1264 of 1744
gz.1122Cg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
h)
i)
Govt of InOla Undeflak.ngt
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 6 of 13
Dredged material
Material containing gypsum or other soluble salts.
4.0 SFTTING OUT

4.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the true and proper setting out of the work in relation
to original points, lines* and levels* of reference and for the correctness of the levels,
dimensions and alignment of all parts of the work. If at any time during progress of the work
any error appears or arises in the position of level, dimension, or alignment of part of the
work, the Contractor at his own expense shall rectify such errors to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge. The checking of any line or level by the Engineer-in-Charge shall not in
any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities.
4.1.1 Tolerances*
The grade shall be properly shaped to the required elevations and parallel to the required
surface. The elevation of any point and the line of any edge or center of the earthworks shall
conform to that shown on the drawings within the tolerances stated below:
Tolerances from True Level
4.2
Tolerances from True Line
Basic Grading
- 25 mm
- 75 mm
Embankments
+75 mm
-0
+75 mm
- 75 mm
The Contractor shall lay out and construct one or more permanent bench marks in some
central place before the start of the work, from which all important levels for the excavations
will be set.
These permanent bench marks shall consist of masonry pillars with top neatly plastered and
leveled as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. Bench marks shall be well connected
with triangular grid system or any other bench mark approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION

5.1
Excavation shall be carried out in any material met on the site to the lines, levels and contours
shown on the detailed drawings and the Contractor shall remove all excavated materials to
spoil heaps on site or transport for use in filling on the site or stack them for reuse as directed.
5.2
Excavated material shall not be deposited within 1.5 m from the top edge of the excavation.
5.3
The sides of the excavation may be cut sloping, or shored and strutted to hold the face of earth
as per site requirements and as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge.
5.4
Foundation pits/ trenches shall not be excavated to the full depth unless construction is
imminent. The last 15 cm depth of the excavation shall not be done until concreting work is
imminent. The full depth may at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge be excavated and the
bed covered with a 50 mm (minimum) thick (or as indicated on drawing) layer of lean
concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 crushed stone aggregate) or as specified in
schedule of rates/ shown on drawing, after watering if required, and consolidating the bed.
5.5
If the bottom of any excavation has been left exposed by the Contractor and in the opinion of
the Engineer-in-Charge, that has become badly affected by the atmosphere or by water, then
the Contractor shall remove such portions of the deteriorated material as the Engineerin-Charge may direct and shall make good with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse
Page 1265 of 1744
,41
$'g-ars
tt~ elvav,am~o
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lA Govt of Ince Undettalong)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 7 of 13
sand : 10 crushed stone aggregate). All expenses for such additional concrete and excavation
5.6
Where excavation is made in excess of the depth required, the Contractor shall, at his own
expense, fill upto required level with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse Sand : 10
crushed stone aggregates ) or as decided by Engineer-in-Charge.
5.7
The Contractor shall provide suitable drainage arrangement to prevent surface water from any
source entering the foundation pits at his own cost.
5.8
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for dewatering during excavation and subsequent
works, the accumulated water from any source (including subsoil water) in the excavated
pits/trenches and keeping the excavated pits/ trenches dry for subsequent works.
5.9
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements for lighting, fencing and other suitable
measures for protection against risk of accidents due to open excavation.
5.10
Where the excavation is to be carried out below the foundation level of an adjacent structure,
the precaution to be taken such as under pinning, shoring and strutting etc. shall be determined
by the Engineer- in-Charge. No excavation shall be done unless such precautionary measures
are carried out as per directions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The payment for such
precautionary measures shall, however, be made separately.
5.11
Loose or soft bed ground encountered in excavation at the required depth shall on the
Engineers-in-Charge's instructions be excavated to a firm bed and difference made up to the
required level with lean concrete 1:5:10 mix (1 cement : 5 coarse Sand : 10 crushed stone
aggregates).
5.12
In those cases where during excavation, side slips occur for reasons not attributable to the
Contractor (e.g. side slips which take place on their own but not due to surcharge of earth kept
near the edge of excavation and cracking of excavation top strata due to clay drying out
leading to collapse of excavation sides), the Engineer-in-Charge shall admit payment at his
discretion.
5.13
Any obstacle encountered during excavation shall be reported immediately to the

Engineer-in-Charge and shall be dealt with as instructed by him. Removal of buried pipes or
cables shall not be done without prior permission of the Engineer-in-Charge and the
Contractor shall provide all measures to protect the same. Cost of such protective measures
are deemed to be included in the rates for various items of excavation.
5.14
The Contractor shall not undertake any concreting in foundation until the excavation pit/trench
is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.15
The specification for earth work shall also apply to excavation in rock in general.
5.16
In case of hard rock requiring blasting, the prnvisions mentioned below shall be strictly
followed.
5.16.1 General
Where hard rock is met with and blasting operations are considered necessary, the Contractor
shall intimate about the same to the Engineer-in-Charge, and obtain his approval in writing for
resorting to blasting operation.
The Contractor shall obtain license from the district authorities for undertaking blasting work
as well as for obtaining and storing the explosive as per the Explosive Rules 2008, corrected
Page 1266 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goot ol Indo Unceol;ng)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 8 of 13
upto date. He shall purchase the explosives, fuses, detonators etc. only from a licensed dealer.
He shall be responsible for the safe custody and proper accounting of the explosive materials.
The Engineer-in-Charge or his authorised representative shall have the access to check the
Contractor's store of explosive and his accounts.
In case where explosives are required to be transported and stored at site, relevant clauses of
the Explosive Rules, 2008 as amended subsequently, shall apply.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any accident to workmen, public or property, due to
blasting operations.
5.16.2 Precautions
Blasting operations shall be carried out under the careful supervision of a responsible
authorised and licensed blaster of the Contractor (referred subsequently as "blaster" only)
during specified hours, as approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. The blaster shall be
fully conversant with the rules of blasting.
Proper precautions for safety of persons shall be taken. Red flags shall be prominently
displayed around the area to be blasted and all the people on the work except those who
actually light the fuses, shall withdraw to a safe distance of not less than 200 m from the blast.
Precautions as per Explosive Rules 2008 with amendment shall be followed.
5.16.3 Fuses
All fuses shall be cut to the lengths required before being inserted into the holes. Joints in
fuses shall be avoided. Where these are unavoidable, a semicircular niche shall be cut in one
piece of fuse about 2 cm. deep from the end and the end of other piece inserted into this niche,
and the two pieces then wrapped together with a string. All joints exposed to dampness shall
be wrapped with rubber tape. Fuse and detonators shall be kept separated from the explosives.
5.16.4 Blasting with Gun Powder
Blasting shall normally be done with gun powder. Dynamite, gelatine or any other high
explosive shall only be used in special cases with the written permission of the Engineerin-Charge.
In case of blasting with gun powder, the position of all bore holes to be drilled shall be marked
out in circles with white paint. The bore holes shall be jumped or drilled in the rock face. The
depth of bore hole shall be about the same as that of the line of least resistance and its size
shall be such that the cartridges can easily pass down to the bottom. The bore holes must be
dried before being charged and these shall be inspected by the Contractor's agent.
Gun powder may be used in the form of pellet blasting cartridges or as powder or granules.
Cartridges are provided with tapered central hole. One end of fuse is passed through the
narrow end of the hole and a sufficient length of the fuse is doubled back that when the fuse
is pulled, it is held tight in the tapered hole of the cartridge. Other cartridges are then inserted
in the fuse to make up the required charge. The cartridge along with the fuse is lowered down
in the bore hole, placed in position and gently filled and pressed home with dry hay or turf.
The rest of the bore shall then be filled with dry clay, which shall be tamped with copper or
brass rod until it becomes compact. Care shall be taken to avoid any possibility of an air space
around the fuse. The safety fuses shall be taken to the required distance so as to allow the
blasting to take place after the person lighting the fuse has withdrawn to a safe distance.
Where gun powder is used in the form of powder or granules it shall be introduced in the bore
hole by means of funnel or copper tube. The bore holes shall be loaded with two thirds of the
Page 1267 of 1744
ENGINEERS
1.112,1 eKent, ,1,13~1
Govt of InOia Undertak.ow
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 9 of 13
quantity of charge required, and safety fuse then directly introduced over the charge.
Remaining one third charge shall then be introduced, and gently filled and pressed home with
dry hay or turf. The rest of the bore hole shall be filled with dry clay in the same way as for
cartridges, and the safety fuse taken to the required distance.
The charges shall be fired by igniting the fuse. The number of charges to be fired and the
actual number of shots heard, shall be compared, and the Contractor's blaster shall satisfy
himself by examination that all the charges have exploded, before workmen are permitted to
approach the site. The charge which has not exploded, shall not be permitted to be withdrawn.
The tamping and charge shall be flooded with water and the holes marked with a red cross (X)
over it. Another hole shall be jumped at a distance of about 45 cm from the old hole and fired
in the usual way. This operation shall be continued, till the original and any subsequent
unfired charges are exploded.
5.16.5 Blasting with Dynamite or any other High Explosive
In case of blasting with dynamite or any other high explosive the position of all bore holes to
be drilled shall be marked out in circle with white paint. These shall be inspected by the
Contractor's blaster. Bore holes shall be of a size that the cartridge can easily pass down. After
the drilling operation, the blaster shall re-inspect the holes to see that the holes marked out by
him have been drilled. The Blaster shall then prepare all charges necessary for the bore holes.
The bore holes shall be thoroughly cleaned before a cartridge is inserted. Wooden tamping
rods (not pointed but cylindrical throughout) shall be used, in charging holes. Metal rods shall
never be used for tamping. One cartridge shall be first placed in the bore hole, gently pressed
and not rammed down. Other cartridges shall then be added as may be required to make up the
necessary charge for the bore hole. The top most cartridge shall be connected to the detonator
which shall in turn be connected to the safety fuse of required length.
The maximum of eight (8) bore holes shall be loaded and fired on each occasion. The charges
shall be fired successively and not simultaneously.
Immediately before firing a blast, due warning shall be given and the blaster shall see that all
persons have retired to a place of safety. The safety fuses of the charged holes shall be ignited
in the presence of the blaster, who shall see that all the fuses are properly ignited.
Careful count shall be kept by him and others of each blast as it explodes. After the blast the
blaster shall inspect the work and ascertain that all the charged holes have been exploded. In
case of misfired holes, the Blaster shall inspect the same after half an hour and mark red
crosses (X) over the holes. During this interval of half an hour, no body shall approach the
misfired holes. None of the drillers shall work near such holes, until one of the two following
operations has been done by the blaster.
a)
Either the Contractor's blaster shall very carefully (when the tamping is of damp clay)
extract the tamping with a wooden scraper and withdraw the fuse, primer and
detonator, after which a fresh detonator, primer and fuse shall be placed in the
misfired holes and fired.
OR
b)
The hole shall be cleaned for 30 cm of tamping and its direction ascertained by
placing a stick in the hole. Another hole shall then be drilled 15 cm away and parallel
to it. This hole shall be charged and fired. The misfired hole should also explode along
with the new one.

Page 1268 of 1744
ry dg
ggar laffl
1.12, eIrcm1,1,1,3~,
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
fA Govf of hotha
undenak,,,g)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 10 of 13
Before leaving the work, the blaster of one shift shall inform another blaster relieving him for
the next shift, of any cases of misfire, and shall point out their positions denoted by red
crosses and also state the action, if any, to be taken in the matter.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall also be informed by the blaster of all cases of misfire, their
causes and steps taken in that connection.
5.16.6 Controlled Blasting (Explosive/ Non-explosive)
Whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge, rock blasting shall be carefully controlled so
that vibrations generated during the blasting do not cause damage to the buildings and
installation around. Similarly, the rock pieces should not fly off and endanger the buildings
and installations around. Apart from the general precautions mentioned in the preceding
paragraphs, following protective measures and limits for use of explosive are suggested as
guidelines. Bidders are requested to carefully check the site conditions and submit details of
the scheme they propose to adopt for controlling the blast.
Following protective measures shall be adopted while carrying out blasting operations.
The hole shall be covered with mild steel plate of minimum 12 mm thickness.
Reinforcement rod mesh not less than 20 mm dia. at 150 mm centre in both directions shall be
placed over the steel plates.
Steel plate and reinforcement shall be inspected after every blasting operation and all twists
shall be removed before reuse to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Sand filled bags of 6 to 8 layers shall be placed over the mesh suitably covering the whole
region under blasting operation.
The thickness of covering plate and the kind of dead weight is to be duly approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
5.16.7 Hard rock requiring blasting as described under Clause 2.3.2 above, but where blasting is
prohibited for any reason(s) breaking up of rock can be done by using Hydraulic Splitter and
chemical substances of approved manufacturer mixed in an appropriate proportion. The
method involves drilling holes into rock and then inserting/ injecting hydraulic splitter/
chemical solvents into the holes. The breaking-up of rock takes place in a controlled fashion
without much noise and spark.
5.17
Excavation in areas where existing under ground cables are envisaged, to be carried out
carefully by manual means taking proper safety precautions.
The earth work machinery be deployed after ensuring from the trial pits that no cable is
crossing the proposed area of excavation.
5.18 Payment (applicable for item rate tenders only)

5.18.1 The payment clause shall be operated only if the earthwork is to be measured separately as per
relevant tender item.
5.18.2 Payment for earth work in excavation shall be made on cubic meter (m3) basis on the
measurement of volume of pit/ trench of excavation with working space as per relevant Indian
Standards (IS:1200) and slopes/ steppings as permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. The rate
shall include cost of all the operations of blasting with explosives & accessories, making of all
arrangements for dewatering the accumulated water from any source in the excavated pit or
Format No. 8-00-0001-F1 Re,*. 0
Page 1269 of 1744
$fg-2:11.
1.1V71 ttrarl +.1 SR1.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA I IMITED CIVIL & STRUCTURAL WORKS
A Govt olind."-Undertakng)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 11 of 13
trench, removal and disposal of surplus excavated soil within a lead of 100 m from
construction areas. The rate shall also include setting out and line out work required for the
excavation.
5.18.3 The following works shall not be measured separately and allowance for the same shall be
deemed to have been made in the description of main item:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
0
g)
h)
i)
j)
Setting out works, profiles, etc.;

Site clearance, such as cleaning grass and vegetation;
Unauthorized battering or benching of excavation;
Forming (or leaving 'dead men' or 'tell-tales' in borrow pits and their removal after
measurements;
Forming (or leaving) steps in sides of deep excavation and their removal after
measurements;
Excavation for insertion of planking and strutting;
Unless otherwise specified, removing slips or falls in excavations;
Bailing out or pumping of water in excavation from rains;
Bailing out or pumping of water in excavation from sub-soil water, and
Slinging or supporting pipes, electric cables, etc, met during excavation.
5.18.4 Special pumping other than what is included in 5.18.3 (h and i) and well point dewatering
where resorted to, shall each be measured separately, unless otherwise stated, in Kilo Watt
Hour against separate specific provision(s) made for the purpose.
5.18.5 The Contractor shall intimate to the Engineer-in-Charge as soon as different classification of
soils are met with. The measurements of various soil classifications then shall be worked out
by either of the following alternatives in the order of their decreasing importance.
a)
Joint levels shall be taken as to the levels of different soil classifications and volume
worked out on the basis of levels only.
b)
Where levels of different strata cannot be clearly marked and defined, the Contractor
shall stack different soils of various classifications separately for measurement
purpose and then dispose it off.
c)
If the quantum of work involved in (b) above is extensively large & time consuming,
then the total area may be divided into various zones and reasonably representative
samples as in (b) above may be taken and quantities of soils of various classifications
finalized for the entire zone based on the representative.
If soil of any classification other than that specified in the Schedule of Rates is met
with during excavation, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge as to the classification
of soil, levels of the strata of different classifications and their location shall be
binding.
In above case, the total quantity of excavation shall be computed from the
measurement of the pit/ trench excavated. The hard rock and soft rock shall be
measured separately from the relevant stacks and each shall be reduced by fifty
percent for voids, and paid under the relevant items. The balance, that is the total
quantity of excavation minus the reduced (for voids) quantity of excavation for rocks
shall be paid as soft/ hard soil as per the direction of the Engineer-in-Charge
(However, the maximum payment shall be limited to the volume of the excavated pit/
trench as approved by Engineer-in-Charge).
Page 1270 of 1744

31
51g-arft2es
IaRJf rirort."3.4)
ENGINEERS
lA Govt ot Inda Unclertaking)
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 12 of 13
6.0 SHORING AND STRUTTING

6.1
The shoring and strutting of the sides to withhold the face of excavation pits/trenches shall be
done when approved or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.2
The shoring shall be of close or open timbering type depending upon the site requirements and
as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge whose decision shall be final and binding as to the type
of shoring to be used.
6.3
The arrangement of the shoring and strutting shall be sound and safe and shall be got approved
from the Engineer-in-Charge before installation. The approval shall not absolve the Contractor
of his responsibilities of safety and any other requirements of the contract.
6.4
The shoring and strutting shall be kept in position till all the relevant work in the excavated
area is completed and approved. It shall be dismantled and removed only after the permission
to do so is obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge.
6.5
Payment (applicable for item rate tenders only)

Payment for shoring and strutting by close and open timbering shall be made on square meter
m2 ) basis as separate items. In both the cases, the measurement shall be done on the basis of
the surface area of the sides of the excavation actually shored and strutted.
The rate shall include all labour, materials, erection of the poling Boards, wales, struts, ballies
etc., fixing and keeping the same in position as required, dismantling and removing the same
after the work is over as directed.
7.0 BACK FILLING AROUND FOUNDATIONS AND IN PLINTH
7.1
Back filling around completed foundations, structures, trenches and in plinth shall be done to
the lines and levels shown on the drawings including any trimming of the surfaces, as may be
necessary. This shall be done with selected and approved earth from excavation or otherwise
with suitable materials described under Clause 3.1 as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Where sufficient suitable material is not available from the excavation, the
Engineer-in-Charge may direct to import suitable earth from other sources. The filling shall be
done in layers of thickness not exceeding 15 cm with watering, rolling and ramming by
manual methods/ mechanical compactors to grade and Level as shown on drawings to obtain
90% laboratory maximum dry density.
7.2
The Contractor shall not commence filling in and around any work until it has been permitted
7.3
Backfilling around liquid retaining structures and pipes shall be done only after approval of
the Engineer-in-Charge is obtained.
74

Payment for backfilling with earth shall be based on volume in cubic meters (m3) of
consolidated fill. This volume shall be derived from the difference between the volume of
excavation and the structure or trenches as the case may be. The rate shall include cost of
extracting suitable approved earth from available excavated soil from spoil heaps within a lead
of 100 m, placing, watering, rolling, ramming compacting in layers, trimming and dressing
finished surface and disposal of surplus material upto a lead of 100 m.
However, backfilling done with materials other than earth shall be paid separately under
relevant items.
Page 1271 of 1744
ENGINEERS
1.41,71 ?:1EISr2
IA
Govf of india Undertakingf
EARTHWORK
6-68-0003 Rev.5
Page 13 of 13
8.0 TRANSPORTATION OF SURPLUS EARTH

8.1
Surplus earth and soil from excavation shall be removed from construction area to the area
demarcated by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.2
8.2.1 Payment shall be made only for the lead beyond initial 100 m from construction area. Rate
shall include re-excavation, loading, transportation, dumping, stacking or spreading (as per
directions of the Engineer-in-Charge) the surplus earth and the soil in the area demarcated by
the Engineer-in-Charge. Payment shall be made on cubic metre (m3) basis on the difference of
measurements of the volume of the excavated pits and the measurement of the back filling.
Quantity generated due to voids in back filled volume of earth shall also be removed by the
Contractor at no extra cost and this disposal of earth shall not be measured and paid under any
item.
8.2.2 In exceptional circumstances the Engineer-in-Charge may direct the Contractor to remove
surplus earth, concrete debris or any other waste material from site to the areas of disposal on
the basis of truck measurement. In such cases volume of material shall be calculated on the
basis of truck volume reduced by 30% for voids in case of soft/hard soils and 50% for soft/
hard rock. All other provisions of disposal such as spreading, levelling, grading shall apply in
this case also.
9.0 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND PERSONNEL
9.1
The Contractor shall protect all active utility lines shown on the drawings or encountered
during the excavation. If he damages those lines, the Contractor shall repair or replace them. If
existing utilities interfere with his work, the Contractor shall inform to the Engineer-in-charge
and secure written instructions for further action.
9.2
The Contractor shall barricade open holes and depressions which he creates or exposes as part
of this, and he shall post warning signs and lights on property adjacent to or with public
access. He shall operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as
otherwise required for safety.
9.3
The Contractor shall protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other facilities from damage
caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and other hazards created by his operations.
9.4
The Contractor shall plan and execute all aspects of the earthwork so that the safety of
personnel, the work and adjacent property is guaranteed and such that a minimum of
inconvenience is caused.
10.0 CLEAN UP
Upon completion nf work, the Contractor shall leave the project site clear nf debris and
surplus materials off plant limits in a manner meeting all location authority requirements.
Page 1272 of 1744
Page 1273 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
31
2154-eg
1.117n ,1,9,+1,111.3~)
IA
Govt ot Inda Undertakng)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION- CIVIL STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

6-68-0004 Rev.6
REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE
Page 1 of 30
& STRUCTURAL WORKS - PLAIN &
1-11"Ich
1
-
(=i
mKi
cnict-k
woircid
PLAIN AND REINFORCED CEMENT

CONCRETE
15th DEC 14
UPDATED & REISSUED
28th DEC 12
UPDATED & REISSUED
CDS
AJS
23rd NOV 07
UPDATED & REISSUED
YPC
PKM
APR,01
UPDATED & REISSUED
RPM7097
SCS
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
PKM
DM
SC
VK
VC
SCJ1151
MI
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$g-ar 22dg
,-,7721,72
(A Govt ot inclta Undetlaking)

& STRUCTURAL WORKS PLAIN &
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 2 of 30
Abbreviations:
ACI
American Concrete Institute
ASTM :
BS
British Standards
G1
Galvanized Iron
IS
Indian Standard
ISO
PVC :
PolyVinyl Chloride
RCC :
SCC :
Self Compacting Concrete
SWG :
Standard Wire Gauge

Convenor:
Mr. P.K. Mittal
Members :

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Ravindra Kumar (Consruction)
Page 1274 of 1744
Page 1275 of 1744
31
f&JI 02
eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOia Undertaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION- CIVIL

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 3 of 30
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
MATERIALS
3.0
GRADES OF CONCRETE
4.0
TYPE OF CONCRETE MIX
5.0
CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
6.0
BATCHING
7.0
CONCRETE MIXING
8.0
TRANSPORTATION, PLACING AND COMPACTION
9.0
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
11
10.0
SEPARATION JOINT
12
11.0
EXPANSION JOINTS/ISOLATION JOINT
12
12.0
WATER STOPS
12
13.0
PROTECTION OF FRESHLY LAID CONCRETE
12
14.0
CURING
13
15.0
FIELD TESTS
13
16.0
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES
19
17.0
FINISHING OF CONCRETE
19
18.0
WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT
21
19.0
FORM WORK
21
20.0
EXPOSED/ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE WORK
25
21.0
REINFORCEMENT
26
22.0
PAYMENT
28
Lii
Oales
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt or moO Underlaking)
1.0

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 4 of 30
SCOPE
This specification is applicable for Concrete Grade up to M60 and establishes the
requirements of materials, mix proportioning, placing, curing, etc. of all types of cast-in-situ
and precast concrete (ref. section 1.6) used in foundations, underground and above ground
structures, floors, pavements etc. Any special requirements as shown or noted on the
drawings shall supersede the provisions of this specification.
1.1
Reference Codes and Specifications

Apart from this specification, construction of plain and reinforced concrete works shall be in
accordance with the Indian Standard Code of Practice for "Plain and Reinforced Concrete"
IS 456: 2000 along with all amendments till date and other relevant codes mentioned
therein.
1.2
For Liquid Retaining Structures, EIL Specification No. 6-68-0005shall be applicable.
1.3
For Structural Steel works, EIL Specification No. 6-68-0006 & 0008 shall be applicable.
1.4
For Bipolar Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture, EIL Specification No.
6-68-0017 shall be applicable.
1.5
For Self Compacting Concrete, EIL Specification No. 6-68-0019 shall be applicable.
1.6
For precast concrete manufacturing refer EIL Specification No. 6-68-0014.
1.7
In case of conflict between the clauses mentioned in this specification and those in the
Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), this specification shall govern.
2.0
MATERIALS
2.1
Materials for concrete viz cement, Pozzolanas, Fly Ash, Ground Granulated Blast Furnace
Slag, Sand, Coarse aggregate, Water, etc. shall be as described in EIL Specification
No.6-68-0002.
2.2
Materials for all reinforcements, embedment, inserts, water bars etc. shall conform to EIL
Specification 6-68-0002.
2.3
Materials to be used as additive to concrete shall conform to EIL specification 6-68-0002 &
6-68-0017.
3.0
GRADES OF CONCRETE
Characteristic Compressive strength for different grades of concrete shall be as per Table- l .
Page 1276 of 1744

n
emp) ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED & STRUCTURAL WORKS PLAIN &
OeIr fMf51- g
A Govt of ind. Undertako9)
Page 1277 of 1744
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 5 of 30
TABLE 1
GRADES OF CONCRETE
Group
Grade Designation
Ordinary
Concrete
M1 0
M 15
M 20
M 25
M 30
M 35
M 40
M 45
M 50
M 55
M 60
Standard
Concrete
Specified Characteristic
Compressive Strength
of 150 mm cube at 28 days
(N/mm2)
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
Note: The characteristic strength is defined as the strength of material below which not
more than five (5) percent of the test results are expected to fall.
4.0
TYPE OF CONCRETE MIX
4.1
Unless otherwise noted on drawings, all lean/plain concrete shall be of Nominal Mix type
and reinforced concrete shall be of Design Mix type.
4.2
Nominal Mix Concrete

This concrete shall be made (without preliminary tests) by adopting nominal concrete mix
with proportions of materials as specified in Table 9 of IS: 456.
4.3
Design Mix Concrete

The mix shall be designed as per IS: 10262 in an approved laboratory to produce the grade
of concrete having the required workability and characteristic strength not less than
appropriate values given in Table-1. The target mean strength of concrete mix shall be equal
to the characteristic strength plus 1.65 times the standard deviation.
As long as the quality of materials does not change, a mix design done earlier but not prior
to one year may be considered adequate for later work. However, in case the source &
quality of materials changes or there is a break in the continuity of construction, the
Engineer-in-Charge shall ask for a new design mix.
Irrespective of the grade of concrete required to be produced as per characteristic strength
criteria, the minimum cement content and maximum water cement ratio in the design
concrete shall be strictly maintained as stipulated in Table 5 of IS: 456.
5.0
CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING

Proportioning, as used in this specification, shall mean the process of determining the
proportions of the various ingredients to be used to produce concrete of the required
workability when fresh/green and strength, durability & surface finish, when hardened. The
following information shall be collected prior to design of the concrete mix:
13~ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
14
,751
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
Govl of focka Undeflaking)
STANDARD SPECIFICATION - CIVIL STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 6 of 30
Grade designation.
Type of cement.
Maximum nominal size of aggregate.
Minimum cement content.
Maximum water cement ratio
Workability requirements.
Exposure condition as per Table 3 & Table 4 of IS:456
Maximum temperature of concrete at the time of placing.
Method of Placing.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall verify the strength of the concrete mix, before giving his
sanction of its use. However, this does not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility as
regards achieving the prescribed strength of the mix. If during the execution of the work,
cube tests show lower strengths than required, the Engineer-in-Charge shall order fresh trial
mixes to be made by the Contractor. No claim to alter the rates of concrete work shall be
entertained due to such changes in mix variations. Any variation in cement consumption
shall be taken into consideration for material reconciliation. Preliminary mix designs shall
be established well ahead of start of work.
5.1
Maximum Density
Suitable proportions of sand and the different sizes of coarse aggregates for each grade of
concrete shall be selected to give as nearly as practicable the maximum density as per clause
10.2.3 of IS 456. This shall be determined by mathematical means, laboratory tests, field
trials and suitable changes in aggregate gradation. The contractor shall ensure the same to
the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.
5.2
Consistency
The concrete shall have a consistency such that it shall be workable in the required position
and when properly vibrated it flows around reinforcing steel, all embedded fixtures, etc.
5.3
Workability
"Workability of Concrete" shall be as per clause 7 of IS: 456.
5.4
Durability
For achieving sufficiently durable concrete, strong, dense aggregates, low water-cement
ratio and adequate cement content shall always be used. Workability of concrete shall be
such that concrete can be completely compacted with the means available. Leak-proof
formwork shall be used so as to ensure no loss of cement-slurry during pouring and
compaction. Cover to reinforcement shall be uniform. Concrete mix design shall always
take into account the type of cement, minimum cement content irrespective of the type of
cement and maximum water cement ratio and minimum grade of concrete conforming to
environmental exposure conditions (refer Table 3 of IS 456) as given in Table 5 of IS: 456.
Generally, following types of cement shall be used for Plain and Reinforced concrete works:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8112.

53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12269.
Rapid hardening Portland Cement conforming to IS: 8041.
Portland Slag Cement conforming to IS: 455.
Portland Pozzolana Cement(fly ash based) conforming to IS:1489(Part 1)
Portland Pozzolana Cement (calcined clay based) conforming to IS: 1489(Part-2).
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement conforming to IS: 12330

Page 1278 of 1744
Page 1279 of 1744

ENGINEERS
IA Gos4 Intha Undertakon9)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 7 of 30
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement shall be used only for specific requirements depending
on environmental and process exposure conditions to which the structures may be subjected
to like high Sulphate concentrations, processes involving Sulphur handling etc.
5.4.1
Water Cement Ratio

Once a mix, including its water cement ratio, has been determined and approved for use by
the Engineer-in-Charge, that water cement ratio shall be maintained. The Contractor shall
determine the water content of the aggregates frequently as the work progresses, and the
amount of mixing water shall be adjusted so as to maintain the approved water cement ratio.
Maximum water-cement ratio shall be as per Table 5 of IS: 456 for different exposure
condition.
The minimum cement content as mentioned in Table 5 of IS: 456 shall be adjusted for
aggregates other than 20mm nominal maximum size as defined in Table 6 of IS 456.
For maximum cement content refer C1.8.2.4.2 of IS: 456.
5.4.2
Where specified, Bipolar concrete penetrating corrosion inhibiting Admixture in reinforced

concrete as per EIL specification No. 6-68-0017 shall be used for protecting the
reinforcement from corrosion.
5.5
Limits to Deleterious Constituents

Careful selection of the mix and the constituent materials shall be made to limit the presence
of deleterious constituents in concrete. The total acid soluble chloride content calculated
from the mix proportion and the measured chloride content of each of the constituents shall
not exceed 0.6 kg/m3 at the time of placing of concrete. The total water soluble Sulphate
content of the concrete mix shall not exceed 4 percent by mass of the cement in the mix.
6.0
BATCHING
Refer clause 10.2 of IS: 456.
7.0
CONCRETE MIXING
7.1
Ready Mixed Concrete supplied by Ready Mixed Concrete Plants or from on/off-site
batching plants (IS: 4926) shall be used for structural concrete.
All records and charts for the batching and mixing operations shall be prepared and
maintained by the contractor in accordance with IS: 4926 or as per the instructions of
Engineer-in-Charge.
In case Ready Mixed Concrete is not available, the mixing of concrete shall be strictly
carried out in an approved type of mechanical concrete mixer. The mixer shall be fitted with
water measuring devices. The mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform distribution
of the material and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation
after unloading from the mixer, the concrete shall be remixed.
7.2
Mixer
7.2.1
Mechanical Mixers shall comply with IS: 1791 and 12119 and shall be maintained in
satisfactory operating condition. These shall be used only for producing lean/ plain concrete
and/ or nominal mix concrete wherever permitted.
3112zit4
5fg'-a- OW5
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
vtwat tnvowronJousvg,
7.2.2
Govt of todfa Unclertaking)

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 8 of 30
Mixing Time
Mixing time shall be as indicated in the following Table-2. Excessive mixing requiring
additions of water shall not be permitted. Time shall start when all solid materials are
poured in the revolving mixer drum, provided that all of the mixing water shall be
introduced before one-fourth of the mixing time has elapsed. The Engineer-in-Charge may,
however, direct a change in the mixing time, if he considers such a change necessary.
TABLE-2
MINIMUM MIXING TIME FOR MIXERS
Capacity of mixer
2 m3 or less
Above 2 m3
7.3
Minimum mixing time

2 minutes
3 minutes or as recommended
by the mixer manufacturer.
Hand Mixing
Hand mixing of concrete shall not be permitted. However, for non-critical applications
namely foundations for crossovers, isolated operating platforms etc., using concrete upto
grade M20 and located at far away isolated places, this may be permitted by the Engineerin-charge as a special case. Mixing shall be carried out on a water tight platform and care
shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and
consistency. No extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for mixing by hand or for
using extra cement due to hand mixing.
7.4
Additives
Additive in concrete shall be used only with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-Charge
and shall comply with Cl. 5.5 of IS: 456. Any additive used for obtaining proper workability
or leak proofness of concrete or repair/rendering works of concrete due to non-conformance
to the specifications, shall not be measured and paid for. All costs relating to such usage
8.0
TRANSPORTATION, PLACING AND COMPACTION
8.1
General
The entire concrete placing programme including transportation arrangements, deployment
of equipment, layout, proposed procedures and methods, shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in-Charge 24 hours prior to concreting for approval. No concreting shall be
placed until his approval has been received. Approval of the Engineer-in-Charge for pouring
concrete shall be taken as 'conveyed', when the concrete pour card is signed by him.
8.1.1
Chuting
The use of long troughs, chutes and pipes for conveying concrete from the mixer to the
forms shall be permitted only on written authorization from the Engineer-in-Charge. In case
an inferior quality of concrete is produced by the use of such conveyors, the
Engineer-in-Charge may order discontinuance of their use and the substitution of a
satisfactory method of placing the concrete. Open troughs and chutes shall be equipped with
baffles and be in short lengths to avoid segregation. Chutes shall be designed so that the
concrete is, to some extent, remixed at the lower end by passing down through a funnel
shaped pipe or drop chute. Alternatively, they shall discharge into a storage hopper from
Page 1280 of 1744
Page 1281 of 1744
CIVIL STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
STANDARD SPECIFICATION"ENGINEERS
IA Govt of lndo Undertakng)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 9 of 30
which the concrete shall be transported to the point of placing by wheel barrows or other
means. Where drop chutes are used, a sufficient number of these must be provided, so that
the concrete discharged from the chute is not required to flow laterally more than 1.0 metre.
Where a drop chute is swung from the vertical, the bottom two sections must be maintained
in a vertical position to avoid segregation. The addition of water at any point in the system
of transportation, to facilitate the movement of concrete shall not be permitted. All chutes,
troughs and pipes, shall be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by
thoroughly flushing them with water after each run; water used for flushing shall be
discharged clear of the structure.
8.1.2
Vibrators
8.1.2.1 Concrete shall be compacted with mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented, if

necessary to obtain consolidation, by hand spreading, rodding and tamping. The vibrators
shall be of immersion type with operational frequency ranging between 8,000 to 12,000
vibrations per minute. All vibrators shall comply with IS: 2505. Screed board concrete
vibrators or concreting vibrating tables or form vibrators conforming to IS: 2506, 2514 and
4656 respectively shall be used where specifically required and directed by
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.1.2.2
Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted in a vertical position at intervals of about

600mm, depending upon the mix, the equipment used, and experience on work. The
vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly. The spacing shall provide some overlapping of the area
vibrated at each insertion. In no case shall vibrators be used to transport concrete inside the
forms. Over vibration or under vibration shall not be permitted as both are harmful. Hand
tamping in some cases may be allowed subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.1.2.3 In placing concrete in layers which are advancing horizontally as the work progresses, great
care shall be exercised to ensure adequate vibration, bonding and moulding of the concrete
between the succeeding batches.
8.1.2.4 The vibrator shall penetrate the layer being placed and also penetrate the layer below while
the under layer is still plastic to ensure good bond and homogeneity between the two layers
and prevent the formation of cold joints.
8.1.2.5
Care shall be taken to prevent contact of vibrators against all embedded reinforcing steel or
inserts. Vibrators shall not be allowed to come in contact with forms.
8.1.2.6 The use of form vibrators shall not be permitted for compaction of in-situ concrete without
specific authorization of the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.1.2.7 The use of surface vibrators of screed board type shall not be permitted for consolidation of
concrete under ordinary conditions. However, for thin slabs (of thickness less than 200mm)
surface vibration by such vibrators may be permitted, upon approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.1.2.8 Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and the disposition
of vibrators shall be carefully planned to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid surface
blemishes.
8.2
Transportation
8.2.1
All concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit such as
formwork as rapidly as possible using suitable buckets, dumpers, pumps, transit mixers
containers or conveyors which shall be mortar leak tight. Care shall be taken to prevent the
segregation or loss of the ingredients and maintaining the required workability. For
structural concrete produced from Ready Mixed Concrete/ Batching Plants, concrete shall
be transported from the plants to the sites only by transit mixers and Delivery Ticket for
each delivery of concrete shall be maintained by the contractor.
k_31
fg-af 22-&-g
r=r,ort aff.pros-,0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Govt of Incha Unclerlaking)

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 10 of 30
8.2.2
During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be transported in deep containers. Other suitable
methods to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather and heat loss in cold
weather may also be adopted. All equipment used for transporting and placing of concrete
shall be maintained in clean condition. All buckets, hoppers, chutes, dumpers and other
equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned after each use.
8.3
Placing and Compaction
8.3.1
Before placing concrete, all soil surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be
placed shall be well compacted and free from standing water, mud or debris. Soft or
yielding soil shall be removed and replaced, with lean concrete or with selected soils/sand
and compacted to the density as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The surface of absorptive
soil (against which concrete is to be placed) shall be moistened thoroughly so that moisture
is not drawn from the freshly placed concrete. Similarly, for concrete to be placed on
formworks, all chippings, shavings and sawdust etc. shall be removed from the interior of
the forms before the concrete is placed.
8.3.2
Concrete shall not be placed until the formwork, the placement of reinforcing steel,
embedded parts; pockets etc. have been inspected and approved by the Engineer- in-Charge.
Any accumulated water on the surface of the bedding layer shall be removed by suitable
means before start of placement. No concrete shall be placed on a water covered surface.
8.3.3
Concrete shall be discharged by vertical drop only and the drop height shall not normally
exceed 1.5 metre throughout all stages of delivery until the concrete comes to rest in forms.
However, drop height can be relaxed by the Engineer-in-Charge as per the provisions given
under Cl. 8.1.1. For continuous concreting operation windows of suitable size shall be kept
in the formwork or chutes shall be used to avoid segregation of concrete.
8.3.4
Concrete shall be deposited as near as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling.
Concrete shall be placed in successive horizontal layers. The bucket loads, or other units of
deposit, shall be placed progressively along the face of the layer with such over-lap as will
facilitate spreading the layer of uniform depth and texture with a minimum of hand
shoveling. Any tendency to segregation shall be corrected by shovelling coarse aggregates
into mortar rather than mortar on the coarse aggregates. Such a tendency for segregation
shall be corrected by redesign of mix, change in process or other means, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
8.3.5
All struts, stays and braces (serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and
alignment pending the placing of concrete at their locations) shall be removed when the
concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These shall
not be buried in the concrete. Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted with vibrators and
fully worked around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures and into corners of formwork
before setting commences and shall not be subsequently disturbed. Methods of placing shall
be such as to preclude segregation and avoid displacement of reinforcement or formwork.
The formation of stone-pockets or mortar bondage in corners and against face forms shall
not be permitted. Should these occur, they shall be dug out, reformed and refilled to
sufficient depth and shape for thorough bonding as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Care
shall be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement and embedded inserts or movement of
formwork.
8.3.6
Unless otherwise approved, concrete shall be placed in single operation to the full thickness
of foundation rafts, slabs, beams and similar members. Concrete shall be placed
continuously until completion of the part of the work between approved construction joints
or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.3.7
The method of placing and compaction employed in any particular section of the work shall
be to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 1282 of 1744
Page 1283 of 1744
.311 .1
1&.11 1812-e'g
14.1R71 cl,ane' an,~71)

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED & STRUCTURAL WORKS - PLAIN &
IA Govt ot InOta UndeltakIngt
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 11 of 30
8.3.8
During hot weather (atmospheric temperature above 40 degree Celsius) or cold weather
(atmospheric temperature below 5 degree Celsius, the concreting shall be done as per the
procedure set out in IS: 7861).
8.3.9
Concrete that has set standing and becomes stiffened shall not be used in the work.
8.3.10
Continuous Concreting
Where called out on the drawings, continuous concreting shall be done in a single operation
as per the requirements of IS: 456 and IS: 2974. Sufficient "Windows" shall be left in the
formwork for pouring & compaction of concrete and inspection. These windows shall be
fixed tight once the level of concrete reaches their levels.
8.3.11
Concreting under special conditions

a)
Work in extreme weather conditions during hot or cold weather, the concreting shall be
done as per procedure set out in IS: 7861(Part 1) or IS: 7861 (Part2).
b)
Under water concreting shall be as per clause 14.2 of IS: 456.
8.4
Items Embedded in Concrete
8.4.1
Concreting shall not be started unless the electrical conduits, pipes, fixtures etc., wherever
required, are laid by the concerned agency. The Contractor shall afford all the facilities and
maintain co-ordination of work with other agencies engaged in electrical and such other
works as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
8.4.2
Before concreting, the Contractor shall provide, fabricate and lay in proper position all metal
inserts, anchor bolts, pipes etc. (which are required to be embedded in concrete members) as
per relevant drawings and directions of Engineer-in-Charge.
8.4.3
All embedment, inserts etc. shall be fully held and secured in their respective positions by
the concerned agencies to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge so as to avoid any
dislocation or displacement during the concreting operations. The Contractor shall take all
possible care during concreting to maintain these embedment/inserts in their exact locations.
9.0
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
9.1
Construction joints shall be provided in position as shown or described on the drawings or

as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Such joints shall be kept to the minimum. These
shall be straight and at right angles to the direction of main reinforcement and shall be
placed at accessible locations to permit cleaning out of laitance, cement slurry and unsound
concrete.
9.2
In a column, the joint shall be formed about 100mm to 150mm below the Iowest soffit of the
beams framing into it. Concrete in a beam and slab shall be placed throughout without a
joint but if the provision of a joint is unavoidable, the joint shall be vertical and located
within 1/3 to 1/4 of the span, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
9.3
When stopping the concrete on a vertical plane in slabs and beams, an approved stop board
shall be placed with necessary slots for reinforcement bars. The construction joints shall be
keyed by providing a triangular or trapezoidal fillet nailed on the stop board. Inclined joints
shall not be permitted. Any concrete flowing through the joints of stop board shall be
removed soon after the initial set. When concrete is stopped on a horizontal plane, the
surface shall be roughened and cleaned after the initial set and a triangular or trapezoidal
groove shall be provided for keying with the new concrete later.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
er,r5r7,15,:ro,
IA
Govt of Indo Undertaking)

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 12 of 30
9.4
When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall be
cleared of any foreign materials and roughened to expose the tips of the coarse aggregate.
This may be done by manual chipping of concrete, with a high pressure water jet or by any
other appropriate means as per Engineer-in-Charge's directions. It shall then be swept clean
and thoroughly washed and wetted before any new concrete is poured. Any set mortar or
concrete sticking to the exposed reinforcing rods in and around such joints shall be
thoroughly removed. The reinforcements shall be wire brushed and washed just before
pouring any cement slurry or mortar. For vertical joints neat cement slurry shall be applied
on the surface before it is dry. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a layer
of mortar about 10 to 15mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the
cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly
mixed and applied immediately before placing new concrete.
9.5
Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the
wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles
of aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free water removed. The
surface shall then be coated with neat cement slurry. On this surface layer of concrete not
exceeding 150mm in thickness shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old
work, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots; work thereafter shall
proceed in normal way.
10.0
SEPARATION JOINT
10.1
Separation joint shall be obtained by using an approved Alkathene sheet stuck on the surface
against which concrete shall be placed. Adequate care shall be taken to cause no damage to
the sheet.
11.0
EXPANSION JOINTS/ISOLATION JOINT
11.1
Expansion/ Isolation joints in structures shall be formed in the positions and to the shapes
shown in the relevant drawings. Joints shall be filled with joint filling material as stipulated
in the drawings/schedule of rates. Isolation joints shall be provided around all equipment
foundations, columns, pedestals, trenches etc. on grade.
12.0
WATER STOPS
PVC water stops as per EIL Specification No. 6-68-0002 for materials shall be accurately
cut, fitted and integrally joined as per manufacturer's specifications to provide a continuous,
watertight diaphragm at all points.
The water stops shall be located and embedded at expansion/contraction/ construction joints
as indicated in the drawings or directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Adequate provision shall be made for the support and protection of water stops during the
progress of the work. Damaged water stops shall be replaced and/or repaired as directed.
13.0
PROTECTION OF FRESHLY LAID CONCRETE
13.1
Newly placed concrete shall be protected, by approved means, from rain, sun and wind.
Concrete placed below the ground level shall be protected from falling earth during and
after placing. Surface shall be kept free from contact with such ground or with water
draining from such ground during placing of concrete for a period of at least 3 days, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The ground water around newly poured
concrete shall be kept to an approved level by pumping or other approved means of drainage
and adequate steps shall be taken to prevent floatation and flooding. Steps shall be taken to
protect immature concrete from damage by debris, loading, vibration, abrasion, mixing with
Page 1284 of 1744
Page 1285 of 1744
IMr
31
s12
Rm1JPTA)

ENGINEERS
)A Go vt of Indo Uncienaking)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 13 of 30
deleterious materials that may, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, impair the strength
and/or durability of the concrete.
14.0 CURING
14.1
Concrete shall be cured by keeping it continuously moist wet for the specified period of time
to ensure complete hydration of cement and its hardening. Curing shall be started after 8
hours of placement of concrete in normal weather, and in hot weather after 4 hours. The
water used for curing shall be of the same quality as that used for making of concrete.
Curing shall be assured by use of an ample water supply under pressure in pipes, with all
necessary appliances such as hose, sprinklers etc. A layer of sacking, canvas, hessian, or
other approved material, which will hold moisture for long periods and prevent loss of
moisture from the concrete, shall be used as covering. Type of covering which would stain,
disfigure or damage the concrete, during and after the curing period, shall not be used. Only
approved covering shall be used for curing.
Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be maintained continuously in a damp or wet condition
for at least the first 7 days after placing of concrete.
The Contractor shall have all equipment and materials required for curing on hand and ready
to use before concrete is placed.
For curing the concrete in pavements, floors, flat roofs or other Level surfaces, the ponding
method of curing shall be used. For the first 24 hours after concreting, the concrete shall be
cured by use of wet sacking, canvas, hessian etc. The minimum water depth of 25mm for
ponding shall be maintained. The method of containing the ponded water shall be approved
by the Engineer-in-Charge. The ponded areas shall be kept continuously filled with water,
and leaks, if any, shall be promptly repaired. Areas cured by ponding method shall be
cleared of all debris and foreign materials after curing period is over.
Alternatively, membrane curing may be used in lieu of moist curing with the permission of
the Engineer-in-Charge. Such compounds shall be applied to all exposed surfaces of the
concrete by spraying or brushing as soon as possible after the concrete has set. Minimum
film thickness of such curing compounds shall be as per the recommendation of the
manufacturer so as to obtain an efficiency of 90% as specified by BS-8110. This film of
curing compound shall be fully removed from the concrete surface after the curing period
specified earlier. Engineer-in-Charge may not allow curing by curing compounds for those
surfaces where use of curing compound may be detrimental to application of future finishes
over the concrete. Impermeable membranes such as polyethylene sheeting closely covering
the concrete surface may also be used.
14.2
For concretes containing Portland pozzolana cement or Portland slag cement, the curing
period as given in Cl. 14.1 shall be doubled. Curing by ponding shall, however, commence
after the first 24 hours of concreting.
15.0
FIELD TESTS
15.1
Grading Test
Grading test on fine and coarse aggregates shall be carried out as per IS: 2386 at intervals
specified by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The mandatory tests and their frequencies shall be done as given in Table-3A & 3B below:

_11
Lir
1.741,R
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
c751...1.7051.11
(A Govt of incha Undertalongt

6 -68 -0004 Rev.6

Page 14 of 30
TABLE 3A
(For Concrete prepared at site by using Mechanical mixers)
MANDATORY TESTS ON SAND & STONE AGGREGATES
S.
No
1.
TEST
MATERIAL
Sand
FIELD / LAB TEST
MIN. QTY OF
MATERIAL/
WORK FOR
CARRYING
OUT TEST
(a) Bulking of sand
Field Test
20 m3
(b) Silt content
Field Test
20 m3
(c) Particle size

distribution
Field or Lab as 40 m3
decided
by
the
Engineer-in-Charge
FREQUENCY OF
TESTING*
3
Every 20 m or part
thereof or more frequently
as decided by the
Engineer-in-Charge
1) Every 40 m3 of fine
aggregate/sand required
in RCC works only
2) Every 80 m3 of fine
aggregate/ sand
required for other items
2.
Stone
aggregate
General visual
a) Percentage of
soft or deleterious inspection,
materials
laboratory test where
required by Engineer
-in-Charge or as
specified
b) Particle size
distribution
Field or lab. as
required by
Engineer-in-Charge
c)Ten percent Fine

value
Laboratory
As
required For all quantities
by Engineerin-Charge
45 m3
For every 45 m3 or part

thereof as decided by
Engineer-in-Charge
45 m3
Initial test and subsequent

test as & when required by
Engineer-in-Charge
* Fresh testing is mandatory whenever there is change in Source of materials.

Page 1286 of 1744
Page 1287 of 1744
Si
2fjleg
1.1127f ,fraw 0,T JafiA)

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IP Govt of inda
Undeft3M.9)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 15 of 30
TABLE 3B
(Refer Cl. 4.4 & 4.6.1 of IS:4926)
(For Ready Mixed Concrete supplied by Ready Mixed Concrete Plants
or from on/off-site Batching Plants)
MATERIALS TESTING REQUIREMENTS
S.
No
AGGREGATE
PROPERTY/
PARAMETER
1.
Grading
TYPE OF
AGGREGATE
ASSESSMENT
OF TYPICAL
PROPERTIES
AND HIGH
TEST RATE*
NORMAL
MONITORING
AND LOW
TEST RATE*
Sand/Fine
Weekly
Monthly
Coarse-Single
sized/ Graded
Weekly
Monthly
Weekly
3 Monthly
All Types
Weekly
3 Monthly
All Types
Monthly
6 Monthly
Sand
Weekly
Monthly
REQUIREMENT FOR
NORMAL MONITORING
AND LOW TEST RATE
Last 8 results conform to

IS 383 or representative
values
Particle density
2.
3.
-Oven Dry
-Saturated Surface Dry
-Apparent
Absorption
All Types
Bulk Density
4.
- Loose
- Compacted
Last 4 results
0.04 percent
Last 4 results
0.04 percent
Last 4 results
75kg/m3
5.
Fines(Silt)
Content
Coarse
Monthly
3 Monthly
Last 10 results
<75 percent maximum
allowed
Aggregate Impact
Value
Coarse
As specified
As specified
7.
10 % Fines
Coarse
Yearly
Yearly
8.
Flakiness
Coarse
2 Weekly
6 Monthly
Last 3 results conform to

standard
9.
Chloride Content
All Types
Weekly
6 Monthly
Last 3 results
< 0.01 percent
Coarse
Yearly/
Source Change
Yearly/
Source Change
Fine and
Coarse
5 Yearly/
Source Change
A11 Types
5 Yearly
Aggregate Abrasion
10. Value
(Los Angeles Method)
11.
Soundness
12 .
Potential Alkali
Aggregate
Reactivity Including
Petrography
13.
Petrographic
Description
Fine and
Coarse
(General)
*Note : The high or low test rates apply in accordance with the following conditions:
a) High test rate
i) To establish the typical characteristics of an aggregate, and
ii) When significant changes in properties occur outside the tolerances for low test rates
given.
b) Low test rate
i) When the typical characteristics of the aggregate have been established, and
ii) When subsequent tests lie within the tolerances for low test rates given
tafaj-dg
'
cwowt ,1, ~3,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in GoN
undertakng)

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 16 of 30
15.2
Compaction Factor Test /Slump Test of Concrete
15.2.1
For structural quality concrete (excluding pavements, flooring etc.) at least one Slump Test
shall be made for every compressive strength test carried out. More frequent tests shall be
made if there is a distinct change in working conditions or if required by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
In case of Ready Mixed Concrete, provisions of IS: 4926 shall be followed.
15.2.2
For structural quality concrete for pavements & floorings, measurement of workability shall
be by determination of compacting factor. Value of compacting factor of 0.75 to 0.8 shall
generally be acceptable.
15.3
Strength Test of Concrete
15.3.1
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as per IS: 1199 and cubes shall be made, cured
and tested at 28 days in accordance with IS: 516.
15.3.2
In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of concrete, optional tests on beams
for modulus of rupture at 72+2 hours or at 7 days, or compressive strength tests at 7 days
may be carried out in addition to 28 days compressive strength tests. For this purpose, the
values shall be arrived at based on actual testing. In all cases, the 28 days compressive
strength specified in Table-1 shall alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the
concrete in accordance with clause 15.3.9.
15.3.3
Sampl ing Procedure

A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete batch shall have
a reasonable chance of being tested that is, the sampling should be spread over the entire
period of concreting and cover all mixing units.
15.3.4
Frequency of Sampling
The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete for each grade shall be in accordance with
Table-4.
TABLE 4
(Refer Cl. 15.2.2 of IS:456)
FREQUENCY OF CONCRETE SAMPLING
Quantity of concrete in the work (m3)
Number of samples
1-5
6-15
16-30
31-50
51 & above
1
2
3
4
4 plus one additional sample for each
additional 50m3 or part thereof.
At least one sample shall be taken from each shift.

When concrete is produced at continuous production units such as ready mixed concrete/
batching plants, atleast one sample shall be taken for every 50m3 of concrete or after every
50 batches, whichever occurs at a greater frequency or as decided by the Engineer-inCharge. Samples shall be avoided from the first and the last cubic metre of concrete mix in a
lot.
Page 1288 of 1744
Page 1289 of 1744
71
(5?..11 22eg
.it271 c,cm,C1,13,
1"41,
411
15.3.5

ENG1NEERS
1NDIA LIMITED & STRUCTURAL WORKS PLAIN &
A Govt ol Ind. Undeltakng)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 17 of 30
Test Specimen
Three test specimens shall be made for each sample for testing at 28 days. Additional cubes
may be required for various purposes such as to determine the strength of concrete at 7 days
or at the time of striking the formwork or to check the testing error. Additional samples may
also be required for testing samples cured by accelerated methods as described in IS: 9013.
The specimen shall be tested as described in IS: 516.
15.3.6
Identification mark on concrete test cubes:

The following numbering system shall be adopted on each 150mm cube:
First line: ZZ
(Alpha code assigned by the Engineer -in-Charge to the

Contractor for a particular contract starting with AA and
progressing to AB, AC and so on).
Second line: XXXX
(Unique integer in ascending order starting from 1).
Third line: DD-MM-YY (Date of casting of cube)

15.3.7
Test Results of Sample

The test results of the sample shall be the average of the strength of three specimens. The
individual variation should not be more than + 15 percent of the average. If more, the test
results of the sample shall be considered invalid.
15.3.8
Standard Deviation
Standard deviation for each grade of concrete shall be calculated separately.
Standard deviation based on test results of samples:
a)
The total number of test samples required to constitute an acceptable record for
calculation of standard deviation shall be not less than 30. Attempts shall be made to
obtain the 30 samples, as early as possible, when a mix is used for the first time.
b)
For design of mix in the first instance, the value of standard deviation given in Table 8
of IS: 456, Amendment No. 4 may be assumed.
c)
As soon as sufficient results of samples are available, actual calculated standard

deviation shall be used and the mix design shall be revised/ updated. However, when
adequate past records for a similar grade exist and justify to the designer a value of
standard deviation different from that shown in Table 8 of IS: 456, Amendment No. 4,
it shall be permissible to use that value.
d) For additional requirement on standard deviation refer clause 9.2.4 of IS : 456.

15.3.9
Acceptance Criteria
15.3.9.1 Compressive Strength

The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirement when both the
conditions as given in col. 2 & co1.3 of Table-5 for that particular grade of concrete are
simultaneously met. For working out standard deviation compressive test result of date wise
serially logged 30 sample test result shall be used.
15.3.9.2 Flexural Strength
The concrete shall be deemed to comply with flexural strength requirements when both the
following conditions are simultaneously met:
a) The mean strength determined from any group of four non-overlapping consecutive
test results exceeds the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.3 N/mm2.
1/431
af 02eg
$ig-
trt,,f v-tv,
prtav~11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
GoA of Inda Undettakinit

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 18 of 30
(For non overlapping consecutive compressive test result any one alternate set of four
samples shall be used for verification of compliance to clause no. 16.1.a of IS 456)
b) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic
strength less 0.3 N/mm2
Table-5
(Refer Cl. 16.1 & 16.3 of IS:456)
Characteristic Compressive Strength Compliance Requirement
Specified
Grade
M15 or above
Mean of the Group of 4 Non-Overlapping

Consecutive Test Results in N/mm2
> fe k + 0.825 x established standard deviation
(rounded off to nearest 0.5N/mm2)
or
> fek + 3 N/mm2 ,
Whichever is greater
Individual Test Results

2
in N/mm
> fek 3 N/mm2
NOTE : I) In the absence of established value of standard deviation, the values given in Table 8 of IS:456.
Amendment No. 4, may be assumed, and attempt should be made to obtain results of 30 samples as
early as possible to establish the value of standard deviation.
2) For concrete of quantity 30 m3 (where the number of samples to be taken is less than four as per the
frequency of sampling given in cl. 15.3.4, Table 4), the mean of test results of all such samples shall
be fck + 4 N/mm2, minimum and the requirement of individual test results shall be fck 2 N/mm2.
minimum. However, when the number of sample is only one as per Table 4, the requirement shall be
fck + 4 N/mm2.
15.3.9.3 Quantity of Concrete Represented by Strength Test Results

The quantity of concrete represented by group of four consecutive test results shall include
the batches from which first and last samples were taken together with all intervening
batches. Acceptance of concrete shall be applicable for serially logged 30 samples. In case
serially logged samples are less than 30 then standard deviation of adjoining previous
sample nets will be used for establishing acceptance criteria as per clause 16.1.a of IS: 456.
For the individual test result requirements given in col. 3 of Table-5 or in item (b) of
15.3.9.2, only the particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk.
Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified, the maximum quantity of concrete that
four consecutive test results represent shall be limited to 60m3.
15.3.9.4 If the concrete is deemed not to comply pursuant to Cl. 15.3.9.1 or 15.3.9.2, the structural
adequacy of the parts affected shall be investigated and any consequential action as needed
shall be taken (Refer Cl. 16.0).
15.3.9.5 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately.
15.3.9.6 Concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous or honey-combed, its placing has been
interrupted without providing a proper construction joint, the reinforcement has been
displaced beyond the tolerances specified, or construction tolerances have not been met.
However, the hardened concrete may be accepted after carrying out suitable remedial
measures and tests to the fullest satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
15.3.9.7 Tolerance in leveling of concrete surface at foundation/ pedestal top levet where grouting is
to be done:
Maximum Plan Dimension
Tolerance in leveling

Page 1290 of 1744
<2m
>2m but <4m
> 4m
+ 1 Omm
+ 1 Omm
+ 10mm
- lOmm
- 20 mm
- 25mm

31 --1
Og-ar faWz
Page 1291 of 1744
1~1 2112971Z 9713997719

ENGINEERS
IA Govt of Indo UndertakIng)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 19 of 30
15.3.9.8 Tolerance in dimensions of pocket:

20mm overall maximum tolerance on the size of pocket.
For pockets, chemically dissolvable moulds shall be preferred. Smooth removal of moulds
without affecting the pocket size shall be ensured.
16.0
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES
16.1
Inspection
To ensure that the construction complies with the design, an inspection procedure shall be
set up by the contractor and duly approved by the Engineer-in Charge covering materials
used, receipt of materials, their test results, records, workmanship and construction etc.
Contractor shall ensure that the surface which is to receive the grout is at proper level and so
are the openings for pockets as per Cl. 15.3.9.7 & 15.3.9.8.
16.2
16.3
Immediately after stripping the formwork, all concrete shall be carefully inspected and any
defective work or small defects either removed or made good before concrete has
thoroughly hardened.
Testing
In case of doubt regarding the grade or soundness of concrete used, either due to poor
workmanship or based on results of cube strength, compressive strength tests of concrete on
the basis of clause 17.4 of IS: 456 and/or load test as per clause 17.6 of IS: 456 shall be
carried out.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall be the final authority for interpreting the results of all tests
and shall decide upon the acceptance or otherwise. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge
shall be final and binding on the contractor. In case the results of the tests are unsatisfactory,
the Engineer-in-Charge may instruct the contractor to demolish and reconstruct the structure
or part thereof without any extra cost to the Owner.
16.4
Members other than Flexural Members

Members other than flexural members like columns etc. shall be referred to the designer to
investigate the structural adequacy. The decision of the designer shall be final and binding
on the contractor.
16.5
Non-destructive Tests
Non-destructive tests using Ultrasonic Pulse Velocity and Rebound Hammer methods shall
be resorted to for checking the soundness of concrete placed and shall be as per the
directions of Engineer-in-Charge. The testing shall be based on IS: 13311, Part-1. However,
the Rebound Hammer test (IS: 13311, Part-2) shall only be used in combination with other
tests (Destructive or Non-Destructive) for checking the concrete quality.
17.0
FINISHING OF CONCRETE
17.1
On striking the formwork, all surface defects such as bulges, ridges and honey-combing etc.
observed shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Engineer-in-Charge
may, at his discretion allow rectification by necessary chipping and packing or grouting with
concrete or cement mortar. However, if honey-combing or sagging is of such extent as being
undesirable, the Engineer-in-Charge may reject the work totally and his decision shall be
binding. No extra payment shall be made for rectifying these defects, demolishing and
reconstructing the structure. However, quantity of cement actually used for this purpose may
gar laf 54-'

eg
,12,7g1 0,1 3,7-9,1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Govt ot
Indla lJnderldkng)

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 20 of 30
be considered for reconciliation of materials. A11 burrs and uneven faces shall be rubbed
smooth with the help of carborundum stone.
The surface of non-shuttered faces shall be smoothened with a wooden float to give a finish
similar to that of the rubbed down shuttered faces. Concealed concrete faces shall be left as
from the formwork except that honey-combed surface shall be made good as specified
above. The top faces of slabs not intended to be covered shall be levelled and floated to a
smooth finish to the rises or falls shown on the drawings or as directed. The floating shall
not be executed to the extent of bringing excess fine materials to the surface. The top faces
of slabs intended to be covered with screed, granolithic or similar finishes, shall be left with
a rough finish.
17.2
Repair and Replacement of Unsatisfactory Concrete
17.2.1
Repair shall be made as soon as possible after the forms are removed and before the
concrete becomes too hard with prior permission from the Engineer-in-Charge, in writing.
Stone pockets, segregation patches and damaged areas shall be chipped out and the edges
undercut slightly to form a key. A11 loose material shall be washed out before patching. No
excess water shall be left in the cavity, but the concrete shall be damp. A good bond
between the patch and parent concrete shall be obtained by sprinkling dry cement on the wet
surface or by throwing mortar with force on to the wetted concrete, or by brush in a coat of
thick cement grout of about 1:1 (1 cement:1 sand) just before applying the patching
material. Before this has dried, the remainder of the patch shall be filled with mortar or
concrete, depending on the extent of the repair.
17.2.2
Cement concrete/mortar used in repair of exposed surfaces shall be made with cement from
the same source as that used in concrete and blended with sufficient amount of white
Portland cement to produce the same colour as in the adjoining concrete. The proportions of
ingredients shall be same as those used in parent concrete. The mortar shall be as dry as
possible and well compacted into the cavity. All filling shall be tightly bonded to the
concrete and shall be sound, free from shrinkage cracks after the filling has been cured and
dried.
17.2.3
For larger repairs to hardened concrete, necessary formwork bearing tightly at the edges of
the cavity shall be provided. Concrete shall be chipped out to a depth of at least 100mm and
preferably 150mm. Mortar shall be scrubbed into all surfaces with a wire brush before
placing the concrete. Damaged reinforcement shall be adequately spliced with new steel so
as to maintain the original strength. Additional reinforcement, if required in the patch, shall
be provided as per the instructions of Engineer-in-Charge.
17.2.4
In case, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge, defects in the concrete is excessive or

beyond repair, the contractor shall either redo the structure or take other remedial measures
as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
final and binding to all in this respect.
17.2.5
Approved epoxy formulation for bonding fresh concrete used for repairs with already
hardened concrete shall be used by the Contractor if asked by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with EIL Specification 6-68-0056 and the
instructions of the manufacturer.
17.2.6
All repair works due to non-conformance or non-adherence to specification, if allowed by

the Engineer-in-Charge, shall be carried out free of cost to the owner.
17.3
Curing of Patched Work

Immediately after patching is completed, the patched area shall be covered with an approved
non-staining water saturated material which shall be kept wet and protected against sun and
wind for a period of 12 hours. Thereafter, the patched area shall be kept continuously wet by
a fine spray or sprinkling for not less than 10 days.
Page 1292 of 1744

ENGINEERS
31
OgzIrl~:g
Page 1293 of 1744
,7,n1c MIJ,
10-A
IA Govt of Indo Undertakm9)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 21 of 30
18.0 WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT

Wherever specified, concrete elements (whether cast-in-situ or precast) exposed to
atmosphere shall be provided with three coats of cement based waterproof paint as per
IS:5410 provided these surfaces shall not contain any protective coating due to architectural/
SMMS requirements. Prior to application of the paint, the surface shall be prepared to
remove all foreign particles, loose materials, extra deposited concrete lumps, etc. using
appropriate mechanical/ manual means.
19.0 FORM WORK
19.1
General
19.1.1
Forms for concrete shall be of plywood conforming to IS: 6461 (Part-5) or steel or as
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall give smooth and even surface after removal
thereof.
19.1.2
If it is desired by Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall prepare, before commencement

of actual work, design and drawings for formwork and get them approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. For details regarding design, detailing etc., reference may be made to
IS: 14687.
19.1.3
Form work and its supports shall maintain their correct position and be to correct shape and
profile so that the final concrete structure is within the limits of dimensional tolerances
specified below, unless required otherwise, for functional/aesthetic reasons. The decision of
the Engineer-in-Charge shall be final and binding in this regard.
(a) Deviation from specified dimensions
of cross section of columns and beams.
- 5mm to +10mm
(b) Deviation from dimensions of footings (see Note below)

i)
Dimensions in plan
-10mm to +50mm
ii)
Eccentricity
0.02 times the width of the footing in the

direction of deviation but not more than
50 mm.
iii) Thickness
-10mm to +50mm or +0.05 times the

specified thickness, whichever is less
Note: These tolerances apply to Cast-in-situ concrete dimensions only, not to

positioning of vertical reinforcing steel or dowels.
(c) Deviation in length (major dimension of single unit)
upto 3m
3m to 4.5m
4.5m to 6m
Additional deviation for every subsequent 6m.
+6mm
+9mm
+12mm
+6mm
(d) Deviation in straightness or bow (deviation from specified line) for a single or
continuous member) e.g. beam, column or slab edge.
upto 3m
3m to 6m
6m to 12m
additional for every subsequent 6m.
6mm
9mm
12mm
6mm
$gU 02eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
O> Go, ol india Undeflaloog)

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 22 of 30
(e) Deviation in squareness shall be measured taking the longer of two adjacent sides as the
base line.
The shorter side shall not vary in its distance from a perpendicular so that the difference
between the greatest and shortest dimensions exceeds 6mm. For this purpose, any error
due to lack of straightness shall be ignored. Squareness shall be checked with respect to
the straight lines that are most nearly parallel with the features being checked. When the
nominal angle is other than 90 degree, the included angle between check lines shall be
varied accordingly.
(f) Deviation in twist shall be within a limit such that any corner shall not be more than the
limit given below from the plane containing other three corners:
upto 600mm wide and upto 6m in length
over 600mm wide and for any length
: 6mm
:
12mm
(g) Maximum deviation in flatness from a 1.5m straight edge placed in any position on a
nominally plain surface shall not exceed 6mm.
(h) Tolerance in leveling of concrete surface at foundation/ :
pedestal top level where grouting is to be done
As per Cl. 15.3.9.7
19.2
Form Requirement
19.2.1
The formwork shall be true, rigid and adequately braced both horizontally as well as
diagonally. The forms shall have smooth and even surface and be sufficiently strong to
carry, without deformation, the dead weight of the green concrete, working load, wind load
and also the side pressure exerted by the green concrete. As far as practical, clamps shall be
used to hold the forms together. Where use of nails is unavoidable minimum number of
nails shall be used. Projected part of nail shall not be bent or twisted for easy withdrawal.
19.2.2
Where through tie rods are required to be put to hold the formwork and maintain accurate
dimension, they shall always be inserted through a precast concrete block (of same mix
proportion as is to be used for concreting) with a through hole of bigger diameter. The
Precast block shall tightly fit against in inner faces of formwork. The holes left after the
withdrawal of tie rods shall be fully grouted with cement-sand mortar of same proportion as
that used for concrete. However, use of such precast block shall in no case impair the
desired appearance or durability of the structure. No such tie rods shall be used in any liquid
retaining or basement structure.
19.2.3
Tie wires shall be permitted only upon approval of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be cut
off flush with the face of the concrete or counter sunk, filled and finished in the manner
specified in clause 17.
19.2.4
Form joints shall not permit any leakage. The formwork shall be strong enough to withstand
the effect of vibrations practically without any deflection, bulging, distortion or loosening of
its components.
19.2.5
Forms for beams and slabs (span more than 6.0m) shall have camber of 1 in 500 so as to
offset the deflection and assume correct shape and line after deposition of concrete. For
cantilevers, the camber at free end shall be 1/100th of the projected length. Where
architectural considerations and adjunctive work are critical, smaller form cambers shall be
adopted as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 1294 of 1744
Page 1295 of 1744
1- 1
tg-ar02-eg
1.12",
t-f c-of t 013~ )
19.2.6

ENGINEERS
IA
Govt of incha unoertax.g)
6-68-0004
Rev.6
Page 23 of 30
All vertical wall forms may be designed and constructed for the following minimum
pressure. The pressures listed in Table-6 are intended as guide only and the Contractor shall
ensure that the formwork is adequately strong and sturdy.
TABLE - 6
MINIMUM DESIGN PRESSURE FOR WALL FORMWORK
Pressure in KN/m2
Rate of pour in meter/hour
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.5
at 10 (in Celsius)
at 24 (in Celsius)
36.0
40.0
44.0
46.0
29.0
32.0
35.0
37.0
A11 horizontal forms shall be designed and constructed to withstand the dead load of the
green concrete, reinforcement, equipment, material, embedment and a minimum live load of
2.0 kN/m2.
19.3
Inspection of Forms
Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column and wall forms and other
places necessary to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Before concrete is placed, all forms
shall be carefully inspected to ensure that they are properly placed, sufficiently rigid and
tight, thoroughly cleaned, properly treated and free from foreign material. The complete
form work shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the
reinforcement bars are placed in position. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any
way, either before or during the placing of concrete, the work shall be stopped until the
defects have been rectified as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.4
Cleaning and Treatment of Formwork

The surfaces of forms that would come in contact with concrete shall be well treated with
approved non-staining form release agents such as soft soap, oil, emulsions etc. Release
agents shall be applied so as to provide a thin uniform coating to the forms without coating
the reinforcement.
19.5
Chamfers and Fillets

A11 corners and angles shall be formed with 45 degree mouldings to form chamfers or fillets
on the finished concrete. The standard dimensions of chamfers and fillets, unless otherwise
detailed or specified shall be 25x25mm. For heavier work chamfers or fillets shall be
50x5Omm. Care shall be exercised to ensure accurate mouldings. The diagonal face of the
moulding shall be planed or surfaced to the same texture as the forms to which it is attached.
19.6
Reuse of forms
Before reuse, all forms shall be thoroughly scrapped, cleaned, examined and when
necessary, repaired and retreated, before resetting. Formwork shall not be reused, if declared
unfit or un-serviceable by the Engineer-in-Charge.
19.7
Removal of Forms/Stripping Time

In the determination of time for removal of forms, consideration shall be given to the
location and character of the structures, the weather and other conditions including the
setting and curing of the concrete and material used in the mix.
$1g-zar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lafr-e-g
>37, oorooro
IA Go, of incha Undertalongf

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 24 of 30
Forms and their supports shall not be removed without the approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Forms shall not be released until the concrete has achieved a strength
of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of removal.
The formwork shall be removed without shock and methods of form removal likely to cause
over stressing or damage to the concrete shall not be adopted. Supports shall be removed in
such a manner as to permit the concrete to uniformly and gradually take the stresses due to
its own weight.
In normal circumstances when average air temperature exceeds 15 degree Celsius during the
period under consideration after pouring of concrete and where ordinary Portland cement is
used, forms may generally be removed after expiry of following periods.
(a) Walls, columns and vertical faces of all
structural members
16 to 24 hours as may be decided

(b) Slabs (props left under)
3 days.
(c) Beam Soffits (props left under)
7 days.
(d) Removal of props under slabs:

Spanning upto 4.5m.
Spanning over 4.5m.
(e) Removal of props under beams and arches:
Spanning upto 6m
Spanning over 6m
7 days.
14 days.
14 days.
21 days
(0 Cantilever Construction Formwork shall remain till structures for counter acting or
bearing down have been erected and have attained sufficient strength (minimum 14
days).
Notes:
i)
For other cements, the stripping time recommended for ordinary Portland cement shall
be suitably modified as per the instructions of the Engineer- in-Charge.
ii) The number of props left under, their sizes, supporting arrangement, and disposition
shall be such as to be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as
the case may be together with any live load likely to occur during curing or further
construction.
iii) Where the shape of the element is such that the formwork has re-entrant angles, the
form work shall be removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set, to avoid
shrinkage cracking occurring due to the restraint imposed.
iv) For rapid hardening cement, 3/7 of the above mentioned periods shall be considered
subject to a minimum of 16 hours.
v) For Portland pozzolana or low heat cement, 10/7 of the above mentioned periods shall
be considered.
19.8
Staging/Scaffolding
19.8.1
Staging/Scaffolding shall be properly planned and designed by the Contractor. Use of only
steel tubes is permitted for staging/scaffolding. The Contractor shall get it reviewed by
Page 1296 of 1744
Page 1297 of 1744
k311fo jti
I&Wg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOw Undettakingt

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 25 of 30
Engineer-in-Charge before commencement of work. While designing and during erection of

scaffolding/staging, the following measures shall be considered:
(a) Sufficient Bills or underpinnings in addition to base plates shall be provided particularly
where scaffolding is erected on soft grounds.
(b) Adjustable bases to compensate for uneven ground shall be used.
(c) Proper anchoring of the scaffolding/staging at reasonable intervals shall be provided in
each direction with the main structure wherever available.
(d) Horizontal braces shall be provided to prevent the scaffolding/staging from rocking.
(e) Diagonal braces shall be provided continuously from bottom to top between two
adjacent rows of uprights.
(f) The scaffolding/staging shall be checked at every stage for plumb line.
(g) Wherever the scaffolding/staging is found to be out of plumb line it shall be dismantled
and re-erected afresh and effort shall not be made to bring it in line with a physical
force.
(h) All nuts and bolts shall be properly tightened and care shall be taken that all
clamps/couplings are firmly tightened to avoid slippage
(i) Erection work of a scaffolding/staging under no circumstances shall be left totally to
semi-skilled or skilled workmen and shall be carried out under the supervision of a
technically qualified civil engineer of the Contractor.
19.8.2
For smaller works or works in remote areas, wooden ballies may be permitted for
scaffolding/staging by the Engineer-in-Charge at his sole discretion. The contractor must
ensure the safety and suitability of such works as described under clause 19.8.1 above.
20.0 EXPOSED/ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE WORK

20.1
Form Work
Other things remaining same as per clause 19.0, formwork shall be of high quality. Care
shall be taken to arrange the forms so that the joints between forms correspond with the
pattern indicated in the drawings. The forms shall be butting with each other in straight
lines, the corners of the boards being truly at right angles. The joints between the forms shall
cross in the two directions at right angles. The size of forms shall be so selected as to exactly
match with the pattern of forms impression on the concrete face indicated in the drawings.
Maximum care shall be taken to make the form work watertight. Burnt oil shall not be used
for treatment of forms. The Contractor shall be permitted reuse of forms brought new on the
work place only if forms are properly cared for, stored and treated after each use.
The Engineer-in-Charge may, at his absolute discretion, order removal of any forms
considered unsuitable for use in the work.
20.2
Finishing
Repairing to exposed concrete work shall be avoided. Rendering and plastering shall not be
done. Minor repairing, if unavoidable shall be done as specified in clause 17.0 with the
written permission of the Engineer-in-Charge.
$fg-ar
arrrm
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,r0571,
IA Goot of Intha UndertaMingt

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 26 of 30
21.0
REINFORCEMENT
21.1
The Contractor shall develop the bar bending schedule for all RCC structures/ structural
parts at no extra cost to the Owner and shall get it reviewed by the Engineer-in-charge.
Reinforcement shall be cut and bent to shape as per dimensions shown in the bar bending
schedule/ drawings.
If protective fusion bonded epoxy coating is required to be applied on reinforcement bars,
the same shall be done as per IS: 13620. All repairs to applied protective coating required
due to mishandling and/ or bending of reinforcement bars shall also be done as per relevant
clauses of IS:13620.
21.2
Straightening, Cutting and Bending

Procedure for cutting and bending shall be as given in IS: 2502. Bars shall be bent in a slow
and regular movement to avoid fractures by mechanical means only. In case bars are
supplied in coils, they shall be smoothly straightened without any kinks.
Cold twisted deformed bars shall be bent cold. Bars larger than 25mm in size (except cold
twisted deformed bars) may be bent hot at cherry red heat to a temperature not exceeding
850 Celsius as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge. The bars shall be allowed to
cool gradually without quenching.
Bars shall be cut & bend in a Bar Bending Machine. Bars which develops cracks or splits
after bending shall be rejected. A second bending of reinforcement bars shall be avoided but
when reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent back into
their original position, care should be taken to ensure that at no time is radius of the bend
less than 6 times bar diameter for high strength deformed bars. Care shall also be taken
when bending back the dowel bars to ensure that concrete around the bars is not damaged.
All bars shall be properly tagged for easy identification.
21.3
Placing and Fixing

All reinforcement shall be cleaned to ensure freedom from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil,
form releasing agents, grease or any other harmful material before placing them in position.
Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by concrete unless it is free from all such materials.
Rough handling and dropping of reinforcement from a height shall be avoided.
All reinforcement shall be fixed in the correct position and shall be properly supported to
ensure that displacement will not occur when the concrete is placed and compacted.
The uncoated reinforcement bars shall be tied at every intersection by two strands of 16
SWG black soft annealed binding wire. The Epoxy coated reinforcement bars shall be tied
with 2 strands of PVC coated GI 18 SWG wire at every intersection. Crossing bars shall not
be tack welded for assembly of reinforcement. The reinforcement bars shall be kept in
position by using the following methods:
a) In case of beam and slab construction, precast cover blocks (having the same sand
contents as the concrete which shall be placed) of size 40 x 40 mm and thickness equal
to the specified covers shall be placed firmly in between the bars and forms so as to
secure and maintain the specified covers over the reinforcement.
When reinforcement bars are placed in two or more layers in beams, the vertical
distance between the horizontal bars shall be maintained by introducing spacer bars at 1
to 1.2m centre to centre.
Page 1298 of 1744
Page 1299 of 1744
ENGINEERS
fdiagOINDIA
LIMITED
sL1r
.IRTY e92,7,2 nA3vn3,1)
IA Govt ol Ineia Undertakingt

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 27 of 30
b) In case of thick rafts & pile caps having two or multi layers of reinforcement, the
vertical distance between the horizontal bars shall be maintained by introducing suitable
chairs, spacers, etc.
c) In case of columns and walls, the vertical bars shall be kept in position by means of
timber templates with slots accurately cut in them. The templates shall be removed after
the concreting has been done below it.
d) Exposed portions of reinforcement bars shall not be subjected to impact or rough
handling and workmen will not be permitted to climb on extending bars until the
concrete has attained sufficient strength so that no movement of the bars in the concrete
is possible.
21.4
Special requirements for Handling, Stacking, Placing of Epoxy coated Reinforcing

bars.
Epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall be carefully handled and it shall be ensured that these do
not rub on any hard surface or against another epoxy coated/uncoated reinforcing bar
whether during conveying/transportation, stacking or placing.
During transportation and while stacking the epoxy coated reinforcing bars shall be placed
on wooden planks not spaced farther than 600mm. When placed in stacks the epoxy coated
reinforcing bars shall be neatly tied in bundles using PVC binding material.
The cut ends of bars shall be touched up with special touch up material of specifications as
provided by the coating agency. After cutting of the bar the application of touch up material
shall be completed within four hours.
While bending the bars the pins of work bench(s) shall be provided with a PVC or plastic
sleeve. Each bending operation on epoxy coated reinforcing bar shall be completed in time
not less than 90 seconds.
Epoxy coated reinforcing steel bar shall not be directly exposed to sun rays or rain, and shall
be protected with opaque polyethylene sheets or similar means as approved by the Engineer
in Charge.
While doing concreting the workmen or machinery shall not rest or move on the epoxy
coated reinforcing bars. Wooden planks shall suitably be placed to create proper gang-way.
21.5
Splicing/Overlapping
Only bars of full length shall be used as shown in the drawings. But where this cannot be
done, overlapping of bars shall be done as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
overlapping bars shall be tied with two strands of 16 SWG black soft annealed binding wire.
The overlaps shall be staggered for different bars and located at points along the span where
neither shear nor bending moment is maximum.
21.6
Welded Joints
Welding of reinforcing bars shall not be permitted without the written permission of the
Engineer-in- Charge. Where welding of reinforcing bars is permitted, it shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of IS: 2751 and IS: 9417. Welded joints shall be
located at suitable staggered positions. Tests shall be made as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge to prove that the joints are of the full strength of the bars. Maximum
one welded joint shall be allowed per bar.
grg-a-
21.7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ON Go, of incha Unclertakingf

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 28 of 30
Mechanical Connections (upto Seismic Zone-III as per IS:1893 Part-I)

The mechanical splices in reinforcement by means of couplers, clamps etc. shall be used (as
per manufacturer's specifications) with the written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Following tests, at the minimum, shall be conducted in advance to prove efficiency of the
coupled joint before putting them in actual use:
Code of conformance
Name of the Test
Testing Requirement
Static Tension &

Compression Test
Each connection shall develop atleast ASTM A370/

125% of the specified yield strength of ACI 318/
ISO 15835
the reinforcing bar
Permanent
Elongation (Stip)
Permanent elongation across the coupled

joint shall be less than 0.1mm after BS 8110/
loading at 60% of the yield strength of ISO 15835
the reinforcing bar
Deformation across the coupled joint

Moderate Oligocyclic shall be less than 0.3mm after subjecting
the joint to a series of 20 cycles with
(Seismic) Test
(Cyclic Tension & 90% tension as well as 50% compression
of the yield strength of the reinforcing
Compression Test)
bar
ISO 15835
All operations relating to reinforcement coupling shall be done by using manufacturer's

patented machine/ equipment in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge. Mechanical
connections shall be placed away from points of high stress and shall be staggered.
21.8
Tolerances on Placing of Reinforcement

Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, reinforcement shall be placed within
the following tolerances:
21.9
a) For effective depth 200mm or less
+ l Omm
b) For effective depth more than 200mm
+ 15mm
Substitution
When indicated diameter of reinforcement bar is not available, the Contractor shall use other
diameter of reinforcement bars on written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
21.10
Tolerance to Cover
The actual concrete cover shall not deviate from the required nominal cover by + 10mm
measured over the steel reinforcement including links.
22.0 PAYMENT
22.1
Plain and Reinforced Concrete
22.1.1
Payment for plain and reinforced cement concrete (cast- in-situ) shall be made on cubic
metre basis of the volume of the actual finished work done or as per approved construction
drawings, whichever is less and shall be inclusive of providing pockets, openings, recesses
of all sizes, chamfers, fillets, grooves, separation/ expansion/ isolation/ construction/
movement joints, curing by normal moist curing or using curing compound etc. as directed
by Engineer-in-Charge etc. The rates shall be deemed to include complete cost of getting the
Page 1300 of 1744
$fgzrr
02-eg
1.7,1twoxt,III~I)

ENGINEERS
A Govt ol Indo Undertak.9)
6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 29 of 30
respective mix designs approved, making and testing concrete cubes and carrying out other
tests including tests of various ingredients, as per specifications and as directed by
Engineer-in-Charge. Payment shall, however, be separately made for tests on concrete cubes
done by accelerated methods of curing as defined in IS: 9013.
22.1.2
No separate payment shall be made for any additive/ admixture/ Plasticizer/ Fibres used by
the contractor for accelerating or retarding the strength of concrete or for achieving specified
workability. The rate quoted shall be deemed to be inclusive of all costs related to any such
additive/admixture/ Plasticizer/ Fibres.
22.1.3
The rate shall however be exclusive of reinforcement, metal inserts, pipe sleeves, formwork,
water stops and any filler material in expansion/isolation joints.
22.1.4
Where the strength of concrete mix as indicated by tests, lies in between the strengths of any
two grades given in Table-1 and it is accepted by the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge, such
concrete shall be classified as a grade belonging to the lower of the two grades between
which it lies. In case the cube strength shows higher results than those specified for the
particular grade of the concrete, it shall not be placed in the higher grade nor shall the
Contractor be entitled for any extra payment on such account. The concrete giving lower
strength than specified may be accepted at reduced rates after satisfying the safety of the
structure by checking it with tests as specified or rejected entirely at the discretion of the
Engineer-in- Charge. The rejected concrete shall be dismantled at no extra cost to the owner
and no payment or extension of time shall be granted for the concrete so rejected and the
formwork and reinforcement used for the same. Cost of any material supplied by the Owner
free of cost shall be recovered from the Contractor at double the prevailing market rate. In
case the concrete of lower strength can be improved by carrying out some strengthening
measures entirely at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge, then the said measures
including all related tests shall be carried out by Contractor at his own cost. If the Contractor
is able to make up the strength to the required grade by such improvement measures to the
entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge, payment shall be made for the grade achieved.
However, if the strength of concrete is not made up to the strength of required grade,
payment shall be made only for the lower strength if such concrete is accepted by the
Engineer-in-Charge.
22.1.5
Deductions for openings, pockets etc. shall be as specified in relevant parts of IS 1200.
22.1.6
Payment under continuous concreting item in the schedule of rates shall be made only where
the total quantity of concrete between two consecutive construction joints specifically
called-out on the drawings exceeds 250 cubic metres. For any foundation/structure
involving concrete quantity upto 250 cubic metres between two consecutive construction
joints shown on drawings, the concrete shall not be measured or paid for under this category
(i.e. continuous concreting), even though the same is required to be constructed in single
pour. The rate quoted against this item shall be inclusive of all extra cost related to labour,
shuttering, staging and making all other arrangements for such continuous casting e.g.
provisions for adequate movement and storage spaces, special gangways, scaffolding,
additional construction equipments, adequate lighting and supervision while the work
continues round the clock etc. The rate shall also be inclusive of all costs related to
concreting in any thickness, shape and position and at any height or depth so as to avoid any
cold joint between specified construction joints.
Page 1301 of 1744
22.1.7 Form Work

Unless otherwise specified, payment for form work shall be on square metre basis of the
actual area in contact with the concrete cast. The rates shall be inclusive of keeping the
formwork for the full period as specified in the above clauses and removing the same after
the period is over. No extra payment shall be made for providing scaffolding/ staging/
access/ stairways/ ladders etc.
92e5
rn c.-1,rat 0,1,30,
11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, ol Ind. Underiakmgj

6-68-0004 Rev.6
Page 30 of 30
The rates shall be inclusive of any provision to be made or kept in the formwork for
providing dowels, inserts etc.
Superior quality formwork for exposed/architectural concrete work shall be measured and
paid separately under the relevant item in the schedule of rates.
22.2
Reinforcement
22.2.1
Payment for plain round mild steel reinforcement bars, high strength deformed steel bars
and epoxy coated reinforcing steel bar shall be on the basis of weight of bare steel
irrespective of any coating applied in metric tons. The weight of the bar shall be derived
from the sizes and corresponding unit weights given in IS:1786. Standard hook lengths,
chairs, spacer bars and authorized laps only shall be included in the weight calculated.
Binding wire shall not be weighed nor otherwise measured. Measurements for weight shall
not include cutting allowance etc.
22.2.2
Rate quoted for reinforcement shall include cost of supplying, decoiling, straightening,
cleaning, cutting, bending, placing, binding, welding (if required) and providing necessary
cover blocks of concrete.
22.2.3
Payment for a mechanical threaded coupler/ clamp shall be made by measuring the Lap
length of the respective rebar on which coupler/ clamp is used. The rate shall include supply
of complete assembly, fixing, testing etc. all complete.
22.3
Water Stops/Water Bars & Expansion/Isolation Joints
22.3.1
Payment for PVC water bars shall be made on running metre (RM) basis of the water stops
provided in position. Rate shall include supplying cutting, fixing, jointing by vulcanising or
any other approved method, wastage, etc. complete.
22.3.2
Payment for filler materials in Expansion/Isolation joints shall be made on running metre
basis of the joint provided. For boards provided at expansion/isolation joints, the
measurement shall be made on square metre basis. Rate shall be inclusive of supply, cutting,
fixing, jointing, wastage etc. complete.
22.4
Waterproof Cement Paint
22.4.1
Payment for waterproof cement paint as per Cl. 18.0 shall be made separately on Sqm basis.
Page 1302 of 1744

31
0231;:t2eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Underlaking)
VACUUM DEWATERING
CONCRETE SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 1 of 7
Trrw fqr-44-r
wrzi
fur-gm.
'(4
ki41
I Ch Ch
VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE

SYSTEM
21.08.14
29.01.10
06.04.00
REVISED AND REISSUED AS

REVISED AND REISSUED AS
REAFFIRMED AND REISSUED AS
AUG'94
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
, t,,, ,
VG
( i_.,---- c.
.CHANDA
L.PKM
NVK
PKM
SCH
DPN
RPM
SCJ
RS
SCK
GPL
VINAY
KUMAR
N. DUARI
MI
A. SONI
Standards
Prepared Checked Committee GM(E)
Convenor
by
by
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1303 of 1744
$fgu
ENGINEERS
22e'g w INDIA LIMITED
tvraar ashrvom,
IA Go0 ot Ind. undertak,n9)
SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:

Indian Standards
BIS
IS

Convenor :
Mr. P K Mittal
Members :
Mr. S Debnath (Geotech)

Mr. Rajan Srivastava
Mr. P J Singh
Mr. V S Chhaya (Projects)
Mr. Ravinder Kumar (Construction)
Page 1304 of 1744
:
.71_it4
-mar Offleg
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Govt of Ind. Undettalongt
SYSTEM

6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
2.0 REFERENCES
3.0 MATERIAL
4.0 GRADE OF CONCRETE
5.0 WATER-CEMENT RATIO
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT
6.0
7.0 CONCRETE LAYING
8.0 CONCRETE COMPACTION
9.0 VACUUM PROCESSING / DEWATERING
10.0 FLOATING & TROWELING
11.0 CURING
12.0 APPROACH, WORKING PLATFORM & FORM WORK
13.0 TESTING OF FINISHED FLOOR
14.0 PAYMENT
Page 1305 of 1744
Silf-_itli I
.
I sr r7P1 2WENZ M1 JP{. )
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot InO. Undertaiong)
SYSTEM
6 -68-0062 Rev.3
Page 4 of 7
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification defines the material, mixing, placing, curing, constructional and other
performance requirements for VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE SYSTEM for
concrete floor slab. Any other special requirements shown or noted on the drawings and
directed by the Engineer-in-Charge shall govern over the provision of this specification.
The PCC layer or other base course to provide base and to break the capillaries shall be as
per the drawings and governed by the relevant specifications.
1.2
Actual work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification and in consultation
with specialized firm undertaking the job to suit specific requirement at site such as rise and
fall of the floor slab, providing dowels for pedestals etc.
1.3
In case of conflict between clauses mentioned in this specification and those in any Indian
Standard, this specification shall govern.
2.0
REFERENCES
2.1
EIL Specification No. 6-68-0002:
Materials
EIL Specification No.6-68-0004:
Plain and Reinforced concrete.
3.0 MATERIAL
All materials of construction like cement, aggregate, sand, water etc. shall conform to EIL
Specification No.6-68-0002.
4.0
GRADE OF CONCRETE
Only Design Mix Concrete shall be used. For other details like proportioning, batching,
mixing placing, curing etc. EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004 shall be followed unless
specified otherwise hereunder.
5.0
WATER-CEMENT RATIO
Water-cement ratio up to 0.55 shall be allowed to obtain better slump & workability. Actual
ratio shall be decided with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Only measured quantity
of water shall be used in the mix.
6.0
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT
6.1
All works covered by this specification shall be carried out by an experienced agency
having sufficient expertise in vacuum dewatering concrete system. Only skilled and
experienced operators shall be employed for the purpose. Prior approval of the agency shall
be obtained from the Engineer-in-Charge before starting the work. All the equipment
including the form work shall be of approved and proven types suitable for the work
involved.
6.2
For best results, the form work must be placed atleast one day before the actual flooring.
The level must be checked and care must be taken to seal the bottom edges properly. A
simple test to check that the formwork is properly placed and fixed is that a man can
walk/jump on these channels without disturbing the level. These channels should be
covered with a thin layer of form oil for easy removal after the floor is laid.
Page 1306 of 1744
ENGINEERS
$gz-jr fMt5 INDIA LIMITED
ATIZAI
242,,r 451,340,,
I A Govt ot Intha Undeetattingt
SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 5 of 7
Removal of channels should be done with extreme care so that the edges of the concrete
floors are not damages. The channels should be removed not earlier than 24 hours after the
floor is cast.
7.0
CONCRETE LAYING
Concrete laying pattern shall be decided in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge and
with his approval. The maximum width of a slab strip shall not generally exceed 4 metres
and minimum number of construction joints shall be used. Alternate slab strips shall be
sequentially laid. Any damage to the already finished top surface shall be avoided. At
construction joints no overflow of mortar or slurry on the already hardened surface shall be
allowed while concreting the intermediate slab strip. Such construction joints shall be
marked with a thread in a straight line (unless otherwise shown on the drawings) while the
concrete is still green. Continuity of reinforcement shall be maintained while laying
concrete in slab strips unless otherwise shown on drawings. Edges at expansion joints shall
be protected and proper arrangement of shear-transfer shall be provided shown on drawings/
standards.
8.0
CONCRETE COMPACTION
8.1
After placing concrete in position, it shall be vibrated thoroughly using poker/needle

vibrators and thereafter levelled with surface vibrators as shown on drawings to produce a
homogenous and smooth concrete surface. In order to achieve a smooth surface to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, surface vibrators shall be very carefully used by
skilled operators. Over vibration resulting in excess mortar near the surface shall be avoided.
8.2
Concrete should not be distributed with the needle / poker vibrator for a thickness upto
150mm.
8.3
Surface vibration should always start as soon as there is enough concrete infront of surface
vibrator. Two passes with the surface vibrator are required. There should always be a roll
of concrete of about 10-20mm in front of the leading beam along the entire length of the
vibrator. When the concrete has been placed and vibrated to a length of about 5 metres, the
second pass is carried out. The vibrator should be pulled at a speed of maximum 1
metre/min and without interruption to avoid linings on the surface.
9.0
VACUUM PROCESSING / DEWATERING
9.1
Suction mats shall be spread over the levelled fresh concrete surface and shall be connected
by a suction hose to the vacuum pumps for dewatering of surplus water in the concrete.
During dewatering it shall be ensured that no cement/cement slurry is pumped out.
9.2
The vacuum dewatering must start within 30 minutes from the time of start of concrete
pouring.
9.3
The filter pads are placed in such a way that there is atleast 100mm fresh concrete visible
around the filter pads on all four sides. Filter pads should be overlapped with each other by
atleast 250mm.
9.4
Suction time may be adopted as 1-1.5 min per lOmm of concrete thickness or as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
10.0 FLOATING & TROWELING

10.1
This shall be done after dewatering by using skim floater. After this, surface shall be
trowelled with minimum two passes of power trowel to achieve a wear resistant surface to
Page 1307 of 1744
rfg`w 1C125
1~, riecrgt mlaittvi)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
SYSTEM
6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 6 of 7
the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. However some guidelines are listed in10.2
below.
10.2
i.
Raking operation must be done diagonally in two directions over the concrete surface.
The concrete which is collected during raking is to be used for adjusting small surface
irregularities of the vacuum treated surface. Any irregularities to be maintained at this
stage only.
A11 four sides of the dewatered panel must be floated first and the remaining central
area is to be floated later.
iv.
Never use any cement paste, mixture of cement sand or fresh concrete for patch work.
v.
Normally two passes with the skim floater is required. The two passes should be
perpendicular to each other.
vi.
Troweling operation to be started after 30 minutes after final floating / when surface is
sufficiently dry.
11.0 CURING
Curing of concrete shall be done as described under EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004.
However, all care shall be taken to avoid any permanent stain on the surface. Any stain or
permanent marking on the top surface shall be removed by approved means.
12.0 APPROACH, WORKING PLATFORM & FORM WORK
The Contractor shall arrange all approaches, scaffolding, working platforms etc. for carrying
out the entire operation safely and in a work-man-like manner. The working area shall be
nearly maintained and all the facilities required by the Engineer-in-Charge for proper
supervision of the work shall be provided.
13.0
TESTING OF FINISHED FLOOR

Contractor shall arrange for core cutting and testing of finished concrete over and above
other field tests specified in EIL Specification No. 6-68-0004. Cores shall be taken after 28
days of concreting and tested as per relevant IS Codes. Core test results shall be compared
with the normal cube test results taken from the same concrete. The average compressive
strength of cores shall be minimum 40% higher than that of normal cube (15cm x 15cm x
15cm) test results. Minimum three cores for each day's work in the initial stages and as
decided later by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be taken. The floor shall be properly rectified
after cutting the cores with concrete of same mix using the same cement as earlier used and
finished smoothly to match with the existing surface. The cut surface of the floor-concrete
shall be coated with proper epoxy-based bonding compound before laying concrete to avoid
shrinkage cracks or, alternatively, a non-shrink compound shall be added with the concrete.
14.0 PAYMENT
This clause shall apply to Item Rate tender only.
14.1
Payment shall be made on cubic meter (m3) basis of actually finished work or as calculated
from the approved construction drawings, whichever is less. The reinforcement used shall
be measured and paid separately on weight basis.
Page 1308 of 1744

31
Og-ar rirenr,any
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Gov,
Un~.9)
SYSTEM

6-68-0062 Rev.3
Page 7 of 7
14.2
The rate quoted shall be inclusive of supply of all labour, material, power trowel, form
work, plant & tools, vibrators, skim floater etc. required for the successful and satisfactory
completion of work including curing and all cleaning operations before and after the work,
preparation of the surface, finishing the surface smooth after completion, providing required
access, working platforms, and other safety measures including their removal after
completion.
14.3
The rates quoted shall be inclusive of any test specified and directed to establish the quality
and strength of all materials and finished work including making good the floors as
specified complete. In case the average compressive strength of the cores does not show
improvement in strength as specified over normal cube compressive strength, the work shall
be classified as 'sub-standard' and the Engineer-in-Charge may accept the work at his sole
discretion and payment may be made to the Contractor at the normal reinforced concrete
rate for similar item of work either quoted elsewhere in the contract or deduced as extra item
as per general conditions of contract. However, under no circumstances, concrete of grade
Iower than that shown on the drawings shall be accepted.
Page 1309 of 1744
Page 1310 of 1744
Page 1311 of 1744
Page 1312 of 1744
Page 1313 of 1744
Page 1314 of 1744
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
51gu
f45
INDIA
LIMITED
I alWrf ri.em2 057,isn.1)
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT

7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
IA Govt of India Undertakong)
SHT. 1 of 7
GRADE BOLT DIMENSIONS

OF
CONC. TYPE
MM
10 12
16
18
20
24
27
30
250 300
450
450
550
600
650
750
850
950 1000 1100
115
155
170
190
210
230
255
285
315
TYPE I
280 336
498
504
610
666
722
831
940 1049 1108 1217
TYPE III
430
486
648
654
910
966 1022
200
200
300
350
400
450
450
550
600
700
700
800
150
180
240
270
300
330
380
405
450
495
540
585
TYPE II
230
236
348
404
460
516
522
631
690
799
808
917
TYPEIV
380
386
498
554
760
816
822
1081 1140
1249 1258 1367
200
250
400
400
450
550
550
650
700
800
850
950
95
115
155
170
190
210
230
255
285
315
345
370
TYPE 1
230
286
448
454
510
616
622
731
790
899
958
1067
TYPE III
380
436
598
604
810
916
922
1181 1240 1349 1408 1517
150
150
250
250
300
350
350
450
500
550
600
650
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
450
495
540
585
TYPE II
180
186
298
304
360
416
422
531
649
708
767
TYPE IV
330
336
440
454
660
716
722
981
180
220
315
335
390
445
470
550
600
95
115
155
170
190
210
230
255
285
TYPE I
210
260
365
390
450
515
545
635
690
TYPE III
360
410
515
540
750
815
845
1085
1140 1230 1295 1385
150
150
200
200
250
275
300
350
375
425
450
500
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
450
495
540
585
TYPEII
180
190
250
255
310
345
375
435
465
525
560
620
TYPEIV
330 340
400
405
610
645
675
885
L
E
8c
III
BOLT DIA ( 0 ) IN MM
95
22
33
36
39
345
370
H
1281 1390 1499 1558 1667
M20
II
8c
IV
H
&
111
H
M25
II
&
IV
590
1
8c
III
1040 1099 1158 1217

680
735
815
315
345
370
780
845
935
H
M30
II
8c
IV
H
915
975 1010 1070
+9-4;
26.11.13
26.03.09 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8-00-0f0".-F4 Rev.0
Page 1315 of 1744
Purpose
A. . SHARMA
VPS
AMARJEET
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
VINAY KUMAR
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
Prepared Checked Stds. Committee

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Og-a OfZ5
2i2O5-feasl.smo.-0
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT

7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
IA Govt of Incha Undertaking)
SHT. 2 of 7
GRADE BOLT DIMENSIONS

OF
CONC. TYPE
MM
BOLT DIA
10
12
16
18
160
190
275
295
95
115
155
TYPE I
190
230
TYPEIII
340
L
E
20
IN MM
22
24
27
30
33
36
39
340
390
410
480
525
595
640
710
170
190
210
230
345
370
325
350
400
460
485
565
615
750
830
380
475
500
700
760
785
1015
1065 1145 1200
150
150
150
150
180
225
225
275
300
350
350
400
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
450
495
540
585
TYPEII
180 190
200
205
240
290
300
390
450
460
520
TYPEIV
330
340
350
355
540
590
600
810
840
900
910
970
150
170
240
255
300
340
360
425
460
525
565
625
95
115
155
170
190
210
230
345
370
TYPE I
180
210
290
310
360
410
435
510
550
675
745
TYPEIII
330
360
440
460
660
710
735
960
1000
150
150
150
150
175
200
200
225
150
180
240
270
300
330
360
405
TYPEII
180
190
200
205
235
270
275
310
TYPEIV
330
340
350
355
535
570
575
255
285
315
8c
III
695
H
1280
M35
II
8c
IV
360
255
285
315
&
III
625
H
1075 1125
1195
275
300
325
495
540
585
375
410
445
825
860
895
M 40
II
&
IV
250
450
340
elie
0_
Ile
760
790
t'4,.
tata
il
TYPE I
TYPE II
o
K (NOMINAL BORE)
a.
TACK WELD
(TYP)
DETAILA
TYPE III
TYPE IV
26.11.13
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rcv.0
Page 1316 of 1744
Purpose
(TYP)
YX1_
A.K: SHARMA
VPS
A1:4-AMARJEET
P.K.MITTAL
.ANTTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
V1NAY KUMAR
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT

7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
IA Govt. of India Undertakingt
SHT. 3 of 7
000r0000000>(>000
tri
0
.4.
in
in
(1) o o co
tO
ro
ro
ro
o csi 0 rO rO
00 00 N
.Cs1
II,
r,
o
.-
00
0
0
I-
.co
N
,-
l*,
'et
(1)
0
O
0>
1N.
.--
ct
in
CD
"Cr
O
0
Cf>
O
CO
0
O
00
U")
tO
ro
>L")
in
in
N
to
co
..0
K>
10
CDOCD000000t0
cla 1- I,) tn tn O O 0/ .- K>
N
O et N tn 10 N
r.
100
N
0
N
00
in
o
0>
Ll'
0
tn
10
...,
o
ir,
0
tt,
s,
0
cD
.--
0
11,
.4-
0
-
CD
Pf)
Sli
U)
et
Pr)
if,
ri)
et
c>
tf)
in
't
N.
N
..:1Csl
CO
10
a)
Pei
vi
0
10
CD
00
o
co
o
co
0
co
LI,
r
LI,
in
"."
O
CO
O
CD
CO
o
.-
0
in
*
0
co
in
>,"
et
.-
tn
ci,
00
O tn
iD
0
tn
11,
.-
in
(1)
Ch
If>
if>
0
P.
0
tf>
.--
tr)
rs.
(0
...
tn
N
tf,
it,
tn
tn
ci
rr
.--
tn
O
in
N
O
-rr
N
.1'
Lf>
-rt
u->
.--
00
tn
.*
1n
.-
O
0
If>
.-
t0
et
re,
o
o
*
o
1.")
0000000
CO O cn O t's1 in
1,
1 1,
1 .-I,>
o
1,>
cn
ro
.-er
rO
LO
.-
et
,-,
K>
--
et
I**)
.--
O
O
CD
O
O
>/)
10
-J
(,)
c."
r-
O
0
.0
O
.--
tn
N
If>
tn
in
N
ro
CI
O
Cs1
O
cn
O
O
.-
LO
to
co
0
00
N
.--
.-
tn
1,)
if>
CV
N
0/
0
tn
..-
C)
..-
00000000
lf> Lf> sl tn II, .- CO ..- N
-
0000
II, .- CO
.- N
SINGLE NUT
DOUBLE NUT
LENGTH
SLEEVE
MM
GRADE
OF
CONC.
LLI
a_
>I-
>
> X
0>i
0 ck;
I_ X
tn
C.1
=
cS
r..1
=
CD=
-:2-1-10CDM
>
>
>
6.3
=
>
>
>
t3
00L000NON
tn tn et to u, N CO -
CD
vi
tn
N
PO
co
Oc)
.-
.-
.--
1-
C1
.-
0000in
O oN1-.4- .N
u,
..,,
`""
000
tn
CD
11,
000030
lf> 0 J N O
vi 1D .in
ir,
00
O u,
el
.-
C'')
0
O
O
LO
.-
0
lo
CO
(C)
C`l
r`)
0,
r..
CO
in
N
.--
.-
0
co
to
oo>no
in
co in
et
u, -
0>
u,
0
O
>..>
vi
cep
0
CO
.N
.--
W")
tn
ceD
>")
co
>
eki
-..J
>
>
>
kr)
1+->
=
ci
't
I.r> ckS i
26.11.13
Rev.
Purpose
rf)
ck$
Format No. 8 .00-0001-F4 Rev.0
in
r.
O
tO
N
00000N0
tn 0 0 It in N 0
et
.- .- - in r. N
CO
.-
Date
CO
e>
0
N
No.
pr)
THREADED (T)
BOLTDIA ( 0 ) INMM
LO
in
O
..Csi
O
O
0/
03
DIMENSIONS
>0)
i.n
Page 1317 of 1744
ro
'et
(c)
tr)
0
CO
(0
rO
000000000001000
O tn a> tn in O U:> O 10 0> in 1-- in ->1.
N) ti, N
a> -. N
N
r.
N
CO O N
1-
0 ifl 0 10 0 0 0 O in O to tn O O
O
,) N. et O in sl 11, co N. et N O O
co O N
tn
tt, N r... 0) N
N
CD N
....0 u, 0 >r) o o o 0 11, 0 tn 10 0 in
>n
r. <0
"zr
in
0 ,4. Lf> N U: ct 1... 14, co
a, CsI
N
0,"> LO N LD 00 N
O 11, 1.110 000000010000010
0 o ro rt 0 rn er 0 o ro vi 0 O co
N
a, N
N ll,
N (0
CO N
O tn
O .- O (o O O O O in O Qa in O O
tn ...a. N ro O O O tn ..d. N /") p. Lf> LID
CD
CO LNI
..- 11, N tn N N
cr> .1' .-
0
cD
-I
to
A.K. SHARMA
VPS
AMARJECT
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
V1NAY KUMAR
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Copyright EIL - All rights reserverI
STANDARD No.
$'>gu2di
dg
It~ rlecnft
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
asidnenan
7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
r.
ID
U)
0,
11)
N)
ch
U)
to
Co
N
lf)
N
.I
N
O
115
N
N
.-
U)
O
N
N
Io)
U)
.-
N
N
N
N)
0
N
O
el
N
.N
if)
.-
u)
.-
.N
U)
in
co
U>
.ir)
o
N
N
l'
U)
Ir)
0
N
N
.-
0
N
0)
V)
..-
0)
if)
.-
N)
C)
.-
Lf)
,n
U)
tn
o
CO
-
U)
U)
N
-
O
If)
...
.-
0
tD
0
N
II,
.-
tf)
0
CO
O
N)
N
O
It
O
0
0)
0
0
If)
U)
CO
.-
Lf>
CO
.-
O
0
0
N
...
If)
cl>
.-
O
N
if)
N
0
if)
./
tr)
,..,
in
U)
.-
U)
11)
ID
.--
O
N
O
u>
,t
O
l0
11,
O
N
0
O
1/5
O
Lf)
O
CD
.-
O
..1>
O
0
-
O
0
.-
O
..ct
-
LI,
N
-
O
N)
.-
O
co
U')
o
K>
._
.-
0
N
.-
0
oD
Ot
0
N
.-
CO
.-
o
._
c>
CO
CO
o
_
CD
-
tf)
U)
V)
CII,
i.c.)
O
Lf>
-.1.
tf>
N
U>
N
N
...
-,
if)
el
CD
Lf>
N)
r
r...
O
0
N
CD
l',"
U)
(0
0
11,
N)
Csi
N)
0
LI)
U)
0
O
I.)
Lf)
.-
u>
O
CD
.-
o
U)
o
cl
.-
c0
4C
0
0
CO
.1.
if)
CO
U)
0
t-
in
,,,r)
0
10
*
r-
0
11)
U)
0
.-
U)
.-
Lr>
,t
u>
U')
N)
0
.--
0
0
>,,
u,
0
CO
0
N
it)
et
10
0
.-
.--.
CD
..-
O
N
0
cf)
I
(D
11,
U)
ct
NI
Ni
0
0
C,)
0 0 0 tf>
t-ONN
NI
.I .-
0
co
0
CO
Lf)
(1)
O.0)
O
LN1
0
0
1A)
0
0
..J.
0
0
.-
0
CsI
0
in
N
o
co
O
cf)
li,
CO
03
,..-
0
0
N
0
Cf>
N
LO
tr)
In
.-
to
0
if)
.-
N)
N
tr)
,-,
0
u")
.-
CD
0
if)
,CD
t...
U")
CD
I,
-
lf)
n
--.,
N.
in
N
NI
0
c0
N
-
o
co
0
11)
"I
(1)
0
.N
0
CO
0
.-
o
o)
0
if)
0
..1
0
Lf)
--I
- -1
(.)
LLI
in
0
CO
if)
N
Lf)
t
*
0
tr,
CO
CO
CO
ttl
o)
I, U')
1f)
el
U)
Cr)
0
CD
4'
0
0
I.")
0
N)
c,)
r..
N
U)
U)
r>
N)
>
LLI
GRA DE
OF
CONC.
>
>
..>3
>
>
cks
=
>
II)
ek;
>- W 0 .<..,
I- 3 LIJ
M
(3 1-1L.Lj
N ix
CD rX 1""
0 Z Lij
FL..., 0 m LAL,0 Li
Z }- vt Z m
O
I- La . (.5 <
,_ > V) Z J
LLI
Lr>
u3
0
O
- o
If)
1-
O
U)
M)
N.
.-
U)
U")
0
cf)
o
co
II)
OD
0
U")
0
U")
_I
N
N
_I
_I
>
_
>
><
_I
7
)(
u)
o
.4-
kS
o o
N 14*/
0 0
N: cc;
O
U)
fl)
I-
LAJ11.
/Y 0 Z
<
0
.-
V>
w I CD
tr>
tf)
_1
<
Z
IZ
Y m > cr 0 0
I = w rC.>
Z
1- iLL
LO
l's
N
.-
W
C1 l
i:d
o L.i
I- 0 `-' ch_
1-cp
0
N
- -- cks
ci tri civi
cNINP,),4)
-4-
Ll. CL i i:: '... CO
N
NI
ir)
z o o
(n ,,, ,-... o
L.,_
1.1i
>()
m)
a_ a.. o 1
....., a:,
> >
w
w=U) u. W
w
~1 = <
N
.-
u_
cri I0 r.) --1

0
Z N 0 Z
ct Vi L.,_ , > 0 v) o
cc . _I <
Lj
Lf>
,-
.-
>
m
= <
Ld
I< Ld
(x EC
0 0
Z
o_Z z
0
N)
K>
w wo
>
O <
-I
LLI V>
I-
a_
>0 m
4t L.d
tt,
I,)
0
cl
1,1
U)
.t
It)
.1.
DOUBLENUT
-2-
in
SINGLENUT
ir>
N
t
tr>
THREADED (T)
LENGTH
,
C
tr)
tO
ch
>c)
in
t3
t3
t-
cf)
csi
'd'
U>
tf)
cf)
MM
CO
ct.
CD
O )m 1
el
tn
in
in
if)
..4.
..-
O
o
CO
N
ot
pe)
O
.-
-.4-
O
te
ID
N
'cl
O
tD
O
o
tO
el'
N
Ni
N
t.')
o
CO
-
N
CO
U)
V &VI
BOLTDIA ( 0 ) INMM
U)
0
N
.-
U)
1,1)
DIMENSIONS
U)
O
met
cri
-J
O
0
-J
0
Z CO
LL
1Z
LAJ
-J
LAJ
Z <
(7) a
CONFORM TO IS: 1363 ANDIS:3 138.
(;)
Li.)
LT)
-J
0
0
I-
U)
N
If)
tO
.-
M.S. ROUNDS CONFORMING
Lf)
i()
,t
tl,
-
o
O
LI,
Lf)
0
Iff
.-
FORGING. THE FORGING TEMPERATURE SHALL BE ABOVE 900* C BUT LOWER

THAN SUPER HEATING TEMPERATURE.
r-
0
0
1.0
)
w>
ir)
00
..,*
U)
.-
0
CD
TYPE OF BOLT
U)
,r,
ce>
(4,
cti
CO
PROJECTION ABOVE CONCRETE
C)
CO
COARSE CONFORMING TOIS:1 367
(D
U)
o
00
ct
t.,)
LD
M35&M40
co
0
115
1,)
BOLTSSHALLBEMARKEDONTHEDRAWING ASUNDER
0
0
N
,0
n,
0.1
5. ANCHORBOLTSSHALLBESET ACCURATELYANDHELDIN
POSITION BY TEMPLATE BEFORE CONCRETING.
SHALL BE TACKWELDED
SHT. 4 of 7
LL
O
0
o
O o w ce
ZN
Z
<
I Z
< v)
M
w ce
<
N 0 <
-I
> <
-N
C.)
I
U;)
03
ci)
a;
-J
cs, <
26.11.13
6
Rev.
No.

Date
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 R.ev.0
Page 1318 of 1744
Purpose
4t7a
A.K. HA 1AA
VPS
talfiLt.
AMARJEET
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
VINAY KUMAR
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI

Convenor
by
by
GM
Copyright EIL - A'l
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
re3erved
ENGINEERS
51gz-z Wes INDIA LIMITED
lafwnetravtasksvsnitt
IA Govt of Indo Godeftakm9)
STANDARD No.
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT
7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
SHT. 5 of 7
GAP BETWEEN
SLEEVE & BOLT
SHALL BE FILLED
WITH GROUT
TYPE - VI
TYPE - V
lja
1E1
(NOMINAL BORE>
IuI
10
lil
6 THK.
SQ, Ft_
(NOMINAL BORE>
10
6 THK,
sQ. FL
2
C>
6 WELD ALROUND
ON BOTH SIDES DF le
SQ.
Al
P>
8 THK.
LTY
6 rnrn VELD
FL
SQ. Ft_
TYPE - VII
TYPE - VIII
TYPE - XII
TYPE - IX
26.11.13
6
Rev.
No.

Date
Format Nc. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0
Page 1319 of 1744
Purpose
A.K: SHARMA
VPS
AMARJE
P.K.MITrAL
P.K.M AL
S.CHATURVEDI S.CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N. DUARI

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Copyright FIL - Al
I rights reserved
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0
:11fadj
eg
Ii1127f eleamlE151~11
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT

7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
1,4 Govt of India Undertakong)
SHT. 6 of 7
r4)
cr)
Lr)
cv
N.
cr)
in
...-
in
(D
N
CO
0
N
N
rs'
u)
;:4
.-
?.e.
.-
00
(0
0
cl.
K..., io(*)
in
re>
in
(D
0
el
0
,.;
0
N
2,. .(
gz
.-
'
(1)
(1)
in
co
CO
o
O
oo
r...)
....
x
,-i;
in
P4')
.-
.-
U)
co
..*
o
.-
O
...;
co
O
0
(0
0
(.0
P,r)
(.0
11)
P')
N
N
O)
Lf)
rt)
.--
o
c,i
O)
N
.--
cr>
(.0
.-
o .?.',2,5
U)
O
.--
Lr>
,9.'
><
2,
.-
cn
0)
K>
.-
O
O
0
c
-.I-,
O
03
O
.-
.-
25
.-
O
0)
co
P.-.
Pf)
.-
re)
.O
(r,
N.
(.1
0
r4)
1D
c`l
O
(C>
o
re)
O
.-
O
tr)
O
0
o
O
0
Pr)
0
LO
-
O
csi
--
K>
cn
c.,1
cs.I
CNI
X
0
c,
o
O)
m)
CO
f4)
X
O
0
o
0,
cf P4)
MM
0
0
U)
(f)
0)
O
N
r4)
r-
O)
u)
co
,:t
r4)
,c1
re)
N
N
vt
N
.X
0
.-
Ln
C,
-CI
O
Lc)
-J
csi
LLI
O)
0
Csi
r4)
fe)
cv
,it
Lr,
(10
P,")
1!)
CO
(7)
LJ
_J /2
0 >CD I
in
kn
CV
o
I.
co
Lf)
<0
<
tn
O
.-.--
O)
co
.-
cm
CO
.-
re)
vt
in
11)
(C>
co
,-'
O
If)
,-
(D
0
vt
0
...1.-
._cc
.-..::
N
d
0
O
un
Pr>
74)
0
0
CO
r-
c,
"M
c
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev C
Purpose
In
N.
O)
N..
(..)
c
(/ )
.__
_
X
S111 `011 `SZIN ÒZN
Date
Rev.
CO
OP VI )2
O
.--
O)
GRADE
OF
CONC.
26.11.13
o Lc)
o
--
r.
..4- ..;-.
to .=,
c,=>
>.
rn
(C>
000008
tn
un
cn
00
o
x
o
o
d-
O
d
X
in
O
0
.-
O
CO
00
.-
.-
co
..g
,- an
CV
O
.-
DOUBLE NUT
0
a)
co
.zIco
Page 1320 of 1744
r_
;-r-5
(D
SINGLE NUT
co
cNi
Ns-
.:1
'.:1'
74,
1...)
c"CP,i
No.
Li,
THREADED
LENGTH
(T)
tO
K)
0
c0
N
oo
O
SINGLE NUT
0)
1,r)
o
O
in
DOUBLENUT
o
c.io
r4,
,d.
N.
cI
o
---
'. ,
tn
Cl
r.r)
DIMENSIONS
re)
THREADED
LENGTH
(T)
BOLT DIA ( 9$)IN MM
oO
A. SHARMA AMARJEET
VPS
P.K.14ITTAL
P.K. AL S.CHATURVEDI S.CHANDA

VINAY KUMAR
N. DUARI

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Page 1321 of 1744
STANDARD No.
faffleg
lai(2R oftmi2as7J,n.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
M.S. ANCHOR BOLT

7-68-0417 Rev. 7
ASSEMBLIES
(A Govt. of India Uncleitaking)
SHT. 7 of 7
NUT
NUT
WASHER
WASHER
BASE PLATE
GRDUT
BASE PLATE
GRDUT
CDNC. TOP
CONC. TDP
SEE DETAIL
Ol
SQ. PDCKET
BOX OF 16 GAUGE MS PLATE
ISMC
n
ISA--I
I I 1 I
11
11
(>
I
I
L_J 11. J
VIEW B - B
VIEW A A
TYPE X
(* AS PER DESIGN REQUIREMENT)
DETAIL -
(i)
(FOR FORGED BOLT HEAD)
TYPE - XI
26.11.13
26.03.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
A.K. SHARMA
VPS
AMARJE
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
N. DUARI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
STANDARD No.
je ENGINEERS
IND!A LIMITED
(~1 232215W 051.344.1)
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
(A Govt of !ndla Undertalong)
Page 1 of 8
NOTES:
1. ALL HANDRAILS AND UPRIGHT SHALL BE AS PER RESPECTIVE TYPE.
2.
ALL FILLET WELDS OF 3mm (MINIMUM) THICKNESS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
3.
JOINTS IN HANDRAILS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT SUITABLE LOCATIONS, WELDED AND GROUND FLUSH.
4.
FOR ADDITIONAL TYPE OF UPRIGHT FIXING DETAILS REFER EIL STD. 7-68-0061.
5.
ALL M.S. TUBES SHALL CONFORM T0 IS:1239.

FABRICATION OF TOP RAIL, INTERMEDIATE FLAT AND TOE PLATE SHALL ONLY BE STARTED AFTER TAKING
6.
ACTUAL DIMENSIONS AT SITE.

7.
7
6
ADJUSTMENT IN SPACING OF VERTICAL POST SHALL BE DONE AT EITHER END OF PLATFORM.
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrrnat Nn 8-on-0001-F4 Rev 0
Page 1322 of 1744

Purpose
V.P.SINGH
V ,-GOEL
V.P.SINGH
PK MITTAL
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ki\-"(
PK MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N DUARI
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
f'.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvAri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
$.7fg-a[OWg INDIA LIMITED
k31
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
IA Govl of Intlia Undertalong)
1~, Cl~C11,14CM)
Page 2 of 8
TYPE 14 0 HOLES FOR

I112 MEDIUM DUIT RUST PROOF
ANCHOR FASTNER
200
V)
8 THK.
BASE PL.
VIEW 3-3
r-91, TUBULAR HANDRAIL

POST
VIEW 2-2
n,-11
V3
ho
TUBULAR HANDRAIL
POST
11 II
FINISHED
FLOOR
LEVEL
V 2 II II
, II I
eiie
2N
5,
Niim
12 LUG(2N0S)
FIXING DET OF TUB. POST .

WITH M.I.PLATE (ALT-I)
SLOPING HANDRAIL ON R.C.C. STAIR
CONCRETE DISCONTINUOUS
END OF HANDRAIL
,2
250
1500(MAX.)
FIXING DET OF TUBULAR POST

WITH ANCHOR FASTNER
ALT-II
1500(MAX.) POST SPACING

(TYP)
---(-P
P-
R=100
32 NB(M) TUBE
o
o
R=100
o
o
100x5 TOE PLATE

WHERE REQUIRED
TO BE WELDED
STRUCTURAL
CONC. LEVEL
F.F.L.
If
HORIZONTAL HANDRAIL ON R.C.C. PLATFORM

7
6
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Rev.
No.
Date
Frmat Nn 8-na-nnnt-F4 RPV n
Page 1323 of 1744

Purpose
V.P.SINGH
V.P.SINGH
t
V GOE L
SEC. 1-1
PK MITTAL
S CHANDA
PK MITTAL S.CHATURVEDI VINAY KUMAR N DUARI
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht FII - All rinhts rpsprvAri
51g-a 02-eg
irrteR r-fecolrosi~f
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Govt of Incha Undertakno)
Page 3 of 8
TYPE - II
CONC. / STEEL FACE-DISCONTINUOUS END OF HANDRAIL
25
1500(MAX.)
250
(MA X.)
1500(MAX.)
(TY P)
(TYP)
Ip
TOE PL. 100x5
[1=1oeu_.
HORIZONTAL HANDRAIL ON STEEL PLATFORM

32 NB(M) TUBE
o
o
in
POST 32 NB(M) TUBE

32 NB(M) TUBE
o
o
TOE PL. 100x5
50x50x6 THK. PL.
(TYP)
o
o
in
TOP OF GRATING
CHEQ. PL.
T.O.S.
v
5J
VIEW 6-6
VIEW 5-5
SECTION 4-4
(AT CORNER)
(FOR DETAILOREFER PAGE 8 OF 8)
7
6
Rev.
No.
Frmat Nn
Page 1324 of 1744
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Date
R-no-rinn1-F4 RPV n
REVISED
REVISED
dc
dc
ISSUED AS STANDARD
S
. \r
V .P.SI GH
ISSUED AS STANDARD
V.P.SINGH
Purpose
Prepared
by
V- GOEL
PK MITTAL
Checked
by
PK MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsp,rvpd
04-a(~,eanc,o51.3~0
r fafje5
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
HAN DRAI LS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
(A Govl of India UndeflakIng)
Page 4 of 8
TYPE - II
PIPE SHALL BE
GROUND TO SHAPE
PLATE
50x50x6 THK.
VIEW 7-7
SLOPING HANDRAIL ON STEEL STAIR

WHEREVER HIGHER SIZE OF STRINGER BEAMS
ARE REQUIRED AS PER DESIGN SIMILAR G.A.
BE FOLLOWED FOR THE SAME.
7
6
16.12.2014
29.01.2010
Rev.
No.
Fnrmat Nn s-rin-n001-F4
Page 1325 of 1744
Purpose
Date
RPV 0
V.P.SINGH
V.P.SINGH
1
.-dL
MITTAL
S CHANDA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
C.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts re.sprv<441
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
raW5 INDIA LIMITED
,
1,7~.11
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
IA Govt of Incha UnderlakIng)
Page 5 of 8
TYPE - III
32 NB(M) TUBULAR
HAND RAILING
VIEW 9-9
SEE DETAIL
OF WALL PLATE
1500(MAX.)
LANDING
100
1500(MAX.)
14 0 HOLES
WALL
8mm THK.
PLATE
3mm MIN.
CONTINUOUS
12 0
EXPANSION
FASTNERS
FILLET WELD
120 0-8 THK.
WALL PLATE
VIEW 8-8
DETAIL OF WALL PLATE
ELEVATION
HANDRAIL FIXED TO WALL DIRECT
16.12.2014
REVISED dc ISSUED AS STANDARD
V.P.SINGH
29.01.2010
REVISED dc ISSUED AS STANDARD
V.P.SINGH
Rev.
No.
Forrnat Nn
Page 1326 of 1744
-a\.<
Date
R-nn-noni -F4 RPV
Purpose
Prepared
by
(Ari
PK MITTAL
Checked
by
PK NITTAL
S CHANDA
S.CHATURVEDI VINAY KUMAR N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rAsrtnind
STANDARD No.
g
$1gzx f8122,1~,n1.549,4)
(w.-rt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
HAN DRAI LS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
(A Govt ot Inclia UndertakIngt
Page 6 of 8
TYPE - IV
1500
1500 MAX.
1500
o
o
u)
TOE PLATE
100x5 THK.
25 THK.
GRATING
1 Oj
HANDRAIL ON HORIZONTAL PLATFORM (STEEL)
SEC. 10-10
NOTE : HANDRAIL TYPE-IV SHALL BE USED OVER PIPE CROSS OVER AND LOW LEVEL PLATFORMS
SUCH AS FOR VALVE OPERATION ETC. AS MENTIONED IN STD 7-68-0562 & 0563.
(FOR DETAILSA
O REFER PAGE 8 OF 8)
16.12.2014
V.P
V.P.. INGH
29.01.2010
V.P.SINGH
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrmat Nn a-nn-nnni-F4 RPV fl
Page 1327 of 1744
Purpose
V G EL
PK MITTAL
Prepared
Checked
by
by
PK MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rps.rvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
" INDIA LIMITED
0 .-a.OW5*10
r W.WaP,~71)
IA
-
HAN DRAI LS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Govt of India Undertaiong)
Page 7 of 8
TYPE - IV
32 0 NB M
TUBE
SLOPING HALF HANDRAIL ON STEEL STAIR
DETAIL - `J
SEC. 1 1 -1 1
7
6
16.12.2014
29.01.2010

\;W\IV
V.P.SINGH
V.P.SINGH
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Frmat Nn fc-nn-rinni-F4 Revn
Page 1328 of 1744
G}
S CHANDA
GO L
PK MITTAL
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
nnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Og-af OW5 d INDIA LIMITED
IswfT 2,REO2osisoomf
HANDRAILS
7-68-0501 Rev. 7
Page 8 of 8
IIIV
J I
irm
32 NB(M)
TUBE
4V
tn
II
II
TOE PLATE
100x5 THK.
0.
OUTSIDE EDGE
OF MEMBER
VIEW 12-12
VT2
50 SQ.
6 THK. PL.
1
u)
DETAIL - (A)
CONNECTION DETAILS
(FOR TYPE II & IV)
NOTE : CHEQUERED PLATES / GRATINGS SHALL BE SUITABLY NOTCHED TO ACCOMMODATE THE TUBE
IN CASE OF BEAM MC100 OR MC125.
16.12.2014
VXINGH
())/16CjL
29.01.2010
V.P.SINGH
PK MITTAL
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrrnat Nn 8-nn-nn01-F4 RAV
Page 1329 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
Checked
by
by
PK
ITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
N DUARI
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
el
$'2,fir 215tg
lxvR2w, femi.-Tuqq)
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 REV. 6
SHT. 1 of 6
- r 75x75x8
30,
NOSING
=4
71O-1=1-4111111111-11MFill..=.
-
-1111M-0.
IOW
ESA_
.E
1142..1=-
-1=1,-C =04//104/000. 7-
7-=-1.110 .1
BRACING (REFER SHT- 5)

30 NOSING j,
NO. OF TREAD x 230
MIN. 750
STRINGER SPAN
4000 MAX. FOR MC150
6000 MAX. FOR MC200
PLAN AT EL. 'A'

O
O
cJ
C.)
0 Lai
-J
0 CC
CNI
N
CC
W
ca
Nu,
CC
X o
rn
3
1
CONCRETE
BASE
NO. OF TREAD x 230
SECTION 4-4
PLAN AT EL. 'C'
NOTES :1. FOR STAIRWAY/TREAD USE ELECTROFORGED GRATING TYPEII AS PER EIL STD NO 7-68-0697.
2. FOR CONNECTION DETAILS REFER SHEETS 3, 4, 5 AND 6.
3. STRINGER SHALL BE SUITABLY DESIGNED FOR OFFICE BUILDING, WARE HOUSES AND WORKSHOP.
4. FOR DETAIL OF INSERT PLATE `R1a REFER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0056.
18.09.13
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrrnat Nn a-nn-.0001-F4 RPV
Page 1330 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
RVEDI D.a'"
MALHOTRA
PK MITTAL
VPS"
SPJoshl
P.K.MITTAL
Checked
by
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAYKUMAR
Stds. Coimlittee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht FII - All rinhts mso.rvpri
0 el
Ig.ZIfdOteg
I KUM' t7e41,
Tr' 111,T9',Fe4i
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
tA Govt of India Undertaking)
SHT. 2 of 6
300
II
II
_7::
II
Ii
4i
J1
EL. 'A'
T.O.G/CH. PL
EL. `B'
T.O.G/CH. Pl.
r75x75x8
EL. 'C'
T.O.G/CH. PL/T.O.C.
1500
MAX.
STRINGER MC 150
OR MC 200
0
z
EL. TOP OF GROUT\Ir

REFERENCE EL.
17
<
FOR STRINGER MC 150 REFER DET.

FOR STRINGER MC 200 REFER DET. (g.)
ON SHEET 6 OF 6
MAXIMUM RISER IS 200 HOWEVER IT

MAY BE REDUCED AND ADJUSTED AS
REQUIRED.
SECTION 1 -1
18.09.13 REVISED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
5
Rev.
No.
SPJoshl
P.K.IAITTAL
Prepared Checked
Date
Format Nn R-0O-01101-F4 RPV
Page 1331 of 1744
PK IA AL
Purpose
by
by
ctiATU RVIDI D. MALHOTRA
VINAYKUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
nonvrinht F I I - All rinhts resprvprl
STANDARD No.
60J:A ENGINEERS
Igai2Preg INDIA LIMITED
4-IreM 29-edifF C51.34,1,-A
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
SHT. 3 of 6
R.C.C. KERB
230
MIN.
230
MIN.
235
MIN.
230
MIN.
30 NOSING
CLEAT
L-75x75x8-150 LG.
F
U)
CLEAT
75x75x8-150 LG.
0
La
6 THK. STIFFN. PL.
IA V)
J I0 E)l
= co INSERT PL.
Lo
END FLAT
R1 a
c_o
MC150 OR MC200
SECTION 2-2
SECTION 2-2
(CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM MC)
(CONNECTION WITH CONCRETE BEAM)

235
230
MIN.
230
MIN.
230
1=1I NMI IN=
MOMEM MIN 1
MEM WM OWN I
11111114 IM1
111111.1111111111MME
01111 MINIM 1.
MOM. 111111 IMMO 11
IMII
1 MINI M.MIN == l
111 MN= MIMI II1=
=MOM
I
1
MI
II
l
l
l
MINIM MIN M
MN NMI MIN
=MOM MOM Mae l
=MI
IN=
=MI MI= OM
=NM
i
IIII
MINI
M= l
i
l
MINN ONE
.I
I
1
MN 1MM l
l
i
gar
LX
L.d
ET=
....
"*".
; i
IIMII M MN MME 1
1== MIN
STRINGER BEAM
STRINGER BEAM
MC
CLEAT
CLEAT
VIEW 6-6
VIEW 5-5
STRINGER BEAM
MC150 OR MC200
STRINGER BEAM
CC
230
MIN.
17
III II-11 I
75
x-10
M16 BOLTS
I
1V
CLEAT
1-75x75x8
200 LG.
75x75x8-60 LG.
INSERT L-75x75x8
1000 LG. FOR 750MM
WIDTH
INSERT PL.
`R1
LUG C1 0 300 c/c
INSERT PL. 'R 1 a
SECTION 3-3
SECTION 3-3 (ALT.)

(R.C.C. KERB NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
6
09.0E.38 REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Pnrmat Nn
Page 1332 of 1744
Date
s-00-nnni-F4 R PV (1
Purpose
VIEW 7-7

(R.C.C. KERB NOT SHOWN FOR C RITY)
SPJoshI
ikD. MALHOTRA
7
MAARVEDI
PK MITTAL
VPS
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared Checked
by
by
VINAYKUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Ell - All rinhts rPsprvprl
STANDARD No.
ei
5'gzil. itiMeg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
elecrAtT2.17,71.1.1)
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
SHT. 4 of 6
230
(MIN.)
230
(MIN.)
CC BEAM
O
230
0
Cs1
30 NOSING
230
(MIN.)
vg
MC150 OR MC200
0
evl
O
O
0.1
75x75x8
150 LG.
C:,
6 THK.
STIFFN. PL.
CLEAT 75x75x8-60 LG.

MEMBER
REF DESIGN DWG
6 THK. STIFFN. PL.
MC150 OR MC200
SECTION 3-3
SECTION 2-2
(CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM ISMB)
(CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM ISMB)
NIIIN WWI P
OM
MIS
1 UMW
MN1I
NM
MILO
MI MIN
MIOMNIN INMME
IMM
=MN
.M
lMO
11
M.IIIIM
MI=
II'
I MN
l=OM
I
1
1NM
WW1
OMB
ME
=MY
JIM
ENO
1
11111111
MIMI=
=MN NM IME I
LIMIMN .
: l
I
.1111 ,MNM
il
il
l
l
I
Il
l
l
-----
IMIIIIIIM
l
l
l
STIFFN. PL.
STRINGER
230
(MIN.)
STIFFN. PL
STRINGER
ANGLE CLEAT WELDED TO
STRINGER, BOLTED TO MB
30
230
(MIN.)
VIEW 8-8
VIEW 9-9
230
MIN.
---- MC150 OR
MORE
STRINGER
6 THK.
STIFFN. PL.
CLEAT L_-75x75x8-250 LG.

CLEAT WELDED TO STRINGER
AND BOLTED TO MC
TOE PLATE
SECTION 3-3
VIEW 10-10
(CONNECTION WITH STEEL BEAM ISMC)

Rev.
No.
Format No
Page 1333 of 1744
Date
Ft-nn-nnnt-F4 RPV
Purpose
PK MITTAL
VPS
SPJoshI
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared Checked
by
by
EDI D. MALHOTRA
SC
VINAYKUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
nonvrinht Fll - All rinhts resprvPrl
STANDARD No.
.e.]
ENGINEERS
eg INDIA LIMITED
$1gar Ofgr'
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
A Gout of India Undertaking)
i-freR irreMIP 051 J40,

1
SHT. 5 of 6
MC150 OR
MC200
50x50x6
o ;i
SEC. 11-11
6 THK.
CHEQ. PL.
HANDRAILING
230
111111=11r
r'
STRINGER
BRACING
L-50x50x6
(APPROX.)
T 50x50x6
TYP. DET. OF CHEQ. PL. STEP
ELEVATION SHOWING STRINGER BRACINGS
L-50x50x6 STIFFENING
BRACING TO BE PROVIDED
FOR STAIR WITH MORE
THAN 20 RISER
FULL STRENGTH
BUTT WELD FOR
FLANGES
8 THK. PL.
DETAIL A
SEC. 13-13
VIEW 12-12
STAIR DETS WITH CHEQURED PLATE STEPS

,kifyv-st
6
5
Rev.
No.

Fnrmat Nn R-00-0001-F4 Rpv
Page 1334 of 1744
Purpose
Date
n
vps
SPJoshl
NGH
P. .MITTAL
Prepared Checked
by
by
URVEDI D. MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAYKUMAR
Stds. Committee
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rPsPrvPri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
Ogar Orole-g INDIA LIMITED
(11,,J3re
Govt of Ind. UntlertakIng)
c7,1,14[hii!
STEEL STAIRS
7-68-0506 Rev. 6
(A
SHT. 6 of 6
229
230
135
L-75x75x8-120 LG.
60x60x6 THK. WASHER
WITH 22 0 HOLE AT CENTRE
_Ada
r4,
H
W.P.
M20 BOLT
REFERENCE EL.
SLOTTED HOLE 22x50 LG.
IN ANGLE CLEAT
FOR FDN. DETS. REFER

EIL STD. 7-67-0008
150
160
DETAIL
219
230
4o
L 75x75x8-120 LG.
60x60x6 THK. WASHER
WITH 22 0 HOLE AT CENTER
o
3.
W.P.
M20 BOLT
REFERENCE EL.
SLOTTED HOLE 22x50 LG.
IN ANGLE CLEAT
FOR FDN. DETS. REFER

EIL STD. 7-67-0008
255
100
DETAIL
/11
\t/
SPJoahI
Prepared Checked
Rev .
No.
Format Nn
Page 1335 of 1744
CH
P.K.MITTAL
Date
A-no-norm -F4 RPV n
Purpose
by
by
RVEDI D. MALHOTRA
SW5
C
PK MITTAL
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAYKUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM
rnnvrinht Fit - All rinhts rpspnipel
STANDARD No.
ENCJNEFRS
INDIA IJMITED
(A Govt. ot Indlo Undertoking)
IAIRII VIONAVIII104KI
DETAILS OF STEEL LADDER
7-68-0507 Rev. 7
Page 1 of 3
è' INSULATION THICKNESS (50 mm UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE)

1.
T"
RUNG
REFER SEC. 11-11 OF 7-68-0509 (SHT. 1 OF 3)
I:24:2 \ DtLIS
INNNN
TOP
RUNG
EL.
SUPPORT
X2
MENSION BETWEEN SUPPORTS
EL.
SUPPORT
X1
O
O
O
LJ
1
0
z
0
0
o
o
OF RUNGS
re)
NOS.
N=
0
1,4)
EL.
SU P
o
O
SAFETY CAGE
LADDER HEAD
AT SIDE
EL.
--L
o
o
o
SUPPORT
X2
eouom
RUNG
(REFER SHT. 3 OF 3)
LADDER FOR SIDE ENTRY
VESSEL DIA (mm)
LOWER OR
INTERNED
HOOPS
DISTANCE `D' (mm)
MC100 SHALL BE ADOPED FOR DISTANCE

MORE THAN 1350 UPTO 2000
7
6
Rev.
No.
UPTO 800
200 + e
> 800 < 3200
260 + e
> 3200 4 8000
275 + e
28.11.13
06.11.08
REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
Date
F -r:nAt Un a-on-0001-F4 rvrni
Page 1336 of 1744
Purpose
SIttiV
VPS
S.P.JOSH1
A
AJmj
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
VINAY KUMAR
V. CHATURVEDI

Conver.ir
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Corwrinht Fll - All rinhts resprvgri
STANDARD No.
ENGNEERS
0111111~011111~111100
7-68-0507 Rev. 7
(A Govt. of Indlo UndertokIng)
Page 2 of 3
800
800
FLAT
75x10
0
0
14,
TOP OF
GRATING/
CHEQ. PL.
EL. ON
SUPPORT
SECTION3_
x II
ZZ
400/
o
O
re,
TOE ANGLE/EDGE OF
PLATF RM MEMBER
0
CD
CD
LADDER FOR FRONT ENTRY

REF. EL.
REF. EL.
L()
NOS. OFRUNGS
o
re)
NOS. OF RUNGS
O
O
MAX. HEIGHTWITHOUT SAFETY CAGE = 4500
EL. ON
SUPPORT
SECTION
TOP OF PEDESTAL/ "

CHEQ. PL /GRATING
BOTTOM
RUNG
AONL
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT DEPENDING

ON FLOORING TYPE.
(REF. SHT. 3 OF 3)
LADDER FOR FRONT ENTRY

NOTES :1. LADDER POSTS SHALL BE OF FLAT (75x10) UPTO 3.60m (MAX.) BETWEEN SUPPORTS AND ISMC 100 UPTO
7.0m (MAX.) BETWEEN SUPPORTS.
2. RUNGS SHALL BE 20 0.
3. SUPPORT TYPE X1' CORRESPONDS TO FIXED SUPPORT AND X2' CORRESPONDS TO SLIDING SUPPORT.
4. SUPPORT ELEVATION X1, X2 CORRESPOND TO CL OF BOLT HOLES.
5. SUPPORTS 'X1' IS CAPABLE TO SUSTAIN A LOAD FOR 9000 mm LONG LADDER ONLY.
6. LADDER SHALL BE GIVEN A SUITABLE SLOPE (MAX.6*),IF NECESSARY, TO AVIOD FOULING WITH ANCHOR CHAIRS.
28.11.13
Rev.
No.
Fnrrnat Nn
Page 1337 of 1744
Date
s-nn-nnni-F4 Rr.v
Purpose
vikft
VPS
S.P.JOSHI
AJS
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
S.CHANDA
V. CHATURVEDI

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Cnairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht Fii - All rinhts rpsprvpri
STANDARD No.
ENGNEB5
NDIA UMITID
7-68-0507 Rev. 7
(A Govt. of Indlo UndortokIng)
Page 3 of 3
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT
NATURE OF SUPPORT SECTION
REMARKS
A1, A2
SITE WITHOUT PAVING
B1, B2
CONCRETE FLOOR
A1, B1, C1, D1 : FIXED TYPE
C1, C2, D1, D2
CHEQUERED PLATE / GRATING FLOORING
A2, B2, C2, D2 : SLIDING TYPE
REFERENCE
ELEVATION
(TYP)
M.S. GRATING
PLATE (1 20x1 20x6)
TYPE - B1
TYPE - Al
TYPE - C1
WITHOUT
NUT
Ll 00x1 00x8
(TYP)
BOTTOM
_ff
NTGO M
WITHOUT
/ NUT
REFERENCE
ELEVATION
(TYP)
WITHOUT
GRATING
PLATE (1 20x1 20x6)
TYPE - A2
TYPE - C2
TYPE - B2
,;;r
11111
EL. X1
OR X2
CHEQ.
PLATE
PLATE (1 20x1 20x6)
TYPE - D1
TYPE - D2
TYPE - E
NOTE
100
24 0 HOLES FOR
M20 BOLTS
LADDER BOTTOM DETAILS

28.11.13
AJS
S.P.JOSHI
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
P.K.MITTAL
Date
Frrnal Nn R-00-01101-F4 RAV 0
Purpose
by
by
S.CHANDA
V. CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
Rev.
Page 1338 of 1744
TYPE OF ATTACHMENT AT BASE
No.
IN CASE OF TOWERS BOTTOM RUNG SHALL

BE 300 mm FROM FGL /HPP.
280 I, 280
560
(FREE)
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairmai
Convenor
Approved by
rnnv-inht Fll - All rk-.nts rPsArvPrI
3-1(bit
1
ENGINEERS
ti faw5
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertaktegy
FOR R+L
LESS THAN 4.00M.
1
L
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORM
FOR
HOT VESSELS
FOR R+L= 4.0M.
TO LESS THAN 8.00M.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 1 of 8
FOR R+L= 8.0M.

TO 10.00M.
1..,
L i oox i ooxs
L i oox100X8
L i oox, ooxs
E2
L 75X75X8
L 90X90X8
L i oox ioox8
INSULATION THICKNESS 'e'
STD. 7-68 0507 SHT.1 OF 3

400
ir
SEE DETAIL'L'
IN SHT. 8 OF 8
HANDRAIL
(REF. SHT. 8 OF 8)
(REFER SHT. 6 OF 8)
SEE DETAIL 'A' FOR NOTCH IN GRATING

IN SHT. 8 OF 8
INTERMEDIATE PLATFORMS
(FOR e 10Orrirn)
ALL CONNECTIONS ARE BOLTED AS SHOWN
NOTES:-
1. FOR c<1 AND o<2REFER GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING

2.
DIMENSION X1 SHALL BE e+35 BUT NOT LESS THAN 85 IN THE PLATFORM WHERE BRACKET
TYPE- LB7/RB7 OR LB8/RB8ARE NOT USED
3. DIMENSION X1 SHALL BE e+45 BUT NOT LESS THAN 145 IN THE PLATFORM WHERE
BRACKET TYPELB7/RB7 OR LB8/RB8 ARE USED.
4. FOR FURTHER DETAILS REFER GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS.
5. FOR BRACKET DETAILS REFER STD.NO. 7-68-0553 AND FOR CLIP DETAILS REFER
STD. NO. 7-68-0557
6. SPLICING OF TOE ANGLE SHALL BE DONE ONLY IF IT IS ESSENTIAL.
7. ELECTROFORGED GRATING TYPEI SHALL BE AS PER EIL STD. NO. 7-68-0697.
8. FOR OTHER NOTES REFER SHT. 2 OF 8.
7
21.01.14
VPS
28.01.09
VPS
Rev.
No.
Date
Enrrnat Nn e-nn-nnn1-F4 Rev n
Page 1339 of 1744
Purpose
AJS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATtIRVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht Fil - All rinhts rpsprupd
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORM
FOR
HOT VESSELS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Intlta Undertakng)
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 2 of 8
INSULATION THICKNESS 'e'
FOR R+ L=
FOR R+L= 4.0M.
FOR R+L= 8.0M.
LESS THAN 4.00M. TO LESS THAN 8.00M. TO 10.00M.
D
STD. 7-68 0507 SHT.1 OF 3
L 100X100X8
L i oox i oox8
L i oox100X8
fr
L 75X75X8
L 90X90X8
L i oox100X8
s,
400
(REFER SHT. 6 OF 8)
SEE DETAIL'L'
IN SHT. 8 OF 8
HANDRAIL
(REF. SHEET 8 OF 8)
SEE DETAIL
(FOR NOTCH IN GRATING

IN SHEET 8 OF 8)
INTERMEDIATE PLATFORMS
(FOR e >100mm)
ALL CONNECTIONS ARE BOLTED AS SHOWN
NOTES:
CONTD. FROM SHT. 1 of 8
9.
IN CASE OF DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THIS STD. & GENERAL ARRGT. DRG.,

THE LATER SHALL GOVERN.
10. FOR SECTIONS 1-1 TO 5-5 REFER SHT. 4 of 8 TO SHT. 7 of 8.

11. LB INDICATES LEFT BRACKET, RB INDICATES RIGHT BRACKET, LB OR RB TO SUIT
THE LOCAL CONDITIONS & TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER FIXTURES.
12. ALL CLIPS ARE IN THE SCOPE OF VESSEL FABRICATOR.
13. FOR VESSELS HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE +230'c, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING
TO ASTM A193 Gr.B7 AND NUTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A194 Gr. 2H
SHALL BE USED FOR CONNECTIONS TO THE VESSEL FOR TEMP. BELOW 230'C,
CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING TO IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
14. THESE PLATFORMS ARE DESIGNED FOR AN IMPOSED LOAD OF 3.OKN/SQ.M
AND THE BRACKETS FOR THE SPECIFIC CONDITION INDICATED. NO PIPE
SHALL BE ANCHORED OR GUIDED ON THE PLATF RM.
\kvps
21.01.14
28.01.09
Date
Frmat Nn R-00-0001-F4 Rev 0
Page 1340 of 1744
VPS
R.SOOD
Prepared Checked
Rev.
No.
AJS
Purpose
by
by
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
H. MATHUR
/
S.CHANDA
G.R. RAJAGOPALAN
Stds. Committee
Convenor
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht Fll - A II hnhts rpsprvpri
STANDARD No.
k_71
g2e5
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Chl.rwcn.)
CIRCULAR PLATFORM FOR

7-68-0552 Rev. 7
HOT VESSELS
(A Govt ot Intha UAdettaktn9)
SHT. 3 of 8
FOR X
LESS THAN 2.00M.
L
fr
FOR X= 2.0M.
TO LESS THAN 5.00M.
FOR X= 5.0M.
TO 7.00M.
L i 00X100X8
Liooxiooxs
Liooxiooxs
Lioox iooxs
75X75X8
90X90X8
SHELL OUTER RADIUS

INSULATION THICKNESS
HEAD PLATFORMS
FOR NOTES REFER SHT. 1 OF 8 AND 2 OF 8
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Fnrmat Nn
Page 1341 of 1744
Date
8-no-nn01 -F4 RPV
Purpose
.Sk4j7
VPS
VPS
W)NAJS
P. K. MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM
Cnnvriaht Fil - All rinhts rpsprvpri
goi
$;fg-ar 92e5
1~ ~12 MIJ,
47.1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
HOT VESSELS
IA Govt of Jneha Undertak.g)
SHT. 4 of 8
SEE DETAIL () WITH 'G'

TYPE BOLT
SEE DETAIL O WITH 'G'

TYPE BOLT
6 THK. STIFF. PL. (TYP)

75
10 THK. PL.(TYP)
EL. T.T.L.
OF VESSEL
150
SECTION 1-1 RBi (LB11 OPP. HAND)

SECTION 6-6
DIMENSIONS X,Y,& L SHALL BE AS PER

GEN. ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
L=1400(MAX.)
800(MAX.)
200
(MIN.)
10
TYPE BOLT
A,80 80
.... 1
'-0,,' ,L)
\s,
_n
IIr- -- 0
INSULATION
(e)
10
SEE DETAIL Q WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT
4-200 HOLES
FOR M18 BOLTS
11,
u)
`-lir
i
IL
JL
__.__>.
'-' _
,IL_
REF EL
(T.O.S.)
MC150
75
125 80
10 THK. PL.(TYP)
/
EMI
300(MIN.)
EL. T.T.L.
OF VESSEL
150
SECTION 2-2 RB12 (LE312 OPP. HAND)
SECTION 7-7
DIMENSIONS X,Y,&L SHALL BE AS PER

NOTE:
FOR DETAIL
7
6
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Format Nn
Page 1342 of 1744
, & BOLT TYPE 'G' REF. SHT. 8 OF 8 AND
FOR OTHER NOTES REFER SHT. 1 OF 8 & 2 OF 8

\ k`:/" AeLe,_
21.01.14
Date
R-00-nnn1-F4 Rev n
Purpose
VPS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhtg rnsnryncl
(m..) ENGINEERS
02-eg INDIA LIMITED
k_31
iA Govt of incha UndertaK,R9)
STANDARD No.

HOT VESSELS
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 5 of 8
L=2800(MAX.)
180 HOLES FOR M16 BOLTS
IN CLIP AND SLOTTED HOLES
IN MC150 SEE DET. 'S1'
10
SEE DETAIL (1) WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT IN SHT. 8 OF 8

TYPE BOLT IN SHT.8 OF 8
L4.
REF EL
(T.0.5.)
INSULATION
(e)

/ /
/ /
8 THK. PL. (TYP)
1 1
1 1
10 THK. PL.(TYP)
/
MC125 FOR LENGTH ..<2000

MC150 FOR 2000< LENGTH 3500
1 1

(TYP)
,:zp EL. T.T.L.

o
o
OF M16 BOLTS
P.
300(MIN.)
20
O.R.
SLOTTED HOLE
REFER DETAIL
OF VESSEL
DETAIL 'S1'
SLOTTED HOLE
(FOR DET. 'S1')
SECTION 3-3 RB13 (LB13 OPP. HAND)

DIMENSIONS X,Y,8c L SHALL BE AS PER
10 THK. PL.
(AT TOP OF CLIPS)
75
10 THK. PL.
150
SECTION 9-9
SECTION 8-8
FOR NOTES REFER SHT. 1 OF 8 & 2 OF 8
21.01.14
VPS
28.01.09
VPS
Rev.
No.
Date
Format Nn a-00-0001-F4 Rev 0
Page 1343 of 1744
Purpose
AJS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVCDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Chairman
Approved by
ennvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsFwvpri
ENGINEERS
Og-affarZ5 INDIA LIMITED
(affen efrcowaildflsoff)
STANDARD No.

HOT VESSELS
IA Govt of Indla Undertaking)
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 6 of 8
L=1400(MAX.)
10
200
10
(MIN.)
SEE DETAIL C) WITH 'G'
TYPE BOLT IN SHT.8 OF 8
SEE DETAIL () WITH 'G'

TYPE BOLT IN SHT. 8 OF 8
)25 25
o
REF. EL
(T.O.S.)
Ir
W.P.I
MC150
10
8 THK. PL.
10
/ /
EL. T.T.L.
10
o
l0
18 9/ HOLES FOR
M16 BOLTS
Iffifflims
SECTION 4-4 RB14 (LE31 4 OPP. HAND)
DIMENSIONS L,X AND Z SHALL BE AS PER
11
.10
!
'
10 THK. PL.
SECTION 10-10
*SECTION 15-15
VIEW 16-16
FOR NOTES REFER SHT. 1 OF 8 & 2 OF 8

*WHEREVER HANDRAIL ON ANGLE'A' IS DISCONTINUED FOR ENTRY TO THE PLATFORM
FROM LADDER/STAIR/ADJACENT PLATFORM THE UPSTAND LEG OF ANGLE'A' SHALL BE CUT AND
L 1 00X1 00X8 VVELDED AS PER SEC. 15-15 FOR THE LENGTH HANDRAIL IS DISC NTINUED.
7
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Fnrmat Nn
Page 1344 of 1744
Date
R-nn-0001-F4 Rpv n
Purpose
VPS
VPS
AJS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpsprvpd
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
)1
,411
faffieg
I~r ri,tcDW C151.545nA)
STANDARD No.

HOT VESSELS
(A Govt of Incha Undeltaking)
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
SHT. 7 of 8
L=2800(MAX.)
EQ

IN CLIP AND SLO1TED HOLES
IN MC150 SEE DET. 'S1'
(SHT. 5 OF 8)
EQ
SEE DETAIL 'Q' WITH 'G'
lYPE BOLT IN SHT. 8 OF 8
MC125 SHALL BE PROVIDED

WHEN
> 1400
J00 100
TYVTYP/
SEE DETAIL 0 WITH 'G'

1YPE BOLT IN SHT. 8 OF 8
REF EL
(T.O.S.)
INSULATION
(e)
10 THK. PL(TYP)
MC125 TO BE PROVIDED (AS SHOWN)
WHEN 'P' IS MORE THAN 800
P
EL. T.T.L.
75
14
OF VESSEL
Lr4
300(MIN.)
10 THK. PL.
150
Z=0.R.+ e+ 1 20
SECTION 11-11
SECTION 5-5 RB15 (LE31 5 OPP. HAND)
DIMENSIONS X,Y,Z & L SHALL BE AS PER
200 HOLE
FOR M18 BOLTS
90
SECTION: 12-12
90
o
rn
u)
N
crt
In
N
12 THK. PL
200
8 THK. PL.
SECTION 13-13
(BASE PLATE)
VIEW-F
SECTION 14-14
(CLIP)
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnnnat Nn 8-nn-nnni-F4 RAV n
Page 1345 of 1744
Purpose
AJS
VPS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ennvrinht Fll - AII rinhts rpp.prvpri
(4.
44li
fd
l!") ENGINEERS
k.71
mar 02-dgWINDIA LIMITED

wkmpwaswam~
STANDARD No.
7-68-0552 Rev. 7
HOT VESSELS
IA Govt of india UndenakIng)
SHT. 8 of 8
10
32 NB(M) PIPE
Tlf PL.
10 THK. PL.
FOR L 100X100X8
FOR L 90X90X8
50X6 FLAT
M12 BOLTS
M12 BOLTS
32 NB(M) PIPE
FOR ANGLE SIZE
FOR ANGLE SIZES 90X90X8/

100X100X8
o
X
X
75X75X8
DETAIL'L'
(SPLICE)
0
CO
R=12
In
50X6 FLAT
50X6 FLAT
~Mi
REF. EL,
(T.O.G.) 1
DETAIL OF SLOTTED
HOLE IN TOE ANGLE
HANDRAIL
BOLT TYPE 'G'

(REFER DET. P & Q)
(REFER DET. P & Q)
HALF HANDRAIL
BRACKET
INNER TOE
ANGLE LB
OUTER TOE
ANGLE LA
u-,
OF 020 HOLE ON
10
//
BKT AND
OF SLOTTED HOLE ON TOE ANGLE

(SEE DETAIL)
OF 020 HOLE ON BKT
DETAIL'A'
WITH 'G' TYPE BOLT
_JEM
/111/~11/e
ffi ~1~
MEIMMIIM
M~~1
ffi~~
DETAIL'P'
DETAIL'Q'
(THE BOLT SHALL BE HAND TIGHTENED )
NOTCH IN GRATING
7
21.01.14
28.01.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrmat Nn R-00-n001-F4 RPV n
Page 1346 of 1744
Purpose
5 Arn-v
VPS
AJt-\
VPS
P. K. MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S.CHATURVEDI S.CHANDA
V.CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

Convenor
by
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ennvrinht Fll - AII rinhts rpsprvpd
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
5fg- r ~
-g
ef57.3,4cf.4)
r-wcol2
DETAILS OF BRACKETS FOR
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
IA Govt of Incha Undertaiongt
OF HOT VESSELS
SHT. 1 of 5
1A
INSULATION
10
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
ELEVATION 'X'
tr)
co
N
\\
/
/
35
BRACKETS LB1 & RB1
L/2
L/2
I /
LB
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
(900 < L 1400)
2 L
4,35 M IN .)
INSULATION
6 THK. BENT UP STEEL PLATE
SUPPORT CLIP
10 THK.
10
GRATING
ELEVATION 'X'
-I
/ /
/ /
_/
/ /
/ /
/ /
/
-T---i8-200 HOLES FOR:,_,_._

M18 BOLTS*_
= ,i 140 HOLES
........................
120 BOLTS
MC125Y! FOR
,_
11
6

I
SUPPORT CLIP
10 THK.
1
35
BRACKETS LB2 & RB2 (1400<1_ isoo)
6
* FOR VESSEL HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE + 230*C, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING T0 ASTM A193 Gr. B7 & NUTS
CONFORMING T0 ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED. FOR TEMP. BELOW 230*C, CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING
T0 IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
TYPE LB
& RB1
TYPE LB 2 & RB2
NOTES:
1.
THESE DETAILS ARE VALID FOR PLATFORMS

T0 HOT VESSELS HAVING INSULATION THICKNESS
100 mm
LENGTH (mm) WEIGHT(kg) LENGTH(mm) WEIGHT(kg)

985
16.00
1485
37.42
1085
17.60
1585
39.72
1185
19.12
1685
42.06
1285
20.62
1785
44.38
1385
22.14
1885
46.72
1485
23.65
2.
FOR DETAILS OF CLIPS REFER STANDARD N0.

7-68-0557 SHT. 1 OF 3
REFER G.A. DRG. OF PLATFORMS FOR BRACKET
3.
TYPES AND DIMENSIONS R, L, X, 0<-1 & c<2

4.
ORIENTATION OF BRACKETS IS GIVEN ACCORDING

TO ARROW 'F'
LB = LEFT BRACKET (FLANGE ON LEFT)

LENGTH = L + 75+10 (FOR 35 CLEARANCE BETWEEN
RB = RIGHT BRACKET (FLANGE ON RIGHT)
INSULATION & INNER TOE ANGLE OF PLATFORM)
ABOVE WEIGHTS INCLUDE WEIGHT OF STIFFENERS
THIS STANDARD IS APPLICABLE FOR IMPOSED LOAD OF 3KN/SQM.
7
21.01.14
Rev.
No.
Fnrrnat Nn
Page 1347 of 1744
\'\
VPS
AJF14..
VPS
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared
Date
R-on-nn01-F4 Rev n
Purpose
by
P.K.M AL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUHAR
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
Checked Stds. Committee

Convenor
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
r,nnvrinht F II - All rinhts rpsprvAri
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
k31
5fg-ar laWs
evramc,d51.1,10,,i)
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
Govt of Indla Underlakingt
OF HOT VESSELS
SHT. 2 of 5
'F' INDICATES VIEWING FROM OUTSIDE TOWARDS THE CENTRE OF VESSEL FOR BRACKET ORIENTATION
W M12 BOLTS
35
5 0 80
GRATING
R F.
(T.O.S.)
V3
C1 5
TOE ANGLE AND
BKT. CONNECTED
WITH 'G' TYPE BOLT
SEE 7-68-0552 SHT.
8 OF 8
CLIP
SEE 7-68-0557
SHT. 1 OF 3
SLOTTED HOLE IN
WEB OF MC125
8 THK. PLATE
8 THK. PLATE
SEE DETAIL'A'
SECTION 2-2
34
/1 In
4111,
R=7
80
10
OF M12 BOLTS
SECTION 1 -1
SIMILAR SEC. 1A-1A EXCEPT BOLTS
BRACKET
002-
SECTION 3-3
'G' TYPE BOLT REF. SHT.
8 OF 8 STD. 7-68-0552
EFERENCE
AXIS
BRACKETS ORIENTATION
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrmat Nn R-00-0001-F4 RPV
Page 1348 of 1744
DETAIL 'A'
Purpose
DETAIL 'B'
\J'kr/
VPS
AJS
VPS
P.K.MITTAL
Prepared
by
P. .MITTAL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI

Convenor
by
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Cnnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rs,sprveri
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
5g-ar 02e5
frrr- e,c,cnW d51.3,47.1)
R
)35/(MIN.)
85 j,85 ,1401,1,
10
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
cNi
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
IA Govl of India Undertaking)
INSULATION

OF HOT VESSELS
4A
10
LB
SHT. 3 of 5
GRATING
ELEVATION 'X'
(T.O.S.)
/ /
F
6-200 HOLES FOR
M18 BOLTS*
/ / /
510 THK. FACE PLAT

_Z
co
4A
//
/ /
SUPPORT CLIP
/
BRACKETS LB3 & RB3
(900 < L 1400)
R
e ,35 MIN.)
INSULATION
L/2
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
LB
L/2
GRATING
ELEVATION 'X'
T.O.S.
/ /
/
/ /
/ /
/Lt
/
1F
8-200 HOLES FOR

M18 BOLTS*
MC125
= FOR 120 BOLTS
/ /
/ / /

10 THK. FACE PLATE
/ / /
6 THK. PLATE
/
!/
/
/ /
SUPPORT CUP
BRACKETS LB4 & RB4
(1400 < L 1800)
* FOR VESSEL HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE + 230'C, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A193 Gr. B7 & NUTS
CONFORMING TO ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED. FOR TEMP. BELOW 230'C, CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING
TO IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
TYPE LB 3 & RB3
TYPE LB4
&
RB4
NOTES:
1.

935
18.40
1435
40.60
1035
19.90
1535
42.60
1135
21.40
1635
45.00
1235
22.90
1735
47.30
1335
24.50
1835
49.60
1435
25.90
2.
3.
4.
VPS
VPS
Date
Fnrmat Nn R-on-on01-F4 Rev
Page 1349 of 1744
Purpose

TYPES AND DIMENSIONS R, L, X, c<1 & oC2
No.
FOR DETAILS OF CLIPS REFER STANDARD N0.

7-68-0557 SHT. 2 OF 3
LENGTH = L+10+25 (FOR 35 CLEARANCE BETWEEN

INSULATION & INNER TOE ANGLE OF PLATFORM)
AND WEIGHT OF FACE PLATE.
Rev.
THESE DETAILS ARE VALID FOR PLATFORMS

TO HOT VESSELS HAVING INSULATION THICKNESS
100 mm BUT NOT MORE THAN 300 mm

TO ARROW 'F'
Prepared
by
/ A
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

by
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fll - Al) rinhts rpsprvpri
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$)gu02e5
trf1eR~f2M1.3,1511)
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
IA Govt of InOia Undertalongt
INSULATION
SHT. 4 of 5
4Bl
44
L/2
f LB
SHELL
OUTSIDE DIA.
OF HOT VESSELS
L/2
GRATING
/ //
ELEVATION
(T.O.S)
,/
140 HOLES FOR

M12 BOLTS
MC 125
Xv 8 (TYP)
8-300 HOLES FOR

M27 BOLTS*
/ / /A,_
/
/
817
// '
/
i
~-r,A
\\_...
1
/
12 THK.
FACE lt
/ /
////
y
/7 /
SUPPORT CLIP
BRACKETS LB7 & RB7 (180o<L2400)
4C
INSULATION
10
L/3
1,
SHELL
45
GRATING
/ /
.frfr
OUTSIDE DIA. /
EL. 'X'
o
o
/
/
/z
/ /-41.\_
5N
8-330 HOLES
/
FOR M30 BOLTS
/7m16 THK.
/ / /
// ///
FACE
/\
/ /
4F
-8 (TYP)
MC125 (TYP)
(T.O.S)
SUPPORT CLIP
4,Cj
BRACKETS LB8 & RB8 (2400<
3000)
FOR VESSEL HAVING TEMPERATURE ABOVE + 230T, SPECIAL BOLTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A193 Gr. B7 & NUTS
CONFORMING TO ASTM A194 Gr. 2H SHALL BE USED. FOR TEMP. BELOW 230T, CARBON STEEL BOLTS CONFORMING
TO IS:1363 SHALL BE USED.
TYPE LB7 & RB7
TYPE LB8 & RB8
NOTES:
1.

1845
1945
2045
2145
2245
2345
2445
60.40
63.10
65.80
68.50
71.20
73.90
76.60
2545
2645
2745
2845
2945
3045
83.80
86.50
89.20
91.90
94.60
97.30
THESE DEAILS ARE VALID FOR PLATFORMS TO HOT

VESSELS HAVING INSULATION THICKNESS UP TO 300mm.
HOWEVER 'e' SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED LESS THAN 100mm.
2.
FOR DETAILS OF CLIPS REFER STANDARD NO.

7-68-0557 SHT. 3 OF 3
3.
4.
TYPES AND DIMENSIONS R, L, X, c<1 &
TO ARROW 'F'
LENGTH = L + 10 + 35
AND WEIGHT OF FACE PLATE
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrrnat Nn R-f)0-0001-F4 RPV
Page 1350 of 1744
Purpose
AJS
VPS
Prepared
by
P.K.MITTAL
P.K.MITTAL
S CHATURVEDI
VINAY KUMAR

by
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
GM
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
r.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhts rpsprvprl
ENGINEERS
$'g-a[ faW5 INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD No.
CIRCULAR PLATFORMS
7-68-0553 Rev. 7
IA Govt of locha Undertak,o9)
FORSEC. 5-5
OF HOT VESSELS
DIA
OUIER
OF
0.D
SHT. 5 of 5
R SEC. 5A-5
ifT2R 2i7d572 ,151.34snl1
OF
BENT UP STEEL PLATE

BRACKET
SECTION 5-5
SEC. 5A-5A, SIMILAR EXCEPT AS NOTED
REF. DETAIL 'A'

SHOWN IN SHT. 2 OF 5
1*'0
GRATING
TOE ANGLE AND

BKT. CONNECTED
WITH 'G' TYPE BOLT
SEE STD. 7-68-0552
SHT. 8 OF 8
200 HOLES FOR

M18 BOLTS FOR
SEC. 4-4, 4A-4A
/
50
300 HOLES FOR

M27 BOLTS FOR
SEC.4B-4B
50
330 HOLES FOR

M30 BOLTS FOR
SEC.4C-4C
EFERENCE
AXIS
ESSEL O.D.
10
80
20
80/ 100 (SEC.4B-4B, 4C-4C)

/
90 (SEC.4-4, 4A-4A)
SECTION 4-4
SIMILAR SEC. 4A-4A, 4B-4B & 4C-4C
EXCEPT BOLTS
BRACKETS ORIENTATION
'F' INDICATES VIEWING FROM OUTSIDE TOWARDS THE CENTRE OF VESSEL FOR BRACKET ORIENTATION
28.01.09
Prepared
Rev.
No.
Date
Fnrmat Nn R-nn-nnni-F4 Rev n
Page 1351 of 1744
P.K.MITTAL
VPS
Purpose
by
P.K.MITTAL
VINAY KUMAR
S CHATURVEDI
S CHANDA
V CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Checked Stds. CommitteeGM
Convenor
Chairman
by
Approved by
C.nnvrinht Fil - All rinhtR rpsgwvw1
- lij 441,1JAUQU
Aq panoiddv
ueltu!eqo
neaJne spls
INO
JOU9AU00
eallmwoo .srAs
NV1Vd001"fil *l'O
VONVH3 S
tinw.vm .H
1Y1JJPI'X'd
103A11111YH3'S
Aq
Aq
paloaqo paiedaid
IHSOrd'S
fr
SdA
asodind
U Add Pd- WOU-0013 uN

9120
9Z
C:IVCINVIS SV aanssi CINV C3SIA321
90'1. 1.0
C12:1VCINVIS SV oenssi CINV C3SIA32!
N
Aad
r4)
'ONIMV210 13SS3A 2:13d SV 38 11VHS Sd110 210d 1VIL131VVI
.03sn 38 11VHS 91:S1 01 ON111210JNO3 S1108 1331S NO8dV3 '0.0Z M0138 "di131 d0J
Sd113 3H1 HIIM NO1133NN03 dOJ cosn 38 11VHS HZ .210 46L V V.11SV 01 ONIMOJNO3 SII1N ONV
L8 dO 61V 111-SV 01 ONIMOJNO3 S1108 1V133dS '3 .0Z+3A08V S38(11Vddr131 ON1AVH S13SS3A 210J 'S
'g0-99L 'ON 021VONV1S 2133321 S11V130 13)13V218 2103 '17
dO Z 133HS NO S1IV130 d3J3d '00 L <a 2103 '
'001. > a > Og >J0J 9-8 =V CINV 09 ,
a > 0 230d 94=V 'Z
(SS3N0101H1 NOI1V1f1SN1=a)001. >9 dOd anvn 38V L 30Vd NO
:S310N
(421? 'Z' L 3dA1 SdI10)
,821, 13)13V218
1HOld 80J
(Zed 2P Z81 SI3>I0V2113 210J)
c.n
(zad
Z81 SI3)13Vd8 d0J)
Z 3d/U
co
\ \
,X,
30N32333321
co
,X,
33N3213J3d
ld .)1H1 OL
(Led ? Len SI3)13V88 d0J)
(Les
Lel SI3)13Vd8 d0J)
3d).1
L 3dk1
,X,
3N J d
ld
)1HI O L
ldVd 1V3161C1N1-1).3 01
12:1Vd 1VOIN 03 01
Jo L '1HS
Sl3SS3A 10H
210d
Sd113 1210ddrIS IN210dBild
TAGd L990-89-L
.oN CldVGNVIS
(BooleVaPon ePol 10 No9 V)
C1311V\111 VICINI
S293NIDN3
(1.ShrLm?K.D...,y2lit)
27
,-gg1121
9rW9P
Page 1352 of 1744
.1J
IIV - ild 44uyouuu
Aq panoaddv
uettu!eqo
wD
neaing 'sp}s
NYridOOYMI
VONVH3 S
JOUGAU00
aan!wwoo spis
anio" .H
10:13ASOIY113'S
1YILYITd
U ndd
alea
asodind
PG>109110 paiedoid
GOOS a
StY
oisords
S'
tf\
sv oenssi CJNV C13S1A3d
CldVCINV1S
90' CO
sv conssi Cl NV Cl3S1A32:1
C21VC1NV1S
'9Z
uN Wuu
'oN
nad
G1S SIH1 JO ( JO L *IHS) 9 25' '9`17 S31ON dI3J3d1 0S1V *

990-99 L 'ON 'CJIS dI3J3d1 `S1IVI30 13>I0Vd18 d0J 'Z
SI 11V130 SIH1 L
0 1. --1-G=V '001< a d0J
(9
L `9
3dAl SdI13)
NVid
:S31ON
(dA1) 31V1d *NH1
-V3SS'3I
pO
(P821 >i) "91 S13)13Vd8 2103)
(chu) 31V1d NH1 OL
Z ,o
2-3d).1
o
(4Eis
yei S13>I0Vd8 d0.1)
(43
9 3dAl
(du) S310H
31V1d *NH1 0 L
rs
,X,
3ON3213J38
(d).1.) S310H 00Z
o
O
S310H 00Z
31V1d NH1 9
.
4)
cn
31V1d )IH1 O L
(921
(921 "8 81 S13)13V219 210.3)
91 S13)I0V218 210J)
9-3dAl
L-3dAl
\C)
an
0
O
O
31V1d *)1H1 0
(dA1) S310H 00Z
(dA1) 9310H 00Z
oo
31V1d ')1H1 0
c
cn
tn
X "13
331,132133321
,X,
30N3213J321-4
1,3
31V1d >IH1 9
S .Aed LSS0-99-L
no
31V1d *NH1 9 -
lJYd 1nllCINI1A0 01
IdVd 1V3IN03 01
C Z '1HS
Sl3SS3A 10H
110d
Sd113 11:10ddflS 11210d11f1d
.oN adVaNVIS
(6unlellaPurt e,Pui 1.0 Inog v)
(1
,
t51/belat...~
/12114)
Ir?W
03111N11
521331\119N3
L9P
Page 1353 of 1744
Cd/N.h.rbdJ .1141.)1.1 Ii> - 1;,1
q panwddv
uewneyo
neanig sps
IAJ 0
Aq
Aq
Jouanuo0
aaniwwoo sm paloaqo paiEdald
anawn .H
NYTIelOOMII TO
VONVH3 s
000S 21
IHSOrd'S
KI3A21111VHO'S
esoclind
U Ak'd Vd- CUUU-U0-13

Glea
Wukiod
N
nad
1.1.1.'9Z
sv conssi CINV CI3SIA32!
90' I. I.'CO
adVCINVIS SV conssi CINV Cl3SIA32:1

CldVCINVIS
(91 25' SL
t7
9
L `1. 3dAl SdI10)
NVid
'01S SIH1 JO ( JO L '133HS) 9 )2 S'17 S310N 83338 0S1V *Z
01. L NVH1
SS31 38 10N 11VHS V 83A3MOH 01+9=V 'SNOI1V1f1SNI
dO S3SS3N>IDIH1 11V 210d C111VA 32IV SlIV130 3S3H1 *1
:310N
(9821 yP 981 S13)13V88 210J)
( 988 41 281 S13X3Y218 80J)
9 1. 3dAl
17
3dAl
;c4
o
ui
Cri
->c-- -4--
31Yld *)1H1 9
31rld *>11-11 9
(dA1) S310H 0
cn
(dA1) S310H 0
eO
cn
31V1d *)1H1 0 L
31V1d '>IH1 0
,X, '13
33N3d3J38
Cn
cn
"
cn
cn
X 13
33N3213J31
ts)
31Y1d ^>1H1
(Lea
*VIG 301sino
113HS
31Vld *)1H1
Lai S13)13V88 803)
(L88 i L81 S13)I3V88 Li03)
1-3dAl
9 1. 3c1A1
V
31V1d *)1H1 Z1
31V1d *)1H1 Z
(dA1) S310H 00
II
(dA1) S310H 00
(O
31rld )IH1 01
31Vld 'XH1 0
\
rs3
cn
4
cn
,X,
33N383d3d
X 13
33N383.1321
O
31V1d '>1H1 9
N)
VIO 3aisino
113HS
31V1d *AH1
llVd 1V3Id0N11A3 01
llYd 1V3IN03 01
'1HS
Sl3SS3A .LOH
dOd
Sd110 .1.2110ddlIS 1111110d1Y1d
Aed L990-29-L
.0N adVCINVIS
(.,,,euapun
VICINI
S2133NI9N3
9-2,142122gif
Page 1354 of 1744
Ird.araliagieo.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tktreR eivenre tor rtur+-0
STANDARD No.
ELECTROFORGED GRATING
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
SHT.1 of 8
NOTES :1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm.

2. THE TYPE OF GRATING TO BE USED SHALL BE CALLED OUT ON THE DESIGN DRAWING.
3. MATERIAL FOR THE GRATING (TWISTED BARS/M.S. FLATS) SHALL BE OF GRADE E250 SUB QUALITYA/BR/BO
CONFORMING TO IS:2062. BEARING FLATS AND END FLAT SHALL BE AS PER IS:1730. FLAT FOR CLAMPS
SHALL BE AS PER IS:513.
4. ALL GRATINGS SHALL BE MADE BY ELECTROFORGING PROCESS.
5. GRATINGS SHALL BE HOT DIP GALVANISED IN ACCORDANCE WITH IS:2629 AND TESTED AS PER
IS:2633 AND IS:6745. QUANTITY OF ZINC COATING SHALL BE MINIMUM 900 gm/m 2 OF SURFACE
AREA (0.12mm UNIFORM THICKNESS)
6. THE PANEL WIDTH SHOWN ON THE SUBSEQUENT SHEETS IS INDICATIVE. IT MAY BE INCREASED OR
DECREASED AS REQUIRED TO SUIT THE GEOMETRY OF THE PLATFORM & CONVENIENCE OF HANDLING.
7. GRATINGS SHALL NOT BE USED FOR SUPPORTING THE PIPES DIRECTLY. ADDITIONAL MEMBERS
(MINIMUM MC125) SHALL BE PROVIDED UNDER THE GRATING FOR SUPPORTING THE PIPE HAVING
A MAXIMUM LOAD OF 500 Kg. THIS MEMBER SHALL SPAN IN SAME DIRECTION AS GRATING.
8. GALVANISED GRATING PANEL SHALL BE FIXED TO THE SUPPORTING MEMBERS BY CLAMPS OR
ALTERNATIVELY BY WELDING. REMOVABLE GALVANISED GRATING PANEL AS SHOWN IN DWGS SHALL BE
FIXED BY CLAMPS ONLY.
9. FOR GRATING PANELS WITH CUTOUTS / OPENINGS; STRENGTHENING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT
AS PER THE DETAILS GIVEN ON SHEET 6. ADDITIONAL MEMBERS WHEREVER SHOWN SHALL BE PROVIDED
IN THE STRUCTURE.
10. THE FABRICATED GRATING SHALL FULFILL THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
(a)
THE UNFUSED JOINTS ARE NOT IN EXCESS OF 5% OF THE TOTAL JOINTS AND ARE WELDED
BY SMAW/GMAW PROCESS
(b)
THE JOINTS ARE ABLE TO SUSTAIN A MINIMUM PULL OUT LOAD OF 1.2 TIMES THE ALLOWABLE
SHEAR CAPACITY OF THE CROSS MEMBER.
11. EVERY FIFTH MAIN MEMBER SHALL NECESSARILY BE WELDED TO THE END FLAT FROM (ONE SIDE)
HOWEVER, THE END MAIN MEMBER SHALL ALWAYS BE WELDED TO THE END FLATS.
12. OPENINGS UP TO 200mm DIA ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWING THE SAME SHALL BE MADE AT SITE
DURING ERECTION OF PIPING.
13. REPAIR TO THE DAMAGED AREA OF GALVANIZED COATING DUE TO WELDING AFTER ERECTION SHALL BE
CARRIED OUT AS PER RECOMMENDED PRACTICE OF IS:11759 USING COLD GALVANIZING SPRAY PROCESS.
ORGANIC PAINT SYSTEM IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
14. MAXIMUM LENGTH OF SINGLE CONTINUOUSLY SUPPORTED GRATING SHALL BE FIXED ON THE BASIS OF
HANDLING. HOWEVER PREFERABLY LENGTH OF GRATING SHALL BE RESTRICTED TO 4.2M.
04.11.15 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0
Page 1355 of 1744
Purpose
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
AMAIUk
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN RIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
GI
fg-ar f&154-eg
IkiRR e-feake
0t1 JV0.N )
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STANDARD No.
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
SHT.2 of 8
TABLE-1
USE OF GRATING TYPE AT VARIOUS LOCATIONS &
NET SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR GRATING TYPE-I & II
500 TO 800
900
1000
1100
1250
1400
APPLICATION
TYPE
2
EITHER OF w(UDL IN KN/m ) OR P(LINEAR LOAD IN KN/M)
1. EQUIPMENT PLATFORM
2. WALKWAY FOR CABLE
PIPE RACK
TRAY IN
3. OPERATING PLATFORM FROM
GRADE/SUPER STRUCTURE
4. APPROACHES
1. STAIRS
2. FLOOR GRATING FOR
a) COMPRESSOR HOUSE
b) TECHNOLOGICAL STRUCTURE
c) PIPE RACK WITH
VALVE / PIPE SUPPORTS
d) MAINTENANCE PLATFORM
II
9 .60
14.80
10.80
8.10
5.30
3.40
9.00
8.00
6.60
5.40
4.00
2.70
19.60
17.60
13.20
8.70
5.50
14.60
10.70
8.80
6.30
4.40
13.00
NOTE:- THE NET SAFE WORKING LOADS GIVEN ON TABLE-1 ARE BASED ON LIMITING VERTICAL
DEFLECTION OF SPAN/200 OR 6mm, WHICHEVER IS LESS.
SYMBOLS := EFFECTIVE SPAN IN mm

b = BEARING WIDTH IN mm
w
= UDL IN KN/m2
p = LINEAR LOAD IN KN/m AT MID SPAN ALONG PANEL WIDTH.

= GRATING SPAN DIRECTION
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1356 of 1744
Purpose
t,4,14A-114'
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
AMARJE
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
1.1ren eit,nler 051.3,10.4-1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
(A Govt of Ind,a Undertalung)
SHT. 3 of 8
"A
36 NOS. FLAT 25x3

(MAIN MEMBER)
0_
>-
''
111
17
X
tO
CNI
0
LJ-
MAIN
MEMBER
M1=1.=
incX Mi rDAIIWIrI TU
35 SPACING 0 30 c /c
z
Lai
CROSS
MEMBER
100
100
100
(REFER NOTE-11)
Z
W
DETAIL 'A'
0
0
0
0
100
100
100
rrA
l `13'
U,
w w
ce
.4(
0
(/)
Li FLAT 25x3
La
(i)
SECTION 1 1
E to0
E
C_)
1.
lz
CLEAR SPAN = 1b
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN MEMBER
DETAIL `B'
PLAN
* (REFER VIEW 4-4 IN SHEET 5 OF 8)
TABLE-2
WT. OF GRATING IN kg/m 2
(INDICATIVE ONLY, NOT FOR PAYMENT)
25x6
25x3
2.36
20.13
6mm SQUARE
TOTAL
TWISTED
BAR
2.54
25.03
PROPERTIES
WIDTH = 1053mm
C M4
Zxx
cm 3
MR
k gm
14.84
11.87
195.94
lxx
REMARKS
GRATING TYPE I
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O
Page 1357 of 1744
Purpose
ivit,d4t0a.
JITENDER GUPTA
AMARJEE1
R.S.CHAUHAN
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
it\L
2 )-/
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
igzEr Oatg
(A
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
SHT.4 of 8
C
L_
E
E
M
31 NOS. FLAT 25x6

(MAIN MEMBER)
75
75
75
MAIN
MEMBER
cD
X
II
CNI
L.
CI
CROSS
MEMBER
3
(REFER NOTE-11)
DETAIL - 'C'
0
cc
Q
II
m
w
75
75
t
LLI
I ED
f.f/
75
X
II
`f
i
I
't'
I
L.1
Zs'
FLAT 25x6
< 0
CY CJ
SECTION 2-2
E
E
co
II
E
E
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN MEMBER
xl
CLEAR SPAN = /b
PLAN
DETAIL - `D'
* (REFER VIEW 4-4 IN SHEET 5 OF 8)
TABLE-3
WT. OF GRATING IN kg/m 2
(INDCATIVEONLY,OTFRPAYMENT)
PROPERTIES
WIDTH = 1056mm
25x6
8mm SQUARE
TWISTED BAR
TOTAL
lxx
cm4
Zxx
cm3
MR
kgm
36.92
6.14
43.06
24.2
19.4
319.69
REMARKS
GRATING TYPE - II
JITENDER GUPTA
16.02.15
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1358 of 1744
_tcr.
Purpose
AMARJEEt
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
k-Y/
k
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
(+,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
riecAte 157 3,TC5Vi)
STANDARD No.
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
SHT.5 of 8
CLAMP 25x3 THK. M.S. FLAT,

WITH 8 0 HOLES (AS/IS:513)
TWISTED BAR
8mm/6mm
CLAMP
5mm
ir;ATT
11")
uN
C- NMI
GRATING
/25x6 THK. M.S.
FLAT WITH 8 0
HOLES, TACK
WELDED TO STRL.
MEMBER
VIEW 3-3
VIEW 4-4
GRATING FIXED WITH CLAMP

(REFER NOTE-8)
GRATING FIXED WITH CLAMP

(REFER NOTE-8)
25 , (min.)/ FULL FLANGE WIDTH
FOR ONE SIDE SUPPORT
TWISTED BAR
cs1
GRATING
18 min.)
/
VIEW 4-4
GRATING FIXED WITH WELDING
(REFER NOTE-13)
WELD/CLAMP
TYP)
.5
O
ID
L (SPAN)
FIXING DETAIL FOR GALVANISED GRATING PANELS

JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1359 of 1744
P44144 9'11-
Purpose
AMARJEET
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAH SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
GI ra..1t4
$'1gar 2154-eg
ereasWasTJacr.ii
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
IA Gov. of India Undertaking)
SHT.6 of 8
=111.11i===111111iM
11M111 1111=
MIIMINII 11111111
.IMINII MMIUM MININ!
-MMINIMMINIMM =11!
IN= 11M11IIII
1111111 111 =,
MOO INP21
M11111
111
111111
MINE M
WWI
NiM 1111111M111 4
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 ALROUND
& WELDED TO
GRATING FLAT
3
3
--------
IIM=111LIME==.11k111
MNIMIIIIINIII
11111111M111=
JOINIIIMIIIIIIIM
-111111111111111
MIIIIIIIIIMIlw /
MIIP" / 'IM W'
/
//
//
I
__I j
,
l
IIIIM111111111
AIMMIIIIII
__
11
MIIIIIMI
.41
JMNIIIIMIIIIIIII11.4, ,
...7 !"
MMINIIIIIIIIIIMMO
MINIEN= 1111111I
IMIIIIIIIIIIIIIIM
1111111111111111111
MIIII11111.===1M
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
----------------------
IMMim m
--------
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6
BENT TO SHAPE
& WELDED TO
GRATING FLAT
I
All
1P2M
14M
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
CIRCULAR
RECTANGULAR
(SIZE OF OPENING >200 & UP TO 400 mm)

(FOR OPENING UP TO 200 MM REFER NOTE 1 2)
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 ALROUND
& WELDED TO GRATING FLAT
--k ----k
k ----1
IIINBENN ,
IIMMINN
IIINOMINLIM
11111MIN '
1 1111111111 51
..MMEIMERIMIEINEMEIMIRIMIMIIMIS
-7IMM
SI=IGISISEMSI.T-S1=IMIMMIE!SM
NMMEM
1111111111
1111=11,
104
MIMI
'
min
mom
SIM
UM
11111
SIM
In=
SUPPORTING MEMBER AS
AS PER DESIGN DWG OR
L-75x75x6 MINIMUM
BELOW GRATING
a=
aim
ams
IMGE 31E 715E
.mon= ra.
Nonsm =oom
solimm
moomm =e
simimm =monom
imm mw =mimm
GALVANISED
FLAT 25x6 BENT TO SHAPE
& WELDED TO GRATING FLAT
INI7''
=M W/
1 1 1W ,
IMIll/
Illl ,
INI
101
INII
--"111111111111111 11P-
"IIMMEIMII
IM111 1
MLNI
ILMIni,
MIME
MEIN
1111Mral
Mil
IMIL
II1I
'MINIM
alll
AMINI
-41111MINIM
AMINIMMIL. ,,,,
..401111 ""
IIIIIIMINIM 1 ""' _.....11 011INI
SUPPORTING MEMBER AS
AS PER DESIGN DWG OR
L-75x75x6 MINIMUM
BELOW GRATING
illilMaGiallatiRGIGGEIRGIWOallORE
11111111111111 1111111111MIII
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
=lomii
WELDING SHALL BE
DONE ON ALL THE
FLATS AND BARS
CIRCULAR
RECTANGULAR
SIZE OF OPENING GREATER THAN 400 mm
TYPICAL DETAIL OF GRATING STRENGTHENING AT OPENINGS

(REFER NOTE-9)
JITENDER GUPTA
16.02.15
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev.O
Page 1360 of 1744
ilkemr144,11.411*
Purpose
AMARJEET
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
oi 6
514artaf5
(4.117
eirotetri.tmat+0
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
SHT.7 of 8
DET. OF 25 THK. GRATING STAIRCASE

TREAD FOR 750 & 1000 WIDE STAIR
E
E
STRINGER
oo
PROJECTION
8mm SQ. TWISTED CROSS BAR

25x6 THK. FLATS MAIN BAR
LEADING EDGE OF TREAD
6 THK. PLATE
CROSS MEMBER
MAIN MEMBER
14 0 HOLE
FOR M12 BOLTS
40x14
SLOTTED HOLE
FOR M12 BOLTS
(AS/IS:1367)
DETAIL- 'E'
VIEW 6-6
t
GALVANISED
END PL. 65x6
\ 31,
I
I
< FLAT 25x6*
SECTION 5-5
*ALL THE FLATS TO BE WELDED TO THE END FLATS
CHEQUERED PL. (AS/IS:35O2)

NOSING 5mm THK.
FULL WELDING AT
ALL FOUR CORNERS
ititiSSISSIMISMISSIMS
O
CN1
GALVANIZED 65X6TH K
FULL WELDING TO BE DONE

AT EVERY BEARING
MEMBER FROM ONE SIDE
- 8mm SQ. TWISTED
CROSS BAR
6NOS. 25X6 THK. FLAT
MAIN MEMBER
I-
D-
70
45
8 SPACINGS 0 75 c/c = 600

12 SPACINGS 0 75 c/c = 900
70 FOR 750 WIDE STAIRS

45 FOR 1000 WIDE STAIRS
FOR 750 WIDE STAIRS
'FOR 1000 WIDE STAIRS
746
996
PLAN
TYP. DETAIL OF GRATING TO BE USED AS TREAD FOR 750/1000 WIDE STAIRS
14144,),,,
3
JITENDER GUPTA
16.02.15
R.S.CHAUHAN
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1361 of 1744
Purpose
9P7
AMARJEET
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJAN S ASTAVA
S. CHANDA
PK IAITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
01
Igat fagteg
rirmre elsis4m.)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A
STANDARD No.
7-68-0697 Rev. 3
TYPE-I & TYPE-II
SHT.8 of 8
7_
94
10
OR
OR
TABLE-4
SECTION 9-9
SECTION 10-10
(TB=TRANSVERSE BOW)
(LB=LONGITUDINAL BOW)
(PERMISSIBLE AND MANUFACTURER TOLERANCES)
PERMISSIBLE TOLERANCES
LOCATION
TOLERANCE (MM)
LENGTH OF GRATING PANEL OR INDIVIDUAL BEARING BAR
+0 / 5
WIDTH OF GRATING
+0 / 5
DEPTH OF BEARING BAR:

FOR 25MM
+1 / 0.5
THICKNESS OF BEARING BAR:
0.4
BINDING:
TOP OF BINDING BAR ABOVE BEARING BAR
+0.5 / 0.5
MANUFACTURING TOLERANCES
TOLERANCE (MM)
LOCATION
5 (OUT OF SQUARENESS OF
GRATING PANEL)
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE LENGTH OF DIAGONALS
TRANSVERSE BARS IN EITHER DIRECTION FROM

PERPENDICULAR ALIGNMENT WITH BEARING BARS
1:100
5 PER 1500 LENGTH OF
BEARING BARS
TRANSVERSE BAR SPACING

BEARING BAR LEAN
1:10
TRANSVERSE BOW OF PANEL BEFORE FASTENING TO SUPPORTS
1:100
LONGITUDINAL BOW OF PANEL BEFORE FASTENING TO SUPPORTS
1:200
04.11.15
16.02.15
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1362 of 1744
Purpose
JITENDER GUPTA
R.S.CHAUHAN
AMARJEt
VIKRAM GUPTA
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJA S IVASTAVA S. CHANDA

PK MITTAL
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
[(d+30) (m LAYERS)+140]
[(d+30)
(n
OUT OF 4mm
THK. M.S SHEET
OF DIA. 150
ROWS)+1101
ELECTRICAL
CABLE
ROAD CROSSING
ERC...(NO. AS
LAYOUT DWG.
.7
. ij
26
el
.
d/2
LEGEND:-
d - OUTER DIA OF PIPE

m - No. OF LAYERS
n - No. OF ROWS
REFERENCE LEVEL 'A'

(REF. G.0 AREA DWG.)
REFERENCE LEVEL
(REF. G.C. AREA DWG.)
d/2 I
30
0
if)
CI)
1.61
s(
016 BAR
TOP OF ERC,
CONCRETE BLOCK
(TYP)
DETAILS OF
VIEW-1
(SEE NOTE-6)
200
CABLE CROSSING INDICATOR
REFERENCE LEVEL 'A'

REF. GEN. CIVIL
AREA DWG.)
REFERENCE LEVEL 'B'

(GENERALLY SAME AS "A"
IN CASE DIFFERENT
REFER G.0 AREA AG.)
FINISHED GRADE LEVEL
CABLE CROSSING
INDICATOR
2. CONDUIT MATERIAL P.V.C. PIPES OF NOM. OUT SIDE PIPE

DIA. 0110, 0160 OR 0210 AS PER LAYOUT PLAN.
3. PIPES SHALL CONFIRM TO IS:4985 CLASS-I AND EMBEDDED
IN PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE.
4. BACK FILLING WITH ROAD MATERIAL SHALL BE DONE IN 150MM
THICK LAYERS, WELL WATERED AND COMPACTED AS PER ROAD
SPECIFICATION.
5. IN CASE CABLE CROSSING IS REQUIRED TO CROSS THE OPEN
DITCHES ON EITHER SIDE, AS SHOWN IN STD.N0.7-51-0322,
THE LENGTH AND THE LEVEL OF CABLE CROSSING SHALL BE
DECIDED CLEARING THE SERVICES ALONG ROAD SIDE.
10r1 01000 CSC
1701
SECTION Y-Y
o
.,1
7
cal
0
FGL.
150
RCC
0
VIEW-1
6 2x25 50 REAR
WELD
6
I
"
*e
NOTES:1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
6. CABLE CROSSING INDICATOR MADE OF 4mm THICK MILD STEEL

PLATE AS PER IS: 2062, ENAMEL PAINTED IN JADE GREEN
BACKGROUND ON BOTH SIDES WITH WHITE LETTERING.
7. THE SHAPE OF PVC REMOVABLE TYPE CAP AS SHOWN IS INDICATIVE.
10 BARS AND 16 SWG
8. PVC PIPES WILL BE TIED WITH SUPPORTING
BINDING WIRE AT 0 1000C/C.
9. REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE OF GRADE Fe500 TMT BAR CONFIRMING TO IS:
REFERENCE LEVEL 'B

GENERALLY SAME AS "A"
N CASE DIFFERENT
REFER GEN.CIVIL AllEA DWG.)
01
>
1786.
CABLE TRENCH

PVC PIPE LAYERS
PVC PIPE LAYERS

>-i
>J
SECTION X-X
SECTION X-X
(APPLICABLE FOR ERC & IRC)
(APPLICABLE FOR SCRC)
ERC IRC NO. --m LAYERS OF n CONDUITS 0 --
HOLE TO BE MADE FOR

PASSING THE
GALVANISED WIRE
0
0
1:c
SCRC NO. --m LAYERS OF n CONDUITS 0
REF. COORDINATE
LEVEL-A
--
cc
PVC REMOVABLE TYPE CAP

(REFER NOTE-7)
APPz
1
111:i
(S
LEVEL-A
LEVEL-B
REF. COORDINATE
LEVEL-B
X
X
REF. LINE
REF. LINE
TEMPORARY GALVANISED WIRE 2.5MM

DIA.(EXTENDED ABOUT 1M)
FOR PULLING CABLES LATER.
SLEEVE END PLUGGING DETAIL

0.
0.
PLAN
PLAN
(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.)
ENGINEERS
ligaf faRes w INDIA LIMITED
ei
raireff eiecorea51.54sr.rO
Page 1363 of 1744
Rev.
No.
25.07.14
19.05.09
Date
(REPRESENTATION ON AREA DRG.)

REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD
Purpose
HV
SK
Prepared
by
S
RC/RKS
Checked
by
SC
NK
ND
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
CABLE CROSSING UNDER ROAD
(P.V.C. PIPES)
7-65-0006 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
(/)
D>
cc
c:
/..
Page 1364 of 1744
co
cro
<2
Cr0
< CO
c-
ET) r-
r-
7"
rn
2;
Co
CD
N7
cn
F4
Z 27
cn
pi
73
zA
r-
-n r 53 cr
n '
3
CD
3
3
A
4"..it
cw
CD "
)> 5; VD C/7 N7
=
-
4 CD p=
CD co
fri
X1 CD ea
2,- m0rn
-0 -13 I 0
>. 0
xi V) r
)4 0
-A
co Ej
S; :t "I
07 R
43
lE rn
=,
-(
rn
!9
c
ow
Co co
CD
-n m ri
17 ZE
rn
17
0 c4 -n t5
'
X -`
6 t5
(L)
mm0
F.
a ocrl
-A SR
rri
finn
c_ ZE
xi
CO 0
2r
m
<o3
r-
-0
a0,W-0
"
1
imb
0 I
In
r, rn0 )". rn ri
9 rn
rn pp, Fi iE I
= r3
ocn
rr--CD
iLre co
rn a co
rn =
o
-n
>.
m
(-)
g
o !-!1rn
mom
0 r- ? r
rn
rn
rn -n
27
rn Co Col 1/4"0 C5
rn CO m
cn CI
rn
m -A CO 3:
rn
ME . 5E
cim) P
r
211
rn
1) --I --I ). ol
.8 m CD 2:1 2
c,
* -a ---. z>
...
Z.47,
/5
01
,
2
o
gg
(!--1 c'zil
In
21I)
5
2 C:1
C C
MM
77
ri
ig .
5 5 \m
,
;3
_
m 2 "rirl
,R03 2 3 ,2- - ,-.sa1-1
gg
i d Ica
gggg
MX
E ri
:S
-61 C Z 71:1
r1
2 ,R1
co
E 32
:c1E0
9 12 g
rg g g g
en
AS MENTIONED ON AREA DEC.
600 MINIMUM
oz
2
-1
P.
T
O
cn
F.
<c 55 rn
7
0) .,_
ozzz
N
0
co
CD
0
0
91
Page 1365 of 1744
m
r
0
0
.74
*
A
m
C
XI
.<
0
z
0
A
>
<
M
al
SA
>
-- M Cn
DJ
1
m
o
0
N
--,
I r- dp
J
,
i > 2
-ID
rn
."*.
0
I n
2= (I
FD o
- -1
o -1P
Z>
<z
04
c) cio
0 -n z
73 CD c) u)
E PI 7p
CO lE
::,
1 u) r -Ti
DJ
(.71
FYI
4> 4>
(7)
-n
0 F !..I
(.0 (./1 N.)

-
CD
mxI
..**%, -4
--I -a 1
>
cu 0 a)
c 0 cri
m CD ,
7,
co ). 0 ,ag, 72
co 2=
-o
m
rn 13 or) z (7)
> rn :4 > rn
>
0
-I
r C) z
Cn CO
0 il
c- :: c)
rn
o>
x u)
--/ a
rE
-9
r-
tn :rs cA N) 7-1 Z
U)
--I 3> 10 0 c--0 --1 --1 Y..
), :C C2 =15 r- C) DO :C 2 r0
-9 55 0
m 1-9
rn
01 > 2 c) 55 55 r0
co C:
(1) co c) u, Ul 2
-1 >
x -I m
,
-, 3> -I 1
(1) m :7 --I )7 )7
17.
m ,
0
5
r^-. c* m 0>
0 in
vZ>
>
0
c
0
PO
DJ 5
2E
x 0 w co C2 -0 ,1 c) c)
ci)
-9
mc)
__
)3
DJ -- u)
O
m
C W M CT) N
2
(j) 2 >
2:
4:.
)>
2=
7 7J
C)
<!-'
5;
-
-.
.--,
m
1 D> cri r- C) 77
-- )rr- 1-9 ) co r- 3: Si r5X/ P0gI
N)co
m2
). )0 co 2=
r- 17 m 3Z
c)
c)
1
<
-mO<>orn
-0 7:1K
A
m
to CA x Kr
-A cu DJ
-i 5 c) ). c:
m
m
>0z
rn
i
x 0 co
r
(.,, -0 -T3 xj Z
0 r- > m
xo _, fr1 r- cf)
Pa
cri
0m
r <-
0z
co
I2
-P. 0
rn
rn
z
0 I")
O
200 125
r-
71
600 MINIMUM
z
0
mom
Zzze,333
0>0
>0>
XJ,X1
crirai
E2-F
**N)
>0>u
rr-Oro
r.)
8'
R.;
F.;
Page 1366 of 1744
cry
0
0
n V) 0 (./)
>>m
o
Z
1/4.1cn
z
0
Z>>
ozzz
0
v)
70
CD
ND
,to
99
-rn
.
g
2'.
g
rg
rt
al
ig
cn
8
al
r6
El
F.) P
o ?, = o
c-) *
c
M 0
-0
R;
.12
6
S.
le
6i 61
g
g
g,,
"
8
C-71
"
8
2 03
la/
71
ma
m r71
2 Pi
0
5 -0
-o
E p
rt- rn
M c?)I 1
tsi
cn
-^3
CZ
ry
E 711
g Le Eril
o
.
CI
-4
in
cn..t
VI
g,
(7
-r1
co V)
0 A)
CD
en
s.
Irn0-0>10
z v)Z
>F
-n - 0 -0
Z ICT9
<
(4)
V) _Ti m p
m
F
%...
0
co
I-0
r- z
>0
no
cow
cn
r- C)
-9
rn 20
D'
0 c
>7 o > c
o r z
>n >oz
<co,rxmco
mm
zor>m
mm>zmrv)
m
m r
0 v)
oz m c c)-nz
<o
2:7
m
o cn
m>
-0
(175
mo
-9
co mo
0o
o
rn
Eo c_ :c
$ ?); 4; (71 c)
ul 0
Cri
2 rC)
C,
0 -0 co -n -A
o
(/)
co
o
0
ri
Z 20 N3 23
rn :1 ),
o 0
-1
n
cn >
Z
>
2 m
OZ
__I XI
COrKOr
__ -A
rn rn
rZ
oj 5E
al co
rn 3:
r
m- IM
7JK
1 0 7:)><T=
xcno>
> _o 3 z
--r-j
0 5 3
m
m
-
cc._
>
>
r
M 0
-0 C:
c- 10 -A -A D.
i-T3-oclOmirm
rn rn --I CD 2 0 Er) (7.5 rco CD 3 1 m
Cf.)
0
1
L3
AS MENTIONED ON AREA DRG.
-h >
rAi
r
(SEE NOTE-6)
iKx,
>Z>
K
0>
X/ M
0
m o rn
z z z
com.rsi
0 . 0.
mono,
EF2F
cn>
r or o
* CA "
300
600 MINIMUM
A
r-
M .S GRATING AS PER DETAIL
JOINT SEALING COMPOUND (AS PER IS:1834 TYPEB)
L50x50 x6
L40X40X5
FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
REFERENCE LINE
OF UNIT
X
/0
U N IT FLOORIN G
_ Tr _r
F.G.L
35x6 @25 c/c (TYP )

X
u)
L_
00
O >.<
L)
UNIT PAVEMENT'S REINFORCEMENT
>
20THK. IMPREGNATED FIBRE BORD
010 @150 c/c
B.L OF DRAIN
12
AS PER LAYOUT
,25 1 251 251
T10 @200c/c
lz.
25
25
< TYP
12
600 ONE PIECE
R.C.0 GRADE
SAME AS PAVEMENT / SEE NOTE-2
DETAIL PLAN OF GRATING
2
LEAN CONCRETE. 1:5:10
T10 EQUI SPACED
NOTES.75
1 00
300
100
75
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.

1.
2. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE PROJECT FOR
REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES FOR THE FOLLOWING :
CROSS SECTION OF DRAIN.
a)
GRADE OF CONCRETE
b)
GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
c)
REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS.

3. BAR BENDING SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2502.
4. ISA AND FLAT SHALL CONFORM TO IS:2062, GRADEA.
L40x40x5 (600 LONG)
5. THIS IS NOT VALID FOR ACID / ALKALI DRAIN.

PROPORTION FOR NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE SHALL BE AS PER
6.
TABLE 9 OF IS:456.
25
7.5
LC)
LW
REFERENCE LINE
12 BAR LUG (200 LONG)

@500c/c WELDED
111111111111 1
11111111111111
TO ANGLE
REPRESENTATION ON UNIT AREA DRG.
FLAT 35X6
(375 LONG)
L 50x50X6
SECTION X-X
DETAIL - 'X'
faelei r41 ENGINEERS

5"fgar 0151-- glAwINDIA LIMITED
tmeimie
JLIm4-1)
Page 1367 of 1744
(A
Govt. of India Undertaking)
1 1 .01 1 3
REVISED AND ISSUSED AS STD.
08.1 0.07
REVISED AND ISSUSED AS STD.
Rev.
Date
No.
DM
VC
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Purpose
Committee GM(ENGG) Stds. Bureau

1IStds.
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
UNIT DRAINAGE DETAILS
(RECTANGULAR DITCH DETAILS)
7-65-0272 Rev.4
Page 1 of 1
7ZI
CM
Page 1368 of 1744
1
CO
-n
m
m
cn
.7c
1.3
m-C1
z 0
RI
rn
4=
C1
In
'
-0
rn 3 8
C1 31. cb
..1
-1
. 0
CO P - --.
< . F*4
In rn
X 2 0b
(A
0
-I
o
X
3).
-0
Z
73
A
(-)
r-
o
a
P
X
mm
Xi Z
31.
>c
/3 -a
D. 3''.
< <
RI RI
....i
RI RI
-1
-0 -0
"
0-
.7.
r..)
VI
x)
X
rn
-"I
=I
i.- X
m
XX
3<
1.
X In
o m
In rn
v ei)
rn
C
(15.
=
Zm
PC
I-
V)
0 .11/1
X
-0
D.
In
o o E
..., RI
'--r-i "... 32.

r
zI no
m . ?(
xi
a a-cr c
o .c
I> X -13 "3
CO
rn
..
z m
2s.
-C Z
--/
cr) m
z .c
4 a,
VI V) 7:1 ....1
Cr/ .=
CI -13
RI -I -I m
70 =
3. o
=
A
VI
a CA 0 RI
rn
Z
>
r0
Z
03
x
rri
1=1 CI
Z
a -I
C
'a
=
rn m
X
.11 rn
73
.<
tai C
a
MI
rn
0
>z
r
r
0
rn
Ti
-4
-.I
fD
-1,3
ZCD
O
<
CD 0
m
a 17
m
z
m
Z
>
rn
rn
rn
:13
rn
rn
rn
rn
__.: - , m:
-< 0 X
x.
v, I-,--
VI S
a PP
.......
i..n
ar .......
(")
A A
-1 CJI
3I. -.
....1 c
0
A
.
m
0 -1
m
03 3.
413
m 1,1 -a
Z
-, (,)
!A
_0 n
pi
3>
..< F 00
-0 z
rn
-I Cn
v)
:-...
>C
2.,
-n 0
m
4. :b.
a
X a
T. -I
'O
aa
-......
A
Am
M
- m
44
X VI
03
_
F
tIr
v) ).
v,
P m VI
X =
-I
-,
30
mz
z c_
71 X
_ D
-u >
z
cn
-4 0
>
0
xi r"
-CI
0 3..0
CD
(A
-1 c-
44 rn
CO x
m
1,1
x 9
1-
x
z
In
...,
mi
0
rn
a
7J =
0
r<
2
SI.. ,....
V) `-'
7:1
71
rl ma3 ;31 0
K
= 7.'
MI
0 -
=
-0
0 m
X
-n
0
X/
X
X
4-)
ri IoA co
. s
32.
m
..-I xj
In
3"
(7 r-.1 VI
co =
o
-< X v) 2
a
i
p
r7, p 0 v x. VI
-.4
-0 rn
z
X xi
mxi
-9 "I 1-rn
f*
',u
(/) mc0
_4
co
0
,,, X
0 = 2 In
-.< -1
-T1 A. GI _I
IA
X 3P"
-I
co m
0
73 CA
; R.;
co 10
8 1 1
t' rn
v, *i=
_1 rn
=
RI p
al 1
:a M
3
(A
,i.p
:ivos m
-1
o.:3 E>C
5A
X
m"
E
Ern
mM
-.4 0
<
m
z 3
c
#
"ri
0
-M
z
w 3m
8
A
A 4! ...,
x7
gc
rn
,A
;
CI
r.r. > ; 2
p
,n
15El 12 gi
2C
Xl
ac V) 3.
73
- X
22
-=
-t
m
=. LA
--I
tn 3,,
1 xi co,
n o rn
X
..... WI rn
I.
X -.1 VI F
"0
0
0 Te.
/1 C
X
*=
-I =
e., 03
0
li
- t5=
,...
m ..<
rn X
C3
, x
-1
a
g
73
4 0
rn czt
-0 cy
in
"a
Z
3. ri".
Xg0
X
K3 D.
Y.' 0 C
IV C w
-0
,..4
F.
c7
r, .,
:...I
V)
(a
C14
C
it -4 z
--]
Isz -0-m
0 m ..17
X c , 0 31.
1.;:: ::
z
Cl)
0
17. X
t1
m
-u rcf)
C 1:I
ZE
-)
Fil.-1
XI
..c
In
'
K
m
Z
-.I
RI
F co
0
a
0V
CA
CD
I
MI .n
--1
Q1
.4:.
CI1
..1
0
70
a
X/ 0
X
,/
..--
(7: 0
()
In n
3'
XI
V)
0 -1:/ 0-)
73
m
Ts
I =
z
C)
Cl
4
-CI
m
CA
- 2
r: r.o
M C1
SV
53
VI
c ==
x
-o v)
--,
I> IA M 32.
0 rn
<0 a p
F3
(n
-43
-.1
0
-.1
m
I- -0 ..4 m a
0
G0
a
0 oo
.,
0
z a)
X
0 C rri
CP 0
"X ; m
I C." 0
-I 4.)
x
,1,. c)
2 F) ..,
0. VI 70 0
4 rn X -..1
0 >e, c)
0:: :1
4- c.)
:'
(.;{ C)
:
z
c z z a N
Page 1369 of 1744
Page 1370 of 1744
Page 1371 of 1744
Page 1372 of 1744
Page 1373 of 1744
Page 1374 of 1744
Page 1375 of 1744
Page 1376 of 1744
Page 1377 of 1744
Page 1378 of 1744
Page 1379 of 1744
Page 1380 of 1744
Page 1381 of 1744
Page 1382 of 1744
Page 1383 of 1744
Page 1384 of 1744
Page 1385 of 1744
Page 1386 of 1744
Page 1387 of 1744
Page 1388 of 1744
Page 1389 of 1744
Page 1390 of 1744
Page 1391 of 1744
Page 1392 of 1744
Page 1393 of 1744
Page 1394 of 1744
Page 1395 of 1744
Page 1396 of 1744
Page 1397 of 1744
Page 1398 of 1744
Page 1399 of 1744
Page 1400 of 1744
Page 1401 of 1744
Page 1402 of 1744
Page 1403 of 1744
Page 1404 of 1744
Page 1405 of 1744
Page 1406 of 1744
Page 1407 of 1744
Page 1408 of 1744
Page 1409 of 1744
Page 1410 of 1744
Page 1411 of 1744
Page 1412 of 1744
Page 1413 of 1744
Page 1414 of 1744
Page 1415 of 1744
Page 1416 of 1744
Page 1417 of 1744
Page 1418 of 1744
Page 1419 of 1744
Page 1420 of 1744
Page 1421 of 1744
~zit4
ENGINEERS
$1g-ar 0154- g w INDIA LIMITED
1.~ cYrTK M13,4.1
Ift Govt of Incha Unclertaking)
FOR FABRICATION AND
ERECTION OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 15

FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF
PIPING
30.07.14
31.03.09
05.06.03
15.09.98
14.04.93
Rev.
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
PMI REQT. INCLUDED AND ISSUED AS
REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD.
SPECIFICATION
AK
SC
VKB
SC
ND
RN
DM
BN
SKG
SH
BRB
NS
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Date
RN
ATD
Approved by
Page 1422 of 1744
RLJI ;Mes
1~1 C-1,9,1, 051 3W1,)
ENGINEEFZS
o INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt ol Indo Undertakngt

FABRICATION AND ERECTION
OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
A.S.
:
ASME :
C.I.
:
C.S.
:
HMTD :
IBR
LTCS :
NACE :
NB
NDT :
P&ID :
PMI
S.S.
SMMS :
Alloy Steel
Cast Iron
Carbon Steel
Heat & Mass Transfer Division
Low Temperature Carbon Steel
Nominal Bore
Stainless Steel
Specialist Material & Maintenance Services
Piping Standards Committee
Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. K.J. Harinarayanan (HMTD)
Mr. P P Lahiri / Mr. S. Ghoshal (SMMS)
Mr. K.V.K. Naidu (Projects)
Page 1423 of 1744
OgLar
1>ffeR
zig
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Tool ol Ind2 Undertakin)

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
SCOPE OF WORK OF CONTRACTOR
.4
3.0
BASIS OF WORK
4.0
FABRICATION
5.0
ERECTION
11
Page 1424 of 1744
fffl
i
t
eg
.1"2-, 21,1,1,
151,41,411
1.0
ENGNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertalong)

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 15
SCOPE
This specification covers general requirements of fabrication and erection of above ground
and trench piping systems at site. The specification covers the scope of work of Contractor,
basis of work to be carried out by Contractor and standards, specifications and normal
practice to be followed during fabrication and erection by the Contractor.
2.0
SCOPE OF WORK OF CONTRACTOR

Generally the scope of work of Contractor shall include the following:
2.1
Transportation of required piping materials (as described in C1.2.1.1), pipe support (material
as described in Cl. 2.3) and all other necessary piping materials from Owner's storage point
or Contractor's storage point (in case of Contractor's scope of supply) to work site/shop
including raising store requisitions for issue of materials in the prescribed format &
maintaining an account of the materials received from Owner's stores.
2.1.1
Piping materials include the following but not limited to the same.
a.
Pipes (A11 sizes and schedule)
b.
Flanges (A11 sizes, types & Pressure ratings).
c.
Fittings (All sizes, types and schedule)
d.
Valves (A11 sizes, types and Ratings)
e.
Gaskets (All sizes, types & Ratings)
f.
Bolts, Nuts or M/C Bolts (All types)
g.
Expansion Joint/Bellows (All types)
h.
Specialty items like online filters, ejectors, sample coolers, steam traps, strainers, air
traps, springs, silencers, snubbers, steam and condensate manifolds, injection nozzles,
MOVs, sight glass, spray nozzles, integrated steam traps, hoses, hose couplings, etc.
i.
Online instruments like control valve, orifice flange, rotameter, safety valves,
restriction orifice, rupture disc, de-super heaters, corrosion probes, annubar, magnetic
flow meter, ultrasonic flow meter, Coriolis mass flow meters, venturi PG/PT/ Flow
transmitter, ejectors, static mixers, flame arrestors, thermal flow switches, prefabricated hook-ups etc.
j.
Shut Down Valves with and without fire box.
2.2
Shop & field fabrication and erection of piping in accordance with documents listed under
C1.3.0 i.e. 'BASIS OF WORK' including erection of all piping materials enumerated above.
2.3
Fabrication and erection of pipe supports like shoe, saddle, guide, stops, anchors, clips,
cradles, hangers, turn-buckles, supporting fixtures, bracket cantilevers, struts, tee-posts
including erection of spring supports, sway braces, dummy pipes, corrosion pads/protection
shields, low friction pads, clamps, special support, expansion bellows, steam and condensate
manifolds supports etc. Corrosion Pads/Protection shields, stiffeners and stiffening rings, if
not covered in the specifications/standards, shall be of the same material as of parent pipes.
Page 1425 of 1744
ENGINEEFZS
dg INDIA LIMITED
Odi
GoN of Ind,a Underta.9)
.R27T
2.4
0,
1 J~1,

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 15
Site fabrication of Piping items

Site fabrication of Piping items shall include but not be limited to the following
2.4.1
Fabrication of piping specials like special radius bends, reducers, mitres etc.
2.4.2
Fabrication of plain and threaded nipples from pipes as required during erection.
2.4.3
Fabrication of swage nipples as and when required.
2.4.4
Fabrication of odd angle elbow like 60, 30 or any other angle from 90/45 elbows as and
when required.
2.4.5
Fabrication of flange, reducing flange, blind flange, spectacle blinds as and when required.
2.4.6
Fabrication of stub-in connection with or without reinforcement.
2.4.7
Grinding of edges of pipes, fittings, flanges etc. to match mating edges of uneven/different
thickness wherever required.
2.4.8
Fabrication of circular pipe for steam rings, fire water lines, utility lines.
2.4.9
Threading of all small bore piping as per piping material specifications.
2.4.10
Drilling on blind flange for inserting / joining small bore lines.
2.4.11
Fabrication and welding of reinforcement pads at branch pipe locations wherever required.
2.4.12
Equipment nozzle reinforcement with pads, jacket & stiffeners wherever required.
2.4.13
Fabrication of injection nozzles as per details provided wherever required.
2.4.14
Fabrication of chain operation arrangement for valves, wherever required. A11 material
required for this modification shall be supplied by Contractor.
2.4.15
Fabrication and erection in position of funnels required for OWS/ SS/ Condensate blow
down system as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.
2.4.16
Grinding/ finishing of uneven surfaces/ joints after welding. Internal grinding of welds of
orifice flanges to render smooth surface.
2.4.17
Tapping and drilling of holes in flanges, blind flanges, piping connections for jack screw, if
required.
2.4.18
Providing bird screens at the outlet of lines open to atmosphere.
2.5
Modifications like providing additional cleats, extension of stem of valve, locking

arrangement of valves etc. as and when required.
2.6
Piping isometrics for main process/utility lines shall be provided to the Contractor.
Preparation of miscellaneous small bore isometrics with bill of materials for process and
utility lines (up to 11/2" size) like instruments & pump flushing / cooling, sample connection,
purging, pump casing vents & drains, pump Base plate drains, control valve drains / vent to
flare, instrument drains & vents, steam tracing (non-IBR) from steam supply stations up to
condensate recovery station, and lines specified as field routed within the Unit battery limit
Page 1426 of 1744
ry
Ogz-drr 2fal-egI
1.1r7R Crt-LISTC 2/513,721,)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl o Indu UnclettakIng)

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 15
as and when required are in Contractor's scope of work. Approval for these isometrics
prepared by the Contractor shall be taken from Engineer-in-charge before erection.
Small bore piping isometrics given by Owner shall be rechecked by Contractor before
erection and installation.
2.7
Obtaining approval for drawings prepared by Contractor from statutory authority, if

required.
2.8
Spun concrete lining of the inside of pipes 3" NB & above including fittings and flanges as
required in accordance with specification.
2.9
Rubber lining inside pipes, fittings, flanges as and when required, in accordance with
specification.
2.10
Radiography, stress relieving, dye penetration, magnetic particle test etc. as required in
specification.
2.11
Performing PMI using alloy analyzers as per `Standard Specification for Positive Material
Identification at Construction Sites, 6-82-0002'.
2.12
Casting of concrete pedestals and Fabrication and erection of small structures/ platforms for
pipe supports and valve operation / attending some instruments, spectacle blinds etc.,
providing brackets, modification / extension of platforms, providing additional platforms /
ladders for improving / providing accessibility.
2.13
Providing insert plates with anchor fasteners in concrete structures / paved floors and repair
of platform gratings around pipe openings and providing suitable members for support
under the platform grating.
2.14
Making material reconciliation statement and return of Owner's supply left over materials to
Owner's storage.
2.15
Flushing and testing of all piping systems as per standard specification for inspection,
flushing and testing of piping systems (Specification No. 6-44-0013). The accessories
required for blinding the line like flange, blind flange, gasket (all sizes, type and rating),
stud-bolts, flexible hoses etc. are to be arranged by the Contractor. During flushing the
discharged water / air shall be drained / routed as directed by the Engineer In Charge.
2.16
Contractor shall prepare welding specifications for all weld joints where dissimilar welding
will be performed, and obtain approval from EIL.
2.17
Contractor to ensure meeting all requirements for carrying out work in shutdown/running
plant.
2.18
Pickling (as and when applicable) as per Job specification(s) for chemical cleaning of CS
suction piping of compressors, SS Piping, Weldments etc, as applicable.
2.19
Chemical Cleaning/ Hydro jet cleaning as per marked-up P&IDs with supply of chemicals,
consumables, DM water, equipments, boilers, coupons, tools & tackles and other testing
equipments required for the same.
Page 1427 of 1744
31
ar
1.1W1 <9,741 451 ,1,1~)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt ot India Undertaloow

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 15
3.0
BASIS FOR WORK
3.1
The complete piping work shall be carried out in accordance with the following:
3.1.1
"Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by EIL to the Contractor - Plans
and/or Isometrics.
3.1.2
"Approved for Construction" drawings and sketches issued by Turn-key bidders to the
Contractor - Plans and/or Isometrics.
3.1.3
Approved Process Licensor's standards and specifications.
3.1.4
Drawings, sketches and documents prepared by Contractor duly approved by Engineer-inCharge (such as isometrics of small bore piping and offsite piping etc.).
3.1.6
EIL specifications/documents as below:
3.1.7
a.
Process and Instrument Diagram.
b.
Job Piping Materials Specification (****-6-44-0005). **** denotes job number.
c.
Piping support, engineering standards.
d.
Line list
e.
Piping support indices (only in offsite), if supports are not shown in plan.
f.
Job specification of Non-destructive Requirement of Piping (****-6-44-0016)
g.
Job Welding Specification Charts for Piping Classes (****-6-77-0005)
h.
Job Welding specification for fabrication of piping (****-6-77-0001).
i.
Any other EIL or OTHER specifications attached with Piping Material Specification
or special condition of contract (such as standard for cement lining of pipe, standard
ofjacketed piping, standard for steam tracing, Dimensional Tolerances etc.)
j.
Standard specification for positive material identification (PMI) at construction sites,

6-82-0002
k.
Standard Spec for application of torque & hydraulic bolt tension for flange joints (676-0002) and its addendum, if any.
Following codes, standards and regulations

a.
ASME B 31.3
Process Piping
b.
ASME Sec. VIII
Code for unfired pressure vessel.
c.
IBR Regulations
d.
ASME Sec. IX
Page 1428 of 1744
Qualification standard for welding and brazing

procedures, welders, brazers and welding and
brazing operators.
Og-ar fa2es
I -117R C4c,7>r, ,Lq .~11
e.

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FABRICATION AND ERECTION
IA Govt 01 India UndetaMing)
OF PIPING
NACE Std.
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 15
Code for Sour Services material requirements

MR-0175/MR0103/Job spec(NACE), as applicable
Note : A11 codes referred shall be latest edition, at the time of award of contract.
3.2
Deviations
Where a deviation from the "Basic of Work" and approved job procedure described above is
required or where the basis of work does not cover a particular situation, the matter shall be
brought to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge and the work carried out only after obtaining
written approval from him in each case.
4.0
FABRICATION
4.1
Piping Material
Pipe, pipe fittings, flanges, valves, gaskets, studs bolts etc. used in a given piping system
shall be strictly as per the "Piping Material Specification" for the "Pipe Class" specified for
that system. To ensure the above requirement, all piping material supplied by the Owner /
Contractor shall have proper identification marks as per relevant standards / EIL
specifications / Licensors specification. Contractor shall provide identification marks on left
over pipe lengths wherever marked up pipe lengths have been fabricated/erected. Materialtraceability is to be maintained for A.S., S.S., NACE, LTCS, material for Hydrogen service
and other exotic materials by way of transferring heat number, etc. (hard punching) as per
approved procedure. This shall be in addition to colour coding for all piping materials to
avoid mix-up.
For the purpose of common understanding the construction job procedure, to be submitted
by the Contractor, shall include proposal for
4.2
Maximizing prefabrication, inspection and testing at fabrication shop with minimum

field joints.
Positive material identification, handling, storage & preservation.
Dimensional Tolerances
Dimensional tolerances for piping fabrication shall be as per EIL Standard No. 7-44-0486.
The Contractor shall be responsible for working to the dimensions shown on the drawings.
However, the Contractor shall bear in mind that there may be variations between the
dimensions shown in the drawing and those actually existing at site due to minor variations
in the location of equipments, inserts, structures etc. To take care of there variations "Field
Welds" shall be provided during piping fabrication. An extra pipe length of 100 mm over
and above the dimensions indicated in the drawing may be left on one nide of the pipe at
each of the field welds. During erection, the pipe end with extra length at each field weld,
shall be cut to obtain the actual dimension occurring at site. Isometrics, if supplied may have
the field welds marked on them. However, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to
provide adequate number of field welds. In any case no extra claims will be entertained
from the Contractor on this account. Wherever errors / omissions occur in drawings and
Bills of Materials it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Engineer-in-Charge
prior to fabrication or erection.
4.3
IBR Piping
4.3.1
Contractor shall obtain approval for the piping systems falling under purview of IBR from
the statutory Indian Boiler Regulations (IBR) authority of the state where the plant is
Page 1429 of 1744
5gU Offl g
1.1WR

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FABRICATION AND ERECTION
Govt of
UnOettaking)
OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 9 of 15
situated. The Owner shall provide documentation for the IBR System. The Contractor shall
carry out the fabrications, erection and testing of this piping as per requirements of Indian
Boiler Regulations and to the entire satisfaction of the Local Boiler Inspector. The
Contractor shall also get the approval of IBR inspector for all fabrication and testing done
by him at his own cost. All certificates of approval shall be in proper IBR forms.
4.3.2
IBR Package for residual, field routed and site modified steam lines shall be prepared by the
Contractor. IBR approval for the same shall be in Contractor's scope, at his own cost.
4.4
Pipe Joints
The piping class of each line specifies the type of pipe joints to be adopted. In general,
joining of lines 2" and above in process and utility piping shall be accomplished by buttwelds. Joining of lines 1-1/2" and below shall be by socket welding/butt welding/threaded
joints as specified in "Piping Material Specifications". However, in piping 1-1/2" and below
where socket welding/ threaded joints are specified butt - welds may be used with the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge for pipe to pipe joining in long runs of piping. This is only
applicable for non-galvanized piping without lining.
Flange joints shall be used at connections to Vessels, Equipment's, Valves and where
required for ease of erection and maintenance as indicated in drawings.
4.5
Butt Welded and Socket Welded Piping

End preparation, alignment and fit-up of pipe pieces to be welded, welding, pre-heating,
post-heating and heat treatment shall be as described in the Job welding specification
(****-6-77-0005) and NDT specification (****-6-44-0016).
4.6
Screwed Piping
In general, Galvanized piping shall have threads as per IS:554 or ANSI B2.1 NPT as
required to match threads on fittings, valves etc. All other piping shall have threads as per
ANSI B2.1, tapered unless specified otherwise.
Threads shall be clean cut, without any burrs or stripping and the ends shall be reamed.
Threading of pipes shall be done preferably after bending, forging or heat treating
operations. If this is not possible, threads shall be gauge checked and chased after welding
heat treatment etc.
During assembly of threaded joints, all threads of pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly
cleaned of cuttings, dirt, oil or any other foreign matter. The male threads shall be coated
with thread sealant and the joint tightened sufficiently for the threads to seize and give a
leakproof joint. Threaded joints to be seal-welded shall be cleaned of all foreign matter,
including sealant and made up to full thread engagement before seal welding.
4.7
Flange Connections
All flange facings shall be true and perpendicular to the axis of pipe to which they are
attached. Flanged bolt holes shall straddle the normal centerlines unless different orientation
is shown in the drawing.
Wherever jack screws are to be provided, drilling and tapping for the jack screws in the I
flange, shall be done as per EIL Standard before welding it to the pipe.
4.8
Branch Connections
Page 1430 of 1744

31
fg-r;Ir fa2e5
14.2R ar a,
W,
7,1~1)

ENGINEERS
LIMITED
FABRICATION
AND ERECTION
INDIA
IA GoN of Indo Underfaon9)
OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 10 of 15
Branch connections shall be as indicated in the piping material specifications. For end
preparation, alignment, spacing, fit-up and welding of branch connections refer welding
specifications. Templates shall be used wherever required to ensure accurate cutting and
proper fit-up.
For all branch connections accomplished either by pipe to pipe connections or by using
forged tees the rates quoted for piping shall be inclusive of this work.
Reinforcement pads shall be provided wherever indicated in drawings/ specifications etc.
4.9
Bending
Bending shall be as per ASME B31.3 except that corrugated or creased bends shall not be
used.
Cold bends for lines 1-1/2" and below, with a bend radius of 5 times the nominal diameter
shall be used as required in place of elbows wherever allowed by piping specifications.
Bending of pipes 2" and above may be required in some cases like that for headers around
heaters, reactors etc.
The completed bend shall have a smooth surface, free from cracks, buckles, wrinkles,
bulges, flat spots and other serious defects. They shall be true to dimensions. The flattening
of a bend, as measured by the difference between the maximum and minimum diameters at
any cross-section, shall not exceed 8% and 3% of the nominal outside diameter, for internal
and external pressure respectively.
4.10
Forging and Forming

Forging and forming of small bore fittings, like reducing nipples for piping 1-1/2" and
below, shall be as per ASME B 31.3.
4.11
Mitre Bends and Fabricated Reducers

The specific application of welded mitre bends and fabricated reducers shall be governed by
the Piping Material Specifications. Reducers shall be fabricated as per directions of
Engineer-in-Charge. The radiographic requirements shall be as per Material Specifications
for process and utility systems and NDT Specification for steam piping under IBR,
radiographic requirements of IBR shall be complied with.
4.12
Cutting and Trimming of Standard Fittings & Pipes

Components like pipes, elbows, couplings, half-couplings etc. shall be cut / trimmed / edge
prepared wherever required to meet fabrication and erection requirements, as per drawings
and instructions of Engineer-in-Charge. Nipples as required shall be prepared from straight
length piping.
4.13
Galvanized Piping
Galvanized carbon steel piping shall be completely cold worked, so as not to damage
galvanized surfaces. This piping involves only threaded joints and additional external
threading on pipes may be required to be done as per requirement.
Page 1431 of 1744
fg--a,r tral
e
-g
oloo,r1.,om,
4.14

ENGINEERS
LJMITED
FABRICATION
AND ERECTION
INDIA
IA Go, ol lnO. Undellaking)
OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 11 of 15
Jacketed Piping
The Jacketing shall be done in accordance with EIL Specification or Licensors specification
as suggested in material specification or special condition of contract.
Pre-assembly of jacketed elements to the maximum extent possible shall be accomplished at
shop by Contractor. Position of jump-over and nozzles on the jacket pipes, fittings etc. shall
be marked according to pipe disposition and those shall be prefabricated to avoid damaging
of inner pipe and obstruction of jacket space. However, valves, flow glasses, in line
instruments or even fittings shall be supplied as jacketed.
4.15
Shop Fabrication / Prefabrication

The purpose of shop fabrication or pre-fabrication is to minimize work during erection to
the extent possible. Piping spool, after fabrication, shall be stacked with proper
identification marks, so as facilitate their withdrawal at any time during erection. During this
period all flange (gasket contact faces) and threads shall be adequately fabricated by coating
with removable rust preventive. Care shall also be taken to avoid any physical damage to
flange faces and threads.
4.16
Miscellaneous
4.16.1
Contractor shall fabricate miscellaneous elements like flash pot, seal pot, sample cooler,
supporting elements like turn-buckles, extension of spindles and interlocking arrangement of
valves, operating platforms as required by Engineer-in-Charge.
4.16.2
Spun Concrete Lining

The work of inside spun concrete lining of pipes and specials of diameter 3" and above shall
be done as per material specifications and special condition contract.
4.16.3
Fabrication of pipes from plate

Pipes shall be fabricated at site as and when required as per the specifications and the actual
Piping Material Specification.
5.0
ERECTION
5.1
Cleaning of Piping before Erection

Before erection all pre-fabricated spool pieces, pipes, fittings etc. shall be cleaned inside and
outside by suitable means. The cleaning process shall include removal of all foreign matter
such as scale, sand, weld spatter chips etc. by wire brushes, cleaning tools etc. and blowing
with compressed air/or flushing out with water. Special cleaning requirements for some
services, if any, shall be as specified in the piping material specification or isometric or line
list. S.S jacketed piping requiring pickling shall be pickled to remove oxidation and
discolouring due to welding.
5.2
Piping Routing
No deviations from the piping route indicated in drawings shall be permitted without the
consent of Engineer-in-Charge.
Pipe to pipe, pipe to structure / equipments distances / clearances as shown in the drawings
shall be strictly followed as these clearances may be required for the free expansion of
Page 1432 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1gul8M--eg
1.117R
+1,13,70,)
(A
Govt ol roma Undertalong)

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 12 of 15
piping / equipment. No deviations from these clearances shall be permissible without the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
In case of fouling of a line with other piping, structure, equipment etc. the matter shall be
brought to the notice of Engineer-in-Charge and corrective action shall be taken as per his
instructions.
5.3
Cold Pull
Wherever cold pull is specified, the Contractor shall maintain the necessary gap, as
indicated in the drawing. Confirmation in writing shall be obtained by the Contractor from
the Engineer-in-Charge, certifying that the gap between the pipes is as indicated in the
drawing, before drawing the cold pull. Stress relieving shall be performed before removing
the gadgets for cold pulling.
5.4
Slopes
Slopes specified for various lines in the drawings / P&ID shall be maintained by the
Contractor. Corrective action shall be taken by the Contractor in consultation with Engineerin-Charge wherever the Contractor is not able to maintain the specified slope.
5.5
Expansion Joints / Bellows

Installation of Expansion Joints/Bellows shall be as follows:
5.5.1
Al1 Expansion joints / Bellows shall be installed in accordance with the specification and
installation drawings, supplied to the Contractor.
5.5.2
a.
Upon receipt, the Contractor shall remove the Expansion Joints/ Bellows from the
case(s) and check for any damage occurred during transit.
b.
The Contractor shall bring to the notice of the Engineer-in- Charge any damage done
to the bellows / corrugations, hinges, tie-rods, flanges/ weld ends etc.
c.
Each Expansion Joint / Bellow shall be blown free of dust / foreign matter with
compressed air or cleaned with a piece of cloth.
a.
For handling and installation of Expansion Joints, great care shall be taken while
aligning. An Expansion Joints shall never be slinged from bellows corrugations/
external shrouds, tie / rods, angles.
b.
An Expansion Joints / Bellow shall preferably be slinged from the end pipes / flanges
or on the middle pipe.
a.
All Expansion Joints shall be delivered to the Contractor at "Installation length",

maintained by means of shipping rods, angles welded to the flanges or weld ends or
by wooden or metallic stops.
b.
Expansion Joints stop blocks shall be carefully removed after hydrostatic testing.
Angles welded to the flanges or weld ends shall be trimmed by saw as per
manufacturer's instructions and the flanges or weld ends shall be ground smooth.
a.
The pipe ends in which the Expansion Joint is to be installed shall be perfectly aligned
or shall have specified lateral deflection as noted on the relevant drawings.
b.
The pipe ends / flanges shall be spaced at a distance specified in the drawings.
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
Page 1433 of 1744

31
$1g-a,ffum
r 02eg

ENGINEERS
LIMITED
FABRICATION
AND ERECTION
INDIA
IA Go, ol
Underlaking)
OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 13 of 15
5.5.6
The Expansion Joint shall be placed between the mating pipe ends / flanges and shall be
tack welded/bolted. The mating pipes shall again be checked for correct alignment.
5.5.7
Butt-welding shall be carried out at each end of the expansion joint. For flanged Expansion
Joint, the mating flanges shall be bolted.
5.5.8
After the Expansion Joint is installed the Contractor shall ensure that the mating pipes and
Expansion Joints are in correct alignment and that the pipes are well supported and guided.
5.5.9
The Expansion Joint shall not have any lateral deflection. The Contractor shall maintain
parallelism of restraining rings or bellows convolutions.
5.5.10 Precautions
5.6
a.
For carrying out welding, earthing lead shall not be attached with the Expansion Joint.
b.
The Expansion bellow shall be protected from arc weld spot and welding spatter.
c.
Hydrostatic Testing of the system having Expansion Joint shall be performed with
shipping lugs in position. These lugs shall be removed after testing and certification
is over.
Flange Connections
While fitting up mating flanges, care shall be exercised to properly align the pipes and to
check the flanges for trueness, so that faces of the flanges can be pulled together, without
inducing any stresses in the pipes and the equipment nozzles. Extra care shall be taken for
flange connections to pumps, turbines, compressors, cold boxes, air coolers etc. The flange
connections to these equipments shall be checked for misalignment, excessive gap etc. after
the final alignment of the equipment is over. The joint shall be made up after obtaining
approval of Engineer-in-Charge.
Hydraulic bolt tensioning & torque tensioning shall be performed on flange joints as per the
requirements specified in "Standard Specification for application of Torque & Hydraulic
Bolt Tension for flange joints," 6-76-0002 and its addendum, if any.
Temporary protective covers shall be retained on all flange connections of pumps, turbines,
compressors and other similar equipments, until the piping is finally connected, so as to
avoid any foreign material from entering these equipments.
The assembly of a flange joint shall be done in such a way that the gasket between these
flange faces is uniformly compressed. To achieve this, the bolts shall be tightened in a
proper sequence. A11 bolts shall extend completely through their nuts but not more than 1/4".
Steel to C.I. flange joints, if any, shall be made up with extreme care, tightening the bolts
uniformly after bringing flange flush with gaskets with accurate pattern and lateral
alignment.
5.7
Vents and Drains

High point vents and low point drains shall be provided as per the instructions of Engineer-
in-Charge, even if these are not shown in the drawings. The details of vents and drains shall
be as per piping material specifications / job standards.
Page 1434 of 1744
Og'-ar
5.8

ENGINEERS
gw
INDIA
LIMITED
FABRICATION
AND ERECTION
Ofd
i
2,22F1? 461 34.--,1
IA Govt of Inda Undenak,n9)
OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 14 of 15
Valves
Valves shall be installed with spindle / actuator orientation / position as shown in the layout
drawings. In case of any difficulty in doing this or if the spindle orientation / position is not
shown in the drawings, the Engineer-in-Charge shall be consulted and work done as per his
instructions. Care shall be exercised to ensure that globe valves, check valves, and other unidirectional valves are installed with the "Flow direction arrow "on the valve body pointing
in the correct direction. If the direction of the arrow is not marked on such valves, this shall
be done in the presence of Engineer-in-Charge before installation.
Fabrication of stem extensions, locking arrangements and interlocking arrangements of
valves (if called for), shall be carried out as per drawings/ instructions of Engineer-inCharge.
5.9
Instruments
Installation of in-line instruments such as control valve, orifice flange, rotameter, safety
valves, restriction orifice, rupture disc, de-super heaters, corrosion probes, annubar,
magnetic flow meter, ultrasonic flow meter, Coriolis mass flow meters, venturi PG/PT/
Flow transmitter, ejectors, etc. and Shut Down Valves with fireboxes shall form a part of
piping erection work.
Fabrication and erection of piping upto first block valve / nozzle / flange for installation of
offline Instruments for measurement of level, pressure, temperature, flow etc. shall also
form part of piping construction work. The limits of piping and instrumentation work will be
shown in drawings / standards / specifications. Orientations / locations of take-offs for
temperature, pressure, flow, level connections etc. shown in drawings shall be maintained.
Flushing and testing of piping systems which include instruments mentioned above and the
precautions to be taken are covered in flushing, testing and inspection of piping (EIL Spec.
6-44-0013). Care shall be exercised and adequate precautions taken to avoid damage and
entry foreign matter into instruments during transportation, installation, testing etc.
5.10
Line Mounted Equipments / Items

Installation of line mounted items like filters, strainers, steam traps, air traps,
desuperheaters, ejectors, samples coolers, mixers, flame arrestors, light glasses etc
including their supporting arrangements shall form part of piping erection work.
5.11
Bolts and Nuts

The Contractor shall apply molycoat grease mixed with graphite powder (unless otherwise
specified in piping classes) all bolts and nuts during storage, after erection and wherever
flange connections are broken and made-up for any purpose whatsoever. The grease and
graphite powder shall be supplied by the Contractor within the rates for piping work.
5.12
Pipe Supports
Pipe supports are designed and located to effectively sustain the weight and thermal effects
of the piping system and to prevent its vibrations. Location and design of pipe supports will
be shown in drawings for lines 2" NB & above. For lines 11/2"NB & below Contractor
shall locate and design pipe supports in line with EIL Stds. In case of IBR Lines 1 1/2"NB &
below only indicative supporting shall be provided & detailing of such supports is in
Contractor's scope. Contractor shall obtain approval of Engineer - in - Charge on drawings
prepared by Contractor, before erection. However, any extra supports desired by Engineerin-Charge shall also be installed.
Page 1435 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1~1 ,i,cmtJ9-0,-.1)
IA Govt of InOla Undertaxng)

OF PIPING
6-44-0012 Rev. 4
Page 15 of 15
No pipe shoe / cradle shall be offset unless specifically shown in the drawings.
Hanger rods shall be installed inclined in a direction opposite to the direction in which the
pipe move during expansion.
Preset pins of all spring supports shall be removed only after hydrostatic testing and
insulation is over. Springs shall be checked for the range of movement and adjusted if
necessary to obtain the correct positioning in cold condition. These shall be subsequently
adjusted to hot setting in operating condition. The following points shall be checked after
installation, with the Engineer-in-Charge and necessary confirmation in writing obtained
certifying that:
-
A11 restraints have been installed correctly.

Clearances have been maintained as per support drawings.
Insulation does not restrict thermal expansion.
A11 temporary tack welds provided during erection have been fully removed.
All welded supports have been fully welded.
Page 1436 of 1744
if
$1g-ar f8151eg
rlecne m,
1.17R
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,K15 ,
INSPECTION, FLUSHING AND
TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 9
-crr-4Wr 19-*7-41
flzIT
f-49-k7
C 1
,11
4
01.07.13
27.08.07
05.06.03
15.09.98
Rev.
No
06.04.83

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
PMI REQT. INCLUDED AND ISSUED AS
REAFFIRMED AND ISSUED AS STD.
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
RN TD DM
RN
ATD
DM
VC
RN
DM
BN
SKG
SH
BRB
NS
AS
DB
DB
Prepared
by
Checked
by
SLG
RSB
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by

Page 1437 of 1744
rtg-ar tt154-eg
eietnre 0,7 JT7.11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeilak.9)

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASME :
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
IBR
PMI
ppm
Parts per million
SS
Stainless Steel

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Mr. Ajay Shrivastava
Mr. G.K. Iyer (Construction)

Page 1438 of 1744

ENGINEERS
31
fg-a(.77nr taf*reg INDIA LIMITED TESTING
OF PIPING SYSTEMS
G" "'" Unde"'"g)
6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
INSPECTION
4.0
FLUSHING
5.0
PRESSURE TESTING

Page 1439 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
NIRY1 esreM7F
1.0
3,10.1)
G" '11"" Unde""

)

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 9
SCOPE
This specification covers the general requirements for inspection, flushing and testing of
piping systems. However, testing of steam lines falling under IBR shall also be governed by
Indian Boiler Regulations.
Flushing and testing of all piping systems shall be witnessed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
2.0 REFERENCES
ASME B31.3
Process Piping
IBR
EIL SPEC 6-82-0002 :
Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification

(PMI) at Construction Sites
3.0 INSPECTION
During various stages and after completion of fabrication and erection, the piping system shall
be inspected by the Engineer-In-Charge to ensure that:
Proper piping material has been used.
PMI has been performed as per EIL specification '6-82-0002'.
Piping has been erected as per drawings and instructions of Engineer-In-Charge.
All supports have been installed correctly.
Test preparations mentioned in this specification have been carried out.
4.0 FLUSHING
Flushing of all lines shall be done before pressure testing.
Flushing shall be done by 'fresh potable water' or by 'dry compressed air wherever water
flushing is not desirable to clean the pipe of all dirt, debris or loose foreign material.
Required pressure for water flushing shall meet the fire hydrant pressure or utility water
pressure. For air flushing, the line/system shall be pressurized by compressed air at the
required pressure which shall be 3.5 kg/cm2g maximum. The pressure shall then be released
by quick opening of a valve, already in line or installed temporarily for this purpose. This
procedure shall be repeated as many times as required till the inside of the pipe is fully
cleaned.
In line instruments like control valves, orifice plates, rotameters, safety valves and other
instruments like thermowells which may interfere with flushing shall not be included in
flushing circuit.
The screens/meshes shall be removed from all permanent strainers before flushing.
Screens/meshes shall be reinstalled after flushing but before testing.
During flushing temporary strainers shall be retained. These shall be removed, cleaned and
reinstalled after flushing, but, before testing.
Page 1440 of 1744
faf5reg
1.11R, ti,Prel>1393,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
G" In Unde"")

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 9
In case any equipment such as column, vessel, exchanger etc. form part of a piping circuit
during flushing, this shall be done with the approval of Engineer-In-Charge. However,
equipments thus included in the circuit shall be completely drained and dried with compressed
air after flushing is completed.
During flushing discharged water/air shall be drained to the place directed by the Engineer-InCharge. If necessary, proper temporary drainage shall be provided by the contractor.
Care shall be taken during flushing so as not to damage/spoil work of other agencies.
Precautions shall also be taken to prevent entry of water/foreign matter into equipments,
electric motors, instruments, electrical installations etc. in the vicinity of lines being flushed.
The contractor shall carry out all the activities required before, during and after the flushing
operation, arising because of flushing requirements, such as but not limited to the following:
Dropping of valves, specials, distance pieces, inline instruments and any other piping part
before flushing. The flanges to be disengaged for this purpose shall be envisaged by the
contractor and approved by the Engineer-In-Charge. These flanges shall be provided with
temporary gaskets at the time of flushing.
After flushing is completed and approved, the valve distance pieces, piping specials etc. shall
be reinstalled by the contractor with permanent gaskets. However, flanges at equipment
nozzles and other places where isolation is required during testing, only temporary gaskets
shall be provided.
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping system
for the flushing done in the proforma provided/approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.0 PRESSURE TESTING
Pressure testing, in general shall be as per clause 345 of ASME B31.3, unless otherwise
specified, herein. Lines carrying highly hazardous/poisonous fluids must have a sensitive leak
test. For IBR lines, ÌBR Regulations' shall also be followed.
5.1
Extent of Testing
With the exclusion of instrumentation, piping systems fabricated or assembled in the field
shall be tested irrespective of whether or not they have been pressure tested prior to site
welding or fabrication.
To facilitate the testing of piping systems, vessels and other equipments may be included in
the system with the prior approval of Engineer-In-Charge if the test pressure specified is equal
to or less than that for the vessels and other equipments.
Pumps, compressors and other rotary equipments shall not be subjected to field test pressure.
Lines which are directly open to atmosphere such as vents, drains, safety valves discharge
need not be tested, but all joints shall be visually inspected. Wherever necessary, such lines
shall be tested by continuous flow of fluid to eliminate the possibility of blockage. However,
such lines if provided with block valve shall be pressure tested up to the last block valve.
Seats of all valves shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum cold working
pressure of the valve. Test pressure applied to valves shall not be greater than the
manufacturer's recommendation nor less than that required by the applicable code. Where
allowable seat pressure is less than test pressure, test shall be made through an open valve.
Page 1441 of 1744
0
fg-zir tif5leg
rirane as ,sr...
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(>172R
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 6 of 9
Instruments in the system to be tested shall be excluded from the test by isolation or removals,
unless approved otherwise by the Engineer-In-Charge.
Restrictions which interfere with filling, venting, draining such as orifice plates etc. shall not
be installed unless testing is complete.
Control valves shall not be included in the test system. Where bypasses are provided test shall
be performed through the bypass and/or necessary spool shall be used in place of the control
valve.
Pressure gauges which are part of the finished system, but cannot withstand test pressure shall
not be installed until the system has been tested. Where piping systems to be tested are
directly connected at the battery limits to piping for which the responsibility rests with other
agencies, the piping to be tested shall be isolated from such piping by physical disconnection
such as valve or blinds.
5.2
General Requirements / Test Preparation for Testing

Testing shall be carried out with permanent gaskets installed unless specified otherwise or
instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
No pressure test shall be carried out against closed valve unless approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge
The Engineer-in-Charge shall be notified in advance by the Contractor, of the testing sequence
and programme, to enable him to be present for witnessing the test. The Contractor shall be
fully responsible for making arrangements with the local boiler inspector to witness the tests
for steam lines falling under IBR. IBR certificates for these tests shall be obtained in the
relevant IBR forms and furnished to the Engineer-in-Charge.
Before testing, all piping shall be cleaned by flushing to make it free from dirt, loose scale,
debris and other loose foreign materials.
All piping systems to be hydrostatically tested shall be vented at the high points and the
systems purged of air before the test pressure is applied.
Wherever in the line any void exists due to any reasons, like absence of control valves, safety
valves, check valves etc. it shall be filled with temporary spools.
All joints welded, screwed or flanged shall be left exposed for examination during the test.
Before pressurizing the lines, each weld joint shall be cleaned by wire brush to free it from
rust and any other foreign matter.
Where a system is to be isolated at a pair of companion flanges, a blank shall be inserted
between the companion flanges. Minimum thickness of the blank shall be designed in
accordance with applicable design code.
Open ends of piping system where blanks cannot be used, such as pumps, compressors,
turbines or wherever equipment or pipe spools have been recovered or disconnected prior to
hydrostatic testing, shall be blinded off by using standard blind flanges of same rating as the
piping system being tested.
Pressure gauges used in testing shall be installed as close as possible to the lowest point in the
piping system to be tested, to avoid overstressing of any of the lower portions of the system.
Page 1442 of 1744
ligaf
fdWeg
afIR'n ,eant Ng.)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt ol India uncieriakm)

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 7 of 9
For longer lines and vertical lines, two or more pressure gauges shall be installed at locations
decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
For lines containing check valves any of the following alternatives shall be adopted for
pressure testing:
Whenever possible pressurize up-stream side of valve.
Replace the valve by a temporary spool and reinstall the valve after testing.
Provide blind on valve flanges and test the upstream and downstream of the line
separately and remove the blind after testing. At these flanges, temporary gaskets shall
be provided during testing and shall be replaced by permanent gaskets subsequently.
For check valves in lines PA" and below flapper or seat shall be removed during
testing (if possible). After completion of testing the flapper/seat shall be refitted.
Gas lines when hydrostatically tested shall be provided with additional temporary supports
during testing as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Piping which is spring or counter-weight supported shall be temporarily supported, where the
weight of the fluid would overload the support. Retaining pins for spring supports shall be
removed only after testing is completed and test fluid is completely drained.
When testing any piping system, air or steam of approximately 2 kg/ cm2g may be used as
preliminary test to detect missing gaskets etc. as this avoids the necessity of draining the line
to make repairs. However, steam shall not be used for this purpose, if the steam temperature is
more than the design temperature of the line.
For jacketed pipes testing of core pipes shall be done on individual pieces where the pipe is
continuously jacketed, before it is jacketed. The outer jacket shall be tested separately as a
system. For piping with discontinuous jacketing the core pipe and the jacket shall be tested as
separate continuous systems.
5.3
Testing Media, Test Pressure and Test Pressure Gauges
5.3.1
Testing Media
In general all pressure tests shall be hydrostatic using iron free water, which is clean and free
of silt. Maximum chloride content in water for hydrostatic testing for SS piping shall be 1520 ppm.
Air shall be used for testing only if water would cause corrosion of the system or overloading
of supports etc. in special cases as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.
If operating fluid in the line is much lighter than testing fluid, the additional weight of testing
fluid may render piping supports (as designed) inadequate. This will call for additional
temporary supports. The typical examples are flare and vapor lines. It is preferable that
hydrostatic testing is avoided in such systems and instead pneumatic testing may be specified.
Where air/water tests are undesirable, substitute fluids such as gas oil, kerosene, methanol etc.
shall be used as the testing medium, with due consideration to the hazards involved. These test
fluids shall be specified in the line list given to the contractor.

Page 1443 of 1744
ara_it.-7
fg-zrr lafj4-d'g
1.17",eiecnIe
5.3.2
SW{1,141
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
'A 6"
""d' Uncle"")

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 8 of 9
Test Pressure
The hydrostatic/ pneumatic test pressure shall be as indicated in the line list or as per the
instruction of Engineer-in-Charge.
The selection of the piping system for one individual test shall be based on the following:
Test pressure required as per line list.
Maximum allowable pressure for the material of construction of piping.
Depending upon the above requirements and based on construction progress, maximum length
of piping shall be included in each test.
5.3.3 Test Pressure Gauge
All gauges used for field testing shall have suitable range so that the test pressure of various
systems falls in 35% to 65% of gauge scale range. Pressure gage dial shall be minimum of 150
mm. Size of Bourdon shall not be less than 75% of nominal diameter of dial range. Gauge
shall be of a good quality and in first class working condition.
Prior to the start of any test or periodically during the field test programme, all test gauges
shall be calibrated using a standard dead weight gauge tester or other suitable approved testing
apparatus. Any gauge showing an incorrect zero reading or error of more than 2% of full
scale range shall be discarded .The Engineer-in-Charge shall check the accuracy of master
pressure gauge used for calibration. Calibration certificate shall be furnished for the pressure
gages.
5.4
Page 1444 of 1744
Testing Procedure
5.4.1 Hydrostatic Test
All vents and other connections used as vents shall be left open while filling the line with test
fluid for complete removal of air. In all lines for pressurizing and depressurizing the system,
temporary isolation valves shall be provided if valved vents, drains do not exist in the system.
Pressure shall be applied only after the system / line is ready and approved by the Engineer-incharge.
Pressure shall be applied by means of a suitable test pump or other pressure source which shall
be isolated from the system as soon as test pressure is reached and stabilized in the system.
A pressure gauge shall be provided at the pump discharge for guidance in bringing the system
to the required pressure.
The pump shall be attended constantly during the test by an authorized person. The pump shall
be isolated from the system whenever the pump is to be left unattended.
Test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient length of time not less than 10minutes. Test
pressure shall be released only after physical checking of all the joints and attachments are
completed, to permit thorough inspection of all joints and connections for leakage or signs of
failure. Any joint found leaking during a pressure test shall be retested to the specified
pressure after repair.
The pump and the piping system to be tested are to be provided with separate pressure
indicating test gauges.
` It1-s
w ENGINEERS
$/tgal taWreg l
WWI eic,
tal 451 Jgsr.)
INDIA LIMITED

6-44-0013 Rev. 4
Page 9 of 9
Care shall be taken to avoid increase in the pressure due to temperature variation during the
test.
5.4.2 Pneumatic Test
When testing with air, pressure shall be supplied by means of a compressor. The compressor
shall be portable type with a receiver, after cooler and oil separator.
Piping to be tested by air shall have joints covered with a soap and water solution so that the
joints can be examined for leaks.
All other details shall be same as per hydrotesting procedure (specified above).
5.5
Completion of Testing
After the hydrostatic test has been completed, pressure shall be released by opening the vents,
in a manner and at a rate so as not to endanger personnel or damage equipments.
All vents shall be opened before the system is to be drained and shall remain open till all
draining is complete, so as to prevent formation of vacuum in the system. After draining, lines
/ systems shall be dried by air. In services like dry air, ethylene etc., small traces of water can
cause problem. For such lines hot air drying is to be done after hydro-test.
After testing is completed the test blinds shall be removed and equipment / piping isolated
during testing shall be connected using the specified gaskets, bolts and nuts. These
connections shall be checked for tightness in subsequent pneumatic tests to be carried out by
the contractor for complete loop / circuit including equipments (except rotary equipments).
Pressure test shall be considered complete only after approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Defects, if any, noticed during testing shall be rectified immediately and retesting of the
system / line shall be done by the contractor at his cost.
5.6
Test Records
Records in triplicate shall be prepared and submitted by the contractor for each piping system,
for the pressure test done in the proforma provided/approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Records shall also be submitted for the PMI undertaken as per EIL Std. Specification No.
6-82-0002.

Page 1445 of 1744
5fg-ar I~-3
dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
IA GoN of Indo Undeflakng)
Page 1 of 10
lebri ch
iJA
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR PIPES
25.09.14
31.12.13
04.07.08
15.03.00
04.04.94
Rev.
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
HYDROTEST & I.G.C. TEST CLAUSES
REVISED
Date
Purpose
SH'
UK
ATD('\:'
AK
SH
RN
SC
SC
RN
SC
DM
VC
RN
BRB
NS
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1446 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
rivvottt.1.5trool,
IA Govt ot Intha Undertalfing)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 10
Abbreviations:
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
BHN
BIS
E.FS.W
E.R.W
HAZ
HIC
IBR
IGC
IS
LT
MR
NACE MR
NB
NPT
PMI
PR
SMYS
SS

Brinell Hardness Number
Electric Fusion Weld
Electric Resistance Weld
Heat Affected Zone
Hydrogen Induced Cracking
Inter Granular Corrosion
Indian Standard
Low Temperature
National Association of Corrosion Engineers : Material Requirement
Nominal Bore
Nominal Pipe Thread
Specified Minimum Yield Strength
Stainless Steel

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1447 of 1744
$
;fgW 21541+fV7R rwnrt ,151,70541,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of lodia Undeftalong)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR PIPES
3.0
ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS
4.0
HYDROSTATIC TEST
5.0
MARKING AND DESPATCH
10
6.0
REFERENCES
10
Page 1448 of 1744
2f5le'g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl ol lnaia
Undertakog)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 10
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
A11 pipes and their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical properties, heat
treatment, hydrostatic test and other testing and marking requirements shall conform to the
latest codes and standards specified in the material requisition (MR). Supplier shall strictly
comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be permitted. Post Order
Concession/Deviation Permit 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18 of Specification for
Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the applicable material
specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in
the MR & Clauses 1.10 & 1.11.
1.2.2 Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition & heat treatment report)
shall also be furnished for the pipes supplied.
1.2.3 PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as defined in the spec for PMI at
Supplier's Works (6-81-0001).
1.2.4 Refer to specification nos. 6-81-0002 and 6-81-0003 for Inspection & Test plans for welded
pipes and seamless pipes respectively.
1.3
Manufacturing Processes
1.3.1
Steel made by acid Bessemer process shall not be acceptable.
1.3.2 A11 longitudinally welded pipes should employ only automatic welding.
1.4
Pipe shall be supplied in single or double random length of 4 to 7 and 7 to 14 meters

respectively.
1.5
a.
Seamless and E.R.W. pipes shall not have any circumferential seam joint in a random
length. However, in case of E.FS.W pipe, in one random length one welded
circumferential seam of same quality as longitudinal weld is permitted. This weld
shall be at least 2.5 m from either end. The longitudinal seams of the two portions
shall be staggered by 90. Single random length in such cases shall be 5 to 7 m.
b.
Unless otherwise mentioned in the respective material code, E.FS.W pipes < 36" shall
not have more than one longitudinal seam joint and E.FS.W pipes
36" shall not
have more than two longitudinal seam joints.
1.6
Pipe with screwed ends shall have NPT external taper pipe threads conforming to
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 up to 1.5" NB & IS 554 for 2" to 6" NB.
Page 1449 of 1744
wlrrT t,vcrtV ItISOIstt )
1.7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
IA Govt ol Intlia Gott000k,o9)
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 10
Pipe with beveled ends shall be in accordance with ASME B16.25. Weld contours shall be as
follows:
Wall Thickness
Material
Carbon Steel (Except
Low Temp. Carbon Steel)
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel
Weld Contour
Up to 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Up to 10 mm
Figure 4
> 10 mm & Up to 25 mm
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
1.8
Galvanized pipes shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 / ASTM
A 153.
1.9
All austenitic stainless steel pipes shall be supplied in solution annealed condition. All types
of 321 or 347 stainless steel pipes shall be in a stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to the normal solution annealing. Soaking time
& holding temp. for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 4 hrs & 900C respectively.
1.10
I.G.C. Test for Stainless Steels
1.10.1 For all austenitic stainless steel pipes inter-granular corrosion test shall have to be conducted
as per following:
ASTM A262 Practice "B" with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
OR
ASTM A262 Practice E with acceptance criteria of no cracks at 20X magnification and
microstructure to be observed at 250X magnification shall ensure the absence of any cracks/
fissures. When testing is conducted as per practice 'E' photograph of microstructure shall be
submitted for record.
1.10.2 When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (eg.SS 309, 310, 316, 316H etc.) ASTM A262 Practice "C" with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year (max.)" shall have to be conducted.
1.10.3 For the IGC test as described in 1.10.1 & 1.10.2, two sets of samples shall be drawn from each
solution annealing lot; one set corresponding to highest carbon content and the other set
corresponding to the highest pipe thickness.
All welded pipes indicated as `CRY0' & `LT' in MR shall be impact tested per requirement
& acceptance criteria of ASME B31.3. The impact test temperature shall be -196C & -45C
for stainless steel and carbon steel respectively unless specifically mentioned otherwise in
MR.
1.12 NACE/HIC Requirements
1.12.1 Pipes under "NACE" category and those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements
given in NACE MR-0103 unless mentioned otherwise.

1.12.2 Pipes made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC requirements of EIL
specification 6-79-0013 unless mentioned otherwise.
Page 1450 of 1744
`51
1
5fga 02eg
1.11UR ertcnt ,TR,1-4.1)
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
Ift Govt of
UnciertaNingf
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 10
1.13
Specified heat treatment for carbon steel and alloy steel and solution annealing for stainless
steel pipes shall be carried out after weld repairs. Number of weld repairs at the same spot
shall be restricted to maximum two by approved repair procedure.
1.14
For black or galvanized pipes to IS 1239, the minimum percentage of elongation shall be
20%.
1.15
All 1Cr-V2Mo and 11/4Cr-1/4Mo seamless pipes shall be normalised and tempered.
1.16
For all welded alloy steel pipes with mandatory requirement of heat treatment and
radiography, radiography shall be performed after heat treatment.
1.17
For Hydrogen service pipes following special requirements shall also be met:
1.17.1 All carbon steel pipes having wall thickness 9.53 mm (0.375") and above shall be normalised.
Cold drawn pipes shall be normalised after the final cold draw pass for all thicknesses.
1.17.2 All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) pipes shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heating operation and not a part of the hot forming operation.
The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psig.
1.17.3 For carbon steel Pipes, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max.). For alloy steel
Pipes, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 225 BHN (max.).
1.17.4 For all austenitic stainless steels, the weld deposit shall be checked for ferrite content. A
Ferrite No.(FN) not less than 3% and not more than 10% is required to avoid sigma phase
embrittlement during heat treatment. FN shall be determined by Ferritescope prior to post
weld heat treatment.
1.17.5 For all Carbon steel and Alloy steel pipes with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V Notch
impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section
VIII, Div-1 for weld metal and base metal from the thickest item per heat of material and per
heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in complete heat treated condition and
accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0Celsius shall average greater than 27J (20
ft-lb) per set of three specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15 ft-lb).
1.18
For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
both grades specified shall be ensured.
2.0
IBR PIPES
2.1
IBR Documentation
2.1.1 Pipes under purview of IBR shall be accompanied with IBR certificate original in Form III-A
duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority/local authority empowered by the Central
Boiler Board of India(Photocopy of the original certificate duly attested by the local boiler
inspector where the supplier is located is the minimum requirement for acceptance) or Form
III-D [for well known pipe manufacturers as per IBR] signed by Manufacturer's authorized
representative. Well known pipe manufacturers, as recognized by IBR, shall submit a duly
attested copy of Form XVI-G along with Form
2.1.2 For materials 11/4Cr - V2Mo (ASTM A335 Gr.P11 / A691 Gr.11/4Cr), 21/4Cr - 1Mo (ASTM
A335 Gr.P22 / A691 Gr.21/4Cr) & 9Cr -1Mo-V (A335 Gr.P91/A691 Gr.91), Form III-A
approved by IBR shall include the tabulation of Et, Sc & Sr values for the entire temperature
range given below. Et, Sc & Sr values shall be such that throughout the temperature range
Page 1451 of 1744
$R-ar 22-eg
1.177, rrmrr
an s~
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
IA Govt ot India Undertalfingt
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 10
E,/ 1.5
Sr / 1.5
SA
Sc
where ,
Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.
Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal temperature)
The average stress to produce elongation of 1%(creep) in 100000 hrs at the
working metal temperature.
The average stress to produce rupture in 100000 hrs at the working metal
temperature and in no case more than 1.33 times the lowest stress to produce
rupture at this temperature.
SA
S,
Sr
SA (psi)
Temp(F)
Material
950
1000 1050
1100
17200 16700 16200 15600 15200 15000 14500 12800 9300
6300 4200
2800
A691 Gr.11/4Cr 18900 18300 18000 17600 17300 16800 16300 15000 9900
6300 4200
2800
A335 Gr.P11
500
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
A335 Gr.P22 /
17900 17900 17900 17900 17900 17800 14500 12800 10800 7800 5100 3200
A691 Gr.21/4Cr
A335 Gr.P91/
28100 27700 27300 26700 25900 24900 23700 22300 20700 18000 14000 10300
A691 Gr.91
Note : SA values shall be as per the latest edition prevai ing.
2.2
For carbon steel pipes under IBR the chemical composition shall conform to the following:
Carbon (max)
Others (S, P, Mn)
0.25%
As prescribed in IBR.
The chemical composition as indicated in this clause is not applicable for pipes other than IBR
services.
3.0 ACCEPTABLE DEVIATIONS

3.1
Pipes to IS 3589 Gr.410 are acceptable in place of IS 3589 Gr.330.
3.2
Pipes of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316 or
SS316(2.5 Mo min.).
3.3
Pipes of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316L
or SS316L(2.5Mo min.).
3.4
Seamless pipes are acceptable in place of welded pipes except in the case of welded
SS321/SS321H pipes with nominal thickness greater than 9.53mm.
4.0 HYDROSTATIC TEST

4.1
A11 pipes shall be hydrostatically tested.
Page 1452 of 1744
~_le7
e5
4.2
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha Undertalting)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 10
The mill test pressure shall be as follows:
4.2.1 Seamless, E.R.W. & Spiral Welded

a)
Carbon Steel
Material Std.
b)
ASTM A106 Gr.B
ASTM A530
API 5L Gr.B, Seamless
API 5L
API 5L, E.R.W.
API 5L
API 5L, Spiral
API 5L
ASTM A333 Gr.3 & 6, Seamless
ASTM A530
ASTM A333 Gr.3 & 6, E.R.W.
ASTM A530
Seamless Alloy Steel

Material Std.
c)
ASTM A530
ASTM A268 TP 405, TP410
ASTM A530
Seamless Stainless Steel
ASTM A312 Gr.TP 304, 304L, 304H, 316,

316L, 316H, 321, 347
ASTM A999
Test Pressure Std.
ASTM B161 UNS No. 2200
ASTM B161
ASTM B165
ASTM B167
ASTM B407
Welded Nickel Alloy

Material Std.
Test Pressure Std.
ASTM B725 UNS No. 2200,4400
ASTM B725
ASTM B517
ASTM B514
Page 1453 of 1744
Test Pressure Std.
Seamless Nickel Alloy

Material Std.
e)
Test Pressure Std.
ASTM A335 Gr.P1, P12, P11, P22, P5, P9
Material Std.
d)
Test Pressure Std.
0141
-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo UnclertaNngt
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 10
4.2.2 Electric Fusion Welded

a)
Carbon Steel & Alloy Steel E.FS.W (16" & above)

Test Pressure Std.
Material Std.
API 5L Gr.B
ASTM A671 Gr.CC65, 70 (C1.32)
ASTM A672 Gr.C60, 65, 70 (CI.12,22)
ASTM A671 Gr.CF60, 65, 66, 70 (C1.32)
ASTM A691 Gr.V2Cr, 1Cr, 11/4Cr, 21/4Cr,
SCr, 9Cr (C1.42)
b)
P = 2ST/D
S = 90% of SMYS
Except for API 5L Gr.B
S = 85% of SMYS
For API 5L Gr.B
T = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = O.D of Pipe
Stainless Steel E.FS.W (2" to 6")

The hydrostatic test pressure in kg/cm2 for the following materials shall be as given
below :
Material Gr.1 :ASTM A312 TP 304 / 304H / 316 / 316H / 321 / 347 welded.
Material Gr.2 :ASTM A312 TP 304L / 316L welded.
Size
Pipe Schedule : 10S
Pipe Schedule : 80S
Material
Gr. 1
Material
Gr.2
Material
Gr.1
Material
Gr.2
Material
Gr.1
Material
Gr.2
100
80
155
130
230
190
3"
80
60
155
130
230
190
4"
80
50
155
130
230
190
6"
65
35
90
75
155
130
2"
c)
Pipe Schedule : 40S
Stainless Steel E.FS.W (8" and above).

Material Std.
ASTM A358 TP 304L, 304, 304H, 316L,
316, 316H, 321, 347 (Classes 1, 3 & 4)
ASTM A358 TP 304L, 304, 304H, 316L,

316, 316H, 321, 347 (Classes 2 & 5)
Test Pressure Std.

P = 2ST/D
S = 85% of SMYS
D = O.D of Pipe
P = 2ST/D
S = 72% of SMYS
D = 0.D of Pipe
4.2.3 Carbon Steel Pipes to BIS Standards

Material Std.
4.3
IS 1239
IS 1239
IS 3589
IS 3589
Hydrostatic pressure testing shall be performed using iron free water, which is clean and free
of silt. Maximum chloride content in water for hydrostatic testing for SS piping shall be 50
ppm.
Page 1454 of 1744
Test Pressure Std.
OrcRes
1
.1,P+,,
M11 J457,01/
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

PIPES
IA GoN ol India UnclettaMing)
6-44-0051 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 10
5.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH

5.1
All pipes shall be marked in accordance with the applicable codes, standards and
specifications. In addition the purchase order number, the item code & special conditions like
"IBR", "CRY0", "NACE", "H2" etc. shall also be marked.
5.2
Pipes under "IBR","CRY0", "NACE" & "H2" shall be painted with one circumferential
stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white respectively for easy
identification. Width of stripe shall be 12mm for pipe sizes lens than 3" and 25mm for pipes
3" and above.
5.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as zinc, lead
or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
5.4
Pipes shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any kind.
5.5
Pipes shall be protected from rust & corrosion.
5.6
Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a
petroleum solvent and the same shall not be harmful to welding.
5.7
Both ends of the pipe shall be protected with the following material:
Plastic cap
Wood, Metal or plastic cover
Metal or plastic threaded cap
Plain end
Bevel end
Threaded end
5.8
Pipes may be provided with plastic push-fit type end caps/ steel caps without belt wire.
5.9
Steel end protectors to be used on galvanized pipes shall be galvanized. Plastic caps can also
be used as end protectors for galvanised pipe ends.
6.0 REFERENCES
6.1
6-81-0001:
Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works.
6.2
6-81-0002:
Inspection & test plan for welded pipes.
6.3
6-81-0003:
Inspection & test plan for seamless pipes.
6.4
6-79-0013:
Material requirements for carbon steel components used in sour service for
petroleum refinery environments
Page 1455 of 1744
Page 1456 of 1744
Page 1457 of 1744
Page 1458 of 1744
Page 1459 of 1744
Page 1460 of 1744
Page 1461 of 1744
Page 1462 of 1744
Page 1463 of 1744
Page 1464 of 1744
Page 1465 of 1744
Page 1466 of 1744
Page 1467 of 1744
Page 1468 of 1744
Page 1469 of 1744
Page 1470 of 1744
Page 1471 of 1744
Page 1472 of 1744
Page 1473 of 1744
Page 1474 of 1744
Page 1475 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
k31
,
$'1g-af
237,1,
17 ,
151 ,R,A)
IA GoN of Inda Undeflakng)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS
AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 7
4ct-cb(Net cs)(Yi
f41
FU I 1T
CfrielChr
n1
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR FLANGES,

SPECTACLE BLINDS AND DRIP RINGS
AK
/RN
SH
AK
ATNNo
SC
25.09.14
REVISED & ISSUED AS STD SPECIFICATION
SH
31.12.13
UK
04.07.08
RN
SC
DM
VC
01.11.00
RN
BRB
NS
MI
04.04.94
I.G.C. TEST CLAUSE REVISED
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
RN
SC
Approved by
Page 1476 of 1744
5gar fa2eg
1.1r, vomooJosnytt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
ot
InO. Undellakoog)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AARH
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
AWWA
BHN
HIC
IBR
IGC
IS
MR
MSS
NACE MR
PMI

American Water Works Association
Indian Standard
Manufacturer's Standardization Society

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1477 of 1744
k31-1
$gt-LIE
IM2--
1.41,1c,,DrO0,
13OO,-.0
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED FLANGES, SPECTACLE BLINDS
11, Tool ol InO. Undonoko9)
AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
3.0
4.0
5.0
REFERENCES
Page 1478 of 1744
$fg-z1
- f d21 dg
'
.117,1 rfrforr onJO'SOff
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Goft of Indo Uncleflak,o9)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 7
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
All items, their dimensions, tolerances, chemical composition, physical properties, heat
treatment and testing etc. shall conform to the latest codes and standards specified in the
requisition. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post Order Concession/Deviation Permit 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18
of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is
not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the relevant material
specifications. Test reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in
the requisition & Clauses 1.11, 1.12 & 1.15.
1.2.2 Material test certificates (physical property, chemical composition & heat treatment report)
shall also be furnished for the flanges supplied.
1.2.3 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as
defined in the `Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works'
(No. 6-81-0001).
1.2.4 Refer to specification no. 6-81-0006 for Inspection and Test plans for flanges, spectacle blinds
& drip rings.
1.3
Ends of weld neck flanges shall be beveled to suit the schedule / thickness of matching pipe,
as specified in the requisition.
1.4
Bevel end details for welding neck flanges shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel
end shall be as follows:
Material
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Upto 10 mm
Figure 4
> 10 mm & Upto 25 mm
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
1.5
Bore of socket weld flanges & reducing blind flanges shall suit the outside diameter and
schedule / thickness of matching pipe.
1.6
Bore of slip on flanges shall suit the outside diameter of matching pipe.
1.7
Flange face finish shall be normally specified in the requisition as serrated finish, 125 AARH
etc. The interpretation for range of face finish shall be as follows:
Stock Finish
1000 1.1 in AARH max.
Serrated Finish/125 AARH
Serrations with 125 to 250gin AARH
63 AARH
32 TO 63 in AARH
Page 1479 of 1744
Copyright EIL
All rights reserved
+31
$'g-arWes
1.41771
051
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A
Gol ol ind. Undenak.9)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 7
1.8
Galvanized flanges shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 /
ASTM A153.
1.9
Ends of screwed flanges unless otherwise specified shall have taper threads as per
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 (upto 1.5" NB) & IS 554 (for 2" to 6" NB).
1.10
For ring joint flanges, blinds and spacers the hardness shall be as follows:
Flange Material
1.11
Min. Hardness of Groove (BHN)
Carbon Steel
140
1% Cr to 5%, 9% Cr
150
Type 304, 316, 321, 347
160
Type 304L, 316L
140
For ring joint flanges, blinds and spacers, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.

1.12.1 Flanges, blinds, drip rings under "NACE" category and those designated as "HIC1" shall meet
the requirements given in NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
1.12.2 Flanges, blinds, drip rings made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC
requirements of EIL Specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
1.13
All austenitic stainless steel flanges shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.
1.14
I.G.C. Test for Stainless Steels:
1.14.1 For all austenitic stainless steel flanges, blinds, drip rings & Fig.8 flanges intergranular
corrosion test shall have to be conducted as per following:
ASTM A262 Practice `B' with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
OR
1.14.2 When specifically asked for in requisition for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (like SS309, 310, 316, 316H etc.) ASTM A262 Practice 'C' with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year" shall have to be conducted.
1.14.3 For the IGC test as described in 1.14.1 & 1.14.2 two sets of samples shall be drawn from each
solution treatment lot; one set corresponding to highest carbon content and the other
corresponding to the highest rating / thickness.
1.15
All types of 321 or 347 stainless steel flanges shall be in a stabilized heat treated condition.
Stabilizing heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to the normal solution annealing.
Soaking temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900 C and 4
hours respectively.
Page 1480 of 1744
t31
$gelE f22e5
el,ntetvrst,,cmt
ENGINEERS
1NDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ot Indo Undertaltng)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

AND DRIP RINGS
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 7
1.16
For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
1.17
AWWA C207 flanges shall be hub type.
1.18
Dimensions for handle projection for Spacers & Blinds shall be as specified in EIL Std. 7-440166.
1.19
Flanges of 22" size shall be as per MSS-SP44 unless otherwise specified
1.20
All 1Cr-V2Mo and 11/4Cr-'/2Mo flanges shall be normalised and tempered.
1.21
Ring Joint Fig-8 Flanges, Spacers & Blinds shall be female type only.
1.22
The handle for spacers & blinds for classes 900# & above shall be designed by the vendor.
The handle may be integral or attached to the line blank / spacer by welding. In case of
attachment by welding heat treatment & welding shall be in accordance with B31.3.
1.23
For Hydrogen service following special requirements shall also be met:

a. All carbon steel flanges having wall thickness 9.53 mm and above shall be normalised.
The normalising heat treatment shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part
of the hot forming operation.
b. All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) flanges shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation.
c. For all carbon steels and alloy steels with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V Notch
impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section
VIII, Div-1 per heat of material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be
in accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0 C shall average greater than 27J (20
ft-lb) per set of 3 specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15ft-lb).
2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS

2.1
IBR Documentation
2.1.1 Flanges coming under the purview of IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied
with IBR Certificate original in Form III C duly approved and countersigned by IBR
authority/ local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of original
certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the
minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.2
Carbon (max)
0.25%
Others (S, P, Mn)
services.

3.1
Blind Flanges and Spacers & Blinds if specified as plate materials are acceptable in forging
materials also in the corresponding material grades.
Page 1481 of 1744
faaes
1.117,
1217-,5W.13tt0.11
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

ENGINEERS
LIMITED
FLANGES,
SPECTACLE BLINDS
INDIA
IA
AND DRIP RINGS
Govt ol Indo Undertakingt
6-44-0053 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 7
3.2
Flanges/Spectacle Blinds/Drip rings of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are

acceptable in place of Grades SS316 or SS316(2.5Mo min.).
3.3
Flanges/Spectacle Blinds/Drip rings of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are

acceptable in place of Grades SS316L or SS316L(2.5Mo min.).
4.0 MARKING AND DESPATCH

4.1
A11 items shall be legibly and conspicuously stamped in accordance with the requirements of
applicable ASME, API and MSS Standards. In addition, EIL item code, purchase order
number & special conditions like "IBR", "CRY0", "NACE" "H2" etc. shall also be stamped.
4.2
A11 items coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall
be painted with one stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow & white
respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 25mm and it shall be painted
longitudinally across the complete thickness of flange other than hub.
4.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metal salts such as zinc, lead
or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating.
4.4
All items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any
kind.
4.5
All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during
transportation, shipment and storage.
4.6
Rust preventive on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a

4.7
Each end of flange shall be protected with the following materials:

Flange face
Bevelled end
Threaded end
Socket welding end
4.8
Wood, metal or plastic cover

Wood, metal or plastic cover
Plastic plug
Plastic cover or plug
Each size of flanges, blinds, etc. shall be supplied in separate packagings marked with the
purchase order number, item code number, material specification, size and rating.
5.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001
Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's

Works.
6-81-0006
Inspection & test plan for flanges, spectacle blinds & drip rings
6-79-0013
Material requirements for carbon steel components used in sour

service for petroleum refinery environments
7-44-0162
Standard for Spacers & Blinds 26" (150CL, 300CL & 600CL FF)
7-44-0164
Standard for Spacers & Blinds
7-44-0166
Dimensions for Handle projection for Spacers & Blinds
Page 1482 of 1744
26" (For AWWA Flanges)

1/2"-24"
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,,cnf1,151,Pqd,,)
IA Govt ol Intha UnooOok,o9)
-rEFW1
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BUTT

WELDED, SOCKET WELDED
AND SCREWED FITTINGS
rc-R
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 9
dcb-ilcb1
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR BUTT

WELDED, SOCKET WELDED AND
SCREWED FITTINGS
25.09.14
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD SPECN
31.12.13
04.07.08
15/03/00
04/04/94
HYDROTEST AND I.G. TEST CLAUSE

REVISED
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
ATD4 SC
SH
.AK
jRN
UK
SH
AK
RN
SC
DM
VC
RN
BRB
NS
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Comm ittee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
RN
SC
Approved by
Page 1483 of 1744
fg-;fr tfai
1.12R ,,c,.13,70.1/
TECH. NOTES FOR BUTT

ENG1NEERS
LIMITED
WELDED,
SOCKET WELDED
INDIA
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AARH
ANSI
API
ASME
ASTM
BHN
CS
DP
HAZ
HIC
IBR
IGC
IS
LT
MP
MR
MSS
NACE MR
NB
PMI
PO
PR
SMYS
SS

Carbon Steel
Dye Penetrant
Heat Affected Zone
Indian Standard
Low Temperature
Magnetic Particle
Manufacturer's Standardisation Society
Nominal Bore
Purchase Order
Specified Minimum Yield Strength
Stainless Steel

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1484 of 1744
7tn
5tgu faaeg
1.17,1 ,rcnr1,1111.~1/

ENGNEERS
INDIA LIMITED WELDED, SOCKET WELDED
6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
3.0
4.0
5.0
REFERENCES
Page 1485 of 1744
k71
Og'-ar 22-'dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
G"
Unde""g)

6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
Chemical composition, physical properties, tests, dimensions and tolerances, heat treatment
and marking shall conform to the applicable latest codes / standards / specifications as
specified in the material requisition (MR). Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR
stipulations and no deviations shall be permitted. Post Order Concession/Deviation Permit 50000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18 of Specification for Quality Management System
Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests as per the material specifications. Test
reports shall also be furnished for any supplementary tests as specified in the MR, Clauses
1.7.8, 1.9, 1.10 & 1.11. Material test certificates (physical properties, chemical composition &
heat treatment report) shall also be furnished for fittings supplied.
1.2.2 Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per scope and procedures defined
in the Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works (6-810001).
1.2.3 Refer to specification no.6-81-0005 for Inspection and Test plan for forged, seamless and
welded fittings.
1.3
All fittings shall be seamless in construction unless otherwise specified. If fittings are
specified as welded, the same shall conform to clause 1.7.
1.4
Outside diameters and wall thickness (unless otherwise mentioned) of butt welded fittings
shall be in accordance with ASME B36.10 and ASME B36.19 as applicable.
1.5
For reducing butt weld fittings having different wall thicknesses at each end, the greater wall
thickness of the fitting shall be employed and inside bore at each end shall be matched with
the specified inside diameter.
1.6
Beveled ends for all fittings shall conform to ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel shall be as
follows:
Material
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Upto 10 mm
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
1.7
Welded Fittings
1.7.1
A11 welded fittings shall be double welded. Inside weld projection shall not exceed 1.6 mm.
Welds shall be ground smooth at least 25 mm from the ends.
Page 1486 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.11,1
051~,
(A G" "d" Unde"''')

6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 9
1.7.2 For fittings made out of welded pipe, the welded pipe shall be double welded type & shall be
manufactured with the addition of filler metal.
1.7.3 Welded tees shall not be of fabricated (stub-in) type.
1.7.4 All welded fittings shall be normalized & 100% radiographed by X-ray on all welds made by
fitting manufacturers & also on the parent materials.
1.7.5 Welded pipes employed for manufacture of fittings shall be made by automatic welding only.
1.7.6 Specified heat treatment for carbon steel & alloy steel fittings shall be carried out again after
weld repairs.
1.7.7 Irrespective of the material code requirement, all welded fittings indicated in the MR as
"Cryo"& "LT" shall meet impact test requirements of ASME B3I .3. The impact test
temperature shall be -196C & -45C for stainless steel & carbon steel respectively unless
specifically mentioned otherwise in the MR.
1.8
Stainless Steel Fittings
1.8.1
All stainless steel fittings shall be supplied in solution heat treated condition.
1.8.2 Solution annealing for stainless steel fittings shall be carried out again after weld repairs.
1.8.3 For all stainless steel fittings Inter Granular Corrosion (IGC) test shall have to be conducted as
per the following:
ASTM A 262 Practice "B" with acceptance criteria of "60 mils/year (max.)".
Or
1.8.4 When specifically asked for in MR for high temperature application of some grades of
austenitic stainless steel (eg. SS309, 310,316,316H etc.) ASTM A 262 Practice "C" with
acceptance criteria of "15 mils/year" shall have to be conducted.
1.8.5 For the IGC test as described in Clauses 1.8.3 & 1.8.4, two nets of samples shall be drawn
from each solution treatment lot, one set corresponding to the highest carbon content and other
set to the highest fitting thickness.
1.8.6 For dual grades of SS where specified, chemical composition and mechanical properties of
1.9
NACE/HIC Requirements
1.9.1 Fittings under "NACE" category or those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements of
NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
1.9.2 Fittings made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC requirements of EIL
specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
1.10
Thickness/schedule lower or higher than specified for the finished product shall not be
accepted.
Page 1487 of 1744
k31
5g"arfaidles
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Rna" Unde"ng)

6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 9
For manufacturing of elbows from pipes, same size of pipe as that of elbow shall be used and
the nominal wall thickness of the starting pipes shall have positive tolerance only. However,
where the manufacturer has an established automatic/semi-automatic process for the
manufacture of elbows, the starting pipe may be permitted to be of Iower size with higher
schedule as required. Starting pipe of higher size than that of the elbow shall not be permitted.
1.11
The gasket contact surfaces of stub ends shall be flat with face finish specified in the
requisition. Interpretation on the specified face finish is as follows:
Serrations with 125 to 250 in AARH
125 AARH
1.12
Seamless stub ends shall not have any welds on the body. Stub ends shall be long pattern type.
1.13
Galvanized fittings shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 /
ASTM A153.
1.14
Threaded ends shall have NPT taper threads in accordance with ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 up to
1.5" NB & IS 554 from 2" to 6" NB.
1.15
Unless and otherwise specified in the MR, all socket welded and screwed fittings shall be in
accordance with ASME B16.11 to the extent covered in the specification except for unions
which shall be in accordance with MSS-SP-83.
1.16
Special fittings like weldolet, sockolet, sweepolet, latrolet, elbolet etc., the dimensions of
which are not covered in ASME, MSS-SP & EIL Standards, shall be as per manufacturer's
std. Contours of these fittings shall meet the requirements of ASME B31.3. Manufacturer shall
submit drawings / catalogues of these items for records after acceptance of offer.
1.17
Length of all long half couplings shall be 100 mm unless otherwise specified in the MR.
1.18
For reducers to manufacturers' standard, length of reducer shall not be less than 0.7D where D
is the outside diameter of the larger end.
1.19
All seamless pipes employed for manufacturing of fittings shall be required to have undergone
hydrostatic test to ASTM A 530. Welded pipes employed for manufacture of fittings shall be
tested as given below :
1.20
Welded Pipe Employed For Manufacture Of Welded Fittings.
Test Criteria
ASTM A671 Gr. C65,70 (C1.32)

ASTM A672 Gr. C60,65,70 (C1.12, 22)
ASTM A671 Gr. CF60,65,70,66 (C1.32)
ASTM A691 Gr. 1/2Cr, 1Cr, 11/4Cr, 21/4Cr, 5Cr, 9Cr (C1.42),
91 (C1.42)
API 5L
ASTM A358 TP 304, 304L, 304H, 318, 318L, 318H, 321,
347 (C1.1, 3, 4)
P=2ST/D
S = 90% of SMYS.
T = Nom. Wall Thickness
D = 0.D. of Pipe.
ASTM B725
P=2ST/D
S = 85% of SMYS.
T = Nom. Wall Thickness
D = 0.D. of Pipe.
ASTM B725
ASTM B517
ASTM B517
ASTM B514
ASTM B514
The bevel ends of all butt weld fittings shall undergo 100% MP / DP test.
Page 1488 of 1744
ENGINEEFZS
Odie`g cw INDIA LIMITED
Ii
1.177, 2:12.72 ,151~)
Unde"")

6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 9
1.21
Abbreviations for ends of swages and nipples shall be as follows:

Plain Both Ends
PBE
Threaded Both Ends
TBE
Threaded One End
TOE
Threaded Small End
TSE
Threaded Large End
TLE
1.22
All types of SS321 or SS347 fittings shall be in stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to normal solution annealing. Soaking
temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900C and 4 hours
respectively.
1.23
For Hydrogen service fittings following special requirements shall also be met:
Page 1489 of 1744
a. All carbon steel fittings having wall thickness 9.53 mm (0.375") and above shall be
normalised. Cold drawn fittings shall be normalised after the final cold draw pass for all
thicknesses. In addition, fittings made from forgings shall have Carbon- 0.35 % max. and
Silicon- 0.35 % max. The normalising heat treatment shall be a separate heating operation
and not a part of the hot forming operation
b. All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) fittings shall be normalised and tempered. The normalising and
tempering shall be a separate heating operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psi.
c. For carbon steel fittings, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max.). For alloy
steel fittings, hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 225 BHN (max.).
d. For all austenitic stainless steels, the weld deposit shall be checked for ferrite content. A
Ferrite No.(FN) not lens than 3% and not more than 10% is required to avoid sigma phase
embrittlement during heat treatment. FN shall be determined by Ferritescope prior to post
weld heat treatment.
e. For all Carbon steel and Alloy steel fittings with wall thickness over 20mm, Charpy-V
Notch impact testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME
Section VIII, Div-1 for weld metal and base metal from the thickest item per heat of
material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in complete heat treated
condition and accordance with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0Celsius shall average
greater than 27J (20 ft-lb) per set of three specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15 ft-lb).
1.24
For all welded alloy steel fittings with mandatory requirements of heat treatment and
radiography, radiography shall be performed after heat treatment.
1.25
All 1Cr-0.5Mo & 1.25Cr-0.5Mo fittings shall be normalized and tempered. All 2.25Cr- 1 Mo,
5Cr-0.5Mo, 9Cr- 1 Mo & 9Cr- 1 Mo-V welded fittings shall be normalized and tempered.
1.26 Fitting material as per ASTM A234 Gr.WP5/WP9/WP91, wherever specified, shall be as per
'Cl.lt, unless otherwise specified.
1.27
Materials designated as structural steel grades like IS 2062, SA 36 etc. or similar specification
are not permitted for manufacture of fittings.
ENGINEERS
egIw INDIA LIMITED
Ofaj-
I MTA <7,7.1,711,~
'flnd" Unde""
)

6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 9
2.0 IBR REQUIREMENTS

2.1
IBR Documentation Required
2.1.1 Fittings under the purview of "IBR" (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied with
original IBR certificate in Form III-C duly approved and countersigned by IBR authority /
local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of the original
certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is the
minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.1.2 For materials 11/4Cr - 1/2Mo (ASTM A 234Gr.WP11 & ASTM A234 Gr.WP11W) & 21/4Cr 1Mo (ASTM A 234 Gr.WP22 & ASTM A234 Gr. WP22W) & 9Cr-lMo-V (A234 Gr.WP91/
A234Gr.WP91W),where fittings are manufactured from pipe, Form III-C approved by IBR
shall include the tabulation of Et, Sc, & Sr values for the entire temperature range given below.
Et, S & Sr values shall be such that throughout the temperature range
Et / 1.5
S, / 1.5
SA
Sc
Allowable stress at the working metal temperature.
Yield point (0.2% proof stress at the working metal temperature)
The average stress to produce elongation of 1%(creep) in 100000 hrs at
the working metal temperature.
The average stress to produce rupture in 100000 hrs at the working metal
temperature and in no case more than 1.33 times the lowest stress to
produce rupture at this temperature.
SA
E,
Sc
Sr
SA
Temp( F)
Material
A234Gr.WP11/
A234Gr.WP11W
A234Gr.WP22 /
A234Gr.WP22W
A234Gr.WP91/
A234Gr.WP91W
Note :
2.2
500
600
650
700
(psi)
750
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
21700 20900 20500 20100 19700 19200 18700 13700 9300
6300
4200
2800
17900 17900 17900 17900 17900 17800 14500 12800 10800
7800
5100
3200
28100 27700 27300 26700 25900 24900 23700 22300 20700 18000 14000 10300
SA values shall be as per the latest edition prevailing.
Carbon (max)
Others (S, P, Mn)
0.25%
services.
3.1
Seamless fittings are acceptable in place of welded fittings, however, welded fittings are not
acceptable in place of seamless fittings. Forged fittings are acceptable in place of wrought
Page 1490 of 1744
aje- g
51g-ar fa
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
5" "'" Un0en'''9)

6-44-0054 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 9
fittings. However, wrought seamless fittings are acceptable in place of forgings only in case of
swages.
3.2
Fittings of Grades SS317 of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades SS316
or SS316(2.5Mo min.).
3.3
Fittings of Grades SS317L of corresponding material are acceptable in place of Grades

SS316L or SS316L(2.5Mo min.).
4.0
4.1
Each fitting shall be legibly and conspicuously stamped in accordance with the requirements
of applicable standards along with special condition like "IBR", "Cryo", "NACE" and "H2"
etc.
4.2
Steel die marking with round bottom punch may be permitted on body of butt weld CS &
lower alloy steel fittings, but for SS & higher alloy steel fittings, the same should be marked
by electro-etching only.
4.3
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metals or metal salts such as Zinc, Lead
or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
4.4
Fittings shall be dry, clean and free of moisture, dirt and loose foreign materials of any kind.
4.5
Fittings shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during transportation,
shipment and storage.
4.6
Rust preventive used on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a
4.7
Fittings coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" & "H2"(hydrogen) shall be
painted with one circumferential stripe of colour red, light purple brown, canary yellow &
white respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be 12mm for sizes less than 3"
and 25mm for sizes 3" and above. Stripe shall be located centrally for elbows, diagonally for
caps, at the larger end for reducing fittings, longitudinally for couplings and at one end near to
the bevel/socket/screwed end for other fittings.
4.8
Each end of fitting shall be protected with a wood, metal or plastic cover.
4.9
Each size of fitting shall be supplied in separate packaging marked with the purchase order
number, item code number, material specification, size and schedule / thickness / rating. For
small quantities, fittings of different sizes may be packed in separate packing size-wise and
there packing may be packed in a bigger package/ container clearly identifying the contents.
5.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001
Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at

Supplier's Works
6-81-0005
Inspection & test plan for forged, seamless and welded

fittings
6-79-0013
Material requirements for carbon steel components used in

sour service for petroleum refinery environments
Page 1491 of 1744
Oa&
+rpm kgronre akrantl)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

GASKETS
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 5
IA GovI of India Undertaking)
Clcfri I 14) I I duLI
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR GASKETS
21.03.13
23.07.07
15.06.98
30.12.92
Rev.
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
z RN
kTD
DM
'(
yr UK
yrSH
RN
ATD
DM
VC
SH
BRB
BN
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked by
Standards Standards
Committee
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1492 of 1744
Ogaf Rae
lg
anen efetpre ftst 3,70,1
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undettatongt
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

GASKETS
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
AARH :
Average Arithmetic Root Height
BHN :
Brinnel Hardness Number
CS
Carbon Steel
MR
PMI
RTJ

Ring Type Joint

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. Harish Chander

Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1493 of 1744
fgar fafgeg
,ania riroreaw+i,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

GASKETS
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
REFERENCES
Page 1494 of 1744
$14-ar 051-eg
wren erecore 4513405141
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Goer of India Undertaking)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

GASKETS
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
All gaskets shall conform to the codes/standards and specifications given in the
requisition. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall
be permitted. Post Order Waiver/ Deviation format 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl.
5.18 of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-780001) is not applicable.
1.2
Process of manufacture, dimensions and tolerances not specified in requisition shall be in

accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer's standards.
1.3
Testing
1.3.1
Test reports shall be supplied for all mandatory tests for gaskets as per the standards
specified in the requisition.
1.3.2
Chemical composition and hardness of RTJ gaskets shall also be furnished in the form of
test reports on samples.
1.3.3
For Spiral wound material following shall be furnished:

a. Manufacturer's test certificate for filler material and spiral material as per the relevant
material specifications.
b. Manufacturer's test certificate for raw materials and tests for compressibility/ sealability & recovery as per the relevant material specifications.
1.3.4
PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures defined in the Specification for
PMI at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001) for ring type joint gaskets.
1.3.5
Refer Specification no 6-81-0008 for 'Inspection & Test Plan for Gaskets'.
1.4
Full face gaskets shall have bolt holes punched out.
1.5
Filler material for spiral wound gaskets shall not have any colour or dye.
1.6
All spiral wound gaskets shall be supplied with Outer ring. Material of the outer ring shall
be CS unless otherwise specified in the MR.
1.7
For spiral wound gaskets, material of Inner Compression ring shall be same as Spiral Strip
material. In addition to the requirements as per code and as specified in the MR, inner
rings shall be provided for the following:
1.8
a.
Sizes 26" and above.
b.
Class 900 and above.
Hardness of metallic RTJ gaskets shall not exceed the values specified below unless
otherwise specified in MR:
Ring Gasket Material
Soft Iron
90
Carbon steel
120
Page 1495 of 1744
Maximum Hardness (BHN)
ligar 215ieg
rrecryrens,mn.,
NIVM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA G0A of Incha Uncterlaiong)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

GASKETS
6-44-0056 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 5
5 Cr. 1/2 Mo
130
Type 304, 316, 321, 347
140
Type 304L, 316L
120
1.9
Face finish of metallic RTJ gaskets shall be 32 to 63 AARH.
1.10
Gaskets of different types and sizes shall be placed in separate shipping containers and
each container clearly marked with the size, rating, material specification and item code.
1.11
All items shall be inspected and approved by EIL Inspector or any other agency
authorized by EIL.
1.12
Any additional requirements specified in the requisition, shall be fully complied with.
1.13
Non-metallic ring gaskets as per ASME B16.21 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto
24" (except 22" size) and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specified otherwise. For
22" size, the matching flange standard shall be MSS-SP44 unless specified otherwise.
1.14
Spiral wound gasket as per ASME B16.20 shall match flanges to ASME B16.5 upto
24"(except 22"size) and to ASME B16.47B above 24" unless specifically mentioned
otherwise. For 22" size, the matching flange standard shall be MSS-SP44 unless specified
otherwise.
1.15 The following abbreviations have been used in the Material Requisition for Spiral Wound
Gaskets :
(I)
(0)
GRAFIL :
2.0
REFERENCES
6-81-0001

Works
6-81-0008
Inspection & Test Plan for Gaskets
6-78-0001
Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from

Bidders
Page 1496 of 1744
Inner Ring
Outer Ring
Grafoil Filler
Igar tif5leg
Page 1497 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

BOLTS AND NUTS
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 5
IA Govt of India Undettatongf
47 74
k:r *
64vd,N*1 -R-
ocn i criI Idui 'J ig'
TECHNICAL NOTES
FOR BOLTS AND NUTS
21.03.13
23.07.07
15.06.98
30.12.92
Rev.
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
9'1A-)DM
RN STD
4, UK
4.7t5(H
RN
ATD
DM
VC
SH
BRB
BN
AS
AKG
BPV
GRR
AS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1498 of 1744
tg-ar 054-eg
1.71217 2T2a+re OP J73,A)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

BOLTS AND NUTS
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
ASME :
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM :
The American Society for Testing and Materials
MR
PMI
SS
Stainless Steel

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. Harish Chander

Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1499 of 1744
,lecnr, am award)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt Of India Undertaking)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

BOLTS AND NUTS
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
3.0
REFERENCES
Ogar 0144-eg
Page 1500 of 1744
1.417M el,a,Je
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeilaking)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

BOLTS AND NUTS
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The process of manufacture, heat treatment, chemical & mechanical requirements and
marking for all stud bolts, m/c bolts, jack screws & nuts shall be in accordance with the
codes/standards and specifications given in the requisition. The applicable identification
symbol in accordance with the material specification shall be stamped on each bolt and
nut. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post Order Waiver/ Deviation format 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18
of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001)
is not applicable.
1.2
Testing
1.2.1
specifications.
1.2.2
Material test certificate shall also be furnished. (Heat Analysis, Product Analysis and
Mechanical Requirement)
1.2.3
PMI shall be performed as per the scope and procedures defined in the Specification for
PMI at Supplier's Works (6-81-0001).
1.2.4
Stress Rupture Test as detailed in ASTM A453 shall be carried out for all ASTM A453
bolting material irrespective of the temperature.
1.2.5
Refer Specification no 6-81-0007 for 'Inspection & Test Plan for Bolting Material'.
1.3
All bolting shall be as per ASME B 18.2.1 for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and ASME
B18.2.2 for nuts.
1.4
Threads shall be unified (UNC for 1" dia and 8UN for > 1" dia) as per ASME B1.1 with
class 2A fit for studs, M/c bolts and jackscrews and class 2B fit for nuts.
1.5
Stud bolts shall be threaded full length with two heavy hexagonal nuts unless otherwise
specified. Length tolerance shall be in accordance with the requirement of Table D2 of
Annexure-D of ASME B 16.5.
1.6
The nuts shall be double chamfered, semi-finished, heavy hexagonal type and shall be
made by the hot forged process and stamped as per respective material specification.
1.7
Heads of jackscrews and m/c bolts shall be heavy hexagonal type. Jackscrew end shall be
rounded.
1.8
Each size of studs & m/c bolts with nuts and jackscrews shall be supplied in separate
containers marked with size and material specifications. `CRY0' shall be marked
additionally in case `CRY0' is specified in the requisition.
1.9
All items shall be inspected and approved (stagewise) by EIL inspector or any other
agency authorized by EIL.
1.10
The heat treatment for stud bolts & nuts shall be as per code unless mentioned otherwise.
1.11
All austenitic stainless steel bolts, nuts, screws shall be supplied in solution annealed
condition unless specified otherwise in the material specification.
1.12
Any additional requirements specified in the requisition shall be fully complied with.
ENGINEERS
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR
31
$2-al faReg INDIA LIMITED
BOLTS AND NUTS
Page 1501 of 1744
6-44-0057 Rev. 4
Govt 01 India Undenaking)
Page 5 of 5
1.13
Stud bolts, nuts & jackscrews shall be impact tested wherever specified in the material
specification and also where the material specification is indicated as "CRYO". For S.S.
nuts and bolts minimum impact energy absorption shall be 27 Joules and test temperature
shall be -196C unless mentioned otherwise. For other materials impact energy and test
shall be as per respective code.
1.14
Bolts/nuts of material of construction B7M/2HM shall be 100% Hardness tested as per

supplementary requirement S3 of ASTM A193.
1.15
When specified as galvanized, the studs, M/C bolts and nuts shall be 'hot dip zinc coated'
in accordance with requirements of 'class C' of ÀSTM A 153'. As an alternative, electrogalvanizing as per IS 1573, 'Service Grade Number 2' is also acceptable.
1.16
All Stud Bolts of Bolt diameter size 1" and above shall be provided with three nuts
irrespective of whatever has been specified elsewhere in the MR.
1.17
Bolting shall be protected by non-corrosive oil or grease before dispatch to prevent

rusting.
2.0
2.1
'Nuts' to ASTM A194Gr.7 are acceptable in place of ASTM A194Gr.4.
3.0
REFERENCES
6-81-0001

Works
6-81-0007
Inspection & Test Plan for Bolting Material
6-78-0001
Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from

Bidders
ENGINEER.S
125 INDIA LIMITED
fa~ r-konrao.00r.0
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 1 of 7
IA Govl of InOko Undellaking)
4-wich
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
23/09/14
30/06/09
22/04/04
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
PK
AK
Prepared
by
ATILk4>SI
k%Xiq
SH
RN
SC
SC
ND
SKG
MRC
Standards Standards
Bureau
Comm ittee
Checked
by Convenor Chairman
BRB
Approved by
Page 1502 of 1744
~'i7llloi2Jt
~ts rai
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind. undertakng)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
AARH :
AISI
ASME :
ASTM :
BHN :
BW
DP
IBR
:
MOC
MP
PMI
Rc
:
SCRD
SS
SW
WN :
eDMS

American Iron and Steel Institute
Butt Weld
Dye Penetrant
Magnetic Particle
Rockwell C Hardness
Screwed
Stainless Steel
Socket Weld
Weld Neck

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1503 of 1744
31
otettort
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo Undertalung)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
Page No.
Sr.No
Description
1.0
PURPOSE & SCOPE
2.0
3.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
4.0
5.0
DOCUMENTATION
6.0
TEST AND INSPECTION
7.0
8.0
ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
9.0
REFERENCES
Page 1504 of 1744

31
$1g-ar ;125
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lA Govt of Inow undenakow
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 4 of 7
PURPOSE & SCOPE

This specification covers the design and construction, IBR requirements, documentation,
testing, inspection, marking and dispatch requirements for Traps. Vendor shall supply
Traps in accordance with the technical notes and details specified in the data sheet for
steam/air traps. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations
shall be permitted. Post order Concession/ Deviation format 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned
in Cl. 5.18 of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders
(6-78-0001) is not applicable.
2.0
2.1
All Codes and Standards for manufacture, testing and inspection etc. shall be of latest
editions.
2.2
The material of construction shall be as per the data sheet; for parts not mentioned in the
datasheet, vendor shall guarantee the material used for the service conditions specified. For
flanged traps, MOC of end flanges shall correspond to the material specified in the data
sheet.
For welding of dissimilar materials required for trap assembly, welder qualification
procedure shall be done prior to welding.
2.3
The material composition, physical properties, heat treatment & mandatory test reports,
dimensions and tolerances shall conform to the applicable codes/standards/specifications as
2.4
All traps shall be designed with back pressure up to 80% of upstream pressure unless
otherwise specified in the datasheet.
2.5
A1l traps shall have an integral strainer which can be serviced and its material shall be
SS304/SS316. However, Ball Float and Inverted Bucket traps may be supplied with
separate strainer of trap or line size, but vendor should quote composite price for the same.
Trap and strainer shall be supplied in assembled condition having strainer in the upstream.
This strainer shall be of Y-type having 40mesh size and material of construction for body
and internals shall be same as that of trap.
2.6
Thermodynamic traps shall have seat integral or seal-welded to the body & central entry
with respect to the disc. The seat and disc shall be differentially hardened to Rc 45-50 and
Rc 40-45 respectively maintaining a minimum difference of Rc 5 to ensure wear on the
disc.
2.7
Thermostatic traps shall be designed with subcool temperature setting as per data sheet. If
nothing is specified in data sheet, subcooling of 10 Deg C should be considered by default.
2.8
Upto 300 Class rating, Composite Impulse cum Thermodynamic type steam trap with two
integral strainers in place of Thermodynamic and Thermostatic trap is also acceptable.
2.9
Inverted bucket steam trap shall be of horizontal entry & exit type.
2.10
For flanged end traps, weld-on flanges are also acceptable. However, the type of flange
shall be WN.
Page 1505 of 1744

31 --1
5R-a- 22eg
1411W7 el,c1N,III~I)
2.11
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha Undeftakmg)
ASME B16.5
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.11
ASME B16.25
Bevel end details for BW steam traps shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel end
shall be as follows :
Material
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Carbon Steel (Except Low

Temp. Carbon Steel)
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
Upto 10 mm
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
> 25 mm
Figure 6 Type A
Flanged end face finish shall be normally specified in the data sheet. The interpretation for
range of face finish shall be as follows:
Stock Finish
Serrated/Smooth Finish/125 AARH
Extra Smooth/63 AARH
2.14
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 5 of 7
Alloy Steel, Stainless Steel

& Low Temp. Carbon Steel
2.13
Ends shall be as specified in the data sheet. The applicable dimension standards are:
Flanged ends
SW ends
SCRD ends
BW ends
2.12
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
: 1000 jt in AARH max.

: Serrations with 125 to 250jtin AARH
: 32 TO 63 jt in AARH
For traps with ring joint type flanged ends the hardness shall be as follows :
Min. Hardness of
Flange Groove (BHN)
140
Max. Gasket
Hardness (BHN)
90
1% Cr to 5% Cr, 9Cr
150
130
Type 304, 316, 321, 347
160
140
Type 304L, 316L
140
120
Flange Material
Carbon Steel
2.15
For traps with flanged ring type joint ends, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
3.0
IBR REQUIREMENTS
3.1
IBR Documentation
3.1.1
Traps coming under the purview of IBR (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall be accompanied
with IBR Certificate original in Form III C duly approved and countersigned by IBR
authority / local authority empowered by Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of
original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located
is the minimum requirement for acceptance.
3.2
For carbon steel traps described as "IBR", chemical composition for all carbon steel
components shall conform to the following :
Page 1506 of 1744
ENGINEERS
Oga~ INDIA LIMITED
?(
3 LIg
laIRR riragt,a,
13~)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
la Govt of Ind. Undertakng)
Carbon (max.)
Others (S, P, Mn)
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 6 of 7
0.25% (C=0.30% for A182 Gr. F 1)

As prescribed in IBR Regulation
4.0
4.1
Following alternative body materials are acceptable :

AISI 420/AISI 410/A743 Gr.CA40/A743 Gr.CA15 in lieu of ASTM A105.
A182 F22 in lieu of A182 F11.
AISI 420/A182 Fll in lieu of A182 Fl.
4.2
Cast traps including strainer with integrally cast flanges are also acceptable in lieu of
equivalent forged material. All castings offered in place of forgings shall be radiographed.
4.3
Forgings of equivalent material shall be acceptable in place of castings.
4.4
For traps where capacity has been specified in the datasheet, and if the trap meets the
capacity requirement, in these cases trap of same type but of lower size is also acceptable.
End connection size and type shall be same as that specified in datasheet.
4.5
Bimetallic traps of same capacity are acceptable in place of Balanced Pressure

Thermostatic traps but not vice versa. Suitability of trap for design conditions shall be
ensured.
5.0
DOCUMENTATION
5.1
No documents shall be submitted with the offer.
5.2
Detailed dimensioned cross section drawing with parts, materials, weight, etc. shall be
submitted through EIL eDMS for records/information.
6.0
TESTS AND INSPECTION
6.1
IBR steam traps shall be hydrostatically tested as per IBR regulations (latest edition). Other
steam traps shall be hydrostatically tested to twice the design pressure for which the traps
are suitable. For air traps test pressure shall be 1.5 times the design pressure.
6.2
Radiography of BW joints shall be as follows :

a. For carbon steel and stainless steel upto 600 Class rating, 10% of joints shall be
radiographed, with a minimum of 1 number against each type, size, rating and material.
Joints for weld-on flanges shall be 100% radiographed.
b. For all ratings in alloy steel and 900 Class ratings and above in carbon steel/stainless
steel, BW joints shall be 100% radiographed.
6.3
Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures
as defined in the `Standard Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at
Supplier's Works' (No. 6-81-0001).
6.4
specifications/requisition. Test reports shall also be furnished for hydrotest and any other
supplementary tests as specified in the requisition.
Page 1507 of 1744
k31
fg-Lif02-eg
.~
ENQNEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ollndia UndettakIngt
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STEAM AND AIR TRAPS
6-44-0066 Rev. 2
Page 7 of 7
6.5
Material test certificates (physical properties, chemical composition & heat treatment
report) of the pressure containing parts shall be furnished for the steam traps supplied.
Material test certificates for the other parts shall also be furnished for verification during
inspection.
6.6
EIL/Client's authorized representatives reserve full right to witness stagewise inspection of

all mandatory/applicable supplementary tests. However, for IBR items, the tests/inspection
shall be by IBR authority or IBR authorized representative.
6.7
Refer Specification 6-81-0134 for Inspection & Test Plan for Steam Traps.
7.0
7.1
Vendor shall securely attach on the body a metal tag stamped with item code, Tag no. (If
mentioned in requisition), size, rating and special conditions like ÌBR'. Wherever
nameplate is provided, marking can be done on the same.
7.2
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as zinc,
lead or copper which cause corrosive attack on heating. IBR traps shall be painted with red
stripes (25mm width).
7.3
A11 traps shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign material of any
kind.
7.4
All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion and mechanical damage during
7.5
Rust preventive on machined surfaces to be welded shall be easily removable with a

petroleum solvent and shall not be harmful to welding.
7.6
Each end of trap shall be protected with the following materials :

Wood or Plastic Cover
Flange Face
Bevelled End
Plastic Cap
SW & SCRD End
7.7
End protectors of wood / plastic to be used on flange faces shall be attached by at least
three bolts and shall not be smaller than the outside diameter of the flange. However
plastic caps for SW & SCRD end steam traps shall be press fit type. End protectors to be
used on bevelled end shall be securely and tightly attached.
8.0
ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
Format No 3-16-43-0094
Data Sheet for Steam Traps

Job Specific Process data sheet for Process steam
trap/Air trap (as applicable)
9.0
REFERENCES
6-81-0001
Specification for PMI at Supplier's Works
6-81-0134
Inspection and Test Plan for Steam Traps
6-78-0001
Specification for Quality Management System

Requirements from Bidders
Page 1508 of 1744
k31
$gU1812 -g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
IA GoA ot Indta Undeflakng)
RYI
ch 1-1 ch
u I 41
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
23.09.2014

SPECIFICATION
SH
29.06.2009
PK
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
,RN D SC
RN
SC
Prepared Checked
by
by
ND
Standards Standards
Bureau
Com m ittee
Convenor Chairman
Approved by
Page 1509 of 1744
IM2 g
aIIZ, rlecnW ast aamnl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
lA Govt ol Indo Undertakng)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
AARH
AISI
ASTM
BHN
BW
DP
FLGD
FN
H2
HAZ
IBR
MOC
MP
NACE
PMI
SCRD
SW
UNC
WN

American Iron and Steel Institute
Butt Weld
Dye Penetrant
Flanged
Ferrite Number
Hydrogen
Heat Affected Zone
Magnetic Particle
Screwed
Socket Weld
Unified Coarse
Weld Neck

Convenor :
Mr. R. Nanda
Members :
Mr. M. Ismaeel
Mr. Amrendra Kumar
Mr. G. Balaji
Page 1510 of 1744
tg'-ar2f51dg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Indo UndellaMing)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
PURPOSE & SCOPE
2.0
DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION
3.0
DOCUMENTATION
4.0
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDROGEN SERVICE
5.0
TESTING & INSPECTION
6.0
8 I
7.0
MARKING & DESPATCH
8.0
ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
9.0
REFERENCES
Page 1511 of 1744
t-11
Og-ar a;es
1~1 tY,CD11,613~
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt of Indu Unclellalong)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
1.0 PURPOSE & SCOPE

This specification covers the design and construction, IBR requirements, documentation,
testing, inspection, marking and despatch requirements for Strainers. Vendor shall supply
Strainers in accordance with the technical notes and details specified in the Data Sheet for
strainers. Supplier shall strictly comply with MR/PR stipulations and no deviations shall be
permitted. Post order Concession/ Deviation format 5-0000-0180-F1 as mentioned in Cl. 5.18
of Specification for Quality Management System Requirements from Bidders (6-78-0001) is
not applicable.
2.0 DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION
2.1.
All codes and Standards for manufacture, testing and inspection etc. shall be of latest editions.
2.2
The material of construction shall be as per the data sheet; for parts not mentioned in the data
sheet, vendor shall guarantee the material used for the service conditions specified.
For flanged strainers, MOC of end flanges shall correspond to the material specified in the
Data sheet.
For welding of dissimilar materials required for strainer assembly, welder qualification
procedure shall be done prior to welding.
2.3
The material composition, physical properties, heat treatment, mandatory test reports,
dimensions and tolerances shall confirm to the applicable codes/ standards/specifications as
2.4
Design shall be based on EIL Std 7-44-0300 for temporary strainers, EIL Stds 7-44-0303/0304
for T-type permanent strainers and Manufacturer's std. for Y-type strainers.
2.5
Dimension Standards for various components are as follows:

-
Body
Flanges
Gaskets
Bolts & Nuts
2.6
ASME B16.9/B16.11
ASME B16.5/B16.47 Series B
ASME B16.20/B16.21
ASME B18.2.1 & B 18.2.2 respectively
Ends of body shall either be Flanged, BW, SW or Screwed as specified in the data sheet.
2.6.1 The ends for strainers shall correspond to the following standards:
ASME B16.5/B16.47 Series B
ASME B16.25
ASMEB16.11
ASME B16.11
FLGD
BW
SW
SCRD
2.6.2 Bevel end details for BW strainers shall be as per ASME B16.25. Contour of bevel end shall
be as follows:
Material
Low Temp. Carbon
Steel)
Page 1512 of 1744
Wall Thickness
Weld Contour
Upto 22 mm
Figure 2 Type A
> 22 mm
Figure 3 Type A
1.41Q, 2:17.77 ffil,m++1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Gov, 01 lrMia Under,ak,n9)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
Wall Thickness
Upto 10 mm
Alloy Steel,
Stainless Steel &
Low Temp. Carbon Steel > 10 mm & Upto 25 mm
Weld Contour
Figure 4
Figure 5 Type A
Figure 6 Type A
> 25 mm
Flange face finish shall be normally specified in the strainer data sheet. The interpretation for
range of face finish shall be as follows:
1000 p in AARH max.
Serrations with 125 to 250 p in AARH
32 TO 63 in AARH
Stock Finish
Serrated/Smooth Finish/125AARH
Extra Smooth Finish/63 AARH
2.8
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
Material
2.7
For strainers with ring type joint flanged ends the hardness shall be as follows:
Min. Hardness of
Groove (BHN)
140
Max. Gasket
Hardness (BHN)
90
1% Cr to 5% Cr, 9% Cr
150
130
Type 304, 316, 321, 347
160
140
Type 304L, 316L
140
120
Flange Material
Carbon Steel
2.9
For strainers with flanged ring type joint ends, the hardness shall be recorded in the test report.
2.10
Ends of screwed strainers unless otherwise specified shall have taper threads as per
ASME/ANSI B1.20.1 (upto 1.5" NB) & IS 554 (for 2" to 6" NB).
2.11
All 2" and higher size Y type strainers shall be provided with 3/4" screwed plug for drain
connection. For less than 2" this shall be 1/2" size.
For Y type, SW end Strainers (size 1.5" & below) to MNF'STD, blind end is also acceptable
with threaded plug cover instead of flanged end. In this case, plug shall be of forged material
equivalent to body material.
2.12
For Y type strainers, cast strainers with integrally cast flanges and with end cover / blind
flange in cast/forged construction is acceptable.
2.13
For flanged end strainers, weld-on flanges (WN) are acceptable.
2.14
Pressure drop calculations shall be furnished by vendor along with the offer, wherever
specified in the data sheet.
2.15
Stainless Steel Strainers
2.15.1 All Austenitic Stainless Steel items shall be supplied in solution annealed condition.
2.15.2 For all Austenitic Stainless Steel items Inter-granular Corrosion Test shall be conducted as per
following:
Page 1513 of 1744
Og-ar
faaes
1~, c.wen/C ,151,370M)
ENGINEEFZS
INDIA LIMITED
Ift Govt of InOla Undettakong)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
ASTM A 262 Practice 'B' with acceptance criteria of `60mils/year (max.)'

OR
ASTM A262 Practice E with acceptance criteria of no cracks at 20X magnification
and microstructure to be observed at 250X magnification shall ensure the absence of
any cracks/ fissures. When testing is conducted as per practice 'E' photograph of
microstructure shall be submitted for record.
2.15.3 When specifically asked for in MR for High Temp. application of some grades of Austenitic
Stainless Steel (like SS 309, 310, 316H etc.) ASTM A 262 practice 'C' with acceptance criteria
of "15mils/year" shall be conducted.
2.15.4 All types of SS321 or SS347 material shall be in stabilized heat treated condition. Stabilizing
heat treatment shall be carried out subsequent to normal solution annealing. Soaking
temperature and holding time for stabilizing heat treatment shall be 900 C and 4 hours
respectively.
2.16 IBR Requirements
2.16.1 For SW / BW end carbon steel strainers under IBR, the chemical composition shall conform to
the following :
Carbon (Max)
Others (S, P, Mn)
0.25%
As per IBR regulations
2.16.2 Strainers coming under the purview of "IBR" (Indian Boiler Regulations) shall each be
duly approved by IBR
individually accompanied by original IBR certificate in Form
authority / local authority empowered by the Central Boiler Board of India. Photocopy of
original certificate duly attested by the local boiler inspector where the supplier is located is
the minimum requirement for acceptance.
2.17
In case of T-type strainer, body construction shall be `Seamless' unless otherwise specified in I
the data sheet.
2.18
Welded Tees shall not be of fabricated (Stub-in) type.
2.19
Strainers with welded body shall be in normalized condition & 100 percent radiographed by
X-ray.
2.20
All alloy steel strainers with welded body construction shall be normalized and tempered &
100 percent radiographed by X-ray.
2.21
Weld joints shall be stress relieved as per the requirement specified in the Strainer MR
Attachment..

2.22.1 Strainines under "NACE" category or those designated as "HIC1" shall meet the requirements
of NACE MR-0103 unless otherwise specified.
2.22.2 Strainers made from plates and designated as "HIC1" shall meet the HIC requirements of EIL
specification 6-79-0013 unless otherwise specified.
2.23
Strainers of Hydrogen service category shall meet the requirements as specified in clause 4.0
below.
2.24
Galvanized strainers shall be coated with zinc by hot dip process conforming to IS 4736 / I
ASTM A153.
Page 1514 of 1744
Og-arld2- g
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of InOta Unclettakingt
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
2.25 Gaskets
2.25.1 Non-metallic gaskets shall conform to B16.21 (corresponding to B16.5) up to 24" and B16.21
(corresponding to B16.47 Series `B') beyond 24", unless otherwise specified.
2.25.2 Spiral wound gaskets shall conform to B16.20.
2.25.3 Ring type and spiral wound gasket shall be self-aligning type.
2.25.4 Ring Joint gasket shall Octagonal type and shall conform to B16.20.
2.26 Bolting
2.26.1 All bolts shall conform to B18.2.1, nuts to B18.2.2. Reference shall also be made to B16.5 for
studs.
2.26.2 Threads shall be unified (UNC for upto 1"dia and 8UN for > 1"dia) as per ANSI B.1.1 with
class 2A fit for studs and M/C bolts and class 2B fit for nuts.
2.26.3 Nuts for Bolts & Studs shall be the American Standard Hexagon Heavy Series.
3.0 DOCUMENTATION
3.1
No documents shall be submitted with the offer.
3.2
Detailed dimensioned cross section drawing with parts, materials, weight, etc. shall be
submitted through EIL eDMS for records/information.
4.0 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDROGEN SERVICE

4.1
Method of Manufacture
4.1.1 All carbon steel strainers having wall thickness 9.53 mm and above shall be normalized.
Carbon content shall be limited to .35% max. and Silicon .35% max. The normalizing heat
treatment shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. Normalizing shall be done after final cold draw pass for all thicknesses if cold
drawn.
4.1.2 All alloy steel (Cr-Mo) strainers shall be normalized and tempered. The normalizing and
tempering shall be a separate heat treatment operation and not a part of the hot forming
operation. The maximum room temperature tensile strength shall be 100,000 psig.
4.2
Impact Test
4.2.1 For all carbon steels and alloy steels with wall thickness over 20 mm, Charpy-V Notch impact
testing shall be carried out in accordance with paragraph UG-84 of ASME Section VIII, Div-1
per heat of material and per heat treating batch. Impact test specimen shall be in accordance
with ASTM A370. Impact energies at 0 C shall average greater than 27J (20 ft-lb) per set of 3
specimens, with a minimum of 19J (15ft-lb).
4.3
For all austenitic stainless steels, the weld deposit shall be checked for ferrite content. A
ferrite No (FN) not lens than 3% and not more than 10% is required to avoid sigma phase
embrittlement during heat treatment. FN shall be determined by ferritescope prior to post weld
heat treatment.
4.4
Hardness of weld and HAZ shall be 200 BHN (max) for carbon steel and 225 BHN (max) for
alloy steel.
Page 1515 of 1744
sig-ar
rircortom.3oor.o
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
in Govt ol indLe Undenak,o9)
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 9
5.0 TESTING & INSPECTION

5.1
A11 strainers shall be hydrostatically tested at the lower of twice the design pressure and 1.5
times the class rating as per ASME B16.5 at ambient temperature.
5.2
All BW joints shall be 100% Radiographed and Fillet welds shall be 100% DP/MP checked.
5.3
Positive Material Identification (PMI) shall be performed as per the scope and procedures as
defined in the `Specification for Positive Material Identification (PMI) at Supplier's Works'
(No. 6-81-0001).
5.4
All welded Tees indicated in the MR as "Cryo" & "LT" shall meet Impact test requirements of
ASME B31.3. The Impact test temperature shall be (-)196C & (-)45C for Stainless Steel &
Low Temperature Carbon Steel respectively unless otherwise mentioned in the MR.
5.5
The stage wise inspection of non-IBR Strainers shall be done by EIL inspector before
despatch. EIL/Client's authorized representatives reserve full right to witness stagewise
inspection of all mandatory/applicable supplementary tests. However, for IBR items, the
tests/inspection shall be by IBR authority.
5.6
Material Test Certificates (Physical Properties, Chemical Composition and heat Treatment
Report) shall also be furnished.
5.7
specifications/requisition. Test reports shall also be furnished for hydrotest and other
supplementary tests as specified in the requisition.
5.8
Refer Specification 6-81-0133 for Inspection & Test Plan for Strainers.

6.1
Following alternative body materials are acceptable :

AISI 420/AISI 410/A743 Gr.CA40/A743 Gr.CA15 in lieu of ASTM A105.
A182 F22 in lieu of A182 F11.
AISI 420/A182 Fl 1 in lieu of A182 F1.
6.2
Cast strainers with integrally cast flanges are also acceptable in lieu of equivalent forged
material. All castings offered in place of forgings shall be radiographed.
6.3
Forgings of equivalent material shall be acceptable in place of castings.
6.4
In the case of T type strainers, `Seamless' body is acceptable in place of "Welded" body.
`Welded' body shall not be acceptable in place of `Seamless'.
7.0 MARKING & DESPATCH

7.1
Each Strainer shall be legibly & conspicuously stamped on the body, in accordance with the
requirements of applicable standards along with special condition like IBR, CRYO, NACE,
H2 etc. Vendor shall also mark on the body the Location/Tag No. and Line Number
mentioned in MR attachment.
7.2
A11 items shall be dry, clean and free from moisture, dirt and loose foreign material of any
kind.
Page 1516 of 1744
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
r laWs INDIA
$'g-a
1.1RA. vivaxt As..AlcA.1>
IA Govt 01 Ind. Undellaking)
2-1
TECHNICAL NOTES FOR

STRAINERS
6-44-0067 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
7.3
All items shall be protected from rust, corrosion, and mechanical damage during
7.4
Rust preventive, on machined surfaces to be welded, shall be easily removable with a

petroleum solvent or shall not be harmful to welding.
7.5
Paint or ink for marking shall not contain any harmful metal or metallic salts such as Zinc,
Lead or Copper which causes corrosive attack on heating.
7.6
Strainers under "IBR", "CRYO", "NACE" & "H2" shall be painted in Red, Light Purple,
Canary Yellow and sea green strips respectively for easy identification. Width of strip shall be
25 mm. Strainers coming under the purview of "IBR", "CRYO" , "NACE" &
"H2"(hydrogen) shall be painted with one circumferential stripe of colour red, light purple
brown, canary yellow & white respectively for easy identification. Width of stripe shall be
12mm for sizes less than 3" and 25mm for sizes 3" and above. Stripe shall be located one end
near to the bevel/socket/screwed/flanged end.
7.7
After testing, one coat of inorganic zinc silicate (minimum DFT 65 to 75 microns) shall be
applied as primer over the external surface for carbon steel / alloy steel strainers.
7.8
Each end of strainer shall be protected with the following materials :

Flange Face
Bevelled End
SW & SCRD End

Plastic Cap
End protectors of wood / plastic to be used on flange faces shall be attached by at least three
bolts and shall not be smaller than the outside diameter of the flange. However plastic caps
for SW & SCRD end strainers shall be press fit type. End protectors to be used on beveled end
shall be securely and tightly attached.
8.0 ATTACHMENTS FOR MR
Format No.3-1643-0093:
Data Sheet for Strainers
9.0 REFERENCES
6-81-0001
Specification for PMI at Supplier's Works
6-81-0133
Inspection and Test Plan for Strainers
6-78-0001

from Bidders
Page 1517 of 1744
STIFFENER OG
NOM
0
+0
C _2
1-)
2"
1
0
IIIIMMUMMIMMEM
ms
mm
waAllass SUMBA/
MIMMMIM/JIM
SEE DETAIL-1
1-
2/2
MMIMMWN/
.U.1,7.wmmm
3"
4"
AS PER MESH SPECIFICATION

(NOTE 1)
D E H
SCH
150CL 300CL 300CL 600CL 600CL

RTJ
RF
RF
RTJ
RF
40, STD
154
160
168
170
171
51
80, XS
152
158
166
168
169
48
160
149
155
163
165
166
40
XXS
147
153
161
163
164
35
40, STD
177
183
192
198
61
80, XS
175
181
190
194
190
196
57
160
172
179
192
188
194
51
40, STD
194
204
211
213
214
76
80, XS
192
202
209
211
212
72
160
189
198
206
208
209
64
XXS
185
194
202
204
205
54
40, STD
232
242
250
264
266
100
80, XS
229
239
247
261
263
95
120
227
237
245
259
261
89
160
224
234
242
256
258
83
XXS
221
231
239
253
255
75
58
6X6
64
6X6
64
6X6
64
6X6
MESH SPECIFICATIONS (NOTE-1)
STIFFENER 0G
LOW
VISCOCITY
0 <y< 2
MIDIUM
VISCOSITY
00 2 4 y. 8
HIGH
VISCOSITY
0
EQUAL TEE (MATERIAL &

THICKNESS AS PER SPEC.)
y>
EQUAL SECTION FRAME ATTACHED BY

INTERMITTENT WELD SIZE P
N.rr
OPEN
AREA%
0.097
8 MESH 22 SWG
62.2
TYPE 4
0.111
7 MESH 21 SWG
60.3
TYPE 3
0.202
4 MESH 18 SWG
65.3
TYPE 2
0.053
14 MESH 26 SWG
55.1
TYPE 5
0.053
14 MESH 26 SWG
55.1
TYPE 5
GASOLINE,
PROPANE
WATER
BLIND FLANGE (MATERIAL PRESSURE

RATING & FACING AS PER SPEC.)
U-
MESH
SPECIFICATION
OPENING (IN)
SERVICE
MESH
DESIGNATION
NOTES:
1. THE MESH SPECIFICATIONS AS GIVEN IN THE TABLE ARE TO BE USED WHEN STRAINER
IS INTENDED TO BE USED AS PERMANENT STRAINER. IN CASE OF TEMPORARY STRAINER
THE MESH SPECIFICATION SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
FOR LINES UPTO 2 //2"
S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.047" DIA WIRE X0.203 SQ.CLEAR OPENING-65.9 % OPEN AREA
FOR LINES 3"& ABOVE
S.S STD. STOCK MESH 0.08" DIA WIRE X0.253 SQ.CLEAR OPENING 57.6 % OPEN AREA.
2. MATERIAL AS PER LINE SPECIFICATION.
3/4"95
- SCREWED
PLUG
3. 3/4"0 SCREWED PLUG FOR DRAIN CONNECTION SHALL BE PROVIDED.
C
PCD (NO. OF BOLTS & BOLT DIMENSIONS
& MATERIAL TO SUIT SPEC.)
5
28.03.13
WELD NECK FLA GE (MATERIAL, PRESSURE

RATING & FACING AS PER SPEC.)
OfitiefithENGNEERS
4
23.07.07
#1gailaRegyri
IDIA LIMMED Rev.
men, mew =mom
Date
No.
Page 1518 of 1744
fy UK
Wr i*./RN ATD
r
A DM
RN
ATD
DM
VC
T-STRAINER TYPE-1 2"4"
Prepared
Checked
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
(150CL RF,300CL RF AND RTJ, 600CL RF AND RTJ)
by
by
Purpose
Approved by
STANDARD No.
7-44-0303 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 1
cp
)
7
C
C
0)
R . CO
CO
0 aCn
c3
0 co
'
7 0
0
CD
(/)
CD
0.
C)
0
7"
*
Cn
co
01
(.41
4
IT,
c..,
>
--f
71 rT1
171
LA
...,
(n (n
=n--71
s -0
M
0 0m
CO
,-)
rn
na
0-1
m
.c:7) 20
Z
0
I
ZEN
MU"-
bum
in -I
0
0
CY) NJ*
x
w
0 m
Mu'
0 0 _1
DM
co
Zm
mm
*r
v)
00
a ;-=
>
COW
w0
0
0 "4
Z
-10j
z00m
mZ
X (1-1-1
>
Q
0
0 > 0
- -r-> >
Z<
"0
'"1
MZz
13 in V),..
> 0 (nVn
"CI
2>
113
-
is,
CD
Page 1519 of 1744
co
CD
CD
7.
O
co
C)
xl
VS
>0
0
--I
mm
i01"1
cn>
I 0
ZZ
02
-um
xpz,
mm
rN
0-1
Om
0:0
0
(A >
Nz
1.3
0
0)
CO
.1
4 0
0
CD
CO
0
CO
co co
co co
CO 0 0
(c)
CO
CA
(.4
O
O
(41
tO
(0
0
0
co
UI
co
UI
UI
-
O
0)
CO
D
CO
O
CA
4'
CD
co
1.3
.1
1.3
1.3
n)
4'
(A
O
0)
cn
0
.1
(0
K.)
0 0
CO
(0
0
CA
0
CD
CA
0
.1
co
co
cr) 0
CO
UI
CA
UI
.1
CO
O
0)
0)
4'
(44
0)
na
N
0 0
c.)
O
O
CD
CO
O
(41
0
CO
CA
1.3
N3
O
CA
0)
0)
0)
0)
CO
0
0)
(.7)
CA
CO
CA
CO 03
0) CD
-44
1.3
co
O
CO
0)
N
0
CO
Co
0)
(.4
cn
COD
0 CO
co
O (0
O CA
(c) co
cn Cn
N 0
O
-"cr
0) co
0
0)
co
0 co
0
co
Cn co
co
0 CO
0)
O
O
0)
n3
0)
0)
CA
co
o
W co co
0) co
0)
CT
CA
0)
'N1111
Aii
co cn
co co
co co
0
0)
a)
o)
0 0 co
0 0
NE. 1110.
ilr
0
cn 0) 0
O
co
O
CO
0)
(0
CA
co
cn
0
0
co
O
co
O
CA
CO
0)
co co
CO
n)
1.3
0) O
N
O
co
1.3
0
cr,
0)
O CO
cr)
(.1
0
CO
Isa
0
4. co
03
CO
CO
1Z)
m
0
co
0
O
Oa
CD
co
(c)
O
CIO
57.
V) 1-
rT1
A71
V)
m
V) m
f
_1 I
0' A
'75
'
di
.., -0
m
Z
0
-rn
0
0 _x
'6 'Oi
g =
_1
0
,
''-
xi
o
-0
''.--'
, rr1
_,,
,- '-"'
cf)
E3
O
C
,:-.. 7.1
o z
x rn
RI (11
m =i
a)
r)
01
cn
m
(Cl N
CO
ts)
rn
CO
0
CO
coc
CO
CO
ts)
m
BC
D)
>
z r-
N 1.3
ts)
0 0
oa 0
c.)) CL
cc
1.3
0
CO
CO
CO
CO
(o
(0
CD
CO
CO
CO
CT
ID
o3
CO
co
0
co
CO
1.3
0)
CA
(0
rq
C4
0 0
04
4 4 A
m
na
4 4m
na
CA
CA
01
9, P
n)
i,i
cn 01
-1 -1 I
0==
.4
4m
0
is,
0)
0)
0)
CD
of
(J/
cn
0
*
c-)
C)
n)
is,
0
*
0
cy)
co
0
0
,,,,
n)
_.
K>
-.
en
x
CO
0
..4
cn
*
0
-.
03
-.
(I)
*
0
n)
-.
CO
1.3
n) 0) co
co 0 cn
*
*
*
0 0 0 0
na
-.
0
-.
--.
(,)
(f) D Emm
1- m V)
v)ii
-0
-.
-.
00
,,,,
x
m x
m
m m
m m
0
n3
cn vi
= =
04 1\3
6-)
C
0
N3
V
co
0)
opp
-.
na -4
CO
V
OPPP
0 0 iv 1.3
4 5
0
>
0a 9,
03
s:
s:
Thzcnz
...1 Co -. (44 A
r
-. E C
4
E
M .. m
M
m
0 v) G)1 LI) v)
= = = I =
LI)
0
_.
-.
<
A 8
000
m -co co
Z .71
co
0
CD
cr
co
CD
CJ)
n3
cn 0
I-
A (.1*
1:.A' C)
0
co
v
co 0
cn. -'
9 a). c);o
-13
rZZ
Ri M
0 ^
0C
-IN 0 x
Co
).
*
-I
ro
x,
5 = PO Ê
m
05
ox A cn
00
0
OIL
VISCOSITY IN cP
o
xi ,
-0 g
0
CT
O
0
CO
0)
1)
0)
(0
UI
co
o)
0
xi
R'
N
0
oa
1.3
0
1.3
CO
co
CO
(A
Cm)
0)
tA
0)
0)
co
co
UI
co
o)
xi
(f)
(.1)
-o
-o m
Cl)
-0 5;
(/)
> --I
CD
co
o)
n
z
D. 0
0 m
R'
1,3
0
0
CD
01
c,4
co
co
co
co
co
0)
N
0
CI)
CO
co
CO
co
0)
Cr
O
to
co
O
co
0
zO
Z
Z0
7J co
>
cn
co
co
(0
CO
CD
13
(7,
0
cn
(CI
Co co
(41
n)
CO
cn
co
co
JO I
0 to
cA 1.) n)
cn
a> cn
a)
co
(0
co
0)
co
>
m
I
5>
co
1.3
(D
CD
CA
..a
a)
co
01
oo
x)
I
>-
(13
Co
co
0)
(D
CA
co
cA
cn
CO
CD
co
co co
0
(.4
CA
(.4
0
co 0
n.)
Ln 0
co
0 cn
CO
(41
to
co
A
0)
co
A
CA
ha
1.3
co
0)
(0
co
co
1,3
0
X
0 0
0
1.3
0 to
co
co co
0)
CO
CO
CO
co
1.3
0 (.4
co
co
co
ts.) n.)
co
cn
0 co
0
co
co
.1
0
I -1-
NO
(C)
CO
tO
(c)
CA
o)
0)
co
I
m
co
CA
N3
rso
0
0)
CA
n.)
CO
co
co
(.4
A
na
CA
(.4
0
0
0
(0
(0
0 0
4.)
CA
CO
co 1.)
1.3
o)
(,)
CO
co
0)
(.7)
CA
CO
..a
CO
n)
(41
co
0)
(.7)
CA
.1
na
0)
CO
co
cin
co
r.)
(D
(.1
1,3
n3
CA
(A
.4 co
co
C/2
co
0
co
0
0 co
co
(13
0.)
co
0
co
co
CO
_ C/2
I
0
rT1
a)
1 00
-11 0
xi 0
XI 0
0
X0
-41 0
y1
n0
o
al 0
a) 0
n0
73 0
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Ogar
(411UR efraf12 t1513g4411
VENTS AND DRAINS

(ON LINES 1 1/2" AND BELOW)
7-44-0350 Rev. 4
(f> Govt of Incha Undertalong)
Page 1 of 1
TYPE
TYPE
TEE EQUALLI,
REDUCING
o
3/4" u"
VC1
VF1
PLUG
(TYP)o
r,
3/4"
TEE EQUAL REDUCING
DF1
VP1
DC1
DP1
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"

EQUAL TEE
o
3/4"
VC2
DC2
RED
VF2
DF2
EQUAL TEE
3/4"
VP2
lon
DP2
_L_L
ON LINE 1"-1 1/2"
VC3
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"
3/4"(NOTE 2)
VF3
TEE EQUAL
REDUCING
DC3
ON LINE 1"- 1 1/2"
(NOTE 2)
3/4 "4
TEE EQUAL
REDUCIN
DF3
DC7
DP3
VP3
DF7
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"
DP7
ON LINE 3/4""-1 1/2"
DC4
DF4
VC4
DP4
VF4
200
VP4
TEE EQUAL/
REDUCING
ON LINE 1"-1 1/2"
\
in
3/4"
(NOTE 2) X 3/4"
VF5
!(NOTE 2)
VP5
TEE EQUAL
REDUCING
TEE EQUAL/
REDUCINIG
ON LINE 1.
-1 1/2"
(NOTE 2)
DC5
3/4"
DF5
ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"

ON LINE 3/4"-1 1/2"
ON LINE 3/4"- 1 1/2"

VF6
DC8
(NOTE 2) x 3/4"
RED.
VP6
FITTING
TO FITTING
DF8
FITTING
TO FITTING
DP8
EQUAL TEE
DC6
DF6
VENT ON LINE 1"- 1 1/2"

ON LINE 1"- 1 1/2"
01.09.14
29.06.09 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1520 of 1744
v<
Purpose
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RN / AT4k--{
SC
Stds. Committee
Convenor
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
gz;11. fafZs
2s17astg erti.rftotfit
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Govt of Incha Undeltak,og)
STANDARD No.
VENTS AND DRAINS
(ON LINES 2" AND ABOVE)
7-44-0351 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
TYPE
DRAIN
VENT
TYPE
D1
V1
VP 1
DP1
D2
V2
D3
DP3
V3
VP3
D4
V4
D5
V5
NOTES :
MIN.
1. DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE VALID FOR 75mm (MAX) INSULN.
THICKNESS. FOR HIGHER INSULATION THICKNESS INCREASE
(NOTE 2)
DC9
DF9
DP9
DIMENSION AS REQUIRED
2. VALVES TO BE PROVIDED SHALL BE SIMILAR TO LINE ISOLATION
VALVE (LATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC., WITH FLGD, SW OR SCR'D
ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PMS.
BRANCHOFFS LIKE HALF CPLG(SW OR SCR'D)/SOCKOLET/WELDOLET
& END CONNECTIONS LIKE CAP/PLUG/FLANGE & BLIND FLANGE
SHALL BE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS.
3. VENTS/DRAINS CAN BE PROVIDED ON FLAT SIDE OF
ECCENTRIC REDUCER ON SIZES 4" & ABOVE
4. LEGEND V=VENT, D=DRAIN, C=CAP, F= FLANGE, P=PLUG
DC10
3/4" (NOTE 2)
5. PLUGGED END OF VALVE OR FITTING SHALL BE THREADED
DF1 0
DP10
it
150
29.06.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1521 of 1744
d9.9vSH
Purpose
`>RN / ATD
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
Stds. Committee
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
5sZrE faWS
I741M c4c,cni1 rfi13rf
STANDARD No.
WELLS INSTALLATION
1 '1/4" DIA. TAPS
( UP TO CLASS 600 )
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of rndia Undertaking)
7-44-0353 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 2
PIPES & FLANGES

AS PER SPEC.(TYP)
NOTE-2
NOTE-3
NOTE-2
NOTE-3
---
TYPE
TW-6
TYPE
TW-9
b(5
TYPE
TW 7
man
u1,1 1\tu
O
O
NOTE-2
NOTE-2
2tv
k.
,/,,.///,'",
"
NNN,NN ./,/%1
- 2-00 ------------TYPE
TW 8
4"
MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR

REMOVAL
630
6"
630
LINE DIA.
NOTES:
1 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS BY PIPING.
2 BRANCH F1TTING SHALL BE AS PER PMS
3 IF BRANCH FITTING IS A COUPLING,
fT SHALL BE OF SPECIAL LENGTH.
670
10"
670
12"
670
14"
670
16"
670
670
750
TYPE TW-9 : VERTICAL LINE DIA. LESS THAN 4"
VESSELS
750
TYPE TW-10: HORIZONTAL UNE DIA. LESS THAN 4"
21 .10.1 4 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

Date
Format Nn 5-00-0001-F4 Rev
TYPE 1W-7 : VERTICAL LINE 4" DIA. OR LARGER

TYPE TW-8 : HORIZONTAL LINE 4" DIA. OR LARGER
18"
No.
TYPE 1W-6 : ELBOW MIN. 4" DIA. OR LARGER
20" AND LARGER
Rev.
Page 1522 of 1744
8"
TYPE
TW-1 0
Purpose
SH
N /ATD
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
Stds. Committee
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
C:nnvrinht Fll - All rinhts rpservpri
51 -a[ laWs
isrtuR GTO' +ffil 3,4-0,44
STANDARD No .
WELLS INSTALLATION
2" DIA. TAPS
(CLASS 900 & ABOVE)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
( A Govt of India Undertaking)
7-44-0353 Rev 4
Page 2 of 2
200 UPTO 1500
IN CASE ANY DEVIATION IS REQUIRED FOR

INSTALLING T.W. TAPS FROM THIS STANDARD
INST. DEPTT. TO BE CONSULTED.
BY INST.
41,
BY PIPING
PIPES & FLANGES
AS PER SPEC.(TYP)
TYPE
1W-4
TYPE
TW-2
TYPE
TW-3
200
TYPE
TW-5
CLEARANCE
UNE DIA. MINIMUM
FOR REMOVAL
4"
630
NOTES:
1 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS BY PIPING.
6"
630
6"
670
10"
2 BRANCH F1TTING SHALL BE AS PER PMS.
670
14"
670
16"
670
18"
750
VESSELS
750
No
Date
Format Nn R-no-nnnr-r4
Purpose
TYPE TW-1 : ELBOW MIN. 4" 0 OR LARGER

TYPE TW-2 : VERTICAL UNE 4" b OR LARGER
TYPE TW-3 : HORIZONTAL UNE 4" 0 OR LARGER
TYPE TW-4 : VERTICAL LINE DIA. LESS THAN 4"
TYPE 1W-5
HORIZONTAL UNE DIA. LESS THAN"
670
20" & ABV
4
Rev .
Page 1523 of 1744
670
12"
SH
!.
$%
) /RN /ATDKb
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
")\/
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
C.onvrinht Fli - All nnhts rp,.prvr-,(1
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7iF277 Cirm11 en1,5oat.o
PRESSURE TAPPINGS
(PA, PG, PC, PT, PIC ETC)
IA Govt ot locho Unaortak,og)
7-44-0354 Rev. 4
50THKINSU.
50THK INS
Page 1 of 1
INST.
INST.
3/4"
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
RED COUPLING
3/4"
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
o_
PC-2
INST.
ON LINE 1"-11/ "
INST.
INST.
_L
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
WAG
3/4"
PIPING.
(NOTES 2&3)
V3/4'. (NOTES 2&3)

PIP ING.
SWAGE NIPPLE
0
C1
10
PC-4
PC-3
ON LINE 1"-1/2"
95 THK INSU.
ON LINE 1/2" & 3/4"
PC-1
PC-5
ON LINE 1"
1
/2"
ON LINE 3/4''
PC-6
ON LINE 1"
INST.
PIPING.
3/4"
(NOTES 2&3)
PC 10
ii=6
.111
PC -1 1 ON LINE 2" & ABOVE
ON LINE 2" & ABOVE
1
(FOR FLANGED VALVE)
(NOTES 2&3)
NOTE-3
PIPING
FOR
INST.
& ABOVE
PC -15 ON VESSELS / COLUMNS
NOTES :
1. THE INDICATED DIMENSIONS ARE MINIMUM WHICH ALSO COVER INSULATION TO THE EXTENT SHOWN ABOVE.
IN CASE OF HIGHER THICKNESS OF INSULATION THAN INDICATED THE DIFFERENCE SHALL BE ADDED IN THE
DIMENSIONS SHOWN ABOVE.
2. PRESSURE TAPPING SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH VALVE SIMILAR TO LINE ISOLATION VALVE (GATE, BALL OR PLUG VALVE ETC.,
WITH FLGD, S.W. OR SCR'D ENDS) UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN PMS, TEE(EQUAL OR REDUCING)/HALF COUPLING(S.W.
OR SCR'D)/STUB IN/SOCKOLET/WELDOLET SHALL BE AS PER PIPING MATERIAL SPECS. DOUBLE ISOLATION VALVE SHALL BE
USED FOR CLASS 900 & ABOVE.
3. IN CASE OF FLGD VALVES BOLTING & GASKET ON BOTH SIDES OF VALVE SHALL BE IN PIPING SCOPE
4. IN CASE OF TAPPING PROVIDED OTHER THAN INDICATED IN THIS STD FOR LAYOUT REASONS
DETAILED DIMENSIONS WILL BE CALLED OUT.
fri/AK
4 21.10.14 REVISED & ISSUED AS STANDARD

3
29.06.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1524 of 1744
Purpose
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
/ATDW
SC
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
NOTES
1 INPUT CODE-STA1/211.
X50
1S0
T
1yp
r--'
0
ro
hb ,i
1
3/4"
3/4"
- 3/4"
EL
.'''
6
0
. 4 4 4 '
1 Ow
3/4
3/4"
3/4-
pr
(A I N)
3/4:K
MIN)
3/4"
iP
c-i
in
3/4"
45
50
.
I'l)
SYMBOL OF REPRESENTATION
IN)
0
r;
(a) IN ISOMETRIC
1-
BLIND FLANGE
(TYP.)
III
r...,
FyJ
N
r.,
298
~
IP
y0
sT
STA-1-TYPE- III
STA- 1-TYPE-I
,I' IYPE'
DRIP LEG AS PER STD 7-44-0403

1
150
MI
,f)
3/4"
i)
3/4"
,
. , 3/4"
.
3/4"
150
3/4" I
HEADER
DRIP LEG
3/4-
ip
)-.
44
r
11
3/4".
V 4
I
1
, 41
r
2
LINE FROM DRIP LEG TO STEAM TRAP
ASSEMBLY AND FROM STEAM TRAP TO
CONDENSATE RECOVERY (IF IT IS
RECOVERING) TO BE ROUTED AND
DIMENSIONED ON PIPING ARRGT. DWG.
(b) IN ARRANGEMENT DWG.
Pir
,f 1 100
0
3/4:9.
to
150
e~ 3Q 0
3/4;r
. ii
TYPE-111
..1-SR._-1
-...
45
IN
1-.
STA-1 -TYPE-11
SO
STA 1 TYP E IV
-
#8iNzegthIENIGINERS
#fgarfaiRtmar
INDIA LIMITED
oar
asaiimo
PRIOR
Page 1525 of 1744
15.12.15
REAFFIRMED
AND ISSUED AS STANDARD
10.07.10
REAFFIRMED
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
SH
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
1"i- RN
SC
DM
SC
ND
Stds. Committee Stds. Bureau

Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No.
STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY

STA-1 (CLOSED SYSTEM)
7-44-0400 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 4
NOTES:
..--,
1. BRANCH CONNECTIONS EQUAL TEE
pAIN)
2. INPUT CODE STA 3/213
El,
,e....,
3. ALL DIMENSIONS SHALL CONFORM TO THE

PIPING MATERIAL SPEC.
3/'r
r-,
4. TRAP TYPE IS INVERTED BUCKET. BOTTOM

INLET/TOP OUTLET WITH SEPARATE STRAINER
AS PER JOB SPECIFICATION
,>1.1
, .--,
3,4,.-
3/
..)
z-S
,,
RE
2-
ER
.,,
,,,iv.
(a)
IN ISOMETRIC
STA-3TYPE-1
111
STA-3TYPEIII
E .300
.31(PV
1. 0
IN)
EI
Ei-
,...,
,-
3/11.
7L
I
/,4 i
(b)
4N
... 4/4.'
1.-
.
.-
'
HEADER
DRIP LEG
.2-
3/4.
.
. 10le
IN
P'
IN)
IN ARRANGEMENT DRG.
/j
.-
Sop
St
cz
.'
.---
-,
z
DIMENSIONED IN PIPING ARRGT.DWG.
STA-3TYPEIV
30p r
STA-3TYPEI1
;
dr,
#5111areglikErsiaNEERs
efflegNIF INDIA LAVED

digai
men rieneeteraceem
Format
No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
Page 1526
of 1744
4
Rev.
(A Govt. of Indio Undertaking)
No.
15.12.15
10.07.10
Date
REAFFIRMED
REAFFIRMED
AND ISSUED AS STANDARD k4;190-"SH

Purpose
NJAK
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
17/ RN
SC
DM
Stds. Committee
'
C
ND
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY

STA-3 (CLOSED SYSTEM)
7 -44 - 0400 Rev. 5

Page 2 of 4
opyng.
. . .. - ... . . .
NOT S:
2 98
1 STEAM TRAP 3/4" S.W, TD TRAP WITH

INTEGRAL STRAINER
2 INPUT CODE- STA 2/212
3 SCRAP PIPE TO BE PROVIDED FOR OFF SITE
FOR LOCATION WITH NO DITCHES NEARBY
AND AREAS WHICH ARE NOT PAVED FOR
UNITS AND OTHER PAVED AREAS,DRAIN LINES
TO O.W.S. FUNNEL LOCATED NEAREST TO
MANIFOLD (FIELD RUN)
ON)
0 5%
.k
6 00
CI"
296
:a.
1 5
TO
3/4"
...n., '
3/4"
',41,?.."i
if)
3/4",
,r3/4"
,ir_1,
,01,-
.,,,j
5 t-
0
1 5
ApE
0
ri
0 OF
_ ,/ r
50
.10
ir 4111
3/4"
0A0
El-'
Giv
3 /4"
.,AO
3/ 4"
-,-ir
P IP
El"
it*f
sv
0 Or
...*.
505
.
GP
10
4)
1 50
150
15
OF
5SEE6IN
BLIND FLANGE,
(TYP.)
0 A0
, GI -
-.44-
>4;4:rt.,
1-''
..-* .,:
00
401,16
51.
,, OF
AP
ip
411
45.
50
(a) IN ISOMETRIC
1 00
50
III
150
STA-2-TYPE-III
STA-2-TYPE-I
.21'19
1,1
rii
0
ij
3/4"
3/4"
ii..,.
5 04 ER
2 98
. 4'
3/4"
IP
'
5
60 0
0,0
G. -
......;.-
1 50
P
G
0
c-i
tog
(b) IN ARRANGEMENT DRG,
OF
EA
f S
I..
g0
Of*
Q AVEL
,,d
....,..14
1,
sc GI -
0 8
, Or
i,
0 B
rl
P IPE
300
HEADER
DRIP LEG
, OF
29
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
3/4"
,
OP
SGRA~OTE'3
..,
..

RG DWG.
DIMSIONED
IN PIPING ART.
EN
''',./...1&-2
...
STA-2-TYPE-IV
STA-2-TYPE-II
Ofitadath ENGINEERS
INDIA umITED
Oar BR!~
mown
WI ERIMIE
Format
No. 8-00-0001-F5 Rev. 0
Page 1527
of 1744
4
Rev.
No.
1 5.1 2.15
1 0.07.1 0
Date
REAFFIRMED
REAFFIRMED
TYPE-III

Purpose
..41%'H
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RN
SC
DM
9\i'rj
SC
ND

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY
STA-2 (OPEN SYSTEM)
7-44-0400 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 4
NOTES:
2 98
6 QO
(.....,
N#
9-
'I
00
3/4",
'
or'3/"
IN)
r- Or
3/4"
0
PIP
"NO
sv
50
GRPQ
3/ 4"
0'
100
50
3/4"
....--,
H'
OF
.., 411
1,
c-s.-:
I,
4 50
...*,..0..
..1;..;:,
3/4"
150
OF
cvX
VY
io
2 INPUT CODE STA-9/186
1 50
El-'
..:r
3/4"
IN
1 STEAM TRAP 1/2" SW TD TRAP WITH

INTEGRAL STRAINER.
MIN)
298
5e
?-K
GP/' 0
OR
PIP E
hl
BLIND FLANGE /,
(TYP.)
(a) IN ISOMETRIC
150
1
11
STA -9TYPEIII
STA-9TYPEI
5 Au g
150
IN
E~ 250
3/4"
..,
045P
-,
...4%
4,",,.
'
, ...
50
rc G
)
I.'
P IP E
At
VC
, OR
IIf
1.
'1
Go
HEADER
DRIP LEG
50
..:,
. N.:
trr
--..->,.:'
'
vo,
0
5
# OR
ON)
PIP
OF
5C6
5Q
(b) IN ARRANGEMENT DWG
ri
I/
OF
. 'F'3/4"
GP
3/4"
3/4"
NI
3/4"
OP
3/4"
3/4"
O (M IN)
,G
5 EE
3Q0
J
H
''.-.
DIMENSIONED IN PIPING ARRGT.DWG.
lJ
t /
..---isl*A-9 TYPEIII
,_
STA-9TYPEIV
STA-9TYPEII
laigiZETM---ENGINERS
Ogar kilffltular MIA UMIlED

wag MOW
=WO
Page 1528 of 1744
5.1 2. 1 5
15.12.15
REAFFIRMED
Pt)>"SH
AK
( 1% RN
10.07.10
REAFFIRMED
PK
RN
SC
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
DM
Stds. Committee
.1SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY

STA-9 (OPEN SYSTEM)
7-44-0400 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 4
STANDARD No.
k5-1WIt4
$}2-arfa[A5
(MCRe-wmWas,Jwc.f)
DRIP LEG FOR

STEAM LINES
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(AGovt o1 Intlia lindertak,n9)
7-44-0403 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
fl
DIA
eld
NOM DRIP LEG DIA
0...4NOTE- 1
NOTE 1
NOTE-1
3/ 4"

TO STEAM TRAP
(NOTE-2)
MIN.100
(NOTE-4
NOM DRIP LEG DIA
3/4
3/
0
u-
-s
TO STEAM TRAP
(NOTE-2)
MIN.100
(NOTE-4
MIN.100
(NOTE-4
4gS49;
LINE SIZE 3/4" TO 6"

(NOTE 3)
LINE SIZE 3/4" 1 1 /2"

DRIP LEG IN MAIN RUNS/RISERS
LINE SIZE 2" AND ABOVE

DRIP LEG AT MAIN RUNS/RISERS
NOM LINE
DIA D
INCH
NOM DRIP
LEG DIA
d INCH
A
MM
3/4"
3/4"
125
100
1"
1"
125
100
1 1/2"
1 1/2"
125
125
2"
2"
75
150
3"
3"
75
150
4"
4"
75
175
6"
4"
75
175
8"
4"
75
175
10"
6"
75
175
12"
6"
75
175
14"
8"
75
175
16"
8"
75
175
18"
10"
75
175
20"
10"
75
175
12"
75
175
24" & ABOVE
TO STEAM TRAP
(NOTE-2)
Al
MM
B
MM
NOTES :
1 . VALVE IS NOT REQUIRED IF STEAM TRAP ASSEMBLY IS INSTALLED WITHIN 3.OM OF DRIP LEG.
2. ALL PIPES, VALVES, FLANGES, FITTINGS, BRANCHOFFS ETC. SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
PROJECT PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS.
3. THIS ARRANGEMENT MAY BE USED ONLY IN CASE OF SPACE CONSTRAINT. SUPPORTING ARRANGEMENT
SHALL BE REVIEWED IN DETAIL TO ENSURE THAT THERE IS NO FOULING BETWEEN SUPPORT PEDESTAL
AND BLIND FLANGE ASSEMBLY.
4. BOTTOM OF PIPE ELEVATION SHALL BE MINIMUM 600MM FROM GRADE. IN CASE OF RATINGS BEYOND
CLASS 600 AND SIZES BEYOND 8", BOTTOM OF PIPE SHALL BE FIXED TO ENSURE MINIMUM 1 OOMM
CLEARANCE FROM GRADE.
4
3
30.07.1 4
1 5.1 1 .08 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1529 of 1744
Purpose
t,,
SH
AC
AK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ATD
...."" RN
DM
Nc)
SC
VC
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
5g-211 926
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undertakng)
STANDARD No.
BUTT WELDING
END PREPARATION
7-44-0477 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
0.8-2.4mm
END PREPARATION FOR MITRE BEND
37 1/2421/2'
=22mm MAX.
20-+21/2'
1.6+0.8mm
(A) WALL THICKNESS 5-22mm INCLUSIVE

(AS PER ASME B31.3)
1
1 0' 2 /2'
OVER22mm
1
20'2/2'
1-1.61-0.8mm
(B) WALL THICKNESS OVER 22mm
(AS PER ASME B31.3)
NOTES :
1. SQUARE ENDS MAY BE USED FOR WALL THICKNESS LESS THAN 5mm
.+5'
2. PIPE ENDS SUPPLIED WITH BEVEL ANGLE OF 30 _cy NEED NOT BE BEVELED FURTHER.
23.09.14
29.06.09
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1530 of 1744
Purpose
AK
RN
PK
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RN /AT
SC
ND
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t~f exow zolJoor44)
FILLET WELD DETAILS
7-44-0478 Rev. 4
IA Govt of Incha UndertakIngt
Page 1 of 1
FrAa
ElE1
X MIN.
X MIN.
X MIN.
1.6mm APPROX.
t OR 6.4mm WHICHEVER
IS SMALLER
SLIP ON FLANGE
SOCKET WELDED FLANGE
X MIN. = 1.4t OR THE THICKNESS OF HUB, WHICHEVER IS SMALLER.

t
= PRESSURE DESIGN THICKNESS.(NOT CONSIDERING CORROSION ALLOWANCE AND MANUFACTURING

TOLERANCE.)
t=PRESSURE DESIGN THICKNESS
1.6mmAPPROX.
SOCKET WELDING FITTINGS

Cx (MIN)=1.25t BUT NOT LESS THAN 3.2mm
FILLET WELD DETAILS

(AS PER ASME B31.3)
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1531 of 1744
Purpose
\*
,(1 SH
IC7
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
V-^N /ATD)
SC
SC
.-
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
MreM elecnreill5101?1,N)
STANDARD No.
WELDING DETAIL FOR

BRANCH CONNECTIONS
(NOT BREAKING INTO)
ENGINEERS
faigleg W INDIA LIMITED
7-44-0479 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RECOMMENDED MIN 45' RECOMMENDED MIN 45'
45'
0.8-2.4mm
V '$ A's
tc(min)
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
tc: MINIMUM OF 0.7T & 6.4mm
SECTION X AT CROTCH OF
RIGHT ANGLE BRANCH
SECTION Y AT FLANK
0.5T
min
tc(min)
45'
min.
VENT HOLE 10mm0
1.6 to 3.2mm
tc: MINIMUM OF 0.7T dc 6.4mm
DETAIL FOR REINFORCED BRANCH
0.8-2.4mm
0.8-2.4mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6-3.2mm
45'MIN
SECTION Q AT BACK OF
SLOPING BRANCH
SECTION W AT FLANK OF
EQUAL BRANCH
SECTION Z AT CROTCH OF
SLOPING BRANCH
NOTES :1.
THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN BRANCH IS EQUAL TO OR ONE SIZE SMALLER THAN MAIN PIPE.
2.
REFER STANDARD 7-44-0484 FOR DIMENSIONAL DETAILS.
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1532 of 1744
Purpose
SH
PK
RN
SC
Prepared
Checked
by
by
'SC
DM
ND

Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All rights resery
fafaitg
ramie anJvms+1
STANDARD No.
BUTT WELD DETAILS

( DIMENSIONS)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
to Govt of India Undertaking)
7-44-0480 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
371/2*-1-21/2'
OR
0.8-1.6 mm
1.6 mm
1.6 mm
0.8-2.4 mm
X MAX
1.6-3.2 mm
4.8 mm < t < 19.1 mm

X MAX = 1.5 mm FOR PIPES 2" AND BELOW
3.0 mm FOR PIPES ABOVE 2"
t)p UK
511,,r--/SH
AC
RN
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1533 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ATD14\.n
RN
DM
DM
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
faijiles
(.,rr rrrmir
C57.5,
10.1)
STANDARD No.
ENGINEER.S
INDIA LIMITED
( A Govt of India Undertaking)
BUTT WELD DETAILS

( SEQUENCE OF WELDS)
7-44-0481 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
1.6 mm
0.8-1.6 mm
1.6+0.8 mm
FAPPROX. 1.6 3.2 mm
STANDARD 'V' BEVEL

BUTT JOINT
APPROX.3mm
SEQUENCE OF WELDS
4.8 mm < t < 19.1 mm
> 'CJK
15.1 1.08 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
AC
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1534 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
RN
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
I ~f 27221517 C151.1,44.1)
STANDARD No.
WELDING DETAIL FOR

BRANCH CONNECTIONS
(STUB IN)
ENGINEERS
1Ufa2a5 INDIA LIMITED
k.31
IA Govl of India UndertakIng)
7-44-0482 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RECOMMENDED MIN 45' RECOMMENDED MIN 45'
NOTES :
1. THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN
BRANCH IS MORE THAN ONE SIZE
SMALLER OF MAIN PIPE.
tc(min)
2. FOR LINES COMING UNDER THE

PURVIEW OF IBR RECOMMENDED
MIN. ANGLE SHALL BE 60').
1.6 TO 3.2 mm
SECTION X AT CROTCH OF RIGHT

ANGLE BRANCH
SECTION Y AT FLANK
tc=MIN OF 0.7t & 6.4mm

0.5T (min)
VENT HOLE lOmmg>
tc(min)
tc(min.)
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
1.6 to 3.2mm
SECTION Z AT CROTCH OF
SLOPING BRANCH
SECTION Q AT BACK OF
SLOPING BRANCH
31.12.13
*ryUK
15.11.08
AC
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1535 of 1744
Purpose
RN
yN"4
,7 H
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
DM
SC
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
MM.! riemie
OW1170
STANDARD No.
BRANCH CONNECTION
ENGNEERS
ligar051-eg INDIA LIMITED
e..1
7-44-0483 Rev. 4
(BREAKING INTO)
Page 1 of 1
A=2d
10 0 TAPPED HOLE
FOR TESTING
MAIN PIPE
2 VENT HOLES 0 3mm

(PLUG BY WELD AFTER WELDING OF PAD)
SYMBOL ON GADS
REINFORCEMENT PAD
SYMBOL ON ISOMETRICS
REINF.PAD
REINF. PAD
0 X THK.
0 X THK.\
PLAN (SINGLE LINE)
PLAN (DOUBLE LINE)
NOTES :1. THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN BRANCH IS MORE THAN ONE SIZE SMALLER THAN MAIN
PIPE
2. THE REINFORCING PLATE SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM PIPE SPOOL OF THE SAME SCHEDULE
AND DIAMETER OF MAIN PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED
3. THE REINFORCEMENT PAD CALCULATIONS SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME 831.3
OR IBR AS APPLICABLE
4. ALSO SEE STANDARD 7-44-0484
5. REFER STANDARD 7-44-0482 FOR WELDING DETAILS.
4
01.07.15
j SH
10.07.10
PK
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1536 of 1744
Purpose
,.- RN
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
SC
SC
DM
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - At rights reserved
ENGINEERS
k31ifoJ i
fai5teg INDIA LIMITED
14Ireef riecole C1513WR)
STANDARD No.
BRANCH CONNECTION
(NOT BREAKING INTO)
7-44-0484 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
10 0 TAPPED HOLE
FOR TESTING
2 VENT HOLES 0 3mm PLUG BY

WELD AFTER WELDING OF PAD
REINF. PAD
0 x THK.
SYMBOL ON ISOMETRICS
NOTES :
1. THIS TYPE IS TO BE USED WHEN BRANCH IS EQUAL TO OR ONE SIZE SMALLER THAN MAIN PIPE
2. THE REINFORCEMENT PAD SHALL BE OBTAINED FROM PIPE SPOOL OF THE SAME SCHEDULE AND
DIAMETER AS MAIN PIPE UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED.
3. THE REINFORCEMENT PAD CALCULATION SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASME 831.3 OR
IBR AS APPLICABLE.
4. ALSO SEE STANDARD 7-44-0483
5. REFER STANDARD 7-44-0479 FOR WELDING DETAILS.
4 01.07.15 REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
SH
fv,AK
,/ RN
PK
RN
SC
Rev.
No.
SC
DM
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Prepared
Checked
Date Purpose Convenor Chairman
by
by
Approved by
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0 Copyright EIL - All rights reserved
Page 1537 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
01
$'1g-a(44WR
r 02eg
23~1d50tn.)
STANDARD No.
TOLERANCES FOR
7-44-0486 Rev. 4
FABRICATION
Page 1 of 1
SECTION
t3mm. MAX: FROM INDICATED DIMENSIONS FOR FACE TO FACE

CENTER TO FACE LOCATION OF ATTACHMENTS ETC. TOLERANCE
CAN NOT BE ADDED.
1.5mm MAX. LATERAL TRANSLAT1ON IN ANY DIRECTION FROM

THE INDICATED POSITION.
+1.5mm MAX. ROTATION FROM THE INDICATED POSITION MEASURED

AS SHOWN.
CO
1mm MAX. OUT OF ALIGNMENT FROM THE INDICATED POSITION

MEASURED ACROSS ANY DIAMETER AS SHOWN.
FLATI-ENING, MEASURED AS DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE MAX.

AND MIN. OD AT ANY CROSS SECTION.
3% MAX: FOR PIPE WITH EXTERNAL PRESSURE.
8% MAX: FOR PIPE WITH INTERNAL PRESSURE.
(_)
31.12.13
15.11.08
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1538 of 1744
Purpose
UK
W
AC
SH
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
Ayl
DM
/R N
t-""
SC
VC
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
$1g-ar fa(Zs
STANDARD No.
METHOD OF CUTTING AND

DIMENSIONS OF FIELD
MANUFACTURED ECC. REDUCERS
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-44-0487 Rev. 5
Page 1 of
E
11
6
10
5
4
9
3
2
8r-
1
7
0.866E
3xA
SIDE VIEW
END VIEW
....................................
....................................
....................................
COMPLETED REDUCER
A = 1/8 OF SMALL PIPE CIRCUMFERENCE.

B = 3/12 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CIRCUMFERENCES.
C = 2/12 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CIRCUMFERENCES.
D = 1/12 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CIRCUMFERENCES.
E = 1.5 x 0.D. OF LARGER PIPE.
NOTES
1. REDUCER SHALL BE FABRICATED OUT OF LINE PIPE.
2. ALL WELDS SHALL BE RADIOGRAPHED AS PER THE
PIPING CLASS NDT REQUIREMENTS.
3. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN D1 & D2 SHALL NOT BE
MORE THAN 20" NOMINAL BORE.
23.09.14
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1539 of 1744
Purpose
MSH
AK
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
krARN /ATD X-N,PC)
SC
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EIL - AII rights reserved
INSTALLATION STANDARDS
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO.
A702-029-81-41-IS-4020-Rev.0
Page 1 of 3
(STRUCTURAL)
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
PROJECT

PROJECT
OWNER
PMC
JOB NO.
A702
Bidders signature
and stamp
02.02.2016
ISSUED FOR BIDS
AKS
AM
DCB
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Approved
by
Page 1540 of 1744
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-IS-4020-Rev.0
Page 2 of 3
LIST OF STRUCTURAL INSTALLATION STANDARDS:
PART-A (STRUCTURAL):
S.NO
TITLE
STANDARD NO.
REV NO.
NO. OF SHTS
1.
M.S. anchor bolt assemblies
7-68-0417
2.
Handrail
7-68-0501
3.
Steel stair
7-68-0506
4.
Details of steel ladder
7-68-0507
5.
Circular Platform for Hot Vessels
7-68-0552
6.
Details of Bracket of Circular

Platform (Hot Vessels)
7-68-0553
Platform Support Clips for Hot

Vessels
7-68-0557
8.
Electroforged grating type-I & type-II
7-68-0697
STANDARD NO.
REV NO
NO OF
SHEETS
PART-B (UG GENERAL GIVIL):
S.NO
TITLE
Cable crossings under road (PVC

pipes)
7-65-0006
Pipe culvert for storm water drainage
7-65-0103
Valve pit (RCC) Type-V for 2 to6
7-65-0207
Unit drainage details (rectangular

ditch details).
7-65-0272
Details of barbed wire fencing (with

angle iron post).
7-65-0403
RCC pavement details.
7-65-0404
Standard No.
Revision
No. of
Sheets
PART-C (ARCHITECTURAL):
Title
Sl.
No.
01
Details of skirting (with bk. Work)
7-75-0002
01
02
Details of skirting (with RCC col.)
7-75-0003
01
03
Details of dado
7-75-0004
01
Page 1541 of 1744
STRUCTURAL
VPSA OXYGEN PLANT
DOCUMENT NO:
A702-029-81-41-IS-4020-Rev.0
Page 3 of 3
Title
Sl.
No.
Standard No.
Revision
No. of
Sheets
04
Glazed Aluminium Door
7-75-0014
01
05
Glazed aluminium window
7-75-0015
01
7-75-0027
01
7-75-0028
01
06
07
Steel Windows/ Ventilators general

specifications
Steel Windows/ Ventilators use of
sections
08
Steel Windows section details
7-75-0029
01
09
Steel Windows/ Ventilator (with

louvers)
7-75-0031
01
10
Steel Windows fittings and fixtures
7-75-0032
01
7-75-0036
01
7-75-0041
01
7-75-0043
02
11
12
13
Pipe hand rail with square upright

type
False ceiling details with aluminium
grid
Aluminium panel false ceiling (Tray
Type)
14
False flooring
7-75-0049
03
15
Steel Gate (for entrance upto 6.0m

width)
7-75-0054
04
16
Orissa pan w.c. fixing detail
7-75-0060
01
17
European type w.c. fixing detail
7-75-0062
01
18
Urinal fixing detail
7-75-0063
01
19
Wash basin fixing detail
7-75-0064
01
20
Plinth Protection (with building drain)
7-75-0065
02
21
Wooden Panel Door (Toilet Door)
7-75-0066
01
22
Roof drainage & water proofing
7-75-0068
03
23
Pressed steel door (single shutter)
7-75-0070
01
24
Pressed steel door (double shutter)
7-75-0071
01
25
Metal Flashing Detail
7-75-0091
02
26
Stainless Steel Tubular Handrail
7-75-0093
04
Page 1542 of 1744
Page 1543 of 1744
Og-ar faWs
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Incha Undertak.g)
STANDARD No.
PIPE HANDRAIL
7-75-0036 Rev. 5
WITH SQUARE UP RIGHT TYPE

Page 1 of 1
40x5mm MS
FLAT NOSING
TREAD FINISH
25x6mm, 250mm LONG MS
LUG WELDED TO NOSING FLAT
0 MIN. 500mm & EMBEDDED
IN RCC STEP
CEMENT MORTAR
32 0 N.B. (MEDIUM)
MS PIPE
WELDED
TO BALUSTERS
12mm THICK CEMENT

PLASTER
25x25mm MS SQUARE
BAR BALUSTERS OVER
EACH STEP
SECTION A-A
(FOR CAST INSITU CONCRETE TREAD)
NOSING
CEMENT MORTAR
KOTA/GRANITE/MARBLE
STONE
FINISH
TREAD FINISH
CEMENT MORTAR
50x50x100mm POCKET
FOR FIXING MS FLAT
SHOE FILLED WITH
CEMENT CONCRETE (1:3:6)
10MM
MINIMUM
40x40x6mm THK. MS
FLAT SHOE WELDED AT
BOTTOM OF BALUSTER &
INSERTED IN RCC STEP
SECTION A-A
12mm THICK
CEMENT PLASTER
(FOR STONE FINISHED TREAD)
DETAIL OF HANDRAIL
NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.

2. RISER, TREAD AND SKIRTING SHALL BE OF SAME ,ifINISH
5
4
Rev.
No.
07.03.14
09.03.09
Date
Purpose
;SD
AG
Prepared
by
SD/JKB
Checked
by
JKB
S.CHATURVEDI S. CHANDA
N.DUARI
VINAY KUMAR
Stds. Committee GM(CIVIL) Stds. Bureau

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by

Page 1544 of 1744
k92.4e-r
$1g-ar
(IfT7R rfecon' 057 J,10.1)
STANDARD No.
VALVE PIT (RCC)

TYPE-V
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-65-0207 Rev. 3
FOR 02" TO 06" VALVE
1,4 Govt of India Undertalungt
Page 1 of 1
NOTE:
2 Nos. UFTING
HOOKS
CHEQUERED PLATE
1300
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MIUMETERS UNLESS

NOTED OTHERWISE.
2. REFER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES OF THE
PROJECT FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE
STRUCTURES FOR FOLLOWING:
a) GRADE OF CONCRETE
b) GRADE AND TYPE OF CEMENT
c) REINFORCEMENT STEEL BARS
d) CLEAR COVER IN R.C.C. WORKS
3. THIS STD. IS APPUCABLE FOR UNIT AREA,
OFFSITE AREA AND AREA WHERE GROUND
WATER TABLE IS UPTO FGL
DETAIL - 1
CHEQUERED PLATE DETAIL
010 UFTING HOOK

CHEQUERED PLATE
FINISHED PAVEMENT LEVEL
CHEQUERED PLATE (6mm THICK)

(REMOVABLE)
REF. GENERAL CIVIL AREA DWG.
OUTERDIAOF
PIPE+100(SQUAR
I,
;%:`
=
=
12000200 C/C1
50150 /15)100
150 50 1
1000 200 C/C
50X8
DETAIL - 2
BAR BENDING SCHEDULE:
1000 200 C/C

BAR MARK
CENTRALLY PLACED
10rtf 0 200 C/C
CENTRALLY PLACED
BOP. REF. LEVEL

REF. GENERAL CIVIL AREA DWG.
GROIMNG IN 1:2 FREE

FLOW CEMENT MORTAR TO BE
APPUED WITH SHUTTERING ON
(TYP)
BOTH
FACES
PCC 1:5:10
DIA
BAR SHAPE
K1 cz= I (;
10 V S -- L
"..
145A
10 /
ELT35.0_11
10
0I
C1
11
(3)1 15001
I-153Q 1
10 IIf t [3C11
SECTION - A A
l
1.1
-7J
STAGGERED RUNGS
REFER STD.
No. 7-65-0211
b
Ld
r -- 2
..
1r)
ir
1 I lov
.'
CARBON STEEL PIPE

ORIENTATION SHALL BE
AS PER LAYOUT DWG.
A
REF. UNE
REPRESENTATION
ON AREA DRG.
.... --
150
1200
150
1500
PLAN
V-1,4
3
05.06.14 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STD.
19.05.09 UPDATED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Page 1545 of 1744
Purpose
>Y3\
JKU
RKS
SSM
DDB/RKS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
NK
ND
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
at
i.WOrl, co,ortfooJosnf-O
(A Govl of lndia Undettaloog)
FOR STEEL/ ALUMINIUM
DOORS, WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
1-1
6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 9
cp 4-111-1
1-1
FOR STEEL/ALUMINIUM DOORS,
WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
03.03.14
03.03.11
21.03.07
11.03.99
16.03.94

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
REAFIRMED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
AG SSD
JK
GJK SD
JKB
S.CHATURVEDI
S.CHANDA
VK
D.
MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
V.
CHATURVEDI
Standards
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked Com m ittee

Convenor
by
by
GM (Civil)
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1546 of 1744
Page 1547 of 1744
dg
fg`-ar Ofai
t~r elvervvc,rvIsr.lt
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of Indie Undertakingt

STEEL/ ALUMINIUM DOORS,
6-75-0004 Rev. 6
WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
IS

British Standards
Indian Standards
Architectural Standards Committee

Convenor:
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members:
Mr. Samir Das

Ms. Jyotsna Shridhar
Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
Mr. V.S.Chhaya (Projects)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Ind Undertatongt

6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR/WINDOW FRAME
3.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR SHUTTER
4.0 STEEL WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
5.0 ALUMINIUM GLAZED DOORS/WINDOW/VENTILATORS
6.0 MEASUREMENT & RATE
Page 1548 of 1744
4
5
5
6
8
9
ENGINEERS
w INDIA
LIMITED
g-ar ;lfaies l
051 Jqtn.)
Ift Govt ol India Undertakingt

STEEU ALUMINIUM DOORS,
6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction the provisions of the
specification shall override.
IS 617 :
Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots & castings

for general engineering purposes.
IS 733 :
Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars,rods

& sections for general engineering purposes.
IS 737 :
Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet &

strip for general engineering purposes.
IS 1038:
Specifications for steel doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 1081:
Code of practice for fixing and glazing of metal (steel and aluminium)
doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 1285:
Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy extruded

round tube & hollow sections for general engineering purposes.
IS 1361 :
Specifications for steel windows for Industrial buildings.
IS 1948 :
Specifications for Aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 2553 part-1:
Safety glass specification

Part-1: General purposes
IS 2835 :
Flat transparent sheet glass.
IS 3548:
Code of practice for glazing in buildings
IS 3614 Part-1:
Specification for fire check doors.

Part-1: Plate metal cover and rolling type
IS 3614 Part-2:
Specification for fire check doors.

Part-2: Resistance test & performance criteria
IS 4351 :
Specifications for steel door frames.
IS 5437 :
Figured rolled and wired glass.
IS 6248 :
Specifications for metal rolling shutters and rolling grill.
IS 7452 :
Specification for hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and
ventilators.
Page 1549 of 1744
Page 1550 of 1744
51g-a- 22-eg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol Undenak,n9)

6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 5 of 9
2.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR/WINDOW FRAME

(Reference Standard No.7-75-0070, 7-75-0071)
Pressed steel door/window frame shall conform to IS: 4351.
The frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile. The frame shall be
made of 16 SWG galvanized pressed steel profiled as required and filled with concrete. The
frame shall be provided with 3 mm thick MS flat spacer welded to frame at @ 500mm c/c and
at holdfast location. Joints between horizontal and vertical frame members shall be mitred. A11
welding shall be finished smooth.
The frame shall be fixed to the masonry by means of 200 mm x 25 mm x 6 mm MS hold fast
welded to the spacers and grouted with M-20 grade concrete in minimum 250 mm x 100 mm
x 100 mm sized hole in the masonry.
In case of concrete, the frames shall be fixed by minimum 100 mm long, 12 mm dia metallic
counter sunk type anchor fasteners through the frame and spacers.
Vertical frame member shall be tied together below floor finish by mean of
20mmx20mmx3mm MS Angle welded to both faces of frame.
40mmx150mmx3mm thick MS pad shall be welded to frame at all hinges and lock locations.
18 SWG GI mortar guard shall be provided at the back of hinges and lock.
The frame surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. and then
finished with painting or powder coating as specified. The thickness of powder coating shall
be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as directed by Engineer- in- Charge with
appropriate measuring instruments supplied by contractor.
3.0 PRESSED STEEL DOOR SHUTTER

(Reference Standard No. 7-75-0070, 7-75-0071)
Pressed steel shutters shall be hollow type with 18 SWG Galvanized pressed steel sheet
welded at meeting of the sheets with pad plate of MS flat 3 mm thick all along perimeter. The
cavity shall be packed with Mineral Wool (48 kg/cum) to fully fit into the cavity without
gaps.
The shutter shall be formed by machine bending of steel sheet in form of hollow box making
an overall thickness of 40mm forming truly square edge in accordance with the shutter profile.
It shall further be braced with 18 SWG GI vertical stiffeners @200 c/c (Spacing to be adjusted
for vision panel and fixed with flush riveting)
3mm thick MS pad plates shall be welded inside at required locations for fixing of hardwares
such as tower bolt, aldrop etc.
2 mm thick 25x25 GI angles (vertical) welded to each shutter shall be provided at the meeting
point of double shutter doors
The frame surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. and then
finished with painting or powder coating as specified. The thickness of powder coating shall
be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as directed by Engineer- in- Charge with
appropriate measuring instruments supplied by contractor.
Page 1551 of 1744
k31
lMes
c,mr,M13,
1"CrA)
ENGINEERS
w INDIA LIMITED
(A Go. 01 Indo Unde(laktng)

6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 9
The shutters shall be fixed to the door frame by means of 100 mm long heavy duty ball
bearing hinges @ 600mm maximum. Vision panel shall be provided in the shutters in
accordance with project drawings.
Following Hardware shall be provided:

a. Over head hydraulic door closer (heavy duty) for each shutter
b. MS holdfast 200mmx25mmx6mm thick @maximum 600 mm c/c
c. 100 mm long SS 304 grade heavy duty ball bearing hinge @600mm C/C maximum for
each shutter
d. SS 304 grade 16mm dia 250mm long aldrop on both sides.
e. Spring loaded heavy duty door stopper for each shutter
f. SS 304 grade 19 mm dia, long handle on both sides of each shutter
g. 10 mm dia SS 304 Tower bolt (250mm long for 2100mm height & 600mm long for
2500mm height) for each shutter
In case of air tight door shutters, approved quality continuous 'D' Profile EPDM Gasket shall
be provided along frame rebate.
In case of partly glazed door shutter, Glass as specified shall be fixed with glazing clips and
solid drawn 10 mm x 10 mm, MS beading backed with putty and fixed by countersunk screws.
Necessary rebate for fixing the glass shall be provided by arranging the shutter bracing
accordingly.
The overall shutter shall ensure smooth operation, proper sizing and shaping as per drgs.
The shutters shall be provided with locking device, handle and other hardwares as specified.
4.0 STEEL WINDOWS & VENTILATORS

Steel windows, ventilators shall in general conform to IS: 1081, IS: 1038 and IS: 7452.
4.1
Materials
4.1.1 Rolled Steel Section

Rolled steel sections for the fabrication of steel windows, ventilators shall conform to IS:
7452.
4.1.2 Glass panels
Glass panels for glazing purpose shall be as specified. All glass panes shall have properly
squared corners and straight edges. Glass panes shall be as specified.
4.2 Workmanship
The profile and type of windows, ventilators (glazed, partly glazed/1 ouvered, nide hung/top
hung/fixed shutter, composite) shall be as per drawings.
The frames shall be constructed of sections cut to size and mitred. Corners shall be welded to
form a fused welded joint. Process of welding shall be flash butt welding. The welded joints
shall be grinded to square and flat edges.
Page 1552 of 1744
OW-g
cfn .340.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt ol lndo Undertak,ng)

6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 9
Where larger units are to be formed by coupling individual units, the mullions, transoms shall
be bedded in mastic to ensure weather tightness. Mastic shall be applied liberally to the
channels of the outside frame sections before assembly, and the two units being coupled shall
be drawn together tight with clamps, the mastic being squeezed out and cut off neatly when
the units shall be screwed together tight.
Where fixed glazing units are placed over openable units a push fit weather bar shall be
provided.
Before glazing, all opening parts shall be checked for their operational smoothness. The frame
shall be completely cleaned and bedding putty shall be placed in the rebate before glazing.
Glass then shall be cushioned into the bedding and shall be fronted with front putty in a
manner so as to enable the painting to be done up to the sight line. The back putty oozing out
over the glazing rebate shall be cut offsquare and smoothed down.
For panels exceeding 600 x 300 mm in size, glass shall be secured by special glazing clips
inserted in holes already provided in the steel sections, before applying the front putty.
For glazing of very large areas, rust proof steel beading with mitred corners shall be provided
with screws @ 10 cm. from each corner and @ 20 cm. apart from each other. Putty shall be
provided to the face of the bead in contact with glass, in addition to back putty.
Side hung shutters shall be connected to the frame by means of friction hinges. The handle for
side hung shutters shall be of pressed brass mounted on a steel handle plate welded to the
opening shutter frame and shall not be removable easily after glazing. The handle shall have a
two point nose which shall engage with a brass striking plate on the fixed frame in a slightly
open as well as in a fixed position.
Top hung shutters shall be provided with steel butt hinges welded to the fixed frame after
cutting a slot in it. Top hung casements shall be provided with peg stay of 3 holes of pressed
brass; 300 mm long which when closed shall be held tightly by the locking bracket fitted to
the fixed frame or to the window.
Before fixing the frames, the size of the opening shall first be checked and cleaned of all
obstructions. The positions of the unit in the reveal shall be taken off the drawings and shall be
marked on the reveal at the jambs using a plumb line.
In case of fixing with masonry, holes for fixing the lugs/hold fasts shall be cut at required
locations.
In case of concrete or stone, the frames shall be fixed by means of dash fasteners.
In case of masonry, the lugs shall be grouted in the holes with cement concrete, M-15 Grade
when fixing to steel work, mastic shall be applied to the Bill of the opening and the unit shall
be placed on it with the jambs and head buttered with mastic and the unit shall be fixed with
special fixing dips or with nuts and bolts.
The windows/ventilators shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
All the steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil etc. by sand
and shot blasting and then finished with painting by priming with red oxide zinc chromate
primer conforming to IS:2074 and painting conforming to IS:1477 (Part II) or by hot dipped
galvanizing conforming to IS:1477 Part (I). Putty shall also be provided with painting in a
manner so as to seal the putty glass junction. Surfaces not meant for painting shall be cleaned
of any strains of paint.
Page 1553 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
t-71
fgÙf&Wg
1~1 ,,,Pr14,1~1,
IA Go. ol India Undertaking)

6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 9
5.0 ALUMINIUM GLAZED DOORS/WINDOW/VENTILATORS

(Reference Standard No. 7-75-0014, 7-75-0015, 7-75-0016, 7-75-0017)
5.1
General
Aluminium glazed doors/window/ventilators shall be of specified sectional size, dimension
and profile as per drawing. Aluminium glazed doors shall be single shutter or double shutters
or with composite profiles (partly openable shutters, partly fixed glazed portion) as per
drawings.
Aluminium glazed windows shall be side hung/top hung/centre hung/sliding or with
composite profiles (partly openable partly fixed) as per the drawings.
5.2
Materials
All Aluminium sections shall be extruded sections of approved Manufacturers having
aluminium alloy as par IS: 733 and IS: 1285. Aluminium sections shall be anodised as per IS:
7088 or electrostatically powder coated to min. 25 microns as specified. The thickness of
anodizing/ powder coating shall be subjected to verification at site (on random basis) as
directed by Engineer- in- Charge with appropriate measuring instruments supplied by
contractor.
Glass used for glazing shall be of following types or as specified.
A.
5.5 mm thick wired glass conforming to IS: 5437.
B.
6.3 mm thick laminated safety glass conforming to IS: 2553.
C.
5.5 mm thick transparent Sheet glass conforming to IS: 2835 (wt.7.2 kg/Esq.)
5.3 Workmanship
Frames shall be square and flat, the corner of the frame being fabricated to true right angles.
Details of construction of frames, shutters etc. shall be as per drawings.
Side hung window shutters shall be fixed to the frame with pivots, or aluminium alloy friction
hinges. For fixing the hinges, slots shall be cut in the fixed frames and the hinges inserted
inside may be riveted to the frame. The handles for side hung shutters shall be of cast
aluminium conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS: 617 and shall be mounted on a handle
plate riveted to the opening frames. The handles shall have same finish as that of the window
sections. The handles shall have a two point nose which shall engage with an aluminium
striking plate on the fixed frame. The striking plate shall be finished in the same manner as for
the handle.
In case of top hung shutters aluminium alloy cast hinges and peg stays shall be provided.
Centre hung shutters shall be hung on the two pairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy of IS
designation NS-4 of IS 737 and IS designation A-5-M of IS:617 or chromium/cadmium plated
brass/bronze cup pivots riveted to the outer and inner frames to permit to swing through an
angle of 85E . Cast aluminium (conforming to IS designation A-5-M of IS: 617) or
chromiumkadmium plated bronze spring catches shall be fixed in the centre of the top bar of
the shutter. The spring catch shall be secured to the frame by screwing/riveting to the frame
and shall close into aluminium catch plate riveted/welded to the outside of the outer shutter
frame bar. Aluminium or cadmium plated brass chord pulley wheel in an aluminium bracket
Page 1554 of 1744
,
51
1
fg-ar
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
rtrax,m,~)
IA Go, of Indka UndeetakIng)

6-75-0004 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 9
shall be fitted at the sill of the shutter with Aluminium or galvanized/cadmium plated steel
screws.
Sliding windows shall be mounted on suitable two track or three track (as required) peripheral
frame of aluminium alloy.
The door shutters shall be fitted with pivots as specified.
The handles for doors shall be of Aluminium and as per design. The door shutters shall be
provided with locking device, floor spring, door closer and any other hardware as specified.
In case of composite Door/window/ventilator units, the units shall be coupled as per drawing.
Weather bar shall be provided whenever a coupling member is fitted over an external opening
shutter.
Glazing shall be fixed to the extruded sections by means of extruded aluminium beading.
Glass panes shall be provided with EPDM gasket/rubber lining before fixing.
The aluminium frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of aluminium lugs fixed to the
frame (by counter sunk brass machine screws) and grouted with M-15 grade concrete in the
hole in the masonry as per drawing,
In case of concrete wall, the frames shall be fixed by 96 mm long, 12 mm dia metallic dash
fasteners. Any steel material coming in contact with aluminium shall be galvanized.
The windows/ventilators/doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
Measurement & rates for item rate tender shall be on Sq.M basis as per item description.
Area shall be measured correct up to two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured
correct up to 0.5 cm.
A composite unit of various designations shall be first measured over all as a unit of
predominant designations and measurement for remaining designations shall be deducted from
the overall measurement of the composite unit in order to arrive at the quantities for various
designations. Mullions/Transoms/Coupling bars etc. at the meeting points of various
designations shall be equally distributed to all such designations for measurement and rates.
Rate shall include cost of all materials, specified hardwares, labour, erection, hoisting,
scaffolding, removal of scaffolding, protective measures, conveyance, handling,
loading/unloading, storing etc. required for proper completion of the item of work in
accordance with the specification.
Copyright EIL AII rights reserved
A.11n
aar Meg
Greker teecran dnottaAl
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Gard or India Undertakrng)
STANDARD No.
STEEL DOOR
(PRESSED STEEL)
DOUBLE SHUTTER
7-75-0071 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
R
QC
< FINISHED
K F BiR EVEL
ELEVATION
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT
BRICK WORK
D
10
}moo
z
La
ce
4354
104
CEMENT
PLASTER
SECTION 1 -1
LEGEND:
18 SWG GI VERTICAL STIFFNER 0 200 C/C

(SPACING TO BE ADJUSTED FOR VISION PANEL).
SPRING LOADED HEAVY DUTY DOOR STOPPER.
3 THICK MS FLAT SPACER WELDED TO FRAME
AT 0 500 C/C.
40x150x3 THICK MS PAD WELDED TO FRAME
AT ALL HINGE & LOCK LOCATIONS.
N: SS 304 GRADE 19 DIA, 200 LONG HANDLE
ON BOTH SIDES.
0: 18 SWG GI MORTAR GUARD AT THE BACK OF
HINGES & LOCK.
10 DIA SS 304 TOWER BOLT (250 LONG FOR
2100 HT. & 600 LONG FOR 2500 HT.).
'D' PROFILE EPDM GASKET ALONG FRAME REBATE
(FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR ONLY).
R: 2 THICK 25X25 GI ANGLE (VERTICAL) EACH
WELDED TO ONE SHUTTER.
NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM
2. FOR OTHER DETAILS REFER STANDARD NO. 7-75-0070.
OVER HEAD HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER (HEAVY DUTY).

MS HOLDFAST 200x25x6 THICK 0 MAXIMUM 600 C/C
WELDED TO FRAME SPACER (L).
C. 40 THICK (OVER ALL) 18 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED
STEEL SHUTTER FILLED WITH MINERAL WOOL (48Kg/cum).
16 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL FRAME OUT OF
125X60 PROFILE FILLLED WITH CONCRETE (REBATE
DIMENSION TO BE SUITABLY ADJUSTED FOR ACCOMODATING
GASKET FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR).
VISION PANEL (AS/PROJECT DRAWING).
100 LONG SS 304 GRADE HEAVY DUTY BALL BEARING
HINGE 0 600 C/C MAXIMUM.
SS 304 GRADE 16 DIA 300 LONG ALDROP ON BOTH SIDES.
H: 3 THICK MS FLAT CONTINUOUS ALONG PERIMETER OF
OF SHUTTER.
09.04.12
REVISED & REISSUED
21.03.07
REVISED, ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date

Page 1555 of 1744
Purpose
II"
DK
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
?fKD
JKB/SD
Checked
by
(Nail'.
JK
ARVIND KUMAR
\Ot
C\ WLsk
N AY KUMAR DUALH OTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee GM(E) Stds. Bureau

Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright Et All rights reserved
Page 1556 of 1744
laitEJEth
ENGINEERS
gtir tatatwer INDIA LIMITED
low/
marewarrn)
IA GoA
at inda undatakm

UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE
GROUND G.1. PIPELINE SYSTEM
No.
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
(WATER SERVICES)
Page 1 of 5
afIT IT 'TR *. aut. 11114011

wind] Wff 1:ITETt * fR TETTW
'VFW
FOR
UNDERGROUND & ABOVE GROUND
GI. PIPELINE SYSTEM
(WATER SERVICES)
10.07.12
12.03.08
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC.
15.07.98
1
0
Rev.
No
VK
KUMAR
DM
GAURAV
RK
NK
RC
PCS
MMK
ASoni
08.02.91
UPDATED & ISSUED AS STD. SPEC
PCS
RB
RPB
RNS
31.03.82
HC
RPB
HVR
RCPC
Standards
Prepared
Checked
by
GM
(ENGG)
Date
Purpose
by
CornmitteeC
onvenor
VC
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright Ell_ PJI rights reserved
Page 1557 of 1744
ale? i
azir faffleu v r
atb ENGINEERS
eRaWan
e INDIA LIMITED

GROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
(WATER SERVICES)
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 5
Abbreviations:
GI
Galvanised Iron
IS
Indian Standard
Kg/cm2 g
Kilogram per Square Centimeter Guage

Convener:
Mr. R.B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. P.K. Mittal (Structural)
Mr. Sushil Sadh (Environment)

LIMITED
tlialeg'S INDIA
i.G&A oltndLiUndettaking)
1512a
- ege ENGINEERS
(WATER SERVICES)
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 3 of 5
CONTENTS
SCOPE
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS
3.0
MATERIALS
4.0
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING ETC
5.0
JOINTING AND ERECTION OF GI PIPING SYSTEM
6.0
TESTING
7.0
PAYMENT
1.0
Page 1558 of 1744
Page 1559 of 1744
eia ea
$igzir 004eglar
l'"ê".""W"l)
1.0
ENGINEERS
INDIA UMITED
A Gan of India Undeilaiiinfil

(WATER SERVICES)
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 4 of 5
SCOPE
This specification covers the fabrication and erection of GI pipeline system, both underground
and above ground, including excavation, backfilling for the pipeline and testing of completed
system.
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS

IS: 554
IS: 778
IS: 1239 Part I
IS: 1239 Part II
Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are made on
threads.
Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes.
Mild steel Tubes, Tubular and other wrought steel fittings.
Mild steel Tubes, Tubular and other Wrought Steel fittings. Mild steel
Sockets, Tubular and other Wrought steel pipe fittings.
NOTE: -Latest Edition of all Codes and Standards shall be followed.

3.0
MATERIALS
All G.I. piping shall conform to IS: 1239 part I.
All gun metal valves shall conform to IS: 778 Class II.
c) All G.I. fittings shall conform to IS: 1239 Part II.
The schedule of pipes & fittings shall be as per schedule of items under respective works.
4.0
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING ETC.

All earthwork for GI lines shall be governed by the provisions of EIL specification 6-650006,"Earthwork for underground piping", to the extent applicable. All earthwork in
excavation, backfilling and transportation are included in the quoted rates.
5.0
JOINTING AND ERECTION OF GI PIPING SYSTEM
5.1
Screw socket Joints.

The screwed end of all GI pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with a mixture of
Red and White Lead or Teflon before jointing. The joint shall be made by winding a few
threads of hemp round the ends of tubes and then screwing them into sockets to the full depth
of threads. Exposed threads shall be coated with approved anticorrosive paint. No pipe shall
be bent / offset to save fittings. The offset in GI pipes shall be made only after the permission
of the Engineer-in-Charge. If threaded end of pipe is damaged, the contractor shall cut the end
with hacksaw and shall prepare new threads conforming to IS: 554, to required length.
All fittings shall be malleable Galvanised Iron approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Fitting in
GI line shall include all couplings, elbows, tees, bends, unions, nipples, reducers, flanges with
nuts and rubber insertion and all other fittings to make a complete job.
5.2
Flanged Joints
Flanged joints shall be made by painting the faces of the flanges with red lead and bolting up
evenly on all sides with compressed asbestos gasket as per piping material specification.
5.3
Valves
Flanged or screwed valves shall be installed in locations shown on the drawings as per
specification for screwed or flanged joints.
Page 1560 of 1744
1611fflaTre?alla ENGINEERS
Itgar El5Itg lit INDIA LIMITEDGROUND G.I. PIPELINE SYSTEM
of India IMO edikng }
6.0
(WATER SERVICES)
6-65-0027 Rev. 4
Page 5 of 5
TESTING
All completed GI piping shall be hydrostatically tested to a test pressure equal to one and a
half times the working pressure, as per job requirement (Minimum test pressure shall be
6Kg/Cm2 g) and the test pressure shall be maintained without loss for at least 30 minutes.
Pipes or fittings which are found leaking shall be replaced and joints found leaking shall be
redone, without extra payment.
7.0
PAYMENT
7.1
Payment shall be made on running meter basis of finished pipeline with fitting after testing
etc. complete. No separate payment shall be made for earthwork in trenching and backfill,
road cutting etc. Payment for valves and flanges etc. shall be made as per schedule of items on
unit rate basis. The unions shall be provided at every 50 meter, unless otherwise stated in
schedule of items / construction drawing. Rates shall include all incidental work such as
transportation of all materials from Owners stores, custody, and fabrication and laying of GI
piping system.
7.2
The payment clause 7.1 is not applicable in case of LSTK Jobs
Praikq e ENGINEERS
5 a fetfireg
WIL3TRAI
INDIA LIMITED
GON M A4a Undertaking)

FALSE CEILING, FALSE FLOORING,
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
UNDERDECK INSULATION &
Page 1 of 11
PARTITIONING
We
ci I
-II y dI UF,
ificchliThl WE
4-11
1-1 ch
71

PARTITIONING.
23.11.11
21.03.07
09.03.99
16.03.94

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Date
Page 1561 of 1744
Purpose
Atek
JS/SD
SO
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
VK
fl/'}
D. MALHOTRA
GB
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
Sallaae?ot ENGINEERS
efa-nr larilegit INDIA LJMITED
77411 erse.eo. ammii
(A Govt a (Ida Undedakingl

6 - 75 - 0010 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 11
PARTITIONING
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
CISCA :
CRCA :
GI
:
IS
MS
:
NRC :
PVC :
RCC :
Page 1562 of 1744
American Standards of Testing of Materials

British Standards
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association
Cold Rolled Close Annealed
Galvanized Iron
Indian Standards
Mild Steel
Noise Reduction Coefficients
Polyvinyl Chloride

Convenor :
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
S5I12-ziet ENGINEERS
11g7 015reg "VW INDIA LIMITED
A Gm4 amen Underlax,ngi

PARTITIONING
6 - 75 -0010 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 11
CONTENTS
FALSE CEILING GRID SYSTEMS
2.0
FALSE CEILING TILES
3.0
ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE CEILING
4.0
UNDERDECK INSULATION (Phenolic Foam)
5.0
UNDERDECK INSULATION (Polyisocyanurate Foam)
6.0
CAVITY (FALSE) FLOORING
7.0
PARTITIONING & PANELLING
10
8.0
MEASUREMENT AND RATES
11
1.0
Page 1563 of 1744

6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Pa:e 4 of 11
PARTITIONING
1.0
FALSE CEILING GRID SYSTEMS
1.1
GI Grid System (For Mineral Fibre False Ceiling)
1.1.1
Material
Main Runner
Main runner shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel and 'Ti shaped of 24 mm x 38mm
size and 0.30mm thickness with double rotary stitching, with baked polyester coating
(min. 25 microns) on the cap of the flange.
Cross Runner
Cross runner shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel and 'T' shaped of 24 mm x 38mm
size , 0.23mm thickness, 1200mm long and 24 mm x 38mm size , 0.23mm thickness,
600mm long with double rotary stitching, with baked polyester coating (min. 25
microns) on the cap of the flange.
C.
1.1.2
Perimeter Section
Material shall be same as runners. Sections shall be 22mm x 22mm size of 0 45mm
thickness. Exposed areas of all the metallic members shall be baked polyester coating
(min 25 microns).
Erection
Main Runners shall be placed at the spacing of max.1200 mm c/c. Cross runners shall be fixed
@ maximum 600mm c/c to obtain a grid of 600mm x 600mm. The grid shall be suspended by
means of min 2 6mm dia GI wire, 6mm thick GI cleat of 25mm x 25mm section, GI anchor
fasteners and level adjustors. Additional runners shall be provided wherever required (such as
along cut-outs for lighting/ A.C. fittings).
The overall grid system shall be rigid by self locking joints, in accordance with false ceiling
patterns, perfectly levelled and aligned at desirable height as per drawings.
1.2
GI Grid System (For Gypsum Board False Ceiling)
1.2.1
Material and Workmanship

Main Runners
GI channel shaped main runners shall be 0 9 mm thick, of size 45 mm and with two
flanges of 15 mm each. The runners shall be suspended from the ceiling @ 1200 mm
with 25 mm x 0 5 mm GI hanger bolted to the channel and fixed to the ceiling (by
means of bolting to GI cleat fixed to the ceiling with anchor fasteners).
Cross Runners
GI channel shaped cross runners shall be 0 5 mm thick having a knurled web of
minimum 50 mm and two flanges of minimum 25 mm each with lips of minimum 10
mm. The cross runners shall be fixed to the main runners in perpendicular direction at
450 mm C/C with the help of connecting clips.
C.
Perimeter Section/ Wall Channels

Wall channels shall be made of 0 5 mm thick GI of size 27 mm, one flange 20 mm
and the other 30 mm Wall channels shall be fixed to peripheral walls by rawl plugs/
anchor fasteners @ 450 mm c/c.
The overall grid system shall be rigid, in accordance with false ceiling pattern, perfectly
levelled and aligned at desirable height.

Page 1564 of 1744

PARTITIONING
1.2.2
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
rage 5 of 11
Erection
The specification for erection shall be the same as stated above in clause 1.1.2
1.3
Aluminium Grid System (For Particle Board False Ceiling)

Aluminium grid system for supporting false ceiling tiles shall be perfectly levelled, aligned at
desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings.
1.3.1
Material
Main Runner
Main Runners shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of
25 ram x 35 mm size, 2.5mm thick.
Cross Runner
Cross Runners shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium Tee sections of
25 mm x 25 mm size, 2.5mm thick.
C.
1.3.2
Perimeter Section
Perimeter sections shall be of extruded anodized (25 micron) aluminium angle
sections of required size.
Erection
The grid system shall be assembled by interlocking the main and cross runners @ 600 mm
maximum both ways by means of Aluminium angle cleats. The Aluminium grid system shall
be suspended from the ceiling by means of 6 mm dia MS hooks. The MS hooks shall be fixed
to main runners @ 1200 mm maximum. Fixing of hooks to main runners shall be with 3 mm
thick MS flat clamps with leveling nut. The MS hooks shall be suspended from the ceiling by
slotting in 25 mm x 25mm x 3 thick MS angle, fixed to the stab by anchor fasteners.
2.0
FALSE CEILING TILES

The tiles shall be placed in position over the supporting grid system in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations. The finished false ceiling shall be perfectly levelled and
aligned, at desired height as per drawings.
Necessary Electrical & AC and other fixtures shall be provided as per drawing and in coordination with relevant construction activities.
2.1
Mineral Fibre Tiles

Mineral fibre false ceiling tiles shall be with durable tegular edging having NRC value of
minimum 0.50, Light reflectance value of minimum 80%,K value of 0.052 to 0.057 w/m deg.
C and fire performance conforming to class I as per BS : 476.The tiles shall be of 600 mm x
600 mm size. The tiles shall have fissured or granulated texture on the front side as specified.
Back side shall be provided with protective coating.
2.2
Particle board tiles

Particle board tiles shall be made of teakwood particle board conforming to IS: 3087 (3 layer
flat pressed particle board bonded with BWP type phenol Formaldehyde Synthetic resin and
as per IS: 848, categorized as class- I for' Surface of very low flame spread' as per IS: 1642,
treated with antifungal chemicals).
The tiles shall either be painted or laminated as specified. Lamination shall be 0.5 mm thick
and of approved quality, shade and texture fixed by hot press method and shall conform to BS
476, Part -7. The tiles shall be painted at the bottom surface (Facing the floor ) with two coats
of approved colour acrylic emulsion paint ( of approved make ) after sanding off the surface
with 120 grit sand paper and applying particle board primer. The other surfaces shall be
painted with 2 coats of linseed oil varnish.

Page 1565 of 1744
aalleitft ENGINEERS
Obleedi/ INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt q 1 UN:lertacog)

PARTITIONINn
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 11
Tile sizes shall be 600mm x 600 mm x 12 mm and all four edges of the tiles shall be painted
with a coat of approved quality primer.
2.3
Gypsum Board Tiles

Gypsum board shall conform to IS: 2095 Part-1. The Gypsum boards used for false ceiling
shall have following properties:
Thermal Conductivity
- 0.16 W/mk
Thermal Resistance.
c)
iii)
For 9.5 mm thick board

For 12.5 min thick board
For 15 mm thick board
- 0.06 Sq.M IC/W

- 0.08 Sq.M IC/W
- 0.09 Sq.MICJW
Fire Propagation
Fire Propagation
Index of performance
- Not exceeding 12 and a sub index not

exceeding 6 (when each side is tested
separately to BS 476, Part -6)
Surface spread of flame
- Class 1 (both sides) as per test to BS 476

Part -7).
Gypsum boards shall be of specified thickness and of specified finish (painted with Plastic
Emulsion paint/ Laminated with 0.5mm thick lamination etc.). The Gypsum board shall be
screw fixed to the under side of false ceiling grid system with 12.5mm dia dry wall screw @
230 mm C/C by drilling machine, Joints in the board shall be finished flush with fillers,
finisher and primer as per manufacturer's recommendation to give a seamless finish.
3.0
ALUMINIUM PANEL FALSE CEILING SYSTEM
3.1
General
Aluminium panel false ceiling system shall be installed by approved agency and shall be
perfectly levelled, aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as
per drawings. The system shall be with demountable areas to give access to service
installation.
3.2
Codes and Standards

Applicable requirements of the following codes, standards and references shall be complied
with.
ASTM C 635: Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
ASTM C 636: Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.
CISCA:
The Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association

Acoustical ceilings: Use and Practice
All applicable state and municipal codes, laws and regulations regarding flammability and
smoke generation of interior finishes.
3.3
Material
All materials utilized for suspended ceilings shall be non-combustible or fire-rated to comply
with all applicable codes and standards.

Page 1566 of 1744
lalezeigt ENGINEERS
siThar laWlegWieINDIA LIMITED

Men FRAM? =MOM
3.4
IA GOvt al India Unciertakm

PARTITIONING
6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Paca t of 11
False Ceiling System (84C Type)

The System shall be standard product of approved Manufacturer and shall conform to
following and approved Manufacturer's specification. The system shall be perfectly levelled,
aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings. The
system shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
Ceiling Panels:
Ceiling panels shall be 84mm wide, 12.5mm deep panels of approved colour, roll
formed out of 0.5mm thick aluminium alloy 3105/3005/5052 (as per ASTM 209M),
with 24mm wide flange to close off the 16mm joint between the panels (module
100mm) Finishing of the panels shall be as specified.
Suspension System:
The suspension system shall be in accordance with approved Manufacturer's standard
specification consisting of carrier, hanger, threaded rod, perimeter profile etc.
The system also includes providing perimeter angles and slit openings for fixing supply/return
air grill, lighting fixtures, AC diffusers etc.
Reference shall be made to EIL standard no. 7-75-0042 for further details of the system.
3.5
False Ceiling System (Tray Type)

The System shall be standard product of approved Manufacturer and shall conform to
following and approved Manufacturer's specification. The system shall be perfectly levelled,
aligned at desired height and in accordance with the false ceiling pattern as per drawings The
system shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
A.
Ceiling Panels:
Ceiling panels shall be minimum 0.7mm thick and of aluminium alloy AA
3105/3005/3003/5052 (as per ASTM 209M). Finishing of the panels shall be as
specified. The panels shall be square edged, perforated or non-perforated and of
following sizes as per drawings.
254/ 305mm x 1264mm
600mm x 600mm
B.
Suspension System:
The suspension system shall be in accordance with approved Manufacturer's standard
specification consisting of main runner profiles, hanger, perimeter profile etc.
The system also includes providing perimeter angles and slit openings for fixing supply/return
air grill, lighting fixtures, AC diffusers etc.
4.0
UNDERDECK INSULATION (Phenolic Foam)
4.1
Material
Underdeck insulation shall be of phenolic foam rigid slab of 25mm thickness and approx.
1000mm x 500mm size as specified and shall conform to IS: 13204. It shall have density of 32
kg / M3 and K Value 0.016 KCal/hr MEC as per BS 4370, Part 2. The insulation shall be
classified as ' Non Combustible ' as per BS 476, part 5 and ' Class I' for surface spread of
flame as per BS 476, part 7. It shall be prelaminated on both sides with kraft paper.
4.2
Workmanship
The entire soffit of slab and beams shall be thoroughly cleaned. Bituminous primer or zinc
chromate primer shall be applied evenly @ 0.5 kg/m2 over the entire surface. Hot bitumen or
CPRX adhesive shall then be applied on the insulation panel @ 1.5 kg/Sq.M. The panels shall

Page 1567 of 1744
ISigiaeitt
ENGINEERS
i 11 iMeg Wir INDIA LIMITED

6-75-0010 Rev. 5
UNDERDECK INSULATION 8,
Page 8 of 1 ;
PARTITIONING
be pressed in position and further secured by dash fasteners and washers @ 250mm c/c all
around.
The underdeck insulation shall be fixed only after all fixtures like hooks, clamps, cleats etc.
for light fixtures, ducts etc. have been fixed in the ceiling.
5.0
UNDERDECK INSULATION (Polyisocyanurate Foam)
5.1
Material
Polyisocyanurate foam (PIR) shall be rigid slabs of size 1000 x 500mm and thickness of
30mm conforming to IS: 12436 having density not less than 32 kg./Cu.M., thermal
conductivity (K- value) not more than 0.023 w/mk measured at 10 deg. C. The slabs shall be
covered on one side with glass fibre tissue/ Aluminium foil having 50mm overlap. The
insulation shall be classified as 'Non Combustible' as per BS 476, part 5 and 'Class I' for
surface spread of flame as per BS 476, part 7.
5.2
Workmanship
First, holes in R.C.C. slab/ beam shall be drilled and nylon rawl plugs of size 8 x 25mm shall
be inserted (5 nos. for each slab- One each at 4 corners and one at center). Entire R.C.0
surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt and loose particles by wire brushing Then
a coat of bituminous primer @ 0.5 Litres/ Sq M shall be applied to bare R.C.C. surface and
allowed it to dry. After the primer has dried, cold adhesive CPRX shall be applied on R.C.C.
surface and to the two surface of each PIR panel and shall be pressed in position. The PIR
panels shall be secured in position with the help of G.I. screws (No. 8 x 75mm long) fixed into
rawl plugs and G.I washers. Facing side of the panels shall be the one covered with fibre
tissue/ Aluminium foil. The overlaps shall be covered with approved quality sealing
compound (MAS-94 or equivalent). Chicken wire mesh 24G x 19mm shall then be fixed to
G.I screws and tightened with lacing wire.
The underdeck insulation shall be fixed only after all fixtures like hooks, clamps, cleats etc.
for light fixtures, ducts etc. have been fixed in the ceiling.
6.0
FALSE (RAISED ACCESS) FLOORING

False floor system shall consist of modular, removable, filled with cementitious compound,
welded steel panels supported on all four edges by structural steel members bolted onto
adjustable height pedestal assemblies forming a modular grid pattern.
It is mandatory that all components of the false flooring system are sourced from same
manufacturer.
False floor understructure shall be installed to support the panels and shall be suitable to
achieve a minimum finished cavity height of 600-1000mm from the existing floor level. The
system shall ensure speedy assembly and removal for relocation and maintenance. The system
shall also ensure easy adjustment of levelling (25mm) and accurate alignment of panels in
the vertical direction.
False floor understructure shall consist of Base plate, pedestals, pedestal head assembly,
stringers and necessary fittings, fixtures and accessories.
6.1
Material
Pedestal Base Assembly
Powder coated pedestal assembly shall consist of a formed hot dip galvanized (60-80
micron) mild steel base plate with not less than 150mm x 150mm x 4 mm of bearing
area, mechanically riveted to a 32mm dia. of 2 mm thick CRCA steel pedestal
designed to engage the head assembly.
Pedestal Head Assembly
Zinc electroplated CRCA steel pedestal head assembly shall consist of 90mm x 90mm
x 4 mm thick profiled head, mechanically riveted to a 19 mm dia threaded bright rod,

Page 1568 of 1744
15IR q Allak
- ENGINEERS
Igar 0151esw WALIMITED

0,
Gat a/ Incha
Undertaking)

6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 11
PARTITIOI' ! NG
fixed to pedestal by specially designed zinc electroplated steel forged adjusting nut for
leveling, locking and changing the height setting.
Stringers
Stringers shall be of hot dip galvanized (60-80 microns) steel, minimum 20mm x
32mm x 1.20mm thick CRCA steel.
Floor Panels
Floor panels shall be 600mm x 600mm size, minimum 35 mm thick powder coated
(40-60 micron) CRCA steel cementitious core panel (with hemispherical and reverse
cones) and 1 mm thick epoxy painted CRCA steel sheet on top. Top sheet shall be
finished with 2mm thick high pressure laminate or 2mm thick conductive PVC or as
per project specification. The inner empty core shall be injected with light weight fire
retardant non combustible cementitious compound. All edges of the panels shall have
conductive PVC trims.
Floor panels shall be capable of supporting following loading conditions when tested
as per CISCA test procedure.
Concentrated load of 675 Kg. with maximum allowable deflection of 2 5mm
and a factor of safety of 2.5.
Uniform load of 2025 Kg/ Square meter.
Fire rating of floor panels shall be class 0 & class 1 conforming to BS 476-part-6 (Fire
propagation) and BS 476-part-7 (Surface spread of flame).
E.
6.2
Accessories
All accessories such as outlet boxes and grommets as required, Panel lifters (at least
one for each building, one number for every 500 Square meter of access floor area)
etc. shall be provided in accordance with approved Manufacturer's recommendations.
Workmanship
The base floor and cavity between false flooring and base floor shall be properly cleaned and
made dust free and dry. The base cement concrete floor shall be treated with one component
polyurethane based coating.
Installation of false floor shall be coordinated with other agencies to maintain the integrity of
the installed system. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by false floor installer. No
traffic but that of false floor installers shall be permitted on any floor area for 24 hours to
allow the pedestal adhesive to set and ensure alignment of the system is achieved. False floor
panels shall not be removed for 72 hours after their installation. Installation of the whole
system shall be done by approved agency in accordance with Manufacturer's
recommendations and as specified here-in.
False flooring pattern shall be as per approved drawing.
Pedestal base assembly shall be fixed to the base floor by fixing base plates to the base floor
by minimum 50mm x 8mm anchor fasteners (4 nos. for each plate).
The pedestal stud locations shall ensure the grid work as per flooring pattern which in general
shall be of 600 mm x 600 mm dimension. The length of the pedestal studs shall be such that
clear cavity between false flooring and base flooring is of desired depth. Additional pedestals
as needed to support panels where floor is disrupted by columns, walls and cutouts shall be
provided. Perimeter pedestal studs shall be provided along the periphery. Pedestal assemblies
including pedestal heads shall be weld-free construction, corrosive resistant and shall provide
an adjustment range of 25mm from the specified finished floor heights.
The threaded bright rod with the top head attachments shall be inserted into the studs and shall
be adjusted to obtain proper level of the finished floor panels by means of the adjustment nut.
The nut shall provide location lugs to engage the pedestal base assembly, such that deliberate

Page 1569 of 1744
esIGNEERS
s'f?ta tataleg Vie INDIA LIMITED
Page 1570 of 1744
(A con.
Incha undertsuro

6-75-0010 Rev. 5
rage 10 of 11
PARTITIONING
action is required to change the height setting. Threaded rod shall provide a specially designed
anti-rotation device, such that when the head assembly is engaged in the base assembly, the
head cannot freely rotate.
The pedestal head shall have an anti vibration PVC cap for panel and stringer location.
Stringers shall support each edge of panel. The stringers shall have counter sunk holes at both
ends to accommodate bolting of M6 machine screws to the pedestal head assembly. Stringers
shall be individually and rigidly fastened to the pedestal with one machine screw for each end
of stringer. Bolts shall provide positive electrical contact between the stringers and pedestals.
Stringer grid shall ensure maximum lateral stability in all directions. All the field cut panels
shall be installed with an appropriate PVC end cap specially designed to accommodate the
stinger and arrest Panel beam movement and will ensure the integrity and stability of the
system.
Floor panels shall be placed over the stringer channels and bolted to pedestal head. All four
edges of panels shall be finished with black conductive 5mm wide PVC edge headings. These
edge beadings are glued and sealed in place to avoid detachment. Floor panels which are field
cut (at ends, Console/ Rack location etc.) shall be marked with positional numbering on the
underneath and the adjoining wall. The finished floor panels shall be perfectly levelled and
aligned without any gaps in between the panels. Each individual panel shall be removable for
the purpose of maintenance of the cavity. Panel shall be easily removed by one person with a
lifting device and shall be fully transferable and totally inter changeable and replaceable in
any of the 4 directions at 90 degrees increments, except where cut for special conditions.
Understructure shall be aligned such that all uncut panels are interchangeable and fit snugly
but do not bind when placed in alternate positions.
Necessary cut-outs shall be made in the panels for cable routing, control panel fixation etc. as
per drawing
Necessary ramps, slopes, steps etc shall be also provided for as per drawing with raised
access floor components as per approved manufacturer recommendations..
Around a control panel/rack, the residual space left out shall be filled up with cut panels of
uniform size as required to fully close the gap between the adjacent full panel and the control
panel base channel. In this case the part floor panel shall extend upto the full width of the base
channel and the cut size shall be determined accordingly. An additional structural steel
framework shall be provided along the cut out on which the edge of the floor panel shall rest
and over which the base channel of control panel shall be placed.
After completion of the floor and association services, tests shall be arranged to demonstrate
that the floor is electrically continuous and fully earth bonded. Points chosen for testing
shall include randomly selected pedestals, stringers tops and bottoms of panels, etc.
7.0
PARTITIONING & PANELLING
7.1
MS Frame
MS frame for Partitioning & Panelling shall consist of horizontal & vertical members of
18SWG 52mm X 38mm MS sections. The members shall be welded to each other at
maximum 600mm c/c both ways. The frame shall be fixed to the floor/ceiling/wall with GI
roulette plug, screw and washers & 300mm maximum c/c. The members shall be provided
with one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer.
The frame-work arrangement shall be in accordance with the pattern for partition including
doors/windows etc.
45110Zeilih
r ENGINEERS
L1I fagleg Neil INDIA 1JMITED
Gov/ al Inds. undertalung)
7.2

6-75-0010 Rev. 5
Page 11 of 11
rARTITIONING
Gypsum Board Partitioning & Panelling

Gypsum boards for partitioning & panelling shall be 12 5mm thick and same as specified in
clause no. 2.3.
Number of Gypsum board layers (single skin or double skin) shall be as specified and with
finishing (painting or lamination) as specified.
Frame work along the edges shall be concealed with partition/panel boards. Necessary cutouts
for electrical, AC, return air etc. and other fixtures shall be provided in the boards. Glazing if
any shall be fixed with putty and wooden beadings.
8.0
MEASUREMENT AND RATES

For item rate tenders, False ceiling/ flooring, Insulation, Partition and Panelling shall be
measured in Sq.M. correct upto two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured correct
upto 0.01M.
No deduction shall be done for cut outs for fixtures, cables etc. upto 0.18 Sq.M in area. No
extra shall be paid for providing such cutouts.
Rate for item rate tenders shall include all materials, labour, transport, conveyance, erection,
storage, other incidental expenditures involved in carrying out the items.

Page 1571 of 1744
4olfaq_itai
$igur tifaileg
ENGINEERS
DADO DETAIL
INDIA LIMITED (WITH BRICK WALL AND RCC COLUMN)
e Tr37 eiLltrelvrl
IA Govt
of India
undertakpng)
STANDARD No.
7-75-0004 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
BRICK WALL/ RCC

COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
12 THICK
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)/
TILE ADHESIVE FOR TILES
STONE/TILE DADO
CRC
STONE/TILE
FLOORING
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 C EM : 4 SAND)/
TILE ADHESIVE FOR
TILES
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTION A-A
CHAMFER OF TILES/STONE
AT 45' ANGLE
CHAMFER OF TILES/STONE
AT 45' ANGLE
RCC COLUMN
BRICK WALL
STONE/TILE DADO
PLAN
(DADO ON BRICK WALL)
PLAN
(DADO ON RCC COLUMN)
NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM

4
3
Rev.
No.
25.10.11
15.02.07
REVISED & REISSUED
OW-W' Nat
AJS
Date

Page 1572 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
JKB/SD
Checked
by
ARVIND KUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI

Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No
Ind it
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Igtak9gleg
IHRT eiraat 41/ YMCA)
STEEL WINDOWS
SECTION DETAILS
IA Gov' 01 Moo Undeltaxpng)
7-75-0029 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
SIDE HUNG GLAZED SHUTTER

FIX GLAZED
, -1
I
I
I
r
I
. co
I.,
_.-- J
I
. I
I
-- J
-._
I
I
I
L. -_.
ELEVATION
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
F4B
2 THICK MS SHEET
FABRICATED BOX
2 THICK WEATHER BAR
PUTTY
SHUTTER FRAME F7D

PUTTY
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
GLASS AS SPECIFIED
SECTION 4-4
SECTION 3-3
SHUTTER
FRAME F7D
COUPLING
MULLION K1113
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
GLASS AS SPECIFIED
SHUTTER FRAME F7D
CENTRAL MULLION F4B
SASH BAR T 2
a
.;IW,/,/// 4;;.
OAMKOMM
rarrA/0
it oA a
S HINGE
SECTION 2-2
PUTTY
100X15X6 MS
LUGS 0 750 C/C
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
10 trp-
MS SCREW
MASTIC
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
CENTRAL
MULLION F4B
GLASS AS
SPECIFIED
ZZ/ZZ
/t)
4
0.10
WAS $
Fran-
wasAa
AWWM4
4 10 Yd
flown
taw
ice
0
mromn
a Watt .0%
et,
PUTTY
SHUTTER
FRAME F7D
SHUTTER
FRAME F7D
MS HINGE
WINDOW FRAME F7D
SECTION 1 -1

DESIGNATION OF SECTIONS ARE AS/ IS : 7452.
4
12.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
oxes-ke
SD
21.03.07
AMARJIT
JKB/SD
Rev
No
Date
Format No 8 000000) 4 Rev.0

Page 1573 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
frfrARVIND KUMAR
% 2ThA
ojert
AWAY KUMAR D.MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - All ri g hts reserved
STANDARD No.
ei e
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$lgartiffleg
I Kew e1R1712051311-0-111
URINAL FIXING DETAIL
7-75-0063 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
IP GoN of India Urdertakingj
CISTERN
FLUSH PIPE
CONCEALED TYPE
TILES/WALL
FNISH
III
URINAL
PARTITION
III
III
SPREADER
FLAT BACK
URINAL
BOTTLE
TRAP
BOTTLE
TRAP
TOP OF
PLATFORM
GRATING
r-- FLOOR LEVEL

ELEVATION
FLOOR TRAP ---1
SIDE ELEVATION
URINAL PARTITION
WASTE PIPE
0
0
to
300
300
URINAL
100 RAISED
PLATFORM
FLOOR TRAP
PLAN
4
09.11.11
21.03.07 REVISED & REISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
REVISED & REISSUED
Date
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4
Page 1574 of 1744
Purpose
Rev 0
DKerie
AMARJR
Prepared
by
SD
JK
SD/JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
VINAY KUMAR
Di/Al/107RA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
Cnnvrinht FII - All rinhts reserved
OOZE'?ift
" ENGINEERS
og eg fd51egW, INDIA LIMITED

elvasetmagmo(A
Govt d n Undertak.9)

EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
GROUND PIPING
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 7
wrzi
Irma. trrectrr t
ReR
fgrffbi
FOR EARTHWORK
FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
23.05.11
16.02.06
30.09.96
13.6.83
Rev.
No
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD.

SPEC.
REVISED AND ISSUED AS STD.
SPEC
REAFFIRMED & ISSUED AS STD.
SPEC
Date
Purpose
ALOK
VK
RK
SKC
NK
VDS
VJN
SM
PCS
MMK
A SONI
UCJ
RPB
RCPC
AK
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
GM
(Engg)
Approved by
Page 1575 of 1744
DM
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
If arOfte 056
Page 1576 of 1744
n elenkenaanorkl/

INDIA LIMITED EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
IllGovt of India Undertaking)
GROUND PIPING
ENGINEERS
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
IS
India Standard
RCC :
U/G :
Underground

Convener:
Mr. R. B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. D.C. Brahma
Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Raju Chutani
Mf
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0
Page 1577 of 1744

INDIA LIMITED EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
IA Govt or India Undertaking)
GROUND PIPING
ENGINEERS
SCOPE
2.0
CODES & STANDARDS
3.0
MATERIAL
4.0
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES / PITS FOR PIPELINES
5.0
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
6.0
7.0
PAYMENT
Page 1578 of 1744
iaeag
)+11e7. (9217R70173,10.1)
1.0

EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
INDIA LIMITED
GROUND PIPING
ENGINEERS
IA
STANDARD S PECIFICATION
No .
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 4
of 7
SCOPE
This specification deals with earthwork in trenches and pits (for valves, manholes, catch pits
etc.) for underground piping.
2.0
3.0
CODES & STANDARDS

IS: 783
Code of practice for laying of RCC pipes.
IS: 1200 (Part-I)
Method of measurement of building and civil engineering works.
IS: 3764
Excavation work code of safety.
NOTE:-
MATERIAL
All workmanship and materials shall conform to the provisions of IS: 1200 (Part-1) and IS:
3764.
4.0
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES / PITS FOR PIPELINES
4.1
Excavation
Plant, machinery and equipments for excavation shall be selected and deployed to provide
optimum mechanisation in excavation of trenches and pits. The selection for excavation and
earth movement machinery etc. shall take into account type of materials to be excavated,
method of excavation, prevailing weather conditions and type of transport to be used.
The excavation of area of cut shall be so timed that the bottom level is not exposed to the
deteriorating influence of the weather for longer duration.
Excavation and earth moving equipment shall be deployed such that minimum damage is
caused to the natural sub-soil structure of exposed formations.
The monitoring of soil deformations, ground water levels during and possibly after
construction work shall be taken into consideration.
In the event, when excavation works are carried out in the vicinity of structures of any
importance, the above monitoring shall be carried out within a distance, from the edge of the
excavation of 5 to 15 times the excavation depth, depending upon the subsoil conditions and
the stability of the neighboring structures.
4.2
Trenching work shall be carried out in all classes of soil including soft rock and excluding
hard rock and shall be for all depths.
4.3
The trench shall be cut true to the line and level as per drawings.
4.4
If the trench is excavated below the required level than that indicated in the drawing, the extra
depth shall be filled with concrete 1:5:10 or approved equivalent materials, as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge, at no extra cost to the owner.
4.5
In case of pressure piping, the trench shall be excavated generally as to provide a cover of
1000 mm or dia of pipe whichever is more. In case of gravity sewers/ pipes, the trench shall
be excavated to conform to invert levels as per drawings. However in certain cases, the pipes
may run at shallower levels or at deeper levels depending upon drawing, site condition etc.

EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
5` ar &Wig W' INDIA LIMITED
undertakm
GROUND PIPING
Page 1579 of 1744
- ENGINEERS
1611faeleift
RWOW O. M30.1)
IA Govt of /We
No.
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 7
No rebate for lesser excavations, nor extra payment due to deeper excavations, shall be
admissible in those cases where pipeline laying rates are inclusive of earthwork items. The
rates quoted shall be deemed to cover all works connected with trenching, whether trenches
are with single pipeline or have multiple pipelines in common trenches including road cutting
and making good the same.
4.6
The width of the trench shall be sufficient to give free working space of personnel,
equipment, supports and ancillaries on each side of the pipe. The free working space shall
conform to IS: 783. Generally it shall not be less than 150 mm on either side or 1/3 dia of
outer diameter of the pipe, whichever is greater.
4.7
When pipelines are running parallel, whether the trenching shall be individual or common,
shall be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge and such decision shall be final and binding on
the contractor. No extra shall be payable for common excavations.
4.8
All earthwork involved in excavations of all types of manholes, catch pits, valve chambers,
inspection chambers, chambers for instrumentation tapping etc., which are coming on the
alignment of U/G piping or as defined by drawing as a part of U/G piping work, shall be paid
extra under Earth work in excavation, back filling and removal of surplus earth etc. under
relevant clauses of the SOR.
4.9
Aspects such as variations in the soil conditions and the geological structure, depth of
excavation, the existence of ground water and surface water, the type and extent of
excavation, the topography of site, the proximity of items such as roads, buildings and buried
services, construction traffic and activities near the excavation eg. stock piling shall be taken
into account when determining whether the sides of excavation should be free standing,
sloping or temporary supported.
Suitable drainage and / or dewatering system like Well Point method / Bore well method etc.
shall be provided to prevent or limit ingress of surface or sub surface water into excavation.
Serviceable materials intended for reuse should be used as soon as possible after excavation
otherwise they should be stock piled at a location beyond 1.5m from the top edge of the
excavation or beyond a distance equal to the depth of the excavation whichever is higher at a
location approved by the Engineer-in-charge. If excavated serviceable material is not possible
to be stacked within the limits specified above, due to some constraint, it shall be stacked
away at a location approved by Engineer-in-Charge and paid separately under relevant item.
Areas used for temporary stockpiling of excavated material shall be kept clean and orderly,
with excavated material kept by the side of road to avoid traffic movement. Excavated areas
shall be restored to their original condition before completion of works.
All types of shoring and strutting, wherever necessary, shall be adopted to with hold the face
of earth or cutting in slope, as per site requirements and direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Supports shall be maintained such that the integrity of the sides of the excavation is not
impaired.
4.10
Any obstacle encountered during excavation shall be reported immediately to the Engineerin-Charge and shall be dealt with as instructed.
4.11
The contractor shall maintain all excavated trenches and pits, in a dry and trim condition.
4.12
Necessary barricading and protection of slopes against slips due to traffic movement shall be
provided to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge. Necessary warning flags and lights shall
be provided to caution traffic in the areas where trenches and/ or pits are provided.

,
1,5-ifaeley ftENGINEERs
EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
INDIA
LIMITED
Ogar 51-e W Govt of India Underlakm)
GROUND PIPING
Page 1580 of 1744
(AAPA ?WW1' =JAW)
4.13
No.
(A
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 7
In case of road cutting, all road material i.e. metal etc., shall be taken out carefully and kept
separately for reuse and road work shall be redone up to the original level, as it was prior to
cutting the road, with the excavated road materials after laying and testing of the pipeline,
within 10 days from the date of starting this work, at the cost of the contractor. The contractor
shall provide suitable warning signs and barricades to prevent accidents.
Contractor shall also provide reasonable bye pass at his own cost when a road is cut for laying
pipeline. Tankage dykes cut due to laying of the pipes, shall be redone conforming to the
original specifications, by the Contractor at his own cost. Secondary dykes, to take care of
any eventuality during construction, shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost.
4.14
Dewatering shall be done in advance of the installation of the pipe to allow adequate
inspection of padding of the bottom, if required. Dewatering shall be continued throughout
during installation and backfilling.
The trench shall follow the gradient of pipeline as specified in the drawing. The contractor
shall keep the trench in good condition, until the pipe is laid and tested. No extra claim shall
be entertained due to its caving or setting down, either before or after the pipe is laid.
In case, pipe is lowered in caved trench and backfilled before being inspected by the
Engineer-in-Charge, the Contractor shall re-excavate the trench for inspection and backfill it
at his own cost.
5.0
BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Backfilling
Trenches shall be back filled with suitable materials which should be compacted to the same
degree or better as the surrounding soils.
5.1
The soil used should be selected and approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Suitable material can
be extracted from available excavated material. The soil should be free from rubbish, grass,
organic matter, stones, building waste and Black Cotton Soil etc. It should be free from clods
and hard lumps. In case good soil is not available from excavated material for back filling,
trench shall be filled back with locally available coarse sand upto 30 cm. thick above the pipe
and rest of trench shall be filled back with excavated soil upto required level.'
5.2
The filling should commence only after approval of Engineer-in-Charge is obtained and after
the structures or pipes to be buried are tested and approved. Otherwise, if required, contractor
shall uncover buried portion and refill at his own cost.
Temporary excavation supports should be removed as back filling and compaction proceeds,
such that unacceptable movement of the supported ground does not occur.
Voids caused by extracted supports should be filled and compacted.
5.3
Filling should be done in layers. Each layer should be not more than 15 cm thick when loose
and should be well rammed, with necessary watering, to obtain at least 90% of maximum
laboratory dry density.
Compaction trials should be carried out on each soil type to be placed in backfill, in order to
confirm the type of machine and number of passes required to obtain optimum compaction
for given soil moisture contents. These trials should also be used to determine the variability
of the proposed fill material for different weather conditions.
Page 1581 of 1744
Igar 251-eg
eiMIVOA3a0F,1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt
of India undenakm)

EARTHWORK FOR UNDER
GROUND PIPING
STANDARD S PECIFICATION
No .
6-65-0006 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 7
5.4
Care must be exercised to protect cables, pipes, joints, and other features from damage due to
backfilling and consolidation.
5.5
Filling should extend up to the level of original ground surface or as per drawing or as
directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The finished surface should be properly trimmed and
dressed. The adjoining area should be cleaned and no heaps of surplus earth should be left
out.
6.0
Unserviceable materials and serviceable materials not intended for re-use shall be removed
from the work site and disposed off at a location as approved by Engineer-in-charge.
The surplus earth is generated due to pipe laying, valve chambers, and manhole construction
etc. Surplus earth is also generated due to voids in the back filled volume of earth. The
removal of surplus earth shall include excavation, loading, transportation, dumping, stacking
or spreading, as per the directions of Engineer-in-charge.
7.0
PAYMENT
7.1
Unless specifically stated in the schedule of rates, no separate payment for earthwork in
excavation, backfilling, transportation, dewatering etc. shall be admissible and the payment
for the same is deemed to have been included in the relevant items of the contract.
7.2
In case payment for earthwork is specified separately in the Schedule of Rates, the payment
shall be based on the actual quantity of excavation, backfilling and transportation done, taking
into consideration the slopes authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge for excavation, volume of
backfilling calculated on the basis of excavation reduced by the volume of pipes.
7.3
In cases where hard rock excavation is involved, the matter shall be referred to Engineer-inCharge, before proceeding with the work.
5114-4a
alreg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATORS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
STANDARD No.
7-75-0027 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
SPECIFICATIONS:
STEEL WINDOWS / VENTILATORS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED STRICTLY IN CONFORMITY

WITH IS:1036 AND IS:1361.
SECTION:
BEST QUALITY HOT ROLLED MILD STEEL SECTION CONFORMING TO IS:7452 SHALL BE
USED.
CONSTRUCTION:
SECTIONS SHALL BE CUT TO REQUIRED LENGTH. THE CORNERS OF THE WINDOW

SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY FLASH BUT WELDED AND MITRED TO FORM A SOLID
FUSED RIGHT ANGLE JOINT SO THAT ALL FRAME SHALL BE SQUARE AND FLAT.
SUB DIVIDING BARS OF THE UNIT SHALL BE TENDED AND RIVETED TO THE FRAMES.
FENESTRA JOINT:
AT THE INTERSECTION OF TEE SECTIONS THE VERTICAL TEE SHALL BE BROACHED

AND THE HORIZONTAL TEE SHALL BE THREADED THROUGH IT. THE INTERSECTION
SHALL BE CLOSED BY HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
HINGES:
PRESSED STEEL (HEAVY DUTY) HINGES SHALL BE INSERTED IN THE SLOTS CUT IN
THE OUTER FRAME FROM INSIDE. SIDE HUNG WINDOWS SHALL BE FITTED WITH
PROJECTING HINGES WITH ELECTRO GALVANISED STEEL PINS AND WASHERS TO
FACILITATE CLEANING OF GLASS PANES. TOP HUNG VENTILATORS SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH PRESSED STEEL BUTT HINGES RIVETED TO OPENING SHUTTER AND
WELDED TO THE OUTER FRAME CUTTING SLOT IN IT.
FITTINGS:
SIDE HUNG WINDOWS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HANDLES AND PEG STAYS OF
STEEL.
HANDLES SHALL HAVE A TWO POINT NOSE WITH A MILD STEEL BEVELLED STRIKING
PLATE RIVETED TO THE FIXED FRAME.
PEG STAYS SHALL HAVE THREE / FOUR DIFFERENT HOLES TO KEEP THE WINDOW
OPEN IN DIFFERENT POSITIONS UP TO A MAXIMUM OF 90 DEGREE.
HANDLE PLATES STAY, PEG STAY RESTS AND LOCKING BRACKETS SHALL BE OF
PRESSED STEEL AND SHALL BE RIVETED TO THE FRAME.
TOP HUNG VENTILATORS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH PEG STAYS OF BRASS OR STEEL.
COMPOSITES:
WINDOWS / VENTILATORS FOR LARGE OPENINGS SHALL BE FORMED BY COUPLING

DIFFERENT UNITS WITH VERTICAL COUPLING MULLION (K1119).
(A)4,,t
12.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
NM^
21.03.10
AMARJIT
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0
Page 1582 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
SD
SD/JKB
Checked
by
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
VINO KUMAR
D.MALMOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
GM (E)
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright DL - All rights reserved
Page 1583 of 1744
ag e,
ENGINEERS
ILIA LIMITED FOR PLASTERING & POINTING
Ig-ar 'Meg
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 9
IA Gan of W. Undertaking)
tictitck
thrict) -F4fkkiri
FOR
PLASTERING & POINTING
05.04.12
21.03.07
10.03.99
16.03.94

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSUED STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
D MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVI D
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Prepar Checked
ed by
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM(E)
Page 1584 of 1744
laffraEga ENGINEERS
a-LIf laiilegire INDIA UNITED
fb

STANDARD SPECIFICATION No
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
IS

British Standards
Indian Standards

Convenor :
.IK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
tzrna
15itig
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
Igat igait3W
(A CAM of Indo Undenalono
6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
MATERIALS
2.0
WORKMANSHIP
3.0
PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER
4.0
SAND FACE PLASTER
5.0
EXPOSED AGGREGATE
6.0
GYPSUM PLASTER
7.0
POINTING
8.0
MEASUREMENT AND RATE
1.0
Page 1585 of 1744

Copyright EL All rights reserved
Page 1586 of 1744
5101-zidear, ENGINEERS
tegileg ver INDIA LIMITED
1.0
MATERIALS
1.1
Cement

6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 9
Cement shall conform to 'Technical Specification for Civil and Structural Works'
1.2
Sand
Sand for plaster and pointing shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone sand or crushed
gravel sand or a combination of any of these and shall conform to IS: 1542. Sand shall be
hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain
any appreciable amount of silt, day bails or pellets. Sand shall not contain harmful impurities
such as iron pyrites, coal particles, lignite, mica shale etc in such form or in quantities as to
affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.
The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall
not exceed the following limits:
Clay, fine silt and fine dust when determined in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 2):
In natural sand or crushed gravel sand & crushed stone sand: Not more than 5% by
mass
Organic impurities when determined in accordance with IS 2386 (Part 2):
Colour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by standard specified in IS
2386 (Part-2)
Grading of sand for use in Plaster shall conform to IS 1542 (as below)
13
IS sieve designation
Percentage passing
10mm
4.75mm
2.36mm
1.18mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
100
95 to 100
95 to 100
90 to 100
80 to 100
20 to 65
0 to 50
Water
Water for plastering and pointing shall conform to ' Technical Specification for Civil and
Structural Works'.
1.4
Cement Mortar
Preparation of cement mortar shall conform to 'Technical Specifications of Civil and
Structural Work' unless otherwise mentioned.
1.5
Cement Mortar with Waterproofing Compound

Waterproof compound shall conform to IS: 2645 of approved make. The compound shall be
well mixed with dry cement in the proportion of 3% by weight or as recommended by
manufacturer. Further procedures for preparation of cement mortar shall be as per clause
No.1.4
$g
Page 1587 of 1744
15044a ENGINEERS
ar
LIMITED
etReswWA
01Rn eRowe ceirJeCroll
1.6
IA Govl of InOia Underla,m91

6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 9
Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum plaster (Calcium Sulphate Hemi-hydrate - CaSO4.1/2112 0) is obtained as a result of
calcinations of raw Gypsum (Calcium Sulphate Di hydrate - CaSO 4 .2H20), in an automatic
kettle under controlled temperature conditions. The material shall conform to IS 2542 (Part 1)1978 (for physical characteristics) and IS 2547 (Part 11)-1976 (for chemical characteristics).
2.0
WORKMANSHIP
2.1
Preparation of Background Surface

The surface shall be cleaned of all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae, efflorescence
and other foreign matter by water or by brushing. Smooth surfaces shall be roughened by wire
brushing or hacking for non-hard and hard surfaces respectively. Projections on surfaces shall
be trimmed wherever necessary to get even surfaces. In case of brick/stone masonry, raking of
joints shall be carried out wherever necessary. The masonry shall be allowed to dry out for
sufficient period before carrying out the plaster work. The masonry shall not be soaked but
only damped evenly thereafter before applying the plaster.
In case of concrete work, projecting blurs of mortar formed due to the gaps of joints in
shuttering shall be removed. Such surface shall be scrubbed clean with wire brushes. The
surface shall be pock marked with a pointed tool at spacing of not more than 50 mm centers,
the pocks being made not less than 3 mm deep to ensure a proper key for the plaster. The
surface shall be washed off and cleaned of all oil, grease etc. and well wetted before the
plaster is applied.
2.2
Sequence of Operations
For external plaster, the plastering operations shall be started from the top floor and carried
downwards. For internal plaster, the plastering may be started wherever the building frame,
roofing, and brick work are ready.
The surfaces to be plastered, shall first be prepared as described in 'Preparation of background
surface' in clause no 2.1
The first under layer shall then be applied to ceilings. After the ceiling plaster is complete and
scaffolding for the same removed, plastering on wall shall be started.
After a suitable time interval as detailed under various types of plaster in subsequent paras,
depending upon the type of mortar, the secondary layers if required shall be applied. After a
further suitable time interval as detailed under various type of plaster in subsequent paras, the
finishing coat shall be applied first to the ceiling and then to the walls.
Plastering of cornices, decorative features, etc. shall be completed before the finishing coat is
applied. Unless otherwise specified corners and edges shall be rounded off to a radius of
25mm, such rounding off shall be complete along with the finishing coat to prevent any joint
marks showing out later.
2.3
Scaffolding/Staging
Scaffolding/staging for plastering/pointing shall be as per 'Technical Specification for Civil
and Structural Work'.
2.4
Damage Rectification
Any cracks, damages, any part of work which sound hollow when tapped or found damaged
150Zeit ENGINEERS
5g7015IitairINDIA LIMITED
Page 1588 of 1744

6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 9
or defective otherwise shall be cut out in rectangular shape and redone as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.
2.5
Chicken Wire Mesh

150mm wide, closely knit , 20 gauge chicken wire mesh stretched tight and fixed with G.I.
"U" type nails shall be provided at all the brick/stone masonry and RCC joints.
3.0
PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER
3.1
Preparation of Mortars
The mortars of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of 'Cement Mortar'
described in clause no. 1.4
3.2
Application of Plaster
3.2.1
One Layer Plaster Work

To ensure even, specified thickness, plaster of 150 mm x 150 mm shall be first applied
horizontally and vertically at not more than 2 meter interval over the entire surface to serve as
gauges. The surface of these gauged areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster
surface. The mortar shall be brought to true surface by working with a wooden straight edge
reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways movements at a time. Finally the
surface shall be finished off true with a trowel or wooden float to obtain a smooth texture.
Excessive trowelling or overworking the float shall be avoided. All corners, arises. angles and
junctions shall be truly vertical/ horizontal and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or
chamfering of corners, arises, junctions etc. shall be carried out with proper templates to the
size required.
In suspending the work, the plaster shall be left. cut clean to line, both horizontally and
vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old work shall be scrapped
clean and wetted before plastering the adjoining area. Plastering work shall be closed on the
border of the wall and nearer than 150 mm to any corners or arises and shall not be closed on
the body of the features such as plaster bands, cornices nor at the corners or arises.
3.2.2
Two Layer Plaster Work
3.2.2.1 First or Under Layer

The first or underlayer of the specified thickness shall be applied as described in clause no.
3.2.1. Before the first coat hardens, surface of it shall be beaten up by edges of wooden tapers
and close dents shall be made on the surface. The subsequent coat shall be applied after this
coat has been allowed to set for 3 to 5 days depending upon weather conditions. The surface
shall not be allowed to dry during this period.
3.2.2.2 Second or Finishing Layer
The second layer shall be complete to the specified thickness in the same manner as for first
layer.
3.3
Curing
Curing shall be started 24 hours after finishing the plaster. The plaster shall be kept wet for a
period of 7 days. During this period the plaster shall be suitably protected from all damages at
the contractor's expense by such means as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The date of
laaaEg fs: ENGINEERS
ligaftWegliiiir ILIA LJMITED
Page 1589 of 1744
vRn.re gmaiRm)
IA son 011odiaunoenakom

6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 9
execution of plastering shall be marked on the plastering to ensure the proper duration of
curing.
4.0
SAND FACE PLASTER
4.1
Preparation of Mortar
The mortar of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of cement mortar described
in clause no. 1.4.
4.2
Sand face plaster shall consist of 13 mm thick (1 cement: 4 coarse sand by volume) underlayer
and 7 mm thick (I cement:2 coarse sand, granule size 2 to 2.5mm by volume) top layer.
Application of plaster shall be as described in 'two coat plaster work' in clause no. 3.2.2.
The surface of the sand face plaster shall be finished rough with sponge or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
4.3
Curing
Curing shall be described in clause 3.2
5.0
EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH
5.1
The morter of specified mix shall be used as per the specifications of cement mortar described
in clause no. 1.4. White and coloured marble chips shall be of 6 mm to 12mm size out of
Makrana/Ambaji, grade I or Dongri Chittor Brown/Rajnagar/Abu green grade-1 quality as
specified.Marble dust shall be obtained from crushing hard marble stone.
5.2
Exposed aggregate finish plaster shall consist of 12mm thick plain cement plaster underlayer
(1 cement: 4 coarse sand by volume) finished rough and 20 mm thick top layer. Underlayer
shall be applied in accordance with 'One layer plaster work' described in clause no. 3.2.1.
Top layer shall be 20 mm thick admixture of white cement and grey cement (mix. ratio 1:1 by
volume) mixed with white/coloured marble chips/pebbles of 6mm to 9mm nominal size as per
item description. Mix ratio shall be 1 cement: 1 marble chips/pebbles by volume. Marble dust
@ 15% by volume shall be added to the admixture. The pebbles to be used shall be well
washed and drained. The admixture shall be thrown wet on to the under layer while it is still
plastic using strong whipping motion at right angles to the face of the wall. One coat of neat
cement slurry @ 2.75 kg cement per square meter of area shall be applied on to the under
layer to receive the top layer. The whole plastering shall be laid in panels of maximum 1.2 M
x 1.2M or as per drawing with 12mm x 20mm grooves in between formed by holding
removable wooden batons of 12mmx x 25mm size over the under layer.
Loose mortar etc. on the top surface shall be cleaned/removed by brushing/washing/spraying
with water jet after initial setting of mortar.
5.3
Curing
Curing shall be as described in Clause no. 3.3
Page 1590 of 1744
ORLEge ENGINEERS
5Ig7 ttlaieg WV INDIA LIMITED
6.0
GYPSUM PLASTER
6.1

6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 9
The powder (gypsum plaster) should be mixed with clean water preferably in clean plastic
buckets to avoid mixing with impurities, ensuring thorough mixing by help of mixing rod so
as to avoid formation of lumps and unmixed residues. The water to plaster ratio should be
maintained as per manufacturer's specification.
6.2
Gypsum plaster can be applied in thickness range of 3-25 mm. However, while applying
gypsum plaster in thickness excess of 12-13 mm, it has to be applied in layers of 10mm each.
Similar will be the application process for RCC columns. However, it is not recommended to
go beyond a thickness of 13mm for ceilings.
6.3
Curing
There is no requirement of curing. Gypsum plaster dries in 3 days, after which painting can be
done directly over the finished surface.
7.0
POINTING
Pointing shall be of the type specified such as flush, cut or weather struck, raised and cut etc.
7.1
Preparation of Base Surface

The joints shall be raked to such a depth that the minimum depth of the new mortar measured
from either the sunk surface of the finished pointing or from the edge of the brick shall be less
than 20 mm.
7.2
Mortar
Mortar shall be in accordance with the specifications of cement mortar described in clause no.
1.4
7.3
Application of Mortar and Finishing

The mortar shall be pressed into the raked out joints with a pointing trowel according to the
type of pointing specified. The mortar shall be spread over the corner edges or surfaces of the
masonry. The pointing shall then be finished with the pointed tool. The superfluous mortar
shall be cut off from the edges.
7.4
Flush Pointing
The mortar shall be pressed into joints and shall be finished off flush and leveled. The edges
shall be neatly trimmed with trowel and straight edges.
7.5
Cut or Weather Struck Pointing

The mortar shall first be pressed into joints. The top of the horizontal joints shall then be
neatly pressed back by about 15 mm with the pointing tool so that the joint is sloping from top
to bottom. The vertical joint shall also be similarly pointed. The junctions of vertical joints
with the horizontal joints shall be at true right angles in case of brick & coursed rubble
masonry.
Page 1591 of 1744
lOtaele ENGINEERS
Itgar Wagmy INDIA LIMITED
7.6

6-75-0005 Rev. 5
Palle 9 of 9
Raised and Cut Pointing

This type of pointing shall project from the wall facing with its edges cut parallel so as to have
a uniformly raised band about 6 mm and width 10 mm more as directed. The pointing shall be
finished to a smooth but hard surface.
7.7
Curing
Curing shall be as described in clause no. 3.3
8.0
MEASUREMENT & RATE

The description of each item, unless otherwise mentioned includes wherever necessary all
material, conveyance and delivery, handling, loading/unloading, storing, fabrication, hoisting,
all labour for finishing the work, preparation of background surface, staging/scaffolding,
application, finishing. removal of staging/scaffolding, curing and other incidental charges. The
rate for item rate tenders shall be for all heights and at all heights of work.
8.1
Plastering & Pointing

Thickness of the plaster shall be the minimum thickness at any point on a surface and shall be
exclusive of the key i.e. grooves or open joints in masonry. No extra payment shall be allowed
for extra thickness of plaster done by contractor, drip moulds, rounding of edges etc.
For item rate tenders, all plastering/pointing shall be measured in square meters unless
otherwise specified. Length, breadth and height shall be measured correct to 0.1 meters.
Sotfits of stairs shall be measured as plastering on ceiling. Ceiling with projected beams shall
be measured over beams and plastered side of beam shall be measured and added on ceiling.
Deductions and additions shall be made in the following manner.
No deductions shall be made for ends of joists, beams, posts, openings not exceeding
0.5 Sq. M. area and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. of these
openings mortar finish to plaster around ends of joists, beams, posts etc.
Deductions for openings exceeding 0.5 Sq. M but not exceeding 3 Sq. M each shall be
made as follows and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. of these
openings.
When both faces of wall are plastered with same type of plaster, deduction
shall be made for one face only.
When two faces of wall are plastered with different types of plasters or if one
face is plastered and the other pointed, deduction shall be made from the
plaster or pointing on the side of frame for door, window etc. on which width
of reveals in lesser, but no deduction shall be made on the other side. Where
widths of reveals on both faces of wall are equal, deduction of 50% of area of
opening on each face shall be made.
iii)
c)
When only one face is plastered, full deduction shall be made from plaster if
width of reveal on plastered side is lesser. But if widths of reveal on both
sides are equal or more on un-plastered side, no deduction shall be made.
In case of openings of area above 3 Sq. M each, deduction shall be made for openings
but jambs, soffits, and sills shall be measured.
Copyright Ell-All rights reserved
Page 1592 of 1744
afaZrel e, ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ar cam
"
A ,,,n undetaknqi
ng-
5i

EXTERNAL FACADE SYSTEM WITH
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
STRUCTURAL GLAZING
Page 1 of 13
(1-1-491 31113-117T WAIN

q
7141
foR Trriw

EXTERNAL FACADE SYSTEM WITH
STRUCTURAL GLAZING
Rev.
No
28.09.11
ISSUED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
JK
SM
Prepared Checked
by
by
JK
VK
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
D.
MALHOTRA
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
lfrtne?
Slig"af Ealeg,
Page 1593 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
G"""ffia Uncle "' ng)

EXTERNAL FACADE SYSTEM
WITH STRUCTURAL GLAZING
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 13
Abbreviations:
ACP
ASTM
BS
ECBC
EPDM
IS
PVC
RCC
Aluminum Composite Panel

British Standards
Energy Conservation in Building Code (India)
Ethylene Propylene Dinine Monomer
Indian Standards
Poly Vinyl Chloride
4-

Convener:
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members:
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. Snigdho Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
Mr. MP Jain (Projects)
larane ENGINEERS
$1g7jelfar ,
INDIA LIMITED
IA GOvt of India Undedaking )
6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 13
CONTENTS
GENERAL
2.0
STRUCTURAL GLAZING SYSTEM
3.0
WORKMANSHIP
11
4.0
DESIGN CRITERIA
11
5.0
DESIGN DATA
12
6.0
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA OF THE STRUCTURAL GLAZING
12
7.0
13
8.0
DRAWINGS AND DETAILS
13
9.0
MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
13
1.0
Page 1594 of 1744

lati&re? neENGINEERS
Sigilf galAtgW-- INDIA LIMITED
G'A '"S"" 1
"en einwe ' j'anii
Page 1595 of 1744

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 13
1.0 GENERAL
The external facade works for a building shall be as per the detailed design of the external
facade using glass and metal in combination to provide required aesthetic view of the
building, perform desired functional parameters with respect to passive climate control and
provide structural stability to the system with respect to various structural loading condition
for which the building is designed including thermal and wind load. The external facade
system shall comprise of structural glazing system or/ and Aluminium composite Panel or
combination thereof as required by the design of facade. In certain cases, the external facade
system may solely comprise of large glass panel with stainless steel patchworks only without
use of any metal frame. Such facades shall be as per the proprietary design detail of the
suppliers. The structural glazing shall form uninterrupted, water, air and weather tight glazed
surface in accordance with the architectural elevation and layout drawings and specifications
and the entire system shall be erected as per the same. The glazed surface shall be formed by
framing system which shall be of structurally and mechanically designed technology for
fabrication and erection with grid sizes as approved. The horizontal members shall span in
length between vertical members. The perimeter of the frames shall be structurally integrated
to form air and water proof movement joint on all four sides of each panel with pressure
equalization chambers formed internally. Design and sealing of such joints shall ensure that
there is no penetration of rainwater through these joints under heavy wind pressures.
The fabrication and erection of the system shall comply with all relevant Indian Standards,
Code of Practice and technical literature relating to best practice pertaining to structural
glazing. The equivalent or higher International Standards may be used.
A specialized agency/ sub-contractor with proven track record to execute this job shall be
engaged for fabrication and erection of the system. Such an agency should have executed
similar jobs for multistoreyed buildings.
This specification is not applicable for suspended point fixed glazing with patch bolts and
shall be limited to the Semi unitized structural glazing system only.
2.0 STRUCTURAL GLAZING SYSTEM
The Structural Glazing System shall be Semi unitized structural glazing system punched/ strip
type window units and the same shall be fabricated as per design and approved drawings.
The system shall consist of frame supporting system, the framing system to support vision
panels (insulated glass) and spandrel panels either with monolithic glass ( single or double
glazed unit) or laminated sandwiched composite panel (ACP)/ openable top hung window
panels/ punched strip windows/ decorative capping to any shape & profile, smoke seal,
flashing including gaskets, sealants, necessary accessories, as part of the system on a
continuous framing supported between floors as detailed below and as per the specification for
external facade system.
The panels shall be supplied and fabricated with the specified glass on the secondary frame at
factory, the system shall be erected on extruded main frame & transom fixed on supporting
system at site as per approved shop drawings at all floor levels and for all heights.
The split framing semi unitized glazing system in case of punched windows with proposed
vision panel with either insulated/ monolithic glass shall have groove width of maximum 16
mm both in horizontal and vertical direction.
Tests for the materials involved in the system, including the field test on the erected system at
site as per the test criteria shall be as per this specification.
Rues high ENGINEERS

at 051e VI INDIA LIMITED
g
Og nien e..n. ave.0
Page 1596 of 1744
IA Gort ol India Undet10.91

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 13
A document on methodology for the materials and assembly (mock up & field test) supported
by the copy of relevant codes & Standards shall be as approved by the Engineer-In-Charge
prior to testing.
Protection of the system and materials till handing over to the owner, removal of the unwanted
materials, broken glass, screws, bolts, nuts, packing materials, debris etc regularly and keeping
the premises neat and clean at all times shall be the responsibility of the agency executing the
work.
The facade cleaning details shall be incorporated in the shop drawing submitted for approval.
The system shall be maintained by means of periodical inspection at site (bi-monthly) and
checking the system and materials involved in the system during the defects liability period of
one year to ensure that the system and all materials are free from any defects during this
period. Necessary guarantee for the entire external facade system to the specified period in an
approved format supported with back to back guarantee from the specialized material supplier
like glass, aluminium composite panel, gasket, sealant, hardware etc complete as directed by
Engineer- In- Charge shall be provided.
2.1
System Design
The pre-assembled aluminium semi unitized structurally glazed panel shall be designed with
continuous framed panels/ strip window/ punched window system with split mullion to any
shape and profile to withstand a minimum design wind pressure of 125 Kg/sq.m (Test
pressure shall be 1.5 times of the design wind pressure) conforming to IS 875-Part 3 and
lateral forces as per IS 1893 and fixed at horizontally/ vertically/ sloped/ curved position etc
as shown in the approved drawings by using aluminium extrusions, glass, spacer tape, gasket,
sealant etc as specified.
System design in total, including aluminium extruded frames, type & thickness of glass pane,
aluminium sleeves at connections, inserts, EPDM gaskets, adhesive tapes, sealant, supporting
system/ bracket including fastening and anchoring system & materials specified in the system
details as shown in the tender drawing shall be deemed as tentative and is meant to set out a
general outline of the proprietary system and minimum requirements/ properties of the system
and component parts. The method of fixing is subject to the approval of Engineer- In- Charge.
Since the external facade system in terms of design, materials, all fixing details, methodology
of execution are proprietary in nature, the onus of the design and performance requirements,
shop drawing, execution etc satisfying the design intent and specification of external facade
system including conducting the site survey prior to and after preparation of shop drawing and
accommodating the site conditions in the system at appropriate levels etc shall lies solely with
the agency executing the work.
The system shall be designed with maximum design wind pressure and lateral forces,
moments, stresses etc. Negative/ suction pressures if determined as per IS 875-Part 3 and
Lateral forces as per code IS 1893 (Latest Revision) shall make allowances as described in the
code for corner effects on the system. System shall be designed with air pressure equalization
chamber and concealed continuous gutter vertically and horizontally at all levels as self
drainage barrier to achieve water tightness besides providing EPDM gaskets on the frame and
EPDM gasket/ sealant on the external groove as air and water barrier.
The system shall be designed to withstand a design wind pressure specified above with selfbearing modular elements supported between floors in the case of structural glazing and split
mullion supported between sill & lintel/ beam in the case of punched windows, EPDM gaskets
on the frame and gasket/ sealant on the groove to prevent the system from air & water
penetration, double adhesive spacer tape, backer rod, sealant, supporting brackets (resistance
to design wind pressure), separator gaskets for bi-metallic corrosion, Pressure equalization
6frea_e",.ENGINEERS
sig-a
. o rtas*
Page 1597 of 1744
INDIA LIMITED
atht hd"nde""i

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 6 of 13
chamber in the system, built-in continuous internal drainage gutter for collection and facility
at lowest floor level to drain out penetrated water, in built adjustability to accommodate
thermal expansion, thermal movement and movement due to any other forces etc.
The system shall be designed with gasket/ sealant on the external groove with coloured
anodized aluminium holder all-round the panel to the required width and thickness as per
design as dead load support to the glass panel. Non staining sealant between glass &
aluminium holder all-round the panel shall be provided. Glazing the panel with child frame
shall be done only at factory at the controlled atmosphere to erect the panel on erected
extruded aluminium main member and transom with supporting system at site fixed on the RC
surface. Vertical in-situ glazing shall not be carried out during construction/ erection stage.
System shall be designed in such a way that the outer surface of insulated glass unit,
monolithic glass unit and aluminium composite panel shall be in the same plane or as per
approved drawing.
The system shall be designed to accommodate movement due to any force including the
movement resulting from the exterior skin temperature ranging from 15C to 85C, interior
skin temperature ranging from 15C to 30C and to accommodate the horizontal building
movement of 10 mm per panel & vertical movement of 20 mm between floors on the
aluminium framing system with support brackets, glass, gaskets and fastening devices. The
system shall be designed to accommodate the size and shape of the glass panels as per the
approved drawings including approved modifications as may be required during execution as
well as all other incidental forces and stresses likely to be experienced under service
conditions i.e. lateral force, dead weight and thermal expansion due to building movement
both vertical and horizontal etc.
The supporting system shall consists of brackets/ clamps, fastening straps, nuts, bolts, rivets,
washers and other fastening materials etc. Extruded sections shall be designed to
accommodate Insulated Glass Unit (IGU)/ monolithic (single) glass and aluminium composite
panel as per the approved shop drawings. Extruded aluminium sections shall be 63400 (119)
grade conforming to IS:8147, finished with AC25 grade architectural quality electrolytic
anodic coating of approved colour conforming to IS:1868.
2.2
Materials
2.2.1
Glass
The infill panels shall be factory made glazed unit of size as per the approved design. The
thickness of the glass shall be as specified in Job Specifications/ Schedule of Rates and as per
the ECBC envelope design criteria and the same shall be as under:
Minimum 8mm thick hard coated reflective toughened glass in approved colour. The glass
shall have a reflective coated surface. For the toughening of the glass the rolling direction
shall be parallel to the width of the glass. The glass shall be cut by machine only to
required size and the edges shall be ground smooth by dressing with corborandum file or
equivalent.
24mm thick (6mm + 12mm air gap + 6mm glass) assembly for both vision and spandrel
panel conforming to the minimum spectral parameters as specified. Spacer for insulated
glazing unit shall be aluminium extruded profile and finished with AC 25 grade
electrolytic anodic coating of black colour conforming to IS: 1868 and filled with dry
desiccant. Primary sealant shall be poly-isobutylene (P113) and secondary seal shall be
structural silicon sealant of approved make. Make and thickness of inner pane glass shall
be the same make as outer pane glass of Insulated Glass Unit / Double Glazed Unit.
Page 1598 of 1744
lalfrae?
Ekteg:
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goa of Indui UndedAm9)

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 7 of 13
Typical Technical Characteristics of single glazing clear AB (Azure Blue) 14 or equivalent are
given below:
Light Transmission
Reflection (OUT) %LR
Reflection (OUT) %ER
Absorbed %EA
Direct Transmission
Solar factor
Shading Co-efficient
U Value
14%
22%
19%
69%
12%
28%
32%
5.2%
Typical Technical Characteristics of double glazing clear AB (Azure Blue) 14 or equivalent is

given below:
Light Transmission
Reflection (OUT) %LR
Reflection (OUT) %ER
Absorbed %EA
Direct Transmission
Solar factor
Shading Co-efficient
U Value
14%
22%
20%
71%
10%
19%
22%
2.8%
The above data is provided as a reference to a specific type of glass. However, the glass shall
be selected based on its SHGC, U-Value and solar factor as specified in ECBC and shall fully
conform to that code.
2.2.2 Processing of Glass
Details of the processor and their facilities shall be approved by Engineer-In-Charge before
their procurement and execution. Laminated glazing unit shall be processed only by the
approved Processor. All glass panes used in the glazing shall be heat treated and heat soak
tested conforming to the relevant codes and standards. No tong marks shall be allowed in the
processed glass. Necessary test certificate shall be produced by the processor to confirm the
adherence of the parameters set out in the codes and standards for heat treated and heat soaked
glass. It shall be the responsibility of the agency executing the work to make sure that the
glass shall be processed as per specification and it shall be conforming to the criteria of the
respective codes and standards. The certificate from the glass processor shall be submitted that
the glass processing has been done as per specification and codal provisions have been
observed and such copy of codes shall be made available for verification of Engineer-InCharge.
Processor shall provide removable safety clips on each corner of glass and PVC button corks
on the surface of the glass as a safety measure prior to packing to avoid breakage of glass in
the corners during transit and this safety clip shall be retained till the glass is taken for glazing
in to the frame at factory. Glazed panel with broken or chipped off glass at the edges and with
any scratch on the surface of the glass shall not be allowed to use in the facade and if any such
damages are found in the glazed panel even after glazing/ erected in place shall be rejected
and shall be replaced with new one after the approval of installation methodology by
Engineer-In-Charge.
2.2.3 Gaskets
Ethylene Propylene Dinine Monomer (EPDM) gaskets as weather strip and barrier at
minimum 3 stages shall be provided with adequate fixing details to ensure water and air
ankflea ENGINEERS
51gar lafalagWIV INDIA LIMITED
Page 1599 of 1744
-enew-v-J0-'
e ndla Uric'''. NI

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 8 of 13
tightness. Weather strip shall be EPDM gaskets with hardness (5 second) shore A with a
typical value not less than 70, ultimate tensile strength of 70 (+/- 10%) kg/ sq.cm and ultimate
elongation of 250% (+/- 10%). The gaskets shall be of approved make.
2.2.4 Sealants
Silicon adhesive structural sealant having excellent properties of adhesion, elasticity, long life
(more than 10 years) and of approved make. Two part silicon shall be used having excellent
properties of adhesion, elasticity, long life (more than 10 years). The thickness and bite of
structural sealant shall be determined to withstand 3 times of the stress caused by the design
wind pressure and to ensure the same; the design calculation of sealant manufacturer shall be
submitted along with shop drawing. It shall be ensured by the agency executing the work that
the bite and thickness of sealant as designed & determined by calculation, verified and tested
by manufacture is followed in the shop drawing and the same shall be adopted for the glazing
at factory after the approval of shop drawing. The sealant and double adhesive spacer tapes for
glazing the panel shall be supplied and fixed as per specification at factory. Spacer tape shall
be open cell polyethylene of approved make. Jointing/ sealing of the glazed panel at factory
shall be done with non structural (weather) sealant/ non staining sealant of approved make
with polyurethane baker rods of approved make. Acetoxy sealant shall not be used for
structural glazing application.
2.2.5 System Supports
The supporting system shall be provided and fixed with brackets/ clamps including fastening
straps, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers etc as per design requirement and as per approved shop
drawings. Brackets/ clamps shall be of hot dip galvanized steel and fastening materials shall
be non - magnetic stainless steel 300 series - 316 grade of approved make. Galvanizing
thickness shall be in accordance with IS 2629 and 4759. Serrated plates or serrated washer
wherever required shall be provided as per the system requirement and as shown in the
approved shop drawing.
2.2.6 Smoke Seal
Smoke seal/ fire stop using extruded aluminium channel with cap shall be provided for
continuous structurally glazed framing system and in general the thickness of channel and cap
shall be 2 mm and to a width as required between transom and sill finish material and it shall
be 63400 (H9) grade conforming to IS: 8147, finished with AC25 grade architectural quality
electrolytic anodic coating conforming to IS 1868 of approved colour. Aluminium colour
anodized extruded channel shall be supported with the help of aluminium bracket as designed
and this bracket to be fixed on the wall/ RCC surface with necessary stainless steel anchor bolt
and fastener of approved make. This channel with cap shall be provided between sill finish
material and structural glazing member at sill level and between RCC member face and
structural glazing member at soffit level/ false ceiling. All the joints between the capping
channel and any other finish material at both sill and soffit level shall be sealed with
intumescent sealant of approved make. The gap on the vertical surface between the face of
column/ wall/ partition and structural glazed frame/ glass shall be closed by using extruded
aluminium channel with cap with chromotised finish aluminium bracket supported on the
column/ wall/ partition and in general the thickness of channel and cap as specified above of
approved matching colour to the mullion & transom.
2.2.7 Flashing
In addition to the smoke seal as specified above for horizontal gap between frame and sill
finish material, flashing shall be provided at all floor levels as part of the system (applicable
only for continuous structural glazing portion) made to profile as shown in the approved
drawings and the profile shall be made out of hot dip galvanized sheet 1.2 mm thick and
areTa ENGINEERS
Sigal ElliilesWINDIA LIMITED
Unn")
"vri eww-wc
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STANDARD SPECIFICATION No

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 9 of 13
galvanizing coating thickness shall be in accordance with IS 2629 & 4759. In general, the
flashing shall be provided to the entire length of structural glazing portion horizontally at all
floor levels and at terrace level with necessary anchoring system with stainless steel fastening
devices of approved make.
2.2.8 Insulation on Spandrel Panel
Rock wool Insulation- 50 mm thick - 64 kg / cum and having 'IC' value of 0.023 w/ M deg k
of approved make shall be provided conforming to IS - 8183/ BS 3958/ ASTM C 612 on the
spandrel panel area i.e. behind the ACP/ glass and for smoke seal at sill level. These wool
should be covered with black tissue factory pressed - 0.50 mm thick (Nominal Mass - 60 Kg/
cum) to conform non combustibility class - fire rating to BS 476 - Part 7 & IS 3808 and fixed
by using GI angle/ channel of required size as base and the wool shall be tied with 22 gauge
GI wire in criss-cross manner into galvanized angle/ channel to the structure and shall be
covered GI sheet tray of 1mm thick and all exposed surface shall be painted with 2 coats of
synthetic enamel paint over a coat of epoxy primer. Insulation shall be fixed to the main
aluminium frame work between mullion & transom on each side with the gap of 25 to 30 mm
from the inner surface of the glass (i.e. behind the spandrel panel glass area). All the edges
between powder coated GI tray and frame to be sealed with non staining weather silicon
sealant of approved make.
2.2.9 Top Hung Openable Window Hardware
Top/ side hung shutters shall be provided with operating hardware and as per details and
requirements of location to facilitate ventilation, cleaning/ maintenance of the glass. The
hardware shall be provided for the shutter with heavy duty self balancing stainless steel
friction hinges, corner transmission, detachable restrictor stay assembly and multi point
locking with heavy duty mechanism (minimum 9 points including corner locking point),
handle with key at centre of the transom having a ceremony. Handle/ ceremony shall be made
out of aluminium die cast with powder coat finish- 65 microns, matching to the transom
profile colour. The shutter frame shall be designed to accommodate the hinge, stay arm and
multi point lock, EPDM gaskets, fastening materials including all other necessary materials
etc. Hinge shall have thermoplastic asymmetric end cap to ensure weather tight sealing at the
ends.
Heavy duty self balancing stainless steel friction hinges, corner locking point and restrictor
stay arm assembly with release key of approved make and multi point lock (minimum 9 point)
and handle with key of approved make shall be considered. Shutter shall have a provision for
hold open option and to restrict the opening not more than 200 mm and to keep the vent
weather tight while closing the shutter. Gaskets shall be provided to ensure the air and water
tight including noise control while the shutter is closed in position and the gasket shall be
silicon synthetic rubber of required strength. Master key- 3 sets (floor wise) & Grand master
key - 3 sets (building wise) shall be provided for openable parts with necessary code engraved
on the keys.
2.2.10 Swing/ Openable Door
Page 1600 of 1744
System design in total, shall have the provision to fix the sliding/ openable door (patch fittings
door) integrating with system with necessary structural supports cladded with specified
materials and necessary hardware etc all complete to necessitate fixing the doors as a part of
the over all system.
The openable double/ single leaf door with patch fittings, hold open heavy duty floor spring,
stainless steel handle, corner lock at both top and bottom of approved make shall be provided
wherever necessary as per design Stainless strip on the edges shall be provided to protect the
laminated exposed face.
ENGINEERS
Ifraeltil
A LI MITED
kt,'"' ,INDI
A ondlillncle10-91
2.2.11
Page 1601 of 1744

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 10 of 13
Aluminium Decorative Capping

Extruded / powder coated finish aluminium decorative capping of approved colour shall be
provided on the unitized structurally glazed system using aluminium extruded clip on section
made to profile and shape as shown in the drawing including providing support profile to fix
the decorative capping for a projection not less than 150 mm or as per drawing from facade
line and shall be fixed as part of the main system including aluminium chromotised finish
support and aluminium cleat at required spacing to form a shape & profile as per drawing and
act as structural support to the decorative capping. The support shall be designed and provided
as per the approved structural calculation and drawing ensuring the screws and fastener shall
not be visible on the external surface of capping. Groove width and line of spacing shall be
maintained as in structural glazing system.
23
Visual Mock-up
A full scale visual mock-up with minimum 3 bays and for 2 floor height with combination of
vision, spandrel, spandrel on vision area, openable window, ACP cladding (if specified),
smoke seal and other special architectural features etc shall be set up to establish the actual
system design prior to proceeding with full scale production of the materials involved in the
system in case of faade design of a multistoried building in excess of four floors. A water test
shall be conducted on the installed visual mock up system (only water using hose real to the
specified pressure in the technical specification) and the test result of the system shall be
submitted for review. Any improvements required on the system based on the test result shall
be incorporated.
2.4
Test
Off-Site proto type Test:
Necessary shop drawings and design calculation shall be provided to carry out the full
scale off site proto type at an approved accredited laboratory based on the design criteria
set out in the specification and confirming to ASTM E 330 at any approved laboratory in
India and the test specimen shall be provided for minimum 3 bays and for 2 floor heights
with the combination of vision, spandrel and openable window with Glass/ ACP and any
other special features on the system as proposed to be installed and the specimen to be
tested to the design wind pressure of 125 kg/ sq.m (Testing pressure shall be 1.5 times of
the design wind pressure) conforming to IS 875 and the lateral displacement as specified
above. Fabrication at site shall commence only after the satisfactory completion of the
test and submission of test report to Engineer- In- Charge.
Field Test:
Field test at site on the installed glazing system shall be conducted as per the criteria set
out in the specification and as per the Methodology described in ASTM 501-2. Test shall
be carried out in the presence of Engineer- In- Charge. Methodology for carrying out the
test shall be submitted to Engineer- In- Charge for approval prior to testing. The results
shall be recorded and the reports shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval. If field test fails, the rectification methodology shall be submitted to correct the
defects as per the performance data set out in the specification and as per the
methodology described in the relevant code for the approval of Engineer- In- Charge.
Defects, if any noticed shall be rectified to the satisfaction of Engineer- In- Charge.
Format No. 8-00-0001-Fl Rev. 0
Sidraeiaa ENGINEERS
b,g-ar naitgWINDIA LIMITED
Ihdia U"nngi
Page 1602 of 1744
2.5

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 11 of 13
Facade Cleaning Platform/ Facade Access System/Gondola:

All the structural/ curtain glazing surfaces of the buildings shall be provided with faade
access system designed for man-riding application and to international safety systems. The
equipment shall be aesthetically designed in keeping with the building Architecture. The
faade access system shall include of floor/ slab & parapet mounted runners having
collapsible / telescopicarm including epoxy finished tracks in structural steel frame work,
stainless steel (non magnetic type of grade 316) monorail system suspended from pergola/
space frame & fixed davits installed at suitable intervals in epoxy finished structural steel
frame.
3.0
WORKMANSHIP
The framing system and fixing arrangements to the RCC framed structure shall be with
aluminium brackets. All the joints in aluminium framing system and factory glazed panels
(also between metal sections and between glass and metal sections and between glass and
metal sections) as well as joints between aluminium frame with concrete and/ or masonry
meeting surrounds shall be fully sealed and made air, water and weather tight preventing
seepage of rain water under heavy wind pressures with provision of adhesive silicon sealant
and superior quality approved make EDPM gaskets. The EDPM gasket shall be free from any
contract or migration strain and shall be compatible with all substrates. Sealant and finishes,
which are likely to come in contact shall comply with provision of IS code. The EPDM gasket
shall be purpose made by approved manufacturer.
Space at each floor level between the external face of the building frame and the internal face
of the structural glazed spandrel panel shall be sealed air tight by horizontal barrier to prevent
passage of smoke/ fire, conditioned air from one floor level to another. There shall be
continuous seal for stopping fire and smoke between the structural glazing and the building
face in cavities formed in spandrel panels between the sill wall level at external edge of one
floor and RCC/ false ceiling of the lower floor. Fire rating of the stoppers between floors shall
be minimum 2 hours.
4.0
DESIGN CRITERIA
The fixing arrangement of factory formed infill glazed grid unitized framing system shall be
designed by the structural glazing agency to withstand all external forces due to worst
condition of wind loads as per IS code applicable for the region of the proposed buildings,
earthquake forces occurring in the zone as per the IS code, building frame movement forces
due to wind and earth-quake, outside temperature experienced during last 10 years.
The structural bite or contact dimensions of silicon adhesive structural sealant to the glass
required, that is the amount of silicon adhesive structural sealant (contact width and thickness)
required to support the glass externally and internally in the panel against action of the worst
condition of the external forces such as wind earthquake forces, building movement forces,
temperature forces including their combinations etc as well as to prevent penetration of rain
water under heavy wind conditions experienced during the last 10 years in the region. It shall
be designed in accordance with the requirement of the silicon adhesive structural sealant
manufacturer and supplier, mentioning the factor of safety obtainable as per the design. In any
case the factor of safety shall not be less than 1.5.
Framing system shall fulfill the design criteria/ specifications as under:
Vertical Mullions
Indicate spacing, size and shape to comply with the

requirements of the design parameters.
Maximum Tensile Strength 19 Kg/mm2
taeJela ENGINEERS
UMITED
Ige egiegitr INDIA
(AG" I in " Undena'ng)
Page 1603 of 1744

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 12 of 13
Maximum allowable deviation in length from a straight line of

0.5mm.
Maximum allowable deviation from the straight of 1
Maximum twist of Maximum variation in flatness of not more
than 0.125 x width/ 25
Horizontal Transom
Alloy
Fixing Bolts
Gaskets
Indicate spacing, size and shape.

Extrusion shall be 6063 T6 Alloy and temper (ASTM B221
alloy G.S.10A-T6)
All exposed bolts, nuts, screws shall be of stainless steel 304 or
306 grade.
EDPM with shore hardness of 70+/- 5
Approved make Glazing tape shall be used.

5.0 DESIGN DATA
Temperature range
60 C Ambient, 100 C for Materials.
Wind Load
150 kg/sq.m
(Entire system and each component including glass in edge
zones on each side of building corners shall be designed for
heavier wind suction as required by design code)
Seismic Load
As per IS codes
Deflections
Mullions
Transoms
Max. L/240 or 15mm whichever is less

Max. L/300
Permanent deflection in Mullions

Max. L/3000 at 300 Kg/ sq.m wind pressure
Permanent deflection in transoms
Nil at 1.5 times dead load
Permanent deflection in cladding frame members
Nil at 300 Kg/ sq.m/ wind pressure
Glass panels
Max. 15mm or as recommended by glass by glass manufacturer

whichever is less (for each typical panel)
R.C.C. Grade
M 25 or higher as per specifications.
6.0 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA OF THE STRUCTURAL GLAZING

The agency executing the work shall be responsible for the quality and efficiency of the design
and application of the structural glazing technology offered. The system offered shall be
structurally sound, aesthetically pleasing and pretested in accredited laboratories certifying
performance of the whole system in accordance with the international structural glazing
standards. All necessary test certificates etc. proving compliance to all design and performance
criteria specified shall be submitted.
Page 1604 of 1744
- - ENGINEERS
lafraeige
OgZIT tetPleg Lir
_ INDIA LIMITED
^4"--esT--'
G't
Undea")

6-75-0012 Rev. 0
Page 13 of 13
The following criteria shall be fulfilled for performance:

Movement: The system shall be capable of accommodating all stress and movements that
are likely to occur during normal life of 20 years of structural glazing members and not
less than 10 years for the structural silicon sealant.
Composition of structural glazing members shall be fully adequate to totally resist any
distortion such that no distortion takes place.
Deflection: Deflection shall not be more than 1/175 of the span of the members
Plumb and alignment: All the members at each joint shall be in perfect plumb line and
alignment. Tolerances for plumb of structural glazing installed shall be within +/- 3mm.
7.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
A warranty for the entire installation carried out and for structural silicon sealant proposed to
be used vis-a-vis similar guarantee from the manufacturer of the silicon sealant to fulfill the
quality standards stipulated above shall be offered. The performance guarantee shall cover for
replacement of any or all members and components by the agency executing the work at its
own cost in case of any deficiency or failure in performance of the structural glazing
component as per the design requirement during the warranty period.
8.0 DRAWINGS AND DETAILS
Detail drawings of the structural glazing system showing framing system, connections to
building RCC frame, main framing grid unitized system comprising of male mullion, female
mullion, transoms, all connection details like bracket connection to the building RCC frame,
connection between transoms and mullions, etc (also indicating the sizes of the sections
proposed) details of the weatherproofing with EDPM gaskets, infixing details of glass/ glass
panels, joint details to withstand severe conditions of winds and rains, insulation of corrosion
proof smoke seals of flexible design and construction shall be furnished for the approval of the
Engineer-In-Charge. All necessary test certificates, documentation etc proving all the
stipulated parameters of the performance shall be produced. Wherever required and asked for,
necessary calculations shall be provided by the agency executing the work to establish the
design and performance criteria. Company profile of the proposed sub-contractor/ agency
proposed to be engaged for executing this job shall be submitted for owner's/ EIL's approval.
9.0 MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT
For the purpose of payment, the measurement shall be done on Sq. Meter basis of the executed
and finished (in all respects) work. Length and breadth of the superficial area of the finished
work shall be measured centre to centre of the grooves on the external surface viewed
externally correct to a centimeter under the respective items. Areas shall be calculated in a
square meter correct to two places of decimal.
Rate shall include the cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations as
specified, to execute the work as per approved drawings/ shop drawings including scaffolding,
infrastructure facility, tools and plants etc necessary for execution of the respective item for all
height and for all floor levels. Items shall be measurable in sq. m. Rate shall include all
components and procedure including all fixing as described in this specification including
supply of glass, supply of hardware for top hung window, aluminium decorative capping, cost
of off site proto type test and insulation tray on spandrel.
51gar
Page 1605 of 1744
fib ENGINEERS
laWdg W INDIA LIMITED
9,enrutnavani)
0 Goy' ct !nem undenakmg)
FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 10
cik3)
ffikhr
FOR
UPVC DOORS, WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
0
Rev.
No
07.11.11
ISSUED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD SPECIFICATION STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.

6-75-0013 Rev. 0
VENTILATORS
Page 2 of 10
OPIZAgra ENGINEERS
UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
oaf we low INDIA LIMITED FOR
Page 1606 of 1744
Goa of India undertaking)
Abbreviations:
BIS
EPDM
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (rubber)
IGBC
Indian Green Building Council
IS
Indian Standards
NBC
National Building Code of India
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
SHGC
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient
UPVC
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride
VCM
Vinyl Chloride Monomer
VOC
Volatile Organic Compound

Convenor :
Mr. J.K.Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S.Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
Mr. M.P.Jain (Projects)
Page 1607 of 1744
OWE?
.
s'g7 fararG
FOR
INDIA LIMITED
VENTILATORS
ENGINEERS
if, Gov( of India Manakin')
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 10
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
CODES & SPECIFICATIONS
3.0
TERMINOLOGY
4.0
MATERIALS
5.0
CONSTRUCTION
6.0
UPVC DOOR/WINDOW/VENTILATOR FRAME
7.0
UPVC DOOR SHUTTER
8.0
UPVC WINDOW & VENTILATOR
9.0
WORKMANSHIP
10.0
OTHER REQUIREMENTS
10
11.0
MEASUREMENT
10
Page 1608 of 1744
laraae?
Slg7
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov/ ol Inas Undeplaking).
FOR UPVC DOORS,WINDOWS &
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 4 of 10
1.0 GENERAL
This standard specification lays down the requirements for types, sizes, construction,
workmanship and methods for testing of UPVC profiled paneled door and windows used in
buildings .
The profile extrusions used in manufacturing of the door and windows covered in this
standard are UPVC sections.
2.0 CODES & SPECIFICATIONS

Latest revisions of Codes, Specifications and other documents shall be referred to wherever
mentioned or otherwise applicable. Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards
In case of any
for further information etc. not covered in the specification.
conflict/contradiction the provisions of the specification shall override.
IS: 4020
Door shutters- Methods of test
IS: 4020 (Part 2):1998
Measurement of dimensions and squareness (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 3):1998
Measurement of general flatness (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 5):1998
Impact indentation test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 7):1998
Edge loading test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 8):1998
Shock resistance test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 9):1998
Buckling test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 10):1998
Slamming test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Parts 11):1998
Misuse test (third revision)
IS 4020 (Part 16):1998
Screw withdrawal test (third revision)
IS 4669: 1968
Method of test of polyvinyl chloride resins
IS 4905: 1968
Method of random sampling
IS 4985: 2000
Specification for UPVC pipes for potable water

supplies (third revision)
IS 6307: 1985
Specification for rigid PVC sheets (first revision)
IS 10428: 1983
Glossary of terms relating to doors
IS 13360
Plastics- Methods of Testing
IS 13360 (Part 3/ Sec 1): 1995 Part 3: Physical and dimensional properties- Sec 1:
determination of density and relative density of non-cellular
plastics.
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 2): 1996 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 2: Determination of tensile
properties- Test conditions for moulding and extrusion
plastics.
Page 1609 of 1744
saf=aire?
Sig,ar ooreG
.
ENGINEERS
FOR
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gout el India Undertalow
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 5 of 10
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 4): 1996 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 4: Determination of Izod
impact strength.
IS 13360 (Part 5/ Sec 24): 1999 Part 5: Mechanical properties- Sec 24: Determination of
impact resistance by the free fall dart method-Instrument
puncture test.
IS 13360 (Part 6/ Sec 17): 1997 Part 6: Thermal properties- Sec 17: Determination of
temperature of defection under load- Plastics and ebonite.
3.0
TERMINOLOGY
For the purpose of this standard, the definitions given in IS 10428, and the following shall
apply.
3.1
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC)

A compound based on a polymer (resin) prepared by the polymerization of vinyl chloride as
essentially the sole monomer (vinyl chloride content not less than 99 percent)
3.2
Compound
An intimate admixture of a polymer with all the materials necessary for the finished product.
3.3
Rework Material
A plastic from a processor's own production that has been reground, palletized, or solvated
after having been previously processed by moulding or extrusion.
3.4
Extrusion
A process in which heated or unheated plastic is forced through a shaping orifice (a die) in one
continuously formed shape, as in film, sheet, rod or tubing.
3.5
Fabrication
The manufacture of plastic products from moulded parts, rods, tubes, sheeting, extrusions or
other forms by appropriate operations such as punching, cutting, drilling and tapping including
fastening plastic parts together or to other parts by mechanical devices, adhesives, heat sealing
or other means.
3.6
Blister
An imperfection, a rounded elevation of the surface of a plastic, with boundaries that may be
more or less sharply defined, somewhat resembling in shape a blister on a human skin.
3.7
Pit
An imperfection, a small carter in the surface of the plastic, with its width of approximately in
the same order of magnitude as its depth.
3.8
Shrink Mark
An imperfection or a depression in the surface of a moulded material, where it has retracted
from the mould.
4.0
MATERIALS
4.1
Type
The material from which the profile is produced shall substantially consist of UPVC to which
may be added to those additives that are needed to facilitate manufacture of sound and durable
profile of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use. None
of the additives shall be used separately or together in quantities sufficient to constitute
Page 1610 of 1744
SZilrEad ft ENGINEERS
FOR
51g7 talWeg W INDIA LIMITED
IA GoA of India Linden...01
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 6 of 10
a toxic, organoleptic or microbial growth hazard, or materially to impair the fabrication or

welding properties of the profile or to impair its chemical and physical or mechanical
properties (in particular long term mechanical strength and impact strength) as defined in this
standard. The additives to be used shall be selected from IS 10148 and shall be uniformly
dispersed.
The monomer content (VCM content) in the resin shall be within the limit specified in 3.3.1of
IS 10151 when tested in accordance with the Annex A of IS 10151. The composition shall be
based on PVC resin having a K-value of 64 or greater when tested in accordance with IS 4669.
When tested in accordance with IS 13360 (Part 5), the UPVC compound in the extruded
sections shall have following properties:
Tensile strength and tensile modulus not less than 38MPa and 200MPa, respectively.
The Izod impact strength of notch specimen not less than 107 Joules/metre.
(c) The deflection temperature of the notch specimen not less than 65C.
The specimens of the UPVC compound in extruded sections after 6 months and 1 year of
weathering shall maintain uniform colour and be free of any visual surface or structural
changes such as peeling, chipping, cracking, flaking and pitting.
NOTE: Weathering requirements are to reflect performance of a typical extrusion
system profile representing a specific UPVC compound and a specific extrusion
technology. The lengthy outdoor weatherability testing shall be performed
concurrently with development of new applications. Completion of weatherability
testing prior to the use of a product is however not required. The manufacturer shall
perform weatherability test when a change is made in either compounding or
extrusion technique.
The average extent of burn of the UPVC compound shall not exceed 100mm and the average
time of burn shall not exceed lOsec.
4.2
Rework Material
The manufacture shall use only its own clean rework material of the same compound and the
extruded profiles produced shall meet all the requirements of this specification.
5.0
CONSTRUCTION
5.1
Manufacturing of UPVC Profile Sections

Appropriate amount of PVC resin and other ingredients are blended in a high intensity mixer
using standard blending procedures. The final mix temperature is fixed in the range of 105C
to 115C. The compound UPVC is then loaded into the hopper of the extruder and is propelled
continuously along a screw through regions of high temperature and pressure, where it is
melted and compressed. Subsequently, molten UPVC is forced through a die to give the final
profiles of desired sizes. The resulting profiles are water cooled, dried and conditioned.
5.2
Thickness and size of Profile Sections

The wall thickness of the profile sections shall be minimum 2mm for the stiles, top rail,
middle rail, bottom rail, shutter frames in case of doors, and for outer frames,
mullions/transoms in case of windows.
The shutter infill panel shall have minimum wall thickness of I mm.
The size used shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile as per drawing.
Page 1611 of 1744
satRise?
5Ig(zirtiReg
6.0
FOR
INDIA LIMITED
ENGINEERS
IA Go4 of India
unattaking)
VENTILATORS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 7 of 10
UPVC DOOR/WINDOW/VENTILATOR FRAME

UPVC door/window/ventilator frame shall confirm to IS: 10151
The door frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile. The frame shall be
also be reinforced at the corners with special polymetric /steel reinforcements of suitable
dimensions. The corner joints shall be mitre cut and welded or joined by means of concealed
cleats with necessary screws and fittings. A tie rod shall be provided at the bottom of the door
frame.
The window and ventilator frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and profile.
The entire frame shall be steel reinforced to increase the structural integrity. The corner,
transom/mullion joints shall be mitre cut and fusion welded
The frame used for door, windows and ventilators shall be free from all sharp edges and burls
Frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of 300mm x 25mm x 6mm PVC hold fasts
screwed to the frame and grouted with M-20 grade concrete in a minimum 350mm x 100mm x
100mm sized hole in the masonry.
7.0
UPVC DOOR SHUTTER
7.1
Fabrication of UPVC Door Shutter

The UPVC door shutter shall be manufactured from extruded UPVC profile sections of stiles,
rails and panel inserts. Shutter frames (top rails, bottom rails and stiles) shall be mitre cut and
joined at the corners with t" shaped polymeric corner reinforcements of suitable dimensions
and shall be fitted with counter sunk fully threaded parallel shank steel screws. The infill
panels shall be made out of seamless one piece multi-chambered PVC extruded sections of
required length and width, joined by tongue and groove jointing. Other hardware locations
shall be reinforced with polymeric reinforcements of suitable dimension Middle rails shall be
made out of PVC extruded sections.
7.2
Sizes and Types

Sizes of UPVC profile door shutters shall conform to the specific requirements indicated in
drawings.
The nominal thickness of the door shutters shall be 24mm, 30mm and 37mm corresponding to
each of the size designations as indicated in Table-1. For the non-modular sizes the thickness
of the door shall not be less the thickness specified for the nearest higher modular size. For
sizes greater than that specified in the Table-1, The thickness of the door shutter shall be as
agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser but not less than 37mm. The tolerance on
the thickness of door shutters shall be 1mm
7.3
Location of Fittings and Accessories

The UPVC door shutters shall be fixed to UPVC or mild steel (see IS: 4351), or wooden (see
IS: 4021) door frame with three anodized aluminium/stainless steel hinges of required size.
The thickness of hinges shall be minimum 2mm. Appropriate marking of holes on the door
shutters as well as on the door frames shall be made where hardware such as hinges, handles,
towerbolts, aldrops and mortice locks are to be fixed. Pre-drilling of pilot hole of 3mm shall
be made on the frame prior to fixing of hinges at 100mm below the top and 100mm above the
bottom. The remaining hinge shall be placed at one third distance between top and bottom
hinges.
Corner reinforcements of minimum overall dimensions of 100mm x 200mm (for 24mm thick
shutter), 100mm x 225mm (for 37mm thick shutter) and 125mm x 210mm (for 30mm thick
shutter) shall be used.
Oft&
ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
FOR
UPVC
DOORS,WINDOWS &
fElIkteG,
IA Goat at India Undertaking)
VENTILATORS
Page 1612 of 1744
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 8 of 10
Finish
The surface of shutters shall be smooth, straight and free from any visual defects such as pin
holes, blistering, colour bolts, cracking, pitting, shrink mark etc. The profile shall be uniform
in colour as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Defective spots shall be
duly repaired and finished to make them non-noticeable. All the four edges of door shutters
shall be square and free from twist and wrap.
Test
Necessary test certificates as per this clause shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval along with necessary relevant documentation before procurement of material at site.
Test Requirements for UPVC Profiles used for Door Shutters
When tested in accordance with IS: 13360, Annex B, D, E (as applicable) the profiles shall
have following properties:
Dimensional Stability: the shrinkage in the profile shall be less than 3 percent
Impact Resistance: The impact on profile shall neither result in cracking nor in
development of holes, split or shatter

Extrusion Quality: The profile shall not flake or disintegrate. A surface attack not
exceeding 25 percent shall be considered as adequately fused and of satisfactory quality.
Density: the density of UPVC profiles used for door shutters shall be between 1.40 and
1.46
(e) Sulphated Ash Content: The sulphated ash content in the profile shall not exceed 11
percent.
7.5.2
Test Requirements for UPVC Door Shutters
When tested in accordance with IS: 4020 (Parts 2,3,5,7,8,9,10,11,16- as applicable) the door
shutters shall comply to following properties:
Dimensions and Squareness: The length and width of door shutters shall be within
tolerance of 3mm of the normal size. The tolerance on thickness of different

components of door shutters (stiles and rails) shall be 1mm. The thickness of door
shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8mm
when measured between any two points. The door shutter shall not deviate from
squareness of its adjacent edges at all the four corners by more than 1mm on a length of
500mm.
General Flatness: Cupping and warping in door shutters shall not exceed 1.5mm.
Impact Indentation: The depth of indentation in door shutter shall not be more than
0.2mm
Slamming: There shall be no visible damage caused in any part of the shutter after
successive slamming actions.
Misuse: There shall not be any permanent deformation of the fixing or any part of the
door hindering its normal working after the test.
Edge Loading: The deflection of the edge at the maximum load shall not be more than
1 Omm. the residual deflection after removal of load from the edge of door shall not be
more than 1mm, failing which the test may be repeated on the other edge in reverse
direction. There shall also not be any lateral buckling greater than 5mm during loaded
condition and residual lateral buckling in the door after removal of the load shall not be
more than 1mm.
Shock Resistance: There shall be no visible damage or permanent deterioration of the
shutter either after the soft and light body impact testing or after the soft and heavy body
impact testing.
Screw Withdrawal Resistance: There shall be no visible damage or permanent
deterioration of the shutter either after the soft and light body impact testing or after the
soft and heavy body impact testing.
Page 1613 of 1744
15iraatqaft ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
FOR
sig-9 EllWreg VP
VENTILATORS
IA Geri of India undertaking)
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 9 of 10
(i) Buckling: The shutter shall not show any deterioration and the residual shall not be more
than 10mm after 15mins. of unloading. The internal deflection under a load of 400N (40
Kgf) should not be more than 100mm.
8.0
UPVC WINDOW & VENTILATOR
8.1
Fabrication of UPVC Window and Ventilator

The window and ventilators sections shall be of hollow, multi chambered with steel
reinforcement with an outer wall of 2mm thickness
The window and ventilator outer frames shall be of specified sectional size, dimension and
profile. The entire frame shall be steel reinforced to increase the structural integrity. These
reinforcements shall be secured to UPVC profiles at a maximum of 100 mm from the ends and
at a maximum of 400mm centers. The screws used for securing the reinforcements shall be
self-tapping type. The corner, transom/mullion joints shall be mitre cut and fusion welded.
The frame used for windows and ventilators shall be free from all sharp edges and burls. The
window unit shall be designed such that water does not pass through reinforcement chamber.
All outer frames of the window and ventilator exposed to external faade shall be provided
with drainage slots with a minimum 5mm wide and 30mm long. All outer frames, transom,
mullions shall be provided with weather seals
8.2
Installation and Fixing

Frames shall be fixed to the masonry by means of 300mmx25mmx6mm PVC hold fasts
screwed to the frame and grouted with M-20 grade concrete in a minimum
350mmx100mmx100mm sized hole in the masonry
8.3
Hardware and Fittings

All hardware including its fittings shall be of material resistant to atmospheric corrosion. The
hardware shall be fixed through the reinforcement and the screw shall penetrate the
reinforcement by at least 2mm.
Openable type window shall be provided with cockspur handles where as the top hung type
window shall be provided with espagnolette handles with all necessary locking arrangement,
fittings and other hardware required for the proper operation of the windows. The handles
shall be made up of zinc and shall be of the powder coated type or as per the coating listed in
the bid/ instructed by the company. The colour, finish and texture of the handles shall be of
the same finish of the window.
The openable windows shall be provided with traid friction stays made up of high quality
stainless steel and nylon components. It shall be fitted to window with a weatherseal. The side
hung friction stays shall open the window at 90 angle and the top hung windows to a
maximum angle of 85.These shall be fixed to window section using stainless steel rivets.
8.4
Glass Panels
Glass panels for glazing purpose shall be 6.3mm thick laminated glass conforming to IS:
2553, and shall have properly square corners and straight edges. It should meet the SHGC
standards specified by IGBC.
9.0
WORKMANSHIP
The profile and type of door, windows, ventilators (glazed, partly glazed/louvered, side
hung/top hung/fixed shutter, composite) shall be as per drawings.
The frame shall be fabricated to true right angles.
Page 1614 of 1744
LIMITED
FOR
51g7 sapegwINDIA
IAA of India Undeptkpng)
VENTILATORS
15iliaattia
ENGINEERS
6-75-0013 Rev. 0
Page 10 of 10
The frame shall be constructed of sections cut to size and mitred and fusion welded.
The side hung and top hung windows shall be fixed to outer frame with necessary hardware
and fittings as specified.
The handles and other hardware (hinges, towerbolts, aldrops and mortice lock) for doors shall
be of stainless steel and for windows shall be of stainless steel or zinc as approved by the
company.
In case of composite Door/window/ventilator units, the units shall be coupled as per drawing.
Weather bar shall be provided where ever coupling member is fitted over an external opening.
Drainage slots in all sections exposed to outside conditions shall be provided.
Glazing shall be bonded to the extruded sections using adhesive tape and then concealed with
proper beading. Glass panes shall be provided with EPDM gasket/rubber lining before fixing.
The outer frames of door and windows shall be fixed to masonry by means of PVC holdfasts
and grouted with M-20 grade concrete hole in the masonry as per drawing.
The windows/ventilators/doors shall be checked to ensure smooth operation, perfect level and
plumb.
10.0 OTHER REQUIREMENTS
UPVC material used for making of doors, windows and ventilators shall have recyclable
content.
Silicon sealant shall be provided in between gaps of walls and frame to prevent heat gain and
loss so as to reduce air conditioning requirement within the building. The sealant and
adhesives used in windows shall have low VOC contents.
The window or ventilator when casted in the wall shall be capable to keep away the
environmental pollutants, like sand, dust, smoke and noise. It should be suitably strengthened
to withstand strong winds without producing whistling and rattling sound. The windows shall
able to achieve U-value ratings as prescribed by IGBC.
11.0 MEASUREMENT
Measurement & rates for item rate tender shall be on Sq.M basis as per item description.
Area shall be measured correct upto two places of decimal. Dimensions shall be measured
correct upto 0.5 cm.
A composite unit of various designations shall be first measured overall as a unit of
predominant designations and measurement for remaining designations shall be deducted from
quantities for various
the overall measurement of the composite unit in order to arrive at the
designations. Mullions/Transoms/Coupling bars -etc. at the, meeting points of various
designations shall be equally distributed to all such designations for measurement and rates.
Rates shall include costs of all materials, specified hardware, labour, erection, hoisting,
scaffolding, removal of scaffolding, protective measures, conveyance, handling, loading/
unloading, storing etc. required for the proper completion of the item of work in accordance
with the specification.
si
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED WASH BASIN FIXING DETAIL
eiek
a
faVeg
WWI
eircrweanatrami
IA Govt of India UnaertakInw
STANDARD No.
7-75-0064 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
550
MINIMUM
MIRROR
00
SOAP CONTAINER
TOWER RAIL
TAPS
0
10
CO
BOTTLE TRAP
WASTE PIPE
EMBEDED IN WALL
TILES/STONE FINISH
AS/SPECS.
GRATING
FLOOR TRAP
ELEVATION
MS BRACKETS
FLOOR TRAP
BELOW
WASH BASIN
TOWEL RAIL
PLAN
09.11.11
REVISED & REISSUED
21.03.07
Rev.
No
Date
Formal Na 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.O

Page 1615 of 1744
Purpose
DK 114".
.3/14
AllARJIT
Prepared
by
a>
MAY KUMAR
vxmmeam
ARVIND KUMAR
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
D.MALHOWA
GM (E)
Stds Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright Et-All rights reserved
agra-e?ft ENGINEERS
azir 051eg itill INDIA LIMITED
114reff AMA? eln W
STANDARD No.
SKIRTING DETAIL
(WITH R.C.C. COLUMN)
7-75-0003 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RCC COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
TILE ADHESIVE
TILE SKIRTING
TILE SKIRTING
RCC COLUMN
Ul
TILE FLOOR FINISH

FLOOR BASE
TILE ADHESIVE
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
CHAMFER OF TILES
AT 45* ANGLE
PLAN
SECTION B-B
(TILE SKIRTING)
RCC COLUMN
CEMENT PLASTER
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)
STONE SKIRTING
a
STONE SKIRTING
RCC COLUMN
en
STONE FLOOR FINISH

FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(I CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
I .
CHAMFER OF ST ONE
AT 45' ANGLE
'
PLAN
SECTION A-A
(STONE SKIRTING)
4
25.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
D Kiev'
15.02.07
AMARJIT
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001+4 Rev.0

Page 1616 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
JKALL.J103/5D
Checked
by
ARVIND KUMAR
\((/' C\11\
MAY KUMAR
2171nL
DMALNOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1617 of 1744
Page 1618 of 1744
Page 1619 of 1744
Page 1620 of 1744
Page 1621 of 1744
Page 1622 of 1744
Page 1623 of 1744
Page 1624 of 1744
Page 1625 of 1744
Page 1626 of 1744
Page 1627 of 1744
Page 1628 of 1744
FOR WOOD WORK
1511atzitte ENGINEERS
iaMegW INDIA
UMITED
. Gog. Inks linden:1mm
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 8
co 19 co
1-1
- 4)
11 1
FOR
WOODWORK
C v,,,,A
15.03.12
flee")
21.03.07
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
11.03.99
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
16.03.94
.15
.15
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKO
RNS
Rev.
No
JK41;,..-PD
SD
D. MALHOTRA
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION

SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ISRaela
ENGINEERS
s'fr
Page 1629 of 1744
elertIleAelaw../
Wie' INDIA LIMITED

IA GoA We UndertaA091

WOOD WORK
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 8
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
IS

British Standards
Indian Standards

Convenor :
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
5 I I=
ea Eq e. .A ENGINEERS
clan taWlegNiW INDIA LIMITED
Page 1630 of 1744
7.;.,.,-..,....,
IA Gent d AML
unantakm

WOOD WORK
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 8
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 MATERIALS
3.0 WOODEN DOOR/ WINDOW FRAME
4.0 DOOR SHUTTERS
Page 1631 of 1744
lalfaag ie ENGINEERS
LII
taf5eg r INDIA LIMITED

y
01 fl aetriR tILTIOM/
IA Gal of India UnciertStm)

WOOD WORK
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 8
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for any further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction, provisions of specification
shall override.
IS 204 Part-I
Specification for Tower bolts

Part-1: Ferrous metals
IS 204 Part-2
Specification for Tower bolts

Part-2: Non- Ferrous metals
IS 205
Specification for non ferrous metal butt hinges
IS 208
Specification for Door handles
IS 303
Specification for plywood for general purposes.
IS 848
Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic

and amino plastic)
IS 1003 Part-1
Specification for Timber paneled and glazed shutters

Part-1: Door shutters
IS 1003 Part-2
Specification for Timber paneled and glazed shutters

Part 2: Window and Ventilator
IS 1341
Specification for steel butt hinges.
IS 2202 Part-1
Specifications for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)

Part 1: Plywood face panels.
IS 2202 Part-2
Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)

Part 2: Particle board and hardboard face panels
IS 2209
Specification for mortise locks- (vertical type)
IS 2338
Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials.

(Part I & II)
IS 2835
Specification for flat transparent sheet glass.
IS 3087
Specification for particle boards at wood & other lingno cellulosic

material (medium density) for general purposes.
IS 3097
Specification for veneered particle boards.
IS 3564
Specification for hydraulically regulated door closers.
IS 4021
Specification for timber door, window and ventilator frames.
IS 5437
Specification for figured rolled and wired glass.
45ifiS
tael
ligtar
tevreg
p
Page 1632 of 1744
lasm Amami
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED WOOD WORK
IA GAN a
MATERIALS
2.1
Timber
2.1.1
Teakwood
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 8
.m Undeflak..01
IS 6315
2.0
Specification for floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy

doors.
Teakwood shall be second class Indian Teakwood conforming to IS 4021 of good quality,
well seasoned and free from defects such as cracks, dead knots, sapwood etc. No individual
hard and sound knot shall be more than 15 sq.cm . in size and the aggregate area of such knots
shall not exceed 1.5% of the area of the piece. The timber shall be fairly close grained having
not less than 2 growth rings per cm. width in cross section.
2.1.2
Hard Wood
Hard wood shall be first class wood conforming to IS: 4021 of good quality, well seasoned
and free from defects such as dead knots, cracks, sapwood etc. No individual hard and sound
knot shall exceed 6 sq. Cm. in size with no dimension more than 50 mm and the aggregate
area of such knots shall not be more than 1% of the area of the piece. There shall not be less
than 5 growth rings per cm. Width in cross-sections.
2.1.3
Moisture content in timber

The maximum permissible percentage of moisture content for well seasoned timber shall be as
per IS:287.
2.1.4
Workmanship of wood work

Workmanship for wood and joinery shall be as per IS:1200 and IS:4021.
2.1.5
Painting/polishing of wood work

Painting/polishing of wood work shall be in accordance with specification No. 6-75-0007.
2.2
Particle Board
Particle board shall conform to IS:3097 and shall be three layer flat pressed teakwood based
and of exterior grade (Grade-I), type-1, BWP type, bonded with phenol Formaldehyde
Synthetic resin conforming to IS:848.
2.3
MDF (Medium density fibre) Board

Medium density fibre board shall conform to IS:12406 interior grade (EGSB). It shall be
dense, homogenous and manufactured from agrobased lignocelluosic fibres bonded with BWP
type phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin conforming to IS:848. It shall be categorised as
class 1 for 'Surfaces of very low flame spread' as per IS:1642.
2.4
Block Board
Block board shall conform to IS:2202 and shall be made of solid Core block board. Teak
wood beading of minimum 12mm thickness shall be fixed to the exposed edges of the boards.
Page 1633 of 1744
ISillane?Ift
m ENGINEERS
real
s INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt al incha undenalorg)
2.5

WOOD WORK
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 8
Veneers
Veneers shall conform to class-1 of IS:303 or BS:476 Part-7.

2.6
Fittings & Fixtures
2.6.1
Hinges
Hinges shall be of Extruded Aluminum Alloy or steel and butt type conforming to IS:205/
IS:1341. Size of hinges shall be minimum 125mm long. Maximum spacing of hinges shall
not exceed 600mm c/c.
2.6.2
Overhead Hydraulic Door Closer
Overhead hydraulic door closers shall be of heavy duty type and shall conform to IS:3564.
2.6.3
Floor Mounted Door Closer
Floor mounted door closers shall be of heavy duty type and hydraulically operated and shall
conform to IS:6315.
2.6.4
Mortice Lock
Mortice locks shall be of chromium plated brass body and shall have 6 levers and pair of
handles of pressure die cast zinc alloy (satin finished). Mortice locks shall conform to
IS:2209.
2.6.5
Door Handles
Door handles shall be of pressure die cast zinc alloy and shall be chromium plated.
2.6.6
Aldrop
Aldrop shall be 300 mm long and minimum 18mm dia.
2.6.7
Tower Bolts
Tower bolts shall conform to IS:204.

2.6.8
Door Stopper
Door stoppers shall consist of heavy duty rubber shoes spring loaded type with zinc alloy
pressure die cast chromium plated holders.
2.6.9
Toilet Door Latch
Toilet Door latch shall be with Vacant/occupied indicator.

2.6.10 Coat & Hat Hook
Coat & Hat hooks for Toilet doors shall be of chromium plated brass body or stainless steel.
2.7
Glazing
Page 1634 of 1744
15i12ZA
ENGINEERS
1g-,ar Meg vir INDIA UMITED
(A Govt 01 k7110 Underla n91

WOOD WORK
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 8
Glass sheets for glazing shall be i) 4 mm thick plain glass (wt. 7.2 kg/m2) conforming
IS:2835, or ii) 5.5 mm thick toughened glass conforming to IS:5437 as specified .
Glass sheets shall be free from flaws, scratches, cracks, bubbles etc.
3.0
WOODEN DOOR/ WINDOW FRAME

Wooden Door/Window frame shall be made of specified wood and shall be in accordance
with detailed drawings.
The wooden members of the frame shall be planed smooth and accurate to the full dimensions.
Rebates, rounding, moulding etc. shall be done before the members are joined into frames.
Joints in the frame work shall be perfect with square edges and shall be pinned with hard
wood/bamboo pins of 10 to 15 mm dia.
Wood work shall be painted/polished or otherwise treated as specified. All exposed portions
shall be coated with wood primer and concealed surface by bituminous paints as per
specification No. 6-75-0007.
Before any surface treatment is applied, the wood work shall be got approved by the Engineerin-charge. The frames shall be fixed to the masonry by 300mm x 25mm x 6mm MS hold fasts
embedded in M-15 grade concrete size of 350mm x 100mm x 100mm in the hole of masonry.
In case of concrete, frames shall be fixed by 12mm dia metallic anchor fasteners.
4.0
DOOR SHUTTERS
Door shutters shall be complete with all operational fittings & fixtures like hinges, overhead
hydraulic door closers, Tower bolts, Locking device, handles, door stopper etc.
4.1
Block Board Flush Shutter

Block board flush shutter shall conform to IS:2202. The shutter shall be 35mm thick and shall
be made of solid core block board. Teak wood beading of minimum 12mm thickness fixed to
the perimeter of the shutter. The shutter shall be faced on both sides with following finishes
as specified and shall be factory made.
3mm thick commercial type plywood conforming to IS:303, BS:476 part-7 finished
with 2 coats of approved quality synthetic enamel paint over primer coat or
Approved quality lmm thick teakwood veneering conforming to IS:303, BS:476, part
7 or
C.
lmm thick approved quality lamination of approved shade.
The edges of the shutters shall either be painted with synthetic enamel paint or french
polished.
4.2
Panel Door Shutter

Panel door shutter shall be 35mm thick and shall consist of 100mm x 35mm teakwood stiles &
top rai1,200mm x 35mm bottom rail and 150mm x 35mm lock rail and 12mm thick particle
board infill panels. The infill panels shall be fixed with adhesive and moulded Teakwood
beadings (minimum 12.5mm x 12.5mm size).
45ilftee ENGINEERS
7 OfAtalie NIAA LIMITED
6-75-0003 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 8
The shutter shall be painted with 2 coats of approved shade synthetic enamel paint or
polyurethane paint as specified over approved coat of primer.
Page 1635 of 1744

WOOD WORK
4.3
Glazed Wooden Door Shutter

Glazed wooden door shutter shall be 38mm thick and shall consist of 100mm x 38mm
Teakwood stiles and top rail, 200mm x 38mm bottom rail and 150mm x 38mm thick lock rail.
4mm thick plain glass or 5.5mm thick toughened glass panels shall be fixed in the stiles &
rails with neoperene adhesive and 12.5mm x 12.5mm moulded Teakwood beading. All the
wood work shall be painted with 2 coats of approved shade synthetic enamel paint or
polyurethane paint or shall be French polished as specified over a coat of primer.
4.4
Flymesh Door Shutter

Flymesh door shutter shall be 38mm thick and shall consist of 100mm x 38mm Teakwood
stiles and top rail, 200mm x 38mm bottom rail and 150mm x 38mm thick lock rail and net of
SS/ galvanised MS wire gauge of IS gauge designation 856 & dia 0.56mm fixed with
moulded Teakwood beading. The shutter including wiremesh shall be painted with 2 coats of
approved shade synthetic enamel paint or polyurethane paint or French polished as specified
over a coat of primer.
5.0
MEASUREMENT & RATE

For item rate tenders wood work in door/window frames shall be measured in Cu.M.
Door/window shutters shall be measured in Sq.M. Hardware and fittings like locks, tower
bolts, door closer etc. shall be counted in numbers provided. Length and width shall be
measured to the nearest 0.01 M. Area and volume shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01
Sq.M and 0.001 Cu.M
Rate for item rate tenders shall include all materials, labour, erection, protective measures,
transport, conveyance, storage and other incidental expenditures as required for completion of
the items.
&wag
faffleg
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
METAL SHEET
FLASHING DETAIL
IA Gov! at India Undertaking)
7-75-0091 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 2
DETAILA
RIDGE PIECE
ROOF MONITOR
BIRD MESH
TURBO/AIR DRIVEN
ROOF EXTRACTOR
TRANSLUCENT SHEET
METAL SHEET ROOFING
STEEL TRUSS/PORTAL
AS/STRUCTURE
METAL SHEET
LOUVERS
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
METAL SHEET
LOUVERS
APPROACH
1ROAD LEVEL/HPP
TYPICAL SECTION
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
RIDGE PIECE
PLAIN SHEET
RIDGE PIECE
METAL
SHEET ROOFING
PLAIN SHEET
CORNER PIECE
(MINIMUM 200X200)
STEEL PURLIN
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
(GABLE END)
STEEL TRUSS
PORTAL
DETAIL-A
CORNER PIECE
FLASHING DETAIL
(RIDGE FLASHING DETAIL)
(ROOF AND GABLE END CLADDING)
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
2. THIS STANDARD INDICATES VARIOUS ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND FLASHING DETAILS OF SHEDS.
PROVISION OF FEATURES (ROOF MONITOR, ROOF EXTRACTOR, TRANSLUCENT SHEET, LOUVERS) AND THEIR
SIZES, LOCATION ETC SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT DRAWINGS.
3. MATERIAL, THICKNESS AND OTHER DETAILS OF ROOFING, CLADDING, ACCESORIES (RIDGE FLASHING, CORNER
PIECE, EAVES PIECE, APRON PIECE AND OTHER FLASHING) AND BIRD MESH SHALL BE AS PER PROJECT
SPECIFICATION.
of
0
Rev.
No.
17.01.2013 ISSUED AS STANDARD

Date
Page 1636 of 1744
Purpose
S..::a
arD.IIALHOTRA
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds.Committee
GM
Stds. Bureau
Convenor TET-i= Chairman
Approved by
triarae_Jei
514721 ft}
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
METAL SHEET
FLASHING DETAIL
IA Goo of India Undertaking)
7-75-0091 Rev. 0
Page 2 of 2
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
STEEL PURLIN
40 x 6 MS
FLAT WIND TIE
STEEL TRUSS/
PORTAL
STEEL COLUMN
75 (MINIMU
PLAIN SHEET
EAVES PIECE
STEEL TRUSS/
PORTAL
STEEL PURLIN
STEEL COLUMN
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
DETAIL-B
(ALTERNATIVE-1)
DETAIL-B
(ALTERNATIVE-2)
EAVES FLASHING DETAIL
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
40 x 6 MS
FLAT WIND TIE
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
11111111111
4
3/413/41/.1
:
4
5
STEEL PURLIN
PLAIN SHEET
CORNER PIECE
(MINIMUM 200OC700)
BIRD MESH
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
DETAIL-C
CORNER PIECE FLASHING DETAIL

(SIDE AND GABLE END CLADDING)
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
METAL SHEET
CLADDING
PLAIN SHEET
FLASHING
z
PLAIN SHEET
APRON PIECE
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
METAL SHEET
ROOFING
STEEL PURLIN
STEEL TRUSS/
PORTAL
FLASH NG DETAIL
(VERTICAL CLADDING AND ROOF)
0
Rev.
No.
17.01.2013 ISSUED AS STANDARD

Date

Page 1637 of 1744
DETAIL-D
(APRON FLASHING DETAIL)
Purpose
SD
Prepared
by
Checked
by
JKDJ
S.CMIURVEDI D.MMI4O1RA
GM Stds. Bureau
Stds.Commateo ( CTRL
AR CH
Convenor
Chairman
GEO TECH)
Approved by
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED GLAZED ALUMINIUM WINDOW
/A
Page 1 of 1
RCC BEAM/
LINTEL
CEMENT
PLASTER
SECTION 20919
SECTION 19428
r1
1
7-75-0015 Rev. 4
Govt 01 Incha Undertaking}
GLASS
0
SH
SH
SECTION 1 1
GLASS
S
ELEVATION
SECTION 19428
(F -FIX ED GLAZING)
(SH -SIDE HUNG SHUTTER)
SECTION 20916
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
SECTION
GLASS
20899
20916
20899
19428
SECTION 19428
GLASS
SECTION 2-2
GLASS
INSIDE
SECTION 6-6
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20919
SECTION 7-7
CEMENT
GLASS
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20916
GLASS
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
SECTION 20919
SECTION 19428
GLASS
BRICK WALL sr.E
SECTION 3-3
GLASS
SECTION 19428
SECTION 20916
SECTION 8-8
t
23.00
SECTION 9-9
t
0
0
63.00
3
SECTION.
NO.-20916
SECTION 20899
SECTION 19428
30.5
In
N
40.60
SECTION.
NO-20919
40.00
SECTION.
NO.-20899
SECTION.
NO.-19428
GLASS
SECTION 4
GLASS
SECTION 20899
SECTION 19428

SECTION 20919
THE SECTION DESIGNATION NOS. PERTAIN TO EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM
SECTIONS OF "JINDAL ALUMINIUM LTD." AND ARE INDICATED FOR
REFERENCE. EQUIVALANT SECTIONS OF OTHER APPROVED
CEMENT
MANUFACTURERS CAN ALSO BE USED.
PLASTER
BRICK WALL
FOR FINISHING OF ALUMINIUM SECTION (ANODISED/POWDER
COATING SWING
RUBBER/EPDM GASKET SHALL BE USED FOR FIXING OF GLASS.
HARDWARE AND GLASS SHALL BE AS PER BID/TENDER.
JK
*LI
4
27.03.12
3
Rev.
No.
21.03.07
Date

Page 1638 of 1744
Purpose
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
JKB/SD
Checked
by
ARVIND KUMAR
VINAY KUMAR D.MALHOTRA

V.CHATURVEDI

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright EIL - At rights reserved
lgaf
tiriliaeicti
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iapeg
(Hen
(A 60A of India Under/along)
STANDARD No.
SKIRTING DETAIL
7-75-0002 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
(WITH BRICK WALL)
BRICK WALL
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
CEMENT PLASTER
GROOVE IN PLASTER
TILE ADHESIVE
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)
TILE SKIRTING
STONE SKIRTING
RECESSED BRICK
WALL AS REQUIRED
STONE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(1 CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
RECESSED BRICK
WALL AS REQUIRED
TILE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
TILE ADHESIVE
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTION AA
(TILE FLOORING-FLUSH SKIRTING)
SECTION AA
(STONE FLOORING-RAISED SKIRTING)
BRICK WALL
CEMENT PLASTER
GROOVE IN PLASTER
12 THICK CEMENT
MORTAR
(1 CEMENT : 3 SAND)
STONE SKIRTING
BRICK WALL
RECESSED BRICK
WALL AS REQUIRED
STONE FLOOR FINISH
FLOOR BASE
CEMENT MORTAR
(I CEMENT: 4 SAND)
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SKIRTING
SECTION AA
PLAN
4
25.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
ornti,
SD
15.02.07
ARARAT
JKB/SD
Rev.
No.
Date

Page 1639 of 1744
(STONE FLOORING-FLUSH SKIRTING
Purpose
Prepared
by
Checked
by
4V
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
\
4,
et1"')
Kt/
DA/ALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Page 1640 of 1744
Rift
Iaaen riedneadJadral)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 1 of 9
Wqr-41, Rg5rchtli
"FRIR
TiRW rcir1411
FOR
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS, WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS

SPECIFICATION
06.01.16
Rev.
No
Date
Purpose
AM
SD/JK
RajanTSrivastava
S.0 anda
AM
SM
JKB
OM
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ligar Rift
Page 1641 of 1744
vIrvniV as MOM
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt of Indta Undertaking)
FOR
FIRE CHECK/FIRE RESISTANT
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM
BS
BS EN
CBRI
EN
FD
FW
FP
GI
IS
NABL
PVC
SS .
UL
: American Society for Testing and Materials

: British Standards
: British standards & European Standards
: Central Building Research Institute
: European Standards
: Fire Check Door
: Fire Check Window
: Fire Check Partition
: Galvanized Iron
: Indian Standard
: National Accreditation Board for Testing and Calibration Laboratories
: Polyvinyl Chloride
: Stainless Steel
: Underwriters Laboratories
Standards Committee
Convenor:
Members:
Mr. J.K. Bhagchandani

Mr. Anurag Sinha
Mr. S.K. Naskar
Mr. V.K. Panwar
Mr. Charanjit Singh (Projects)
a(zieial111,_ ENGINEERS
Igar QCs
w INDIA LIMITED
Page 1642 of 1744
rirovels JoarsO
IA Govt of India Undenaking)
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
GENERAL
CODES
TESTING & CERTIFICATION
MATERIALS
FIRE & SMOKE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED DOORS (FDs)
FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT / FIRE RATED WINDOWS (FWs) &
PARTITIONS (FPs)
INSTALLATION
DELIVERABLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
GUARANTEE
MEASUREMENT
4
4
4
5
5
8
9
9
9
9
lear Eaeg
Page 1643 of 1744
Wren eleane Jc15w)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 4 of 9
1.0 GENERAL
The Fire & smoke Check/ Fire resistant/ Fire rated Doors (hereinafter termed as FD),
Windows (hereinafter termed as FW) and Partitions (hereinafter termed as FP) shall not
collapse during the rated period of fire and shall provide safe access to the escape route and
Exit.
The FD, FW & FPs shall meet the specified requirement of fire resistance i.e. stability and
integrity.
2.0
CODES
The components and complete system of FD, FW and FPs shall conform to following codes as
applicable. In case of similar codes of different organizations (IS, BS, EN, BS-EN etc.),
conformity with any of the similar codes is acceptable.
BS:476, Part-4
BS:476, Part-7
Fire tests on building materials and structures. Non-combustibility test

for materials
Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method of test to
determine the classification of the surface spread of flame of products.
BS:476, Part-20
Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method for

determination of the fire resistance of elements of construction
(general principles).
BS:476, Part-22
BS EN 1363-1
Fire tests on building materials and structures. Method for

determination of the fire resistance of non-load bearing elements of
construction.
Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass
and safety plastics for use in buildings.
Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety glass
and safety plastics for use in buildings.
Glass in building. Determination of luminous and solar characteristics
of glazing
Fire resistance tests. General requirements
BS EN 1363-2
Fire resistance tests. Alternative and additional procedures
BS EN 1364-1
BS EN 1634-1
Fire resistance tests for non-load bearing elements. Walls

Fire resistance and smoke control tests for door and shutter assemblies,
openable windows and elements of building hardware. Fire resistance
test for door and shutter assemblies and openable windows
Fire classification of construction products and building elements.
Classification using data from fire resistance tests, excluding ventilation
services
Method for Classification of Flame Spread of Products.
Metallic and Non Metallic Fire Check Doors, Resistance Test and
Performance Criteria
BS:6206
EN:12600
BS EN 410
BS EN 13501-2
IS:12777
IS:3614, Part 2
3.0 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
The FD, FW & FPs shall be UL listed or in accordance with valid fire test certificate or test
report appropriate to the type and size of FD/FW/FPs from Central Building Research
Institute, India (CBRI) or NABL accredited state or central government Laboratories or
renowned National/International Test House/ Laboratories.
Page 1644 of 1744
dafaeJtq ENGINEERS
51gar 2154-e-g
INDIA LIMITED
MKT, e.rmI00JAecA 1
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 5 of 9
Test or Evaluation report etc. done by the Manufacturer himself shall not be considered for
this purpose.
The Contractor shall furnish prototype test certificate or test report (not older than 5 years)
from these laboratories.
The certification/ report shall include complete description of the components, dimensions and
hardware of FD, FW and FPs.
4.0 MATERIALS
All Materials shall conform to applicable IS or BS or EN or BS EN or ASTM standards and
shall be subjected to approval by Engineer-In-charge. Necessary documentation/ Test
certificates shall be furnished by the Contractor for such approval. The FD, FW & FPs shall be
fabricated only after approval of materials.
4.1
Glass
The thickness, size, brand and make of glass panels in glazed FD, FW and FPs shall be in
accordance with prototype test certificate or test report (refer clause 3.0) and shall be clear,
toughened, inter-layered having fire rating of minimum 120 minutes with respect to stability
and integrity. Glass shall have following properties:
Category
Impact resistance
Light transmission ratio
EW120
(in accordance with BS EN 13501-2 tested as per BS EN 1363-1,
BS EN 1363-2, BS EN 1634 -1 or BS 476, part 22)
Note:
Other categories of Glass having fire rating of minimum 120
minutes with respect to stability and integrity are also acceptable.
Minimum 2B2 category
(in accordance with EN 12600)
Minimum 85%
(In accordance with BS EN 410).
Approved Manufacturers of the glass:

1. Saint Gobain (Brand - Contrflam Door lite / Contraflam Lite)
2. Interver (Brand - Pyroguard)
3. Glaverbel (Brand - Pyrobelite)
Glass of Vision Panels in Doors shall be as per test certificate or test report or above
specification of glass.
5.0 FIRE & SMOKE CHECK / FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED DOORS (FDs)
FDs shall be of proprietary design and construction complete with Door frame, Shutter, hinges
and Hardware.
Materials, sizes, dimensions and profiles of various components shall be in accordance with
prototype test report or test certificate.
The Doors shall not allow passage of hot gases or the flames through the rebate or the gap
between the door frame and shutter for the duration of fire rating.
ogar taleg
Page 1645 of 1744
laileateleaneandoes.1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 6 of 9
Each FD shall be provided with a small metal identification plate in suitable location
indicating Fire rating, name of the Manufacturer, date of installation and name/ approval of
Test house/Laboratory.
5.1
Fire & Smoke Check Wooden Door

A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, the complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire rating
for stability and integrity (tested in accordance with BS: 476, Part-22 and IS: 3614, Part- 2).
B. Frame
Door frame shall be of requisite profile made out of Hardwood and shall be fitted with
intumescent fire seals all in accordance with the test certificate or report.
C.
Shutter
Shutters shall be non-metallic and asbestos free type. They shall be composed of approved
quality Calcium Silicate boards (Material class: Non- combustible as per BS: 476, Part 4 or IS:
3614, Part 2) on both sides with Mineral wool insulation (density 48 Kg/ Cu. M.) in between
all as per the test report or test certificate.
The shutter composition shall have teak wood lipping around the periphery fitted with
intumescent fire seal in PVC casing as per the test report or test certificate.
D. Finishing
The Door frames shall be finished with approved quality fire resistant paint including primer
in desired colour to provide class I surface (surface spread of flame) conforming to BS: 476
part 7 or IS: 12777.
The Door shutters shall be faced with 4mm thick polished teak veneer of approved make and
colour & texture on both sides.
5.2
Fire & Smoke Check Steel Door

A.
Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, the complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire rating
for stability and integrity (tested in accordance with BS: 476, Part-22 and IS: 3614, Part-2).
B.
Frame
Door frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized steel sheet pressed to
requisite profile as indicated in the test certificate or report. They shall be provided with
stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting and other accessories.
C.
Shutter
Shutter frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.2mm thick galvanized steel sheet pressed to
requisite profile with infill of mineral wool or any other proprietary insulation as indicated in
the test certificate or report.
ENGINEERS
Igar 2P-ag INDIA LIMITED
Page 1646 of 1744
101
el
oiren elrage mown-4V
(A Govt of India Undenaking)
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 7 of 9
They shall be provided with stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting and other accessories.
D. Finishing
The Door frames and shutters shall be finished with powder coating (70 microns) in desired
colour.
5.3
Fire & Smoke Check Glazed Door

The doors shall be fully glazed type with required glass, Door & Shutter frame (stiles and
rails) and Hardware.
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, The complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire
rating for stability and integrity tested in accordance with either BS:476, Part-22 and IS:
3614, Part-2 or BS EN / EN 1634-1.
B. Door Frame & Shutter frame (stiles & rails)
Door & shutter frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized steel
sheet pressed to requisite profile & size with Insulation across the door frame (both jambs
and the head) and in the hollow space of door and shutter frames as indicated in the test
certificate or report. They shall be provided with stiffeners for hardware/ lock mounting
and other accessories.
C. Glass Panels in shutter
The glass panes shall be held in position with glazing bead, glazing tape, Calcium Silicate
blocks etc. in accordance with prototype test certificate or test report.
Size of glass panels shall not exceed the dimensions indicated in the test certificate/ report.
Each Glass shall carry a non-removable marking with the name of the product & the
manufacturer inscribed on it.
D. Finishing
The door & shutter frame, other metallic components shall be finished with powder
coating (70 micron) in desired colour.
5.4
Hardware & Vision Panel for FDs

FDs of all type shall be provided with Hardware and vision panel (wherever applicable).
Hardware shall be same as tested and indicated in the test certificate / report or UL listed.
Vision panels shall be of dimensions as indicated in the test certificate or report.
Each FD shall be provided with following Hardware as a minimum.
S. No
1.
2.
Hardware
SS 304 grade double ball bearing hinges. (Or hinges as indicated in
test certificate or report).
"push to open" horizontal panic bar - single / double leaf panic exit
devices
Nos
As
required
1 No.
Page 1647 of 1744
lt
di ENGINEERS
054--cg W INDIA LIMITED

I011211tneofien10irdsvii
3.
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 8 of 9
Openable locks/ trims for horizontal Panic Bars to operate panic bar
from outside with necessary screws as required. The lock and handle
should be an amalgamated single motion piece from the same
manufacturer as that of Panic Bar. This hardware shall be installed in
selective doors as per approved layout.
Heavy duty door closer
SS 304 grade twin rubber heavy duty Door Stopper with SS screws
SS 304 grade minimum 300mm long concealed flush bolt (in inactive
shutter of double shutter Doors)
4.
5.
6.
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
2 Nos.
For internal fire doors opening to the rooms adjoining corridor (defined as escape route), the
doors need not have panic bar assembly and shall have the following Hardware as a minimum.
However any internal door placed directly on the escape route exclusive of any adjoining
room shall be provided with panic bar as specified above.
S. No
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hardware
SS 304 grade double ball bearing hinges. (Or hinges as indicated in test
certificate or report)
Heavy duty door closer
Heavy duty mortice lock (with D type handle on both face) in SS finish
along with necessary screws
SS 304 grade, finish twin rubber heavy duty Door Stopper with SS
screws
Nos.
As
required
1 No.
1 No.
1 No.
6.0 FIRE CHECK/ FIRE RESISTANT/ FIRE RATED WINDOWS (FWs) & PARTITIONS
(FPs)
FWs & FPs shall be fixed, fully glazed with steel frame and shall be of proprietary design and
construction.
Materials, sizes, dimensions and profiles of various components shall be in accordance with
prototype test report.
Overall dimension of FWs & FPs shall not exceed the overall size as indicated in test
certificate or report.
A. Fire Rating
Unless otherwise specified, The complete assembly of Doors shall be of 120 minutes fire
rating for stability and integrity tested in accordance with either BS:476, Part-22 and IS:
3614, Part-2 or BS EN/ EN 1364-1.
B.
Frame
Window & Partition frame shall be fabricated with minimum 1.6mm thick galvanized
steel sheet pressed to requisite profile & size with Insulation across the frame and in the
hollow space of frames as indicated in the test certificate or report.
C.
Glass Panels in Windows & Partitions

The glass panes shall be held in position with glazing bead, glazing tape, Calcium Silicate
blocks etc. in accordance with prototype test certificate or test report.
Page 1648 of 1744
lg-ar iMeu
Nren rwmrras3vmwn
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
(A Govt
India Undertaking)
FOR
DOORS WINDOWS &
PARTITIONS
6-75-0011 Rev. 1
Page 9 of 9
Size of glass panels shall not exceed the dimensions indicated in the test certificate or
report.
Each Glass shall carry a non-removable marking with the name of the product & the
manufacturer inscribed on it.
D. Finishing
The door & shutter frame, other metallic components shall be finished with powder
coating (70 micron) in desired colour.
7.0 INSTALLATION
Shop drawings of the doors, windows and partitions in accordance with test certificate or report
shall be prepared and submitted for approval by the Engineer-In-Charge.
The shop drawings shall include all details of construction, anchoring, connections, fastenings
etc.
The FD/ FW/ FPs shall be installed in accordance with the approved drawings.
Installation of FDs shall ensure proper operation of the doors.
8.0 DELIVERABLES BY THE CONTRACTOR
Following documentation/ drawings shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Prototype Test Certificate/ report (Refer clause 3.0).

Shop drawings
Specification/ Manufacturer's literature, Test certificates and other documentation for
materials and items intended to be used.
Certificate indicating that design and installation of Doors and hardware as per the test
reports submitted.
Manufacturer's Guarantee.
9.0 GUARANTEE
The FD/FW/FPs including all hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the
date of installation against any manufacturing defect.
In case of any such defect within the guarantee period, the defected part shall be replaced by the
Contractor.
10.0 MEASUREMENTS
The measurement of the FD/FW/FPs opening shall be in Sq. M. measuring the actual area
including the frames. The rate shall include complete assembly consisting of Frame, Shutter,
Hardware, Accessories and sealant etc. including installation.
$)g-affM-g
STANDARD No.
PIPE SLEEVE DETAILS

FOR INSULATED LINES
UNDER ROADS AND DYKES
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Inda Undenaking)
7-44-0404 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
SEAL PLATE FOR INSIDE DYKES

ONLYDETAIL A
NOTES 2,3
DETAIL B
NOTES 2,3
UNDER ROADS
NOTES-4,5
LENGTH BY FIELD
INSULATED LINES
UNDER ROADS
NOTE-2
PIPE SLEEVE
-b
300
GUIDE PLATES SPACED AT APPROX. 4M CRS.

FOR LINES 6" & 6M CRS. FOR LINES 8" & ABOVE
300
y
IN CASE OF DETAIL 'A' ARRANGEMENT CHECK
SHALL BE MADE FOR ANCHOR FORCES ON
EARTHEN/CONCRETE DYKE WALLS.
6 THICK SPLIT
SEAL PLATE
SLEEVE(NOTE-1)
INSULATION NOT
REQUIRED INSIDE
SLEEVE UNDER
ROAD
50
1-2
TRACER
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
PIPE
SIZE
GRIND CORNERS
SLEEVE SIZE(NOTES-4,5)
DYKE
SCH/
THK.
ROAD
11/2"
6"
40
3"
2"
6"
40
3"
3"
8"
20
4"
4"
10"
20
6"
6"
12"
20
8"
8"
14"
10
10"
10"
16"
10
12"
12"
18"
10
14"
14"
20"
6.35mm
16"
16"
24"
6.35mm
18"
18"
24"
6.35mm
20"
20"
30"
6.35mm
22"
22"
30"
6.35mm
24"
24"
32"
6.35mm
26"
26"
36"
28"
36"
R ' VEIR-r
REll
do
30"
40"
do
32"
40"
do
36"
44"
do
40"
48"
do
42"
50"
do
44"
52"
do
46"
54"
do
48"
56"
do
DETAIL-A
300 10
6 THK. SEGMENTAL
PLATE WELDED TO PIPE
DETAIL-B
NOTES:
5. PIPE SPACING SHALL BE TO SUIT SLEEVE PLATE SIZES.

6. SLEEVE MAY BE FABRICATED OUT OF STEEL PLATE OF COMMERICAL QUALITY OF EQUIVALENT
THICK NESS IN LIEU OF STANDARD PIPES GIVEN IN THE TABLE.
Page 1649 of 1744
Purpose
INSULATION NOT
REQUIRED INSIDE
SLEEVE UNDER ROAD
(NOTE-3)
1 . PIPE SLEEVE SHALL BE COATED & WRAPPED FROM OUTSIDE.

2. IT IS PREFERED THAT PIPES ARE NOT INSULATED BELOW ROADS AND DYKES AND FOR THIS
DETAIL 'B' SHOULD BE PROVIDED AT BOTH ENDS OF PIPES.
3. IF INSULATION IS ESSENTIAL
o) PIPES UNDER ROADS SHALL BE BELOW A CULVERT, AND
b) PIPES UNDER DYKES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH DETAIL 'A' FROM INSIDE AND DETAIL 'B'
FROM OUTSIDE OF DYKES.
4. THE ROAD SLEEVES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COVER OF 300 FOR LIGHT TRAFFIC AND 600
FOR HEAVY TRAFFIC ROAD. IN CASE OF VERY HEAVY TRAFFIC ROADS THE SLEEVE SHALL BE
ENCASED IN CONCRETE.
Date
BITUMEN IMPREGNATED
MINERAL WOOL
NOTE 2 & 3
Rev.
(WHERE APPLICABLE)
GRIND CORNERS
No.
STEAM TRACER
50X6 THK.
GUIDE PLATE
SH
itm152N
PK
RN
Prepared
Checked
by
by
/AT1k.-(",
SC
ND
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
STANDARD No
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1/45illadel
5g7 tameg
(A Govt 0/ India
PLINTH PROTECTION
WITH BUILDING DRAIN)
U a ng)
_J
7-75-0065 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 2
JL
ROAD
BUILDING
0
Et
BUILDING DRAIN
(TO BE CONNECTED TO MAIN STORM
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM AT
SUITABLE LOCATION AS PER STORM
WATER DRAINAGE SYSTEM DRAWING)
ROAD
KEY PLAN
RCC COLUMN FACE LINE
RCC
RAIN WATER PIPE
MS GRATING COVER
15 THICK PLAIN CEMENT PLASTER
WITH NEAT CEMENT FINISH
1000
/lastaifi
GROOVE
FINISHED GROUND LEVEL
BRICK WORK
PCC 1:2:4
RAMMED EARTH
IIMEGRESIMia'
-tv
N' NA
fr N.
75
RAMMED EARTH
PCC 1:2:4
SECTION AA
co
BUILDING DRAIN
(SLOPE 1:500)
DRAIN
A
0 D
0
z
I
O
V
5c
RWP EMBEDDED
IN PCC
La
0-
PLAN (CASE 1, X<600)

4
25.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
Dion"
21.03.07
AMAMI'
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev.0

Page 1650 of 1744
Purpose
RCC COLUMN
EXTERNAL FACE
OF WALL
Prepared
by
0S7D
JKB/SD
Checked
by
CAtbi-sA
VINAY KUMAR DMALHOTRA
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright Ell - All rights reserved
STANDARD No.
Etleg
I Wen etretnre nos/Anil
INDIALIMITED
INDIA
(A Govt of locha
under/41.19 i
PLINTH PROTECTION
(WITH BUILDING DRAIN)
7-75-0065 Rev. 4
Page 2 of 2
BUILDING DRAIN
40x6 MS FLAT
035 C/C
-op
RWP EMBEDDED
IN CONCRETE
r.
0
40x6 MS FLAT
EXTERNAL FACE
OF WALL
RCC COLUMN
PLAN
M.S. GRATING DETAIL
(CASE 2, X > 600)

PCC
(1:2:4)
MS GRATING AS
PER DETAIL
SLOP
FINISHED GROUND LEVEL
RAMMED
EARTH
12 THK CEMENT PLASTER

PCC (1:2:4)
40x6 MS FLAT
40x6 THICK MS
FLAT 0 35 C/C
1 2THK CEMENT PLASTER

50x50x 6 MS ANGLE
PCC POCKET (1:3:6)
BRICK WALL
10 DIA MS BAR LUG
0 500 C/C WELDED
TO ANGLE AND
EMBEDDED IN PCC
(1:3:6)
DETAIL
DETAIL
NOTES:
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
WIDTH OF THE PLINTH PROTECTION SHALL BE 900mm AND X+300 MAXIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE MENTIONED
IN BUILDING DRAWING.
PLINTH PROTECTION ALONG ANY PARTICULAR SIDE OF THE BUILDING SHALL BE OF CONSTANT WIDTH FOLLOWING
THE EXTERNAL WALL ALIGNEMENT IF NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED/INDICATED IN BYILDING DRAWING.
MS DRAIN COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER BUILDING DRAIN AT ALL APPROACHES UNLESS OTHERWISE
MENTIONED/INDICATED IN BUILDING DRAWING.
4
3
Rev.
No.
25.10.11
21.03.07
REVISED & REISSUED

Date
Format No. 8 - 00 - 0001 - F4 Rev .O
Page 1651 of 1744
Purpose
ta
Dicortso
MAW
Prepared
by
\r/iN
JD wty.-- VISAS KUMAR

JKB/SD
Checked
by
ArAND KUMAR
()Ilk.")
D.MALHOTRA
V.CMATURVEDI
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EL - All rights reserved
OWE aENGINEERS
azit Meg
INDIA LIMITED
(mail)
Page 1652 of 1744
t'lek07
IA Gov/ or India underiakingJ
STANDARD No
ROOF DRAINAGE
7-75-0068 REV. 4
AND WATERPROOFING
Page 1 of 3
RCC GUTTER
FINISHED WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT AS PER SPECIFICATION
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL
SLOPE
SLOPE
RAIN WATER PIPE

EXTERNAL BRICK WALL
SECTION A-A
RCC FACIA
RCC GUTTER
RCC/BRICK PARAPET WALL
a-
0-
-J
L/)
rta
RAIN WATER PIPE

EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
(LOCATIONS AS PER
ARCHITECTURAL BUILDING
DRAWINGS)
RIDGE LINE
SLOPE
(1:80 TO 100)
LAI
a_ o
0 co
LAI
0-
0
SLOPE
PART TERRACE PLAN

4
20.02.12
REVISED & REISSUED
15.02.07
e5aSl:
AMARNT
JKB/SD
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
e ere rr
V.CLIATURVEDI
Ofraze a ENGINEERS
Page 1653 of 1744
ROOF DRAINAGE
INDIA LIMITED
fgar
Oft
I Ira Al -,17151.3ERFil
STANDARD No,
7-75-0068 REV. 4
AND WATERPROOFING
IA G OO olIndia Undertaking)
Page 2 of 3
CINDER CONCRETE LAID TO
SLOPE AND TOPPED WITH WATER
PROOFING TREATMENT AND
PROT E CTIVE CEM E NT PLASTER
AS PER SP E CIFI C AT IO N
RCC / BRICK PARAPET WALL
PROTECTIVE LAYER OF
C E M E NT CONCRETE WITH
CHICK E N MESH AS PER
SPECIFICATI O N
WATER PROOFING
C>. TR E ATM E NT AS PER
SPECIFICATION
CEMEN T CONCRETE AS P ER
SPECIFICATION LAID TO SLOPE
r TOP OF RCC SLAB
CEMENT PLAST E R
10 X 20
GROOV E FILLED
WITH PU SEALANT
PUTTY
jq
d,
c._
;l
WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT TURNED
INTO GROOVE
12 THICK
CEMENT PLASTER
RCC COLUMN
RCC GUTTER
RAIN WATER
PIPE COVER
RAIN WAT E R
PIPE SOCKET
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB

RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
D R I P CO U RSE
RAIN WATER PIPE
EMBEDDED IN CEMENT
CONCRETE
MINIMUM 300
300
DETAIL A
RAIN WATER PIPE
EMBEDDE D IN CEMENT
CONCRETE
CEMENT PLAST E R
RCC COLUMN
WIDE GROOV E
IN PLASTER
10
RCC GUTTER
ABOVE
EXTERNAL WALL
/\/
SECTIONAL PLAN CC
4
20.02. / 2
REVISED & REISSUED
15.02.07
,.)14SD
AMAR JI T
Pu:
JK B /5D
9\9vYer
.;."
JKB
VINAY K UM A R
D .MALHOTRA
V.CHATURV ED I
ARVIND KUMAR
(3 M ( E
A r,proved by
aar
Page 1654 of 1744
eJ
fameg
.17en' efffeasTFc151,,roaf
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Goof of India undertalongj
7-75-0068 Rev. 4
AND WATERPROOFING
Page 3 of 3
RCC PARAPET WALL
12 THICK CEMENT PLASTER
10x20 GROOVE FILLED WITH PU
SEALANT PUTTY
WATER PROOFING TREATMENT
TURNED INTO GROOVE
PROTECTIVE LAYER OF
CEMENT CONCRETE WITH
CHICKEN MESH AS PER
SPECIFICATION
WATER PROOFING
TREATMENT AS PER
TENDER ON RCC SLAB
TOP OF RCC SLAB
z.4
I-
STANDARD No.
ROOF DRAINAGE
ec4._
A A 4
Po y
CEMENT CONCRETE AS
PER SPECIFICATION LAID
TO SLOPE
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
75x75 CEMENT CONCRETE FILLET
RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
EXTERNAL FINISH
SECTION BB
(PARAPET HEIGHT MORE THAN 450)
RCC PARAPET WALL
A.
A;

CONTINUED TO PARAPET TOP
PROTECTIVE LAYER OF
CEMENT CONCRETE WITH
CHICKEN MESH AS PER
SPECIFICATION
AS PER TENDER ON RCC SLAB
TOP OF RCC SLAB
CEMENT CONCRETE AS
PER SPECIFICATION LAID
TO SLOPE
RCC FLAT ROOF SLAB
75x75 CEMENT CONCRETE FILLET
RCC BEAM
EXTERNAL WALL
EXTERNAL FINISH
SECTION BB
(PARAPET HEIGHT UP TO 450)
4
20.02.12
REVISED & REISSUED
21.03.07
REVISED, ISSUED
ISSUED AS STANDARD
AVON
AMARJIT
crprP,..
WHAT KUMAR D.MALHOTRA

JKB/SD
ARVIND KUMAR
V.NATIANEW
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
k31
fzdzir NR-e-g
(PPP erecoremdfriFil)
STANDARD No.
STAINLESS STEEL TUBULAR

HANDRAIL
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
Page 1 of 4
REFER DETAILA
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
REFER DETAILB
oi
Eli
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
0
18 DIA SS PIPE
FLOOR FINISH
AS/SPECIFICATION
FINISHED FLOOR
20 DIA SS BARS
WELDED TO VERTICAL
POST
100 DIA X6
THICK SS INSERT
PLATE
4.
REFER DETAILC
SECTION A-A
200
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
TJ
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
32 DIA SS PIPE
FOR VERTICAL POST
0
0
N
18 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
_
Ln
N
FINISHED FLOOR
ELEVATION
f4
100 DIA X 6 THICK

SS PLATE
STAINLESS STEEL (SS) HANDRAIL FIXED ON SIDE OF SLAB

NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETRES.
0
02.11.15
ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV
Page 1655 of 1744
Purpose
RD c,...y.VA P' I/J
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJANJI SR
VA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Corwrinht Fll - All rinhts rasprvpri
Page 1656 of 1744
Ill ei
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
HANDRAIL
fg-ar Elf51-eg
vttwir viecnie to JUMP)
STANDARD No.
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
REF DETAILA
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
32 DIA SS PIPE
FOR VERTICAL POST
WELDED TO THE
BASE PLATE
REF DETAILB
FLOOR FINISH
AS/SPECIFICATION
REF DETAILD
!
12 THK GROOVE
rAr VZ.F./Z.///: Kr/."1
FINISHED FLOOR
IZA
100
SECTION BB
1200
50 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
1 OC
32 DIA SS PIPE FOR

VERTICAL POST
a
0
0
0
18 DIA SS PIPE
HANDRAIL
FINISHED FLOOR
Page 2 of 4
ei
Weg
Wren eleaxedaJi.antn
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India UndeitakingI
STANDARD No.

HANDRAIL
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
Page 3 of 4
50 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL HANDRAIL
50x8 THICK
STAINLESS STEEL
PLATE BALUSTER ON
EVERY THIRD STEP
0
0
18 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL INTERMEDIATE
PIPE
FLOOR FINISH AS
PER SPECIFICATION
2 NOS. HILTI BOLTS
SECTION C-C
50 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL PIPE HANDRAIL
WELDED JOINTS
50 X 8 THICK
STAINLESS STEEL
PLATE BALUSTER ON
EVERY THIRD STEP
18 DIA STAINLESS
STEEL INTERMEDIATE
PIPE
STAIR FINISH AS
PER SPECIFICATION
NOSING
50X50X6 SS ANGLE
STAINLESS STEEL PLATE

BOLTS FOUR NOS.
MATERIAL GRADE SS 316
ELEVATION
STAINLESS STEEL (SS) HANDRAIL FOR STAIRS
02.11.15
ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date
Format Nn 8-00-0001-F4 RPV 0
Page 1657 of 1744
Purpose
RD c_01
SD/J1e4
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJANJI SRIVA AVA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Bureau
Stds. Committee
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Convriatit FIt - All rights rpsprvPri
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
7-75-0093 Rev. 0
HANDRAIL
ICI
50 DIA SS PIPE
6 THICK SS SADDLE
PLATE
14 DIA SS
BAR CONNECTOR
50 DIA x 6 THICK
CAP PLATE
DETAIL A
Page 4 of 4
41)
mralrereaggrm
EOM I=
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
80 DIA X 8 THICK SS
PLATE
FINISHED FLOOR
4 NOS HILTI BOLTS
DETAIL D
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
50 DIA SS PIPE
18 DIA SS PIPE
RAILING
14 DIA SS
BAR WELDED
TO SS PIPE
DETAIL B
6 THICK SS SADDLE
PLATE
14 DIA SS BAR
CONNECTOR
SECTION D-D
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
20 DIA SS BARS
100 DIA X 6 THICK
CIRCULAR SS
INSERT PLATE
80 DIA X 8 THICK SS
PLATE
32 DIA SS PIPE
VERTICAL POST
4 NOS HILTI HSL BOLTS
CL OF INSERT PLATE
DETAIL C
SECTION E-E
(TYPICAL DETAILS)
02.11.15
ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
Page 1658 of 1744
No.
Date
Format No 8-00-0001-F4 RPV
Purpose
RD
)),g1:0/J
Prepared
Checked
by
by
RAJANJI SRIVASTAVA
S. CHANDA
Stds. Committee
Stds. Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Convrinht RI - All rinhts rpsprvpd
Page 1659 of 1744
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION No.
klet ENGINEB2S
a
INDIA umiTED FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
tgzir
tinpieg
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
GENERAL
IA Gat of kW UficlertuknO
lItq cOdl
c
4
Page 1 of 7
Witil*f&C
ftfttvr -ER
t11 4-11 1 q I cul
FOR
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
GENERAL
15.03.12
21.03.07
RENAMED & ISSUED AS STANDARD
11.03.99
16.03.94

SPECIFICATION
Rev.
No
0.6
PD
SPECIFICATION
JK C---
)11t<
D. MALHOTRA
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V.
CHATURVEDI
SD
MIS
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
SPECIFICATION
Pumose
SD
eS---4
SD
SPECIFICATION
Date
)4?
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Bureau
Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
laRaet.".,
" ENGINEERS
Saar Emden" INDIA LIMITED
Page 1660 of 1744
(A Gent of India
unaenewnsi

FOR ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
GENERAL
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
:
BS
IS

British Standards
Indian Standards

Convenor :
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Dos

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
laaineta ENGINEERS
Ogez
EVIegliW INDIA LIMITED
lawr efiewaaJelaa
Page 1661 of 1744
t)
LAC of
Undertaking)
FOR ARCHITECTURAL. WORKS
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 DEFINITIONS
3.0 CODES & SPECIFICATIONS
4.0 MANUFACTURER
5.0 CONFLICTS & CONTRADICTIONS
6.0 MATERIALS
7.0 WORKMANSHIP
8.0 PACKAGING, SHIPPING, DELIVERY & STORAGE
9.0 SUBMITTALS
10.0 MEASUREMENT
owieitift ENGINEERS
Igzirimegw: INDIA LIMITED
(A
1.0
IA Goa s MA. UndelOW.91
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 7
GENERAL
This specification establishes and defines various aspects of specifications of Architectural
works such as codes, references, manufacturer, conflicts and contradictions, materials,
workmanship, packaging, shipping, delivery and storage, testing, submittals and measurement
etc. and shall be applicable for all the Architectural specifications.
2.0
DEFINITIONS
2.1
Contractor
The party which carries out all or part of the design, engineering, procurement, construction,
commissioning or management of the Project. Contractor includes its approved
Manufacturers, Vendors, Suppliers, and subcontractor's. Requirements of this specification
shall be enforced at all levels of the Contractor's design, engineering, procurement,
construction process.
2.2
Subcontractor
The party which is engaged by the "Contractor" and carries out all or part of the design,
engineering, procurement, construction of the system (s).
2.3
Manufacturer/ Supplier/ Vendor

The party which manufactures and/or supplies equipment, materials, technical documents/
drawings and services to perform the duties specified by the "Contractor".
2.4
Shall
Indicates a mandatory requirement.
2.5
Should
Indicates a strong recommendation to comply with the requirements of this document.
3.0
CODES & SPECIFICATIONS

Codes and standards as indicated in the specifications form a part of specifications. When an
edition date is not indicated for a code or standard, the latest edition and addendum or
amendment in force at time of contract award shall apply.
Alternate codes and standards meeting the requirements of the referenced codes and standards
may be used with the approval of the competent authority.
It shall be Contractor's responsibility to be, or to become, knowledgeable of the requirements
of any referenced codes and standards.
4.0
MANUFACTURER
Manufacturers listed for particular item in the specifications are the acceptable Manufacturers
for that particular item. Products by other Manufacturers which are of equal quality and
performance may be considered for approval upon review of information as required and
submitted to the competent authority. However the contractor to ensure that the time schedule
is adhered to in any case.

Page 1662 of 1744
Page 1663 of 1744
0 Gov, of loom
underrakow
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 7
Product data sheet, specifications, performance data, installation instructions and other
recommendations of such listed or approved Manufacturers also form part of the
specifications subject to compliance with other requirements specified.
Materials, installation method and other requirements for execution of any item if required by
Manufacturer's installation instructions, recommendations and requirements shall also form
part of the specifications whether specified or not.
Specifications which are based on one particular manufacturer's product are for reference to
maintain the quality.
5.0 CONFLICTS & CONTRADICTIONS
Specifications, Scope of Work, Schedule of rates and drawings for a particular Tender shall be
read in conjunction with each other. In case of conflicts/contradictions amongst them, the
clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer- In- Charge whose decision shall be final &
binding. Following procedure shall be followed for the necessary clarification.
Item description shall prevail over specifications for item rate tenders when provisions
therein are different from those in specifications.
Whenever any requirement is not covered in item description but are covered in
specifications, the specifications shall be followed in addition to the requirements of
item description .No extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for executing such
item as per specification.
Whenever drawings call for requirements different from or additional to those in item
description and specification, the decision of the Engineer - In - Charge shall be
obtained in writing.
However no extra payment shall be made to the Contractor for executing any work
incorporating requirements additional to those in item description and specification
but covered in applicable drawings or standards attached to the tender.
6.0 MATERIALS
All materials shall be of standard quality conforming to the specifications & IS or equivalent
such as ASTM, BS etc and shall be obtained from the approved Manufacturer.
The Contractor shall get the samples of materials approved by the Engineer - In - Charge
before ordering & procurement. Such approved samples shall be properly marked/ identified
as approved sample and shall be kept as record for future reference. The Contractor shall
furnish necessary test certificates etc. as asked by the Engineer - In - Charge. Further to that he
shall get the materials tested from approved test house if and as asked by the Engineers - In Charge & submit the test certificate at his own cost for which no extra payment shall be made
to him.
The Engineer - In - Charge shall have the right to reject all or any of the materials intended to
be used and such materials shall be immediately removed from the site by the Contractor at
his own cost without any claim for compensation etc. due to such rejection.
7.0 WORKMANSHIP
Workmanship shall conform to the highest standards of construction practice. All work shall
be executed to the c mnplete satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge in regard to its qt ality and the
order in which it is carried out.
Page 1664 of 1744
PraaeLa ENGINEERS
tingleg leWA UMFIED
+NM eraereaslawai)
(A Gorr of inda Unaertatog)

6-75-0001 Rev. 5
GENERAL
Page 6 of 7
Workmanship shall be in accordance with relevant codes or in accordance with

Manufacturer's recommendations if not mentioned otherwise.
All works shall be undertaken by qualified Contractor's who have adequate equipment and
skilled workers. All specialized items of work (e.g. Aluminium Doors and Windows,
Waterproofing, Underdeck and Overdeck Insulation, Precoated roof sheeting/ cladding, False
ceiling, False Flooring, Partitioning and Panelling, Expansion joint sealing etc.) shall be got
executed by the Contractor only through authorised applicators/ sub contractors of approved
manufacturer/ vendor.
All precaution and protection shall be taken during & after completion of work to prevent
damages to work being done and other works. Any damages done shall be rectified.
Work area shall be cleaned after completion of each work and shall be kept clean and
protected till final acceptance by the competent authority.
8.0
PACKAGING, SHIPPING, DELIVERY & STORAGE

All material shall be delivered in Manufacturer's original package bearing the name of the
Manufacturer, product colour and pattern name, identification number and other related
information.
All materials shall be stored, preserved and protected to safeguard against all adverse
environments such as humidity, moisture, rain, dust, dirt, sand, mud, salt air, salt spray and sea
water.
Specific requirement of packaging, shipping, storage and preservation and safety of materials/
items if any as per Manufacturer's recommendation shall also be ensured by Contractor.
Materials damaged in handling and storage shall not be used. In the event that any material for
use deteriorates and become unusable due to inadequate and poor storage they shall be
removed from site as instructed by Engineer-in-charge and replaced at the Contractor's
expenses.
9.0
SUBMITTALS
If not mentioned otherwise, Contractor shall submit the following for various items.
9.1
Samples
Samples for all materials, components, accessories and complete range of finishing/ shades/
colours for verification as well as acceptance of pattern, colour and finish as applicable.
Samples shall be re-submitted until approved. Approved samples shall be retained to serve as
a basis for checking delivery to site and standard for subsequent work.
9.2
Test Certificates
All applicable tests as per relevant codes & standards shall be conducted by the Contractor at
no extra cost. Test Certificates shall be submitted for review/ approval of the Engineer-incharge.
9.3
Shop Drawings
Shop drawings indicating large scale details, lay-out, connections, anchoring, fastening,
bracing, finishes etc. as applicable for review/ approval.
Page 1665 of 1744
ISit&Eggia ENGINEERS
li
NW! 211,514 EISIJUP,91
9.4
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov1
umenamoi
GENERAL
6-75-0001 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 7
Product Information and Manuals

Product information (Technical)
Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions
9.5
List of applicators/ Sub contractors

Contractor shall submit list of authorized applicators/ sub contractors of specialized items of
works for review/ approval before execution of such items.
9.6
Maintenance manuals
10.0
MEASUREMENT
Mode of measurement is generally specified in each Specification. Whenever mode of
measurement is not specified, IS: 1200 shall be applicable.
Page 1666 of 1744
Page 1667 of 1744
eiel 1=1 ENGINEERS

5fgarfatateg INDIA LIMITED
I ARA AWATer JA-05.1/
IA
STANDARD No.
EUROPEAN TYPE WC
(FIXING DETAIL)
Gov. ollndu Undenakpngi
7-75-0062 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
TOILET PAPER
HOLDER
r
EUROPEAN
i]
TYPE WC
CISTERN
MS BRACKET
FLUSH PIPE WITH
BEND COMPLETE
S OR P TRAP
FLOOR TRAP COVERED

WITH GRATING
_ _1
SECTION AA
FLOOR TRAP COVERED
WITH GRATING
rAr
BIB COCK
00S
200
4/k
10MM DROP
IN FLOOR
EUROPEAN
TYPE WC
CISTERN
t.
STOP COCK
1300 MINIMUM
PLAN
09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED
3
Rev.
No.
Format Nn
Page 1668 of 1744

Date
s-nn-nnni-Fit Rev n
Purpose

DAnst
mama
Prepared
by
JKB
SD/JKB
Checked
by
WRAY KUMAR
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
i 44.4
DMA/MOIRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
r.nnveinht Fli - All nnhte reserved
Sft
Ogar
ENGINEERS
cam' INDIA LIMITED
rA Goo of inaa unartarmg 1
FOR SANITARY FITTINGS AND
FIXTURES
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 6
)-1 ^41 ftitit 3 S 14) 1z1`< cot

fedtvr
FOR
SANITARY FITTINGS & FIXTURES
03.0412
21.03.07

SPECIFICATION
09.03.99 REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
16.03.94
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Page 1669 of 1744
2)VA
VK
SPECIFICATION
D MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS

SPECIFICATION
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Date
Purpose
Prepar Checked
ed by
by
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM(E)
Page 1670 of 1744
ItitraZiaft ENGINEERS
fgar Wag W INDIA

LIMITED
A
Govi ol Inca Undeptak.agi

SANITARY FITTINGS AND
FIXTURES
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 6
Abbreviations:
IS
BS
:
ASTM :
Indian Standards
British Standards

Convenor :
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
ssaceym INDIA
ENGINEERS
LIMITED
Ogar Wag NW
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 6
CONTENTS
1.0
Page 1671 of 1744

FIXTURES
GENERAL
04
04
2.0
SANITARY FITTINGS
3.0
INDIAN TYPE WATER CLOSET
04
4.0
WASH DOWN TYPE WATER CLOSET
05
5.0
URINALS
05
6.0
WASH BASINS
05
7.0
WASH BASINS (COUNTER TOP)
06
Page 1672 of 1744
15Pa-a (n1 ENGINEERS
? P.9eg,
ar
INDIA LIMITED
Goo ptintla Und.ttokngi

6-75-0009 Rev. 5
FIXTURES
Page 4 of 6
1.0 GENERAL
covered in the specification. In case of any conflict/contradiction provisions of specification
shall override.
IS :2556 Part 1-17
Specification for Vitreous Sanitary appliances (VitreousChina,Part 1-17).
1 S :774
Specification for Flushing Cistern for Water Closets and Urinals.
IS : 775
Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and
sinks
IS :781
Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
valves for water services.
IS :2064
Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of

Sanitary appliances.
IS :2548 Part-I
Specification for Plastic Seats and Covers for water closets

Part-I : Thermoset seats and covers
IS :2548 Part-2
Specification for Plastic Seats and Covers for water closets

Part-I : Thermoplastic seats and covers
IS :2326
Specification for automatic flushing cistern for urinals (other than

plastic cisterns)
IS :7231
Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals
IS :9758
Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and
urinals
2.0 SANITARY FITTINGS

All glazed earthen ware shall be of approved make, colour and of one piece construction. All
metallic fixtures like taps, stop cocks, soap holders etc. shall be CP brass or Stainless Steel of
approved make. All wall fittings shall be fixed with nylon sleeve and CP brass screws and
washers.
3.0 INDIAN TYPE WATER CLOSET

Squatting Pan shall be Orissa Pan type conforming to IS: 2556. The closet shall be fixed in the
floor with 150 mm thick sand cushion and shall be connected with 100 mm dia CI 'S' or 'P'
trap. The closet shall also be fitted with syphonic type flushing cistern, conforming to IS: 774,
15 mm dia. PVC inlet with brass union, PVC ball valves, handle, telescopic 32 mm dia
chrome plated flushing pipe with union etc. The cistern shall have water efficient dual flush
mechanism and shall be compliant to the norms laid down by National Building Code.
The cistern shall be fixed on MS brackets. All exposed metallic surface shall be painted with
two coats of synthetic enamel paint oil approved quality over a coat of primer (primer is not
required for GI pipe).
Page 1673 of 1744
1512ZIeTe ENGINEERS
efaniellgrageINDIA UMITED
IA Go, of Ina. Undertak.og,

6-75-0009 Rev. 5
FIXTURES
Page 5 of 6
Rate quoted for item rate tenders shall include providing and fixing water-closet and flushing
cistern with all accessories, breaking wall and floors and making good the same, all inlet and
outlet connections of cistern and water closet, finishing of solder joints, painting and testing of
all connections etc. complete.
4.0
WASH DOWN TYPE WATER CLOSET

Wash down water closet shall be of pattern-1 conforming to IS:2556 Part-II. Water Closet
shall be of one piece construction. This shall be fixed with plastic seat and cover as per
IS:2548 of approved make, fixed with CP brass hinges and rubber buffers and an intergral 100
mm dia 'S' or 'P' trap with anti-syphonage vent horn.
A low level cistern conforming to IS:774 with 15mm dia PVC inlet pipe and brass union with
wiped solder joint, internal overflow arrangement, 40 mm dia CP brass flushing pipe. The
cistern shall have water efficient dual flush mechanism and shall be compliant to the norms
laid down by National Building Code. CI or MS supporting brackets shall be fixed with the
water closet. The closet shall be fixed firmly in the floor with matching cement mortar. All
exposed metallic surfaces shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved quality over a coat of primer. The clearance between top of pan and bottom of
cistern shall not exceed 300 mm.
Rate quoted for item rate tenders shall include providing and fixing of all fittings, breaking
floors and wall, making good the same, making inlet and outlet connection to the cistern and
the closet, testing of joints, painting the exposed metallic surface with two coats of white
enamel paint over a coat of primer etc. complete.
5.0
URINALS (Half stall type)

Half stall type urinal shall be conforming to IS:2556 Part VI. Urinals shall be of single piece
construction with integral flushing box rim. These shall be mounted on walls. The flushing
inlet pipe shall be of CP brass 15 mm dia and waste pipe 32 mm dia GI, 750 mm long shall be
embedded in wall. Necessary unions and CP bottle trap shall be provided in the waste line.
Rawl plugs with CP brass screws shall be used for fixing the urinal. Fixing shall ensure that no
liquid is left over in the pan after flushing. Unless otherwise indicated height above finished
floors shall be 600 mm.
Urinals shall be connected to automatic flushing cisterns either individually, or in groups.
Cistern inlet shall be 15 mm dia PVC pipe with brass union. Outlet pipe from cistern shall be
25mm CP brass main, with 15 mm CP distributor pipe of sufficient lengths to reach each
bowl. Where individual cisterns are provided the outlet shall be of 15 mm CP brass. The
cistern shall have water efficient flush mechanism and shall be compliant to the norms laid
down by National Building Code.
Rate quoted for item rate tenders shall include cost of urinals inlet and outlet pipes, flushing
cistern, breaking and making good the walls and flooring, making inlet and outlet connections,
painting exposed brackets and GI pipes etc.
6.0
WASH BASINS
This shall be flat back wash basin with one tap hole conforming to IS: 2556 Part-IV. Wash
basins shall be of one piece construction including a combined overflow and it shall be so
designed as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow. This shall be fitted on CI or MS brackets.
Brackets shall conform to IS: 775. The brackets shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel
paint or aluminium paint, over a coat of primer.
Page 1674 of 1744
16i1PzIeT
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
0 Go, of Ina. UndenaM,^91

FIXTURES
6-75-0009 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 6
The wall side shall be fixed well flushed with the plaster or wall and the joint if any, shall be
properly stopped with an elastomeric sealant. One CP brass pillar cock, PVC connecting pipe
with brass union, a CP brass bottle trap with union, CP brass chain and rubber PVC stopper,
2mm dia GI/ CPVC waste pipe shall also be supplied and fitted with the wash basin and
embedded in the wall. The pillar cock shall be water efficient low flow fixture and shall have
low flow rates with auto-stop facility, wherever specified, compliant to the norms laid down
by the National Building Code. The top of rim of the wash basin shall be fixed at 800 mm
above finished floor level, unless otherwise specified.
Rate for item rate tenders shall include provision and fixing of wash basin with all accessories,
providing stop cocks and pillar cocks, breaking and making good walls, fixing and making
inlet and outlet connections for stop cock, pillar cock and waste pipe, providing & fixing MS
brackets painted as mentioned above etc. complete.
7.0
WASH BASIN (Counter Top)

Wash basins shall be oval or round shaped counter top type with anti-splash rim conforming
to IS: 2556 Part-IV. Wash basins shall be of one piece construction including a combined
overflow having an area of not less than 5 Sq. cm. in the front or back of the bowl and it shall
be so designed as to facilitate cleaning of the overflow. Wash basin shall be fixed over 1 8 to
19mm thick granite stone or 16 to 17mm marble stone finished counter top . The stone shall
be pre-polished (mirror- finished) counter top with require number of tap holes. The cut out in
the granite/ marble slab counter top shall be made to suit the fixing of the wash basin neatly.
Each wash basin shall be provided with 15mm dia. pillar cock of approved make, rubber plug
with CP brass chain, 32mm CP Waste fitting of standard pattern with 32mm dia. G.I./ CPVC
pipe, CP Brass bottle trap, CP Brass 15mm dia stop cock etc. complete with all related
accessories, fittings and fixtures. The pillar cock shall be water efficient low flow fixture and
shall have low flow rates with auto-stop facility, wherever specified, compliant to the norms
laid down by the National Building Code. This shall be fitted on CI or MS brackets. Brackets
shall confirm to IS:775. The brackets shall be given two coats of synthetic enamel paint or
aluminium paint, over a coat of approved make primer. The top of rim of the wash basin shall
be fixed at 850 mm above finished floor level, unless otherwise specified. The sides of the rim
of the washbasin & its bottom shall be fixed with sealant of approved make to the
granite/marble stone slab.
The Rate shall include provision and fixing of wash basin with all accessories, providing stop
cocks and pillar cocks, breaking and making good walls, fixing and making inlet and outlet
connections for stop cock, pillar cock and waste pipe, providing & fixing MS brackets painted
with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a coat of red oxide zinc
chromate primer etc. complete.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IoN melt
STANDARD No.
STEEL WINDOWS
FITTINGS AND FIXTURES
7-75-0032 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
STEEL FRAME
3 THICK MS FLAT
CUT/BENT TO SHAPE
NYLON WASHER
8 DIA MS BOLT
3 THICK BRASS
STRIKING PLATE
DETAIL AT A-A
DETAIL OF MS HINGE
STEEL FRAME
3 THICK 10 PROJECTED
BRASS STRIKING PLATE
RIVETED TO WINDOW
FRAME TO HOLD THE
HANDLE IN POSITION
4 DIA PIN
33
10 DIA MS FIXING SCREW
3 THICK MS
FABRICATED HANDLE
3 THICK BRASS
STRIKING PLATE
PVC WASHER
11 ROUND OR
SQUARE HOLE
DETAIL OF HANDLE
2 THICK MS
FABRICATED STAY
75
DETAIL OF PEG STAY

2. FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS REFERENCE SHALL BE MADE TO 15:1038.
S;)
23.04.12
DK
21.03.07
MURAT
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No. 8-00-000 SEA Re g 0

Page 1675 of 1744
Purpose
Prepared
by
V/NAT KUMAR
JKB/SD
Checked
by
D KUMAR
Stds. Como-silo
Convenor
fl%-L
D.MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
GM (E)
Stds. Reread
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright
- All rights rases', eri
STANDARD No.
STEEL GATE
Wartak,
111INWEINWS
ED
.A God. of YANAArtelAsq)
7-75-0054 Rev. 4
(FOR ENTRANCES UPTO 6.0M WIDTH)
Sheet 1 of 2
r
SPACE
FOR LOGO
40x80x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
80x40x3.2MM MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION MEMBERS
32x32x2.6MM MS
SQUARE HOLLOW
SECTION MEMBERS
ELEVATION
SECTION '1-1'
40x80x3.2MM
MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
(OUTER FRAME)
75x1OMM THICK MS FLAT

STOPPER EMBEDED IN
CEMENT CONCRETE (1:2:4)
32x32x2.6MM MS
SQUARE HOLLOW
SECTION MEMBERS
40x80x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
80x40x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR HOLLOW
SECTION MEMBERS
40x80x3.2MM
MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
EQ
EQ
=1-111-
RCC COLUMN
PLAN AT 'A'
OUTER FRAME
OUTER FRAME
R.C.C. COLUMN
2 NOS. 6 THK. M.S.FLATS
WELDED TO INSERT PLATE
FABRICATED HOLLOW MS
CYLINDER MADE OF
5MM THK. M.S PLATE WITH
20MM INTERNAL DIA. FIXED
TO SHUTTER
M.S HOLD FAST,
25x6x200MM LONG
FABRICATED
HINGE ASSEMBLY
80x40x3.2MM
MS RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
MEMBERS
2 NOS. 6MM THK.

M.S.FLATS WELDED
TO FRAME
75MM WIDE, 6MM

THK. MS FLAT CLAMP
75MM DIA. 25MM
THK. M.S. WHEEL
DETAIL '3'
75x5OMM, 8 THK
M.S INSERT PLATE
NOTE:
DETAIL AT '4'
ALL STEEL MEMBERS SHALL CONFORM TO

RELEVANT B.IS. CODES AS APPLICABLE.
/
4 20.03.12 REVISED, ISSUED AS STANDARD

3 21.03.07 REVISED, ISSUED AS STANDARD
Rev.
No.
Date

Page 1676 of 1744
Purpose
SUMEDHA
JKB
AMARJIT
SD/JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds. Committee
Convenor
cr\ iv ....
J IM AY KUMAR
D. MALHOTRA
V. CHATURVEDI
GM (E)
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1677 of 1744
lregenrarED.
NM an/NM (A
STANDARD No.
STEEL GATE
Gant of Ado Unakrbfklog/
Sheet 2 of 2
375Ha LoxIit( <W.o Ss

350
rmmeIn
7-75-0054 Rev. 4
(FOR ENTRANCES UPTO 6.0M WIDTH)
nACJA.I.LIVIIVI
tJ
/V13 ICGl. I PalNlolif-na
HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAM E)
mCTPII
IC;h1i
MuEZERS
.,............,
.-- u
a
1'
2
0 a
CO an
el
..
DETAIL AT '5'
......
OMI
I,
..
ten=
near
00
. Aenn
itinitrai
Ai
n:
1111/1
.
i 4
44
411011 Aeranz4.7WM
11 LIMN'
II
0 0.
c
11.
MAORI
aiali
l r
"IL
1000
1900
40 (TYP.)
.
spacing
tflialli
ArIvAriv10kAAA ItAZ DC(`TANIft:II AD
AfTeArly1 9K)11.1 MC RFCTAN/C,1 It AP
HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
RCC COLUMN
40x80x3.2MM MS
RECTANGULAR
HOLLOW SECTION
(OUTER FRAME)
HOLLOW SECTION (OUTER FRAME)
32x32x2.6MM MS SQUARE
75MM WIDE 6MM THICK
MS CLAMP
75MM DR 25MM THICK MS
WHEEL WITH BALL BEARING
20 DIA MS BOLT
50x50x6MM MS TEE BENT
TO SHAPE
WELDED TO FRAME & MS SQ. BAR

25X25MM MS SQ. BAR WELDED
TO FRAME & 20 DIA ROUND BAR
AT BOTTOM
50x50x5OMM MS SECTION
WITH 22 DIA X 20 DEEP
SLOT FOR MOVING PIVOT
DETAIL AT '6'
DETAIL AT '7'
40x40x6MM MS
ANGLE FOR
LOCKING
ARRANGEMENT
12 DIA HOLE
FOR LOCK
NOTE:
DETAIL AT '8'
ALL STEEL MEMBERS SHALL CONFORM TO

RELEVAE.I.S. CODES AS APWCABLE
.Ak
20.03.12
21.03.07
Rev.
No.
Date
Purpose
SUMEDHA
SIA
"-
AMARJIT
Prepared
SD/JKB
Checked
by
by
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
\fr
..>
Y
KUMAR
D. MALHOTRA
CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
V.
GM (E)
Approved by
Page 1678 of 1744
aazieT
ENCINEERS
$fg-itir 00ft,INDIA LIMITED
GoN al incl. undePlaivngl

WHITE WASHING, COLOUR
WASHING, DISTEMPERING,
PAINTING & POLISHING
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 15
13t^ 4-tiR41,
thricordb-r
FOR
WASHING, DISTEMPERING, PAINTING
AND POLISHING
09.04.12
21.03.07
REVISED & ISSIED AS STANDARD

SPECIFICATION
REVISED & ISSIED AS STANDARD
SPECIFICATION
10.03.99
2
1
Rev.
No
2/ye-4
0 k 5412\\
VK
TS
D MALHOTRA
SD
JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
REAFFIRMED AS STANDARD SPECIFICATION
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
16.03.94

SPECIFICATION
JS
JS
AKG
AS
27.09.91
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Date
Purpose
CHATURVEDI
Standards
Standards
Bureau
Prepared Checked Committee GM(E)
Convenor
Chairman
by
by
Approved by
Page 1679 of 1744
swzra
Ig-.41fe9-eg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Gov/ al India Undertaong

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
IS
BS
:
ASTM :
Indian Standards
British Standards
American Society of Testing of Materials

Convenor :
Mr. JK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
Page 1680 of 1744
az
aZra ENGINEERS
azz EIfaleg INDIA LIMITED
IA Go, of Inda Uncienalengj


6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
WHITEWASHING
3.0
COLOURWASHING
4.0
DRY DISTEMPERING
5.0
OIL BOUND DISTEMPERING
6.0
7.0
PLASTIC EMULSION PAINT
10
8.0
ACRYLIC COPLOYMER AGGREGATE FINISH
11
9.0
ACRYLIC BASED EXTERIOR EMULSION PAINT
11
10.0
PAINTING OF WOOD WORK
12
11.0
PAINTING OF STEEL AND OTHER METAL SURFACE
14
12.0
15
Page 1681 of 1744
150zre?
sga feifteg
,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iÂ Govt of lode Undertakogj

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 15
1.0 GENERAL
Reference shall be made to the following Indian Standards for further information etc. not
covered in the specification. In case of conflict/contradictions provisions of the specification
shall override.
IS 6278
Code of practice for white washing and colour washing.
IS 2395
Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces.
IS 712
Specification for building limes.
IS 55
Specification for Ultramarine blue for paints.
IS 63
Specification for whiting for paint and putty.
IS 427
Distemper (dry), colour as required.
IS 428
Distemper (Oil Bound), colour as required.
IS 5411
Specification for plastic Emulsion paint for interior use.
IS 2338 Part-1 :
Code of practice for finishing of wood, and wood based materials.

Part-1 : Operations & workmanship
IS 2338 Part-2 :
Code of practice for finishing of wood, and wood based materials.

Part-2 : Schedule
IS 5410
Cement paint, colour as required.
IS 2524 Part-1 :
Code of practice for painting non ferrous metals in buildings.

Part-1 : Pretreatment
IS 2524 Part-2 :
Code of practice for painting non ferrous metals in buildings.

Part-2 : Painting
IS 1477 Part-1 :
Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings.

Part-1 : Pretreatment
IS 1477 Part-2 :
Code of practice for painting ferrous metals in buildings.

Part-1 : Painting
IS 384
Brushes, paints and varnishes, flat.
IS 486
Brushes, sash, tool, for paints and varnishes.
IS 110
Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler enamels for use over primers.
IS 426
Paste filler for colour coats.
IS 345
Wood filler, transparent liquid.
IS 3585
Ready mixed paint, aluminium brushing priming water resistant for

wood work.
Page 1682 of 1744
ISlifrzre? ENCJNEERS
basal. itiwegw INDIA LIMITED

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 5 of 15
IS 110
Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler for enamels for use over
primers.
IS 106
Ready mixed paint, brushing, priming for enamels, for use on metals.
IS 2395 Part-1 :
Painting of concrete, masonry & plastered surface, code of practice

Part-1 : Operations and workmanship
IS 2395 Part-2 :
Painting of concrete, masonry & plastered surface, code of practice

Part-2 : Schedule
All materials required for the execution of painting work shall be obtained direct from
approved manufacturers and shall be brought to the site in makers drums, bags etc. with seals
unbroken.
In case of ready mixed paints, thinning if necessary, the brand of thinner shall be as per
recommendations of the manufacturer.
Paint shall be applied by brushing or spraying. The brushing operations are to be adjusted to
the spreading capacity advised by the manufacturer. During painting, every time after the paint
has been worked out of the brush bristles, the bristles shall be opened up by striking the brush
suitably.
Spray machine used may be of high pressure type or low pressure depending on the nature and
location of work. After work, the brushes shall be completely cleaned of paint and shall be
hung in a thinner if intended to be used afterwards. The spray guns shall be cleaned
thoroughly after every break in work. The paint containers, when not used shall be kept close
and free from air.
After the finishing of work, the adjacent surfaces not intended to be washed/
distempered/painted/polished shall be thoroughly cleaned of all paint patches and shall be
finished in accordance with surface finishing of such surfaces.
2.0
WHITE WASHING
White washing in general shall conform to IS 6278.
2.1
Workmanship
2.1.1
Scaffolding
Wherever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be erected in such a way that as far as possible no
part of scaffolding shall rest against the surface to be white/ colour washed. For white washing
of ceiling, proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.
2.1.2
Preparation of Surfaces
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign
matter before white wash is to be applied. Surfaces already white/colour washed shall be
broomed down to remove all dust, dirt, loose scales of lime wash or other foreign matters.
All damaged portions of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in
rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the joints in masonry properly. Such
portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry before any operation.
Page 1683 of 1744
SSlIPZIeft, ENGINEERS
fetlatow INDIA LIMITED
IA GoN of ludo Undertaking)

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 6 of 15
All holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.1 sq. m. in area shall be made good with
material similar to that of the surface. Surfaces affected by efflorescence, moss, fungi, algae,
lichen etc. shall be treated in accordance with IS: 2395.
2.1.3 Preparation of White Wash
The fat lime conforming to IS: 712 shall be slaked at site and shall be mixed and stirred with
about 5 litres of water for 1 kg. of unslaked lime to make thin cream. This shall be allowed to
stand for a period of 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 4 kg of
gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic metre of lime cream. Approved
quality ultramarine blue conforming to IS 55 @ 3 gram per kg. of lime shall also be added to
the solution. The whole solution shall be stirred thoroughly before use.
2.1.4 Application
White wash shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
operation for each coat shall consist of stroke of the brush from the top to down wards,
another from the down to upwards over the first stroke, similarly one stroke horizontally from
right and another stroke from the left. Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next coat is
applied. The white washing on ceiling should be done prior to that on walls.
2.1.5 Protective measures
Surfaces of doors, windows, floors etc. which are not to be white washed shall be protected
from being splashed upon. Such surfaces shall be cleaned of white wash splashed if any.
COLOUR WASHING
Workmanship
Scaffolding
3.1.2 Preparation of Surface
Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar dropping and other foreign matter
before white wash is to be applied. Surfaces already white/colour washed shall be broomed
down to remove all dust, dirt, loose scales of lime wash or other foreign matters.
All damaged portions of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in
rectangular patches and plastered again after raking the joints in masonry properly. Such
portions shall be wetted and allowed to dry before any operation.
All holes, cracks, patches etc. not exceeding 0.1 sq. m. in area shall be made good with
material similar to that of the surface. Surfaces affected by efflorescence, moss, fungi, algae,
lichen etc. shall be treated in accordance with IS: 2395.
3.1.3 Preparation of Colour Wash
Sufficient quantity of colour wash enough for the complete job shall be prepared in one
operation to avoid any difference in colour. The basic white wash solution shall be prepared in
accordance with clause 2.1.3. Mineral colours of approved shade and quality not affected by
lime shall be added to the white wash solution in proportions as directed by Engg.in-charge.
Copyright DLAll rights reserved
Page 1684 of 1744
sfiftne?
047 oqteg,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
rA Goo of incia unaertskingl

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 15
Solid lumps etc. in the colour powder shall be ground to fine powder, sieved and mixed evenly
and thoroughly to the white wash solution.
3.1.4
Application of Colour Wash

Colour wash shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
3.1.5
Protective Measure
4.0
DRY DISTEMPERING
4.1
Workmanship
4.1.1
Scaffolding
4.1.2
Preparation of Surface
The surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from dust, dirt, grease, mortar droppings, other
foreign matter and shall be made smooth by sand papering.
In case of distempering over existing distempered surface, the existing distempering shall be
scraped by steel scrapers leaving a clean surface.
All nails shall be removed. Pitting in plaster shall be made good with plaster-of-paris mixed
with dry distemper of colour to be used. The surface then shall be rubbed down again with a
fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be applied over the patches.
The surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is allowed.
The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae, efflorescence shall be treated in accordance with
IS: 2395.
4.1.3
Priming Coat
A priming coat of whiting conforming to IS 63 shall be applied over the prepared surface. The
priming coat shall be prepared by mixing 2.5 kg. of whiting and one litre of glue solution
(prepared by mixing 250 gm. glue conforming to IS: 852 with boiling water) together and
placing it in a covered vessel with enough water to cover the mixture which shall be left to
cool until it becomes a jelly.
Priming coat shall be applied with "MOONJ" brush to the specified number of coats. The
Page 1685 of 1744
ofrzey
51e-,4199:eg,
4.1.4
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
1.
GOA
o/
Undertaiong)

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 15
Preparation of Distemper
The dry distemper of approved shade and quality conforming to IS: 427 shall be stirred slowly
in clean warm water using 0.6 litres of water per kg. of distemper. It shall be allowed to settle
for at least 30 minutes before applying. The mixture shall be well stirred before and during use
to maintain an even consistency.
4.1.5
Application of Distemper
After the priming coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
and dusted off avoiding rubbing off of the priming coat. Prepared distemper shall then be
applied in minimum two coats with proper distemper brushes in horizontal strokes
immediately followed by vertical ones which together shall constitute one coat. The
subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried. The finished surface
shall be even and uniform without patches, marks, distemper drops etc. The application of a
coat in each room shall be finished in one operation. After each day's work, brushes shall be
thoroughly washed in hot water and hung down to dry.
4.1.6
Protective Measure
5.0
OIL BOUND DISTEMPERING
5.1
Workmanship
5.1.1
Scaffolding
Same as in clause no. 2.1.1
5.1.2
Preparation of surface shall in general be in accordance with clause no. 4.1.2 except that any
unevenness shall be made good by applying putty made of plaster of Paris mixed with water
including filling up the undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry.
5.1.3
Primer Coat
The primer coat shall be alkali resistant primer or distemper primer and shall be of the same
manufacture as oil bound distemper.
If the wall surface plaster has not dried completely, alkali resistant primer otherwise distemper
primer shall be applied. The mixture of alkali resistant primer shall be prepared as per
approved manufacturer's instructions.
The application of primer coat shall be in accordance with 2.1.4
5.1.4
Preparation of Oil Bound Distemper

The distemper shall conform to IS: 428 and shall be diluted with water or any other prescribed
thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
5.1.5
Application of Distemper
Page 1686 of 1744
SW-Lie? ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt Al Intha Uneertaktom

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 15
After the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered
and dusted off avoiding rubbing off of the primer coat. Minimum two coats of distemper shall
be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed by immediate vertical strokes which
together shall constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be applied after at least 24 hours
between consecutive coats to permit proper drying of the preceding coat. The finished surface
shall be even and uniform without patches, brush marks drops etc. Application of a coat in
each room shall be finished in one operation. 14 cm double bristled distemper brushes shall be
used. After each day's work brushes shall be thoroughly washed in hot water with soap
solution and hung down to dry.
5.1.6
Protective Measures
Same as in clause no. 2.1.5
6.0
6.1
Workmanship
6.1.1
Scaffolding
Same as in clause 2.1.1
6.1.2
Preparation of surface shall be in accordance with clause no. 2.1.2. The surface so prepared
shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before the paint is applied.
6.1.3
Preparation of Paint
Waterproof cement paint of approved make shall be mixed with water and stirred to obtain a
thick paste which shall then be diluted to brushable consistency. The proportion of mixture
shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation. The paint shall be mixed in such quantity
which can be used up within an hour of mixing to avoid setting and thickening of the paint.
6.1.4
Application of Paint
The surface shall be treated with minimum two coats of waterproof cement paint. No less than
24 hours shall be allowed between two coats and subsequent coats shall be applied only after
the preceding coat has become hard to resist marking by subsequent brushing.
The finished surface shall be even and uniform in shade without patches, brush marks, paint
drops etc. Cement paints shall be applied with a brush with relatively short stiff hog or fibre
bristles.
6.1.5
Curing
Curing shall be started after the paint has hardened. Curing shall be done by sprinkling with
water two or three times a day. This shall be done between coats and for at least two days
following the final coat.
6.1.6
Protective Measure
Same as in clause in 2.1.5
Page 1687 of 1744
larairefirm ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govi Al ^nda Underialong)

7.0
PLASTIC EMULSION PAINTING
7.1
Workmanship
7.1.1
Scaffolding
6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 10 of 15

7.1.2
Same as in clause 5.1.2 under specification of oil bound distempering.
7.1.3
Preparation of Paint
Plastic emulsion paint shall conform to IS 5411 (Part-1) and shall be of approved shade.
Preparation of paint shall be as per manufacturer's instructions.
7.1.4
Application of Paint
The paint mix shall be continuously stirred while applying for maintaining uniform
consistency. Number of coats shall be as specified. The painting shall be laid evenly and
smoothly by means of crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of
covering the area with paint, brushing the surface hard at first, then brushing alternately in
opposite direction 2 to 3 times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to
the same. In this process, no brush marks, no hair marks no clogging of paint puddles shall be
permitted. The full process of crossing and laying off will constitute one coat. The paint shall
be applied by means of brush or roller.
Before starting painting with plastic emulsion paint, the prepared surface shall be treated with
two coats of primer consisting of cement, primer, whiting and plastic emulsion paint shall start
only after the preceding coat has become sufficiently hard to resist brush marking. Subsequent
coats of plastic emulsion paint shall also be started after the preceding coat is dried by
evaporation of water content.
The surface on finishing shall present a flat, velvety smooth finish, even and uniform shade
without patches, marks, paint drops etc.
7.1.5
Precautions
Brushes shall be quickly washed in water immediately after use and kept immersed in
water during break periods to prevent the paint from hardening on the brush. Old
brushes, if used shall be completely dried of turpentine/oil paints by washing in warm
soap water.
No oil base putties shall be used in filling cracks/holes.
C.
7.1.6
Washing of painted surface shall not be done within 3-4 weeks of application.
Protective Measures
Page 1688 of 1744
02-zre?
gar lageg)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Underlag)

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 11 of 15
8.0
ACRYLIC COPOLYMER AGGREGATE FINISH
8.1
Material
It shall be an acrylic based textured wall coating consisting of quartz and silica aggregate,
inorganic pigments and other additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, waterproof
coating.
8.2
The surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be
removed. Any old textured surface shall be removed with removing agent as per
manufacturer's instructions.
8.3
Application
Bonding agent and water shall be mixed first. Then the flakes/granules shall be added and
mixed thoroughly and kneaded till no lumps are found. The dough shall be left for 20-30
minutes before starting application. The bonding agent, flakes/granules and water shall be
mixed in different ratios for different finishes as per manufacturer's specifications.
The first application shall be by steel trowel. It shall be smoothened, if the specified finish
requires, by a plastic trowel.
9.0
ACRYLIC BASED EXTERIOR EMULSION PAINT
9.1
Material
It shall be an acrylic based wall coating for exterior surfaces consisting of pure acrylic resin
and additives to form a crack free, flexible, tough, alkali resistant, UV resistant waterproof
coating.
9.2
The surface to be coated shall be cleaned and all dirt, dust, grease and loose particles shall be
removed. Any old paint shall be removed with removing agent as per manufacturer's
instructions. The surface affected by moss, fungus, algae, efflorescence shall be treated in
accordance with IS: 2395.
9.3
Application
A primer coat of similar shade shall be applied as per manufacturer's specifications. The paint
shall be stirred to a uniform consistency. Two coats shall be applied over the primer coat by
brush or roller. Each coat shall be applied after the previous coat has dried completely. The
coverage of paint and application shall be strictly as per manufacturer's specifications.
10.0
PAINTING OF WOOD WORK
10.1
Preparation of surface
Preparation of wood surface shall conform to IS: 2338 (Part-I) in general. All woodwork shall
be dry and free from any foreign matter. Nails shall be punched well below the surface. The
surface shall be smoothened off with abrasive paper used across the grain prior to painting,
with the grain prior to the staining. Any knots, resinous or bluish sap wood, cutting out of
which is not justified shall be covered with red lead conforming to IS: 103.
Plywood and block board shall be treated in the same manner as for wood work.
Format No. 8-00-0001-Fl Rev. 0
ailfrZie?
0g-elf lafgreg
Page 1689 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Goal at
moo Uncieltahmg

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 12 of 15
Particle board's surface shall be filled with a thin brushable filler and finished as for solid
wood.
10.2
Priming
Priming shall be in accordance with IS: 2338 (Part I and II). Dirt or any other extraneous
material on the surface shall be removed and the priming shall be applied by brushing.
Priming shall be done on all exposed and unexposed surfaces. Unless specified otherwise all
joinery work intended to be painted shall receive atleast 2 coats of primer. Type of primer
shall be in accordance with Table-1 and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part-II).
103
Stopping and Filling

Stopping and filling shall be done after priming. Stopping shall be made to the consistency of
stiff paste and shall be used to fill holes and cracks. Filler shall be used to level up slight
irregularities of the surface.. Filler shall be applied with a putty knife and subsequently rubbed
down to a level surface with abrasive paper.
The filler coat shall be allowed to fully flatten and harden before subsequent coat is applied.
10.4
Application of Undercoat
Under coat shall be applied after the surface has been primed, stopped and filled, and rubbed
down to a smooth surface. Under coat may be brushed or sprayed. After drying the coat shall
be carefully rubbed down and wiped clean before the next coat is applied.
The type of undercoat shall be depending upon the finishing and in accordance with Table I
and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part II).
10.5
Finishing
The finishing paint shall be as specified and shall be applied either by the brush or by
spraying.
Reference shall be made to the Table-1 and Table-2 of IS: 2338 (Part-II)
10.6
Application of Clear Finishes

For the application of clear finishes, the following procedures shall generally be adopted in
accordance with IS: 2338 (Part-I)
Filling
Staining
Sealing
Finishing
10.6.1 Filling
Fillers shall be applied to prevent the excessive penetration of the finish to the surface for
obtaining a smooth finish. Fillers shall be conforming to IS: 345.
Fillers shall be heavily applied to the wood surface by hand, using hessian or jute rag across
the grain. It shall be rubbed when still wet to get better penetration. After 5-10 minutes it shall
Page 1690 of 1744
1,51fazra
s'@-91a9lag,
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
iA Gout at indu
undensong)

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 13 of 15
be wiped off by hand across the grain followed by a light wipe with the grain. The filled
surface shall be dried preferably over night and smoothened with abrasive paper.
10.6.2 Staining
10.6.2.1 Spirit Stains
Spirit stains are solutions of spirit soluble dyes in Industrial methylated spirit.
10.6.2.2011 Stains
Oil stains are solutions of oil soluble dyes in linseed oil, but, usually consist of insoluble,
semi-transparent pigments ground in linseed oil and thinned with turpentine or other solvent.
10.6.2.3Preparation of Wood for Staining
Surface intended for staining shall be kept scrupulously clean and free from greasy finger
marks. It shall be prepared by careful smoothing with fine abrasive paper used in the direction
of the grain. Small cracks/nail holes shall be stopped with plastic wood/fine plaster of Paris.
The stopping shall be rubbed down with fine abrasive paper when hard and touched with a
thinned knotting before staining. In case of oil staining stopping shall be done after staining
using tinted putty or wood filler.
10.6.2.4Application of Stains
Stains shall be applied by brushing and wiping or by spraying. The stain shall be so thinned
that it can be applied fairly, liberally without over staining and over lapping.
10.6.3 Sealing
A suitable sealer shall be applied on the filled and sanded surface to prevent absorption by the
wood of the succeeding coats of finish and to seal stain and filler and thus preclude their
bleeding into the finish coat.
Sealer may be sprayed on taking care not to flood the surface and it shall be allowed to dry
hard. When fully dry the surface shall be sanded taking care not to cut through at corners and
edges. Dust shall be blown off and surface wiped with a clean rag.
10.6.4 Finishing
The stained surface shall be varnished, wax-polished or French polished as required after it is
dried.
10.6.4.1 Varnishing
Varnishing of wood and wood based material shall be in accordance with IS: 2338 (Part-I).
Surfaces to be varnished shall be prepared to produce a smooth, dry and matt surface and all
dust and dirt shall be removed from the surface.
The Varnish shall be applied liberally with a brush and spread evenly over a portion of the
surface with short light strokes to avoid frothing. It shall be allowed to flow out while the next
section is being laid in. Excess Varnish shall be scraped out of the brush and then the first
section be crossed, re- crossed and laid off lightly. The Varnish, once it has begun to set, shall
not be retouched. In case of any mistake, the Varnish shall be removed and the work shall be
started afresh.
Page 1691 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA On, Al Inda Unclartakingl

6-75-0007 Rev. 5
Page 14 of 15
Where two coats of varnish are applied, the first coat shall be a hard drying under coating or
flatting varnish which shall be allowed to dry hard and then be flatted down before applying
the finishing coat. Sufficient time shall be allowed in between two coats.
When flat varnishing is used for finishing, a preparatory coat of hard drying undercoating of
flatting varnish shall first be applied and shall be allowed to harden thoroughly. It shall then
be lightly rubbed down before the flat varnish is applied. On larger areas, the flat varnish shall
be applied rapidly, and the edges of each patch applied shall not be allowed to set, but shall be
followed up whilst in free working conditions.
10.6.4.2French Polish
French polish shall conform to IS :348. Suitable pigments shall be added to get the required
colour.
The surface to be French polished shall be rubbed down to smoothness with sand paper and
shall be well dusted. Pores in the surface shall be filled up with fillers.
A pad of woollen cloth covered by a fine cloth shall be used to apply the finish. The pad shall
be moistened with polish and rubbed hard on the surface in a series of overlapping circles
applying the polish sparingly but uniformly over the entire area to give an even surface. A
trace of linseed oil may be used on the face of the pad for the purpose. The surface shall be
allowed to dry and the remaining coats applied in the same way. To finish off, the pad shall be
covered with a fresh piece of clean fine cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and
rubbed lightly and quickly with circular motions. The finished surface shall have a uniform
texture and high gloss.
11.0
PAINTING OF STEEL AND OTHER METAL SURFACE
11.1
General
Reference shall be made to IS :2524 and IS:1447.
11.2
The surface, before painting, shall be cleaned of all rust, scale, dirt and other foreign matter
with wire brushes, steel wool, scrappers, sand paper etc. The surface shall then be wiped
finally with mineral turpentine which shall then be removed of grease etc. The surface then
shall be allowed to dry.
In case of GI surface, surface so prepared shall be treated with Mordant solution (5 litre for
about 100 sq.m.) by rubbing the solution generously with brush. After about half an hour, the
surface if required shall be retouched and washed down thoroughly with clean cold water and
allowed to dry.
11.3
Application of Priming and Paints

Approved quality primer and paint in specified numbers of coats shall be applied as per
manufacturer's recommendations either by brushing or spraying. Each subsequent coat shall
be applied only after the preceding coat has dried.
Page 1692 of 1744
ISIMileg ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
517 Hag
IA Goo ot Indka Undertalopg)

6 - 75 - 0007 Rev. 5
Page 15 of 15
12.0 MEASUREMENT AND RATE

For item rate tenders, all work shall be measured in areas. Areas shall be worked out to the
nearest 0.01 sq. m and all dimensions to the nearest 0.01 metre.
Deductions shall be made in accordance with Specification no. 6-75-0005.
For item rate tenders, rate shall include the cost of all materials, labour, scaffolding, protective
measures etc. and all works involved in specification. The rate shall also include, if not
mentioned otherwise, conveyance, delivery, handling, unloading, storing etc.
1/43511Reiel
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
5e7,10Meg,
STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATORS
USE OF SECTIONS
7-75-0028 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
PURPOSE OR RECOMMENDED USE OF SECTIONS

NOTE : DESIGNATION OF SECTIONS ARE AS/ IS 7452.
SR. NO.
DESIGNATION
OF SECTION
F7D
: WINDOWS / VENTILATORS OUTER AND SHUTTER FRAME.
F4B
: CENTRAL MULLION (MEETING BAR FOR SHUTTERS) FOR WINDOWS /

VENTILATORS. SUB DIVIDING BARS FOR OPENABLE WINDOWS AND
TOPHUNG VENTILATORS.
T2
K 11 B
: (A) VERTICAL COUPLING MULLION FOR WINDOWS / VENTILATORS.
4.
USE
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL GLAZING BARS FOR SASHES, WINDOWS,

VENTILATORS, SUB DIVIDING BARS FOR FIXEDLIGHTS, SASH BARS
FOR WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS.
(B) CAN BE USED AS HORIZONTAL COUPLING BAR WHEN OPNABLE

WINDOWS ARE TO BE COUPLED ABOVE FIXED ONES OR BETWEEN
TWO FIXED WINDOWS.
4
3
Rev.
No
Page 1693 of 1744
I A GOA Of meg aUndedaking)
STANDARD No.
12.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
21.03.07
Date
0
00-0001-F4 Rev 0
Purpose
Die.r..."
3.161/4;
VINAY KUMAR
AMARJIT
SD/JKB
ARVIND KUMAR
Prepared
by
Checked
by
Stds Committee
Convenor
D.MALHOTRA
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
GM (E)
<65x65x6(1YP.)
SEE DETAIL
L65x65x6
(TYP.)
TIED WITH BINDING WIRE

(TYP.)
NOTES:
illkilln....116.
IllialInEalliPanISIM.
NIMESEIIIMINW-111111111.0WitAlliglah.
allandlillSallIllalrAVAIIIIIMLIIIIIS
MIZIONEINOMIllrflI1111IrSAKIMMINIAlla
-NrilINSIMOMMINNENOW2111WAIMalliaLSOr
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

THE GALVANIZED STEEL BARBED WIRE SHALL CONFORM
TO IS:278 DESIGNATED AS "STEEL BARBED WIRE
A-1 TO IS:278".
LINE POST SHALL BE PLACED AT 3.0M C/C.
STRUT SHALL BE PROVIDED AT EVERY 15TH.
POST ON BOTH SIDE & END POST ON ONE SIDE.
STRAINING BOLTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT
THE END POST & AT PLACES AS DIRECTED
BE ENGINEER INCHARGE.
EXPOSED FOUNDATION BLOCK AT GROUT LEVEL SHALL
BE FINISHED SMOOTH IN CEMENT MORTAR 1:6.
GALVANISED BARBED WIRE SHALL BE TIED TO THE
ANGLE IRON POST EITHER WITH WELDED M.S. NIBS
OR WITH G.I. WIRE THROUGH HOLES IN THE POST.
GRADE OF CONCRETE AS PER STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES (MINIMUM M20).
S'IMINIarearAnnalkes.
s'1110111111MHWailalleatamira
AllaSIEWSIWAIPASIara.
SIMISSAtirflara
"1111111PrellralWAWAIS411111121SIIL
III,
ShllrWaIIIIIIIFAISIIFSIS
, ,, ,
F.G L
AraerSisain
1111
1t11
1
1
11
LJ
I
L
I I I I
I LJ I
4 0
L50x50x6
TY P.
3000
3000
I
L
750
i OW.)
J
1
(TYP.)
BARBED WIRE FENCE

(OUTSIDE)
L65x65x6
WELD
L50x50x6
F.G.L.
300 LONG 0 8 BOLT
THREADED UPTO THE NECK
CONC. BLOCK
750x600x750
CONC. BLOCK
(600x450x750)
FIXING DETAIL OF STRAINING

BOLT WITH POST
DETAIL X
SECTION ELEVATIONAA
4CA
el
ligalaMeg
1.31W1 qe5we6130/1R)
Page 1694 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undedaking)
3
2
Rev.
No.
28.05.12
22.08.06
Date

Purpose
Anil
RBT/RRS
MANOJ RLT/UCJ
Prepared
by
R itgB
VK
2sw-"
DM
VJN
Stds.
Bureau
Stds.
Committee
GM(Engg)
Checked
Chairman
Convenor
by
Approved by
VDS
DETAIL OF BARBED WIRE FENCING

(WITH ANGLE IRON POST)
STANDARD No.
7-65-0403 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 1
fgeTr fdal
eg
Q`fe,gncf5Leiotr
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 1 of 7
49. Prick) .4FR:irr
iiiich 14-1411

CHAIN LINK FENCING
24.06.13
19.02.08
Rev.
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
RBT
RKS
MANAS
PPC /RKS
Prepared
by
Checked
by
DM
NK
VC
Standards
Committee
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1695 of 1744
Page 1696 of 1744
27f tcg
,I
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of Intha UndeftakmOl
'U

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 2 of 7
Abbreviations:
c/c
center to center
GI
Galvanized Iron
IS
Indian Standard
LSTK :
Lump Sum Turnkey Contract
mm
Millimeter
Meter
MS
Mild Steel
MT
Metric Ton

Convener:
Mr. R.B. Bhutda
Members:
Mr. Vipan Goel

Mr. R.K. Sharma
Mr. S. K. Naskar
Mr. Vinod Mahajan
Mr. Amitabh Kishore
Mr. V S Chhaya (Projects)
Page 1697 of 1744
5fgareTFmrtfa&
og,zn41r,
To
ENGINEERS
INDIA
LIMITED
Govt of Ind. Undertaking)

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 3 of 7
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE
3.0 REFERENCE OF EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS
4.0 EARTHWORK FOR CIVIL WORKS
5.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FOR FOUNDATION & SILL
6.0 CEMENT CONCRETE IN PRECAST POSTS/STRUTS
7.0 REINFORCEMENT
8.0 CHAIN LINK FENCING
9.0 PAYMENT
Page 1698 of 1744
$gar fafireg
INR
elegge
,TP415A
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govl of India Undettang)

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 4 of 7
1.0
SCOPE
This specification specifies the requirements of chain link fence for security purposes. The
height of the fence shall be approximately 2.00M to the top of the chain link fencing at the
posts and approximately 2.5M in vertical height at the top line of barbed wire attached to
the cranked tops of the posts.
2.0
CODES AND STANDARDS

Specification for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
IS : 278
Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for
IS : 383
concrete
Plain and Reinforced Concrete Code of Practice
IS : 456
Specification
for Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fencing
IS : 2721
NOTE: -
3.0
4.0
REFERENCE OF EIL SPECIFICATIONS / STANDARDS

Following standard specification shall be enclosed as part of the job
specifications.
Standard Specification Civil and Structural Works
General Scope
6-68-0001

Material
6-68-0002

Earth work
6-68-0003

Plain & Reinforcement Cement Concrete
6-68-0004

Structural Steel Works
6-68-0006
Standard detail of chain link fencing (with conc. Post)
7-65-0400
EARTHWORK FOR CIVIL WORKS

Refer specification No. 6-68-0003
5.0
CEMENT CONCRETE FOR FOUNDATION & SILL
5.1
Refer specification No. 6-68-0004.
6.0
CEMENT CONCRETE IN PRECAST POSTS/STRUTS

(Straining posts, intermediate posts and struts)
6.1
Pre Cast Cement concrete shall be of M25 grade for moderate environment exposure
condition and M30 grade for severe environment exposure condition with 20mm and
down size crushed stone aggregates conforming to IS : 383.
6.2
The work shall be carried out as per IS : 456 in all respects.
6.3
Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
smooth finished with 1:3 cement sand mortar as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Page 1699 of 1744
1
01
1=g-ar tlfgrdg
25-2,7,7=37'45,i)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 5 of 7
6.3
Necessary moulds shall be provided for casting the concrete posts and the same shall be
smooth finished with 1:3 cement sand mortar as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.0
REINFORCEMENT
7.1
Refer specification No. 6-68-0004
8.0
CHAIN LINK FENCING
8.1
Materials
8.1.1
Chain Link Fencing

The material requirement shall conform to IS : 2721 latest edition. The chain link
fencing shall be woven from 3.15mm dia wire with mesh size of 50mm. The mesh wire
shall not vary from the specified dia by more than + 0.05mm.
8.1.2
Galvanized Wires
8.1.2.1
All steel wires shall be hot dipped galvanized wire and dia of the wire shall be 3.15mm.
over the galvanized coating.
8.1.2.2
The line wire shall be 4.0mm dia MS.
8.1.2.3
The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the concrete intermediate posts shall be
3.15mm diameter MS.
8.1.2.4
The tying wire for securing the chain link fencing to the line wire shall be 2.50mm
diameter MS.
8.1.2.5
Hair pin staples for fastening down the bottom of galvanized chain link fencing to the
concrete sill shall be of 3.15mm wire. The ends shall be bent outwards to secure
anchorage.
8.1.3
Cleats for eye bolts shall be of uniform size and shall consists of MS angle of 75 x 50 x
6mm.
8.1.4
Eye Bolt Strainers
8.1.4.1
The eye bolt strainer shall consist of bolts with welded eye sufficiently threaded and
fitted with a nut and waster.
8.1.4.2
Two-way eye bolt strainer shall have suitable ring nuts, fitted after wires have been
strained on one side.
8.1.5
Stretcher bar shall consist of MS flats 25mm x 4.75mm. They shall be secured to the
cleats by steel bolts.
8.1.6
Droppers for barbed wire shall be of M.S not less than 25mm x 4.75mm thick with
38mm x 4.85mm half round staples for fastening the barbed wire to them.
12-err 254-es
Page 1700 of 1744
ENGINEERS ED
INDIA LIMIT
Icnen rirm
rtm3PCM11
IA Govt ol India Undellaking)

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 6 of 7
8.1.7
Barbed Wire
8.1.7.1
Barbed wire shall conform to IS :278. The galvanized barbed wire shall be
manufactured from galvanized MS wire conforming to IS:280. The coating on the wire
shall be smooth and relatively free of lumps, globes or points, wires with excessive
roughness, blisters, Sal ammoniac spots shall be rejected. A galvanized steel barbed
wire of Type A-1 IS:278 shall be made from two strands of galvanised, twisted 2.5 mm
steel wire with 4 points of barbs. Each barb shall have two turns tightening around both
line wires making altogether four complete turns. The barbs shall be so finished that
four points are set and looked at right angles to each other.
8.1.7.2
Bracing of the rows of barbed wire shall be as shown in EIL Standard drawing.
8.1.7.3
The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than 18mm.
8.2
Erection
8.2.1
Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners of fences, at changes in
direction or acute variations in level and at intervals not exceeding 60m on straight
lengths of fence. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding
3M.
8.2.2
Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of
the line of fence.
8.2.3
Fixing chain link fencing
8.2.3.1
There shall be four evenly spaced rows of line wire. The top wire shall be doubled,
making five line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground.
8.2.3.2
Each line wire shall be strained tightly by means of eyebolt strainers or winders at each
straining point.
8.2.3.3
Each line wire shall be secured to each intermediate post by a wire stirrup passed
through a hole in the posts and secured to the line wire by three complete turns on each
side of the post.
8.2.3.4
The chain link fencing shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and secured
to each straining post by means of a Stretcher bar. One of the top line wires shall be
threaded through the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes
in the rows are bypassed by the line wire except where deviation is necessary at the
straining posts. The second top line wire shall be strained in front of the fencing. The
fencing shall be attached to the top and bottom line wire by wire ties spaced 150mm
apart and to the other line wires by wire ties spaced 450mm apart.
8.2.3.5
The bottom of the fencing shall be treated as follows:

Continuous concrete sill 230mm wide x 300mm high for full length between post shall
be cast with the top 25mm above G.L. and 25mm below the chain link fencing. Hair pin
staples shall be threaded through the bottom row of mesh at 0.75 m c/c and set in the sill
to a depth of 150mm.
8.2.4
Fixing barbed wires for Anticlimbing device.
lgzrr fagrdg
tvecnre- a513913,
+1)
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

CHAIN LINK FENCING
No.
6-65-0013 Rev. 3
Page 7 of 7
8.2.4.1
Three lines of barbed wire shall be provided as shown in drg. The wires shall be
attached by eye bolts to the cranked tops of the straining posts. On concrete intermediate
posts they shall be secured to cranked tops with stirrup wires. The barbed wire shall be
fitted with one droper at the centre of each bay, secured to the wires so that they cannot
be bunched together.
9.0
PAYMENT
9.1
Earthwork
Payment for earthwork shall be made on cubic meter basis
9.2
Page 1701 of 1744
Cement Concrete (Cast-in-Situ and Pre-cast)

Payment shall be made on cubic meter basis and the rate shall include labour, materials,
mixing placing, leaving pockets, fixing chain link fencing, line wires, barbed wires inserts
in concrete post while casting as shown in the drawing or as per the directions of
Engineer-in-Charge, keeping the concrete post in the proper position while concreting,
scaffolding, all moulds, curing etc. complete including handling & transportation from
pre-casting yards to place of fixing, preparation of pre-casting yards etc. but excluding
cost of reinforcement.
9.3
Reinforcement
Payment for reinforcement shall be made on MT basis including transportation of steel
to site of work, straightening, cleaning, cutting, bending to required shapes and lengths,
placing, binding with soft annealed wire as per drawings, specifications and instruction
of Engineer-in-Charge.
9.4
Chain Link Fencing

Payment for chain link fencing shall be made on running meter basis for bottom 2.0
meter height of the total height including supply of chain link fencing in 1.9 meter width
roll, fixing in position true to line and as per drawing. The rate shall also include
supplying and fixing necessary galvanized line wires, stirrup wires, tying wires, hair pin
staples for fixing the fence in conc sill, etc. tensioning the line wire and fencing, all
materials and labour etc. required to complete the job as per drawings and direction of
Engineer-in-Charge.
9.5
Barbed Wire Fencing

Payment for barbed wire shall be made on running meter basis. The rate shall included
supply and fixing necessary dropers, straining bolts tensioning the barbed wire etc. and
all materials and labour etc. required to complete the job.
9.6
The payment clause(s) as described in this standard specification shall not be referred
/applicable for LSTK Jobs.
ENGINEERS
STEEL WINDOWS/VENTILATOR
INDIA LIMITED
(WITH LOUVERS)
IA Govl of India Undertaking;
STANDARD No
7-75-0031 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. LINTEL/
R.C.C. BEAM
CEMENT
PLASTER
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
FRAME F7D
18 GAUGE MS
SHEET LOUVERS
SASH BAR T2
WINDOW/VENTILATOR
FRAME F7D
treVA
CEMENT
PLASTER
GLASS
UL SSAS
A
SPECIFIED
BRICK
VERTICAL SECTION
WALL
VERTICAL SECTION
LOUVERED WINDOW/VENTILATOR
LOUVERED & GLAZED

WINDOW/VENTILATOR
NOTE : ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.
12.10.11
REVISED & REISSUED
21.03.07
Rev.
No.
Date
Forrest No 8-00-0001-F4 Rev 0
Page 1702 of 1744
Purpose
DK
.34 SD
JKB
AMARJIT
JKB/SD
Prepared
Checked
by
by
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds Committee
Convenor
WHAT KUMAR
CM (E)
D.MALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright L L - All rights reserved
sg-tirfaf5leg
IA Govt at India undertaking)
li I
STANDARD No.
STEEL DOOR
(PRESSED STEEL)
SINGLE SHUTTER
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Page 1 of 1
R.C.C. BEAM/
R.C.C. LINTEL
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
CEMENT PLASTER
11
7-75-0070 Rev. 4
B
C
SHUTTER
3 THICK MS FLAT
CONTINUOUS ALONG
VISION PANEL
18 SWG GI 'Z'
SECTION FIXED
TO FRAME
EPDM GASKET
ALL AROUND THE
GLASS
GLASS
0
II
II
II
II
0
0
I
I
I
I
SECTION 3-3
IF
II
II
II
II
II
II
III
880 TO 1180
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
20X20X3 MS ANGLE
WELDED TO BOTH
FACES OF FRAME
ELEVATION
SECTION 1 1
12X10 GROOVE IN
PLASTER FILLED WITH
BRICK WORK
0
79
10
A
tisivil 014 I
I
,.W
414
L5
'(?'
CEMENT
PLASTER
SECTION 2-2
LEGEND:
A: OVER HEAD HYDRAULIC DOOR CLOSER (HEAVY DUTY).
THICK 0 MAXIMUM 600 C/C

WELDED TO FRAME SPACER (L)
40 THICK (OVER ALL) 18 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED
STEEL SHUTTER FILLED WITH MINERAL WOOL (48Kg/cum).
16 SWG GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL FRAME OUT OF
125X60 PROFILE FILLLED WITH CONCRETE (REBATE
DIMENSION TO BE SUITABLY ADJUSTED FOR
ACCOMODATING GASKET FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR).
VISION PANEL (AS/PROJECT DRAWING).
100 LONG SS 304 GRADE HEAVY DUTY BALL BEARING
HINGE 0 600 C/C MAXIMUM.
G: SS 304 GRADE 16 DIA 250 LONG ALDROP ON BOTH
SIDES.
B. MS
HOLD FAST 200x25x6
NOTE: 1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM

4
3
Rev
No.
09.04.12
21.03.07
REVISED & REISSUED

Date
Format No 8-00 0001 F4 Rev .O
Page 1703 of 1744
Purpose
H: 3 THICK MS FLAT CONTINUOUS ALONG
PERIMETER OF SHUTTER.
18 SWG GI VERTICAL STIFFNER 0 200 C/C
(SPACING TO BE ADJUSTED FOR VISION PANEL).
SPRING LOADED HEAVY DUTY DOOR STOPPER.
3 THICK MS FLAT SPACER WELDED TO FRAME
AT 0 500 C/C.
40x150x3 THICK MS PAD WELDED TO FRAME
AT ALL HINGE & LOCK LOCATIONS.
N: SS 304 GRADE 19 DIA, 200 LONG HANDLE
ON BOTH SIDES.
0: 18 SWG GI MORTAR GUARD AT THE BACK OF
HINGES & LOCK.
P: 10 DIA SS 304 TOWER BOLT (250 LONG FOR
2100 HT. & 600 LONG FOR 2500 HT.).
'D' PROFILE EPDM GASKET ALONG FRAME REBATE
(FOR AIR TIGHT DOOR ONLY).
(mom
err&
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
JKS/SD
Checked
by
.111(C
16...
ARVIND KUMAR
CYK
PIA UMAR D.SAUK) TRA
V.CHATURVEDI

Chairman
Convenor
Approved by
Copyright Ell-All rights reserved
0
fgZIT
el
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
tafileg
272x172 ,Tf?nvil
7-75-0014 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
Nr
-.
II O
ELEVATION
(FFIXED GLAZING)
DOOR HANDLE
ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP
(SECTION NO.19377)-
L..,
3
SECTION 4-4
OPENABLE SHUTTER
PIVOT
6 GAP

(SECTION NO.19377)
GLASS
F
k]
oom
R.C.C. LINTEL/
BEAM
CEMENT PLASTER
101.60x44.45x2 5
ALUMINIUM DOOR FRAME
(SECTION No.20102)
FiO
GLAZED ALUMINIUM DOOR
(A Govl of mate Undeflaking)
STANDARD No.
101.60x44.45x2.5
(SECTION No.20102)
C)
50x44.50x2.5
ALUMINIUM SHUTTER FRAME
(SECTION No.19554)
PIVOT
ALUMINIUM BOTTOM RAIL
(SECTION NO.19584)

(SECTION NO.19377)
GLASS
101.60x44.45x2.5
(SECTION NO.20102)
50x44.50x2.5 ALUMINIUM
SHUTTER FRAME
(SECTION No.19554)
SECTION 5-5
RUBBER/EPDM GASKET
PIVOT
GLASS
47.62X44.45X2.8 ALUMINIUM
SHUTTER FRAME
(SECTION No.19502)
100x44.45x2
ALUMINIUM LOCK RAIL
(SECTION No.19564)
SECTION 2-2
BRICK WALL/R.C.C. COLUMN

CEMENT PLASTER
(SECTION NO.19377)
101.50x44.50x2.5 ALUMINIUM DOOR
FRAME (SECTION No.20102) FIXED WITH
ALUMINIUM LUGS/ANCHOR FASTENER
ALUMINIUM GLAZING CLIP (SECTION NO.19377)
GLASS
GLASS
SECTION 6-6

(SECTION NO.19377)
GLASS
150x44.45x3.10
ALUMINIUM BOTTOM RAIL
(SECTION No.19584)
101.60X44.45X2.5
ALUMINIUM FRAME
(SECTION NO.20057)
SECTION 1 1
SECTION 3-3
FINISHED FLOOR LEVEL
NOTES:
S ECTION 7-7
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MM.

THE SECTION DESIGNATION NOS. PERTAIN TO EXTRUDED ALUMINIUM SECTIONS OF
"JINDAL ALUMINIUM LTD." AND ARE INDICATED FOR REFERENCE. EQUIVALANT SECTIONS
OF OTHER APPROVED MANUFACTURERS CAN ALSO BE USED.
FOR FINISHING OF ALUMINIUM SECTION (ANODISED/POWDER COATING) REFER BID/TEND ER.
RUBBER/EPDM GASKET SHALL BE USED FOR FIXING OF GLASS.
HARDWARE SHALL BE AS PER BID/TENDER.
4
3
Rev.
No.
27.03.12
21.03.07

Date

Page 1704 of 1744
Purpose
JKAFV"
AMARJIT
Prepared
by
JKB/SO
Checked
by
WHO KUMAR
MAY KUMAR D.MALHOTRA

V.CHATURVEDI
Stds, Committee GM(E) Stds. Bureau

Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
Copyright EL - All rights reserved
ENGINEERS
0 el
51gzif laWg w INDIA LIMITED
Nr, 03,2r.,171Nom.I
iA
FOR FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 1 of 15
Govt of India Undellakog)
TO- t
ucbiul
G-1 ct)
FOR
FLOOR FINISHING
03.03.15
06.07.10
21.03.07
12.03.99
16.03.94
Rev.
No

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
Date
Purpose
PKM
(Addn GM)
S CHANDA
VK
N DUARI
GB
JS
JKB
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
Prepared Checked
by
by
Standards
Committee GM (E)
Convenor
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1705 of 1744
lI
ligof fdfireg
'i7l ci el
4417R
ofoo, 7,1,7,140471
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA Govt of India Undeftakingt

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 2 of 15
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
British Standards
IS
PVC
Indian Standards
Polyvinyl Chloride

Convenor :
Mr. J.K.Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. Rajesh Gujral
Mr. R.K. Bhandari (Projects)
Page 1706 of 1744
el
cZS
751
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 3 of 15
CONTENTS
1.0
GENERAL
2.0
CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING
3.0
CEMENT CONCRETE GRANOLITHIC FLOORING
4.0
HEAVY DUTY FLOORING
5.0
PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED CEMENT TILES
6.0
CEMENT PLASTER SKIRTING
7.0
PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED TERRAZZO TILES
8.0
TILE WORK
10
9.0
KOTA STONE FINISH
10
10.0
MARBLE STONE FINISH
12
11.0
PVC FINISH
13
12.0
ACID RESISTANT TILES
14
13.0
EPDXY FLOOR 8.z. WALL COATING SYSTEM
15
14.0
15
Page 1707 of 1744
al 056
Ifg
eive51,0b1.3421,111
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

FLOOR FINISHING

6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 4 of 15
1.0 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
covered in this Specification. In case of any contlict/contradiction, provision of this
Specification shall override.
IS: 4971
Recommendations for selection of Industrial floor finishes.
IS: 1237
Specification for Cement concrete flooring tiles.
IS: 2571
Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring.
IS: 4631
Code of practice for laying of epoxy resin floor toppings.
IS: 3462
Code of practice for unbaked flexible PVC flooring.
IS: 5318
Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile flooring.
IS: 3461
Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles.
IS: 1443
Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring
IS: 5491
Code of practice for laying in situ granolithic concrete floor topping.
IS: 4441
Code of practice for use of silicate type Chemical resistant mortars.
IS: 4443
Code of practice for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar.
IS: 1196
Code of practice for laying Bitumen Mastic Flooring
IS: 13753
Specification for dust pressed Ceramic tiles with water absorption of

E >10%, Group (13111)
Sub base concrete shall be provided prior to laying the specified floor finish wherever
indicated. Sub base concrete shall be provided on Ground floor slab and suspended floors
(before floor finishing) as per the drawings. The sub base concrete shall be of specified
thickness and shall be provided with zero or required slope as required. Floors in Verandahs,
Courtyards, Kitchens, Baths shall have slope ranging from 1:36 or 1:48 depending upon
locations and as indicated in drawings or as decided by the Engineer-in-charge. Floors in
water closet portions shall have slope of 1:30 or as decided by site-in-charge. On ground floor,
plinth masonry off-set shall be depressed accordingly to allow the base concrete to rest on it.
This base concrete shall normally be 1:3:6 (to achieve the required slope as described above);
however the mix shall be 1:2:4 wherever conduits, raceways, service pipes etc. are to be
embedded/ laid.
2.0 CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING

2.1
General
Cement concrete flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and finishing layer of floor
finish.
2.2 Workmanship
2.2.1
Base Course
Base course shall be of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness.
The floor space on which base course is to be laid shall be cleaned, washed and divided into
square/ rectangular or as per designed panels to prevent cracks in the floor finish. No
dimension of the panels shall exceed 2 meters and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2
square meters. Base course shall be laid on alternate panels. The borders of the panels shall
Page 1708 of 1744
0 el
Igaf fai5itg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
.1, Wer,i, as] 3,0-73 I

6-75-0002 Rev. 6
FLOOR FINISHING
Page 5 of 15
have mitred joints at the corners of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line
with panel joints.
The panels shall be bound by glass/PVC/stainless steel strips etc. as specified. These shall be
fixed in position with their top at proper level, giving slope wherever required.
The flooring shall butt against masonry of wall which shall not be plastered. When the base
course is to be laid on hardened base, the sub-base shall be roughened by steel wire brushing
and cleaned. Before laying the base course, neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement per
square meter of area shall be brushed into the prepared sub base surface.
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with wooden plank and finished
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.
Necessary slope shall be provided. The cement concrete mix shall be used within 30 minutes
of its preparation.
2.2.2
Floor Finishing
Finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the completion of base course. The
base course shall be free of excessive moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry
cement, cement sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
While the concrete is still green, cement @ 2 kg per square meter of floor area shall be mixed
with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth without any trowel mark.
The junction of floor with wall plaster, cladding, skirting shall be rounded off uniformly upto
a radius of 25mm unless otherwise mentioned.
2.2.3
Curing
Each finished portion of floor, on completion shall be kept wet with ponding for a minimum
period of 10 days.
3.0 CEMENT CONCRETE GRANOLITHIC FLOORING

3.1
General
Cement concrete granolithic flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and finishing
layer of floor finish.
3.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 5491.
3.2.1
Base Course (Under layer)

Base course shall be of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness.
The floor space on which base course is to be laid shall be cleaned, washed and divided into
square/ rectangular or as per designed panels to prevent cracks in the floor finish. No
dimension of the panels shall exceed 2 meter and the area of a panel shall not be more than 2
square meters. Base course shall be laid on alternate panels. The borders of the panels shall
have mitred joints at the corners of the room and intermediate joints shall be in straight line
with panel joints.
The panels shall be bound by glass/PVC/stainless steel strips etc. as specified. These shall be
fixed in position with their top at proper level, giving slope wherever required.
The flooring shall butt against masonry of wall which shall not be plastered. When the base
course is to be laid on hardened base, the sub-base shall be roughened by steel wire brushing
Page 1709 of 1744
71210
ligaf id15ift
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
,A Go, of
Undeft.ngl

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 6 of 15
and cleaned. Before laying the base course, neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of cement per
square meter of area shall be brushed into the prepared sub base surface.
Cement concrete shall be placed in position and beaten with wooden plank and finished
smooth. Beating shall cease as soon as surface is found covered with cream of mortar.
Necessary slope shall be provided. The cement concrete mix shall be used within 30 minutes
of its preparation.
3.2.2
Floor Finishing
Finishing of the surface shall follow immediately after the completion of base course. The
base course shall be free of excessive moisture before starting the floor finishing. Use of dry
cement, cement sand mixture sprinkled on the surface to stiffen the concrete or absorb
excessive moisture shall not be permitted.
While the concrete is still green, cement 4. 2 kg per square meter of floor area shall be mixed
with water to form thick slurry and spread over the surface. The cement slurry shall then be
properly processed and finished smooth without any trowel mark.
3.2.3
Wearing Top Layer

The top layer shall consist of cement mortar of specified mix and thickness finished smooth
with cement slurry. The top layer shall be laid over first layer within 15 minutes of laying the
first layer. The cement and aggregates for the top layer shall be mixed dry. After mixing,
sufficient quantity of washed sand and water shall be added to make the mix plastic but not
flowing. The top and bottom layer shall firmly grip together.
3.2.4
Curing
period of 10 days.
4.0 HEAVY DUTY FLOORING

4.1
General
Heavy duty Flooring shall consist of a sub-base, a base course and a finishing layer of floor
finish.
4.2 Workmanship
4.2.1
Base Course
Base course shall consist of one layer of cement concrete of specified mix and thickness laid
on sub-base in panels in accordance with clause no. 2.2.1.
4.2.2
Floor Finish
Finishing layer shall be of cement, hardener and stone aggregate mix of specified thickness
laid over the base course. Unless otherwise mentioned, one part of approved quality hardener
and four parts of cement by weight shall be mixed dry. This dry mixture shall be mixed with
stone aggregate 6mm nominal size or as otherwise specified in the ratio of I hardener and
cement mixture: 2 stone aggregate by volume. Just enough water shall then be added to the
mix.
The mixture so obtained shall then be laid on the base course within 2 to 4 hours of latter's
laying. It shall be firmly pressed into bottom concrete so as to have a good bond with it. After
the starting of initial setting, the surface shall be finished smooth and true with steel floats
without any float mark.
Page 1710 of 1744
ll~iri~
IfgaT
Riieg
iNtZrl
AledAV,A.3ALTI I
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 7 of 15
4.2.4
Curing
period of 10 days.
5.0 PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED CEMENT TILES

5.1
Materials
5.1.1
Cement Concrete Tiles

Cement concrete tiles shall conform to IS: 1237 and shall be factory made of approved shade,
and thickness.
5.1.2
Pigments
Pigments to be admixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
5.1.3
Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall be of specified mix and thickness.
5.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 1443. The base on which tiles are to be laid shall
be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2
kg of cement per square meter of area without allowing water pools. Cement mortar of
specified thickness shall then be spread over the base for two rows of tiles and 3-5 metres in
length. The mortar shall be laid in slope as per requirements and thickness of mortar shall not
be less than 10mm at any place. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement
slurry can be absorbed. Laying shall be from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
900. Cut tiles of uniform sizes shall be laid along periphery, if necessary. Neat cement slurry
of honey like consistency @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter shall be spread over the
mortar bed for laying 20 tiles at a time. The tiles shall then be fixed in this grout one after the
other, each tile being gently tapped and properly bedded in line and level. The Joints shall not
exceed 1.5mm in width. After the day's work, the excess cement slurry on top and the joints
shall be cleaned with broom stick and washed before the slurry sets hard. Next day, the joints
shall be filled with the cement grout to match the shade of the tile.
Tiles along the periphery shall be continued under the wall plaster, skirting or dado.
For skirting/dado/risers on the brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at
least 15mm while the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete work, the surface shall be
hauled and roughened with wire brushes. The wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly
covered with backing of cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) of specified
thickness. Before hardening of the cushioning mortar, back of each tile shall be covered with
a neat layer of cement slurry @ 4.4 kg of cement per square meter and edges with white
cement with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and the tiles then shall be pressed
on the backing and tapped.
The tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in required pattern and
butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of skirting and dado shall
be truly horizontal.
5.3
Curing, Polishing and Finishing

The day after the tiles are laid all joints shall be cleaned with a wire brush to a depth of 5 mm
and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with white
Page 1711 of 1744
k5111a
- eAt
if
1ga 16Vieg
I.TR MTMI, JUM-Si
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
IA
Govt of Ind. Uneertakog)

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 8 of 15
cement mixed with pigment to match the shade of the tiles. The same cement slurry then shall
be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat to protect the surface from abrasive
damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.
The flooring shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet with ponding.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the tiles and the joints
are properly set. Grinding shall be done by machines. First grinding shall be done with
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely used
during grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be
cleaned with water baring all pin holes. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey/white
cement mixed with pigments to match with colour of the flooring. This grout shall be kept
moist for a week. Thereafter the second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 120
grit. Final grinding shall be done the day after the second grinding with carborundum stone of
320 grit using water in abundance. The floor shall be washed clean with water, oxalic acid
powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed with machine fitted
hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The floor shall then be washed clean and dried
with a soft cloth or linen. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced
and properly jointed and polished.
6.0 CEMENT PLASTER SKIRTING
6.1
Material

6.2 Workmanship
The surface on which the skirting is to be applied shall be prepared and skirting of specified
thickness shall be laid. The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15mm in masonry
walls. In case of concrete walls, the surface shall be roughened by hacking. Skirting with
specified mortar and to specified thickness shall be laid immediately after the surface is
prepared. It shall be laid along with the border or adjacent panels of floor.
Finishing of skirting shall be done simultaneously with the borders of the adjacent panels of
floor. The cement to be applied in the form of thick slurry for smooth finishing shall be @ 2
kg of cement per litre of water applied over an area of 1 square meter.
7.0 PRECAST HYDRAULICALLY PRESSED TERRAZZO TILES
7.1
Materials
7.1.1
Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be of specified thickness, texture and shade and shall generally conform in
all respects to IS: 1237. The tiles shall be factory made with 10mm down size stone
aggregates, white & ordinary cement mix (1 white cement : 6 ordinary cement by volume) and
pigments conforming to IS: 2114. Tablel.
7.1.2
Pigments
Pigments to be mixed with mortar or for grouting the joints shall conform to Table -1 of IS:
2114.
7.1.3
Cement Mortar

7.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall in general conform to IS: 1443. The base on which tiles are to be laid shall
be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2
kg of cement per Square meter of area without allowing water pools. Cement mortar of
Page 1712 of 1744
01
Ogar tif5leg
kritrOgt7 ,REPIRI
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt et ndo Undertaking)

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 9 of 15
specified thickness shall then be spread over the base for two rows of tiles and 3-5 metres in
length. The mortar shall be laid in slope as per requirements and thickness of mortar shall not
be less than 10mm at any place. The top of the mortar shall be kept rough so that cement
slurry can be absorbed. Laying shall be from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
90. Cut tiles of uniform sizes shall be laid along periphery, if necessary. Neat cement slurry
of honey like consistency @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter shall be spread over the
mortar bed for laying required number of tiles at a time. The tiles shall then be fixed in this
grout one after the other, each tile being gently tapped and properly bedded in line and level.
The Joints shall not exceed 1.5mm in width. After the day's work, the excess cement slurry on
top and the joints shall be cleaned and washed before the slurry sets hard. Next day, the joints
shall be filled with the cement grout to match the shade of the tile.
Tiles along the periphery shall be continued under the wall plaster, skirting or dado.
For skirting/dado/risers on the brick masonry wall, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at
least 12mm while the masonry is being laid. In case of concrete work, the surface shall be
hauled and roughened with wire brushes. The wall surface shall be uniformly and evenly
covered with backing of cement mortar 1:3 (I cement: 3 coarse sand by volume) of specified
thickness. Before hardening of the cushioning mortar, back of each tile shall be covered with
a neat layer of cement slurry @ 4.4 kg of cement per Square meter and edges with white
cement with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and the tiles then shall be pressed
on the backing and tapped.
For vertical surfaces, the tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in
required pattern and butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of
skirting and dado shall be truly horizontal.
7.3
Curing, Polishing and Finishing

and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or
white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the tiles. The same cement
slurry then shall be applied to the entire surface of the tiles in a thin coat to protect the surface
from abrasive damage and fill the pin holes that may exist on the surface.
The tiles shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the tiles and the joints
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely during
grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be cleaned
with water baring all pin holes. It shall then be covered with a thin coat of grey/white cement
mixed with pigments to match with colour of the flooring. This grout shall be kept moist for a
week. Thereafter the second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of 120 grit. Final
grinding shall be done the day after the second grinding with carborundum stone of 320 grit
using water in abundance. The floor shall be washed clean with water, oxalic acid powder
shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed with machine fitted hessian bobs
or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The floor shall then be washed clean and dried with a soft
cloth or linen. If any tile is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced and properly
jointed and polished.
Page 1713 of 1744
ENGINEERS
r ICIWs
INDIA LIMITED
,1771471.751,1lIMN
(A
co, of India Uncle/Ming)

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 10 of 15
8.0 TILE WORK

8.1
Materials
8.1.1
Tiles
A.
Ceramic Tiles
Ceramic tiles shall be of specified size, thickness and approved colour/ design/
texture, of first quality and shall conform to IS 13753.
B.
Vitrified Tiles
Vitrified tiles shall be of specified size, thickness and approved colour/ design/
texture, of first quality and shall conform to EN 176.
8.1.2
Pigments
2114.
8.2 Workmanship
The tiles shall be laid over a coating of specified adhesive (as per approved manufacturer's
specifications) laid on base floor/wall plaster. The joints of the tiles shall be cleaned off and
all dust and loose mortar removed. The joints then shall be flush pointed with cement paste
(white cement and pigment conforming to IS: 2114, Table-I) or any other joint fixing
compound as recommended by Tile Manufacturer matching the shade of tiles.
Tiles shall be laid as per desired pattern. Joints shall be uniform kept as thin as possible and in
straight lines. Cut tiles shall be permitted only in unavoidable cases as directed by EngineerIn- Charge.
The base on which tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt and properly wetted by
applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 3 kg of cement per Square meter of area.
For flooring, laying shall be generally from centre & proceed outwards in two directions at
90
For vertical surfaces, the tiles shall be corrected to proper planes with joints truly vertical in
required pattern and butt jointed. The fixing shall be done from bottom upward. The top of
skirting and dado shall be truly horizontal.
9.0 KOTA STONE
9.1
FINISH
Materials
The Kota Stone slabs shall be of selected quality and shade, hard, sound, dense, homogenous
in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flakes. These shall be machine cut to the
requisite size and thickness and chisel dressed.
The slabs shall have the top (exposed) face polished before being brought to site. Before
starting the work, the contractor shall get the samples of slabs approved by Engineer-incharge.
9.2 Workmanship
9.2.1
Dressing of Slabs
Each slab shall be machine cut and rubbed to the required size and shape and fine chisel
dressed at all edges to full depth so that a straight edge laid along the side of the stone shall be
in full contact with it. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be true, square and free from
chippings giving a plane and smooth surface.
Page 1714 of 1744
0 el
Ogar fafreg
1.7T
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
751,0571

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 11 of 15
9.2.2
Cement mortar of specified thickness and mix shall be laid over the base after making it
rough, cleaning & wetting thoroughly and applying neat and thick cement slurry @ 2 kg of
cement per square meter of area to receive the mortar. The mortar shall be laid for fixing one
slab at a time.
In case of skirting/ dado/ risers, the joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 12mm in
masonry walls. In case of concrete surface, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with
wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet before
laying kota stone.
9.2.3
Laying
The slab shall be washed clean before laying.
A. Laying in floor
It shall be laid over cement mortar bedding, pressed, and tapped gently to bring it in level. It
shall be then lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar then shall be corrected by adding
fresh mortar at hollows and depressions. The mortar then shall be allowed to harden and
cement slurry of honey like consistency @ 4.4.kg of cement per square meter shall be spread
over the mortar. The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with white cement with pigment
grout to match the shade of the slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position and
tapped with wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs in flooring
shall continue under the plaster/skirting. The finished surface shall be true to levels and slopes
as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be laid in patterns as per drawings and size. Cut size may be used along
periphery as required. The joints shall be uniform and in perfect line.
B. Laying in skirting/ dado/ risers
The slabs shall be held in position by suitable temporary measure such as wooden/ bamboo
supports, temporary hook etc. as approved by Engineer-In- Charge. The outer face of the slabs
shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall be as fine as possible and
shall be filled with neat cement paste/ grout with white cement and pigment to match the
colour of the slabs. The joints shall thus be left to harden and then the rear gap between the
slabs and backing surface shall be packed with cement mortar of specified mix and thickness.
Temporary supports shall be removed after the mortar filling in the gap has acquired sufficient
strength. The top line of the skirting/ dado/ risers shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical.
Joints in treads and platforms shall be permitted only at curvature or when width/ length is
more than 0.6/ 2 metres respectively. Number of joints in each direction shall not be more than
one number for every 2 metres length beyond the initial 2 meter length.
9.3
Polishing and Finishing

Grinding/ polishing shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the stone and
the joints are properly set. Grinding shall be done by machines. Grinding/ polishing shall be
done with carborundum stone of 320 grit using water in abundance. The stone shall be washed
clean with water, oxalic acid powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface
rubbed with machine fitted hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The surface shall
then be washed clean and dried with a soft cloth or linen & polished with mansion polish. If
any stone is disturbed or damaged, it shall be refitted or replaced and properly jointed and
polished.
Page 1715 of 1744
M ENGINEERS
ig-ZifiaWeg ',II,INDIA LIMITED
q_.1
,i27S317
NA.,
IA Go, of India Undertaking)

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 12 of 15
10.0 MARBLE STONE FINISH

10.1 Materials
10.1.1 Marble Slabs
The marble slabs shall be of specified size, thickness, type and grade. The marble from which
the slabs are made shall be of selected quality, hard, sound, dense, homogenous in texture, free
from cracks, decay, weathering and flakes. The sample of marble stone slabs shall be got
approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be machine cut to the requisite dimensions. Dimension of slabs shall be
700mm to 2500mm in length and 300 to 1000mm in width as per drawing and as directed by
Engineer-In-Charge.
Tolerance of +3% shall be allowed for the thickness. In respect of length and breadth of slabs,
a tolerance of +2% shall be allowed.
Physical properties of Marble and method of testing shall be as follows:
Physical Property
Requirement
Method of test
Moisture absorption
After 24 hours
Immersion in cold water
Maximum 0.4%
by weight
IS: 1124
10.1.2 Pigments
2114.
10.2 Workmanship
10.2.1 Preparation of Surface
Preparation of surface shall be done in accordance with clause no. 9.2.2.
10.2.2 Laying
The slab shall be washed clean before laying. Due care shall be taken to match the grains of
slabs which shall be selected judiciously having uniform pattern of veins/ streaks or as
directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.
A. Laying in floor
It shall be laid over cement mortar bedding, pressed, and tapped gently to bring it in level. It
shall be then lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar then shall be corrected by adding
fresh mortar at hollows and depressions. The mortar then shall be allowed to harden and
cement slurry of honey like consistency @ 4.4.kg of cement per square meter shall be spread
over the mortar. The edges of the slabs shall be buttered with white cement with or without
pigment grout to match the shade of the slabs. The slabs shall then be gently placed in position
and tapped with wooden mallets till it is properly bedded in level. The joints shall be as fine as
possible. Surplus cement on the surface of the slab shall be removed. The slabs in flooring
shall continue for not less than 10 mm under the plaster/skirting. The finished surface shall be
true to levels and slopes as instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The slabs shall be laid in patterns as per drawings and size. Cut size may be used along
periphery as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The joints shall be uniform and in perfect line.
B. Laying in skirting/ dado/ risers
The slabs shall be held in position by suitable temporary measure such as wooden/ bamboo
supports, temporary hook etc. as approved by Engineer-In- Charge. The outer face of the slabs
Page 1716 of 1744
.5ilfaeJerf
fat s
NWil
ATI. MT.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
A Go, of ntha Undeffak,^9/

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 13 of 15
shall be checked for plane and plumb and corrected. The joints shall be as fine as possible and
shall be filled with neat cement paste/ grout with white cement and pigment to match the
colour of the slabs. The joints shall thus be left to harden and then the rear gap between the
slabs and backing surface shall be packed with cement mortar of specified mix and thickness.
Temporary supports shall be removed after the mortar filling in the gap has acquired sufficient
strength. The top line of the skirting/ dado/ risers shall be truly horizontal and joints truly
vertical.
10.3 Curing
The finished surface shall be cured for a minimum period of 7 days.
10.4
Polishing and Finishing

Unevenness at the meeting edges of slabs shall be removed by fine chiseling.
and all dust and loose mortar removed and cleaned. Joints shall then be grouted with grey or
white cement mixed with or without pigment to match the shade of the stones.
Grinding shall be commenced after a minimum period of 7 days when the stones and the joints
carborundum stones of 60 grade grit fitted in the machine. Water shall be profusely during
grinding. When the chips show up and the floor has been uniformly rubbed, it shall be cleaned
with water baring all pin holes. The second grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of
120 grit. Final grinding/polishing shall done the day after the second grinding with
carborundum stone of 320 grit using water in abundance. The surface shall be washed clean
with water, oxalic acid powder shall then be dusted at 33 gms/sq. m. on the surface rubbed
with machine fitted hessian bobs or rubbed hard with woolen rags. The surface shall then be
washed clean and dried with a soft cloth or linen. If any stone is disturbed or damaged, it shall
be refitted or replaced and properly jointed and polished.
11.0 PVC FINISH

11.1
Material
11.1.1 PVC Roll/ Tiles

PVC Roll/ tiles shall be homogenous, asbestos free, approved texture, colour, pattern and
specified thickness. PVC rolls shall conform to IS: 3462 and PVC tiles shall conform to IS:
3462
11.1.2 Antistatic PVC Roll/Tile
Antistatic P.V.C. roll/ tiles shall conform to B.S.2050, Table-2.
11.1.3
Adhesive
Adhesive shall be neoprene based rubber adhesive of approved make as recommended by
PVC Manufacture.
11.2 Workmanship
The sub floor on which PVC finish is to be laid shall be prepared in accordance with PVC
Manufacturer's recommendation. The sub floor shall be made permanently smooth, firm, free
of cracks and dry. If required, suitable leveling compound of minimum 3 mm thickness shall
be applied over sub floor.
P.V.C. rolls/tiles shall be brought to the temperature of the area in which it is to be laid and
stacked suitably near the site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.
Page 1717 of 1744
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
oaf 054-"eg
.Hr.,
711

FLOOR FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 14 of 15
Laying of PVC roll/ tile shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

In case of rolls, minimum possible number of joints shall be provided. Rolls running towards
door openings, niches, or similar shall completely cover these areas. Door openings, niches, or
similar along the side of the roll may be covered by strips.
Tiles shall be laid in any pattern including diagonal formation as directed by Engineer-InCharge.
The adhesive shall be applied by spatula to the base floor and back of the PVC roll/tile in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. PVC rolls shall be placed in position from
one end onwards slowly without creation on any air pockets between roll and the base course.
PVC rolls/tiles shall be placed only when the adhesive is set sufficiently for laying. When set
sufficiently for laying, the adhesive will be sticky to the touch but shall not mark the fingers.
After placing, the roll shall be pressed suitably with a wooden roller weighing about 5 kg.
The joint between adjacent rolls shall be thin hairline type.
Laying of PVC tiles shall start from centre and proceed outwards in two right angle direction
till the periphery of the room/area is reached. Fractional tiles of uniform cut sizes may be laid
only along the peripheral border if so required owing to size of the room area.
PVC rolls in flooring shall he continued for skirting without any joints and with 50mm radius
rounded corner at the junction of skirting and flooring.
Any excess adhesive squeezing out of the surface shall he wiped off immediately with a wet
cloth. In case of such excess adhesive becoming hard, it shall be removed with a solution of
one part of commercial Butyle Acetate and three parts of turpentine oil or any other solution
as advised by the manufacturer of the roll.
Necessary earthing system shall be installed in case of antistatic flooring in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation.
After a minimum period of 24 hours after laying the rolls/tiles, the finished floor shall be
cleaned with a wet cloth soaked in warm soap solution of 2 spoons of soft soap powder in 5
litres of warm water or detergent as per approved manufacturer's specifications.
12.0 ACID RESISTANT TILES
12.1 Material
The tiles shall be vitrified tiles of approved size, thickness and colour as per approved
manufacturer's specification and shall be homogeneous. They shall have the following
properties:S. No.
Property
Values
Norms
Water Absorptions
0.5%
ASTM C 373
Scratch Resistance
>6
ASTM C 373
Chemical Resistance
Unaffected
ASTM C 650
Abrasion Resistance
>100
ASTM C 501
Breaking strength
400 kg/sq.cm
ASTM C 648
Density
> 2.0 Gm/CC
12.2 Workmanship
Base and background surface over which the tiles are to be laid shall be prepared as per IS:
4443.
Page 1718 of 1744
falgrarg
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
Govt of ntl. Unne/takg)

FINISHING
6-75-0002 Rev. 6
Page 15 of 15
Tiles shall be fixed on the prepared surface over a bitumen priming layer, bitumen mastic
layer and resin type chemical resistant mortar in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation. The bitumen shall conform to IS: 702 and laying of bitumen mastic shall
conform to IS: 1196.
Joints shall be allowed to set for 24 hours. The floor shall then be washed as per
manufacturer's specifications to totally remove all marks from tile surface.
13.0
EPDXY FLOOR & WALL COATING SYSTEM
13.1 Material
The epoxy floor and wall coating system shall generally consist of the following basic
components of composition and thickness as mentioned in the item descriptions:
13.1.1 Primer Coat
Primer coat shall be suitable for base surface and compatible with successive layers/ coating
over it for specified applications in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
recommendations.
13.1.2 Screed/ Underlayer
The screed/ underlayer (for flooring) shall consist of combination of fillers and hardeners and
shall be suitable and compatible for application of top/ finishing coat over it for specified
application in accordance with the approved manufacturer's recommendations.
13.1.3 Top/ Finishing Coat
Top/ finishing coat shall be applied over screed/ underlayer in case of flooring. For walls/
vertical surfaces, top/ finishing coat shall be applied over primer coat as recommended by
approved manufacturer. Top/ finishing coat shall be suitable for specified application.
13.2 Workmanship
Workmanship shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications.
Measurement and rate for flooring for item rate tenders shall be in Square meter in general
unless otherwise mentioned.
Length and breadth shall be measured before laying skirting, dado or wall plaster. No
deduction shall be made nor extra paid for voids not exceeding 0.20 sqm. Deductions for ends
of dissimilar materials or other articles embedded shall not be made for areas not exceeding
0.10 sqm.
The flooring done either with strips (in one operation) or without strips (in alternate panels)
shall be treated as same and measured together.
Page 1719 of 1744
Itifazie? ie ENGINEERS
ai kV:tagNW INDIA LIMITED
wen train aw.sepai(
(A Govt Of
FOR ROOF TREATMENT
moa undertaking)
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 1 of 9
0 3 t-1 -c1 I
imict) fdft4mi
FOR
ROOF TREATMENT
15.05.12
21.03.07
10.03.99
16.03.94

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION
27.09.91
Rev.
No
Page 1720 of 1744
Date
Purpose
c\
61
SM
SD
JKB
ARVIND
KUMAR
V
CHATURVEDI
SD
MLB
SCJ
AS
JS
JS
AKG
AS
SD
SD
AKG
RNS
Prepared Checked
by
by
JK/11%)kiCt
) .,,--1
MIN
D MALHOTRA
Standards
Standards
Committee GM(E)
Bureau
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
laraag e ENGINEERS
1;4111 IEVeg lei INDIA LIMITED
Goat mind. undertaking)

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 2 of 9
Abbreviations:
ASTM :
BS
:
IS

British Standards
Indian Standards

Convenor : JK Bhagchandani
Members :
Mr. Samir Das

Mr. S. Majumdar
Mr. Rajesh Gujral

Page 1721 of 1744
Oyez
agizie?te ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 3 of 9
CONTENTS
1.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (TWO COMPONENTS)
2.0 POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (SINGLE COMPONENT)
3.0 PLOYMER MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOF WATER PROOFING
4.0 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM)
5.0 GUARANTEE

Page 1722 of 1744
lairaTAtft
ENGINEERS
Imien elemr7a.nrRI)
IA Gen d
sig-ar killitegliir INDIA UMITED

India
unaeriakm
ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 4 of 9
1.0
POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (TWO COMPONENTS)
1.1
Material
PU waterproof coating shall consist of 2 pack clear/pigmented Aliphatic Polyurethane as per
ASTM C836-95 using Polyether Polyols (Polyester or Castor oil based Polyols are not
acceptable with Iso-cynorate for rendering flame resistant characteristic. The 2 pack system
consisting of pigment and the solvent (Xylene/ Toulene, no filter) shall be mixed in definite
ratio by weight strictly as per approved Manufacturers specification for preparing the coating
for application. The coating shall have physical features like high resistance to impact,
abrasion and cracking, superior tensile strength (8 Kg/Sq. CM after 4 weeks at ambient
temperature) and perfectly smooth, dust free glossy finish retained at least up to 3 years. It
should also be resistant to acid, alkalies and have a very low water absorption rate (0.5 %
maximum at ambient temperature after 7 days).
The packs shall not be older than 9 months after the date of manufacture and packing.
1.2
Workmanship
1.2.1
The roof surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and all foreign matter etc. shall
be removed. Well defined cracks on the surface shall be cut to "V" section, cleaned and filled
up with a paste of 2 component Polyurethane based crack filling compound and white cement
in a ratio of 1:2. The finished surface shall be perfectly dry and any dampness should be
allowed to evaporate. Potholes/depressions shall be filled up after removing weak cement
concrete/ cement plaster etc. with PCC(1 cement :1.2 coarse sand :3.5 stone aggregate of 6mm
& down size by volume,) laid over a coat of neat cement slurry @2.75 Kg of cement per Sq.M
of area, wherever required thus preparing smooth and properly sloped surface. Slope and
leveling of the existing surface shall be checked and if necessary, adequate slope shall be
provided by laying PCC laid over neat cement slurry as above for effective roof drainage.
Leak-prone areas shall also be identified and rectified by raking out existing water proofing
and filling up with PCC as directed by Engineer-In-Charge. The surface thus shall be prepared
smooth for receiving the waterproof treatment over it.
1.2.2
Primer Coat
It shall consist of 2 packs of Polyurethane. Primer coat shall be mixed in the ratio as per
Manufacturer's specification. A single coat of this primer shall be applied by brush over the
prepared bed as an adhesion coat.
The primer shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 8 hours time before the successive
finishing coats of PU are applied.
1.2.3
Finishing Coat
The finishing coats shall consist of three successive pigmented sealing coats each of 2 packs
of Polyurethane mixed in the ratio as per Manufacturer's specification. Application shall be
with brush to a smooth and even finish. The overall dry film thickness shall be 1.5mm
0.1mm as per ASTM C898 in multiple coats or minimum covering capacity shall be 160 Gms/
Sq.M per coat.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry for minimum 12 hours before applying next coat. Care shall
be taken for quick application after mixing the 2 pack primer in view of short pot life of the

Page 1723 of 1744
aande ENGINEERS
Sig:ar laWleg /liW INDIA LIMITED

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Pa e 5 of 9
mix and shall be full y consumed within the stipulated period as per Manufacturer's
specification (maximum 60 minutes at 30 deg C)
The PU coating shall be continued up the parapets/walls for a minimum of 150mm over the
finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by at least 100mm.
1.3
Protective Layer
The final coat of PU, when tacky, shall be sprinkled with 300 micron layer of clean sand. Over
this, plain cement concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size
by volume) of 50mm minimum thickness mixed with cement based polymer modified
waterproofing compound shall be provided. The PCC layer shall be laid in panels of max.
1200 mm X 1200 mm size and shall be reinforced with 24 SWG chicken wire mesh (20mm x
20mm) as per IS 1556. Proper shuttering, tamping, curing etc shall be done. The top surface
shall be finished smooth in slope. Dummy square joints @ 300mm x 300mm shall be marked
on the top surface by pressing rope over finished surface. The joints between panels shall be
raked out neatly (after stipulated curing period) to a minimum 6mm X 6mm V groove and
filled up with an approved quality elastomeric compound sealant. Drain outlet shall be
provided for all spouts/rain water pipes by suitable rounding, filling and sloping and by
providing minimum 450 mm x 450mm khurras (rain water collecting pit, leveled down by
minimum 25mm from adjacent areas) in cement concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone
aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at all drainage outlets.At the junction of the roof
and parapet or any other vertical surfaces, a fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement
concrete (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume).
2.0
POLYURETHANE (PU) WATERPROOF COATING (SINGLE COMPONENT)
2.1
Material:
The material shall consist of a single component, high solid content minimum 80%, highly
viscous liquid containing urethane polymers conforming to ASTM C 836. This single
component coating shall cure by reaction with atmospheric moisture to give a continuous film
in Aluminium/ silver colour which is rubbery and elastic. The cured coating shall have
physical features like high resistance to impact, abrasion and cracking, superior tensile
strength minimum 8Kg/ Sq. Centimeter after 4 weeks of drying and high resistance to ultra
violet rays.
The pack shall not be older than 9 months after the date of manufacture and packing. The
liquid shall not be diluted with water or any other solvent.
2.2
Workmanship
2.2.1
Preparation of surface shall be as described in Clause 1.2.1.
222
Primer coat
Urethane primer shall be applied on the perfectly dry prepared bed with a brush in a single
coat at coverage of 6-8 Sq M per litre.
The primer shall be allowed to dry for a minimum of 2 hours before applying the successive
finishing coats. If the drying time exceeds 48 hours, re-priming shall be done.
2.2.3
Finishing coats

Page 1724 of 1744
la1151-ae?
ENGINEERS
umiTED
I N DIA
'IA Gort al India lAdedalongl

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Pa e 6 of 9
The first finishing coat of single component urethane shall be applied over the primer with
brush to a smooth and even finish. The overall dry film thickness shall be 0.5mm or minimum
coverage shall be 0.5 kg per Sq.M per coat.
The second and third coats shall be applied within 24 hours of application of the previous coat
when the previous coat is tacky at coverage of 0.5 Kg per Sq M to give a total dry film
thickness of 1.5 mm 0.1 mm as per ASTM 898.
Care shall be taken for quick application and the pack shall be consumed within the stipulated
period as per manufacturer's specification. Any skin formed on top of the opened pack shall
be removed before using the contents.
The water proof coating shall be continued up the parapet/ walls for a minimum of 150mm
over the finished roof surface. It shall be continued into rain water pipes by at least 100mm.
2.3
Protective Layer
Protective layer shall be provided as described in Clause 1.3.
3.0
POLYMER MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOF WATER PROOFING
3.1
Material
Bituminous membrane for waterproofing shall be 4mm thick prefabricated polymer (APPatactic polypropylene) modified and shall be reinforced with nonwoven Polyester and shall
have following properties. Test methods of all these properties shall be as per relevant ASTM
codes.
Thickness
Penetration at 25deg. C, 100g, 5 seconds
Softening point
Low Temp. Flexibility
Tensile strength
Longitudinal
Transverse
Elongation
Longitudinal
Transverse
Nail tearing resistance
Longitudinal
Transverse
Water absorption
3.2
Workmanship
3.2.1
4mm
25+_Smm
110 to 150 deg C
-2 deg C to -5 deg C
> 500N/ 5cm
> 500N/ 5cm
> 40%
> 40%
>= 130N
>= 130N
0.2% max.

3.2.2
Primer coat
One coat of bituminous solvent based primer of approved quality and conforming to IS: 3384
shall be cold applied @ 0.2-0.4 litre/Sq M over the entire area to be waterproofed including
vertical surfaces. The primer shall be allowed to be dry for minimum 24 hours.

Page 1725 of 1744
Page 1726 of 1744
15itaget ENGINEERS
lellWleuWit INDIA LIMITED
war, amine, aw.go
12.3
(A GOry CI4 Intlu UndeflMgi

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 7 of 9
Fixing of APP Membrane

APP polymer modified bituminous membrane shall be laid over the primer coat by torch
welding. The membrane shall be properly pressed during laying to remove any entrapped air.
The joints should be sealed properly with necessary side laps of 100mm and end laps of
150mm.
The membrane shall be continued along the vertical surfaces up to a minimum height of
300mm. Suitable fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement concrete (1 cement :2 coarse
sand :4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at the junction of horizontal/ vertical
surfaces. The continued membrane shall be terminated in minimum 20mm x 10mm chase to
be provided in the vertical surface and shall be sealed with approved polyurethane sealant.
3.3
Protective layer
Protective layer shall be provided as described in Clause 1.3. The plain cement concrete layer
shall be provided directly over membrane without sprinkling of clean sand.
4.0
ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) ROOF WATER PROOFING
4.1
Material
The EPDM membrane for waterproofing shall be a single-ply synthetic rubber membrane
made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer mixed with carbon, oil, curing agents and
processing acids, calendared into large sheets and vulcanized. The membrane shall be 1.5mm
thick and shall have the following properties.
The EPDM standard membrane shall be a 100% cured unreinforced EPDM roofing membrane
made of a synthetic rubber Ethylene, Propylene, Diene Terpolymer. The sheet shall be made
of two plies of standard compound and shall be factory-assembled into large, fully vulcanized
seamless membranes. The membrane can be supplied in the following dimensions:
Specific weight
Length
Width
1170 kg/m3;
15.25 m; 30.5 m; 45.75 m; 61.00 m;
2.28 m; 3.05 m; 5.08 m; 6.10 m;
7.62 m; 9.15 m; 12.20 m; 15.25 m
Dimension of the membrane will be chosen in view of the dimensions, complexity of the roof,
the application method chosen and the experience of the installer.
The membrane complies with the following characteristics when tested in accordance with EN
13956 & ASTM D-4637 (Type I)
Tensile strength (both directions)
Elongation at break
Tear Resistance
Static loading
Dynamic indentation
Cold fold ability
Resistance to static loading
(EPS & concrete)
Resistance to impact EPS
Resistance to impact concrete
Joint peel resistance
Joint shear resistance
>= 8 N/mm2
>= 300%
>= 40 N
>= 25 kg (on soft and hard support)
>= 300 mm (hard support)
>= 2000 mm (soft support)
<= -45C
25 Kg
> 15 mm
> 10 mm
> 25 N/50mm
> 200 N/50mm
Sara-LAM ENGINEERS
11
INDIALIMITED
4.2
Workmanship
4.2.1

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 8 of 9

4.2.2
Fixing of EPDM Membrane

EPDM membrane must always be fully adhered to the substrate i.e. the below surface, by
applying suitably approved bonding adhesive for fixing the membrane. Membrane shall be
firstly positioned on the substrate for about 30minutes. Then half of the membrane shall be
folded back and bonding adhesive shall be then applied to the underside of the folded
membrane and also to the substrate that has to be covered. Let both the surfaces dry until
adhesive no longer sticks, roll back the membrane onto the substrate and sweep with soft
brush or as advised by engineer in charge Similarly repeat with other half of the membrane.
EPDM membrane shall preferably be laid in with a single sheet on the roof but if there is a
need to splice to adjoining EPDM membrane them it shall be noted that no space shall be left
in between adjacent EPDM membranes. However a slight over lap of max. 100mm is
permissible and this joint will be sealed with the help of self adhesive splice tape from the
same vendor and underside of membrane shall be suitably fixed to other membrane using
bonding adhesive and shall be suitably pressed with roller. Contractor to make sure that no air
bubbles are trapped inside, during this process. All the corners and insertions of pipes etc shall
be treated with Form Flash, water block sealant and lap sealant
The membrane shall be continued and fixed using bonding adhesive along the vertical
surfaces up to a minimum height of 300mm. Suitable fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in
cement concrete (1 cement :2 coarse sand :4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume)
at the junction of horizontal/ vertical surfaces. The continued membrane shall be terminated in
minimum 20mm x 10mm chase to be provided in the vertical surface and shall be sealed with
approved polyurethane sealant.
Contractor to properly seal all rain water outlets incorporating clamp ring / Insert piece/
Scupper as per the detail applicable for the particular junction or as instructed by engineer in
charge. The membrane must be restrained using 'Base Tie-in' where change in roof slope
angles exceeds 15.
The membrane shall be continued along the vertical surfaces up to a minimum height of
300mm. Suitable fillet of 75mm radius shall be formed in cement concrete (1 cement :2 coarse
sand :4 stone aggregate of 6mm & down size by volume) at the junction of horizontal/ vertical
surfaces. The membrane will be secured with a termination bar, used in conjunction with
water repellent sealant Water Block between the membrane and the substrate under
compression behind the termination bar, mechanically fixed at maximum 200 mm centers
using appropriate fasteners. A bead of Lap Sealant is applied along the top edge of the
termination bar. The EPDM membrane will be mechanically fastened using an appropriate
fastening system. A proprietary flashing is secured to the vertical face above the membrane
termination. The counter flashing will cover the top of the fastening system by a minimum of
100 mm. The vertical membrane shall be provided with acrylic coating. This coating shall be
shall be sprayed in one coat or roller applied in two coats after two weeks of the installation.
The complete installation procedure shall be done by applicator approved by the EPDM
vendor/company.

Page 1727 of 1744
ISORZIETOENGINEERS
laWg INDIA LIMITED
(0W elierrimasal
4.3
IA Goy/ of India Undertaking)

ROOF TREATMENT
6-75-0006 Rev. 5
Page 9 of 9
Protective layer
Protective layer shall be provided as described in Clause 1.3. The plain cement concrete layer
shall be provided directly over membrane without sprinkling of clean sand.
5.0
GUARANTEE
A Guarantee of minimum 10 years shall be provided against the performance of the finished
waterproofing system.
6.0
MEASUREMENT & RATE

The finished work shall be measured in Sq.M of area for the purpose of payment in item rate
tenders.

Page 1728 of 1744
Igar
0563
,,an./
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
ORISSA PAN W.C.
7-75-0060 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
(FIXING DETAIL)
A Govt of India Undertaking)
CISTERN
MS BRACKET
BIB COCK
FLUSH PIPE
FINISHED FLOOR
LEVEL
ORISSA PAN WC
FLOOR FINISH
SUNK BY
MINIMUM 10MM
=me,.
FILLED UP/SUNK
PORTION
//WWWWW,,,,WW,W.
4777/47..
SECTION A-A
BIB COCK w
0
--,,
SLOPE\
5717 a a
svO
10MM DROP
IN FLOOR
I.
0
ORISSA PA9-..b
W
CISTERN
,A
1200 MINIMUM
STOP COCK
PLAN
4
3
Rev.
No.
FnrmAt Nn
Page 1729 of 1744
09.11.11 REVISED & REISSUED

Date
k-nn-nnni-F4 Rev n
Purpose
Drit
mow
Prepared
by
Clk Or/
0715111:
SD/JKB
Checked
by
JI(Ca
VINAY KUMAR
ARVIND KUMAR
Stds. Committee
Convenor
2ettfik
OMALHOTRA
V.CHATURVEDI
GM (E)
Stds. Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
ronvrinht Fll - All rinhts rnsnrund
Page 1730 of 1744
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PENETRATING CORROSION
INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
IStatzeie ENGINEERS
10-ar Were INDIA LIMITED
INIMPIRPR =MOW
IA Gent M MAO unartokno
1:
ITTW
furre ;r4
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 1 of 14
kill
tioifficiich wrzi
wrickw (Able ataruff

kutur atafrarar
BIPOLAR CONCRETE PENETRATING
CORROSION INHIBITING ADMIXTURE
&AR \ ( 1.1 "

0
Rev.
No

Date
Purpose
AJS
PKM
Prepared Checked
by
by
Cavvk
SC
VK
DM
Standards
Committee
Convenor
GM(E)
Standards
Bureau
Chairman
Approved by
Page 1731 of 1744
Offitaelda EnoNEERs
ogar Wagger INDIA LJMITED

WWI
IA Gcnet al MY
unertanto
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 2 of 14
ABBREVIATIONS:
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ASTM
CPCIA
Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture
IS
Indian Standard
JIS
Japanese Industrial Standard
OPC
Ordinary Portland Cement
PPC
Portland Pozzolana Cement
PSC
Portland Slag Cement
SRC
Sulphate Resistant Cement
STRUCTURAL STANDARDS COMMITTEE

Convenor :
Mr. S. Chaturvedi
Members :
Mr. PK Mittal
Mr. S. Debnath
Mr. Rajan Srivastav
Mr. PJ Singh
Mr. Samir Das
Mr. MP Jain (Projects)
PRZIBT AS- INGINEERS

ligataPitg W
` WA LIMITED
Page 1732 of 1744
inmaxeivelJelmil
IA Gat of So Limning)
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
648-0017 Rev.O
Page 3 of 14
CONTENTS
1.0
SCOPE
2.0
REFERENCES
3.0
SAMPLING
4.0
5.0
HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT CONSIDERATIONS
6.0
PACKAGING
ANNEXURE-A (SHORT TERM TESTS)
ANNEXURE-B (LONG TERM TESTS)
APPENDIX-I (MODIFIED ACCELERATED CORROSION TEST)
APPENDIX-II (IMMERSION TEST)
APPENDIX-III (TEST FOR EFFECT ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH WITH CCPIA)...10

APPENDIX-IV (ELECTROCHEMICAL POLARIZATION TEST)
11
APPENDIX-V (CORROSION TEST)
12
APPENDIX-VI (CHLORIDE ION PENETRATION TEST)
13
Page 1733 of 1744
149AITS
L MITED
113\1
Sil%
Ei
al India undertaking)
1A Gal
1.0
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 4 of 14
SCOPE
This specification prescribes the requirements and test methods including performance test for
evaluating the efficiency of Bipolar Concrete Penetrating Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture
(CPCIA) for protecting steel reinforcement embedded in concrete from corrosion. Nonconcrete penetrating, Nitrite & Nitrate corrosion inhibitors are excluded from the scope.
2.0
REFERENCES
2.1
Codes
ASTM-G1, ASTM-G3, ASTM-G109, ASTM-C1202, JIS-Z-1535, AASHTO T259, IS:2,
IS:101(Partl/Sec.5), IS:456, IS:1202, IS:1448, IS:1786, IS:9103, etc.
2.2
EIL Specifications
General Scope
Materials
6-68-0001 :
6-68-0002 :
3.0
SAMPLING
3.1
The representative samples of the material shall be drawn as per the table given below:
No. of containers (Lot)
No. of containers to be selected for

sampling (N)
Up to 50
51-100
101-300
301-500
501& Above
5
Plus 1 for every lot of 300 containers
4.0
4.1
The product shall comply with the requirements specified in Annexure-A (Short Term Tests)
and Annexure-B (Long Term Tests). Both the tests shall be conducted in an approved
laboratory.
4.2
Unless specified otherwise, all the tests under Indian tropical conditions shall be conducted at
room temperature 27 2C and relative humidity at 65 5 % in a well ventilated chamber
free from dust.
4.3
The contractor shall submit the Manufacturer Test certificate to the Engineer-in-Charge.
Approval for usage of product may be given after satisfactory Short Term test results as Long
Term test results would require a considerable time. However, the product shall also satisfy
the requirements of Long Term Tests. Recommendations from reputed organizations about the
product shall be an added advantage.
laitzmiakENarNaRs
UMETED
Ifgar
ElPitg var WA
loan !MR elJn
IA Govt S Wei Venting)
5.0
5.1
Page 1734 of 1744
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 5 of 14
HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The CPCIA shall not cause harm to applicators by mean of inhalation or skin contact. All
precautionary measures shall be prescribed by the manufacturers along with instructions of
usage Application methodology shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
5.2
The waste shall be discharged in accordance with applicable Environmental laws of land.
5.3
CPCIA shall not degrade or damage the construction materials like concrete, aggregates, steel
reinforcement, formwork/shuttering.
6.0
PACKAGING
The product shall be supplied in air tight containers and following information shall be labeled
on each container:
Name of the material
Name of the manufacturer
Volume / weight of material
Specification number
e) Batch No. or Lot No. in bar code or otherwise
0 Month and year of manufacture
Ingredients & method of usage
Instructions for safe usage
1511WIzeak
_ ENGINEERS
sigar egie INDIA UMITED
Page 1735 of 1744
141R.1 emir is asam)
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.)
Page 6 of 14
ANNEXURE-A
SHORT TERM TESTS

S.
No.
Characteristics
Requirements
Methods of Tests
Appearance
Brownish Liquid free from

any visible residual deposits
Visually
Odour
Mild Ammonical Odour
By smell
Skin irritation
No irritation
By applying on reverse of
the palm for 5 minutes.
Ph
As in supplied condition
1% dilution ,w/w
7.
pH meter /
Standard pH paper
9.0-11.0
9.0-11.0
Specific Gravity at 27 2C
1.04 - 1.06
IS 1448
Viscosity of the material as in

supplied condition, by Ford cup No
4, at 27 2C
10 - 20 sec.
IS: 101(Pt.1/Sec.5)
Accelerated Corrosion Test, for 21

hrs.
Raw water without CPCIA
Raw water with CPCIA
Excessive corrosion spots.

There shall not be more
than 1-2 corrosion spots.
Modified accelerated
corrosion test based
on Japanese standard
JIS Z 1535
(Refer Appendix-I)
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
PR-atilt ENGINEERS
sig-ar
t latiegi lar INDIA UMITED
Page 1736 of 1744
IA Gent a( Wd
1ftdeno.9)
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 7 of 14
ANNEXURE-B
LONG TERM TESTS
(Shall be performed in triplicate)
S.
No .
Characteristics
Requirements
Without CPCIA
With 1% CPCIA
Immersion test for 720 hrs.

(Rebar weight loss method )
40.00 mpy, max.
2.00 mpy, max.
Effect of Concrete admixture on

compressive strength
Concrete strength in sample with

CPCIA* should be ?_concrete strength
in sample without CPCIA*
Polarization test by Tafel

polarization with 3.5% Sodium
Chloride, for 20 days:
45 mpy, max.
9 mpy, max.
25 Coulombs,
max.
0.50 Coulombs,
max.
0.025%, max.
Nil
Rate of corrosion shall be

Effect of CPCIA* on corrosion of
embedded steel rebars exposed to
chloride environments after 09
cycles (14 days wetting and 14
days drying):
Rate of corrosion shall be
5.
profile
Chloride
Migration
properties of concrete (for all
types of cements viz. OPC, PPC,
PSC, SRC)
Chloride % in concrete at
30mm depth after 90 days.
Methods of Tests
Immersion Test
(Rebar weight loss test)
as per ASTM GI
(Refer Appendix-II)
Test for effect on
compressive strength
by addition of CPCIA
as per IS 9103
(Refer Appendix-III)
Electrochemical
polarization test
conducted on steel
rebars embedded in
concrete as per
ASTM-G 3 & IS 9103
(Refer Appendix-IV)
Long term corrosion

test as per ASTM G109
(Refer Appendix-V)
AASHTO T-259
(Refer Appendix-VI)
Chloride ion
penetration
(Salt ponding test)
as per IS:456
Ability to resist chloride

ion penetration
Concrete grade M-30,
Water cement ratio: 0.45
1650 Coulombs,
max.
1000 Coulombs,
max.
Concrete grade M-40,

Water cement ratio: 0.40
1550 Coulombs,
max.
1000 Coulombs,
max.
Electrical indication
of concrete ability to
resist Chloride Ion
Penetration (Rapid
Chloride Permeability
test) as per
ASTM C1202
Notes:
CPCIA* : The CPCIA shall be used as 1% w/w of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer
for conducting the tests mentioned in Annexure-B except Immersion test for 720 hrs. mentioned at
S.No.1 where it shall be used as 1% w/w of water or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Rebars conforming to IS: 1786 shall be used for testing purposes
ISIRIzet ENGINEER.S
gzir 1151d g isr INDIA UMITED
si
Page 1737 of 1744
Owen PIMP anaign)
IA GON of India UnIonsking)
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 8 of 14
APPENDIX-I
MODIFIED ACCELERATED CORROSION TEST
(BASED ON JAPANESE STANDARD JIS Z 1535)

TEST PROCEDURE
Attach steel test pieces conforming to IS: 1786 (of size approx. 15mm dia and 12mm thickness drilled
from one side c/c to a dia of lOmm and a depth of 10 mm to hold the Aluminium pipe) after thorough
cleaning to white metal by using 1000 grade grit paper and subsequently polishing with 3/0 grade and
finally with 4/0 grade grit paper to the Aluminium pipe with the help of cello tape so that it is firmly
attached. The Aluminium pipe is then slid upwards till the test piece rests in the slot provided in the
rubber cork, as shown in the figure.
Alumirium Pita
Rubber
Stopper
Bottle Rubber Stopper
Rubber
Stopper
1000 rri 1We Mouth Glass Bottle
Test
Piece
REIN Water
Plastic Ctip with Corrosion Inhibitor

Assent!). win Corrosion Inhbilor
Pour 100 ml of tap water in both the bottles. Fill the plastic cup with 25 ml CPCIA solution as in
supplied condition. In one of the bottles place the plastic cup with the CPCIA solution so that the cup
is placed in the tap water. Allow to remain for 18 hours at ambient temperature. After 18 hrs. add
chilled water having temperature below 1.0 C into the Aluminium pipes and allow to remain for 3 hrs.
The temperature of the chilled water in the Aluminium pipes shall be maintained at 2.0 0.5 C by
frequently changing the chilled water with the help of the pipette. Observe the steel test pieces after
the experiments i.e. 18+3=21 hrs., for any corrosion spots.
IA Go (M MY mammon.,
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 9 of 14
APPENDIX-H
IMMERSION TEST (REBAR WEIGHT LOSS TEST)
(AS PER ASTM G 1)
TEST PROCEDURE
Take six pieces of Tor steel rebar conforming to IS: 1786 of size approx. 40 mm length and 10 mm
dia. Clean the rebar of any rust, mill scale etc., with the help of steel wire brush, till it has overall a
shining surface. Now clean all the six pieces with solvent such as Benzene/Acetone to remove any
loose rust /dust from the surface. Dry at 100 2 C for 15 minutes in an oven. Cool and take the
weights of all the six pieces and record it.
Take six transparent glass/plastic bottles of approx. 150+10 ml with air tight caps. Clean all the bottles
with tap water and then fill them with 100 ml of tap water so that the bottles are approx. three fourth
filled. In three of the six bottles, add CPCIA 1%, w/w or as recommended by the manufacturer of the
water in the bottle. Now put one cleaned and weighed rebar test piece completely immersed in
water/water + CPCIA, in all the six bottles and close the cap.
After 30 days (720 hrs.), take out all the six test pieces and put them in Clark solution (prepared by
dissolving 20 gins of Antimony Trioxide and 50 gins of Stannous Chloride in 1000 ml of Conc.
Hydrochloric acid, S.G. 1.18) so that corrosion products are dissolved. After complete removal of
corrosion products (in 5 minutes approximate), take out the test pieces and wash in running water and
finally with distilled water. Then wash the test pieces, with solvent such as Benzene/Acetone. Dry at
100 2 C for 30 minutes in an oven. Cool and take the weights of all the six pieces and record it.
Calculate the corrosion rate in mpy, by using the formula
Corrosion rate (mpy) = 534 (WI-W2) / DAT
Where WI -W2 is the weight loss in mg., D is the density of steel , A is the area in sq.inch and T is the
time of exposure in hrs
reark
Raw Water
Assembly without Corrosion Inhditor

Page 1738 of 1744
ela
Raw water
with 1% (whie)CPCIA
Assembly with Corrosion Inhibitor
CIVIL
& STRUCTURAL WORKS
sigar Wag's!, INDIA LIMITED
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
Page 1739 of 1744
1510zEta ENGINEERS
KAM eiteVallatAli
IA
6-68-0017 Rev.O
GON ate. UMWMEMO)
Page 10 of 14
APPENDIX-HI
TEST FOR EFFECT ON COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH BY ADDITION OF CPCIA
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete blocks of size 100mm x 100mm x 100mm each without and with CPCIA 1%
(w/w) of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer, by casting the concrete of M20 grade as per
Clause 6.2.3 of IS 9103.
The above casted blocks shall be demoulded after 24 hrs. These blocks shall be moist cured for 28
days. After completion of the curing period, the blocks of each type shall be tested for compressive
strength in compression testing machine (Universal Tensile Machine) and data recorded.
Page 1740 of 1744
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 11 of 14
APPENDIX-IV
BRIEF OUTLINES OF ELECTROCHEMICAL POLARIZATION TEST CONDUCTED ON
STEEL REBARS EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE (AS PER ASTM G 3)
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete cylinders, of size 75mm dia and 150mm length each without and with CPCIA 1%
(w/w) of cement or as recommended by the manufacturer, by casting the concrete of M 20 grade as
per Clause 6.2.3 of IS 9103, and placement of one cleaned rebar conforming to IS:1786 of size 375mm
length and 12mm dia (preferably cleaned by pickling in Hydrochloric acid 20% (v/v) approximately,
till surface shines and washed in running water) in each block .
The above casted blocks shall be demoulded after 24 hrs. These blocks shall be moist cured for 28
days.
After completion of the curing period, the blocks shall be subjected for Polarization test for 20 days as
per ASTM G-3 and observations recorded.
05d ze ak ENGINEERS
oig7men kilatalir
INDIA LIMITED
ereetweg awem
Page 1741 of 1744
(A Goo of IWO UndeltelOM
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 12 of 14
APPENDIX-V
BRIEF OUTLINES OF LONG TERM CORROSION TEST

(AS PER ASTM G 109)
TEST PROCEDURE
Three specimens each of control concrete and that of CPCIA admixed concrete (1% w/w of cement or
as recommended by the manufacturer) should be cast as per the size 280mmx150mmx115mm and
with placement of three cleaned reinforcement bars conforming to 1S:1786 (preferably cleaned by
picking in Hydrochloric acid 20% (v/v) approx, till surface shines and washed in running water) of
size 12mm and length 375mm as per the details shown in the figure. Admixture shall be added as per
manufacturers recommended dosage. All the casted concrete samples shall be moist cured for 28 days.
Ponding of samples with 3% NaCl solution as shown in the figure to be continued and measuring of
voltage across 100 ohm resistor to be continued beginning of the second week of ponding. Calculate
the current IJ from the measured voltage and record. Also measure the corrosion potential of the bars
against reference electrode. The experiment should be continued till the macrocell current reaches a
value of 10 IAA. After the experiment break the specimens and examine the rebars for extent of
corrosion, measure the corroded area and record.
Sealed with
epoxy
Anode
Reba,
.3 In
0.75 In or 1
6 In
Cathode
4.5 In
Reber
Note - All Maas urements in In. (25.4 mm = 1 In)
Page 1742 of 1744
ENGINEERS
UNITED
f
ILIA
OWN eiVellerna0
IA GOA al Si
tosnco
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 13 of 14
APPENDIX-VI
(Sheet 1 of 2)
BRIEF OUTLINES OF RESISTANCE OF CONCRETE TO MIGRATION OF
CHLORIDE ION TEST (AS PER AASHTO T259)
Part-A : Chloride Ion Penetration (Salt Ponding Test As per IS:456)
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete blocks of size 300mmx300mmx75mm each without and with CPCIA 1% (w/w) or
as recommended by the manufacturer, by using the concrete mix as under:
S.No.
v)
M 30 (Kg)
50
M 40 (Kg)
50
Coarse Sand
104
87
Aggregate, passes through 20 mm and retained on 10 mesh
160
134
Water (subject to 55+5 slump)
24
20
0.5*
0.5*
Material
53 Grade Cement
CPCIA
* as recommended by the manufacturer with each type of cement viz. Ordinary Portland
Cement, Portland Pozzolana Cement, Portland Slag cement, Sulphate resisting Cement
AASHTO T259 test (commonly referred to as the salt ponding test) is a long-term test for measuring
the penetration of Chloride ions into concrete. Three slabs of 75 mm thick and having a surface area of
300 mm square shall be casted. These slabs are moist cured for 14 days and then stored in drying room
at 50 percent relative humidity for 28 days. The sides of the slabs are sealed except for bottom and top
face. After the conditioning period, a 3% NaCI solution is ponded on the top surface for 90 days, while
the bottom face is left exposed to the drying environment (see figure below).
3% NaCI Solution
Sealed on _11,.
Sides
Concrete Sample
t 13 mm
1 _I75 mm
if
50% r.h.
atmosphere
At the end of this time (90 days) the slabs are removed from the drying environment and the Chloride
concentration of 10 mm thick slices is then determined (AASHTO T259).Two or three slices are taken
at progressive depth. The salt ponding test does provide a crude one-dimensional chloride ion ingress
profile. Test results should meet the requirements as stipulated in IS: 456.
OM-addle ENGINEERS
Ogza
W INDIA MOM
Page 1743 of 1744
(A Gen ol Mm. undmA191
BIPOLAR CONCRETE
6-68-0017 Rev.0
Page 14 of 14
APPENDIX -VI
(Sheet 2 of 2)
BRIEF OUTLINES OF RESISTANCE OF CONCRETE TO MIGRATION OF

Contd.
CHLORIDE ION TEST (AS PER AASHTO T259)
Part-B : Electrical Indication of Concrete's Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
(Rapid Chloride Permeability test As per ASTM C-1202)
TEST PROCEDURE
Cast three concrete cylinders of size 50 mm thick, 100 mm diameter without and with CPCIA 1%
(w/w) or as recommended by the manufacturer, by using the concrete mix as under:
S.No.
v)
M 30 (Kg)
50
M 40 (Kg)
50
Coarse Sand
104
87
Aggregate, passes through 20 mm and retained on 10 mesh
160
134
Water (subject to 555 slump)
24
20
0.5*
0.5*
Material
53 Grade Cement
CPCIA
* as recommended by the manufacturer with each type of cement viz. Ordinary Portland
Cement, Portland Pozzolana Cement, Portland Slag cement, Su phate resisting Cement
As per ASTM C-1202, water-saturated concrete specimen is subjected to a 60 V applied DC voltage
for 6 hrs. using the apparatus shown in Figure below. In one reservoir is a 3.0% NaC1 solution and in
the other reservoir is a 0.3 M NaOH solution. The total charge passed is determined and this is used to
rate the concrete's resistance to chloride ion penetration.
60 V Power Supply
Concrete sample 50 nun long.

100 mm diameter, with top
solace facing NCI solution
lafaad
STANDARD No.
ENGINEERS
INDIA LIMITED
$1`fga1affle
g
I ani'M eiM/ReealaW511/
WOODEN PANEL DOOR

(TOILET DOOR)
lA Govt of India Undertaking)
7-75-0066 Rev. 4
Page 1 of 1
RCC LINTEL
CEMENT PLASTER
A
750 TO 1000
4(:)
ill
411/
Si
4
F
Po
FINISHED
FLOOR LEVEL
SECTION 2-2
ELEVATION
B
F
BRICK WORK
CEMENT
SECTIONAL PLAN 1 -1
LEGEND:
WOODEN FRAME OUT OF 125x65
C:
D:
E:
F:
G:
TEAK WOOD STYLE 100x35

TEAK WOOD TOP RAIL 100x35
TEAK WOOD BOTTOM RAIL 200x35
12 THK. PARTICLE BOARD
INFILL PANEL WITH SPECIFIED FACING.
150 LONG BUTT HINGES
0 MAX. 600 C/C.
25x6x300 LONG MS HOLD FAST
EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE
BLOCK 350 x100x 100
H:
J:
K:
L:
M:
N:
P:
TOILET DOOR LATCH

TOWER BOLT
DOOR HANDLE
COAT AND HAT HOOK
(INTERNAL SIDE OF THE DOOR)
ACRYLIC KICK PLATE 200X3 THICK.
TEAK WOOD LOCK RAIL 150x35
TEAK WOOD BEADING

4
09.11.11
REVISED & REISSUED
21.03.07
Rev.
No.
Date
Format No s-noonni -F4 Rev n

Page 1744 of 1744
Purpose
DK friV.
*SD
MARDI
JKB/SD
Prepared
by
Checked
by
..1)(40^
\q-(2)n4
ARVIND KUMAR
V.CHATURVEDI
Stds. Committee GM(E) Stds. BureaL
Convenor
Chairman
Approved by
nonurinht Fl I - All nnhts reserved

TN

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

TN

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Page 1 of 1744

Click on the Document Title to go to that section of the document

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (MACHINERY

LOADING & PENALTY CRITERIA

SCOPE OF SUPPLY/ WORK

PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAMS (P&IDS)

JOB SPECIFICATIONS (MACHINERY DIVISION)

ANY DOCUMENT TYPE SPECIFIC TO DEPT.

SPECIFICTAION FOR SURFACE PREPARATION AND

MANDATORY SPARE PARTS

PIPING SCOPE DRAWING FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

DATA SHEET(MACHINERY DIVISION)

VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS (MACHINERY DIVISION)

VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS

VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS

Click on the Document Title to go to that section of the document

VENDOR DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR VPSA OXYGEN PLANT

Engineering Design Basis

ENGINEERING DESIGN BASIS

SITE SPECIFIC SEISMIC SPECTRA

ANNEXURE-I TO PMS ( GENERAL NOTES)

Piping Material Specification

Non Destructive Examination Requirements of Piping

OVERALL PLOT PLAN

DETAILS OF ROADS C/S

ANY OTHER DOCUMENT

Standard specification for pressure vessels for package items.

Click on the Document Title to go to that section of the document

Instrument connection on vessel, standpipes and tanks.

Standard specification civil - structural lump-sum turn-key works

Click on the Document Title to go to that section of the document

Click on the Document Title to go to that section of the document

BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED

BHARAT OMAN REFINERIES LIMITED

MASTER INDEX (COMMERCIAL)

BIDDING DOCUMENT NO.

VPSA OXYGEN PLANT FOR REVAMP AND CAPACITY

Notice Inviting Bid (NIB)

Instructions To Bidders (ITB)

Instructions to Bidders for E-Tendering

Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)

Qualification and Experience of Key Supervisory Personnel

Quality Management System

Specification for Documentation Requirements from Contractors and

Annexure-A, B & C for methodology of procurement of Structural

Health Safety and Environment (HSE) Guidelines

General requirements for Radiography & other NDT

Calibration requirement of measuring devices

Terms and conditions for participation in HAZOP Study

General Conditions of Contract (GCC) along with its Annexure

GLOBAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING

Bidding Document on Website

Bid Due Date/ Time

On 14.06.2016 up to 1200 Hrs.

to 1200 Hrs. (IST) on 14.06.2016

NOTICE INVITING BID (NIB)

BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK:

Each chain shall consist of following major items:

Following major items shall be common for all the chains

TIME SCHEDULE FOR COMPLETION

SALIENT FEATURES OF THE BIDDING DOCUMENT ARE AS FOLLOWS:

Bidding Document No.